MANUAL OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LOAD & RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN Volume I Structural Members, Specifications, & Codes Volum...
230 downloads
2485 Views
34MB Size
Report
This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form
MANUAL OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LOAD & RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN Volume I Structural Members, Specifications, & Codes Volume II Connections
Second Edition
iv
Copyright © 1994 by American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. ISBN 1-56424-041-X ISBN 1-56424-042-8 All rights reserved. This book or any part thereof must not be reproduced in any form without the written permission of the publisher. The information presented in this publication has been prepared in accordance with recognized engineering principles and is for general information only. While it is believed to be accurate, this information should not be used or relied upon for any specific application without competent professional examination and verification of its accuracy, suitability, and applicability by a licensed professional engineer, designer, or architect. The publication of the material contained herein is not intended as a representation or warranty on the part of the American Institute of Steel Construction or of any other person named herein, that this information is suitable for any general or particular use or of freedom from infringement of any patent or patents. Anyone making use of this information assumes all liability arising from such use. Caution must be exercised when relying upon other specifications and codes developed by other bodies and incorporated by reference herein since such material may be modified or amended from time to time subsequent to the printing of this edition. The Institute bears no responsibility for such material other than to refer to it and incorporate it by reference at the time of the initial publication of this edition. Printed in the United States of America
v
FOREWORD
T
he American Institute of Steel Construction, founded in 1921, is the non-profit technical specifying and trade organization for the fabricated structural steel industry in the United States. Executive and engineering headquarters of AISC are maintained in Chicago, Illinois. The Institute is supported by three classes of membership: Active Members totaling 400 companies engaged in the fabrication and erection of structural steel, Associate Members who are allied product manufacturers, and Professional Members who are individuals or firms engaged in the practice of architecture or engineering. Professional members also include architectural and engineering educators. The continuing financial support and active participation of Active Members in the engineering, research, and development activities of the Institute make possible the publishing of this Second Edition of the Load and Resistance Factor Design Manual of Steel Construction. The Institute’s objectives are to improve and advance the use of fabricated structural steel through research and engineering studies and to develop the most efficient and economical design of structures. It also conducts programs to improve product quality. To accomplish these objectives the Institute publishes manuals, textbooks, specifications, and technical booklets. Best known and most widely used are the Manuals of Steel Construction, LRFD (Load and Resistance Factor Design) and ASD (Allowable Stress Design), which hold a highly respected position in engineering literature. Outstanding among AISC standards are the Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings and the Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. The Institute also assists designers, contractors, educators, and others by publishing technical information and timely articles on structural applications through two publications, Engineering Journal and Modern Steel Construction. In addition, public appreciation of aesthetically designed steel structures is encouraged through its award programs: Prize Bridges, Architectural Awards of Excellence, Steel Bridge Building Competition for Students, and student scholarships. Due to the expanded nature of the material, the Second Edition of the LRFD Manual has been divided into two complementary volumes. Volume I contains the LRFD Specification and Commentary, tables, and other design information for structural members. Volume II contains all of the information on connections. Like the LRFD Specification upon which they are based, both volumes of this LRFD Manual apply to buildings, not bridges. The Committee gratefully acknowledges the contributions of Roger L. Brockenbrough, Louis F. Geschwindner, Jr., and Cynthia J. Zahn to this Manual. By the Committee on Manuals, Textbooks, and Codes, William A. Thornton, Chairman
Barry L. Barger, Vice Chairman
Horatio Allison Robert O. Disque Joseph Dudek William G. Dyker Ronald L. Hiatt
David T. Ricker Abraham J. Rokach Ted W. Winneberger Charles J. Carter, Secretary
Mark V. Holland William C. Minchin Thomas M. Murray Heinz J. Pak Dennis F. Randall
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
vi
REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
Part 6 (Volume I) of this LRFD Manual contains the full text of the following: American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC) Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, December 1, 1993 Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members, December 1, 1993 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, June 15, 1992 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, June 10, 1992 Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) Load and Resistance Factor Design Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, June 8, 1988 Additionally, the following other documents are referenced in Volumes I and II of the LRFD Manual: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) AASHTO/AWS D1.5–88 American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 349–90 American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, 1991 American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ANSI/ASME B1.1–82 ANSI/ASME B18.2.2–86 ANSI/ASME B18.1–72 ANSI/ASME B18.5–78 ANSI/ASME B18.2.1–81 American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) ASCE 7-88 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM A6–91b ASTM A490–91 ASTM A617–92 ASTM A27–87 ASTM A500–90a ASTM A618–90a ASTM A36–91 ASTM A501–89 ASTM A668–85a ASTM A53–88 ASTM A502–91 ASTM A687–89 ASTM A148–84 ASTM A514–91 ASTM A709–91 ASTM A153–82 ASTM A529–89 ASTM A770–86 ASTM A193–91 ASTM A563–91c ASTM A852–91 ASTM A194–91 ASTM A570–91 ASTM B695–91 ASTM A208(A239–89) ASTM A572–91 ASTM C33–90 ASTM A242–91a ASTM A588–91a ASTM C330–89 ASTM A307–91 ASTM A606–91a ASTM E119–88 ASTM A325–91c ASTM A607–91 ASTM E380–91 ASTM A354–91 ASTM A615–92b ASTM F436–91 ASTM A449–91a ASTM A616–92 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
vii
American Welding Society (AWS) AWS A2.4–93 AWS A5.25–91 AWS A5.1–91 AWS A5.28–79 AWS A5.5–81 AWS A5.29–80 AWS A5.17–89 AWS B1.0–77 AWS A5.18–79 AWS D1.1–92 AWS A5.20–79 AWS D1.4–92 AWS A5.23–90
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1-1
PART 1 DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 STRUCTURAL STEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Selection of the Appropriate Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Brittle Fracture Considerations in Structural Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Lamellar Tearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Jumbo Shapes and Heavy-Welded Built-Up Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Effect of Shop Painting on Spray-Applied Fireproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 EFFECT OF HEAT ON STRUCTURAL STEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Coefficient of Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Use of Heat to Straighten, Camber, or Curve Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 EXPANSION JOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 COMPUTER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 AISC Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 AISC for AutoCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 STRUCTURAL SHAPES: TABLES OF AVAILABILITY, SIZE GROUPINGS, PRINCIPAL PRODUCERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING: TABLES OF AVAILABILITY, PRINCIPAL PRODUCERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 STRUCTURAL SHAPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Designations, Dimensions, and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Tables: W Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 M Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 S Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 HP Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 American Standard Channels (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 Miscellaneous Channels (MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 Angles (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56 STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1-2
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Use of Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67 DOUBLE ANGLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91 Use of Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91 COMBINATION SECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105 STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120 Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120 Structural Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120 BARS AND PLATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133 Product Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133 Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133 Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133 Floor Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134 CRANE RAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139 Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139 Welded Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141 Fastenings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141 TORSION PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145 SURFACE AREAS AND BOX AREAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175 CAMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179 Beams and Girders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179 Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179 STANDARD MILL PRACTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183 Methods of Increasing Areas and Weights by Spreading Rolls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-183
Cambering of Rolled Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185 REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-199
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OVERVIEW
1-3
OVERVIEW To facilitate reference to Part 1, the locations of frequently used tables are listed below. Dimensions and Properties W Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 M Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 S Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 HP Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 American Standard Channels (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 Miscellaneous Channels (MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 Angles (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56 Structural Tees (WT, MT, ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68 Double Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92 Combination Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106 Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121 Structural Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122 Torsion Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146 Surface Areas and Box Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175 Availability Availability of Shapes, Plates, and Bars, Table 1-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Structural Shape Size Groupings, Table 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Principal Producers of Structural Shapes, Table 1-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Availability of Steel Pipe and Structural Tubing, Table 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Principal Producers of Structural Tubing (TS), Table 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Principal Producers of Steel Tubing (Round), Table 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1-4
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL STEELS
1-5
STRUCTURAL STEELS Availability
Section A3.1 of the AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings lists fifteen ASTM specifications for structural steel approved for use in building construction. Five of these steels are available in hot-rolled structural shapes, plates, and bars. Two steels, ASTM A514 and A852, are available only in plates. Table 1-1 shows five groups of shapes and eleven ranges of thickness of plates and bars available in the various minimum yield stress* and tensile strength levels afforded by the seven steels. For complete information on each steel, reference should be made to the appropriate ASTM specification. A listing of shape sizes included in each of the five groups follows in Table 1-2, corresponding with the groupings given in Table A of ASTM Specification A6. Seven additional grades of steel, other than those covering hot-rolled shapes, plates, and bars, are listed in Section A3.1a of the LRFD Specification. These steels cover pipe, cold- and hot-formed tubing, and cold- and hot-rolled sheet and strip. The principal producers of shapes listed in Part 1 of this Manual are shown in Table 1-3. Availability and the principal producers of structural tubing are shown in Tables 1-4 through 1-6. For additional information on availability and classification of structural steel plates and bars, refer to the separate discussion beginning on page 1-129. Space does not permit inclusion in Table 1-3, or in the listing of shapes and plates in Part 1 of this Manual, of all rolled shapes or plates of greater thickness that are occasionally used in construction. For such products, reference should be made to the various producers’ catalogs. To obtain an economical structure, it is often advantageous to minimize the number of different sections. Cost per square foot can often be reduced by designing this way. Selection of the Appropriate Structural Steel
Steels with 50 ksi yield stress are now widely used in construction, replacing ASTM A36 steel in many applications. The 50 ksi steels listed in Section A3.1a of the LRFD Specification are ASTM A572 high-strength low-alloy structural steel, ASTM A242 and A588 atmospheric-corrosion-resistant high-strength low-alloy structural steels, and ASTM A529 high-strength carbon-manganese structural steel. Yield stresses above 50 ksi can be obtained from two grades of ASTM A572 steel as well as ASTM A514 and A852 quenched and tempered structural steel plate. These higher-strength steels have certain advantages over 50 ksi steels in certain applications. They may be economical choices where lighter members, resulting from use of higher design strengths, are not penalized because of instability, local buckling, deflection, or other similar reasons. They may be used in tension members, beams in continuous and composite construction where deflections can be minimized, and columns having low slenderness ratios. The reduction of dead load and associated savings in shipping costs can be significant factors. However, higher strength steels are not to be used indiscriminately. Effective use of all steels depends on thorough cost and engineering analysis. Normally, connection material is specified as ASTM A36. The connection tables in this Manual are for A36 steel.
*As used in the AISC LRFD Specification, “yield stress” denotes either the specified minimum yield point (for those that have a yield point) or specified minimum yield strength (for those steels that do not have a yield point). AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1-6
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
With appropriate procedures and precautions, all steels listed in the AISC Specification are suitable for welded fabrication. To provide for weldability of ASTM A529 steel, the specification of a maximum carbon equivalent is recommended. ASTM A242 and A588 atmospheric-corrosion-resistant, high-strength, low-alloy steels can be used in the bare (uncoated) condition in most atmospheres. Where boldly exposed under such conditions, exposure to the normal atmosphere causes a tightly adherent oxide to form on the surface which protects the steel from further atmospheric corrosion. To achieve the benefits of the enhanced atmospheric corrosion resistance of these bare steels, it is necessary that design, detailing, fabrication, erection, and maintenance practices proper for such steels be observed. Designers should consult with the steel producers on the atmospheric-corrosion-resistant properties and limitations of these steels prior to use in the bare condition. When either A242 or A588 steel is used in the coated condition, the coating life is typically longer than with other steels. Although A242 and A588 steels are more expensive than other high-strength, low-alloy steels, the reduction in maintenance resulting from the use of these steels usually offsets their higher initial cost. Brittle Fracture Considerations in Structural Design
As the temperature decreases, an increase is generally noted in the yield stress, tensile strength, modulus of elasticity, and fatigue strength of the structural steels. In contrast, the ductility of these steels, as measured by reduction in area or by elongation, and the toughness of these steels, as determined from a Charpy V-notch impact test, decrease with decreasing temperatures. Furthermore, there is a temperature below which a structural steel subjected to tensile stresses may fracture by cleavage,* with little or no plastic deformation, rather than by shear,* which is usually preceded by a considerable amount of plastic deformation or yielding. Fracture that occurs by cleavage at a nominal tensile stress below the yield stress is commonly referred to as brittle fracture. Generally, a brittle fracture can occur in a structural steel when there is a sufficiently adverse combination of tensile stress, temperature, strain rate, and geometrical discontinuity (notch) present. Other design and fabrication factors may also have an important influence. Because of the interrelation of these effects, the exact combination of stress, temperature, notch, and other conditions that will cause brittle fracture in a given structure cannot be readily calculated. Consequently, designing against brittle fracture often consists mainly of (1) avoiding conditions that tend to cause brittle fracture and (2) selecting a steel appropriate for the application. A discussion of these factors is given in the following sections. Conditions Causing Brittle Fracture
It has been established that plastic deformation can occur only in the presence of shear stresses. Shear stresses are always present in a uniaxial or biaxial state-of-stress. However, in a triaxial state-of-stress, the maximum shear stress approaches zero as the principal stresses approach a common value, and thus, under equal triaxial tensile stresses, failure occurs by cleavage rather than by shear. Consequently, triaxial tensile stresses tend to cause brittle fracture and should be avoided. A triaxial state-of-stress can result from a uniaxial loading when notches or geometrical discontinuities are present.
*Shear and cleavage are used in the metallurgical sense (macroscopically) to denote different fracture mechanisms. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL STEELS
1-7
Increased strain rates tend to increase the possibility of brittle behavior. Thus, structures that are loaded at fast rates are more susceptible to brittle fracture. However, a rapid strain rate or impact load is not a required condition for a brittle fracture. Cold work and the strain aging that normally follows generally increase the likelihood of brittle fracture. This behavior is usually attributed to the previously mentioned reduction in ductility. The effect of cold work that occurs in cold forming operations can be minimized by selecting a generous forming radius and, thus, limiting the amount of strain. The amount of strain that can be tolerated depends on both the steel and the application. The use of welding in construction increases the concerns relative to brittle fracture. In the as-welded condition, residual stresses will be present in any weldment. These stresses are considered to be at the yield point of the material. To avoid brittle fracture, it may be required to utilize steels with higher toughness than would be required for bolted construction. Welds may also introduce geometric conditions or discontinuities that are crack-like in nature. These stress risers will additionally increase the requirement for notch toughness in the weldment. Avoidance of the intersection of welds from multiple directions reduces the likelihood of triaxial stresses. Properly sized weld-access holes prohibit the interaction of these various stress fields. As steels being welded become thicker and more highly restrained, welding procedure issues such as preheat, interpass temperature, heat input, and cooling rates become increasingly important. The residual stresses present in a weldment may be reduced by the use of fewer weld passes and peening of intermittent weld layers. In most cases, weld metal notch toughness exceeds that of the base materials. However, for fracture-sensitive applications, notch-tough base and weld metal should be specified. The residual stresses of welding can be greatly reduced through thermal stress relief. This reduces the driving force that causes brittle fracture, but if the toughness of the material is adversely affected by this thermal treatment, no increase in brittle fracture resistance will be experienced. Therefore, when weldments are to be stress relieved, investigation into the effects on the weld metal, heat-affected zone, and base material should be made. Selecting a Steel To Avoid Brittle Fracture
The best guide in selecting a steel that is appropriate for a given application is experience with existing and past structures. A36 and Grade 50 (i.e., 50 ksi yield stress) steels have been used successfully in a great number of applications, such as buildings, transmission towers, transportation equipment, and bridges, even at the lowest atmospheric temperatures encountered in the U.S. Therefore, it appears that any of the structural steels, when designed and fabricated in an appropriate manner, could be used for similar applications with little likelihood of brittle fracture. Consequently, brittle fracture is not usually experienced in such structures unless unusual temperature, notch, and stress conditions are present. Nevertheless, it is always desirable to avoid or minimize the previously cited adverse conditions that increase the susceptibility of the steel to brittle fracture. In applications where notch toughness is considered important, it usually is required that steels must absorb a certain amount of energy, 15 ft-lb or higher (Charpy V-notch test), at a given temperature. The test temperature may be higher than the lowest operating temperature depending on the rate of loading. See Rolfe and Barsom (1986) and Rolfe (1977). AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1-8
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Lamellar Tearing
The information on strength and ductility presented in the previous sections generally pertains to loadings applied in the planar direction (longitudinal or transverse orientation) of the steel plate or shape. It should be noted that elongation and area reduction values may well be significantly lower in the through-thickness direction than in the planar direction. This inherent directionality is of small consequence in many applications, but does become important in the design and fabrication of structures containing massive members with highly restrained welded joints. With the increasing trend toward heavy welded-plate construction, there has been a broader recognition of the occurrence of lamellar tearing in some highly restrained joints of welded structures, especially those using thick plates and heavy structural shapes. The restraint induced by some joint designs in resisting weld deposit shrinkage can impose tensile strain sufficiently high to cause separation or tearing on planes parallel to the rolled surface of the structural member being joined. The incidence of this phenomenon can be reduced or eliminated through greater understanding by designers, detailers, and fabricators of (1) the inherent directionality of construction forms of steel, (2) the high restraint developed in certain types of connections, and (3) the need to adopt appropriate weld details and welding procedures with proper weld metal for through-thickness connections. Further, steels can be specified to be produced by special practices and/or processes to enhance through-thickness ductility and thus assist in reducing the incidence of lamellar tearing. Steels produced by such practices are available from several producers. However, unless precautions are taken in both design and fabrication, lamellar tearing may still occur in thick plates and heavy shapes of such steels at restrained through-thickness connections. Some guidelines in minimizing potential problems have been developed (AISC, 1973). See also Part 8 in Volume II of this LRFD Manual and ASTM A770, Standard Specification for Through-Thickness Tension Testing of Steel Plates for Special Applications. Jumbo Shapes and Heavy Welded Built-up Sections
Although Group 4 and 5 W-shapes, commonly referred to as jumbo shapes, generally are contemplated as columns or compression members, their use in non-column applications has been increasing. These heavy shapes have been known to exhibit segregation and a coarse grain structure in the mid-thickness region of the flange and the web. Because these areas may have low toughness, cracking might occur as a result of thermal cutting or welding (Fisher and Pense, 1987). Similar problems may also occur in welded built-up sections. To minimize the potential of brittle failure, the current LRFD Specification includes provisions for material toughness requirements, methods of splicing, and fabrication methods for Group 4 and 5 hot-rolled shapes and welded built-up cross sections with an element of the cross section more than two inches in thickness intended for tension applications. FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION
Fire-resistant steel construction may be defined as structural members and assemblies which can maintain structural stability for the duration of building fire exposure and, in some cases, prevent the spread of fire to adjacent spaces. Fire resistance of a steel member is a function of its mass, its geometry, the load to which it is subjected, its structural support conditions, and the fire to which it is exposed. Many steel structures have inherent fire resistance through a combination of the above factors and do not require additional insulation from the effects of fire. However, in many AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FIRE-RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION
1-9
situations, building codes specify the use of fire-rated steel assemblies. In this case, ASTM Specification E119, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, outlines the procedures of fire testing of structural elements. Structural fire resistance is a major consideration in the design of modern buildings. In general, building codes define the level of fire protection that is required in specific applications and structural fire protection is typically implemented in design through code compliance. In the United States, with a few notable exceptions, the majority of cities and states now enforce one of the following model codes: • National Building Code, published by the Building Officials and Code Administrators International. • Standard Building Code, published by the Southern Building Code Congress International. • Uniform Building Code, published by the International Conference of Building Officials. Building codes specify fire-resistance requirements as a function of building occupancy, height, area, and whether or not other fire protection systems (e.g., sprinklers) are provided. Fire-resistance requirements are specified in terms of hourly ratings based upon tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E119. This test method specifies a “standard” fire for evaluating the relative fire-resistance of construction assemblies (i.e., floors, roofs, beams, girders, and columns). Specific end-point criteria for evaluating the ability of assemblies to prevent the spread of fire to adjacent spaces and/or to continue to sustain superimposed loads are included. In effect, ASTM E119 is used to evaluate the length of time that an assembly continues to perform these functions when exposed to the standard fire. Thus, code requirements and fire-resistance ratings are specified in terms of time (i.e., one hour, two hours, etc.). The design of fire-resistant buildings is typically accomplished in a very prescriptive fashion by selecting tested designs that satisfy specific building code requirements. Listings of fire-resistant designs are available from a number of sources including: • Fire-Resistance Directory, Underwriters Laboratories. • Fire-Resistance Ratings, American Insurance Services Group. • Fire-Resistance Design Manual, Gypsum Association. In general, due to the very prescriptive nature of fire-resistant design, changes in tested assemblies can be difficult to justify to the satisfaction of code officials and listing agencies. In the case of structural steel construction, however, the basic heat transfer and structural principles are well defined. As a result, relatively simple analytical techniques have been developed that enable designers to use a variety of different structural steel shapes in conjunction with tested assemblies. These analytical techniques are specifically recognized by North American building code authorities and are described in a series of booklets published by the American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Designing Fire Protection for Steel Columns (1980) Designing Fire Protection for Steel Beams (1984) Designing Fire Protection for Steel Trusses (1981) Since fire-resistant design is currently based on the use of tested assemblies, an important consideration is the degree to which a test assembly is “representative” of AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 10
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
actual building construction. In reality, this consideration poses a number of technical difficulties due to the size of available testing facilities, most of which can only accommodate floor or roof specimens in the range of 15 ft by 18 ft in area. As a result, a test assembly represents a relatively small sample of a typical floor or roof structure. Most floor slabs and roof decks are physically, if not structurally, continuous over beams and girders. Beam and girder spans are often much larger than can be accommodated in available laboratory furnaces. A variety of connection details are used to frame beams, girders, and columns. In short, given the cost of testing, the complexity and variety of modern structural systems, and the size of available test facilities, it is unrealistic to assume that test assemblies accurately model real construction systems during fire exposure. In recognition of the practical difficulties associated with laboratory scale testing, ASTM E119 includes two specific test conditions, “restrained” and “unrestrained.” From a structural engineering standpoint, the choice of these two terms is unfortunate since the “restraint” that is contemplated in fire testing is restraint against the thermal expansion, not structural rotational restraint in the traditional sense. The “restrained” condition applies when the assembly is supported or surrounded by construction which is “capable of resisting substantial thermal expansion throughout the range of anticipated elevated temperatures.” Otherwise, the assembly should be considered free to rotate and expand at the supports and should be considered “unrestrained.” Thus, a floor system that is simply supported from a structural standpoint will often be “restrained” from a fireresistance standpoint. In order to provide guidance on the use of restrained and unrestrained ratings, ASTM E119 includes an explanatory Appendix. It should be emphasized that most common types of steel framing can be considered “restrained” from a fire-resistance standpoint. The standard fire test also includes other arbitrary assumptions. The specific fire exposure, for example, is based on furnace capabilities with continuous fuel supply and does not model real building fires with exhaustible fuel. Also, the test method assumes that assemblies are fully loaded when a fire occurs. In reality, fires are infrequent, random events and their design requirements should be probability based. Rarely will design structural loads occur simultaneously with fire. In addition, many structural elements are sized for serviceability (i.e., drift, deflection, or vibration) rather than strength, thereby providing an additional reserve strength during a fire. As a result of these and other considerations, more rational engineering design standards for structural fire protection are now being developed (International Fire Engineering Design for Steel Structures: State-of-the-Art, International Iron and Steel Institute). Although not yet standardized or recognized in North American building codes, similar design methods have been used in specific cases, based on code variances. One such method has been developed by AISI for architecturally exposed structural steel elements on the exterior of buildings. In effect, ASTM E119 assumes that structural elements are located within a fire compartment and does not realistically characterize the fire exposure that will be seen by exterior structural elements. Fire-Safe Structural Steel: A Design Guide (American Iron and Steel Institute, 1979) defines a step-by-step analytical procedure for determining maximum steel temperatures, based on realistic fire exposures for exterior structural elements. Occasionally, structural engineers will be called upon to evaluate fire-damaged steel structures. Although it is well known that the prolonged exposure to high temperatures can affect the physical and metallurgical properties of structural steel, in most cases steel AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
EFFECT OF HEAT ON STRUCTURAL STEEL
1 - 11
members that can be straightened in place will be suitable for continued use (Dill, 1960). Special attention should be given to heat-treated or cold-formed steel elements and high-strength bolts and welds. Effect of Shop Painting on Spray-Applied Fireproofing
Spray-applied fireproofing has excellent adhesion to unpainted structural steel. Mechanical anchorage devices, bonding agents, or bond tests are not required to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) guidelines. In fact, moderate rusting enhances the adhesion of the fireproofing material, providing the uncoated steel is free of loose rust and mill scale. Customarily, any loose rust or mill scale as well as any other debris which has accumulated during the construction process is removed by the fireproofing application contractor. In many cases, this may be as simple as blowing it off with compressed air. This ease of application is not realized when fireproofing is applied over painted steel. In order to meet UL requirements, bond tests in accordance with the ASTM E736 must be performed to determine if the fireproofing material has adequate adherence to the painted surface. Frequently, a bonding agent must be added to the fireproofing material and the bond test repeated to determine if the minimum bond strength can be met. Should the bond testing still not be satisfactory, mechanical anchorage devices are required to be applied to the steel before the fireproofing can be applied. The erected steel must still be cleaned free of any construction debris and scaling or peeling paint before the fireproofing may be applied. Once it is determined that the bond tests are adequate, UL guidelines require that if fireproofing is spray-applied over painted steel, the steel must be wrapped with steel lath or mechanical anchorage devices must be applied to the steel if the structural shape exceeds the following dimensional criteria: • For beam applications, the web depth cannot exceed 16 inches and the flange cannot exceed 12 inches. • For column applications, neither the web depth nor the flange width can exceed 16 inches. A significant number of structural shapes do not meet these restrictions. The use of primers under spray-applied fireproofing significantly increases the cost of the steel and the preparation for and the application of the fireproofing material. In an enclosed structure, primer is insignificant in either the short- or long-term protection of the steel. LRFD Specification Section M3.1 states that structural steelwork need not be painted unless required by the contract. For many years, the AISC specifications have not required that steelwork be painted when it will be concealed by interior building finish or will be in contact with concrete. The use of primers under spray-applied fireproofing is strongly discouraged unless there is a compelling reason to paint the steel to protect against corrosion. It is suggested that the designer refer to the UL Directory Fire Resistance—Volume 1, 1993, “Coating Materials,” for more specific information on this topic. EFFECT OF HEAT ON STRUCTURAL STEEL
Short-time elevated-temperature tensile tests on the structural steels permitted by the AISC Specification indicate that the ratios of the elevated-temperature yield and tensile strengths to their respective room-temperature values are reasonably similar in the 300° to 700°F range, except for variations due to strain aging. (The tensile strength ratio may AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 12
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
increase to a value greater than unity in the 300° to 700°F range when strain aging occurs.) Below 700°F the strength ratios decrease only slightly. Above 700°F the ratio of elevated-temperature to room-temperature strength decreases more rapidly as the temperature increases. The composition of the steels is usually such that the carbon steels (ASTM A36 and A529) exhibit strain aging with attendant reduced notch toughness. The high-strength low-alloy steels (ASTM A242, A572, and A588) and heat-treated alloy steels (ASTM A514 and A852) exhibit less-pronounced or little strain aging. As examples of the decreased ratio levels obtained at elevated temperature, the yield strength ratios for carbon and high-strength low-alloy steels are approximately 0.77 at 800°F, 0.63 at 1,000°F, and 0.37 at 1,200°F. Coefficient of Expansion
The average coefficient of expansion for structural steel between 70°F and 100°F is 0.0000065 for each degree. For temperatures of 100°F to 1,200°F the coefficient is given by the approximate formula: ε = (6.1+0.0019t) × 10−6 in which ε is the coefficient of expansion (change in length per unit length) for each degree Fahrenheit and t is the temperature in degrees Fahrenheit. The modulus of elasticity of structural steel is approximately 29,000 ksi at 70°F. It decreases linearly to about 25,000 ksi at 900°F, and then begins to drop at an increasing rate at higher temperatures. Use of Heat to Straighten, Camber, or Curve Members
With modern fabrication techniques, a controlled application of heat can be effectively used to either straighten or to intentionally curve structural members. By this process, the member is rapidly heated in selected areas; the heated areas tend to expand, but are restrained by adjacent cooler areas. This action causes a permanent plastic deformation or “upset” of the heated areas and, thus, a change of shape is developed in the cooled member. “Heat straightening” is used in both normal shop fabrication operations and in the field to remove relatively severe accidental bends in members. Conversely, “heat cambering” and “heat curving” of either rolled beams or welded girders are examples of the use of heat to effect a desired curvature. As with many other fabrication operations, the use of heat to straighten or curve will cause residual stresses in the member as a result of plastic deformations. These stresses are similar to those that develop in rolled structural shapes as they cool from the rolling temperature; in this case, the stresses arise because all parts of the shape do not cool at the same rate. In like manner, welded members develop residual stresses from the localized heat of welding. In general, the residual stresses from heating operations do not affect the ultimate strength of structural members. Any reduction in strength due to residual stresses is incorporated in the provisions of the LRFD Specification. The mechanical properties of steels are largely unaffected by heating operations, provided that the maximum temperature does not exceed 1,100°F for quenched and tempered alloy steels (ASTM A514 and A852), and 1,300°F for other steels. The AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
EXPANSION JOINTS
1 - 13
temperature should be carefully checked by temperature-indicating crayons or other suitable means during the heating process. EXPANSION JOINTS
Although buildings are typically constructed of flexible materials, expansion joints are required in roofs and the supporting structure when horizontal dimensions are large. The maximum distance between expansion joints is dependent upon many variables including ambient temperature during construction and the expected temperature range during the lifetime of the building. An excellent reference on the topic of thermal expansion in buildings and location of expansion joints is the Federal Construction Council’s Technical Report No. 65, Expansion Joints in Buildings. Taken from this report, Figure 1-1 provides a guide based on design temperature change for maximum spacing of structural expansion joints in beam-and-column-framed buildings with hinged-column bases and heated interiors. The report includes data for numerous cities and gives five modification factors which should be applied as appropriate:
MAXIMUM SPACING OF EXPANSION JOINTS (ft)
1. If the building will be heated only and will have hinged-column bases, use the maximum spacing as specified; 2. If the building will be air-conditioned as well as heated, increase the maximum spacing by 15 percent provided the environmental control system will run continuously; 3. If the building will be unheated, decrease the maximum spacing by 33 percent; 4. If the building will have fixed column bases, decrease the maximum spacing by 15 percent;
600
500
Rectangular multiframed configuration with Symmetrical stiffness
400
Steel
300 200
Nonrectangular configuration (L, T, U type)
Any material
100
10 20 30 40
50 60 70 70 80 90
DESIGN TEMPERATURE CHANGE (°F)
Fig. 1-1. Expansion joint spacing. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 14
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
5. If the building will have substantially greater stiffness against lateral displacement in one of the plan dimensions, decrease the maximum spacing by 25 percent. When more than one of these design conditions prevail in a building, the percentile factor to be applied should be the algebraic sum of the adjustment factors of all the various applicable conditions. Additionally, most building codes include restrictions on location and spacing of fire walls. Such fire walls often become locations for expansion joints. The most effective expansion joint is a double line of columns which provides a complete and positive separation. When expansion joints other than the double-column type are employed, low-friction sliding elements are generally used. Such systems, however, are never totally free and will induce some level of inherent restraint to movement. COMPUTER SOFTWARE AISC Database
The AISC Database contains the properties and dimensions of structural steel shapes, corresponding to Part 1 of this LRFD Manual. LRFD-related properties such as X1 and X2, as well as torsional properties, are included. Two versions, one in U.S. customary units and one in metric units, are available. Dimensions and properties of W, S, M, and HP shapes, American Standard Channels (C), Miscellaneous Channels (MC), Structural Tees cut from W, M, and S shapes (WT, MT, ST), Single and Double Angles, Structural Tubing, and Pipe are listed in ASCII format. Also included are: a BASIC read/write program, a sample search routine, and a routine to convert the file to Lotus *.PRN file format. AISC for AutoCAD *
The program will draw the end, elevation, and plan views of W, S, M, and HP shapes, American Standard Channels (C), Miscellaneous Channels (MC), Structural Tees cut from W, M, and S shapes (WT, MT, ST), Single and Double Angles, Structural Tubing, and Pipe to full scale corresponding to data published in Part 1 of this LRFD Manual. Version 2.0 runs in AutoCAD Release 12 only; Version 1.0 runs in AutoCAD Releases 10 and 11.
*AutoCAD is a registered trademark in the US Patent and Trademark Office by Autodesk, Inc. AISC for AutoCAD is copyrighted in the US Copyright Office by Bridgefarmer and Associates, Inc. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 15
Table 1-1. Availability of Shapes, Plates, and Bars According to ASTM Structural Steel Specifications Shapes
Fy
Steel Type
A36
32
58–80
36
58–80c
42
42
60–85
50
50
70–100
42
42
60
50
50
65
60
60
75
65
65
80
A242
42
63
46
67
50
70
HighStrength Low-alloy
Corrosion Resistant Highstrength Low-alloy
A572 Grade
A529f Grade
Carbon
Group per Over Over Mini1⁄ ″ 3⁄ ″ ASTM A6 Fu mum 2 4 ASTM Yield Tensile To to to a 1⁄ ″ 3 ⁄ ″ 11 ⁄ ″ Desig- Stress Stress 2 4 4 b nation (ksi) (ksi) 1 2 3 4 5 incl. incl. incl.
A588
42
63
46
67
50
70
Quenched A852e & Tempered Alloy
70
90–110
Quenched A514e & Tempered A514e Low-Alloy
90
100–130
100
110–130
Plates and Bars Over Over Over Over Over Over Over 11⁄4″ 11⁄2″ 2″ 21⁄2″ 4″ 5″ 6″ to to to to to to to 11⁄2″ 2″ 21⁄2″ 4″ 5″ 6″ 8″ Over incl. incl. incl. incl. incl. incl. incl. 8″
d
aMinimum unless a range is shown. bIncludes bar-size shapes cFor shapes over 426 lb / ft minimum of 58 ksi only applies. dPlates to 1 in. thick, 12 in. width; bars to 11⁄ in. 2 ePlates only. fTo improve the weldability of A529 steel, the specification of a maximum carbon equivalent
(per ASTM Supplementary Requirement S78) is recommended. Available Not Available
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 16
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-2. Structural Shape Size Groupings for Tensile Property Classification Structural Shapes W shapes
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3 W44× 290, 335
Group 4
W24× 55, 62
W44× 230, 262
W21× 44 to 57 incl.
W40× 149 to 264 incl. W40× 431
W18× 35 to 71 incl.
W36× 135 to 210 incl. W40× 277 to 372 incl. W36× 328 to 798 incl.
W16× 26 to 57 incl.
W33× 118 to 152 incl. W36× 230 to 300 incl. W33× 318 to 354 incl.
W14× 22 to 53 incl.
W30× 90 to 211 incl. W33× 169 to 291 incl. W30× 292 to 477 incl.
W12× 14 to 58 incl.
W27× 84 to 178 incl. W30× 235 to 261 incl. W27× 307 to 539 incl.
W10× 12 to 45 incl.
W24× 68 to 162 incl. W27× 194 to 258 incl. W24× 250 to 492 incl.
Group 5
W40×466 to 593 incl. W36× 848 W40× 392
W8× 10 to 48 incl.
W21× 62 to 147 incl. W24× 176 to 229 incl. W18× 211 to 311 incl.
W6× 9 to 25 incl.
W18× 76 to 143 incl. W21× 166 to 201 incl. W14× 233 to 550 incl.
W5× 16,19
W16× 67 to 100 incl. W18× 158 to 192 incl. W12× 210 to 336 incl.
W4× 13
W14× 61 to 132 incl. W14× 145 to 211 incl.
W14× 605 to 808 incl.
W12× 65 to 106 incl. W12× 120 to 190 incl. W10× 49 to 112 incl. W8× 58, 67 M Shapes
all
S Shapes
to 35 lb/ft incl.
over 35 lb/ft
HP Shapes
to 102 lb/ft incl.
American to 20.7 lb/ft incl. Standard Channels (C)
over 20.7 lb/ft
Miscellane- to 28.5 lb/ft incl. ous Channels (MC)
over 28.5 lb/ft
Angles (L)
to 1⁄2-in. incl.
over 102 lb/ft
over 1⁄2- to 3⁄4-in. incl. over 3⁄4-in.
Notes: Structural tees from W, M, and S shapes fall into the same group as the structural shapes from which they are cut. Group 4 and Group 5 shapes are generally contemplated for application as columns or compression components. When used in other applications (e.g., trusses) and when thermal cutting or welding is required, special material specification and fabrication procedures apply to minimize the possibility of cracking (see Part 6, LRFD Specification, Sections A3.1c, J1.5, J1.6, J2.3, and M2.2, and corresponding Commentary sections).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 17
Structural Steel Shape Producers Bayou Steel Corp. P.O. Box 5000 Laplace, LA 70068 (800) 535-7692
Florida Steel Corp. P.O. Box 31328 Tampa, FL 33631 (800) 237-0230
Nucor-Yamato Steel P.O. Box 1228 Blytheville, AR 72316 (800) 289-6977
Bethlehem Steel Corp. 301 East Third St. Bethlehem, PA 18016-7699 (800) 633-0482
Northwestern Steel & Wire Co. 121 Wallace St. P.O. Box 618 Sterling, IL 61081-0618 (800) 793-2200
Roanoke Electric Steel Corp. P.O. Box 13948 Roanoke, VA 24038 (800) 753-3532
British Steel Inc. 475 N. Martingale Road #400 Schaumburg, IL 60173 (800) 542-6244
North Star Steel Co. 1380 Corporate Center Curve Suite 215 P.O. Box 21620 Eagan, MN 55121-0620 (800) 328-1944
Chaparral Steel Co. 300 Ward Road Midlothian, TX 76065-9501 (800) 529-7979
Nucor Steel P.O. Box 126 Jewett, TX 75846 (800) 527-6445
SMI Steel, Inc. 101 South 50th St. Birmingham, AL 35232 (800) 621-0262 TradeARBED 825 Third Ave. New York, NY 10022 (212) 486-9890
Structural Tube Producers American Institute for Hollow Structural Sections 929 McLaughlin Run Road Suite 8 Pittsburgh, PA 15017 (412) 221-8880 Acme Roll Forming Co. 812 North Beck St. Sebewaing, MI 48759-0706 (800) 937-8823
Dallas Tube & Rollform P.O. Box 540873 Dallas, TX 75354-0873 (214) 556-0234
Independence Tube Corp. 6226 West 74th St. Chicago, IL 60638 (708) 496-0380
Eugene Welding Co. P.O. Box 249 Marysville, MI 48040 (313) 364-7421
IPSCO Steel, Inc. P.O. Box 1670, Armour Road Regina, Saskatchewan S4P 3C7 CANADA (416) 271-2312
EXLTUBE, Inc. 905 Atlantic North Kansas City, MO 64116 (800) 892-8823
Bull Moose 57540 SR 19 S P.O. Box B-1027 Elkhart, IN 46515 (800) 348-7460
Hanna Steel Corp. 3812 Commerce Ave. P.O. Box 558 Fairfield, AL 35064 (800) 633-8252
Copperweld Corp. 7401 South Linder Ave. Chicago, IL 60638 (800) 327-8823
UNR-Leavitt, Div. of UNR Inc. 1717 West 115th St. Chicago, IL 60643 (800) 532-8488 Valmont Industries, Inc. P.O. Box 358 Valley, NE 68064 (800) 825-6668 Welded Tube Co. of America 1855 East 122nd St. Chicago, IL 60633 (800) 733-5683
Steel Pipe Producers National Association of Steel Pipe Distributors, Inc. 12651 Briar Forest Dr., Suite 130 Houston, TX 77077 (713) 531-7473
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 18
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-3. Principal Producers of Structural Shapes B—Bethlehem Steel Corp. C—Chaparral Steel F—Florida Steel Corp.
I—British Steel S—North Star Steel M—SMI Steel Inc. T—TradeARBED N—Nucor-Yamato Steel U—Nucor Steel R—Roanoke Steel
W—Northwestern Steel & Wire Y—Bayou Steel Corp.
Section, Weight per ft
Producer Code
Section, Weight per ft
Producer Code
W44× all
T
W40× 321-593 W40× 297 W40× 278 W40× 277 W40× 264 W40× 249 W40× 235 W40× 215 W40× 211 W40× 199 W40× 183 W40× 174 W40× 149-167
T N T N,T B,T N,T B,T N,T B,T N,T B,I,N,T T B,I,N,T
W24× 103 W24× 84-94 W24× 55-76
B,W B,I,N,W B,C,I,N,W
W21× 182-201 W21× 166 W21× 83-147 W21× 44-73
I,W B,I,W B,I,N,W B,C,I,N,W
W18× 258-311 W18× 175-234 W18× 130-158 W18× 76-119 W18× 65-71 W18× 35-60
B B,W B,N,W B,N,W B,I,N,W B,C,I,N,W
W36× 439-848 W36× 393 W36× 328-359 W36× 260-300 W36× 256 W36× 245 W36× 232 W36× 135-230
T B,T B,I,T B,I,N,T B,I B,I,N,T B,I B,I,N,T
W16× 67-100 W16× 57 W16× 26-50
B,N,W B,I,N,W B,C,I,N,W
W33× 263-354 W33× 201-241 W33× 169 W33× 118-152
B,T B,N,T B,T B,I,N,T
W30× 391-477 W30× 261-326 W30× 173-235 W30× 148 W30× 99-132 W30× 90
W14× 808 W14× 342-730 W14× 311 W14× 90-283 W14× 82 W14× 74 W14× 61-68 W14× 43-53 W14× 38 W14× 22-34
B B,I,T B,I,T,W B,I,N,T,W B,N,W B,C,I,N,W B,C,N,W B,C,I,N,W B,I,N,W B,C,I,N,W
T B,T B,I,N,T B,I,T B,I,N,T B,N
W27× 307-539 W27× 258 W27× 235 W27× 146-217 W27× 129 W27× 84-114
T N,T N B,N,T B,I,T,W B,I,N,T,W
W12× 252-336 W12× 210-230 W12× 170-190 W12× 65-152 W12× 50-58 W12× 16-45 W12× 14
B B,T B,I,T,W B,I,N,T,W B,C,I,N,W B,C,N,W B,C,W
W24× 279-492 W24× 250 W24× 229 W24× 207 W24× 192 W24× 104-176
T B,N,W B,N,T,W B,N,W B,I,N,T,W B,I,N,T,W
W10× 88-112 W10× 49-77 W10× 33-45 W10× 22-30 W10× 15-19 W10× 12
B,I,N,W B,C,I,N,W B,C,N,W B,C,I,N,W B,C,I,W B,C,W
W8× 31-67 W8× 18-28 W8× 15
B,C,I,N,W B,C,N,W B,C,W,Y
Notes: For the most recent list of producers, please see the latest January or July issue of the AISC magazine Modern Steel Construction. Maximum lengths of shapes obtained vary with producer, but typically range from 60 ft to 75 ft. Lengths up to 100 ft are available for certain shapes. Please consult individual producers for length requirements.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 19
Table 1-3 (cont.). Principal Producers of Structural Shapes B—Bethlehem Steel Corp. C—Chaparral Steel F—Florida Steel Corp.
I—British Steel S—North Star Steel M—SMI Steel Inc. T—TradeARBED N—Nucor-Yamato Steel U—Nucor Steel R-Roanoke Steel
W—Northwestern Steel & Wire Y—Bayou Steel Corp.
Section, Weight per ft
Producer Code
Section, Weight per ft
Producer Code
W8× 10-13
B,C,M,W,Y
W6× 20-25 W6× 16 W6× 15 W6× 12 W6× 9
B,C,I,N,W B,C,W,Y B,C,I,N,W B,C,W,Y B,C,N,W,Y
W5× 16-19
B
W4× 13
B,C,M,Y
M12× 10.8-11.8 M10× 8-9 M8× 6.5 M5× 18.9
MC18× 42.7-58 MC13× 31.8-50 MC12× 31-50 MC12× 10.6 MC10× 22-41.1 MC10× 8.4 MC9× 23.9-25.4 MC8× 18.7-22.8 MC8× 8.5 MC7× 19.1-22.7 MC6× 18 MC6× 12-16.3
B,N B,N B,N S,N B S B B,S M B B B,S
C C C B
S24× 80-121 S20× 66-96 S18× 54.7-70 S15× 42.9-50 S12× 31.8-50 S10× 25.4-35 S8× 18.4-23 S6× 12.5-17.25 S5× 10 S4× 9.5 S4× 7.7 S3× 7.5 S3× 5.7
B,W B,W B,W B,W B,W B,S B,C,S C,S,Y C,Y C C,Y C,Y C,M,Y
HP14× 73-117 HP12× 53-84 HP10× 42-57 HP8× 36
B,I,N,W B,I,N,W B,C,I,N,W B,C,I,N,W
C15× 33.9-50 C12× 30 C12× 20.7-25 C10× 25-30 C10× 15.3-20 C9× 20 C9× 13.4-15 C8× 18.75 C8× 11.5-13.75 C7× 12.25 C7× 9.8 C6× 13 C6× 10.5 C6× 8.2 C5× 9 C5× 6.7 C4× 5.4-7.25 C3× 6 C3× 4.1-5
Section by Leg Length & Thickness Producer Code L8× 8×
B,N,W B,W B,C,S,W B,S,W B,C,S,W B B,S S,W,Y C,M,S,U,W,Y S,U,W M,S,U,W M,S,U,W,Y C,M,S,U,W,Y C,F,M,U,W,Y, M,U,W,Y F,M,U,W,Y F,M,U,W,Y M,U,W,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y
11 ⁄8 1 7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 9⁄ 1⁄
L6× 6×
7⁄ 5⁄ 9⁄ 1⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄
L4× 4×
4 8 16 2
1
3⁄
L5× 5×
8
3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄
8 4 8 16 2 16 8 16 8 4 8 2 16 8 16 4 8 2 16 8 16 4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
B B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,U,Y B,U,Y B,M,U,Y B,M,U,Y B,M,U,Y B,M,S,U,Y B,M,U,Y B,M,S,U,Y M,U,Y B,U,Y B,M,U,Y B,M,U,Y B,M,U,W,Y B,M,U,Y B,M,U,W,Y B,M,U,W,Y M,U,Y M,U,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y F,M,U,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y
1 - 20
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-3 (cont.). Principal Producers of Structural Shapes B—Bethlehem Steel Corp. C—Chaparral Steel F—Florida Steel Corp.
I—British Steel S—North Star Steel M—SMI Steel Inc. T—TradeARBED N—Nucor-Yamato Steel U—Nucor Steel R—Roanoke Steel
W—Northwestern Steel & Wire Y—Bayou Steel Corp.
Section by Leg Length Producer Code and Thickness
Section by Leg Length Producer Code and Thickness
L31 ⁄2 × 31 ⁄2 ×
L6× 31 ⁄2 ×
1⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄
L3× 3×
1⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄ 3⁄
L21 ⁄2 × 21 ⁄2 ×
1⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄ 3⁄
L2× 2×
3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄ 3⁄ 1⁄
L8× 6×
7⁄ 5⁄ 9⁄ 1⁄ 7⁄
7⁄ 5⁄ 9⁄ 1⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄
L6× 4×
8 16 4 2 16 8 16 4 16 2 8 16 4 16 8 16 4 16 8
8 4 8 16 2 16
1
3⁄
L7× 4×
16
1
3⁄
L8× 4×
2
7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 9⁄ 1⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄
8 4 8 16 2 16 4 8 2 16 8 8 4 8 16 2 16 8 16
F,M,R,U,W,Y U,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y F,M,U,W,Y U,Y F,M,R,S,U,W,Y F,M,R,S,U,W,Y F,M,R,S,U,W,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y F,U F,S,U F,S,U F,S,U F,U F,S,U F,S,U F,S,U F,S,U F,S,U B,S B B,S B B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,S B,Y B,Y B,S,Y B,Y B,S,Y B B,M,S,U,W,Y B,M,S,U,W,Y B,M,S,U,W,Y B,M,S,U,W,Y B,U,Y B,M,S,U,W,Y B,M,S,U,W,Y
1⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄
L5× 31 ⁄
3⁄
2×
5⁄ 1⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄ 1⁄
L5× 3×
7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄
L4× 31 ⁄
1⁄
2×
3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄
L4× 3×
5⁄ 1⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄
L31 ⁄2 × 3×
1⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄
L31 ⁄
2
× 21 ⁄
2×
1⁄ 3⁄ 1⁄
L3× 21 ⁄2 ×
1⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄ 3⁄
L3× 2×
1⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄ 3⁄
L21 ⁄
2 × 2×
3⁄ 5⁄ 1⁄ 3⁄
2 8 16 4 8 2 8 16 4 2 16 8 16 4 2 8 16 4 8 2 16 8 16 4 2 8 16 4 2 8 4 2 8 16 4 16 2 8 16 4 16 8 16 4 16
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
M,U,W,Y B,M,U,W,Y B,M,U,W,Y M,U,Y M,U,Y M,U,W,Y M,U,W,Y M,U,W,Y M,U,W,Y F,M,U,W,Y F,Y F,M,U,W,Y F,M,U,W,Y F,M,U,W,Y F,M,U,W F,M,R,U,W F,M,R,U,W F,M,R,U,W M,U,Y F,M,U,W,Y U,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y F,M,R,U,W,Y U,W M,U,W M,U,W M,U,W U U U U U,W U,W,Y R,U,W U F F,S,U F,S,U F,R,S,U F,R,U R,S,U S,U R,S,U R,S,U
1 - 21
Table 1-4. Availability of Steel Pipe and Structural Tubing According to ASTM Material Specifications
ASTM Specification
Steel
Fy
Fu
Grade
Minimum Yield Stress (ksi)
Minimum Tensile Stress (ksi)
Shape
Round
Square & Rectangular
Availability
ElectricResistance Welded
A53 Type E
B
35
60
Note 3
Seamless
Type S
B
35
60
Note 3
A
33
45
Note 1
B
42
58
Note 1
C
46
62
Note 1
A
39
45
Note 1
B
46
58
Note 2
C
50
62
Note 1
—
36
58
Note 1
I
50
70
Note 1
II
50
70
Note 1
III
50
65
Note 1
Cold Formed
Hot Formed
HighStrength Low-Alloy
A500
A501
A618
Notes: 1. Available in mill quantities only; consult with producers. 2. Normally stocked in local steel service centers. 3. Normally stocked by local pipe distributors. Available Not Available
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 22
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-5. Principal Producers of Structural Tubing (TS) A—Acme Rolling Forming Co. B—Bull Moose Tube Co. C—Copperweld Corp.
D—Dallas Tube & I—Independence Tube Rollform Corp. E—Eugene Welding Co. P—IPSCO Steel H—Hanna Steel Corp. U—UNR-Leavitt, Div. of UNR, Inc.
Nominal Size and Thickness
Producer Code
30× 30× 5⁄8 28× 28× 5⁄8 26× 26× 5⁄8 24× 24× 5⁄8, 1⁄2, 3⁄8 22× 22× 5⁄8, 1⁄2, 3⁄8 20× 20× 5⁄8, 1⁄2, 3⁄8 18× 18× 5⁄8, 1⁄2, 3⁄8
V—Valmont Industries, Inc. W—Welded Tube Co. of America X—EXLTUBE
Nominal Size and Thickness
Producer Code
V* V* V* V* V* V* V*
41⁄2× 41⁄2× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 41⁄2× 41⁄2× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 41⁄2× 41⁄2× 1⁄8
I,P,W A,B,C,D,I,P,W,X A,B,C,P,I,W
4× 4× 1⁄2 4× 4× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 4× 4× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 , 1⁄8
B,C,P,U,W A,B,C,D,E,I,P,U,W A,B,C,D,E,I,P,U,V,W,X
16× 16× 5⁄8 16× 16× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16
V* V*,W
31⁄2× 31⁄2× 5⁄16 31⁄2× 31⁄2× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 , 1⁄8
I,P,W A,B,C,D,E,I,P,U,W,X
14× 14× 5⁄8 14× 14× 1⁄2, 3⁄8 14× 14× 5⁄16
V* V*,W W
3× 3× 5⁄16 3× 3× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 3× 3× 1⁄8
I,P,W A,B,C,D,E,I,P,U,W,X A,B,C,D,E,I,P,U,W
12× 12× 5⁄8 12× 12× 1⁄2, 3⁄8 12× 12× 5⁄16 , 1⁄4
B B,V*,W B,W
21⁄2× 21⁄2× 5⁄16 21⁄2× 21⁄2× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 21⁄2× 21⁄2× 1⁄8
I A,B,C,D,E,I,P,U,V,W,X A,B,C,D,E,I,P,U,V,W
10× 10× 5⁄8 10× 10× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4 10× 10× 3⁄16
B,C B,C,P,U,W B,C,P,W
2× 2× 5⁄16 2× 2× 1⁄4 2× 2× 3⁄16 , 1⁄8
I,V A,B,C,D,I,U,V,W,X A,B,C,D,E,I,P,U,V,W,X
8× 8× 5⁄8 8× 8× 1⁄2 8× 8× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4, 3⁄16
B,C B,C,P,U,W B,C,D,P,U,W
11⁄2× 11⁄2× 3⁄16
B,E,P,U,V
7× 7× 5⁄8 7× 7× 1⁄2 7× 7× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4, 3⁄16
B B,C,P,U,W B,C,D,P,U,W
30× 24× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 28× 24× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 26× 24× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 24× 22× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 22× 20× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16
V* V* V* V* V*
6× 6× 5⁄8 6× 6× 1⁄2 6× 6× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 6× 6× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 6× 6× 1⁄8
B B,C,P,U,W B,C,D,I,P,U,W A,B,C,D,I,P,U,W,X A,B,C,I,P
20× 18× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 20× 12× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 20× 8× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 20× 4× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16
V* W W W
51⁄2× 51⁄2× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4, 3⁄16 , 1⁄8,
B,I
18× 12× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 18× 6× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 18× 6× 1⁄4
V* B,W B
5× 5× 1⁄2 5× 5× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 5× 5× 1⁄4 5× 5× 3⁄16 5× 5× 1⁄8
B,C,P,U,W B,C,D,I,P,U,W A,B,C,D,I,P,U,W,X A,B,C,D,I,P,U,V,W,X A,B,C,I,P,V,W
16× 12× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 16× 8× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 16× 4× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16
V*,W B,W B,W
*Size is manufactured by Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) process and is not stocked by steel service centers (contact producer for specific requirements). All other sizes are manufactured by Electric Resistance Welding and are available from steel service centers. For the most recent list of producers, please see the latest January or July issue of the AISC magazine Modern Steel Construction.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 23
Table 1-5 (cont.). Principal Producers of Structural Tubing (TS) A—Acme Rolling Forming Co. B—Bull Moose Tube Co. C—Copperweld Corp.
D—Dallas Tube & I—Independence Tube Rollform Corp. E—Eugene Welding Co. P—IPSCO Steel H—Hanna Steel Corp. U—UNR-Leavitt, Div. of UNR, Inc.
Nominal Size and Thickness
Producer Code
14× 12× 1⁄2, 3⁄8 14× 10× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 14× 6× 5⁄8 14× 6× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4 14× 4× 5⁄8 14× 4× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4 14× 4× 3⁄16
V* B,W B B,W B B,W B
12× 10× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4 12× 8× 5⁄8 12× 8× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4 12× 8× 3⁄16 12× 6× 5⁄8 12× 6× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4 12× 6× 3⁄16 12× 4× 5⁄8 12× 4× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4, 3⁄16 12× 3× 5⁄16 , 1⁄4, 3⁄16 12× 2× 1⁄4, 3⁄16
B B B,C,U,W B,C,W B B,C,U,W B,C,W B B,U,W B B,U
10× 8× 1⁄2, 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4, 3⁄16 10× 6× 1⁄2 10× 6× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4, 3⁄16 10× 5× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4, 3⁄16 10× 4× 1⁄2 10× 4× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4, 3⁄16 10× 3× 3⁄8,5⁄16 10× 3× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 10× 2× 5⁄16 10× 2× 1⁄4, 3⁄16
B,C,U,W B,C,U,W B,C,D,P,U,W B,C,D B,C,P,U,W B,C,D,P,U,W D B,D D,P,W B,D,P,U,W
8× 6× 1⁄2 8× 6× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 , 1⁄4, 3⁄16 8× 4× 5⁄8 8× 4× 1⁄2 8× 4× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 8× 4× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 8× 4× 1⁄8 8× 3× 1⁄2 8× 3× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 8× 3× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 8× 3× 1⁄8 8× 2× 3⁄8 8× 2× 5⁄16 8× 2× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 8× 2× 1⁄8
B,C,P,U,W B,C,D,P,U,W B B,C,P,U,W B,C,D,H,I,P,U,W A,B,C,D,H,I,P,U,W,X A,B,D,I,P C,P,U B,C,D,I,P,U,W A,B,C,D,I,P,U,W A,B,C,D,I,P H H,I,P,W A,B,D,I,P,U,W A,B,D,I,P
V—Valmont Industries, Inc. W—Welded Tube Co. of America X—EXLTUBE
Nominal Size and Thickness
Producer Code
7× 5× 1⁄2 7× 5× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 7× 5× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 7× 5× 1⁄8 7× 4× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 7× 4× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 7× 4× 1⁄8 7× 3× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 7× 3× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 7× 3× 1⁄8
B,C,P,U,W B,C,I,P,U,W A,B,C,H,I,P,U,W A,B,C,I,P B,C,D,H,I,P,U,W A,B,C,D,H,I,P,U,W A,B,C,H,I,P B,C,D,H,I,P,W A,B,C,D,H,I,P,W,X A,B,C,D,H,I,P
6× 4× 1⁄2 6× 4× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 6× 4× 1⁄4 6× 4× 3⁄16 6× 4× 1⁄8 6× 3× 1⁄2 6× 3× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 6× 3× 1⁄4 6× 3× 3⁄16 6× 3× 1⁄8 6× 2× 3⁄8 6× 2× 5⁄16 6× 2× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 6× 2× 1⁄8
B,C,P,U,W B,C,D,H,I,P,U,W A,B,C,D,H,I,P,U,W,X A,B,C,D,H,I,P,U,V,W,X A,B,C,D,H,I,P,V,W P,U B,D,H,I,P,U A,B,C,D,H,I,P,U,X A,B,C,D,H,I,P,U,W,X A,B,C,D,H,I,P,W H H,I,P,W A,B,C,D,E,H,I,P,U,W,X A,B,C,D,E,H,I,P,U,W
5× 4× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 5× 4× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 5× 3× 1⁄2 5× 3× 3⁄8, 5⁄16 5× 3× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 5× 3× 1⁄8 5× 2× 5⁄16 5× 2× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 5× 2× 1⁄8
I,P,W B,C,D,I,P,U,W C,P,U B,C,D,H,I,P,U,W A,B,C,D,E,H,I,P,U,W,X A,B,C,D,E,H,I,P,U,W I,P,W A,B,C,D,E,H,I,P,U,W,X A,B,C,D,E,H,I,P,U,W
4× 3× 5⁄16 4× 3× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 4× 3× 1⁄8 4× 2× 3⁄8 4× 2× 5⁄16 4× 2× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 4× 2× 1⁄8
B,I,P,W A,B,C,D,E,H,I,P,U,W,X A,B,C,D,E,H,I,P,U,W H H,I,P,W A,B,C,D,E,H,I,P,U,W,X A,B,C,E,H,I,P,U,W
3× 2× 5⁄16 3× 2× 1⁄4, 3⁄16 3× 2× 1⁄8
I A,B,C,D,E,H,I,P,U,V,W,X A,B,C,D,E,H,I,P,U,V,W
21⁄2 × 11⁄2 × 1⁄4, 3⁄16
H,X
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 24
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-6. Principal Producers of Steel Tubing (Round) C—Copperweld Corp. P—IPSCO
U—UNR-Leavitt, Div. of UNR, Inc.
V—Valmont Industries, Inc.
W—Welded Tube Co. of America X—EXLTUBE
Outside Diameter and Thickness
Producer Code
Outside Diameter and Thickness
Producer Code
20.000× .500,.375,.250
P*,W
6.626×.250,.188 6.625×.125
P,U,V,W P,V,W
18.000× .500,.375,.250
P*,W
16.000× .500 16.000× .375,.250 16.000× .188 16.000× .125
P*,W P,W P,V* V*
6.000×.500,.375,.312 6.000×.280 6.000×.250,.188,.125
W X V,W
14.000× .500,.438,.375,.250 14.000× .188 14.000× .125
P,W P,V* V*
5.563×.375 5.563×.258 5.563×.134
P,U P,U,V,W P,V,W
12.750× .500,.406,.375 12.750× .188× .125
P,W P,V*
5.000×.500,.375,.312 5.000×.258 5.000×.250,.188 5.000×.125
P,C,W P,X C,P,U,V,W P,U,V,W
10.750× .500,.365,.250
P,W
4.500×.237,.188,.125
P,U,V,W
10.000× .625,.500,.375,.312 10.000× .250,.188 10.000× .125
C C,V V
4.000×.337,.237 4.000×.266,.250,.188,.125
X U,V,W
9.625×.500 9.625×.375,.312,.250,.188
C,U C,P*,U
3.500×.318 3.500×.300 3.500×.250,.203,.188,.125 3.500×.226
X P,W P,U,V,W P,X
8.625×.500 8.625×.375,.322 8.625×.250,.188 8.625×.125
C,P,U C,P,U,W C,P,U,V,W P,V,W
3.000×.300,.216
X
2.875×.276 2.875×.250,.203,.188,.125
W P,U,V,W
7.000×.500 7.000×.375,.312,.250 7.000×.188 7.000×.125
C,P,U C,P,U,W C,P,U,V,W C,P,V,W
2.375,.250,.218,.188 2.375,.154,.125
P,V,W P,U,V,W
6.625×.500,.432 6.625×.375,.312,.280
P,U P,U,W
*Size is manufactured by Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) Process and is typically not stocked by steel service centers. Other sizes are manufactured by Electric Resistance Welding and typically are available from steel service centers. For more information contact the manufacturer or the American Institute for Hollow Structural Sections. Also, other sizes and wall thicknesses may be available. Contact an individual manufacturer for more details.
Steel Pipe: For availability contact the National Association of Steel Pipe Distributors, Inc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 25
STRUCTURAL SHAPES Designations, Dimensions, and Properties
The hot rolled shapes shown in Part 1 of this Manual are published in ASTM Specification A6/A6M, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use. W shapes have essentially parallel flange surfaces. The profile of a W shape of a given nominal depth and weight available from different producers is essentially the same except for the size of fillets between the web and flange. HP bearing pile shapes have essentially parallel flange surfaces and equal web and flange thicknesses. The profile of an HP shape of a given nominal depth and weight available from different producers is essentially the same. American Standard Beams (S) and American Standard Channels (C) have a slope of approximately 17 percent (2 in 12 inches) on the inner flange surfaces. The profiles of S and C shapes of a given nominal depth and weight available from different producers are essentially the same. The letter M designates shapes that cannot be classified as W, HP, or S shapes. Similarly, MC designates channels that cannot be classified as C shapes. Because many of the M and MC shapes are only available from a limited number of producers, or are infrequently rolled, their availability should be checked prior to specifying these shapes. They may or may not have slopes on their inner flange surfaces, dimensions for which may be obtained from the respective producing mills. The flange thickness given in the table from S, M, C, and MC shapes is the average flange thickness. In calculating the theoretical weights, properties, and dimensions of the rolled shapes listed in Part 1 of this Manual, fillets and roundings have been included for all shapes except angles. Because of differences in fillet radii among producers, actual properties of rolled shapes may vary slightly from those tabulated. Dimensions for detailing are generally based on the largest theoretical-size fillets produced. Equal leg and unequal leg angle (L) shapes of the same nominal size available from different producers have profiles which are essentially the same, except for the size of fillet between the legs and the shape of the ends of the legs. The k distance given in the tables for each angle is based on the theoretical largest size fillet available. Availability of certain angles is subject to rolling accumulation and geographical location, and should be checked with material suppliers.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 26
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
X
W SHAPES Dimensions
k
k1
X
T
tw
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Area A 2
in.
Depth d in.
Thickness tw
tw 2
in.
in.
W44×335 W40×290 W40×262 W40×230
98.3 85.8 77.2 67.7
44.02 43.62 43.31 42.91
44 435⁄8 433⁄8 427⁄8
1.020 0.870 0.790 0.710
W40×593* W40×503* W40×431 W40×372 W40×321 W40×297 W40×277 W40×249 W40×215 W40×199 W40×174
174 148 127 109 94.1 87.4 81.3 73.3 63.3 58.4 51.1
42.99 42.05 41.26 40.63 40.08 39.84 39.69 39.38 38.98 38.67 38.20
43 421⁄16 411⁄4 405⁄8 401⁄16 397⁄8 393⁄4 393⁄8 39 385⁄8 381⁄4
1.790 113⁄16 1.540 19⁄16 1.340 15⁄16 1.160 13⁄16 1.000 1 0.930 15⁄16 0.830 13⁄16 3⁄ 0.750 4 5⁄ 0.650 8 5 0.650 ⁄8 5 0.650 ⁄8
W40×466* W40×392* W40×331 W40×278 W40×264 W40×235 W40×211 W40×183 W40×167 W40×149
137 115 97.6 81.8 77.6 68.9 62.0 53.7 49.1 43.8
42.44 427⁄16 41.57 419⁄16 40.79 4013⁄16 40.16 403⁄16 40.00 40 39.69 393⁄4 39.37 393⁄8 38.98 39 38.59 385⁄8 38.20 381⁄4
1.67 111⁄16 1.42 17⁄16 1.22 11⁄4 1.02 1 0.960 1 13 0.830 ⁄16 3 0.750 ⁄4 5 ⁄8 0.650 5⁄ 0.650 8 5⁄ 0.630 8
W36×848* W40×798* W40×650* W40×527* W40×439* W40×393* W40×359* W40×328* W40×300 W40×280 W40×260 W40×245 W40×230
249 234 190 154 128 115 105 96.4 88.3 82.4 76.5 72.1 67.6
42.45 41.97 40.47 39.21 38.26 37.80 37.40 37.09 36.74 36.52 36.26 36.08 35.90
421⁄2 42 401⁄2 391⁄4 381⁄4 373⁄4 373⁄8 371⁄8 363⁄4 361⁄2 361⁄4 361⁄8 357⁄8
Flange
2.520 2.380 1.970 1.610 1.360 1.220 1.120 1.020 0.945 0.885 0.840 0.800 0.760
1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
21⁄2 23⁄8 2 15⁄8 13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
Width bf
Thickness tf
k
in.
k1
in.
in.
1.770 1.580 1.420 1.220
13⁄4 19⁄16 17⁄16 11⁄4
387⁄16 29⁄16 387⁄16 23⁄8 387⁄16 23⁄16 387⁄16 2
15⁄16 11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄8
3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
16.690 163⁄4 16.420 167⁄16 16.220 161⁄4 16.060 161⁄16 15.910 157⁄8 15.825 157⁄8 15.830 157⁄8 15.750 153⁄4 15.750 153⁄4 15.750 153⁄4 15.750 153⁄4
3.230 2.760 2.360 2.050 1.770 1.650 1.575 1.420 1.220 1.065 0.830
31⁄4 23⁄4 23⁄8 21⁄16 13⁄4 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 11⁄4 11⁄16 13⁄ 16
343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16
47⁄16 21⁄16 315⁄16 115⁄16 39⁄16 17⁄8 31⁄4 13⁄4 215⁄16 111⁄16 31⁄16 111⁄16 23⁄4 15⁄8 25⁄8 19⁄16 23⁄8 11⁄2 21⁄4 11⁄2 2 11⁄2
13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
12.640 125⁄8 12.360 123⁄8 12.170 123⁄16 11.970 12 11.930 12 11.890 117⁄8 11.810 113⁄4 11.810 113⁄4 11.810 113⁄4 11.810 113⁄4
2.950 215⁄16 2.520 21⁄2 2.130 21⁄8 1.810 113⁄16 1.730 13⁄4 1.575 17⁄16 1.415 19⁄16 1.220 11⁄4 1.025 1 0.830 13⁄16
343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16 343⁄16
41⁄8 2 311⁄16 17⁄8 35⁄16 113⁄16 3 111⁄16 215⁄16 111⁄16 23⁄4 15⁄8 25⁄8 19⁄16 23⁄8 11⁄2 23⁄16 11⁄2 2 11⁄2
11⁄4 13⁄16 1 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
18.130 17.990 17.575 17.220 16.965 16.830 16.730 16.630 16.655 16.595 16.550 16.510 16.470
181⁄8 18 175⁄8 171⁄4 17 167⁄8 163⁄4 165⁄8 165⁄8 165⁄8 161⁄2 161⁄2 161⁄2
4.530 41⁄2 4.290 45⁄16 3.540 39⁄16 2.910 215⁄16 2.440 27⁄16 2.200 23⁄16 2.010 2 1.850 17⁄8 1.680 111⁄16 1.570 19⁄16 1.440 17⁄16 1.350 13⁄8 1.260 11⁄4
311⁄8 311⁄8 311⁄8 311⁄8 311⁄8 311⁄8 311⁄8 311⁄8 311⁄8 311⁄8 311⁄8 311⁄8 311⁄8
511⁄16 57⁄16 411⁄16 41⁄16 39⁄16 35⁄16 31⁄8 3 213⁄16 211⁄16 29⁄16 21⁄2 23⁄8
1
15.950 15.830 15.750 15.750
in.
T
153⁄4 157⁄8 153⁄4 153⁄4
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
in.
Distance
*Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
21⁄4 23⁄16 2 13⁄4 15⁄8 15⁄8 19⁄16 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 11⁄2 17⁄16 17⁄16
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 27
W SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
k1
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
Nominal Wt. per ft
Compact Section Criteria
h tw
Fy′′′
lb
bf 2tf
335 290 262 230
4.5 5.0 5.5 6.5
593 503 431 372 321 297 277 249 215 199 174
k
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
ksi
2
(1/ksi)
in.
38.1 44.7 49.2 54.8
44 32 26 21
2430 2140 1930 1690
5110 8220 12300 21200
31100 27100 24200 20800
2.6 3.0 3.4 3.9 4.5 4.8 5.0 5.5 6.5 7.4 9.5
19.1 22.2 25.5 29.5 34.2 36.8 41.2 45.6 52.6 52.6 52.6
— — — — — 47 38 31 23 23 23
4790 4110 3550 3100 2690 2500 2350 2120 1830 1690 1500
337 620 1100 1860 3240 4240 5370 7940 14000 20300 36000
466 392 331 278 264 235 211 183 167 149
2.1 2.5 2.9 3.3 3.4 3.8 4.2 4.8 5.8 7.1
20.5 24.1 28.0 33.5 35.6 41.2 45.6 52.6 52.6 54.3
— — — 57 50 38 31 23 23 22
4560 3920 3360 2860 2720 2430 2200 1900 1750 1610
848 798 650 527 439 393 359 328 300 280 260 245 230
2.0 2.1 2.5 3.0 3.5 3.8 4.2 4.5 5.0 5.3 5.7 6.1 6.5
12.5 13.2 16.0 19.6 23.1 25.8 28.1 30.9 33.3 35.6 37.5 39.4 41.4
— — — — — — — — 58 51 46 41 37
7100 6720 5590 4630 3900 3540 3240 2980 2720 2560 2370 2230 2100
S
I 4
Axis Y-Y
r
S
I 4
r 3
Zx
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.3
1410 1240 1120 969
17.8 17.8 17.7 17.5
1200 1050 927 796
150 133 118 101
3.49 3.50 3.46 3.43
1620 1420 1270 1100
236 206 183 157
50400 41700 34800 29600 25100 23200 21900 19500 16700 14900 12200
2340 1980 1690 1460 1250 1170 1100 992 858 769 639
17.0 16.8 16.6 16.4 16.3 16.3 16.4 16.3 16.2 16.0 15.5
2520 2050 1690 1420 1190 1090 1040 926 796 695 541
302 250 208 177 150 138 132 118 101 88.2 68.8
3.81 3.72 3.65 3.60 3.56 3.54 3.58 3.56 3.54 3.45 3.26
2760 2300 1950 1670 1420 1330 1250 1120 963 868 715
481 394 327 277 234 215 204 182 156 137 107
473 851 1560 2910 3510 5310 7890 13700 20500 31400
36300 29900 24700 20500 19400 17400 15500 13300 11600 9780
1710 1440 1210 1020 971 874 785 682 599 512
16.3 16.1 15.9 15.8 15.8 15.9 15.8 15.7 15.3 14.9
1010 803 646 521 493 444 390 336 283 229
160 130 106 87.1 82.6 74.6 66.1 56.9 47.9 38.8
2.72 2.64 2.57 2.52 2.52 2.54 2.51 2.50 2.40 2.29
2050 1710 1430 1190 1130 1010 905 781 692 597
262 212 172 140 132 118 105 89.6 76.0 62.2
71 87 175 365 704 1040 1470 2040 2930 3730 5100 6430 8190
67400 62600 48900 38300 31000 27500 24800 22500 20300 18900 17300 16100 15000
3170 2980 2420 1950 1620 1450 1320 1210 1110 1030 953 895 837
16.4 16.4 16.0 15.8 15.6 15.5 15.4 15.3 15.2 15.1 15.0 15.0 14.9
4550 4200 3230 2490 1990 1750 1570 1420 1300 1200 1090 1010 940
501 467 367 289 235 208 188 171 156 144 132 123 114
4.27 4.24 4.12 4.02 3.95 3.90 3.87 3.84 3.83 3.81 3.78 3.75 3.73
3830 3570 2840 2270 1860 1660 1510 1380 1260 1170 1080 1010 943
799 743 580 454 367 325 292 265 241 223 204 190 176
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3
Zy
in.
in.
3
1 - 28
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
X
W SHAPES Dimensions
k
k1
X
T
tw
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Area A 2
in.
Depth d in.
Flange
Thickness tw
tw 2
in.
in.
Width bf in.
Distance
Thickness tf in.
T
k
k1
in.
in.
in.
W36×256 W40×232 W40×210 W40×194 W40×182 W40×170 W40×160 W40×150 W40×135
75.4 68.1 61.8 57.0 53.6 50.0 47.0 44.2 39.7
37.43 37.12 36.69 36.49 36.33 36.17 36.01 35.85 35.55
373⁄8 371⁄8 363⁄4 361⁄2 363⁄8 361⁄8 36 357⁄8 351⁄2
0.960 0.870 0.830 0.765 0.725 0.680 0.650 0.625 0.600
1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
12.215 12.120 12.180 12.115 12.075 12.030 12.000 11.975 11.950
121⁄4 121⁄8 121⁄8 121⁄8 121⁄8 12 12 12 12
1.730 1.570 1.360 1.260 1.180 1.100 1.020 0.940 0.790
13⁄4 19⁄16 13⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄8 1 15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16
321⁄8 321⁄8 321⁄8 321⁄8 321⁄8 321⁄8 321⁄8 321⁄8 321⁄8
25⁄8 21⁄2 25⁄16 23⁄16 21⁄8 2 115⁄16 17⁄8 111⁄16
15⁄16 11⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄16 13⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄8
W33×354* W40×318* W40×291* W40×263* W40×241 W40×221 W40×201
104 93.5 85.6 77.4 70.9 65.0 59.1
35.55 35.16 34.84 34.53 34.18 33.93 33.68
351⁄2 351⁄8 347⁄8 341⁄2 341⁄8 337⁄8 335⁄8
1.160 1.040 0.960 0.870 0.830 0.775 0.715
13⁄16 11⁄16 1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
16.100 15.985 15.905 15.805 15.860 15.805 15.745
161⁄8 16 157⁄8 153⁄4 157⁄8 153⁄4 153⁄4
2.090 1.890 1.730 1.570 1.400 1.275 1.150
21⁄16 17⁄8 13⁄4 19⁄16 13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8
293⁄4 293⁄4 293⁄4 293⁄4 293⁄4 293⁄4 293⁄4
27⁄8 211⁄16 29⁄16 23⁄8 23⁄16 21⁄16 115⁄16
13⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄4 13⁄16 13⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄8
W33×169 W40×152 W40×141 W40×130 W40×118
49.5 44.7 41.6 38.3 34.7
33.82 33.49 33.30 33.09 32.86
337⁄8 331⁄2 331⁄4 331⁄8 327⁄8
0.670 0.635 0.605 0.580 0.550
11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
11.500 11.565 11.535 11.510 11.480
111⁄2 115⁄8 111⁄2 111⁄2 111⁄2
1.220 1.055 0.960 0.855 0.740
11⁄4 11⁄16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4
293⁄4 293⁄4 293⁄4 293⁄4 293⁄4
21⁄16 17⁄8 13⁄4 111⁄16 19⁄16
11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄16
W30×477* W40×391* W40×326* W40×292* W40×261 W40×235 W40×211 W40×191 W40×173
140 114 95.7 85.7 76.7 69.0 62.0 56.1 50.8
34.21 33.19 32.40 32.01 31.61 31.30 30.94 30.68 30.44
341⁄4 331⁄4 323⁄8 32 315⁄8 311⁄4 31 305⁄8 301⁄2
1.630 1.360 1.140 1.020 0.930 0.830 0.775 0.710 0.655
15⁄8 13⁄8 11⁄8 1 15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
15.865 15.590 15.370 15.255 15.155 15.055 15.105 15.040 14.985
157⁄8 155⁄8 153⁄8 151⁄2 151⁄8 15 151⁄8 15 15
2.950 2.440 2.050 1.850 1.650 1.500 1.315 1.185 1.065
3 27⁄16 21⁄16 17⁄8 15⁄8 11⁄2 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16
263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4
33⁄4 31⁄4 213⁄16 25⁄8 27⁄16 21⁄4 21⁄8 115⁄16 11⁄16
19⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄16 11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄16 11⁄16
W30×148 W40×132 W40×124 W40×116 W40×108 W40×99 W40×90
43.5 38.9 36.5 34.2 31.7 29.1 26.4
30.67 30.31 30.17 30.01 29.83 29.65 29.53
305⁄8 301⁄4 301⁄8 30 297⁄8 295⁄8 291⁄2
0.650 0.615 0.585 0.565 0.545 0.520 0.470
5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
10.480 10.545 10.515 10.495 10.475 10.450 10.400
101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 103⁄8
1.180 1.000 0.930 0.850 0.760 0.670 0.610
13⁄16 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4 263⁄4
2 13⁄4 111⁄16 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄16
1 11⁄16 1 1 1 1 1
*Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 29
W SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
k1
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
Nominal Wt. per ft
Compact Section Criteria
h tw
Fy′′′
lb
bf 2tf
256 232 210 194 182 170 160 150 135
3.5 3.9 4.5 4.8 5.1 5.5 5.9 6.4 7.6
354 318 291 263 241 221 201
k
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
Axis Y-Y
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
ksi
2
(1/ksi)
in.
33.8 37.3 39.1 42.4 44.8 47.8 50.0 52.0 54.1
56 46 42 36 32 28 26 24 22
2840 2580 2320 2140 2020 1900 1780 1680 1520
2870 4160 6560 8850 11300 14500 18600 24200 38000
16800 15000 13200 12100 11300 10500 9750 9040 7800
895 809 719 664 623 580 542 504 439
14.9 14.8 14.6 14.6 14.5 14.5 14.4 14.3 14.0
528 468 411 375 347 320 295 270 225
3.8 4.2 4.6 5.0 5.7 6.2 6.8
25.8 28.8 31.2 34.5 36.1 38.7 41.9
— — — 54 49 43 36
3540 3200 2940 2670 2430 2240 2040
1030 1530 2130 3100 4590 6440 9390
21900 19500 17700 15800 14200 12800 11500
1230 1110 1010 917 829 757 684
14.5 14.4 14.4 14.3 14.1 14.1 14.0
169 152 141 130 118
4.7 5.5 6.0 6.7 7.8
44.7 47.2 49.6 51.7 54.5
32 29 26 24 22
2160 1940 1800 1660 1510
8150 12900 17800 25100 37700
9290 8160 7450 6710 5900
549 487 448 406 359
477 391 326 292 261 235 211 191 173
2.7 3.2 3.7 4.1 4.6 5.0 5.7 6.3 7.0
16.6 19.9 23.7 26.5 29.0 32.5 34.9 38.0 41.2
— — — — — 61 53 44 38
5420 4510 3860 3460 3110 2820 2510 2280 2070
193 386 735 1110 1690 2460 3950 5840 8540
26100 20700 16800 14900 13100 11700 10300 9170 8200
148 132 124 116 108 99 90
4.4 5.3 5.7 6.2 6.9 7.8 8.5
41.5 43.9 46.2 47.8 49.6 51.9 57.5
37 33 30 28 26 24 19
2310 2050 1930 1800 1680 1560 1430
6180 10500 13500 17700 24200 34100 47000
6680 5770 5360 4930 4470 3990 3620
S
I 4
r
S
I
86.5 77.2 67.5 61.9 57.6 53.2 49.1 45.1 37.7
2.65 2.62 2.58 2.56 2.55 2.53 2.50 2.47 2.38
1040 936 833 767 718 668 624 581 509
137 122 107 97.7 90.7 83.8 77.3 70.9 59.7
1460 1290 1160 1030 932 840 749
181 161 146 131 118 106 95.2
3.74 3.71 3.69 3.66 3.63 3.59 3.56
1420 1270 1150 1040 939 855 772
282 250 226 202 182 164 147
13.7 13.5 13.4 13.2 13.0
310 273 246 218 187
53.9 47.2 42.7 37.9 32.6
2.50 2.47 2.43 2.39 2.32
629 559 514 467 415
1530 1250 1030 928 827 746 663 598 539
13.7 13.5 13.2 13.2 13.1 13.0 12.9 12.8 12.7
1970 1550 1240 1100 959 855 757 673 598
249 198 162 144 127 114 100 89.5 79.8
3.75 3.68 3.61 3.58 3.54 3.52 3.49 3.46 3.43
1790 1430 1190 1060 941 845 749 673 605
436 380 355 329 299 269 245
12.4 12.2 12.1 12.0 11.9 11.7 11.7
227 196 181 164 146 128 115
43.3 37.2 34.4 31.3 27.9 24.5 22.1
2.28 2.25 2.23 2.19 2.15 2.10 2.09
500 437 408 378 346 312 283
in.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3
Zy in.3
in.
3
Zx in.
in.
4
r in.
in.
3
84.4 73.9 66.9 59.5 51.3 390 310 252 223 196 175 154 138 123 68.0 58.4 54.0 49.2 43.9 38.6 34.7
1 - 30
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
X
W SHAPES Dimensions
k
k1
X
T
tw
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Area A 2
in.
Depth d in.
Flange
Thickness tw
tw 2
in.
in.
Width bf in.
Distance
Thickness tf
T
in.
k
k1
in.
in.
in.
W27×539* W40×448* W40×368* W40×307* W40×258 W40×235 W40×217 W40×194 W40×178 W40×161 W40×146
158 131 108 90.2 75.7 69.1 63.8 57.0 52.3 47.4 42.9
32.52 31.42 30.39 29.61 28.98 28.66 28.43 28.11 27.81 27.59 27.38
321⁄2 313⁄8 303⁄8 295⁄8 29 285⁄8 283⁄8 281⁄8 273⁄4 275⁄8 273⁄8
1.970 1.650 1.380 1.160 0.980 0.910 0.830 0.750 0.725 0.660 0.605
2 15⁄8 13⁄8 13⁄16 1 15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
1 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
15.255 14.940 14.665 14.445 14.270 14.190 14.115 14.035 14.085 14.020 13.965
151⁄4 15 145⁄8 141⁄2 141⁄4 141⁄4 141⁄8 14 141⁄8 14 14
3.540 2.990 2.480 2.090 1.770 1.610 1.500 1.340 1.190 1.080 0.975
39⁄16 3 21⁄2 21⁄16 13⁄4 15⁄8 11⁄2 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16 1
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
41⁄4 311⁄16 33⁄16 213⁄16 21⁄2 25⁄16 23⁄16 21⁄16 17⁄8 113⁄16 111⁄16
15⁄8 11⁄2 15⁄16 11⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄16 1 11⁄16 1 1
W27×129 W40×114 W40×102 W40×94 W40×84
37.8 33.5 30.0 27.7 24.8
27.63 27.29 27.09 26.92 26.71
275⁄8 271⁄4 271⁄8 267⁄8 263⁄4
0.610 0.570 0.515 0.490 0.460
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
10.010 10.070 10.015 9.990 9.960
10 101⁄8 10 10 10
1.100 0.930 0.830 0.745 0.640
11⁄8 15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8
24 24 24 24 24
113⁄16 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 13⁄8
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16
W24×492* W40×408* W40×335* W40×279* W40×250* W40×229 W40×207 W40×192 W40×176 W40×162 W40×146 W40×131 W40×117 W40×104
144 119 98.4 82.0 73.5 67.2 60.7 56.3 51.7 47.7 43.0 38.5 34.4 30.6
29.65 28.54 27.52 26.73 26.34 26.02 25.71 25.47 25.24 25.00 24.74 24.48 24.26 24.06
295⁄8 281⁄2 271⁄2 263⁄4 263⁄8 26 253⁄4 251⁄2 251⁄4 25 243⁄4 241⁄2 241⁄4 24
1.970 1.650 1.380 1.160 1.040 0.960 0.870 0.810 0.750 0.705 0.650 0.605 0.550 0.500
2 15⁄8 13⁄8 13⁄16 11⁄16 1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
1 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
14.115 13.800 13.520 13.305 13.185 13.110 13.010 12.950 12.890 12.955 12.900 12.855 12.800 12.750
141⁄8 133⁄4 131⁄2 131⁄4 131⁄8 131⁄8 13 13 127⁄8 13 127⁄8 127⁄8 123⁄4 123⁄4
3.540 2.990 2.480 2.090 1.890 1.730 1.570 1.460 1.340 1.220 1.090 0.960 0.850 0.750
39⁄16 3 21⁄2 21⁄16 17⁄8 13⁄4 19⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄16 11⁄4 11⁄16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
45⁄16 33⁄4 31⁄4 27⁄8 211⁄16 21⁄2 23⁄8 21⁄4 21⁄8 2 17⁄8 13⁄4 15⁄8 11⁄2
19⁄16 13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄8 1 1 1 15⁄ 16 11⁄16 1 1 ⁄16 11⁄16 1 1
W24×103 W40×94 W40×84 W40×76 W40×68
30.3 27.7 24.7 22.4 20.1
24.53 24.31 24.10 23.92 23.73
241⁄2 241⁄4 241⁄8 237⁄8 233⁄4
0.550 0.515 0.470 0.440 0.415
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
9.000 9.065 9.020 8.990 8.965
9 91⁄8 9 9 9
0.980 0.875 0.770 0.680 0.585
1 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
21 21 21 21 21
13⁄4 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 13⁄8
13⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16
W24×62 W40×55
18.2 16.2
23.74 23.57
233⁄4 235⁄8
0.430 0.395
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
7.040 7.005
7 7
0.590 0.505
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
21 21
13⁄8 15⁄16
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16
* Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 31
W SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
k1
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
Nominal Wt. per ft
Compact Section Criteria
h tw
Fy′′′
lb
bf 2tf
539 448 368 307 258 235 217 194 178 161 146
2.2 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.4 4.7 5.2 5.9 6.5 7.2
129 114 102 94 84
k
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
ksi
2
12.3 14.7 17.6 20.9 24.7 26.6 29.2 32.3 33.4 36.7 40.0
— — — — — — — 61 57 47 40
7160 6070 5100 4320 3670 3360 3120 2800 2550 2320 2110
66 123 243 463 873 1230 1640 2520 3740 5370 7900
25500 20400 16100 13100 10800 9660 8870 7820 6990 6280 5630
4.5 5.4 6.0 6.7 7.8
39.7 42.5 47.0 49.4 52.7
41 35 29 26 23
2390 2100 1890 1740 1570
5340 9220 14000 19900 31100
492 408 335 279 250 229 207 192 176 162 146 131 117 104
2.0 2.3 2.7 3.2 3.5 3.8 4.1 4.4 4.8 5.3 5.9 6.7 7.5 8.5
10.9 13.1 15.6 18.6 20.7 22.5 24.8 26.6 28.7 30.6 33.2 35.6 39.2 43.1
— — — — — — — — — — 58 50 42 34
7950 6780 5700 4840 4370 4020 3650 3410 3140 2870 2590 2330 2090 1860
103 94 84 76 68
4.6 5.2 5.9 6.6 7.7
39.2 41.9 45.9 49.0 52.0
42 37 30 27 24
62 55
6.0 6.9
50.1 54.6
25 21
S
I
r
S 3
Zx
in.
in.
in.3
1570 1300 1060 884 742 674 624 556 502 455 411
12.7 12.5 12.2 12.0 11.9 11.8 11.8 11.7 11.6 11.5 11.4
2110 1670 1310 1050 859 768 704 618 555 497 443
277 224 179 146 120 108 99.8 88.1 78.8 70.9 63.5
3.66 3.57 3.48 3.42 3.37 3.33 3.32 3.29 3.26 3.24 3.21
1880 1530 1240 1020 850 769 708 628 567 512 461
437 351 279 227 187 168 154 136 122 109 97.5
4760 4090 3620 3270 2850
345 299 267 243 213
11.2 11.0 11.0 10.9 10.7
184 159 139 124 106
36.8 31.5 27.8 24.8 21.2
2.21 2.18 2.15 2.12 2.07
395 343 305 278 244
57.6 49.3 43.4 38.8 33.2
43 79 156 297 436 605 876 1150 1590 2260 3420 5290 8190 12900
19100 15100 11900 9600 8490 7650 6820 6260 5680 5170 4580 4020 3540 3100
1290 1060 864 718 644 588 531 491 450 414 371 329 291 258
11.5 11.3 11.0 10.8 10.7 10.7 10.6 10.5 10.5 10.4 10.3 10.2 10.1 10.1
1670 1320 1030 823 724 651 578 530 479 443 391 340 297 259
237 191 152 124 110 99.4 88.8 81.8 74.3 68.4 60.5 53.0 46.5 40.7
3.41 3.33 3.23 3.17 3.14 3.11 3.08 3.07 3.04 3.05 3.01 2.97 2.94 2.91
1550 1250 1020 835 744 676 606 559 511 468 418 370 327 289
375 300 238 193 171 154 137 126 115 105 93.2 81.5 71.4 62.4
2400 2180 1950 1760 1590
5280 7800 12200 18600 29000
3000 2700 2370 2100 1830
245 222 196 176 154
9.96 9.87 9.79 9.69 9.55
119 109 94.4 82.5 70.4
26.5 24.0 20.9 18.4 15.7
1.99 1.98 1.95 1.92 1.87
280 254 224 200 177
41.5 37.5 32.6 28.6 24.5
1700 1540
25100 39600
1550 1350
131 114
9.23 9.11
34.5 29.1
1.38 1.34
153 134
15.7 13.3
9.80 8.30
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3
Zy
in.
in.
4
r
in.
in.
3
I
in.
(1/ksi)
4
Axis Y-Y
1 - 32
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
X
W SHAPES Dimensions
k
k1
X
T
tw
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Area A 2
in.
Depth d in.
Flange
Thickness tw
tw 2
in.
in.
Width bf
Distance
Thickness tf
in.
in.
T
k
k1
in.
in.
in.
W21×201 W40×182 W40×166 W40×147 W40×132 W40×122 W40×111 W40×101
59.2 53.6 48.8 43.2 38.8 35.9 32.7 29.8
23.03 22.72 22.48 22.06 21.83 21.68 21.51 21.36
23 223⁄4 221⁄2 22 217⁄8 215⁄8 211⁄2 213⁄8
0.910 0.830 0.750 0.720 0.650 0.600 0.550 0.500
15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
12.575 12.500 12.420 12.510 12.440 12.390 12.340 12.290
125⁄8 121⁄2 123⁄8 121⁄2 121⁄2 123⁄8 123⁄8 121⁄4
1.630 1.480 1.360 1.150 1.035 0.960 0.875 0.800
15⁄8 11⁄2 13⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16
181⁄4 181⁄4 181⁄4 181⁄4 181⁄4 181⁄4 181⁄4 181⁄4
23⁄8 21⁄4 21⁄8 17⁄8 113⁄16 111⁄16 15⁄8 19⁄16
1 1 15⁄ 16 11⁄16 1 1 15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16
W21×93 W40×83 W40×73 W40×68 W40×62
27.3 24.3 21.5 20.0 18.3
21.62 21.43 21.24 21.13 20.99
215⁄8 213⁄8 211⁄4 211⁄8 21
0.580 0.515 0.455 0.430 0.400
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
8.420 8.355 8.295 8.270 8.240
83⁄8 83⁄8 81⁄4 81⁄4 81⁄4
0.930 0.835 0.740 0.685 0.615
15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
181⁄4 181⁄4 181⁄4 181⁄4 181⁄4
111⁄16 19⁄16 11⁄2 17⁄16 13⁄8
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
W21×57 W40×50 W40×44
16.7 14.7 13.0
21.06 20.83 20.66
21 207⁄8 205⁄8
0.405 0.380 0.350
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
6.555 6.530 6.500
61⁄2 61⁄2 61⁄2
0.650 0.535 0.450
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
181⁄4 181⁄4 181⁄4
13⁄8 15⁄16 13⁄16
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
W18×311* W40×283* W40×258* W40×234* W40×211* W40×192 W40×175 W40×158 W40×143 W40×130
91.5 83.2 75.9 68.8 62.1 56.4 51.3 46.3 42.1 38.2
22.32 21.85 21.46 21.06 20.67 20.35 20.04 19.72 19.49 19.25
223⁄8 217⁄8 211⁄2 21 205⁄8 203⁄8 20 193⁄4 191⁄2 191⁄4
1.520 1.400 1.280 1.160 1.060 0.960 0.890 0.810 0.730 0.670
11⁄2 13⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄16 1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
12.005 11.890 11.770 11.650 11.555 11.455 11.375 11.300 11.220 11.160
12 117⁄8 113⁄4 115⁄8 111⁄2 111⁄2 113⁄8 111⁄4 111⁄4 111⁄8
2.740 23⁄4 2.500 21⁄2 2.300 25⁄16 2.110 21⁄8 1.910 115⁄16 1.750 13⁄4 1.590 19⁄16 1.440 17⁄16 1.320 15⁄16 1.200 13⁄16
151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2
37⁄16 33⁄16 3 23⁄4 9 2 ⁄16 27⁄16 21⁄4 21⁄8 2 17⁄8
13⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄8 1 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16
W18×119 W40×106 W40×97 W40×86 W40×76
35.1 31.1 28.5 25.3 22.3
18.97 18.73 18.59 18.39 18.21
19 183⁄4 185⁄8 183⁄8 181⁄4
0.655 0.590 0.535 0.480 0.425
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
11.265 11.200 11.145 11.090 11.035
111⁄4 111⁄4 111⁄8 111⁄8 11
1.060 0.940 0.870 0.770 0.680
11⁄16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2
13⁄4 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 13⁄8
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16
W18×71 W40×65 W40×60 W40×55 W40×50
20.8 19.1 17.6 16.2 14.7
18.47 18.35 18.24 18.11 17.99
181⁄2 183⁄8 181⁄4 181⁄8 18
0.495 0.450 0.415 0.390 0.355
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
7.635 7.590 7.555 7.530 7.495
75⁄8 75⁄8 71⁄2 71⁄2 71⁄2
0.810 0.750 0.695 0.630 0.570
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16
151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2
11⁄2 17⁄16 13⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄4
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16
W18×46 W40×40 W40×35
13.5 11.8 10.3
18.06 17.90 17.70
18 177⁄8 173⁄4
0.360 0.315 0.300
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
6.060 6.015 6.000
6 6 6
0.605 0.525 0.425
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
151⁄2 151⁄2 151⁄2
11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄8
13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
*Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 33
W SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
k1
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
Nominal Wt. per ft
Compact Section Criteria
h tw
Fy′′′
lb
bf 2tf
201 182 166 147 132 122 111 101
3.9 4.2 4.6 5.4 6.0 6.5 7.1 7.7
93 83 73 68 62
k
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
ksi
2
20.6 22.6 24.9 26.1 28.9 31.3 34.1 37.5
— — — — — — 55 45
4290 3910 3590 3140 2840 2630 2400 2200
4.5 5.0 5.6 6.0 6.7
32.3 36.4 41.2 43.6 46.9
61 48 38 34 29
57 50 44
5.0 6.1 7.2
46.3 49.4 53.6
311 283 258 234 211 192 175 158 143 130
2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9 4.2 4.6
119 106 97 86 76
S
I 4
in.
in.
453 649 904 1590 2350 3160 4510 6400
5310 4730 4280 3630 3220 2960 2670 2420
2680 2400 2140 2000 1820
3460 5250 8380 10900 15900
30 26 22
1960 1730 1550
10.6 11.5 12.5 13.8 15.1 16.7 18.0 19.8 21.9 23.9
— — — — — — — — — —
5.3 6.0 6.4 7.2 8.1
24.5 27.2 30.0 33.4 37.8
71 65 60 55 50
4.7 5.1 5.4 6.0 6.6
46 40 35
5.0 5.7 7.1
Axis Y-Y
r
S
I 4
r 3
Zx
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.3
461 417 380 329 295 273 249 227
9.47 9.40 9.36 9.17 9.12 9.09 9.05 9.02
542 483 435 376 333 305 274 248
86.1 77.2 70.1 60.1 53.5 49.2 44.5 40.3
3.02 3.00 2.98 2.95 2.93 2.92 2.90 2.89
530 476 432 373 333 307 279 253
133 119 108 92.6 82.3 75.6 68.2 61.7
2070 1830 1600 1480 1330
192 171 151 140 127
8.70 8.67 8.64 8.60 8.54
92.9 81.4 70.6 64.7 57.5
22.1 19.5 17.0 15.7 13.9
1.84 1.83 1.81 1.80 1.77
221 196 172 160 144
34.7 30.5 26.6 24.4 21.7
13100 22600 36600
1170 984 843
111 94.5 81.6
8.36 8.18 8.06
30.6 24.9 20.7
1.35 1.30 1.26
129 110 95.4
14.8 12.2 10.2
8160 7520 6920 6360 5800 5320 4870 4430 4060 3710
38 52 71 97 140 194 274 396 557 789
6960 6160 5510 4900 4330 3870 3450 3060 2750 2460
624 564 514 466 419 380 344 310 282 256
8.72 8.61 8.53 8.44 8.35 8.28 8.20 8.12 8.09 8.03
795 704 628 558 493 440 391 347 311 278
132 118 107 95.8 85.3 76.8 68.8 61.4 55.5 49.9
2.95 2.91 2.88 2.85 2.82 2.79 2.76 2.74 2.72 2.70
753 676 611 549 490 442 398 356 322 291
207 185 166 149 132 119 106 94.8 85.4 76.7
— — — 57 45
3340 2990 2750 2460 2180
1210 1880 2580 4060 6520
2190 1910 1750 1530 1330
231 204 188 166 146
7.90 7.84 7.82 7.77 7.73
253 220 201 175 152
44.9 39.4 36.1 31.6 27.6
2.69 2.66 2.65 2.63 2.61
261 230 211 186 163
69.1 60.5 55.3 48.4 42.2
32.4 35.7 38.7 41.2 45.2
61 50 43 38 31
2680 2470 2290 2110 1920
3310 4540 6080 8540 12400
1170 1070 984 890 800
127 117 108 98.3 88.9
7.50 7.49 7.47 7.41 7.38
60.3 54.8 50.1 44.9 40.1
15.8 14.4 13.3 11.9 10.7
1.70 1.69 1.69 1.67 1.65
145 133 123 112 101
24.7 22.5 20.6 18.5 16.6
44.6 51.0 53.5
32 25 22
2060 1810 1590
10100 17200 30300
712 612 510
78.8 68.4 57.6
7.25 7.21 7.04
22.5 19.1 15.3
9.35 7.64 6.36
7.43 6.35 5.12
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.29 1.27 1.22
3
Zy
in.
(1/ksi)
3
90.7 78.4 66.5
11.7 9.95 8.06
1 - 34
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
X
W SHAPES Dimensions
k
k1
X
T
tw
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Area A 2
in.
Depth d in.
Thickness tw in.
Flange
tw 2 in.
Width bf in.
Distance
Thickness tf in.
T
k
in.
in.
k1 in.
W16×100 W16×89 W16×77 W16×67
29.4 26.2 22.6 19.7
16.97 16.75 16.52 16.33
17 163⁄4 161⁄2 163⁄8
0.585 0.525 0.455 0.395
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
10.425 10.365 10.295 10.235
103⁄8 103⁄8 101⁄4 101⁄4
0.985 0.875 0.760 0.665
1 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
135⁄8 111⁄16 135⁄8 19⁄16 135⁄8 17⁄16 135⁄8 13⁄8
15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16
W16×57 W16×50 W16×45 W16×40 W16×36
16.8 14.7 13.3 11.8 10.6
16.43 16.26 16.13 16.01 15.86
163⁄8 161⁄4 161⁄8 16 157⁄8
0.430 0.380 0.345 0.305 0.295
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
7.120 7.070 7.035 6.995 6.985
71⁄8 71⁄8 7 7 7
0.715 0.630 0.565 0.505 0.430
11⁄
16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
135⁄8 135⁄8 135⁄8 135⁄8 135⁄8
13⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄8
7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
9.12 15.88 7.68 15.69
157⁄8 153⁄4
0.275 0.250
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
1⁄
5.525 5.500
51⁄2 51⁄2
0.440 0.345
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
135⁄8 135⁄8
11⁄8 11⁄16
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
17⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄8 1
18.560 17.890 17.650 17.415 17.200 17.010 16.835
181⁄2 177⁄8 175⁄8 173⁄8 171⁄4 17 167⁄8
5.120 51⁄8 4.910 415⁄16 4.520 41⁄2 4.160 43⁄16 3.820 313⁄16 3.500 31⁄2 3.210 33⁄16
111⁄4 513⁄16 21⁄2 111⁄4 59⁄16 23⁄16 111⁄4 53⁄16 21⁄16 111⁄4 413⁄16 115⁄16 111⁄4 41⁄2 113⁄16 111⁄4 43⁄16 13⁄4 111⁄4 37⁄8 15⁄8
15⁄
16.695 16.590 16.475 16.360 16.230 16.110 15.995 15.890 15.800 15.710 15.650 15.565 15.500
163⁄4 165⁄8 161⁄2 163⁄8 161⁄4 161⁄8 16 157⁄8 153⁄4 153⁄4 155⁄8 155⁄8 151⁄2
3.035 31⁄16 2.845 27⁄8 2.660 211⁄16 2.470 21⁄2 2.260 21⁄4 2.070 21⁄16 1.890 17⁄8 1.720 13⁄4 1.560 19⁄16 1.440 17⁄16 1.310 15⁄16 1.190 13⁄16 1.090 11⁄16
111⁄4 311⁄16 111⁄4 31⁄2 111⁄4 35⁄16 111⁄4 31⁄8 111⁄4 215⁄16 111⁄4 23⁄4 111⁄4 29⁄16 111⁄4 23⁄8 111⁄4 21⁄4 111⁄4 21⁄8 111⁄4 2 111⁄4 17⁄8 111⁄4 13⁄4
W16×31 W16×26 W14×808* W16×730* W16×665* W16×605* W16×550* W16×500* W16×455*
237 215 196 178 162 147 134
22.84 22.42 21.64 20.92 20.24 19.60 19.02
227⁄8 223⁄8 215⁄8 207⁄8 201⁄4 195⁄8 19
3.740 33⁄4 3.070 31⁄16 2.830 213⁄16 2.595 25⁄8 2.380 23⁄8 2.190 23⁄16 2.015 2
W14×426* W16×398* W16×370* W16×342* W16×311* W16×283* W16×257* W16×233* W16×211 W16×193 W16×176 W16×159 W16×145
125 117 109 101 91.4 83.3 75.6 68.5 62.0 56.8 51.8 46.7 42.7
18.67 18.29 17.92 17.54 17.12 16.74 16.38 16.04 15.72 15.48 15.22 14.98 14.78
185⁄8 181⁄4 177⁄8 171⁄2 171⁄8 163⁄4 163⁄8 16 153⁄4 151⁄2 151⁄4 15 143⁄4
1.875 1.770 1.655 1.540 1.410 1.290 1.175 1.070 0.980 0.890 0.830 0.745 0.680
17⁄8 13⁄4 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16 1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
1⁄
7⁄
13⁄
13⁄ 3⁄
8 8
16 8 16 16
4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
*Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
19⁄16 11⁄2 17⁄16 13⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄4 13⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄8 11⁄16 11⁄16 1 1
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 35
W SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
k1
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
Compact NomSection inal Criteria Wt. per Fy′′′ bf h ft 2tf tw lb ksi
k
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
2
(1/ksi)
S
I 4
Axis Y-Y
r 3
in.
in.
175 155 134 117
S
I 4
r 3
Zx 3
Zy in.3
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
7.10 7.05 7.00 6.96
186 163 138 119
35.7 31.4 26.9 23.2
2.51 2.49 2.47 2.46
198 175 150 130
54.9 48.1 41.1 35.5
12.1 10.5 9.34 8.25 7.00
1.60 1.59 1.57 1.57 1.52
105 92.0 82.3 72.9 64.0
18.9 16.3 14.5 12.7 10.8
4.49 1.17 3.49 1.12
54.0 44.2
100 89 77 67
5.3 5.9 6.8 7.7
24.3 27.0 31.2 35.9
— — — 50
3450 3090 2680 2350
1040 1630 2790 4690
1490 1300 1110 954
57 50 45 40 36
5.0 5.6 6.2 6.9 8.1
33.0 37.4 41.2 46.6 48.1
59 46 38 30 28
2650 3400 2340 5530 2120 8280 1890 12900 1700 20800
758 659 586 518 448
92.2 81.0 72.7 64.7 56.5
6.72 6.68 6.65 6.63 6.51
43.1 37.2 32.8 28.9 24.5
31 26
6.3 8.0
51.6 56.8
24 20
1740 20000 1470 40900
375 301
47.2 38.4
6.41 6.26
12.4 9.59
808 730 665 605 550 500 455
1.8 1.8 2.0 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.6
3.4 3.7 4.0 4.4 4.8 5.2 5.7
— — — — — — —
18900 17500 16300 15100 14200 13100 12200
1.45 1.90 2.50 3.20 4.20 5.50 7.30
16000 14300 12400 10800 9430 8210 7190
1400 1280 1150 1040 931 838 756
8.21 8.17 7.98 7.80 7.63 7.48 7.33
5510 4720 4170 3680 3250 2880 2560
594 527 472 423 378 339 304
4.82 4.69 4.62 4.55 4.49 4.43 4.38
1834 1660 1480 1320 1180 1050 936
927 816 730 652 583 522 468
426 398 370 342 311 283 257 233 211 193 176 159 145
2.8 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.6 3.9 4.2 4.6 5.1 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.1
6.1 6.4 6.9 7.4 8.1 8.8 9.7 10.7 11.6 12.8 13.7 15.3 16.8
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
11500 10900 10300 9600 8820 8120 7460 6820 6230 5740 5280 4790 4400
8.90 11.0 13.9 17.9 24.4 33.4 46.1 64.9 91.8 125 173 249 348
6600 6000 5440 4900 4330 3840 3400 3010 2660 2400 2140 1900 1710
707 656 607 559 506 459 415 375 338 310 281 254 232
7.26 7.16 7.07 6.98 6.88 6.79 6.71 6.63 6.55 6.50 6.43 6.38 6.33
2360 2170 1990 1810 1610 1440 1290 1150 1030 931 838 748 677
283 262 241 221 199 179 161 145 130 119 107 96.2 87.3
4.34 4.31 4.27 4.24 4.20 4.17 4.13 4.10 4.07 4.05 4.02 4.00 3.98
869 801 736 672 603 542 487 436 390 355 320 287 260
434 402 370 338 304 274 246 221 198 180 163 146 133
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.03 5.48
1 - 36
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
X
W SHAPES Dimensions
k
k1
X
T
tw
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Area A 2
in.
Depth d in.
Thickness tw in.
Flange
tw 2 in.
Width bf
Distance
Thickness tf
in.
in.
T
k
k1
in.
in.
in.
W14×132 W16×120 W16×109 W16×99 W16×90
38.8 35.3 32.0 29.1 26.5
14.66 14.48 14.32 14.16 14.02
145⁄8 141⁄2 143⁄8 141⁄8 14
0.645 0.590 0.525 0.485 0.440
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
14.725 14.670 14.605 14.565 14.520
143⁄4 145⁄8 145⁄8 145⁄8 141⁄2
1.030 0.940 0.860 0.780 0.710
1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
111⁄4 111⁄4 111⁄4 111⁄4 111⁄4
111⁄16 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 13⁄8
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
W14×82 W16×74 W16×68 W16×61
24.1 21.8 20.0 17.9
14.31 14.17 14.04 13.89
141⁄4 141⁄8 14 137⁄8
0.510 0.450 0.415 0.375
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
10.130 10.070 10.035 9.995
101⁄8 101⁄8 10 10
0.855 0.785 0.720 0.645
7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8
11 11 11 11
15⁄8 19⁄16 11⁄2 17⁄16
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16
W14×53 W16×48 W16×43
15.6 14.1 12.6
13.92 13.79 13.66
137⁄8 133⁄4 135⁄8
0.370 0.340 0.305
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
8.060 8.030 7.995
8 8 8
0.660 0.595 0.530
11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2
11 11 11
17⁄16 13⁄8 15⁄16
15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
W14×38 W16×34 W16×30
11.2 10.0 8.85
14.10 13.98 13.84
141⁄8 14 137⁄8
0.310 0.285 0.270
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
6.770 6.745 6.730
63⁄4 63⁄4 63⁄4
0.515 0.455 0.385
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
12 12 12
11⁄16 1 15⁄ 16
5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
W14×26 W16×22
7.69 6.49
13.91 13.74
137⁄8 133⁄4
0.255 0.230
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
5.025 5.000
5 5
0.420 0.335
7⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
12 12
15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 37
W SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
k1
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
Nominal Wt. per ft
Compact Section Criteria
h tw
Fy′′′
lb
bf 2tf
132 120 109 99 90
7.1 7.8 8.5 9.3 10.2
82 74 68 61
5.9 6.4 7.0 7.7
k
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
ksi
2
17.7 19.3 21.7 23.5 25.9
— — — — —
4180 3830 3490 3190 2900
22.4 25.3 27.5 30.4
— — — —
53 48 43
6.1 30.8 6.7 33.5 7.5 37.4
38 34 30 26 22
S
I
Axis Y-Y
r
S
in.
in.
428 601 853 1220 1750
1530 1380 1240 1110 999
209 190 173 157 143
6.28 6.24 6.22 6.17 6.14
3600 3290 3020 2720
846 1190 1650 2460
882 796 723 640
123 112 103 92.2
6.05 6.04 6.01 5.98
— 57 46
2830 2580 2320
2250 3220 4900
541 485 428
77.8 70.3 62.7
5.89 5.85 5.82
57.7 51.4 45.2
6.6 39.6 7.4 43.1 8.7 45.4
41 35 31
2190 1970 1750
6850 10600 17600
385 340 291
54.6 48.6 42.0
5.87 5.83 5.73
26.7 23.3 19.6
6.0 48.1 7.5 53.3
28 22
1890 1610
13900 27300
245 199
35.3 29.0
5.65 5.54
(1/ksi)
3
I
4
in.
4
r
Zx
in.
in.
in.3
548 495 447 402 362
74.5 67.5 61.2 55.2 49.9
3.76 3.74 3.73 3.71 3.70
234 212 192 173 157
113 102 92.7 83.6 75.6
148 134 121 107
29.3 26.6 24.2 21.5
2.48 2.48 2.46 2.45
139 126 115 102
44.8 40.6 36.9 32.8
14.3 12.8 11.3
1.92 1.91 1.89
87.1 78.4 69.6
22.0 19.6 17.3
7.88 6.91 5.82
1.55 1.53 1.49
61.5 54.6 47.3
12.1 10.6 8.99
3.54 2.80
1.08 1.04
40.2 33.2
5.54 4.39
8.91 7.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3
Zy
in.
in.
3
1 - 38
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
X
W SHAPES Dimensions
k
k1
X
T
tw
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Area A 2
in.
Depth d in.
Flange
Thickness tw
tw 2
in.
in.
Width bf
Distance
Thickness tf
in.
T
k
k1
in.
in.
in.
in.
2.955 215⁄16 2.705 211⁄16 2.470 21⁄2 2.250 21⁄4 2.070 21⁄16 1.900 17⁄8 1.735 13⁄4 1.560 19⁄16 1.400 13⁄8 1.250 11⁄4 1.105 11⁄8 0.990 1 7⁄ 0.900 8 0.810 13⁄16 3 0.735 ⁄4 0.670 11⁄16 5⁄ 0.605 8
91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2
311⁄16 37⁄16 33⁄16 215⁄16 23⁄4 25⁄8 27⁄16 21⁄4 21⁄8 115⁄16 113⁄16 111⁄16 15⁄8 11⁄2 17⁄16 13⁄8 15⁄16
11⁄2 17⁄16 13⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄4 11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄8 11⁄16 1 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16
91⁄2 91⁄2
13⁄8 11⁄4
13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16
0.640 0.575 0.515
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2
13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄4
13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
61⁄2 61⁄2 61⁄2
0.520 0.440 0.380
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2
15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8
1
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
4 4 4 4
0.425 0.350 0.265 0.225
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2
7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
W12×336* W16×305* W16×279* W16×252* W16×230* W16×210* W16×190 W16×170 W16×152 W16×136 W16×120 W16×106 W16×96 W16×87 W16×79 W16×72 W16×65
98.8 89.6 81.9 74.1 67.7 61.8 55.8 50.0 44.7 39.9 35.3 31.2 28.2 25.6 23.2 21.1 19.1
16.82 16.32 15.85 15.41 15.05 14.71 14.38 14.03 13.71 13.41 13.12 12.89 12.71 12.53 12.38 12.25 12.12
167⁄8 163⁄8 157⁄8 153⁄8 15 143⁄4 143⁄8 14 133⁄4 133⁄8 131⁄8 127⁄8 123⁄4 121⁄2 123⁄8 121⁄4 121⁄8
1.775 1.625 1.530 1.395 1.285 1.180 1.060 0.960 0.870 0.790 0.710 0.610 0.550 0.515 0.470 0.430 0.390
13⁄4 15⁄8 11⁄2 13⁄8 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
13.385 13.235 13.140 13.005 12.895 12.790 12.670 12.570 12.480 12.400 12.320 12.220 12.160 12.125 12.080 12.040 12.000
133⁄8 131⁄4 131⁄8 13 127⁄8 123⁄4 125⁄8 125⁄8 121⁄2 123⁄8 123⁄8 121⁄4 121⁄8 121⁄8 121⁄8 12 12
W12×58 W16×53
17.0 15.6
12.19 12.06
121⁄4 12
0.360 0.345
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
10.010 9.995
10 10
0.640 0.575
W12×50 W16×45 W16×40
14.7 13.2 11.8
12.19 12.06 11.94
121⁄4 12 12
0.370 0.335 0.295
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
8.080 8.045 8.005
81⁄8 8 8
W12×35 W16×30 W16×26
10.3 8.79 7.65
12.50 12.34 12.22
121⁄2 123⁄8 121⁄4
0.300 0.260 0.230
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
6.560 6.520 6.490
W12×22 W16×19 W16×16 W16×14
6.48 5.57 4.71 4.16
12.31 12.16 11.99 11.91
121⁄4 121⁄8 12 117⁄8
0.260 0.235 0.220 0.200
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
4.030 4.005 3.990 3.970
*Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 39
W SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
k1
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
Nominal Wt. per ft
Compact Section Criteria
h tw
Fy′′′
lb
bf 2tf
336 305 279 252 230 210 190 170 152 136 120 106 96 87 79 72 65
2.3 2.4 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.4 3.7 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.6 6.2 6.8 7.5 8.2 9.0 9.9
58 53
k
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
ksi
2
5.5 6.0 6.3 7.0 7.6 8.2 9.2 10.1 11.2 12.3 13.7 15.9 17.7 18.9 20.7 22.6 24.9
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
12800 11800 11000 10100 9390 8670 7940 7190 6510 5850 5240 4660 4250 3880 3530 3230 2940
7.8 8.7
27.0 28.1
— —
3070 2820
50 45 40
6.3 7.0 7.8
26.2 29.0 32.9
— — 59
3170 2870 2580
35 30 26
6.3 7.4 8.5
36.2 41.8 47.2
22 19 16 14
4.7 5.7 7.5 8.8
41.8 46.2 49.4 54.3
(1/ksi)
S
I 4
Axis Y-Y
r 3
S
I 4
Zx 3
Zy
in.
in.
177 159 143 127 115 104 93.0 82.3 72.8 64.2 56.0 49.3 44.4 39.7 35.8 32.4 29.1
3.47 3.42 3.38 3.34 3.31 3.28 3.25 3.22 3.19 3.16 3.13 3.11 3.09 3.07 3.05 3.04 3.02
603 537 481 428 386 348 311 275 243 214 186 164 147 132 119 108 96.8
274 244 220 196 177 159 143 126 111 98.0 85.4 75.1 67.5 60.4 54.3 49.2 44.1
in.
in.
4060 3550 3110 2720 2420 2140 1890 1650 1430 1240 1070 933 833 740 662 597 533
483 435 393 353 321 292 263 235 209 186 163 145 131 118 107 97.4 87.9
6.41 1190 6.29 1050 6.16 937 6.06 828 5.97 742 5.89 664 5.82 589 5.74 517 5.66 454 5.58 398 5.51 345 5.47 301 5.44 270 5.38 241 5.34 216 5.31 195 5.28 174
1470 2100
475 425
78.0 70.6
5.28 5.23
107 95.8
21.4 19.2
2.51 2.48
86.4 77.9
32.5 29.1
1410 2070 3110
394 350 310
64.7 58.1 51.9
5.18 5.15 5.13
56.3 50.0 44.1
13.9 12.4 11.0
1.96 1.94 1.93
72.4 64.7 57.5
21.4 19.0 16.8
49 37 29
2420 4340 2090 7950 1820 13900
285 238 204
45.6 38.6 33.4
5.25 5.21 5.17
24.5 20.3 17.3
7.47 1.54 6.24 1.52 5.34 1.51
51.2 43.1 37.2
11.5 9.56 8.17
37 30 26 22
2160 8640 1880 15600 1610 32000 1450 49300
156 130 103 88.6
25.4 21.3 17.1 14.9
4.91 4.82 4.67 4.62
2.31 1.88 1.41 1.19
29.3 24.7 20.1 17.4
3.66 2.98 2.26 1.90
4.66 3.76 2.82 2.36
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
0.847 0.822 0.773 0.753
in.
in.3
in.
6.05 8.17 10.8 14.7 19.7 26.6 37.0 54.0 79.3 119 184 285 405 586 839 1180 1720
in.
r 3
1 - 40
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
X
W SHAPES Dimensions
k
k1
X
T
tw
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Area A 2
in.
Depth d in.
Flange
Thickness tw
tw 2
in.
in.
Width bf
Distance
Thickness tf
k1
in.
in.
in.
32.9 29.4 25.9 22.6 20.0 17.6 15.8 14.4
11.36 11.10 10.84 10.60 10.40 10.22 10.09 9.98
113⁄8 111⁄8 107⁄8 105⁄8 103⁄8 101⁄4 101⁄8 10
0.755 0.680 0.605 0.530 0.470 0.420 0.370 0.340
3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
10.415 10.340 10.265 10.190 10.130 10.080 10.030 10.000
103⁄8 103⁄8 101⁄4 101⁄4 101⁄8 101⁄8 10 10
1.250 1.120 0.990 0.870 0.770 0.680 0.615 0.560
11⁄4 11⁄8 1 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16
75⁄8 75⁄8 75⁄8 75⁄8 75⁄8 75⁄8 75⁄8 75⁄8
17⁄8 13⁄4 15⁄8 11⁄2 13⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄4 13⁄16
15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
W10×45 W10×39 W10×33
13.3 11.5 9.71
10.10 9.92 9.73
101⁄8 97⁄8 93⁄4
0.350 0.315 0.290
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
8.020 7.985 7.960
8 8 8
0.620 0.530 0.435
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
75⁄8 75⁄8 75⁄8
11⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄16
11⁄
0.300 0.260 0.240
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
5.810 5.770 5.750
53⁄4 53⁄4 53⁄4
0.510 0.440 0.360
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
85⁄8 85⁄8 85⁄8
15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
0.250 0.240 0.230 0.190
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
4.020 4.010 4.000 3.960
4 4 4 4
0.395 0.330 0.270 0.210
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
85⁄8 85⁄8 85⁄8 85⁄8
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
W10×30 W10×26 W10×22
8.84 7.61 6.49
10.47 10.33 10.17
W10×19 W10×17 W10×15 W10×12
5.62 4.99 4.41 3.54
10.24 10.11 9.99 9.87
101⁄4 101⁄8 10 97⁄8
in.
k
W10×112 W10×100 W10×88 W10×77 W10×68 W10×60 W10×54 W10×49
101⁄2 103⁄8 101⁄8
in.
T
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
11⁄
11⁄
16 16 16
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 41
W SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
k1
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
Nominal Wt. per ft
Compact Section Criteria
h tw
Fy′′′
lb
bf 2tf
112 100 88 77 68 60 54 49
4.2 4.6 5.2 5.9 6.6 7.4 8.2 8.9
45 39 33
k
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
ksi
2
in.
in.
10.4 11.6 13.0 14.8 16.7 18.7 21.2 23.1
— — — — — — — —
7080 6400 5680 5010 4460 3970 3580 3280
56.7 83.8 132 213 334 525 778 1090
716 623 534 455 394 341 303 272
6.5 7.5 9.1
22.5 25.0 27.1
— — —
3650 3190 2710
758 1300 2510
30 26 22
5.7 6.6 8.0
29.5 34.0 36.9
— 55 47
2890 2500 2150
2160 3790 7170
19 17 15 12
5.1 6.1 7.4 9.4
35.4 36.9 38.5 46.6
51 47 43 30
2420 2210 1930 1550
5160 7820 14300 35400
(1/ksi)
S
I 4
Axis Y-Y
r 3
S
I 4
r 3
in.3
2.68 2.65 2.63 2.60 2.59 2.57 2.56 2.54
147 130 113 97.6 85.3 74.6 66.6 60.4
69.2 61.0 53.1 45.9 40.1 35.0 31.3 28.3
13.3 11.3 9.20
2.01 1.98 1.94
54.9 46.8 38.8
20.3 17.2 14.0
5.75 4.89 3.97
1.37 1.36 1.33
36.6 31.3 26.0
8.84 7.50 6.10
2.14 1.78 1.45 1.10
0.874 0.844 0.810 0.785
21.6 18.7 16.0 12.6
3.35 2.80 2.30 1.74
in.
in.
in.
126 112 98.5 85.9 75.7 66.7 60.0 54.6
4.66 4.60 4.54 4.49 4.44 4.39 4.37 4.35
236 207 179 154 134 116 103 93.4
45.3 40.0 34.8 30.1 26.4 23.0 20.6 18.7
248 209 170
49.1 42.1 35.0
4.32 4.27 4.19
53.4 45.0 36.6
170 144 118
32.4 27.9 23.2
4.38 4.35 4.27
16.7 14.1 11.4
18.8 16.2 13.8 10.9
4.14 4.05 3.95 3.90
4.29 3.56 2.89 2.18
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3
Zy
in.
in.
96.3 81.9 68.9 53.8
Zx
1 - 42
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
X
W SHAPES Dimensions
k
k1
X
T
tw
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Area A
Depth d
2
in.
in.
Thickness tw in.
Flange
tw 2 in.
Width bf
Distance
Thickness tf
in.
in.
T
k
k1
in.
in.
W8×67 W8×58 W8×48 W8×40 W8×35 W8×31
19.7 17.1 14.1 11.7 10.3 9.13
9.00 8.75 8.50 8.25 8.12 8.00
9 83⁄4 81⁄2 81⁄4 81⁄8 8
0.570 0.510 0.400 0.360 0.310 0.285
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
8.280 8.220 8.110 8.070 8.020 7.995
81⁄4 81⁄4 81⁄8 81⁄8 8 8
0.935 0.810 0.685 0.560 0.495 0.435
15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
61⁄8 61⁄8 61⁄8 61⁄8 61⁄8 61⁄8
17⁄16 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16 1 15⁄ 16
11⁄
W8×28 W8×24
8.25 7.08
8.06 7.93
8 77⁄8
0.285 0.245
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
6.535 6.495
61⁄2 61⁄2
0.465 0.400
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
61⁄8 61⁄8
15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
W8×21 W8×18
6.16 5.26
8.28 8.14
81⁄4 81⁄8
0.250 0.230
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
5.270 5.250
51⁄4 51⁄4
0.400 0.330
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
65⁄8 65⁄8
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
W8×15 W8×13 W8×10
4.44 3.84 2.96
8.11 7.99 7.89
81⁄8 8 77⁄8
0.245 0.230 0.170
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
4.015 4.000 3.940
4 4 4
0.315 0.255 0.205
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
65⁄8 65⁄8 65⁄8
3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
W6×25 W8×20 W8×15
7.34 5.87 4.43
6.38 6.20 5.99
63⁄8 61⁄4 6
0.320 0.260 0.230
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
6.080 6.020 5.990
61⁄8 6 6
0.455 0.365 0.260
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4
43⁄4 43⁄4 43⁄4
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8
7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
W6×16 W8×12 W8×9
4.74 3.55 2.68
6.28 6.03 5.90
61⁄4 6 57⁄8
0.260 0.230 0.170
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
4.030 4.000 3.940
4 4 4
0.405 0.280 0.215
3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
43⁄4 43⁄4 43⁄4
3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
W5×19 W8×16
5.54 4.68
5.15 5.01
51⁄8 5
0.270 0.240
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
5.030 5.000
5 5
0.430 0.360
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
31⁄2 31⁄2
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
W4×13
3.83
4.16
41⁄8
0.280
1⁄ 4
1⁄ 8
4.060
4
0.345
3⁄ 8
23⁄4
11⁄ 16
7⁄ 16
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
in. 11⁄
16
16 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 43
W SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
k1
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
Nominal Wt. per ft
Compact Section Criteria
h tw
Fy′′′
lb
bf 2tf
67 58 48 40 35 31
4.4 5.1 5.9 7.2 8.1 9.2
28 24
k
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
ksi
2
in.
in.
11.1 12.4 15.8 17.6 20.4 22.2
— — — — — —
6620 5820 4860 4080 3610 3230
73.9 122 238 474 761 1180
272 228 184 146 127 110
7.0 8.1
22.2 25.8
— —
3480 3020
931 1610
21 18
6.6 8.0
27.5 29.9
— —
2890 2490
15 13 10
6.4 7.8 9.6
28.1 29.9 40.5
— — 39
25 20 15
6.7 15.5 8.2 19.1 11.5 21.6
16 12 9
5.0 7.1 9.2
19 16 13
(1/ksi)
S
I 4
Axis Y-Y
r 3
S
I 4
r 3
Zx
Zy
in.
3
in.
in.3
in.
in.
in.
60.4 52.0 43.3 35.5 31.2 27.5
3.72 3.65 3.61 3.53 3.51 3.47
88.6 75.1 60.9 49.1 42.6 37.1
21.4 18.3 15.0 12.2 10.6 9.27
2.12 2.10 2.08 2.04 2.03 2.02
70.2 59.8 49.0 39.8 34.7 30.4
32.7 27.9 22.9 18.5 16.1 14.1
98.0 82.8
24.3 20.9
3.45 3.42
21.7 18.3
6.63 5.63
1.62 1.61
27.2 23.2
10.1 8.57
2090 3890
75.3 61.9
18.2 15.2
3.49 3.43
9.77 7.97
3.71 3.04
1.26 1.23
20.4 17.0
5.69 4.66
2670 2370 1760
3440 5780 17900
48.0 39.6 30.8
11.8 9.91 7.81
3.29 3.21 3.22
3.41 2.73 2.09
1.70 1.37 1.06
0.876 0.843 0.841
13.6 11.4 8.87
2.67 2.15 1.66
— — —
4410 3550 2740
369 846 2470
53.4 41.4 29.1
16.7 13.4 9.72
2.70 2.66 2.56
17.1 13.3 9.32
5.61 4.41 3.11
1.52 1.50 1.46
18.9 14.9 10.8
8.56 6.72 4.75
19.1 21.6 29.2
— — —
4010 3100 2360
591 1740 4980
32.1 22.1 16.4
10.2 7.31 5.56
2.60 2.49 2.47
4.43 2.99 2.19
2.20 1.50 1.11
0.966 0.918 0.905
11.7 8.30 6.23
3.39 2.32 1.72
5.8 6.9
14.0 15.8
— —
5140 4440
192 346
26.2 21.3
10.2 8.51
2.17 2.13
9.13 7.51
3.63 3.00
1.28 1.27
11.6 9.59
5.53 4.57
5.9
10.6
—
5560
154
11.3
5.46
1.72
3.86
1.90
1.00
6.28
2.92
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 44
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
X
M SHAPES Dimensions
k
k1
X
T
tw
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Area A 2
in.
Depth d
Thickness tw
in.
in.
Flange
tw 2
Width bf
Thickness tf
in.
in.
T
k
k1
in.
in.
in.
11.91 1115⁄16 0.177 11.87 117⁄8 0.162
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 16
3.065 31⁄16 0.225 3.065 31⁄16 0.206
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
1015⁄16 107⁄8
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
97⁄8 0.157 913⁄16 0.139
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 16
2.690 211⁄16 0.206 2.690 211⁄16 0.183
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
87⁄8 813⁄16
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
0.133
1⁄ 8
1⁄ 16
2.280
21⁄4
0.186
3⁄ 16
67⁄8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
0.316
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 16
5.003
5
0.416
7⁄ 16
31⁄4
7⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
M12×11.8 M12×10.8
3.48 3.20
M10×9 M12×8
2.67 2.38
9.86 9.81
M8×6.5
1.92
7.85
77⁄8
M5×18.9*
5.55
5.00
5
in.
Distance
*This shape has tapered flanges while all other M shapes have parallel flanges.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 45
M SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
k1
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
Nominal Wt. per ft
Compact Section Criteria
h tw
Fy′′′
lb
bf 2tf
11.8 10.8
6.8 7.4
9 8
k
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
ksi
2
(1/ksi)
61.4 67.0
17 14
1420 1320
6.5 7.3
56.4 63.7
20 16
6.5
6.1
51.7
18.9
6.0
11.2
S
I 4
Axis Y-Y
r 3
in.
in.
56700 75800
71.7 65.8
12.1 11.1
1570 1400
37100 57800
38.5 34.3
24
1780
20700
—
5710
134
S
I 4
r 3
Zx
Zy
in.
3
in.
in.3
14.3 13.1
1.16 1.05
in.
in.
in.
4.54 4.54
1.09 0.995
0.709 0.649
0.559 0.558
7.82 6.99
3.80 3.80
0.673 0.597
0.501 0.444
0.502 0.502
9.21 8.20
0.815 0.718
18.1
4.62
3.07
0.371
0.325
0.439
5.40
0.527
24.1
9.63
2.08
7.86
3.14
1.19
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
11.0
5.02
1 - 46
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
S SHAPES Dimensions
k
X
X
T
tw
grip
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Flange
Distance
Max. Flge. FasGrip tener
Area A
Depth d
Thickness tw
tw 2
Width bf
Thickness tf
T
k
in.2
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in. 1 1
S24×121 S24×106
35.6 31.2
24.50 24.50
241⁄2 241⁄2
0.800 0.620
13⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
7⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
8.050 7.870
8 77⁄8
S24×100 S24×90 S24×80
29.3 26.5 23.5
24.00 24.00 24.00
24 24 24
0.745 0.625 0.500
3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
7.245 7.125 7.000
S20×96 S24×86
28.2 25.3
20.30 201⁄4 0.800 20.30 201⁄4 0.660
13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
S20×75 S24×66
22.0 19.4
20.00 20.00
20 20
0.635 0.505
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
6.385 6.255
63⁄8 61⁄4
0.795 0.795
13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16
163⁄4 163⁄4
15⁄8 15⁄8
13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
S18×70 20.6 S24×54.7 16.1
18.00 18.00
18 18
0.711 0.461
11⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
3⁄
4
6.251 6.001
61⁄4 6
0.691 0.691
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
15 15
11⁄2 11⁄2
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
S15×50 14.7 S24×42.9 12.6
15.00 15.00
15 15
0.550 0.411
9⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
5.640 5.501
55⁄8 51⁄2
0.622 0.622
5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
121⁄4 121⁄4
13⁄8 13⁄8
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
S12×50 14.7 S24×40.8 12.0
12.00 12.00
12 12
0.687 0.462
11⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
3⁄
4
5.477 5.252
51⁄2 51⁄4
0.659 0.659
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
91⁄8 91⁄8
17⁄16 17⁄16
11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
S12×35 10.3 12.00 S24×31.8 9.35 12.00
12 12
0.428 0.350
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
5.078 5.000
51⁄8 5
0.544 0.544
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
95⁄8 95⁄8
13⁄16 13⁄16
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
S10×35 10.3 10.00 S24×25.4 7.46 10.00
10 10
0.594 0.311
5⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
4.944 4.661
5 45⁄8
0.491 0.491
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
73⁄4 73⁄4
11⁄8 11⁄8
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
4.171 4.001
41⁄8 4
0.426 0.426
7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
6 6
1 1
7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
8
3.565 3.332
35⁄8 33⁄8
0.359 0.359
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
41⁄4 41⁄4
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
5⁄ 8 —
8
3.004
3
0.326
5⁄ 16
33⁄8
13⁄ 16
5⁄ 16
—
0.293 0.293
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
21⁄2 21⁄2
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
— —
0.260 0.260
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
15⁄8 15⁄8
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
— —
1⁄
1⁄
8
8
1.090 1.090
11⁄16 11⁄16
201⁄2 201⁄2
2 2
11⁄8 11⁄8
71⁄4 71⁄8 7
0.870 0.870 0.870
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
201⁄2 201⁄2 201⁄2
13⁄4 13⁄4 13⁄4
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
1 1 1
7.200 7.060
71⁄4 7
0.920 0.920
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16
163⁄4 163⁄4
13⁄4 13⁄4
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16
1 1
S8×23 S8×18.4
6.77 5.41
8.00 8.00
8 8
0.441 0.271
7⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
1⁄
S6×17.25 S8×12.5
5.07 3.67
6.00 6.00
6 6
0.465 0.232
7⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
1⁄
S5×10
2.94
5.00
5
0.214
3⁄ 16
1⁄
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
2.796 2.663
23⁄4 25⁄8
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
2.509 2.330
21⁄2 23⁄8
S4×9.5 S8×7.7
2.79 2.26
4.00 4.00
4 4
0.326 0.193
5⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
S3×7.5 S8×5.7
2.21 1.67
3.00 3.00
3 3
0.349 0.170
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
1⁄
1⁄
4 8 4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 47
S SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
grip
Nominal Wt. per ft
Compact Section Criteria
bf 2tf
h tw
Fy′′′
121 106
3.7 3.6
100 90 80
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
ksi
2
(1/ksi)
36.4 34.1
— 55
3310 2960
4.2 4.1 4.0
28.3 33.7 42.1
— 56 36
96 86
3.9 3.8
21.6 26.2
75 66
4.0 3.9
70 54.7
lb
k
S
I 4
Axis Y-Y
r 3
in.
in.
1770 2470
3160 2940
3000 2710 2450
2940 4090 5480
— —
3730 3350
27.1 34.1
— 55
4.5 4.3
21.8 33.6
50 42.9
4.5 4.4
50 40.8
S
I 4
r 3
Zx 3
Zy in.3
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
258 240
9.43 9.71
83.3 77.1
20.7 19.6
1.53 1.57
306 279
36.2 33.2
2390 2250 2100
199 187 175
9.02 9.21 9.47
47.7 44.9 42.2
13.2 12.6 12.1
1.27 1.30 1.34
240 222 204
23.9 22.3 20.7
1160 1630
1670 1580
165 155
7.71 7.89
50.2 46.8
13.9 13.3
1.33 1.36
198 183
24.9 23.0
3140 2800
2290 3250
1280 1190
128 119
7.62 7.83
29.8 27.7
9.32 8.85
1.16 1.19
153 140
16.7 15.3
— 57
3590 2770
1470 3400
926 804
103 89.4
6.71 7.07
24.1 20.8
7.72 6.94
1.08 1.14
125 105
14.4 12.1
23.2 31.0
— —
3450 2960
1540 2470
486 447
64.8 59.6
5.75 5.95
15.7 14.4
5.57 5.23
1.03 1.07
77.1 69.3
9.97 9.02
4.2 4.0
13.9 20.7
— —
5070 4050
333 682
305 272
50.8 45.4
4.55 4.77
15.7 13.6
5.74 5.16
1.03 1.06
61.2 53.1
10.3 8.85
35 31.8
4.7 4.6
23.4 28.6
— —
3500 3190
1310 1710
229 218
38.2 36.4
4.72 4.83
9.87 9.36
3.89 3.74
0.980 1.00
44.8 42.0
6.79 6.40
35 25.4
5.0 4.7
13.8 26.4
— —
4960 3430
374 1220
147 124
29.4 24.7
3.78 4.07
8.36 6.79
3.38 2.91
0.901 0.954
35.4 28.4
6.22 4.96
23 18.4
4.9 4.7
14.5 23.7
— —
4770 3770
397 821
64.9 57.6
16.2 14.4
3.10 3.26
4.31 3.73
2.07 1.86
0.798 0.831
19.3 16.5
3.68 3.16
17.25 5.0 12.5 4.6
9.9 19.9
— —
6250 4290
143 477
26.3 22.1
8.77 7.37
2.28 2.45
2.31 1.82
1.30 1.09
0.675 0.705
10.6 8.47
2.36 1.85
10
4.6
17.4
—
4630
348
12.3
4.92
2.05
1.22
0.809 0.643
5.67
1.37
9.5 7.7
4.8 4.5
8.7 14.7
— —
6830 5240
87.4 207
6.79 6.08
3.39 3.04
1.56 1.64
0.903 0.764
0.646 0.569 0.574 0.581
4.04 3.51
1.13 0.964
7.5 5.7
4.8 4.5
5.6 11.4
— —
9160 6160
28.1 106
2.93 2.52
1.95 1.68
1.15 1.23
0.586 0.455
0.468 0.516 0.390 0.522
2.36 1.95
0.826 0.653
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 48
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
tf
d
X
HP SHAPES Dimensions
k
k1
X
T
tw
Y bf
k
Web
Designation
Area A 2
in.
Depth d in.
Thickness tw in.
Flange
tw 2 in.
Width bf in.
Distance
Thickness tf in.
T
k
k1
in.
in.
in.
HP14×117 HP14×102 HP14×89 HP14×73
34.4 30.0 26.1 21.4
14.21 14.01 13.83 13.61
141⁄4 14 137⁄8 135⁄8
0.805 0.705 0.615 0.505
13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
14.885 14.785 14.695 14.585
147⁄8 143⁄4 143⁄4 145⁄8
0.805 0.705 0.615 0.505
13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2
111⁄4 111⁄4 111⁄4 111⁄4
11⁄2 13⁄8 15⁄16 13⁄16
11⁄16 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8
HP12×84 HP14×74 HP14×63 HP14×53
24.6 21.8 18.4 15.5
12.28 12.13 11.94 11.78
121⁄4 121⁄8 12 113⁄4
0.685 0.605 0.515 0.435
11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
12.295 12.215 12.125 12.045
121⁄4 121⁄4 121⁄8 12
0.685 0.610 0.515 0.435
11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2 91⁄2
13⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄4 11⁄8
15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
HP10×57 HP14×42
16.8 12.4
9.99 9.70
10 93⁄4
0.565 0.415
9⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
10.225 10.075
101⁄4 101⁄8
0.565 0.420
9⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
75⁄8 75⁄8
13⁄16 11⁄16
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
HP8×36
10.6
8.02
8
0.445
7⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
8.155
81⁄8
0.445
7⁄ 16
61⁄8
15⁄ 16
5⁄ 8
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 49
HP SHAPES Properties
Y
tf
d
k
k1
X
X
T
tw
Y bf
Nominal Wt. per ft
Compact Section Criteria
h tw
Fy′′′
lb
bf 2tf
117 102 89 73
9.2 10.5 11.9 14.4
84 74 63 53
9.0 10.0 11.8 13.8
k
Plastic Modulus
Elastic Properties Axis X-X
X1
X2 × 106
ksi
ksi
2
14.2 16.2 18.5 22.6
— — — —
14.2 16.0 18.9 22.3
57 42 36
S
I
Axis Y-Y
r 3
S
I
(1/ksi)
4
in.
in.
in.
in.
3870 3400 2960 2450
659 1090 1840 3880
1220 1050 904 729
172 150 131 107
5.96 5.92 5.88 5.84
— — — —
3860 3440 2940 2500
670 1050 1940 3650
650 569 472 393
106 93.8 79.1 66.8
9.0 13.9 12.0 18.9
— —
3920 2920
631 1970
294 210
9.2 14.2
—
3840
685
119
4
r 3
Zx
Zy
in.
in.
in.
in.3
443 380 326 261
59.5 51.4 44.3 35.8
3.59 3.56 3.53 3.49
194 169 146 118
91.4 78.8 67.7 54.6
5.14 5.11 5.06 5.03
213 186 153 127
34.6 30.4 25.3 21.1
2.94 2.92 2.88 2.86
120 105 88.3 74.0
53.2 46.6 38.7 32.2
58.8 43.4
4.18 4.13
101 71.7
19.7 14.2
2.45 2.41
66.5 48.3
30.3 21.8
29.8
3.36
40.3
1.95
33.6
15.2
9.88
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3
1 - 50
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
k
T
x
Y
X
CHANNELS AMERICAN STANDARD Dimensions
tf
xp
d
X
tw
k
Y
grip
bf
eo
Web
Designation
Area Depth Thickness A d tw in.2
in.
in.
Flange
Distance
Max. Flge. FasGrip tener
tw 2
Width bf
Thickness tf
T
k
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
121⁄8 121⁄8 121⁄8
17⁄16 17⁄16 17⁄16
5⁄
93⁄4 93⁄4 93⁄4
11⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄8
1⁄
2
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
in.
3.716 3.520 3.400
33⁄4 31⁄2 33⁄8
0.650 0.650 0.650
5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
3.170 3.047 2.942
31⁄8 3 3
0.501 0.501 0.501
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
8 8 8 8
1 1 1 1
7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
in.
C15×50 C15×40 C15×33.9
14.7 11.8 9.96
15.00 15.00 15.00
0.716 0.520 0.400
11⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8
C12×30 C15×25 C15×20.7
8.82 7.35 6.09
12.00 12.00 12.00
0.510 0.387 0.282
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
3.033 2.886 2.739 2.600
3 27⁄8 23⁄4 25⁄8
0.436 0.436 0.436 0.436
7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
2.648 2.485 2.433
25⁄8 21⁄2 23⁄8
0.413 0.413 0.413
7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
71⁄8 71⁄8 71⁄8
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16
7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
2.527 2.343 2.260
21⁄2 23⁄8 21⁄4
0.390 0.390 0.390
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
61⁄8 61⁄8 61⁄8
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16
3⁄
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
2.194 2.090
21⁄4 21⁄8
0.366 0.366
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
51⁄4 51⁄4
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
3⁄
8
5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
2.157 2.034 1.920
21⁄8 2 17⁄8
0.343 0.343 0.343
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
43⁄8 43⁄8 43⁄8
13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
1.885 1.750
17⁄8 13⁄4
0.320 0.320
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
31⁄2 31⁄2
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
5⁄ 8 —
5⁄ 5⁄
1⁄ 1⁄
8 8 8 2 2
1 1 1
C10×30 C15×25 C15×20 C15×15.3
8.82 7.35 5.88 4.49
10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
0.673 0.526 0.379 0.240
11⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4
C9×20 C5×15 C5×13.4
5.88 4.41 3.94
9.00 9.00 9.00
0.448 0.285 0.233
7⁄
C8×18.75 C8×13.75 C8×11.5
5.51 4.04 3.38
8.00 8.00 8.00
0.487 0.303 0.220
C7×12.25 C8×9.8
3.60 2.87
7.00 7.00
0.314 0.210
5⁄
C6×13 C8×10.5 C8×8.2
3.83 3.09 2.40
6.00 6.00 6.00
0.437 0.314 0.200
7⁄
C5×9 C8×6.7
2.64 1.97
5.00 5.00
0.325 0.190
5⁄
C4×7.25 C8×5.4
2.13 1.59
4.00 4.00
0.321 0.184
5⁄
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 16
1.721 1.584
13⁄4 15⁄8
0.296 0.296
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
25⁄8 25⁄8
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
5⁄ 16
16
—
5⁄ 8 —
C3×6 C8×5 C8×4.1
1.76 1.47 1.21
3.00 3.00 3.00
0.356 0.258 0.170
3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 16
1.596 1.498 1.410
15⁄8 11⁄2 13⁄8
0.273 0.273 0.273
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
15⁄8 15⁄8 15⁄8
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
— — —
— — —
5⁄
16
16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 2
5⁄
16 1⁄ 4
3⁄
5⁄ 3⁄
3⁄
3⁄
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3⁄ 3⁄
3⁄
8 8 8 8
—
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 51
CHANNELS AMERICAN STANDARD Properties
k
x
Y
xp
X
T
tf
d
X
tw
Y
k
Nominal Wt. per ft
_ x
Shear Center PNA Loca- Location tion eo xp
Axis X-X
Z
I 4
in.
Axis Y-Y
S 3
grip
bf
eo
r 3
Z
I 4
S 3
r 3
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
50 40 33.9
0.798 0.777 0.787
0.583 0.767 0.896
0.488 0.390 0.330
404 349 315
68.2 57.2 50.4
53.8 46.5 42.0
5.24 5.44 5.62
11.0 9.23 8.13
8.17 6.87 6.23
3.78 3.37 3.11
0.867 0.886 0.904
30 25 20.7
0.674 0.674 0.698
0.618 0.746 0.870
0.366 0.305 0.252
162 144 129
33.6 29.2 25.4
27.0 24.1 21.5
4.29 4.43 4.61
5.14 4.47 3.88
4.33 3.84 3.49
2.06 1.88 1.73
0.763 0.780 0.799
30 25 20 15.3
0.649 0.617 0.606 0.634
0.369 0.494 0.637 0.796
0.439 0.366 0.292 0.223
103 91.2 78.9 67.4
26.6 23.0 19.3 15.8
20.7 18.2 15.8 13.5
3.42 3.52 3.66 3.87
3.94 3.36 2.81 2.28
3.78 3.19 2.71 2.35
1.65 1.48 1.32 1.16
0.669 0.676 0.692 0.713
20 15 13.4
0.583 0.586 0.601
0.515 0.682 0.743
0.325 0.243 0.217
60.9 51.0 47.9
16.8 13.5 12.5
13.5 11.3 10.6
3.22 3.40 3.48
2.42 1.93 1.76
2.47 2.05 1.95
1.17 1.01 0.962
0.642 0.661 0.669
18.75 13.75 11.5
0.565 0.553 0.571
0.431 0.604 0.697
0.343 0.251 0.209
44.0 36.1 32.6
13.8 10.9 9.55
11.0 9.03 8.14
2.82 2.99 3.11
1.98 1.53 1.32
2.17 1.73 1.58
1.01 0.854 0.781
0.599 0.615 0.625
12.25 9.8
0.525 0.540
0.538 0.647
0.255 0.203
24.2 21.3
8.40 7.12
6.93 6.08
2.60 2.72
1.17 0.968
1.43 1.26
0.703 0.625
0.571 0.581
13 10.5 8.2
0.514 0.499 0.511
0.380 0.486 0.599
0.317 0.255 0.198
17.4 15.2 13.1
7.26 6.15 5.13
5.80 5.06 4.38
2.13 2.22 2.34
1.05 0.866 0.693
1.36 1.15 0.993
0.642 0.564 0.492
0.525 0.529 0.537
9 6.7
0.478 0.484
0.427 0.552
0.262 0.217
8.90 7.49
4.36 3.51
3.56 3.00
1.83 1.95
0.632 0.479
0.918 0.763
0.450 0.378
0.489 0.493
7.25 5.4
0.459 0.457
0.386 0.502
0.264 0.241
4.59 3.85
2.81 2.26
2.29 1.93
1.47 1.56
0.433 0.319
0.697 0.569
0.343 0.283
0.450 0.449
6 5 4.1
0.455 0.438 0.436
0.322 0.392 0.461
0.291 0.242 0.284
2.07 1.85 1.66
1.72 1.50 1.30
1.38 1.24 1.10
1.08 1.12 1.17
0.305 0.247 0.197
0.544 0.466 0.401
0.268 0.233 0.202
0.416 0.410 0.404
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 52
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
k
T
x
Y
X
CHANNELS MISCELLANEOUS Dimensions
tf
xp
d
X
tw
k
Y eo
grip
bf
Web
Designation
Area Depth Thickness A d tw in.2
in.
in.
Flange
Distance
Max. Flge. FasGrip tener
tw 2
Width bf
Thickness tf
T
k
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
151⁄4 151⁄4 151⁄4 151⁄4
13⁄8 13⁄8 13⁄8 13⁄8
5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
1 1 1 1
101⁄4 101⁄4 101⁄4 101⁄4
13⁄8 13⁄8 13⁄8 13⁄8
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
1 1 1 1
15⁄16 15⁄16 15⁄16 15⁄16 15⁄16
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
1 1 1 1 1
MC18×58 MC18×51.9 MC18×45.8 MC18×42.7
17.1 15.3 13.5 12.6
18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00
0.700 0.600 0.500 0.450
11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
MC13×50 MC18×40 MC18×35 MC18×31.8
14.7 11.8 10.3 9.35
13.00 13.00 13.00 13.00
0.787 0.560 0.447 0.375
3⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 7⁄
16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
4.135 4.012 3.890 3.767 3.670
41⁄
4 37⁄8 33⁄4 35⁄8
0.700 0.700 0.700 0.700 0.700
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
1.500
11⁄2
0.309
5⁄ 16
105⁄8
16
—
—
71⁄2 71⁄2 71⁄2
11⁄4 11⁄4 11⁄4
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
MC12×50 MC18×45 MC18×40 MC18×35 MC18×31 MC12×10.6
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
4.200 4.100 4.000 3.950
41⁄
41⁄8 4 4
0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625
5⁄
4.412 4.185 4.072 4.000
43⁄8 41⁄8 41⁄8 4
0.610 0.610 0.610 0.610
5⁄
93⁄8 93⁄8 93⁄8 93⁄8 93⁄8
4
5⁄ 5⁄ 5⁄
5⁄ 5⁄ 5⁄
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
14.7 13.2 11.8 10.3 9.12
12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00
0.835 0.712 0.590 0.467 0.370
13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
3.10
12.00
0.190
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
4.321 4.100 3.950
43⁄
41⁄8 4
8
0.575 0.575 0.575
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
8
11⁄
12.1 9.87 8.37
10.00 10.00 10.00
0.796 0.575 0.425
13⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
MC10×25 MC18×22
7.35 6.45
10.00 10.00
0.380 0.290
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
3⁄
16 1⁄ 8
3.405 3.315
33⁄8 33⁄8
0.575 0.575
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
71⁄2 71⁄2
11⁄4 11⁄4
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
MC10×8.4
2.46
10.00
0.170
3⁄ 16
1⁄
1.500
11⁄2
0.280
1⁄
85⁄8
11⁄
—
—
MC10×41.1 MC18×33.6 MC18×28.5
16
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4
16
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 53
CHANNELS MISCELLANEOUS Properties
k
x
Y
xp
X
T
tf
d
X
tw
Y
k
Nominal Wt. per ft
_ x
Shear Center PNA Loca- Location tion eo xp
Axis X-X
Z
I 4
Axis Y-Y
S 3
grip
bf
eo
r 3
Z
I 4
S 3
r 3
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
58 51.9 45.8 42.7
0.862 0.858 0.866 0.877
0.695 0.797 0.909 0.969
0.472 0.422 0.372 0.347
676 627 578 554
94.6 86.5 78.4 74.4
75.1 69.7 64.3 61.6
6.29 6.41 6.56 6.64
17.8 16.4 15.1 14.4
9.94 9.13 8.42 8.10
5.32 5.07 4.82 4.69
1.02 1.04 1.06 1.07
50 40 35 31.8
0.974 0.963 0.980 1.00
0.815 1.03 1.16 1.24
0.564 0.450 0.394 0.358
314 273 252 239
60.5 50.9 46.2 43.1
48.4 42.0 38.8 36.8
4.62 4.82 4.95 5.06
16.5 13.7 12.3 11.4
10.1 8.57 7.95 7.60
4.79 4.26 3.99 3.81
1.06 1.08 1.10 1.11
50 45 40 35 31
1.05 1.04 1.04 1.05 1.08
0.741 0.844 0.952 1.07 1.18
0.610 0.549 0.488 0.426 0.416
269 252 234 216 203
56.1 51.7 47.3 42.8 39.3
44.9 42.0 39.0 36.1 33.8
4.28 4.36 4.46 4.59 4.71
17.4 15.8 14.3 12.7 11.3
10.2 9.35 8.59 7.91 7.44
5.65 5.33 5.00 4.67 4.39
1.09 1.09 1.10 1.11 1.12
10.6
0.269
0.284
0.129
0.639
0.310
0.351
41.1 33.6 28.5
1.09 1.08 1.12
0.864 1.06 1.21
0.601 0.490 0.415
158 139 127
38.9 33.4 29.6
31.5 27.8 25.3
3.61 3.75 3.89
8.71 7.51 6.83
4.88 4.38 4.02
1.14 1.16 1.17
25 22
0.953 0.990
1.03 1.13
0.364 0.468
110 103
25.8 23.6
22.0 20.5
3.87 3.99
7.35 6.50
5.21 4.86
3.00 2.80
1.00 1.00
0.284
0.332
0.122
3.61
0.328
0.552
0.270
0.365
8.4
55.4
32.0
11.6
7.86
9.23
6.40
4.22
0.382 15.8 13.2 11.4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 54
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
k
T
x
Y
X
CHANNELS MISCELLANEOUS Dimensions
tf
xp
d
X
tw
k
Y eo
grip
bf
Web
Designation
Area Depth Thickness A d tw in.2
in.
in.
Flange
Distance
Max. Flge. FasGrip tener
tw 2
Width bf
Thickness tf
T
k
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
65⁄8 65⁄8
13⁄16 13⁄16
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
55⁄8 55⁄8
13⁄16 13⁄16
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
MC9×25.4 MC9×23.9
7.47 7.02
9.00 9.00
0.450 0.400
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
3.500 3.450
31⁄
31⁄2
2
0.550 0.550
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
MC8×22.8 MC9×21.4
6.70 6.28
8.00 8.00
0.427 0.375
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
3⁄
3⁄
3.502 3.450
31⁄2 31⁄2
0.525 0.525
1⁄
MC8×20 MC9×18.7
5.88 5.50
8.00 8.00
0.400 0.353
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
3⁄
3.025 2.978
3 3
0.500 0.500
1⁄
16
2
53⁄4 53⁄4
11⁄8 11⁄8
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
MC8×8.5
2.50
8.00
0.179
3⁄ 16
1⁄
16
1.874
17⁄8
0.311
5⁄ 16
61⁄2
3⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
5⁄ 8
MC7×22.7 MC9×19.1
6.67 5.61
7.00 7.00
0.503 0.352
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8
3⁄
1⁄ 4
3.603 3.452
35⁄8 31⁄2
0.500 0.500
1⁄
16
2
43⁄4 43⁄4
11⁄8 11⁄8
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
MC6×18
5.29
6.00
0.379
3⁄ 8
3⁄
16
3.504
31⁄2
0.475
1⁄
2
37⁄8
11⁄16
1⁄ 2
7⁄ 8
MC6×16.3 MC9×15.1
4.79 4.44
6.00 6.00
0.375 0.316
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
3⁄
16
3.000 2.941
3 3
0.475 0.475
1⁄
2
16
2
37⁄8 37⁄8
11⁄16 11⁄16
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
MC6×12
3.53
6.00
0.310
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
2.497
21⁄2
0.375
3⁄
8
43⁄8
13⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 8
3⁄
3⁄
16 16 16
1⁄
1⁄
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1⁄
1⁄
2 2 2
2
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 55
CHANNELS MISCELLANEOUS Properties
k
x
Y
xp
X
T
tf
d
X
tw
Y
k
Nominal Wt. per ft
_ x
Shear Center PNA Loca- Location tion eo xp
Axis X-X
Z
I 4
Axis Y-Y
S 3
grip
bf
eo
r 3
Z
I 4
S 3
r 3
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
25.4 23.9
0.970 0.981
0.986 1.04
0.411 0.386
88.0 85.0
23.2 22.2
19.6 18.9
3.43 3.48
7.65 7.22
5.23 5.05
3.02 2.93
1.01 1.01
22.8 21.4
1.01 1.02
1.04 1.09
0.415 0.449
63.8 61.6
18.8 18.0
16.0 15.4
3.09 3.13
7.07 6.64
4.88 4.71
2.84 2.74
1.03 1.03
20 18.7
0.840 0.849
0.843 0.889
0.364 0.341
54.5 52.5
16.2 15.4
13.6 13.1
3.05 3.09
4.47 4.20
3.57 3.44
2.05 1.97
0.872 0.874
8.5
0.428
0.542
0.155
23.3
6.91
3.05
0.628
0.882
0.434
0.501
22.7 19.1
1.04 1.08
1.01 1.15
0.473 0.567
47.5 43.2
16.2 14.3
2.67 2.77
7.29 6.11
4.86 4.34
2.85 2.57
1.05 1.04
18
1.12
1.17
0.622
29.7
11.5
9.91
2.37
5.93
4.14
2.48
1.06
16.3 15.1
0.927 0.940
0.930 0.982
0.464 0.537
26.0 25.0
10.2 9.69
8.68 8.32
2.33 2.37
3.82 3.51
3.18 3.00
1.84 1.75
0.892 0.889
12
0.704
0.725
0.292
18.7
7.38
6.24
2.30
1.87
1.79
1.04
0.728
5.83 13.6 12.3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 56
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
ANGLES Equal legs and unequal legs Properties for designing
xp
x Z
X
X y, yp
k α
Y
Size and Thickness in.
Z
k
Weight per ft
Axis X-X Area 2
S
I 4
r 3
y
Z
yp 3
in.
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
L8×8×11⁄8 L8×8×1 L8×8×17⁄8 L8×8×13⁄4 L8×8×15⁄8 L8×8×19⁄16 L8×8×11⁄2
13⁄4 15⁄8 11⁄2 13⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄8
56.9 51.0 45.0 38.9 32.7 29.6 26.4
16.7 15.0 13.2 11.4 9.61 8.68 7.75
98.0 89.0 79.6 69.7 59.4 54.1 48.6
17.5 15.8 14.0 12.2 10.3 9.34 8.36
2.42 2.44 2.45 2.47 2.49 2.50 2.50
2.41 2.37 2.33 2.28 2.23 2.21 2.19
31.6 28.5 25.3 22.0 18.6 16.8 15.1
1.05 0.938 0.827 0.715 0.601 0.543 0.484
L8×6×1 L8×8×17⁄8 L8×8×13⁄4 L8×8×15⁄8 L8×8×19⁄16 L8×8×11⁄2 L8×8×17⁄16
11⁄2 13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄16 1 15⁄ 16
44.2 39.1 33.8 28.5 25.7 23.0 20.2
13.0 11.5 9.94 8.36 7.56 6.75 5.93
80.8 72.3 63.4 54.1 49.3 44.3 39.2
15.1 13.4 11.7 9.87 8.95 8.02 7.07
2.49 2.51 2.53 2.54 2.55 2.56 2.57
2.65 2.61 2.56 2.52 2.50 2.47 2.45
27.3 24.2 21.1 17.9 16.2 14.5 12.8
1.50 1.44 1.38 1.31 1.28 1.25 1.22
L8×4×1 L8×8×17⁄8 L8×8×13⁄4 L8×4×15⁄8 L8×8×19⁄16 L8×8×11⁄2 L8×4×17⁄16 L7×4×3⁄4 L7×4×5⁄8 L7×4×1⁄2 L7×4×7⁄16 L7×4×3⁄8
11⁄2 13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄16 1 15⁄ 16 11⁄4 11⁄8 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8
37.4 33.1 28.7 24.2 21.9 19.6 17.2 26.2 22.1 17.9 15.7 13.6
11.0 9.73 8.44 7.11 6.43 5.75 5.06 7.69 6.48 5.25 4.62 3.98
69.6 62.5 54.9 46.9 42.8 38.5 34.1 37.8 32.4 26.7 23.7 20.6
14.1 12.5 10.9 9.21 8.35 7.49 6.60 8.42 7.14 5.81 5.13 4.44
2.52 2.53 2.55 2.57 2.58 2.59 2.60 2.22 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27
3.05 3.00 2.95 2.91 2.88 2.86 2.83 2.51 2.46 2.42 2.39 2.37
24.3 21.6 18.9 16.0 14.5 13.0 11.5 14.8 12.6 10.3 9.09 7.87
2.50 2.44 2.38 2.31 2.28 2.25 2.22 1.88 1.81 1.75 1.72 1.69
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 57
Y
ANGLES Equal legs and unequal legs Properties for designing
x
xp
Z
X
X y, yp
k α
Y
Size and Thickness
Z
Axis Y-Y
S
I
r
Axis Z-Z
x
Z
xp
r
Tan
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
α
L8×8×11⁄8 L8×8×1 L8×8×17⁄8 L8×8×13⁄4 L8×8×15⁄8 L8×8×19⁄16 L8×8×11⁄2
98.0 89.0 79.6 69.7 59.4 54.1 48.6
17.5 15.8 14.0 12.2 10.3 9.34 8.36
2.42 2.44 2.45 2.47 2.49 2.50 2.50
2.41 2.37 2.33 2.28 2.23 2.21 2.19
31.6 28.5 25.3 22.0 18.6 16.8 15.1
1.05 0.938 0.827 0.715 0.601 0.543 0.484
1.56 1.56 1.57 1.58 1.58 1.59 1.59
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
L8×6×1 L8×8×17⁄8 L8×8×13⁄4 L8×8×15⁄8 L8×8×19⁄16 L8×8×11⁄2 L8×8×17⁄16
38.8 34.9 30.7 26.3 24.0 21.7 19.3
8.92 7.94 6.92 5.88 5.34 4.79 4.23
1.73 1.74 1.76 1.77 1.78 1.79 1.80
1.65 1.61 1.56 1.52 1.50 1.47 1.45
16.2 14.4 12.5 10.5 9.52 8.51 7.50
0.813 0.718 0.621 0.522 0.472 0.422 0.371
1.28 1.28 1.29 1.29 1.30 1.30 1.31
0.543 0.547 0.551 0.554 0.556 0.558 0.560
L8×4×1 L8×4×17⁄8 L8×8×13⁄4 L8×4×15⁄8 L8×8×19⁄16 L8×8×11⁄2 L8×4×17⁄16
11.6 10.5 9.36 8.10 7.43 6.74 6.02
3.94 3.51 3.07 2.62 2.38 2.15 1.90
1.03 1.04 1.05 1.07 1.07 1.08 1.09
1.05 0.999 0.953 0.905 0.882 0.859 0.835
7.72 6.77 5.81 4.86 4.38 3.90 3.42
0.688 0.608 0.527 0.444 0.402 0.359 0.316
0.846 0.848 0.852 0.857 0.861 0.865 0.869
0.247 0.253 0.258 0.262 0.265 0.267 0.269
L7×4×3⁄4 L7×4×5⁄8 L7×4×1⁄2 L7×4×7⁄16 L7×4×3⁄8
9.05 7.84 6.53 5.83 5.10
3.03 2.58 2.12 1.88 1.63
1.09 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13
1.01 0.963 0.917 0.893 0.870
5.65 4.74 3.83 3.37 2.90
0.549 0.463 0.375 0.330 0.285
0.860 0.865 0.872 0.875 0.880
0.324 0.329 0.335 0.337 0.340
in.
4
3
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 58
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
ANGLES Equal legs and unequal legs Properties for designing
xp
x Z
X
X y, yp
k α
Y
Size and Thickness in.
Z
k
Weight per ft
Axis X-X Area 2
S
I 4
r 3
y
Z
yp 3
in.
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
L6×6×1 L6×6×17⁄8 L6×6×13⁄4 L6×6×15⁄8 L6×6×19⁄16 L6×6×11⁄2 L6×6×17⁄16 L6×6×13⁄8 L6×6×15⁄16
11⁄2 13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄16 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16
37.4 33.1 28.7 24.2 21.9 19.6 17.2 14.9 12.4
11.0 9.73 8.44 7.11 6.43 5.75 5.06 4.36 3.65
35.5 31.9 28.2 24.2 22.1 19.9 17.7 15.4 13.0
8.57 7.63 6.66 5.66 5.14 4.61 4.08 3.53 2.97
1.80 1.81 1.83 1.84 1.85 1.86 1.87 1.88 1.89
1.86 1.82 1.78 1.73 1.71 1.68 1.66 1.64 1.62
15.5 13.8 12.0 10.2 9.26 8.31 7.34 6.35 5.35
0.917 0.811 0.703 0.592 0.536 0.479 0.422 0.363 0.304
L6×4×7⁄8 L6×4×3⁄4 L6×4×5⁄8 L6×4×9⁄16 L6×4×1⁄2 L6×4×7⁄16 L6×4×3⁄8 L6×4×5⁄16
13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄16 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16
27.2 23.6 20.0 18.1 16.2 14.3 12.3 10.3
7.98 6.94 5.86 5.31 4.75 4.18 3.61 3.03
27.7 24.5 21.1 19.3 17.4 15.5 13.5 11.4
7.15 6.25 5.31 4.83 4.33 3.83 3.32 2.79
1.86 1.88 1.90 1.90 1.91 1.92 1.93 1.94
2.12 2.08 2.03 2.01 1.99 1.96 1.94 1.92
12.7 11.2 9.51 8.66 7.78 6.88 5.97 5.03
1.44 1.38 1.31 1.28 1.25 1.22 1.19 1.16
L6×31⁄2×1⁄2 L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16
15.3 11.7 9.80
4.50 3.42 2.87
16.6 12.9 10.9
4.24 3.24 2.73
1.92 1.94 1.95
2.08 2.04 2.01
7.50 5.76 4.85
1.50 1.44 1.41
L5×5×7⁄8 L5×5×3⁄4 L5×5×5⁄8 L5×5×1⁄2 L5×5×7⁄16 L5×5×3⁄8 L5×5×5⁄16
13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16
27.2 23.6 20.0 16.2 14.3 12.3 10.3
7.98 6.94 5.86 4.75 4.18 3.61 3.03
17.8 15.7 13.6 11.3 10.0 8.74 7.42
5.17 4.53 3.86 3.16 2.79 2.42 2.04
1.49 1.51 1.52 1.54 1.55 1.56 1.57
1.57 1.52 1.48 1.43 1.41 1.39 1.37
9.33 8.16 6.95 5.68 5.03 4.36 3.68
0.798 0.694 0.586 0.475 0.418 0.361 0.303
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 59
Y
ANGLES Equal legs and unequal legs Properties for designing
x
xp
Z
X
X y, yp
k α
Y
Size and Thickness in. L6×6×1 L6×6×17⁄8 L6×6×13⁄4 L6×6×15⁄8 L6×6×19⁄16 L6×6×11⁄2 L6×6×17⁄16 L6×6×13⁄8 L6×6×15⁄16
Z
Axis Y-Y
S
I 4
r
Axis Z-Z
x
xp
r
in.
in.
in.
α
1.86 1.82 1.78 1.73 1.71 1.68 1.66 1.64 1.62
15.5 13.8 12.0 10.2 9.26 8.31 7.34 6.35 5.35
0.917 0.811 0.703 0.592 0.536 0.479 0.422 0.363 0.304
1.17 1.17 1.17 1.18 1.18 1.18 1.19 1.19 1.20
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
in.
3
in.
in.
in.
35.5 31.9 28.2 24.2 22.1 19.9 17.7 15.4 13.0
8.57 7.63 6.66 5.66 5.14 4.61 4.08 3.53 2.97
1.80 1.81 1.83 1.84 1.85 1.86 1.87 1.88 1.89
Z 3
Tan
L6×4×7⁄8 L6×4×3⁄4 L6×4×5⁄8 L6×4×9⁄16 L6×4×1⁄2 L6×4×7⁄16 L6×4×3⁄8 L6×4×5⁄16
9.75 8.68 7.52 6.91 6.27 5.60 4.90 4.18
3.39 2.97 2.54 2.31 2.08 1.85 1.60 1.35
1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.17
1.12 1.08 1.03 1.01 0.987 0.964 0.941 0.918
6.31 5.47 4.62 4.19 3.75 3.30 2.85 2.40
0.665 0.578 0.488 0.442 0.396 0.349 0.301 0.252
0.857 0.860 0.864 0.866 0.870 0.873 0.877 0.882
0.421 0.428 0.435 0.438 0.440 0.443 0.446 0.448
L6×31⁄2×1⁄2 L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
4.25 3.34 2.85
1.59 1.23 1.04
0.972 0.988 0.996
0.833 0.787 0.763
2.91 2.20 1.85
0.375 0.285 0.239
0.759 0.767 0.772
0.344 0.350 0.352
17.8 15.7 13.6 11.3 10.0 8.74 7.42
5.17 4.53 3.86 3.16 2.79 2.42 2.04
1.49 1.51 1.52 1.54 1.55 1.56 1.57
1.57 1.52 1.48 1.43 1.41 1.39 1.37
9.33 8.16 6.95 5.68 5.03 4.36 3.68
0.798 0.694 0.586 0.475 0.418 0.361 0.303
0.973 0.975 0.978 0.983 0.986 0.990 0.994
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
L5×5×7⁄8 L5×5×3⁄4 L5×5×5⁄8 L5×5×1⁄2 L5×5×7⁄16 L5×5×3⁄8 L5×5×5⁄16
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 60
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
ANGLES Equal legs and unequal legs Properties for designing
xp
x Z
X
X y, yp
k α
Y
Size and Thickness in.
Z
k
Weight per ft
Axis X-X Area 2
S
I 4
r 3
y
Z
yp 3
in.
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
L5×31⁄2×3⁄4 L5×31⁄2×5⁄8 L5×31⁄2×1⁄2 L5×31⁄2×3⁄8 L5×31⁄2×5⁄16 L5×31⁄2×1⁄4
11⁄4 11⁄8 1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
19.8 16.8 13.6 10.4 8.70 7.00
5.81 4.92 4.00 3.05 2.56 2.06
13.9 12.0 9.99 7.78 6.60 5.39
4.28 3.65 2.99 2.29 1.94 1.57
1.55 1.56 1.58 1.60 1.61 1.62
1.75 1.70 1.66 1.61 1.59 1.56
7.65 6.55 5.38 4.14 3.49 2.83
1.13 1.06 1.00 0.938 0.906 0.875
L5×3×1⁄2 L5×3×7⁄16 L5×3×3⁄8 L5×3×5⁄16 L5×3×1⁄4
1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
12.8 11.3 9.80 8.20 6.60
3.75 3.31 2.86 2.40 1.94
9.45 8.43 7.37 6.26 5.11
2.91 2.58 2.24 1.89 1.53
1.59 1.60 1.61 1.61 1.62
1.75 1.73 1.70 1.68 1.66
5.16 4.57 3.97 3.36 2.72
1.25 1.22 1.19 1.16 1.13
L4×4×3⁄4 L5×3×5⁄8 L5×3×1⁄2 L5×3×7⁄16 L5×3×3⁄8 L5×3×5⁄16 L5×3×1⁄4
11⁄8 1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
18.5 15.7 12.8 11.3 9.80 8.20 6.60
5.44 4.61 3.75 3.31 2.86 2.40 1.94
7.67 6.66 5.56 4.97 4.36 3.71 3.04
2.81 2.40 1.97 1.75 1.52 1.29 1.05
1.19 1.20 1.22 1.23 1.23 1.24 1.25
1.27 1.23 1.18 1.16 1.14 1.12 1.09
5.07 4.33 3.56 3.16 2.74 2.32 1.88
0.680 0.576 0.469 0.414 0.357 0.300 0.242
L4×31⁄2×1⁄2 L4×31⁄2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4
15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
11.9 9.10 7.70 6.20
3.50 2.67 2.25 1.81
5.32 4.18 3.56 2.91
1.94 1.49 1.26 1.03
1.23 1.25 1.26 1.27
1.25 1.21 1.18 1.16
3.50 2.71 2.29 1.86
0.500 0.438 0.406 0.375
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
in.
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 61
Y
ANGLES Equal legs and unequal legs Properties for designing
x
xp
Z
X
X y, yp
k α
Y
Size and Thickness
Z
Axis Y-Y
S
I
r
Axis Z-Z
x
Z
xp
r
Tan
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
α
L5×31⁄2×3⁄4 L5×31⁄2×5⁄8 L5×31⁄2×1⁄2 L5×31⁄2×3⁄8 L5×31⁄2×5⁄16 L5×31⁄2×1⁄4
5.55 4.83 4.05 3.18 2.72 2.23
2.22 1.90 1.56 1.21 1.02 0.830
0.977 0.991 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04
0.996 0.951 0.906 0.861 0.838 0.814
4.10 3.47 2.83 2.16 1.82 1.47
0.581 0.492 0.400 0.305 0.256 0.206
0.748 0.751 0.755 0.762 0.766 0.770
0.464 0.472 0.479 0.486 0.489 0.492
L5×3×1⁄2 L5×3×7⁄16 L5×3×3⁄8 L5×3×5⁄16 L5×3×1⁄4
2.58 2.32 2.04 1.75 1.44
1.15 1.02 0.888 0.753 0.614
0.829 0.837 0.845 0.853 0.861
0.750 0.727 0.704 0.681 0.657
2.11 1.86 1.60 1.35 1.09
0.375 0.331 0.286 0.240 0.194
0.648 0.651 0.654 0.658 0.663
0.357 0.361 0.364 0.368 0.371
L4×4×3⁄4 L5×3×5⁄8 L5×3×1⁄2 L5×3×7⁄16 L5×3×3⁄8 L5×3×5⁄16 L5×3×1⁄4
7.67 6.66 5.56 4.97 4.36 3.71 3.04
2.81 2.40 1.97 1.75 1.52 1.29 1.05
1.19 1.20 1.22 1.23 1.23 1.24 1.25
1.27 1.23 1.18 1.16 1.14 1.12 1.09
5.07 4.33 3.56 3.16 2.74 2.32 1.88
0.680 0.576 0.469 0.414 0.357 0.300 0.242
0.778 0.779 0.782 0.785 0.788 0.791 0.795
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
L4×31⁄2×1⁄2 4×31⁄2×3⁄8 4×31⁄2×5⁄16 4×31⁄2×1⁄4
3.79 2.95 2.55 2.09
1.52 1.16 0.994 0.808
1.04 1.06 1.07 1.07
1.00 0.955 0.932 0.909
2.73 2.11 1.78 1.44
0.438 0.334 0.281 0.227
0.722 0.727 0.730 0.734
0.750 0.755 0.757 0.759
in.
4
3
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 62
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
ANGLES Equal legs and unequal legs Properties for designing
xp
x Z
X
X y, yp
k α
Y
Size and Thickness
Z
k
Weight per ft
Axis X-X Area
S
I 2
r 4
y 3
Z
yp 3
in.
in.
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
L4×3×5⁄8 L4×3×1⁄2 L4×3×7⁄16 L4×3×3⁄8 L4×3×5⁄16 L4×3×1⁄4
11⁄16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
13.6 11.1 9.80 8.50 7.20 5.80
3.98 3.25 2.87 2.48 2.09 1.69
6.03 5.05 4.52 3.96 3.38 2.77
2.30 1.89 1.68 1.46 1.23 1.00
1.23 1.25 1.25 1.26 1.27 1.28
1.37 1.33 1.30 1.28 1.26 1.24
4.12 3.41 3.03 2.64 2.23 1.82
0.813 0.750 0.719 0.688 0.656 0.625
L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄2 L31⁄2×31⁄2×7⁄16 L31⁄2×31⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×31⁄2×5⁄16 L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄4
7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
11.1 9.80 8.50 7.20 5.80
3.25 2.87 2.48 2.09 1.69
3.64 3.26 2.87 2.45 2.01
1.49 1.32 1.15 0.976 0.794
1.06 1.07 1.07 1.08 1.09
1.06 1.04 1.01 0.990 0.968
2.68 2.38 2.08 1.76 1.43
0.464 0.410 0.355 0.299 0.241
L31⁄2×3×1⁄2 L31⁄2×3×3⁄8 L31⁄2×3×5⁄16 L31⁄2×3×1⁄4
15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
10.2 7.90 6.60 5.40
3.00 2.30 1.93 1.56
3.45 2.72 2.33 1.91
1.45 1.13 0.954 0.776
1.07 1.09 1.10 1.11
1.13 1.08 1.06 1.04
2.63 2.04 1.73 1.41
0.500 0.438 0.406 0.375
L31⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄2 L31⁄2×31⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄4
15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
9.40 7.20 4.90
2.75 2.11 1.44
3.24 2.56 1.80
1.41 1.09 0.755
1.09 1.10 1.12
1.20 1.16 1.11
2.53 1.97 1.36
0.750 0.688 0.625
L3×3×1⁄2 L4×3×7⁄16 L4×3×3⁄8 L4×3×5⁄16 L4×3×1⁄4 L4×3×3⁄16
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
9.40 8.30 7.20 6.10 4.90 3.71
2.75 2.43 2.11 1.78 1.44 1.09
2.22 1.99 1.76 1.51 1.24 0.962
1.07 0.954 0.833 0.707 0.577 0.441
0.898 0.905 0.913 0.922 0.930 0.939
0.932 0.910 0.888 0.865 0.842 0.820
1.93 1.72 1.50 1.27 1.04 0.794
0.458 0.406 0.352 0.296 0.240 0.182
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
in.
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 63
Y
ANGLES Equal legs and unequal legs Properties for designing
x
xp
Z
X
X y, yp
k α
Y
Size and Thickness
Z
Axis Y-Y
S
I
r
Axis Z-Z
x
Z
xp
r
Tan
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
α
L4×3×5⁄8 L4×3×1⁄2 L4×3×7⁄16 L4×3×3⁄8 L4×3×5⁄16 L4×3×1⁄4
2.87 2.42 2.18 1.92 1.65 1.36
1.35 1.12 0.992 0.866 0.734 0.599
0.849 0.864 0.871 0.879 0.887 0.896
0.871 0.827 0.804 0.782 0.759 0.736
2.48 2.03 1.79 1.56 1.31 1.06
0.498 0.406 0.359 0.311 0.261 0.211
0.637 0.639 0.641 0.644 0.647 0.651
0.534 0.543 0.547 0.551 0.554 0.558
L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄2 L31⁄2×31⁄2×7⁄16 L31⁄2×31⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×31⁄2×5⁄16 L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄4
3.64 3.26 2.87 2.45 2.01
1.49 1.32 1.15 0.976 0.794
1.06 1.07 1.07 1.08 1.09
1.06 1.04 1.01 0.990 0.968
2.68 2.38 2.08 1.76 1.43
0.464 0.410 0.355 0.299 0.241
0.683 0.684 0.687 0.690 0.694
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
L31⁄2×3×1⁄2 L31⁄2×3×3⁄8 L31⁄2×3×5⁄16 L31⁄2×3×1⁄4
2.33 1.85 1.58 1.30
1.10 0.851 0.722 0.589
0.881 0.897 0.905 0.914
0.875 0.830 0.808 0.785
1.98 1.53 1.30 1.05
0.429 0.328 0.276 0.223
0.621 0.625 0.627 0.631
0.714 0.721 0.724 0.727
L31⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄2 L31⁄2×31⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄4
1.36 1.09 0.777
0.760 0.592 0.412
0.704 0.719 0.735
0.705 0.660 0.614
1.40 1.07 0.735
0.393 0.301 0.205
0.534 0.537 0.544
0.486 0.496 0.506
L3×3×1⁄2 L3×3×7⁄16 L3×3×3⁄8 L3×3×5⁄16 L3×3×1⁄4 L3×3×3⁄16
2.22 1.99 1.76 1.51 1.24 0.962
1.07 0.954 0.833 0.707 0.577 0.441
0.898 0.905 0.913 0.922 0.930 0.939
0.932 0.910 0.888 0.865 0.842 0.820
1.93 1.72 1.50 1.27 1.04 0.794
0.458 0.406 0.352 0.296 0.240 0.182
0.584 0.585 0.587 0.589 0.592 0.596
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
4
3
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 64
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
ANGLES Equal legs and unequal legs Properties for designing
xp
x Z
X
X y, yp
k α
Y
Size and Thickness in.
Z
k
Weight per ft
Axis X-X Area 2
S
I 4
r 3
y
Z
yp 3
in.
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
L3×21⁄2×1⁄2 L3×21⁄2×3⁄8 L3×21⁄2×5⁄16 L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×21⁄2×3⁄16
7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16
8.50 6.60 5.60 4.50 3.39
2.50 1.92 1.62 1.31 0.996
2.08 1.66 1.42 1.17 0.907
1.04 0.810 0.688 0.561 0.430
0.913 0.928 0.937 0.945 0.954
1.000 0.956 0.933 0.911 0.888
1.88 1.47 1.25 1.02 0.781
0.500 0.438 0.406 0.375 0.344
L3×2×1⁄2 L3×2×3⁄8 L3×2×5⁄16 L3×2×1⁄4 L3×2×3⁄16
13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
7.70 5.90 5.00 4.10 3.07
2.25 1.73 1.46 1.19 0.902
1.92 1.53 1.32 1.09 0.842
1.00 0.781 0.664 0.542 0.415
0.924 0.940 0.948 0.957 0.966
1.08 1.04 1.02 0.993 0.970
1.78 1.40 1.19 0.973 0.746
0.750 0.688 0.656 0.625 0.594
L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄2 L21⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄8 L21⁄2×21⁄2×5⁄16 L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4 L21⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄16
13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
7.70 5.90 5.00 4.10 3.07
2.25 1.73 1.46 1.19 0.902
1.23 0.984 0.849 0.703 0.547
0.724 0.566 0.482 0.394 0.303
0.739 0.753 0.761 0.769 0.778
0.806 0.762 0.740 0.717 0.694
1.31 1.02 0.869 0.711 0.545
0.450 0.347 0.293 0.238 0.180
L21⁄2×2×3⁄8 L21⁄2×2×5⁄16 L21⁄2×2×1⁄4 L21⁄2×2×3⁄16
11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
5.30 4.50 3.62 2.75
1.55 1.31 1.06 0.809
0.912 0.788 0.654 0.509
0.547 0.466 0.381 0.293
0.768 0.776 0.784 0.793
0.831 0.809 0.787 0.764
0.986 0.843 0.691 0.532
0.438 0.406 0.375 0.344
L2×2×3⁄8 L2×2×5⁄16 L2×2×1⁄4 L2×2×3⁄16 L2×2×1⁄8
11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
4.70 3.92 3.19 2.44 1.65
1.36 1.15 0.938 0.715 0.484
0.479 0.416 0.348 0.272 0.190
0.351 0.300 0.247 0.190 0.131
0.594 0.601 0.609 0.617 0.626
0.636 0.614 0.592 0.569 0.546
0.633 0.541 0.445 0.343 0.235
0.340 0.288 0.234 0.179 0.121
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
in.
in.
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
1 - 65
ANGLES Equal legs and unequal legs Properties for designing
Y
x
xp
Z
X
X y, yp
k α
Y
Size and Thickness
Z
Axis Y-Y
S
I
r
Axis Z-Z
x
Z
xp
r
Tan
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
α
L3×21⁄2×1⁄2 L3×21⁄2×3⁄8 L3×21⁄2×5⁄16 L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×21⁄2×3⁄16
1.30 1.04 0.898 0.743 0.577
0.744 0.581 0.494 0.404 0.310
0.722 0.736 0.744 0.753 0.761
0.750 0.706 0.683 0.661 0.638
1.35 1.05 0.889 0.724 0.553
0.417 0.320 0.270 0.219 0.166
0.520 0.522 0.525 0.528 0.533
0.667 0.676 0.680 0.684 0.688
L3×2×1⁄2 L3×2×3⁄8 L3×2×5⁄16 L3×2×1⁄4 L3×2×3⁄16
0.672 0.543 0.470 0.392 0.307
0.474 0.371 0.317 0.260 0.200
0.546 0.559 0.567 0.574 0.583
0.583 0.539 0.516 0.493 0.470
0.891 0.684 0.577 0.468 0.357
0.375 0.289 0.244 0.198 0.150
0.428 0.430 0.432 0.435 0.439
0.414 0.428 0.435 0.440 0.446
L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄2 L21⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄8 L21⁄2×21⁄2×5⁄16 L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4 L21⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄16
1.23 0.984 0.849 0.703 0.547
0.724 0.566 0.482 0.394 0.303
0.739 0.753 0.761 0.769 0.778
0.806 0.762 0.740 0.717 0.694
1.31 1.02 0.869 0.711 0.545
0.450 0.347 0.293 0.238 0.180
0.487 0.487 0.489 0.491 0.495
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
L21⁄2×2×3⁄8 L21⁄2×2×5⁄16 L21⁄2×2×1⁄4 L21⁄2×2×3⁄16
0.514 0.446 0.372 0.291
0.363 0.310 0.254 0.196
0.577 0.584 0.592 0.600
0.581 0.559 0.537 0.514
0.660 0.561 0.457 0.350
0.309 0.262 0.213 0.162
0.420 0.422 0.424 0.427
0.614 0.620 0.626 0.631
L2×2×3⁄8 L3×2×5⁄16 L3×2×1⁄4 L3×2×3⁄16 L3×2×1⁄8
0.479 0.416 0.348 0.272 0.190
0.351 0.300 0.247 0.190 0.131
0.594 0.601 0.609 0.617 0.626
0.636 0.614 0.592 0.569 0.546
0.633 0.541 0.445 0.343 0.235
0.340 0.288 0.234 0.179 0.121
0.389 0.390 0.391 0.394 0.398
1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
in.
4
3
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 66
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 67
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
Structural tees are obtained by splitting the webs of various beams, generally with the aid of rotary shears, and straightening to meet established permissible variations listed in Standard Mill Practice in Part 1 of this Manual. Although structural tees may be obtained by off-center splitting, or by splitting at two lines, as specified on order, the Dimensions and Properties are based on a depth of tee equal to one-half the published beam depth. Values of Qs are given for Fy = 36 ksi and Fy = 50 ksi, for those tees having stems which exceed the limiting width-thickness ratio λr of LRFD Specification Section B5. Since the cross section is comprised entirely of unstiffened elements, Qa = 1.0 and Q = Qs for _ all tee sections. The Flexural-Torsional Properties Table lists the dimensional values (ro and H) and cross-section constants (J and Cw) needed for checking flexural-torsional buckling. Use of Table
The table may be used as follows for checking the limit states of (1) flexural buckling about the x-axis and (2) flexural-torsional buckling. The lower of the two limit states must be used for design. See also Part 3 of this LRFD Manual. (1) Flexural Buckling About the X-Axis
Where no value of Qs is shown, the design compressive strength for this limit state is given by LRFD Specification Section E2. Where a value of Qs is shown, the strength must be reduced in accordance with Appendix B5 of the LRFD Specification. (2) Flexural-Torsional Buckling
The design compressive strength for this limit _ state is given by LRFD Specification Section E3. This involves calculations with J, ro, and H. Refer to the Flexural-Torsional Properties Tables, later in Part 1.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 68
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
bf tf
yp , y
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Dimensions
k
Y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Stem
Area Designation in.2
Area of Stem
Depth of Tee d
Thickness tw
tw 2
in.
in.
in.
in.2
Flange Width bf in.
Thickness tf in.
Distance k in.
WT22×167.5 WT22×145 WT22×131 WT22×115
49.1 42.9 38.6 33.8
22.010 22 1.020 21.810 2113⁄16 0.870 21.655 2111⁄16 0.790 21.455 217⁄16 0.710
1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
22.5 19.0 17.1 15.2
15.950 15.830 15.750 15.750
153⁄4 157⁄8 153⁄4 153⁄4
1.770 1.580 1.420 1.220
13⁄4 19⁄16 17⁄16 11⁄4
29⁄16 23⁄8 23⁄16 2
WT20×296.5 WT22×251.5 WT22×215.5 WT22×186 WT22×160.5 WT22×148.5 WT22×138.5 WT22×124.5 WT22×107.5 WT22×99.5 WT22×87
87.0 74.0 63.4 54.7 47.0 43.7 40.7 36.7 31.7 29.2 25.5
21.495 21.025 20.630 20.315 20.040 19.920 19.845 19.690 19.490 19.335 19.100
211⁄2 21 205⁄8 205⁄16 20 1915⁄16 197⁄8 1911⁄16 191⁄2 195⁄16 191⁄8
1.790 1.540 1.340 1.160 1.000 0.930 0.830 0.750 0.650 0.650 0.650
113⁄16 19⁄16 15⁄16 13⁄16 1 15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
1 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
38.5 32.4 27.6 23.6 20.0 18.5 16.5 14.8 12.7 12.6 12.4
16.690 163⁄4 16.420 167⁄16 16.220 161⁄4 16.060 161⁄16 15.910 157⁄8 15.825 157⁄8 15.830 157⁄8 15.750 153⁄4 15.750 153⁄4 15.750 153⁄4 15.750 153⁄4
3.230 2.760 2.360 2.050 1.770 1.650 1.575 1.420 1.220 1.065 0.830
31⁄4 23⁄4 23⁄8 21⁄16 13⁄4 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 11⁄4 11⁄16 13⁄ 16
47⁄16 315⁄16 39⁄16 31⁄4 215⁄16 31⁄16 23⁄4 25⁄8 23⁄8 21⁄4 2
WT20×233 WT22×196 WT22×165.5 WT22×139 WT22×132 WT22×117.5 WT22×105.5 WT22×91.5 WT22×83.5 WT22×74.5
68.4 57.7 48.8 40.9 38.8 34.5 31.0 26.9 24.6 21.9
21.220 213⁄16 20.785 203⁄4 20.395 203⁄8 20.080 201⁄8 20.000 20 19.845 197⁄8 19.685 1911⁄16 19.490 191⁄2 19.295 195⁄16 19.100 191⁄8
1.67 1.42 1.22 1.02 0.960 0.830 0.750 0.650 0.650 0.630
111⁄16 17⁄16 11⁄4 1 1 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
35.4 29.5 24.9 20.5 19.2 16.5 14.8 12.7 12.5 12.0
12.640 125⁄8 12.360 123⁄8 12.170 123⁄16 11.970 12 11.930 12 11.890 117⁄8 11.810 113⁄4 11.810 113⁄4 11.810 113⁄4 11.810 113⁄4
2.950 2.520 2.130 1.810 1.730 1.575 1.415 1.220 1.025 0.830
215⁄16 21⁄2 21⁄8 113⁄16 13⁄4 17⁄16 19⁄16 11⁄4 1 13⁄ 16
41⁄8 311⁄16 35⁄16 3 215⁄16 23⁄4 25⁄8 23⁄8 23⁄16 2
WT18×424 WT22×399 WT22×325 WT22×263.5 WT22×219.5 WT22×196.5 WT22×179.5 WT22×164 WT22×150 WT22×140 WT22×130 WT22×122.5 WT22×115
125 117 95.0 77.0 64.0 57.5 52.7 48.2 44.1 41.2 38.2 36.0 33.8
21.225 211⁄4 20.985 21 20.235 201⁄4 19.605 195⁄8 19.130 191⁄8 18.900 187⁄8 18.700 1811⁄16 18.545 189⁄16 18.370 183⁄8 18.260 181⁄4 18.130 181⁄8 18.040 18 17.950 18
2.520 2.380 1.970 1.610 1.360 1.220 1.120 1.020 0.945 0.885 0.840 0.800 0.760
21⁄2 23⁄8 2 15⁄8 13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
11⁄4 13⁄16 1 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
53.5 49.9 39.9 31.6 26.0 23.1 20.9 18.9 17.4 16.2 15.2 14.4 13.6
18.130 17.990 17.575 17.220 16.965 16.830 16.730 16.630 16.655 16.595 16.550 16.510 16.470
181⁄8 18 175⁄8 171⁄4 17 167⁄8 163⁄4 165⁄8 165⁄8 165⁄8 161⁄2 161⁄2 161⁄2
4.530 4.290 3.540 2.910 2.440 2.200 2.010 1.850 1.680 1.570 1.440 1.350 1.260
41⁄2 45⁄16 39⁄16 215⁄16 27⁄16 23⁄16 2 17⁄8 111⁄16 19⁄16 17⁄16 13⁄8 11⁄4
511⁄16 57⁄16 411⁄16 41⁄16 39⁄16 35⁄16 31⁄8 3 213⁄16 211⁄16 29⁄16 21⁄2 23⁄8
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 69
bf
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Properties
tf
k
Y
yp , y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Nominal Wt. per ft lb
Axis X-X
h tw
Qs*
Axis Y-Y
I
S
r
y
Z
yp
I
S
r
Z
in.4
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.
in.3
36
Fy, ksi 50
167.5 145 131 115
19.1 22.3 24.6 27.4
2160 1840 1650 1440
131 111 100 88.6
6.63 6.55 6.53 6.53
5.51 5.27 5.20 5.17
233 197 177 157
1.54 1.35 1.23 1.07
600 524 463 398
75.3 66.1 58.8 50.5
3.50 3.49 3.46 3.43
118 103 91.4 78.4
0.982 0.833 0.732 0.608
0.817 0.636 0.532 0.438
296.5 251.5 215.5 186 160.5 148.5 138.5 124.5 107.5 99.5 87
9.5 11.1 12.8 14.7 17.1 18.4 20.6 22.8 26.3 26.3 26.3
3300 2730 2290 1930 1630 1500 1360 1210 1030 987 907
209 175 148 126 107 98.9 88.6 79.3 68.0 66.4 63.8
6.16 6.07 6.01 5.95 5.89 5.87 5.78 5.75 5.72 5.81 5.96
5.67 5.39 5.18 4.97 4.79 4.71 4.51 4.41 4.28 4.48 4.87
379 315 266 225 191 176 157 140 120 117 114
2.61 2.25 1.95 1.70 1.48 1.38 1.28 1.16 1.00 0.927 0.811
1260 1020 843 710 596 546 522 463 398 347 271
151 125 104 88.5 74.9 69.1 65.9 58.8 50.5 44.1 34.4
3.81 3.72 3.65 3.60 3.56 3.54 3.58 3.56 3.55 3.45 3.26
240 197 164 139 117 108 102 91.0 77.9 68.3 53.8
— — — — — 0.989 0.882 0.782 0.618 0.628 0.643
— — — — 0.895 0.825 0.699 0.580 0.445 0.452 0.463
233 196 165.5 139 132 117.5 105.5 91.5 83.5 74.5
10.2 12.0 14.0 16.8 17.8 20.6 22.8 26.3 26.3 27.1
2770 2270 1880 1540 1450 1260 1120 957 898 815
185 153 128 106 99.3 85.6 76.7 65.8 63.7 59.7
6.36 6.28 6.21 6.14 6.11 6.04 6.01 5.97 6.05 6.10
6.22 5.95 5.74 5.50 5.40 5.17 5.08 4.94 5.20 5.45
333 276 231 190 178 153 137 117 115 119
2.71 2.33 2.01 1.71 1.63 1.45 1.31 1.14 1.04 1.82
504 401 323 261 246 222 195 168 141 115
79.8 65.0 53.1 43.6 41.3 37.3 33.0 28.5 23.9 19.4
2.72 2.64 2.57 2.52 2.52 2.54 2.51 2.50 2.40 2.29
131 106 86.2 70.0 66.2 59.2 52.3 44.8 38.0 31.1
— — — — — 0.882 0.782 0.618 0.630 0.604
— — — 0.913 0.855 0.699 0.581 0.445 0.454 0.435
424 399 325 263.5 219.5 196.5 179.5 164 150 140 130 122.5 115
6.3 6.6 8.0 9.8 11.6 12.9 14.1 15.4 16.7 17.8 18.7 19.7 20.7
4250 3920 3020 2330 1880 1660 1500 1350 1230 1140 1060 995 934
277 257 202 159 130 115 104 94.1 86.1 80.0 75.1 71.0 67.0
5.84 5.79 5.64 5.50 5.42 5.37 5.33 5.29 5.27 5.25 5.26 5.26 5.25
5.86 5.72 5.29 4.89 4.63 4.46 4.33 4.21 4.13 4.07 4.05 4.03 4.01
515 478 373 290 235 207 187 168 153 142 133 125 118
3.43 3.25 2.70 2.24 1.89 1.71 1.58 1.45 1.33 1.24 1.16 1.09 1.03
2270 2100 1610 1240 997 877 786 711 648 599 545 507 470
251 234 184 145 117 104 94.0 85.5 77.8 72.2 65.9 61.4 57.1
4.27 4.24 4.12 4.02 3.95 3.90 3.86 3.84 3.83 3.81 3.78 3.75 3.73
399 371 290 227 184 162 146 132 120 112 102 94.9 88.1
— — — — — — — — — — 0.981 0.943 0.896
— — — — — — — — 0.927 0.867 0.816 0.770 0.715
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the Tee complies with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 70
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
bf tf
yp , y
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Dimensions
k
Y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Stem
Area of Stem
Flange DisThickness tance tf k
Area
Depth of Tee d
Thickness tw
tw 2
Designation
in.2
in.
in.
in.
WT18×128 WT18×116 WT18×105 WT18×97 WT18×91 WT18×85 WT18×80 WT18×75 WT18×67.5
37.7 34.1 30.9 28.5 26.8 25.0 23.5 22.1 19.9
18.715 1811⁄16 18.560 189⁄16 18.345 183⁄8 18.245 181⁄4 18.165 181⁄8 18.085 181⁄8 18.005 18 17.925 177⁄8 17.775 173⁄4
0.960 0.870 0.830 0.765 0.725 0.680 0.650 0.625 0.600
1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
2
7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
18.0 16.1 15.2 14.0 13.2 12.3 11.7 11.2 10.7
12.215 12.120 12.180 12.115 12.075 12.030 12.000 11.975 11.950
121⁄4 121⁄8 121⁄8 121⁄8 121⁄8 12 12 12 12
1.730 1.570 1.360 1.260 1.180 1.100 1.020 0.940 0.790
13⁄4 19⁄16 13⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄8 1 15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16
25⁄8 21⁄2 25⁄16 23⁄16 21⁄8 2 115⁄16 17⁄8 111⁄16
WT16.5×177 WT16.5×159 WT16.5×145.5 WT16.5×131.5 WT16.5×120.5 WT16.5×110.5 WT16.5×100.5
52.1 46.7 42.8 38.7 35.4 32.5 29.5
17.775 173⁄4 17.580 179⁄16 17.420 177⁄16 17.265 171⁄4 17.090 171⁄8 16.965 17 16.840 167⁄8
1.160 1.040 0.960 0.870 0.830 0.775 0.715
13⁄16 11⁄16 1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
20.6 18.3 16.7 15.0 14.2 13.1 12.0
16.100 15.985 15.905 15.805 15.860 15.805 15.745
161⁄8 16 157⁄8 153⁄4 157⁄8 153⁄4 153⁄4
2.090 1.890 1.730 1.570 1.400 1.275 1.150
21⁄16 17⁄8 13⁄4 19⁄16 13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8
27⁄8 211⁄16 29⁄16 23⁄8 23⁄16 21⁄16 115⁄16
WT16.5×84.5 WT16.5×76 WT16.5×70.5 WT16.5×65 WT16.5×59
24.8 22.4 20.8 19.2 17.3
16.910 1615⁄16 16.745 163⁄4 16.650 165⁄8 16.545 161⁄2 16.430 163⁄8
0.670 0.635 0.605 0.580 0.550
11⁄
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
11.3 10.6 10.1 9.60 9.04
11.500 11.565 11.535 11.510 11.480
111⁄2 115⁄8 111⁄2 111⁄2 111⁄2
1.220 1.055 0.960 0.855 0.740
11⁄4 11⁄16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4
21⁄16 17⁄8 13⁄4 111⁄16 19⁄16
WT15×238.5 WT15×195.5 WT15×163 WT15×146 WT15×130.5 WT15×117.5 WT15×105.5 WT15×95.5 WT15×86.5
70.0 57.0 47.9 42.9 38.4 34.5 31.0 28.1 25.4
17.105 171⁄8 16.595 165⁄8 16.200 163⁄16 16.005 16 15.805 1513⁄16 15.650 155⁄8 15.470 151⁄2 15.340 153⁄8 15.220 151⁄4
1.630 1.360 1.140 1.020 0.930 0.830 0.775 0.710 0.655
15⁄8 13⁄8 11⁄8 1 15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
13⁄
16 11⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
27.9 22.6 18.5 16.3 14.7 13.0 12.0 10.9 9.97
15.865 15.590 15.370 15.255 15.155 15.055 15.105 15.040 14.985
157⁄8 155⁄8 153⁄8 151⁄2 151⁄8 15 151⁄8 15 15
2.950 2.440 2.050 1.850 1.650 1.500 1.315 1.185 1.065
3 27⁄16 21⁄16 17⁄8 15⁄8 11⁄2 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16
33⁄4 31⁄4 213⁄16 25⁄8 27⁄16 21⁄4 21⁄8 115⁄16 17⁄8
WT15×74 WT18×66 WT18×62 WT18×58 WT18×54 WT18×49.5 WT18×45
21.7 19.4 18.2 17.1 15.9 14.5 13.2
15.335 155⁄16 15.155 151⁄8 15.085 151⁄8 15.005 15 14.915 147⁄8 14.825 147⁄8 14.765 143⁄4
0.650 0.615 0.585 0.565 0.545 0.520 0.470
5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
10.0 9.32 8.82 8.48 8.13 7.71 6.94
10.480 10.545 10.515 10.495 10.475 10.450 10.400
101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 101⁄2 103⁄8
1.180 1.000 0.930 0.850 0.760 0.670 0.610
13⁄16 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
2 13⁄4 111⁄16 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄16
16 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
1⁄
Width bf
in.2
in.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
in.
in.
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 71
bf
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Properties
tf
k
Y
yp , y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Nominal Wt. per ft lb
Axis X-X
h tw
Qs*
Axis Y-Y
I
S
r
y
Z
yp
I
S
r
Z
in.4
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.
in.3
Fy, ksi 36
50
128 116 105 97 91 85 80 75 67.5
16.9 18.7 19.6 21.2 22.4 23.9 25.0 26.0 27.1
1200 1080 985 901 845 786 740 698 637
87.4 78.5 73.1 67.0 63.1 58.9 55.8 53.1 49.7
5.66 5.63 5.65 5.62 5.62 5.61 5.61 5.62 5.66
4.92 4.82 4.87 4.80 4.77 4.73 4.74 4.78 4.96
156 140 131 120 113 105 100 95.5 94.3
1.54 1.40 1.27 1.18 1.11 1.04 0.980 0.923 1.24
264 234 206 187 174 160 147 135 113
43.2 38.6 33.8 30.9 28.8 26.6 24.6 22.5 18.9
2.65 2.62 2.58 2.56 2.55 2.53 2.50 2.47 2.38
68.6 61.0 53.5 48.9 45.4 41.9 38.6 35.5 29.8
— 0.994 0.960 0.887 0.831 0.767 0.720 0.677 0.634
0.927 0.831 0.791 0.705 0.635 0.565 0.521 0.486 0.457
177 159 145.5 131.5 120.5 110.5 100.5
12.9 14.4 15.6 17.2 18.1 19.3 21.0
1320 1160 1050 943 871 799 725
96.8 85.8 78.3 70.2 65.8 60.8 55.5
5.03 4.99 4.97 4.94 4.96 4.96 4.95
4.16 4.02 3.94 3.84 3.85 3.81 3.78
174 154 140 125 116 107 97.7
1.62 1.46 1.34 1.22 1.12 1.03 0.938
729 645 581 517 466 420 375
90.6 80.7 73.1 65.5 58.8 53.2 47.6
3.74 3.71 3.69 3.66 3.63 3.59 3.56
141 125 113 101 90.9 82.1 73.4
— — — — — 0.968 0.896
— — 0.993 0.907 0.867 0.801 0.715
84.5 76 70.5 65 59
22.4 23.6 24.8 25.8 27.3
649 592 552 513 469
51.1 47.4 44.7 42.1 39.2
5.12 5.14 5.15 5.18 5.20
4.21 4.26 4.29 4.36 4.47
90.8 84.5 79.8 75.6 74.8
1.08 0.967 0.901 0.832 0.862
155 136 123 109 93.6
27.0 23.6 21.3 18.9 16.3
2.50 2.47 2.43 2.39 2.32
42.2 37.0 33.5 29.7 25.7
0.827 0.775 0.728 0.685 0.621
0.630 0.574 0.529 0.492 0.447
238.5 195.5 163 146 130.5 117.5 105.5 95.5 86.5
8.3 9.9 11.8 13.2 14.5 16.2 17.4 19.0 20.6
1550 1210 981 861 764 674 610 549 497
121 96.6 78.9 69.6 62.3 55.1 50.5 45.7 41.7
4.70 4.61 4.53 4.48 4.46 4.42 4.43 4.42 4.42
4.30 4.04 3.76 3.63 3.54 3.42 3.40 3.35 3.31
224 177 143 125 112 98.2 89.5 80.8 73.4
2.21 1.83 1.56 1.40 1.27 1.15 1.03 0.933 0.848
987 774 622 549 480 427 378 336 299
124 99.2 81.0 71.9 63.3 56.8 50.1 44.7 39.9
3.75 3.68 3.61 3.58 3.54 3.52 3.49 3.46 3.43
195 155 126 111 97.9 87.5 77.2 68.9 61.4
— — — — — — — 0.981 0.913
— — — — — 0.952 0.897 0.816 0.735
74 66 62 58 54 49.5 45
20.8 22.0 23.1 23.9 24.8 26.0 28.7
466 421 396 373 349 322 291
40.6 37.4 35.3 33.7 32.0 30.0 27.1
4.63 4.66 4.66 4.67 4.69 4.71 4.69
3.84 3.90 3.90 3.94 4.01 4.09 4.03
72.2 66.8 63.1 60.4 57.7 57.4 49.4
1.04 0.921 0.867 0.815 0.757 0.912 0.445
113 98.0 90.4 82.1 73.0 63.9 57.3
21.7 18.6 17.2 15.7 13.9 12.2 11.0
2.28 2.25 2.23 2.19 2.15 2.10 2.08
34.0 29.2 27.0 24.6 22.0 19.3 17.3
0.896 0.853 0.801 0.767 0.733 0.685 0.563
0.715 0.664 0.601 0.565 0.533 0.492 0.405
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the Tee complies with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 72
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
bf tf
yp , y
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Dimensions
k
Y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Stem
Area of Stem
Area
Depth of Tee d
Thickness tw
tw 2
Designation
in.2
in.
in.
in.
in.2
WT13.5×269.5 WT13.5×224 WT13.5×184 WT13.5×153.5 WT13.5×129 WT13.5×117.5 WT13.5×108.5 WT13.5×97 WT13.5×89 WT13.5×80.5 WT13.5×73
79.0 65.5 54.0 45.1 37.9 34.6 31.9 28.5 26.1 23.7 21.5
16.260 15.710 15.195 14.805 14.490 14.330 14.215 14.055 13.905 13.795 13.690
161⁄4 1511⁄16 153⁄16 1413⁄16 141⁄2 145⁄16 143⁄16 141⁄16 137⁄8 133⁄4 133⁄4
1.970 1.650 1.380 1.160 0.980 0.910 0.830 0.750 0.725 0.660 0.605
2 15⁄8 13⁄8 13⁄16 1 15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
1 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
32.0 25.9 21.0 17.2 14.2 13.0 11.8 10.5 10.1 9.10 8.28
WT13.5×64.5 WT13.5×57 WT13.5×51 WT13.5×47 WT13.5×42
18.9 16.8 15.0 13.8 12.4
13.815 1313⁄16 13.645 135⁄8 13.545 131⁄2 13.460 131⁄2 13.355 133⁄8
0.610 0.570 0.515 0.490 0.460
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
WT12×246 WT12×204 WT12×167.5 WT12×139.5 WT12×125 WT12×114.5 WT12×103.5 WT12×96 WT12×88 WT12×81 WT12×73 WT12×65.5 WT12×58.5 WT12×52
72.0 59.5 49.2 41.0 36.8 33.6 30.4 28.2 25.8 23.9 21.5 19.3 17.2 15.3
14.825 1413⁄16 14.270 141⁄4 13.760 133⁄4 13.365 133⁄8 13.170 133⁄16 13.010 13 12.855 127⁄8 12.735 123⁄4 12.620 125⁄8 12.500 121⁄2 12.370 123⁄8 12.240 121⁄4 12.130 121⁄8 12.030 12
1.970 1.650 1.380 1.160 1.040 0.960 0.870 0.810 0.750 0.705 0.650 0.605 0.550 0.500
2 15⁄8 13⁄8 13⁄16 11⁄16 1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
29.2 23.5 19.0 15.5 13.7 12.5 11.2 10.3 9.47 8.81 8.04 7.41 6.67 6.02
WT12×51.5 WT12×47 WT12×42 WT12×38 WT12×34
15.1 13.8 12.4 11.2 10.0
12.265 12.155 12.050 11.960 11.865
121⁄4 121⁄8 12 12 117⁄8
0.550 0.515 0.470 0.440 0.415
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
9.11 11.870 8.10 11.785
117⁄8 113⁄4
0.430 0.395
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
WT12×31 WT12×27.5
1
Flange DisThickness tance tf k
Width bf in.
in.
in.
151⁄4 15 145⁄8 141⁄2 141⁄4 141⁄4 141⁄8 14 141⁄8 14 14
3.540 2.990 2.480 2.090 1.770 1.610 1.500 1.340 1.190 1.080 0.975
39⁄16 3 21⁄2 21⁄16 13⁄4 15⁄8 11⁄2 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16 1
41⁄4 311⁄16 33⁄16 213⁄16 21⁄2 25⁄16 23⁄16 21⁄16 17⁄8 113⁄16 111⁄16
8.43 10.010 10 7.78 10.070 101⁄8 6.98 10.015 10 6.60 9.990 10 6.14 9.960 10
1.100 0.930 0.830 0.745 0.640
11⁄8 15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8
113⁄16 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 13⁄8
14.115 13.800 13.520 13.305 13.185 13.110 13.010 12.950 12.890 12.955 12.900 12.855 12.800 12.750
141⁄8 133⁄4 131⁄2 131⁄4 131⁄8 131⁄8 13 13 127⁄8 13 127⁄8 127⁄8 123⁄4 123⁄4
3.540 2.990 2.480 2.090 1.890 1.730 1.570 1.460 1.340 1.220 1.090 0.960 0.850 0.750
39⁄16 3 21⁄2 21⁄16 17⁄8 13⁄4 19⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄16 11⁄4 11⁄16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4
45⁄16 33⁄4 31⁄4 27⁄8 211⁄16 21⁄2 23⁄8 21⁄4 21⁄8 2 17⁄8 13⁄4 15⁄8 11⁄2
6.75 6.26 5.66 5.26 4.92
9.000 9.065 9.020 8.990 8.965
9 91⁄8 9 9 9
0.980 0.875 0.770 0.680 0.585
1 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
13⁄4 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 13⁄8
5.10 4.66
7.040 7.005
7 7
0.590 0.505
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
13⁄8 15⁄16
15.255 14.940 14.665 14.445 14.270 14.190 14.115 14.035 14.085 14.020 13.965
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 73
bf
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Properties
tf
k
Y
yp , y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Nominal Wt. per ft lb
Axis X-X
h tw
Qs*
Axis Y-Y
I
S
r
y
Z
yp
I
S
r
Z
in.4
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.
in.3
36
50
2.59 1060 2.19 836 1.84 655 1.56 527 1.33 430 1.22 384 1.13 352 1.02 309 0.928 278 0.845 248 0.768 222
138 112 89.3 72.9 60.2 54.2 49.9 44.1 39.4 35.4 31.7
3.66 3.57 3.48 3.42 3.37 3.33 3.32 3.29 3.26 3.24 3.21
218 176 140 113 93.3 83.8 77.0 67.9 60.8 54.5 48.8
— — — — — — — — — — 0.938
— — — — — — — 0.963 0.937 0.851 0.765
18.4 15.8 13.9 12.4 10.6
2.21 2.18 2.15 2.12 2.07
28.8 24.7 21.7 19.4 16.6
0.938 0.883 0.780 0.728 0.664
0.765 0.700 0.578 0.529 0.476
119 95.5 75.9 61.9 54.9 49.7 44.4 40.9 37.2 34.2 30.3 26.5 23.2 20.3
3.41 3.33 3.23 3.17 3.14 3.11 3.08 3.07 3.04 3.05 3.01 2.97 2.94 2.91
187 150 119 96.4 85.3 77.0 68.6 63.1 57.3 52.6 46.6 40.7 35.7 31.2
— — — — — — — — — — — — 0.960 0.874
— — — — — — — — — — 0.947 0.887 0.791 0.690
20.7 18.8 16.3 14.3 12.3
0.951 0.896 0.810 0.741 0.681
0.781 0.715 0.610 0.541 0.489
7.87 0.724 6.67 0.626
0.525 0.450
269.5 224 184 153.5 129 117.5 108.5 97 89 80.5 73
6.2 7.4 8.8 10.5 12.4 13.3 14.6 16.2 16.7 18.4 20.0
1520 1190 938 753 613 556 502 444 414 372 336
128 102 81.7 66.4 54.6 50.0 45.2 40.3 38.2 34.4 31.2
4.39 4.27 4.17 4.09 4.02 4.01 3.97 3.95 3.98 3.96 3.95
4.36 4.02 3.71 3.47 3.28 3.21 3.11 3.03 3.05 2.99 2.95
241 191 151 121 98.8 89.8 81.1 71.8 67.6 60.8 55.0
64.5 57 51 47 42
19.9 21.3 23.5 24.7 26.3
323 289 258 239 216
31.0 28.3 25.3 23.8 21.9
4.13 4.15 4.14 4.16 4.18
3.39 3.42 3.37 3.41 3.48
55.1 50.4 45.0 42.4 39.2
0.945 0.833 0.750 0.692 0.621
246 204 167.5 139.5 125 114.5 103.5 96 88 81 73 65.5 58.5 52
5.5 6.5 7.8 9.3 10.4 11.2 12.4 13.3 14.4 15.3 16.6 17.8 19.6 21.6
1130 874 685 546 478 431 382 350 319 293 264 238 212 189
105 83.1 66.3 53.6 47.2 42.9 38.3 35.2 32.2 29.9 27.2 24.8 22.3 20.0
3.96 3.83 3.73 3.65 3.61 3.58 3.55 3.53 3.51 3.50 3.50 3.52 3.51 3.51
4.07 3.74 3.42 3.18 3.05 2.97 2.87 2.80 2.74 2.70 2.66 2.65 2.62 2.59
200 157 123 98.8 86.5 78.1 69.3 63.5 57.8 53.3 48.2 43.9 39.2 35.1
2.55 2.16 1.82 1.54 1.39 1.28 1.17 1.09 1.00 0.921 0.833 0.750 0.672 0.600
51.5 47 42 38 34
19.6 20.9 22.9 24.5 26.0
204 186 166 151 137
22.0 20.3 18.3 16.9 15.6
3.67 3.67 3.67 3.68 3.70
3.01 2.99 2.97 3.00 3.06
39.2 36.1 32.5 30.1 27.9
0.841 0.764 0.685 0.622 0.560
59.7 54.5 47.2 41.3 35.2
13.3 12.0 10.5 9.18 7.85
1.99 1.98 1.95 1.92 1.87
31 27.5
25.1 27.3
131 117
15.6 14.1
3.79 3.80
3.46 3.50
28.4 25.6
1.28 1.53
17.2 14.5
4.90 4.15
1.38 1.34
92.2 79.4 69.6 62.0 52.8 837 659 513 412 362 326 289 265 240 221 195 170 149 130
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the Tee complies with LRFD Specification Sect. E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Fy, ksi
1 - 74
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
bf tf
yp , y
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Dimensions
k
Y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Stem
Area of Stem
Flange DisThickness tance tf k
Area
Depth of Tee d
Thickness tw
tw 2
Designation
in.2
in.
in.
in.
in.2
WT10.5×100.5 WT10.5×91 WT10.5×83 WT10.5×73.5 WT10.5×66 WT10.5×61 WT10.5×55.5 WT10.5×50.5
29.6 26.8 24.4 21.6 19.4 17.9 16.3 14.9
11.515 11.360 11.240 11.030 10.915 10.840 10.755 10.680
111⁄2 113⁄8 111⁄4 11 107⁄8 107⁄8 103⁄4 105⁄8
0.910 0.830 0.750 0.720 0.650 0.600 0.550 0.500
15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
1⁄
2
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
10.5 9.43 8.43 7.94 7.09 6.50 5.92 5.34
12.575 12.500 12.420 12.510 12.440 12.390 12.340 12.290
125⁄8 121⁄2 123⁄8 121⁄2 121⁄2 123⁄8 123⁄8 121⁄4
1.630 1.480 1.360 1.150 1.035 0.960 0.875 0.800
15⁄8 11⁄2 13⁄8 11⁄8 11⁄16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16
23⁄8 21⁄4 21⁄8 17⁄8 113⁄16 111⁄16 15⁄8 19⁄16
WT10.5×46.5 WT10.5×41.5 WT10.5×36.5 WT10.5×34 WT10.5×31
13.7 12.2 10.7 10.0 9.13
10.810 10.715 10.620 10.565 10.495
103⁄4 103⁄4 105⁄8 105⁄8 101⁄2
0.580 0.515 0.455 0.430 0.400
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
6.27 5.52 4.83 4.54 4.20
8.420 8.355 8.295 8.270 8.240
83⁄8 83⁄8 81⁄4 81⁄4 81⁄4
0.930 0.835 0.740 0.685 0.615
15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
111⁄16 19⁄16 11⁄2 17⁄16 13⁄8
8.37 10.530 7.36 10.415 6.49 10.330
101⁄2 103⁄8 103⁄8
0.405 0.380 0.350
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
4.26 3.96 3.62
6.555 6.530 6.500
61⁄2 61⁄2 61⁄2
0.650 0.535 0.450
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
13⁄8 15⁄16 13⁄16
WT10.5×28.5 WT10.5×25 WT10.5×22
Width bf in.
in.
in.
WT9×155.5 WT9×141.5 WT9×129 WT9×117 WT9×105.5 WT9×96 WT9×87.5 WT9×79 WT9×71.5 WT9×65
45.8 41.6 38.0 34.4 31.1 28.2 25.7 23.2 21.0 19.1
11.160 10.925 10.730 10.530 10.335 10.175 10.020 9.860 9.745 9.625
113⁄16 1015⁄16 103⁄4 101⁄2 105⁄16 103⁄16 10 97⁄8 93⁄4 95⁄8
1.520 1.400 1.280 1.160 1.060 0.960 0.890 0.810 0.730 0.670
11⁄2 13⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄16 1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
17.0 15.3 13.7 12.2 11.0 9.77 8.92 7.99 7.11 6.45
12.005 11.890 11.770 11.650 11.555 11.455 11.375 11.300 11.220 11.160
12 117⁄8 113⁄4 115⁄8 111⁄2 111⁄2 113⁄8 111⁄4 111⁄4 111⁄8
2.740 2.500 2.300 2.110 1.910 1.750 1.590 1.440 1.320 1.200
23⁄4 21⁄2 25⁄16 21⁄8 115⁄16 13⁄4 19⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄16 13⁄16
37⁄16 33⁄16 3 23⁄4 9 2 ⁄16 27⁄16 21⁄4 21⁄8 2 17⁄8
WT9×59.5 WT9×53 WT9×48.5 WT9×43 WT9×38
17.5 15.6 14.3 12.7 11.2
9.485 9.365 9.295 9.195 9.105
91⁄2 93⁄8 91⁄4 91⁄4 91⁄8
0.655 0.590 0.535 0.480 0.425
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
6.21 5.53 4.97 4.41 3.87
11.265 11.200 11.145 11.090 11.035
111⁄4 111⁄4 111⁄8 111⁄8 11
1.060 0.940 0.870 0.770 0.680
11⁄16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
13⁄4 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 13⁄8
WT9×35.5 WT9×32.5 WT9×30 WT9×27.5 WT9×25
10.4 9.55 8.82 8.10 7.33
9.235 9.175 9.120 9.055 8.995
91⁄4 91⁄8 91⁄8 9 9
0.495 0.450 0.415 0.390 0.355
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
1⁄
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
4.57 4.13 3.78 3.53 3.19
7.635 7.590 7.555 7.530 7.495
75⁄8 75⁄8 71⁄2 71⁄2 71⁄2
0.810 0.750 0.695 0.630 0.570
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16
11⁄2 17⁄16 13⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄4
WT9×23 WT9×20 WT9×17.5
6.77 5.88 5.15
9.030 8.950 8.850
9 9 87⁄8
0.360 0.315 0.300
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
3.25 2.82 2.66
6.060 6.015 6.000
6 6 6
0.605 0.525 0.425
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄8
1⁄
4 4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 75
bf
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Properties
tf
k
Y
yp , y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Nominal Wt. per ft lb
Axis X-X
h tw
Qs*
Axis Y-Y
I
S
r
y
Z
yp
I
S
r
Z
in.4
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.
in.3
36
50
43.1 38.6 35.0 30.0 26.7 24.6 22.2 20.2
3.02 3.00 2.98 2.95 2.93 2.92 2.90 2.89
66.6 59.6 53.9 46.3 41.1 37.8 34.1 30.9
— — — — — — — 0.990
— — — — — 0.993 0.917 0.826
17.4 15.3 13.3 12.2 10.9
— — 0.908 0.853 0.784
0.968 0.856 0.730 0.664 0.583
7.42 0.793 6.09 0.733 5.09 0.638
0.592 0.533 0.460
100.5 91 83 73.5 66 61 55.5 50.5
10.3 11.2 12.4 13.0 14.4 15.6 17.1 18.8
285 253 226 204 181 166 150 135
31.9 28.5 25.5 23.7 21.1 19.3 17.5 15.8
3.10 3.07 3.04 3.08 3.06 3.04 3.03 3.01
2.57 2.48 2.39 2.39 2.33 2.28 2.23 2.18
58.6 52.1 46.3 42.4 37.6 34.3 31.0 27.9
1.18 1.07 0.984 0.864 0.780 0.724 0.662 0.605
271 241 217 188 166 152 137 124
46.5 41.5 36.5 34 31
16.2 18.2 20.6 21.8 23.5
144 127 110 103 93.8
17.9 15.7 13.8 12.9 11.9
3.25 3.22 3.21 3.20 3.21
2.74 2.66 2.60 2.59 2.58
31.8 28.0 24.4 22.9 21.1
0.812 0.728 0.647 0.606 0.554
46.4 40.7 35.3 32.4 28.7
11.0 9.75 8.51 7.83 6.97
1.84 1.83 1.81 1.80 1.77
28.5 25 22
23.2 24.7 26.8
90.4 80.3 71.1
11.8 10.7 9.68
3.29 3.30 3.31
2.85 2.93 2.98
21.2 20.8 17.6
0.638 0.771 1.06
15.3 12.5 10.3
4.67 3.82 3.18
1.35 1.30 1.26
155.5 141.5 129 117 105.5 96 87.5 79 71.5 65
5.3 5.7 6.3 6.9 7.5 8.3 9.0 9.9 11.0 11.9
383 337 298 260 229 202 181 160 142 127
46.5 41.5 37.0 32.6 29.0 25.8 23.4 20.8 18.5 16.7
2.89 2.85 2.80 2.75 2.72 2.68 2.66 2.63 2.60 2.58
2.93 2.80 2.68 2.55 2.44 2.34 2.26 2.18 2.09 2.02
90.6 80.1 71.0 62.4 55.0 48.5 43.6 38.5 34.0 30.5
1.91 1.75 1.61 1.48 1.34 1.23 1.13 1.02 0.938 0.856
59.5 53 48.5 43 38
12.3 13.6 15.0 16.7 18.9
119 104 93.8 82.4 71.8
15.9 14.1 12.7 11.2 9.83
2.60 2.59 2.56 2.55 2.54
2.03 1.97 1.91 1.86 1.80
28.7 25.2 22.6 19.9 17.3
0.778 126 0.695 110 0.640 100 0.570 87.6 0.505 76.2
35.5 32.5 30 27.5 25
16.2 17.8 19.3 20.6 22.6
78.2 70.7 64.7 59.5 53.5
11.2 10.1 9.29 8.63 7.79
2.74 2.72 2.71 2.71 2.70
2.26 2.20 2.16 2.16 2.12
20.0 18.0 16.5 15.3 13.8
0.683 0.629 0.583 0.538 0.489
30.1 27.4 25.0 22.5 20.0
23 20 17.5
22.3 25.5 26.8
52.1 44.8 40.1
7.77 6.73 6.21
2.77 2.76 2.79
2.33 2.29 2.39
13.9 12.0 12.0
0.558 0.489 0.450
11.3 9.55 7.67
398 352 314 279 246 220 196 174 156 139
Fy, ksi
66.2 59.2 53.4 47.9 42.7 38.4 34.4 30.7 27.7 24.9
2.95 2.91 2.88 2.85 2.82 2.79 2.76 2.74 2.72 2.70
104 92.5 83.2 74.5 66.2 59.4 53.1 47.4 42.7 38.3
— — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — —
22.5 19.7 18.0 15.8 13.8
2.69 2.66 2.65 2.63 2.61
34.6 30.2 27.6 24.2 21.1
— — — — 0.990
— — — 0.937 0.826
7.89 7.22 6.63 5.97 5.35
1.70 1.69 1.69 1.67 1.65
12.3 — 11.2 — 10.3 0.964 9.27 0.913 8.29 0.823
0.963 0.877 0.796 0.735 0.625
3.72 3.17 2.56
1.29 1.27 1.22
5.85 0.831 4.97 0.690 4.03 0.638
0.635 0.496 0.460
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the Tee complies with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 76
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
bf tf
yp , y
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Dimensions
k
Y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Stem
Area of Stem
Flange DisThickness tance tf k
Area
Depth of Tee d
Thickness tw
tw 2
Designation
in.2
in.
in.
in.
in.2
WT8×50 WT8×44.5 WT8×38.5 WT8×33.5
14.7 13.1 11.3 9.84
8.485 8.375 8.260 8.165
81⁄2 83⁄8 81⁄4 81⁄8
0.585 0.525 0.455 0.395
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
4.96 4.40 3.76 3.23
10.425 10.365 10.295 10.235
103⁄8 103⁄8 101⁄4 101⁄4
0.985 0.875 0.760 0.665
1 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
111⁄16 19⁄16 17⁄16 13⁄8
WT8×28.5 WT8×25 WT8×22.5 WT8×20 WT8×18
8.38 7.37 6.63 5.89 5.28
8.215 8.130 8.065 8.005 7.930
81⁄4 81⁄8 81⁄8 8 77⁄8
0.430 0.380 0.345 0.305 0.295
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
3.53 3.09 2.78 2.44 2.34
7.120 7.070 7.035 6.995 6.985
71⁄8 71⁄8 7 7 7
0.715 0.630 0.565 0.505 0.430
11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
13⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄4 13⁄16 11⁄8
WT8×15.5 WT8×13
4.56 3.84
7.940 7.845
8 77⁄8
0.275 0.250
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
1⁄
2.18 1.96
5.525 5.500
51⁄2 51⁄2
0.440 0.345
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
11⁄8 11⁄16
3.740 3.070 2.830 2.595 2.380 2.190 2.015
33⁄4 31⁄16 213⁄16 25⁄8 23⁄8 23⁄16 2
17⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄8 1
42.7 34.4 30.6 27.1 24.1 21.5 19.2
18.560 17.890 17.650 17.415 17.200 17.010 16.835
181⁄2 177⁄8 175⁄8 173⁄8 171⁄4 17 167⁄8
5.120 4.910 4.520 4.160 3.820 3.500 3.210
51⁄8 415⁄16 41⁄2 43⁄16 313⁄16 31⁄2 33⁄16
513⁄16 59⁄16 53⁄16 413⁄16 41⁄2 43⁄16 37⁄8
1.875 1.770 1.655 1.540 1.410 1.290 1.175 1.070 0.980 0.890 0.830 0.745 0.680
17⁄8 13⁄4 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16 1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
15⁄
17.5 16.2 14.8 13.5 12.1 10.8 9.62 8.58 7.70 6.89 6.32 5.58 5.03
16.695 16.590 16.475 16.360 16.230 16.110 15.995 15.890 15.800 15.710 15.650 15.565 15.500
163⁄4 165⁄8 161⁄2 163⁄8 161⁄4 161⁄8 16 157⁄8 153⁄4 153⁄4 155⁄8 155⁄8 151⁄2
3.035 2.845 2.660 2.470 2.260 2.070 1.890 1.720 1.560 1.440 1.310 1.190 1.090
31⁄16 27⁄8 211⁄16 21⁄2 21⁄4 21⁄16 17⁄8 13⁄4 19⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16
311⁄16 31⁄2 35⁄16 31⁄8 215⁄16 23⁄4 29⁄16 23⁄8 21⁄4 21⁄8 2 17⁄8 13⁄4
WT7×404 WT8×365 WT8×332.5 WT8×302.5 WT8×275 WT8×250 WT8×227.5
119 107 97.8 88.9 80.9 73.5 66.9
WT7×213 WT8×199 WT8×185 WT8×171 WT8×155.5 WT8×141.5 WT8×128.5 WT8×116.5 WT8×105.5 WT8×96.5 WT8×88 WT8×79.5 WT8×72.5
62.6 58.5 54.4 50.3 45.7 41.6 37.8 34.2 31.0 28.4 25.9 23.4 21.3
11.420 117⁄16 11.210 111⁄4 10.820 107⁄8 10.460 101⁄2 10.120 101⁄8 9.800 93⁄4 9.510 91⁄2 9.335 9.145 8.960 8.770 8.560 8.370 8.190 8.020 7.860 7.740 7.610 7.490 7.390
93⁄8 91⁄8 9 83⁄4 81⁄2 83⁄8 81⁄4 8 77⁄8 73⁄4 75⁄8 71⁄2 73⁄8
1⁄
7⁄
13⁄
13⁄ 3⁄
8 8
16 8 16 16
4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
Width bf in.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
in.
in.
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 77
bf
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Properties
tf
k
Y
yp , y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Nominal Wt. per ft lb
Axis X-X
h tw
Qs*
Axis Y-Y
I
S
r
y
Z
yp
I
S
r
Z
in.4
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.
in.3
36
50
17.9 15.7 13.4 11.6
2.51 2.49 2.47 2.46
27.4 24.0 20.5 17.7
— — — —
— — 0.988 0.861
— 0.990 0.904 0.784 0.754
0.942 0.826 0.725 0.583 0.553
50 44.5 38.5 33.5
12.1 13.5 15.6 18.0
76.8 67.2 56.9 48.6
11.4 10.1 8.59 7.36
2.28 2.27 2.24 2.22
1.76 1.70 1.63 1.56
20.7 18.1 15.3 13.0
0.706 0.631 0.549 0.481
93.1 81.3 69.2 59.5
28.5 25 22.5 20 18
16.5 18.7 20.6 23.3 24.1
48.7 42.3 37.8 33.1 30.6
7.77 6.78 6.10 5.35 5.05
2.41 2.40 2.39 2.37 2.41
1.94 1.89 1.86 1.81 1.88
13.8 12.0 10.8 9.43 8.93
0.589 0.521 0.471 0.421 0.378
21.6 18.6 16.4 14.4 12.2
15.5 13
25.8 28.4
27.4 23.5
4.64 4.09
2.45 2.47
2.02 2.09
404 365 332.5 302.5 275 250 227.5
1.5 1.9 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
898 739 622 524 442 375 321
116 95.4 82.1 70.6 60.9 52.7 45.9
2.75 2.62 2.52 2.43 2.34 2.26 2.19
3.70 3.47 3.25 3.05 2.85 2.67 2.51
213 199 185 171 155.5 141.5 128.5 116.5 105.5 96.5 88 79.5 72.5
3.0 3.2 3.4 3.7 4.0 4.4 4.9 5.3 5.8 6.4 6.9 7.7 8.4
287 257 229 203 176 153 133 116 102 89.8 80.5 70.2 62.5
41.4 37.6 33.9 30.4 26.7 23.5 20.7 18.2 16.2 14.4 13.0 11.4 10.2
2.14 2.10 2.05 2.01 1.96 1.92 1.88 1.84 1.81 1.78 1.76 1.73 1.71
2.40 2.30 2.19 2.09 1.97 1.86 1.75 1.65 1.57 1.49 1.43 1.35 1.29
8.27 0.413 8.12 0.372 249 211 182 157 136 117 102 91.7 82.9 74.4 66.2 57.7 50.4 43.9 38.2 33.4 29.4 26.3 22.8 20.2
3.19 3.00 2.77 2.55 2.35 2.16 1.99
6.20 4.80 2760 2360 2080 1840 1630 1440 1280
1.88 1180 1.76 1090 1.65 994 1.54 903 1.41 807 1.29 722 1.18 645 1.08 576 0.980 513 0.903 466 0.827 419 0.751 374 0.688 338
Fy, ksi
6.06 5.26 4.67 4.12 3.50
1.60 1.59 1.57 1.57 1.52
9.43 8.16 7.23 6.37 5.42
2.24 1.74
1.17 1.12
3.52 0.668 0.479 2.74 0.563 0.406
297 264 236 211 189 169 152
4.82 4.69 4.62 4.55 4.49 4.43 4.38
463 408 365 326 292 261 234
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
141 131 121 110 99.4 89.7 80.7 72.5 65.0 59.3 53.5 48.1 43.7
4.34 4.31 4.27 4.24 4.20 4.17 4.13 4.10 4.07 4.05 4.02 4.00 3.98
217 201 185 169 152 137 123 110 99.0 90.2 81.4 73.0 66.3
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the Tee complies with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 78
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
bf tf
yp , y
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Dimensions
k
Y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Stem
Designation
Area of Stem
Flange DisThickness tance tf k
Area
Depth of Tee d
Thickness tw
tw 2
in.2
in.
in.
in.
in.2
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
4.73 4.27 3.76 3.43 3.08
14.725 14.670 14.605 14.565 14.520
143⁄4 145⁄8 145⁄8 145⁄8 141⁄2
1.030 0.940 0.860 0.780 0.710
1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
111⁄16 15⁄8 19⁄16 17⁄16 13⁄8
1⁄
10.130 101⁄8 10.070 101⁄8 10.035 10 9.995 10
0.855 0.785 0.720 0.645
7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8
15⁄8 19⁄16 11⁄2 17⁄16
Width bf in.
in.
in.
WT7×66 WT7×60 WT7×54.5 WT7×49.5 WT7×45
19.4 17.7 16.0 14.6 13.2
7.330 7.240 7.160 7.080 7.010
73⁄8 71⁄4 71⁄8 71⁄8 7
0.645 0.590 0.525 0.485 0.440
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
WT7×41 WT7×37 WT7×34 WT7×30.5
12.0 10.9 9.99 8.96
7.155 7.085 7.020 6.945
71⁄8 71⁄8 7 7
0.510 0.450 0.415 0.375
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
3.65 3.19 2.91 2.60
WT7×26.5 WT7×24 WT7×21.5
7.81 7.07 6.31
6.960 6.895 6.830
7 67⁄8 67⁄8
0.370 0.340 0.305
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
2.58 2.34 2.08
8.060 8.030 7.995
8 8 8
0.660 0.595 0.530
11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2
17⁄16 13⁄8 15⁄16
WT7×19 WT7×17 WT7×15
5.58 5.00 4.42
7.050 6.990 6.920
7 7 67⁄8
0.310 0.285 0.270
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
2.19 1.99 1.87
6.770 6.745 6.730
63⁄4 63⁄4 63⁄4
0.515 0.455 0.385
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
11⁄16 1 15⁄ 16
WT7×13 WT7×11
3.85 3.25
6.955 6.870
7 67⁄8
0.255 0.230
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
1⁄
1.77 1.58
5.025 5.000
5 5
0.420 0.335
7⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
15⁄
1⁄
1⁄
4 4
8 8
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7⁄
16 8
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 79
bf
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Properties
tf
k
Y
yp , y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Nominal Wt. per ft
Axis X-X
h tw
S
I 4
r 3
y
Z
yp 3
S
I 4
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
66 60 54.5 49.5 45
8.8 9.7 10.9 11.8 13.0
57.8 51.7 45.3 40.9 36.4
9.57 8.61 7.56 6.88 6.16
1.73 1.71 1.68 1.67 1.66
1.29 1.24 1.17 1.14 1.09
18.6 16.5 14.4 12.9 11.5
0.658 0.602 0.549 0.500 0.456
41 37 34 30.5
11.2 12.7 13.7 15.2
41.2 36.0 32.6 28.9
7.14 6.25 5.69 5.07
1.85 1.82 1.81 1.80
1.39 1.32 1.29 1.25
13.2 11.5 10.4 9.16
0.594 0.541 0.498 0.448
74.2 66.9 60.7 53.7
26.5 24 21.5
15.4 16.8 18.7
27.6 24.9 21.9
4.94 4.48 3.98
1.88 1.87 1.86
1.38 1.35 1.31
8.87 8.00 7.05
0.484 0.440 0.395
28.8 25.7 22.6
19 17 15
19.8 21.5 22.7
23.3 20.9 19.0
4.22 3.83 3.55
2.04 2.04 2.07
1.54 1.53 1.58
7.45 6.74 6.25
0.412 0.371 0.329
13 11
24.1 26.7
17.3 14.8
3.31 2.91
2.12 2.14
1.72 1.76
5.89 5.20
0.383 0.325
lb
Qs*
Axis Y-Y
in.
r 3
Z
Fy, ksi 3
in.
in.
in.
36
50
37.2 33.7 30.6 27.6 25.0
3.76 3.74 3.73 3.71 3.70
56.6 51.2 46.4 41.8 37.8
— — — — —
— — — — —
14.6 13.3 12.1 10.7
2.48 2.48 2.46 2.45
22.4 20.3 18.5 16.4
— — — —
— — — 0.973
7.16 6.40 5.65
1.92 1.91 1.89
11.0 9.82 8.66
— — 0.947
0.958 0.882 0.775
13.3 11.7 9.79
3.94 3.45 2.91
1.55 1.53 1.49
6.07 5.32 4.49
0.934 0.857 0.810
0.760 0.669 0.610
4.45 3.50
1.77 1.40
1.08 1.04
2.77 2.19
0.737 0.621
0.537 0.447
274 247 223 201 181
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the Tee complies with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 80
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
bf tf
yp , y
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Dimensions
k
Y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Stem
Designation
Area of Stem
Area
Depth of Tee d
Thickness tw
tw 2
in.2
in.
in.
in.
in.2 14.9 13.3 12.1 10.7 9.67 8.68 7.62 6.73 5.96 5.30 4.66 3.93 3.50 3.23 2.91 2.63 2.36
WT6×168 WT6×152.5 WT6×139.5 WT6×126 WT6×115 WT6×105 WT6×95 WT6×85 WT6×76 WT6×68 WT6×60 WT6×53 WT6×48 WT6×43.5 WT6×39.5 WT6×36 WT6×32.5
49.4 44.8 41.0 37.0 33.9 30.9 27.9 25.0 22.4 20.0 17.6 15.6 14.1 12.8 11.6 10.6 9.54
8.410 8.160 7.925 7.705 7.525 7.355 7.190 7.015 6.855 6.705 6.560 6.445 6.355 6.265 6.190 6.125 6.060
83⁄8 81⁄8 77⁄8 73⁄4 71⁄2 73⁄8 71⁄4 7 67⁄8 63⁄4 61⁄2 61⁄2 63⁄8 61⁄4 61⁄4 61⁄8 6
1.775 1.625 1.530 1.395 1.285 1.180 1.060 0.960 0.870 0.790 0.710 0.610 0.550 0.515 0.470 0.430 0.390
13⁄4 15⁄8 11⁄2 13⁄8 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
WT6×29 WT6×26.5
8.52 7.78
6.095 6.030
61⁄8 6
0.360 0.345
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
WT6×25 WT6×22.5 WT6×20
7.34 6.61 5.89
6.095 6.030 5.970
61⁄8 6 6
0.370 0.335 0.295
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
WT6×17.5 WT6×15 WT6×13
5.17 4.40 3.82
6.250 6.170 6.110
61⁄4 61⁄8 61⁄8
0.300 0.260 0.230
WT6×11 WT6×9.5 WT6×8 WT6×7
3.24 2.79 2.36 2.08
6.155 6.080 5.995 5.955
61⁄8 61⁄8 6 6
0.260 0.235 0.220 0.200
Flange DisThickness tance tf k
Width bf in.
in.
in.
133⁄8 131⁄4 131⁄8 13 127⁄8 123⁄4 125⁄8 125⁄8 121⁄2 123⁄8 123⁄8 121⁄4 121⁄8 121⁄8 121⁄8 12 12
2.955 2.705 2.470 2.250 2.070 1.900 1.735 1.560 1.400 1.250 1.105 0.990 0.900 0.810 0.735 0.670 0.605
215⁄16 211⁄16 21⁄2 21⁄4 21⁄16 17⁄8 13⁄4 19⁄16 13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄8 1 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
311⁄16 37⁄16 33⁄16 215⁄16 23⁄4 25⁄8 27⁄16 21⁄4 21⁄8 115⁄16 113⁄16 111⁄16 15⁄8 11⁄2 17⁄16 13⁄8 15⁄16
2.19 10.010 2.08 9.995
10 10
0.640 0.575
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16
13⁄8 11⁄4
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
2.26 2.02 1.76
8.080 8.045 8.005
81⁄8 8 8
0.640 0.575 0.515
5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
13⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄4
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
1.88 1.60 1.41
6.560 6.520 6.490
61⁄2 61⁄2 61⁄2
0.520 0.440 0.380
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
1.60 1.43 1.32 1.19
4.030 4.005 3.990 3.970
4 4 4 4
0.425 0.350 0.265 0.225
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16
13.385 13.235 13.140 13.005 12.895 12.790 12.670 12.570 12.480 12.400 12.320 12.220 12.160 12.125 12.080 12.040 12.000
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 81
bf
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Properties
tf
k
Y
yp , y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Nominal Wt. per ft
Axis X-X
h tw
S
I 4
r 3
y
Qs*
Axis Y-Y
Z
yp 3
S
I 4
r 3
Z
Fy, ksi 3
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
36
50
168 152.5 139.5 126 115 105 95 85 76 68 60 53 48 43.5 39.5 36 32.5
2.7 3.0 3.2 3.5 3.8 4.1 4.6 5.1 5.6 6.1 6.8 8.0 8.8 9.4 10.3 11.3 12.4
190 162 141 121 106 92.1 79.0 67.8 58.5 50.6 43.4 36.3 32.0 28.9 25.8 23.2 20.6
31.2 27.0 24.1 20.9 18.5 16.4 14.2 12.3 10.8 9.46 8.22 6.91 6.12 5.60 5.03 4.54 4.06
1.96 1.90 1.86 1.81 1.77 1.73 1.68 1.65 1.62 1.59 1.57 1.53 1.51 1.50 1.49 1.48 1.47
2.31 2.16 2.05 1.92 1.82 1.72 1.62 1.52 1.43 1.35 1.28 1.19 1.13 1.10 1.06 1.02 0.985
68.4 59.1 51.9 44.8 39.4 34.5 29.8 25.6 22.0 19.0 16.2 13.6 11.9 10.7 9.49 8.48 7.50
1.84 1.69 1.56 1.42 1.31 1.21 1.10 0.994 0.896 0.805 0.716 0.637 0.580 0.527 0.480 0.439 0.398
593 525 469 414 371 332 295 259 227 199 172 151 135 120 108 97.5 87.2
88.6 79.3 71.3 63.6 57.5 51.9 46.5 41.2 36.4 32.1 28.0 24.7 22.2 19.9 17.9 16.2 14.5
3.47 3.42 3.38 3.34 3.31 3.28 3.25 3.22 3.19 3.16 3.13 3.11 3.09 3.07 3.05 3.04 3.02
137 122 110 97.9 88.4 79.7 71.3 63.0 55.6 49.0 42.7 37.5 33.7 30.2 27.2 24.6 22.0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
29 26.5
13.5 14.1
19.1 17.7
3.76 3.54
1.50 1.51
1.03 1.02
6.97 0.426 6.46 0.389
53.5 47.9
10.7 9.58
2.51 2.48
16.3 14.6
— —
— —
25 22.5 20
13.1 14.5 16.5
18.7 16.6 14.4
3.79 3.39 2.95
1.60 1.58 1.57
1.17 1.13 1.08
6.90 0.454 6.12 0.411 5.30 0.368
28.2 25.0 22.0
6.97 6.21 5.51
1.96 1.94 1.93
10.7 9.50 8.41
— — —
— 0.998 0.887
17.5 15 13
18.1 20.9 23.6
16.0 13.5 11.7
3.23 2.75 2.40
1.76 1.75 1.75
1.30 1.27 1.25
5.71 0.394 4.83 0.337 4.20 0.295
12.2 10.2 8.66
3.73 3.12 2.67
1.54 1.52 1.51
5.73 4.78 4.08
— 0.856 0.891 0.710 0.767 0.565
11 9.5 8 7
20.9 23.1 24.7 27.2
11.7 10.1 8.70 7.67
2.59 2.28 2.04 1.83
1.90 1.90 1.92 1.92
1.63 1.65 1.74 1.76
4.63 4.11 3.72 3.32
2.33 1.88 1.41 1.18
1.16 0.939 0.706 0.594
0.847 0.822 0.773 0.753
1.83 1.49 1.13 0.950
0.891 0.797 0.741 0.626
lb
0.402 0.348 0.639 0.760
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the Tee complies with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
0.710 0.596 0.541 0.450
1 - 82
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
bf tf
yp , y
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Dimensions
k
Y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Stem
Designation
Area of Stem
Area
Depth of Tee d
Thickness tw
tw 2
in.2
in.
in.
in.
in.2
Flange DisThickness tance tf k
Width bf in.
in.
in.
WT5×56 WT5×50 WT5×44 WT5×38.5 WT5×34 WT5×30 WT5×27 WT5×24.5
16.5 14.7 12.9 11.3 9.99 8.82 7.91 7.21
5.680 5.550 5.420 5.300 5.200 5.110 5.045 4.990
55⁄8 51⁄2 53⁄8 51⁄4 51⁄4 51⁄8 5 5
0.755 0.680 0.605 0.530 0.470 0.420 0.370 0.340
3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
4.29 3.77 3.28 2.81 2.44 2.15 1.87 1.70
10.415 10.340 10.265 10.190 10.130 10.080 10.030 10.000
103⁄8 103⁄8 101⁄4 101⁄4 101⁄8 101⁄8 10 10
1.250 1.120 0.990 0.870 0.770 0.680 0.615 0.560
11⁄4 11⁄8 1 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16
17⁄8 13⁄4 15⁄8 11⁄2 13⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄4 13⁄16
WT5×22.5 WT5×19.5 WT5×16.5
6.63 5.73 4.85
5.050 4.960 4.865
5 5 47⁄8
0.350 0.315 0.290
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
1.77 1.56 1.41
8.020 7.985 7.960
8 8 8
0.620 0.530 0.435
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
11⁄4 11⁄8 11⁄16
WT5×15 WT5×13 WT5×11
4.42 3.81 3.24
5.235 5.165 5.085
51⁄4 51⁄8 51⁄8
0.300 0.260 0.240
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
1.57 1.34 1.22
5.810 5.770 5.750
53⁄4 53⁄4 53⁄4
0.510 0.440 0.360
1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4
WT5×9.5 WT5×8.5 WT5×7.5 WT5×6
2.81 2.50 2.21 1.77
5.120 5.055 4.995 4.935
51⁄8 5 5 47⁄8
0.250 0.240 0.230 0.190
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
1.28 1.21 1.15 0.938
4.020 4.010 4.000 3.960
4 4 4 4
0.395 0.330 0.270 0.210
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 83
bf
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Properties
tf
k
Y
yp , y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Nominal Wt. per ft lb
Axis X-X
h tw
Qs*
Axis Y-Y
I
S
r
y
Z
yp
I
S
r
Z
in.4
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.
in.3
0.791 118 0.711 103 0.631 89.3 0.555 76.8 0.493 66.8 0.438 58.1 0.395 51.7 0.361 46.7
22.6 20.0 17.4 15.1 13.2 11.5 10.3 9.34
2.68 2.65 2.63 2.60 2.59 2.57 2.56 2.54
6.65 5.64 4.60
Fy, ksi 36
50
34.6 30.5 26.5 22.9 20.0 17.5 15.7 14.2
— — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — —
2.01 1.98 1.94
10.1 8.59 7.01
— — —
— — —
56 50 44 38.5 34 30 27 24.5
5.2 5.8 6.5 7.4 8.4 9.4 10.6 11.6
28.6 24.5 20.8 17.4 14.9 12.9 11.1 10.0
6.40 5.56 4.77 4.04 3.49 3.04 2.64 2.39
1.32 1.29 1.27 1.24 1.22 1.21 1.19 1.18
1.21 1.13 1.06 0.990 0.932 0.884 0.836 0.807
13.4 11.4 9.65 8.06 6.85 5.87 5.05 4.52
22.5 19.5 16.5
11.2 12.5 13.6
10.2 8.84 7.71
2.47 2.16 1.93
1.24 1.24 1.26
0.907 0.876 0.869
4.65 3.99 3.48
0.413 0.359 0.305
15 13 11
14.8 17.0 18.4
9.28 7.86 6.88
2.24 1.91 1.72
1.45 1.44 1.46
1.10 1.06 1.07
4.01 3.39 3.02
0.380 0.330 0.282
8.35 7.05 5.71
2.87 2.44 1.99
1.37 1.36 1.33
4.42 3.75 3.05
— — 0.999
— 0.902 0.836
17.7 18.4 19.2 23.3
6.68 6.06 5.45 4.35
1.74 1.62 1.50 1.22
1.54 1.56 1.57 1.57
1.28 1.32 1.37 1.36
3.10 2.90 3.03 2.50
0.349 0.311 0.306 0.323
2.15 1.78 1.45 1.09
1.07 0.888 0.723 0.551
0.874 0.844 0.810 0.785
1.68 — 1.40 — 1.15 0.977 0.872 0.793
0.872 0.841 0.811 0.592
9.5 8.5 7.5 6
26.7 22.5 18.3
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the Tee complies with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 84
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
bf tf
yp , y
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Dimensions
k
Y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Stem
Area of Stem
Flange DisThickness tance tf k
Area
Depth of Tee d
Thickness tw
tw 2
Designation
in.2
in.
in.
in.
in.2
WT4×33.5 WT4×29 WT4×24 WT4×20 WT4×17.5 WT4×15.5
9.84 8.55 7.05 5.87 5.14 4.56
4.500 4.375 4.250 4.125 4.060 4.000
41⁄2 43⁄8 41⁄4 41⁄8 4 4
0.570 0.510 0.400 0.360 0.310 0.285
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
2.56 2.23 1.70 1.48 1.26 1.14
8.280 8.220 8.110 8.070 8.020 7.995
81⁄4 81⁄4 81⁄8 81⁄8 8 8
0.935 0.810 0.685 0.560 0.495 0.435
15⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16
17⁄16 15⁄16 13⁄16 11⁄16 1 15⁄ 16
WT4×14 WT4×12
4.12 3.54
4.030 3.965
4 4
0.285 0.245
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
1.15 0.971
6.535 6.495
61⁄2 61⁄2
0.465 0.400
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8
WT4×10.5 WT4×9
3.08 2.63
4.140 4.070
41⁄8 41⁄8
0.250 0.230
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
1.03 0.936
5.270 5.250
51⁄4 51⁄4
0.400 0.330
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
WT4×7.5 WT4×6.5 WT4×5
2.22 1.92 1.48
4.055 3.995 3.945
4 4 4
0.245 0.230 0.170
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
0.993 0.919 0.671
4.015 4.000 3.940
4 4 4
0.315 0.255 0.205
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
3⁄ 4 11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
WT3×12.5 WT4×10 WT4×7.5
3.67 2.94 2.21
3.190 3.100 2.995
31⁄4 31⁄8 3
0.320 0.260 0.230
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
1.02 0.806 0.689
6.080 6.020 5.990
61⁄8 6 6
0.455 0.365 0.260
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8
WT3×8 WT4×6 WT4×4.5
2.37 1.78 1.34
3.140 3.015 2.950
31⁄8 3 3
0.260 0.230 0.170
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
0.816 0.693 0.502
4.030 4.000 3.940
4 4 4
0.405 0.280 0.215
3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16
WT2.5×9.5 WT4.5×8
2.77 2.34
2.575 2.505
25⁄8 21⁄2
0.270 0.240
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
0.695 0.601
5.030 5.000
5 5
0.430 0.360
7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
WT2×6.5
1.91
2.080
21⁄8
0.280
1⁄ 4
1⁄ 8
0.582
4.060
4
0.345
3⁄ 8
11⁄ 16
Width bf in.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
in.
in.
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 85
bf
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from W shapes Properties
tf
k
Y
yp , y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Nominal Wt. per ft lb
Axis X-X
h tw
Qs*
Axis Y-Y
I
S
r
y
Z
yp
I
S
r
Z
in.4
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.
in.3
36
Fy, ksi 50
33.5 29 24 20 17.5 15.5
5.6 6.2 7.9 8.8 10.2 11.1
10.9 9.12 6.85 5.73 4.81 4.28
3.05 2.61 1.97 1.69 1.43 1.28
1.05 1.03 0.986 0.988 0.967 0.968
0.936 0.874 0.777 0.735 0.688 0.667
6.29 5.25 3.94 3.25 2.71 2.39
0.594 0.520 0.435 0.364 0.321 0.285
44.3 37.5 30.5 24.5 21.3 18.5
10.7 9.13 7.52 6.08 5.31 4.64
2.12 2.10 2.08 2.04 2.03 2.02
16.3 13.9 11.4 9.25 8.06 7.04
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
14 12
11.1 12.9
4.22 3.53
1.28 1.08
1.01 0.999
0.734 0.695
2.38 1.98
0.315 0.273
10.8 9.14
3.31 2.81
1.62 1.61
5.05 4.29
— —
— —
10.5 9
13.8 15.0
3.90 3.41
1.18 1.05
1.12 1.14
0.831 0.834
2.11 1.86
0.292 0.251
4.89 3.98
1.85 1.52
1.26 1.23
2.84 2.33
— —
— —
7.5 6.5 5
14.0 15.0 20.2
3.28 2.89 2.15
1.07 0.974 0.717
1.22 1.23 1.20
0.998 1.03 0.953
1.91 1.74 1.27
0.276 0.240 0.188
1.70 1.37 1.05
0.849 0.876 0.683 0.843 0.532 0.841
1.33 — 1.08 — 0.828 0.913
12.5 10 7.5
7.8 9.6 10.8
2.28 1.76 1.41
0.886 0.693 0.577
0.789 0.774 0.797
0.610 0.560 0.558
1.68 1.29 1.03
0.302 0.244 0.185
8.53 6.64 4.66
2.81 2.21 1.56
4.28 3.36 2.37
— — —
— — —
8 6 4.5
9.6 10.8 14.6
1.69 0.685 1.32 0.564 0.950 0.408
0.844 0.861 0.842
0.676 0.677 0.623
1.25 1.01 0.720
0.294 0.222 0.170
2.21 1.50 1.10
1.10 0.966 0.748 0.918 0.557 0.905
1.70 1.16 0.858
— — —
— — —
9.5 8
7.0 7.9
1.01 0.485 0.850 0.413
0.605 0.601
0.487 0.458
0.967 0.798
0.275 0.234
4.56 3.75
1.82 1.50
1.28 1.27
2.76 2.29
— —
— —
6.5
5.3
0.530 0.321
0.524
0.440
0.616
0.236
1.93
0.950 1.00
1.46
—
—
1.52 1.50 1.45
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the Tee complies with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
— — 0.735
1 - 86
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
bf tf
yp , y
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from M shapes Dimensions
k
Y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Designation
Area
Depth of Tee d
in.2
in.
Flange
Stem Area of Thickness tw 2 Stem tw
in.
in.
in.
1.73 1.59
6.000 5.990
6 6
0.177 0.160
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 16
1.06 3.065 0.958 3.065
31⁄8 31⁄8
0.225 0.210
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
— 1⁄ 2
MT5×4.5 MT5×4
1.32 1.18
5.000 4.980
5 5
0.157 0.141
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 16
0.785 2.690 0.702 2.690
23⁄4 23⁄4
0.206 0.182
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
9⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
3⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
— 3⁄ 8
MT4×3.25
0.958 4.000
4
0.135
1⁄ 8
1⁄ 16
0.540 2.281
21⁄4
0.189
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 16
—
0.316
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 16
0.790 5.003
5
0.416
7⁄ 16
7⁄ 8
7⁄ 16
7⁄ 8
2.500 21⁄2
in.
in.2
MT6×5.9 MT6×5.4
MT2.5×9.45* 2.78
in.
Width bf in.
Max. DisFlge. FasThickness tance Grip tener tf k in.
*This shape has tapered flanges, while all other MT shapes have parallel flanges.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 87
bf
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from M shapes Properties
tf
k
Y
yp , y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Nominal Wt. per ft lb
Axis X-X
h tw
Qs*
Axis Y-Y
I
S
r
y
Z
yp
I
S
r
Z
in.4
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.
in.3
36
Fy, ksi 50
5.9 5.4
31.3 31.8
6.60 6.03
1.60 1.46
1.95 1.95
1.89 1.85
2.89 2.63
1.09 1.01
0.490 0.453
0.320 0.295
0.532 0.533
0.577 0.525
0.483 0.397
0.348 0.286
4.5 4
29.2 29.7
3.46 3.09
0.997 0.893
1.62 1.62
1.53 1.52
1.81 1.62
0.778 0.778
0.305 0.269
0.227 0.200
0.480 0.477
0.405 0.333
0.549 0.446
0.396 0.321
3.25
26.9
1.57
0.556
1.28
1.17
1.01
0.446
0.172
0.150
0.423
0.265
0.634
0.457
9.45
5.6
1.05
0.527
0.615
0.511
1.03
0.278
3.93
1.57
1.19
2.66
—
—
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the Tee complies with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 88
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
bf tf y, yp
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from S shapes Dimensions
grip
Y
X
X
d
tw
Y
Designation
Area
Depth of Tee d
in.2
in.
Flange
Stem Area of Thickness tw 2 Stem tw
Width bf
Max. DisFlge. FasThickness tance Grip tener tf k
in.
in.2
in.
in.
in.
7 13⁄ 16 ⁄16 5⁄ 5⁄ 8 16
9.80 7.60
8.050 8 7.870 77⁄8
1.090 1.090
11⁄16 11⁄16
2 2
11⁄8 11⁄8
1 1
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
8.94 7.50 6.00
7.245 71⁄4 7.125 71⁄8 7.000 7
0.870 0.870 0.870
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
13⁄4 13⁄4 13⁄4
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
1 1 1
7 13⁄ 16 ⁄16 3⁄ 11⁄ 16 8
8.12 6.70
7.200 71⁄4 7.060 7
0.920 0.920
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16
13⁄4 13⁄4
15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16
1 1
in.
in.
in.
in.
ST12×60.5 ST12×53
17.8 15.6
12.250 121⁄4 12.250 121⁄4
0.800 0.620
ST12×50 ST12×45 ST12×40
14.7 13.2 11.7
12.000 12.000 12.000
0.745 0.625 0.500
ST10×48 ST10×43
14.1 12.7
10.150 101⁄8 10.150 101⁄8
0.800 0.660
ST10×37.5 ST10×33
11.0 9.70
10.000 10.000
10 10
0.635 0.505
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
6.35 5.05
6.385 63⁄8 6.225 61⁄4
0.795 0.795
13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16
15⁄8 15⁄8
13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
ST9×35 ST9×27.35
10.3 8.04
9.000 9.000
9 9
0.711 0.461
11⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4
6.40 4.15
6.251 61⁄4 6.001 6
0.691 0.691
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
11⁄2 11⁄2
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
12 12 12
3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2
ST7.5×25 ST7.5×21.45
7.35 6.31
7.500 71⁄2 7.500 71⁄2
0.550 0.411
9⁄
16
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
4.13 3.08
5.640 55⁄8 5.501 51⁄2
0.622 0.622
5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
13⁄8 13⁄8
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
ST6×25 ST6×20.4
7.35 6.00
6.000 6.000
6 6
0.687 0.462
11⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
3⁄ 8 1⁄ 4
4.12 2.77
5.477 51⁄2 5.252 51⁄4
0.659 0.659
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
17⁄16 17⁄16
11⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
ST6×17.5 ST6×15.9
5.15 4.68
6.000 6.000
6 6
0.428 0.350
7⁄
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
2.57 2.10
5.078 51⁄8 5.000 5
0.545 0.544
9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
13⁄16 13⁄16
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
ST5×17.5 ST5×12.7
5.15 3.73
5.000 5.000
5 5
0.594 0.311
16
5⁄ 16 3⁄ 16
2.97 1.56
4.944 5 4.661 45⁄8
0.491 0.491
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
11⁄8 11⁄8
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
ST4×11.5 ST4×9.2
3.38 2.70
4.000 4.000
4 4
0.441 0.271
7⁄
16 1⁄ 4
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 8
1.76 1.08
4.171 41⁄8 4.001 4
0.425 0.425
7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
1 1
7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
ST3×8.625 ST3×6.25
2.53 1.83
3.000 3.000
3 3
0.465 0.232
7⁄
16 1⁄ 4
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 8
1.40 0.70
3.565 35⁄8 3.332 33⁄8
0.359 0.359
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8
5⁄ 8 —
ST2.5×5
1.47
2.500 21⁄2
0.214
3⁄
16
1⁄ 8
0.535 3.004
0.326
5⁄ 16
13⁄ 16
5⁄ 16
—
ST2×4.75 ST2×3.85
1.40 1.13
2.000 2.000
0.326 0.193
5⁄
16
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
0.652 2.796 23⁄4 0.386 2.663 25⁄8
0.293 0.293
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
5⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
— —
ST1.5×3.75 ST1.5×2.85
1.10 0.835
1.500 11⁄2 1.500 11⁄2
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
0.523 2.509 21⁄2 0.255 2.330 23⁄8
0.260 0.260
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
11⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4
— —
2 2
0.349 0.170
7⁄
16
16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 8
5⁄
3⁄
16
3⁄ 8
3⁄
16
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL TEES (WT, MT, ST)
1 - 89
bf
STRUCTURAL TEES Cut from S shapes Properties
tf
grip
Y
y, yp
X
X
d
tw
Y
Nominal Wt. per ft lb
Axis X-X
h tw
Qs*
Axis Y-Y
I
S
r
y
Z
yp
I
S
r
Z
in.4
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.
in.3
60.5 53
13.2 17
259 216
30.1 24.1
3.82 3.72
3.63 3.28
54.5 43.3
1.28 1.03
41.7 38.5
10.4 9.80
1.53 1.57
18.1 16.6
50 45 40
14.1 16.8 21.1
215 190 162
26.3 22.6 18.7
3.83 3.79 3.72
3.84 3.60 3.29
47.5 41.1 33.6
2.20 23.8 1.48 22.5 0.922 21.1
6.58 6.31 6.04
1.27 1.30 1.34
12.0 11.2 10.4
48 43
10.8 13.1
143 125
20.3 17.2
3.18 3.14
3.13 2.91
36.9 31.1
1.40 25.1 0.985 23.4
6.97 6.63
1.33 1.36
12.5 11.6
37.5 33
13.6 17
109 93.1
15.8 12.9
3.15 3.10
3.07 2.81
28.6 23.4
1.40 14.9 0.855 13.8
4.66 4.43
1.16 1.19
35 27.35
10.9 16.8
84.7 62.4
14.0 9.61
2.87 2.79
2.94 2.50
25.1 17.3
1.81 12.1 0.747 10.4
3.86 3.47
25 21.45
11.6 15.5
40.6 33.0
7.73 6.00
2.35 2.29
2.25 2.01
14.0 10.8
0.872 0.613
7.85 7.19
25 20.4
7 10.3
25.2 18.9
6.05 4.28
1.85 1.78
1.84 1.58
11.0 7.71
0.770 0.581
17.5 15.9
11.7 14.3
17.2 14.9
3.95 3.31
1.83 1.78
1.64 1.51
7.12 5.94
17.5 12.7
6.9 13.2
12.5 7.83
3.63 2.06
1.56 1.45
1.56 1.20
11.5 9.2
7.3 11.8
5.03 3.51
1.77 1.15
1.22 1.14
5 10
8.63 6.25
Fy, ksi 36
50
— —
— 0.907
— — — 0.937 0.878 0.695 — —
— —
8.37 7.70
— —
— 0.907
1.08 1.14
7.21 6.07
— —
— 0.922
2.78 2.61
1.03 1.07
5.01 4.54
— —
— 0.988
7.85 6.78
2.87 2.58
1.03 1.06
5.19 4.45
— —
— —
0.548 0.485
4.94 4.68
1.95 1.87
0.980 1.00
3.41 3.22
— —
— —
6.58 3.70
0.702 0.408
4.18 3.39
1.69 1.46
0.901 0.954
3.11 2.49
— —
— —
1.15 0.941
3.19 2.07
0.447 0.341
2.15 1.86
1.03 0.798 0.932 0.831
1.84 1.59
— —
— —
2.13 1.27
1.02 0.917 0.914 0.552 0.833 0.691
1.85 1.01
0.401 0.275
1.15 0.911
0.648 0.675 0.547 0.705
1.18 0.929
— —
— —
5
8.7
0.681
0.353 0.681 0.569
0.650 0.243
0.608
0.405 0.643
0.685
—
—
4.75 3.85
4.3 7.3
0.470 0.316
0.325 0.580 0.553 0.203 0.528 0.448
0.592 0.255 0.381 0.209
0.451 0.382
0.323 0.569 0.287 0.581
0.566 0.483
— —
— —
3.75 2.85
2.8 5.7
0.204 0.118
0.191 0.430 0.432 0.101 0.376 0.329
0.351 0.223 0.196 0.175
0.293 0.227
0.234 0.516 0.195 0.522
0.412 0.327
— —
— —
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the Tee complies with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 90
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
DOUBLE ANGLES
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DOUBLE ANGLES
1 - 91
DOUBLE ANGLES
Properties of double angles in contact and separated are listed in the following tables. Each table shows properties of double angles in contact, and the radius of gyration about the Y-Y axis when the legs of the angles are separated. Values of Qs are given for Fy = 36 ksi and Fy = 50 ksi for those angles exceeding the width-thickness ratio λr of LRFD Specification Section B5. Since the cross section is comprised entirely of unstiffened elements, Qa = 1.0 and Q = Qs, for all _angle sections. The Flexural-Torsional Properties Table lists the dimensional values (J, ro, and H) needed for checking flexural-torsional buckling. Use of Table
The table may be used as follows for checking the limit states of (1) flexural buckling and (2) flexural-torsional buckling. The lower of the two limit states must be used for design. See also Part 3 of this LRFD Manual. (1) Flexural Buckling
Where no value of Qs is shown, the design compressive strength for this limit state is given by LRFD Specification Section E2. Where a value of Qs is shown, the strength must be reduced in accordance with Appendix B5 of the LRFD Specification. (2) Flexural-Torsional Buckling
The design compressive strength for this limit state_ is given by LRFD Specification Sections E3 and E4. This involves calculations with J, ro, and H. These torsional constants can be obtained by summing the respective values for single angles listed in the Flexural-Torsional Properties Tables in Part 1 of this Manual.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 92
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y X
X
DOUBLE ANGLES Two equal leg angles Properties of sections
y, yp
s Y
Wt. Area of per ft 2 Angles 2 Angles Designation
2
Axis X-X
S
I 4
in.
r 3
y
Z
yp 3
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
L8×8×11⁄8 L8×8×1 L8×8×17⁄8 L8×8×13⁄4 L8×8×15⁄8 L8×8×11⁄2
114 102 90.0 77.8 65.4 52.8
33.5 30.0 26.5 22.9 19.2 15.5
195 177 159 139 118 97.3
35.1 31.6 28.0 24.4 20.6 16.7
2.42 2.44 2.45 2.47 2.49 2.50
2.41 2.37 2.32 2.28 2.23 2.19
63.2 56.9 50.5 43.9 37.1 30.1
1.05 0.938 0.827 0.715 0.601 0.484
L6×6×1 L8×8×17⁄8 L8×8×13⁄4 L8×8×15⁄8 L8×8×11⁄2 L8×8×13⁄8
74.8 66.2 57.4 48.4 39.2 29.8
22.0 19.5 16.9 14.2 11.5 8.72
70.9 63.8 56.3 48.3 39.8 30.8
17.1 15.3 13.3 11.3 9.23 7.06
1.80 1.81 1.83 1.84 1.86 1.88
1.86 1.82 1.78 1.73 1.68 1.64
30.9 27.5 24.0 20.4 16.6 12.7
0.917 0.811 0.703 0.592 0.479 0.363
L5×5×7⁄8 L5×5×3⁄4 L5×5×1⁄2 L5×5×3⁄8 L5×5×5⁄16
54.4 47.2 32.4 24.6 20.6
16.0 13.9 9.50 7.22 6.05
35.5 31.5 22.5 17.5 14.8
10.3 9.06 6.31 4.84 4.08
1.49 1.51 1.54 1.56 1.57
1.57 1.52 1.43 1.39 1.37
18.7 16.3 11.4 8.72 7.35
0.798 0.694 0.475 0.361 0.303
L4×4×3⁄4 L5×5×5⁄8 L5×5×1⁄2 L5×5×3⁄8 L5×5×5⁄16 L5×5×1⁄4
37.0 31.4 25.6 19.6 16.4 13.2
10.9 9.22 7.50 5.72 4.80 3.88
15.3 13.3 11.1 8.72 7.43 6.08
5.62 4.80 3.95 3.05 2.58 2.09
1.19 1.20 1.22 1.23 1.24 1.25
1.27 1.23 1.18 1.14 1.12 1.09
10.1 8.66 7.12 5.49 4.64 3.77
0.680 0.576 0.469 0.357 0.300 0.242
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DOUBLE ANGLES
1 - 93
DOUBLE ANGLES Two equal leg angles Properties of sections
Y X
X
y, yp
s Y
Qs*
Axis Y-Y Radii of Gyration Back to Back of Angles, in.
Angles in Contact
Angles Separated
0
3⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
L8×8×11⁄8 L8×8×1 L8×8×17⁄8 L8×8×13⁄4 L8×8×15⁄8 L8×8×11⁄2
3.42 3.40 3.38 3.36 3.34 3.32
3.55 3.53 3.51 3.49 3.47 3.45
3.69 3.67 3.64 3.62 3.60 3.58
— — — — — 0.995
— — — — — 0.921
— — — — 0.997 0.911
— — — — 0.935 0.834
L6×6×1 L8×8×17⁄8 L8×8×13⁄4 L8×8×15⁄8 L8×8×11⁄2 L8×8×13⁄8
2.59 2.57 2.55 2.53 2.51 2.49
2.73 2.70 2.68 2.66 2.64 2.62
2.87 2.85 2.82 2.80 2.78 2.75
— — — — — 0.995
— — — — — 0.921
— — — — — 0.911
— — — — 0.961 0.834
L5×5×7⁄8 L5×5×3⁄4 L5×5×1⁄2 L5×5×3⁄8 L5×5×5⁄16
2.16 2.14 2.10 2.09 2.08
2.30 2.28 2.24 2.22 2.21
2.45 2.42 2.38 2.35 2.34
— — — — 0.995
— — — — 0.921
— — — 0.982 0.911
— — — 0.919 0.834
L4×4×3⁄4 L5×5×5⁄8 L5×5×1⁄2 L5×5×3⁄8 L5×5×5⁄16 L5×5×1⁄4
1.74 1.72 1.70 1.68 1.67 1.66
1.88 1.86 1.83 1.81 1.80 1.79
2.03 2.00 1.98 1.95 1.94 1.93
— — — — — 0.995
— — — — — 0.921
— — — — 0.997 0.911
— — — — 0.935 0.834
Designation
*Where no value ofQs is shown, the angles comply with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 94
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
DOUBLE ANGLES Two equal leg angles Properties of sections
Y X
X
y, yp
s Y
Wt. Area of per ft 2 Angles 2 Angles 2
Axis X-X
S
I 4
r 3
y
Z
yp 3
Designation
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
L31⁄2×31⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×31⁄2×5⁄16 L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄4
17.0 14.4 11.6
4.97 4.18 3.38
5.73 4.90 4.02
2.30 1.95 1.59
1.07 1.08 1.09
1.01 0.990 0.968
4.15 3.52 2.86
0.355 0.299 0.241
L3×3×1⁄2 L3×3×3⁄8 L3×3×5⁄16 L3×3×1⁄4 L3×3×3⁄16
18.8 14.4 12.2 9.80 7.42
5.50 4.22 3.55 2.88 2.18
4.43 3.52 3.02 2.49 1.92
2.14 1.67 1.41 1.15 0.882
0.898 0.913 0.922 0.930 0.939
0.932 0.888 0.865 0.842 0.820
3.87 3.00 2.55 2.08 1.59
0.458 0.352 0.296 0.240 0.182
L21⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×31⁄2×5⁄16 L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄4 L31⁄2×31⁄2×3⁄16
11.8 10.0 8.20 6.14
3.47 2.93 2.38 1.80
1.97 1.70 1.41 1.09
1.13 0.964 0.789 0.606
0.753 0.761 0.769 0.778
0.762 0.740 0.717 0.694
2.04 1.74 1.42 1.09
0.347 0.293 0.238 0.180
9.40 7.84 6.38 4.88 3.30
2.72 2.30 1.88 1.43 0.960
0.958 0.832 0.695 0.545 0.380
0.702 0.681 0.494 0.381 0.261
0.594 0.601 0.609 0.617 0.626
0.636 0.614 0.592 0.569 0.546
1.27 1.08 0.890 0.686 0.471
0.340 0.288 0.234 0.179 0.121
L2×2×3⁄8 L3×3×5⁄16 L3×3×1⁄4 L3×3×3⁄16 L3×3×1⁄8
in.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DOUBLE ANGLES
1 - 95
DOUBLE ANGLES Two equal leg angles Properties of sections
Y X
X
y, yp
s Y
Qs*
Axis Y-Y Radii of Gyration
Angles in Contact
Angles Separated
3⁄ 4
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
Back to Back of Angles, in. 3⁄ 8
Designation
0
L31⁄2×31⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×31⁄2×5⁄16 L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄4
1.48 1.47 1.46
1.61 1.60 1.59
1.75 1.74 1.73
— — —
— — 0.982
— — 0.965
— 0.986 0.897
L3×3×1⁄2 L3×3×3⁄8 L3×3×5⁄16 L3×3×1⁄4 L3×3×3⁄16
1.29 1.27 1.26 1.26 1.25
1.43 1.41 1.40 1.39 1.38
1.59 1.56 1.55 1.53 1.52
— — — — 0.995
— — — — 0.921
— — — — 0.911
— — — 0.961 0.834
L21⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄8 L21⁄2×21⁄2×5⁄16 L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4 L21⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄16
1.07 1.06 1.05 1.04
1.21 1.20 1.19 1.18
1.36 1.35 1.34 1.32
— — — —
— — — —
— — — 0.982
— — — 0.919
L2×2×3⁄8 L2×2×5⁄16 L2×2×1⁄4 L2×2×3⁄16 L2×2×1⁄8
0.870 0.859 0.849 0.840 0.831
1.01 1.00 0.989 0.977 0.965
1.17 1.16 1.14 1.13 1.11
— — — — 0.995
— — — — 0.921
— — — — 0.911
— — — — 0.834
*Where no value ofQs is shown, the angles comply with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 96
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
DOUBLE ANGLES Two unequal leg angles Properties of sections
Y X
X
y, yp
s
Long legs back to back
Y
Wt. Area of per ft 2 Angles 2 Angles Designation
2
Axis X-X
S
I 4
in.
r 3
y
Z
yp 3
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
L8×6×1 L8×6×13⁄4 L8×6×11⁄2
88.4 67.6 46.0
26.0 19.9 13.5
161 126 88.6
30.2 23.3 16.0
2.49 2.53 2.56
2.65 2.56 2.47
54.5 42.2 29.1
1.50 1.38 1.25
L8×4×1 L8×6×13⁄4 L8×6×11⁄2
74.8 57.4 39.2
22.0 16.9 11.5
139 109 77.0
28.1 21.8 15.0
2.52 2.55 2.59
3.05 2.95 2.86
48.5 37.7 26.1
2.50 2.38 2.25
L7×4×3⁄4 L7×4×1⁄2 L7×4×3⁄8
52.4 35.8 27.2
15.4 10.5 7.97
75.6 53.3 41.1
16.8 11.6 8.88
2.22 2.25 2.27
2.51 2.42 2.37
29.6 20.6 15.7
1.88 1.75 1.69
L6×4×3⁄4 L7×4×5⁄8 L7×4×1⁄2 L7×4×3⁄8
47.2 40.0 32.4 24.6
13.9 11.7 9.50 7.22
49.0 42.1 34.8 26.9
12.5 10.6 8.67 6.64
1.88 1.90 1.91 1.93
2.08 2.03 1.99 1.94
22.3 19.0 15.6 11.9
1.38 1.31 1.25 1.19
L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
23.4 19.6
6.84 5.74
25.7 21.8
6.49 5.47
1.94 1.95
2.04 2.01
11.5 9.70
1.44 1.41
L5×31⁄2×3⁄4 L6×31⁄2×1⁄2 L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
39.6 27.2 20.8 17.4
11.6 8.00 6.09 5.12
27.8 20.0 15.6 13.2
8.55 5.97 4.59 3.87
1.55 1.58 1.60 1.61
1.75 1.66 1.61 1.59
15.3 10.8 8.28 6.99
1.13 1.00 0.938 0.906
L5×3×1⁄2 L7×4×3⁄8 L7×4×5⁄16 L7×4×1⁄4
25.6 19.6 16.4 13.2
7.50 5.72 4.80 3.88
18.9 14.7 12.5 10.2
5.82 4.47 3.77 3.06
1.59 1.61 1.61 1.62
1.75 1.70 1.68 1.66
10.3 7.95 6.71 5.45
1.25 1.19 1.16 1.13
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DOUBLE ANGLES
1 - 97
DOUBLE ANGLES Two unequal leg angles Properties of sections
Y X
X
y, yp
s
Long legs back to back Y
Qs*
Axis Y-Y Radii of Gyration Back to Back of Angles, in.
Angles in Contact
Angles Separated
0
3⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
L8×6×1 L8×6×13⁄4 L8×6×11⁄2
2.39 2.35 2.32
2.52 2.48 2.44
2.66 2.62 2.57
— — —
— — —
— — 0.911
— — 0.834
L8×4×1 L8×4×13⁄4 L8×4×11⁄2
1.47 1.42 1.38
1.61 1.55 1.51
1.75 1.69 1.64
— — —
— — —
— — 0.911
— — 0.834
L7×4×3⁄4 L7×4×1⁄2 L7×4×3⁄8
1.48 1.44 1.43
1.62 1.57 1.55
1.76 1.71 1.68
— — —
— — —
— 0.965 0.839
— 0.897 0.750
L6×4×3⁄4 L7×4×5⁄8 L7×4×1⁄2 L7×4×3⁄8
1.55 1.53 1.51 1.5
1.69 1.67 1.64 1.62
1.83 1.81 1.78 1.76
— — — —
— — — —
— — — 0.911
— — 0.961 0.834
L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
1.26 1.26
1.39 1.38
1.53 1.51
— —
— —
0.911 0.825
0.834 0.733
L5×31⁄2×3⁄4 L6×31⁄2×1⁄2 L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
1.40 1.35 1.34 1.33
1.53 1.49 1.46 1.45
1.68 1.63 1.60 1.59
— — — —
— — — —
— — 0.982 0.911
— — 0.919 0.834
L5×3×1⁄2 L7×4×3⁄8 L7×4×5⁄16 L7×4×1⁄4
1.12 1.10 1.09 1.08
1.25 1.23 1.22 1.21
1.40 1.37 1.36 1.34
— — — —
— — — —
— 0.982 0.911 0.804
— 0.919 0.834 0.708
Designation
*Where no value of Qs is shown the angles comply with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 98
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
DOUBLE ANGLES Two unequal leg angles Properties of sections
Y X
X
y, yp
s
Long legs back to back
Y
Wt. Area of per ft 2 Angles 2 Angles Designation
2
Axis X-X
S
I 4
in.
r 3
y
Z
yp 3
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
L4×31⁄2×1⁄2 L4×31⁄2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4
23.8 18.2 15.4 12.4
7.00 5.34 4.49 3.63
10.6 8.35 7.12 5.83
3.87 2.99 2.53 2.05
1.23 1.25 1.26 1.27
1.25 1.21 1.18 1.16
7.00 5.42 4.59 3.73
0.500 0.438 0.406 0.375
L4×3×1⁄2 L4×3×3⁄8 L4×3×5⁄16 L4×3×1⁄4
22.2 17.0 14.4 11.6
6.50 4.97 4.18 3.38
10.1 7.93 6.76 5.54
3.78 2.92 2.47 2.00
1.25 1.26 1.27 1.28
1.33 1.28 1.26 1.24
6.81 5.28 4.47 3.63
0.750 0.688 0.656 0.625
L31⁄2×3×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4
15.8 13.2 10.8
4.59 3.87 3.13
5.45 4.66 3.83
2.25 1.91 1.55
1.09 1.10 1.11
1.08 1.06 1.04
4.08 3.46 2.82
0.438 0.406 0.375
L31⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4
14.4 9.80
4.22 2.88
5.12 3.60
2.19 1.51
1.10 1.12
1.16 1.11
3.94 2.73
0.688 0.625
L3×21⁄2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16
13.2 9.00 6.77
3.84 2.63 1.99
3.31 2.35 1.81
1.62 1.12 0.859
0.928 0.945 0.954
0.956 0.911 0.888
2.93 2.04 1.56
0.438 0.375 0.344
L3×2×3⁄8 L4×3×5⁄16 L4×3×1⁄4 L4×3×3⁄16
11.8 10.0 8.20 6.14
3.47 2.93 2.38 1.80
3.06 2.63 2.17 1.68
1.56 1.33 1.08 0.830
0.940 0.948 0.957 0.966
1.04 1.02 0.993 0.970
2.79 2.38 1.95 1.49
0.688 0.656 0.625 0.594
L21⁄2×2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4 L4×31⁄2×3⁄16
10.6 9.00 7.24 5.50
3.09 2.62 2.13 1.62
1.82 1.58 1.31 1.02
1.09 0.932 0.763 0.586
0.768 0.776 0.784 0.793
0.831 0.809 0.787 0.764
1.97 1.69 1.38 1.06
0.438 0.406 0.375 0.344
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DOUBLE ANGLES
1 - 99
DOUBLE ANGLES Two unequal leg angles Properties of sections
Y X
X
y, yp
s
Long legs back to back Y
Qs*
Axis Y-Y Radii of Gyration
Angles in Contact
Angles Separated
3⁄ 4
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
Back to Back of Angles, in. Designation
0
3⁄ 8
L4×31⁄2×1⁄2 L4×31⁄2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4
1.44 1.42 1.42 1.41
1.58 1.56 1.55 1.54
1.72 1.70 1.69 1.67
— — — —
— — — 0.982
— — 0.997 0.911
— — 0.935 0.834
L4×3×1⁄2 L4×3×3⁄8 L4×3×5⁄16 L4×3×1⁄4
1.20 1.18 1.17 1.16
1.33 1.31 1.30 1.29
1.48 1.45 1.44 1.43
— — — —
— — — —
— — 0.997 0.911
— — 0.935 0.834
L31⁄2×3×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4
1.22 1.21 1.20
1.36 1.35 1.33
1.50 1.49 1.48
— — —
— — —
— — 0.965
— 0.986 0.897
L31⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4
0.976 0.958
1.11 1.09
1.26 1.23
— —
— —
— 0.965
— 0.897
L3×21⁄2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16
1.02 1.00 0.993
1.16 1.13 1.12
1.31 1.28 1.27
— — —
— — —
— — 0.911
— 0.961 0.834
L3×2×3⁄8 L4×3×5⁄16 L4×3×1⁄4 L4×3×3⁄16
0.777 0.767 0.757 0.749
0.917 0.903 0.891 0.879
1.07 1.06 1.04 1.03
— — — —
— — — —
— — — 0.911
— — 0.961 0.834
L21⁄2×2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4 L4×31⁄2×3⁄16
0.819 0.809 0.799 0.790
0.961 0.948 0.935 0.923
1.12 1.10 1.09 1.07
— — — —
— — — —
— — — 0.982
— — — 0.919
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the angles comply with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 100
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
DOUBLE ANGLES Two unequal leg angles Properties of sections
Y X
X
y, yp
s
Short legs back to back
Y
Wt. Area of per ft 2 Angles 2 Angles Designation
2
Axis X-X
S
I 4
in.
r 3
y
Z
yp 3
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
L8×6×1 L8×6×13⁄4 L8×6×11⁄2
88.4 67.6 46.0
26.0 19.9 13.5
77.6 61.4 43.4
17.8 13.8 9.58
1.73 1.76 1.79
1.65 1.56 1.47
32.4 24.9 17.0
0.813 0.621 0.422
L8×4×1 L8×6×13⁄4 L8×6×11⁄2
74.8 57.4 39.2
22.0 16.9 11.5
23.3 18.7 13.5
7.88 6.14 4.29
1.03 1.05 1.08
1.05 0.953 0.859
15.4 11.6 7.80
0.688 0.527 0.359
L7×4×3⁄4 L5×3×1⁄2 L5×3×3⁄8
52.4 35.8 27.2
15.4 10.5 7.97
18.1 13.1 10.2
6.05 4.23 3.26
1.09 1.11 1.13
1.01 0.917 0.870
11.3 7.66 5.80
0.549 0.375 0.285
L6×4×3⁄4 L5×3×5⁄8 L5×3×1⁄2 L5×3×3⁄8
47.2 40.0 32.4 24.6
13.9 11.7 9.50 7.22
17.4 15.0 12.5 9.81
5.94 5.07 4.16 3.21
1.12 1.13 1.15 1.17
1.08 1.03 0.987 0.941
10.9 9.24 7.50 5.71
0.578 0.488 0.396 0.301
L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
23.4 19.6
6.84 5.74
6.68 5.70
2.46 2.08
0.988 0.996
0.787 0.763
4.41 3.70
0.285 0.239
L5×31⁄2×3⁄4 L6×31⁄2×1⁄2 L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
39.6 27.2 20.8 17.4
11.6 8.00 6.09 5.12
11.1 8.10 6.37 5.44
4.43 3.12 2.41 2.04
0.977 1.01 1.02 1.03
0.996 0.906 0.861 0.838
8.20 5.65 4.32 3.63
0.581 0.400 0.305 0.256
L5×3×1⁄2 L5×3×3⁄8 L5×3×5⁄16 L5×3×1⁄4
25.6 19.6 16.4 13.2
7.50 5.72 4.80 3.88
5.16 4.08 3.49 2.88
2.29 1.78 1.51 1.23
0.829 0.845 0.853 0.861
0.750 0.704 0.681 0.657
4.22 3.21 2.69 2.17
0.375 0.286 0.240 0.194
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DOUBLE ANGLES
1 - 101
DOUBLE ANGLES Two unequal leg angles Properties of sections
Y X
X
y, yp
s
Short legs back to back
Y
Qs*
Axis Y-Y Radii of Gyration Back to Back of Angles, in.
Angles in Contact
Angles Separated
0
3⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
L8×6×1 L8×6×13⁄4 L8×6×11⁄2
3.64 3.60 3.56
3.78 3.74 3.69
3.92 3.88 3.83
— — 0.995
— — 0.921
— — 0.911
— — 0.834
L8×4×1 L8×4×13⁄4 L8×4×11⁄2
3.95 3.90 3.86
4.10 4.05 4.00
4.25 4.19 4.14
— — 0.995
— — 0.921
— — 0.911
— — 0.834
L7×4×3⁄4 L7×4×1⁄2 L7×4×3⁄8
3.35 3.30 3.28
3.49 3.44 3.42
3.64 3.59 3.56
— — 0.926
— 0.982 0.838
— 0.965 0.839
0.897 0.750
L6×4×3⁄4 L7×4×5⁄8 L7×4×1⁄2 L7×4×3⁄8
2.80 2.78 2.76 2.74
2.94 2.92 2.90 2.87
3.09 3.06 3.04 3.02
— — — 0.995
— — — 0.921
— — — 0.911
— — 0.961 0.834
L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
2.81 2.80
2.95 2.94
3.09 3.08
0.995 0.912
0.921 0.822
0.911 0.825
0.834 0.733
L5×31⁄2×3⁄4 L6×31⁄2×1⁄2 L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
2.33 2.29 2.27 2.26
2.48 2.43 2.41 2.39
2.63 2.57 2.55 2.54
— — — 0.995
— — — 0.921
— — 0.982 0.911
— — 0.919 0.834
L5×3×1⁄2 L5×3×3⁄8 L5×3×5⁄16 L5×3×1⁄4
2.36 2.34 2.33 2.32
2.50 2.48 2.47 2.46
2.65 2.63 2.61 2.60
— — 0.995 0.891
— — 0.921 0.797
— 0.982 0.911 0.804
— 0.919 0.834 0.708
Designation
*Where no value of Qs is shown, the angles comply with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 102
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
DOUBLE ANGLES Two unequal leg angles Properties of sections
Y X
X
y, yp
s
Short legs back to back
Y
Wt. Area of per ft 2 Angles 2 Angles Designation
2
Axis X-X
S
I 4
in.
r 3
y
Z
yp 3
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
L4×31⁄2×1⁄2 L4×31⁄2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4
23.8 18.2 15.4 12.4
7.00 5.34 4.49 3.63
7.58 5.97 5.10 4.19
3.03 2.35 1.99 1.62
1.04 1.06 1.07 1.07
1.00 0.955 0.932 0.909
5.47 4.21 3.56 2.89
0.438 0.334 0.281 0.227
L4×3×1⁄2 L3×2×3⁄8 L3×2×5⁄16 L3×2×1⁄4
22.2 17.0 14.4 11.6
6.50 4.97 4.18 3.38
4.85 3.84 3.29 2.71
2.23 1.73 1.47 1.20
0.864 0.879 0.887 0.896
0.827 0.782 0.759 0.736
4.06 3.11 2.63 2.13
0.406 0.311 0.261 0.211
L31⁄2×3×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4
15.8 13.2 10.8
4.59 3.87 3.13
3.69 3.17 2.61
1.70 1.44 1.18
0.897 0.905 0.914
0.830 0.808 0.785
3.06 2.59 2.10
0.328 0.276 0.223
L31⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4
14.4 9.80
4.22 2.88
2.18 1.55
1.18 0.824
0.719 0.735
0.660 0.614
2.15 1.47
0.301 0.205
L3×21⁄2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4 L4×31⁄2×3⁄16
13.2 9.00 6.77
3.84 2.63 1.99
2.08 1.49 1.15
1.16 0.808 0.620
0.736 0.753 0.761
0.706 0.661 0.638
2.10 1.45 1.11
0.320 0.219 0.166
L3×2×3⁄8 L3×2×5⁄16 L3×2×1⁄4 L3×2×3⁄16
11.8 10.0 8.20 6.14
3.47 2.93 2.38 1.80
1.09 0.941 0.784 0.613
0.743 0.634 0.520 0.401
0.559 0.567 0.574 0.583
0.539 0.516 0.493 0.470
1.37 1.16 0.937 0.713
0.289 0.244 0.198 0.150
L21⁄2×2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4 L4×31⁄2×3⁄16
10.6 9.00 7.24 5.50
3.09 2.62 2.13 1.62
1.03 0.893 0.745 0.583
0.725 0.620 0.509 0.392
0.577 0.584 0.592 0.600
0.581 0.559 0.537 0.514
1.32 1.12 0.915 0.701
0.309 0.262 0.213 0.162
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DOUBLE ANGLES
1 - 103
DOUBLE ANGLES Two unequal leg angles Properties of sections
Y X
X
y, yp
s
Short legs back to back
Y
Qs*
Axis Y-Y Radii of Gyration Back to Back of Angles, in.
Angles in Contact
Angles Separated
0
3⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
L4×31⁄2×1⁄2 L4×31⁄2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4
1.76 1.74 1.73 1.72
1.89 1.87 1.86 1.85
2.04 2.01 2.00 1.99
— — — 0.995
— — — 0.921
— — 0.997 0.911
— — 0.935 0.834
L4×3×1⁄2 L3×2×3⁄8 L3×2×5⁄16 L3×2×1⁄4
1.82 1.80 1.79 1.78
1.96 1.94 1.93 1.92
2.11 2.08 2.07 2.06
— — — 0.995
— — — 0.921
— — 0.997 0.911
— — 0.935 0.834
L31⁄2×3×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4
1.53 1.52 1.52
1.67 1.66 1.65
1.82 1.80 1.79
— — —
— — 0.982
— — 0.965
— 0.986 0.897
L31⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4
1.60 1.58
1.74 1.72
1.89 1.86
— —
— 0.982
— 0.965
— 0.897
L3×21⁄2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4 L4×31⁄2×3⁄16
1.33 1.31 1.30
1.47 1.45 1.44
1.62 1.60 1.58
— — 0.995
— — 0.921
— — 0.911
— 0.961 0.834
L3×2×3⁄8 L3×2×5⁄16 L3×2×1⁄4 L3×2×3⁄16
1.40 1.39 1.38 1.37
1.55 1.53 1.52 1.51
1.70 1.68 1.67 1.66
— — — 0.995
— — — 0.921
— — — 0.911
— — 0.961 0.834
L21⁄2×2×3⁄8 L4×31⁄2×5⁄16 L4×31⁄2×1⁄4 L4×31⁄2×3⁄16
1.13 1.12 1.11 1.10
1.28 1.26 1.25 1.24
1.43 1.42 1.40 1.39
— — — —
— — — —
— — — 0.982
— — — 0.911
Designation
*Where no value of Qs is shown the angles comply with LRFD Specification Section E2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 104
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
COMBINATION SECTIONS
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMBINATION SECTIONS
1 - 105
COMBINATION SECTIONS
Standard rolled shapes are frequently combined to produce efficient and economical structural members for special applications. Experience has established a demand for certain combinations. When properly sized and connected to satisfy the design and specification criteria, these members may be used as struts, lintels, eave struts, and light crane and trolley runways. The W section with channel attached to the web is not recommended for use as a trolley or crane runway member. Properties of several combined sections are tabulated for those combinations that experience has proven to be in popular demand.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 106
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
COMBINATION SECTIONS W shapes and channels Properties of sections
Y
y
2
X
X
y , yp 1
Y
Beam
Channel
Axis X-X
Total Weight per ft
Total Area
lb
in.2
I
S1 = I / y1
S2 = I / y2
r
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
W12×26 W ×26
C10×15.3 C12×20.7
41.3 46.7
12.14 13.74
299 318
36.3 36.8
70.5 82.2
4.96 4.81
W14×30 W ×30
C10×15.3 C12×20.7
45.3 50.7
13.34 14.94
420 448
46.1 46.8
84.6 98.3
5.61 5.47
W16×36 W ×36
C12×20.7 C15×33.9
56.7 69.9
16.69 20.56
670 748
62.8 64.6
123 160
6.34 6.03
W18×50 W ×50
C12×20.7 C15×33.9
70.7 83.9
20.79 24.66
1120 1250
97.4 100
166 211
7.34 7.11
W21×62 W ×62 W ×68 W ×68
C12×20.7 C15×33.9 C12×20.7 C15×33.9
82.7 95.9 88.7 101.9
24.39 28.26 26.09 29.96
1800 2000 1960 2180
138 142 152 156
218 272 232 287
8.59 8.41 8.68 8.52
W24×68 W ×68 W ×84 W ×84
C12×20.7 C15×33.9 C12×20.7 C15×33.9
88.7 101.9 104.7 117.9
26.19 30.06 30.79 34.66
2450 2720 3040 3340
168 173 212 217
258 321 303 368
9.67 9.50 9.93 9.82
W27×84 W ×94
C15×33.9 C15×33.9
117.9 127.9
34.76 37.66
4050 4530
237 268
404 436
10.8 11.0
W30×99 W ×99 W ×116 W ×116
C15×33.9 C18×42.7 C15×33.9 C18×42.7
132.9 141.7 149.9 158.7
39.06 41.70 44.16 46.80
5540 5830 6590 6900
300 304 360 365
480 533 544 599
11.9 11.8 12.2 12.1
W33×118 W ×118 W ×141 W ×141
C15×33.9 C18×42.7 C15×33.9 C18×42.7
151.9 160.7 174.9 183.7
44.66 47.30 51.56 54.20
7900 8280 9580 10000
395 400 484 490
596 656 689 751
13.3 13.2 13.6 13.6
W36×150 W ×150
C15×33.9 C18×42.7
183.9 192.7
54.16 56.80
11500 12100
546 553
765 832
14.6 14.6
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMBINATION SECTIONS
1 - 107
COMBINATION SECTIONS W shapes and channels Properties of sections
Y
y
2
X
X
y , yp 1
Y
Axis X-X
y1 Beam
Z
Axis Y-Y
yp 3
Channel
in.
in.
W12×26 W30×26
C10×15.3 C12×20.7
8.22 8.63
W14×30 W30×30
C10×15.3 C12×20.7
W16×36 W30×36
S
I 4
3
r
Z
in.
in.3
in.
in.
in.
47.0 48.8
11.30 11.55
84.7 146
16.9 24.4
2.64 3.26
24.0 33.6
9.12 9.57
60.5 62.3
12.56 12.87
87.0 149
17.4 24.8
2.55 3.15
24.8 34.4
C12×20.7 C15×33.9
10.67 11.58
83.6 88.6
14.56 15.21
154 340
25.6 45.3
3.03 4.06
36.3 61.3
W18×50 W30×50
C12×20.7 C15×33.9
11.51 12.47
128 134
16.08 16.90
169 355
28.2 47.3
2.85 3.79
42.0 67.0
W21×62 W30×62 W30×68 W30×68
C12×20.7 C15×33.9 C12×20.7 C15×33.9
13.01 14.06 12.93 13.95
182 190 200 208
18.06 19.36 17.60 19.32
187 373 194 380
31.1 49.7 32.3 50.6
2.77 3.63 2.72 3.56
47.2 72.2 49.8 74.8
W24×68 W30×68 W30×84 W30×84
C12×20.7 C15×33.9 C12×20.7 C15×33.9
14.53 15.67 14.35 15.40
224 234 275 288
19.15 21.66 18.49 21.61
199 385 223 409
33.2 51.4 37.2 54.6
2.76 3.58 2.69 3.44
50.0 75.0 58.1 83.1
W27×84 W27×94
C15×33.9 C15×33.9
17.07 16.92
320 357
23.86 23.56
421 439
56.1 58.5
3.48 3.41
83.6 89.2
W30×99 W30×99 W30×116 W30×116
C15×33.9 C18×42.7 C15×33.9 C18×42.7
18.51 19.18 18.30 18.93
408 418 480 492
24.34 26.43 23.77 26.04
443 682 479 718
59.1 75.8 63.9 79.8
3.37 4.04 3.29 3.92
89.1 113 99.6 124
W33×118 W30×118 W30×141 W30×141
C15×33.9 C18×42.7 C15×33.9 C18×42.7
20.01 20.69 19.79 20.42
529 544 634 652
25.43 27.77 24.83 26.96
502 741 561 800
66.9 82.3 74.8 88.9
3.35 3.96 3.30 3.84
102 126 117 141
W36×150 W30×150
C15×33.9 C18×42.7
21.15 21.81
716 738
25.84 27.91
585 824
78.0 91.6
3.29 3.81
121 145
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 108
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
COMBINATION SECTIONS S shapes and channels Properties of sections
Y
y
2
X
X
y , yp 1
Y
Beam
Channel
Axis X-X
Total Weight per ft
Total Area
lb
in.2
I
S1 = I / y1
S2 = I / y2
r
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
S10×25.4
C8×11.5 C10×15.3
36.9 40.7
10.84 11.95
176 186
27.2 27.6
46.6 52.9
4.02 3.94
S12×31.8
C8×11.5 C10×15.3
43.3 47.1
12.73 13.84
299 316
39.8 40.4
63.2 71.4
4.84 4.78
S15×42.9
C8×11.5 C10×15.3
54.4 58.2
15.98 17.09
585 616
64.9 65.8
94.2 105
6.05 6.01
S20×66
C10×15.3 C12×20.7
81.3 86.7
23.89 25.49
1530 1620
130 132
181 203
8.00 7.97
S24×80
C10×15.3 C12×20.7
95.3 100.7
27.99 29.59
2610 2750
188 191
252 278
9.66 9.65
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMBINATION SECTIONS
1 - 109
COMBINATION SECTIONS S shapes and channels Properties of sections
Y
y
2
X
X
y , yp 1
Y
Axis X-X
y1 Beam
Z
Axis Y-Y
yp 3
S
I 4
3
r
Z
in.
in.3
Channel
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
S10×25.4
C8×11.5 C10×15.3
6.45 6.73
35.7 36.9
8.81 9.02
39.4 74.2
9.8 14.8
1.91 2.49
14.5 20.8
S12×31.8
C8×11.5 C10×15.3
7.50 7.82
52.6 53.9
10.30 10.61
42.0 76.8
10.5 15.4
1.82 2.36
16.0 22.2
S15×42.9
C8×11.5 C10×15.3
9.01 9.37
85.7 88.2
11.58 12.77
47.0 81.8
11.8 16.4
1.71 2.19
18.6 24.9
S20×66
C10×15.3 C12×20.7
11.81 12.29
171 178
14.41 15.99
95.1 157
19.0 26.1
2.00 2.48
31.2 40.8
S24×80
C10×15.3 C12×20.7
13.86 14.38
244 254
16.46 18.05
110 171
21.9 28.5
1.98 2.41
36.6 46.2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 110
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
d
2
Yd
COMBINATION SECTIONS Two channels Properties of sections
2
y
2
X
X x1 , xp
y , yp 1
Y
Vertical Horizontal Channel Channel
Axis X-X
Total Weight per ft
Total Area
lb
in.2
I
S1 = I / y1
S2 = I / y2
r
y1
Z
yp
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
C3×4.1
C4×5.4
9.5
2.80
3.0
1.4
3.0
1.04
2.20
2.16
2.67
C4×5.4
C4×5.4 C5×6.7
10.8 12.1
3.18 3.56
6.5 6.9
2.3 2.3
4.9 5.5
1.43 1.39
2.86 2.94
3.39 3.62
3.56 3.61
C5×6.7
C5×6.7 C6×8.2 C7×9.8
13.4 14.9 16.5
3.94 4.37 4.84
12.8 13.4 14.0
3.5 3.6 3.7
8.0 8.9 9.8
1.80 1.75 1.70
3.60 3.70 3.79
5.23 5.50 5.81
4.50 4.57 4.62
C6×8.2
C5×6.7 C6×8.2 C7×9.8 C8×11.5 C9×13.4 C10×15.3
14.9 16.4 18.0 19.7 21.6 23.5
4.37 4.80 5.27 5.78 6.34 6.89
21.5 22.5 23.4 24.3 25.2 26.0
5.1 5.2 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5
10.9 12.1 13.3 14.5 15.8 16.9
2.22 2.16 2.11 2.05 1.99 1.94
4.22 4.34 4.45 4.55 4.64 4.70
7.31 7.61 7.93 8.30 8.72 9.16
5.37 5.45 5.53 5.58 5.63 5.65
C7×9.8
C6×8.2 C7×9.8 C8×11.5 C9×13.4 C10×15.3
18.0 19.6 21.3 23.2 25.1
5.27 5.74 6.25 6.81 7.36
35.3 36.7 38.0 39.3 40.5
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5
15.7 17.3 18.8 20.5 21.9
2.59 2.53 2.47 2.40 2.34
4.95 5.08 5.20 5.31 5.39
10.2 10.6 10.9 11.4 11.8
6.32 6.40 6.48 6.54 6.58
C8×11.5
C6×8.2 C7×9.8 C8×11.5 C9×13.4 C10×15.3 C12×20.7
19.7 21.3 23.0 24.9 26.8 32.2
5.78 6.25 6.76 7.32 7.87 9.47
52.4 54.5 56.4 58.4 60.0 64.4
9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 10.2
19.6 21.6 23.6 25.6 27.5 32.6
3.01 2.95 2.89 2.82 2.76 2.61
5.53 5.68 5.82 5.95 6.06 6.30
13.4 13.8 14.2 14.6 15.1 16.4
7.18 7.27 7.35 7.44 7.49 7.62
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMBINATION SECTIONS
1 - 111
COMBINATION SECTIONS Two channels Properties of sections
d
2
Yd
2
y
2
X
X x1 , xp
y , yp 1
Y
Axis Y-Y Vertical Channel
Horizontal Channel
I
S
r
x1
Z
xp
in.4
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
C3×4.1
C4×5.4
4.0
2.0
1.20
0.44
2.67
0.315
C4×5.4
C4×5.4 C5×6.7
4.2 7.8
2.1 3.1
1.14 1.48
0.46 0.46
2.84 4.09
0.281 0.282
C5×6.7
C5×6.7 C6×8.2 C7×9.8
8.0 13.6 21.8
3.2 4.5 6.2
1.42 1.76 2.12
0.48 0.48 0.48
4.29 5.90 7.90
0.264 0.266 0.268
C6×8.2
C5×6.7 C6×8.2 C7×9.8 C8×11.5 C9×13.4 C10×15.3
8.2 13.8 22.0 33.3 48.6 68.1
3.3 4.6 6.3 8.3 10.8 13.6
1.37 1.70 2.04 2.40 2.77 3.14
0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51 0.51
4.52 6.14 8.13 10.6 13.5 16.8
0.242 0.245 0.247 0.249 0.252 0.254
C7×9.8
C6×8.2 C7×9.8 C8×11.5 C9×13.4 C10×15.3
14.1 22.3 33.6 48.6 68.4
4.7 6.4 8.4 10.9 13.7
1.63 1.97 2.32 2.68 3.05
0.54 0.54 0.54 0.54 0.54
6.41 8.41 10.8 13.8 17.1
0.225 0.228 0.230 0.234 0.235
C8×11.5
C6×8.2 C7×9.8 C8×11.5 C9×13.4 C10×15.3 C12×20.7
14.4 22.6 33.9 49.2 68.7 130
4.8 6.5 8.5 10.9 13.7 21.7
1.58 1.90 2.24 2.59 2.95 3.71
0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57
6.73 8.73 11.2 14.1 17.4 27.0
0.218 0.219 0.219 0.220 0.220 0.230
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 112
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
d
2
Yd
COMBINATION SECTIONS Two channels Properties of sections
2
y
2
X
X x1 , xp
y , yp 1
Y
Vertical Horizontal Channel Channel
Total Weight per ft
Axis X-X Total Area 2
lb
in.
C9×13.4
C7×9.8 C8×11.5 C9×13.4 C10×15.3 C12×20.7
23.2 24.9 26.8 28.7 34.1
6.81 7.32 7.88 8.43 10.03
C10×15.3
C8×11.5 C9×13.4 C10×15.3 C12×20.7 C15×33.9
26.8 28.7 30.6 36.0 49.2
7.87 8.43 8.98 10.58 14.45
C12×20.7
C9×13.4 C10×15.3 C12×20.7 C15×33.9
34.1 36.0 41.4 54.6
C15×33.9
C10×15.3 C12×20.7 C15×33.9 MC18×42.7
MC18×42.7 MC12×20.7 MC15×33.9 MC18×42.7
S1 = I / y1
I 4
in.
3
S2 = I / y2 3
r
y1
Z
yp 3
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
12.4 12.6 12.7 12.8 13.1
26.3 28.7 31.2 33.5 39.8
3.38 3.32 3.25 3.19 3.02
6.26 6.42 6.57 6.69 6.98
17.6 18.1 18.5 19.0 20.4
8.11 8.21 8.31 8.37 8.54
110 114 117 126 141
15.8 15.9 16.1 16.4 17.3
34.2 37.2 39.9 47.5 63.7
3.75 3.68 3.61 3.45 3.13
7.00 7.16 7.30 7.64 8.18
22.4 22.9 23.4 24.9 28.3
9.07 9.18 9.26 9.46 9.73
10.03 10.58 12.18 16.05
207 213 228 256
25.2 25.4 25.9 27.0
51.4 55.0 65.3 87.8
4.54 4.48 4.32 4.00
8.21 8.38 8.79 9.48
35.7 36.3 38.0 41.8
10.78 10.88 11.16 11.56
49.2 54.6 67.8 76.6
14.45 16.05 19.92 22.56
474 509 575 608
48.8 49.9 52.0 53.1
85.6 99.8 132 152
5.72 5.63 5.37 5.19
9.71 10.19 11.06 11.45
69.7 72.2 77.4 80.7
12.83 13.31 14.04 14.37
63.4 76.6 85.4
18.69 22.56 25.20
860 975 1030
72.9 76.1 77.6
133 174 200
6.78 6.57 6.40
11.80 12.80 13.29
77.7 80.5 83.3 85.6 91.7
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
106 113 117
15.51 16.50 16.96
COMBINATION SECTIONS
1 - 113
COMBINATION SECTIONS Two channels Properties of sections
d
2
Yd
2
y
2
X
X x1 , xp
y , yp 1
Y
Axis Y-Y Vertical Channel
Horizontal Channel
I
S
r
x1
Z
xp
in.4
in.3
in.
in.
in.3
in.
C9×13.4
C7×9.8 C8×11.5 C9×13.4 C10×15.3 C12×20.7
23.1 34.4 49.7 69.2 131
6.6 8.6 11.0 13.8 21.8
1.84 2.17 2.51 2.86 3.61
0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60
9.10 11.5 14.5 17.8 27.4
0.226 0.227 0.227 0.227 0.229
C10×15.3
C8×11.5 C9×13.4 C10×15.3 C12×20.7 C15×33.9
34.9 50.2 69.7 131 317
8.7 11.2 13.9 21.9 42.3
2.11 2.44 2.79 3.52 4.69
0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.63
11.9 14.9 18.2 27.8 52.8
0.232 0.232 0.233 0.234 0.239
C12×20.7
C9×13.4 C10×15.3 C12×20.7 C15×33.9
51.8 71.3 133 319
11.5 14.3 22.1 42.5
2.27 2.60 3.30 4.46
0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70
16.0 19.3 29.0 54.0
0.261 0.261 0.262 0.266
C15×33.9
C10×15.3 C12×20.7 C15×33.9 MC18×42.7
75.5 137 323 562
15.1 22.9 43.1 62.5
2.29 2.92 4.03 4.99
0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79
22.1 31.7 56.7 80.7
0.337 0.338 0.342 0.343
MC18×42.7
MC12×20.7 MC15×33.9 MC18×42.7
143 329 568
23.9 43.9 63.2
2.77 3.82 4.75
0.88 0.88 0.88
33.6 58.6 82.6
0.355 0.358 0.359
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 114
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
COMBINATION SECTIONS Channels and angles Properties of sections
Y
y
2
X
X
Long leg of angle turned out
y , yp 1
x1 xp
x2 Y
Total Weight per ft
Axis X-X Total Area 2
S1 = I / y1
I 4
3
3
in.
r
y1
Z
yp 3
Angle
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
C6×8.2
L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3 ×21⁄2×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L3×21⁄2 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4
12.3 12.7 13.6 14.8 14.0
3.59 3.71 3.96 4.33 4.09
17.9 18.5 19.0 19.8 19.5
8.0 8.5 8.9 9.8 9.5
4.8 4.8 4.9 5.0 5.0
2.24 2.23 2.19 2.14 2.19
2.24 2.17 2.13 2.02 2.06
6.75 6.90 7.23 7.54 7.36
1.40 1.26 1.26 1.11 1.13
C7×9.8
L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3 ×21⁄2×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L3×21⁄2 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L3×2 ×5⁄16
13.9 14.3 15.2 16.4 15.6 17.0
4.06 4.18 4.43 4.80 4.56 4.96
28.5 29.3 30.0 31.2 30.8 32.0
10.6 11.2 11.8 12.9 12.4 13.7
6.6 6.7 6.7 6.8 6.8 6.9
2.65 2.65 2.60 2.55 2.60 2.54
2.68 2.61 2.54 2.42 2.48 2.35
9.13 9.31 9.64 9.99 9.81 10.2
1.67 1.53 1.53 1.35 1.39 1.20
C8×11.5
L3 ×21⁄2×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L3×21⁄2 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L3×2 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16
16.0 16.9 18.1 17.3 18.7 20.2
4.69 4.94 5.31 5.07 5.47 5.94
43.9 44.9 46.7 46.0 47.8 49.9
14.3 15.1 16.4 15.8 17.3 18.9
8.9 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.1 9.3
3.06 3.02 2.97 3.01 2.96 2.90
3.07 2.98 2.84 2.91 2.76 2.64
12.2 12.6 13.0 12.8 13.2 13.9
1.81 1.81 1.60 1.67 1.45 1.30
C9×13.4
L3 ×21⁄2×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L3×21⁄2 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L3×2 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16
17.9 18.8 20.0 19.2 20.6 22.1
5.25 5.50 5.87 5.63 6.03 6.50
63.1 64.6 67.1 66.0 68.7 71.4
17.8 18.8 20.4 19.6 21.4 23.4
11.6 11.6 11.7 11.7 11.8 12.0
3.47 3.43 3.38 3.42 3.37 3.31
3.54 3.45 3.29 3.37 3.20 3.06
15.8 16.1 16.6 16.3 16.8 17.5
2.11 2.11 1.87 1.98 1.73 1.58
C10×15.3
L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L3×21⁄2 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L3×2 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16 L3×21⁄2 ×3⁄8
20.7 21.9 21.1 22.5 24.0 25.7
6.05 6.42 6.18 6.58 7.05 7.54
89.3 92.7 91.1 94.7 98.4 102
22.8 24.8 23.8 25.9 28.2 30.6
14.7 14.8 14.8 14.9 15.1 15.2
3.84 3.80 3.84 3.79 3.74 3.67
3.91 3.74 3.83 3.65 3.49 3.33
20.0 20.6 20.3 20.9 21.6 22.2
2.39 2.12 2.26 1.98 1.84 1.61
Channel
in.
S2 = I / y2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMBINATION SECTIONS
1 - 115
COMBINATION SECTIONS Channels and angles Properties of sections
Y
y
2
X
X
Long leg of angle turned out
y , yp 1
x1 xp
x2 Y
Axis Y-Y
S1 = I / x1
I
3
3
r
x1
Z
xp 3
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
C6×8.2
L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3 ×21⁄2×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4
2.6 3.6 4.9 5.7 6.5
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.7 1.7
1.4 1.9 2.4 2.7 3.1
0.85 0.98 1.11 1.14 1.26
2.60 3.01 3.40 3.31 3.79
2.02 2.38 2.82 3.27 3.30
2.60 3.09 3.57 3.54 4.06
C7×9.8
L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3 ×21⁄2×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L31⁄2 ×5⁄16
3.0 4.0 5.4 6.3 7.1 8.3
1.1 1.3 1.6 1.8 18 2.2
1.6 2.0 2.6 2.9 3.2 3.6
0.86 0.98 1.10 1.14 1.25 1.29
2.67 3.09 3.48 3.40 3.88 3.78
2.31 2.66 3.11 3.57 3.59 4.16
2.62 3.11 3.59 3.57 4.08 4.05
C8×11.5
L3 ×21⁄2×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L3×3 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16
4.6 6.0 6.9 7.8 9.0 14.7
14 1.7 2.0 2.0 2.3 3.2
2.2 2.7 3.0 3.4 3.8 5.6
0.99 1.10 1.14 1.24 1.28 1.57
3.16 3.56 3.48 3.97 3.87 4.64
3.00 3.45 3.91 3.93 4.51 5.97
3.13 3.61 3.59 4.10 4.08 5.05
C9×13.4
L3 ×21⁄2×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L3×3 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16
5.2 6.7 7.7 8.5 9.9 15.8
1.6 1.8 2.2 2.1 2.5 3.3
2.3 2.9 3.2 3.6 4.0 5.9
0.99 1.10 1.14 1.23 1.28 1.56
3.22 3.64 3.55 4.05 3.96 4.74
3.38 3.83 4.31 4.32 4.91 6.38
3.14 3.63 3.61 4.12 4.10 5.08
C10×15.3
L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L3×3 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16 L31⁄2×3 ×3⁄8
7.4 8.5 9.4 10.8 16.9 19.2
2.0 2.3 2.3 2.7 3.5 4.1
3.1 3.4 3.8 4.2 6.1 6.7
1.11 1.15 1.23 1.28 1.55 1.60
3.70 3.62 4.12 4.03 4.83 4.73
4.25 4.73 4.74 5.34 6.82 7.70
3.64 3.63 4.14 4.12 5.09 5.07
Channel
Angle
in.
4
S2 = I / x2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 116
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
COMBINATION SECTIONS Channels and angles Properties of sections
Y
y
2
X
X
Long leg of angle turned out
y , yp 1
x1 xp
x2 Y
Total Weight per ft
Axis X-X Total Area 2
S1 = I / y1
I 4
3
S2 = I / y2 3
r
y1
Z
yp 3
Angle
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
C12×20.7
L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16 L5×31⁄2 ×3⁄8 L6 ×4 ×3⁄8 L5×3 ×1⁄2
26.1 27.3 26.5 27.9 29.4 31.1 33.0 36.9
7.65 8.02 7.78 8.18 8.65 9.14 9.70 10.84
164 170 167 173 180 186 192 202
33.2 35.8 34.4 37.2 40.2 43.4 46.6 53.2
23.2 23.5 23.4 23.6 23.9 24.1 24.3 24.7
4.63 4.61 4.63 4.60 4.56 4.51 4.45 4.32
4.94 4.75 4.86 4.66 4.47 4.29 4.12 3.80
31.4 32.2 31.8 32.6 33.5 34.2 35.3 36.7
3.23 2.80 3.01 2.67 2.53 2.25 2.11 1.68
C12×25
L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L5×31⁄2 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16 L5×31⁄2 ×3⁄8 L6 ×4 ×3⁄8 L5×3 ×1⁄2
30.4 31.6 30.8 32.2 33.7 35.4 37.3 41.2
8.91 9.28 9.04 9.44 9.91 10.40 10.96 12.10
180 187 183 190 197 204 211 223
35.4 38.0 36.6 39.3 42.3 45.4 48.7 55.3
26.1 26.4 26.3 26.6 26.9 27.2 27.5 28.0
4.50 4.49 4.50 4.49 4.46 4.43 4.39 4.29
5.09 4.92 5.02 4.84 4.67 4.49 4.33 4.03
35.8 36.8 36.3 37.3 38.3 39.3 40.4 42.2
3.98 3.50 3.82 3.30 3.05 2.77 2.65 2.20
C15×33.9
L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16 L5×31⁄2 ×3⁄8 L6 ×4 ×3⁄8 L5×3 ×1⁄2
39.7 41.1 42.6 44.3 46.2 50.1
11.65 12.05 12.52 13.01 13.57 14.71
383 395 408 421 434 458
58.7 62.4 66.5 70.8 75.4 84.8
45.1 45.6 46.1 46.5 46.9 47.7
5.73 5.73 5.71 5.69 5.65 5.58
6.52 6.33 6.14 5.94 5.76 5.40
60.1 61.8 63.4 64.8 66.2 68.6
5.39 4.89 4.30 3.69 3.48 2.92
Channel
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMBINATION SECTIONS
1 - 117
COMBINATION SECTIONS Channels and angles Properties of sections
Y
y
2
X
X
Long leg of angle turned out
y , yp 1
x1 xp
x2 Y
Axis Y-Y
S1 = I / x1
I
3
3
r
x1
Z
xp 3
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
C12×20.7
L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16 L31⁄2×3 ×3⁄8 L6 ×4 ×3⁄8 L4×3 ×1⁄2
9.5 10.7 11.6 13.2 19.9 22.5 33.2 40.6
2.5 2.8 2.7 3.2 40 4.6 5.8 7.3
3.7 4.0 4.4 4.8 6.8 7.5 10.3 11.9
1.12 1.16 1.22 1.27 1.52 1.57 1.85 1.93
3.84 3.77 4.28 4.20 5.02 4.93 5.72 5.52
5.45 5.94 5.94 6.56 8.06 8.97 11.1 13.7
3.69 3.67 4.18 4.16 5.15 5.13 6.10 6.05
C12×25
L31⁄2×3 ×1⁄4 L31⁄2×3 ×5⁄16 L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16 L31⁄2×3 ×3⁄8 L6 ×4 ×3⁄8 L4×3 ×1⁄2
10.2 11.4 12.3 13.9 20.8 23.5 34.5 42.3
2.6 3.0 2.8 3.3 4.1 4.7 5.9 7.5
3.8 4.2 4.5 5.0 7.0 7.7 10.7 12.4
1.07 1.11 1.17 1.22 1.45 1.50 1.77 1.87
3.87 3.81 4.32 4.25 5.09 5.00 5.81 5.63
5.88 6.40 6.38 7.02 8.54 9.48 11.7 14.3
3.74 3.72 4.23 4.22 5.20 5.18 6.15 6.11
C15×33.9
L4 ×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×5⁄16 L5 ×31⁄2×5⁄16 L31⁄2×3 ×3⁄8 L6 ×4 ×3⁄8 L4×3 ×1⁄2
16.8 18.7 26.2 29.3 41.3 50.3
3.7 4.2 4.9 5.6 6.8 8.5
5.8 6.3 8.5 9.2 12.4 14.3
1.20 1.25 1.45 1.50 1.75 1.85
4.49 4.43 5.30 5.23 6.06 5.89
8.82 9.47 11.0 12.0 14.2 16.9
4.27 4.26 5.24 5.23 6.21 6.17
Channel
Angle
in.
4
S2 = I / x2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 118
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
COMBINATION SECTIONS Channels and angles Properties of sections
Y
y
2
X
X
y , yp
1
1
x1 xp
Short leg of angle turned out
2
x2 Y
Total Weight per ft
Total Area 2
3
in.
S2 = I / y2 3
in.
r
y1
Z
yp 3
in.
in.
in.
in.
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
12.7 13.1 14.0 16.4 18.0
3.71 3.84 4.09 4.80 5.27
6.0 6.1 6.4 7.5 7.7
5.9 6.2 6.2 6.4 6.8
2.61 2.68 2.63 2.55 2.56
4.21 4.56 4.46 4.16 4.45
7.86 8.23 8.32 8.77 9.32
2.79 3.25 3.18 3.00 3.46
C 7×9.8
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
14.3 14.7 15.6 18.0 19.6
4.18 4.31 4.56 5.27 5.74
8.0 8.0 8.5 10.0 10.3
7.8 8.2 8.2 8.5 8.9
3.00 3.07 3.03 2.95 2.96
4.70 5.05 4.93 4.60 4.87
10.5 10.9 1 1.0 11.6 12.2
2.95 3.38 3.29 3.11 3.50
C 8×11.5
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
16.0 16.4 17.3 19.7 21.3
4.69 4.82 5.07 5.78 6.25
10.4 10.4 10.9 12.9 13.3
10.2 10.6 10.6 11.0 11.4
3.39 3.45 3.42 3.36 3.36
5.20 5.55 5.42 5.06 5.31
13.7 14.2 14.3 14.9 15.6
3.52 3.73 3.42 3.21 3.61
C 9×13.4
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
17.9 18.3 19.2 21.6 23.2
5.25 5.38 5.63 6.34 6.81
13.1 13.1 13.8 16.2 16.7
12.9 13.4 13.5 13.9 14.4
3.78 3.84 3.81 3.76 3.77
5.71 6.07 5.93 5.54 5.78
17.4 18.0 18.3 19.0 19.7
4.18 4.42 3.88 3.32 3.71
C10×15.3
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
19.8 20.2 21.1 23.5 25.1
5.80 5.93 6.18 6.89 7.36
16.2 16.1 17.0 19.9 20.5
16.0 16.5 16.6 17.1 17.7
4.17 4.22 4.20 4.17 4.18
6.22 6.58 6.43 6.02 6.25
21.4 22.1 22.5 23.5 24.2
4.77 5.01 4.48 3.44 3.81
C12×20.7
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
25.2 25.6 26.5 28.9 30.5
7.40 7.53 7.78 8.49 8.96
24.3 24.0 25.3 29.2 30.1
24.7 25.3 25.5 26.3 27.1
4.90 4.95 4.95 4.94 4.97
7.32 7.69 7.54 7.11 7.33
32.6 33.4 34.3 36.4 37.5
6.17 6.45 6.01 4.74 4.41
C15×33.9
L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
38.8 39.7 42.1 43.7
11.40 11.65 12.36 12.83
42.7 44.5 50.1 51.4
47.2 47.7 49.1 50.3
5.95 5.96 6.01 6.05
9.45 9.31 8.91 9.15
61.1 62.5 66.5 69.0
8.70 8.39 7.50 7.41
Angle
in.
S1 = I / y1
C 6×8.2
Channel
lb
Axis X-X
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMBINATION SECTIONS
1 - 119
COMBINATION SECTIONS Channels and angles Properties of sections
Y
y
2
X
Short leg of angle turned out
X
y , yp
1
1
x1 xp
2
x2 Y
Axis Y-Y
S1 = I / x1
r
x1
Z
xp 3
in.
in.
in.
in.
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
2.4 2.8 3.8 6.0 8.4
4.4 4.6 6.6 9.3 12.1
1.22 1.26 1.64 2.05 2.47
2.25 2.18 2.85 3.33 3.82
3.70 4.01 5.46 8.29 11.3
2.65 2.59 3.46 4.12 4.84
C 7×9.8
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
2.6 2.9 3.9 6.1 8.6
5.0 5.2 7.5 10.5 13.6
1.19 1.23 1.60 2.01 2.44
2.32 2.25 2.95 3.47 3.98
4.03 4.35 5.82 8.71 11.8
2.72 2.67 3.55 4.24 4.99
C 8×11.5
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
2.7 3.0 4.0 6.3 8.7
5.6 5.8 8.3 11.7 15.2
1.16 1.20 1.55 1.97 2.40
2.37 2.31 3.03 3.58 4 13
4.40 4.73 6.21 9.16 12.3
2.78 2.73 3.62 4.34 5.12
C 9×13.4
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
2.8 3.2 4.2 6.4 8.9
6.2 6.5 9.2 12.9 16.9
1.14 1.18 1.51 1.92 2.36
2.40 2.35 3.10 3.68 4.26
4.81 5.15 6.65 9.66 12.8
2.84 2.79 3.70 4.43 5.23
C10×15.3
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
3.0 3.4 4.3 6.5 9.0
6.8 7.1 10.0 14.0 18.3
1.12 1.16 1.48 1.88 2.31
2.42 2.37 3.15 3.76 4.36
5.25 5.59 7.10 10.1 13.3
2.88 2.84 3.74 4.49 5.31
C12×20.7
L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
3.6 4.0 4.7 6.9 9.3
8.6 8.9 12.2 17.0 22.4
1.10 1.13 1.40 1.78 2 19
2.47 2.43 3.25 3.92 4.59
6.47 6.82 8.37 11.5 14.8
3.01 2.97 3.89 4.67 5.52
C15×33.9
L3×3 ×1⁄4 L4×3 ×1⁄4 L5×3 ×5⁄16 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
5.6 5.9 7.8 10.2
13.5 17.2 23.4 30.7
1.10 1.30 1.61 1.97
2.48 3.35 4.12 4.88
9.54 11.1 14.5 18.0
3.12 4.11 5.02 5.90
Angle
in.
3
C 6×8.2
Channel
in.
3
S2 = I / x2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 120
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING General
When designing and specifying steel pipe or tubing as compression members, refer to comments in the notes for Columns, Steel Pipe, and Structural Tubing, in Part 3. For standard mill practices and tolerances, refer to page 1-183. For material specifications and availability, see Tables 1-4 through 1-6, Part 1. Steel Pipe
The Tables of Dimensions and Properties of Steel Pipe (unfilled) list a selected range of sizes of standard, extra strong, and double-extra strong pipe. For a complete range of sizes manufactured, refer to catalogs of the manufacturers or to the American Institute for Hollow Structural Sections (AIHSS). Structural Tubing
The Tables of Dimensions and Properties of Square and Rectangular Structural Tubing (unfilled) list a selected range of frequently used sizes. For dimensions and properties of other sizes, refer to catalogs from the manufacturers or AIHSS. The tables are based on an outside corner radius equal to two times the specified wall thickness. Material specifications stipulate that the outside corner radius may vary up to three times the specified wall thickness. This variation should be considered in those details where a close match or fit is important.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
1 - 121
PIPE Dimensions and properties Dimensions
Weight Nominal Outside Inside Wall per ft lbs Diameter Diameter Diameter Thickness Plain Ends in. in. in. in.
Properties Area
I
S
r
J
Z
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
0.041 0.071 0.133 0.235 0.326 0.561 1.06 1.72 2.39 3.21 5.45 8.50 16.8 29.9 43.8
0.261 0.334 0.421 0.540 0.623 0.787 0.947 1.16 1.34 1.51 1.88 2.25 2.94 3.67 4.38
0.034 0.074 0.175 0.389 0.620 1.33 3.06 6.03 9.58 14.5 30.3 56.3 145 321 559
0.059 0.100 0.187 0.324 0.448 0.761 1.45 2.33 3.22 4.31 7.27 11.2 22.2 39.4 57.4
0.048 0.085 0.161 0.291 0.412 0.731 1.34 2.23 3.14 4.27 7.43 12.2 24.5 39.4 56.7
0.250 0.321 0.407 0.524 0.605 0.766 0.924 1.14 1.31 1.48 1.84 2.19 2.88 3.63 4.33
0.040 0.090 0.211 0.484 0.782 1.74 3.85 8.13 12.6 19.2 41.3 81.0 211 424 723
0.072 0.125 0.233 0.414 0.581 1.02 1.87 3.08 4.32 5.85 10.1 16.6 33.0 52.6 75.1
1.10 2.00 3.42 6.79 12.1 20.0 37.6
0.703 0.844 1.05 1.37 1.72 2.06 2.76
2.62 5.74 12.0 30.6 67.3 133 324
1.67 3.04 5.12 9.97 17.5 28.9 52.8
Standard Weight 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 4
0.840 1.050 1.315 1.660 1.900 2.375 2.875 3.500 4.000 4.500 5.563 6.625 8.625 10.750 12.750
0.622 0.824 1.049 1.380 1.610 2.067 2.469 3.068 3.548 4.026 5.047 6.065 7.981 10.020 12.000
0.109 0.113 0.133 0.140 0.145 0.154 0.203 0.216 0.226 0.237 0.258 0.280 0.322 0.365 0.375
0.85 1.13 1.68 2.27 2.72 3.65 5.79 7.58 9.11 10.79 14.62 18.97 28.55 40.48 49.56
1 11⁄4 11⁄2 2 21⁄2 3 31⁄2 4 5 6 8 10 12
0.840 1.050 1.315 1.660 1.900 2.375 2.875 3.500 4.000 4.500 5.563 6.625 8.625 10.750 12.750
0.546 0.742 0.957 1.278 1.500 1.939 2.323 2.900 3.364 3.826 4.813 5.761 7.625 9.750 11.750
0.147 0.154 0.179 0.191 0.200 0.218 0.276 0.300 0.318 0.337 0.375 0.432 0.500 0.500 0.500
1.09 1.47 2.17 3.00 3.63 5.02 7.66 10.25 12.50 14.98 20.78 28.57 43.39 54.74 65.42
2 21⁄2 3 4 5 6 8
2.375 2.875 3.500 4.500 5.563 6.625 8.625
1.503 1.771 2.300 3.152 4.063 4.897 6.875
0.436 0.552 0.600 0.674 0.750 0.864 0.875
1 11⁄4 11⁄2 2 21⁄2 3 31⁄2 4 5 6 8 10 12
0.250 0.333 0.494 0.669 0.799 1.07 1.70 2.23 2.68 3.17 4.30 5.58 8.40 11.9 14.6
0.017 0.037 0.087 0.195 0.310 0.666 1.53 3.02 4.79 7.23 15.2 28.1 72.5 161 279
Extra Strong 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 4
0.320 0.433 0.639 0.881 1.07 1.48 2.25 3.02 3.68 4.41 6.11 8.40 12.8 16.1 19.2
0.020 0.045 0.106 0.242 0.391 0.868 1.92 3.89 6.28 9.61 20.7 40.5 106 212 362
Double-Extra Strong 9.03 13.69 18.58 27.54 38.59 53.16 72.42
2.66 4.03 5.47 8.10 11.3 15.6 21.3
1.31 2.87 5.99 15.3 33.6 66.3 162
The listed sections are available in conformance with ASTM Specification A53 Grade B or A501. Other sections are made to these specifications. Consult with pipe manufacturers or distributors for availability.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 122
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
STRUCTURAL TUBING Square Dimensions and properties Dimensions
Properties**
Nominal* Size
Wall Thickness
Weight per ft
Area
I
S
r
J
Z
in.
in.
lb
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
0.6250
5⁄ 8
246.47
72.4
10300
690
12.0
16000
794
28×28
0.6250
5⁄ 8
229.45
67.4
8360
597
11.1
13000
689
26×26
0.6250
5⁄ 8
212.44
62.4
6650
511
10.3
10400
591
24×24 24×24 24×24
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8
195.43 157.74 119.35
57.4 46.4 35.1
5180 4240 3250
432 353 270
9.50 9.56 9.62
8100 6570 4990
500 407 310
22×22 22×22 22×22
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8
178.41 144.13 109.15
52.4 42.4 32.1
3950 3240 2490
359 294 226
8.68 8.74 8.80
6200 5030 3830
418 340 259
20×20 20×20 20×20
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8
161.40 130.52 98.94
47.4 38.4 29.1
2940 2410 1850
294 241 185
7.87 7.93 7.99
4620 3760 2870
342 279 213
18×18 18×18 18×18
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8
144.39 116.91 88.73
42.4 34.4 26.1
2110 1740 1340
234 193 149
7.05 7.11 7.17
3340 2720 2080
274 224 172
30×30
*Outside dimensions across flat sides. **Properties are based upon a nominal outside corner radius equal to two times the wall thickness.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
1 - 123
STRUCTURAL TUBING Square Dimensions and properties Dimensions
Properties**
Nominal* Size
Wall Thickness
Weight per ft
Area
I
S
r
J
Z
in.
in.
lb
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
127.37 103.30 78.52 65.87
37.4 30.4 23.1 19.4
1450 1200 931 789
182 150 116 98.6
6.23 6.29 6.35 6.38
2320 1890 1450 1220
214 175 134 113
110.36 89.68 68.31 57.36
32.4 26.4 20.1 16.9
952 791 615 522
136 113 87.9 74.6
5.42 5.48 5.54 5.57
1530 1250 963 812
161 132 102 86.1
93.34 76.07 58.10 48.86 39.43
27.4 22.4 17.1 14.4 11.6
580 485 380 324 265
96.7 80.9 63.4 54.0 44.1
4.60 4.66 4.72 4.75 4.78
943 777 599 506 410
116 95.4 73.9 62.6 50.8
76.33 62.46 47.90 40.35 32.63 24.73
22.4 18.4 14.1 11.9 9.59 7.27
321 271 214 183 151 116
64.2 54.2 42.9 36.7 30.1 23.2
3.78 3.84 3.90 3.93 3.96 3.99
529 439 341 289 235 179
77.6 64.6 50.4 42.8 34.9 26.6
16×16
14×14
12×12
10×10
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
5⁄ 1⁄ 3⁄
8 2
8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 1⁄
8 2
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 5⁄ 1⁄
8 2
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 5⁄ 1⁄ 3⁄
8 2
8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
*Outside dimensions across flat sides. **Properties are based upon a nominal outside corner radius equal to two times the wall thickness.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 124
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
STRUCTURAL TUBING Square Dimensions and properties Dimensions
Properties**
Nominal* Size
Wall Thickness
Weight per ft
Area
I
S
r
J
Z
in.
in.
lb
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
8×8
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
59.32 48.85 37.69 31.84 25.82 19.63
17.4 14.4 11.1 9.36 7.59 5.77
153 131 106 90.9 75.1 58.2
38.3 32.9 26.4 22.7 18.8 14.6
2.96 3.03 3.09 3.12 3.15 3.18
258 217 170 145 118 90.6
47.2 39.7 31.3 26.7 21.9 16.8
7×7
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
50.81 42.05 32.58 27.59 22.42 17.08
14.9 12.4 9.58 8.11 6.59 5.02
97.5 84.6 68.7 59.5 49.4 38.5
27.9 24.2 19.6 17.0 14.1 11.0
2.56 2.62 2.68 2.71 2.74 2.77
166 141 112 95.6 78.3 60.2
34.8 29.6 23.5 20.1 16.5 12.7
6×6
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
42.30 35.24 27.48 23.34 19.02 14.53 9.86
12.4 10.4 8.08 6.86 5.59 4.27 2.90
57.3 50.5 41.6 36.3 30.3 23.8 16.5
19.1 16.8 13.9 12.1 10.1 7.93 5.52
2.15 2.21 2.27 2.30 2.33 2.36 2.39
99.5 85.6 68.5 58.9 48.5 37.5 25.7
24.3 20.9 16.8 14.4 11.9 9.24 6.35
51⁄2×51⁄2
0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
24.93 21.21 17.32 13.25 9.01
7.33 6.23 5.09 3.89 2.65
31.2 27.4 23.0 18.1 12.6
11.4 9.95 8.36 6.58 4.60
2.07 2.10 2.13 2.16 2.19
51.9 44.8 37.0 28.6 19.7
13.8 12.0 9.91 7.70 5.31
5×5
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
28.43 22.37 19.08 15.62 11.97 8.16
8.36 6.58 5.61 4.59 3.52 2.40
27.0 22.8 20.1 16.9 13.4 9.41
10.8 9.11 8.02 6.78 5.36 3.77
1.80 1.86 1.89 1.92 1.95 1.98
46.8 38.2 33.1 27.4 21.3 14.7
13.7 11.2 9.70 8.07 6.29 4.36
*Outside dimensions across flat sides. **Properties are based upon a nominal outside corner radius equal to two times the wall thickness.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
1 - 125
STRUCTURAL TUBING Square Dimensions and properties Dimensions
Properties**
Nominal* Size
Wall Thickness
Weight per ft
Area
I
S
r
J
Z
in.
in.
lb
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
41⁄2×41⁄2
0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
19.82 16.96 13.91 10.70 7.31
5.83 4.98 4.09 3.14 2.15
16.0 14.2 12.1 9.60 6.78
7.10 6.30 5.36 4.27 3.02
1.66 1.69 1.72 1.75 1.78
27.1 23.6 19.7 15.4 10.6
8.81 7.68 6.43 5.03 3.50
4×4
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
1⁄
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
21.63 17.27 14.83 12.21 9.42 6.46
6.36 5.08 4.36 3.59 2.77 1.90
12.3 10.7 9.58 8.22 6.59 4.70
6.13 5.35 4.79 4.11 3.30 2.35
1.39 1.45 1.48 1.51 1.54 1.57
21.8 18.4 16.1 13.5 10.6 7.40
8.02 6.72 5.90 4.97 3.91 2.74
31⁄2×31⁄2
0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
12.70 10.51 8.15 5.61
3.73 3.09 2.39 1.65
6.09 5.29 4.29 3.09
3.48 3.02 2.45 1.76
1.28 1.31 1.34 1.37
10.4 8.82 6.99 4.90
4.35 3.69 2.93 2.07
3×3
0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
10.58 8.81 6.87 4.75
3.11 2.59 2.02 1.40
3.58 3.16 2.60 1.90
2.39 2.10 1.73 1.26
1.07 1.10 1.13 1.16
6.22 5.35 4.28 3.03
3.04 2.61 2.10 1.49
21⁄2×21⁄2
0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
8.45 7.11 5.59 3.90
2.48 2.09 1.64 1.15
1.87 1.69 1.42 1.06
1.50 1.35 1.14 0.847
0.868 0.899 0.930 0.961
3.32 2.92 2.38 1.71
1.96 1.71 1.40 1.01
2×2
0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
6.32 5.41 4.32 3.05
1.86 1.59 1.27 0.897
0.815 0.766 0.668 0.513
0.815 0.766 0.668 0.513
0.662 0.694 0.726 0.756
1.49 1.36 1.15 0.846
1.11 1.00 0.840 0.621
11⁄2×11⁄2
0.1875
3⁄ 16
3.04
0.894
0.242
0.323
0.521
0.431
0.423
3⁄
2 8
*Outside dimensions across flat sides. **Properties are based upon a nominal outside corner radius equal to two times the wall thickness.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 126
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
X
X
STRUCTURAL TUBING Rectangular Dimensions and properties
Y
Dimensions
Properties**
Nominal* Wall Weight Size Thickness per ft Area in.
in.
2
X-X Axis
S
I 4
Z 3
Y-Y Axis
r 3
S
I 4
Z 3
3
r
J
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.4
178.16 134.67 112.66
52.4 39.6 33.1
7110 474 5430 362 4570 305
555 422 354
11.7 11.7 11.7
5070 3870 3260
422 323 272
477 363 304
9.84 9.89 9.92
9170 6960 5830
30×24
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
28×24
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
171.35 129.56 108.41
50.4 38.1 31.9
6050 432 4630 331 3890 278
503 383 321
11.0 11.0 11.1
4790 3660 3080
399 305 257
454 345 290
9.75 9.81 9.84
8280 6290 5270
26×24
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
164.55 124.46 104.15
48.4 36.6 30.6
5100 392 3900 300 3280 253
454 345 290
10.3 10.3 10.4
4510 3460 2910
376 288 242
430 327 275
9.66 9.72 9.75
7410 5630 4720
24×22
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
150.93 114.25 95.64
44.4 33.6 28.1
3960 330 3040 253 2560 213
383 292 245
9.45 3470 9.51 2660 9.54 2240
315 242 204
361 275 231
8.84 8.90 8.93
5740 4370 3660
22×20
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
137.32 104.04 87.14
40.4 30.6 25.6
3010 273 2310 210 1950 177
318 243 204
8.63 2600 8.69 2000 8.72 1690
260 200 169
298 228 192
8.03 8.09 8.12
4350 3310 2780
20×18
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
123.71 93.83 78.63
36.4 27.6 23.1
2220 222 1710 171 1440 144
259 198 167
7.81 1890 7.88 1460 7.91 1230
210 162 137
242 185 155
7.21 7.27 7.30
3190 2440 2050
20×12
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
103.30 78.52 65.87
30.4 23.1 19.4
1650 165 1280 128 1080 108
201 154 130
7.37 7.45 7.47
750 583 495
125 141 97.2 109 82.5 91.8
4.97 5.03 5.06
1650 1270 1070
20×8
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
89.68 68.31 57.36
26.4 20.1 16.9
1270 127 162 988 98.8 125 838 83.8 105
6.94 7.02 7.05
300 236 202
20×4
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
76.07 58.10 48.86
22.4 17.1 14.4
889 699 596
88.9 123 69.9 95.3 59.6 80.8
6.31 6.40 6.44
61.6 50.3 43.7
75.1 59.1 50.4
84.7 65.6 55.6
3.38 3.43 3.46
806 625 529
30.8 25.1 21.8
36.0 28.5 24.3
1.66 1.72 1.74
205 165 143
*Outside dimensions across flat sides. **Properties are based upon a nominal outside corner radius equal to two times the wall thickness.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
1 - 127
STRUCTURAL TUBING Rectangular Dimensions and properties
Y
X
X
Y
Dimensions
Properties**
Nominal* Wall Weight Size Thickness per ft Area in.
in.
lb
in.2
X-X Axis
Y-Y Axis
I
S
Z
r
I
S
Z
r
J
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
in.4
6.71 6.78 6.81
684 533 452
114 130 88.8 100 75.3 84.5
4.91 4.97 5.00
1420 1090 920
53.9 42.1 35.8 29.2
2.52 2.57 2.60 2.63
410 322 274 224
103 118 80.3 91.3 68.2 77.2
4.84 4.90 4.93
1200 922 777
18×12
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
96.49 73.42 61.62
28.4 21.6 18.1
18×6
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
76.07 58.10 48.86 39.43
22.4 17.1 14.4 11.6
818 641 546 447
90.9 119 71.3 92.2 60.7 78.1 49.6 63.5
6.05 6.13 6.17 6.21
141 113 97.0 80.0
16×12
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
89.68 68.31 57.36
26.4 20.1 16.9
962 748 635
120 144 93.5 111 79.4 93.8
6.04 6.11 6.14
618 482 409
16×8
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
76.07 58.10 48.86
22.4 17.1 14.4
722 565 481
90.2 113 70.6 87.6 60.1 74.2
5.68 5.75 5.79
244 193 165
16×4
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
62.46 47.90 40.35
18.4 14.1 11.9
481 382 327
60.2 47.8 40.9
82.2 64.2 54.5
5.12 5.21 5.25
14×12
0.5000 0.3750
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8
82.88 63.21
24.4 18.6
699 546
99.9 119 78.0 91.7
5.36 5.42
14×10
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16
76.07 58.10 48.86
22.4 17.1 14.4
608 476 405
86.9 105 68.0 81.5 57.9 69.0
14×6
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
76.33 62.46 47.90 40.35 32.63
22.4 18.4 14.1 11.9 9.59
504 426 337 288 237
72.0 60.8 48.1 41.2 33.8
1280 142 172 991 110 132 840 93.3 111
94.0 78.3 61.1 51.9 42.3
47.2 37.6 32.3 26.7
61.0 48.2 41.2
69.7 54.2 45.9
3.30 3.36 3.39
599 465 394
24.6 20.2 17.6
29.0 23.0 19.7
1.64 1.69 1.72
157 127 110
552 431
91.9 107 71.9 82.6
4.76 4.82
983 757
5.22 5.28 5.31
361 284 242
72.3 56.8 48.4
83.6 64.8 54.9
4.02 4.08 4.11
730 564 477
4.74 4.82 4.89 4.93 4.97
130 111 89.1 76.7 63.4
43.3 37.1 29.7 25.6 21.1
51.2 42.9 33.6 28.7 23.4
2.41 2.46 2.52 2.54 2.57
352 296 233 199 162
49.3 40.4 35.1
*Outside dimensions across flat sides. **Properties are based upon a nominal outside corner radius equal to two times the wall thickness.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 128
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
X
X
STRUCTURAL TUBING Rectangular Dimensions and properties
Y
Dimensions
Properties**
Nominal* Wall Weight Size Thickness per ft Area in.
in.
lb
in.2
X-X Axis
Y-Y Axis
I
S
Z
r
I
S
Z
r
J
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
in.4
49.0 43.1 35.4 30.9 25.8 20.2
24.5 21.5 17.7 15.4 12.9 10.1
30.0 25.5 20.3 17.4 14.3 11.1
1.57 1.62 1.68 1.71 1.73 1.76
154 134 108 93.1 77.0 59.7
14×4
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
67.82 55.66 42.79 36.10 29.23 22.18
19.9 16.4 12.6 10.6 8.59 6.52
392 335 267 230 189 146
56.0 47.8 38.2 32.8 27.0 20.9
77.3 64.8 50.8 43.3 35.4 27.1
4.44 4.52 4.61 4.65 4.69 4.74
12×10
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
69.27 53.00 44.60 36.03
20.4 15.6 13.1 10.6
419 330 281 230
69.9 55.0 46.9 38.4
83.9 65.2 55.2 44.9
4.54 4.60 4.63 4.66
316 249 213 174
63.3 49.8 42.6 34.9
74.1 57.6 48.8 39.7
3.94 4.00 4.03 4.06
581 450 381 309
12×8
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
76.33 62.46 47.90 40.35 32.63 24.73
22.4 18.4 14.1 11.9 9.59 7.27
418 353 279 239 196 151
69.7 58.9 46.5 39.8 32.6 25.1
87.1 72.4 56.5 47.9 39.1 29.8
4.32 4.39 4.45 4.49 4.52 4.55
221 188 149 128 105 81.1
55.3 46.9 37.3 32.0 26.3 20.3
65.6 54.7 42.7 36.3 29.6 22.7
3.14 3.20 3.26 3.28 3.31 3.34
481 401 312 265 216 165
12×6
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
67.82 55.66 42.79 36.10 29.23 22.18
19.9 16.4 12.6 10.6 8.59 6.52
337 287 228 196 161 124
56.2 47.8 38.1 32.6 26.9 20.7
72.9 60.9 47.7 40.6 33.2 25.4
4.11 4.19 4.26 4.30 4.33 4.37
112 96.0 77.2 66.6 55.2 42.8
37.2 32.0 25.7 22.2 18.4 14.3
44.5 37.4 29.4 25.1 20.6 15.8
2.37 2.42 2.48 2.51 2.53 2.56
286 241 190 162 132 101
12×4
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
59.32 48.85 37.69 31.84 25.82 19.63
17.4 14.4 11.1 9.36 7.59 5.77
257 221 178 153 127 98.2
42.8 36.8 29.6 25.5 21.1 16.4
58.6 49.4 39.0 33.3 27.3 21.0
3.84 3.92 4.01 4.05 4.09 4.13
41.8 36.9 30.5 26.6 22.3 17.5
20.9 18.5 15.2 13.3 11.1 8.75
25.8 22.0 17.6 15.1 12.5 9.63
1.55 1.60 1.66 1.69 1.71 1.74
127 110 89.0 76.9 63.6 49.3
12×3
0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
29.72 24.12 18.35
8.73 132 7.09 109 5.39 85.1
22.0 18.2 14.2
29.7 24.4 18.8
3.89 3.93 3.97
13.8 11.7 9.28
9.19 10.6 7.79 8.80 6.19 6.84
1.26 1.28 1.31
43.6 36.5 28.7
*Outside dimensions across flat sides. **Properties are based upon a nominal outside corner radius equal to two times the wall thickness.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
1 - 129
STRUCTURAL TUBING Rectangular Dimensions and properties
Y
X
X
Y
Dimensions
Properties**
Nominal* Wall Weight Size Thickness per ft Area in.
in.
X-X Axis
Y-Y Axis
I
S
Z
r
I
S
Z
r
J
lb
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
in.4
92.2 15.4 72.0 12.0
21.4 16.6
3.74 3.79
12×2
0.2500 0.1875
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
22.42 17.08
6.59 5.02
10×8
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
55.66 42.79 36.10 29.23 22.18
16.4 12.6 10.6 8.59 6.52
226 180 154 127 97.9
45.2 35.9 30.8 25.4 19.6
55.1 43.1 36.7 30.0 23.0
3.72 3.78 3.81 3.84 3.87
160 127 109 90.2 69.7
39.9 31.8 27.3 22.5 17.4
47.2 37.0 31.5 25.8 19.7
3.12 3.18 3.21 3.24 3.27
306 239 203 166 127
10×6
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
48.85 37.69 31.84 25.82 19.63
14.4 11.1 9.36 7.59 5.77
181 145 125 103 79.8
36.2 29.0 25.0 20.6 16.0
45.6 35.9 30.7 25.1 19.3
3.55 3.62 3.65 3.69 3.72
80.8 65.4 56.5 46.9 36.5
26.9 21.8 18.8 15.6 12.2
31.9 25.2 21.5 17.7 13.6
2.37 2.43 2.46 2.49 2.51
187 147 126 103 79.1
10×5
0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
35.13 29.72 24.12 18.35
10.3 128 8.73 110 7.09 91.2 5.39 70.8
25.5 22.0 18.2 14.2
32.3 27.6 22.7 17.4
3.51 3.55 3.59 3.62
42.9 37.2 31.1 24.3
17.1 14.9 12.4 9.71
19.9 17.0 14.0 10.8
2.04 2.07 2.09 2.12
107 91.5 75.2 58.0
10×4
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
42.05 32.58 27.59 22.42 17.08
12.4 136 9.58 110 8.11 95.5 6.59 79.3 5.02 61.7
27.1 22.0 19.1 15.9 12.3
36.1 28.7 24.6 20.2 15.6
3.31 3.39 3.43 3.47 3.51
30.8 25.5 22.4 18.8 14.8
15.4 12.8 11.2 9.39 7.39
18.5 14.9 12.8 10.6 8.20
1.58 1.63 1.66 1.69 1.72
86.9 70.4 60.8 50.4 39.1
10×3
0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
30.0 25.5 20.72 15.80
8.83 7.48 6.09 4.64
92.8 80.8 67.4 52.7
18.6 16.2 13.5 10.5
25.1 21.6 17.8 13.8
3.24 3.29 3.33 3.37
13.0 11.5 9.79 7.80
8.66 10.3 7.68 8.92 6.53 7.42 5.20 5.79
1.21 1.24 1.27 1.30
39.8 34.9 29.3 23.0
10×2
0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
27.48 23.34 19.02 14.53
8.08 6.86 5.59 4.27
75.4 15.1 66.1 13.2 55.5 11.1 43.7 8.74
21.5 18.5 15.4 11.9
3.06 3.10 3.15 3.20
4.85 4.42 3.85 3.14
4.85 4.42 3.85 3.14
0.775 0.802 0.830 0.858
16.5 14.9 12.8 10.3
4.62 3.76
4.62 3.76
5.38 0.837 4.24 0.865
6.05 5.33 4.50 3.56
*Outside dimensions across flat sides. **Properties are based upon a nominal outside corner radius equal to two times the wall thickness.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
15.9 12.8
1 - 130
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
X
X
STRUCTURAL TUBING Rectangular Dimensions and properties
Y
Dimensions
Properties**
Nominal* Wall Weight Size Thickness per ft Area in.
in.
lb
in.2
X-X Axis
Y-Y Axis
I
S
Z
r
I
S
Z
r
J
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
in.4
8×6
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
42.05 32.58 27.59 22.42 17.08
12.4 103 9.58 83.7 8.11 72.4 6.59 60.1 5.02 46.8
25.8 20.9 18.1 15.0 11.7
32.2 25.6 21.9 18.0 13.9
2.89 2.96 2.99 3.02 3.05
65.7 53.5 46.4 38.6 30.1
21.9 17.8 15.5 12.9 10.0
26.4 21.0 18.0 14.8 11.4
2.31 2.36 2.39 2.42 2.45
135 107 91.3 74.9 57.6
8×4
0.6250 0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
42.30 35.24 27.48 23.34 19.02 14.53 9.86
12.4 10.4 8.08 6.86 5.59 4.27 2.90
21.3 18.8 15.5 13.5 11.3 8.83 6.14
28.8 24.7 19.9 17.1 14.1 11.0 7.53
2.62 2.69 2.77 2.80 2.84 2.88 2.91
27.4 24.6 20.6 18.1 15.3 12.0 8.45
13.7 12.3 10.3 9.05 7.63 6.02 4.23
17.3 15.0 12.2 10.5 8.72 6.77 4.67
1.49 1.54 1.60 1.62 1.65 1.68 1.71
73.2 64.1 52.2 45.2 37.5 29.1 20.0
8×3
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
31.84 24.93 21.21 17.32 13.25 9.01
9.36 7.33 6.23 5.09 3.89 2.65
61.0 15.3 51.0 12.7 44.7 11.2 37.6 9.40 29.6 7.40 20.7 5.17
21.0 17.0 14.7 12.2 9.49 6.55
2.55 2.64 2.68 2.72 2.76 2.80
12.1 10.4 9.25 7.90 6.31 4.48
8.05 10.1 6.92 8.31 6.16 7.24 5.26 6.05 4.21 4.73 2.99 3.29
1.14 1.19 1.22 1.25 1.27 1.30
35.7 29.9 26.3 22.1 17.3 12.1
8×2
0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
22.37 19.08 15.62 11.97 8.16
6.58 5.61 4.59 3.52 2.40
40.1 10.0 14.2 35.5 8.87 12.3 30.1 7.52 10.3 23.9 5.97 8.02 16.8 4.20 5.56
2.47 2.51 2.56 2.60 2.65
3.85 3.52 3.08 2.52 1.83
3.85 3.52 3.08 2.52 1.83
4.83 4.28 3.63 2.88 2.03
0.765 0.792 0.819 0.847 0.875
12.6 11.4 9.84 7.94 5.66
7×5
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
35.24 27.48 23.34 19.02 14.53 9.86
10.4 8.08 6.86 5.59 4.27 2.90
63.5 52.2 45.5 38.0 29.8 20.7
23.1 18.5 15.9 13.2 10.2 7.00
2.48 2.54 2.58 2.61 2.64 2.67
37.2 30.8 26.9 22.6 17.7 12.4
14.9 12.3 10.8 9.04 7.10 4.95
18.2 14.6 12.6 10.4 8.10 5.58
1.90 1.95 1.98 2.01 2.04 2.07
79.9 64.2 55.3 45.6 35.3 24.2
7×4
0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
24.93 21.21 17.32 13.25 9.01
7.33 6.23 5.09 3.89 2.65
44.0 12.6 16.0 38.5 11.0 13.8 32.3 9.23 11.5 25.4 7.26 8.91 17.7 5.07 6.15
2.45 2.49 2.52 2.55 2.59
18.1 16.0 13.5 10.7 7.51
9.06 10.8 7.98 9.36 6.75 7.78 5.34 6.06 3.76 4.19
1.57 1.60 1.63 1.66 1.68
43.3 37.5 31.2 24.2 16.7
85.1 75.1 61.9 53.9 45.1 35.3 24.6
18.1 14.9 13.0 10.9 8.50 5.91
*Outside dimensions across flat sides. **Properties are based upon a nominal outside corner radius equal to two times the wall thickness.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
1 - 131
STRUCTURAL TUBING Rectangular Dimensions and properties
Y
X
X
Y
Dimensions
Properties**
Nominal* Wall Weight Size Thickness per ft Area in.
in.
X-X Axis
Y-Y Axis
I
S
Z
r
I
S
Z
r
J
lb
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
in.4
in.3
in.3
in.
in.4
7×3
0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
22.37 19.08 15.62 11.97 8.16
6.58 5.61 4.59 3.52 2.40
35.7 31.5 26.6 21.1 14.8
10.2 13.5 9.00 11.8 7.61 9.79 6.02 7.63 4.22 5.29
2.33 2.37 2.41 2.45 2.48
9.08 8.11 6.95 5.57 3.96
6.05 5.41 4.63 3.71 2.64
7.32 6.40 5.36 4.20 2.93
1.18 1.20 1.23 1.26 1.29
25.1 22.0 18.5 14.6 10.2
6×4
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
28.43 22.37 19.08 15.62 11.97 8.16
8.36 6.58 5.61 4.59 3.52 2.40
35.3 29.7 26.2 22.1 17.4 12.2
11.8 15.4 9.90 12.5 8.72 10.9 7.36 9.06 5.81 7.06 4.08 4.88
2.06 2.13 2.16 2.19 2.23 2.26
18.4 15.6 13.8 11.7 9.32 6.57
9.21 7.82 6.92 5.87 4.66 3.29
11.5 9.44 8.21 6.84 5.34 3.71
1.48 1.54 1.57 1.60 1.63 1.66
42.1 34.6 30.1 25.0 19.5 13.5
6×3
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
25.03 19.82 16.96 13.91 10.70 7.31
7.36 5.83 4.98 4.09 3.14 2.15
27.7 23.8 21.1 17.9 14.3 10.1
9.25 12.6 7.92 10.4 7.03 9.11 5.98 7.62 4.76 5.97 3.36 4.15
1.94 2.02 2.06 2.09 2.13 2.17
8.91 7.78 6.98 6.00 4.83 3.45
5.94 5.19 4.65 4.00 3.22 2.30
7.59 6.34 5.56 4.67 3.68 2.57
1.10 1.16 1.18 1.21 1.24 1.27
23.9 20.3 17.9 15.1 11.9 8.27
6×2
0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
17.27 14.83 12.21 9.42 6.46
5.08 4.36 3.59 2.77 1.90
17.8 16.0 13.8 11.1 7.92
5.94 5.34 4.60 3.70 2.64
8.33 7.33 6.18 4.88 3.42
1.87 1.92 1.96 2.00 2.04
2.84 2.62 2.31 1.90 1.39
2.84 2.62 2.31 1.90 1.39
3.61 3.22 2.75 2.20 1.56
0.748 0.775 0.802 0.829 0.857
8.72 7.94 6.88 5.56 3.98
5×4
0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
19.82 16.96 13.91 10.70
5.83 4.98 4.09 3.14
18.7 16.6 14.1 11.2
7.50 6.65 5.65 4.49
9.44 8.24 6.89 5.39
1.79 1.83 1.86 1.89
13.2 11.7 9.98 7.96
6.58 5.85 4.99 3.98
8.08 7.05 5.90 4.63
1.50 1.53 1.56 1.59
26.3 22.9 19.1 14.9
5×3
0.5000 0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
21.63 17.27 14.83 12.21 9.42 6.46
6.36 5.08 4.36 3.59 2.77 1.90
16.9 14.7 13.2 11.3 9.06 6.44
6.75 5.89 5.27 4.52 3.62 2.58
9.20 7.71 6.77 5.70 4.49 3.14
1.63 1.70 1.74 1.77 1.81 1.84
7.33 6.48 5.85 5.05 4.08 2.93
4.88 4.32 3.90 3.37 2.72 1.95
6.34 5.35 4.72 3.98 3.15 2.21
1.07 1.13 1.16 1.19 1.21 1.24
18.2 15.6 13.8 11.7 9.21 6.44
*Outside dimensions across flatsides. **Properties are based upon a nominal outside corner radius equal to two times the wall thickness.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 132
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Y
X
X
STRUCTURAL TUBING Rectangular Dimensions and properties
Y
Dimensions
Properties**
Nominal* Wall Weight Size Thickness per ft Area in.
in.
2
X-X Axis
S
I 4
Z 3
Y-Y Axis
r 3
S
I 4
Z 3
3
r
J
lb
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.4
12.70 10.51 8.15 5.61
3.73 3.09 2.39 1.65
9.74 8.48 6.89 4.96
3.90 3.39 2.75 1.98
5.31 4.51 3.59 2.53
1.62 1.66 1.70 1.73
2.16 1.92 1.60 1.17
2.16 1.92 1.60 1.17
2.70 2.32 1.86 1.32
0.762 0.789 0.816 0.844
6.24 5.43 4.40 3.15
5×2
0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
4×3
0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
12.70 10.51 8.15 5.61
3.73 3.09 2.39 1.65
7.45 6.45 5.23 3.76
3.72 3.23 2.62 1.88
4.75 4.03 3.20 2.25
1.41 1.45 1.48 1.51
4.71 4.10 3.34 2.41
3.14 2.74 2.23 1.61
3.88 3.30 2.62 1.85
1.12 1.15 1.18 1.21
9.89 8.41 6.67 4.68
4×2
0.3750 0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
12.17 10.58 8.81 6.87 4.75
3.58 3.11 2.59 2.02 1.40
5.75 5.32 4.69 3.87 2.82
2.87 2.66 2.35 1.93 1.41
4.00 3.60 3.09 2.48 1.77
1.27 1.31 1.35 1.38 1.42
1.83 1.71 1.54 1.29 0.954
1.83 1.71 1.54 1.29 0.954
2.39 2.17 1.88 1.52 1.09
0.715 0.743 0.770 0.798 0.826
4.97 4.58 4.01 3.26 2.34
3×2
0.3125 0.2500 0.1875 0.1250
5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 8
8.45 7.11 5.59 3.90
2.48 2.09 1.64 1.15
2.44 2.21 1.86 1.38
1.63 1.47 1.24 0.920
2.20 1.92 1.57 1.13
0.992 1.03 1.06 1.10
1.26 1.15 0.977 0.733
1.26 1.15 0.977 0.733
1.64 1.44 1.18 0.855
0.714 0.742 0.771 0.800
2.97 2.63 2.16 1.57
21⁄2×11⁄2
0.2500 0.1875
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
5.41 4.32
1.59 1.27
1.05 0.844 1.15 0.815 0.920 0.736 0.964 0.852
0.458 0.405
0.610 0.793 0.537 1.14 0.540 0.669 0.565 0.976
*Outside dimensions across flat sides. **Properties are based upon a nominal outside corner radius equal to two times the wall thickness.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BARS AND PLATES
1 - 133
BARS AND PLATES Product Availability
Plates are readily available in seven of the structural steel specifications listed in Section A3.1 of the AISC LRFD Specification. These are: ASTM A36, A242, A529, A572, A588, A514, and A852. Bars are available in all of these steels except A514 and A852. Table 1-1 shows the availability of each steel in terms of plate thickness. The Manual user is referred to the discussion on p. 1-5, Selection of the Appropriate Structural Steel, for guidance in selection of both plate and structural shapes. Classification
Bars and plates are generally classified as follows: Bars: 6 in. or less in width, .203 in. and over in thickness. Over 6 in. to 8 in. in width, .230 in. and over in thickness. Plates: Over 8 in. to 48 in. in width, .230 in. and over in thickness. Over 48 in. in width, .180 in. and over in thickness. Bars
Bars are available in various widths, thicknesses, diameters, and lengths. The preferred practice is to specify widths in 1⁄4-in. increments and thickness and diameter in 1⁄8-in. increments. Plates
Defined according to rolling procedure: Sheared plates are rolled between horizontal rolls and trimmed (sheared or gas cut) on all edges. Universal (UM) plates are rolled between horizontal and vertical rolls and trimmed (sheared or gas cut) on ends only. Stripped plates are furnished to required widths by shearing or gas cutting from wider sheared plates. Sizes
Plate mills are located in various districts, but the sizes of plates produced differ greatly and the catalogs of individual mills should be consulted for detail data. The extreme width of UM plates currently rolled is 60 inches and for sheared plates it is 200 inches, but their availability together with limiting thickness and lengths should be checked with the mills before specifying. The preferred increments for width and thickness are: Widths:
Various. The catalogs of individual mills should be consulted to determine the most economical widths. Thickness: 1⁄32-in. increments up to 1⁄2-in. 1⁄ -in. increments over 1⁄ -in. to 1 in. 16 2 1⁄ -in. increments over 1 in. to 3 in. 8 1⁄ -in. increments over 3 in. 4 Ordering
Plate thickness may be specified in inches or by weight per square foot, but no decimal edge thickness can be assured by the latter method. Separate tolerance tables apply to each method. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 134
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-7. Theoretical Weights of Rolled Floor Plates Gauge No.
Theoretical Weight per sq. ft lb
Nominal Thickness in.
18
2.40
1⁄ 8
16
3.00
3⁄
14 13 12
Nominal Thickness in.
Theoretical Weight per sq. ft, lb
6.16
1⁄ 2
21.47
8.71
9⁄ 16
24.02
3.75
1⁄ 4
11.26
5⁄ 8
26.58
4.50
5⁄
13.81
3⁄ 4
31.68
5.25
3⁄ 8
16.37
7⁄ 8
36.78
7⁄
18.92
1
41.89
16
16
16
Theoretical Weight per sq. ft, lb
Note: Thickness is measured near the edge of the plate, exclusive of raised pattern.
Invoicing
Standard practice is to invoice plates to the fabricator at theoretical weight at point of shipment. Permissible variations in weight are in accordance with the tables of ASTM Specification A6. All plates are invoiced at theoretical weight and, except as noted, are subject to the same weight variations which apply to rectangular plates. Odd shapes in most instances require gas cutting, for which gas cutting extras are applicable. All plates ordered gas cut for whatever reason, or beyond published shearing limits, take extras for gas cutting in addition to all other extras. Rolled steel bearing plates are often gas cut to prevent distortion due to shearing but would also take the regular extra for the thickness involved. Extras for thickness, width, length, cutting, quality and quantity, etc., which are added to the base price of plates, are subject to revision, and should be obtained by inquiry to the producer. The foregoing general statements are made as a guide toward economy in design. Floor Plates
Floor plates having raised patterns are available from several mills, each offering its own style of surface projections and in a variety of widths, thicknesses, and lengths. A maximum width of 96 inches and a maximum thickness of one inch are available, but availability of matching widths, thicknesses, and lengths should be checked with the producer. Floor plates are generally not specified to chemical composition limits or mechanical property requirements; a commercial grade of carbon steel is furnished. However, when strength or corrosion resistance is a consideration, raised pattern floor plates are procurable in any of the regular steel specifications. As in the case of plain plates, the individual manufacturers should be consulted for precise information. The nominal or ordered thickness is that of the flat plate, exclusive of the height or raised pattern. The usual weights are as shown in Table 1-7.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BARS AND PLATES
1 - 135
SQUARE AND ROUND BARS Weight and area Weight lb per ft
Area Sq in.
Size in. 0
Weight lb per ft
Area Sq in.
Size in.
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
0.013 0.053 0.120
0.010 0.042 0.094
0.0039 0.0156 0.0352
0.0031 0.0123 0.0276
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
30.63 31.91 33.23 34.57
24.05 25.07 26.10 27.15
9.000 9.379 9.766 10.160
7.069 7.366 7.670 7.980
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
0.213 0.332 0.479 0.651
0.167 0.261 0.376 0.512
0.0625 0.0977 0.1406 0.1914
0.0491 0.0767 0.1104 0.1503
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
35.94 37.34 38.76 40.21
28.23 29.32 30.44 31.58
10.563 10.973 11.391 11.816
8.296 8.618 8.946 9.281
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
0.851 1.077 1.329 1.608
0.668 0.846 1.044 1.263
0.2500 0.3164 0.3906 0.4727
0.1964 0.2485 0.3068 0.3712
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
41.68 43.19 44.71 46.27
32.74 33.92 35.12 36.34
12.250 12.691 13.141 13.598
9.621 9.968 10.321 10.680
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
1.914 2.246 2.605 2.991
1.503 1.764 2.046 2.349
0.5625 0.6602 0.7656 0.8789
0.4418 0.5185 0.6013 0.6903
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
47.85 49.46 51.09 52.76
37.58 38.85 40.13 41.43
14.063 14.535 15.016 15.504
11.045 11.416 11.793 12.177
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
3.403 3.841 4.307 4.798
2.673 3.017 3.382 3.769
1.0000 1.1289 1.2656 1.4102
0.7854 0.8866 0.9940 1.1075
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
54.44 56.16 57.90 59.67
42.76 44.11 45.47 46.86
16.000 16.504 17.016 17.535
12.566 12.962 13.364 13.772
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
5.317 5.862 6.433 7.032
4.176 4.604 5.053 5.523
1.5625 1.7227 1.8906 2.0664
1.2272 1.3530 1.4849 1.6230
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
61.46 63.28 65.13 67.01
48.27 49.70 51.15 52.63
18.063 18.598 19.141 19.691
14.186 14.607 15.033 15.466
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
7.656 8.308 8.985 9.690
6.013 6.525 7.057 7.610
2.2500 2.4414 2.6406 2.8477
1.7672 1.9175 2.0739 2.2365
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
68.91 70.83 72.79 74.77
54.12 55.63 57.17 58.72
20.250 20.816 21.391 21.973
15.904 16.349 16.800 17.257
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
10.421 11.179 11.963 12.774
8.185 8.780 9.396 10.032
3.0625 3.2852 3.5156 3.7539
2.4053 2.5802 2.7612 2.9483
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
76.78 78.81 80.87 82.96
60.30 61.90 63.51 65.15
22.563 23.160 23.766 24.379
17.721 18.190 18.666 19.147
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
13.611 14.475 15.366 16.283
10.690 11.369 12.068 12.789
4.0000 4.2539 4.5156 4.7852
3.1416 3.3410 3.5466 3.7583
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
85.07 87.21 89.38 91.57
66.81 68.49 70.20 71.92
25.000 25.629 26.266 26.910
19.635 20.129 20.629 21.135
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
17.227 18.197 19.194 20.217
13.530 14.292 15.075 15.879
5.0625 5.3477 5.6406 5.9414
3.9761 4.2000 4.4301 4.6664
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
93.79 96.04 98.31 100.61
73.66 75.43 77.21 79.02
27.563 28.223 28.891 29.566
21.648 22.166 22.691 23.221
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
21.267 22.344 23.447 24.577
16.703 17.549 18.415 19.303
6.2500 6.5664 6.8906 7.2227
4.9087 5.1573 5.4119 5.6727
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
102.93 105.29 107.67 110.07
80.84 82.69 84.56 86.45
30.250 30.941 31.641 32.348
23.758 24.301 24.851 25.406
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
25.734 26.917 28.126 29.362
20.211 21.140 22.090 23.061
7.5625 7.9102 8.2656 8.6289
5.9396 6.2126 6.4918 6.7771
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
112.50 114.96 117.45 119.96
88.36 90.29 92.24 94.22
33.063 33.785 34.516 35.254
25.967 26.535 27.109 27.688
1
2
3
4
5
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 136
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
SQUARE AND ROUND BARS Weight and area Weight lb per ft
Area Sq in.
Size in. 6
Weight lb per ft
Area Sq in.
Size in.
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
122.50 125.07 127.66 130.28
96.21 98.23 100.26 102.32
36.000 36.754 37.516 38.285
28.274 28.867 29.465 30.069
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
132.92 135.59 138.29 141.02
104.40 106.49 108.61 110.75
39.063 39.848 40.641 41.441
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
143.77 146.55 149.35 152.18
112.91 115.10 117.30 119.52
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
155.04 157.92 160.83 163.77
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
275.63 279.47 283.33 287.23
216.48 219.49 222.53 225.59
81.000 82.129 83.266 84.410
63.617 64.504 65.397 66.296
30.680 31.296 31.919 32.548
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
291.15 295.10 299.07 303.07
228.67 231.77 234.89 238.03
85.563 86.723 87.891 89.066
67.201 68.112 69.029 69.953
42.250 43.066 43.891 44.723
33.183 33.824 34.472 35.125
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
307.10 311.15 315.24 319.34
241.20 244.38 247.59 250.81
90.250 91.441 92.641 93.848
70.882 71.818 72.760 73.708
121.77 124.03 126.32 128.63
45.563 46.410 47.266 48.129
35.785 36.451 37.122 37.800
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
323.48 327.64 331.82 336.04
254.06 257.33 260.61 263.92
95.063 96.285 97.516 98.754
74.662 75.622 76.589 77.561
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
166.74 169.73 172.74 175.79
130.95 133.30 135.67 138.06
49.000 49.879 50.766 51.660
38.485 39.175 39.871 40.574
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
340.28 344.54 348.84 353.16
267.25 270.61 273.98 277.37
100.000 101.254 102.516 103.785
78.540 79.525 80.516 81.513
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
178.86 181.96 185.08 188.23
140.48 142.91 145.36 147.84
52.563 53.473 54.391 55.316
41.283 41.997 42.718 43.446
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
357.50 361.88 366.28 370.70
280.78 284.22 287.67 291.15
105.063 106.348 107.641 108.941
82.516 83.525 84.541 85.563
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
191.41 194.61 197.84 201.10
150.33 152.85 155.38 157.94
56.250 57.191 58.141 59.098
44.179 44.918 45.664 46.415
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
375.16 379.64 384.14 388.67
294.65 298.17 301.70 305.26
110.250 111.566 112.891 114.223
86.590 87.624 88.664 89.710
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
204.38 207.69 211.03 214.39
160.52 163.12 165.74 168.38
60.063 61.035 62.016 63.004
47.173 47.937 48.707 49.483
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
393.23 397.82 402.43 407.07
308.85 312.45 316.07 319.71
115.563 116.910 118.266 119.629
90.763 91.821 92.886 93.957
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
217.78 221.19 224.64 228.11
171.04 173.73 176.43 179.15
64.000 65.004 66.016 67.035
50.266 51.054 51.849 52.649
1⁄ 16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16
411.74 416.43 421.15 425.89
323.38 327.06 330.77 334.50
121.000 122.379 123.766 125.160
95.033 96.116 97.206 98.301
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
231.60 235.12 238.67 242.25
181.90 184.67 187.45 190.26
68.063 69.098 70.141 71.191
53.456 54.269 55.088 55.914
1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
430.66 435.46 440.29 445.14
338.24 342.01 345.80 349.61
126.563 127.973 129.391 130.816
99.402 100.510 101.623 102.743
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
245.85 249.48 253.13 256.82
193.09 195.94 198.81 201.70
72.250 73.316 74.391 75.473
56.745 57.583 58.426 59.276
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16
450.02 454.92 459.85 464.81
353.44 357.30 361.17 365.06
132.250 133.691 135.141 136.598
103.869 105.001 106.139 107.284
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
260.53 264.26 268.02 271.81
204.62 207.55 210.50 213.48
76.563 77.660 78.766 79.879
60.132 60.994 61.863 62.737
3⁄ 4 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
469.80 474.81 479.84 484.91
368.98 372.91 376.87 380.85
138.063 139.535 141.016 142.504
108.434 109.591 110.754 111.923
490.00
384.85
144.000
113.098
7
8
9
10
11
12
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BARS AND PLATES
1 - 137
AREA OF RECTANGULAR SECTIONS Square inches Width in.
Thickness, inches 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
7⁄ 16
1⁄ 2
9⁄ 16
5⁄ 8
11⁄ 16
3⁄ 4
13⁄ 16
1
0.047 0.093 0.141 0.188
0.063 0.125 0.188 0.250
0.078 0.156 0.234 0.313
0.094 0.188 0.281 0.375
0.109 0.219 0.328 0.438
0.125 0.250 0.375 0.500
0.141 0.281 0.422 0.563
0.156 0.313 0.469 0.625
0.172 0.344 0.516 0.688
0.188 0.375 0.563 0.75
0.203 0.406 0.609 0.813
0.219 0.438 0.656 0.875
0.234 0.469 0.703 0.938
0.250 0.500 0.750 1.00
11⁄4 11⁄2 13⁄4 2
0.234 0.281 0.328 0.375
0.313 0.375 0.438 0.500
0.391 0.469 0.547 0.625
0.469 0.563 0.656 0.750
0.547 0.656 0.766 0.875
0.625 0.750 0.875 1.00
0.703 0.844 0.984 1.13
0.781 0.938 1.09 1.25
0.859 1.03 1.20 1.38
0.938 1.13 1.31 1.50
1.02 1.22 1.42 1.63
1.09 1.31 1.53 1.75
1.17 1.41 1.64 1.88
1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00
21⁄4 21⁄2 23⁄4 3
0.422 0.469 0.516 0.563
0.563 0.625 0.688 0.750
0.703 0.781 0.859 0.938
0.844 0.938 1.03 1.13
0.984 1.09 1.20 1.31
1.13 1.25 1.38 1.50
1.27 1.41 1.55 1.69
1.41 1.56 1.72 1.88
1.55 1.72 1.89 2.06
1.69 1.88 2.06 2.25
1.83 2.03 2.23 2.44
1.97 2.19 2.41 2.63
2.11 2.34 2.58 2.81
2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00
31⁄4 31⁄2 33⁄4 4
0.609 0.656 0.703 0.750
0.813 0.875 0.938 1.00
1.02 1.09 1.17 1.25
1.22 1.31 1.41 1.50
1.42 1.53 1.64 1.75
1.63 1.75 1.88 2.00
1.83 1.97 2.11 2.25
2.03 2.19 2.34 2.50
2.23 2.41 2.58 2.75
2.44 2.63 2.81 3.00
2.64 2.84 3.05 3.25
2.84 3.06 3.28 3.50
3.05 3.28 3.52 3.75
3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00
41⁄4 41⁄2 43⁄4 5
0.797 0.844 0.891 0.938
1.06 1.13 1.19 1.25
1.33 1.41 1.48 1.56
1.59 1.69 1.78 1.88
1.86 1.97 2.08 2.19
2.13 2.25 2.38 2.50
2.39 2.53 2.67 2.81
2.66 2.81 2.97 3.13
2.92 3.09 3.27 3.44
3.19 3.38 3.56 3.75
3.45 3.66 3.86 4.06
3.72 3.94 4.16 4.38
3.98 4.22 4.45 4.69
4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00
51⁄4 51⁄2 53⁄4 6
0.984 1.03 1.08 1.13
1.31 1.38 1.44 1.50
1.64 1.72 1.80 1.88
1.97 2.06 2.16 2.25
2.30 2.41 2.52 2.63
2.63 2.75 2.88 3.00
2.95 3.09 3.23 3.38
3.28 3.44 3.59 3.75
3.61 3.78 3.95 4.13
3.94 4.13 4.31 4.50
4.27 4.47 4.67 4.88
4.59 4.81 5.03 5.25
4.92 5.16 5.39 5.63
5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00
61⁄4 61⁄2 63⁄4 7
1.17 1.22 1.27 1.31
1.56 1.63 1.69 1.75
1.95 2.03 2.11 2.19
2.34 2.44 2.53 2.63
2.73 2.84 2.95 3.06
3.13 3.25 3.38 3.50
3.52 3.66 3.80 3.94
3.91 4.06 4.22 4.38
4.30 4.47 4.64 4.81
4.69 4.88 5.06 5.25
5.08 5.28 5.48 5.69
5.47 5.69 5.91 6.13
5.86 6.09 6.33 6.56
6.25 6.50 6.75 7.00
71⁄4 71⁄2 73⁄4 8
1.36 1.41 1.45 1.50
1.81 1.88 1.94 2.00
2.27 2.34 2.42 2.50
2.72 2.81 2.91 3.00
3.17 3.28 3.39 3.50
3.63 3.75 3.88 4.00
4.08 4.22 4.36 4.50
4.53 4.69 4.84 5.00
4.98 5.16 5.33 5.50
5.44 5.63 5.81 6.00
5.89 6.09 6.30 6.50
6.34 6.56 6.78 7.00
6.80 7.03 7.27 7.50
7.25 7.50 7.75 8.00
81⁄2 9
1.59 1.69
2.13 2.25
2.66 2.81
3.19 3.38
3.72 3.94
4.25 4.50
4.78 5.06
5.31 5.63
5.84 6.19
6.38 6.75
6.91 7.31
7.44 7.88
7.97 8.44
8.50 9.00
91⁄2 10
1.78 1.88
2.38 2.50
2.97 3.13
3.56 3.75
4.16 4.38
4.75 5.00
5.34 5.63
5.94 6.25
6.53 6.88
7.13 7.50
7.72 8.13
8.31 8.75
8.91 9.38
9.50 10.0
101⁄2 11
1.97 2.06
2.63 2.75
3.28 3.44
3.94 4.13
4.59 4.81
5.25 5.50
5.91 6.19
6.56 6.88
7.22 7.56
7.88 8.25
8.53 8.94
9.19 9.63
9.84 10.3
10.5 11.0
111⁄2 12
2.16 2.25
2.88 3.00
3.59 3.75
4.31 4.50
5.03 5.25
5.75 6.00
6.47 6.75
7.19 7.50
7.91 8.63 8.25 9.00
9.34 9.75
10.8 11.3
11.5 12.0
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7⁄ 8
10.1 10.5
15⁄ 16
1
1 - 138
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
WEIGHT OF RECTANGULAR SECTIONS Pounds per linear foot Width in.
Thickness, inches 3⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
7⁄ 16
1⁄ 2
9⁄ 16
5⁄ 8
11⁄ 16
3⁄ 4
13⁄ 16
7⁄ 8
15⁄ 16
1
0.160 0.319 0.479 0.638
0.213 0.425 0.638 0.851
0.266 0.532 0.798 1.06
0.319 0.638 0.957 1.28
0.372 0.744 1.12 1.49
0.425 0.851 1.28 1.70
0.479 0.957 1.44 1.91
0.532 1.06 1.60 2.13
0.585 1.17 1.75 2.34
0.638 1.28 1.91 2.55
0.691 1.38 2.07 2.76
0.744 1.49 2.23 2.98
0.798 1.60 2.39 3.19
0.851 1.70 2.55 3.40
11⁄4 11⁄2 13⁄4 2
0.798 0.957 1.12 1.28
1.06 1.28 1.49 1.70
1.33 1.60 1.86 2.13
1.60 1.91 2.23 2.55
1.86 2.23 2.61 2.98
2.13 2.55 2.98 3.40
2.39 2.87 3.35 3.83
2.66 3.19 3.72 4.25
2.92 3.51 4.09 4.68
3.19 3.83 4.47 5.10
3.46 4.15 4.84 5.53
3.72 4.47 5.21 5.95
3.99 4.79 5.58 6.38
4.25 5.10 5.95 6.81
21⁄4 21⁄2 23⁄4 3
1.44 1.60 1.75 1.91
1.91 2.13 2.34 2.55
2.39 2.66 2.92 3.19
2.87 3.19 3.51 3.83
3.35 3.72 4.09 4.47
3.83 4.25 4.68 5.10
4.31 4.79 5.26 5.74
4.79 5.32 5.85 6.38
5.26 5.85 6.43 7.02
5.74 6.38 7.02 7.66
6.22 6.91 7.60 8.29
6.70 7.44 8.19 8.93
7.18 7.98 8.77 9.57
7.66 8.51 9.36 10.2
31⁄4 31⁄2 33⁄4 4
2.07 2.23 2.39 2.55
2.76 2.98 3.19 3.40
3.46 3.72 3.99 4.25
4.15 4.47 4.79 5.10
4.84 5.21 5.58 5.95
5.53 5.95 6.38 6.81
6.22 6.70 7.18 7.66
6.91 7.44 7.98 8.51
7.60 8.19 8.77 9.36
8.29 8.93 9.57 10.2
8.99 9.68 10.4 11.1
9.68 10.4 11.2 11.9
10.4 11.2 12.0 12.8
11.1 11.9 12.8 13.6
41⁄4 41⁄2 43⁄4 5
2.71 2.87 3.03 3.19
3.62 3.83 4.04 4.25
4.52 4.79 5.05 5.32
5.42 5.74 6.06 6.38
6.33 6.70 7.07 7.44
7.23 7.66 8.08 8.51
8.13 8.61 9.09 9.57
9.04 9.57 10.1 10.6
9.94 10.5 11.1 11.7
10.8 11.5 12.1 12.8
11.8 12.4 13.1 13.8
12.7 13.4 14.1 14.9
13.6 14.4 15.2 16.0
14.5 15.3 16.2 17.0
51⁄4 51⁄2 53⁄4 6
3.35 3.51 3.67 3.83
4.47 4.68 4.89 5.10
5.58 5.85 6.11 6.38
6.70 7.02 7.34 7.66
7.82 8.19 8.56 8.93
8.93 9.36 9.78 10.2
10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5
11.2 11.7 12.2 12.8
12.3 12.9 13.5 14.0
13.4 14.0 14.7 15.3
14.5 15.2 15.9 16.6
15.6 16.4 17.1 17.9
16.7 17.5 18.3 19.1
17.9 18.7 19.6 20.4
61⁄4 61⁄2 63⁄4 7
3.99 4.15 4.31 4.47
5.32 5.53 5.74 5.95
6.65 6.91 7.18 7.44
7.98 8.29 8.61 8.93
9.30 9.68 10.0 10.4
10.6 11.1 11.5 11.9
12.0 12.4 12.9 13.4
13.3 13.8 14.4 14.9
14.6 15.2 15.8 16.4
16.0 16.6 17.2 17.9
17.3 18.0 18.7 19.4
18.6 19.4 20.1 20.8
19.9 20.7 21.5 22.3
21.3 22.1 23.0 23.8
71⁄4 71⁄2 73⁄4 8
4.63 4.79 4.94 5.10
6.17 6.38 6.59 6.81
7.71 7.98 8.24 8.51
9.25 9.57 9.89 10.2
10.8 11.2 11.5 11.9
12.3 12.8 13.2 13.6
13.9 14.4 14.8 15.3
15.4 16.0 16.5 17.0
17.0 17.5 18.1 18.7
18.5 19.1 19.8 20.4
20.0 20.7 21.4 22.1
21.6 22.3 23.1 23.8
23.1 23.9 24.7 25.5
24.7 25.5 26.4 27.2
81⁄2 9
5.42 5.74
7.23 7.66
9.04 9.57
10.8 11.5
12.7 13.4
14.5 15.3
16.3 17.2
18.1 19.1
19.9 21.1
21.7 23.0
23.5 24.9
25.3 26.8
27.1 28.7
28.9 30.6
91⁄2 10
6.06 6.38
8.08 8.51
10.1 10.6
12.1 12.8
14.1 14.9
16.2 17.0
18.2 19.1
20.2 21.3
22.2 23.4
24.2 25.5
26.3 27.6
28.3 29.8
30.3 31.9
32.3 34.0
101⁄2 11
6.70 7.02
8.93 9.36
11.2 11.7
13.4 14.0
15.6 16.4
17.9 18.7
20.1 21.1
22.3 23.4
24.6 25.7
26.8 28.1
29.0 30.4
31.3 32.8
33.5 35.1
35.7 37.4
111⁄2 12
7.34 7.66
9.78 10.2
12.2 12.8
14.7 15.3
17.1 17.9
19.6 20.4
22.0 23.0
24.5 25.5
26.9 28.1
29.3 30.6
31.8 33.2
34.2 35.7
36.7 38.3
39.1 40.8
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1
CRANE RAILS
1 - 139
CRANE RAILS General Notes
The ASCE rails and the 104- to 175-lb crane rails shown in Figure 1-2 are recommended for crane runway use. For complete details and for profiles and properties of rails not listed, consult manufacturers’ catalogs. Rails should be arranged so that joints on opposite sides of the crane runway will be staggered with respect to each other and with due consideration to the wheelbase of the crane. Rail joints should not occur at crane girder splices. Light 40-lb rails are available in 30-ft lengths, 60-lb rails in 30-, 33- or 39-ft lengths, standard rails in 33- or 39-ft lengths and crane rails up to 80 ft. Consult manufacturer for availability of other lengths. Odd lengths, which must be included to complete a run or obtain the necessary stagger, should be not less than 10 feet long. For crane rail service, 40-lb rails are furnished to manufacturers’ specifications and tolerances. 60- and 85-lb rails are furnished to manufacturers’ specifications and tolerances, or to ASTM A1. Crane rails are furnished to ASTM A759. Rails will be furnished with standard drilling in both standard and odd lengths unless stipulated otherwise on order. For controlled cooling, heat treatment, and rail end preparation, see manufacturers’ catalogs. Purchase orders for crane rails should be noted “For crane service.” (See Table 1-8.) For maximum wheel loadings see manufacturers’ catalogs. Splices
Bolted Splices
It is often more desirable to use properly installed and maintained bolted splice bars in making up rail joints for crane service than welded splice bars. Standard rail drilling and joint-bar punching, as furnished by manufacturers of light standard rails for track work, include round holes in rail ends and slotted holes in joint bars to receive standard oval-neck tack bolts. Holes in rails are oversize and punching in joint bars is spaced to allow 1⁄16- to 1⁄8-in. clearance between rail ends (see manufacturers’ catalogs for spacing and dimensions of holes and slots). Although this construction is satisfactory for track and light crane service, its use in general crane service may lead to joint failure. For best service in bolted splices, it is recommended that tight joints be stipulated for all rails for crane service. This will require rail ends to be finished by milling or grinding, and the special rail drilling and joint-bar punching tabulated below. Special rail drilling is accepted by some mills, or rails may be ordered blank for shop drilling. End finishing of standard rails can be done at the mill; light rails must be end-finished in the fabricating shop or ground at the site prior to erection. In the crane rail range, from 104 to 175 lbs per yard, rails and joint bars are manufactured to obtain a tight fit and no further special end finishing, drilling, or punching is required. Because of cumulative tolerance variations in holes, bolt diameters, and rail ends, a slight gap may sometimes occur in the so-called tight joints. Conversely, it may sometimes be necessary to ream holes through joined bar and rail to permit entry of bolts. Joint bars for crane service are provided in various sections to match the rails. Joint bars for light and standard rails may be purchased blank for special shop punching to obtain tight joints. See Bethlehem Steel Corp. Booklet 3351 for dimensions, material specifications, and the identification necessary to match the crane rail section. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 140
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
c
Bars can be sheared off r
13°
c of g y
13°
1/ 4 Rad.
R
X
X
h
1/ 4 Rad.
t
1/ 2 Rad.
d
1/ 2 Rad.
h
g
13°
13°
m
m
n
b
A.S.C.E. 40, 60 & 85 lb. c
BETHLEHEM 104 lb. c 4
3 (approx.)
12°
13° 3 4
Rad.
3 4
Rad.
7/ 8
7/ 8 Rad.
h
13°
h
12° m
BETHLEHEM 135 lb.
Rad.
m
BETHLEHEM 171 lb.
c 4 1/32 (approx.)
12°
2 Rad.
11/8 Rad. 12°
h 2 53/64 m
BETHLEHEM 175 lb. Nomenclature of sketch for A.S.C.E. rails also applies to the other sections.
Fig. 1-2. Crane rails. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CRANE RAILS
1 - 141
Table 1-8. Crane Rails Dimensions and Properties
Type
Nominal Wt. per Classi- Yd. d fication lb in.
Sx
Gage g
b
m
n
c
r
t
h
R
Area
lx
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.2
in.4
17⁄ 32 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16 48⁄ 64 13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 57⁄ 64 31⁄ 32 11⁄16 11⁄16 11⁄4 19⁄64
11⁄ 64 7⁄ 32 1⁄ 4 9⁄ 32 9⁄ 32 19⁄ 64 19⁄ 64 10⁄ 32 1⁄ 2 15⁄ 32 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2
111⁄16
12
12
3.00 4.10 2.55
12
155⁄64
12
3.94 6.54 3.59 3.89 1.68
21⁄8
12
23⁄8
12
27⁄16
12
21⁄2
12
29⁄16
12
23⁄4
12
21⁄ 64 25⁄ 64 7⁄ 16 31⁄ 64 33⁄ 64 35⁄ 64 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
123⁄32
17⁄8
21⁄2
12
1
ASCE
Light
30
31⁄8
125⁄64
31⁄8
ASCE
Light
40
31⁄2
171⁄128
31⁄2
ASCE
Light
50
37⁄8
123⁄32
37⁄8
ASCE
Light
60
41⁄4 1115⁄128 41⁄4
ASCE
70
45⁄8
23⁄64
45⁄8
ASCE
80
5
23⁄16
5
ASCE
Std.
85
53⁄16
217⁄64
53⁄16
ASCE
Std.
100
53⁄4
265⁄128
53⁄4
Bethlehem
Crane
104
5
27⁄16
5
Bethlehem
Crane
135
53⁄4
215⁄32
53⁄16
Bethlehem
Crane
171
6
25⁄8
6
Bethlehem
Crane
175
6
221⁄32
6
Hd. Base
y
in.3
in.3
in.
—
—
21⁄16
12
4.90 10.1
5.10
217⁄64
12
5.93 14.6
6.64 7.12 2.05
215⁄32
12
6.81 19.7
8.19 8.87 2.22
25⁄8
12
7.86 26.4 10.1 11.1 2.38
23⁄4
12
8.33 30.1 11.1 12.2 2.47
25⁄64
12
9.84 44.0 14.6 16.1 2.73
27⁄16
31⁄2
10.3 29.8 10.7 13.5 2.21
12
13.3 50.8 17.3 18.1 2.81
—
1.88
37⁄16
14
11⁄4 213⁄16
4.3
Flat
11⁄4
23⁄4 Vert. 16.8 73.4 24.5 24.4 3.01
41⁄4
18
11⁄2
37⁄64 Vert. 17.1 70.5 23.4 23.6 2.98
Joint-bar bolts, as distinguished from oval-neck track bolts, have straight shanks to the head and are manufactured to ASTM A449 specifications. Nuts are manufactured to ASTM A563 Gr. B specifications. ASTM A325 bolts and nuts may be used. Bolt assembly includes an alloy steel spring washer, furnished to AREA specifications. After installation, bolts should be retightened within 30 days and every three months thereafter. Welded Splices
When welded splices are specified, consult the manufacturer for recommended rail-end preparation, welding procedure, and method of ordering. Although joint continuity, made possible by this method of splicing, is desirable, it should be noted that the careful control required in all stages of the welding operation may be difficult to meet during crane rail installation. Rails should not be attached to structural supports by welding. Rails with holes for joint bar bolts should not be used in making welded splices. Fastenings
Hook Bolts
Hook bolts (Figure 1-3) are used primarily with light rails when attached to beams too narrow for clamps. Rail adjustment to ±1⁄2-in. is inherent in the threaded shank. Hook bolts are paired alternately three to four inches apart, spaced at about 24-in. centers. The special rail drilling required must be done at the fabricator’s shop. Hook bolts are not recommended for use with heavy duty cycle cranes (CMAA Classes, D, E, and F). It is generally recommended that hook bolts should not be used in runway systems which are longer than 500 feet because the bolts do not allow for longitudinal movement of the rail. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 142
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-9. Splices for Tight Joints
g
A
B
C
C
B
D
C
B
L
Rail End
Joint Bar
l
l
Grip
Grip H
H
G Cut when specified 40-60-85-104
Rail
Joint Bar
Drilling Wt. Per Yard
g
lb
in.
40 171⁄128 60 1115⁄128 85 217⁄64 104
27⁄16
135 215⁄32 171
25⁄8
175
221⁄32
Hole Dia. A in. 13⁄ * 16 13⁄ * 16 15⁄ * 16 11⁄16 13⁄16 13⁄16 13⁄16
105-135-171-175
B C
in. in. in. 21⁄2 5
—
21⁄2 5
—
21⁄2 5
—
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
Bolt
Washer
Punching
5
6
Wt. 2 Bars Bolts, Nuts, Washers
ThickIn- ness side and With Less Dia. Width Fig. Fig.
Hole Dia.
D
B C
L
G
Dia.
Grip
I
H
in.
in.
in. in. in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
lb
lb
13⁄ * 16 13⁄ * 16 15⁄ * 16 11⁄16 13⁄16 13⁄16 13⁄16
415⁄16*
5
— 20 23⁄16
3⁄
4
115⁄16
31⁄2
21⁄2
16.5
5
— 24 211⁄16
3⁄
4
219⁄32
4
211⁄16
36.5
29.6
415⁄16*
5
— 24 311⁄32
7⁄
8
35⁄32
43⁄4
33⁄16
56.6
45.3
715⁄16
5
6
34
31⁄2
1
31⁄2
51⁄4
31⁄2
715⁄16
5
6
34
—
11⁄8
35⁄8
51⁄2
311⁄16
715⁄16
5
6
34
—
11⁄8
47⁄16
61⁄4
41⁄16
—
11⁄8
41⁄8
61⁄4
315⁄16
7⁄ ×3⁄ 16 8 7⁄ ×3⁄ 16 8 7⁄ ×3⁄ 16 8 7⁄ ×1⁄ 16 2 7⁄ ×1⁄ 16 2 7⁄ ×1⁄ 16 2 7⁄ ×1⁄ 16 2
20.0
415⁄16*
13⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 11⁄16 13⁄16 13⁄16 13⁄16
715⁄16
5
6
34
73.5
55.4
—
75.3
—
90.8
—
87.7
*Special rail drilling and joint-bar punching.
Rail Clips
Rail clips are forged or cast devices which are shaped to match specific rail profiles. They are usually bolted to the runway girder flange with one bolt or are sometimes welded. Rail clips have been used satisfactorily with all classes of cranes. However, one drawback is that when a single bolt is used the clip can rotate in response to rail longitudinal movement. This clip rotation can cause a camming action, thus forcing the rail out of alignment. Because of this limitation, rail clips should only be used in crane systems subject to infrequent use, and for runways less than 500 feet in length. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CRANE RAILS
1 - 143
Rail Clamps
Rail clamps are a common method of attachment for heavy duty cycle cranes. Rail clamps are detailed to provide two types: tight and floating (Figure 1-4). Each clamp consists of two plates: an upper clamp plate and a lower filler plate. The lower plate is flat and roughly matches the height of the toe of the rail flange. The upper plate covers the lower plate and extends over the top of the lower rail flange. In the tight clamp the upper plate is detailed to fit tightly to the lower tail flange top, thus “clamping” it tightly in place when the fasteners are tightened. In the past, the tight clamp had been illustrated with the filler plates fitted tightly against the rail flange toe. This tight fit-up was rarely achieved in practice and is not considered to be necessary to achieve a tight type clamp. In the floating type clamp, the pieces are detailed to provide a clearance both alongside the rail flange toe and below the upper plate. The floating type does not, in reality, clamp the rail but merely holds the rail within the limits of the clamp clearances.
Fig. 1-3. Hook bolts. Reversible 1 1/2 fillers
Reversible fillers
Clamp plates
3
Off-center punching
11/2
Clamp plates
3
Off-center punching
11/2
1 1/2
Rail base + 1/ 4
( 1/2 to 9/16 ) "float"
Max. adjustment
Self-locking nut or nut and lock washer Filler Machine bolt Gage
Gage
Tight clamp
Floating clamp
Fig. 1-4. Rail clamps. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 144
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
High strength bolts are recommended for both clamp types. Both types should be spaced three feet or less apart. Dimensions shown above are suggested. See manufacturers’ catalogs for recommended gages, bolt sizes, and detail dimensions not shown. Patented Rail Clips
Each manufacturer’s literature presents in detail the desirable aspects of the various designs. In general patented rail clips are easy to install due to their range of adjustment while providing the proper limitations of lateral movement and allowance for longitudinal movement. Patented rail clips should be considered as a viable alternative to conventional hook bolts, clips, or clamps. Because of their desirable characteristics, patented rail clips can be used without restriction except as limited by the specific manufacturer’s recommendations. Installations using patented rail clips sometimes incorporate pads beneath the rail. When this is done the lateral float of the rail should be limited as in the case of the tight rail clamps.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 145
TORSION PROPERTIES
Torsional analysis is not required for the routine design of most structural steel members. When torsional analysis is required, the Table of Torsion Properties will be of assistance in utilizing current analysis methods. The reader is referred to the AISC publication Torsional Analysis of Steel Members (American Institute of Steel Construction, 1983) for additional information and appropriate design aids. Torsion Properties are also required to determine the design compressive strength for torsional and flexural-torsional buckling as specified in the AISC LRFD Specification Appendix E3. Nomenclature
= warping constant for section, in.6* = modulus of elasticity of steel (29,000 ksi) = shear modulus of elasticity of steel (11,200 ksi) = flexural constant in Equation E3-1, LRFD Specification = torsional constant for a section, in.4 = statical moment for a point in the flange directly above the vertical edge of the web, in.3 3 _Qw = statical moment at mid-depth of the section, in. ro = polar radius of gyration about the shear center, in. Sw = warping statical moment at a point in the section, in.4 Wno = normalized warping function at a point at the flange edge, in.2 Cw E G H J Qf
*Calculated values of Cw are given for all tabulated shapes. However, for many angles and T shapes, Cw is so small that for practical purposes it can be taken as zero. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 146
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
TORSION PROPERTIES W shapes
√ EC w GJ
Normalized Warping Constant Wno
Warping Statical Moment Sw
Qf
Qw
in.
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.3
137 153 167 190
168 166 165 164
1190 1040 922 789
282 251 225 194
811 709 636 551
989000 649000 577000 511000 446000 397000 378000 333000 283000 245000 189000
75.4 95.1 103 110 121 130 138 151 173 187 209
166 158 156 154 152 151 151 149 149 148 147
2240 1540 1380 1240 1100 986 940 836 714 621 481
484 354 323 294 264 240 230 208 179 157 119
1380 992 894 813 730 665 624 560 481 434 364
393000 306000 242000 192000 181000 161000 140000 119000 99300 79600
60.6 67.9 76.8 87.6 91.3 101 109 125 136 147
125 121 118 115 114 113 112 111 111 110
1160 940 762 622 589 530 468 402 336 270
322 272 228 192 184 168 151 134 113 92.0
1030 856 715 596 566 506 453 391 346 299
1620000 1480000 1090000 816000 637000 554000 493000 441000 398000 366000 330000 306000 282000
57.5 59.8 68.6 80.0 92.0 100 108 116 127 134 143 151 160
172 169 162 156 152 150 148 146 146 145 144 143 143
3530 3270 2520 1960 1570 1390 1240 1130 1020 944 858 799 740
674 634 513 415 344 309 281 258 235 219 200 187 175
1910 1790 1420 1130 928 830 757 691 628 585 538 505 472
168000 148000 128000 116000 107000 98500 90200 82200 68100
90.3 98.1 109 116 123 130 137 145 159
109 108 108 107 106 105 105 105 104
576 512 446 407 378 349 321 294 245
408000 357000 319000 281000 250000 224000 198000
95.8 105 113 122 134 145 158
135 133 132 130 130 129 128
1130 1000 906 808 721 650 580
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Designation
in.4
in.6
W44×335 W ×290 W ×262 W ×230
74.4 51.5 37.7 24.9
536000 463000 406000 346000
W40×593 W ×503 W ×431 W ×372 W ×321 W ×297 W ×277 W ×249 W ×215 W ×199 W ×174
451 186 142 109 79.4 61.2 51.1 37.7 24.4 18.1 11.2
W40×466 W ×392 W ×331 W ×278 W ×264 W ×235 W ×211 W ×183 W ×167 W ×149
277 172 106 64.7 56.1 41.3 30.4 19.6 14.0 9.60
W36×848 W ×798 W ×650 W ×527 W ×439 W ×393 W ×359 W ×328 W ×300 W ×280 W ×260 W ×245 W ×230 W36×256 W ×232 W ×210 W ×194 W ×182 W ×170 W ×160 W ×150 W ×135 W33×354 W ×318 W ×291 W ×263 W ×241 W ×221 W ×201 W33×169 W ×152 W ×141 W ×130 W ×118
1270 1070 600 330 195 143 109 84.5 64.2 52.6 41.5 34.6 28.6 53.3 39.8 28.0 22.2 18.4 15.1 12.4 10.1 6.99 115 84.4 65.0 48.5 35.8 27.5 20.5 17.7 12.4 9.70 7.37 5.30
82400 71700 64400 56600 48300
110 122 131 141 154
93.7 93.8 93.3 92.8 92.2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
329 286 258 228 196
Statical Moment
176 159 138 128 120 111 103 95.1 79.9
520 468 416 383 359 334 312 291 255
263 237 216 195 174 158 142
709 634 577 519 469 428 386
109 95.1 86.5 76.9 66.6
314 279 257 233 207
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 147
TORSION PROPERTIES W shapes
Designation W30×477 W ×391 W ×326 W ×292 W ×261 W ×235 W ×211 W ×191 W ×173 W30×148 W ×132 W ×124 W ×116 W ×108 W ×99 W ×90 W27×539 W ×448 W ×368 W ×307 W ×258 W ×235 W ×217 W ×194 W ×178 W ×161 W ×146
√ EC w GJ
Normalized Warping Constant Wno
Warping Statical Moment Sw
Qf
Qw
in.6
in.
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.3
480000 364000 286000 249000 215000 190000 166000 146000 129000
63.6 73.6 84.8 92.8 102 111 124 135 148
329 268 223 200 177 160 141 126 113
896 716 595 530 470 422 374 337 303
49400 42100 38600 34900 30900 26800 24000
93.6 106 112 119 127 136 146
77.3 77.3 76.9 76.5 76.1 75.7 75.0
239 204 188 171 152 133 119
86.8 74.0 68.8 62.8 56.1 49.5 45.0
250 219 204 189 173 156 142
440000 336000 254000 199000 159000 140000 128000 111000 98300 87300 77200
47.8 54.1 62.4 71.4 82.2 88.5 94.6 104 114 124 135
111 106 102 99.4 98.2 96.0 95.0 93.9 93.7 92.9 92.2
1490 1190 930 750 613 548 503 442 393 352 314
342 283 231 192 161 146 135 120 107 96.6 87.0
940 766 620 511 424 384 354 314 284 256 231
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
in.4 307 174 103 74.9 53.8 40.0 27.9 20.6 15.3 14.6 9.72 7.99 6.43 4.99 3.77 2.92 499 297 169 101 61.0 46.3 37.0 26.5 19.5 14.7 10.9
124 120 117 115 114 112 112 111 110
1450 1140 919 812 710 633 556 494 439
Statical Moment
W27×129 W ×114 W ×102 W ×94 W ×84
11.2 7.33 5.29 4.03 2.81
32500 27600 24000 21300 17900
86.7 98.7 108 117 128
66.4 66.4 65.7 65.4 64.9
183 155 137 122 103
69.5 59.2 52.7 47.3 40.6
197 171 153 139 122
W24×492 W ×408 W ×335 W ×279 W ×250 W ×229 W ×207 W ×192 W ×176 W ×162 W ×146 W ×131 W ×117 W ×104
456 271 154 91.7 67.3 51.8 38.6 31.0 24.1 18.5 13.4 9.50 6.72 4.72
283000 214000 160000 125000 108000 95800 83900 76200 68400 62600 54600 47100 40800 35200
40.1 45.2 51.9 59.4 64.5 69.2 75.0 79.8 85.7 93.6 103 113 125 139
92.1 88.1 84.6 82.0 80.6 79.6 78.5 77.7 77.0 77.0 76.3 75.6 74.9 74.3
1150 909 709 570 502 451 401 367 333 304 268 233 204 178
281 233 189 157 141 128 116 107 97.8 89.4 79.5 69.7 61.5 54.1
774 626 509 418 372 338 303 280 255 234 209 185 164 144
W24×103 W ×94 W ×84 W ×76 W ×68
7.10 5.26 3.70 2.68 1.87
16600 15000 12800 11100 9430
77.8 85.9 94.6 104 114
53.0 53.1 52.6 52.2 51.9
117 105 91.3 79.8 68.0
49.4 44.4 39.0 34.4 29.5
140 127 112 100 88.3
W24×62 W ×55
1.71 1.18
4620 3870
83.6 92.2
40.7 40.4
42.3 35.7
23.2 19.8
76.6 67.1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 148
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
TORSION PROPERTIES W shapes
√ EC w GJ
Normalized Warping Constant Wno
Warping Statical Moment Sw
Qf
Qw
in.6
in.
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.3
41.3 31.1 23.9 15.4 11.3 8.98 6.83 5.21
61800 54300 48500 41100 36000 32700 29200 26200
62.2 67.2 72.5 83.1 90.8 97.1 105 114
67.0 66.0 65.6 65.4 64.7 64.2 63.7 63.2
345 307 277 235 208 191 172 155
W21×93 W ×83 W ×73 W ×68 W ×62
6.03 4.34 3.02 2.45 1.83
9940 8630 7410 6760 5960
65.3 71.8 79.7 84.5 91.8
43.6 43.0 42.5 42.3 42.0
85.3 75.0 65.2 59.9 53.2
38.2 34.2 30.3 28.0 25.1
110 98.0 86.2 79.9 72.2
W21×57 W ×50 W ×44
1.77 1.14 0.77
3190 2570 2110
68.3 76.4 84.2
33.4 33.1 32.8
35.6 28.9 24.0
20.9 17.2 14.5
64.3 55.0 47.7
75700 65600 57400 49900 43200 37900 33200 28900 25700 22700
33.3 35.5 37.8 40.3 43.4 46.6 50.1 54.3 58.6 63.2
58.8 57.5 56.4 55.2 54.2 53.3 52.5 51.6 51.0 50.4
483 427 382 339 299 267 237 210 189 169
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Designation
in.4
W21×201 W ×182 W ×166 W ×147 W ×132 W ×122 W ×111 W ×101
W18×311 W ×283 W ×258 W ×234 W ×211 W ×192 W ×175 W ×158 W ×143 W ×130
177 135 104 79.7 59.3 45.2 34.2 25.4 19.4 14.7
Statical Moment
102 92.3 84.4 71.4 64.0 59.2 53.7 49.0
141 127 116 105 94.3 85.7 77.2 69.4 63.2 57.1
265 238 216 187 167 154 139 127
376 338 306 274 245 221 199 178 161 145
W18×119 W ×106 W ×97 W ×86 W ×76
10.6 7.48 5.86 4.10 2.83
20300 17400 15800 13600 11700
70.4 77.6 83.6 92.7 103
50.4 49.8 49.4 48.9 48.4
151 131 120 104 90.7
50.6 44.6 41.2 36.3 31.9
131 115 105 92.8 81.4
W18×71 W ×65 W ×60 W ×55 W ×50
3.48 2.73 2.17 1.66 1.24
4700 4240 3850 3430 3040
59.1 63.4 67.8 73.1 79.7
33.7 33.4 33.1 32.9 32.6
52.1 47.5 43.5 39.0 34.9
25.8 23.8 22.1 19.9 18.0
72.7 66.6 61.4 55.9 50.4
W18×46 W ×40 W ×35
1.22 0.81 0.51
1710 1440 1140
60.2 67.8 76.1
26.4 26.1 25.9
24.2 20.6 16.5
15.3 13.3 10.7
45.3 39.2 33.2
W16×100 W ×89 W ×77 W ×67
7.73 5.45 3.57 2.39
11900 10200 8590 7300
63.1 69.6 78.9 88.9
41.7 41.1 40.6 40.1
107 93.3 79.3 68.2
39.0 34.4 29.7 25.9
99.0 87.3 75.0 64.9
W16×57 W ×50 W ×45 W ×40 W ×36
2.22 1.52 1.11 0.79 0.54
2660 2270 1990 1730 1460
55.7 62.2 68.1 75.3 83.7
28.0 27.6 27.4 27.1 26.9
35.6 30.8 27.2 23.9 20.2
19.0 16.7 15.0 13.4 11.4
52.6 46.0 41.1 36.5 32.0
W16×31 W ×26
0.46 0.26
739 565
64.5 75.0
21.3 21.1
13.0 10.0
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9.17 7.20
27.0 22.1
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 149
TORSION PROPERTIES W shapes Torsional Constant J Designation W14×808 W ×730 W ×665 W ×605 W ×550 W ×500 W ×455 W14×426 W ×398 W ×370 W ×342 W ×311 W ×283 W ×257 W ×233 W ×211 W ×193 W ×176 W ×159 W ×145
4
in. 1860 1450 1120 870 670 514 395
331 273 222 178 136 104 79.1 59.5 44.6 34.8 26.5 19.8 15.2
Warping Constant Cw 6
in.
√
EC w GJ
Normalized Warping Constant Wno 2
Warping Statical Moment Sw 4
Statical Moment
Qf 3
Qw in.3
in.
in.
in.
in.
433000 362000 305000 258000 219000 187000 160000
24.6 25.4 26.6 27.7 29.1 30.7 32.4
82.2 78.3 75.5 73.0 70.6 68.5 66.5
1950 1720 1510 1320 1160 1020 899
337 319 287 259 233 209 189
916 831 740 660 588 524 468
144000 129000 116000 103000 89100 77700 67800 59000 51500 45900 40500 35600 31700
33.6 35.0 36.8 38.7 41.2 44.0 47.1 50.7 54.7 58.4 62.9 68.2 73.5
65.3 64.1 62.9 61.6 60.3 59.1 57.9 56.9 55.9 55.1 54.4 53.7 53.0
827 756 689 623 553 493 438 389 345 312 279 248 224
176 163 151 138 125 113 102 91.7 82.3 75.4 68.0 61.3 55.8
434 401 368 336 301 271 243 218 195 177 160 143 130
190 171 154 138 125
49.9 45.3 41.2 37.2 33.7
117 106 95.9 86.6 78.3
W14×132 W ×120 W ×109 W ×99 W ×90
12.3 9.37 7.12 5.37 4.06
25500 22700 20200 18000 16000
73.3 79.2 85.7 93.2 101
50.2 49.7 49.1 48.7 48.3
W14×82 W ×74 W ×68 W ×61
5.08 3.88 3.02 2.20
6710 5990 5380 4710
58.5 63.2 67.9 74.5
34.1 33.7 33.4 33.1
73.8 66.6 60.4 53.3
28.1 25.7 23.5 21.0
69.3 62.8 57.3 51.1
W14×53 W ×48 W ×43
1.94 1.46 1.05
2540 2240 1950
58.2 63.0 69.3
26.7 26.5 26.2
35.5 31.6 27.8
17.3 15.6 13.9
43.6 39.2 34.8
W14×38 W ×34 W ×30
0.80 0.57 0.38
1230 1070 887
63.1 69.7 77.7
23.0 22.8 22.6
20.0 17.5 14.7
11.5 10.2 8.59
30.7 27.3 23.6
W14×26 W ×22
0.36 0.21
405 314
54.0 62.2
16.9 16.8
6.98 5.58
20.1 16.6
243 185 143 108 83.8 64.7 48.8 35.6 25.8 18.5 12.9 9.13 6.86 5.10 3.84 2.93 2.18
57000 48600 42000 35800 31200 27200 23600 20100 17200 14700 12400 10700 9410 8270 7330 6540 5780
24.6 26.1 27.6 29.3 31.0 33.0 35.4 38.2 41.5 45.4 49.9 55.1 59.6 64.8 70.3 76.0 82.9
46.4 45.0 44.0 42.8 41.8 41.0 40.1 39.2 38.4 37.7 37.0 36.4 35.9 35.5 35.2 34.9 34.5
W12×336 W ×305 W ×279 W ×252 W ×230 W ×210 W ×190 W ×170 W ×152 W ×136 W ×120 W ×106 W ×96 W ×87 W ×79 W ×72 W ×65
8.94 7.02 459 403 357 313 279 249 220 192 168 146 126 110 98.2 87.2 78.1 70.3 62.7
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
119 107 96.3 86.4 78.4 71.1 64.1 56.9 50.4 44.5 38.9 34.6 31.3 28.0 25.3 22.9 20.6
301 269 241 214 193 174 156 137 121 107 93.2 81.9 73.6 66.0 59.5 53.9 48.4
1 - 150
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
TORSION PROPERTIES W shapes
√ EC w GJ
Normalized Warping Constant Wno
Warping Statical Moment Sw
Qf
Qw
in.
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.3
3570 3160
66.3 72.0
28.9 28.7
46.3 41.2
18.2 16.3
43.2 39.0
1.78 1.31 0.95
1880 1650 1440
52.3 57.1 62.6
23.3 23.1 22.9
30.2 26.7 23.6
14.7 13.1 11.8
36.2 32.4 28.8
W12×35 W ×30 W ×26
0.74 0.46 0.30
879 720 607
55.5 63.7 72.4
19.6 19.4 19.2
16.8 13.9 11.8
W12×22 W ×19 W ×16 W ×14
0.29 0.18 0.10 0.07
164 131 96.9 80.4
38.3 43.4 50.1 54.5
12.0 11.8 11.7 11.6
W10×112 W ×100 W ×88 W ×77 W ×68 W ×60 W ×54 W ×49
15.1 10.9 7.53 5.11 3.56 2.48 1.82 1.39
6020 5150 4330 3630 3100 2640 2320 2070
32.1 35.0 38.6 42.9 47.5 52.5 57.5 62.1
26.3 25.8 25.3 24.8 24.4 24.0 23.8 23.6
85.7 74.7 64.2 54.9 47.6 41.2 36.6 33.0
30.8 27.2 23.8 20.7 18.1 15.9 14.3 13.0
73.7 64.9 56.4 48.8 42.6 37.3 33.3 30.2
W10×45 W ×39 W ×33
1.51 0.98 0.58
1200 992 790
45.4 51.2 59.4
19.0 18.7 18.5
23.6 19.8 16.0
11.5 9.77 7.98
27.5 23.4 19.4
W10×30 W ×26 W ×22
0.62 0.40 0.24
414 345 275
41.6 47.3 54.5
14.5 14.3 14.1
10.7 9.05 7.30
7.09 6.08 4.95
18.3 15.6 13.0
W10×19 W ×17 W ×15 W ×12
0.23 0.16 0.10 0.05
104 85.1 68.3 50.9
34.2 37.1 42.1 51.3
3.93 3.24 2.62 1.99
3.76 3.13 2.56 2.00
10.8 9.33 8.00 6.32
W8×67 W ×58 W ×48 W ×40 W ×35 W ×31
5.06 3.34 1.96 1.12 0.77 0.54
1440 1180 931 726 619 530
27.1 30.2 35.1 41.0 45.6 50.4
16.7 16.3 15.8 15.5 15.3 15.1
14.7 12.5 10.4 8.42 7.39 6.46
35.1 29.9 24.5 19.9 17.3 15.2
W8×28 W ×24
0.54 0.35
312 259
38.7 43.8
12.4 12.2
9.43 7.94
5.64 4.83
13.6 11.6
W8×21 W ×18
0.28 0.17
152 122
37.5 43.1
10.4 10.3
5.47 4.44
4.03 3.31
10.2 8.52
W8×15 W ×13 W ×10
0.14 0.09 0.04
51.8 40.8 30.9
31.0 34.3 44.7
7.82 7.74 7.57
2.47 1.97 1.53
2.39 1.93 1.56
6.78 5.70 4.43
W6×25 W ×20 W ×15
0.46 0.24 0.10
150 113 76.5
29.1 34.9 44.5
9.01 8.78 8.58
6.23 4.82 3.34
3.92 3.10 2.18
9.46 7.45 5.39
W6×16 W ×12 W ×9
0.22 0.09 0.04
38.2 24.7 17.7
21.2 26.7 33.8
5.92 5.75 5.60
2.42 1.61 1.19
2.28 1.55 1.19
5.84 4.15 3.12
W5×19 W ×16
0.31 0.19
50.8 40.6
20.6 23.5
5.94 5.81
3.21 2.62
2.44 2.02
5.81 4.82
W4×13
0.15
14.0
15.5
3.87
1.36
1.27
3.14
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Designation
in.4
in.6
W12×58 W ×53
2.10 1.58
W12×50 W ×45 W ×40
9.89 9.80 9.72 9.56
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.13 4.14 3.09 2.59
32.3 27.2 22.0 17.5 15.2 13.1
Statical Moment
9.86 8.30 7.15
25.6 21.6 18.6
4.87 4.01 3.04 2.59
14.7 12.4 10.0 8.72
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 151
TORSION PROPERTIES M shapes
√ EC w GJ
Normalized Warping Constant Wno
Warping Statical Moment Sw
Qf
Qw
in.6
in.
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.3
0.05 0.04
34.0 31.3
42.0 45.0
9.02 9.01
1.56 1.45
1.98 1.86
7.14 6.58
M10×9 M ×8
0.03 0.02
14.6 12.8
35.5 40.7
6.59 6.57
0.91 0.80
1.32 1.18
4.60 4.06
M8×6.5
0.02
26.0
4.45
0.48
0.82
2.72
M5×18.9
0.34
17.7
5.73
2.98
2.28
5.53
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Designation
in.4
M12×11.8 M ×10.8
5.23 41.3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Statical Moment
1 - 152
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
TORSION PROPERTIES S shapes
Designation S24×121 S ×106
√ EC w GJ
Normalized Warping Constant Wno
Warping Statical Moment Sw
Qf
Qw
in.6
in.
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.3
11400 10600
48.0 52.1
47.1 46.1
103 98.8
47.1 47.1
154 141 121 112 103
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
in.4 12.8 10.1
Statical Moment
S24×100 S ×90 S ×80
7.58 6.04 4.88
6380 6000 5640
46.7 50.7 54.7
41.9 41.2 40.5
66.0 63.8 61.6
33.5 33.5 33.5
S20×96 S ×86
8.39 6.64
4710 4390
38.1 41.4
34.9 34.2
57.8 55.5
29.2 29.2
99.7 92.5
S20×75 S ×66
4.59 3.58
2750 2550
39.4 42.9
30.7 30.0
38.9 37.3
22.6 22.6
77.0 70.5
S18×70 S ×54.7
4.15 2.37
1800 1560
33.5 41.3
27.0 26.0
29.2 26.9
17.1 17.1
63.0 52.9
S15×50 S ×42.9
2.12 1.54
811 744
31.5 35.4
20.3 19.8
17.8 16.9
11.8 11.8
39.0 35.1
S12×50 S ×40.8
2.82 1.75
505 437
21.5 25.4
15.5 14.9
14.0 12.9
9.30 9.30
31.0 26.9
S12×35 S ×31.8
1.08 0.90
324 307
27.9 29.7
14.5 14.3
10.0 9.74
7.48 7.48
22.7 21.3
S10×35 S ×25.4
1.29 0.60
189 153
19.5 25.7
11.8 11.1
7.13 6.34
5.24 5.24
17.9 14.4
S8×23 S ×18.4
0.55 0.34
61.8 53.5
17.1 20.2
7.90 7.58
3.50 3.22
3.10 3.10
9.74 8.38
S6×17.25 S ×12.5
0.37 0.17
18.4 14.5
11.3 14.9
5.03 4.70
1.61 1.41
1.63 1.63
5.35 4.30
S5×10
0.11
6.66
12.3
3.51
0.86
1.11
2.88
S4×9.5 S ×7.7
0.12 0.07
3.10 2.62
8.18 9.84
2.59 2.47
0.53 0.48
0.70 0.70
2.05 1.79
S3×7.5 S ×5.7
0.09 0.04
1.10 0.85
5.63 7.42
1.72 1.60
0.28 0.24
0.40 0.40
1.20 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 153
TORSION PROPERTIES HP shapes
√ EC w GJ
Normalized Warping Constant Wno
Warping Statical Moment Sw
Qf
Qw
in.6
in.
in.2
in.4
in.3
in.3
8.02 5.40 3.60 2.01
19900 16800 14200 11200
80.2 89.8 101 120
49.9 49.2 48.5 47.8
149 128 110 88.0
38.5 33.5 29.1 23.8
97.2 84.3 72.9 59.2
HP13×100 HP ×87 HP ×73 HP ×60
6.25 4.12 2.54 1.39
11300 9430 7680 6020
68.4 77.0 88.5 106
40.9 40.2 39.6 39.0
103 87.7 72.8 57.8
29.9 25.8 21.8 17.7
76.3 65.6 55.2 44.5
HP12×84 HP ×74 HP ×63 HP ×53
4.24 2.98 1.83 1.12
7160 6170 4990 4090
66.1 73.2 84.0 97.2
35.6 35.2 34.6 34.2
75.0 65.5 54.1 44.7
23.5 20.8 17.5 14.7
59.8 52.7 44.2 37.0
HP10×57 HP ×42
1.97 0.81
2240 1540
54.3 70.2
24.1 23.4
34.8 24.7
13.1 9.64
33.2 24.2
HP8×36
0.77
578
44.1
15.4
14.0
6.62
16.8
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Designation
in.4
HP14×117 HP ×102 HP ×89 HP ×73
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Statical Moment
1 - 154
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Channels
Designation
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
C15×50 C15×40 C15×33.9
2.67 1.46 1.02
492 411 358
5.49 5.72 5.94
.937 .927 .920
C12×30 C15×25 C15×20.7
0.87 0.54 0.37
151 130 112
4.55 4.72 4.93
.919 .909 .899
C10×30 C1××25 C5××20 C10×15.3
1.23 0.69 0.37 0.21
79.3 68.4 56.9 45.6
3.63 3.75 3.93 4.19
.921 .912 .900 .883
C9×20 C9×15 C9×13.4
0.43 0.21 0.17
39.4 31.0 28.2
3.46 3.69 3.79
.899 .882 .874
C8×18.75 C9×13.75 C9×11.5
0.44 0.19 0.13
25.1 19.2 16.5
3.06 3.27 3.42
.894 .874 .862
C7×12.25 C9×9.8
0.16 0.10
11.2 9.18
2.87 3.02
.862 .846
C6×13 C9×10.5 C9×8.2
0.24 0.13 0.08
7.22 5.95 4.72
2.37 2.49 2.65
.858 .843 .824
C5×9 C9×6.7
0.11 0.06
2.93 2.22
2.10 2.26
.814 .790
C4×7.25 C9×5.4
0.08 0.04
1.24 0.92
1.75 1.89
.768 .741
C3×6 C9×5 C9×4.1
0.07 0.04 0.03
0.46 0.38 0.31
1.39 1.45 1.53
.689 .674 .656
*See LRFD Specification Appendix E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 155
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Channels
Designation
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
MC18×58 MC10×51.9 MC10×45.8 MC10×42.7
2.81 2.03 1.45 1.23
1070 986 897 852
6.56 6.70 6.88 6.97
.944 .939 .933 .930
MC13×50 MC10×40 MC10×35 MC10×31.8
2.98 1.57 1.14 0.94
558 463 413 380
5.07 5.33 5.50 5.64
.875 .860 .849 .842
MC12×50 MC10×45 MC10×40 MC10×35 MC10×31 MC10×10.6
3.24 2.35 1.70 1.25 1.01 0.06
411 374 336 297 268 11.7
4.77 4.87 5.01 5.18 5.34 4.27
.859 .851 .842 .832 .821 .983
MC10×41.1 MC10×33.6 MC10×28.5
2.27 1.21 0.79
270 224 194
4.26 4.47 4.68
.790 .771 .752
MC10×25 MC10×22
0.64 0.51
125 111
4.46 4.63
.802 .790
MC10×8.4
0.04
3.68
.972
MC9×25.4 MC9×23.9
0.69 0.60
4.08 4.15
.770 .763
MC8×22.8 MC9×21.4 MC9×20 MC9×18.7 MC9×8.5
0.57 0.50 0.44 0.38 0.06
75.3 70.9 47.9 45.1 8.22
3.85 3.91 3.59 3.65 3.24
.716 .709 .780 .773 .910
MC7×22.7 MC9×19.1
0.63 0.41
58.5 49.4
3.53 3.71
.662 .638
MC6×18
0.38
34.6
3.46
.562
MC6×16.3 MC9×15.1
0.34 0.29
22.1 20.6
3.11 3.18
.643 .634
MC6×12
0.15
11.2
2.80
.740
7.01 104 98.2
*See LRFD Specification Appendix E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 156
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Single Angles Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.6
in.
No Units
×1 ×17⁄8 ×13⁄4 ×15⁄8 ×19⁄16 ×11⁄2
7.13 5.08 3.46 2.21 1.30 0.960 0.682
32.5 23.4 16.1 10.4 6.16 4.55 3.23
4.31 4.35 4.37 4.41 4.45 4.47 4.48
0.632 0.630 0.629 0.627 0.627 0.627 0.624
L8×6×1 L × × 3⁄4 L × ×19⁄16 L × ×11⁄2 L × ×17⁄16
4.35 1.90 0.822 0.584 0.396
16.3 7.28 3.20 2.28 1.55
3.89 3.96 4.01 4.02 4.04
— — — — —
L8×4×1 L8×4×17⁄8 L × ×13⁄4 L8×4×15⁄8 L × ×19⁄16 L × ×11⁄2 L8×4×17⁄16
3.68 2.48 1.61 0.933 0.704 0.501 0.328
12.9 8.89 5.75 3.42 2.53 1.80 1.22
3.77 3.79 3.82 3.85 3.86 3.88 3.89
— — — — — — —
L7×4×3⁄4 L × ×5⁄8 L × ×1⁄2 L7×4×7⁄16 L × ×3⁄8
1.47 0.873 0.459 0.300 0.200
3.33 3.36 3.38 3.40 3.42
— — — — —
Designation L8×8×11⁄8 L L L L L L
× × × × × ×
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
in.4
3.97 2.37 1.25 0.851 0.544
*See LRFD Specification Appendix E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 157
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Single Angles Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
L6×6×1 L6×6×17⁄8 L6×6×13⁄4 L6×6×15⁄8 L6×6×19⁄16 L6×6×11⁄2 L6×6×17⁄16 L6×6×13⁄8 L6×6×15⁄16
3.68 2.51 1.61 0.954 0.704 0.501 0.340 0.218 0.129
9.24 6.41 4.17 2.50 1.85 1.32 0.899 0.575 0.338
3.19 3.22 3.26 3.29 3.31 3.32 3.34 3.36 3.38
0.637 0.632 0.629 0.628 0.627 0.627 0.627 0.626 0.625
L6×4×3⁄4 L6×4×5⁄8 L6×4×9⁄16 L6×4×1⁄2 L6×4×7⁄16 L6×4×3⁄8 L6×4×5⁄16
1.33 0.792 0.585 0.417 0.284 0.183 0.108
2.64 1.59 1.18 0.843 0.575 0.369 0.217
2.86 2.89 2.9 2.92 2.94 2.96 2.97
— — — — — — —
L6×31⁄2×1⁄2 L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L6×31⁄2×5⁄16
0.396 0.174 0.103
0.779 0.341 0.201
2.88 2.92 2.93
— — —
L5×5×7⁄8 L6×4×3⁄4 L6×4×5⁄8 L6×4×1⁄2 L6×4×7⁄16 L6×4×3⁄8 L6×4×5⁄16
2.07 1.33 0.792 0.417 0.284 0.183 0.108
3.53 2.32 1.40 0.744 0.508 0.327 0.193
2.65 2.68 2.71 2.74 2.77 2.79 2.81
0.634 0.634 0.630 0.630 0.629 0.627 0.626
Designation
*See LRFD Specification Appendix E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 158
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Single Angles Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
L5×31⁄2×3⁄4 L5×31⁄2×5⁄8 L5×31⁄2×1⁄2 L5×31⁄2×3⁄8 L5×31⁄2×5⁄16 L5×31⁄2×1⁄4
1.11 0.660 0.348 0.153 0.0905 0.0479
1.52 0.918 0.491 0.217 0.128 0.0670
2.37 2.40 2.44 2.47 2.49 2.50
— — — — — —
L5×3×1⁄2 L5×3×7⁄16 L5×3×3⁄8 L5×3×5⁄16 L5×3×1⁄4
0.322 0.219 0.141 0.0832 0.0438
0.444 0.304 0.196 0.116 0.0606
2.39 2.41 2.42 2.43 2.45
— — — — —
L4×4×3⁄4 L5×3×5⁄8 L5×3×1⁄2 L5×3×7⁄16 L5×3×3⁄8 L5×3×5⁄16 L5×3×1⁄4
1.02 0.610 0.322 0.219 0.141 0.0832 0.0438
1.12 0.680 0.366 0.252 0.162 0.0963 0.0505
2.11 2.14 2.17 2.19 2.20 2.22 2.23
0.639 0.631 0.632 0.631 0.625 0.623 0.627
L4×31⁄2×1⁄2 L5×31⁄2×3⁄8 L5×31⁄2×5⁄16 L5×31⁄2×1⁄4
0.301 0.132 0.0782 0.0412
0.302 0.134 0.0798 0.0419
2.04 2.08 2.09 2.11
— — — —
Designation
*See LRFD Specification Appendix E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 159
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Single Angles Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
L4×3×5⁄8 L4×3×1⁄2 L4×3×7⁄16 L4×3×3⁄8 L4×3×5⁄16 L4×3×1⁄4
0.529 0.281 0.192 0.123 0.0731 0.0386
0.472 0.255 0.176 0.114 0.0676 0.0356
1.91 1.95 1.96 1.98 2.00 2.01
— — — — — —
L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄2 L31⁄2×31⁄2×7⁄16 L31⁄2×31⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×31⁄2×5⁄16 L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄4
0.281 0.192 0.123 0.0731 0.0386
0.238 0.164 0.106 0.0634 0.0334
1.89 1.91 1.91 1.93 1.95
0.631 0.629 0.628 0.627 0.626
L31⁄2×3×1⁄2 L31⁄2×3×3⁄8 L31⁄2×3×5⁄16 L31⁄2×3×1⁄4
0.260 0.114 0.0680 0.0360
0.191 0.0858 0.0512 0.0270
1.76 1.79 1.81 1.83
— — — —
L31⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄2 L31⁄2×31⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄4
0.234 0.103 0.0322
0.159 0.0714 0.0225
1.67 1.70 1.73
— — —
L3×3×1⁄2 L4×3×7⁄16 L4×3×3⁄8 L4×3×5⁄16 L4×3×1⁄4 L4×3×3⁄16
0.234 0.160 0.103 0.0611 0.0322 0.0142
0.144 0.100 0.0652 0.0390 0.0206 0.00899
1.60 1.61 1.63 1.65 1.66 1.68
0.634 0.632 0.629 0.628 0.627 0.626
Designation
*See LRFD Specification Appendix E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 160
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Single Angles Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
L3×21⁄2×1⁄2 L3×21⁄2×7⁄16 L3×21⁄2×3⁄8 L3×21⁄2×5⁄16 L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×21⁄2×3⁄16
0.213 0.146 0.0943 0.0560 0.0296 0.0131
0.112 0.0777 0.0507 0.0304 0.0161 0.00705
1.47 1.49 1.50 1.52 1.54 1.55
— — — — — —
L3×2×1⁄2 L2×2×3⁄8 L2×2×5⁄16 L2×2×1⁄4 L2×2×3⁄16
0.192 0.0855 0.0509 0.0270 0.0120
0.0908 0.0413 0.0248 0.0132 0.00576
1.40 1.43 1.45 1.46 1.48
— — — — —
L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄2 L21⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄8 L21⁄2×21⁄2×5⁄16 L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4 L21⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄16
0.185 0.0816 0.0483 0.0253 0.0110
0.0791 0.0362 0.0218 0.0116 0.00510
1.31 1.34 1.36 1.37 1.39
0.639 0.632 0.630 0.628 0.627
L21⁄2×2×3⁄8 L3×21⁄2×5⁄16 L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×21⁄2×3⁄16
0.0728 0.0432 0.0227 0.00990
0.0268 0.0162 0.00868 0.00382
1.22 1.24 1.25 1.27
— — — —
L2×2×3⁄8 L2×2×5⁄16 L2×2×1⁄4 L2×2×3⁄16 L2×2×1⁄8
0.0640 0.0381 0.0201 0.00880 0.00274
0.0174 0.0106 0.00572 0.00254 0.00079
1.05 1.07 1.09 1.10 1.12
0.637 0.633 0.630 0.628 0.626
Designation
*See LRFD Specification Appendix E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 161
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Structural Tees Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.6
in.
No Units
37.2 25.7 18.9 12.4
434 279 204 139
8.81 8.67 8.65 8.67
0.724 0.733 0.731 0.723
WT20×296.5** WT ×251.5** WT ×215.5 WT ×186 WT ×160.5 WT ×148.5 WT ×138.5 WT ×124.5 WT ×107.5 WT ×99.5 WT ×87
223 140 88.5 58.2 37.7 30.6 25.8 19.1 12.4 9.14 5.60
2340 1420 881 559 350 279 218 158 101 83.5 65.3
8.30 8.17 8.09 8.00 7.92 7.88 7.75 7.71 7.66 7.83 8.12
0.761 0.760 0.756 0.756 0.756 0.756 0.770 0.770 0.770 0.746 0.699
WT20×233** WT ×196** WT ×165.5 WT ×139 WT ×132 WT ×117.5 WT ×105.5 WT ×91.5 WT ×83.5 WT ×74.5
139 86.1 53.0 32.4 28.0 20.6 15.2 10.0 7.01 4.68
1360 802 485 278 233 156 113 72.1 62.9 51.9
8.39 8.27 8.19 8.07 8.02 7.88 7.84 7.79 8.02 8.24
0.680 0.678 0.674 0.676 0.680 0.690 0.690 0.691 0.658 0.626
WT18×424** WT ×399** WT ×325** WT ×263.5** WT ×219.5** WT ×196.5** WT ×179.5** WT ×164** WT ×150 WT ×140 WT ×130 WT ×122.5 WT ×115
622 527 295 163 96.7 70.7 54.3 42.1 32.0 26.2 20.7 17.3 14.3
6880 5700 3010 1570 894 637 480 363 278 226 181 151 125
8.08 8.02 7.82 7.63 7.52 7.44 7.38 7.32 7.30 7.27 7.28 7.28 7.27
0.802 0.801 0.797 0.797 0.794 0.796 0.797 0.799 0.797 0.796 0.791 0.788 0.784
Designation WT22×167.5 WT ×145 WT ×131 WT ×115
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
in.4
*See LRFD Specification Section E3. **Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 162
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Structural Tees Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
WT18×128 WT ×116 WT ×105 WT ×97 WT ×91 WT ×85 WT ×80 WT ×75 WT ×67.5
26.6 19.8 13.9 11.1 9.19 7.51 6.17 5.04 3.48
205 151 119 92.7 77.6 63.2 53.6 46.0 37.3
7.43 7.40 7.49 7.45 7.45 7.44 7.46 7.50 7.65
0.703 0.703 0.687 0.687 0.686 0.684 0.678 0.670 0.644
WT16.5×177** WT ×159** WT ×145.5** WT ×131.5** WT ×120.5 WT ×110.5 WT ×100.5
57.2 42.1 32.4 24.2 17.9 13.7 10.2
468 335 256 188 146 113 84.9
7.00 6.94 6.90 6.86 6.91 6.90 6.89
0.802 0.803 0.801 0.802 0.792 0.788 0.784
8.83 6.16 4.84 3.67 2.64
55.4 43.0 35.4 29.3 23.4
6.74 6.82 6.85 6.93 7.02
0.714 0.700 0.691 0.678 0.659
151 85.9 50.8 37.2 26.7 19.9 13.9 10.3 7.61
1170 636 361 257 184 132 96.4 71.2 53.0
6.65 6.54 6.40 6.34 6.31 6.25 6.27 6.25 6.25
0.819 0.815 0.817 0.818 0.815 0.817 0.809 0.806 0.802
7.27 4.85 3.98 3.21 2.49 1.88 1.42
37.6 28.5 23.9 20.5 17.3 14.3 10.5
6.10 6.19 6.20 6.24 6.31 6.38 6.34
0.716 0.698 0.693 0.683 0.669 0.654 0.655
Designation
WT16.5×84.5 WT ×76 WT ×70.5 WT ×65 WT ×59 WT15×238.5** WT ×195.5** WT ×163** WT ×146** WT ×130.5 WT ×117.5 WT ×105.5 WT ×95.5 WT ×86.5 WT15×74 WT ×66 WT ×62 WT ×58 WT ×54 WT ×49.5 WT ×45
*See LRFD Specification Section E3. **Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 163
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Structural Tees
Designation WT13.5×269.5** WT ×224** WT ×184** WT ×153.5** WT ×140.5** WT ×129 WT ×117.5 WT ×108.5 WT ×97 WT ×89 WT ×80.5 WT ×73 WT13.5×64.5 WT ×57 WT ×51 WT ×47 WT ×42 WT12×246** WT ×204** WT ×167.5** WT ×139.5** WT ×125** WT ×114.5 WT ×103.5 WT ×96 WT ×88 WT ×81 WT ×73 WT ×65.5 WT ×58.5 WT ×52
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
245 146 83.6 49.8 39.0 30.2 23.0 18.5 13.2 9.74 7.31 5.44
1740 977 532 304 232 178 135 105 74.3 57.7 42.7 31.7
6.27 6.11 5.97 5.85 5.80 5.77 5.74 5.72 5.66 5.70 5.67 5.65
0.830 0.829 0.828 0.828 0.830 0.828 0.825 0.830 0.826 0.815 0.813 0.810
5.48 5.54 5.52 5.57 5.63
0.731 0.716 0.714 0.703 0.685
5.71 5.55 5.40 5.28 5.22 5.19 5.14 5.11 5.09 5.09 5.08 5.09 5.08 5.07
0.838 0.836 0.837 0.837 0.838 0.836 0.836 0.836 0.835 0.831 0.827 0.818 0.813 0.809
5.60 3.65 2.64 2.01 1.40 223 133 76.0 45.3 33.3 25.7 19.1 15.4 12.0 9.22 6.70 4.74 3.35 2.35
24.0 17.5 12.6 10.2 7.79 1340 748 405 230 165 125 91.3 72.5 55.8 43.8 31.9 23.1 16.4 11.6
WT12×51.5 WT ×47 WT ×42 WT ×38 WT ×34
3.54 2.62 1.84 1.34 0.932
12.3 9.57 6.90 5.30 4.08
4.88 4.89 4.89 4.93 4.99
0.733 0.727 0.721 0.709 0.692
WT12×31 WT ×27.5
0.850 0.588
3.92 2.93
5.13 5.18
0.619 0.606
*See LRFD Specification Section E3. **Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 164
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Structural Tees
Designation WT10.5×100.5 WT10.5×91 WT10.5×83 WT10.5×73.5 WT10.5×66 WT10.5×61 WT10.5×55.5 WT10.5×50.5
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
20.6 15.4 11.9 7.69 5.62 4.47 3.40 2.60
85.4 63.0 47.3 32.5 23.4 18.4 13.8 10.4
4.67 4.64 4.59 4.64 4.61 4.58 4.56 4.54
0.859 0.859 0.861 0.847 0.845 0.846 0.846 0.846
WT10.5×46.5 WT10.5×41.5 WT10.5×36.5 WT10.5×34 WT10.5×31
3.01 2.16 1.51 1.22 0.513
9.33 6.50 4.42 3.62 2.78
4.37 4.33 4.31 4.31 4.31
0.729 0.732 0.732 0.727 0.722
WT10.5×28.5 WT10.5×25 WT10.5×22
0.884 0.570 0.383
2.50 1.89 1.40
4.36 4.44 4.49
0.665 0.640 0.623
4.42 4.36 4.30 4.23 4.19 4.14 4.10 4.06 4.03 3.99
0.875 0.873 0.874 0.875 0.873 0.875 0.872 0.872 0.874 0.874
WT9×155.5** WT9×141.5** WT9×129** WT9×117** WT9×105.5** WT9×96 WT9×87.5 WT9×79 WT9×71.5 WT9×65
87.2 66.5 51.5 39.4 29.4 22.4 17.0 12.6 9.70 7.30
339 251 189 140 102 75.7 56.5 41.2 30.7 22.8
WT9×59.5 WT9×53 WT9×48.5 WT9×43 WT9×38
5.30 3.73 2.92 2.04 1.41
17.4 12.1 9.29 6.42 4.37
4.03 4.00 3.97 3.95 3.92
0.862 0.860 0.862 0.860 0.862
WT9×35.5 WT9×32.5 WT9×30 WT9×27.5 WT9×25
1.74 1.36 1.08 0.829 0.613
3.96 3.01 2.35 1.84 1.36
3.72 3.69 3.67 3.68 3.66
0.751 0.755 0.756 0.749 0.748
WT9×23 WT9×20 WT9×17.5
0.609 0.403 0.252
1.20 0.788 0.598
3.67 3.65 3.74
0.694 0.692 0.662
*See LRFD Specification Section E3. **Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 165
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Structural Tees Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
WT8×50 WT ×44.5 WT ×38.5 WT ×33.5
3.85 2.72 1.78 1.19
10.4 7.19 4.61 3.01
3.62 3.60 3.56 3.53
0.877 0.877 0.877 0.879
WT8×28.5 WT ×25 WT ×22.5 WT ×20 WT ×18
1.10 0.760 0.655 0.396 0.271
1.99 1.34 0.974 0.673 0.516
3.30 3.28 3.27 3.24 3.30
0.770 0.770 0.767 0.769 0.745
WT8×15.5 WT ×13
0.229 0.130
0.366 0.243
3.26 3.32
0.695 0.667
5.67 5.47 5.36 5.25 5.15 5.06 4.98
0.959 0.966 0.966 0.966 0.967 0.967 0.967
4.92 4.87 4.81 4.77 4.71 4.66 4.61 4.56 4.52 4.49 4.46 4.42 4.40
0.968 0.968 0.968 0.968 0.968 0.969 0.969 0.970 0.970 0.971 0.971 0.971 0.971
Designation
WT7×404** WT ×365** WT ×332.5** WT ×302.5** WT ×275** WT ×250** WT ×227.5**
918 714 555 430 331 255 196
6970 5250 3920 2930 2180 1620 1210
WT7×213** WT ×199** WT ×185** WT ×171** WT ×155.5** WT ×141.5** WT ×128.5** WT ×116.5** WT ×105.5 WT ×96.5 WT ×88 WT ×79.5 WT ×72.5
164 135 110 88.3 67.5 51.8 39.3 29.6 22.2 17.3 13.2 9.84 7.56
991 801 640 502 375 281 209 154 113 87.2 65.2 47.9 36.3
*See LRFD Specification Section E3. **Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 166
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Structural Tees Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
WT7×66 WT ×60 WT ×54.5 WT ×49.5 WT ×45
6.13 4.67 3.55 2.68 2.03
26.6 20.0 15.0 11.1 8.31
4.21 4.18 4.16 4.14 4.12
0.966 0.966 0.968 0.968 0.968
WT7×41 WT ×37 WT ×34 WT ×30.5
2.53 1.94 1.51 1.10
5.63 4.19 3.21 2.29
3.25 3.21 3.19 3.18
0.912 0.917 0.915 0.915
WT7×26.5 WT ×24 WT ×21.5
0.970 0.726 0.524
1.46 1.07 0.751
2.89 2.87 2.85
0.868 0.866 0.866
WT7×19 WT ×17 WT ×15
0.398 0.284 0.190
0.554 0.400 0.287
2.87 2.86 2.90
0.800 0.793 0.772
WT7×13 WT ×11
0.179 0.104
0.207 0.134
2.82 2.86
0.713 0.691
Designation
*See LRFD Specification Section E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 167
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Structural Tees
Designation WT6×168** WT ×152.5** WT ×139.5** WT ×126** WT ×115** WT ×105** WT ×95 WT ×85 WT ×76 WT ×68 WT ×60 WT ×53 WT ×48 WT ×43.5 WT ×39.5 WT ×36 WT ×32.5
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
120 92.0 70.9 53.5 41.6 32.2 24.4 17.7 12.8 9.22 6.43 4.55 3.42 2.54 1.92 1.46 1.09
481 356 267 195 148 112 82.1 58.3 41.3 28.9 19.7 13.6 10.1 7.34 5.43 4.07 2.97
4.07 4.00 3.94 3.88 3.84 3.79 3.74 3.69 3.65 3.61 3.58 3.54 3.51 3.49 3.46 3.45 3.43
0.958 0.959 0.957 0.958 0.958 0.958 0.959 0.960 0.960 0.960 0.959 0.961 0.961 0.960 0.960 0.961 0.960
WT6×29 WT ×26.5
1.05 0.788
2.08 1.53
3.01 3.00
0.944 0.940
WT6×25 WT ×22.5 WT ×20
0.889 0.656 0.476
1.23 0.885 0.620
2.67 2.64 2.62
0.899 0.898 0.901
WT6×17.5 WT ×15 WT ×13
0.369 0.228 0.150
0.437 0.267 0.174
2.56 2.55 2.54
0.835 0.830 0.826
WT6×11 WT ×9.5 WT ×8 WT ×7
0.146 0.0899 0.0511 0.0350
0.137 0.0934 0.0678 0.0493
2.52 2.54 2.62 2.64
0.683 0.663 0.624 0.610
*See LRFD Specification Section E3. **Group 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 168
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Structural Tees Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
WT5×56 WT5×50 WT5×44 WT5×38.5 WT5×34 WT5×30 WT5×27 WT5×24.5
7.50 5.41 3.75 2.55 1.78 1.23 0.909 0.693
16.9 11.9 8.02 5.31 3.62 2.46 1.78 1.33
3.04 3.00 2.98 2.93 2.92 2.89 2.87 2.85
0.963 0.964 0.964 0.964 0.965 0.965 0.966 0.966
WT5×22.5 WT5×19.5 WT5×16.5
0.753 0.487 0.291
0.981 0.616 0.356
2.44 2.42 2.40
0.940 0.936 0.927
WT5×15 WT5×13 WT5×11
0.310 0.201 0.119
0.273 0.173 0.107
2.17 2.15 2.17
0.848 0.848 0.831
WT5×9.5 WT5×8.5 WT5×7.5 WT5×6
0.116 0.0776 0.0518 0.0272
0.0796 0.061 0.0475 0.0255
2.08 2.12 2.16 2.16
0.728 0.702 0.672 0.662
Designation
*See LRFD Specification Section E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 169
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Structural Tees Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
WT4×33.5 WT ×29 WT ×24 WT ×20 WT ×17.5 WT ×15.5
2.52 1.66 0.979 0.559 0.385 0.268
3.56 2.28 1.30 0.715 0.480 0.327
2.41 2.39 2.34 2.31 2.29 2.29
0.962 0.961 0.966 0.961 0.963 0.961
WT4×14 WT ×12
0.268 0.173
0.230 0.144
1.97 1.96
0.935 0.936
WT4×10.5 WT ×9
0.141 0.0855
0.0916 0.0562
1.80 1.81
0.877 0.863
WT4×7.5 WT ×6.5 WT ×5
0.0679 0.0433 0.0212
0.0382 0.0269 0.0114
1.72 1.74 1.69
0.762 0.732 0.748
WT3×12.5 WT ×10 WT ×7.5
0.229 0.120 0.0504
0.171 0.0858 0.0342
1.76 1.73 1.71
0.952 0.952 0.937
WT3×8 WT ×6 WT ×4.5
0.111 0.0449 0.0202
0.0426 0.0178 0.0074
1.37 1.37 1.34
0.880 0.846 0.852
WT2.5×9.5 WT ×8
0.154 0.0930
0.0775 0.0453
1.44 1.43
0.964 0.962
WT2×6.5
0.0750
0.0213
1.16
0.947
Designation
*See LRFD Specification Section E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 170
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Structural Tees Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.6
in.
No Units
0.0307 0.0196
0.0330 0.0252
2.69 2.67
0.564 0.572
MT5×4.5 MT ×4
0.0213 0.0116
0.0133 0.00916
2.21 2.21
0.584 0.582
MT4×3.25
0.0146
0.00421
1.73
0.611
MT2.5×9.45**
0.165
0.0732
1.37
0.951
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
in.4
MT6×5.9 MT ×5.4
Designation
*See LRFD Specification Section E3. **This shape has tapered flanges while other MT shapes have parallel flanges.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 171
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Structural Tees
Designation
Torsional Constant J
Warping Constant Cw
Polar Radius of Gyration _ ro*
Flexural Constant H*
in.4
in.6
in.
No Units
ST12×60.5 ST ×53
6.38 5.04
27.5 15.0
5.14 4.87
0.640 0.685
ST12×50 ST ×45 ST ×40
3.76 3.01 2.43
19.5 12.1 6.94
5.27 5.12 4.89
0.584 0.616 0.657
ST10×48 ST ×43
4.15 3.30
15.0 9.17
4.36 4.20
0.625 0.661
ST10×37.5 ST ×33
2.28 1.78
7.21 4.02
4.28 4.10
0.612 0.655
ST9×35 ST ×27.35
2.05 1.18
7.03 2.26
4.01 3.71
0.583 0.662
ST7.5×25 ST ×21.45
1.05 0.767
2.02 0.995
3.22 3.04
0.637 0.689
ST6×25 ST ×20.4
1.39 0.872
1.97 0.787
2.60 2.42
0.663 0.733
ST6×17.5 ST ×15.9
0.538 0.449
0.556 0.364
2.49 2.39
0.697 0.731
ST5×17.5 ST ×12.7
0.633 0.300
0.725 0.173
2.23 1.98
0.653 0.768
ST4×11.5 ST ×9.2
0.271 0.167
0.168 0.0642
1.74 1.59
0.707 0.789
ST3×8.625 ST ×6.25
0.182 0.0838
0.0772 0.0197
1.36 1.21
0.706 0.820
ST2.5×5
0.0568
0.0100
1.02
0.842
ST2×4.75 ST ×3.85
0.0589 0.0364
0.00995 0.00457
0.907 0.841
0.800 0.872
ST1.5×3.75 ST ×2.85
0.0440 0.0220
0.00496 0.00189
0.737 0.672
0.832 0.913
*See LRFD Specification Section E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 172
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Double Angles Long Legs Vertical
Short Legs Vertical
Back to Back of Angles, in. 3⁄ 8
0
Back to Back of Angles, in.
3⁄ 4
3⁄ 8
0
3⁄ 4
Designation
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
L8×8×11⁄8 L × ×1 L × × 7⁄8 L × × 3⁄4 L × × 5⁄8 L × × 1⁄2
4.58 4.58 4.58 4.58 4.58 4.59
0.837 0.833 0.831 0.828 0.825 0.822
4.68 4.68 4.68 4.68 4.68 4.69
0.844 0.840 0.838 0.835 0.832 0.829
4.79 4.79 4.78 4.78 4.78 4.78
0.851 0.847 0.845 0.842 0.839 0.836
4.58 4.58 4.58 4.58 4.58 4.59
0.837 0.833 0.831 0.828 0.825 0.822
4.68 4.68 4.68 4.68 4.68 4.69
0.844 0.840 0.838 0.835 0.832 0.829
4.79 4.79 4.78 4.78 4.78 4.78
0.851 0.847 0.845 0.842 0.839 0.836
L8×6×1 L × × 3⁄4 L × × 1⁄2
4.07 4.08 4.11
0.721 0.714 0.708
4.15 4.16 4.18
0.731 0.724 0.718
4.23 4.24 4.26
0.742 0.735 0.728
4.19 4.17 4.17
0.925 0.919 0.914
4.31 4.29 4.28
0.929 0.924 0.919
4.44 4.41 4.40
0.933 0.928 0.923
L8×4×1 L × × 3⁄4 L × × 1⁄2
3.87 3.89 3.93
0.566 0.562 0.558
3.93 3.94 3.97
0.578 0.573 0.568
3.99 4.00 4.03
0.591 0.586 0.580
4.12 4.08 4.05
0.982 0.980 0.977
4.26 4.22 4.19
0.983 0.981 0.979
4.41 4.36 4.33
0.984 0.982 0.980
L7×4×3⁄4 L × ×1⁄2 L × ×3⁄8
3.42 3.45 3.46
0.609 0.604 0.602
3.48 3.5 3.51
0.623 0.616 0.614
3.55 3.57 3.57
0.637 0.629 0.627
3.58 3.55 3.54
0.968 0.965 0.963
3.71 3.68 3.67
0.971 0.967 0.965
3.85 3.82 3.80
0.973 0.969 0.968
L6×6×1 L × × 7⁄8 L × × 3⁄4 L × × 5⁄8 L × × 1⁄2 L × × 3⁄8
3.43 3.43 3.44 3.44 3.44 3.44
0.843 0.838 0.833 0.830 0.827 0.822
3.54 3.54 3.54 3.54 3.54 3.54
0.852 0.847 0.842 0.839 0.836 0.831
3.65 3.65 3.65 3.64 3.64 3.64
0.861 0.856 0.852 0.848 0.845 0.841
3.43 3.43 3.44 3.44 3.44 3.44
0.843 0.838 0.833 0.830 0.827 0.822
3.54 3.54 3.54 3.54 3.54 3.54
0.852 0.847 0.842 0.839 0.836 0.831
3.65 3.65 3.65 3.64 3.64 3.64
0.861 0.856 0.852 0.848 0.845 0.841
L6×4×3⁄4 L × ×5⁄8 L × ×1⁄2 L × ×3⁄8
2.98 2.98 3.00 3.01
0.672 0.668 0.663 0.661
3.05 3.05 3.06 3.07
0.687 0.683 0.678 0.675
3.13 3.13 3.14 3.15
0.704 0.699 0.693 0.690
3.10 3.09 3.08 3.07
0.948 0.946 0.943 0.940
3.23 3.21 3.20 3.19
0.952 0.950 0.947 0.944
3.36 3.34 3.34 3.32
0.956 0.954 0.951 0.948
L6×31⁄2×3⁄8 L × 1⁄2×5⁄16
2.97 2.97
0.610 0.610
3.02 3.02
0.624 0.624
3.09 3.09
0.640 0.639
3.05 3.03
0.961 0.960
3.17 3.16
0.964 0.963
3.31 3.29
0.967 0.966
L5×5×7⁄8 L × ×3⁄4 L × ×1⁄2 L × ×3⁄8 L × ×5⁄16
2.87 2.85 2.86 2.87 2.87
0.844 0.839 0.830 0.824 0.821
2.97 2.96 2.96 2.96 2.97
0.855 0.850 0.841 0.835 0.833
3.09 3.07 3.07 3.07 3.07
0.865 0.861 0.852 0.846 0.844
2.87 2.85 2.86 2.87 2.87
0.844 0.839 0.830 0.824 0.821
2.97 2.96 2.96 2.96 2.97
0.855 0.850 0.841 0.835 0.833
3.09 3.07 3.07 3.07 3.07
0.865 0.861 0.852 0.846 0.844
*See LRFD Specification Section E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TORSION PROPERTIES
1 - 173
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Double Angles Long Legs Vertical
Short Legs Vertical
Back to Back of Angles, in.
Back to Back of Angles, in.
3⁄ 8
0
3⁄ 4
3⁄ 8
0
3⁄ 4
Designation
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
L5×31⁄2×3⁄4 L5×31⁄2×1⁄2 L5×31⁄2×3⁄8 L5×31⁄2×5⁄16
2.50 2.51 2.52 2.53
0.697 0.685 0.682 0.679
2.58 2.59 2.59 2.60
0.715 0.703 0.699 0.695
2.67 2.67 2.67 2.68
0.734 0.722 0.717 0.713
2.61 2.59 2.58 2.58
0.943 0.936 0.932 0.930
2.74 2.71 2.70 2.70
0.948 0.941 0.938 0.936
2.87 2.84 2.83 2.82
0.953 0.947 0.943 0.942
L5×3×1⁄2 L3×3×3⁄8 L3×3×5⁄16 L3×3×1⁄4
2.45 2.46 2.47 2.48
0.626 0.623 0.621 0.618
2.52 2.52 2.53 2.54
0.645 0.641 0.638 0.634
2.59 2.60 2.60 2.61
0.665 0.661 0.657 0.653
2.55 2.54 2.54 2.53
0.962 0.959 0.957 0.956
2.69 2.67 2.67 2.66
0.965 0.963 0.961 0.960
2.82 2.80 2.80 2.79
0.969 0.966 0.965 0.964
L4×4×3⁄4 L3×3×5⁄8 L3×3×1⁄2 L3×3×3⁄8 L3×3×5⁄16 L3×3×1⁄4
2.29 2.29 2.29 2.29 2.29 2.29
0.847 0.839 0.834 0.827 0.824 0.823
2.40 2.40 2.39 2.39 2.39 2.39
0.861 0.853 0.848 0.841 0.838 0.837
2.52 2.51 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.49
0.873 0.867 0.862 0.855 0.852 0.850
2.29 2.29 2.29 2.29 2.29 2.29
0.847 0.839 0.834 0.827 0.824 0.823
2.40 2.40 2.39 2.39 2.39 2.39
0.861 0.853 0.848 0.841 0.838 0.837
2.52 2.51 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.49
0.873 0.867 0.862 0.855 0.852 0.850
L4×31⁄2×1⁄2 L5×31⁄2×3⁄8 L5×31⁄2×5⁄16 L5×31⁄2×1⁄4
2.15 2.15 2.15 2.16
0.783 0.774 0.774 0.770
2.24 2.24 2.24 2.24
0.801 0.792 0.791 0.787
2.34 2.34 2.34 2.34
0.818 0.809 0.808 0.805
2.17 2.17 2.17 2.17
0.881 0.875 0.872 0.870
2.29 2.28 2.28 2.28
0.892 0.887 0.884 0.882
2.41 2.40 2.40 2.39
0.903 0.898 0.895 0.893
L4×3×1⁄2 L3×3×3⁄8 L3×3×5⁄16 L3×3×1⁄4
2.04 2.04 2.05 2.06
0.719 0.714 0.710 0.706
2.12 2.12 2.13 2.13
0.740 0.735 0.731 0.726
2.22 2.21 2.22 2.22
0.762 0.757 0.752 0.747
2.10 2.09 2.09 2.09
0.924 0.919 0.917 0.914
2.22 2.21 2.21 2.20
0.933 0.928 0.925 0.923
2.35 2.34 2.33 2.33
0.940 0.935 0.933 0.931
L31⁄2×31⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄4
2.00 2.01
0.831 0.824
2.10 2.10
0.847 0.839
2.22 2.21
0.862 0.855
2.00 2.01
0.831 0.824
2.10 2.10
0.847 0.839
2.22 2.21
0.862 0.855
L31⁄2×3×3⁄8 L5×31⁄2×5⁄16 L5×31⁄2×1⁄4
1.86 1.87 1.87
0.771 0.766 0.762
1.95 1.96 1.96
0.791 0.787 0.782
2.06 2.06 2.06
0.812 0.807 0.803
1.89 1.89 1.89
0.884 0.881 0.878
2.00 2.00 2.00
0.897 0.894 0.891
2.13 2.12 2.12
0.909 0.906 0.903
L31⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄8 L31⁄2×31⁄2×1⁄4
1.76 1.77
0.696 0.691
1.84 1.85
0.721 0.715
1.94 1.93
0.748 0.740
1.82 1.81
0.932 0.927
1.94 1.93
0.941 0.936
2.08 2.06
0.948 0.944
L3×3×1⁄2 L3×3×3⁄8 L3×3×5⁄16 L3×3×1⁄4 L3×3×3⁄16
1.72 1.72 1.72 1.72 1.72
0.842 0.834 0.830 0.825 0.822
1.83 1.82 1.82 1.82 1.82
0.860 0.852 0.848 0.844 0.841
1.95 1.94 1.93 1.93 1.93
0.877 0.869 0.866 0.862 0.858
1.72 1.72 1.72 1.72 1.72
0.842 0.834 0.830 0.825 0.822
1.83 1.82 1.82 1.82 1.82
0.860 0.852 0.848 0.844 0.841
1.95 1.94 1.93 1.93 1.93
0.877 0.869 0.866 0.862 0.858
*See LRFD Specification Section E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 174
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL PROPERTIES Double Angles Long Legs Vertical
Short Legs Vertical
Back to Back of Angles, in. 3⁄ 8
0
Back to Back of Angles, in.
3⁄ 4
3⁄ 8
0
3⁄ 4
Designation
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
ro*
H*
L3×21⁄2×3⁄8 L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×21⁄2×3⁄16
1.58 1.59 1.59
0.763 0.754 0.750
1.67 1.67 1.67
0.789 0.779 0.775
1.78 1.78 1.77
0.813 0.804 0.800
1.61 1.61 1.61
0.896 0.889 0.885
1.73 1.72 1.72
0.910 0.903 0.899
1.86 1.84 1.84
0.922 0.916 0.912
L3×2×3⁄8 L3×2×5⁄16 L3×2×1⁄4 L3×2×3⁄16
1.49 1.50 1.50 1.50
0.672 0.667 0.664 0.661
1.57 1.57 1.57 1.57
0.704 0.698 0.694 0.690
1.66 1.66 1.66 1.66
0.737 0.730 0.726 0.721
1.55 1.55 1.54 1.54
0.949 0.946 0.943 0.940
1.68 1.68 1.67 1.66
0.956 0.954 0.951 0.949
1.82 1.82 1.80 1.80
0.963 0.961 0.958 0.956
L21⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄8 L21⁄2×21⁄2×5⁄16 L21⁄2×21⁄2×1⁄4 L21⁄2×21⁄2×3⁄16
1.43 1.43 1.43 1.43
0.839 0.834 0.829 0.825
1.54 1.54 1.53 1.53
0.861 0.856 0.851 0.847
1.66 1.66 1.65 1.65
0.880 0.876 0.871 0.867
1.43 1.43 1.43 1.43
0.839 0.834 0.829 0.825
1.54 1.54 1.53 1.53
0.861 0.856 0.851 0.847
1.66 1.66 1.65 1.65
0.880 0.876 0.871 0.867
L21⁄2×2×3⁄8 L3×21⁄2×5⁄16 L3×21⁄2×1⁄4 L3×21⁄2×3⁄16
1.29 1.30 1.30 1.31
0.752 0.746 0.741 0.736
1.39 1.39 1.39 1.39
0.785 0.779 0.773 0.767
1.50 1.50 1.50 1.49
0.816 0.810 0.804 0.798
1.33 1.33 1.33 1.32
0.912 0.908 0.903 0.899
1.45 1.45 1.45 1.44
0.927 0.923 0.919 0.915
1.59 1.58 1.58 1.57
0.939 0.935 0.932 0.928
L2×2×3⁄8 L3×2×5⁄16 L3×2×1⁄4 L3×2×3⁄16 L3×2×1⁄8
1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
0.846 0.840 0.834 0.828 0.822
1.26 1.26 1.25 1.25 1.25
0.873 0.867 0.861 0.855 0.850
1.39 1.38 1.38 1.37 1.37
0.896 0.890 0.885 0.880 0.875
1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
0.846 0.840 0.834 0.828 0.822
1.26 1.26 1.25 1.25 1.25
0.873 0.867 0.861 0.855 0.850
1.39 1.38 1.38 1.37 1.37
0.896 0.890 0.885 0.880 0.875
*See LRFD Specification Section E3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SURFACE AREAS AND BOX AREAS
1 - 175
SURFACE AREAS AND BOX AREAS W shapes Square feet per foot of length
Case A Case B Case C Case D
Designation
Case A Case B Case C Case D
Designation
W44×335 W44×290 W44×262 W44×230 W44 W40×593 W44×503 W44×431 W44×372 W44×321 W44×297 W44×277 W44×249 W44×215 W44×199 W44×174
11.0 11.0 10.9 10.9
12.4 12.3 12.2 12.2
8.67 8.59 8.53 8.46
10.0 9.91 9.84 9.78
10.9 10.7 10.5 10.4 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.2 10.2 10.1 10.0
12.3 12.1 11.9 11.8 11.6 11.6 11.6 11.5 11.5 11.4 11.3
8.56 8.38 8.23 8.11 8.01 7.96 7.93 7.88 7.81 7.76 7.68
9.95 9.75 9.58 9.45 9.33 9.28 9.25 9.19 9.12 9.07 8.99
W40×466 W44×392 W44×331 W44×278 W44×264 W44×235 W36×211 W36×183 W36×167 W36×149
9.79 9.61 9.47 9.35 9.32 9.28 9.22 9.17 9.11 9.05
10.8 10.6 10.5 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.2 10.2 10.1 10.0
8.13 7.96 7.81 7.69 7.66 7.61 7.55 7.48 7.42 7.35
9.18 8.99 8.83 8.69 8.66 8.60 8.53 8.47 8.40 8.34
W36×848 W36×798 W36×650 W36×527 W36×439 W36×393 W36×359 W36×328 W36×300 W36×280 W36×260 W36×245 W36×230
11.1 11.0 10.7 10.4 10.3 10.2 10.1 10.0 9.99 9.95 9.90 9.87 9.84
12.6 12.5 12.1 11.9 11.7 11.6 11.5 11.4 11.4 11.3 11.3 11.2 11.2
8.59 8.49 8.21 7.97 7.79 7.70 7.63 7.57 7.51 7.47 7.42 7.39 7.36
10.1 9.99 9.67 9.41 9.20 9.10 9.02 8.95 8.90 8.85 8.80 8.77 8.73
W36×256 W44×232 W44×210 W44×194 W36×182 W36×170 W36×160 W36×150 W36×135
9.02 8.96 8.91 8.88 8.85 8.82 8.79 8.76 8.71
10.0 9.97 9.93 9.89 9.85 9.82 9.79 9.76 9.70
7.26 7.20 7.13 7.09 7.06 7.03 7.00 6.97 6.92
8.27 8.21 8.15 8.10 8.07 8.03 8.00 7.97 7.92
W33×354 W36×318 W36×291 W36×263 W36×241 W36×221 W33×201
9.66 9.58 9.52 9.46 9.42 9.38 9.33
11.0 10.9 10.8 10.8 10.7 10.7 10.6
7.27 7.19 7.13 7.07 7.02 6.97 6.93
8.61 8.52 8.46 8.39 8.34 8.29 8.24
W33×169 W36×152 W36×141 W36×130 W36×118
8.30 8.27 8.23 8.20 8.15
9.26 9.23 9.19 9.15 9.11
6.60 6.55 6.51 6.47 6.43
7.55 7.51 7.47 7.43 7.39
W30×477 W36×391 W36×326 W36×292 W36×261 W36×235 W36×211 W36×191 W36×173
9.30 9.11 8.96 8.88 8.81 8.75 8.71 8.66 8.62
10.6 10.4 10.2 10.2 10.1 10.0 9.97 9.92 9.87
7.02 6.83 6.68 6.61 6.53 6.47 6.42 6.37 6.32
8.35 8.13 7.96 7.88 7.79 7.73 7.67 7.62 7.57
W30×148 W36×132 W36×124 W36×116 W36×108 W36×99 W36×90
7.53 7.49 7.47 7.44 7.41 7.37 7.35
8.40 8.37 8.34 8.31 8.28 8.25 8.22
5.99 5.93 5.90 5.88 5.84 5.81 5.79
6.86 6.81 6.78 6.75 6.72 6.68 6.66
Case A: Shape perimeter, minus one flange surface. Case B: Shape perimeter. Case C: Box perimeter, equal to one flange surface plus twice the depth. Case D: Box perimeter, equal to two flange surfaces plus twice the depth.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 176
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
SURFACE AREAS AND BOX AREAS W shapes Square feet per foot of length
Case A Case B Case C Case D
Designation
Case A Case B Case C Case D
Designation
W27×539 W ×448 W ×368 W ×307 W ×281 W ×258 W ×235 W ×217 W ×194 W ×178 W ×161 W ×146
8.82 8.61 8.42 8.27 8.21 8.15 8.09 8.04 7.98 7.95 7.91 7.87
10.09 9.86 9.64 9.47 9.40 9.34 9.27 9.22 9.15 9.12 9.08 9.03
6.69 6.48 6.29 6.14 6.08 6.02 5.96 5.91 5.85 5.81 5.77 5.73
7.96 7.73 7.51 7.34 7.27 7.21 7.14 7.09 7.02 6.98 6.94 6.89
W27×129 W ×114 W ×102 W ×94 W ×84
6.92 6.88 6.85 6.82 6.78
7.75 7.72 7.68 7.65 7.61
5.44 5.39 5.35 5.32 5.28
6.27 6.23 6.18 6.15 6.11
W24×492 W ×408 W ×335 W ×279 W ×250 W ×229 W ×207 W ×192 W ×176 W ×162 W ×146 W ×131 W ×117 W ×104
8.07 7.86 7.66 7.51 7.44 7.38 7.32 7.27 7.23 7.22 7.17 7.12 7.08 7.04
9.25 9.01 8.79 8.62 8.54 8.47 8.40 8.35 8.31 8.30 8.24 8.19 8.15 8.11
6.12 5.91 5.71 5.56 5.49 5.43 5.37 5.32 5.28 5.25 5.20 5.15 5.11 5.07
7.29 7.06 6.84 6.67 6.59 6.52 6.45 6.40 6.35 6.33 6.27 6.22 6.18 6.14
W24×103 W ×94 W ×84 W ×76 W ×68
6.18 6.16 6.12 6.09 6.06
6.93 6.92 6.87 6.84 6.80
4.84 4.81 4.77 4.74 4.70
5.59 5.56 5.52 5.49 5.45
W24×62 W ×55
5.57 5.54
6.16 6.13
4.54 4.51
5.13 5.10
W21×201 W18×182 W18×166 W18×147 W18×132 W18×122 W18×111 W18×101
6.75 6.69 6.65 6.61 6.57 6.54 6.51 6.48
7.80 7.74 7.68 7.66 7.61 7.57 7.54 7.50
4.89 4.83 4.78 4.72 4.68 4.65 4.61 4.58
5.93 5.87 5.82 5.76 5.71 5.68 5.64 5.61
W21×93 W18×83 W18×73 W ×68 W18×62
5.54 5.50 5.47 5.45 5.42
6.24 6.20 6.16 6.14 6.11
4.31 4.27 4.23 4.21 4.19
5.01 4.96 4.92 4.90 4.87
W21×57 W18×50 W18×44
5.01 4.97 4.94
5.56 5.51 5.48
4.06 4.02 3.99
4.60 4.56 4.53
W18×311 W18×283 W18×258 W18×234 W18×211 W18×192 W18×175 W18×158 W18×143 W18×130
6.41 6.32 6.24 6.17 6.10 6.03 5.97 5.92 5.87 5.83
7.41 7.31 7.23 7.14 7.06 6.99 6.92 6.86 6.81 6.76
4.72 4.63 4.56 4.48 4.41 4.35 4.29 4.23 4.18 4.14
5.72 5.62 5.54 5.45 5.37 5.30 5.24 5.17 5.12 5.07
W18×119 W18×106 W18×97 W ×86 W18×76
5.81 5.77 5.74 5.70 5.67
6.75 6.70 6.67 6.62 6.59
4.10 4.06 4.03 3.99 3.95
5.04 4.99 4.96 4.91 4.87
W18×71 W18×65 W18×60 W ×55 W18×50
4.85 4.82 4.80 4.78 4.76
5.48 5.46 5.43 5.41 5.38
3.71 3.69 3.67 3.65 3.62
4.35 4.32 4.30 4.27 4.25
Case A: Shape perimeter, minus one flange surface. Case B: Shape perimeter. Case C: Box perimeter, equal to one flange surface plus twice the depth. Case D: Box perimeter, equal to two flange surfaces plus twice the depth.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SURFACE AREAS AND BOX AREAS
1 - 177
SURFACE AREAS AND BOX AREAS W shapes Square feet per foot of length
Case A Case B Case C Case D
Designation
Case A Case B Case C Case D
Designation
W18×46 W ×40 W ×35
4.41 4.38 4.34
4.91 4.88 4.84
3.51 3.48 3.45
4.02 3.99 3.95
W16×100 W ×89 W ×77 W ×67
5.28 5.24 5.19 5.16
6.15 6.10 6.05 6.01
3.70 3.66 3.61 3.57
4.57 4.52 4.47 4.43
W16×57 W ×50 W ×45 W ×40 W ×36
4.39 4.36 4.33 4.31 4.28
4.98 4.95 4.92 4.89 4.87
3.33 3.30 3.27 3.25 3.23
3.93 3.89 3.86 3.83 3.81
W16×31 W ×26
3.92 3.89
4.39 4.35
3.11 3.07
3.57 3.53
W14×808 W ×730 W ×665 W ×605 W ×550 W ×500 W ×455
7.74 7.61 7.46 7.32 7.19 7.07 6.96
9.28 9.10 8.93 8.77 8.62 8.49 8.36
5.35 5.23 5.08 4.94 4.81 4.68 4.57
6.90 6.72 6.55 6.39 6.24 6.10 5.98
W14×426 W ×398 W ×370 W ×342 W ×311 W ×283 W ×257 W ×233 W ×211 W ×193 W ×176 W ×159 W ×145
6.89 6.81 6.74 6.67 6.59 6.52 6.45 6.38 6.32 6.27 6.22 6.18 6.14
8.28 8.20 8.12 8.03 7.94 7.86 7.78 7.71 7.64 7.58 7.53 7.47 7.43
4.50 4.43 4.36 4.29 4.21 4.13 4.06 4.00 3.94 3.89 3.84 3.79 3.76
5.89 5.81 5.73 5.65 5.56 5.48 5.40 5.32 5.25 5.20 5.15 5.09 5.05
W14×132 W ×120 W ×109 W ×99 W ×90
5.93 5.90 5.86 5.83 5.81
7.16 7.12 7.08 7.05 7.02
3.67 3.64 3.60 3.57 3.55
4.90 4.86 4.82 4.79 4.76
W14×82 W14×74 W14×68 W ×61
4.75 4.72 4.69 4.67
5.59 5.56 5.53 5.50
3.23 3.20 3.18 3.15
4.07 4.04 4.01 3.98
W14×53 W14×48 W14×43
4.19 4.16 4.14
4.86 4.83 4.80
2.99 2.97 2.94
3.66 3.64 3.61
W14×38 W14×34 W14×30
3.93 3.91 3.89
4.50 4.47 4.45
2.91 2.89 2.87
3.48 3.45 3.43
W14×26 W ×22
3.47 3.44
3.89 3.86
2.74 2.71
3.16 3.12
W12×336 W ×305 W14×279 W14×252 W14×230 W14×210 W14×190 W14×170 W14×152 W ×136 W14×120 W14×106 W14×96 W14×87 W14×79 W14×72 W14×65
5.77 5.67 5.59 5.50 5.43 5.37 5.30 5.23 5.17 5.12 5.06 5.02 4.98 4.95 4.92 4.89 4.87
6.88 6.77 6.68 6.58 6.51 6.43 6.36 6.28 6.21 6.15 6.09 6.03 5.99 5.96 5.93 5.90 5.87
3.92 3.82 3.74 3.65 3.58 3.52 3.45 3.39 3.33 3.27 3.21 3.17 3.13 3.10 3.07 3.05 3.02
5.03 4.93 4.83 4.74 4.66 4.58 4.51 4.43 4.37 4.30 4.24 4.19 4.15 4.11 4.08 4.05 4.02
W12×58 W14×53
4.39 4.37
5.22 5.20
2.87 2.84
3.70 3.68
W12×50 W14×45 W ×40
3.90 3.88 3.86
4.58 4.55 4.52
2.71 2.68 2.66
3.38 3.35 3.32
Case A: Shape perimeter, minus one flange surface. Case B: Shape perimeter. Case C: Box perimeter, equal to one flange surface plus twice the depth. Case D: Box perimeter, equal to two flange surfaces plus twice the depth.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 178
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
SURFACE AREAS AND BOX AREAS W shapes Square feet per foot of length
Case A Case B Case C Case D
Designation
Case A Case B Case C Case D
Designation
W12×35 W12×30 W12×26
3.63 3.60 3.58
4.18 4.14 4.12
2.63 2.60 2.58
3.18 3.14 3.12
W12×22 W12×19 W12×16 W12×14
2.97 2.95 2.92 2.90
3.31 3.28 3.25 3.23
2.39 2.36 2.33 2.32
2.72 2.69 2.66 2.65
W10×112 W12×100 W12×88 W12×77 W12×68 W12×60 W12×54 W12×49
4.30 4.25 4.20 4.15 4.12 4.08 4.06 4.04
5.17 5.11 5.06 5.00 4.96 4.92 4.89 4.87
2.76 2.71 2.66 2.62 2.58 2.54 2.52 2.50
3.63 3.57 3.52 3.47 3.42 3.38 3.35 3.33
W10×45 W12×39 W12×33
3.56 3.53 3.49
4.23 4.19 4.16
2.35 2.32 2.29
3.02 2.98 2.95
W10×30 W12×26 W12×22
3.10 3.08 3.05
3.59 3.56 3.53
2.23 2.20 2.17
2.71 2.68 2.65
W10×19 W12×17 W12×15 W12×12
2.63 2.60 2.58 2.56
2.96 2.94 2.92 2.89
2.04 2.02 2.00 1.97
2.38 2.35 2.33 2.30
W8×67 W8×58 W8×48 W8×40 W8×35 W8×31
3.42 3.37 3.32 3.28 3.25 3.23
4.11 4.06 4.00 3.95 3.92 3.89
2.19 2.14 2.09 2.05 2.02 2.00
2.88 2.83 2.77 2.72 2.69 2.67
W8×28 W8×24
2.87 2.85
3.42 3.39
1.89 1.86
2.43 2.40
W8×21 W8×18
2.61 2.59
3.05 3.03
1.82 1.79
2.26 2.23
W8×15 W8×13 W8×10
2.27 2.25 2.23
2.61 2.58 2.56
1.69 1.67 1.64
2.02 2.00 1.97
W6×25 W ×20 W8×15
2.49 2.46 2.42
3.00 2.96 2.92
1.57 1.54 1.50
2.08 2.04 2.00
W6×16 W8×12 W8×9
1.98 1.93 1.90
2.31 2.26 2.23
1.38 1.34 1.31
1.72 1.67 1.64
W5×19 W8×16
2.04 2.01
2.45 2.43
1.28 1.25
1.70 1.67
W4×13
1.63
1.96
1.03
1.37
Case A: Shape perimeter, minus one flange surface. Case B: Shape perimeter. Case C: Box perimeter, equal to one flange surface plus twice the depth. Case D: Box perimeter, equal to two flange surfaces plus twice the depth.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CAMBER
1 - 179
CAMBER Beams and Girders
Camber and sweep are used to form a desired curvature in either rolled beams or welded girders. Camber denotes a curve in the vertical plane. Beams and girders can be cambered to compensate for the anticipated deflection or for architectural reasons. Note that the required camber is determined at service (unfactored) load levels. Sweep denotes a curve in the horizontal plane. Camber and sweep may be induced through cold bending or through the application of heat. The minimum radius for cold cambering in members up to a nominal depth of 30 inches is between 10 and 14 times the depth of the member; deeper members will require a larger minimum radius. Cold bending may be used to provide sweep in members to practically any radius desired. Note that a length limit of 40 to 50 feet is practical. Heat cambering, sweeping, and straightening are provided through controlled heat application. The member is rapidly heated in selected areas which tend to expand, but are restrained by the adjacent cooler areas, causing plastic deformation of the heated areas and a change in the shape of the cooled member. The mechanical properties of steels are largely unaffected by such heating operations, provided the maximum temperature does not exceed 1,100°F for quenched and tempered alloy steels, and 1,300°F for other steels. The temperature should be carefully checked by temperature-indicating crayons or other suitable means during the heating process. Cambering and sweeping induces residual stresses similar to those that develop in rolled structural shapes as elements of the shape cool from the rolling temperature at different rates. In general, these residual stresses do not affect the ultimate strength of structural members. Additionally, the effect of residual stresses is incorporated in the provisions of the LRFD Specification. Note that when a cambered beam bearing on a wall or other support is loaded, expansion of the unrestrained end must be considered. In Figure 1-5(a), the end will move a distance ∆, where ∆=
4Cd L
If instead the cambered beam is supported on a simple shear connection at both ends, the top and bottom flange will each move a distance of one-half ∆ since end rotation will occur approximately about the neutral axis. The designer should be aware of the magnitude of these movements and make provisions to accommodate them. Figure 1-5(a) considers the geometry of a girder in the horizontal position, and Figure 1-5(b) illustrates the condition when the girder is not level. Trusses
“Cambering” of trusses is accomplished by geometric relocation of panel points and adjustment of member lengths; it does not involve physical cold bending or the application of heat as with beams and girders. The following discussion of cambering to compensate for the anticipated deflection of a truss is applicable for any parabolic condition; large-radius circular curves will be approximated very closely by the technique described. Cambering to compensate for the axial deformation of the members of a truss is beyond the scope of this Manual; refer to a textbook on mechanics of materials. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 180
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Distances approximately equal for small angles
Distances equal for parabolic curve, approximately equal for circular curve. See sketch below.
∆
∆ θ
d C
90°
C L /2
∆
L /2
tanθ = 2C
Fixed End
L /2
∆ = d tanθ
Unrestrained End
∆ = 4Cd L
θ 2θ for circular curve 2C for parabolic curve (a) Beam or Girder Ends at
Same Elevations
4Cd ∆= L
4Cd ∆= L
∆ = 4Cd L
∆ = 4Cd L d
B Grade angle
B L
L approx
.
(b) Beam or Girder Ends at Different Elevations
Fig. 1-5. Camber for beams and girders. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
B
A+B A
B
A
Horiz. line
Vert.
A
°
90
A
B
°
e
B 90
Grade lin
A+B A
C
A
CAMBER
1 - 181
The usual method of providing camber in building trusses is to progressively raise each panel point. The lengths of the verticals are not changed, but the lengths of the diagonals are calculated on the basis of the adjusted elevation for the several panel points. For any simple-span truss, the offset above a straight base line, at the several panel points, can be computed from the following equations if the vertical curve forming the camber is taken as a parabola. 2
2
B B D = C − C = C 1 − A A where A = Horizontal distance from end panel point to mid-span of the truss (half the truss span). B = Horizontal distance from mid-span of the truss to panel point for which offset is to be determined. C = Required mid-span camber. D = Offset from the base-line at panel point corresponding to distance B. A and B must be expressed in the same units; similarly C and D must be expressed in the same units, but not necessarily the same units as A and B. When the truss is divided into any number of approximately equal panels, it may be convenient to express distances A and B in panel lengths. For the truss of Figure 1-6(a) with eight equal panels, distance A is taken as four panel lengths. Assuming the camber at the midpoint is specified as 11⁄2-in., the offset at panel point 1, where B equals three panel lengths, is: 2
3 D = 1 -in. 1 − 4 = 21⁄32-in. 1⁄ 2
The offset at panel point 2, where B equals two panel lengths, is: 2
2 D = 1 -in. 1 − 4 = 11⁄8-in. 1⁄ 2
The offset at panel point 3, where B equals one panel length, is: 2
1 D = 1 -in. 1 − 4 = 113⁄32-in. 1⁄ 2
Finally, the offset at panel point 4, where B equals zero, is D = C = 11⁄2-in. An alternative method of determining the amount of camber at intermediate panel points when all panel points are approximately the same distance apart is as follows. Using the truss in Figure 1-6(a) as an example, sketch the camber diagram and number the panel points, starting with the first panel point from the end of the truss, from 1 to 4, AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 182
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
as shown in Figure 1-6(b) on line A. Next, on line B, reverse the numbering as shown. Finally, on line C, enter the product of the numbers on lines A and B. The camber at any panel point is the amount of camber at the centerline of the truss multiplied by the fraction whose numerator is the figure on line C at the given panel point, and whose denominator is the figure on line C at the center line of the truss. Thus, at panel point 1, the camber is 7⁄
16
× 11⁄2jin. = 21⁄32jin.
at panel point 2, the camber is 12⁄
16
× 11⁄2jin. = 11⁄8jin.
at panel point 3, the camber is 15⁄
16
× 11⁄2jin. = 113⁄32jin.
and at panel point 4, the camber is 16⁄
16
× 11⁄2jin. = 11⁄2jin.
cL
4
3 2 1 21/ 32
0
1 1/2
1 13/32
11/8
Baseline
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
(a) Calculated camber ordinates by formula
1
2
3
cL 4
line A line B
1 x7
2 x6
3 x5
4 x4
line C
7
12
15
16
Panel point
(b) Alternative calculation method for approximately equal panels
Fig. 1-6. Camber for trusses. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STANDARD MILL PRACTICE
1 - 183
STANDARD MILL PRACTICE General Information
Rolling structural shapes and plates involves such factors as roll wear, subsequent roll dressing, temperature variations, etc., which cause the finished product to vary from published profiles. Such variations are limited by the provisions of the American Society for Testing and Materials Specification A6. Contained in this section is a summary of these provisions, not a reproduction of the complete specification. In its entirety, A6 covers a group of common requirements, which, unless otherwise specified in the purchase order or in an individual specification, apply to rolled steel plates, shapes, sheet piling, and bars. As indicated in Table 1-1, carbon steel refers to ASTM designations A36 and A529; high-strength, low-alloy steel refers to designations A242, A572, and A588; alloy steel refers to designation A514; and low-alloy steel refers to A852. For further information on mill practices, including permissible variations for rolled tees, zees, and bulb angles in structural and bar sizes, pipe, tubing, sheets, and strip, and for other grades of steel, see ASTM A6, A53, A500, A568, and A618; the Steel Products Manuals of the Iron and Steel Society (American Institute of Mining, Metallurgical, and Petroleum Engineers); and producers’ catalogs. The data on spreading rolls to increase areas and weights, and mill cambering of beams, is not a part of ASTM A6. Additional material on mill practice is included in the descriptive material preceding the “Dimensions and Properties” tables for shapes and plates. Letter symbols representing dimensions on sketches shown herein are in accordance with ASTM A6, AISI and mill catalogs and not necessarily as defined by the general nomenclature of this manual. Methods of increasing areas and weights by spreading rolls Cambering of rolled beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positions for measuring camber and sweep . . . . . . . . . W Shapes, permissible variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S Shapes, M Shapes, and Channels, permissible variations . Tees split from W , M, and S Shapes, permissible variations Angles split from Channels, permissible variations . . . . . Angles, structural size, permissible variations . . . . . . . . Angles, bar size, permissible variations . . . . . . . . . . . Steel Pipe and Tubing, permissible variations . . . . . . . . Plates, permissible variations for sheared, length and width . Plates, permissible variations for universal mill, length . . . Plates, permissible variations for universal mill, width . . . Plates, permissible variations for camber . . . . . . . . . . Plates, permissible variations for flatness . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-183 1-186 1-187 1-188 1-190 1-191 1-191 1-192 1-193 1-194 1-196 1-196 1-196 1-197 1-198
Methods of Increasing Areas and Weights by Spreading Rolls
W Shapes
To vary the area and weight within a given nominal size, the flange width, the flange thickness, and the web thickness are changed as shown in Figure 1-7(a). AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 184
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
S Shapes and American Standard Channels
To vary the area and weight within a given nominal size, the web thickness and the flange width are changed by an equal amount as shown in Figures 1-7(b) and (c). Angles
To vary area and weight for a given leg length, the thickness of each leg is changed. Note that the leg length is changed slightly by this method (Figure 1-7(d)).
Constant for a given nominal size
(a)
Constant for a given nominal size (except S24 and S20)
(b)
Constant for a given nominal size
(c)
(d) Fig. 1-7. Varying areas and weights. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STANDARD MILL PRACTICE
1 - 185
Cambering of Rolled Beams
All beams are straightened after rolling to meet permissible variations for sweep and camber listed hereinafter for W shapes and S shapes. The following data refer to the subsequent cold cambering of beams to produce a predetermined dimension. The maximum lengths that can be cambered depend on the length to which a given section can be rolled, with a maximum of 100 feet. Table 1-10 outlines the maximum and minimum induced camber of W shapes and S shapes. Consult the producer for specific camber and/or lengths outside the above listed available lengths and sections. Mill camber in beams of less depth than tabulated should not be specified. A single minimum value for camber, within the ranges shown above for the length ordered, should be specified. Camber is measured at the mill and will not necessarily be present in the same amount in the section of beam as received due to release of stress induced during the cambering operation. In general 75 percent of the specified camber is likely to remain. Camber will approximate a simple regular curve nearly the full length of the beam, or between any two points specified. Camber is ordinarily specified by the ordinate at the mid-length of the portion of the beam to be curved. Ordinates at the other points should not be specified. Although mill cambering to achieve reverse or other compound curves is not considered practical, fabricating shop facilities for cambering by heat can accomplish such results as well as form regular curves in excess of the limits tabulated above. Refer to the earlier section Effect of Heat of Steel for further information.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 186
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-10. Cambering of Rolled Beams Maximum and Minimum Induced Camber Sections, Nominal Depth, in.
Specified Length of Beam, ft Over 30 to 42, incl.
Over 42 to 52, incl.
Over 52 to 65, incl.
Over 65 to 85, incl.
Over 85 to 100, incl.
Max. and Min. Camber Acceptable, in. W shapes, 24 and over
W shapes, 14 to 21, incl. and S shapes, 12 in. and over
1 to 2, incl. 3⁄ 4
to 21⁄2, incl.
1 to 3, incl.
2 to 4, incl.
3 to 5, incl.
3 to 6, incl.
1 to 3, incl.
—
—
—
Permissible Variations for Camber Ordinate Lengths
Plus Variation 1⁄
50 ft and less Over 50 ft
1⁄ -in. 2
2-in.
1⁄ -in. 8
plus for each 10 ft or fraction thereof in excess of 50 ft
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Minus Variation 0 0
STANDARD MILL PRACTICE
1 - 187
Table 1-11. Positions for Measuring Camber and Sweep
Camber
Sweep
Camber
Sweep*
Horizontal surface
W SHAPES
Camber
S SHAPES and M SHAPES
Sweep*
Camber
Horizontal surface
Horz
Camber
onta
CHANNELS
ANGLES
l sur
face
TEES
*Due to the extreme variations in flexibility of these shapes, straightness tolerances for sweep are subject to negotiations between manufacturer and purchaser for individual sections involved.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 188
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-12. W Shapes, HP Shapes B
1/ 2 B±
B
1/ 2 B±
E
E
T′
C
T′
C
A
A
T
T 1/2 B±E
1/ 2 B±
E
Permissible Variations in Cross Section Section Nominal Size, in.
A, Depth, in.
B, Fig. Width, in.
Over Theoretical
Under Theoretical
Over Theoretical
To 12, inc.
1⁄
2
1⁄ 8
1⁄ 4
3⁄
Over 12
1⁄
8
1⁄ 8
1⁄ 4
3⁄
T+T′ Flanges, out of square, Max, in.
E a, Web off Center, Max, in.
C, Max. Depth at any Crosssection over Theoretical Depth, in.
16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄
4
16
5⁄
3⁄ 16
1⁄
4
Under Theoretical
16
Permissible Variations in Length Variations from Specified Length for Lengths for Given, in. 30 ft and Under W Shapes
Over 30 ft
Over
Under
Over
Under
Beams 24 in. and under in nominal depth
3⁄
8
3⁄ 8
3⁄
1 8 plus ⁄16 for each additional 5 ft or fraction thereof
3⁄ 8
Beams over 24 in. nom. depth; all columns
1⁄
2
1⁄ 2
1⁄
1⁄ 2
1 2 plus ⁄16 for each additional 5 ft or fraction thereof
Notes: aVariation of 5⁄ in. max. for sections over 426 lb / ft. 16
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Continued on next page
STANDARD MILL PRACTICE
1 - 189
Table 1-12 (cont.). WP Shapes, HP Shapes Other Permissible Variations Area and weight variation: ±2.5 percent theorectical or specified amount. Ends out-of-square: 1⁄64-in. per in. of depth, or of flange width if it is greater than the depth.
Camber and Sweep Permissible Variation, in. Sizes
Length
Sizes with flange width equal to or greater than 6 in.
All
Sizes with flange width less than 6 in.
All
45 ft. and under
Certain sections with a flange width approx. equal to depth & specified on order as b columns
Over 45 ft.
Camber 1⁄ 8
1⁄ 8
in. ×
Sweep in. ×
(total length ft.) 10
(total length ft.) 10
1⁄ 8
in. ×
(total length ft.) 5
(total length ft.) with 3⁄8 in. max. 10
1⁄ 8
in. ×
3⁄ 8
(total length ft. − 45) in. + 1⁄8 in. × 10
bApplies only to W8×31 and heavier, W10×49 and heavier, W12×65 and heavier, W14×90 and heavier. If the other sections are specified on the order as columns, the tolerance will be subject to negotiation with the manufacturer.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 190
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-13. S Shapes, M Shapes, and Channels Permissible Variations in Cross Section B B
T′
T′
*
A
A
T
T
* Back of square and centerline of web to be parallel when measuring “out-of-square”
A, Depth in.a
Section
T + T ′b, Out of Square per Inch of Over Under Over Under B, in. Theoretical Theoretical Theoretical Theoretical
Nominal Size in.
S shapes 3 to 7, incl. Over 7 to 14, and M incl. shapes Over 14 to 24, incl.
1⁄ 2 1⁄ 8
1⁄ 16 3⁄ 32
1⁄ 8 5⁄ 32
1⁄ 8 5⁄ 32
1⁄
3⁄
16
1⁄ 8
3⁄ 16
3⁄ 16
1⁄
32
32 1⁄ 8
1⁄ 16 3⁄ 32
1⁄ 8 1⁄ 8
1⁄ 8 5⁄ 32
1⁄
32
3⁄
1⁄ 8
1⁄ 8
3⁄ 16
1⁄
3⁄
Channels 3 to 4, incl. Over 7 to 14, incl. Over 14
B, Flange Width, in.
16
1⁄
1⁄
32 32
32 32
Permissible Variations in Length Variations from Specified Length for Lengths Given, in. Over 30 to 40 ft., incl.
to 30 ft., incl. Section S shapes, M shapes and Channels
Over 40 to 50 ft., incl.
Over
Under
Over
Under
Over
1⁄
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 4
1⁄
1
2
4
Under 1⁄
4
Over 50 to 65 ft., incl.
Over 65 ft.
Over
Under
Over
Under
11⁄8
1⁄ 4
11⁄4
1⁄ 4
Other Permissible Variations
Area and weight variation: ±2.5 percent theoretical or specified amount. Ends out-of square: S shapes and channels 1⁄64-in. per in. of depth. total length,ft Camber = 1⁄8-in. × 5 Notes: aA is measured at center line of web for beams; and at back of web for channels. bT + T′ applies when flanges of channels are toed in or out.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STANDARD MILL PRACTICE
1 - 191
Table 1-14. Tees Split from W, M, and S Shapes, Angles Split from Channels Permissible Variations in Depth A
A
A
Dimension A may be approximately one-half beam or channel depth, or any dimension resulting from off-center splitting, or splitting on two lines as specified on the order. Depth of Beam from which Tees or Angles are Split
Variations in Depth A Over and Under Tees
Angles
To 6 in., excl.
1⁄ 8
1⁄ 8
6 to 16, excl.
3⁄ 16
3⁄ 16
16 to 20, excl.
1⁄ 4
1⁄ 4
20 to 24, excl.
5⁄ 16
—
24 and over
3⁄ 8
—
The above variations for depths to tees or angles include the permissible variations in depth for the beams and channels before splitting.
Other Permissible Variations Other permissible variations in cross section as well as permissible variations in length, area, and weight variation, and ends out-of-square will correspond to those of the beam or channel before splitting, except total length,ft Camber = 1⁄8-in. × 5
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 192
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-15. Angles, Structural Size Permissible Variations in Cross Section T
B
B
T
B Length of Leg, in. Nominal Size, in.a
Section Angles
Over Theoretical
Under Theoretical
T, Out of Square per in. of B, in.
1⁄ 8
3⁄ 32
b 3⁄ 128
3 to 4, incl. Over 4 to 6, incl.
1⁄ 8
1⁄ 8
b 3⁄ 128
Over 6
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
b 3⁄ 128
Permissible Variations in Length Variations from Specified Length for Lengths Given, in. Over 30 to 40 ft., incl.
to 30 ft., incl. Section Angles
Over 40 to 50 ft., incl.
Over 50 to 65 ft., incl.
Over 65 ft.
Over
Under
Over
Under
Over
Under
Over
Under
Over
Under
1⁄ 2
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 4
1⁄ 4
1
1⁄ 4
11⁄8
1⁄ 4
11⁄4
1⁄ 4
Other Permissible Variations Area and weight variation: ±2.5 percent theoretical or specified amount. Ends out-of square: 3⁄128-in. per in. of leg length, or 11⁄2 degrees. Variations based on the longer leg of unequal angle. total length,ft Camber = 1⁄8-in. × , applied to either leg 5 Notes; aFor unequal leg angles, longer leg determines classification. 1 b1⁄ 128 in. per in. = 1 ⁄2 deg.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STANDARD MILL PRACTICE
1 - 193
Table 1-16. Angles, Bar Size* Permissible Variation in Cross Section T
B
B
a
Specified Length of Leg, in.
T
Variations from Thickness for Thicknesses Given, Over and Under, in. 3⁄ 16
and Under
Over 3⁄16 to 3⁄ incl. 8
1 and Under
0.008
0.010
Over 1 to 2, incl.
0.010
0.010
Over 2 to 3, excl.
0.012
0.015
Over 3⁄8
B Length of T, Out of Leg Over Square per and Under, in. Inch of B, in. 1⁄ 32
b 3⁄ 128
0.012
3⁄ 64
b 3⁄ 128
0.015
1⁄ 16
b 3⁄ 128
Permissible Variations in Length Variations Over Specified Length for Lengths Given No Variation Under Section All sizes of barsize angles
50 to 10 ft. excl.
10 to 20 ft. excl.
20 to 30 ft. excl.
30 to 40 ft. excl.
40 to 65 ft. excl.
5⁄ 8
1
11⁄2
2
21⁄2
Other Permissible Variations total length,ft 5 Straightness: Because of warpage, permissible variations for straightness do not apply to bars if any subsequent heating operation has been performed. Ends out-of-square: 3⁄128-in. per inch of leg length or 11⁄2 degrees. Variation based on longer leg of an unequal angle. Camber: 1⁄4-in. in any 5 feet, or 1⁄4 in. ×
Notes: *A member is ‘‘bar size’’ when its greatest cross-sectional dimension is less than three inches. aFor unequal leg angles, longer leg determines classification. 1 b1⁄ 128 in. per in. = 1 ⁄2 degrees.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 194
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-17. Steel Pipe and Tubing Dimensions and Weight Tolerances Round Tubing and Pipe (see also Table 1-4) ASTM A53 Weight—The weight of the pipe as specified in Table X2 and Table X3 (ASTM Specification A53) shall not vary by more than ±10 percent. Note that the weight tolerance of ±10 percent is determined from the weights of the customary lifts of pipe as produced for shipment by the mill, divided by the number of feet of pipe in the lift. On pipe sizes over four inches where individual lengths may be weighed, the weight tolerance is applicable to the individual length. Diameter—For pipe two inches and over in nominal diameter, the outside diameter shall not vary more than ±1 percent from the standard specified. Thickness—The minimum wall thickness at any point shall not be more than 12.5 percent under the nominal wall thickness specified. ASTM 500 Diameter—For pipe two inches and over in nominal diameter, the outside diameter shall not vary more than ±0.75 percent from the standard specified. Thickness—The wall thickness at any point shall not be more than 10 percent under or over the nominal wall thickness specified. ASTM A501 and ASTM 618 Outside dimensions—For round hot-formed structural tubing two inches and over in nominal size, the outside diameter shall not vary more than ±1 percent from the standard specified. Weight (A501 only)—The weight of structural tubing shall be less than the specified value by more than 3.5 percent. Mass (A618 only)—The mass of structural tubing shall not be less than the specified value by more than 3.5 percent. Length—Structural tubing is commonly produced in random mill lengths and in definite cut lengths. When cut lengths are specified for structural tubing, the length tolerances shall be in accordance with the following table: Over 22 to 44 ft, incl.
22 ft and under
Length tolerance for specified cut lengths, in.
Over
Under
Over
Under
1⁄
1⁄
3⁄
1⁄
2
4
4
4
Straightness—The permissible variation for straightness of structural tubing shall be 1⁄8-in. times the number of feet of total length divided by 5. Continued on next page
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STANDARD MILL PRACTICE
1 - 195
Table 1-17 (cont.). Steel Pipe and Tubing Dimensions and Weight Tolerances Square and Rectangular Tubing (see also Table 1-4) ASTM A500 and ASTM A618 Outside Dimensions—The specified dimensions, measured across the flats at positions at least two inches from either end-of-square or rectangular tubing and including an allowance for convexity or concavity, shall not exceed the plus and minus tolerance shown in the following table: a
Largest Outside Dimension Across Flats, in.
Tolerance Plus an Minus, in.
21⁄2 and under Over 21⁄2 to 31⁄2, incl. Over 31⁄2 to 51⁄2, incl. Over 51⁄2
0.020 0.025 0.030 1 percent
aThe respective outside dimension tolerances
include the allowances for convexity and concavity.
Lengths—Structural tubing is commonly produced in random lengths, in multiple lengths, and in definite cut lengths. When cut lengths are specified for structural tubing, the length tolerances shall be in accordance with the following table: 22 ft and under
Length tolerance for specified cut lengths, in.
Over 22 to 44 ft, incl.
Over
Under
Over
Under
1⁄
1⁄
3⁄
1⁄
2
4
4
4
Mass (A618 only)—The mass of structural tubing shall not be less than the specified value by more than 3.5 percent. Straightness—The permissible variation for straightness of structural tubing shall be 1⁄8-in. times the number of feet of total length divided by five. Squareness of sides—For square or rectangular structural tubing, adjacent sides may deviate from 90 degrees by a tolerance of plus or minus two degrees maximum. Radius of corners—For square or rectangular structural tubing, the radius of any outside corner of the section shall not exceed three times the specified wall thickness. Twists—The tolerances for twist or variation with respect to axial alignment of the section, for square and rectangular structural tubing, shall be as shown in the following table: Specified Dimension of Longest Side, in.
Maximum Twist per 3 ft of Length, in.
11⁄
2 and under Over 11⁄2 to 21⁄2, incl. Over 21⁄2 to 4, incl. Over 4 to 6 incl. Over 6 to 8, incl. Over 8
0.050 0.062 0.075 0.087 0.100 0.112
Twist is measured by holding down one end of a square or rectangular tube on a flat surface plate with the bottom side of the tube parallel to the surface plate and noting the height that either corner, at the opposite end of the bottom side of the tube, extends above the surface plate. Wall thickness (A500 only)—The tolerance for wall thickness exclusive of the weld area shall be plus and minus 10 percent of the nominal wall thickness specified. The wall thickness is to be measured at the center of the flat.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 196
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-18. Rectangular Sheared Plates and Universal Mill Plates Permissible Variations in Width and Length for Sheared Plates (11⁄2-in. and under in thickness) Permissible Variations in Length Only for Universal Mill Plates (21⁄2-in. and under in thickness) Specified Dimensions, in.
Variations over Specified Width and Length for Thickness, in., and Equivalent Weights, lb per sq. ft., Given To 3⁄8 excl. To 15.3, excl.
Length To 120, excl.
Width
to 5⁄8 excl.
15.3 to 25.5, excl.
5⁄ 8
to 1, excl.
1 to 2, incl.a
25.5 to 40.8, excl.
40.8 to 81.7, incl.
Width Length Width Length Width Length Width Length
To 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl 108 and over
120 to 240, excl. To 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over 240 to 360, excl. To 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over
3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4
3⁄
3⁄
1⁄
1⁄
16 5⁄ 8
1
9⁄
3⁄ 1⁄
8 2
9⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
480 to 600, excl. To 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over
7⁄
To 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over
4
3⁄
7⁄
600 to 720, excl. To 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over
8 2
360 to 480, excl. To 60, excl. 60 to 84, excl. 84 to 108, excl. 108 and over
720 and over, excl.
3⁄ 8
16 1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 16 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 1⁄ 5⁄ 5⁄ 7⁄
2 8 8 8
9⁄
16 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
1
7⁄
4 8
5⁄
11⁄
2 8
16 3⁄ 4
1 1 1 11 ⁄8
1⁄
11 ⁄8 11 ⁄4 11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8
1⁄
11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8 13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2
1⁄
11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8 13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2
5⁄
2 2 2 2
3⁄
5⁄ 3⁄ 7⁄ 5⁄ 3⁄ 7⁄ 5⁄ 3⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄ 3⁄
2 8 4 8 2 8 4 8 2 8 4 8 8 4 4
1 7⁄ 7⁄
4 8 8
11 ⁄8
5⁄ 8
11⁄
16
7⁄
8
1 7⁄ 7⁄
15 ⁄
8 8 16
11 ⁄8
1⁄ 2
5⁄ 3⁄
7⁄ 5⁄ 3⁄
13 ⁄ 7⁄
11 ⁄8 11 ⁄8 11 ⁄8 11 ⁄4
5⁄
11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8 13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2
5⁄
11 ⁄2 11 ⁄2 11 ⁄2 15 ⁄8
5⁄
17 ⁄8 17 ⁄8 17 ⁄8 2
3⁄
21 ⁄8 21 ⁄8 21 ⁄8 23 ⁄8
3⁄ 7⁄
8 4 8 8 4 16 8 8 4 8
1 3⁄ 7⁄
8 4 8
1 3⁄ 7⁄
8 4 8
1 7⁄ 7⁄
4 8 8
11 ⁄8 7⁄
8
1 1 11 ⁄4
3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4
1 11 ⁄8
1 11 ⁄8
1 1 11 ⁄8 11 ⁄4
3⁄
11 ⁄4 11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8 13 ⁄8 13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2 11 ⁄2 15 ⁄8 15 ⁄8 15 ⁄8 15 ⁄8 13 ⁄4
7⁄
4 8
1 11 ⁄8 3⁄ 7⁄
4 8
1 11 ⁄4 3⁄ 7⁄
4 8
1 11 ⁄4 3⁄ 7⁄
4 8
1 11 ⁄4 7⁄
1 1 11 ⁄ 8 11 ⁄ 4 11 ⁄ 8 11 ⁄ 4 13 ⁄ 8 13 ⁄ 8 11 ⁄ 2 11 ⁄ 2 11 ⁄ 2 13 ⁄ 4 15 ⁄ 8 15 ⁄ 8 17 ⁄ 8 17 ⁄ 8 17 ⁄ 8 17 ⁄ 8 17 ⁄ 8 17 ⁄ 8
17 ⁄8 17 ⁄8 17 ⁄8 21 ⁄4
1 11 ⁄8 11 ⁄4
21 ⁄ 4 21 ⁄ 4 21 ⁄ 4 21 ⁄ 2
21 ⁄4 21 ⁄4 21 ⁄4 21 ⁄2
1 11 ⁄8 11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8
23 ⁄ 4 23 ⁄ 4 23 ⁄ 4 3
8
Notes: aPermissible variations in length apply also to Universal Mill plates up to 12 in. width for thicknesses over 2 to 21⁄2-in., incl. except for alloy steels up to 13⁄4-in. thick. Permissible variations under specified width and length, 1⁄4-in. Table applies to all steels listed in ASTM A6.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STANDARD MILL PRACTICE
1 - 197
Table 1-19. Rectangular Sheared Plates and Universal Mill Plates Permissible Variations from Flatness (Carbon Steel Only) Variations from Flatness for Specified Widths, in.
Specified Thickness, in.
To 36 excl.
To 1⁄4, excl. 1⁄ to 3⁄ , excl. 4 8 3⁄ to 1⁄ , excl. 8 2 1⁄ to 3⁄ , excl. 2 4 3⁄ to 1, excl. 4 1 to 2, excl. 2 to 4, excl. 4 to 6, excl. 6 to 8, excl.
9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16
36 to 48, 48 to 60, 60 to 72, 72 to 84, 84 to 96, 96 to 108, 108 to excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. 120, excl. 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
15⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄
16 4
8 9⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
11⁄4 15⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8
13⁄8 11⁄8 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 11⁄ 16
11⁄2 11⁄4 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
15⁄8 13⁄8 1 1 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 7⁄ 8
13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄8 1 7⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
Permissible Variations in Camber for Carbon Steel Sheared and Gas Cut Rectangular Plates Maximum permissible camber, in. (all thicknesses) = 1⁄8-in. ×
total length,ft 5
Permissible Variations in Camber for Carbon Steel Universal Mill Plates, High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel Sheared and Gas Cut Rectangular Plates, Universal Mill Plates, Special Cut Plates Dimension, in. Thickness To 2, incl. Over 2 to 15, incl. Over 2 to 15, incl.
Width
Camber for Thicknesses and Widths Given
All To 30, incl. Over 30 to 60, incl.
1⁄ in. × (total length, ft / 5) 8 3⁄ in. × (total length, ft / 5) 16 1⁄ in. × (total length, ft / 5) 4
General Notes: 1. The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and permissible variations in flatness along the length should not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 feet in length. 2. The flatness variations across the width should not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. 3. When the longer dimension is under 36 inches, the permissible variation should not exceed 1⁄4-in. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 inches, inclusive, the permissible variation should not exceed 75 percent of the tabular amount for the specified width, but in no case less than 1⁄4-in. 4. These variations apply to plates which have a specified minimum tensile strength of not more than 60 ksi or compatible chemistry or hardness. The limits in the table are increased 50 percent for plates specified to a higher minimum tensile strength or compatible chemistry or hardness. See also next page.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 - 198
DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
Table 1-20. Rectangular Sheared Plates and Universal Milled Plates Permissible Variations from Flatness (High-Strength Low-Alloy and Alloy Steel, Hot Rolled or Thermally Treated) Variations from Flatness for Specified Widths, in.
Specified Thickness, in.
To 36 excl.
To 1⁄4, excl. 1⁄ to 3⁄ , excl. 4 8 3⁄ to 1⁄ , excl. 8 2 1⁄ to 3⁄ , excl. 2 4 3⁄ to 1, excl. 4 1 to 2, excl. 2 to 4, excl. 4 to 6, excl. 6 to 8, excl.
13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 5⁄ 8 5⁄ 8 9⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
36 to 48, 48 to 60, 60 to 72, 72 to 84, 84 to 96, 96 to 108, 108 to excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. excl. 120, excl. 11⁄8
15⁄ 7⁄ 3⁄ 3⁄ 5⁄
13⁄8 11⁄8 15⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 9⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4
16 8 4 4
8 9⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
17⁄8 13⁄8 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 3⁄ 4 15⁄ 16
21⁄4 17⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄8 1 15⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8 11⁄8
2 13⁄4 11⁄8 1 15⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8 1
23⁄8 2 11⁄2 11⁄4 11⁄8 1 3⁄ 4 15⁄ 16 11⁄4
25⁄8 21⁄4 15⁄8 13⁄8 15⁄16 1 7⁄ 8 11⁄8 15⁄16
General Notes: 1. The longer dimension specified is considered the length, and variations from a flat surface along the length should not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width in plates up to 12 feet in length. 2. The flatness variation across the width should not exceed the tabular amount for the specified width. 3. When the longer dimension is under 36 inches, the variation should not exceed 3⁄8-in. When the longer dimension is from 36 to 72 inches, inclusive the variation should not exceed 75 percent of the tabular amount for the specified width.
Permissible Variations in Width for Universal Mill Plates (15 inches and under in thickness) Variations Over Specified Width for Thickness, in., and Equivalent Weights, lb per sq. ft., Given To 3⁄8, excl.
3⁄ 8
to 5⁄8 excl.
5⁄ 8
to 1, excl.
Specified Width, in.
To 15.3, excl.
15.3 to 25.5, excl.
25.5 to 40.8, excl.
Over 8 to 20, excl. 20 to 36, excl. 36 and over
1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
1⁄
1⁄
3⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 7⁄ 16
3⁄
8 4 8
1 to 2, excl.
Over 2 to 10, incl.
Over 10 to 15, incl.
40.8 to 81.7 to 409.0 to 81.7, incl. 409.0, incl. 613.0, incl. 1⁄ 3⁄ 1⁄
4 8 2
Notes: Permissible variation under specified width, 1⁄8-in. Table applies to all steels listed in ASTM A6.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16 9⁄ 16
1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8
REFERENCES
1 - 199
REFERENCES
American Institute of Steel Construction, 1973, “Commentary on Highly Restrained Welded Connections,” Engineering Journal, 3rd Qtr., AISC, Chicago, IL. American Iron and Steel Institute, 1979, Fire Safe Structural Steel: A Design Guide, AISI, Washington, DC. AISI, 1980, Designing Fire Protection for Steel Columns, 3rd Edition. AISI, 1981, Designing Fire Protection for Steel Trusses, 2nd Edition. AISI, 1984, Designing Fire Protection for Steel Beams. Brockenbrough, R. L. and B. G. Johnston, 1981, USS Steel Design Manual, R. L. Brockenbrough & Assoc. Inc., Pittsburgh, PA. Dill, F. H., 1960, “Structural Steel After a Fire,” Proceedings of the 1960 National Engineering Conference, AISC, New York, NY. Fisher, J. W. and A. W. Pense, 1987, “Experience with Use of Heavy W Shapes in Tension,” Engineering Journal, 2nd Qtr., AISC, Chicago. Lightner, M. W. and R. W. Vanderbeck, 1956, “Factors Involved in Brittle Fracture,” Regional Technical Meetings, AISI, Washington, DC. Rolfe, S. T. and J. M. Barsom, 1986, Fracture and Fatigue Control in Structures: Applications of Fracture Mechanics, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. Rolfe, S. T., 1977, “Fracture and Fatigue Control in Steel Structures,” Engineering Journal, 1st Qtr., AISC, Chicago. Welding Research Council, 1957, Control of Steel Construction to Avoid Brittle Failure, New York.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2-1
PART 2 ESSENTIALS OF LRFD OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 INTRODUCTION TO LRFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 A. GENERAL PROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 C. FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 D. TENSION MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 E. COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 F. BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 H. MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 I. COMPOSITE MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 COMPUTER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2-2
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OVERVIEW
2-3
OVERVIEW The following LRFD topics are covered herein (with the letters A through I in the section headings referring to the corresponding chapters in the LRFD Specification): INTRODUCTION TO LRFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 LRFD Versus ASD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 LRFD Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 A. GENERAL PROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Loads and Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Gross, Net, and Effective Net Areas for Tension Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Gross, Net, and Effective Net Areas for Flexural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Local Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Limiting Slenderness Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 C. FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Second Order Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Effective Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 “Leaning” Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 D. TENSION MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Design Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Built-Up Members, Eyebars, and Pin-Connected Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 E. COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Effective Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Design Compressive Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Flexural-Torsional Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Built-Up and Pin-Connected Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 F. BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Flexure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Design for Flexure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Design for Shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Web Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 H. MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Symmetric Members Subject to Bending and Axial Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Symmetric Members Subject to Bending and Axial Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Bending and Axial Compression—Preliminary Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, and/or Axial Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2-4
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
I. COMPOSITE MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Compression Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Flexural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Combined Compression and Flexure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 COMPUTER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 ELRFD (Electronic LRFD Specification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO LRFD
2-5
INTRODUCTION TO LRFD
The intent of this part of the LRFD Manual is to provide a general introduction to the subject. It was written primarily for: (1) engineers experienced in allowable stress design (ASD) who are unfamiliar with LRFD and (2) students and novice engineers. The emphasis is on understanding the most common cases, rather than on completeness and efficiency in design. Regular users of LRFD may also find it helpful to refer to the information provided herein. It should be noted, however, that the governing document is the LRFD Specification (in Part 6 of this volume of the Manual). For optimum design the use of the design aids elsewhere in this Manual is recommended. Among the topics not covered herein are: (1) connections, the subject of Volume II, and (2) noncompact beams and plate girders, for which the reader is referred to Appendices F and G of the LRFD Specification and Part 4 of this volume of the Manual. LRFD Versus ASD
The primary objective of the LRFD Specification is to provide a uniform reliability for steel structures under various loading conditions. This uniformity cannot be obtained with the allowable stress design (ASD) format. The ASD method can be represented by the inequality ΣQi ≤ Rn / F.S.
(2-1)
The left side is the summation of the load effects, Qi (i.e., forces or moments). The right side is the nominal strength or resistance Rn divided by a factor of safety. When divided by the appropriate section property (e.g., area or section modulus), the two sides of the inequality become the calculated stress and allowable stress, respectively. The left side can be expanded as follows: ΣQi = the maximum (absolute value) of the combinations D + L′ (D + L′ + W) × 0.75* (D + L′ + E) × 0.75* D−W D−E where D, L′, W, and E are, respectively, the effects of the dead, live, wind, and earthquake loads; total live load L′ = L + (Lr or S or R) L = Live load due to occupancy Lr = Roof live load S = Snow load R = Nominal load due to initial rainwater or ice exclusive of the ponding contribution *0.75 is the reciprocal of 1.33, which represents the 1/3 increase in allowable stress permitted when wind or earthquake is taken simultaneously with live load. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2-6
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
ASD, then, is characterized by the use of unfactored service loads in conjunction with a single factor of safety applied to the resistance. Because of the greater variability and, hence, unpredictability of the live load and other loads in comparison with the dead load, a uniform reliability is not possible. LRFD, as its name implies, uses separate factors for each load and for the resistance. Considerable research and experience were needed to establish the appropriate factors. Because the different factors reflect the degree of uncertainty of different loads and combinations of loads and the accuracy of predicted strength, a more uniform reliability is possible. The LRFD method may be summarized by the formula ΣγiQi ≤ φRn
(2-2)
On the left side of the inequality, the required strength is the summation of the various load effects Qi multiplied by their respective load factors γi. The design strength, on the right side, is the nominal strength or resistance Rn multiplied by a resistance factor φ. Values of φ and Rn for columns, beams, etc. are provided throughout the LRFD Specification and will be covered here, as well. According to the LRFD Specification (Section A4.1), ΣγiQi = the maximum absolute value of the following combinations 1.4D 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5(Lr or S or R) 1.2D + 1.6(Lr or S or R) + (0.5L or 0.8W) 1.2D + 1.3W + 0.5L + 0.5(Lr or S or R) 1.2D ± 1.0E + 0.5L + 0.2S 0.9D ± (1.3W or 1.0E)
(A4-1) (A4-2) (A4-3) (A4-4) (A4-5) (A4-6)
(Exception: The load factor on L in combinations A4-3, A4-4, A4-5 shall equal 1.0 for garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly, and all areas where the live load is greater than 100 psf). The load effects D, L, Lr, S, R, W, and E are as defined above. The loads should be taken from the governing building code or from ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures (American Society of Civil Engineers, 1988). Where applicable, L should be determined from the reduced live load specified for the given member in the governing code. Earthquake loads should be from the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, which appears in Part 6 of this Manual. LRFD Fundamentals
The following is a brief discussion of the basic concepts of LRFD. A more complete treatment of the subject is available in the Commentary on the LRFD Specification (Section A4 and A5) and in the references cited therein. LRFD is a method for proportioning structures so that no applicable limit state is exceeded when the structure is subjected to all appropriate factored load combinations. Strength limit states are related to safety and load carrying capacity (e.g., the limit states of plastic moment and buckling). Serviceability limit states (e.g., deflections) relate to performance under normal service conditions. In general, a structural member will have several limit states. For a beam, for example, they are flexural strength, shear strength, vertical deflection, etc. Each limit state has associated with it a value of Rn, which defines the boundary of structural usefulness. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO LRFD
2-7
Because the AISC Specification is concerned primarily with safety, strength limit states are emphasized. The load combinations for determining the required strength were given in expressions A4-1 through A4-6. (Other load combinations, with different values of γi, are appropriate for serviceability; see Chapter L in the LRFD Specification and Commentary.) The AISC load factors (A4-1 through A4-6) are based on ASCE 7. They were originally developed by the A58 Load Factor Subcommittee of the American National Standards Institute, ANSI, (U.S. Department of Commerce, 1980) and are based strictly on load statistics. Being material-independent, they are applicable to all structural materials. Although others have written design codes similar in format to the LRFD Specification, the AISC was the first specification group to adopt the ANSI probability-based load factors. The AISC load factors recognize that when several loads act in combination, only one assumes its maximum lifetime value at a time, while the others are at their “arbitrarypoint-in-time” (APT) values. Each combination models the total design loading condition when a different load is at its maximum: Load Combination A4-1 A4-2 A4-3 A4-4 A4-5 A4-6
Load at its Lifetime (50-year) Maximum D (during construction; other loads not present) L Lr or S or R (a roof load) W (acting in direction of D) E (acting in direction of D) W or E (opposing D)
The other loads, which are APT loads, have mean values considerably lower than the lifetime maximums. To achieve a uniform reliability, every factored load (lifetime maximum or APT) is larger than its mean value by an amount depending on its variability. The AISC resistance factors are based on research recommendations published by Washington University in St. Louis (Galambos et al., 1978) and reviewed by the AISC Specification Advisory Committee. Test data were analyzed to determine the variability of each resistance. In general, the resistance factors are less than one (φ < 1). For uniform reliability, the greater the scatter in the data for a given resistance, the lower its φ factor. Several representative LRFD φ factors for steel members (referenced to the corresponding chapters in the LRFD Specification) are: φt = 0.90 for tensile yielding (Chapter D) φt = 0.75 for tensile fracture (Chapter D) φc = 0.85 for compression (Chapter E) φb = 0.90 for flexure (Chapter F) φv = 0.90 for shear yielding (Chapter F) Resistance factors for other member and connection limit states are given in the LRFD Specification. The following sections (A through I) summarize and explain the corresponding chapters of the LRFD Specification. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2-8
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
A. GENERAL PROVISIONS
In the LRFD Specification, Sections A4 and A5 define Load and Resistance Factor Design. The remainder of Chapter A contains general provisions which are essentially the same as in the earlier ASD editions of the Specification. Reference is made to the Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (adopted in 1992 by AISC), which appears with a Commentary in Part 6 of this LRFD Manual. The Code defines the practices and commonly accepted standards in the structural steel fabricating industry. In the absence of other instructions in the contract documents, these trade practices govern the fabrication and erection of structural steel. The types of construction recognized by the AISC Specification have not changed, except that both “simple framing” (formerly Type 2) and “semi-rigid framing” (formerly Type 3) have been combined into one category, Type PR (partially restrained). “Rigid framing” (formerly Type 1) is now Type FR (fully restrained). Type FR construction is permitted unconditionally. Type PR is allowed only upon evidence that the connections to be used are capable of furnishing, as a minimum, a predictable portion of full end restraint. Type PR construction may necessitate some inelastic, but self-limiting, deformation of a structural steel part. When specifying Type PR construction, the designer should take into account the effects of reduced connection stiffness on the stability of the structure, lateral deflections, and second order bending moments. Semi-rigid connections, once common, are again becoming popular. They offer economies in connection fabrication (compared with FR connections) and reduced member size (compared with simple framing). For information on connections, please refer to Volume II of this LRFD Manual. The yield stresses of the grades of structural steel approved for use range from 36 ksi for the common A36 steel to 100 ksi for A514 steel. Not all rolled shapes and plate thicknesses are available for every yield stress. Availability tables for structural shapes, plates and bars are at the beginning of Part 1 of this LRFD Manual. A36, for many years the dominant structural steel for buildings, is being replaced by the more economical 50 ksi steels. ASTM designations for structural steels with 50 ksi yield stress are: A572 for most applications, A529 for thin-plate members only, and A242 and A588 weathering steels for atmospheric corrosion resistance. A more complete explanation is provided by Table 1-1 in Part 1 of this Manual. However, A36 is still normally specified for connection material, where no appreciable savings can be realized from higher strength steels. Complete and accurate drawings and specifications are necessary for all stages of steel construction. The requirements for design documents are set forth in Section A7 of the LRFD Specification and Section 3 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice. When beam end reactions are not shown on the drawings, the structural steel detailer will refer to the appropriate tables in Part 4 of the LRFD Manual. These tables, which are for uniform loads, may significantly underestimate the effects of the concentrated loads. The recording of beam end reactions on design drawings, which is recommended in all cases, is, therefore, absolutely essential when there are concentrated loads. Beam reactions, column loads, etc., shown on design drawings should be the required strengths calculated from the factored load combinations and should be so noted. Loads and Load Combinations
LRFD Specification Sections A4 (Loads and Load Combinations) and A5 (Design Basis) describe the basic criteria of LRFD. This information was discussed above under AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
A. GENERAL PROVISIONS
2-9
Introduction to LRFD. To illustrate the application of load factors, the AISC load combinations will be repeated here with design examples. The required strength is the maximum absolute value of the combinations 1.4D 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5(Lr or S or R) 1.2D + 1.6(Lr or S or R) + (0.5L or 0.8W) 1.2D + 1.3W + 0.5L + 0.5(Lr or S or R) 1.2D ± 1.0E + 0.5L + 0.2S 0.9D ± (1.3W or 1.0E)
(A4-1) (A4-2) (A4-3) (A4-4) (A4-5) (A4-6)
(The load factor on L in combinations A4-3, A4-4 and A4-5 shall equal 1.0 for garages, areas occupied as placed of public assembly, and all areas where the live load is greater than 100 psf). In the combinations the loads or load effects (i.e., forces or moments) are: D = dead load due to the weight of the structural elements and the permanent features on the structure L = live load due to occupancy and moveable equipment (reduced as permitted by the governing code) Lr = roof live load W= wind load S = snow load E = earthquake load R = nominal load due to initial rainwater or ice exclusive of the ponding contribution The loads are to be taken from the governing building code. In the absence of a code, one may use ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures (American Society of Civil Engineers, 1988). Earthquake loads should be determined from the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, in Part 6 of this Manual. Whether the loads themselves or the load effects are combined, the results are the same, provided the principle of superposition is valid. This is usually true because deflections are small and the stress-strain behavior is linear elastic; consequently, second order effects can usually be neglected. (The analysis of second order effects is covered in Chapter C of the LRFD Specification.) The linear elastic assumption, although not correct at the strength limit states, is valid under normal in-service loads and is permissible as a design assumption under the LRFD Specification. In fact, the Specification (in Section A.5.1) allows the designer the option of elastic or plastic analysis using the factored loads. However, to simplify this presentation, it is assumed that the more prevalent elastic analysis option has been selected.
EXAMPLE A-1
Given:
Solution:
Roof beams W16×31, spaced 7′′-0 center-to-center, support a superimposed dead load of 40 psf. Code specified roof loads are 30 psf downward (due to roof live load, snow, or rain) and 20 psf upward or downward (due to wind). Determine the critical loading for LRFD. D
= 31 plf + 40 psf × 7.0 ft = 311 plf AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 10
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
L =0 (Lr or S or R) = 30 psf × 7.0 ft = 210 plf W = 20 psf × 7.0 ft = 140 plf E =0 Load Combinations A4-1 A4-2 A4-3 A4-4 A4-5 A4-6a A4-6b
Factored Loads 1.4(311 plf) 1.2(311 plf) + 0 + 0.5(210 plf) 1.2(311 plf) + 1.6 (210 plf) + 0.8(140 plf) 1.2(311 plf) + 1.3(140 plf) + 0 + 0.5(210 plf) 1.2(311 plf) + 0 + 0 + 0.2(210 plf) 0.9 (311 plf) + 1.3 (140 plf) 0.9(311 plf) − 1.3(140 plf)
= 435 plf = 478 plf = 821 plf = 660 plf = 415 plf = 462 plf = 98 plf
The critical factored load combination for design is the third, with a total factored load of 821 plf.
EXAMPLE A-2
Given:
Solution:
The axial loads on a building column resulting from the code-specified service loads have been calculated as: 100 kips from dead load, 150 kips from (reduced) floor live load, 30 kips from the roof (Lr or S or R), 60 kips due to wind, and 50 kips due to earthquake. Determine the required strength of this column. Load Combination A4-1 A4-2 A4-3a A4-3b A4-4 A4-5a A4-5b A4-6a A4-6b A4-6c A4-6d
Factored Axial Load 1.4(100 kips) 1.2(100 kips) + 1.6(150 kips) + 0.5(30 kips) 1.2(100 kips) + 1.6(30 kips) + 0.5(150 kips) 1.2(100 kips) + 1.6(30 kips) + 0.8(60 kips) 1.2(100 kips) + 1.3(60 kips) + 0.5(150 kips) + 0.5(30 kips) 1.2(100 kips) + 1.0(50 kips) + 0.5(150 kips) + 0.2(30 kips) 1.2(100 kips) − 1.0(50 kips) + 0.5(150 kips) + 0.2(30 kips) 0.9(100 kips) + 1.3(60 kips) 0.9(100 kips) − 1.3(60 kips) 0.9(100 kips) + 1.0(50 kips) 0.9(100 kips) − 1.0(50 kips)
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
= 140 kips = 375 kips = 243 kips = 216 kips = 288 kips = 251 kips = 151 kips = 168 kips = 12 kips = 140 kips = 40 kips
B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
2 - 11
The required strength of the column is 375 kips based on the second combination of factored axial loads. As none of the results above are negative, net tension need not be considered in the design of this column. B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Gross, Net, and Effective Net Areas for Tension Members
The concept of effective net area, which in earlier editions of the Specification was applied only to bolted members, has been extended to cover members connected by welding as well. As in the past, when tensile forces are transmitted directly to all elements of the member, the net area is used to determine stresses. However, when the tensile forces are transmitted through some, but not all, of the cross-sectional elements of the member, a reduced effective net area Ae is used instead. According to Section B3 of the LRFD Specification Ae = AU
(B3-1)
where A = area as defined below U = reduction coefficient _ = 1 − (x / L) ≤ 0.9, or as defined in (c) or (d) (B3-2) _ x = connection eccentricity. (See Commentary on the LRFD Specification, Section B3 and Figure C-B3.1.) L = length of connection in the direction of loading a. When the forces are transmitted only by bolts A = An = net area of member, in.2 b. When the forces are transmitted by longitudinal welds only or in combination with transverse welds A = Ag = gross area of member, in.2 c. When the forces are transmitted only by transverse welds A = area of directly connected elements, in.2 U = 1.0 d. When the forces are transmitted to a plate by longitudinal welds along both edges at the end of the plate A = area of plate, in.2 l ≥w For l ≥ 2w For 2w > l ≥ 1.5w For 1.5w > l ≥ w
U = 1.00 U = 0.87 U = 0.75 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 12
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
where l = weld length w = plate width (distance between welds), in. In computing the net area for tension and shear, the width of a bolt hole is taken as 1⁄16-in. greater than the nominal dimension of the hole, which, for standard holes, is 1⁄16-in. larger than the diameter of the bolt. Chains of holes, treated as in the past, are covered in Section B2 of the LRFD Specification. Gross, Net, and Effective Net Areas for Flexural Members
Gross areas are used for elements in compression, in beams and columns. According to Section B10 of the LRFD Specification, the properties of beams and other flexural members are based on the gross section (with no deduction for holes in the tension flange) if 0.75Fu Afn ≥ 0.9Fy Afg
(B10-1)
where Afg = gross flange area, in.2 Afn = net flange area (deducting bolt holes), in.2 Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi Fu = minimum tensile strength, ksi Otherwise, an effective tension flange area Afe is used to calculate flexural properties Afe =
5 Fu A 6 Fy fn
(B10-3)
Local Buckling
Steel sections are classified as either compact, noncompact, or slender element sections: • If the flanges are continuously connected to the web and the width-thickness ratios of all the compression elements do not exceed λp, then the section is compact. • If the width-thickness ratio of at least one of its compression elements exceeds λp, but does not exceed λr, the section is noncompact. • If the width-thickness ratio of any compression element exceeds λr, that element is called a slender compression element. Columns with compact and noncompact cross sections are covered by Chapter E of the LRFD Specification. Column cross sections with slender elements require the special design procedure in Appendix B5.3 of the Specification. Beams with compact sections are covered by Chapter F of the LRFD Specification. All other cross sections in bending must be designed in accordance with Appendices B5.3, F1 and/or G. In general, reference to the appendices of the Specification is required for the design of members controlled by local buckling. In slender element sections, local buckling, occurring prior to initial yielding, will limit the strength of the member. Noncompact sections will yield first, but local buckling will precede the development of a fully plastic stress distribution. In actual practice, such cases are not common and can be easily avoided by designing so that: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
2 - 13
Table B-1. Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements* WidthThickness Ratio
Beam Element
Limiting Width-Thickness Ratio, λp General
For Fy = 50 ksi
Flanges of I shapes and channels
b/t
65 / √ F y
9.2
Flanges of square and rectangular box beams
b/t
190 / √ Fy
26.9
Webs in flexural compression
h / tw
640 / √ Fy
90.5
Webs in combined flexural and axial compression
h / tw
253 / √ Fy **
35.8
Column Element
WidthThickness Ratio
Limiting Width-Thickness Ratio, λr General
For Fy = 50 ksi
Flanges of I shapes and channels and plates projecting from compression elements
b/t
95 / √ F y
13.4
Webs in axial compression
h / tw
253 / √ Fy
35.8
*For the complete table, see LRFD Specification, Section B5, Table B5.1. **This is a simplified, conservative version of the corresponding entry in Table B5.1 of the LRFD Specification.
• for beams, the width-thickness ratios of all compression elements ≤ λp; • for columns, the width-thickness ratios of all elements ≤ λr. Table B-1, which is an abridged version of Table B5.1 in the LRFD Specification, should be useful for this purpose. The formulas for λp for beam elements and λr for column elements are tabulated, together with the corresponding numerical values for 50 ksi steel. The definitions of “width” for use in determining the width-thickness ratios of the elements of various structural shapes are stated in Section B5 of the LRFD Specification. They are shown graphically in Figure B-1. Compact section criteria for W shapes and other I-shaped cross sections are listed in the Properties Tables in Part 1 of LRFD Manual. Limiting Slenderness Ratios
For members whose design is based on compressive force, the slenderness ratio Kl / r preferably should not exceed 200. For members whose design is based on tensile force, the slenderness ratio l / r preferably should not exceed 300. The above limitation does not apply to rods in tension. K = effective length factor, defined in Section C below l = distance between points of lateral support (lx or ly), in. r = radius of gyration (rx or ry), in. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 14
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
C. FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES Second Order Effects
As stated in Section C1 of the LRFD Specification, an analysis of second order effects is required; i.e., the additional moments due to the axial loads acting on the deformed structure must be considered. In lieu of a second order analysis for Mu, the required flexural strength, the LRFD Specification (in Section C1) presents the following simplified method: Mu = B1Mnt + B2Mlt
(C1-1)
The components of the total factored moment, determined from a first order elastic analysis (neglecting second order effects) are divided into two groups, Mnt and Mlt. Each group is in turn multiplied by a magnification factor B1 or B2 and the results are added to approximate the actual second order factored moment Mu. (The method, as explained here, is valid where the moment connections are Type FR, fully restrained. The analysis for Type PR, or partially restrained, moment connections is beyond the scope of this section.) Beam-columns are generally columns in frames, which are either braced (Mlt = 0) or unbraced (Mlt ≠ 0). Mnt is the moment in the member assuming there is no lateral translation of the frame; Mlt is the moment due to lateral translation. Mnt includes the moments resulting from the gravity loads, as determined manually or by computer, using one of the customary (elastic, first order) methods. The moments from the lateral loads are classified as Mlt; i.e., due to lateral translation. If both the frame and its vertical loads are symmetric, Mlt from the vertical loads is zero. However, if either the vertical loads or the frame is asymmetric and the frame is not braced, lateral translation occurs and Mlt ≠ 0. The procedure for obtaining Mlt in this case involves:
b=
bf
b=
2
bf
bf
b = bf
2
bf
bf
h
h
h
bf
b
t
hw
t
h
b = b f – 3t h = h w – 3t
Fig. B-1. Definitions of widths (b and h) for use in Table B-1. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
C. FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
2 - 15
a. applying fictitious horizontal reactions at each floor level to prevent lateral translation, and b. using the reverse of these reactions as the “sway forces” for determining Mlt. In general, Mlt for an unbraced frame is the sum of the moments due to the lateral loads and these “sway forces,” as illustrated in Figure C-1. The magnification factors applied to Mnt and Mlt are, respectively, B1 and B2. As shown in Figure C-2, B1 accounts for the secondary Pδ member effect in all frames (including sway-inhibited) and B2 covers the P∆ story effect in unbraced frames. The expressions for B1 and B2 follow: B1 =
Cm ≥ 1.0 (1 − Pu / Pe1 )
(C1-2)
where Pu = the factored axial compressive force on the member, kips Pe1 = Pe as listed in Table C-1 as a function of the slenderness ratio Kl / r, with effective length factor K = 1.0 and considering l / r in the plane of bending only l = unbraced length of the member, in. r = radius of gyration of its cross section, in. Cm = a coefficient to be taken as follows: V1 V2
V3
P1
P1
R1
V1 +R1
P2
P2 R 2
V2 +R2
P3
P3
Original Frame
=
R3
Nonsway Frame for M nt
V3 +R3
Sway Frame for M t
+
Fig. C-1. Frame models for Mnt and Mlt.
∆P
P
H
δ
M1=Mnt+Pδ =B1Mnt
(a) Column in Braced Frame
L
M t =HL M2=M t +P∆ =B2M t
(b) Column in Unbraced Frame
Fig. C-2. Illustrations of secondary effects. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 16
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
Table C-1. Values of Pe / Ag for Use in Equation C1-2 and C1-5 for Steel of Any Yield Stress Note: Multiply tabulated values by Ag (the gross cross-sectional area of the member) to obtain Pe
Kl / r 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Pe / Ag Pe / Ag Pe / Ag Pe / Ag Pe / Ag Pe / Ag (ksi) Kl / r (ksi) Kl / r (ksi) Kl / r (ksi) Kl / r (ksi) Kl / r (ksi) 649.02 591.36 541.06 496.91 457.95 423.40 392.62 365.07 340.33 318.02 297.83 279.51 262.83 247.59 233.65 220.85 209.07 198.21 188.18 178.89 170.27 162.26 154.80 147.84 141.34 135.26 129.57 124.23 119.21 114.49
Note: Pe / Ag =
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
110.04 105.85 101.89 98.15 94.62 91.27 88.08 85.08 82.22 79.51 76.92 74.46 72.11 69.88 67.74 65.71 63.76 61.90 60.12 58.41 56.78 55.21 53.71 52.57 50.88 49.55 48.27 47.04 45.86 44.72
81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
43.62 42.57 41.55 40.56 39.62 38.70 37.81 36.96 36.13 35.34 34.56 33.82 33.09 32.39 31.71 31.06 30.42 29.80 29.20 28.62 28.06 27.51 26.98 26.46 25.96 25.47 25.00 24.54 24.09 23.65
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140
23.23 22.82 22.42 22.02 21.64 21.27 20.91 20.56 20.21 19.88 19.55 19.23 18.92 18.61 18.32 18.03 17.75 17.47 17.20 16.94 16.68 16.43 16.18 15.94 15.70 15.47 15.25 15.03 14.81 14.60
141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170
14.40 14.19 14.00 13.80 13.61 13.43 13.25 13.07 12.89 12.72 12.55 12.39 12.23 12.07 11.91 11.76 11.61 11.47 11.32 11.18 11.04 10.91 10.77 10.64 10.51 10.39 10.26 10.14 10.02 9.90
171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200
9.79 9.67 9.56 9.45 9.35 9.24 9.14 9.03 8.93 8.83 8.74 8.64 8.55 8.45 8.36 8.27 8.18 8.10 8.01 7.93 7.85 7.76 7.68 7.60 7.53 7.45 7.38 7.30 7.23 7.16
π2E (K l /r)2
a. For compression members not subject to transverse loading between their supports in the plane of bending, Cm = 0.6 − 0.4(M1 / M2)
(C1-3)
where M1 / M2 is the ratio of the smaller to larger moment at the ends of that portion of the member unbraced in the plane of bending under consideration. M1 / M2 is positive when the member is bending in reverse curvature, negative when bending in single curvature. b. For compression members subjected to transverse loading between their supports, the value of Cm can be determined by rational analysis, or the following values may be used: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
C. FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
2 - 17
for members with ends restrained against rotation . . . . . . . . . . Cm = 0.85 for members with ends unrestrained against rotation . . . . . . . . . Cm = 1.0 Two alternative equations are given for B2 in the LRFD Specification B2 =
1 ΣPu ∆oh 1− ΣH L
B2 =
1 ΣPu 1− ΣPe2
(C1-4)
(C1-5)
where ΣPu = required axial strength of all columns in a story, i.e., the total factored gravity load above that level, kips ∆oh = translational deflection of the story under consideration, in. ΣH = sum of all story horizontal forces producing ∆oh, kips L = story height, in. ΣPe2 = the summation of Pe2 for all rigid-frame columns in a story; Pe2 is determined from Table C-1, considering the actual slenderness ratio Kl / r of each column in its plane of bending K = effective length factor (see below) Of the two expressions for B2, the first (Equation C1-4) is better suited for design office practice. The quantity (∆oh / L) is the story drift index. For many structures, particularly tall buildings, a maximum drift index is one of the design criteria. Using this value in Equation C1-4 will facilitate the evaluation of B2. In general, two values of B2 are obtained for each story of a building, one for each of the major directions. B1 is evaluated separately for every column; two values of B1 are needed for biaxial bending. Using Equations C1-1 through C1-5, the appropriate Mux and Muy are determined for each column. Effective Length
As in previous editions of the AISC Specification, the effective length of Kl is used (instead of the actual unbraced length l) to account for the influence of end-conditions in the design of compression members. A number of acceptable methods have been utilized to evaluate K, the effective length factor. They are discussed in Section C2 of the Commentary on the LRFD Specification. One method will be shown here. Table C-2, which is also Table C-C2.1 in the Commentary, is taken from the Structural Stability Research Council (SSRC) Guide to Stability Design Criteria for Metal Structures. It relates K to the rotational and translational restraints at the ends of the column. Theoretical values for K are given, as well as the recommendations of the SSRC. The basic case is d, the classical pin-ended column, for which K = 1.0. Theoretical K values for the other cases are determined by the distances between points of inflection. The more conservative SSRC recommendations reflect the fact that perfect fixity can never be attained in actual structures. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 18
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
Table C-2. Effective Length Factors (K) for Columns Buckled shape of column is shown by dashed line
(a)
(b)
(c)
Theoretical K value
0.5
0.7
1.0
Recommended design value when ideal conditions are approximated
0.65
0.80
1.2
End condition code
(d)
(e)
(f)
1.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
2.10
2.0
Rotation fixed and translation fixed Rotation free and translation fixed Rotation fixed and translation free Rotation free and translation free
Like its predecessors, the LRFD Specification (in Section C2) distinguishes between columns in braced and unbraced frames. In braced frames, sidesway is inhibited by attachment to diagonal bracing or shear walls. Cases a, b, and d in Table C-2 represent columns in braced frames; K ≤ 1.0. The LRFD Specification requires that for compression members in braced frames, K “shall be taken as unity, unless structural analysis shows that a smaller value may be used.” Common practice is to assume conservatively K = 1.0 for columns in braced frames and compression members in trusses. The other cases in Table C-2, c, e, and f, are in unbraced frames (sidesway uninhibited); K ≥ 1.0. The SSRC recommendations given in Table C-2 are appropriate for design. “Leaning” Columns
The concept of the “leaning” column, although not related exclusively to LRFD, is new to the 1993 LRFD Specification. A leaning column is one which is pin ended and does not participate in providing lateral stability to the structure. As a result it relies on the columns in other parts of the structure for stability. In analyzing and designing unbraced frames, the effects of the leaning columns must be considered (as required by Section C2.2 of the LRFD Specification). For further information the reader is referred to: (1) Part 3 of this Manual. (2) the Commentary on the LRFD Specification, Section C2, and (3) a paper on this subject (Geschwindner, 1993). AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
D. TENSION MEMBERS
2 - 19
D. TENSION MEMBERS Design Tensile Strength
The design philosophy for tension members is the same in the LRFD and ASD Specifications: a. The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. Usually, the portion of the total member length occupied by fastener holes is small. The effect of early yielding at the reduced cross sections on the total member elongation is negligible. Use of the area of the gross section is appropriate. b. The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The design strength of tension members, φtPn, as given in Section D1 of the LRFD Specification, is the lesser of the following: a. For yielding in the gross section, φt = 0.90 Pn = Fy Ag
(D1-1)
b. For fracture in the net section, φt = 0.75 Pn = Fu Ae
(D1-2)
where Ae Ag Fy Fu Pn
= effective net area, in.2 (see Section B, above) = gross area of member, in.2 = specified minimum yield stress, ksi = specified minimum tensile strength, ksi = nominal axial strength, kips
For 50 ksi steels, Fy = 50 ksi and minimum Fu = 65 ksi. Accordingly a. For yielding in the gross section, φtPn = 0.9 × 50 ksi × Ag = 45.0 ksi × Ag
(2-3)
b. For fracture in the net section, φtPn = 0.75 × 65 ksi × Ae = 48.8 ksi × Ae
(2-4)
The limit state of block shear rupture may govern the design tensile strength. For information on block shear, see Section J4.3 of the LRFD Specification and Part 8 (in Volume II) of this LRFD Manual. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 20
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
EXAMPLE D-1
Given:
Determine the design strength of a W8×24 as a tension member in 50 ksi steel. How much dead load can it support?
Solution:
If there are no holes in the member, Ae = Ag and Equation 2-3 governs φtPn = 45.0 ksi × Ag = 45.0 ksi × 7.08 in.2 = 319 kips Assuming that dead load is the only load, the governing load combination from Section A is 1.4D. Then, the required tensile strength Pu = 1.4PD ≤φtPn = 319 kips PD≤ 319 kips/1.4 = 228 kips maximum dead load that can be supported by the member.
EXAMPLE D-2
Given:
Repeat Example D-1 for a W8×24 in 50 ksi steel with four 1-in. diameter holes, two per flange, along the member (i.e., not at its ends) for miscellaneous attachments. See Figure D-1(a).
Solution:
a. For yielding in the gross section φtPn = 319 kips, as in Example D-1. b. For fracture in the net section Ae = An = Ag − 4 × (dhole + 1⁄16-in.) × tf = 7.08 in.2 − 4 × (1 + 1⁄16-in.) × 0.400 in. = 5.38 in.2 φtPn = 48.8 ksi × Ae = 48.8 ksi × 5.38 in.2 = 263 kips < 319 kips Fracture in the net section governs. Pu = 1.4 PD ≤ φtPn = 263 kips PD ≤ 263 kips / 1.4 = 188 kips
W8x24
x=y=0.695 in.
tf
WT4x12 WT4x12
(a)
(b)
Fig. D-1 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
D. TENSION MEMBERS
2 - 21
Note: If the holes had been at the end connection of the tension member, the U reduction coefficient would apply in the calculation of an effective net area.
EXAMPLE D-3
Given:
Repeat Example D-2 for holes at a bolted end-connection. There are a total of eight 1-in. diameter holes, as shown in Figure D-1(a), on two planes, 4 in. center-to-center.
Solution:
a. For yielding in the gross section φtPn = 319 kips, as in Example D-1. b. For fracture in the net section, according to Equation B3-1 in Section B above, the effective net area Ae = AU = AnU where An = 5.38 in.2 as in Example D-2 _ x U = 1 − , L = 4 in.* L
_ According to Commentary Figure C-B3.1(a), x for a W8×24 in this case is taken as that for a WT4×12. _ From the properties of a WT4×12 given in Part 1 of this Manual, x = y = 0.695 in. See Figure D-1(b). U=1−
0.695 in. = 0.826 4 in.
Thus Ae = 5.38 in.2 × 0.826 = 4.45 in.2 φtPn = 48.8 ksi × Ae = 48.8 ksi × 4.45 in.2 = 217 kips < 319 kips Fracture in the net section governs. Again, assuming that dead load is the only load, Pu = 1.4PD ≤ φtPn = 217 kips PD ≤ 217 kips / 1.4 = 155 kips maximum dead load that can be supported by the member. Built-Up Members, Eyebars, and Pin-Connected Members
See Section D2 and D3 in the LRFD Specification. *In lieu of calculating U, the Commentary on the LRFD Specification (Section B3) permits the use of more conservative values of U listed therein. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 22
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
E. COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS Effective Length
For a discussion of the effective length Kl for columns, refer to Section C above. Design Compressive Strength
Although the column strength equations have been revised for compatibility with LRFD and recent research on column behavior, the philosophy and procedures of column design in LRFD are similar with those in ASD. The direct design of columns with W and other rolled shapes is facilitated by the column strength tables in Part 3 of this LRFD Manual, which show the design compressive strength φcPn as a function of KL (the effective unbraced length in feet). Columns with cross sections not tabulated (e.g., built-up columns) can be designed iteratively, as in the past, with the aid of tables listing design stresses versus Kl / r, the slenderness ratio. Such tables are given in the Appendix of the LRFD Specification for 36 and 50 ksi structural steels, and below (Table E-1) for 50 ksi steel. There are two equations governing column strength, based on the limit state of flexural buckling, one for inelastic buckling (Equation E2-2) and the other (Equation E2-3) for elastic, or Euler, buckling. Equation E2-2 is an empirical relationship for the inelastic range, while Equation E2-3 is the familiar Euler formula multiplied by 0.877. Both equations include the effects of residual stresses and initial out-of-straightness. The boundary between inelastic and elastic instability is λc = 1.5, where the parameter λc =
Kl rπ
√
Fy E
(E2-4)
For axially loaded columns with all elements having width-thickness ratios < λr (in Section B5.1 of the LRFD Specification), the design compressive strength = φcPn where φc = 0.85 Pn = AgFcr
(E2-1)
Ag = gross area of member, in.2 a. For λc ≤ 1.5 2
Fcr = (0.658λc)Fy
(E2-2)
As is done in the Commentary on Section E2, this equation can be expressed in exponential form Fcr = [exp (−0.419λ2c )]Fy where exp(x) = ex AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(C-E2-1)
E. COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS
2 - 23
Table E-1. Design Stress for Compression Members of 50 ksi Specified Minimum Yield Stress Steel, φc = 0.85* Kl r
F cr (ksi)
Kl r
F cr (ksi)
1 2 3 4 5
42.50 42.49 42.47 42.45 42.42
41 42 43 44 45
37.59 37.36 37.13 36.89 36.65
6 7 8 9 10
42.39 42.35 42.30 42.25 42.19
46 47 48 49 50
11 12 13 14 15
42.13 42.05 41.98 41.90 41.81
16 17 18 19 20
Kl r
F cr (ksi)
Kl r
F cr (ksi)
Kl r
F cr (ksi)
81 82 83 84 85
26.31 26.00 25.68 25.37 25.06
121 122 123 124 125
14.57 14.33 14.10 13.88 13.66
161 162 163 164 165
8.23 8.13 8.03 7.93 7.84
36.41 36.16 35.91 35.66 35.40
86 87 88 89 90
24.75 24.44 24.13 23.82 23.51
126 127 128 129 130
13.44 13.23 13.02 12.82 12.62
166 167 168 169 170
7.74 7.65 7.56 7.47 7.38
51 52 53 54 55
35.14 34.88 34.61 34.34 34.07
91 92 93 94 95
23.20 22.89 22.58 22.28 21.97
131 132 133 134 135
12.43 12.25 12.06 11.88 11.71
171 172 173 174 175
7.30 7.21 7.13 7.05 6.97
41.71 41.61 41.51 41.39 41.28
56 57 58 59 60
33.79 33.51 33.23 32.95 32.67
96 97 98 99 100
21.67 21.36 21.06 20.76 20.46
136 137 138 139 140
11.54 11.37 11.20 11.04 10.89
176 177 178 179 180
6.89 6.81 6.73 6.66 6.59
21 22 23 24 25
41.15 41.02 40.89 40.75 40.60
61 62 63 64 65
32.38 32.09 31.80 31.50 31.21
101 102 103 104 105
20.16 19.86 19.57 19.28 18.98
141 142 143 144 145
10.73 10.58 10.43 10.29 10.15
181 182 183 184 185
6.51 6.44 6.37 6.30 6.23
26 27 28 29 30
40.45 40.29 40.13 39.97 39.79
66 67 68 69 70
30.91 30.61 30.31 30.01 29.70
106 107 108 109 110
18.69 18.40 18.12 17.83 17.55
146 147 148 149 150
10.01 9.87 9.74 9.61 9.48
186 187 188 189 190
6.17 6.10 6.04 5.97 5.91
31 32 33 34 35
39.62 39.43 39.25 39.06 38.86
71 72 73 74 75
29.40 20.09 28.79 28.48 28.17
111 112 113 114 115
17.27 16.99 16.71 16.42 16.13
151 152 153 154 155
9.36 9.23 9.11 9.00 8.88
191 192 193 194 195
5.85 5.79 5.73 5.67 5.61
36 37 38 39 40
38.66 38.45 38.24 38.03 37.81
76 77 78 79 80
27.86 27.55 27.24 26.93 26.62
116 117 118 119 120
15.86 15.59 15.32 15.07 14.82
156 157 158 159 160
8.77 8.66 8.55 8.44 8.33
196 197 198 199 200
5.55 5.50 5.44 5.39 5.33
* When element width-to-thickness ratio exceeds λr, see Appendix B5.3 of LRFD Specification
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 24
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
b. For λc > 1.5 0.877 Fcr = 2 Fy λc
(E2-3)
where Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi E = modulus of elasticity, ksi K = effective length factor l = unbraced length of member, in. r = governing radius of gyration about plane of buckling, in. For 50 ksi steel λc =
Kl 1 r π
√
Kl Kl 50 ksi = 0.0132 or = 75.7λc r r 29,000 ksi
(2-5)
The boundary between inelastic and elastic buckling (λc = 1.5) for 50 ksi steel is Kl = 75.7 × 1.5 = 113.5 r The column strength equations in terms of Kl / r for 50 ksi steel become φcPn = (φcFcr )Ag
(2-6)
Fcr = {exp[−7.3 × 10−5(Kl / r)2]} × 50 ksi
(2-7)
where φc = 0.85 a. For Kl / r ≤ 113.5
b. For Kl / r ≤ 113.5 Fcr =
2.51 × 105 ksi (Kl / r)2
(2-8)
Based on Equations 2-7 and 2-8, Table E-1 gives the design stresses for 50 ksi steel columns for the full range of slenderness ratios. Determining the design strength of a given 50 ksi steel column merely involves using Equation 2-6 in connection with Table E-1. The appropriate design stress (φcFcr) from Table E-1 is multiplied by the cross-sectional area to obtain the design strength φcPn.
EXAMPLE E-1
Given:
Design a 25-ft high, free standing A618 (Fy = 50 ksi) steel pipe column to support a water tank with a weight of 75 kips at full capacity. See Figure E-1.
Solution:
For a live load of 75 kips, the required column strength (from Section A) is Pu = 1.6PL = 1.6 × 75 kips = 120 kips. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
E. COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS
2 - 25
From Table C-2, case e, recommended K = 2.1. KL = 2.1 × 25.0 ft = 52.5 ft. Try a standard 12-in. diameter pipe (A = 14.6 in.2, I = 279 in.4): r =√ I/A =√ 279 in. / 14.6 in.2 = 4.37 in. Kl 52.5 ft × 12 in./ft = = 144.2 4.37 in r From Table E-1, φcFcr = 10.3 ksi The design compressive strength φcPn = (φcFcr )Ag = 10.3 ksi × 14.6 in.2 = 150 kips > 120 kips required o.k. To complete the design, bending due to lateral loads (i.e., wind and earthquake) should also be considered. See Sections F and H. EXAMPLE E-2
Determine the adequacy of a W14×120 building column.
Given:
50 ksi steel; K = 1.0; story height = 12.0 ft; required strength based on the maximum total factored load is 1,300 kips. KxLx = Ky Ly = 1.0 × 12.0 ft = 12.0 ft Because ry < rx, Kl Ky Ly 12.0 ft × 12 in./ft = = 38.5 maximum = ry 3.74 in. r From Table E-1, φcFcr = 38.14 ksi Design compressive strength φcPn = (φcFcr)Ag = 38.14 ksi × 35.3 in.2 = 1,346 kips > 1,300 kips required o.k.
L = 25.0 ft.
Solution:
Fig. E-1 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 26
Select the most economical W14 column for the case shown in Figures E-2 and E-3.
Lower Level
Intermediate Level
Upper Level
Fig. E-2. Plan views.
12 -0
Upper Level
Intermediate Level
12 -0
EXAMPLE E-3
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
Lower Level
Fig. E-3. Elevation. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
F. BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
2 - 27
Given:
50 ksi steel; K = 1.0; required strength based on the maximum total factored load is 1,300 kips. The column is braced in both directions at the upper and lower levels, and in the weak direction at the intermediate level.
Solution:
Try a W14×120 (as in Example E-2): Kx lx rx
=
1.0 × 24.0 ft × 12 in./ft = 46.2 6.24 in.
Ky ly ry
=
1.0 × 12.0 ft × 12 in./ft = 38.5 3.74 in.
Kx lx Kl max = = 46.2 rx r From Table E-1, φcFcr = 36.35 ksi Required Ag =
1,300 kips = 35.8 in.2 > 35.3 in.2 provided 36.35 ksi
W14×120 n.g. By inspection W14×132 is o.k. Use W14×132 Flexural-Torsional Buckling
As stated in Section E3 of the LRFD Specification and Commentary, torsional and flexural-torsional buckling generally do not govern the design of doubly symmetric rolled shapes in compression. For other cross sections, see Section E3 and Appendix E3 of the LRFD Specification. Built-Up and Pin-Connected Members
These members are covered, respectively, in Section E4 and E5 of the LRFD Specification. F. BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
Chapter F of the LRFD Specification covers compact beams. Compactness criteria are given in Table B5.1 of the LRFD Specification and are summarized in Table B-1 above. To prevent torsion, wide-flange shapes must be loaded in either plane of symmetry, channels must be loaded through the shear center parallel to the web, or restraint against twisting must be provided at load points and points of support. Torsion combined with flexure and axial force combined with flexure are covered in Chapter H of the LRFD Specification. This section explains the provisions of the LRFD Specification for compact rolled beams. For other compact and noncompact flexural members, refer to Appendix F of the Specification; plate girders are in Appendix G. Flexure
To understand the provisions of the LRFD Specification regarding flexural design, it is helpful to review briefly some aspects of elementary beam theory. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 28
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
Under working loads (and until initial yielding) the distributions of flexural strains and stresses over the cross-section of a beam are linear. As shown in Figure F-1, they vary from maximum compression at the extreme fibers on one side (the top) to zero at the neutral, or centroidal, axis to maximum tension at the extreme fibers on the other side (the bottom). The relationship between moment and maximum bending stress (tension or compression) at a given cross section is M = Sfb
(2-9)
where M= bending moment due to the applied loads, kip-in. S = elastic section modulus, in the direction of bending, in.3 I = c fb = maximum bending stress, ksi I = moment of inertia of the cross section about its centroidal axis, in.4 c = distance from the elastic neutral axis to the extreme fiber, in. Similarly, at initial yielding Mr = SFy
(2-10)
where Mr = bending moment coinciding with first yielding, kip-in. If additional load is applied, the strains continue to increase; the stresses, however, are, limited to Fy. Yielding proceeds from the outer fibers inward until a plastic hinge is developed, as shown in Figure F-1. At full plastification of the cross section Mp = ZFy
(2-11)
where Mp = plastic moment, kip-in Z = plastic section modulus, in the direction of bending, in.3 Due to the presence of residual stresses (prior to loading, as a consequence of the rolling operation), yielding begins at an applied stress of (Fy − Fr). Equation 2-10 should be modified to
STRAINS
BEAM
Cross Section
Compression
STRESSES Fy
Fy
Working Load
Fy Initial Yielding
Tension
Fig. F-1. Flexural strains and stresses. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Fy Plastic Hinge
F. BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
Mr = S(Fy − Fr )
2 - 29
(2-12)
where Fr = the maximum compressive residual stress in either flange, ksi = 10 ksi for rolled shapes, 16.5 ksi for welded shapes The definition of plastic moment in Equation 2-11 is still valid, because it is not affected by residual stresses. Design for Flexure
a. Assuming Cb = 1.0 Compact sections will not experience local buckling before the formation of a plastic hinge. The occurrence of lateral-torsional buckling of the member depends on the unbraced length Lb. As implied by the term lateral-torsional buckling, overall instability of a beam requires that twisting of the member occur simultaneously with lateral buckling of the compression flange. Lb is the distance between points braced to prevent twist of the cross section. Many beams can be considered continuously braced; e.g., beams supporting a metal deck, if the deck is intermittently welded to the compression flange. Compact wide flange and channel members bending about their major (or x) axes can develop their full plastic moment Mp without buckling if Lb ≤ Lp. If Lb = Lr, the nominal flexural strength is Mr, the moment at first yielding adjusted for residual stresses. The nominal moment capacity (Mn) for Lp < Lb < Lr is Mr < Mn < Mp. Compact shapes bent about their minor (or y) axes will not buckle before developing Mp, regardless of Lb. Flexural design strength, governed by the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling, is φbMn, where φb = 0.90 and Mn the nominal flexural strength is as follows: Mn = Mp = ZxFy for bending about the major axis if Lb ≤ Lp Mn = Mp = ZyFy for bending about the minor axis regardless of Lb Lp =
300ry = 42.4ry for 50 ksi steel Fy √
Mn = Mr = Sx(Fy − Fr ) = Sx(Fy − 10 ksi) for rolled shapes bending about the major axis if Lb = Lr
(2-13) (2-14) (2-15) (2-16)
Mn for bending about the major axis, if Lp < Lb < Lr, is determined by linear interpolation between Equations 2-13 and 2-16; i.e., Lb − Lp Mn = Mp − (Mp − Mr) Lr − Lp
(2-17)
The definition for the limiting laterally unbraced length Lr is given in the LRFD Specification (in Equations F1-6, 8, and 9) and will not be repeated here. For bending about the major axis if Lb > Lr, Mn = Mcr ≤ Mr
(2-18)
The case of Lb > Lr is beyond the scope of this section. The reader is referred to Section F1.2b of LRFD Specification (specifically Equation F1-13, where the critical moment AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 30
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
Table F-1. Values of Cb for Simply Supported Beams Braced at Ends of Span Load
Lateral Bracing Along Span
Cb
Concentrated at center
None
1.32
At centerline only
1.67
None
1.14
At centerline only
1.30
Uniform
Mcr is controlled by lateral-torsional buckling). This case is also covered in the beam graphs in Part 4 of this LRFD Manual. b. All values of Cb Cb is the bending coefficient. A new expression for Cb is given in the LRFD Specification. (It is more accurate than the one previously shown.) Cb =
12.5Mmax 2.5Mmax + 3MA + 4MB + 3Mc
(F1-3)
where M is the absolute value of a moment in the unbraced beam segment as follows: Mmax, the maximum MA, at the quarter point MB, at the centerline Mc, at the three-quarter point The purpose of Cb is to account for the influence of moment gradient on lateral-torsional buckling. The flexural strength equations with Cb = 1.0 are based on a uniform moment along a laterally unsupported beam segment causing single curvature buckling of the member. Other loadings are less severe, resulting in higher flexural strengths; Cb ≥ 1.0. Typical values of Cb are given in Table F-1. For unbraced cantilevers, Cb = 1.0. Cb can conservatively be taken as 1.0 for all cases. For all values of Cb, the flexural design strength φbMn, where φb = 0.90, is given in the LRFD Specification in terms of a nominal flexural strength Mn varying as follows: Mn = Mp = ZxFy
(2-13)
for bending about the major axis if Lb ≤ Lm Mn = CbMr = CbSx(Fy − 10 ksi) ≤ Mp
(2-19)
for bending about the major axis if Lb = Lr. For bending about the major axis if Lm < Lb < Lr, linear interpolation is used Lb − Lp Mn = Cb Mp − (Mp − Mr) ≤ Mp Lr − Lp
(F1-2)
Mn = Mcr ≤ CbMr and Mp
(2-20)
If Lb > Lr,
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
F. BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
2 - 31
The determination of Mn for a given Lb can best be done graphically, as illustrated in Figure F-2. The required parameters for each W shape are given in the beam design table in Part 4 of the LRFD Manual, an excerpt of which is shown herein as Table F-2. If Cb = 1.0, the coordinates for constructing the graph are (Lp, Mp), and (Lr, Mr). For Cb > 1.0, the key coordinates are (Lp, Cb Mp) and (Lr, Cb Mr). Note that Mn cannot exceed the plastic moment Mp. Lm, then, can be derived graphically as the upper limit of Lb for which Mn = Mp. If Lb > Lr, the beam graphs in Part 4 of the LRFD Manual can be used to determine Mcr.
EXAMPLE F-1
Select the required W shape for a 30-foot simple floor beam with full lateral support carrying a dead load (including its own weight) of 1.5 kips per linear foot and a live load of 3.0 kips per linear foot. Assume 50 ksi steel and:
Given:
a. There is no member depth limitation b. The deepest member is a W18 The governing load combination in Section A is A4-2:
Solution:
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5(Lr or S or R) = 1.2 × 1.5 klf + 1.6 × 3.0 klf + 0 = 6.6 klf Required Mu =
wL2 6.6 klf × (30.0 ft)2 = = 743 kip-ft 8 8
Flexural design strength φbMn ≥ 743 kip-ft
CbMp Mn for Cb=1.0
Mn for Cb>1.0
Mp
Mn
Mcr for Cb=1.0
CbMr
Mcr for Cb >1.0
Mr
Lm
Lp
Lr
Lb
Fig. F-2. Determination of nominal flexural strength M n. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 32
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
Table F-2. Excerpt from Load Factor Design Selection Table (LRFD Manual, Part 4) For Fy = 50 ksi
Zx (in.3)
Shape
φbMp (kip-ft)
φbMr (kip-ft)
Lp (ft)
Lr (ft)
224 221 212 211
W24× ×84 W21×93 W14×120 W18×97
840 829 795 791
588 576 570 564
6.9 6.5 13.2 9.4
18.6 19.4 46.2 27.4
200 198 196 192 186 186
W24× ×76 W16×100 W21×83 W14×109 W18×86 W12×120
750 743 735 720 698 698
528 525 513 519 498 489
6.8 8.9 6.5 13.2 9.3 11.1
18.0 29.3 18.5 43.2 26.1 50.0
177 175
W24× ×68 W16×89
664 656
462 465
6.6 8.8
17.4 27.3
Note: Flexural design strength φbMn = φbMp, as tabulated is valid for Lb ≤ Lm. If Cb = 1.0, Lm = Lp; otherwise, Lm > Lp. φb = 0.90.
a. In Table F-2, the most economical beams are in boldface print. Of the boldfaced beams, the lightest one with φbMn = φbMp ≥ 743 kip-ft is a W24×76 b. By inspection of Table F-2, the lightest W18 with φbMn = φbMp ≥ 743 kip-ft is a W18×97.
EXAMPLE F-2
Given:
Determine the flexural design strength of a 30-ft long simply supported W24×76 girder (of 50 ksi steel) with a concentrated load and lateral support, both at midspan.
Solution:
From Table F-1, Cb = 1.67 Lb = 30.0 ft/2 = 15.0 ft From Equation F1-2: Lb − Lp φbMn = Cb φbMp − (φbMp − φbMr) ≤ φbMp Lr − Lp From Table F-2 for a W24×76: φbMp = 750 kip-ft φbMr = 528 kip-ft Lp = 6.8 ft AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
F. BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
Lr
2 - 33
= 18.0 ft
15.0 ft − 6.8 ft φbMn = 1.67 750 kip−ft − (750 − 528) kip−ft × 18.0 ft − 6.8 ft = 981 kip-ft > 750 kip-ft Use φb Mn = φb Mp = 750 kip-ft In this case, even though the unbraced length Lb > Lp, the design flexural strength is φbMp because Cb > 1.0. Design for Shear
The design shear strength is defined by the equations in Section F2 of the LRFD Specification. Shear in wide-flange and channel sections is resisted by the area of the web (Aw), which is taken as the overall depth d times the web thickness tw. For webs of 50 ksi steel without transverse stiffeners, the design shear strength φvVn, where φv = 0.90, and the nominal shear strength Vn are as follows: For
h ≤ 59 (including all rolled W and channel shapes), tw
Vn = 30.0 ksi × dtw φvVn= 27.0 ksi × dtw For 59
74, tw =
132,000 dtw ksi (h / tw)2
φvVn =
118,000 dtw ksi (h / tw)2
Vn
h
(2-23)
tw
d
tw
h
Fig. F-3. Definitions of d, h, and tw for W and channel shapes. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF
STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 34
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
Shear strength is governed by the following limit states; Equation 2-21 by yielding of the web; Equation 2-22, by inelastic buckling of the web; and Equation 2-23 by elastic buckling.
EXAMPLE F-3
Given:
Solution:
Check the adequacy of a W30×99 beam of 50 ksi steel to carry a load resulting in maximum shears of 100 kips due to dead load and 150 kips due to live load. Required shear strength = Vu = 1.2D + 1.6L = 1.2 × 100 kips + 1.6 × 150 kips = 360 kips Design shear strength = φvVn = 27.0 ksi × dtw = 27.0 ksi × 29.65 in. × 0.520 in. = 416 kips > 360 kips required o.k.
Web Openings
See Section F4 of the LRFD Specification and Commentary, and the references given in the Commentary. H. MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION Symmetric Members Subject to Bending and Axial Tension
The interaction of flexure and tension in singly and doubly symmetric shapes is governed by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b, as follows: For
For
Pu ≥ 0.2, φPn
Pu < 0.2, φPn
Muy Pu 8 Mux + + ≤ 1.0 9 φPn φb Mnx φb Mny
(H1-1a)
Mux Muy Pu + + ≤ 1.0 2φPn φb Mnx φb Mny
(H1-1b)
where = required tensile strength; i.e., the total factored tensile force, kips = design tensile strength, φtPn, kips = resistance factor for tension, φt = 0.90 = nominal tensile strength as defined in Chapter D of the LRFD Specification, kips Mu = required flexural strength; i.e., the moment due to the total factored load, kipin. or kip-ft. (Subscript x or y denotes the axis about which bending occurs.) φb Mn = design flexural strength, kip-in. or kip-ft = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90 φb
Pu φPn φ Pn
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF
STEEL CONSTRUCTION
H. MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
Mn
2 - 35
= nominal flexural strength determined in accordance with the appropriate equations in Chapter F of the LRFD Specification, kip-in. or kip-ft
Interaction Equations H1-1a and H1-1b cover the general case of biaxial bending combined with axial force. They are also valid for uniaxial bending (i.e., when Mux = 0 or Muy = 0). In this case, they reduce to the form plotted in Figure H-1. Pure biaxial bending (with Pu = 0) is covered by Equation H1-1b. EXAMPLE H-1
Given:
Check the adequacy of a W10×22 tension member of 50 ksi steel to carry loads resulting in the following factored load combination: Pu = 55 kips Muy = 20 kip-ft Mux = 0
Solution:
From Section D above for 50 ksi steel, φPn = φtPn = 45.0 ksi × Ag = 45.0 ksi × 6.49 in.2 = 292 kips Pu 55 kips = = 0.188 < 0.20; therefore, Equation H1-1b governs. φPn 292 kips For bending about the y axis only, Equation H1-1b becomes: Pu Muy + ≤ 1.0 2φPn φb Mny φ Pn
Pu
Pu
φ Pn
+
8 Mu = 9 φb M n
0.2 φPn
( )
1 Pu 2 φPn
Mu
+
Mu =1 φb M n 0.9 φb M n
φb M n
Fig. H-1. Interaction Equations H1-1a and H1-1b modified for axial load combined with bending about one axis only. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF
STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 36
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
From Section F above for 50 ksi steel, Mn = Mp = ZyFy = 50 ksi × Zy for minor-axis bending (regardless of the unbraced length). φbMny = 0.90 × 50 ksi × Zy = 45.0 ksi × Zy = 45.0 ksi ×
6.10 in.3 12 in./ft
= 22.9 kip-ft for a W10×22 member 20 kip−ft Pu Muy 0.188 + = + = 0.094 + 0.873 2 22.9 kip−ft 2φPn φb Mny = 0.967 < 1.0 o.k.
EXAMPLE H-2
Given:
Check the same tension member, a W10×22 in 50 ksi steel, 4.0 ft long, subjected to the following combination of factored loads: Pu = 140 kips Mux = 55 kip-ft Muy = 0 Cb = 1.0
Solution:
Again, φPn = 292 kips Pu
φPn
=
140 kips = 0.479 > 0.20; Equation H1-1a governs. 292 kips
For bending about the x axis only, Equation H1-1a becomes Pu 8 Mux + ≤ 1.0 φPn 9 φb Mnx From Section F above for 50 ksi steel, Mn = Mp = ZxFy = 50 ksi × Zx for major-axis bending if Lb ≤ Lp for (Cb = 1.0). Assume unbraced length, Lb = 4.0 ft. By Equation 2-15 in Section F, Lp = 42.4ry for 50 ksi steel. For a W10×22, ry = 1.33 in., Zx = 26.0 in.3 Lp =
42.4 × 1.33 in. = 4.7 ft 12 in./ft
Lb = 4.0 ft < Lp = 4.7 ft Then Mnx = 50 ksi × Zx φb Mnx
0.90 × 50 ksi × 26.0 in.3 12 in./ft = 97.5 kip-ft for a W10×22 member =
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF
STEEL CONSTRUCTION
H. MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
2 - 37
55 kip−ft Pu 8Mux 8 + = 0.479 + × 9 97.5 kip−ft φPn 9φb Mnx = 0.479 + 0.501 = 0.980 < 1.0 o.k. Symmetric Members Subject to Bending and Axial Compression
The interaction of compression and flexure in beam-columns with singly and doubly symmetric cross sections is governed by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b, repeated here for convenience: For
For
Pu ≥ 0.2, φPn
Pu < 0.2, φPn
Muy Pu 8 Mux + + ≤ 1.0 φPn 9 φb Mnx φb Mny
(H1-1a)
Mux Muy Pu + + ≤ 1.0 2φPn φb Mnx φb Mny
(H1-1b)
The definitions of the ter ms in the for mulas, which differ in some cases from those given above, are as follows: = required compressive strength; i.e., the total factored compressive force, kips = design compressive strength, φc Pn, kips = resistance factor for compression, φc = 0.85 = nominal compressive strength as defined in Chapter E of the LRFD Specification, kips Mu = required flexural strength including second-order effects, kip-in. or kip-ft φb Mn = design flexural strength, kip-in. or kip-ft = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90 φb Mn = nominal flexural strength from Chapter F of the LRFD Specification, kip-in. or kip-ft
Pu φPn φ Pn
The second-order analysis required for Mu involves the determination of the additional moment due to the action of the axial compressive forces on a deformed structure. In lieu of a second-order analysis, the simplified method given in Chapter C of the LRFD Specification (and in Section C above) may be used. However, in applying the simplified method, the additional moments obtained for beam-columns must also be distributed to connected members and connections (to satisfy equilibrium). Bending and Axial Compression—Preliminary Design
The design of a beam-column is a trial and error process which can become tedious, particularly with the repeated solution of Interaction Equation H1-1a or H1-1b. A rapid method for the selection of a trial section is given in this LRFD Manual, Part 3, under the heading Combined Axial and Bending Loading (Interaction). As in earlier editions of the AISC Manual, the Interaction Equations are approximated by an equation which converts bending moments to equivalent axial loads: Pu eq = Pu + Muxm + Muymu AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF
STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 38
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
where = equivalent axial load to be checked against the column load table, kips Pu eq Pu, Mux, Muy are defined in the Interaction Equations for compression and bending m, u are factors tabulated in this LRFD Manual, Part 3 As soon as a satisfactory trial section has been found (i.e., one for which Pu eq ≤ tabulated φc Pn), a final verification should be made with the appropriate Interaction Equation, H1-1a or H1-1b
EXAMPLE H-3
Given:
Check the adequacy of a W14×176 beam-column, 14.0 ft in height floor-to-floor, in a braced symmetrical frame in 50 ksi steel. The member is subjected to the following factored forces due to symmetrical gravity loads: Pu = 1,400 kips; Mx = 200 kip-ft, My = 70 kip-ft (reverse curvature bending with equal end moments about both axes); and no loads along the member.
Solution:
For a braced frame, K = 1.0 KxLx = KyLy = 14.0 ft For a W14×176: A Zx Zy rx ry Kl / rx Kl / ry
= 51.8 in.2 = 320 in.3 = 163 in.3 = 6.43 in. = 4.02 in. = (14.0 ft × 12 in./ft) / 6.43 in. = 26.1 = (14.0 ft × 12 in./ft) / 4.02 in. = 41.8
From Table E-1, above, φcFcr = 37.4 ksi for Kl / r = 41.8 in 50 ksi steel. φcPn = (φc Fcr) A = 37.4 ksi × 51.8 in.2 = 1,940 kips Pu 1,400 kips = = 0.72 > 0.2, Interaction Equation H1-1a φc Pn 1,940 kips governs.
Since
For a braced frame, Mlt = 0. From Equation C1-1: Mux = B1x Mntx , where Mntx = 200 kip-ft; and Muy = B1y Mnty , where Mnty = 70 kip-ft From Equations C1-2 and C1-3: B1 =
Cm > 1.0 (1 − Pu / Pe1 )
where in this case (a braced frame with no transverse loading), Cm = 0.6 − 0.4(M1 / M2) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF
STEEL CONSTRUCTION
H. MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
2 - 39
For reverse curvature bending and equal end moments: M1 / M2 = +1.0 = 0.6 − 0.4(1.0) = 0.2
Cm
From Table C-1: Pe1x = 420 ksi × Ag = 420 ksi × 51.8 in.2 = 21,756 kips From Table C-1: Pe1y = 164 ksi × Ag = 164 ksi × 51.8 in.2 = 8,495 kips B1x =
Cmx 0.2 = = 0.2 (1 − Pu / Pe1x ) (1 − 1,400 kips / 21,756 kips)
Use B1x = 1.0, per Equation C1-2. B1y =
Cmy 0.2 = = 0.2 (1 − Pu / Pe1y ) 1 − 1,400 kips / 8,495 kips)
Use B1y = 1.0, per Equation C1-2. Mux = 1.0 × 200 kip-ft Muy = 1.0 × 70 kip-ft From Equation 2-15 for 50 ksi steel, Lp = 42.4ry =
42.4 × 4.02 in. = 14.2 ft 12 in./ft
Since Lb = 14.0 ft < Lp = 14.2 ft, Mnx = Mpx = ZxFy Mny
= Mpy = Zy Fy
φbFy
= 0.90 × 50 ksi = 45.0 ksi
φb Mnx = φbFy Zx =
45.0 ksi × 320 in.3 = 1,200 kip-ft 12 in./ft
φb Mny = φbFy Zy =
45.0 ksi × 163 in.3 = 611 kip-ft 12 in./ft
By Interaction Equation H1-1a 70 kip−ft 8 1,400 kips 8 200 kip−ft + + = 0.72 + (0.17+0.11) 1,940 kips 9 1,200 kip−ft 611 kip−ft 9 = 0.72 + 0.25 = 0.97 < 1.0 W14×176 is o.k. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF
STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 40
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
EXAMPLE H-4
Given:
Check the adequacy of a W14×176 beam-column (Fy = 50 ksi) in an unbraced symmetrical frame subjected to the following factored forces: Pu Mux My KxLx
= 1,400 kips (due to gravity plus wind) = 300 kip-ft (due to wind only) =0 = Ky Ly = 14.0 ft
Drift index, ∆oh / L ≤ 0.0025 (or 1⁄400) ΣPu = 24,000 kips ΣH = 800 kips Solution:
As in Example H-3, for a W14×176 with KL = 14.0 ft, φcPn = 1,940 kips. Pu 1,400 kips = = 0.72 > 0.2, Interaction Equation H1-1a φcPn 1,940 kips governs.
Since
Because Mntx = Mnty = Mlty = 0 and only Mltx ≠ 0, Mux = B2Mltx and Muy = 0. Mltx = 300 kip-ft According to Equation C1-4, B2 =
1 1 = = 1.08 ΣPu ∆oh 1 − 24,000 kips (0.0025) 1− 800 kips ΣH L
Mux = 1.08 × 300 kip-ft = 324 kip-ft Because Lb < Lp = 14.2 ft, Mnx = Mpx = ZxFy; φb Mnx = 1,200 kip-ft as in Example H-3. By Interaction Equation H1-1a: 8 1,400 kips 8 324 kip−ft + = 0.72 + 0.27 = 0.96 < 1.0 9 1,940 kips 9 1,200 kip−ft W14×176 is o.k. Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, and/or Axial Force
Criteria for members subjected to torsion and torsion combined with other forces are given in Section H2 of the LRFD Specification. They require the calculation of normal and shear stresses by elastic analysis of the member under the factored loads. The AISC book Torsional Analysis of Steel Members (American Institute of Steel Construction, 1983) provides design aids and examples for the determination of torsional stresses. Extensive coverage is given there to wide-flange shapes (W, S, and HP), channels (C and MC) and Z shapes. For these members, the charts and formulas simplify considerably AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF
STEEL CONSTRUCTION
H. MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
2 - 41
the calculation of torsional rotations, torsional normal and shear stresses, and the combination of torsional with flexural stresses. In the LRFD Specification, fun = the total normal stress under factored load (ksi) from torsion and all other causes fuv = the total shear stress under factored load (ksi) from torsion and all other causes The criteria are as follows: a. For the limit state of yielding under normal stress fun ≤ φFy, where φ = 0.90
(H2-1)
fun ≤ 0.90 × 50 ksi = 45.0 ksi
(2-24)
For 50 ksi steel,
b. For the limit state of yielding under shear stress, fuv ≤ 0.60φFy, where φ = 0.90
(H2-2)
fuv ≤ 0.60 × 0.90 × 50 ksi = 27.0 ksi
(2-25)
For 50 ksi steel,
c. For the limit state of buckling, fun ≤ φcFcr or fuv ≤ φcFcr, as applicable, where φc = 0.85
(H2-3)
For 50 ksi steel, values of φcFcr are given in Table E-1, in Section E above. Torsion will accompany flexure when the line of action of a lateral load does not pass through the shear center. For wide flange and other doubly symmetric shapes, the shear center is located at the centroid. Singly symmetric shapes have their shear centers on the axis of symmetry, but not at the centroid. (The location of the shear center of channel sections is given in the Properties tables in Part 1 of this LRFD Manual.) Open sections, such as wide-flange and channel, are very inefficient in resisting torsion; i.e., torsional rotations can be large and torsional stresses relatively high. It is best to avoid torsion by detailing the loads and reactions to act through the shear center of the member. In the case of spandrel members supporting building facade elements, this may not be possible. Heavy exterior masonry walls and stone panels can impose severe torsional loads on spandrel beams. The following are suggestions for eliminating or reducing this kind of torsion: 1. Wall elements may span between floors. The moment due to the eccentricity of the wall with respect to the edge beams can be resisted by lateral forces acting through the floor diaphragms. Torsion would not be imposed on the spandrel beams. 2. If facade panels extend only a partial story height below the floor line, the use of diagonal steel “kickers” may be possible. These light members would provide lateral support to the wall panels. Torsion from the panels would be resisted by forces originating from structural elements other than the spandrel beams. 3. Even if torsion must be resisted by the edge members, providing intermediate torsional supports can be helpful. Reducing the span over which the torsion acts will reduce torsional stresses. If there are secondary beams framing into a spandrel girder, AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 - 42
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
the beams can act as intermediate torsional supports for the girder. By adding top and bottom moment plates to the connections of the beams with the girder, the bending resistances of the beams can be mobilized to provide the required torsional reactions along the girder. 4. Closed sections provide considerably better resistance to torsion than open sections; torsional rotations and stresses are much lower for box beams than for wide-flange members. For members subjected to torsion, it may be advisable to use box sections or to simulate a box shape by welding one or two side plates to a W shape. I. COMPOSITE MEMBERS
Chapter I of the LRFD Specification covers composite members. Included are concreteencased and concrete-filled steel columns and beam columns, as well as steel beams interactive with the concrete slabs they support and steel beams encased in concrete. Unlike traditional structural steel design, which considers only the strength of the steel, composite design assumes that the steel and concrete work together in resisting loads. This results in more economical designs, as the quantity of steel can be reduced. Compression Members
Composite columns (concrete-encased and concrete-filled) must satisfy the limitations in Section I2 of the LRFD Specification. The design strength of axially loaded composite columns is φcPn, where φc = 0.85 and the nominal axial compressive strength is determined from Equations E2-1 through E2-4 above with the following modifications: As replaces Ag, rm replaces r, Fmy replaces Fy, and Em replaces E. Fmy = Fy + c1Fyr
Ar Ac + c2 fc′ As As
(I2-1)
Ac As
(I2-2)
Em = E + c3Ec
rm = radius of gyraton of the steel shape, pipe, or tubing, in. (For steel shapes it shall not be less than 0.3 times the overall thickness of the composite cross section in the plane of buckling.) where Ec = w1.5√ fc′ and Fmy Fy Fyr fc′ Em E Ec w Ac Ar
= modified yield stress for the design of composite columns, ksi = specified minimum yield stress of the structural steel shape, ksi = specified minimum yield stress of the longitudinal reinforcing bars, ksi = specified compressive strength of the concrete, ksi = modified modulus of elasticity for the design of composite columns, ksi = modulus of elasticity of steel = 29,000 ksi = modulus of elasticity of concrete, ksi = unit weight of concrete, lb/ft3 = cross-sectional area of concrete, in.2 = cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcing bars, in.2 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
I. COMPOSITE MEMBERS
2 - 43
As = cross-sectional area of structural steel, in.2 c1, c2, c3 = numerical coefficients. For concrete-filled pipe and tubing: c1 = 1.0, c2 = 0.85, and c3 = 0.4; for concrete-encased shapes c1 = 0.7, c2 = 0.6, and c3 = 0.2 Composite columns can be designed by using the Composite Columns Tables in Part 5 of this LRFD Manual (or the numerous tables in AISC Steel Design Guide No. 6: Load and Resistance Factor Design of W-Shapes Encased in Concrete) for the cross sections tabulated therein, or the above equations for all cross sections. Flexural Members
The most common case of a composite flexural member is a steel beam interacting with a concrete slab by means of stud or channel shear connectors. The slab can be a solid reinforced concrete slab, but is usually concrete on a corrugated metal deck. The effective width of concrete slab acting compositely with a steel beam is determined by three criteria. On either side of the beam centerline, the effective width of concrete slab cannot exceed: a. one-eighth of the beam span, b. one-half the distance to the centerline of the adjacent beam, or c. the distance to the edge of the slab. The following pertains to rolled W shapes in regions of positive moment, the predominant use of composite beam design. Other cases (e.g., plate girders and negative moments) are covered in Chapter I of the LRFD Specification. The horizontal shear force between the steel beam and concrete slab, to be transferred by the shear connectors between the points of zero and maximum positive moments, is the minimum of: a. 0.85fc′Ac (the maximum possible compressive force in the concrete), b. AsFy (the maximum possible tensile force in the steel), and c. ΣQn (the strength of the shear connectors). For W shapes, the design flexural strength φb Mn, with φb = 0.85, is based on: a. a uniform compressive stress of 0.85fc′ and zero tensile strength in the concrete b. a uniform steel stress of Fy in the tension area and compression area (if any) of the steel section, and c. equilibrium; i.e., the sum of the tensile forces equals the sum of the compressive forces. The above is valid for shored and unshored construction. However, in the latter case, it is also necessary to check the bare steel beam for adequacy to support the wet concrete and other construction loads (properly factored). The number of shear connectors required between a point of maximum moment and the nearest location of zero moment is n=
Vh Qn
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(2-26)
2 - 44
ESSENTIALS OF LRFD
where Vh = the total horizontal shear force to be transferred, kips = the minimum of 0.85fc′Ac, AsFy, and ΣQn Qn = the shear strength of one connector The nominal strength of a single stud shear connector in a solid concrete slab is fc′Ec ≤ AscFu Qn = 0.5Asc√
(I5-1)
where Asc = cross-sectional area of a stud shear connector, in.2 fc′ = specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi Fu = minimum specified tensile strength of a stud shear connector, ksi Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete, ksi Special provisions for shear connectors embedded in concrete on formed steel deck are given in Section I3.5 of the LRFD Specification. Among them are reduction factors (given by Equation I3-1 and I3-2) to be applied to the middle term of Equation I5-1 above. The design of composite beams and the selection of shear connectors can be accomplished with the tables in Part 5 of this LRFD Manual. The design shear strength for composite beams is determined by the shear strength of the steel web, as for noncomposite beams; see Section F above. Combined Compression and Flexure
Composite beam-columns are covered in Section I4 of the LRFD Specification. COMPUTER SOFTWARE ELRFD* (Electronic LRFD Specification)
ELRFD is a sophisticated computer program for interactively checking structural steel building components for compliance with the AISC Specification. All provisions of Chapters A through H and K of the LRFD Specification are included in the knowledge base of ELRFD. The ELRFD program checks whether the member satisfies all limit states and limitation requirements set by the LRFD Specification and reports which sections of the specification are satisfied or violated. One can review in detail the formulas and rules used in the evaluation and interactively assess any mathematical expression appearing on the screen. Design data produced by the software can be viewed and/or printed in report form for permanent record. ELRFD has a fully interactive Windows-based user interface.
*ELRFD is copyright AISC and Visual Edge Software, Ltd. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
REFERENCES
2 - 45
REFERENCES
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 1983, Torsional Analysis of Steel Members, AISC, Chicago, IL. American Society of Civil Engineers, 1988, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE 7-88, New York, NY. Galambos, T. V., et al., 1978, Eight LRFD Papers, Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9 (September 1978), New York. Geschwindner, L., 1993, “The ‘Leaning’ Column in ASD and LRFD,” Proceedings of the 1993 National Steel Construction Conference, AISC, Chicago. U.S. Department of Commerce, 1980, Development of a Probability Based Criterion for American National Standard A58, NBS (National Bureau of Standards) Special Publication 577, Washington, DC.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3-1
PART 3 COLUMN DESIGN OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 W and HP Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Steel Pipe and Structural Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Double Angles and WT Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 Single-Angle Struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104 COLUMN BASE PLATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117 REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3-2
COLUMN DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OVERVIEW
3-3
OVERVIEW Column tables with design compressive strengths, in kips, are located as follows: W shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 HP shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Steel pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Structural tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 Double angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 WT shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83 Single angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104 Additional information related to column design is provided as follows: Effective length factor (K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Alignment charts, Figure 3-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Stiffness reduction factors (SRF), Table 3-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 “Leaning” columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Combined axial and bending loading (Interaction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Preliminary design of beam-columns, Table 3-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3-4
COLUMN DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3-5
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS General Notes
Column Load Tables
Column Load Tables are presented for W, WT, and HP shapes, pipe, structural tubing, double angles, and single angles. Tabular loads are computed in accordance with the AISC LRFD Specification, Sections E2 and E3 and Appendix E3, for axially loaded members having effective unsupported lengths indicated to the left of each table. The effective length KL is the actual unbraced length, in feet, multiplied by the factor K, which depends on the rotational restraint at the ends of the unbraced length and the means available to resist lateral movements. Table C-C2.1 in the Commentary on the LRFD Specification is a guide in selecting the K-factor. Interpolation between the idealized cases is a matter of engineering judgment. Once sections have been selected for the several framing members, the alignment charts in Figure 3-1 [reproduced from the Structural Stability Research Council Guide (Galambos, 1988) here and in Figure C-C2.2 of the Commentary on the LRFD Specification] afford a means to obtain more precise values for K, if desired. For column behavior in the inelastic range, the values of G as defined in Figure 3-1 may be reduced by the values given in Table 3-1, as illustrated in Example 3-3. Tables for W, WT, and HP shapes and for double and single angles are provided for 36 ksi and 50 ksi yield stress steels. Tables for steel pipe are provided for 36 ksi, and for structural tubing for 46 ksi yield stress steel. All design strengths are tabulated in kips. Values are not shown when Kl / r exceeds 200. In all tables, except double angle and WT tables, design strengths are given for effective lengths with respect to the minor axis calculated by LRFD Specification Section E2. When the minor axis is braced at closer intervals than the major axis, the strength of the column must be investigated with reference to both major (X-X) and minor (Y-Y) axes. The ratio rx / ry included in these tables provides a convenient method for investigating the strength of a column with respect to its major axis. To obtain an effective length with respect to the minor axis equivalent in load carrying capacity to the actual effective length about the major axis, divide the major axis effective length by rx / ry ratio. Compare this length with the actual effective length about the minor axis. The longer of the two lengths will control the design, and the design strength may be taken from the table opposite the longer of the two effective lengths with respect to the minor axis. The double angle and WT tables show values for effective lengths about both axes. Properties useful to the designer are listed at the bottom of the column design strength tables. Additional notes relating specifically to the W and HP shape tables, the steel pipe and structural tubing tables, and the double and single angle tables precede each of these groups of tables.
EXAMPLE 3-1
Given:
Design the lightest W shape of Fy = 50 ksi steel to support a factored concentric load of 1,400 kips. The effective length with respect to its minor axis is 16 feet. The effective length with respect to its major axis is 31 feet. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3-6
COLUMN DESIGN
Solution:
Enter the appropriate Column Load Table for W shapes at effective length of KL = 16 ft. Since W14 columns are generally most efficient, begin with the W14 table and work downward, weightwise. Select W14×145, good for 1,530 kips > 1,400 kips rx / ry = 1.59. Equivalent L = 31 ft / 1.59 = 19.5 ft > 16 ft Equivalent effective length for X-X axis controls.
GA ∞ 50.0
K
GB ∞
1.0
50.0 10.0
10.0 5.0 3.0
5.0 0.9
5.0
100.0 50.0 30.0
20.0
4.0
20.0
10.0 9.0 8.0 7.0
3.0
2.0
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.3
pl
am
2
0.6
0.7
6.0 5.0
10.0 9.0 8.0 7.0
-3 e3
Ex
3-
0.8 0.7
ple
1.0
0.8 0.7
am
1.0
Ex
0.8
0.2
GB ∞ 20.0 10.0
100.0 50.0 30.0
3.0
2.0
0.6
K
GA ∞
6.0 5.0
2.2
4.0
4.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
1.75 2.0
2.36
2.0 1.5
0.6
0.2 1.0
0.1
1.0
0.1
0.26 0
0.5
0
SIDESWAY INHIBITED
1.0
0
0
SIDESWAY UNINHIBITED
Fig. 3-1. Alignment charts for effective length of columns in continuous frames. The subscripts A and B refer to the joints at the two ends of the column section being considered. G is defined as Σ(Ic / Lc) G= Σ(Ig / Lg) in which Σ indicates a summation of all members rigidly connected to that joint and lying on the plane in which buckling of the column is being considered. Ic is the moment of inertia and Lc the unsupported length of a column section, and Ig is the moment of inertia and Lg is the unsupported length of a girder or other restraining member. Ic and Ig are taken about axes perpendicular to the plane of buckling being considered. For column ends supported but not rigidly connected to a footing or foundation, G is theoretically infinity, but, unless actually designed a true friction free pin, may be taken as 10 for practical designs. If the column end is rigidly attached to a properly designed footing, G may be taken as 1.0. Smaller values may be used if justified by analysis. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3-7
Table 3-1. Stiffness Reduction Factors (SRF) for Columns Pu / A
Fy
Pu / A
ksi 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27
Fy
ksi 36 ksi
50 ksi
— — — — — — — — — — — — 0.05 0.14 0.22 0.30
0.03 0.09 0.16 0.21 0.27 0.33 0.38 0.44 0.49 0.53 0.58 0.63 0.67 0.71 0.75 0.79
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
36 ksi
50 ksi
0.38 0.45 0.52 0.58 0.65 0.70 0.76 0.81 0.85 0.89 0.92 0.95 0.97 0.99 1.00 ↓
0.82 0.85 0.88 0.90 0.93 0.95 0.97 0.98 0.99 1.00 ↓
— indicates not applicable.
Re-enter table for effective length of 19.5 ft to satisfy axial load of 1,400 kips, select W14×145. By interpolation, the column is good for 1,410 kips. Use W14×145 column
EXAMPLE 3-2
Given:
Design an 11-ft long W12 interior bay column to support a factored concentric axial roof load of 1,100 kips. The column is rigidly framed at the top by 30-ft long W30×116 girders connected to each flange. Column moment is zero due to the assumption of equal and offsetting moments in the girders. The column is braced normal to its web at top and base so that sidesway is inhibited in this plane. Use Fy = 50 ksi steel.
Solution:
a. Check Y-Y axis: Assume the column is pin-connected at the top and bottom with sidesway inhibited. From Table C-C2.1 in the Commentary for condition (d), K = 1.0: Effective length = 11 ft Enter Column Load Table: W12×106 good for 1,160 kips > 1,100 kips o.k. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3-8
COLUMN DESIGN
b. Check X-X axis: 1. Preliminary selection: Assume sidesway uninhibited and pin-connected at base. From Table C-C2.1 for condition (f): K = 2.0 Approximate effective length relative to X-X axis: 2.0 × 11 = 22.0 ft From Properties section in tables, for W12 column: rx / ry ≈ 1.76 Equivalent effective length relative to the Y-Y axis: 22.0
1.76
≈ 12.5 ft > 11.0 ft
Therefore, effective length for X-X axis is critical. Enter Column Load Table with an effective length of 12.5 ft: W12×106 column, by interpolation, good for 1,115 kips > 1,100 kips o.k. 1. Final selection Try W12×106 Using Figure 3-1 (sidesway uninhibited): Ix for W12×106 column = 933 in.4 Ix for W30×116 girder = 4,930 in.4 G (base)
= 10 (assume supported but not rigidly connected)
G (top)
=
933 / 11 = 0.258, say 0.26 (4,930 × 2) / 30
Connect points GA = 10 and GB = 0.26, read K = 1.75 For W12×106, rx / ry = 1.76 Actual effective length relative to Y-Y axis: 1.75 × 11.0 = 10.9 ft < 11.0 ft 1.76 Since the effective length for Y-Y axis is not critical, Use W12×106 column AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3-9
EXAMPLE 3-3
Given:
Using the alignment chart, Figure 3-1 (sidesway uninhibited) and Table 3-1 (Stiffness Reduction Factors), design columns for the bent shown, by the inelastic K-factor procedure. Let Fy = 50 ksi. Assume continuous support in the transverse direction.
Solution:
The alignment charts in Figure 3-1 are applicable to elastic columns. By multiplying G-values times the stiffness reduction factor Et / E, the charts may be used for inelastic columns. Since Et / E ≈ Fcr, inelastic / Fcr, elastic, the relationship may be written as Ginelastic = (Fcr, inelastic / Fcr, elastic)Gelastic. By utilizing the calculated stress Pu / A a direct solution is possible, using the following steps: 1. For a known value of factored axial load, Pu = 1,100 kips, select a trial column size. Assume W12×120 A = 35.3 in.2, Ix = 1,070 in.4, rx = 5.51 in. 2. Calculate Pu / A: Pu / A = 1,100 kips / 35.3 in.2 = 31.2 ksi 3. From Table 3-1, determine the Stiffness Reduction Factor (SRF); SRF = 0.62. For values of Pu / A smaller than those with entries in Table 3-1, the column is elastic, and the reduction factor is 1.0. 4. Determine Gelastic: Gelastic (bottom) = 10 1,100 k
1,100 k
W16x31 IX = 375 15′
20′
Fig. 3-2 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 10
COLUMN DESIGN
Gelastic (top)
=
1,070 / 15 = 3.80 375 / 20
5. Calculate Ginelastic = SRF × Gelastic: Ginelastic(top) = 0.62 × 3.80 = 2.36 6. Determine K from Figure 3-1 using Ginelastic For G (top) = 2.36 and G (bottom) = 10, Read from Figure 3-1, K = 2.2 7. KLx = 2.2 × 15 ft = 33.0 ft 8. Calculate equivalent of KLy: KLx 33.0 ft = = 18.75 ft 1.76 rx / ry 9. From the column tables (for 50 ksi steel): φc Pn = 1,030 kips < 1,100 kips req’d. n.g. Try a stronger column. 1. Try a W12×136 A = 39.9 in.2, Ix = 1,240 in.4, rx = 5.58 in. 2. Pu / A = 1,100 kips / 39.9 in.2 = 27.6 ksi 3. From Table 3-1: SRF = 0.77 4. Gelastic (top) =
1,240 / 15 = 4.41 375 / 20
5. Ginelastic(top) = 0.77 × 4.41 = 3.39 6. K = 2.3 7. KLx = 2.3 × 15 ft = 34.5 ft 8. Equivalent KLy:
KLx 34.5 ft = = 19.5 ft 1.77 rx / ry
9. φc Pn = 1,135 kips > 1,100 kips req’d o.k. Use W12×136 “Leaning” Columns
A “leaning” column is one which is considered pin-ended and does not participate in providing lateral stability to the structure. As a result, it relies on other parts of the structure for stability. The LRFD Specification in Section C2.2 requires that for unbraced frames, “the destabilizing effects of gravity-loaded columns whose simple connections AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 11
to the frame do not provide resistance to lateral loads shall be included in the design of the moment-frame columns.” Normal practice is to design leaning columns for their required strength with an effective length factor K = 1. To account for the effects of leaning columns on unbraced frames, one of the methods given in the Commentary on the LRFD Specification (Section C2) or in Geschwindner (1993) may be utilized. The simplest methods are: 1. The slightly conservative approach of adjusting the effective lengths of the rigidframe columns, Ki′ = √NKi where Ki′ = the modified effective length factor of a column Ki = the actual effective length factor of a column N = ratio of the factored gravity load supported by all columns in the given story to that supported by the columns in the rigid frame 2. The more conservative approach of providing sufficient design compressive strength in the rigid-frame columns of a story to enable them to support the total factored gravity load of the story at their actual effective lengths. Combined Axial and Bending Loading (Interaction)
Loads given in the Column Tables are for concentrically loaded columns. For columns subjected to both axial and bending stress, see Chapters C and H of the LRFD Specification. The design of a beam-column is a trial and error process in which a trial section is checked for compliance with Equations H1-1a and H1-1b. A fast method for selecting an economical trial W section, using an equivalent axial load, is illustrated in the example problem, using Table 3-2 and the u values listed in the column properties at the bottom of the column load tables. The procedure is as follows: 1. With the known value of KL (effective length), select a first approximate value of m from Table 3-2. Let u equal 2. 2. Solve for Pu eq = Pu + Mux m + Muy mu where Pu Mux Muy m u
= actual factored axial load, kips = factored bending moment about the strong axis, kip-ft = factored bending moment about the weak axis, kip-ft = factor taken from Table 3-2 = factor taken from column load table
3. From the appropriate Column Load Table, select a tentative section to support Pu eq. 4. Based on the section selected in Step 3, select a “subsequent approximate” value of m from Table 3-2 and a u value from the column load table. 5. With the values selected in Step 4, solve for Pu eq. 6. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the values of m and u stabilize. 7. Check section obtained in Step 6 per Equation H1-1a or H1-1b, as applicable. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 12
COLUMN DESIGN
Table 3-2. Preliminary Beam-Column Design Fy = 36 ksi, Fy = 50 ksi Values of m
Fy KL (ft)
36 ksi 10
12
14
16
18
50 ksi 20
22 and over
10
12
14
16
18
20
22 and over
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.4 1.7 1.8 2.0 1.8 1.5 1.4
1.1 1.4 1.5 1.7 1.7 1.5 1.3
1.0 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.4 1.3
0.9 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.3 1.2
0.8 0.9 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.2 1.2
1st Approximation All Shapes
2.0
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.3
1.9
Subsequent Approximation W4 W6 W8 W8 W10 W12 W14
3.1 3.2 2.8 2.5 2.1 1.7 1.5
2.3 2.7 2.5 2.3 2.0 1.7 1.5
1.7 2.1 2.1 2.2 1.9 1.6 1.4
1.4 1.7 1.8 2.0 1.8 1.5 1.4
1.1 1.4 1.5 1.8 1.7 1.5 1.3
1.0 1.2 1.3 1.6 1.6 1.4 1.3
0.8 1.0 1.1 1.4 1.4 1.3 1.2
2.4 2.8 2.5 2.4 2.0 1.7 1.5
1.8 2.2 2.2 2.2 1.9 1.6 1.4
This table is from a paper in AISC Engineering Journal by Uang, Wattar, and Leet (1990).
EXAMPLE 3-4
Given:
Design the following column: Pu = 400 kips Mntx = 250 kip-ft Mltx = 0 (braced frame) Mnty = 80 kip-ft Mlty = 0 (braced frame) KLx = KLy = 14 ft Lb = 14 ft Cm = 0.85 Fy = 50 ksi
Solution:
1. For KL = 14 ft, from Table 3-2 select a first trial value of m = 1.7. Let u = 2 2. Pu eq = Pu + Mux m + Muy mu = 400 + 250 × 1.7 + 80 × 1.7 × 2 = 1,097 kips 3. From Column Load Tables select W14×109 (φc Pn = 1,170 kips) or W12×120 (φc Pn = 1,220 kips). 4. Select the W14 column, so the second trial value of m is 1.4. (Note: If a W14 column were required for architectural or other reasons, AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 13
the selection process could have started with m = 1.4). With m = 1.4 and u = 1.97 (for a W14×109) from Column Load Table, Pu eq = 400 + 250 × 1.4 + 80 × 1.4 × 1.97 = 971 kips 5. From Column Load Tables select W14×90 (φc Pn = 969 kips). 6. For W14×90, m = 1.4, u = 1.94. Repeat of Steps 3 and 4 not required. 7. Check W14×90 with the appropriate interaction formula. A
= 26.5 in.2
ry
= 3.70 in.,
Kl 14 × 12 = 45.4 = 3.70 ry
rx
= 6.14 in.,
Kl 14 × 12 = 27.4 = 6.14 rx
Thesecond-or der moments,Mux and Muy, will be evaluated using the approximate method given in Section C1 of the LRFD Specification. Because Mltx = Mlty = 0 (braced frames in both directions), Specification Equation C1-1 reduces to Mu = B1Mnt, where B1 is a function of Pe1 (Equation C1-2). The values of Pe1 with respect to the x and y axes can be determined from LRFD Specification Table 8 as follows:
Pex Pey
= 382 × 26.5 = 10,123 kips = 139 × 26.5 = 3,684 kips
B1x
=
0.85 < 1.0. Use B1x = 1.0 1 − 400 / 10,123
B1y
=
0.85 < 1.0. Use B1y = 1.0 1 − 400 / 3,684
= 1.0 × 250 = 250 kip-ft = 1.0 × 80 = 80 kip-ft 0.9 × 50 × 75.6 = 284 kip-ft φb Mny = φb Mpy = 12
Mux Muy
From the beam selection table in Part 4 of this Manual: φb Mnx = 577 kip-ft for Lb < Lp = 15.0 ft Pu φcPn
=
400 = 0.412 > 0.2. Therefore, Equation H1-1a applies. 969
400 8 250 80 + + = 0.412 + 0.636 = 1.05 < 1.0 n.g. 969 9 577 284 Use W14×99 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 14
COLUMN DESIGN
Column Stiffening
Values of Pwo, Pwi, Pwb, and Pfb, listed in the Properties Section of the Column Load Tables for W and HP shapes, are useful in determining if a column requires stiffening because of forces transmitted into it from the flanges or connecting flange plates of a rigid beam connection to the column flange. The parameters are defined as follows: Pwo Pwi Pwb Pfb
= φ5Fyw tw k (kips), φ = 1.0 = φFyw tw (kips/in.), φ = 1.0 = φ4,100tw3 √ Fyw / h (kips), φ = 0.9 = φ6.25tf2Fyf (kips), φ = 0.9
Column stiffening or a heavier column* is required if Pbf, the factored force transmitted into the column web, exceeds any one of the following three resisting forces: Pwb Pfb Pwi tb + Pwo, where tb is the thickness of the beam flange delivering the concentrated force. For a complete explanation of these design parameters, see the section Column Stiffening in Part 10 (Volume II) of this LRFD Manual.
*The designer should consider selecting a heavier column section to eliminate the need for stiffening. Although this will increase the material cost of the column, this heavier section may provide a more economical solution due to the reduction in labor cost associated with the elimination of stiffening. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 15
W and HP Shapes
The design strengths in the tables that follow are tabulated for the effective lengths in feet KL (with respect to the minor axis), indicated at the left of each table. They are applicable to axially loaded members in accordance with Section E2 of the LRFD Specification. Two yield stresses are covered, 36 and 50 ksi. The heavy horizontal lines appearing within the tables indicate Kl / r = 200. No values are listed beyond Kl / r = 200. For discussion of effective length, range of l / r, strength about the major axis, combined axial and bending stress, and sample problems, see General Notes, above. Properties and factors are listed at the bottom of the tables for checking strength about the strong axis, combined loading conditions, and column stiffener requirements.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 16
COLUMN DESIGN Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
X
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
Y
Designation
W14
Wt./ft
808
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
Fy
730
665
605
550
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
7250
10100
6580
9140
6000
8330
5450
7570
4960
6890
11 12 13 14 15
5610 5480 5350 5230 5110
7440 7240 7040 6850 6660
6310 6260 6210 6150 6090
8620 8530 8430 8320 8200
5750 5700 5650 5590 5540
7850 7760 7660 7560 7450
5210 5170 5120 5070 5020
7110 7030 6940 6850 6750
4740 4700 4650 4600 4560
6460 6390 6300 6220 6120
16 17 18 19 20
4990 4870 4760 4650 4540
6480 6310 6130 5970 5810
6020 5960 5880 5810 5730
8080 7960 7820 7690 7550
5480 5410 5350 5280 5200
7340 7220 7100 6970 6840
4960 4900 4840 4770 4700
6640 6530 6420 6300 6170
4500 4450 4390 4330 4260
6020 5920 5810 5700 5590
22 24 26 28 30
4340 4140 3950 3770 3600
5490 5200 4920 4660 4410
5570 5390 5210 5020 4820
7250 6940 6610 6280 5940
5050 4890 4720 4540 4360
6560 6270 5970 5660 5340
4560 4410 4250 4090 3920
5910 5640 5360 5080 4790
4130 3990 3840 3690 3530
5350 5100 4840 4570 4300
32 34 36 38 40
3430 3280 3130 2980 2850
4170 3950 3740 3540 3350
4620 4420 4210 4000 3790
5600 5250 4910 4580 4250
4170 3980 3790 3590 3400
5030 4710 4400 4090 3780
3740 3570 3390 3210 3030
4490 4200 3910 3630 3350
3370 3210 3050 2880 2720
4030 3760 3500 3240 2990
42 44 46 48 50
2720 2590 2470 2360 2250
3170 3000 3860 3540 3260
3580 3380 3170 2970 2780
3930 3620 3310 3040 2800
3210 3020 2830 2650 2470
3490 3200 2930 2690 2480
2860 2680 2510 2340 2180
3080 2820 2580 2370 2180
2550 2390 2240 2080 1940
2740 2500 2290 2100 1940
2.03 2.03 2.03 3910 5430 3070 135 187 111 103000 122000 56400 5310 7370 4880 20.1 17.0 19.5 415 270 372
2.03 4270 154 66500 6780 16.6 241
2.02 3670 142 52200 5750 16.3 222
2.02 2250 93.4 33900 3500 19.0 313
2.01 3120 130 39900 4870 16.1 203
2.02 1930 85.7 26100 2950 18.7 288
2.01 2680 119 30800 4100 15.9 188
Properties u P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
237 16000 5510 4.82 1.70 457000 158000
215 14300 4720 4.69 1.74 411000 135000
2.02 2640 102 44300 4140 19.3 342
196 12400 4170 4.62 1.73 357000 120000
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
178 10800 3680 4.55 1.71 310000 105000
162 9430 3250 4.49 1.70 270000 93500
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 17 Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
Designation
W14
Wt./ft
500
Fy
455
426
398
370
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
4500
6250
4100
5700
3830
5310
3580
4970
3340
4630
11 12 13 14 15
4290 4250 4210 4170 4120
5850 5780 5710 5620 5540
3910 3870 3840 3790 3750
5330 5260 5190 5110 5030
3640 3610 3570 3530 3490
4970 4900 4830 4760 4680
3410 3380 3340 3300 3270
4640 4580 4520 4450 4380
3170 3140 3110 3070 3040
4320 4260 4200 4140 4070
16 17 18 19 20
4070 4020 3970 3910 3850
5450 5350 5250 5150 5040
3710 3660 3610 3560 3500
4950 4860 4770 4670 4570
3450 3400 3360 3310 3260
4600 4520 4430 4340 4250
3230 3180 3140 3090 3040
4300 4220 4140 4050 3960
3000 2960 2920 2870 2820
4000 3920 3840 3760 3680
22 24 26 28 30
3730 3600 3460 3320 3180
4820 4590 4350 4100 3850
3390 3270 3140 3010 2870
4370 4150 3930 3700 3480
3150 3030 2910 2790 2660
4050 3850 3640 3430 3210
2940 2830 2720 2600 2480
3780 3590 3390 3190 2990
2730 2630 2520 2410 2290
3500 3320 3140 2950 2750
32 34 36 38 40
3030 2880 2730 2580 2420
3610 3360 3120 2880 2650
2740 2600 2460 2320 2180
3250 3020 2800 2580 2370
2530 2400 2270 2140 2010
3000 2780 2570 2370 2170
2360 2230 2110 1990 1860
2780 2580 2390 2190 2010
2180 2060 1950 1830 1710
2560 2380 2190 2010 1840
42 44 46 48 50
2280 2130 1990 1850 1710
2420 2210 2020 1860 1710
2040 1910 1780 1650 1520
2160 1970 1800 1650 1520
1880 1750 1630 1510 1400
1980 1800 1650 1510 1400
1740 1620 1510 1400 1290
1830 1660 1520 1400 1290
1600 1490 1380 1280 1180
1670 1520 1390 1280 1180
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
2.01 1650 78.8 20400 2480 18.5 264
2.00 2290 110 24100 3450 15.7 172
1.99 1410 72.5 15800 2090 18.3 242
1.99 1950 101 18600 2900 15.5 157
1.99 1730 93.8 15000 2590 15.3 148
1.99 1120 63.7 10800 1640 18.0 213
1.98 1550 88.5 12800 2280 15.2 139
1.98 987 59.6 8790 1430 17.8 199
1.97 1370 82.8 10400 1990 15.1 129
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
147 8210 2880 4.43 1.69 235000 82600
134 7190 2560 4.38 1.67 206000 73600
2.00 1240 67.5 12800 1870 18.1 227
125 6600 2360 4.34 1.67 189000 67400
117 6000 2170 4.31 1.66 172000 62200
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
109 5440 1990 4.27 1.66 156000 56900
3 - 18
COLUMN DESIGN Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
X
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
Y
Designation
W14
Wt./ft
342
Fy
311
283
257
233
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
3090
4290
2800
3880
2550
3540
2310
3210
2100
2910
6 7 8 9 10
3040 3030 3010 2990 2960
4200 4170 4130 4090 4050
2750 2740 2720 2700 2680
3800 3770 3740 3700 3660
2510 2500 2480 2460 2440
3460 3440 3410 3370 3330
2280 2260 2250 2230 2210
3140 3120 3090 3060 3020
2060 2050 2040 2020 2000
2850 2820 2800 2770 2730
11 12 13 14 15
2940 2910 2880 2850 2810
4000 3950 3890 3830 3760
2660 2630 2600 2570 2540
3610 3560 3510 3460 3400
2420 2390 2370 2340 2310
3290 3240 3200 3140 3090
2190 2170 2150 2120 2090
2980 2940 2890 2850 2800
1980 1960 1940 1920 1890
2700 2660 2620 2570 2530
16 17 18 19 20
2770 2740 2700 2650 2610
3690 3620 3550 3470 3400
2510 2470 2430 2390 2360
3330 3270 3200 3130 3060
2280 2250 2210 2180 2140
3030 2970 2910 2850 2780
2060 2030 2000 1970 1940
2740 2690 2630 2570 2510
1870 1840 1810 1780 1750
2480 2430 2380 2320 2270
22 24 26 28 30
2520 2420 2320 2220 2110
3230 3060 2890 2710 2530
2270 2180 2090 2000 1900
2910 2750 2590 2430 2270
2060 1980 1900 1810 1720
2640 2500 2350 2200 2050
1870 1790 1710 1630 1550
2380 2250 2120 1980 1840
1690 1620 1550 1470 1400
2150 2030 1910 1780 1660
32 34 36 38 40
2010 1900 1790 1680 1570
2360 2180 2010 1840 1680
1800 1700 1600 1500 1410
2110 1950 1790 1640 1490
1630 1540 1450 1360 1270
1900 1760 1620 1480 1340
1470 1380 1300 1220 1140
1710 1570 1440 1320 1190
1320 1240 1170 1090 1020
1530 1410 1290 1180 1070
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
1.98 866 55.4 7100 1240 17.7 185
1.97 1200 77.0 8360 1720 15.0 120
1.97 746 50.8 5430 1030 17.5 168
1.96 1040 70.5 6400 1440 14.8 110
1.95 887 64.5 4930 1210 14.7 100
1.96 542 42.3 3150 723 17.2 140
1.94 753 58.8 3710 1000 14.6 91.6
1.95 457 38.5 2370 599 17.1 127
1.93 635 53.5 2790 832 14.5 83.4
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
101 4900 1810 4.24 1.65 141000 52000
91.4 4330 1610 4.2 1.64 124000 46100
1.97 639 46.4 4190 868 17.4 154
83.3 3840 1440 4.17 1.63 110000 41500
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
75.6 3400 1290 4.13 1.62 97400 36900
68.5 3010 1150 4.1 1.62 86200 33000
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 19 Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
Designation
W14
Wt./ft
211
Fy
193
176
159
145
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
1900
2640
1740
2410
1590
2200
1430
1980
1310
1810
6 7 8 9 10
1870 1860 1840 1830 1810
2580 2550 2530 2500 2470
1710 1700 1690 1670 1660
2360 2340 2320 2290 2260
1560 1550 1540 1530 1510
2150 2130 2110 2090 2060
1400 1400 1390 1380 1360
1940 1920 1900 1880 1860
1280 1280 1270 1260 1250
1770 1760 1740 1720 1700
11 12 13 14 15
1790 1780 1760 1730 1710
2440 2400 2370 2330 2280
1640 1630 1610 1590 1570
2230 2200 2170 2130 2090
1500 1480 1460 1450 1430
2030 2000 1970 1940 1900
1350 1330 1320 1300 1280
1830 1810 1780 1740 1710
1230 1220 1210 1190 1170
1670 1650 1620 1590 1560
16 17 18 19 20
1690 1660 1640 1610 1580
2240 2190 2140 2090 2040
1540 1520 1500 1470 1440
2050 2010 1960 1910 1870
1410 1380 1360 1340 1310
1860 1820 1780 1740 1700
1270 1250 1230 1200 1180
1680 1640 1600 1570 1530
1160 1140 1120 1100 1080
1530 1500 1460 1430 1390
22 24 26 28 30
1520 1460 1390 1330 1260
1940 1830 1710 1600 1490
1390 1330 1270 1210 1150
1770 1670 1560 1460 1350
1260 1210 1150 1100 1040
1610 1510 1420 1320 1220
1140 1090 1040 990 930
1440 1360 1270 1180 1100
1040 992 946 898 849
1320 1240 1160 1080 998
32 34 36 38 40
1190 1120 1050 980 912
1370 1260 1160 1050 951
1080 1020 955 892 830
1250 1150 1050 956 863
980 920 863 805 748
1130 1040 946 859 775
880 830 773 721 670
1010 928 846 767 692
800 752 703 655 608
919 842 767 694 626
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
1.95 397 35.3 1830 493 17.0 116
1.93 551 49.0 2160 684 14.4 76.0
1.96 340 32.0 1370 420 16.9 106
1.93 473 44.5 1610 583 14.3 70.1
1.92 415 41.5 1310 483 14.2 64.5
1.94 251 26.8 803 287 16.7 88.6
1.92 349 37.3 947 398 14.1 59.0
1.93 214 24.5 609 241 16.6 81.5
1.90 298 34.0 718 334 14.1 54.7
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
62.0 2660 1030 4.07 1.61 76100 29400
56.8 2400 931 4.05 1.60 68700 26700
1.94 299 29.9 1110 348 16.8 97.5
51.8 2140 838 4.02 1.60 61300 24000
46.7 1900 748 4 1.60 54400 21400
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
42.7 1710 677 3.98 1.59 49000 19400
3 - 20
COLUMN DESIGN Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
X
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
Y
Designation
W14
Wt./ft
132
Fy
120
109 50
90
36
50
36
50
36
50†
36
50†
0
1190
1650
1080
1500
979
1360
890
1240
811
1130
6 7 8 9 10
1160 1160 1150 1140 1130
1610 1590 1570 1550 1530
1060 1050 1040 1030 1020
1460 1450 1430 1410 1390
960 953 946 937 927
1320 1310 1300 1280 1260
873 867 860 852 843
1200 1190 1180 1160 1150
795 789 783 775 767
1100 1080 1070 1060 1040
11 12 13 14 15
1110 1100 1080 1070 1050
1510 1480 1450 1430 1390
1010 999 986 971 956
1370 1350 1320 1290 1270
917 905 893 880 866
1240 1220 1200 1170 1150
833 823 811 799 787
1130 1110 1090 1060 1040
758 749 738 727 716
1030 1010 989 969 947
16 17 18 19 20
1030 1020 997 978 958
1360 1330 1300 1260 1220
940 924 906 888 870
1240 1210 1180 1140 1110
852 837 821 804 787
1120 1090 1060 1030 1000
773 759 745 730 714
1020 991 965 938 911
704 691 678 664 650
925 902 878 853 828
22 24 26 28 30
916 872 826 780 733
1150 1070 997 920 844
831 791 749 706 663
1040 972 902 832 762
752 715 677 639 600
943 879 815 751 688
682 648 614 578 542
854 796 737 679 621
620 589 558 525 493
776 723 670 616 564
32 34 36 38
686 639 593 547
769 697 627 563
620 577 535 494
694 628 565 507
560 522 483 446
627 567 509 457
507 471 436 402
565 511 458 411
460 428 396 365
512 463 415 372
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
2.03 196 23.2 520 215 15.7 73.7
1.99 272 32.3 613 298 13.3 49.7
2.04 173 21.2 399 179 15.6 67.9
1.99 240 29.5 471 249 13.2 46.3
1.97 205 26.3 331 208 13.2 43.2
2.02 125 17.5 222 123 15.5 58.1
1.95 174 24.3 261 171 13.4 40.6
2.02 109 15.8 165 102 15.4 54.2
1.94 151 22.0 195 142 15.0 38.4
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36
99
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
38.8 1530 548 3.76 1.67 43800 15700
35.3 1380 495 3.74 1.67 39300 14100
2.02 148 18.9 281 150 15.5 62.7
32 1240 447 3.73 1.67 35400 12700
†Flange is noncompact; see discussion preceding column load tables.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
29.1 1110 402 3.71 1.66 31700 11500
26.5 999 362 3.70 1.66 28600 10400
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 21 Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
Designation
W14
Wt./ft
82
Fy
36
50
68
61
53
48
43
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50†
737 1020 667
927
612
850
548
761
477
663
431
599
386
536
6 7 8 9 10
705 694 682 667 652
963 942 918 892 863
638 628 616 604 590
871 852 830 807 781
585 576 565 553 540
798 781 760 738 714
523 515 505 494 483
714 698 680 660 638
443 432 418 404 389
598 576 552 526 498
400 390 378 365 351
540 520 498 474 449
357 347 337 325 312
482 463 443 422 399
11 12 14 16 18
635 618 579 538 495
833 800 732 661 588
575 559 524 487 447
753 724 662 598 532
526 511 479 444 408
689 662 604 544 484
470 457 428 396 364
615 591 539 486 431
372 355 319 282 245
469 439 379 319 263
336 320 287 253 220
423 395 340 286 235
298 284 254 224 194
375 350 301 252 206
20 22 24 26 28
450 406 363 321 280
516 447 381 325 280
407 367 328 290 253
467 405 345 294 253
371 334 297 262 229
424 366 311 265 229
331 297 265 233 203
377 325 276 236 203
210 176 148 126 109
213 176 148 126 109
188 157 132 113 97
191 157 132 113 97
165 138 116 99 85
167 138 116 99 85
30 31 32 34 36
244 229 214 190 169
244 229 214 190 169
221 207 194 172 153
221 207 194 172 153
199 187 175 155 138
199 187 175 155 138
177 166 155 138 123
177 166 155 138 123
95 89 83
95 89 83
85 79
85 79
74 69
74 69
38
152
152 138
138
124
124
110
110
3.2 2.7 3.12 2.56 2.97 95.7 133 84.2 117 72.1 13.3 18.5 12.2 17.0 11.0 98.4 116 76.4 90.0 55.1 88.2 123 71.7 100 56.9 8.00 6.79 7.96 6.75 7.88 28.0 20.1 26.4 19.2 24.7
2.37 100 15.3 64.9 79.0 6.68 18.2
0
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
74
Properties u P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
2.85 149 18.4 257 148 10.3 43.0
2.68 207 25.5 303 206 8.77 29.6
24.1 882 148 2.48 2.44 25200 4240
2.82 127 16.2 177 125 10.3 40.0
2.62 176 22.5 209 173 8.77 27.9
21.8 796 134 2.48 2.44 22800 3840
2.80 112 14.9 139 105 10.3 37.3
2.56 156 20.8 163 146 8.70 26.4
20 723 121 2.46 2.44 20700 3460
2.74 97.0 13.5 102 84.2 10.2 34.7
2.44 135 18.8 121 117 8.66 25.0
17.9 640 107 2.45 2.44 18300 3080
15.6 541 57.7 1.92 3.07 15500 1650
14.1 485 51.4 1.91 3.06 13800 1470
12.6 428 45.2 1.89 3.08 12200 1290
†Web may be noncompact for combined axial and bending stress; see AISC LRFD Specification Section B5. Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 22
COLUMN DESIGN Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
X
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
Y
Designation
W12
Wt./ft
336
Fy
305
279
252
230
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
3020
4200
2740
3810
2510
3480
2270
3150
2070
2880
6 7 8 9 10
2960 2930 2900 2870 2840
4070 4020 3970 3910 3850
2680 2660 2630 2600 2570
3690 3640 3590 3540 3480
2450 2430 2400 2370 2350
3370 3330 3280 3230 3170
2210 2190 2170 2150 2120
3040 3010 2960 2920 2870
2020 2000 1980 1960 1930
2780 2740 2710 2660 2610
11 12 13 14 15
2800 2760 2720 2670 2620
3780 3700 3620 3540 3450
2530 2500 2460 2410 2370
3420 3350 3270 3190 3110
2310 2280 2240 2200 2160
3110 3050 2980 2910 2830
2090 2060 2020 1980 1950
2810 2750 2680 2620 2550
1910 1880 1840 1810 1770
2560 2500 2450 2380 2320
16 17 18 19 20
2570 2520 2470 2410 2350
3360 3260 3160 3060 2960
2320 2270 2220 2170 2120
3020 2940 2840 2750 2660
2110 2070 2020 1970 1920
2750 2670 2580 2500 2410
1910 1860 1820 1770 1730
2470 2400 2320 2240 2160
1740 1700 1660 1610 1570
2250 2180 2110 2030 1960
22 24 26 28 30
2230 2100 1980 1850 1720
2750 2540 2330 2120 1910
2000 1890 1770 1650 1530
2460 2270 2070 1880 1690
1820 1710 1600 1490 1380
2230 2050 1870 1690 1520
1630 1530 1430 1330 1230
1990 1830 1660 1500 1350
1480 1390 1300 1200 1110
1810 1650 1500 1350 1210
32 34 36 38 40
1590 1460 1340 1220 1100
1720 1520 1360 1220 1100
1410 1300 1180 1080 971
1510 1340 1200 1080 971
1270 1160 1060 960 866
1350 1200 1070 960 866
1130 1030 940 848 766
1200 1060 945 848 766
1020 931 845 761 687
1070 951 848 761 687
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
2.18 1180 64 12700 1770 14.5 202
2.17 1640 89 15000 2460 12.3 131
2.18 1010 59 9740 1480 14.3 184
2.16 1400 81 11500 2060 12.1 120
2.15 1220 77 9700 1720 12.0 110
2.16 738 50 6150 1030 13.9 154
2.14 1020 70 7250 1420 11.8 100
2.15 636 46 4810 868 13.8 141
2.13 883 64 5670 1210 11.7 92.0
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
98.8 4060 1190 3.47 1.85 116000 34000
89.6 3550 1050 3.42 1.84 101000 30000
2.16 878 55 8230 1240 14.1 169
81.9 3110 937 3.38 1.82 88900 26800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
74.1 2720 828 3.34 1.81 77900 23700
67.7 2420 742 3.31 1.80 69100 21200
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 23 Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
Designation
W12
Wt./ft
210
Fy
190
170
152
136
120
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
1890
2630
1710
2370
1530
2120
1370
1900
1220
1700
1080
1500
6 7 8 9 10
1840 1830 1810 1790 1760
2540 2500 2470 2430 2380
1660 1650 1630 1610 1590
2290 2260 2220 2190 2150
1490 1480 1460 1440 1420
2050 2020 1990 1960 1920
1330 1320 1300 1290 1270
1830 1810 1780 1750 1710
1190 1180 1160 1150 1130
1630 1610 1590 1560 1530
1050 1040 1030 1010 1000
1440 1420 1400 1380 1350
11 12 13 14 15
1740 1710 1680 1650 1610
2330 2280 2230 2170 2110
1570 1540 1510 1480 1450
2100 2050 2000 1950 1900
1400 1380 1350 1330 1300
1880 1840 1790 1740 1690
1250 1230 1210 1180 1160
1680 1640 1590 1550 1510
1110 1090 1070 1050 1030
1490 1460 1420 1380 1340
984 966 948 928 908
1320 1290 1250 1220 1180
16 17 18 19 20
1580 1540 1510 1470 1430
2040 1980 1910 1840 1780
1420 1390 1350 1320 1280
1840 1780 1720 1650 1590
1270 1240 1210 1180 1140
1640 1580 1530 1470 1420
1130 1100 1070 1050 1020
1460 1410 1360 1310 1260
1010 980 955 928 901
1290 1250 1210 1160 1110
886 864 841 817 793
1140 1100 1060 1020 976
22 24 26 28 30
1340 1260 1170 1090 1000
1640 1490 1360 1220 1090
1210 1130 1050 973 895
1460 1340 1210 1090 967
1070 1000 933 862 792
1300 1180 1070 959 852
954 891 827 763 700
1150 1050 944 844 749
846 788 731 673 617
1020 924 831 742 656
743 692 640 589 538
892 808 726 646 569
32 34 36 38 40
919 837 759 682 616
962 852 760 682 616
819 745 674 605 546
853 755 674 605 546
724 657 593 532 480
750 664 593 532 480
638 578 520 467 421
658 583 520 467 421
561 508 456 409 369
577 511 456 409 369
489 442 395 355 320
500 443 395 355 320
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
2.16 558 42 3760 731 13.7 129
2.13 774 59 4430 1020 11.6 84.2
2.14 465 38 2700 610 13.5 117
2.11 646 53 3190 847 11.5 76.6
2.15 333 31 1500 397 13.3 94.7
2.11 462 44 1760 551 11.3 62.1
2.13 276 28 1120 316 13.2 84.6
2.09 383 40 1320 439 11.2 55.7
2.12 232 26 815 247 13.0 75.5
2.07 322 36 960 343 11.1 50.0
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
61.8 2140 664 3.28 1.80 61400 19000
55.8 1890 589 3.25 1.79 54100 16900
2.14 389 35 2020 493 13.4 105
2.11 540 48 2380 684 11.4 68.9
50.0 1650 517 3.22 1.78 47100 14800
44.7 1430 454 3.19 1.77 41000 13000
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
39.9 1240 398 3.16 1.77 35600 11400
35.3 1070 345 3.13 1.76 30700 9900
3 - 24
COLUMN DESIGN Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
X
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
Y
Designation
W12
Wt./ft
106
Fy
96
87
79
72
65
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50†
955
1330
863
1200
783
1090
710
986
646
897
584
812
6 7 8 9 10
928 919 908 896 883
1280 1260 1240 1210 1190
839 830 820 809 797
1150 1140 1120 1100 1070
761 753 744 734 723
1050 1030 1010 994 973
689 682 674 665 654
947 933 917 900 880
627 620 613 604 595
861 848 834 818 800
567 561 554 546 538
779 767 754 739 723
11 12 13 14 15
868 853 836 819 800
1160 1130 1100 1070 1040
784 770 755 739 722
1050 1020 995 966 935
711 698 684 669 654
950 926 901 874 846
643 631 619 605 591
860 838 814 790 764
585 574 562 550 537
781 761 740 717 694
529 519 508 497 485
706 687 668 647 626
16 17 18 19 20
781 761 741 719 698
1000 968 932 895 858
704 686 667 648 628
904 871 838 805 771
638 621 604 586 568
817 788 758 727 696
576 561 545 529 512
738 711 683 655 627
523 509 495 480 465
670 645 620 594 569
472 460 446 433 419
604 581 558 535 512
22 24 26 28 30
653 608 562 516 472
783 708 635 565 497
588 546 505 463 422
703 635 569 505 443
531 493 455 417 380
634 572 511 453 397
479 444 409 375 341
570 514 459 406 355
434 403 371 339 309
517 465 415 367 321
391 362 333 305 277
464 417 372 328 287
32 34 36 38 40
428 386 345 310 279
437 387 345 310 279
383 345 308 276 249
390 345 308 276 249
344 309 276 248 223
349 309 276 248 223
308 277 247 221 200
312 277 247 221 200
279 250 223 200 181
282 250 223 200 181
250 223 199 179 161
252 223 199 179 161
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
2.12 185 22 518 198 13.0 67.2
2.06 257 31 611 276 11.0 44.9
2.10 161 20 378 164 12.9 61.4
2.04 223 28 446 228 10.9 41.4
2.09 122 17 236 109 12.7 51.8
2.01 169 24 278 152 10.8 35.7
2.08 106 15 181 91 12.7 48.2
1.98 148 22 213 126 10.7 33.6
2.06 92.1 14 135 74 12.6 44.7
1.95 128 20 159 103 11.8 31.7
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
31.2 933 301 3.11 1.76 26700 8640
28.2 833 270 3.09 1.76 23900 7710
2.10 139 19 311 133 12.8 56.3
2.02 193 26 366 185 10.9 38.3
25.6 740 241 3.07 1.75 21200 6910
23.2 662 216 3.05 1.75 18900 6180
†Flange is noncompact; see discussion preceding column load tables.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
21.1 597 195 3.04 1.75 17000 5580
19.1 533 174 3.02 1.75 15200 4990
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 25 Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
Designation
W12
Wt./ft
58
Fy
53
50
45
40
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
520
723
477
663
450
625
404
561
361
502
6 7 8 9 10
498 490 482 472 461
680 666 649 631 611
457 449 441 432 422
623 610 594 577 559
419 408 396 383 369
566 546 524 500 475
376 366 355 343 330
507 489 469 447 424
336 327 317 306 295
453 437 419 399 378
11 12 13 14 15
450 437 424 411 397
590 568 545 521 496
411 400 388 375 362
539 518 496 474 451
354 339 322 306 289
448 421 393 365 337
317 302 287 272 257
400 375 350 324 299
282 269 256 242 228
356 334 311 288 266
16 18 20 22 24
382 352 321 291 260
471 420 370 322 276
348 320 292 263 235
428 381 334 290 247
271 237 204 173 145
310 257 209 173 145
241 210 180 152 128
274 227 184 152 128
214 187 160 135 113
243 201 163 135 113
26 28 30 32 34
231 202 176 155 137
235 202 176 155 137
207 181 158 139 123
210 181 158 139 123
124 107 93 82
124 107 93 82
109 94 82 72
109 94 82 72
96 83 72 64
96 83 72 64
38 41
110 94
110 94
98 85
98 85
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
2.41 89 13 106 83 10.5 38.3
2.22 124 18 125 115 8.9 27.0
2.39 78 12 94 67 10.3 35.8
2.16 108 17 111 93 8.8 25.6
2.51 127 19 136 115 6.9 21.6
2.79 75 12 86 67 8.1 28.4
2.37 105 17 101 93 6.9 20.3
2.69 66 11 59 54 8.0 26.5
2.22 92 15 69 75 6.8 19.3
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
17.0 475 107 2.51 2.10 13600 3070
15.6 425 95.8 2.48 2.11 12200 2750
2.85 92 13 116 83 8.2 30.8
14.7 394 56.3 1.96 2.64 11300 1620
13.2 350 50 1.94 2.65 10000 1420
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
11.8 310 44.1 1.93 2.66 8890 1260
3 - 26
COLUMN DESIGN Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
X
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
Y
Designation
W10
Wt./ft
112
Fy
100
88
77
68
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
1010
1400
900
1250
793
1100
692
961
612
850
6 7 8 9 10
969 956 941 924 906
1330 1300 1270 1240 1210
865 853 840 824 808
1180 1160 1140 1110 1080
762 751 739 725 710
1040 1020 999 973 945
664 655 644 632 618
908 890 869 847 822
588 579 569 558 547
803 787 769 749 727
11 12 13 14 15
886 865 842 819 794
1170 1130 1090 1050 1010
789 770 750 728 706
1040 1010 970 931 892
694 677 659 639 619
916 884 851 817 782
604 588 572 555 537
796 768 738 708 677
534 520 506 490 475
703 678 652 625 597
16 17 18 19 20
768 742 715 688 660
961 915 870 824 778
682 659 634 609 584
851 810 769 727 686
599 577 556 534 511
746 709 672 635 599
519 500 481 461 442
645 612 580 547 515
458 441 424 407 389
569 540 511 482 454
22 24 26 28 30
604 548 493 440 389
688 601 518 447 389
534 483 434 386 340
605 527 453 390 340
466 422 378 336 295
527 458 393 339 295
402 362 324 287 252
452 392 335 289 252
354 319 285 252 221
398 344 294 254 221
32 34 36 38 40
342 303 270 242 219
342 303 270 242 219
299 265 236 212 191
299 265 236 212 191
259 230 205 184 166
259 230 205 184 166
221 196 175 157 141
221 196 175 157 141
194 172 153 138 124
194 172 153 138 124
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
2.06 255 27 1210 316 11.2 86.4
2.02 354 38 1430 439 9.5 56.5
2.06 214 24 883 254 11.0 77.4
2.01 298 34 1040 353 9.4 50.8
1.99 246 30 735 276 9.3 45.1
2.03 143 19 420 153 10.8 60.0
1.96 199 27 495 213 9.2 39.8
2.01 116 17 293 120 10.8 53.8
1.93 162 24 345 167 9.2 36.0
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
32.9 716 236 2.68 1.74 20400 6760
29.4 623 207 2.65 1.74 17800 5910
2.04 177 22 623 198 11.0 68.4
25.9 534 179 2.63 1.73 15300 5130
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
22.6 455 154 2.60 1.73 13000 4370
20.0 394 134 2.59 1.71 11300 3840
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 27 Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
Designation
W10
Wt./ft
60
Fy
54
49
45
39
33
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
539
748
483
672
441
612
407
565
352
489
297
413
6 7 8 9 10
517 509 500 491 480
706 692 675 657 638
464 457 449 440 431
634 621 606 590 572
422 416 409 401 392
577 565 551 536 520
380 371 361 350 337
515 497 478 458 436
328 320 311 301 290
444 428 412 393 374
276 269 261 252 243
373 360 345 329 312
11 12 13 14 15
469 457 444 430 416
617 595 571 547 523
420 409 398 385 373
553 533 512 490 468
382 372 361 350 338
502 484 464 444 424
324 311 296 282 267
412 388 364 339 314
278 266 254 241 228
353 332 310 289 267
233 222 211 200 189
294 276 257 238 220
16 17 18 19 20
401 387 371 356 340
497 472 446 421 395
360 346 332 318 304
445 422 399 376 353
326 314 301 288 275
403 382 361 340 319
252 237 222 207 192
290 266 243 221 199
215 201 188 175 162
246 225 205 185 167
177 166 155 144 133
202 184 167 150 135
22 24 26 28 30
309 278 248 219 191
346 299 255 220 191
276 248 221 195 170
309 266 227 196 170
250 224 199 175 153
278 239 204 176 153
164 138 118 102 88
164 138 118 102 88
138 116 99 85 74
138 116 99 85 74
112 94 80 69 60
112 94 80 69 60
32 33 34 36
168 158 149 133
168 158 149 133
150 141 133 118
150 141 133 118
134 126 119 106
134 126 119 106
78 73
78 73
65 61
65 61
53
53
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
2.00 99 15 209 94 10.7 48.1
1.90 138 21 246 130 9.1 32.6
1.97 83 13 143 77 10.7 43.9
1.87 116 19 168 106 9.1 30.2
2.37 79 13 121 78 8.4 35.2
2.17 109 18 142 108 7.1 24.1
2.31 64 11 88 57 8.3 31.2
2.04 89 16 104 79 7.0 21.9
2.23 55 10 69 38 8.1 27.4
1.87 77 14 81 53 6.9 19.7
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
17.6 341 116 2.57 1.71 9710 3330
15.8 303 103 2.56 1.71 8640 2960
1.96 73 12 111 64 10.6 40.7
1.83 101 17 131 88 9.0 28.3
14.4 272 93.4 2.54 1.71 7800 2660
13.3 248 53.4 2.01 2.15 7100 1540
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
11.5 209 45.0 1.98 2.16 6000 1290
9.71 170 36.6 1.94 2.16 4880 1050
3 - 28
COLUMN DESIGN Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
X
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
Y
Designation
W8
Wt./ft
67
Fy
58
48
40
35
31
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
603
837
523
727
431
599
358
497
315
438
279
388
6 7 8 9 10
567 555 541 526 509
770 746 721 693 662
492 481 469 455 441
667 647 624 599 572
405 396 386 374 362
549 532 513 492 470
335 327 319 309 298
454 439 423 405 386
295 288 280 272 262
399 386 372 356 339
261 255 248 240 232
354 342 329 315 300
11 12 13 14 15
492 473 453 433 412
631 598 564 529 494
425 409 391 374 355
544 515 485 455 425
349 335 321 306 291
446 422 397 372 347
287 275 263 251 238
366 345 324 303 281
252 242 231 220 208
321 303 284 265 246
223 214 204 194 184
284 268 251 234 217
16 17 18 19 20
391 370 349 328 307
460 425 392 359 328
337 318 300 281 263
394 365 335 307 279
276 260 245 229 214
321 297 272 249 226
225 211 198 185 173
260 239 219 199 180
197 185 174 162 151
228 209 191 174 157
174 163 153 143 133
200 184 168 153 138
22 24 26 28 30
266 228 194 167 146
271 228 194 167 146
228 194 165 143 124
231 194 165 143 124
185 157 134 115 100
187 157 134 115 100
148 125 107 92 80
149 125 107 92 80
129 109 93 80 70
130 109 93 80 70
114 96 82 70 61
114 96 82 70 61
32 33 34 35
128 120 113 107
128 120 113 107
109 103 97 91
109 103 97 91
88 83 78
88 83 78
70 66 62
70 66 62
61 58
61 58
54 51
54 51
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
2.03 147 21 648 177 8.8 64.0
1.96 205 28 764 246 7.5 41.9
2 120 18 464 133 8.8 55.9
1.93 167 26 547 185 7.4 36.8
1.93 69 13 163 64 8.5 39.1
1.8 96 18 192 88 7.2 26.5
1.89 56 11 104 50 8.5 35.1
1.74 78 16 123 69 7.2 24.1
1.85 48 10 81 38 8.4 32.0
1.65 67 14 95 53 7.1 22.4
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
19.7 272 88.6 2.12 1.75 7800 2530
17.1 228 75.1 2.10 1.74 6520 2160
1.97 86 14 224 95 8.7 46.7
1.87 119 20 264 132 7.4 31.1
14.1 184 60.9 2.08 1.74 5260 1750
11.7 146 49.1 2.04 1.73 4170 1390
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
10.3 127 42.6 2.03 1.73 3630 1210
9.13 110 37.1 2.02 1.72 3150 1070
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 29 Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
Designation
W8
Wt./ft
W6
28
Fy
24
25
20
15 †
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50†
252
351
217
301
225
312
180
249
136
188
6 7 8 9 10
228 219 210 200 189
303 288 271 253 235
195 188 180 171 162
260 247 232 217 200
200 191 182 172 162
265 250 233 216 198
159 152 145 137 128
211 198 185 171 156
119 114 108 102 95
158 148 137 126 115
11 12 13 14 15
178 167 155 143 132
216 197 178 160 142
152 142 132 122 112
184 168 151 136 121
151 140 129 118 107
180 162 144 128 112
119 111 102 93 84
142 127 113 100 87
88 81 74 68 61
104 92 82 71 62
16 17 18 19 20
121 110 99 89 80
125 111 99 89 80
102 93 84 75 68
106 94 84 75 68
97 87 78 70 63
98 87 78 70 63
76 68 60 54 49
76 68 60 54 49
55 48 43 39 35
55 48 43 39 35
22 24 25 26 27
66 56 51 47 44
66 56 51 47 44
56 47 44 40
56 47 44 40
52 44 40
52 44 40
40 34 31
40 34 31
29 24
29 24
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
2.17 48 10 81 44 6.8 27.2
1.87 67 14 95 61 5.7 18.8
2.07 39 9 52 32 6.7 24.3
1.71 54 12 61 45 5.7 17.2
1.98 65 16 172 58 5.4 21.0
2.03 35 9 78 27 6.3 25.6
1.91 49 13 92 37 5.3 17.6
1.98 26 8 54 14 6.7 20.8
1.75 36 12 64 19 6.8 15.0
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties u
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
8.25 98.0 21.7 1.62 2.13 2810 620
7.08 82.8 18.3 1.61 2.12 2370 525
2.07 47 12 146 42 6.3 31.2
7.34 53.4 17.1 1.52 1.78 1530 485
5.87 41.4 13.3 1.50 1.77 1190 378
†Flange is noncompact; see discussion preceding column load tables. Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4.43 29.1 9.32 1.46 1.75 831 270
3 - 30
COLUMN DESIGN Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
X
X
COLUMNS W shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
Designation
W6
Wt./ft
16
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
Fy
W5
12
9
W4
19
16
13
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
145
201
109
151
82
114
170
235
143
199
117
163
2 3 4 5 6
140 135 127 118 108
193 182 168 152 134
105 100 94 87 79
144 135 124 110 96
79 75 71 65 59
108 101 93 83 72
166 163 157 151 144
229 222 212 201 187
141 137 133 127 121
194 188 179 169 157
114 109 104 97 89
156 148 138 125 111
7 8 9 10 11
97 86 75 64 54
116 98 81 66 54
70 61 52 44 37
82 68 55 44 37
52 45 39 32 27
61 50 40 33 27
135 126 117 107 97
172 156 140 124 108
114 106 98 90 81
144 131 117 104 90
81 72 63 55 47
97 83 69 57 47
12 13 14 15 16
46 39 33 29 26
46 39 33 29 26
31 26 23 20
31 26 23 20
23 19 17 14
23 19 17 14
87 78 68 60 53
93 80 69 60 53
73 65 57 50 44
78 66 57 50 44
39 34 29 25 22
39 34 29 25 22
47 42 37 34 30
47 42 37 34 30
39 35 31 28 25
39 35 31 28 25
1.84 39 10 115 37 5.3 30.3
1.72 55 14 136 52 4.5 20.1
1.79 32 9 81 26 5.3 26.2
1.63 45 12 95 36 4.5 17.6
1.89 35 10 164 24 4.2 25.5
1.77 48 14 193 33 3.5 16.8
17 18 19 20 21
Properties u P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
2.84 35 9 78 33 4.0 18.3
2.5 49 13 92 46 3.4 12.5
4.74 32.1 4.43 0.966 2.69 917 127
2.62 26 8 54 16 3.8 14.3
2.13 36 12 64 22 3.2 10.2
3.55 22.1 2.99 0.918 2.71 630 85.6
2.24 17 6 22 9 3.8 12.0
1.72 24 9 26 13 3.2 8.9
2.68 16.4 2.19 0.905 2.73 468 62.8
5.54 26.2 9.13 1.28 1.70 747 260
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4.68 21.3 7.51 1.27 1.68 608 216
3.83 11.3 3.86 1.00 1.72 324 110
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 31 Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS HP shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
Designation
HP14
Wt./ft
117
Fy
HP13
102
89
73
100
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
1050
1460
918
1280
799
1110
655
909
900
1250
6 7 8 9 10
1030 1020 1010 1000 993
1420 1400 1390 1370 1350
898 891 884 875 865
1240 1220 1210 1190 1170
781 775 768 760 752
1080 1060 1050 1040 1020
640 635 629 623 615
882 872 861 848 834
875 867 857 846 834
1200 1190 1170 1150 1120
11 12 13 14 15
980 967 953 938 922
1320 1300 1270 1250 1220
854 842 830 816 802
1150 1130 1110 1080 1060
742 732 721 709 696
1000 982 962 940 917
607 599 589 580 569
819 803 786 768 749
821 806 791 775 758
1100 1070 1050 1020 986
16 17 18 19 20
905 888 870 851 832
1190 1150 1120 1090 1050
788 772 756 740 723
1030 1000 974 945 915
683 670 656 641 626
893 869 844 818 791
558 547 535 523 511
729 708 687 666 644
741 722 703 684 664
954 921 888 854 820
22 24 26 28 30
792 750 707 664 620
985 913 842 771 701
687 650 613 574 536
853 790 727 665 604
595 563 529 496 462
737 682 627 572 519
485 458 430 402 374
599 553 507 462 418
623 581 539 496 454
750 681 613 547 483
32 34 36 38 40
576 533 491 450 411
633 568 507 455 411
498 460 423 387 352
545 487 435 390 352
428 395 363 332 301
467 417 372 334 301
346 319 292 267 241
375 334 298 267 241
413 374 336 301 272
425 376 336 301 272
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
217 29 1010 131 15.0 66.0
302 40 1191 182 12.7 45.1
174 25 679 101 14.8 59.0
242 35 801 140 12.6 41.1
202 31 533 106 12.5 37.6
108 18 250 52 14.5 46.8
150 25 294 72 12.3 34.2
198 28 953 119 13.2 60.1
275 38 1123 165 11.2 40.9
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
34.4 1220 443 3.59 1.66 35000 12700
30.0 1050 380 3.56 1.66 30100 10900
145 22 453 77 14.7 53.0
26.1 904 326 3.53 1.67 25800 9310
21.4 729 261 3.49 1.67 20900 7460
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
29.4 886 294 3.16 1.74 25400 8400
3 - 32
COLUMN DESIGN Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
X
COLUMNS HP shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
Y
Designation
HP13
Wt./ft
87
Fy
HP12
73
60
84
74
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
780
1080
661
918
536
744
753
1050
667
927
6 7 8 9 10
759 751 743 733 722
1040 1030 1010 993 973
642 636 628 620 611
882 870 856 840 823
520 515 509 502 494
714 704 692 679 665
729 721 712 701 690
1000 985 967 947 926
646 639 630 621 610
886 872 856 838 819
11 12 13 14 15
711 698 685 670 656
952 928 904 878 851
601 590 578 566 553
804 784 763 741 717
486 477 467 457 447
650 633 616 597 578
677 663 649 634 618
902 877 851 823 795
599 587 574 560 546
798 776 752 727 702
16 17 18 19 20
640 624 607 590 573
823 794 765 735 705
540 526 512 497 482
693 669 644 618 592
436 424 413 401 388
559 539 518 497 476
601 584 567 548 530
765 735 705 674 642
531 516 500 484 467
675 648 621 593 565
22 24 26 28 30
537 500 462 425 389
644 584 524 467 411
451 420 388 356 325
540 488 438 389 342
363 337 311 285 260
433 391 350 310 272
492 454 416 378 342
580 518 459 402 350
434 400 366 332 300
510 455 402 351 306
32 34 36 38 40
353 319 286 256 231
361 320 286 256 231
295 266 237 213 192
300 266 237 213 192
235 211 189 169 153
239 211 189 169 153
307 273 243 218 197
308 273 243 218 197
268 238 213 191 172
269 238 213 191 172
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
165 24 624 90 13.0 53.2
229 33 735 124 11.1 36.9
127 20 384 65 12.9 47.0
177 28 453 90 11.0 33.4
129 23 243 60 10.9 30.2
170 25 732 95 12.3 54.0
235 34 862 132 10.4 36.9
143 22 506 75 12.2 48.9
199 30 597 105 10.3 34.0
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
25.5 755 250 3.13 1.74 21700 7150
21.6 630 207 3.10 1.74 18000 5940
93 17 206 43 12.8 41.2
17.5 503 165 3.07 1.75 14400 4720
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
24.6 650 213 2.94 1.75 18600 6090
21.8 569 186 2.92 1.75 16300 5320
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 33 Y
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS HP shapes Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
Designation
HP12
Wt./ft
HP10
63
Fy
53
HP8
57
42
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
563
782
474
659
514
714
379
527
324
451
6 7 8 9 10
545 538 531 523 514
747 735 721 706 689
459 453 447 440 432
629 618 607 594 579
491 483 474 464 453
670 655 638 619 599
362 356 349 341 333
494 482 469 455 440
302 294 286 276 266
408 393 377 360 342
11 12 13 14 15
504 494 482 471 458
671 651 631 610 588
424 415 406 396 385
564 547 530 512 493
441 429 415 401 387
577 555 531 506 481
324 314 304 294 283
423 406 388 369 350
255 243 232 219 207
322 302 282 262 242
16 17 18 19 20
446 432 419 405 391
565 542 518 495 471
374 363 351 339 327
474 454 434 414 394
372 357 341 326 310
456 430 404 379 354
272 260 249 237 225
331 312 293 274 255
195 182 170 158 146
222 202 184 165 149
22 24 26 28 30
362 333 304 275 247
423 376 332 288 251
303 278 253 229 206
353 314 276 240 209
279 248 219 191 166
305 259 221 191 166
202 179 157 136 119
219 185 158 136 119
123 104 88 76 66
123 104 88 76 66
32 34 36 38 40
221 196 174 157 141
221 196 174 157 141
183 163 145 130 117
183 163 145 130 117
146 129 115 103 93
146 129 115 103 93
104 92 82 74 67
104 92 82 74 67
58 52 46 41 37
58 52 46 41 37
P wo (kips) P wi (kips/in.) P wb (kips) P fb (kips) L p (ft) L r (ft)
116 19 311 54 12.0 43.0
161 26 366 75 10.2 30.7
88 16 188 38 11.9 38.7
122 22 221 53 10.1 28.3
168 28 599 90 8.7 31.1
79 15 202 36 10.0 35.9
110 21 238 50 8.5 25.6
75 16 309 40 8.1 35.7
104 22 364 56 6.9 24.4
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration ry
36 0
Properties
A (in.2) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) ry (in.) Ratio rx / ry Pex (KL )2 / 10 4 Pey (KL )2 / 10 4
18.4 472 153 2.88 1.76 13500 4370
15.5 393 127 2.86 1.76 11200 3630
121 20 508 65 10.2 45.6
16.8 294 101 2.45 1.71 8400 2890
12.4 210 71.7 2.41 1.71 6050 2060
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
10.6 119 40.3 1.95 1.72 3420 1150
3 - 34
COLUMN DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 35
Steel Pipe and Structural Tubing
The design strengths in the tables that follow are tabulated for the effective lengths in feet KL (with respect to the least radius of gyration, r or ry), indicated at the left of each table. They are applicable to axially loaded members in accordance with Section E2 of the LRFD Specification. For discussion of effective length, range of l / r, strength about major axis, combined axial and bending stress, and sample problems, see General Notes. Properties and factors are listed at the bottom of the tables for checking strength about the strong axis. Steel Pipe Columns
Design strengths for unfilled pipe columns are tabulated for Fy = 36 ksi. Steel pipe manufactured to ASTM A501 furnishes Fy = 36 ksi, and ASTM A53, Type E or S, Gr. B furnishes Fy = 35 ksi and may be designed for the strengths permitted for Fy = 36 ksi steel. The heavy horizontal lines within the table indicate Kl / r = 200. No values are listed beyond Kl / r = 200. Structural Tube Columns
Design strengths for square and rectangular structural tube columns are tabulated for Fy = 46 ksi. Structural tubing is manufactured to Fy = 46 ksi under ASTM A500, Gr. B. All tubes listed in the column load tables satisfy Section B5 of the LRFD Specification. The heavy horizontal lines appearing within the tables indicate Kl / r = 200. No values are listed beyond Kl / r = 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 36
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
COLUMNS Standard steel pipe Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Nominal Dia.
12
10
8
6
5
4
31⁄2
3
Wall Thickness
0.375
0.365
0.322
0.280
0.258
0.237
0.226
0.216
Weight per ft
49.56
40.48
28.55
18.97
14.62
10.79
9.11
7.58
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
36 ksi 0
447
364
257
171
132
97
82
68
6 7 8 9 10
440 438 436 433 429
357 354 351 348 344
249 246 243 239 235
162 159 155 151 147
122 118 115 111 106
86 82 78 74 70
70 67 63 58 54
56 52 48 43 39
11 12 13 14 15
426 422 418 413 409
340 336 331 326 321
231 227 222 216 211
142 138 133 127 122
102 97 92 86 81
65 60 55 51 46
49 45 40 36 32
35 30 26 23 20
16 17 18 19 20
404 399 393 387 381
315 309 303 297 291
205 199 193 187 181
116 111 105 99 94
76 71 66 61 56
41 37 33 30 27
28 25 22 20 18
17 15 14 12
22 24 25 26 28
369 356 349 342 328
277 263 256 249 234
168 155 149 142 129
83 72 67 62 53
47 39 36 33 29
22 19 17
15
30 31 32 34 36
313 306 298 283 268
219 212 205 190 176
117 111 105 93 83
47 44 41 36 32
25 23
37 38 40
260 253 237
169 162 148
79 75 67
31
3.17 7.23 1.51
2.68 4.79 1.34
Properties 2
Area A (in. ) I (in.4) r (in.)
14.6 279 4.38
11.9 161 3.67
8.40 72.5 2.94
5.58 28.1 2.25
4.30 15.2 1.88
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2.23 3.02 1.16
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 37
Fy = 36 ksi
COLUMNS Extra strong steel pipe Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Nominal Dia.
12
10
8
6
5
4
31⁄2
3
Wall Thickness
0.500
0.500
0.500
0.432
0.375
0.337
0.318
0.300
Weight per ft
65.42
54.74
43.39
28.57
20.78
14.98
12.50
10.25
Effective length KL (ft)
Fy
36 ksi 0
588
493
392
257
187
135
113
92
6 7 8 9 10
579 576 573 569 564
483 479 475 470 465
379 375 369 364 357
243 238 232 226 219
172 168 162 156 149
119 114 108 102 95
96 91 85 79 72
75 69 64 58 52
11 12 13 14 15
559 554 549 543 536
460 453 447 440 433
351 343 336 327 319
212 205 197 189 180
143 135 128 121 113
89 82 75 68 62
66 60 53 47 42
46 40 34 30 26
16 18 19 20 21
530 515 508 500 492
425 409 400 391 382
310 291 282 272 262
172 154 145 137 128
105 91 83 76 70
56 44 40 36 32
37 29 26 23 21
23 18 16
22 24 26 28 30
483 465 447 428 408
373 354 334 314 294
252 231 211 191 172
120 103 88 76 66
63 53 45 39 34
30 25
32 34 36 38 40
388 368 348 328 308
273 253 234 215 196
154 136 121 109 98
58 52 46
19.2 362 4.33
16.1 212 3.63
12.8 106 2.88
6.11 20.7 1.84
4.41 9.61 1.48
3.68 6.28 1.31
3.02 3.89 1.14
Properties Area A (in.2) I (in.4) r (in.)
8.40 40.5 2.19
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 38
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
COLUMNS Double-extra strong steel pipe Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Nominal Dia.
8
6
5
4
3
Wall Thickness
0.875
0.864
0.750
0.674
0.600
Weight per ft
72.42
53.16
38.55
27.54
18.58
Effective length KL (ft)
Fy
36 ksi 0
652
477
346
248
167
6 7 8 9 10
629 621 612 601 590
448 437 426 413 399
315 305 293 281 268
214 203 191 179 165
131 120 108 96 84
11 12 13 14 15
578 565 551 536 521
385 369 353 336 319
254 239 224 209 194
152 139 125 112 100
73 62 53 46 40
16 17 18 19 20
505 489 472 455 438
302 285 268 250 234
179 165 151 137 124
88 78 70 62 56
35 31
22 24 26 28 30
403 367 333 299 266
201 170 145 125 109
102 86 73 63
47
32 34 36 38 40
235 208 186 166 150
96 85
21.3 162 2.76
15.6 66.3 2.06
11.3 33.6 1.72
8.10 15.3 1.37
Properties Area A (in.2) I (in.4) r (in.)
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.47 5.99 1.05
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 39
Fy = 46 ksi
COLUMNS Square structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Nominal Size
16× ×16
Thickness
1⁄
Wt./ft
103.30
89.68
68.31
0
1190
1030
786
6 7 8 9 10
1180 1170 1170 1170 1160
1020 1020 1010 1010 1000
11 12 13 14 15
1150 1150 1140 1130 1120
16 17 18 19 20
2
14× ×14 1⁄
2
12× ×12 3⁄
8
8
93.34
1⁄
2
3⁄
8
5⁄
16
76.07
58.10
48.86
1070
876
669
563
777 774 770 766 761
1050 1050 1040 1030 1020
862 857 851 845 838
658 655 650 645 640
554 551 548 544 539
993 985 977 969 960
756 751 745 739 732
1010 1000 992 979 966
830 821 812 803 792
634 628 621 614 606
535 529 524 518 511
1120 1110 1100 1090 1080
950 940 930 919 907
725 717 710 701 693
953 939 924 908 892
781 770 758 746 733
598 590 581 571 562
504 497 490 482 474
21 22 23 24 25
1070 1060 1040 1030 1020
895 883 870 857 844
684 675 665 655 645
875 858 841 823 805
719 706 692 677 663
552 542 531 520 510
466 457 449 440 431
26 27 28 29 30
1010 994 981 967 954
830 816 802 787 772
635 624 614 603 592
786 767 748 729 710
648 633 617 602 586
498 487 475 464 452
421 412 402 392 383
32 34 36 38 40
925 896 865 835 803
742 711 680 648 616
569 546 522 498 474
670 631 592 553 515
555 523 491 460 429
428 404 381 357 333
363 343 323 303 283
30.4 1200 6.29
26.4 791 5.48
27.4 580 4.60
22.4 485 4.66
17.1 380 4.72
14.4 324 4.75
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
5⁄
46 ksi
Properties A (in2) I (in.4) r (in.)
20.1 615 5.54
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 40
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
COLUMNS Square structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
10× ×10
Nominal Size Thickness Wt./ft
76.33
62.46
47.90
40.35
32.63
0
876
719
551
465
375
6 7 8 9 10
855 847 839 829 818
703 697 690 682 674
539 534 529 524 517
455 451 447 442 437
11 12 13 14 15
807 794 781 767 752
664 655 644 633 621
510 503 495 487 478
16 17 18 19 20
736 720 703 686 668
608 595 582 568 553
21 22 23 24 25
650 631 612 593 573
26 27 28 29 30 32 34 36 38 40
8
1⁄
2
3⁄
8× ×8
5⁄
8
5⁄
16
4
5⁄
8
59.32
1⁄
2
3⁄
8
5⁄
16
1⁄
4
48.85
37.69
31.84
25.82
680
563
434
366
297
367 364 360 357 353
654 644 634 622 609
542 535 526 517 507
418 413 407 400 392
353 349 343 338 331
287 283 279 274 269
431 425 418 411 404
348 343 338 332 326
595 580 564 548 531
496 484 471 458 444
384 375 366 356 345
324 317 309 301 293
264 258 252 245 238
468 459 449 438 427
396 388 380 371 362
320 314 307 300 293
513 494 476 456 437
430 415 400 385 369
335 324 312 301 289
284 275 265 256 246
231 224 216 209 201
538 523 508 493 477
416 405 394 382 370
353 343 334 324 314
286 278 270 263 255
418 398 379 360 341
354 338 322 307 291
277 266 254 242 230
236 226 216 206 196
193 185 177 169 161
554 534 515 495 476
461 446 430 414 398
358 347 335 323 311
305 295 285 275 265
247 239 231 223 215
322 304 286 268 251
276 261 246 232 218
219 207 196 185 174
187 177 168 158 149
153 146 138 131 123
437 400 364 328 296
367 337 307 278 251
287 264 242 220 199
245 225 206 188 170
199 184 168 154 139
221 195 174 156 141
191 169 151 136 122
153 136 121 109 98
132 117 104 93 84
109 97 86 77 70
22.4 321 3.78
18.4 271 3.84
14.1 214 3.90
11.9 183 3.93
17.4 153 2.96
14.4 131 3.03
11.1 106 3.09
9.36 90.9 3.12
7.59 75.1 3.15
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
1⁄
46 ksi
Properties A (in2) I (in.4) r (in.)
9.59 151 3.96
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 41
Fy = 46 ksi
COLUMNS Square structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) 7× ×7
Nominal Size Thickness
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
6× ×6
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
50.81 42.05 32.58 27.59 22.42 17.08 42.30 35.24 27.48 23.34 19.02 14.53
Fy
46 ksi
Effective length KL (ft)
Wt./ft
0
584
485
375
317
258
196
486
407
316
268
219
167
6 7 8 9 10
553 543 531 518 503
461 452 443 432 421
357 351 344 336 327
302 297 291 285 278
246 242 237 232 226
188 185 181 177 173
451 438 425 410 394
379 369 358 346 333
295 288 280 271 262
251 245 239 231 223
205 200 195 189 183
157 153 149 145 140
11 12 13 14 15
488 472 454 437 418
409 396 382 368 353
318 308 298 288 277
270 262 254 245 236
220 214 207 200 193
168 164 159 153 148
377 359 341 322 303
320 306 291 276 260
252 241 230 219 207
215 206 197 187 178
176 169 162 154 146
135 130 124 119 113
16 17 18 19 20
399 380 361 342 323
338 322 307 291 276
265 254 242 230 218
226 217 207 197 187
185 177 170 162 154
142 136 130 124 118
284 265 246 227 210
245 229 214 199 184
195 184 172 160 149
168 158 148 138 129
138 131 123 115 107
107 101 95 89 83
22 24 26 28 30
285 248 214 184 161
245 215 187 161 140
195 172 151 130 113
167 148 130 113 98
138 123 108 94 81
107 95 84 73 63
175 147 125 108 94
155 131 111 96 84
127 107 91 79 69
111 93 80 69 60
92 78 67 57 50
72 61 52 45 39
32 34
141 125
123 109
100 88
86 76
72 63
56 49
83 73
73 65
60 53
53 47
44 39
34 30
35 36 37 38 39
118 111 106 100 95
103 97 92 87 83
83 79 74 71 67
72 68 64 61 58
60 57 54 51 48
47 44 42 40 38
69
61 58
50 48 45
44 41 39 37
37 35 33 31
29 27 26 24 23
40
90
79
64
55
46
36
12.4 57.3 2.15
10.4 50.5 2.21
8.08 41.6 2.27
6.86 36.3 2.30
5.59 30.3 2.33
4.27 23.8 2.36
Properties 2
A (in ) I (in.4) r (in.)
14.9 97.5 2.56
12.4 84.6 2.62
9.58 68.7 2.68
8.11 59.5 2.71
6.59 49.4 2.74
5.02 38.5 2.77
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 42
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
COLUMNS Square structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) 51⁄2×51⁄2
Nominal Size
5× ×5
Thickness
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
Wt./ft
24.93
21.21
17.32
13.25
28.43
22.37
19.08
15.62
11.97
8.16
Effective length KL (ft)
Fy
46 ksi 0
286
244
199
152
327
257
219
179
138
94
6 7 8 9 10
264 256 248 238 228
225 219 212 204 195
184 179 173 167 161
141 137 133 129 124
294 282 270 257 242
233 224 215 205 194
199 192 184 176 167
163 158 152 145 138
126 121 117 112 107
86 83 80 77 73
11 12 13 14 15
218 207 195 184 172
187 177 168 158 148
154 146 139 131 123
118 113 107 101 95
228 213 197 182 167
183 172 160 149 137
158 148 139 129 119
131 123 115 107 99
101 95 89 84 78
70 66 62 58 54
16 17 18 19 20
160 149 137 126 115
139 129 119 110 101
115 107 99 92 84
89 83 77 72 66
152 138 124 111 100
126 115 104 93 84
110 100 91 82 74
92 84 77 69 63
72 66 60 55 50
50 46 42 38 35
22 24 26 28 30
96 80 68 59 51
84 70 60 52 45
70 59 50 43 38
55 47 40 34 30
83 70 59 51 45
70 59 50 43 37
61 52 44 38 33
52 44 37 32 28
41 34 29 25 22
29 24 21 18 15
31 32 33 34 35
48 45 43 40
42 40 37 35
35 33 31 29 28
28 26 25 23 22
35
31
26 24
21 19
15 14 13
6.58 22.8 1.86
5.61 20.1 1.89
4.59 16.9 1.92
3.52 13.4 1.95
2.40 9.41 1.98
Properties 2
A (in ) I (in.4) r (in.)
7.33 31.2 2.07
6.23 27.4 2.10
5.09 23.0 2.13
3.89 18.1 2.16
8.36 27.0 1.80
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 43
Fy = 46 ksi
COLUMNS Square structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) 41⁄2×41⁄2
Nominal Size
4× ×4
Thickness
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
Wt./ft
19.82
16.96
13.91
10.70
7.31
Effective length KL (ft)
Fy
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
21.63
17.27
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
14.83 12.21
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
9.42
6.46
46 ksi 0
228
195
160
123
84
249
199
170
140
108
74
6 7 8 9 10
201 192 182 171 160
172 165 157 148 139
142 136 130 123 115
110 105 100 95 90
75 72 69 65 62
208 195 180 166 151
168 158 148 137 125
145 137 128 119 110
120 114 107 100 92
93 89 83 78 72
64 61 58 54 50
11 12 13 14 15
149 137 125 114 103
129 119 110 100 91
107 100 92 84 76
84 78 72 66 60
58 54 50 46 42
136 121 107 93 81
114 102 91 81 70
100 90 81 72 63
84 76 68 61 54
66 60 54 49 43
46 42 38 34 31
16 17 18 19 20
92 82 73 66 59
81 73 65 58 53
69 62 55 49 45
55 49 44 39 36
38 35 31 28 25
71 63 56 50 46
62 55 49 44 40
55 49 44 39 35
47 42 37 34 30
38 34 30 27 24
27 24 21 19 17
21 22 23 24 25
54 49 45 41 38
48 43 40 36 34
41 37 34 31 29
32 29 27 25 23
23 21 19 17 16
41 38 34
36 33 30 27
32 29 27 25
28 25 23 21 19
22 20 18 17 16
16 14 13 12 11
26
35
31
26
21
15
27 28 29
32
29 27
25 23
20 18 17
14 13 12
10
Properties 2
A (in ) I (in.4) r (in.)
5.83 16.0 1.66
4.98 14.2 1.69
4.09 12.1 1.72
3.14 9.60 1.75
2.15 6.78 1.78
6.36 12.3 1.39
5.08 10.7 1.45
4.36 9.58 1.48
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3.59 8.22 1.51
2.77 6.59 1.54
1.90 4.70 1.57
3 - 44
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
COLUMNS Square structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
31⁄2×31⁄2
Nominal Size
3× ×3
Thickness
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
Wt./ft
12.7
10.51
8.15
5.61
10.58
8.81
6.87
4.75
0
146
121
93
65
122
101
79
55
6 7 8 9 10
118 109 100 90 81
99 92 84 76 69
77 72 66 60 54
54 50 46 42 39
90 80 71 61 52
76 68 61 53 45
60 54 49 43 37
42 39 35 31 27
11 12 13 14 15
71 62 54 46 40
61 54 46 40 35
49 43 38 32 28
35 31 27 23 20
44 37 31 27 23
38 32 27 24 21
32 27 23 19 17
23 20 17 14 12
16 17 18 19 20
35 31 28 25 23
31 27 24 22 20
25 22 20 18 16
18 16 14 13 11
21 18
18 16 14
15 13 12
11 10 9 8
21 22
21
18
14 13
10 9
3.73 6.09 1.28
3.09 5.29 1.31
2.39 4.29 1.34
3.11 3.58 1.07
2.59 3.16 1.10
2.02 2.60 1.13
1.40 1.90 1.16
Effective length KL (ft)
Fy
46 ksi
Properties A (in2) I (in.4) r (in.)
1.65 3.09 1.37
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 45
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
Nominal Size 16× ×12
16× ×8
14× ×12
14× ×10
Thickness
1⁄
1⁄
1⁄
Wt./ft
89.68
76.07
82.88
63.21
76.07
0
1030
876
952
726
876
6 7 8 9 10
1020 1010 1010 998 990
848 838 827 815 801
938 933 927 920 912
715 712 707 702 697
11 12 13 14 15
982 973 963 952 941
786 771 754 736 717
904 895 886 876 865
16 17 18 19 20
929 916 903 889 875
697 677 657 635 614
22 24 26 28 30
845 813 781 746 711
32 34 36 38 40
676 640 604 568 533
2
2
2
3⁄
8
2
12× ×10
3⁄
8
58.10
1⁄
2
3⁄
8
5⁄
16
1⁄
4
69.27
53.00
44.60
36.03
669
796
609
513
414
857 850 843 834 825
655 650 644 638 631
778 772 765 757 748
596 591 586 580 573
502 498 493 488 483
405 402 399 395 390
691 684 677 669 661
815 803 791 779 765
623 615 606 597 587
738 728 716 704 692
566 558 550 541 531
477 470 463 456 448
386 380 375 369 363
854 842 829 816 803
653 644 634 625 615
751 737 721 705 689
576 565 554 542 530
679 665 650 636 620
522 511 501 489 478
440 431 422 413 404
356 349 342 335 327
569 525 480 436 393
774 744 713 681 648
593 571 548 524 499
655 620 584 547 511
504 478 451 424 396
589 556 522 488 454
454 430 404 379 353
384 363 342 321 300
311 295 278 261 244
352 313 279 250 226
615 581 547 514 480
474 448 423 398 372
474 438 403 369 335
368 341 315 289 264
420 387 355 324 293
328 302 278 254 231
278 257 237 217 197
227 210 193 177 162
17.1 476 284 1.29 4.08
20.4 419 316 1.15 3.94
15.6 330 249 1.15 4.00
13.1 281 213 1.15 4.03
10.6 230 174 1.15 4.06
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration
1⁄
46 ksi
Properties 2
A (in ) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) rx / ry ry (in.)
26.4 962 618 1.25 4.84
22.4 722 244 1.72 3.30
24.4 699 552 1.13 4.76
18.6 546 431 1.13 4.82
22.4 608 361 1.30 4.02
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 46
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
X
X
COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
12× ×8
Nominal Size
12× ×6
Thickness
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
Wt./ft
76.33
62.46
47.90
40.35
67.82
55.66
42.79
36.10
0
876
719
551
465
778
641
493
414
6 7 8 9 10
845 835 822 809 794
695 687 677 666 655
534 527 520 512 503
450 445 439 433 425
731 715 697 677 655
604 591 577 561 543
466 456 445 434 421
392 384 376 366 355
11 12 13 14 15
778 760 742 722 702
642 628 613 598 582
494 483 473 461 449
417 409 400 390 380
632 607 581 555 528
525 505 485 464 442
407 393 378 362 346
344 332 320 307 293
16 17 18 19 20
681 659 637 614 591
565 547 530 511 493
437 424 410 397 383
370 359 348 336 325
500 473 445 418 390
420 398 375 353 331
329 313 296 279 262
280 266 252 238 224
22 24 26 28 30
544 497 451 405 362
455 417 380 343 307
355 326 298 270 243
301 277 253 230 207
338 288 245 211 184
288 247 211 182 158
230 199 170 146 128
197 171 146 126 110
32 34 36 38 39
320 283 252 227 215
273 241 215 193 184
217 192 171 154 146
185 164 146 131 125
162 143 128 115 109
139 123 110 99 94
112 99 89 80 75
97 86 76 69 65
40
205
174
139
119
89
72
62
16.4 287 96.0 1.73 2.42
12.6 228 77.2 1.72 2.48
10.6 196 66.6 1.71 2.51
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi
Properties 2
A (in ) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) rx / ry ry (in.)
22.4 418 221 1.38 3.14
18.4 353 188 1.37 3.20
14.1 279 149 1.37 3.26
11.9 239 128 1.37 3.28
19.9 337 112 1.73 2.37
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 47
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
10× ×8
Nominal Size
10× ×6
Thickness
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
Wt./ft
55.66
42.79
36.10
29.23
48.85
37.69
31.84
25.82
0
641
493
414
336
563
434
366
297
6 7 8 9 10
619 611 602 592 581
476 470 463 456 448
401 396 390 384 377
325 321 317 312 306
529 517 504 490 474
409 400 391 380 368
345 338 330 321 312
281 275 269 261 254
11 12 13 14 15
568 556 542 528 513
439 429 419 408 397
370 362 354 345 335
300 294 287 280 273
457 439 421 402 382
356 343 329 315 300
302 291 279 267 255
246 237 228 218 209
16 17 18 19 20
497 481 465 448 431
386 374 361 349 336
326 316 306 295 285
265 257 249 241 232
362 342 322 302 282
285 270 255 240 225
243 230 218 205 193
199 189 179 169 159
22 24 26 28 30
396 361 327 294 262
310 284 258 232 208
263 241 220 198 178
215 197 180 163 146
244 208 177 153 133
196 169 144 124 108
169 146 124 107 93
139 121 103 89 77
32 34 36 38 39
231 205 183 164 156
184 163 146 131 124
158 140 125 112 106
130 116 103 93 88
117 104 92 83 79
95 84 75 67 64
82 73 65 58 55
68 60 54 48 46
40
148
118
101
84
61
52
44
11.1 145 65.4 1.49 2.43
9.36 125 56.5 1.48 2.46
7.59 103 46.9 1.48 2.49
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi
Properties 2
A (in ) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) rx / ry ry (in.)
16.4 226 160 1.19 3.12
12.6 180 127 1.19 3.18
10.6 154 109 1.19 3.21
8.59 127 90.2 1.19 3.24
14.4 181 80.8 1.50 2.37
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 48
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
X
COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
Y
10× ×5
Nominal Size
8× ×6
Thickness
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
Wt./ft
35.13
29.72
24.12
42.05
32.58
27.59
22.42
0
403
341
277
485
375
317
258
6 7 8 9 10
370 359 347 334 319
315 306 295 284 272
256 249 241 232 222
454 444 432 419 404
352 344 335 325 315
298 292 284 276 268
243 238 232 225 218
11 12 13 14 15
304 288 272 255 239
260 246 233 219 205
212 201 191 179 168
389 373 357 340 322
303 292 279 266 253
258 248 238 227 217
211 203 195 186 178
16 17 18 19 20
222 206 189 174 159
191 178 164 151 138
157 146 135 124 114
305 287 269 252 235
240 227 213 200 187
205 194 183 172 161
169 160 151 142 133
22 24 26 28 30
131 110 94 81 71
115 96 82 71 62
95 80 68 59 51
201 170 145 125 109
161 137 117 101 88
140 119 102 88 76
116 99 85 73 64
32 34 36 38 39
62 55
54 48
45 40
96 85 76 68
77 68 61 55 52
67 59 53 48 45
56 49 44 40 38
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi
36
40
Properties 2
A (in ) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) rx / ry ry (in.)
10.3 128 42.9 1.72 2.04
8.73 110 37.2 1.71 2.07
7.09 91.2 31.1 1.72 2.09
12.4 103 65.7 1.25 2.31
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9.58 83.7 53.5 1.25 2.36
8.11 72.4 46.4 1.25 2.39
6.59 60.1 38.6 1.25 2.42
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 49
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
8× ×4
Nominal Size
7× ×5
Thickness
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
Wt./ft
42.30
35.24
27.48
23.34
19.02
35.24
27.48
23.34
19.02
14.53
0
486
407
316
268
219
407
316
268
219
167
6 7 8 9 10
415 393 368 341 314
351 333 313 292 270
276 262 248 233 216
235 224 212 199 185
192 184 174 164 153
369 357 342 327 311
288 279 268 257 245
245 238 229 220 210
200 194 187 180 172
154 149 144 138 132
11 12 13 14 15
287 259 233 207 182
248 226 204 183 162
200 183 167 150 135
172 158 144 130 117
142 131 120 109 98
294 276 258 240 222
232 219 205 192 178
199 188 177 165 154
164 155 146 137 127
126 119 113 106 99
16 17 18 19 20
160 141 126 113 102
143 126 113 101 91
120 106 95 85 77
104 92 82 74 67
88 78 70 62 56
205 187 170 154 139
165 151 138 126 114
142 131 120 110 100
118 109 101 92 84
92 85 79 72 66
22 24 25 26 27
84 71
76 63 58
63 53 49 45
55 46 43 39 37
47 39 36 33 31
115 97 89 82 76
94 79 73 67 62
82 69 64 59 55
69 58 54 50 46
54 46 42 39 36
71 66 62 58
58 54 51 47 44
51 47 44 41 39
43 40 37 35 33
34 31 29 27 26
37
31
24 23
6.86 45.5 26.9 1.30 1.98
5.59 38.0 22.6 1.30 2.01
4.27 29.8 17.7 1.29 2.04
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
Properties 2
A (in ) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) rx / ry ry (in.)
12.4 85.1 27.4 1.76 1.49
10.4 75.1 24.6 1.75 1.54
8.08 61.9 20.6 1.73 1.60
6.86 53.9 18.1 1.73 1.62
5.59 45.1 15.3 1.72 1.65
10.40 63.5 37.2 1.31 1.90
8.08 52.2 30.8 1.30 1.95
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 50
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
X
X
COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
7× ×4
Nominal Size
6× ×4
Thickness
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
Wt./ft
24.93
21.21
17.32
13.25
28.43
22.37
19.08
15.62
11.97
0
287
244
199
152
327
257
219
179
138
6 7 8 9 10
249 236 223 208 193
213 202 191 179 167
175 166 158 148 138
134 128 121 114 107
279 263 246 228 210
222 211 198 185 171
190 181 171 160 148
157 149 141 132 123
121 115 109 102 96
11 12 13 14 15
178 163 148 133 118
154 141 129 116 104
128 118 107 97 88
99 92 84 76 69
191 173 155 137 121
157 143 129 116 103
136 125 113 102 91
114 104 95 85 77
89 81 74 67 61
16 17 18 19 20
105 93 83 74 67
92 82 73 65 59
78 69 62 56 50
62 55 49 44 40
106 94 84 75 68
90 80 71 64 58
80 71 63 57 51
68 60 54 48 44
54 48 43 38 35
21 22 23 24 25
61 55 51 46 43
54 49 45 41 38
45 41 38 35 32
36 33 30 28 25
62 56 51 47
52 48 44 40 37
46 42 39 36 33
39 36 33 30 28
31 29 26 24 22
26 27
40
35
30 27
23 22
30
26
20 19
5.61 26.2 13.8 1.38 1.57
4.59 22.1 11.7 1.37 1.60
3.52 17.4 9.32 1.37 1.63
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi
Properties 2
A (in ) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) rx / ry ry (in.)
7.33 44.0 18.1 1.56 1.57
6.23 38.5 16.0 1.56 1.60
5.09 32.3 13.5 1.55 1.63
3.89 25.4 10.7 1.54 1.66
8.36 35.3 18.4 1.39 1.48
6.58 29.7 15.6 1.38 1.54
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 51
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
X
X
Y
6× ×3
Nominal Size
5× ×4
Thickness
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
Wt./ft
25.03
19.82
16.96
13.91
10.70
19.82
16.96
13.91
10.70
0
288
228
195
160
123
228
195
160
123
6 7 8 9 10
216 194 172 150 129
176 160 144 127 111
152 138 125 111 97
126 116 105 94 83
98 90 82 74 65
195 185 173 161 148
168 159 149 139 129
139 132 124 116 107
107 102 96 90 84
11 12 13 14 15
109 92 78 67 59
95 81 69 59 52
84 71 61 52 46
72 62 53 45 39
57 50 42 36 32
135 123 110 98 86
118 107 97 87 77
99 90 82 73 65
77 71 64 58 52
16 17 18 19 20
52 46 41
45 40 36 32
40 36 32 28
35 31 27 25 22
28 25 22 20 18
76 67 60 54 49
67 60 53 48 43
58 51 46 41 37
46 41 36 33 29
44 40 37 34 31
39 36 33 30 28
33 30 28 26 24
27 24 22 20 19
22
17
4.09 14.1 9.98 1.19 1.56
3.14 11.2 7.96 1.19 1.59
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi
21 22 23 24 25 26
Properties 2
A (in ) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) rx / ry ry (in.)
7.36 27.7 8.91 1.76 1.10
5.83 23.8 7.78 1.74 1.16
4.98 21.1 6.98 1.75 1.18
4.09 17.9 6.00 1.73 1.21
3.14 14.3 4.83 1.72 1.24
5.83 18.7 13.2 1.19 1.50
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4.98 16.6 11.7 1.20 1.53
3 - 52
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
X
X
COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
5× ×3
Nominal Size
4× ×3
Thickness
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
Wt./ft
21.63
17.27
14.83
12.21
9.42
6.46
12.70
10.51
8.15
5.61
0
249
199
170
140
108
74
146
121
93
64
6 7 8 9 10
183 164 145 125 107
151 137 122 107 93
132 120 108 95 83
110 100 91 81 71
85 78 71 63 56
59 55 50 45 40
110 100 89 78 67
93 84 76 67 58
73 66 60 53 47
51 47 42 38 33
11 12 13 14 15
89 75 64 55 48
79 67 57 49 43
71 60 51 44 39
61 52 45 38 33
49 42 36 31 27
35 30 26 22 19
57 48 41 35 31
50 42 36 31 27
40 34 29 25 22
29 25 21 18 16
16 17 18 19 20
42 37
38 33 30
34 30 27 24
29 26 23 21
23 21 19 17 15
17 15 13 12 11
27 24 21
24 21 19 17
19 17 15 14
14 12 11 10 9
1.90 6.44 2.93 1.48 1.24
3.73 7.45 4.71 1.26 1.12
3.09 6.45 4.10 1.26 1.15
2.39 5.23 3.34 1.25 1.18
1.65 3.76 2.41 1.25 1.21
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi
Properties 2
A (in ) Ix (in.4) Iy (in.4) rx / ry ry (in.)
6.36 16.9 7.33 1.52 1.07
5.08 14.7 6.48 1.50 1.13
4.36 13.2 5.85 1.50 1.16
3.59 11.3 5.05 1.49 1.19
2.77 9.06 4.08 1.50 1.21
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 53
Double Angles and WT Shapes
Double Angles
Design strengths are tabulated for the effective length KL in feet with respect to both the X-X and Y-Y axes. Design strengths about the X-X axis are in accordance with LRFD Specification Section E2. For buckling about the Y-Y axis the shear deformation of the connectors may require the slenderness to be increased in accordance with the equations for (Kl / r)m in Section E4. Incorporating this slenderness ratio, the design strengths are determined from Section E2 or E3, whichever governs. In addition to the usual limit state of flexural buckling for columns, double angle and WT shapes in compression may also be governed by the limit state of flexural-torsional buckling, in accordance with Section E3 of the LRFD Specification. This has been included in the tables. Discussion under Section C2 of the LRFD Specification Commentary points out that for trusses it is usual practice to take K = 1.0. No values are listed beyond KL / r = 200. For buckling about the X-X axis, both angles move parallel so that the design strength is not affected by the connectors. For buckling about the Y-Y axis, the design strengths are tabulated for the indicated number n of intermediate connectors. For connectors with snug-tight bolts or different spacings, the design strength must be recalculated using the corresponding modified slenderness and LRFD Specification Section E4. The number of intermediate connectors given in the table was selected so the design strength about the Y-Y axis is 90 percent or greater of that for buckling of the two angles acting as a unit. If fewer connectors are used, the strength must be reduced accordingly. According to Section E4 of the LRFD Specification, the connectors must be spaced so that the slenderness ratio a / rz of the individual angle does not exceed 75 percent of the governing slenderness ratio of the built-up member. In designing members fabricated of two angles connected to opposite faces of a gusset plate, Chapter J of the LRFD Specification states that eccentricity between the gage lines and gravity axis may be neglected. In the following tables, this eccentricity is neglected. The tabulated loads for double angles referred to in the Y-Y axis assume a 3⁄8-in. spacing between angles. These values are conservative when a wider spacing is provided. Example 3-5 illustrates a method for determining the design strength when a 3⁄4-in. gusset plate is used. Examples 3-6 and 3-7 demonstrate how to determine the number of connectors when Klx / rx governs and when the modified (Kly / ry)m governs.
EXAMPLE 3-5
Given:
Solution:
Using 50 ksi steel, determine the design strength with respect to the Y-Y axis of a double angle member of 8×8×1 angles with an effective length equal to 12 ft, and connected to a 3⁄4-in. thick gusset plate. ry = 3.53 in. (from Double Angle Column Design Strength Table for two L8×8×1 with 3⁄8-in. plate) ry′ = 3.67 in. (from Part 1, Properties, Two Equal-Leg Angles, two L8×8×1 with 3⁄4-in. plate) ry 3.53 = = 0.962 ry′ 3.67 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 54
COLUMN DESIGN
Equivalent effective length = 0.962 × 12 ft = 11.5 ft Enter Column Design Strength Table for two L8×8×1 with reference to Y-Y axis for effective lengths between 10 and 15 feet, read 1,120 and 1,000 kips, respectively.
Equivalent design strength = 1,120 − (1,120 − 1,000) ×
11.5 − 10 15 − 10
= 1,084 kips EXAMPLE 3-6
Given:
Solution:
Using a double angle member of 5×3×1⁄2 angles (short legs back to back) and 36 ksi steel, with Lx = 10 ft and Ly = 20 ft, and a factored axial load of 70 kips, determine the number of connectors required. Assume K = 1.0 and that the intermediate connectors are snug-tight bolted. Kx Lx = 10 ft, Kx lx / rx = (10 × 12) / 0.829 = 145 Ky Ly = 20 ft, Ky ly / ry = (20 × 12) / 2.5 = 96 The X-X axis governs. From the X-X axis portion of the table φPn = 76 kips > 70 kips o.k. Find number of connectors required based on Section E4: a / rz ≤ 0.75KLx / rx a ≤ 0.75(KLx / rx)rz = 0.75 (145) 0.648 = 70 in. Assume two connectors are required; a = (10 × 12) / 3 = 40 in. a / rz = 40 / rz = 40.0 / 0.648 = 61.7 Check that modified (Ky ly / ry)m does not govern. According to Specification Equation E4-1, 962 + 61.7 2 = 114 (Ky ly / ry)m = √ Modified ly′ = 114ry / Ky = 114 (2.50 in.) / 1.0 = 285 in. = 23.8 ft Inspection of the tables indicates that Kxlx / rx still governs, therefore one connector is required every 40 inches.
EXAMPLE 3-7
Given:
Using the same steel shape and bolts as Example 3-6, with Lx = 10 ft and Ly = 30 ft, determine the number of connectors required and the corresponding maximum design strength. Assume K = 1.0. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
Solution:
3 - 55
Kx Lx = 10 ft, Kx lx / rx = (10 × 12) / 0.829 = 145 Ky Ly = 30 ft, Ky ly / ry = (30 × 12) / 2.5 = 144 Kx lx / rx appears to govern, so try one connector in the 10-ft length. Check (Ky ly / ry)m with a / rz = 5 × 12 / 0.648 = 93 1442 + 932 = 171 (Ky ly / ry)m = √ Since (Ky ly / ry)m governs, the Y-Y portion of the table gives a design strength of 72 kips provided four connectors are used in the 30-ft length. This gives a spacing of 30 ft / 5 = 6.0 ft. Check if (Kyly / ry)m governs with = (6.0 × 12) / 0.648 = 111 a / rz 1442 + 111 2 = 182 (Kyly / ry)m = √ (Ky ly / ry)m still governs, so four connectors at 6.0 ft would be appropriate. Verify that a / rz < 0.75 governing Kl / r : 111 < (0.75 × 182 = 137) o.k. Modified ly′ = 182ry / Ky = 182(2.5 in.) / 1.0 = 455 in. = 37.9 ft From the tables, the design strength is 45 kips. The design strength can be increased by closer spacing of the connectors, which reduces (Kyly / ry)m .
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 56
COLUMN DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 57
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi Y
COLUMNS Double angles
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Equal legs 8
in. back to back of angles
3/ ′′ 8
8× ×8
Size 11⁄8
Thickness Wt./ft
36
7⁄ 8
1
113.8
Fy
X-X AXIS
Y
102.0
50
3⁄ 4
90.0
5⁄ 8
77.8
1⁄ 2
65.4
52.8
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1030 1420
918
1280
811
1130
701
973
586
763
432
550
10 14 18 22 26
901 1190 795 1000 674 795 548 596 427 430
808 715 608 496 388
1070 902 719 542 391
715 633 539 440 345
945 799 638 482 349
619 549 469 384 303
819 694 556 422 306
518 461 395 325 257
651 559 456 354 261
387 348 302 253 205
478 417 349 278 212
30 34 38 39 40
323 251 201 191 182
323 251 201 191 182
294 229 183 174 165
294 229 183 174 165
262 204 163 155 147
262 204 163 155 147
230 179 143 136 129
230 179 143 136 129
196 153 122 116 110
196 153 122 116 110
159 124 99 94 90
159 124 99 94 90
123
123
105
105
85
85
0
1030 1420
918
1280
811
1130
701
973
586
763
432
550
10 15 20 25 30
939 1260 869 1130 779 975 677 803 570 632
834 772 692 601 506
1120 1000 864 711 560
726 670 599 517 432
965 865 741 606 473
615 569 509 440 368
808 728 626 514 402
495 460 413 359 302
609 555 486 407 325
345 324 297 263 226
406 378 341 295 244
35 40 45 50 55
465 366 290 235 194
477 366 290 235 194
412 324 257 208 172
422 324 257 208 172
349 272 216 175 145
354 272 216 175 145
297 232 184 150 124
301 232 184 150 124
244 191 152 124 103
248 191 152 124 103
188 150 120 98 82
193 150 120 98 82
56 57 58 59
188 181 175 169
188 181 175 169
166 161 155
166 161 155
140 135 130
140 135 130
120 116 112
120 116 112
99 96
99 96
79 76
79 76
No. of a Connectors
3⁄
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
b
Y-Y AXIS
41
2
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
33.5 2.42 3.55
30.0 2.44 3.53
26.5 2.45 3.51
22.9 2.47 3.49
19.2 2.49 3.47
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
15.5 2.50 3.45
3 - 58
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi Y X
COLUMNS Double angles
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) 3⁄ 8
Equal legs in. back to back of angles 6× ×6
Size Thickness Wt./ft
74.8
Y-Y AXIS
X-X AXIS
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
66.2
57.4
1⁄ 2
48.4
3⁄ 8
39.2
29.8
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
673
935
597
829
517
718
435
604
352
470
243
309
8 10 12 14 16
580 533 481 426 370
759 676 586 495 407
515 473 428 379 330
675 601 522 441 364
447 412 373 332 290
587 524 457 388 321
377 347 315 280 245
495 442 386 328 272
306 283 257 229 201
389 351 308 265 222
214 200 183 166 147
264 241 216 190 164
18 22 26 30 31
315 218 156 117
326 218 156 117
282 196 140 105
292 196 140 105
248 173 124 93
259 173 124 93
210 147 105 79
220 147 105 79
173 122 87 65 61
182 122 87 65 61
129 94 68 51 48
138 94 68 51 48
0
673
935
597
829
517
718
435
604
352
470
243
309
10 12 14 16 18
595 567 537 503 468
787 738 683 625 565
523 499 472 442 410
690 647 598 547 494
449 428 404 379 352
590 552 511 468 422
371 353 334 313 291
483 453 420 385 348
289 275 260 244 226
359 338 315 289 262
187 180 172 163 153
219 210 199 186 173
20 22 24 26 28
431 394 357 321 286
505 446 389 334 288
378 345 312 280 249
441 388 338 290 250
324 295 267 239 213
377 332 288 247 214
268 244 221 198 176
310 273 238 204 176
208 189 171 152 135
235 207 181 155 135
142 131 120 109 97
158 143 128 113 98
30 32 34 36 38
252 221 196 175 157
252 221 196 175 157
218 192 170 152 137
218 192 170 152 137
187 164 146 130 117
187 164 146 130 117
154 136 120 108 97
154 136 120 108 97
118 104 92 82 74
118 104 92 82 74
86 76 68 61 55
86 76 68 61 55
40 42 43 44 45
142 129 123 117 112
142 129 123 117 112
123 112 107 102 98
123 112 107 102 98
106 96 91 87
106 96 91 87
87 79 76 72
87 79 76 72
67 61 58 56
67 61 58 56
50 45 43
50 45 43
Properties of 2 A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
5⁄ 8
22.0 1.80 2.73
19.5 1.81 2.70
No. of a Connectors
Y
3/ ′′ 8
b
2
3
angles—3⁄8
in. back to back
16.9 1.83 2.68
14.2 1.84 2.66
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
11.5 1.86 2.64
8.72 1.88 2.62
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 59
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi Y
COLUMNS Double angles
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Equal legs in. back to back of angles 5× ×5
Size 7⁄ 8
Thickness Wt./ft
X-X AXIS
3⁄ 4
54.5
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
1⁄ 2
47.2
3⁄ 8
32.4
5⁄ 16
24.6
20.6
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
490
680
425
591
291
404
217
282
169
215
6 8 10 12 14
433 393 348 299 251
573 502 423 343 268
377 344 305 264 222
500 440 372 304 239
259 237 211 183 155
344 304 259 213 169
194 178 160 140 119
244 219 189 159 129
152 141 127 113 97
189 171 150 128 107
16 18 20 22 24
204 162 132 109 91
206 162 132 109 91
182 145 117 97 82
183 145 117 97 82
128 103 83 69 58
130 103 83 69 58
99 80 65 54 45
102 80 65 54 45
82 68 55 46 38
86 68 55 46 38
75
75
53
53
42 39
42 39
35 33
35 33
25 26
Y-Y AXIS
3/ ′′ 8
Y
0
490
680
425
591
291
404
217
282
169
215
6 8 10 12 14
457 438 414 388 358
617 582 540 492 441
394 377 357 334 309
531 501 464 423 379
260 249 236 221 204
345 326 303 277 249
184 176 168 157 145
224 214 201 186 168
136 131 126 119 111
160 154 146 137 127
16 18 20 22 24
327 295 263 231 201
389 337 287 240 202
282 254 226 199 172
334 289 246 205 173
186 168 149 131 114
219 190 161 135 114
133 120 107 93 81
150 132 113 95 81
103 94 84 75 66
115 103 90 78 66
26 28 30 32 34
172 149 130 114 101
172 149 130 114 101
148 127 111 98 87
148 127 111 98 87
97 84 73 65 57
97 84 73 65 57
69 60 52 46 41
69 60 52 46 41
57 49 43 38 34
57 49 43 38 34
36 37 38
90 85 81
90 85 81
77 73 69
77 73 69
51 48
51 48
37 35
37 35
30
30
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
16.0 1.49 2.30
13.9 1.51 2.28
b
2
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
No. of a Connectors
3⁄ 8
9.50 1.54 2.24
7.22 1.56 2.22
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.05 1.57 2.21
3 - 60
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi Y X
COLUMNS Double angles
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) 3⁄ 8
Equal legs in. back to back of angles 4× ×4
Size 3⁄ 4
Thickness Wt./ft
37.0
X-X AXIS
Fy
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
31.4
3⁄ 8
25.6
5⁄ 16
19.6
1⁄ 4
16.4
13.2
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
334
463
282
392
230
319
175
243
146
191
108
138
4 6 8 10 12
306 275 237 195 154
411 354 288 220 159
259 233 201 167 132
349 301 245 189 137
212 191 166 138 110
285 247 203 157 115
162 146 127 106 85
217 189 156 121 89
135 123 107 90 72
172 152 127 101 76
101 92 82 70 57
126 112 96 78 61
14 16 18 19 20
117 89 71 63
117 89 71 63
100 77 61 54 49
100 77 61 54 49
84 65 51 46 41
84 65 51 46 41
65 50 40 36 32
65 50 40 36 32
56 43 34 30 27
56 43 34 30 27
45 35 28 25 22
46 35 28 25 22
0
334
463
282
392
230
319
175
243
146
191
108
138
6 8 10 12 14
303 284 262 237 210
406 371 332 288 245
254 238 219 198 176
339 311 277 241 204
204 191 176 158 140
270 247 220 191 161
151 141 130 117 104
196 180 161 141 119
121 114 106 96 85
148 138 125 110 95
85 81 76 70 63
100 94 87 79 70
16 18 20 22 24
183 157 132 109 92
202 163 132 109 92
153 131 109 91 76
168 135 109 91 76
122 104 86 72 60
133 106 86 72 60
90 77 64 53 45
98 79 64 53 45
74 63 53 44 37
79 64 53 44 37
56 48 41 35 29
60 50 41 35 29
26 28 29 30 31
78 67 63 59 55
78 67 63 59 55
65 56 52 49 46
65 56 52 49 46
51 44 41 39
51 44 41 39
38 33 31 29
38 33 31 29
32 27 26 24
32 27 26 24
25 22 20
25 22 20
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
10.9 1.19 1.88
9.22 1.20 1.86
7.50 1.22 1.83
5.72 1.23 1.81
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4.80 1.24 1.80
3.88 1.25 1.79
No. of a Connectors
Y
3/ ′′ 8
b
3
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 61
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi Y
COLUMNS Double angles
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Equal legs 8
in. back to back of angles 31⁄2×31⁄2
Size 3⁄ 8
Thickness Wt./ft
X-X AXIS
5⁄ 16
17.0
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
Y
1⁄ 4
14.4
11.6
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
152
211
128
175
100
129
2 4 6 8 10
148 137 120 100 78
204 182 152 117 84
125 115 101 84 67
169 152 127 99 72
97 90 80 67 54
125 114 97 77 58
12 14 16 17 18
59 43 33 29
59 43 33 29
50 37 28 25 22
50 37 28 25 22
41 30 23 21 18
41 30 23 21 18
0
152
211
128
175
100
129
6 8 10 12 14
130 120 108 94 81
170 152 131 109 88
107 98 89 78 67
136 123 106 89 72
80 74 67 60 52
96 88 78 67 56
16 18 20 22 24
67 54 44 37 31
69 54 44 37 31
56 45 37 30 26
57 45 37 30 26
43 36 29 24 20
44 36 29 24 20
26
26
26
22
22
17
17
3/ ′′ 8
No. of a Connectors
3⁄
b
Y-Y axis
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
4.97 1.07 1.61
4.18 1.08 1.60
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3.38 1.09 1.59
3 - 62
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi Y X
COLUMNS Double angles
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Y
3⁄ 8
Equal legs in. back to back of angles 3× ×3
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
18.8
X-X AXIS
Fy
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
14.4
1⁄ 4
12.2
3⁄ 16
9.8
7.42
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
168
234
129
179
109
151
88
118
61
77
2 4 5 6 7
162 145 133 120 106
222 190 169 146 123
125 112 103 93 83
171 147 131 114 97
105 94 87 79 70
144 124 111 97 82
85 77 71 64 57
112 98 88 77 66
59 54 50 46 41
74 66 60 54 47
8 9 10 11 12
92 79 66 54 46
101 81 66 54 46
72 62 52 43 36
80 64 52 43 36
61 53 45 37 31
68 55 45 37 31
50 43 37 31 26
56 46 37 31 26
37 32 28 24 20
41 34 28 24 20
13 14 15
39 34
39 34
31 27 23
31 27 23
26 23 20
26 23 20
22 19 16
22 19 16
17 15 13
17 15 13
0
168
234
129
179
109
151
88
118
61
77
2 4 6 8 10
163 155 143 128 111
223 209 187 161 132
123 117 108 97 84
167 156 140 121 99
101 97 89 80 70
136 128 115 99 82
79 75 70 63 55
100 95 86 75 63
50 48 45 42 37
59 57 53 48 42
12 14 16 18 20
94 76 60 47 38
104 78 60 47 38
70 57 45 36 29
78 58 45 36 29
58 47 37 29 24
64 48 37 29 24
46 38 29 23 19
50 38 29 23 19
32 27 22 17 14
35 28 22 17 14
22 23
32 29
32 29
24 22
24 22
20 18
20 18
16 14
16 14
12 11
12 11
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
b
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
No. of a Connectors
3/ ′′ 8
5.50 0.898 1.43
4.22 0.913 1.41
3.55 0.922 1.40
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2.88 0.930 1.39
2.18 0.939 1.38
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 63
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi Y
COLUMNS Double angles
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Equal legs 8
in. back to back of angles 21⁄2×21⁄2
Size 3⁄ 8
Thickness Wt./ft
X-X AXIS Y-Y AXIS
5⁄ 16
11.8
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
Y
1⁄ 4
10.0
3⁄ 16
8.2
6.14
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
106
147
90
125
73
101
54
70
2 3 4 5 6
101 94 86 76 66
137 125 110 93 76
85 80 73 65 56
116 106 93 79 65
69 65 59 53 46
94 86 76 65 53
52 48 44 40 35
66 61 54 47 40
7 8 9 10 11
55 45 36 29 24
59 46 36 29 24
47 39 31 25 21
51 39 31 25 21
39 32 26 21 17
42 33 26 21 17
30 25 20 16 13
32 25 20 16 13
12
20
20
17
17
14
14
11
11
0
106
147
90
125
73
101
54
70
2 3 4 5 6
101 99 95 90 85
138 133 126 118 109
84 82 79 75 71
114 110 105 98 90
67 65 63 60 56
89 86 82 77 71
46 45 44 42 40
57 55 53 50 47
7 8 9 10 11
79 73 66 60 53
98 88 77 67 57
66 61 55 50 44
82 73 64 55 47
52 48 44 40 35
64 58 51 44 37
37 35 32 29 26
44 40 35 31 27
12 13 14 15 16
47 41 35 31 27
48 41 35 31 27
39 34 29 26 22
40 34 29 26 22
31 27 23 20 18
32 27 23 20 18
23 20 17 15 13
23 20 17 15 13
17 18 19 20
24 21 19 17
24 21 19 17
20 18 16 14
20 18 16 14
16 14 13
16 14 13
12 11 9
12 11 9
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
3.47 0.753 1.21
2.93 0.761 1.20
2.38 0.769 1.19
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.80 0.778 1.18
3/ ′′ 8
No. of a Connectors
3⁄
b
3
3 - 64
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi Y X
COLUMNS Double angles
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Y
3⁄ 8
Equal legs in. back to back of angles 2× ×2
Size 3⁄ 8
Thickness Wt./ft
9.4
X-X AXIS
Fy
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
7.84
3⁄ 16
6.38
1⁄ 8
4.88
3.30
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
83
116
70
98
58
80
44
61
27
34
2 3 4 5 6
76 69 59 49 38
103 88 72 55 39
65 58 50 42 33
87 75 61 47 34
53 48 41 35 28
71 62 51 39 29
40 37 32 27 21
54 47 39 30 22
25 23 20 17 14
31 28 24 19 15
7 8 9 10
29 22 18
29 22 18
25 19 15 12
25 19 15 12
21 16 13 10
21 16 13 10
16 13 10 8
16 13 10 8
11 9 7 6
11 9 7 6
0
83
116
70
98
58
80
44
61
27
34
2 3 4 5 6
79 76 72 67 61
108 102 95 86 76
67 64 60 56 51
90 86 79 72 63
54 51 49 45 41
72 68 63 57 51
39 38 36 33 31
52 49 46 42 37
22 21 20 19 18
26 25 24 22 20
7 8 9 10 11
55 49 43 37 31
66 55 46 37 31
46 41 36 30 26
55 46 38 31 26
37 33 29 24 21
44 37 30 25 21
27 24 21 18 15
32 27 22 18 15
16 15 13 11 10
18 16 14 12 10
12 13 14 15 16
26 22 19 17 15
26 22 19 17 15
22 18 16 14 12
22 18 16 14 12
17 15 13 11 10
17 15 13 11 10
13 11 9 8 7
13 11 9 8 7
8 7 6 5 5
8 7 6 5 5
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
2.72 0.594 1.01
2.30 0.601 1.00
1.88 0.609 0.989
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.43 0.617 0.977
0.960 0.626 0.965
No. of a Connectors
3/ ′′ 8
b
3
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 65
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
Y
COLUMNS Double angles
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Unequal legs
3/ ′′ 8
Long legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles 3⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
Wt./ft
88.4
67.6
46.0
Fy
36
X-X AXIS
1⁄ 2
57.4
39.2
36
50
36
50
36
50
846
376
479
0
673
935 517 718 321 408
10 12 14 16 18
704 667 626 582 535
932 865 792 715 637
541 513 483 450 415
717 667 613 555 496
339 323 306 287 267
419 395 368 340 310
10 12 14 16 18
597 567 533 496 457
792 736 676 612 546
460 437 412 384 354
611 569 523 475 425
289 276 262 246 230
358 338 315 292 267
20 22 24 26 28
488 440 393 348 305
560 486 415 353 305
379 343 308 273 241
438 381 328 279 241
247 226 205 185 165
280 250 221 193 167
20 22 24 26 28
418 378 338 300 264
482 419 359 306 264
324 294 264 235 207
376 328 283 241 208
212 195 177 160 143
242 216 192 168 146
30 32 34 36 38
265 233 207 184 165
265 233 207 184 165
210 184 163 146 131
210 184 163 146 131
146 128 113 101 91
146 128 113 101 91
30 32 34 36 38
230 230 202 202 179 179 160 160 143 143
181 159 141 126 113
181 127 127 159 112 112 141 99 99 126 88 88 113 79 79
41 42
142
142 112 107
112 107
78 74
78 74
40 42 43
129 129 102 102 117 117 92 92
0
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
3⁄ 4
74.8
796 1110 609
0
50
8× ×4 1
b
50
36
50
71 65 62
796 1110 609
846
376
479
0
729 703 672 636 595
978 932 876 811 741
537 519 496 470 440
709 677 638 593 543
301 293 282 270 256
357 346 331 314 295
6 8 10 12 14
568 741 416 533 234 275 520 657 381 473 217 251 464 562 339 405 197 223 404 463 294 333 175 192 342 368 248 263 150 159
935 517 718 321 408
16 18 20 22 24
551 506 459 412 366
667 592 517 445 378
408 375 340 305 271
490 435 381 328 279
240 223 205 187 169
273 249 225 200 176
16 18 20 22 24
282 238 194 160 135
300 238 194 160 135
203 162 132 110 93
26 28 32
321 279 214
323 279 214
238 207 159
239 207 159
151 133 103
152 133 103
25 26
125 115
125 115
85
34 36 40 41 42
190 170 138 131 125
190 170 138 131 125
141 126 103 98
141 126 103 98
92 82 67
92 82 67
A
rx (in.) ry (in.)
26.0 2.49 2.52
19.9 2.53 2.48
13.5 2.56 2.44
22.0 2.52 1.61
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2
204 126 127 162 103 103 132 84 84 110 70 70 93 60 60 85
55
55 3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back (in2)
b
71 65 62
6 8 10 12 14
2
673
36
No. of a Connectors
1
No. of a Connectors
8× ×6
Size Thickness
Y
16.9 2.55 1.55
11.5 2.59 1.51
3 - 66
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
Y X
COLUMNS Double angles
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Unequal legs
3/ ′′ 8
3⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
Wt./ft
52.4
35.8
27.2
Fy
36
50
36
50
36
50
X-X AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
0 471 655 310 401 205 254
3⁄ 4
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
47.2
40.0
32.4
24.6
36 0
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
425 591 358 497 291 388 201 256
8 10 12 14 16
427 404 378 349 318
571 529 481 431 379
283 268 252 233 214
355 332 306 278 248
189 181 171 161 149
230 218 204 188 172
8 10 12 14 16
371 343 312 279 246
488 439 385 329 276
313 290 265 237 209
413 371 327 281 236
18 20 22 24 26
286 255 224 194 166
328 278 232 195 166
194 174 154 135 117
219 190 162 137 117
137 125 113 101 89
155 138 121 105 90
18 20 22 24 26
212 180 150 126 108
225 182 150 126 108
181 155 129 109 93
193 148 158 110 119 156 127 128 96 100 129 106 106 82 82 109 89 89 69 69 93 76 76 59 59
28 143 143 100 100 30 125 125 88 88 32 110 110 77 77 34 97 97 68 68
78 68 59 53
78 68 59 53
28 30 31 32
93 81 76
93 81 76
80 70 65
36 37
47 44
47 44
87 82
87 82
61 58
61 58
b
0 471 655 310 401 205 254
Y-Y AXIS
6× ×4
No. of a Connectors
7× ×4
Size Thickness
6 8 10 12 14
394 362 325 284 242
511 456 393 327 262
238 221 200 176 151
286 260 229 196 161
146 137 127 115 101
167 156 142 126 108
16 18 20 22 24
201 162 132 110 92
204 126 128 162 103 103 132 84 84 110 70 70 92 59 59
87 74 61 51 43
90 74 61 51 43
25 26 27
85 79 73
40
40
0
80 70 65
254 236 216 193 171
65 57 53
325 294 260 225 191
65 57 53
179 167 154 140 125
51 44 41 39
220 202 182 161 140 b
51 44 41 39
425 591 358 497 291 388 201 256
6 8 10 12 14
367 339 306 270 232
481 432 375 315 256
302 279 252 222 191
394 354 308 259 210
236 218 197 174 150
293 266 233 198 162
153 144 132 118 104
181 167 151 132 112
16 18 20 22 24
195 160 136 113 95
211 161 165 126 129 167 132 132 103 103 136 107 107 84 84 113 89 89 70 70 95 75 75 59 59
89 75 61 51 43
93 75 61 51 43
26 27 28
81 75 70
37 35
37 35
2
85 79 73
55 51
55 51
2
81 75 70
64 59
64 59
50 47
50 47
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
No. of a Connectors
Long legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles
Y
15.4 2.22 1.62
10.5 2.25 1.57
7.97 2.27 1.55
13.9 1.88 1.69
11.7 1.90 1.67
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9.50 1.91 1.64
7.22 1.93 1.62
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 67
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
Y
COLUMNS Double angles
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Unequal legs
3/ ′′ 8
Long legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles
Wt./ft
23.4
Y-Y AXIS
X-X AXIS
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
5⁄ 16
19.6
36
50
36
50
0
191
243
145
179
8 10 12 14 16
170 159 146 133 119
209 192 173 153 133
130 123 114 105 95
157 146 134 120 106
18 20 22 24 26
105 92 78 66 56
114 95 79 66 56
85 75 65 56 48
93 79 67 56 48
28 30 32
49 42 37
49 42 37
41 36 32
0
191
243
4 6 8 10 12
148 139 127 113 98
14 16 18 20 22 23
3⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
39.6
3⁄ 8
27.2
5⁄ 16
20.8
50
36
50
0
355
493
245
340 183 238 143 182
4 6 8 10 12
337 317 290 259 225
460 233 421 219 372 202 318 181 262 158
14 16 18 20 22
191 158 127 103 85
209 161 127 103 85
41 36 32
24 25 26
72 66
72 66
51 47 44
145
179
0
355
493
245
176 163 147 127 105
107 101 94 85 75
122 115 106 94 80
4 6 8 10 12
325 303 274 241 206
437 215 396 200 345 182 289 160 232 136
284 258 226 189 152
152 142 129 114 98
81 66 53 43 36
84 66 53 43 36
64 53 43 35 29
66 53 43 35 29
14 16 18 20 22
170 144 114 93 77
188 144 114 93 77
113 90 72 58 48
117 90 72 58 48
82 65 52 43 35
84 65 52 43 35
65 53 43 35 29
68 53 43 35 29
33
33
27
27
24 25
65 60
65 60
41
41
30
30
25
25
b
318 292 260 223 185
36
17.4
36
175 165 152 137 120
50
36
50
224 208 187 163 138
137 130 120 109 97
172 161 146 129 111
135 149 104 113 113 116 87 90 91 91 71 71 74 74 58 58 61 61 48 48
85 72 60 49 41
93 76 61 49 41
34 31 29
34 31 29
51 47 44
40 37 34
40 37 34
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
186 113 134 171 107 125 152 98 114 130 88 99 107 77 84
2
6.84 1.94 1.39
5.74 1.95 1.38
b
340 183 238 143 182
2
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
No. of a Connectors
3⁄ 8
Thickness
5× ×31⁄2
No. of a Connectors
6× ×31⁄2
Size
Y
11.6 1.55 1.53
8.00 1.58 1.49
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.09 1.60 1.46
5.12 1.61 1.45
3 - 68
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
Y X
COLUMNS Double angles
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Unequal legs
3/ ′′ 8
5× ×3
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
25.6
X-X AXIS
Fy
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
19.6
1⁄ 4
16.4
13.2
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
230
319
172
223
134
170
95
117
2 4 6 8 10
227 219 206 189 170
313 298 274 244 210
170 164 155 143 129
220 210 195 176 154
132 128 122 113 103
168 161 151 137 121
95 92 88 82 76
115 112 105 97 88
12 14 16 18 20
149 128 107 87 70
175 141 110 87 70
114 98 82 68 55
130 107 86 68 55
91 79 68 56 46
104 88 71 57 46
68 61 53 45 38
78 67 56 47 38
22 24 26 27
58 49 42
58 49 42
45 38 32
45 38 32
38 32 27
38 32 27
31 26 22 21
31 26 22 21
0
230
319
172
223
134
170
95
117
2 4 6 8 10
207 195 177 153 128
276 255 223 184 143
146 138 125 110 92
179 167 149 126 101
107 102 94 84 72
128 121 110 95 78
71 68 64 58 51
80 77 72 64 55
12 14 16 18 20
101 81 62 49 40
109 81 62 49 40
74 57 44 35 28
76 57 44 35 28
59 46 36 29 23
61 46 36 29 23
43 35 28 22 18
45 35 28 22 18
No. of a Connectors
Long legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles
Y
b
2
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
7.50 1.59 1.25
5.72 1.61 1.23
4.80 1.61 1.22
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3.88 1.62 1.21
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 69
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
Y
COLUMNS Double angles
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Unequal legs
3/ ′′ 8
Long legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
23.8
Fy
X-X AXIS
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
18.2
15.4
12.4
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
214
298
163
227
137
179
101
129
2 4 6 8 10
210 198 179 155 130
289 266 232 191 148
160 151 137 120 101
221 204 178 147 116
134 127 115 101 85
174 162 143 120 96
99 94 87 77 66
126 118 106 91 75
12 14 16 18 20
104 80 61 48 39
109 80 61 48 39
81 63 48 38 31
86 63 48 38 31
69 54 41 33 26
73 54 41 33 26
55 44 34 27 22
59 44 34 27 22
24
24
20
20
0
214
298
163
227
137
179
101
129
2 4 6 8 10
203 196 183 167 148
276 262 240 211 180
150 144 135 124 110
200 190 174 155 132
121 116 110 101 90
150 143 133 120 104
84 81 77 72 65
99 96 91 83 74
12 14 16 18 20
128 108 88 74 60
147 116 93 74 60
95 80 66 53 43
108 86 66 53 43
78 66 54 43 35
87 70 54 43 35
58 50 42 34 28
64 53 42 34 28
22 24 25 26
50 42 39 36
50 42 39 36
35 30 28 25
35 30 28 25
29 25 23
29 25 23
23 20 18
23 20 18
b
21
Y-Y AXIS
1⁄ 4
No. of a Connectors
4× ×31⁄2
Size
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
Y
2
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
7.00 1.23 1.58
5.34 1.25 1.56
4.49 1.26 1.55
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3.63 1.27 1.54
3 - 70
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
Y X
COLUMNS Double angles
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Unequal legs
3/ ′′ 8
4× ×3
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
22.2
X-X AXIS
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
3⁄ 8
17.0
1⁄ 4
14.4
11.6
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
199
276
152
211
127
166
94
120
2 4 6 8 10
195 184 167 146 122
269 248 217 179 141
149 141 128 112 94
206 190 166 138 109
125 118 108 94 80
162 151 133 112 90
93 88 81 72 62
117 110 99 85 70
12 14 16 18 20
99 77 59 46 38
105 77 59 46 38
76 60 46 36 29
81 60 46 36 29
65 51 39 31 25
69 51 39 31 25
51 41 32 25 21
55 42 32 25 21
27
27
23
23
19
19
0
199
276
152
211
127
166
94
120
2 4 6 8 10
187 177 161 142 120
253 235 207 173 137
138 131 119 105 89
183 171 151 127 101
111 105 96 85 73
137 129 116 99 81
77 74 69 62 54
92 88 80 71 59
12 14 16 18 20
97 76 61 49 39
108 80 61 49 39
72 56 43 35 28
76 56 43 35 28
59 46 36 29 23
62 46 36 29 23
45 36 28 23 18
47 36 28 23 18
21 22
36 33
36 33
25
25
21
21
17
17
b
21
Y-Y AXIS
5⁄ 16
2
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
No. of a Connectors
Long legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles
Y
6.50 1.25 1.33
4.97 1.26 1.31
4.18 1.27 1.30
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3.38 1.28 1.29
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 71
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
Y
COLUMNS Double angles
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Unequal legs
3/ ′′ 8
Long legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles
Wt./ft
15.8
X-X AXIS
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
13.2
10.8
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
140
195
118
162
92
119
2 4 6 8 10
137 127 112 93 74
188 169 142 111 80
115 107 95 79 63
157 141 119 94 69
90 84 75 63 51
116 106 91 73 55
12 14 16 17 18
56 41 32 28 25
56 41 32 28 25
48 35 27 24 21
48 35 27 24 21
39 29 22 20 18
0
140
195
118
162
2 4 6 8 10
131 124 114 101 86
176 164 146 123 99
107 102 94 83 71
12 14
71 56
76 59
16 18 20
45 36 29
22
24
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 4
14.4
9.8
36
50
36
50
0
129
179
85
110
2 4 6 8 10
126 117 103 86 69
173 156 131 103 75
83 77 69 59 47
107 97 84 68 52
40 29 22 20 18
12 14 16 18
52 39 30 23
53 39 30 23
37 27 21 17
37 27 21 17
92
119
0
129
179
85
110
140 131 118 100 81
79 76 70 63 54
97 92 83 73 60
2 4 6 8 10
118 109 96 80 63
158 142 119 92 69
71 67 59 50 40
87 80 69 56 42
59 46
62 47
45 36
48 36
12 14
49 36
49 36
30 22
30 22
45 36 29
36 29 23
36 29 23
28 22 18
28 22 18
16 18
28 22
28 22
17 14
17 14
24
19
19
15
15
b
No. of a Connectors
3⁄ 8
Thickness
31⁄2×21⁄2
No. of a Connectors
31⁄2×3
Size
Y
b
2
Y-Y AXIS
2
3
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
4.59 1.09 1.36
3.87 1.10 1.35
3.13 1.11 1.33
4.22 1.10 1.11
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2.88 1.12 1.09
3 - 72
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
Y X
COLUMNS Double angles
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Unequal legs
3/ ′′ 8
3⁄ 8
Thickness
13.2
Wt./ft
Y-Y AXIS
X-X AXIS
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
1⁄ 4
36
3⁄ 16
9.0
6.77
50
36
50
36
50
0 118 163
80
107
55
71
2 113 155 3 109 146 4 102 134 5 94 120 6 86 105
78 75 70 65 59
103 97 90 81 71
54 52 49 46 42
68 65 60 55 50
3× ×2
No. of a Connectors
3× ×21⁄2
Size
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
11.8
36
1⁄ 4
10.0
3⁄ 16
8.2
36
6.1
50
36
50
50
0
106 147
90
125
73
97
50
64
2 3 4 5 6
103 98 93 86 78
141 132 122 109 96
87 83 78 73 66
119 112 103 93 82
70 68 64 59 54
93 88 81 74 65
49 47 45 42 38
61 59 55 50 45
7 8 9 10 11
70 61 53 45 38
82 69 56 45 38
59 52 45 39 32
70 59 48 39 32
49 43 37 32 27
57 48 40 32 27
35 31 28 24 20
40 35 30 25 21
12 13 14 15 16
32 27 23 20
32 27 23 20
27 23 20 17
27 23 20 17
22 19 16 14
22 19 16 14
17 15 13 11 10
17 15 13 11 10
7 8 9 10 11
76 67 58 49 40
90 75 60 49 40
53 47 40 34 29
62 52 43 35 29
38 34 30 26 22
44 38 32 27 22
12 13 14 15
34 29 25 22
34 29 25 22
24 21 18 15
24 21 18 15
19 16 14 12
19 16 14 12
0 118 163
80
107
55
71
0
106 147
90
125
73
97
50
64
2 110 149 3 107 143 4 102 135 5 97 125 6 90 114
71 69 66 63 59
90 87 83 77 71
45 44 43 41 39
54 53 51 48 45
2 3 4 5 6
97 131 93 122 86 111 79 98 71 84
80 76 71 65 58
107 100 91 81 69
63 60 56 51 46
79 74 68 61 53
40 39 37 34 31
48 46 43 39 35
7 8 9 10 11
62 53 47 39 32
70 60 48 39 32
51 44 37 32 27
58 49 39 32 27
40 35 29 25 21
45 37 31 25 21
28 24 21 17 15
30 26 21 17 15
12 13 14 15
27 23 20 18
27 23 20 18
22 19 17 14
22 19 17 14
18 15 13
18 15 13
12 11 10
12 11 10
7 8 9 10 11
83 102 76 90 68 77 61 66 53 58
54 50 45 40 35
64 57 49 42 35
36 34 31 28 25
41 38 34 30 26
12 13 14 15 16
48 42 36 31 28
49 42 36 31 28
30 26 23 20 18
30 26 23 20 18
22 19 16 14 13
22 19 16 14 13
17 18 19
24 22 20
24 22 20
16 14
16 14
11 10
11 10
b
2
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back A
(in2)
rx (in.) ry (in.)
3.84 0.928 1.16
2.63 0.945 1.13
1.99 0.954 1.12
3.47 0.940 0.917
2.93 0.948 0.903
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2.38 0.957 0.891
1.80 0.966 0.879
No. of a Connectors
Long legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles
Y
b
2
3
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 73
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
Y
COLUMNS Double angles
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Unequal legs
3/ ′′ 8
Long legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles 3⁄ 8
Thickness Wt./ft
10.6
X-X AXIS
Fy
Y-Y AXIS
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
9.0
3⁄ 16
7.2
5.5
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
95
131
80
111
65
91
49
63
2 3 4 5 6
90 84 77 69 60
122 112 99 84 69
76 72 66 59 51
104 95 84 72 59
62 58 54 48 42
85 78 69 59 49
46 44 40 36 32
59 55 49 43 36
7 8 9 10 11
50 42 33 27 22
55 42 33 27 22
43 36 29 23 19
47 37 29 23 19
36 30 24 19 16
39 30 24 19 16
27 23 19 15 12
30 24 19 15 12
12 13
19
19
16
16
13 11
13 11
10 9
10 9
0
95
131
80
111
65
91
49
63
2 3 4 5 6
89 85 80 74 67
120 113 104 93 82
74 71 66 61 55
99 93 85 76 66
58 56 52 48 44
77 73 67 60 52
41 39 37 34 31
50 48 44 40 36
7 8 9 10 11
60 52 45 38 32
70 58 47 38 32
49 42 36 32 26
56 48 39 32 26
39 33 28 25 21
44 36 31 25 21
28 24 21 17 15
31 26 22 18 15
12 13 14 15 16
27 23 20 17 15
27 23 20 17 15
22 19 16 14
22 19 16 14
17 15 13 11
17 15 13 11
13 11 10 8
13 11 10 8
b
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
No. of a Connectors
21⁄2×2
Size
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
Y
3.09 0.768 0.961
2.62 0.776 0.948
2.13 0.784 0.935
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.62 0.793 0.923
2
3
3 - 74
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Double angles
Y X
X
Unequal legs
8× ×6
Size Thickness Wt./ft
88.4
Fy
36
X-X AXIS Y-Y AXIS
67.6
46.0
50
36
50
796 1110 609
846
376
479
8 12 16 20 24
677 552 416 288 200
882 666 449 288 200
521 428 325 228 159
680 518 354 228 159
328 276 217 159 111
402 323 237 160 111
28 29
147
147 116 109
116 109
82 76
796 1110 609
846
12 16 20 24 28
725 681 628 569 506
970 890 796 695 591
547 514 474 429 382
32 36 40 44 48
443 380 320 265 223
490 396 321 265 223
52 56 60 61 62
190 164 143 138 134
190 164 143 138 134
63
130
130
0
50
1⁄ 2
36
0
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
3⁄ 4
1
8× ×4 3⁄ 4
1 74.8
1⁄ 2
57.4
50
0
673
935 517 718 321 408
4 6 8 10 12
600 521 426 329 240
798 654 495 346 240
82 76
14 16 17 18
176 176 141 141 101 101 135 135 108 108 78 78 120 120 96 96 69 69 61 61
376
479
0
673
935 517 718 321 408
727 667 598 522 444
325 308 287 263 237
393 368 338 304 267
12 16 20 24 28
628 596 558 514 467
849 790 720 643 563
480 455 426 392 355
647 602 548 489 426
295 281 264 245 224
365 344 318 290 258
333 286 240 199 168
368 297 241 199 168
210 183 156 131 110
229 192 157 131 110
32 36 40 44 48
418 369 320 274 231
483 405 333 275 231
317 279 242 206 174
364 305 250 206 174
202 179 157 135 115
227 195 165 137 115
143 123 108 104 101
143 123 108 104 101
94 81 71 69
94 81 71 69
52 56 60 64 66
197 170 148 130 122
197 148 148 170 128 128 148 111 111 130 98 98 122 92 92
98 85 74 65 61
98 85 74 65 61
67 68
119 119 115 115
b
3
36
39.2
36
463 404 333 260 192
50
616 509 390 276 192
89
36
292 259 219 177 137
50
361 311 252 192 138
89
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
26.0 1.73 3.78
19.9 1.76 3.74
13.5 1.79 3.69
22.0 1.03 4.10
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
16.9 1.05 4.05
11.5 1.08 4.00
No. of a Connectors
Short legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles No. of a Connectors
Y
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
3/ ′′ 8
b
6
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 75
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Double angles
Y X
X
Unequal legs
7× ×4
Size 3⁄ 4
Thickness Wt./ft
1⁄ 2
52.4
Fy
36
50
3⁄ 8
35.8
36
50
27.2
36
50
No. of a Connectors
Short legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
0 471 655 310 401 205 254 4 6 8 10 12
426 375 313 249 188
568 476 371 270 188
282 250 212 171 132
354 304 245 186 133
189 171 149 124 100
230 203 171 137 104
14 138 138 16 106 106 18 84 84
98 75 59
98 75 59
77 59 47
3/ ′′ 8
Y
6× ×4 3⁄ 4
5⁄ 8
47.2
50 0
36
50
1⁄ 2
40.0
36
3⁄ 8
32.4
50
36
24.6
50
36
50
425 591 358 497 291 388 201 256
4 6 8 10 12
386 342 289 232 178
436 370 293 218 154
265 236 201 164 127
343 295 238 181 129
186 168 146 122 97
231 203 170 135 102
77 59 47
14 16 18 19
132 132 113 113 101 101 86 86 80 80 68 68
95 73 57 52
95 73 57 52
75 57 45 41
75 57 45 41
0 471 655 310 401 205 254
0
8 12 16 20 24
449 427 397 362 324
611 570 516 454 389
291 277 259 236 212
368 346 317 282 245
28 32 36 40 44
283 243 204 168 139
323 261 207 168 139
186 160 135 111 92
207 129 143 171 113 122 137 98 102 111 83 83 92 69 69
48 117 117 52 99 99 56 86 86 57 83 83 58 80 80
77 66 57 55
77 66 57 55
188 181 171 158 144
58 49 43 41
b
225 215 201 184 164
58 49 43 41
5
517 437 345 255 179
326 289 245 198 152
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
15.4 1.09 3.49
10.5 1.11 3.44
7.97 1.13 3.42
b
425 591 358 497 291 388 201 256
8 12 16 20 24
398 370 334 293 249
538 486 422 352 282
28 32 36 40 44
206 166 131 106 88
216 172 179 138 143 100 105 165 138 138 110 110 81 82 131 109 109 87 87 65 65 106 88 88 71 71 52 52 88 73 73 58 58 43 43
45 46 47 48 49
84 80 77 74 71
84 80 77 74 71
333 310 279 245 208
70 67 64 61
449 406 352 294 235
70 67 64 61
267 249 224 197 167
56 53 51 49
346 314 275 230 186
56 53 51 49
181 170 155 138 119
42 40 38
222 205 184 158 131
42 40 38
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
No. of a Connectors
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
13.9 1.12 2.94
11.7 1.13 2.92
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9.50 1.15 2.90
7.22 1.17 2.87
4
3 - 76
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Double angles
Y X
X
Unequal legs
6× ×31⁄2
Size 3⁄ 8
Thickness Wt./ft
23.4
Y-Y AXIS
X-X AXIS
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
5⁄ 16
19.6
36
50
36
50
0
191
243
145
179
4 6 8 10
170 148 121 94
210 175 136 99
131 115 97 77
158 135 109 82
12 14 16
69 50 39
69 50 39
58 43 33
59 43 33
0
191
243
145
8 12 16 20 24
173 160 144 125 112
213 194 170 142 124
28 32 36 40 44
94 76 63 51 42
48 49
36 34
5× ×31⁄2 3⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
39.6
3⁄ 8
27.2
5⁄ 16
20.8
50
36
50
0
355
493
245
340 183 238 143 182
2 4 6 8 10
344 313 267 214 160
472 238 326 413 217 288 331 187 234 243 152 176 164 116 121
12 14 16 17
114 84 64
114 84 64
84 62 47
179
0
355
493
245
340 183 238 143 182
130 122 111 98 84
154 143 128 110 98
8 10 12 14 16
318 300 279 257 233
423 390 354 334 297
217 205 191 175 159
287 265 240 214 201
99 80 63 51 42
75 62 53 43 35
80 66 53 43 35
18 20 22 24 26
224 201 179 157 144
260 225 201 169 144
152 136 121 106 96
175 106 127 151 101 111 134 90 95 113 79 84 96 69 72
36 34
30 29
30 29
28 30 32 34 36
125 109 95 85 75
125 109 95 85 75
83 72 64 56 50
83 72 64 56 50
62 54 48 42 38
62 54 48 42 38
49 43 38 33 30
49 43 38 33 30
38 39 40
68 64 61
68 64 61
45 43 41
45 43 41
34 32 31
34 32 31
27 25
27 25
41
58
58
b
5
36
17.4
36
178 163 141 116 89
84 62 47
50
50
229 139 176 205 129 159 170 113 135 131 94 107 94 74 79
65 48 37 32
160 151 141 130 118
36
65 48 37 32
198 185 169 153 143
56 41 31 28
123 117 110 102 94
6.84 0.988 2.95
5.74 0.996 2.94
11.6 0.977 2.48
8.00 1.01 2.43
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.09 1.02 2.41
b
56 41 31 28
149 140 130 119 106
85 100 81 89 73 77 65 66 57 57
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
No. of a Connectors
Short legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles No. of a Connectors
Y
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
3/ ′′ 8
5.12 1.03 2.39
4
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 77
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Double angles
Y X
X
Unequal legs
Short legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles 5× ×3
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
X-X AXIS Y-Y AXIS
3⁄ 8
25.6
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
Y
5⁄ 16
19.6
1⁄ 4
16.4
13.2
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
230
319
172
223
134
170
95
117
2 4 6 8 10
220 192 154 113 76
300 249 184 119 76
165 146 118 88 61
212 180 137 94 61
129 115 95 73 52
162 140 110 79 52
92 84 71 56 42
112 99 81 61 43
12 13 14
53 45
53 45
42 36 31
42 36 31
36 31 26
36 31 26
30 25 22
30 25 22
0
230
319
172
223
134
170
95
117
8 10 12 14 16
205 194 181 167 152
273 253 230 205 194
152 144 135 125 114
190 178 163 147 139
118 112 106 98 90
144 135 126 115 103
83 79 75 71 66
96 92 87 81 75
18 20 22 24 26
146 132 117 103 95
170 147 132 112 95
109 99 88 78 68
124 109 94 84 71
82 79 71 63 56
98 87 76 66 59
61 56 54 49 44
68 65 58 51 45
28 30 32 34 36
82 72 63 56 50
82 72 63 56 50
62 54 47 42 37
62 54 47 42 37
51 45 39 35 31
51 45 39 35 31
39 36 31 28 25
41 36 31 28 25
38 40 41
45 40 38
45 40 38
34 30 29
34 30 29
28 25 24
28 25 24
22 20 19
22 20 19
3/ ′′ 8
No. of a Connectors
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
b
4
5
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
7.50 0.829 2.50
5.72 0.845 2.48
4.80 0.853 2.47
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3.88 0.861 2.46
3 - 78
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Double angles
Y X
Y
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Unequal legs
3/ ′′ 8
Short legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles 4× ×31⁄2
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
23.8
X-X AXIS
Fy
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
18.2
1⁄ 4
15.4
12.4
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
214
298
163
227
137
179
101
129
2 4 6 8 10
208 191 166 137 106
286 255 210 160 112
159 147 128 106 83
219 195 162 125 89
133 123 108 90 71
172 156 131 103 76
99 92 81 69 55
125 114 98 79 60
12 14 16 17
78 57 44 39
78 57 44 39
62 45 35 31
62 45 35 31
53 39 30 26
53 39 30 26
42 31 24 21
43 31 24 21
0
214
298
163
227
137
179
101
129
4 6 8 10 12
201 190 177 161 143
271 252 228 200 181
150 142 132 120 107
200 187 169 149 127
122 116 108 99 89
152 143 132 117 102
86 83 78 72 66
103 99 92 84 75
14 16 18 20 22
132 115 98 86 71
153 126 106 86 71
94 86 73 61 53
114 94 75 61 53
77 71 61 51 42
92 77 62 51 42
58 54 47 40 33
65 59 49 40 33
24 26 28 30 31
60 51 44 38 36
60 51 44 38 36
45 38 33 29 27
45 38 33 29 27
36 30 26 23 21
36 30 26 23 21
28 24 21 18
28 24 21 18
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
7.00 1.04 1.89
5.34 1.06 1.87
4.49 1.07 1.86
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3.63 1.07 1.85
No. of a Connectors
X
b
3
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 79
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Double angles
Y X
X
Unequal legs
Short legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles 4× ×3
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
X-X AXIS Y-Y AXIS
3⁄ 8
22.2
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
Y
5⁄ 16
17.0
1⁄ 4
14.4
11.6
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
199
276
152
211
127
166
94
120
2 4 6 8 10
191 169 138 104 72
261 220 166 112 72
146 130 107 81 57
200 170 129 88 57
123 109 90 69 49
158 136 106 75 49
91 82 69 54 40
115 101 81 59 40
12 14
50 37
50 37
40 29
40 29
34 25
34 25
28 21
28 21
0
199
276
152
211
127
166
94
120
4 6 8 10 12
190 182 172 160 146
259 245 226 204 180
143 137 130 121 110
193 183 169 153 135
118 113 107 99 91
149 142 132 120 107
85 82 78 73 67
103 99 93 86 78
14 16 18 20 22
131 116 101 86 73
156 131 108 88 73
99 87 76 65 54
117 98 81 66 54
81 72 62 53 44
93 79 65 53 44
61 55 48 41 35
69 60 51 42 35
24 26 28 30 32
61 52 45 39 34
61 52 45 39 34
46 39 34 29 26
46 39 34 29 26
37 32 27 24 21
37 32 27 24 21
30 25 22 19 17
30 25 22 19 17
3/ ′′ 8
No. of a Connectors
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
b
3
4
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
6.50 0.864 1.96
4.97 0.879 1.94
4.18 0.887 1.93
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3.38 0.896 1.92
3 - 80
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Double angles
Y X
X
Unequal legs
31⁄2×3
Size 3⁄ 8
Thickness Wt./ft
15.8
X-X AXIS
Fy
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
13.2
10.8
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
140
195
118
162
92
2 4 6 8 10
135 121 100 77 55
185 158 122 84 55
114 102 85 65 47
154 132 103 72 47
12 14 15
38 28
38 28
33 24 21
0
140
195
4 6 8 10 12
130 123 114 103 91
14 16 18 20 22 24 26 27
31⁄2×21⁄2 3⁄ 8
1⁄ 4
14.4
9.8
50
36
50
36
50
119
0
129
179
85
110
89 80 67 53 38
114 100 79 58 39
2 4 6 8 10
122 102 76 51 32
165 129 86 51 32
81 68 52 36 23
102 83 59 36 23
33 24 21
27 20 17
27 20 17
11 12
27
27
19 16
19 16
118
162
92
119
0
129
179
85
110
175 162 146 127 107
108 102 94 85 75
142 132 119 104 88
82 77 72 66 58
100 94 86 77 66
4 6 8 10 12
122 116 108 98 87
165 154 139 122 105
78 74 69 63 57
97 91 84 75 65
78 66 54 44 36
87 68 54 44 36
65 55 45 37 30
72 57 45 37 30
51 43 36 29 24
55 45 36 29 24
14 16 18 20 22
76 65 55 45 37
87 70 55 45 37
50 43 36 30 25
55 46 37 30 25
31 26 24
31 26 24
26 22 20
26 22 20
20 17 16
20 17 16
24 26 28 29
31 27 23 21
31 27 23 21
21 18 15
21 18 15
b
3
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
4.59 0.897 1.67
3.87 0.905 1.66
3.13 0.914 1.65
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4.22 0.719 1.74
2.88 0.735 1.72
No. of a Connectors
Short legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles No. of a Connectors
Y
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
3/ ′′ 8
b
4
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 81
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Double angles
Y X
X
Unequal legs
3× ×21⁄2
Size 3⁄ 8
Thickness Wt./ft
13.2
X-X AXIS
Fy
36
3⁄ 16
9.0
6.77
50
36
50
36
50
0 118 163
80
107
55
71
2 111 151 3 104 137 4 94 120 5 83 100 6 71 81
76 71 65 58 50
100 91 81 69 56
53 50 46 41 36
66 62 55 48 41
45 35 27 22 18
31 26 21 17 14
34 27 21 17 14
3/ ′′ 8
Y
3× ×2 3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
11.8
50
36
1⁄ 4
10.0
3⁄ 16
8.2
6.1
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
106 147
90
125
73
97
50
64
2 3 4 5 6
96 129 85 109 72 86 58 64 44 45
82 73 61 50 38
109 93 74 55 39
66 59 50 41 32
86 74 59 45 32
46 42 36 30 24
58 51 42 33 25
7 8 9
33 25 20
33 25 20
28 22 17
28 22 17
24 18 14
24 18 14
18 14 11
18 14 11
106 147
90
125
73
97
50
64
b 7 8 9 10 11
59 48 38 31 25
63 48 38 31 25
42 34 27 22 18
12
21
b
21
15
15
12
12
0 118 163
80
107
55
71
0
2 113 155 4 109 146 6 101 132 8 91 114 10 79 95
75 72 67 60 53
97 92 84 73 62
49 47 45 41 36
59 57 53 48 41
2 4 6 8 10
104 100 93 85 76
143 135 123 109 92
87 84 78 71 63
119 113 103 91 77
70 67 63 57 51
92 87 80 70 60
47 45 43 39 35
58 55 52 47 41
12 14 16 18 20
67 56 44 35 28
76 58 44 35 28
45 37 29 23 19
50 38 29 23 19
32 27 22 17 14
35 28 22 17 14
12 14 16 18 20
65 55 45 36 29
75 59 46 36 29
54 46 37 30 24
62 49 38 30 24
44 37 30 24 19
49 39 30 24 19
31 26 22 18 14
35 28 22 18 14
22 24
23 20
23 20
16 13
16 13
12 10
12 10
22 24 25
24 20 19
24 20 20 17 19 15
20 16 17 13 15 12
16 13 12
12 10 9
12 10 9
3
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
1⁄ 4
No. of a Connectors
Short legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles
No. of a Connectors
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
3.84 0.736 1.47
2.63 0.753 1.45
1.99 0.761 1.44
3.47 0.559 1.55
2.93 0.567 1.53
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2.38 0.574 1.52
1.80 0.583 1.51
4
3 - 82
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Double angles
Y X
Y
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Unequal legs
3/ ′′ 8
Short legs 3⁄8 in. back to back of angles 21⁄2×2
Size 3⁄ 8
Thickness Wt./ft
10.6
X-X AXIS
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
9.0
3⁄ 16
7.2
5.5
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
95
131
80
111
65
91
49
63
2 3 4 5 6
86 77 66 54 42
116 99 79 60 42
73 66 56 46 36
98 84 68 51 37
60 54 46 38 30
80 69 56 43 31
45 40 35 29 23
57 50 41 32 24
7 8 9 10
31 24 19
31 24 19
27 21 16
27 21 16
23 17 14
23 17 14
18 14 11 9
18 14 11 9
0
95
131
80
111
65
91
49
63
2 4 6 8 10
92 86 78 69 58
126 116 101 84 66
77 73 66 57 47
105 97 84 69 54
62 58 53 46 38
84 77 67 55 43
45 42 38 33 28
56 52 46 39 31
12 14 16 18 20
46 36 28 22 18
49 36 28 22 18
38 29 22 17 14
39 29 22 17 14
30 23 18 14 11
31 23 18 14 11
22 17 13 10 9
23 17 13 10 9
21
16
16
13
13
No. of a Connectors
X
b
Y-Y AXIS
3
4
Properties of 2 angles—3⁄8 in. back to back 2
A (in ) rx (in.) ry (in.)
3.09 0.577 1.28
2.62 0.584 1.26
2.13 0.592 1.25
aFor Y-Y axis, welded or fully tensioned bolted connectors only. bFor number of connectors, see double angle column discussion.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.62 0.600 1.24
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 83
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Designation
X-X AXIS Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
Y
WT 18 150
Wt./ft
Fy
X
140
130
122.5
115
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1350
1730
1260
1510
1150
1330
1040
1170
925
1030
10 12 14 16 18
1310 1300 1280 1260 1240
1670 1650 1620 1590 1550
1230 1210 1190 1180 1150
1470 1440 1420 1390 1360
1120 1100 1090 1070 1050
1290 1270 1250 1220 1200
1010 998 985 970 953
1140 1130 1110 1090 1070
903 893 882 869 855
998 986 972 956 939
20 22 24 26 28
1210 1180 1150 1120 1090
1510 1460 1420 1370 1320
1130 1100 1080 1050 1020
1330 1290 1250 1210 1170
1030 1010 983 957 930
1170 1140 1110 1070 1040
935 915 893 870 847
1050 1020 993 964 934
839 822 803 784 763
920 899 876 853 828
30 32 34 36 38
1060 1020 984 947 910
1260 1210 1160 1100 1040
984 951 917 883 847
1120 1080 1030 987 940
901 871 841 810 778
1000 965 926 886 847
822 796 769 742 714
903 871 838 804 770
742 719 696 673 649
802 776 748 720 692
40
872
989
812
893
746
806
686
736
624
663
0
1350
1730
1260
1510
1150
1330
1040
1170
925
1030
10 12 14 16 18
1210 1190 1160 1130 1090
1510 1470 1430 1370 1320
1120 1100 1070 1040 1010
1320 1290 1250 1210 1160
1010 990 966 938 908
1140 1120 1090 1050 1010
906 888 867 843 817
1010 985 959 930 898
803 788 770 750 728
874 857 836 812 786
20 22 24 26 28
1050 1010 962 916 868
1260 1190 1130 1060 988
972 932 891 848 804
1110 1060 1000 943 884
876 841 804 766 726
971 927 880 833 784
789 759 727 693 659
863 826 787 747 705
704 679 651 623 593
758 728 696 662 628
30 32 34 36 38
820 771 721 672 624
918 848 780 713 647
758 713 667 622 577
825 766 708 650 595
686 645 604 563 523
734 684 634 585 537
623 587 551 515 480
662 619 577 534 493
563 532 501 469 438
592 557 521 485 450
40
577
585
533
540
484
490
445
452
408
415
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
44.1 5.27 3.83
41.2 5.25 3.81
38.2 5.26 3.78
36.0 5.26 3.75
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
33.8 5.25 3.73
3 - 84
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi X
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
Designation 105
Wt./ft
X-X AXIS
Fy
36
97
50
91
85
80
75
67.5
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
908 1040 772
851
683
726
587
601
518
521
458
457
385
385
10 12 14 16 18
887 1010 755 878 1000 748 868 986 740 856 971 731 843 954 720
831 822 812 801 788
670 664 657 649 640
710 704 696 687 677
576 571 566 560 553
590 585 579 572 565
509 505 500 495 489
512 508 503 498 492
451 448 444 440 435
449 446 442 438 433
380 377 374 371 367
380 377 374 371 367
20 22 24 26 28
828 813 796 778 759
935 915 893 870 846
709 696 683 668 653
775 759 743 726 708
631 620 609 597 584
667 655 642 629 614
545 537 528 518 508
557 548 539 529 518
483 476 468 460 452
486 479 471 463 454
429 424 417 411 403
428 422 416 409 402
363 359 354 348 343
363 359 354 348 343
30 32 36 40
739 719 675 630
821 795 740 684
637 621 586 549
689 669 628 585
571 557 527 496
599 584 551 517
497 486 462 437
507 495 470 444
443 433 413 392
445 436 415 394
396 388 371 353
395 387 370 352
337 331 317 303
337 331 317 303
908 1040 772
851
683
726
587
601
518
521
458
457
385
385
10 12 14 16 18
716 687 654 617 578
791 756 715 670 622
607 585 559 530 499
653 627 597 563 527
534 515 494 470 444
558 538 515 488 460
457 442 425 406 385
465 450 432 412 391
397 385 371 356 339
399 387 373 357 340
344 335 323 311 297
344 334 323 310 296
268 261 253 244 234
268 261 253 244 234
20 22 24 26 28
537 494 450 407 364
572 521 469 418 367
465 431 395 360 325
489 449 409 369 330
416 387 358 327 297
430 398 366 333 301
363 340 315 291 266
368 344 319 293 268
320 301 280 260 239
321 302 281 260 239
281 265 248 231 213
281 265 248 231 213
223 211 198 185 172
223 211 198 185 172
30 32 34 36 39
323 285 254 228 195
323 285 254 228 195
291 258 230 206 176
291 258 230 206 176
268 239 213 191 164
269 239 213 191 164
242 218 194 174 150
242 218 194 174 150
218 197 177 159 137
218 197 177 159 137
196 178 161 144 124
195 178 161 144 124
158 144 131 118 102
158 144 131 118 102
41 42 43
177 169 161
177 160 169 153 161
160 153
149 142
149 142
136 130
136 130
124
124
113
113
0
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
WT 18
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
30.9 5.65 2.58
28.5 5.62 2.56
26.8 5.62 2.55
25.0 5.61 2.53
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
23.5 5.61 2.50
22.1 5.62 2.47
19.9 5.66 2.38
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 85
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Designation
Y-Y AXIS
X-X AXIS
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
WT 16.5 120.5
Wt./ft
Y
36
50
110.5
36
50
100.5
76
70.5
65
59
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0 1080 1300 964 1110 810
899
532
548
463
467
402
401
330
330
10 12 14 16 18
1050 1040 1020 1000 980
1260 1240 1210 1190 1160
935 923 909 893 875
1070 1050 1030 1010 990
788 779 767 755 741
872 860 847 831 814
521 516 510 503 495
535 530 524 516 508
453 449 444 439 433
457 453 448 442 436
394 391 387 383 378
393 390 386 382 377
324 321 318 315 311
324 321 318 315 311
20 22 24 26 28
958 933 907 880 851
1120 1090 1050 1020 975
855 834 811 787 762
965 937 908 878 846
725 708 690 672 652
795 775 753 730 706
487 478 468 458 447
500 490 480 469 458
426 419 411 402 393
429 422 414 405 396
372 366 360 353 345
371 365 359 352 345
307 303 298 293 287
307 303 298 293 287
30 32 34 36 40
821 790 759 727 662
934 892 849 806 720
737 710 682 654 598
813 779 745 710 639
631 610 588 565 520
681 656 630 603 549
436 424 411 399 373
446 433 420 407 379
384 374 364 354 332
387 377 366 356 334
338 330 321 313 295
337 329 321 312 295
282 276 269 263 249
282 276 269 263 249
0 1080 1300 964 1110 810
899
532
548
463
467
402
401
330
330
10 12 14 16 18
951 929 904 876 845
1110 1080 1050 1010 967
833 815 793 769 743
934 911 884 854 821
692 678 661 643 622
753 736 717 695 671
420 406 389 370 349
429 414 396 377 355
358 346 333 318 301
360 348 335 319 302
300 291 280 268 255
299 290 280 268 255
234 228 220 212 203
234 228 220 212 203
20 22 24 26 28
811 775 738 699 659
922 874 824 772 720
714 683 651 617 583
785 747 707 666 624
600 576 551 525 497
644 616 587 556 525
327 305 281 257 234
332 309 284 260 235
283 264 245 225 206
284 266 246 226 206
241 226 211 195 179
241 226 210 195 178
192 181 170 158 146
192 181 170 158 146
30 34 36 38 39
618 537 497 458 439
667 564 514 464 441
548 477 442 408 391
581 496 455 414 394
470 413 385 357 343
492 427 395 363 348
211 167 150 135 129
211 167 150 135 129
186 149 134 121 115
187 149 134 121 115
162 131 118 107 102
162 131 118 107 102
134 109 98 89
134 109 98 89
40 41
420 401
420 375 401 358
375 330 358 316
332 317
123 117
123 117
109
109
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
35.4 4.96 3.63
32.5 4.96 3.59
29.5 4.95 3.56
22.4 5.14 2.47
20.8 5.15 2.43
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
19.2 5.18 2.39
17.3 5.20 2.32
3 - 86
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi X
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
Designation 105.5
Wt./ft
Fy
36
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
0
50
95.5
36
50
86.5
36
66
50
36
62
50
36
58
50
36
54
50
36
49.5
50
36
50
949 1180 844 974 708 791 505 546 447 465 402 412 357 361 304 303
10 12 14 16 18
913 897 879 859 837
1130 1100 1080 1050 1010
812 799 783 765 746
932 914 894 870 845
684 673 661 647 632
761 748 733 715 696
490 484 477 468 459
529 521 513 503 492
434 429 423 416 408
452 446 439 432 423
392 387 382 376 369
401 396 391 384 377
348 344 340 335 329
352 348 343 338 332
297 294 290 286 282
296 293 290 286 281
20 22 24 26 28
813 787 759 731 701
976 938 897 855 811
724 702 678 652 626
817 787 756 724 690
615 597 578 558 537
676 654 630 606 581
449 437 426 413 400
480 467 454 439 424
399 390 380 370 359
414 404 393 382 370
361 353 345 336 326
369 361 352 343 333
323 316 309 301 293
326 319 311 304 295
277 271 266 259 253
276 271 265 259 253
30 32 34 36 40
670 639 607 575 511
767 723 678 634 547
599 571 543 515 459
656 621 586 551 482
515 493 471 448 402
555 528 501 474 421
387 373 358 344 314
409 393 377 360 327
347 335 323 311 285
358 345 332 319 292
316 306 295 284 262
322 311 300 289 266
284 276 267 257 238
287 278 269 259 240
246 239 232 224 209
246 239 232 224 209
0
Y-Y AXIS
WT 15
949 1180 844 974 708 791 505 546 447 465 402 412 357 361 304 303
10 12 14 16 18
838 1010 734 828 609 667 817 982 716 805 595 651 793 946 695 778 579 631 766 907 672 749 561 610 736 864 646 717 541 586
389 371 350 328 303
411 391 368 343 316
340 325 308 290 269
350 335 317 297 275
298 286 271 256 238
303 290 276 259 241
254 244 233 220 206
256 246 234 221 207
207 199 191 181 170
206 199 191 181 170
20 22 24 26 28
704 670 635 598 561
818 769 720 669 617
619 589 559 527 495
682 645 607 568 528
520 497 473 448 422
561 533 505 475 445
278 252 227 201 176
288 259 231 203 176
248 226 204 183 161
253 230 207 184 161
220 201 182 163 145
223 203 183 164 145
191 175 159 143 127
192 176 160 143 127
159 147 134 121 108
159 146 134 121 108
30 32 34 35 36
523 486 449 430 412
567 517 468 444 420
462 429 397 381 365
488 448 410 391 372
396 370 344 331 318
415 384 354 339 325
155 137 122 115 109
155 137 122 115 109
142 125 112 106 100
142 127 127 112 112 125 113 113 100 100 112 100 100 89 89 106 95 95 84 84 100 90 90
96 85 76
96 85 76
37 38 40
395 377 342
398 349 353 305 310 103 103 378 334 335 293 296 342 303 303 268 268
95
95
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
31.0 4.43 3.49
28.1 4.42 3.46
25.4 4.42 3.43
19.4 4.66 2.25
18.2 4.66 2.23
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
17.1 4.67 2.19
15.9 4.69 2.15
14.5 4.71 2.10
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 87
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Designation
WT 13.5 89
Wt./ft
Fy
36
X-X AXIS
50
73
57
51
47
42
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
799 1040 725
857
617
698
453
498
358
369
308
311
251
250
10 12 14 16 18
761 745 727 707 684
978 951 921 887 850
691 676 660 641 620
810 790 767 741 712
589 577 564 549 532
663 648 631 612 591
436 428 420 410 399
477 468 458 447 434
346 341 334 328 320
356 350 344 337 329
298 294 289 284 278
301 297 292 286 280
244 241 238 234 229
243 240 236 232 228
20 22 24 26 28
660 634 606 578 549
811 770 727 683 638
598 574 549 523 496
682 650 617 583 548
514 495 474 453 431
568 544 519 493 466
388 375 362 348 334
420 405 390 373 357
312 303 293 283 273
320 310 300 290 279
271 264 256 248 240
273 266 258 250 241
224 219 213 207 201
223 218 212 206 200
30 32 34 36 38
519 489 459 430 400
594 550 506 464 423
469 442 415 388 361
513 478 443 409 376
409 387 364 342 319
439 412 385 358 332
319 304 289 274 259
339 322 304 287 269
262 251 240 229 218
268 256 244 233 221
231 222 213 204 194
233 223 214 205 195
194 187 180 173 166
193 187 180 173 165
371
40
383 335
344
298
306
244
252
206
209
185
186
159
158
799 1040 725
857
617
698
453
498
358
369
308
311
251
250
10 12 14 16 18
701 681 658 632 604
877 845 808 768 725
627 609 588 565 540
720 696 669 639 606
527 513 497 479 459
583 566 546 524 500
349 331 311 288 264
374 353 330 304 277
275 263 248 232 215
281 268 253 236 218
231 221 210 197 184
233 223 211 198 185
181 174 166 157 147
180 173 165 156 147
20 22 24 26 28
574 542 509 476 442
678 631 582 533 484
513 485 456 426 395
571 534 497 458 420
437 415 391 367 342
474 446 418 389 359
240 215 191 167 145
249 221 193 167 145
197 179 160 142 125
199 180 161 143 125
169 154 140 125 110
170 155 140 125 110
137 126 114 103 92
136 125 114 103 92
30 32 34 35 36
408 374 342 326 310
436 390 347 328 310
365 335 305 291 277
382 345 309 292 277
317 292 268 256 244
330 301 273 259 245
127 112 100 94 89
127 112 100 94 89
109 97 86 81
109 97 86 81
97 86 76 72
97 86 76 72
81 72 64
81 72 64
40
252
252 225
225
200
200
0
Y-Y AXIS
80.5
36
0
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
Y
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
26.1 3.98 3.26
23.7 3.96 3.24
21.5 3.95 3.21
16.8 4.15 2.18
15.0 4.14 2.15
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
13.8 4.16 2.12
12.4 4.18 2.07
3 - 88
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi X
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
Designation
WT 12 81
Wt./ft
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
Fy
73
65.5
58.5
52
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
731
1020
658
864
591
726
506
580
410
450
10 12 14 16 18
687 669 648 624 598
932 898 858 815 769
618 602 583 562 538
797 769 737 702 664
556 541 524 505 484
673 652 627 599 569
477 465 451 435 418
542 526 508 487 465
389 379 369 357 344
424 413 401 387 371
20 22 24 26 28
571 542 512 481 450
720 670 619 568 518
514 488 461 433 405
624 583 541 499 457
462 439 415 391 366
537 504 471 437 403
400 380 360 339 318
442 418 392 367 341
331 316 301 285 269
355 338 320 302 283
30 32 34 36 38
419 388 358 328 299
469 421 375 335 300
377 349 322 295 269
416 376 338 301 270
341 316 291 267 244
369 336 304 273 245
297 276 255 235 215
315 290 265 241 217
252 236 220 204 188
264 246 227 209 192
40
271
271
244
244
221
221
196
196
173
175
0
731
1020
658
864
591
726
506
580
410
450
10 12 14 16 18
648 626 601 574 544
858 819 775 727 675
575 555 533 508 482
723 691 656 617 575
505 487 468 446 422
597 573 545 515 482
424 410 395 377 358
472 455 435 414 390
338 328 317 304 290
363 352 339 324 308
20 22 24 26 28
512 480 446 412 378
622 568 514 460 409
453 424 393 363 332
532 487 442 398 355
397 371 345 317 290
448 412 376 340 305
338 316 294 272 249
365 339 313 286 259
275 260 243 226 209
291 273 254 235 216
30 32 34 36 38
345 312 281 251 225
359 316 281 251 225
303 273 245 219 197
313 276 245 219 197
264 238 213 190 171
271 239 213 190 171
227 206 184 165 149
233 207 184 165 149
192 175 159 143 129
196 178 159 143 129
40
204
204
178
178
155
155
135
135
117
117
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
23.9 3.50 3.05
21.5 3.50 3.01
19.3 3.52 2.97
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
17.2 3.51 2.94
15.3 3.51 2.91
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 89
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Designation
WT 12 47
Wt./ft
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
Fy
Y
42
38
34
31
27.5
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
378
419
307
321
254
258
209
208
202
203
155
155
10 12 14 16 18
360 352 343 332 321
396 387 376 363 350
293 287 280 273 265
306 299 292 284 275
244 240 234 229 222
247 243 237 231 225
201 198 194 189 185
200 197 193 189 184
194 191 187 183 178
196 192 188 184 179
150 148 145 142 139
150 148 145 142 139
20 22 24 26 28
309 296 283 269 255
335 320 304 287 271
256 246 236 225 215
265 255 244 233 221
215 208 200 192 184
218 210 202 194 185
179 174 168 162 155
179 173 167 161 155
173 168 162 156 150
174 169 163 157 150
136 132 128 124 120
136 132 128 124 120
30 32 34 36 38
240 226 211 197 183
254 237 220 203 187
204 192 181 170 159
209 197 185 173 161
175 166 157 148 140
176 167 158 149 140
148 142 135 128 121
148 141 135 128 121
143 136 130 123 116
144 137 130 123 117
115 111 106 101 96
115 111 106 101 96
40
169
171
148
150
131
131
114
114
109
110
92
92
0
378
419
307
321
254
258
209
208
202
203
155
155
10 12 14 16 18
288 269 248 226 202
310 288 263 237 211
231 218 202 185 168
239 224 208 190 171
188 178 166 154 140
190 179 167 155 141
148 140 132 123 113
147 140 132 123 113
121 110 97 84 71
122 110 98 84 71
91 84 75 67 57
91 84 75 67 57
20 22 23 24 26
179 156 145 134 115
184 158 145 134 115
150 132 124 115 99
152 134 124 115 99
126 113 106 99 86
127 113 106 99 86
103 92 87 82 71
103 92 87 82 71
59 49 46
59 49 46
48 41
48 41
28 30 31 32 33
99 87 82 77 72
99 87 82 77 72
86 75 71 66
86 75 71 66
74 65 61 58
74 65 61 58
62 55 51
62 55 51
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
13.8 3.67 1.98
12.4 3.67 1.95
11.2 3.68 1.92
10.0 3.70 1.87
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9.11 3.79 1.38
8.10 3.80 1.34
3 - 90
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi X
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
Designation
WT 10.5 73.5
Wt./ft
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
Fy
66
61
55.5
50.5
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
661
918
594
825
548
757
499
637
452
524
10 12 14 16 18
610 589 565 539 510
822 782 739 691 641
547 528 507 483 457
737 701 661 618 573
505 487 466 444 420
676 643 606 566 524
459 443 424 404 382
573 547 518 486 453
416 401 384 366 346
476 457 434 410 384
20 22 24 26 28
480 449 417 385 353
589 536 484 434 385
429 401 372 343 315
526 478 431 386 341
395 368 341 315 288
481 437 394 352 311
358 334 310 285 261
418 382 347 312 279
324 303 280 258 236
357 329 301 274 247
30 32 34 36 38
322 292 262 234 210
337 296 263 234 210
286 259 233 208 186
299 263 233 208 186
262 236 212 189 170
272 239 212 189 170
237 214 192 171 154
246 217 192 171 154
214 193 173 154 139
221 195 173 154 139
40
190
190
168
168
153
153
139
139
125
125
0
661
918
594
825
548
757
499
637
452
524
10 12 14 16 18
587 566 542 515 486
778 740 697 650 601
522 503 482 458 432
689 655 617 576 532
478 461 441 419 396
626 596 562 524 485
430 415 397 377 356
526 503 476 447 415
385 372 356 339 320
434 417 397 375 352
20 22 24 26 28
456 424 392 360 328
550 498 447 397 349
405 377 348 320 291
487 441 395 351 308
371 345 319 293 267
444 402 361 321 281
334 311 287 263 239
383 349 316 283 251
300 279 258 237 216
327 301 275 249 223
30 32 34 36 38
297 267 238 213 191
305 268 238 213 191
263 237 210 188 169
269 237 210 188 169
241 216 193 172 155
246 217 193 172 155
216 194 172 154 139
220 194 172 154 139
195 175 156 139 125
199 175 156 139 125
40
173
173
153
153
140
140
125
125
113
113
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
21.6 3.08 2.95
19.4 3.06 2.93
17.9 3.04 2.92
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
16.3 3.03 2.90
14.9 3.01 2.89
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 91
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Designation
Fy
36
X-X AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
0
50
41.5
36
50
36.5
36
34
50
36
31
50
36
28.5
50
36
50
25
36
22
50
36
50
419 562 373 444 297 331 261 283 219 225 203 210 165 167 127 127
6 8 10 12 14
409 400 390 378 364
543 529 511 489 466
364 356 347 336 323
430 420 407 392 374
290 284 278 270 260
322 316 307 297 286
255 251 245 239 231
276 271 264 256 247
214 211 206 201 195
221 217 212 207 201
199 196 192 187 182
206 203 199 194 188
162 160 157 153 149
164 161 158 155 151
125 123 121 119 116
125 123 121 119 116
16 18 20 22 24
349 332 315 296 277
439 412 383 353 323
310 295 279 262 245
355 335 314 291 269
250 239 227 215 202
274 260 246 231 216
222 213 203 192 182
237 227 215 203 191
189 181 174 165 157
194 186 178 169 160
176 170 163 155 147
182 175 167 159 151
145 140 134 129 123
146 141 136 130 124
113 110 106 102 98
113 110 106 102 98
26 28 30 32 34
258 239 220 201 183
293 264 236 209 185
228 210 193 177 160
247 225 203 182 162
189 176 163 150 137
200 185 169 155 140
170 159 148 137 126
178 165 153 140 128
148 139 130 121 112
151 142 132 123 114
139 131 123 115 107
143 117 118 134 111 111 125 104 105 117 98 98 108 91 92
94 90 85 81 76
94 90 85 81 76
36 38 40
165 165 145 145 125 126 115 117 104 104 148 148 130 130 113 113 105 105 95 96 134 134 117 117 102 102 95 95 87 87
71 67 63
71 67 63
0
Y-Y AXIS
WT 10.5 46.5
Wt./ft
Y
99 100 91 92 84 84
85 79 73
85 79 73
419 562 373 444 297 331 261 283 219 225 203 210 165 167 127 127
6 8 10 12 14
357 337 313 285 256
452 420 381 338 293
311 294 273 250 224
357 334 307 276 243
245 233 218 201 182
267 252 235 214 192
213 203 191 177 161
227 215 202 186 168
152 147 141 133 123
153 142 128 113 97
16 18 20 21 22
226 195 166 151 138
247 203 166 151 138
198 171 145 132 121
210 177 145 132 121
162 142 122 113 103
169 146 124 113 103
145 128 111 103 95
150 112 113 131 101 102 112 90 90 103 84 84 95 78 78
81 66 54 49 45
24 26 28 29 30
117 117 102 102 100 100 88 88 86 86 76 76 80 80 71 71 75 75 66 66
87 75 65 60 57
87 75 65 60 57
80 69 60 56 52
80 69 60 56 52
149 145 138 131 122
67 58 51 47
157 116 117 145 108 109 131 99 99 115 88 88 98 76 76 82 66 54 49 45
64 52 43 39
64 52 43 39
85 80 74 67 59
85 80 74 67 59
51 42 35 32
51 42 35 32
67 58 51 47
Properties A
(in2)
rx (in.) ry (in.)
13.7 3.25 1.84
12.2 3.22 1.83
10.7 3.21 1.81
10.0 3.20 1.80
9.13 3.21 1.77
8.37 3.29 1.35
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.36 3.30 1.30
6.49 3.31 1.26
3 - 92
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi X
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
Designation
WT 9 59.5
Wt./ft
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
Fy
53
48.5
43
38
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
536
744
477
663
438
608
389
507
339
393
10 12 14 16 18
479 456 430 402 372
636 594 548 499 449
426 406 383 357 331
567 529 487 444 399
390 370 349 325 301
518 482 444 403 361
346 329 309 288 266
436 407 376 344 310
302 287 270 252 233
343 323 302 278 254
20 22 24 26 28
342 311 281 251 222
399 350 303 259 224
304 276 249 222 197
354 310 268 229 198
275 250 225 200 177
320 279 241 205 177
244 221 199 177 156
276 243 211 181 156
213 193 174 155 136
229 205 181 158 137
30 34 38 42 43
195 152 121 99 95
195 152 121 99 95
172 134 107 88 84
172 134 107 88 84
154 120 96 79
154 120 96 79
136 106 85 69
136 106 85 69
119 93 74 61
119 93 74 61
0
536
744
477
663
438
608
389
507
339
393
10 12 14 16 18
471 450 427 401 374
622 584 543 499 453
415 397 376 353 329
546 513 477 438 397
379 362 343 322 300
496 467 434 398 361
331 317 300 282 263
411 388 362 334 305
285 272 258 243 226
320 304 287 267 246
20 22 24 26 28
346 318 289 260 233
407 361 317 274 237
304 279 253 228 203
356 315 276 238 206
277 254 230 207 185
324 286 251 216 187
242 222 201 181 161
275 245 216 188 163
209 192 174 156 139
225 203 182 161 140
30 34 38 42 43
206 161 129 106 101
206 161 129 106 101
180 140 112 92 88
180 140 112 92 88
163 127 102 84 80
163 127 102 84 80
142 111 89 73 70
142 111 89 73 70
123 96 77 63 61
123 96 77 63 61
44
96
96
84
84
76
76
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
17.5 2.60 2.69
15.6 2.59 2.66
14.3 2.56 2.65
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
12.7 2.55 2.63
11.2 2.54 2.61
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 93
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Designation
Fy
36
X-X AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
0
32.5
50
36
30
50
36
27.5
50
36
25
50
36
23
50
36
20
50
36
17.5
50
36
50
318 426 292 356 261 299 226 253 184 194 172 183 124 124 101 101
10 12 14 16 18
288 275 261 246 229
372 351 327 302 275
264 252 239 225 210
314 297 279 259 238
236 226 214 202 189
266 253 239 223 206
206 197 188 178 167
227 217 206 193 180
169 163 156 148 140
177 171 163 154 145
168 161 154 146 138
116 112 108 104 99
116 112 108 104 99
95 92 89 86 82
95 92 89 86 82
20 22 24 26 28
212 195 178 161 144
248 222 196 171 148
194 178 162 146 131
216 195 173 153 134
175 161 147 133 119
189 172 155 138 122
155 143 131 120 108
166 152 138 124 111
131 122 113 103 94
135 124 129 126 116 120 116 107 111 106 99 101 96 90 92
94 89 84 78 72
94 89 83 78 72
78 74 70 66 62
78 74 70 66 62
30 32 34 36 38
128 129 116 116 106 107 113 113 102 102 94 94 100 100 91 91 83 83 89 89 81 81 74 74 80 80 72 72 66 66
97 86 76 68 61
98 86 76 68 61
85 77 68 61 55
86 77 68 61 55
82 74 67 59 53
83 75 67 59 53
67 61 56 51 46
67 61 56 51 46
57 53 49 45 41
57 53 49 45 41
55 50 48 44
55 50 48 44
49 45 43 39
49 45 43 39
48 44 42 38 36
48 44 42 38 36
41 38 36 33 31
41 38 36 33 31
37 34 32 29 28
37 34 32 29 28
40 42 43 45 46 0
Y-Y AXIS
WT 9 35.5
Wt./ft
Y
72 66 63 57
72 66 63 57
65 59 57 52
65 59 57 52
60 54 52 47
60 54 52 47
318 426 292 356 261 299 226 253 184 194 172 183 124 124 101 101
10 12 14 16 18
231 207 182 157 132
279 242 204 167 133
210 188 165 142 119
238 209 179 149 120
187 168 149 129 109
204 182 158 134 111
161 146 130 113 96
20 21 22 24 26
109 109 99 99 90 90 76 76 65 65
98 89 82 69 59
98 89 82 69 59
90 82 75 63 54
90 82 75 63 54
80 73 67 57 48
80 73 67 57 48
70 64 59 50 43
70 64 59 50 43
55 51
55 51
50 47
50 47
45
45
40
40
27 28
159 153 147 140 132
60 56
60 56
173 132 137 107 111 155 121 125 92 94 136 109 111 77 78 117 96 98 62 62 98 83 84 50 50 40 37
40 37
80 71 61 51 41
80 71 61 51 41
61 54 47 40 32
61 54 47 40 32
34 31
34 31
27
27
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
10.4 2.74 1.70
9.55 2.72 1.69
8.82 2.71 1.69
8.10 2.71 1.67
7.33 2.70 1.65
6.77 2.77 1.29
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.88 2.76 1.27
5.15 2.79 1.22
3 - 94
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi X
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
Designation
WT 8 50
Wt./ft
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
Fy
44.5
38.5
33.5
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
450
625
401
557
346
476
301
361
10 12 14 16 18
389 365 338 310 280
510 467 420 372 324
346 324 300 275 249
454 415 373 330 287
297 278 257 235 212
386 353 316 279 243
258 241 223 203 183
300 277 251 225 199
20 22 24 26 28
251 222 194 167 144
278 234 197 167 144
223 197 172 148 128
246 207 174 148 128
189 166 145 124 107
207 174 146 124 107
163 143 124 106 92
173 148 125 106 92
30 32 34 36 37
126 111 98 87 83
126 111 98 87 83
111 98 87 77 73
111 98 87 77 73
93 82 73 65 61
93 82 73 65 61
80 70 62 55 52
80 70 62 55 52
38
78
78
0
450
625
401
557
346
476
301
361
10 12 14 16 18
391 371 349 325 300
514 479 440 399 357
346 328 309 287 265
453 422 388 351 314
295 280 263 245 226
382 356 327 297 265
254 241 226 211 194
294 276 257 236 214
20 22 24 26 28
274 248 223 198 174
315 275 236 201 174
242 219 196 173 152
277 241 206 176 152
206 186 166 147 129
234 203 174 149 129
177 160 143 127 111
192 170 148 128 111
30 32 34 36 38
151 133 118 105 95
151 133 118 105 95
133 117 103 92 83
133 117 103 92 83
112 99 88 78 70
112 99 88 78 70
97 85 75 67 61
97 85 75 67 61
41
81
81
71
71
60
60
52
52
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
14.7 2.28 2.51
13.1 2.27 2.49
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
11.3 2.24 2.47
9.84 2.22 2.46
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 95
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Designation
Y-Y AXIS
X-X AXIS
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
WT 8 28.5
Wt./ft
Y
25
22.5
20
18
15.5
13
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
256
336
223
259
184
205
141
145
122
124
93
93
66
66
6 8 10 12 14
245 236 225 212 199
316 301 283 262 240
213 205 196 185 173
245 235 223 208 193
176 170 163 154 145
195 188 179 169 157
136 132 127 121 115
140 136 130 124 117
118 114 111 106 101
120 116 112 108 102
91 88 86 83 79
90 88 85 82 79
65 63 62 60 58
65 63 62 60 58
16 18 20 22 24
184 168 152 136 121
217 193 169 147 125
160 146 133 119 105
176 159 141 125 108
135 124 114 103 92
145 133 120 107 95
108 100 92 85 77
110 102 94 86 78
95 89 82 76 69
96 90 83 76 70
75 71 67 62 57
75 71 66 62 57
55 53 50 47 44
55 53 50 47 44
26 28 30 32 34
106 92 80 70 62
107 92 80 70 62
93 80 70 61 54
93 80 70 61 54
82 72 62 55 49
83 72 62 55 49
69 62 54 48 42
70 62 54 48 42
63 56 50 44 39
63 57 50 44 39
53 48 44 39 35
53 48 44 39 35
41 38 35 32 29
41 38 35 32 29
36 38 39 40 41
56 50 47 45
56 50 47 45
49 44 41 39
49 44 41 39
43 39 37
43 39 37
38 34 32
38 34 32
35 31 30 28
35 31 30 28
31 28 27 25
31 28 27 25
27 24 23 22 21
27 24 23 22 21
0
256
336
223
259
184
205
141
145
122
124
93
93
66
66
6 8 10 12 14
216 200 181 160 138
268 243 214 182 151
185 171 155 137 119
207 190 170 148 125
153 143 130 116 101
167 155 140 123 106
116 110 102 92 82
119 112 104 94 84
95 90 84 76 68
97 91 85 77 69
70 65 58 50 42
70 64 57 50 42
47 44 40 35 30
47 44 40 35 30
16 18 20 22
116 96 78 65
120 96 78 65
100 83 67 56
103 83 67 56
87 72 59 49
89 72 59 49
72 62 52 43
73 62 52 43
60 51 43 36
60 51 43 36
34 27
34 27
25 21
25 21
24 25 26
54 50 46
54 50 46
47 43 40
47 43 40
41 38 35
41 38 35
36 34 31
36 34 31
30 28
30 28
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
8.38 2.41 1.60
7.37 2.40 1.59
6.63 2.39 1.57
5.89 2.37 1.57
5.28 2.41 1.52
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4.56 2.45 1.17
3.84 2.47 1.12
3 - 96
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi X
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
Designation
WT 7 66
Wt./ft
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
Fy
60
54.5
49.5
45
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
594
825
542
752
490
680
447
621
404
561
2 4 6 8 10
588 570 542 505 461
813 779 726 658 580
536 520 493 459 418
741 710 661 597 525
484 469 444 412 374
670 641 595 536 468
442 428 405 375 340
611 584 542 487 425
399 387 366 339 307
552 528 489 439 383
12 14 16 18 20
412 361 310 261 215
497 414 335 266 215
373 326 279 234 192
448 371 299 237 192
333 289 246 205 167
397 327 261 207 167
302 262 223 185 151
360 296 236 186 151
272 236 200 166 135
324 265 211 166 135
22 24 26 27 28
178 149 127 118 110
178 149 127 118 110
158 133 113 105 98
158 133 113 105 98
138 116 99 92 85
138 116 99 92 85
125 105 89 83
125 105 89 83
111 94 80 74
111 94 80 74
0
594
825
542
752
490
680
447
621
404
561
6 8 10 12 14
578 570 559 546 531
794 778 758 734 706
526 519 509 497 483
722 708 689 667 642
475 468 459 448 436
651 638 621 601 578
432 426 418 408 396
591 579 564 546 525
389 384 376 367 357
531 520 506 490 472
16 18 20 22 24
514 496 476 455 434
675 642 607 571 533
468 451 433 414 394
614 584 551 518 484
422 407 391 373 355
553 526 497 467 436
384 370 355 339 322
502 477 451 423 395
346 333 320 305 290
451 429 405 381 355
26 28 30 32 34
411 388 365 341 318
495 457 420 383 347
373 352 331 309 288
449 414 380 346 314
337 317 298 279 260
404 373 342 311 282
305 288 270 253 235
366 337 309 281 255
275 259 243 227 211
329 303 278 253 229
36 38 40
295 273 251
312 281 253
267 247 227
282 253 229
241 222 204
253 227 205
218 201 184
228 205 185
196 180 166
205 184 166
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
19.4 1.73 3.76
17.7 1.71 3.74
16.0 1.68 3.73
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
14.6 1.67 3.71
13.2 1.66 3.70
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 97
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Designation
WT 7 41
Wt./ft
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
Fy
Y
37
34
30.5
26.5
24
21.5
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
367
510
334
463
306
425
274
370
239
318
216
265
183
208
4 6 8 10 12
354 339 319 294 267
486 457 419 375 327
322 307 288 265 240
440 413 378 337 293
295 281 264 243 219
403 378 346 308 267
264 252 236 217 196
352 330 302 270 235
231 221 208 193 175
303 287 265 239 211
209 200 188 174 158
254 241 224 203 181
177 170 160 149 136
200 191 179 164 148
14 16 18 20 22
238 208 179 151 126
279 232 188 152 126
213 186 159 134 111
248 205 165 134 111
194 169 144 121 100
226 186 150 121 100
173 151 128 108 89
199 165 133 108 89
157 138 119 101 85
182 153 126 102 85
141 124 107 91 76
158 134 112 92 76
122 108 93 80 67
131 114 97 81 67
24 26 28 30 31
106 90 78 68
106 90 78 68
93 79 68 59
93 79 68 59
84 72 62 54
84 72 62 54
75 64 55 48
75 64 55 48
71 61 52 45 43
71 61 52 45 43
64 54 47 41 38
64 54 47 41 38
56 48 41 36 34
56 48 41 36 34
0
367
510
334
463
306
425
274
370
239
318
216
265
183
208
8 10 12 14 16
334 320 303 285 265
447 421 391 359 324
303 290 275 258 240
405 382 355 325 294
276 265 251 235 218
369 347 322 295 267
246 236 223 210 195
320 302 281 258 233
203 189 173 156 139
256 233 208 181 154
183 170 156 140 124
215 197 177 156 135
154 144 132 119 106
171 158 144 128 112
18 20 22 24 26
244 222 201 179 159
289 254 221 188 161
221 202 182 163 144
262 231 200 171 146
201 183 165 147 130
238 209 181 154 131
179 163 147 131 116
209 184 160 137 117
121 104 87 73 63
129 105 87 73 63
108 93 78 66 56
114 94 78 66 56
93 80 68 57 49
97 82 68 57 49
28 30 31 32 34
139 121 113 106 94
139 121 113 106 94
126 110 103 97 86
126 110 103 97 86
113 99 93 87 77
113 99 93 87 77
101 88 82 77 69
101 88 82 77 69
54 47 44 41
54 47 44 41
48 42 40
48 42 40
42 37 34
42 37 34
36 40 41
84 68 65
84 68 65
76 62 59
76 62 59
69 56 53
69 56 53
61 50
61 50
Properties A
(in2)
rx (in.) ry (in.)
12.0 1.85 2.48
10.9 1.82 2.48
9.99 1.81 2.46
8.96 1.80 2.45
7.81 1.88 1.92
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.07 1.87 1.91
6.31 1.86 1.89
3 - 98
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi X
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
Designation
WT 7 19
Wt./ft
X-X AXIS Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
Fy
17
15
13
11
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
159
180
131
142
109
114
87
88
62
62
2 4 6 8 10
158 155 150 143 134
178 174 168 159 148
130 128 124 119 112
141 138 134 127 120
109 107 104 100 95
114 112 108 104 98
87 85 83 80 77
88 86 84 81 78
62 61 60 58 56
62 61 60 58 56
12 14 16 18 20
125 114 103 92 81
136 123 110 97 83
105 96 88 79 70
111 102 92 82 72
89 83 76 69 62
92 85 78 70 63
73 68 63 58 53
73 69 64 58 53
53 51 48 44 41
53 51 48 44 41
22 24 26 28 30
70 60 51 44 38
71 60 51 44 38
62 53 46 39 34
63 54 46 39 34
55 48 42 36 31
55 48 42 36 31
48 42 37 33 28
48 43 38 33 28
38 34 31 28 24
38 34 31 28 24
32 34 35
34 30
34 30
30 27
30 27
27 24
27 24
25 22 21
25 22 21
22 19 18
22 19 18
0
159
180
131
142
109
114
87
88
62
62
6 8 10 12 14
132 123 111 99 86
146 134 120 105 89
108 101 92 82 72
115 107 97 86 74
86 81 74 67 59
89 83 76 68 60
65 58 50 41 32
66 58 50 41 32
45 41 35 30 24
45 41 35 30 24
16 17 18 20 22
72 66 60 49 40
74 66 60 49 40
61 56 51 42 35
63 57 52 42 35
50 46 42 35 29
51 47 42 35 29
25 22 20
25 22 20
19 17
19 17
24 25
34 31
34 31
30 27
30 27
25
25
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
5.58 2.04 1.55
5.00 2.04 1.53
4.42 2.07 1.49
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3.85 2.12 1.08
3.25 2.14 1.04
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 99
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Designation
X-X AXIS Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
Y
WT 6 29
Wt./ft
Fy
X
26.6
25
22.5
20
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
261
362
238
331
225
312
202
280
180
221
2 4 6 8 10
257 247 231 210 186
355 336 306 268 227
235 226 211 192 171
325 307 280 246 208
222 214 202 186 167
307 292 269 240 207
200 193 181 167 149
276 262 241 214 184
178 172 161 148 133
218 208 193 174 152
12 14 16 18 20
160 135 110 88 71
185 145 111 88 71
147 124 102 81 66
170 134 103 81 66
147 126 105 86 70
173 139 109 86 70
131 112 93 75 61
153 123 96 75 61
116 99 82 66 54
129 106 84 66 54
22 24 25 26
59 49 45
59 49 45
54 46 42
54 46 42
58 48 45 41
58 48 45 41
51 42 39 36
51 42 39 36
44 37 34 32
44 37 34 32
0
261
362
238
331
225
312
202
280
180
221
6 8 10 12 14
246 238 228 216 203
333 318 300 279 257
223 216 206 196 184
301 287 271 252 231
205 194 181 166 150
274 255 232 206 179
183 174 162 148 134
244 227 206 183 159
162 154 143 131 118
194 182 167 150 132
16 18 20 22 24
189 175 160 144 129
233 208 184 160 137
171 157 144 130 116
209 187 164 143 122
134 117 101 86 72
152 127 103 86 72
119 104 89 75 63
135 112 91 75 63
105 92 79 66 56
114 97 80 66 56
26 28 30 32 34
115 101 88 77 69
117 101 88 77 69
103 90 78 69 61
104 90 78 69 61
61 53 46 41
61 53 46 41
54 47 41 36
54 47 41 36
48 41 36 32
48 41 36 32
36 38 41
61 55 47
61 55 47
54 49 42
54 49 42
Properties A
(in2)
rx (in.) ry (in.)
8.52 1.50 2.51
7.78 1.51 2.48
7.34 1.60 1.96
6.61 1.58 1.94
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.89 1.57 1.93
3 - 100
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi X
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
Designation 17.5
Wt./ft
X-X AXIS
Fy
15
13
11
9.5
8
7
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
158
188
120
132
90
92
88
98
68
71
53
54
40
40
2 4 6 8 10
157 152 145 135 124
186 179 169 156 140
119 116 111 104 96
131 127 121 113 104
89 87 84 80 74
91 89 86 81 76
88 86 83 78 73
97 95 91 86 80
68 66 64 61 58
70 69 67 63 60
53 52 51 48 46
54 53 51 49 46
40 39 38 37 35
40 39 38 37 35
12 14 16 18 20
111 98 85 72 59
124 106 89 73 59
87 78 68 59 50
93 82 71 60 50
68 62 55 48 42
70 63 56 49 42
68 61 55 48 42
73 65 58 50 43
54 49 44 40 35
55 50 45 40 35
43 40 36 33 29
43 40 36 33 29
33 31 29 26 24
33 31 29 26 24
22 24 26 28 29
49 41 35 30 28
49 41 35 30 28
41 35 30 25 24
41 35 30 25 24
36 30 26 22 21
36 30 26 22 21
36 30 26 22 21
36 30 26 22 21
30 26 22 19 18
30 26 22 19 18
26 22 19 16 15
26 22 19 16 15
21 19 17 14 14
21 19 17 14 14
19 18
19 18
17 16
17 16
14 13 13
14 13 13
13 12 11
13 12 11
30 31 32
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
WT 6
0
158
188
120
132
90
92
88
98
68
71
53
54
40
40
2 4 6 8 10
147 142 134 123 110
172 165 154 139 123
109 106 101 93 85
119 115 109 100 90
81 79 75 71 65
83 80 77 72 66
73 67 57 45 33
80 72 60 46 33
54 49 43 34 26
55 51 44 35 26
37 34 30 24 18
37 34 30 25 18
26 25 22 19 15
26 25 22 19 15
12 13 14 16 18
96 89 82 68 55
105 95 87 69 55
75 70 65 55 45
79 73 67 56 45
59 55 52 45 38
59 56 52 45 38
23 20 17
23 20 17
18 16
18 16
13
13
11
11
20 22 24 25
45 37 31 29
45 37 31 29
37 31 26 24
37 31 26 24
31 26 22 20
31 26 22 20
Properties A
(in2)
rx (in.) ry (in.)
5.17 1.76 1.54
4.40 1.75 1.52
3.82 1.75 1.51
3.24 1.90 0.847
2.79 1.90 0.822
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2.36 1.92 0.773
2.08 1.92 0.753
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 101
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Designation
WT 5 22.5
Wt./ft
19.5
16.5
15
13
11
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
203
282
175
244
148
206
135
188
117
146
99
115
2 4 6 8 10
199 187 170 148 124
274 253 220 182 142
172 162 147 128 107
237 218 190 157 123
146 137 125 109 92
201 185 162 135 106
133 128 119 107 94
184 173 157 136 114
115 110 102 92 81
144 136 124 109 92
98 94 87 79 69
113 108 99 88 76
12 14 16 18 20
100 77 59 47 38
105 77 59 47 38
86 67 51 40 33
91 67 51 40 33
75 58 45 35 29
79 58 45 35 29
80 67 54 42 34
91 70 54 42 34
69 57 46 36 29
76 60 46 36 29
59 49 40 32 26
64 51 40 32 26
26
26
31 28 24
31 28 24
27 24 20
27 24 20
23 21 18
23 21 18
21 22 24
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
Fy
Y
0
203
282
175
244
148
206
135
188
117
146
99
115
2 4 6 8 10
199 195 188 178 167
274 266 253 235 214
171 167 161 153 143
235 227 216 201 183
143 140 134 127 119
194 188 179 166 151
128 122 113 101 88
174 163 147 126 104
109 104 96 86 75
134 126 115 100 84
89 85 78 70 61
101 96 88 78 66
12 14 16 18 20
153 139 125 110 95
191 167 143 120 99
131 119 106 93 80
163 142 121 101 83
109 98 87 76 66
134 116 99 82 67
74 60 47 38 30
82 62 47 38 30
63 51 40 32 26
68 52 40 32 26
51 41 32 26 21
54 42 32 26 21
22 24 26 28 30
81 69 59 50 44
82 69 59 50 44
68 57 49 42 37
68 57 49 42 37
55 47 40 34 30
55 47 40 34 30
25
25
21
21
17
17
32 33
39 36
39 36
32 30
32 30
26
26
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
6.63 1.24 2.01
5.73 1.24 1.98
4.85 1.26 1.94
4.42 1.45 1.37
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3.81 1.44 1.36
3.24 1.46 1.33
3 - 102
COLUMN DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi X
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85)
Y
Designation
WT 5 9.5
Wt./ft
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
Fy
8.5
7.5
6
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
86
104
77
90
66
76
43
45
2 4 6 8 10
85 82 77 70 62
103 98 91 81 71
76 73 68 63 56
88 85 79 71 62
65 63 59 54 49
75 72 67 61 54
43 41 39 37 34
44 43 41 38 35
12 14 16 18 20
54 46 38 30 25
60 49 39 30 25
49 42 34 28 23
53 44 35 28 23
43 37 31 25 20
46 39 31 25 20
30 27 23 19 16
31 27 23 20 16
22 24 25 26
20 17 16
20 17 16
19 16 14 13
19 16 14 13
17 14 13 12
17 14 13 12
13 11 10 10
13 11 10 10
0
86
104
77
90
66
76
43
45
2 4 6 8 10
74 67 56 43 31
87 77 62 46 31
62 56 47 36 25
70 62 51 37 25
49 45 37 29 20
54 48 40 29 20
30 28 24 19 14
30 28 24 20 14
12 13 14
22 18 16
22 18 16
18 15 13
18 15 13
14 12
14 12
10 9
10 9
Properties A (in2) rx (in.) ry (in.)
2.81 1.54 0.874
2.50 1.56 0.844
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2.21 1.57 0.810
1.77 1.57 0.785
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 103
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Structural tees cut from W shapes
X
X
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.85) Designation
WT 4 14
Wt./ft
12
10.5
9
7.5
6.5
5
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
126
175
108
150
94
131
80
112
68
94
59
82
41
46
2 3 4 5 6
122 118 112 105 96
168 160 148 135 121
105 101 96 90 82
144 137 127 116 103
92 89 86 81 76
127 121 114 106 97
79 76 73 70 65
108 104 98 91 83
67 65 63 60 57
92 89 84 79 73
58 56 54 52 49
79 77 73 69 64
41 40 38 37 35
45 44 42 40 38
8 10 12 14 16
78 60 43 32 24
90 62 43 32 24
67 51 36 27 20
77 52 36 27 20
64 52 39 29 22
76 57 40 29 22
55 45 35 26 20
67 50 35 26 20
49 41 33 25 19
60 47 34 25 19
43 36 29 22 17
52 41 30 22 17
30 26 21 16 12
33 27 21 16 12
18
18
16 14
16 14
15 14 12
15 14 12
13 12 11
13 12 11
10 9 8
10 9 8
18 19 20
Y-Y AXIS
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to indicated axis
X-X AXIS
Fy
Y
0
126
175
108
150
94
131
80
112
68
94
59
82
41
46
2 4 6 8 10
123 119 112 104 93
169 161 149 133 116
105 101 96 88 80
143 137 127 113 98
89 85 77 68 57
121 113 99 83 66
75 70 64 56 47
100 93 82 68 54
60 54 45 35 25
79 68 53 37 25
49 44 36 28 19
63 55 43 29 19
33 30 25 20 15
35 32 27 21 15
12 14 16 18 20
82 71 60 49 40
97 79 62 49 40
70 60 51 42 34
83 67 53 42 34
47 37 28 22 18
49 37 28 22 18
38 30 23 18 15
40 30 23 18 15
17 13
17 13
14 10
14 10
10 8
10 8
21 22 24 26 27
36 33 28 24 22
36 33 28 24 22
31 28 24 20
31 28 24 20
16
16
Properties A
(in2)
rx (in.) ry (in.)
4.12 1.01 1.62
3.54 .999 1.61
3.08 1.12 1.26
2.63 1.14 1.23
2.22 1.22 0.876
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.92 1.23 0.843
1.48 1.20 0.841
3 - 104
COLUMN DESIGN
Single-Angle Struts
Design strengths of single-angle struts were formerly not tabulated in this Manual because of the difficulty in loading such struts concentrically. Concentric loading can be accomplished by milling the ends of an angle and loading it through bearing plates. However, in common practice, the eccentricity of loading is relatively large, and its neglect in design may lead to an under-designed member. The design of single-angle struts is governed by the AISC Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members, which is reproduced in Part 6 of this Manual. The following example illustrates the design procedure for an equal-leg angle loaded eccentrically. The design strengths for concentric loading, tabulated below, are useful in solving the interaction equations for combined axial force and bending. The tables below are based on Zureick (1993), revised to conform with the AISC Single-Angle Specification (LRFD). EXAMPLE 3-8
An angle 2×2×1⁄4 is loaded by a gusset plate attached to one leg with an eccentricity of 0.8 in. from the centroid, as shown in Figure 3-3. Determine the factored compressive load Pu which may be applied. The effective length KL is 4.0 ft.
Given:
A = 0.938 in.2 rz = 0.391 in. Ix = Iy = 0.348 in.4
3 84
′
7′
′′
7 .2
0
0.
Z
Pn
W
0.8′′
0.592 ′′
37
′′
α
8 0.
W
Z
′ 4′
41
1.
Fig. 3-3 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 105
α = 45° Fy = 50 ksi Solution:
Determine the properties for the principal axes Z-Z and W-W as follows: Iz = Arz2 = 0.938(0.391)2 = 0.143 in.2 Iw + Iz = Ix + Iy Iw = 0.348 + 0.348 − 0.143 = 0.552 in.4 rw
=
√ √ Iw = A
0.552 = 0.767 in. 0.938
From the tables which follow, the design compressive strength φcPn = 14 kips for KL = 4 ft. For combined axial compression and bending, the latter is taken about the principal axes in accordance with the Single-Angle LRFD Specification (Section 6). For equal leg angles— Major principal axis (W-W) bending (Section 5.3.1): 0.46Eb2t 2 l 0.46(29,000 ksi)(2 in.)2(0.25 in.)2 = 1.0 × 48 in. = 69.5 k-in. Iw 0.552 in.4 My = Fy Sw = Fy = 50 ksi × cw 1.414 in. = 19.5 k-in.
Mob = Cb
Since Mob > My (Section 5.1.3), Mnw = [1.58 − 0.83 √ My / Mob ] My ≤ 1.25My = [1.58 − 0.83 √ 19.5 / 69.5 ] My = 1.14My = 1.14 × 19.5 k-in. = 22 k-in. According to Section 5.1.1, (= 2 in. / 0.25 in. = 8) < 0.382 √ E /Fy (= 0.382 √ 29,000 / 50 = 9.2), Mnw ≤ 1.25Fy Sc = 1.25Fy Sw = 1.25My
for b / t
This is satisfied since Mnw = 1.14My. Minor principal axis (Z-Z) bending (Section 5.3.1): With the leg tips of the angle in tension and the angle corner in compression AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 106
COLUMN DESIGN
Mnz = 1.25My = 1.25Fy Sz = 1.25Fy = 1.25 × 50 ksi ×
Iz cz
0.143 in.4 0.837 in.
= 11 k-in. Assuming
Pu ≥ 0.2, Interaction Equation 6-1a governs. φcPn
Muz Pu 8 Muw φ P + 9 φ M + φ M ≤ 1.0 b nz b nw c n According to Section 6.1.1, for flexural compression Mu shall be multiplied by B1 (Equation 6-2). Major principal axis (W-W) bending:
Kl / rw = 1.0 × 48 / 0.767 = 62.2 From LRFD Specification Table 8, Pe / Ag = 73.1
Pe1w = 73.1(0.938) = 68.6 kips B1w =
Cm 0.85 = < 1. Use B1w = 1.0. 1 − Pu / Pe1w 1 − Pu / 68.6
Minor principal axis (Z-Z) bending:
Kl / rw = 1.0 × 48 / 0.391 = 122.8 From LRFD Specification Table 8, Pe / Ag = 19.0
Pe1z = 19.0(0.938) = 17.8 kips B1z =
Cm 0.85 = 1 − Pu / Pe1z 1 − Pu / 17.8
Conservatively adding the maximum axial and flexural terms, Equation 6-1a becomes Pu ×0.277 in. Pu 8 Pu ×0.843 in. × 1.0 0.85 + + ≤ 1.0 14 kips 9 0.9×22 kip−in. 0.9×11 kip−in. 1−Pu / 17.8
Pu = 7 kips Checking
Pu 7 kips = = 0.5 > 0.2 o.k. 14 kips φcPn
A less conservative approach would have involved applying the interaction equation separately at the corner and the two leg tips of the angle, with the proper signs (+ or −) for compression and tension. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 107
Fy = 36 ksi
z
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Single angles
w x
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.90)
x
w Y z
8× ×6
Size Thickness
1
7⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
5⁄ 8
9⁄ 16
1⁄ 2
7⁄ 16
Wt./ft
44.2
39.1
33.8
28.5
25.7
23.0
20.2
Effective length KL (ft)
Fy
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
421
585
373
518
322
447
270
352
235
303
199
253
163
203
1 2 3 4 5
406 398 393 384 371
555 541 531 515 490
355 347 342 336 325
484 468 460 448 429
301 292 288 284 277
408 391 383 375 363
246 235 231 228 224
311 294 287 282 276
210 199 195 193 190
262 245 239 235 230
174 163 160 158 156
213 197 192 188 185
138 128 125 123 122
166 151 146 144 141
6 7 8 9 10
353 333 311 287 263
458 422 383 344 305
311 293 274 253 232
402 371 338 303 268
266 252 236 219 201
343 319 291 262 233
217 208 195 182 167
265 250 231 210 189
186 179 170 159 148
224 214 200 184 167
153 149 143 135 126
181 175 166 155 142
120 118 115 110 104
139 136 131 124 116
11 12 13 14 15
239 215 192 169 147
266 230 196 169 147
211 190 169 149 130
235 203 173 149 130
183 165 147 130 114
204 177 151 130 114
152 137 123 109 95
167 146 125 109 95
135 123 111 99 87
149 131 114 99 87
117 107 96 87 77
128 114 101 88 77
97 90 82 75 67
107 97 87 77 67
16 17 18 19 20
130 115 103 92 83
130 115 103 92 83
115 102 91 81 74
115 102 91 81 74
100 89 79 71 64
100 89 79 71 64
84 74 66 60 54
84 74 66 60 54
77 68 61 55 49
77 68 61 55 49
68 60 54 49 44
68 60 54 49 44
60 53 48 43 39
60 53 48 43 39
21
76
76
67
67
58
58
49
49
45
45
40
40
35
35
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 108
COLUMN DESIGN
z
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Single angles
w x
x
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.90)
w Y z
8× ×4
Size Thickness Wt./ft
37.4
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
33.1
5⁄ 8
28.7
24.2
1⁄ 2
21.9
7⁄ 16
19.6
17.2
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
356
495
315
438
273
380
230
299
200
258
170
216
139
174
1 2 3 4 5
342 331 315 293 267
468 446 417 378 332
300 289 275 257 234
408 387 363 330 290
256 245 235 220 201
346 326 307 280 248
209 198 190 179 165
264 246 233 216 194
179 169 162 154 142
223 207 197 184 167
149 139 134 128 119
182 168 160 150 138
118 109 105 101 95
142 128 122 116 108
6 7 8 9 10
238 208 177 148 121
283 234 187 149 121
209 183 156 131 107
248 205 164 131 107
180 157 135 113 92
212 176 141 113 92
148 130 112 94 77
169 142 117 94 77
129 114 99 84 70
146 125 104 84 70
109 98 86 73 61
123 107 90 74 61
88 80 71 62 53
98 87 75 63 53
11 12 13 14
100 85 72 62
100 85 72 62
89 75 64 55
89 75 64 55
77 65 56 48
77 65 56 48
65 55 47 41
65 55 47 41
58 49 42 37
58 49 42 37
52 44 38 33
52 44 38 33
45 38 33 29
45 38 33 29
7× ×4
Size 3⁄ 4
Thickness Wt./ft
5⁄ 8
26.2
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
9⁄ 16
1⁄ 2
22.1
7⁄ 16
17.9
3⁄ 8
15.7
13.6
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
249
346
210
288
164
212
136
173
108
134
1 2 3 4 5
236 228 219 205 188
320 306 289 264 233
194 187 180 170 156
258 245 233 215 191
146 139 134 128 119
182 171 164 154 140
118 111 107 103 97
144 133 128 122 113
90 85 82 79 76
107 99 95 91 86
6 7 8 9 10
168 147 126 106 87
200 166 134 107 87
140 123 106 89 73
165 138 113 90 73
108 96 84 71 59
124 106 89 72 59
89 80 71 61 51
101 88 75 62 51
70 64 57 50 43
79 70 61 52 43
11 12 13 14
72 61 52 45
72 61 52 45
61 52 44 38
61 52 44 38
49 42 36 31
49 42 36 31
43 37 31 27
43 37 31 27
37 31 27 23
37 31 27 23
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 109
Fy = 36 ksi
z
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Single angles
w x
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.90)
Wt./ft
7⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
27.2
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
Y z
6× ×4
Size Thickness
36
5⁄ 8
23.6
50
36
9⁄ 16
20.0
50
36
1⁄ 2
18.1
50
36
7⁄ 16
16.2
50
36
3⁄ 8
14.3
50
36
5⁄ 16
10.3
12.3
50
36
50
36
50
0
259 359 225 312 190 264 172 239 154 205 132 171 107 136
81
100
1 2 3 4 5
250 244 233 217 198
343 331 310 282 248
91 111 87 105 85 102 82 97 78 91
66 63 61 59 57
78 73 70 68 65
6 7 8 9 10
177 155 133 111 91
212 154 184 129 155 117 139 104 121 176 135 153 113 129 102 116 91 102 142 115 124 98 105 88 94 79 84 112 97 98 82 83 74 75 67 67 91 80 80 67 67 61 61 55 55
89 102 79 87 68 73 58 59 48 48
72 65 57 49 41
82 72 61 50 41
54 50 45 39 34
61 55 48 41 34
11 12 13 14
75 63 54 47
40 34 29 25
34 29 25 22
34 29 25 22
29 24 21 18
29 24 21 18
75 63 54 47
215 210 201 188 172
293 284 268 244 215
66 55 47 41
66 55 47 41
178 174 168 157 144
56 47 40 35
241 233 222 203 180
56 47 40 35
159 155 150 141 130
51 43 37 32
214 206 197 182 162
139 135 131 125 115
51 43 37 32
46 38 33 28
180 172 166 155 139
46 38 33 28
116 112 109 105 98
145 138 133 126 116
40 34 29 25
6× ×31⁄2
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
3⁄ 8
15.3
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
x
w
5⁄ 16
11.7
9.8
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
146
195
101
128
77
95
1 2 3 4 5
132 127 121 112 100
171 162 152 137 118
86 82 79 75 69
105 99 94 88 79
63 59 57 55 51
74 69 66 63 58
6 7 8 9 10
87 74 60 48 39
98 78 61 48 39
61 53 44 36 30
68 56 45 36 30
47 41 36 30 25
51 44 37 30 25
11 12
33 28
33 28
25 21
25 21
21 18
21 18
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 110
COLUMN DESIGN
z
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Single angles
w x
x
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.90)
w Y z
5× ×31⁄2
Size 3⁄ 4
Thickness Wt./ft
19.8
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
16.8
3⁄ 8
13.6
10.4
1⁄ 4
8.7
7.0
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
188
261
159
221
130
180
97
126
76
96
54
66
1 2 3 4 5
182 176 165 150 133
249 238 218 192 162
152 148 139 127 113
207 199 183 162 137
120 117 112 103 91
162 156 146 130 111
85 82 80 75 68
107 102 98 90 79
64 61 60 57 53
77 74 71 67 61
43 41 40 38 36
49 47 45 44 41
6 7 8 9 10
115 96 79 63 51
132 103 79 63 51
97 82 67 53 43
112 88 67 53 43
79 67 55 44 35
90 71 55 44 35
59 50 42 33 27
66 54 42 33 27
47 41 34 28 23
52 44 35 28 23
34 30 26 22 18
37 32 27 22 18
11 12
42 35
42 35
36 30
36 30
29 25
29 25
23 19
23 19
19 16
19 16
15 13
15 13
5× ×3
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
7⁄ 16
12.8
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
11.3
5⁄ 16
9.8
1⁄ 4
8.2
6.6
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
122
169
107
146
91
118
71
90
51
62
1 2 3 4 5
112 108 100 88 75
151 143 128 108 87
97 93 87 77 66
127 120 109 93 76
80 76 72 65 56
100 94 87 76 63
60 57 54 50 44
72 68 64 58 49
40 38 36 34 31
46 44 42 39 34
6 7 8 9 10
62 49 38 30 24
66 49 38 30 24
54 43 33 27 22
58 43 33 27 22
46 37 29 23 19
49 37 29 23 19
37 30 24 19 16
40 31 24 19 16
27 23 19 15 13
29 24 19 15 13
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 111
Fy = 36 ksi
z
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Single angles
w x
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.90)
1⁄
Thickness Wt./ft
3⁄ 8
2
11.9
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
Y z
4× ×31⁄2
Size
5⁄ 16
9.1
1⁄ 4
7.7
6.2
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
113
158
87
120
73
95
53
68
1 2 3 4 5
107 105 99 90 79
146 142 131 114 95
78 77 75 68 60
104 102 98 87 73
63 61 60 57 51
79 76 74 69 59
43 42 42 41 38
52 50 49 48 44
6 7 8 9 10
67 56 45 35 29
76 58 45 35 29
51 43 35 27 22
58 45 34 27 22
43 36 29 23 19
48 38 29 23 19
33 28 23 19 15
37 30 24 19 15
11 12
24 20
24 20
18 15
18 15
15 13
15 13
13 11
13 11
4× ×3
Size 5⁄ 8
Thickness Wt./ft
1⁄ 2
13.6
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
x
w
7⁄ 16
11.1
3⁄ 8
9.8
5⁄ 16
8.5
1⁄ 4
7.2
5.8
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
129
179
105
146
93
129
80
112
67
88
50
63
1 2 3 4 5
124 119 108 95 81
170 160 141 118 93
100 96 88 78 66
136 129 114 96 76
87 84 78 68 58
117 112 101 84 67
73 71 66 59 50
98 94 86 73 58
59 57 55 49 42
74 71 67 58 47
41 40 39 36 32
50 48 46 42 36
6 7 8 9 10
66 52 39 31 25
70 51 39 31 25
54 42 32 26 21
57 42 32 26 21
47 37 29 23 18
51 37 29 23 18
41 32 25 20 16
44 32 25 20 16
35 27 21 17 14
37 27 21 17 14
27 22 17 14 11
29 22 17 14 11
31⁄2×3
Size Thickness
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
Wt./ft
10.2
7.9
6.6
5.4
Effective length KL (ft)
Fy
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
0
97
135
75
104
63
86
49
63
1 2 3 4 5
93 89 81 71 59
127 120 105 87 68
69 67 62 54 46
93 90 81 67 53
56 55 52 46 38
73 71 66 56 44
41 40 39 36 30
51 49 48 42 34
6 7 8 9 10
48 37 28 22 18
50 37 28 22 18
37 29 22 17 14
39 29 22 17 14
31 24 19 15 12
33 24 19 15 12
25 20 15 12 10
27 20 15 12 10
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
50
3 - 112
COLUMN DESIGN
z
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Single angles
w x
x
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.90)
w Y z
31⁄2×21⁄2
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness
3⁄ 8
9.4
Wt./ft
Effective length KL (ft)
Fy
1⁄ 4
7.2
4.9
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
89
124
68
95
45
58
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
85 79 70 58 46
116 105 88 68 49 34 25 19
63 60 53 44 35 26 19 15
85 79 67 52 38 26 19 15
38 37 34 29 24 18 13 10 8
47 45 41 33 25 18 13 10 8
34 25 19
3× ×21⁄2
Size Thickness
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
Wt./ft
8.5
6.6
5.6
4.5
3.39
Effective length KL (ft)
Fy
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
81
113
62
86
52
73
42
57
29
37
1 2 3 4 5
78 72 63 52 40
107 96 79 60 42
58 55 48 40 31
79 73 61 46 33
48 46 41 34 26
65 61 51 39 28
37 36 33 27 21
48 46 40 31 23
24 23 22 19 16
29 28 26 22 17
6 7 8
29 22 17
29 22 17
23 17 13
23 17 13
19 14 11
19 14 11
16 12 9
16 12 9
12 9 7
12 9 7
3× ×2
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness
7.7
Wt./ft
Fy Effective length KL (ft)
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
5.9
5.0
3⁄ 16
4.1
3.07
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0 1 2 3 4 5
73 69 61 50 37 26
101 94 80 60 40 26
56 52 47 38 29 20
78 71 61 46 31 20
47 43 39 32 24 17
66 58 51 39 26 17
39 34 31 26 20 14
51 43 39 30 21 14
27 22 21 18 14 10
34 27 25 21 15 10
6 7
18 13
18 13
14 10
14 10
12 9
12 9
10 7
10 7
7 5
7 5
21⁄2×2
Size 3⁄ 8
Thickness
5⁄ 16
5.3
Wt./ft
Fy Effective length KL (ft)
1⁄ 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1⁄ 4
4.5
3⁄ 16
3.62
2.75
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
50 48 42 34 25 17 12 9
70 65 55 41 27 17 12 9
42 40 36 29 21 15 10 7
59 54 46 34 23 15 10 7
34 31 29 23 17 12 8 6
48 42 37 28 18 12 8 6
26 22 21 17 13 9 6 5
33 27 25 20 14 9 6 5
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 113
Fy = 36 ksi
z
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Single angles
w x
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.90)
Y z
8× ×8
Size 11⁄8
Thickness Wt./ft
7⁄ 8
1
56.9
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
x
w
51.0
3⁄ 4
45.0
5⁄ 8
38.9
9⁄ 16
32.7
1⁄ 2
29.6
26.4
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
541
752
486
675
428
594
369
513
310
405
270
348
229
291
6 7 8 9 10
484 465 444 421 397
643 608 570 530 488
435 417 398 378 356
578 546 512 476 438
383 368 351 334 315
510 482 452 421 388
320 318 304 289 273
420 417 392 365 337
254 252 251 243 230
311 309 306 294 273
213 212 210 209 202
256 255 253 250 240
173 172 171 170 168
203 202 201 199 197
11 12 13 14 15
372 346 320 294 269
446 404 363 323 283
334 311 288 264 242
401 363 326 290 255
295 275 255 234 215
355 322 289 258 227
256 239 221 204 187
308 280 252 225 198
215 201 186 172 157
251 230 208 187 167
191 178 166 154 141
222 204 186 169 151
165 155 144 134 124
191 177 162 148 133
16 17 18 19 20
244 221 197 177 159
249 221 197 177 159
219 198 177 159 143
224 198 177 159 143
195 176 158 141 128
199 177 158 141 128
170 154 138 124 112
174 154 138 124 112
143 130 116 104 94
147 130 116 104 94
129 118 107 95 86
134 119 106 95 86
114 104 95 85 77
120 106 95 85 77
21 22 23 24 25
145 132 121 111 102
145 132 121 111 102
130 118 108 99 92
130 118 108 99 92
116 105 96 89 82
116 105 96 89 82
101 92 84 78 71
101 92 84 78 71
85 78 71 65 60
85 78 71 65 60
78 71 65 60 55
78 71 65 60 55
70 64 58 53 49
70 64 58 53 49
26
94
94
85
85
76
76
66
66
56
56
51
51
45
45
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 114
COLUMN DESIGN
z
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Single angles
w x
x
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.90)
w Y z
6× ×6
Size Thickness Wt./ft
7⁄ 8
1 37.4
Fy
36
3⁄ 4
33.1
50
36
5⁄ 8
28.7
50
36
9⁄ 16
24.2
50
36
50
1⁄ 2
21.9
36
7⁄ 16
19.6
50
36
3⁄ 8
17.2
50
36
5⁄ 16
14.9
50
36
12.4
50
36
50
Effective length KL (ft)
0 356 495 315 438 273 380 230 320 208 289 186 249 159 206 129 164 98 120 1 2 3 4 5
346 343 339 326 310
476 469 462 438 409
304 300 298 289 275
416 408 404 387 361
260 255 253 250 238
354 345 342 336 314
214 209 207 205 201
289 279 275 273 265
190 184 182 181 180
255 244 241 238 236
166 160 158 157 155
213 202 199 197 195
137 131 129 128 127
170 107 129 77 160 100 119 71 157 99 117 69 156 98 115 69 154 97 114 68
89 81 79 78 77
6 7 8 9 10
292 272 250 228 205
376 340 303 266 230
258 241 221 202 181
332 301 268 235 203
224 209 192 175 157
288 261 232 204 176
189 177 163 148 134
244 221 197 174 151
171 160 147 134 121
221 200 179 157 136
153 143 132 120 108
192 174 156 138 120
126 124 114 105 95
152 149 134 120 105
96 113 68 95 112 67 94 110 66 87 99 66 79 88 63
76 76 75 74 71
11 12 13 14 15
183 161 140 121 105
196 164 140 121 105
162 142 124 107 93
173 140 150 119 128 108 116 145 123 126 105 108 95 98 124 108 107 92 92 83 83 107 92 92 79 79 72 72 93 81 81 69 69 62 62
97 103 85 87 74 74 64 64 56 56
85 75 66 57 50
92 78 67 57 50
71 64 57 49 43
77 67 57 49 43
58 52 47 42 37
63 56 49 42 37
16 17 18 19
92 82 73 65
92 82 73 65
82 72 64 58
49 43 39 35
44 39 35 31
44 39 35 31
38 34 30 27
38 34 30 27
32 29 25 23
32 29 25 23
82 72 64 58
71 63 56 50
71 63 56 50
61 54 48 43
61 54 48 43
55 49 43 39
49 43 39 35
5× ×5
Size 7⁄ 8
Thickness Wt./ft
3⁄ 4
27.2
Fy
Effective length KL (ft)
55 49 43 39
5⁄ 8
23.6
1⁄ 2
20.0
7⁄ 16
16.2
3⁄ 8
14.3
5⁄ 16
12.3
10.3
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
259
359
225
312
190
264
154
214
135
184
115
149
89
114
1 2 3 4 5
251 249 241 228 212
345 341 325 301 272
216 214 209 198 184
296 291 283 262 237
179 177 176 167 156
244 239 236 221 200
141 138 137 135 127
189 183 181 179 163
121 117 116 115 112
157 152 150 148 141
99 95 94 93 92
122 117 115 114 112
73 70 69 68 67
88 83 81 80 79
6 7 8 9 10
194 175 155 135 116
241 209 177 146 119
169 152 135 118 102
210 182 154 128 104
143 129 114 100 86
178 154 131 108 88
116 105 93 82 70
145 126 107 89 72
102 93 82 72 62
126 110 94 78 64
87 79 71 62 54
105 92 80 67 56
67 64 57 51 45
78 74 65 55 47
11 12 13 14 15
98 82 70 60 53
98 82 70 60 53
86 72 61 53 46
86 72 61 53 46
73 61 52 45 39
73 61 52 45 39
60 50 43 37 32
60 50 43 37 32
53 44 38 33 28
53 44 38 33 28
46 39 33 28 25
46 39 33 28 25
38 33 28 24 21
39 33 28 24 21
16
46
46
40
40
34
34
28
28
25
25
22
22
18
18
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF COLUMNS
3 - 115
Fy = 36 ksi
z
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Single angles
w x
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.90)
Wt./ft
3⁄ 4
Effective length KL (ft)
5⁄ 8
18.5
Fy
1⁄ 2
15.7
7⁄ 16
12.8
3⁄ 8
11.3
5⁄ 16
9.8
1⁄ 4
8.2
6.6
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
176
245
149
207
122
169
107
149
93
129
78
101
57
73
1 2 3 4 5
171 168 158 144 129
236 228 209 185 159
144 142 134 122 109
196 194 178 157 135
114 113 109 100 89
155 152 145 128 110
99 97 96 88 79
133 130 128 113 97
83 81 80 76 68
110 107 106 98 84
66 64 64 63 57
82 79 78 77 68
46 44 44 43 43
55 52 51 51 50
6 7 8 9 10
112 96 79 64 52
131 105 81 64 52
95 81 67 54 44
111 89 69 54 44
78 66 55 44 36
91 73 56 44 36
69 59 49 40 32
81 65 50 40 32
60 51 43 34 28
70 56 44 34 28
50 43 36 29 24
57 47 37 29 24
39 34 29 24 19
44 37 30 24 19
11 12 13
43 36
43 36
36 30
36 30
30 25 21
30 25 21
26 22 19
26 22 19
23 19 16
23 19 16
19 16 14
19 16 14
16 13 11
16 13 11
31⁄2×31⁄2
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
7⁄ 16
11.1
Fy Effective length KL (ft)
Y z
4× ×4
Size Thickness
3⁄ 8
9.8
5⁄ 16
8.5
1⁄ 4
7.2
5.8
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
105
146
93
129
80
112
68
93
53
68
1 2 3 4 5
100 99 91 81 70
137 134 119 102 83
87 86 80 72 62
118 116 106 90 74
74 73 70 62 54
99 97 91 78 64
60 59 58 53 46
78 76 75 65 54
44 43 42 41 36
53 52 51 50 42
6 7 8 9 10
59 48 37 29 24
65 49 37 29 24
52 42 33 26 21
58 43 33 26 21
45 37 29 23 18
50 37 29 23 18
38 31 24 19 16
42 32 24 19 16
31 25 20 16 13
34 26 20 16 13
11
20
20
17
17
15
15
13
13
11
11
3× ×3
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
7⁄ 16
9.4
Fy Effective length KL (ft)
x
w
3⁄ 8
8.3
5⁄ 16
7.2
1⁄ 4
6.1
3⁄ 16
4.9
3.71
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
89
124
79
109
68
95
58
80
47
62
32
41
1 2 3 4 5
86 82 73 62 51
117 109 94 76 57
75 72 65 55 45
102 97 83 67 51
64 63 56 48 40
86 84 72 58 44
52 52 47 41 33
70 69 61 49 38
40 39 38 33 27
51 50 48 39 30
25 25 24 24 20
30 29 29 28 22
6 7 8 9
40 30 23 18
41 30 23 18
36 27 20 16
36 27 20 16
31 23 18 14
32 23 18 14
26 20 15 12
27 20 15 12
21 16 12 10
22 16 12 10
16 12 9 7
17 12 9 7
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3 - 116
COLUMN DESIGN
z
Fy = 36 ksi
Y
Fy = 50 ksi
COLUMNS Single angles
w x
x
Design axial strength in kips (φ = 0.90)
w Y z
21⁄2×21⁄2
Size 1⁄ 2
Thickness Wt./ft
7.7
Fy Effective length KL (ft)
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
5.9
1⁄ 4
5.0
3⁄ 16
4.1
3.07
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
73
101
56
78
47
66
39
54
29
37
1 2 3 4 5
71 64 55 44 33
97 85 68 50 33
53 49 42 34 25
73 65 52 38 26
44 42 36 29 21
59 55 44 33 22
34 34 29 23 18
46 45 36 27 18
24 23 22 18 13
29 28 26 20 14
6 7 8
23 17 13
23 17 13
18 13 10
18 13 10
15 11 9
15 11 9
13 9 7
13 9 7
10 7 5
10 7 5
2× ×2
Size Thickness
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
Wt./ft
4.7
3.92
3.19
2.44
1.65
Fy
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
44
61
37
52
30
42
23
32
14
18
1 2 3 4 5
42 36 28 20 13
57 46 33 20 13
35 31 24 17 11
48 39 28 17 11
28 25 19 14 9
38 32 23 14 9
20 19 15 11 7
27 25 18 11 7
11 11 10 7 5
13 13 11 8 5
6
9
9
8
8
6
6
5
5
3
3
Effective length KL (ft)
36 0
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
REFERENCES
3 - 117
COLUMN BASE PLATES
The design of column base plates is covered in Part 11 (Volume II) of this LRFD Manual. REFERENCES
Galambos, T. V. (ed.), 1988, Guide to Stability Design Criteria for Metal Structures, Fourth Edition, Structural Stability Research Council, John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY. Geschwindner, L., 1993, “The ‘Leaning’ Column in ASD and LRFD,” Proceedings of the 1993 National Steel Construction Conference, AISC, Chicago, IL. Uang, C. M., S. W. Wattar, and K. M. Leet, 1990, “Proposed Revision of the Equivalent Axial Load Method for LRFD Steel and Composite Beam-Column Design,” Engineering Journal, 1st Qtr., AISC, Chicago. Zureick, A., 1993, “Design Strength of Concentrically Loaded Single-Angle Struts,” Engineering Journal, 4th Qtr., AISC, Chicago.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4-1
PART 4 BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 DESIGN STRENGTH OF BEAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Design Strength If Elastic Analysis Is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Flexural Design Strength for Cb = 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Flexural Design Strength for Cb > 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Design Strength If Plastic Analysis Is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE FOR SHAPES USED AS BEAMS . . . 4-11 Use of the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 MOMENT OF INERTIA SELECTION TABLES FOR W AND M SHAPES . . . . . . . . 4-23 FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Use of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Reference Notes on Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Tables, Fy = 36 ksi: W Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Tables, Fy = 36 ksi: S Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Tables, Fy = 36 ksi: Channels (C, MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Tables, Fy = 50 ksi: W Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Tables, Fy = 50 ksi: S Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98 Tables, Fy = 50 ksi: Channels (C, MC)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101 DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH GREATER THAN Lp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109 Charts (Fy = 36 ksi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113 Charts (Fy = 50 ksi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139 PLATE GIRDER DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167 Flexure and Shear Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167 Table of Dimensions and Properties of Built-up Wide-Flange Section . . . . . . . . . . 4-167 Design Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4-2
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187 Frequently Used Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-188 Table of Concentrated Load Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-189 Static Loading Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-190 Design Properties of Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-205 FLOOR DEFLECTIONS AND VIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-207 Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-207 Deflections and Camber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-207 Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-208 BEAMS: OTHER SUBJECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-211 REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-213
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OVERVIEW
4-3
OVERVIEW Beam tables are located as follows: Load Factor Design Selection Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Moment of Inertia Selection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Factored Uniform Load Tables, Fy = 36 ksi, begin on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Factored Uniform Load Tables, Fy = 50 ksi, begin on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Beam charts are located as follows: Beam Design Moments, Fy = 36 ksi, begin on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113 Beam Design Moments, Fy = 50 ksi, begin on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139 Plate Girder Design Tables are on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183 Beam Diagrams and Formulas begin on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-187 Additional information related to beam design is provided as follows: Floor deflections and vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-207
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4-4
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF BEAMS
4-5
DESIGN STRENGTH OF BEAMS General
Beams are proportioned so that no applicable strength limit state is exceeded when subjected to factored load combinations and that no serviceability limit state is exceeded when subjected to service loads. Strength limit states for beams include local buckling, lateral torsional buckling, and yielding. Serviceability limit states may include, but are not limited to, deflection and vibration. The flexural design strength for beams must equal or exceed the required strength based on the factored loads. The design strength φbMn for each applicable limit state shall equal or exceed the maximum moment Mu as determined from the applicable factored load combinations given in Section A4 of the LRFD Specification. Values of φbMn are tabulated in the pages to follow. These values are based on beam behavior as shown in Figure 4-1 and explained in the following discussion. It should be noted that the LRFD Specification expresses values for moments and lengths in kip-in. and inches. In this and other parts of the LRFD Manual, these values are tabulated in kip-ft and feet. The required strength can be determined by either elastic or plastic analysis. Design Strength If Elastic Analysis Is Used
The flexural design strength of rolled I and C shape beams designed using elastic analysis, according to LRFD Specification Section F1 is: φbMn where φb = 0.90
Mp M n′
Mn Mr (CbMn – Mn) CbMn Mn
Lp
L ′p
Lm
Lm′
Lr
Lb
Fig. 4-1 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4-6
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
Mn = nominal flexural strength as determined by the limit state of yielding, lateraltorsional buckling, or local buckling Flexural Design Strength for Cb = 1.0
Compact Sections (Cb = 1.0)
When Lb ≤ Lp
The flexural design strength of compact (flange and web local buckling λ ≤ λp) I-shaped and C-shaped rolled beams (as defined in Section B5 of the LRFD Specification) bent about the major or minor axis is: φbMn = φbMp = φbZFy / 12 In minor axis flexure this is true for all unbraced lengths, but for bending about the major axis the distance Lb between points braced against lateral movement of the compression flange or between points braced to prevent twist of the cross-section shall not exceed the value Lp (see Figure 4-1). Lp =
300ry Fy √
(F1-4)
When Lp < Lb ≤ Lr The flexural design strength of compact I or C rolled shapes bent about the major axis, from LRFD Specification Section F1.2, is: Lb − Lp φbMn = φbMp − φb(Mp − Mr) ≤ φbMp Lr − Lp where the limiting length Lr and the corresponding buckling moment Mr (see Figure 4-1) are determined as follows: Lr =
ryX1 (Fy − Fr )
√ 1+√ 1 + X2(Fy − Fr)2
(F1-6)
where X1 =
π Sx
√
4Cw X2 = Iy
EGJA 2
Sx GJ
(F1-8)
2
φbMr = φbSx(Fy − Fr ) / 12 kip-ft Sx = section modulus about major axis, in.3 E = modulus of elasticity of steel, 29,000 ksi G = shear modulus of steel, 11,200 ksi J = torsional constant, in.4 A = cross-sectional area of beam, in.2 Cw = warping constant, in.6 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(F1-9)
DESIGN STRENGTH OF BEAMS
4-7
Fr = compressive residual stress in flange: for rolled shapes Fr = 10 ksi; for welded shapes Fr = 16.5 ksi Values of J and Cw are tabulated for some shapes in Part 1 of the LRFD Manual. For values not shown, see Torsional Analysis of Steel Members (AISC, 1983). Compact and Noncompact Sections (Cb = 1.0)
When Lb > Lr
According to LRFD Specification Section F1.2b, the flexural design strength of compact and noncompact I or C rolled shapes bent about the major axis is: π φbMn = φbMcr = φb Lb
√ 2
πE EIyGJ + IyCw Lb
SxX1√ 2 = φb (Lb / ry)
√ 1+
X21X2 ≤ φbMr 2(Lb / ry)2
Noncompact Sections (Cb = 1.0)
When Lb ≤ Lp′
All rolled W shapes are compact except the W40×174, W14×99, W14×90, W12×65, W10×12, W8×10, and W6×15 for 50 ksi and the W6×15 for 36 ksi. The flexural design strength φbMn′ (see Figure 4-1) for noncompact (flange or web local buckling λp < λ ≤ λr) I and C rolled shapes bent about the major or minor axis is the smaller value for either local flange buckling or local web buckling as determined by: λ − λp φbMn′ = φbMp − φb(Mp − Mr) λr − λp For local flange buckling: λ = bf / 2tf for I-shaped members λ = bf / tf for C-shaped members Fy λp = 65 / √ λr = 141 / √ Fy − 10 For local web buckling: λ = h / tw λp = 640 / √ Fy Fy λr = 970 / √ Mp − Mn′ Lp′ = Lp + (Lr − Lp) Mp − Mr Sections with a width-to-thickness ratio exceeding the specified values for λr are slender shapes and must be analyzed using LRFD Specification Appendix B5.3. When Lp′ < Lb ≤ Lr AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4-8
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
The flexural design strength of noncompact I or C rolled shapes bent about the major axis is determined by: Lb − Lp φbMn = φbMp − φb(Mp − Mr) ≤ φbMn′ Lr − Lp In the Load Factor Design Selection Table, in the case of the noncompact shapes, the values of φbMn′ and Lp′ are tabulated as φbMp and Lp. The formula above may be used with the tabulated values. Flexural Design Strength for Cb > 1.0
Cb is a factor which varies with the moment gradient between bracing points (Lb). For Cb greater than 1.0, the design flexural strength is equal to the tabulated value of the design flexural strength (with Cb = 1.0) multiplied by the calculated Cb value. The maximum value is φbMp for compact shapes or φbMn′ for noncompact shapes. The maximum unbraced lengths associated with the maximum flexural design strengths φbMp and φbMn′ are Lm and Lm′ (see Figure 4-1). A new expression for Cb is given in the LRFD Specification. (It is more accurate than the one previously shown.) Cb =
12.5Mmax 2.5Mmax + 3MA + 4MB + 3Mc
(F1-3)
where M is the absolute value of a moment in the unbraced beam segment as follows: Mmax , the maximum MA , at the quarter point MB , at the centerline Mc , at the three-quarter point Values for Cb for some typical loading conditions are given in Table 4-1. Compact Sections (Cb > 1.0)
When Lb ≤ Lm
The flexural design strength for rolled I and C shapes is: φbMn = φbMp When Lb > Lm The flexural design strength is: φbMn = Cb[φbMn (for Cb = 1.0)] ≤ φbMp For Lm ≤ Lr Lm = Lp +
(CbMp − Mp)(Lr − Lp) Cb(Mp − Mr) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN STRENGTH OF BEAMS
4-9
Table 4-1. Values of Cb for Simply Supported Beams Lateral Bracing Along Span
Load
Cb
None 1.32
At load points 1.67
1.67
None 1.14
At load points 1.67
1.00
1.67
None 1.14
At load points 1.67
1.11
None
At centerline
Cbπ Mp
1.30
√ √ √ EIyGJ 2
1+
1+
4CwM2p IyC2bG2J2
The value of Cb for which Lm or Lm′ equals Lr for any rolled shape is: Cb =
Fy Zx (Fy − 10)Sx
Noncompact Sections (Cb > 1.0)
When Lb ≤ Lm′
The flexural design strength for rolled I and C shapes is: φbMn = φbMn′ < φbMp When Lb > Lm′ The flexural design strength is: φbMn = Cb[φbMn (for Cb = 1.0)] ≤ φbMn′ AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.67
1.14
For Lm > Lr
Lm =
1.11
1.30
4 - 10
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
For Lm′ ≤ Lr Lm′ = Lp′ +
(CbMn′ − Mn′)(Lr − Lp) Cb(Mp − Mr)
For Lm′ > Lr Lm =
Cbπ Mp
√ √ √ EIyGJ 2
1+
1+
4CwM2p IyC2bG2J2
Design Strength If Plastic Analysis Is Used
The design flexural strength for plastic analysis is: φbMn = φbMp where φb = 0.90 Mp = ZxFy / 12 kip-ft The yield strength of material that may be used with plastic analysis is limited to 65 ksi. Plastic analysis is limited to compact shapes as defined in Table B5.1 of the LRFD Specification as: λp = bf / 2tf ≤ 65 / √ Fy for the flanges of I shapes in flexure Fy for the flanges of C shapes in flexure λp = bf / tf ≤ 65 / √ and λp = h / tw ≤ 640 / √ Fy for beam webs in flexural compression where
.
λp = limiting slenderness parameter for compact element bf = width of flange for I and C shapes, in. tf = flange thickness, in. h = clear distance between flanges less the fillet at each flange, in. tw = beam web thickness, in
In addition, LRFD Specification Section F1.2d states: for a section bent about the major axis, the laterally unbraced length of the compression flange at plastic hinge locations associated with the failure mechanism shall not exceed: Lpd =
3,600 + 2,220(M1 / M2) ry Fy
where Fy M1 M2 ry (M1 / M2)
= specified yield strength of compression flange, ksi = smaller moment at end of unbraced length of beam, kip-in. = larger moment at end of unbraced length of beam, kip-in. = radius of gyration about minor axis, in. is positive when the moments cause reverse curvature AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(F1-17)
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE FOR SHAPES USED AS BEAMS
4 - 11
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE FOR SHAPES USED AS BEAMS
This table facilitates the selection of beams designed on the basis of flexural strength in accordance with Section F of the LRFD Specification. It includes only W and M shapes designed as beams. A laterally supported beam can be selected by entering the table with the required plastic section modulus or factored bending moment, and comparing it with tabulated values of Zx or φbMp respectively. The table is applicable to adequately braced beams with unbraced lengths not exceeding Lr, i.e., Lb ≤ Lr. For beams with unbraced lengths greater than Lp, it may be convenient to use the unbraced beam charts. For most loading conditions, it is convenient to use this selection table. However, for adequately braced, simply supported beams with a uniform load over the entire length, or equivalent symmetrical loading, the tables of Factored Uniform Loads can also be used. In this table, shapes are listed in groups by descending order plastic section modulus Zx. Included also for steel of Fy = 36 ksi and 50 ksi are values for the maximum flexural design strength φbMp; the limiting buckling moment φbMr; the limiting laterally unbraced compression flange length for full plastic moment capacity and uniform moment (Cb = 1.0) Lp; limiting laterally unbraced length for inelastic lateral-torsional buckling Lr; and BF, a factor that can be used to calculate the resisting moment φbMn for beams with unbraced lengths between the limiting bracing lengths Lp and Lr. For noncompact shapes, as determined by Section B5 of the LRFD Specification, the maximum flexural design strength φbMn, max as determined by LRFD Specification Formula A-F1-3 is tabulated as φbMp. The associated maximum unbraced length is tabulated as Lp. (See the previous discussion under Design Strength of Beams for further explanation.) The symbols used in this table are: Zx = plastic section modulus, X-X axis, in.3 φbMp = design plastic bending moment, kip-ft = φbZxFy / 12 if shape is compact λ − λp = φbM′n = φbMp − φb(Mp − Mr) if shape is noncompact λr − λp φbMr = limiting design buckling moment, kip-ft = φbSx(Fy − Fr ) / 12 where Fr = 10 ksi for rolled shapes Lp = limiting laterally unbraced length for inelastic LTB, ft, uniform moment case (Cb = 1) Lr = limiting laterally unbraced length for elastic lateral-torsional buckling, ft BF = a factor that can be used to calculate the design flexural strength for unbraced lengths Lb, between Lp and Lr, kip-ft φb(Mp − Mr) = Lr − Lp where φbMn = Cb[φbMp − BF(Lb − Lp)] ≤ φbMp AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 12
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
Use of the Table
Determine the required plastic section modulus Zx from the maximum factored moment Mu (kip-ft) using the desired steel yield strength. Zx =
12Mu φbFy
Enter the column headed Zx and find a value equal to or greater than the plastic section modulus required. Alternatively, enter the φbMp column and find a value of φbMp equal to or greater than the required factored load moment. The beam opposite these values (Zx or φbMp) in the shapes column, and all beams above it, have sufficient flexural strength based only on these parameters. The first beam appearing in boldface type adjacent to or above the required Zx or φbMp is the lightest section that will serve for the steel yield stress used in the calculations. If the beam must not exceed a certain depth, proceed up the column headed “Shape” until a beam within the required depth is reached. After a shape has been selected, the following checks should be made. If the lateral bracing of the compressive flange exceeds Lp, but is less than Lr, the design flexural strength may be calculated as follows: φbMn = Cb[φbMp − BF(Lb − Lp)] ≤ φbMp If the bracing length Lb is substantially greater than Lp, i.e., Lb > Lr, it is recommended the unbraced beam charts be used. A check should be made of the beam web shear strength by referring to the Factored Uniform Load Tables or by use of the formula: φvVn = φv0.6FywAw (from LRFD Specification Section F2) where φv = 0.90 If a deflection limitation also exists, the adequacy of the selected beam should be checked accordingly.
EXAMPLE 4-1
Given:
Solution (Zx method):
Select a beam of Fy = 50 ksi steel subjected to a factored uniform bending moment of 256 kip-ft, having its compression flange braced at 5.0 ft intervals. Assume Cb = 1.0. Zx (req’d) =
Mu(12) 256(12) = = 68.3 in.3 φbFy 0.9(50)
Enter the Load Factor Design Selection Table and find the nearest higher tabulated value of Zx is 69.6 in., which corresponds to a W14×43. This beam, however, is not in boldface type. Proceed up the shape column and locate the first beam in boldface, W16×40. Note the values tabulated for φbMp and Lp are 273 kip-ft and 5.6 ft, respectively. Use W16x40 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE FOR SHAPES USED AS BEAMS
4 - 13
Alternatively, proceed up the shape column and select a W18×40. The tabulated values for φbMp and Lp are 294 kip-ft and 4.5 ft, respectively. Since the bracing length Lb is larger than Lp and smaller than Lr, the maximum resisting moment may be calculated as follows: φbMn = Cb[φbMp − BF(Lb − Lp)] = 1.0[294 − (11.7)(5.0 − 4.5)] = 288 kip-ft > 256 kip-ft req’d o.k. A W18×40 is satisfactory. Alternate solution (Mp method):
Enter the column of φbMp values and note the tabulated value nearest and higher than the required factored moment (Mu) is 261 kip-ft, which corresponds to a W14×43. Scanning the φbMp values for shapes listed higher in the column, a W16×40 is found to be the lightest suitable shape with Lb < Lp. Use W16×40
EXAMPLE 4-2
Given:
Determine the design flexural strength of a W16×40 of Fy = 36 ksi and Fy = 50 ksi steel with the compression flange braced at intervals of 9.0 ft. Assume Cb = 1.1.
Solution:
Enter the Load Factor Design Table and note that for a W16×40, Fy = 36 ksi: φbMp = 197 kip-ft Lp = 6.5 ft Lr = 19.3 ft BF = 5.54 kips φbMn = Cb[φbMp − BF(Lb − Lp)] ≤ φb Mp = 1.1[197 − 5.54(9 − 6.5)] ≤ 197 kip-ft = 197 kip-ft Enter the Load Factor Design Selection Table and note that for a W16×40, Fy = 50 ksi: φbMp = 273 kip-ft Lp = 5.6 ft Lr = 14.7 ft BF = 8.67 kips φbMn = Cb[φbMp − BF(Lb − Lp)] ≤ φb Mp = 1.1[273 − 8.67(9 − 5.6)] ≤ 273 kip-ft = 268 kip-ft AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 14
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
EXAMPLE 4-3
Given:
Select a beam of Fy = 50 ksi steel subjected to a factored uniform bending moment of 30 kip-ft having its compression flange braced at 4.0-ft intervals and a depth of eight inches or less. Assume Cb = 1.0.
Solution (Zx method):
Assume shape is compact and Lb ≤ Lp. Zx req’d =
12Mu 12(30) = = 8.0 in.3 φbFy 0.9(50)
Enter the Load Factor Design Selection Table and note that for a W8×10, Fy = 50 ksi, the shape is noncompact, however, the maximum resisting moment φbMn listed in the φbMp column is adequate. Further note: φbMn = 33.0 kip-ft Lp = 3.1 ft Lr = 7.8 ft BF = 2.03 kips Since Lp < Lb ≤ Lr φbMn = Cb[φbMn − BF(Lb − Lp)] = 1.0[33.0 − 2.03(4.0 − 3.1)] = 33.0 − 1.8 = 31.2 kip-ft > 30 kip-ft req’d o.k. Use: W8×10 Alternate Solution (Mp method):
Enter the Selection Table and note that in the column of φbMp values for W8×10, Fy = 50 ksi, the value of φbMp is 33.0 kip-ft, which is adequate. Also note, however, Lp = 3.1 ft is less than the bracing interval Lb = 4.0 ft, and that BF is equal to 2.03 kips. Therefore: φbMn = 1.0[33.0 − 2.03(4 − 3.1)] = 31.2 kip-ft > 30 kip-ft req’d o.k. Use: W8×10
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE FOR SHAPES USED AS BEAMS
4 - 15
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE For shapes used as beams φb = 0.90 Fy = 36 ksi
Zx
Fy = 50 ksi
BF
Lr
Lp
φbMr
φbMp
Zx
Kips
Ft
Ft
Kip-ft Kip-ft
in.3
φbMr
Lp
Lr
BF
Kip-ft Kip-ft
Ft
Ft
Kips
34.5
138.2
17.8
6180
10300
3830
W36×848a 14400
9510
15.1
90.5
64.3
34.1
130.1
17.7
5810
9639
3570
W36×798a 13400
8940
15.0
85.3
63.2
33.2
105.9
17.2
4720
7668
2840
W36×650a 10700
7260
14.6
70.0
61.1
41.9
84.8
15.9
4560
7450
2760
W40×593a 10400
7020
13.5
56.8
76.7
41.2 33.2
72.5 86.8
15.5 16.8
3860 3800
6210 6129
2300 2270
W40×503a W36× 527a
8630 8510
5940 5850
13.2 14.2
49.5 58.3
73.9 60.4
46.9
58.2
11.3
3330
5540
2050
W40×466a
7690
5130
9.6
39.4
85.9
41.0 19.3 32.7 23.7
63.3 119.4 73.5 93.6
15.2 15.3 16.5 15.6
3300 3060 3160 2980
5270 5080 5022 4830
1950 1880 1860 1790
W40×431 W27× 539a W36× 439a W30× 477a
7310 7050 6980 6710
5070 4710 4860 4590
12.9 12.9 14.0 13.3
44.1 78.2 50.3 62.0
72.0 35.9 58.2 43.5
46.6
49.8
11.0
2810
4620
1710
W40×392a
6410
4320
9.3
34.3
83.7
39.9 32.5
56.6 67.2
15.0 16.3
2850 2830
4510 4482
1670 1660
W40×372 W36× 393a
6260 6230
4380 4350
12.7 13.8
40.3 46.7
68.4 57.0
48.6 15.3 18.9 32.5
48.0 123.3 99.2 62.4
14.6 14.2 14.9 16.1
2750 2520 2540 2570
4370 4190 4130 4077
1620 1550 1530 1510
W44×335 W24× 492a W27× 448a W36× 359a
6080 5810 5740 5660
4230 3870 3900 3960
12.4 12.1 12.6 13.7
35.5 80.5 65.3 44.0
79.7 28.4 34.9 56.2
46.2 22.9 29.4
43.2 77.5 64.4
10.7 15.3 15.6
2360 2440 2400
3860 3860 3830
1430 1430 1420
W40×331 W30× 391a W33× 354a
5360 5360 5330
3630 3750 3690
9.1 13.0 13.2
30.5 52.1 44.7
80.9 41.2 51.9
46.1 38.4 32.2 38.4
45.3 51.2 58.5 48.9
14.6 14.8 16.0 14.8
2420 2440 2360 2280
3830 3830 3726 3590
1420 1420 1380 1330
W44×290 W40× 321 W36× 328a W40× 297
5330 5330 5180 4990
3720 3750 3630 3510
12.4 12.6 13.6 12.5
34.0 37.2 41.7 35.9
74.1 63.9 54.9 63.2
43.4 28.9 31.6 14.7 37.3 19.0 44.2 23.4 31.0 28.2 43.7
43.1 59.3 55.1 103.0 47.9 82.0 38.2 66.6 53.0 55.7 37.0
14.4 15.5 16.0 13.9 14.9 14.5 10.5 15.0 15.9 15.4 10.5
2180 2160 2160 2070 2150 2070 1990 2010 2010 1970 1890
3430 3430 3402 3380 3380 3350 3210 3210 3159 3110 3050
1270 1270 1260 1250 1250 1240 1190 1190 1170 1150 1130
W44×262 W33× 318a W36× 300 W24× 408a W40× 277 W27× 368a W40× 278 W30× 326a W36× 280 W33× 291a W40× 264
4760 4760 4730 4690 4690 4650 4460 4460 4390 4310 4240
3360 3330 3330 3180 3300 3180 3060 3090 3090 3030 2910
12.2 13.1 13.5 11.8 12.7 12.3 8.9 12.8 13.5 13.0 8.9
32.8 41.8 39.9 67.5 35.5 54.6 27.6 45.7 38.8 39.8 27.0
68.2 49.9 52.9 27.0 60.8 34.8 74.9 41.7 51.3 48.0 73.3
35.6
45.4
14.8
1930
3020
1120
W40×249
4200
2980
12.6
34.1
56.9
Shape
φbMp
aGroup 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2 (Part 1).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 16
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE For shapes used as beams φb = 0.90
Zx
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
BF
Lr
Lp
φbMr
φbMp
Zx
Kips
Ft
Ft
Kip-ft Kip-ft
in.3
φbMr
Lp
Lr
BF
Kip-ft Kip-ft
φbMp
Ft
Ft
Kips
40.1 30.3 23.1 37.0 27.7 15.0 18.7 41.8 29.6
41.2 50.6 60.5 39.7 52.0 84.5 69.4 35.1 48.8
14.3 15.8 14.9 11.0 15.3 13.5 14.3 10.6 15.6
1890 1860 1810 1750 1790 1680 1720 1700 1750
2970 2916 2860 2810 2810 2750 2750 2730 2727
1100 1080 1060 1040 1040 1020 1020 1010 1010
W44×230 W36×260 W30× 292a W36×256 W33× 263a W24× 335a W27× 307a W40×235 W36×245
4130 4050 3980 3900 3900 3830 3830 3790 3790
2910 2860 2780 2690 2750 2590 2650 2620 2690
12.1 13.4 12.7 9.4 12.9 11.4 12.1 9.0 13.3
31.7 37.5 42.1 28.8 37.8 55.8 46.9 26.0 36.4
62.0 49.4 40.4 62.7 46.3 27.8 33.7 68.6 47.7
33.1 28.7 22.8 27.0 36.1
42.7 47.3 55.4 49.2 37.2
14.8 15.5 14.8 15.1 10.9
1670 1630 1610 1620 1580
2600 2550 2540 2540 2530
963 943 941 939 936
W40×215 W36×230 W30×261 W33×241 W36×232
3610 3540 3530 3520 3510
2570 2510 2480 2490 2430
12.5 13.2 12.5 12.8 9.3
32.6 35.6 39.2 36.2 27.3
51.6 45.8 39.2 44.2 59.9
40.2
33.2
10.5
1530
2440
905
W40×211
3390
2360
8.9
24.9
64.7
31.6 26.0 18.6 22.4 14.7 34.9
41.1 46.9 59.6 51.6 71.2 35.0
14.4 15.0 14.0 14.7 13.2 10.8
1500 1480 1450 1450 1400 1400
2340 2310 2300 2280 2250 2250
868 855 850 845 835 833
W40×199 W33×221 W27×258 W30×235 W24× 279a W36×210
3260 3210 3190 3170 3130 3120
2310 2270 2230 2240 2150 2160
12.2 12.7 11.9 12.4 11.2 9.1
31.6 35.0 41.1 37.1 47.6 26.1
48.8 41.9 32.9 37.7 26.9 56.8
37.4 25.0 18.5 34.0 8.40 21.8 14.7
31.2 44.8 55.0 33.5 109.5 47.9 64.3
10.4 14.8 13.9 10.7 12.3 14.5 13.1
1330 1330 1310 1290 1220 1290 1260
2110 2080 2080 2070 2030 2020 2010
781 772 769 767 753 749 744
W40×183 W33×201 W27×235 W36×194 W18× 311a W30×211 W24× 250a
2930 2900 2880 2880 2820 2810 2790
2050 2050 2020 1990 1870 1990 1930
8.8 12.6 11.8 9.1 10.4 12.3 11.1
23.8 33.8 38.5 25.2 71.5 35.1 43.4
59.0 39.7 32.3 54.6 15.6 36.0 26.6
32.7
32.8
10.6
1210
1940
718
W36×182
2690
1870
9.0
24.9
52.0
b
Shape
27.5 18.2
38.4 52.0
13.6 13.8
1250 1220
1930 1910
715 708
W40×174 W27×217
2660 2660
1920 1870
12.0 11.7
29.9 36.8
41.3 31.3
35.6 8.29 14.7 21.0 31.5 28.3 17.8
29.7 99.6 59.3 45.4 31.9 32.6 48.0
10.0 12.1 13.0 14.4 10.5 10.4 13.7
1170 1100 1150 1170 1130 1070 1080
1870 1830 1830 1820 1800 1700 1700
692 676 676 673 668 629 628
W40×167 W18× 283a W24×229 W30×191 W36×170 W33×169 W27×194
2600 2540 2540 2520 2510 2360 2360
1800 1690 1760 1790 1740 1650 1670
8.5 10.3 11.0 12.2 8.9 8.8 11.6
22.8 65.1 40.4 33.7 24.4 24.5 34.6
55.6 15.4 26.2 33.9 49.6 45.4 30.0
30.7 8.21 14.5 20.2
30.9 90.9 54.2 43.2
10.4 12.0 12.8 14.3
1060 1000 1040 1050
1680 1650 1640 1630
624 611 606 605
W36×160 W18× 258a W24×207 W30×173
2340 2290 2270 2270
1630 1540 1590 1620
8.8 10.2 10.9 12.1
23.7 59.5 37.4 32.5
48.0 15.2 25.6 32.0
aGroup 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2 (Part 1). bIndicates noncompact shape; F = 50 ksi y
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE FOR SHAPES USED AS BEAMS
4 - 17
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE For shapes used as beams φb = 0.90 Fy = 36 ksi
Zx
Fy = 50 ksi
BF
Lr
Lp
φbMr
φbMp
Zx
Kips
Ft
Ft
Kip-ft Kip-ft
in.3
φbMr
Lp
Lr
BF
Kip-ft Kip-ft
Ft
Ft
Kips
32.8 29.4 17.5 26.8 14.3 8.09 11.0
28.2 30.2 45.2 31.2 51.3 82.8 60.8
9.5 10.3 13.6 10.3 12.8 11.9 12.6
998 983 979 950 957 909 899
1610 1570 1530 1510 1510 1480 1430
597 581 567 559 559 549 530
W40×149 W36× 150 W27× 178 W33× 152 W24× 192 W18× 234a W21× 201
2240 2180 2130 2100 2100 2060 1990
1540 1510 1510 1460 1470 1400 1380
8.1 8.7 11.5 8.7 10.9 10.1 10.7
21.9 23.4 33.1 23.7 35.7 54.4 41.1
50.8 45.6 28.8 42.3 25.0 14.9 19.9
25.7 16.9 14.3
30.1 42.8 47.8
10.1 13.5 12.7
874 887 878
1390 1380 1380
514 512 511
W33×141 W27× 161 W24× 176
1930 1920 1920
1340 1370 1350
8.6 11.5 10.7
23.1 31.7 33.8
40.2 27.4 24.6
27.5 23.7 8.00 10.9 14.1
28.8 30.6 75.0 55.8 45.2
9.9 9.5 11.8 12.5 12.7
856 850 817 813 807
1370 1350 1320 1290 1260
509 500 490 476 468
W36×135 W30× 148 W18× 211a W21× 182 W24× 162
1910 1880 1840 1790 1760
1320 1310 1260 1250 1240
8.4 8.1 10.0 10.6 10.8
22.4 22.8 49.5 38.1 32.4
42.2 38.6 14.7 19.4 23.8
24.5 16.2 7.98 22.4 10.8 13.8
29.1 40.7 68.3 29.0 51.7 42.0
10.0 13.4 11.6 9.4 12.4 12.5
792 801 741 741 741 723
1260 1240 1190 1180 1170 1130
467 461 442 437 432 418
W33×130 W27× 146 W18× 192 W30× 132 W21× 166 W24× 146
1750 1730 1660 1640 1620 1570
1220 1230 1140 1140 1140 1110
8.4 11.3 9.9 8.0 10.5 10.6
22.5 30.6 45.3 22.0 35.7 30.6
37.9 25.8 14.6 35.6 19.1 22.8
23.1 21.6 7.95 18.9
27.8 28.2 62.3 30.0
9.7 9.3 11.5 9.2
700 692 671 673
1120 1100 1070 1070
415 408 398 395
W33×118 W30× 124 W18× 175 W27× 129
1560 1530 1490 1480
1080 1070 1030 1040
8.2 7.9 9.8 7.8
21.7 21.5 41.5 22.3
35.5 34.1 14.5 30.9
21.1 10.7 13.3 7.87
27.1 46.4 39.3 56.7
9.1 12.3 12.4 11.4
642 642 642 605
1020 1010 999 961
378 373 370 356
W30×116 W21× 147 W24× 131 W18× 158
1420 1400 1390 1340
987 987 987 930
7.7 10.4 10.5 9.7
20.8 32.8 29.1 38.2
33.0 18.4 21.5 14.2
20.2 18.0 10.5 12.7 7.82
26.3 28.2 43.1 37.1 52.2
9.0 9.1 12.2 12.3 11.3
583 583 575 567 550
934 926 899 883 869
346 343 333 327 322
W30×108 W27× 114 W21× 132 W24× 117 W18× 143
1300 1290 1250 1230 1210
897 897 885 873 846
7.6 7.7 10.4 10.4 9.6
20.3 21.3 30.9 27.9 35.5
31.5 28.7 17.7 20.2 14.0
19.0 10.3 17.0 7.79 12.0
25.5 41.0 26.8 48.0 35.2
8.8 12.2 9.0 11.3 12.1
525 532 521 499 503
842 829 824 786 780
312 307 305 291 289
W30×99 W21× 122 W27× 102 W18× 130 W24× 104
1170 1150 1140 1090 1080
807 819 801 768 774
7.4 10.3 7.6 9.5 10.3
19.8 29.8 20.5 33.0 26.8
29.2 17.1 26.7 13.8 18.8
Shape
φbMp
aGroup 4 or Group 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2 (Part 1).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 18
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE For shapes used as beams φb = 0.90
Zx
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
BF
Lr
Lp
φbMr
φbMp
Zx
Kips
Ft
Ft
Kip-ft Kip-ft
in.3
φbMr
Lp
Lr
BF
Kip-ft Kip-ft
Ft
Ft
Kips
17.8 14.8 10.1 16.2 7.72 14.3 9.61
24.8 27.1 38.7 25.9 44.1 25.9 37.1
8.7 8.3 12.1 8.8 11.2 8.3 12.0
478 478 486 474 450 433 443
764 756 753 751 705 686 683
283 280 279 278 261 254 253
W30×90 W24×103 W21×111 W27× 94 W18×119 W24× 94 W21×101
1060 1050 1050 1040 979 953 949
735 735 747 729 693 666 681
7.4 7.0 10.3 7.5 9.5 7.0 10.2
19.4 20.1 28.5 19.9 30.8 19.4 27.6
27.1 24.1 16.4 25.2 13.4 23.0 15.4
15.0 3.87 7.62
24.9 73.6 40.4
8.6 15.7 11.1
415 408 398
659 632 621
244 234 230
W27×84 W14×132 W18×106
915 878 863
639 627 612
7.3 13.3 9.4
19.3 49.6 28.7
23.0 6.89 13.0
13.6 11.8 3.86 7.51
24.5 26.6 67.9 38.1
8.1 7.7 15.6 11.0
382 374 371 367
605 597 572 570
224 221 212 211
W24×84 W21× 93 W14×120 W18× 97
840 829 795 791
588 576 570 564
6.9 6.5 13.2 9.4
18.6 19.4 46.2 27.4
21.5 19.6 6.82 12.6
12.7 6.10 11.3 3.84 2.95 7.27
23.4 42.1 24.9 62.7 75.5 35.5
8.0 10.5 7.6 15.5 13.0 11.0
343 341 333 337 318 324
540 535 529 518 502 502
200 198 196 192 186 186
W24×76 W16×100 W21× 83 W14×109 W12×120 W18× 86
750 743 735 720 698 698
528 525 513 519 489 498
6.8 8.9 6.5 13.2 11.1 9.3
18.0 29.3 18.5 43.2 50.0 26.1
19.8 10.7 18.5 6.70 5.36 11.9
12.1 6.03 3.77 10.7 2.95 6.94
22.4 38.6 58.2 23.5 67.2 33.3
7.8 10.4 15.5 7.5 13.0 10.9
300 302 306 294 283 285
478 473 467 464 443 440
177 175 173 172 164 163
W24×68 W16× 89 W14× 99b W21× 73 W12×106 W18× 76
664 656 647 645 615 611
462 465 471 453 435 438
6.6 8.8 13.4 6.4 11.0 9.2
17.4 27.3 40.6 17.7 44.9 24.8
18.7 10.3 6.46 17.0 5.32 11.1
10.4 3.75
22.8 54.1
7.5 15.4
273 279
432 424
160 157
W21×68 W14× 90b
600 587
420 429
6.4 15.0
17.3 38.4
16.5 6.31
13.8 5.85 2.01 2.91 8.29
17.2 34.9 86.4 61.4 24.4
5.8 10.3 11.2 12.9 7.1
255 261 246 255 248
413 405 397 397 392
153 150 147 147 145
W24×62 W16× 77 W10×112 W12× 96 W18× 71
574 563 551 551 544
393 402 378 393 381
4.9 8.7 9.5 10.9 6.0
13.3 25.2 56.5 41.3 17.8
21.4 9.75 3.68 5.20 13.8
9.84 4.15
21.7 43.0
7.4 10.3
248 240
389 375
144 139
W21×62 W14× 82
540 521
381 369
6.3 8.8
16.6 29.6
15.3 7.31
Shape
φbMp
bIndicates noncompact shape; F = 50 ksi. y
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE FOR SHAPES USED AS BEAMS
4 - 19
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE For shapes used as beams φb = 0.90 Fy = 36 ksi
Zx
Fy = 50 ksi
BF
Lr
Lp
φbMr
φbMp
Zx
Kips
Ft
Ft
Kip-ft Kip-ft
in.3
φbMr
Lp
Lr
BF
Kip-ft Kip-ft
Ft
Ft
Kips
12.7 8.08 2.90 2.00 5.57 11.3 4.10 7.91 2.88 4.05 1.97
16.6 23.2 56.4 77.4 32.3 17.3 40.0 22.4 51.8 37.3 68.4
5.6 7.0 12.8 11.0 10.3 5.6 10.3 7.0 12.7 10.3 11.0
222 228 230 218 228 216 218 211 209 201 192
362 359 356 351 351 348 340 332 321 311 305
134 133 132 130 130 129 126 123 119 115 113
W24×55 W18× 65 W12× 87 W10× 100 W16× 67 W21× 57 W14× 74 W18× 60 W12× 79 W14× 68 W10× 88
503 499 495 488 488 484 473 461 446 431 424
342 351 354 336 351 333 336 324 321 309 296
4.7 6.0 10.9 9.4 8.7 4.8 8.8 6.0 10.8 8.7 9.3
12.9 17.1 38.4 50.8 23.8 13.1 28.0 16.7 35.7 26.4 45.1
19.6 13.3 5.12 3.66 9.02 18.0 7.12 12.8 5.03 6.91 3.58
7.65
21.4
7.0
192
302
112
W18×55
420
295
5.9
16.1
12.2
10.5 2.87 6.43 3.91
16.2 48.2 22.8 34.7
5.4 12.7 6.7 10.2
184 190 180 180
297 292 284 275
110 108 105 102
W21×50 W12× 72 W16× 57 W14× 61
413 405 394 383
284 292 277 277
4.6 10.7 5.7 8.7
12.5 33.6 16.6 24.9
16.4 4.93 10.7 6.51
7.31 1.95 2.80
20.5 60.1 44.7
6.9 10.8 12.6
173 168 171
273 264 261
101 97.6 96.8
W18×50 W10× 77 W12× 65b
379 366 358
267 258 264
5.8 9.2 11.8
15.6 39.9 31.7
11.5 3.53 4.72
9.68 6.18 8.13 4.17 2.91 1.93 5.91
15.4 21.3 16.6 28.0 38.4 53.7 20.2
5.3 6.6 5.4 8.0 10.5 10.8 6.5
159 158 154 152 152 148 142
258 248 245 235 233 230 222
95.4 92.0 90.7 87.1 86.4 85.3 82.3
W21×44 W16× 50 W18× 46 W14× 53 W12× 58 W10× 68 W16× 45
358 345 340 327 324 320 309
245 243 236 233 234 227 218
4.5 5.6 4.6 6.8 8.9 9.2 5.6
12.0 15.8 12.6 20.1 27.0 36.0 15.2
14.9 10.1 13.0 7.02 4.96 3.46 9.43
7.51 4.06 2.85 1.91
15.7 26.3 35.8 48.1
5.3 8.0 10.3 10.7
133 137 138 130
212 212 210 201
78.4 78.4 77.9 74.6
W18×40 W14× 48 W12× 53 W10× 60
294 294 292 280
205 211 212 200
4.5 6.8 8.8 9.1
12.1 19.2 25.6 32.6
11.7 6.70 4.77 3.38
5.54 3.06 1.30 3.91 1.89
19.3 30.8 64.0 24.7 43.9
6.5 8.2 8.8 7.9 10.7
126 126 118 122 117
197 195 190 188 180
72.9 72.4 70.2 69.6 66.6
W16×40 W12× 50 W8× 67 W14× 43 W10× 54
273 272 263 261 250
194 194 181 188 180
5.6 6.9 7.5 6.7 9.1
14.7 21.7 41.9 18.2 30.2
8.67 5.25 2.38 6.32 3.30
6.95 3.01 5.23 4.41 1.88 1.27 2.92 1.96
14.8 28.5 18.3 20.0 40.7 56.0 26.5 35.1
5.1 8.1 6.3 6.5 10.6 8.8 8.0 8.4
112 113 110 106 106 101 101 95.7
180 175 173 166 163 161 155 148
66.5 64.7 64.0 61.5 60.4 59.8 57.5 54.9
W18×35 W12× 45 W16× 36 W14× 38 W10× 49 W8× 58 W12× 40 W10× 45
249 243 240 231 227 224 216 206
173 174 170 164 164 156 156 147
4.3 6.9 5.4 5.5 9.0 7.4 6.8 7.1
11.5 20.3 14.1 14.9 28.3 36.8 19.3 24.1
10.7 5.07 8.08 7.07 3.25 2.32 4.82 3.45
Shape
φbMp
bIndicates noncompact shape; F = 50 ksi. y
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 20
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE For shapes used as beams φb = 0.90
Zx
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
BF
Lr
Lp
φbMr
φbMp
Zx
Kips
Ft
Ft
Kip-ft Kip-ft
in.3
φbMr
Lp
Lr
BF
Kip-ft Kip-ft
Ft
Ft
Kips
4.18
19.0
6.4
94.8
147
54.6
W14×34
205
146
5.4
14.4
6.58
5.70 3.47 1.26
14.3 20.6 46.7
4.9 6.4 8.7
92.0 88.9 84.4
146 138 132
54.0 51.2 49.0
W16×31 W12× 35 W8×48
203 192 184
142 137 130
4.1 5.4 7.4
11.0 15.2 31.1
8.85 5.67 2.27
3.92 1.93
17.9 31.2
6.2 8.3
81.9 82.1
128 126
47.3 46.8
W14×30 W10× 39
177 176
126 126
5.3 7.0
13.7 21.8
6.06 3.32
5.15 3.22
13.3 19.1
4.7 6.3
74.9 75.3
119 116
44.2 43.1
W16×26 W12× 30
166 162
115 116
4.0 5.4
10.4 14.4
7.88 5.10
4.44 1.25 1.89
13.4 39.1 27.4
4.5 8.5 8.1
68.8 69.2 68.3
109 107 105
40.2 39.8 38.8
W14×26 W8×40 W10× 33
151 149 146
106 107 105
3.8 7.2 6.9
10.3 26.4 19.7
6.96 2.22 3.15
2.99 2.44 1.23
18.1 20.3 35.1
6.3 5.7 8.5
65.1 63.2 60.8
100 98.8 93.7
37.2 36.6 34.7
W12×26 W10× 30 W8×35
140 137 130
100 97.2 93.6
5.3 4.8 7.2
13.8 14.5 24.1
4.64 4.13 2.16
4.06 2.34 1.21
12.5 18.5 32.0
4.3 5.7 8.4
56.6 54.4 53.6
89.6 84.5 82.1
33.2 31.3 30.4
W14×22 W10× 26 W8×31
125 117 114
87.0 83.7 82.5
3.7 4.8 7.1
9.7 13.5 22.3
6.26 3.85 2.07
3.88 1.27
11.1 27.3
3.5 6.8
49.5 47.4
79.1 73.4
29.3 27.2
W12×22 W8×28
110 102
76.2 72.9
3.0 5.7
8.4 18.9
6.24 2.22
2.19
16.9
5.5
45.2
70.2
26.0
W10×22
97.5
69.6
4.7
12.7
3.50
3.61 1.24
10.4 24.4
3.4 6.7
41.5 40.8
66.7 62.6
24.7 23.2
W12×19 W8×24
92.6 87.0
63.9 62.7
2.9 5.7
7.9 17.2
5.70 2.11
2.60 1.46
12.0 18.6
3.6 5.3
36.7 35.5
58.3 55.1
21.6 20.4
W10×19 W8×21
81.0 76.5
56.4 54.6
3.1 4.5
8.9 13.3
4.26 2.47
3.30 0.741 2.46
9.6 31.3 11.2
3.2 6.3 3.5
33.3 32.6 31.6
54.3 51.0 50.5
20.1 18.9 18.7
W12×16 W6×25 W10× 17
75.4 70.9 70.1
51.3 50.1 48.6
2.7 5.4 3.0
7.4 21.0 8.4
5.12 1.33 3.97
2.97 1.40 2.34 0.728
9.2 16.7 10.3 25.6
3.1 5.1 3.4 6.3
29.1 29.6 26.9 26.1
47.0 45.9 43.2 40.2
17.4 17.0 16.0 14.9
W12×14 W8×18 W10× 15 W6×20
65.3 63.8 60.0 55.9
44.7 45.6 41.4 40.2
2.7 4.3 2.9 5.3
7.2 12.3 7.9 17.7
4.56 2.30 3.69 1.27
3.32 1.53
6.9 12.6
2.3 3.7
23.6 23.0
38.6 36.7
14.3 13.6
M12×11.8 W8×15
53.7 51.0
36.3 35.4
2.0 3.1
5.4 9.2
5.10 2.56
Shape
φbMp
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE FOR SHAPES USED AS BEAMS
4 - 21
LOAD FACTOR DESIGN SELECTION TABLE For shapes used as beams φb = 0.90 Fy = 36 ksi
Zx
Fy = 50 ksi
BF
Lr
Lp
φbMr
φbMp
Zx
Kips
Ft
Ft
Kip-ft Kip-ft
in.3
3.10 2.03 0.817 0.458 1.44 0.417 0.693 0.444
6.8 9.5 18.3 30.3 11.5 31.1 20.8 26.3
2.3 3.3 4.0 5.3 3.5 5.0 6.7 5.3
21.6 21.3 19.9 19.9 19.3 18.8 19.0 16.6
35.4 34.0 31.6 31.3 30.8 29.7 28.8 25.9
13.1 12.6 11.7 11.6 11.4 11.0 10.8 9.59
M12×10.8 W10× 12b W6× 16 W5× 19 W8× 13 M5× 18.9 W6×15b,c W5× 16
49.2 47.0 43.9 43.5 42.8 41.3 38.6 36.0
2.32 1.30 0.775
6.2 10.2 14.4
2.1 3.5 3.8
15.2 15.2 14.3
24.9 23.9 22.4
9.21 8.87 8.30
M10×9 W8× 10b W6× 12
2.13 0.295 0.724
6.1 25.5 12.0
2.1 4.2 3.8
13.6 10.6 10.8
22.1 17.0 16.8
8.20 6.28 6.23
1.50
5.5
1.8
14.6
5.40
9.01
φbMr
Lp
Lr
BF
Kip-ft Kip-ft
Ft
Ft
Kips
33.3 32.7 30.6 30.6 29.7 28.9 29.2 25.5
2.0 2.9 3.4 4.5 3.0 4.2 6.8 4.5
5.3 7.4 12.5 20.1 8.5 20.5 15.0 17.6
4.74 3.13 1.46 0.830 2.35 0.758 1.16 0.795
34.5 33.0 31.1
23.5 23.4 21.9
1.8 3.1 3.2
4.9 7.8 10.2
3.59 2.03 1.33
M10×8 W4× 13 W6× 9
30.8 23.6 23.4
21.0 16.4 16.7
1.8 3.5 3.2
4.8 16.9 8.9
3.26 0.538 1.17
M8×6.5
20.2
13.9
1.6
4.3
2.35
Shape
φbMp
bIndicates noncompact shape; F = 50 ksi y cIndicates noncompact shape; F = 36 ksi y
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 22
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
MOMENT OF INERTIA SELECTION TABLES FOR W AND M SHAPES
4 - 23
MOMENT OF INERTIA SELECTION TABLES FOR W AND M SHAPES
These two tables for moment of inertia (Ix and Iy) are provided to facilitate the selection of beams and columns on the basis of their stiffness properties with respect to the X-X axis or Y-Y axis, as applicable, where Ix = moment of inertia, X-X axis, in.4 Iy = moment of inertia, Y-Y axis, in.4 In each table the shapes are listed in groups by descending order of moment of inertia for all W and M shapes. The boldface type identifies the shapes that are the lightest in weight in each group. Enter the column headed Ix (or Iy) and find a value of Ix (or Iy) equal to or greater than the moment of inertia required. The shape opposite this value, and all shapes above it, have sufficient stiffness. Note that the member selected must also be checked for compliance with specification provisions governing its specific application.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 24
Ix Shape
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
MOMENT OF INERTIA SELECTION TABLE For W and M shapes Ix
Shape
In.4 W36×848*
67400
W36×798*
62600
W40×593* W36× 650*
50400 48900
W40×503* W36× 527*
41700 38300
W40×466*
36300
W40×431
34800
W44×335 W36× 439* W40× 392* W40× 372 W36× 393*
31100 31000 29900 29600 27500
W44×290 W30× 477* W27× 539* W40× 321 W36× 359* W40× 331
27100 26100 25500 25100 24800 24700
W44×262 W40× 297 W36× 328* W40× 277 W33× 354*
24200 23200 22500 21900 21900
W44×230 W30× 391* W40× 278 W27× 448* W36× 300 W33× 318* W40× 249 W40× 264 W24× 492* W36× 280 W33× 291* W40× 235 W36× 260 W30× 326* W36× 256
20800 20700 20500 20400 20300 19500 19500 19400 19100 18900 17700 17400 17300 16800 16800
Ix
W40×215 W27× 368* W36×245 W14× 808* W33× 263*
16700 16100 16100 16000 15800
W40×211 W24× 408* W36×230 W36×232
15500 15100 15000 15000
W40×199 W30× 292* W14× 730* W33×241
14900 14900 14300 14200
W40×183 W36×210 W27× 307* W30×261 W33×221 W14× 665*
13300 13200 13100 13100 12800 12400
W40×174 W36×194 W24× 335* W30×235
12200 12100 11900 11700
W40×167 W33×201 W36×182 W14× 605* W27×258 W36×170 W30× 211
11600 11500 11300 10800 10800 10500 10300
W40×149 W36×160 W27×235 W24× 279* W14× 550* W33×169 W30×191 W36×150 W27×217 W24× 250* W14× 500* W30×173 W33×152 W27×194
9780 9750 9660 9600 9430 9290 9170 9040 8870 8490 8210 8200 8160 7820
Ix
Shape
In.4
Shape
In.4 W36×135 W24× 229 W33× 141 W14×455* W27× 178 W18× 311* W24× 207
7800 7650 7450 7190 6990 6960 6820
W33×130 W30× 148 W14×426* W27× 161 W24× 192 W18×283* W14×398*
6710 6680 6600 6280 6260 6160 6000
W33×118 W30× 132 W24× 176 W27× 146 W18×258* W14×370* W30× 124 W21× 201 W24× 162
5900 5770 5680 5630 5510 5440 5360 5310 5170
W30×116 W18×234* W14×342* W27× 129 W21× 182 W24× 146
4930 4900 4900 4760 4730 4580
W30×108 W18× 211* W14× 311* W21× 166 W27× 114 W12×336* W24× 131
4470 4330 4330 4280 4090 4060 4020
*Group 4 or 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2 (Part 1).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Ix In.4
W30×99 W18× 192 W14× 283* W21× 147
3990 3870 3840 3630
W30×90 W27× 102 W12× 305* W24× 117 W18× 175 W14× 257* W27× 94 W21× 132 W12× 279* W24× 104 W18× 158 W14× 233* W24× 103 W21× 122
3620 3620 3550 3540 3450 3400 3270 3220 3110 3100 3060 3010 3000 2960
W27×84 W18× 143 W12× 252* W24× 94 W21× 111 W14× 211 W18× 130 W12× 230* W21× 101 W14× 193
2850 2750 2720 2700 2670 2660 2460 2420 2420 2400
W24×84 W18× 119 W14× 176 W12× 210*
2370 2190 2140 2140
W24×76 W21× 93 W18× 106 W14× 159 W12× 190
2100 2070 1910 1900 1890
MOMENT OF INERTIA SELECTION TABLE FOR W AND M SHAPES
4 - 25
MOMENT OF INERTIA SELECTION TABLE For W and M shapes Shape
Ix
Shape
In.4 W24×68 W21× 83 W18× 97 W14× 145 W12× 170 W21× 73
1830 1830 1750 1710 1650 1600
W24×62 W14× 132 W18× 86 W16× 100 W21× 68 W12× 152 W14× 120
1550 1530 1530 1490 1480 1430 1380
W24×55 W18× 76 W21× 62 W16× 89 W14× 109 W12× 136 W18× 71 W21× 57 W14× 99 W16× 77 W12× 120 W18× 65 W14× 90 W18× 60
1350 1330 1330 1300 1240 1240 1170 1170 1110 1110 1070 1070 999 984
W21×50 W16× 67 W12× 106 W18× 55 W14× 62
984 954 933 890 882
Ix
Shape
In.4
Ix
Shape
In.4
W21×44 W12× 96 W18× 50 W14× 74 W16× 57 W12× 87 W14× 68 W10× 112 W18× 46 W12× 79 W16× 50 W14× 61 W10× 100
843 833 800 796 758 740 723 716 712 662 659 640 623
W16×26 W14× 30 W12× 35 W8× 67 W10× 49 W10× 45
301 291 285 272 272 248
W14×26 W12× 30 W8× 58 W10× 39
245 238 228 209
W12×26
204
W18×40 W12× 72 W16× 45 W14× 53 W10× 88 W12× 65
612 597 586 541 534 533
W14×22 W8× 48 W10× 30 W10× 33
199 184 170 170
W16×40
518
W12×22 W8× 40 W10× 26
156 146 144
W18×35 W14× 48 W12× 58 W10× 77 W16× 36 W14× 43 W12× 53 W12× 50 W10× 68 W14× 38
510 485 475 455 448 428 425 394 394 385
W12×19 W8× 35 W10× 22 W8× 31
130 127 118 110
W12×16 W8× 28 W10× 19
103 98.0 96.3
W16×31 W12× 45 W10× 60 W14× 34 W12× 40 W10× 54
375 350 341 340 310 303
W12×14 W8× 24 W10× 17 W8× 21
88.6 82.8 81.9 75.3
M12×11.8 W10× 15
71.7 68.9
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Ix Ix In.4
M12×10.8 W8× 18 W10×12 W6× 25 W8× 15 W6× 20 W8× 13
65.8 61.9 53.8 53.4 48.0 41.4 39.6
M10×9
38.5
M10×8 W6× 16 W8× 10 W6× 15 W5× 19 M5× 18.9 W6× 12 W5× 16
34.3 32.1 30.8 29.1 26.2 24.1 22.1 21.3
M8×6.5 W6×9 W4× 13
18.1 16.4 11.3
4 - 26
Iy Shape
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
MOMENT OF INERTIA SELECTION TABLE For W and M shapes Iy
Shape
In.4 W14×808*
5510
W14×730* W36× 848* W36× 798*
4720 4550 4200
W14×665*
4170
W14×605*
3680
W14×550* W36× 650*
W14×283* W40×372 W36× 328* W24× 408* W27× 368* W36×300
1440 1420 1420 1320 1310 1300
W14×257* W33× 318* W30× 326* W36×280 W44×335 W12× 336* W40×321 W33× 291*
1290 1290 1240 1200 1200 1190 1190 1160
3250 3230
W14×500*
2880
W14×455* W40× 593* W36× 527*
2560 2520 2490
W14×426*
2360
W14×398* W27× 539* W40× 503*
2170 2110 2050
W14×370* W36× 439* W30× 477*
1990 1990 1970
W14×342* W36× 393* W40× 431 W27× 448* W24× 492*
1810 1750 1690 1670 1670
W14×311* W36× 359* W30× 391* W33× 354*
Iy
1610 1570 1550 1460
W14×233* W30× 292* W40×297 W36×260 W44×290 W27× 307* W12× 305* W40×277 W33× 263* W24× 335*
1150 1100 1090 1090 1050 1050 1050 1040 1030 1030
W14×211 W40× 466* W36×245 W30×261 W36×230 W12× 279* W33×241
1030 1010 1010 959 940 937 932
W14×193 W44×262 W40×249 W27×258 W30×235 W33×221
931 927 926 859 855 840
Iy
Shape
In.4
Shape
In.4 W14×176 W12×252* W24×279* W40×392* W40× 215 W44× 230 W18× 311* W27× 235 W30× 211 W33× 201
838 828 823 803 796 796 795 768 757 749
W14×159 W12×230* W24×250* W18×283* W27× 217 W40× 199
748 742 724 704 704 695
W14×145 W30× 191 W12×210* W24× 229 W40× 331 W18×258* W27× 194 W30× 173 W12× 190 W24× 207 W18×234* W27× 178
677 673 664 651 646 628 618 598 589 578 558 555
W14×132 W21× 201 W40× 174 W24× 192 W36× 256 W40× 278 W12× 170 W27× 161
548 542 541 530 528 521 517 497
*Group 4 or 5 shape. See Notes in Table 1-2 (Part 1).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Iy In.4
W14×120 W40× 264 W18× 211* W21× 182 W24× 176 W36× 232 W12× 152
495 493 493 483 479 468 454
W14×109 W40× 235 W24× 162 W27× 146 W18× 192 W21× 166 W36× 210
447 444 443 443 440 435 411
W14×99 W12× 136 W18× 175 W24× 146 W40× 211 W21× 147 W36× 194
402 398 391 391 390 376 375
W14×90 W36× 182 W18× 158 W12× 120 W24× 131 W40× 183 W21× 132 W36× 170 W18× 143 W33× 169 W21× 122 W12× 106 W24× 117 W36× 160 W40× 167 W18× 130 W21× 111 W33× 152 W36× 150 W12× 96 W24× 104 W18× 119 W21× 101 W33× 141
362 347 347 345 340 336 333 320 311 310 305 301 297 295 283 278 274 273 270 270 259 253 248 246
MOMENT OF INERTIA SELECTION TABLE FOR W AND M SHAPES
4 - 27
MOMENT OF INERTIA SELECTION TABLE For W and M shapes Shape
Iy
Shape
In.4 W12×87 W10× 112 W40× 149 W30× 148 W36× 135 W18× 106 W33× 130
241 236 229 227 225 220 218
W12×79 W10× 100 W18× 97 W30× 132
216 207 201 196
W12×72 W33× 118 W16× 100 W27× 129 W30× 124 W10× 88 W18× 86
195 187 186 184 181 179 175
W12×65 W30× 116 W16× 89 W27× 114 W10× 77 W18× 76 W14× 82 W30× 108 W27× 102 W16× 77 W10× 68 W14× 74 W30× 99 W27× 94 W14× 68 W24× 103 W16× 67
174 164 163 159 154 152 148 146 139 138 134 134 128 124 121 119 119
Iy
Shape
In.4 W10×60 W30× 90 W24× 94
116 115 109
W12×58 W14× 61 W27× 84
107 107 106
W10×54
103
W12×53 W24× 84
95.8 94.4
W10×49 W21× 93 W8× 67 W24× 76 W21× 83 W8× 58 W21× 73 W24× 68 W21× 68
93.4 92.9 88.6 82.5 81.4 75.1 70.6 70.4 64.7
W8×48 W18× 71 W14× 53 W21× 62 W12× 50 W18× 65
60.9 60.3 57.7 57.5 56.3 54.8
W10×45 W14× 48 W18× 60
53.4 51.4 50.1
W12×45
50.0
W8×40 W14× 43
49.1 45.2
Iy
Shape
In.4 W10×39 W18× 55 W12× 40 W16× 57
45.0 44.9 44.1 43.1
W8×35 W18× 50 W16× 50
42.6 40.1 37.2
W8×31 W10× 33 W24× 62 W16× 45 W21× 57 W24× 55 W16× 40 W14× 38 W21× 50 W12× 35 W16× 36 W14× 34 W18× 46
37.1 36.6 34.5 32.8 30.6 29.1 28.9 26.7 24.9 24.5 24.5 23.3 22.5
W8×28 W21× 44 W12× 30 W14× 30 W18× 40
21.7 20.7 20.3 19.6 19.1
W8×24 W12× 26 W6× 25 W10× 30 W18× 35 W10× 26
18.3 17.3 17.1 16.7 15.3 14.1
W6×20 W16× 31 W10× 22 W8× 21 W16× 26
13.3 12.4 11.4 9.77 9.59
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Iy Iy In.4
W6×15 W5× 19 W14×26 W8× 18 M5× 18.9 W5× 16 W14×22 W12×22 W6× 16 W10×19
9.32 9.13 8.91 7.97 7.86 7.51 7.00 4.66 4.43 4.29
W4×13 W12×19 W10×17 W8× 15
3.86 3.76 3.56 3.41
W6×12 W10×15 W12×16 W8× 13 W12×14
2.99 2.89 2.82 2.73 2.36
W6×9 W10×12 W8× 10 M12× 11.8 M12× 10.8
2.19 2.18 2.09 1.09 0.995
M10×9
0.673
M10×8
0.597
M8×6.5
0.371
4 - 28
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES General Notes
The Tables of Factored Uniform Loads for W and S shapes and channels (C and MC) used as simple laterally supported beams give the maximum uniformly distributed factored loads in kips. The tables are based on the flexural design strengths specified in Section F1 of the LRFD Specification. Separate tables are presented for Fy = 36 ksi and Fy = 50 ksi. The tabulated loads include the weight of the beam, which should be deducted in the calculation to determine the net load that the beam will support. The tables are also applicable to laterally supported simple beams for concentrated loading conditions. A method to determine the beam load capacity for several cases is shown in this discussion. It is assumed, in all cases, that the loads are applied normal to the X-X axis (shown in the Tables of Properties of Shapes in Part 1 of this LRFD Manual) and that the beam deflects vertically in the plane of bending. If the conditions of loading involve forces outside this plane, design strengths must be determined from the general theory of flexure and torsion. Lateral Support of Beams
The flexural design strength of a beam is dependent upon lateral support of its compression flange in addition to its section properties. In these tables the notation Lp is used to denote the maximum unbraced length of the compression flange, in feet, for the uniform moment case (Cb = 1.0) and for which the design strengths for compact symmetrical shapes are calculated with a flexural design strength of: φbMn = φbMp = φbZxFy / 12 Noncompact shapes are calculated with a flexural design strength of: λ − λp φbMn′ = φbMp − φb(Mp − Mr) λr − λp as permitted in the LRFD Specification Appendix F1. The associated maximum unbraced length for φbMn′ is tabulated as Lp. The notation Lr is the unbraced length of the compression flange for which the flexural design strength for rolled shapes is: φbMr = φbSx(Fy − 10) / 12 These tables are not applicable for beams with unbraced lengths greater than Lr. For such cases, the beam charts should be used. Flexural Design Strength and Tabulated Factored Uniform Loads
For symmetrical rolled shapes designated W and S the flexural design strengths and resultant loads are based on the assumption that the compression flanges of the beams are laterally supported at intervals not greater than Lp. The Uniform Load Constant φbWc is obtained from the moment and stress relationship of a simply supported, uniformly loaded beam. The relationship results in the formula: φbWc = φb(2ZxFy / 3), kip-ft for compact shapes AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
4 - 29
The following expression may be used for calculating the tabulated uniformly distributed factored load Wu on a simply supported beam or girder: Wu = φbWc / L, kips For compact shapes, the tabulated constant is based on the yield stress Fy = 36 ksi or 50 ksi and the plastic section modulus Zx. (See Section F1.1 of the LRFD Specification.) For noncompact sections, the tabulated constant is based on the nominal resisting moment as determined by Equation A-F1-3. (See LRFD Specification Appendix F1.) Shear
For relatively short spans, the design strengths for beams and channels may be limited by the shear strength of the web instead of the bending strength. This limit is indicated in the tables by solid horizontal lines. Loads shown above these lines will produce the design shear strength in the beam web. End and Interior Bearing
For a discussion of end and interior bearing and use of the tabulated values φR1 through φr R6 and φR, see Part 9 in Volume II of this LRFD Manual. Vertical Deflection
For rolled shapes designated W, M, S, C, and MC, the maximum vertical deflection may be calculated using the formula: ∆ = ML2 / (C1Ix) where M = maximum service load moment, kip-ft L = span length, ft Ix = moment of inertia, in.4 C1 = loading constant (see Figure 4-2) ∆ = maximum vertical deflection, in.
W
P
C1 = 161
P
C1 = 201
P
P
P
C1 = 158
C1= 170
Fig. 4-2 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
P
4 - 30
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
Table 4-2. Recommended Span/Depth Ratios Service Load Ratios
Maximum Span/Depth Ratios
Dead / Total
Dead / Live
Fy = 36 ksi
Fy = 50 ksi
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
0.25 0.43 0.67 1.00 1.50
20.0 22.2 25.0 29.0 —
14.0 16.0 18.0 21.0 26.0
Deflection can be controlled by limiting the span-depth ratio of a simply supported, uniformly loaded beam as shown in Table 4-2. A live-load deflection limit of L / 360 is assumed; i.e.,
∆LL ≤
Span Length 360
For large span/depth ratios, vibration may also be a consideration. Use of Tables
Maximum factored uniform loads are tabulated for steels of Fy = 36 ksi and Fy = 50 ksi. They are based on the design flexural strength determined from the LRFD Specification: Equation F1-1 (in Section F1.1) for compact members, and Equation A-F1-3 (in Appendix F1) for noncompact members. The beams must be braced adequately and have an axis of symmetry in the plane of loading. Factored loads may be read directly from the tables when the distance between points of lateral support of the compression flange Lb does not exceed Lp (tabulated earlier in the Load Factor Design Selection Table for beams). Loads above the heavy horizontal lines in the tables are governed by the design shear strength, determined from Section F2 of the LRFD Specification. EXAMPLE 4-4
Given:
A W16×45 floor beam of Fy = 50 ksi steel spans 20 feet. Determine the maximum uniform load, end reaction, and total service load deflection. The live load equals the dead load.
Solution:
Based on Section A4 of the LRFD Specification, the governing load combination for a floor beam is 1.2 (dead load) + 1.6 (live load). As the two loads are equal, factored load = 1.4 (total load) Enter the Factored Uniform Loads Table for Fy = 50 ksi and note that: Maximum factored uniform load = Wu = 124 kips, or 124/20 = 6.2 kips/ft Factored end reaction = Wu / 2 = 124 / 2 = 61.8 kips AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
4 - 31
Service load moment =
124(20) Wu L = 8(1.4) 8(LF)
= 221 kip-ft Deflection:
∆=
ML2 221(20)2 = = 0.94 in. C1Ix 161(586)
Live load deflection = 0.5 × 0.94 in. = 0.47 in. < (L / 360 = 20 × 12 / 360 = 0.66 in.) o.k. EXAMPLE 4-5
Given:
A W10×45 beam of Fy = 50 ksi steel spans 6 feet. Determine the maximum load and corresponding end reaction.
Solution:
Enter the Factored Uniform Loads Table for Fy = 50 ksi and note that: Maximum factored uniform load = Wu = 191 kips, or 191/6 = 31.8 kips/ft As Wu appears above the horizontal line, it is limited by shear in the web. Factored end reaction = Wu / 2 = 191 / 2 = 96 kips
EXAMPLE 4-6
Given:
Using Fy = 50 ksi steel, select an 18-in. deep beam to span 30 feet and support two equal concentrated loads at the one-third and two-thirds points of the span. The service load intensities are 10 kips dead load and 24 kips live load. The beam is supported laterally at the points of load application and the ends. Determine the beam size and service live load deflection.
Solution:
Refer to the Table of Concentrated Load Equivalents on page 4-189 and note that: Equivalent uniform load = 2.67Pu 1. Required factored uniform load: Wu = 2.67Pu = 2.67[1.2(10) + 1.6(24)] = 2.67(50.4) = 135 kips 2. Enter the Factored Uniform Loads Table for Fy = 50 ksi and Wu ≥ 135 kips For W18×71: Wu = 145 kips > 135 kips; however, Lb = 10 ft > Lp = 6.0 ft. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 32
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
For W18×76: Wu = 163 kips > 135 kips; however, Lb = 10 ft > Lp = 9.2 ft. 3. Since Lp < Lb < Lr, use the Load Factor Design Selection Table. φbMn = Cb[φbMp − BF(Lb − Lp)] For the central third of the span (uniform moment), Cb = 1.0. Required flexural strength: Mu = Pu (L / 3) = 50.4(30 / 3) = 504 kip-ft 4. Try W18×71: φbMn = 1.0[544 − 13.8(10 − 6)] = 489 kip-ft < 504 kip-ft req’d. n.g. 5. Try W18×76: φbMn = 1.0[611 − 11.1(10 − 9.2)] = 602 kip-ft > 504 kip-ft req’d. o.k. Use W18×76 6. Determine service live load deflection: MLL = (PLL / Pu )Mu = (24 / 50.4)504 = 240 kip-ft Maximum ∆ (at midspan) =
240(30)2 MLLL2 = = 1.03 in. C1Ix 158(1,330)
EXAMPLE 4-7
Given:
A W24×55 of 50 ksi steel spans 20 feet and is braced at 4-ft intervals. Determine the maximum factored load and end reaction.
Solution:
1. Enter the Factored Uniform Load Table for Fy = 50 ksi and note that: Maximum factored uniform load = Wu = 201 kips, or 201 / 20 = 10.1 kips/ft This is true for Lb ≤ Lp : 4.0 ft < 4.7 ft o.k. 2. End reaction = R = Wu / 2 = 201 / 2 = 101 kips
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
4 - 33
Reference Notes on Tables
1. Maximum factored uniform loads, in kips, are given for beams with adequate lateral support; i.e., Lb ≤ Lp for Cb = 1.0, Lb ≤ Lm for Cb > 1.0. 2. Loads below the heavy horizontal line are limited by design flexural strength, while loads above the line are limited by design shear strength. 3. Factored loads are given for span lengths up to the smaller of L / d = 30 or 72 ft. 4. The end bearing values at the bottom of the tables are for use in solving LRFD Specification Equations K1-3, K1-5a, and K1-5b. They are defined as follows: φR1 = φ(2.5kFy tw) φR2 = φ(Fy tw)
kips kips/in.
Equation K1-3 becomes φRn = φR1 + N(φR2) Fty tf φrR3 = φr 68t2w √ w
kips 1.5
3 tw φrR4 = φr 68t2w d tf
√Ft t y f
w
kips/in.
Equation K1-5a becomes φrRn = φrR3 + N(φrR4) 1.5
tw φrR5 = φr 68t2w 1 − 0.2 tf
1.5
4 tw φrR6 = φr 68t2w d tf
Fty tf √ w
√Fty t f
w
kips
kips/in.
Equation K1-5b becomes φrRn = φrR5 + N(φrR6) where φ = 1.00, φr = 0.75, N = length of bearing (in.), and the other terms as defined in the LRFD Specification, Section K1. φR (N = 31⁄4) is defined as the design bearing strength for N = 31⁄4-in. For N / d ≤ 0.2, φR is the minimum of φR1 + N(φR2) φrR3 + N(φrR4) For N / d > 0.2, φR is the minimum of φR1 + N(φR2) φrR5 + N(φrR6) For a complete explanation of end and interior bearing and use of the tabulated values, see Part 9 in Volume II of this LRFD Manual. 5. The other terms at the bottom of the tables are: Zx
= plastic section modulus for major axis bending, in.3 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 34
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
φvVn = design shear strength, kips φbWc = uniform load constant = φb(2ZxFy / 3) kip-ft for compact shapes; per Equation A-F1-3 (LRFD Specification Appendix F1) for noncompact shapes 6. Tabulated maximum factored uniformly distributed load for the given beam and span is the minimum of φbWc and 2φvVn L See also Note 2 above.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 35
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 44
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
W 44
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
335
290
262
230
20 21 22 23 24 25
1750 1670 1590 1520 1460 1400
1480 1460 1390 1330 1280 1230
1330 1310 1250 1190 1140 1100
1180 1130 1080 1030 990 950
26 27 28 29 30 31
1350 1300 1250 1210 1170 1130
1180 1140 1100 1060 1020 989
1060 1020 980 946 914 885
914 880 849 819 792 766
32 33 34 35 36
1090 1060 1030 1000 972
959 929 902 876 852
857 831 807 784 762
743 720 699 679 660
38 40 42 44 46 48
921 875 833 795 761 729
807 767 730 697 667 639
722 686 653 623 596 572
625 594 566 540 517 495
50 52 54 56 58 60
700 673 648 625 603 583
613 590 568 548 529 511
549 528 508 490 473 457
475 457 440 424 410 396
62 64 66 68 70 72
564 547 530 515 500 486
495 479 465 451 438 426
442 429 416 403 392 381
383 371 360 349 339 330
1270 27400 665 156 28.4 256 7.36 235 9.81 248
1100 23800 592 128 25.6 202 6.28 184 8.37 211
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
1620 35000 873 235 36.7 419 12.5 383 16.7 355
1420 30700 738 186 31.3 312 8.77 287 11.7 288
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 36
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W 40
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation Wt./ft
W 40 431
372
321
297
277
249
199
174
977 937
965 965 908 858 813 772
985 945 904 867 832 800
893 852 815 781 750 721
735 702 671 644 618 594
896 864 834 806 780 756
770 743 717 693 671 650
694 670 647 625 605 586
572 552 533 515 498 483
818 794 771 750 730 711
733 712 691 672 654 637
630 612 594 578 562 547
568 551 536 521 507 493
468 454 441 429 417 406
718 684 653 625 599 575
675 643 614 587 563 540
605 576 550 526 504 484
520 495 473 452 433 416
469 446 426 408 391 375
386 368 351 336 322 309
590 568 548 529 511 495
552 532 513 495 479 463
519 500 482 466 450 435
465 448 432 417 403 390
400 385 371 359 347 335
361 347 335 323 312 302
297 286 276 266 257 249
479 465 451 438 426
449 435 422 410 399
422 409 397 386 375
378 367 356 346 336
325 315 306 297 289
293 284 276 268 260
241 234 227 221 215
1120 24200 574 190 27.0 237 6.93 219 9.23 259
963 20800 493 154 23.4 177 5.30 163 7.07 194
868 18700 489 143 23.4 165 6.12 150 8.16 185
715 15400 483 117 23.4 146 7.95 126 10.6 172
1830 1800
1560 1530
1440 1440
21 22 23 24 25 26
2010 1910 1830 1760 1680 1620
1720 1640 1570 1500 1440 1390
1460 1390 1330 1280 1230 1180
1370 1310 1250 1200 1150 1100
1280 1230 1170 1130 1080 1040
1150 1100 1050 1010 968 930
27 28 29 30 31 32
1560 1500 1450 1400 1360 1320
1340 1290 1240 1200 1160 1130
1140 1100 1060 1020 989 959
1060 1030 991 958 927 898
1000 964 931 900 871 844
33 34 35 36 37 38
1280 1240 1200 1170 1140 1110
1090 1060 1030 1000 975 949
929 902 876 852 829 807
871 845 821 798 776 756
40 42 44 46 48 50
1050 1000 957 916 878 842
902 859 820 784 752 721
767 730 697 667 639 613
52 54 56 58 60 62
810 780 752 726 702 679
694 668 644 622 601 582
64 66 68 70 72
658 638 619 602 585
564 547 530 515 501
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
1950 42100 1075 430 48.2 729 22.7 667 30.2 586
1670 36100 916 339 41.8 547 17.2 501 22.9 475
Span (ft)
2150 2110
Fy = 36 ksi
15 16 17 18 19 20
215
Properties and Reaction Values 1420 30700 779 264 36.0 407 12.9 373 17.3 381
1330 28700 720 256 33.5 353 11.2 323 15.0 365
1250 27000 640 224 29.9 290 8.40 268 11.2 318
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 37
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 40
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Designation Wt./ft
W 40 331
278
264
235
211
167
149
985 937
975 934 879 830
936 921 860 806 759 716
1030 977 931 889 850 815
888 843 803 767 733 703
787 747 712 679 650 623
679 645 614 586 561 537
873 839 808 779 752 727
782 752 724 698 674 652
675 649 625 602 582 562
598 575 554 534 515 498
516 496 478 461 445 430
787 763 740 718 697 678
704 682 661 642 623 606
631 611 592 575 559 543
544 527 511 496 482 469
482 467 453 440 427 415
416 403 391 379 368 358
695 676 643 612 584 559
660 642 610 581 555 531
590 574 545 519 496 474
528 514 489 465 444 425
456 444 422 402 383 367
404 393 374 356 340 325
349 339 322 307 293 280
644 618 594 572 552 533
536 514 494 476 459 443
509 488 469 452 436 421
455 436 420 404 390 376
407 391 376 362 349 337
351 337 324 312 301 291
311 299 287 277 267 258
269 258 248 239 230 222
60 62 64 66 68 70
515 498 483 468 454 441
428 415 402 389 378 367
407 394 381 370 359 349
364 352 341 331 321 312
326 315 305 296 287 279
281 272 264 256 248 241
249 241 234 226 220 214
215 208 201 195 190 184
72
429
357
339
303
272
234
208
179
781 16900 493 154 23.4 177 5.30 163 7.07 194
692 14900 488 143 23.4 162 6.37 146 8.50 183
597 12900 468 128 22.7 139 7.24 121 9.65 163
13 14 15 16 17 18
1930 1930 1820 1720
1590 1510 1430
1490 1440 1360
1280 1210
1150 1090
19 20 21 22 23 24
1630 1540 1470 1400 1340 1290
1350 1290 1220 1170 1120 1070
1280 1220 1160 1110 1060 1020
1150 1090 1040 992 949 909
25 26 27 28 29 30
1240 1190 1140 1100 1070 1030
1030 989 952 918 886 857
976 939 904 872 842 814
31 32 33 34 35 36
996 965 936 908 883 858
829 803 779 756 734 714
37 38 40 42 44 46
835 813 772 735 702 671
48 50 52 54 56 58
183
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
1430 30900 967 364 43.9 602 19.2 550 25.6 506
1190 25700 796 275 36.7 424 13.4 388 17.9 395
1130 24400 746 254 34.6 379 11.7 347 15.6 366
1010 21800 640 205 29.9 290 8.40 268 11.2 303
905 19500 574 177 27.0 236 6.95 218 9.27 259
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 38
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W 36
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
W 36
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
300
280
260
245
230
1120 1090 1040 992 949 909
1060 1020 970 926 886 849
19 20 21 22 23 24
1350 1300 1240 1180 1130
1260 1200 1150 1100 1050
1180 1170 1110 1060 1010 972
25 26 27 28 29 30
1090 1050 1010 972 938 907
1010 972 936 903 871 842
933 897 864 833 804 778
873 839 808 779 752 727
815 783 754 727 702 679
31 32 33 34 35 36
878 851 825 800 778 756
815 790 766 743 722 702
753 729 707 686 667 648
704 682 661 642 623 606
657 637 617 599 582 566
37 38 39 40 41 42
736 716 698 680 664 648
683 665 648 632 616 602
630 614 598 583 569 555
590 574 559 545 532 519
551 536 522 509 497 485
43 44 46 48 50 52
633 619 592 567 544 523
588 574 549 527 505 486
543 530 507 486 467 449
507 496 474 455 436 420
474 463 443 424 407 392
54 56 58 60 62 64
504 486 469 454 439 425
468 451 436 421 408 395
432 417 402 389 376 365
404 390 376 364 352 341
377 364 351 339 329 318
66 68 70 72
412 400 389 378
383 372 361 351
353 343 333 324
331 321 312 303
309 300 291 283
1010 21800 561 180 28.8 254 9.65 231 12.9 274
943 20400 530 162 27.4 228 8.91 206 11.9 251
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
1260 27200 675 239 34.0 364 12.6 334 16.7 350
1170 25300 628 214 31.9 319 11.1 292 14.8 318
1080 23300 592 194 30.2 283 10.4 258 13.9 292
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 39
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 36
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation Wt./ft
W 36 256
19 20 21 22 23 24
194
182
170
160
150
135
1260 1190 1120
1180 1120 1060 1000
1090 1040 975 920
1020 969 912 862
956 902 849 802
910 899 842 793 749
871 837 784 738 697
1180 1120 1070 1020 977 936
1060 1010 963 919 879 842
947 900 857 818 782 750
872 828 789 753 720 690
816 775 739 705 674 646
759 721 687 656 627 601
709 674 642 613 586 562
661 627 598 570 546 523
579 550 524 500 478 458
25 26 27 28 29 30
899 864 832 802 775 749
809 778 749 722 697 674
720 692 666 643 620 600
663 637 614 592 571 552
620 596 574 554 535 517
577 555 534 515 498 481
539 518 499 481 465 449
502 483 465 448 433 418
440 423 407 393 379 366
31 32 33 34 35 36
725 702 681 661 642 624
652 632 613 595 578 562
580 562 545 529 514 500
534 518 502 487 473 460
500 485 470 456 443 431
465 451 437 424 412 401
435 421 408 396 385 374
405 392 380 369 359 349
355 344 333 323 314 305
38 40 42 44 46 48
591 562 535 511 488 468
532 505 481 459 440 421
473 450 428 409 391 375
436 414 394 377 360 345
408 388 369 352 337 323
380 361 344 328 314 301
355 337 321 306 293 281
330 314 299 285 273 261
289 275 262 250 239 229
50 52 54 56 58 60
449 432 416 401 387 374
404 389 374 361 349 337
360 346 333 321 310 300
331 319 307 296 286 276
310 298 287 277 267 258
289 277 267 258 249 240
270 259 250 241 232 225
251 241 232 224 216 209
220 211 204 196 190 183
62 64 66 68 70 72
362 351 340 330 321 312
326 316 306 297 289 281
290 281 273 265 257 250
267 259 251 244 237 230
250 242 235 228 222 215
233 225 219 212 206 200
217 211 204 198 193 187
202 196 190 185 179 174
177 172 167 162 157 153
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
1040 22500 699 227 34.6 379 12.5 347 16.7 339
936 20200 628 196 31.3 311 10.4 285 13.8 298
624 13500 455 113 23.4 162 6.86 145 9.15 184
581 12500 436 105 22.5 147 6.65 131 8.87 168
509 11000 415 91.1 21.6 126 7.06 110 9.41 149
Span (ft)
1400 1320 1250
210
829 785 733 687 647 611
Fy = 36 ksi
13 14 15 16 17 18
232
Properties and Reaction Values 833 18000 592 173 29.9 270 10.5 244 14.0 270
767 16600 543 151 27.5 230 8.94 208 11.9 240
718 15500 512 139 26.1 205 8.16 185 10.9 223
668 14400 478 122 24.5 180 7.25 162 9.67 202
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 40
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 33
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 33 241
221
W 33 201
169
152
141
130
118
755 710 671 635 604 575
694 653 617 584 555 529
630 593 560 531 504 480
560 527 498 472 448 427
16 17 18 19 20 21
1100 1070 1010 966
1020 972 923 879
936 926 878 834 794
849 799 755 715 679 647
22 23 24 25 26 27
922 882 845 811 780 751
839 803 770 739 710 684
758 725 695 667 641 618
618 591 566 543 523 503
549 525 503 483 464 447
505 483 463 444 427 411
459 439 420 403 388 374
407 390 374 359 345 332
28 29 30 31 32 33
724 699 676 654 634 615
660 637 616 596 577 560
596 575 556 538 521 505
485 468 453 438 425 412
431 416 402 389 377 366
397 383 370 358 347 336
360 348 336 325 315 306
320 309 299 289 280 272
34 35 36 37 38 40
597 579 563 548 534 507
543 528 513 499 486 462
490 476 463 451 439 417
400 388 377 367 358 340
355 345 335 326 318 302
327 317 308 300 292 278
297 288 280 273 265 252
264 256 249 242 236 224
42 44 46 48 50 52
483 461 441 423 406 390
440 420 401 385 369 355
397 379 363 347 334 321
323 309 295 283 272 261
287 274 262 252 241 232
264 252 241 231 222 214
240 229 219 210 202 194
213 204 195 187 179 172
54 56 58 60 62 64
376 362 350 338 327 317
342 330 318 308 298 289
309 298 288 278 269 261
252 243 234 226 219 212
224 216 208 201 195 189
206 198 191 185 179 173
187 180 174 168 163 158
166 160 155 149 145 140
66 68 70 72
307 298 290 282
280 272 264 257
253 245 238 232
206 200 194 189
183 178 172 168
168 163 159 154
153 148 144 140
136 132 128 125
514 11100 392 95.3 21.8 141 6.36 127 8.48 162
467 10100 373 88.1 20.9 125 6.33 111 8.44 146
415 8960 351 77.3 19.8 107 6.28 93.6 8.37 128
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
939 20300 552 163 29.9 274 11.0 249 14.6 261
855 18500 511 144 27.9 236 9.88 213 13.2 235
772 16700 468 125 25.7 198 8.66 179 11.6 208
629 13600 440 124 24.1 185 6.69 170 8.92 203
559 12100 413 107 22.9 159 6.65 144 8.87 181
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 41
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 30
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
W 30
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
261
235
191
173
932 899 851 809 770
847 808 765 727 692
775 769 726 688 653 622
830 794 761 730 702 676
735 703 674 647 622 599
661 632 606 581 559 538
594 568 545 523 503 484
726 701 678 656 635 616
652 629 608 589 570 553
578 558 539 522 506 490
519 501 485 469 454 441
467 451 436 422 408 396
34 36 38 40 42 44
598 565 535 508 484 462
537 507 480 456 435 415
476 449 426 404 385 368
428 404 383 363 346 330
384 363 344 327 311 297
46 48 50 52 54 56
442 423 407 391 376 363
397 380 365 351 338 326
352 337 324 311 300 289
316 303 291 280 269 260
284 272 261 251 242 233
58 60 62 64 66 68
350 339 328 318 308 299
315 304 294 285 277 268
279 270 261 253 245 238
251 242 234 227 220 214
225 218 211 204 198 192
70 72
290 282
261 254
231 225
208 202
187 182
673 14500 423 124 25.6 199 9.04 181 12.0 207
605 13100 388 111 23.6 167 7.96 151 10.6 187
16 17 18 19 20 21
1140 1130 1070 1020 968
1010 961 913 869
22 23 24 25 26 27
924 884 847 813 782 753
28 29 30 31 32 33
211
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
941 20300 571 204 33.5 353 14.2 323 18.9 313
845 18300 505 168 29.9 283 11.2 260 14.9 265
749 16200 466 148 27.9 239 10.5 218 14.0 239
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 42
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 30
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 30 148
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72
775 771 720 675 635 600 568 540 514 491 470 450 432 415 400 386 372 360 348 338 327 318 300 284 270 257 245 235 225 216 208 200 193 186 180 174 169 164 159 154 150
132
725 674 629 590 555 524 497 472 449 429 410 393 378 363 350 337 325 315 304 295 286 278 262 248 236 225 215 205 197 189 182 175 169 163 157 152 147 143 139 135 131
124 686 678 629 588 551 518 490 464 441 420 401 383 367 353 339 326 315 304 294 284 275 267 259 245 232 220 210 200 192 184 176 169 163 157 152 147 142 138 134 130 126 122
116
108
99
90
659 628 583 544 510 480 454 430 408 389 371 355 340 327 314 302 292 282 272 263 255 247 240 227 215 204 194 186 177 170 163 157 151 146 141 136 132 128 124 120 117 113
632 623 575 534 498 467 440 415 393 374 356 340 325 311 299 287 277 267 258 249 241 234 226 220 208 197 187 178 170 162 156 149 144 138 133 129 125 121 117 113 110 107 104
599 562 518 481 449 421 396 374 355 337 321 306 293 281 270 259 250 241 232 225 217 211 204 198 187 177 168 160 153 147 140 135 130 125 120 116 112 109 105 102 99 96 94
540 509 470 437 408 382 360 340 322 306 291 278 266 255 245 235 226 218 211 204 197 191 185 180 170 161 153 146 139 133 127 122 118 113 109 105 102 99 96 93 90 87 85
346 7470 316 76.6 19.6 107 6.55 94.3 8.74 129
312 6740 300 67.3 18.7 93.9 6.50 81.1 8.66 115
283 6110 270 55.5 16.9 77.0 5.29 66.6 7.05 94.2
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
500 10800 388 117 23.4 174 6.97 160 9.29 193
437 9440 362 96.9 22.1 148 7.05 133 9.39 169
408 8810 343 88.8 21.1 132 6.55 119 8.73 153
378 8160 330 82.6 20.3 120 6.49 107 8.65 141
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 43
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 27
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 27 258
235
194
178
161
146
917 900 850 805 765
820 798 754 714 678
784 765 720 680 645 612
708 691 651 614 582 553
644 622 586 553 524 498
791 755 722 692 664 639
728 695 665 637 612 588
646 617 590 565 543 522
583 557 532 510 490 471
527 503 481 461 442 425
474 453 433 415 398 383
680 656 633 612 592 574
615 593 573 554 536 519
566 546 527 510 493 478
502 484 468 452 438 424
454 437 422 408 395 383
410 395 381 369 357 346
369 356 343 332 321 311
33 34 35 36 37 38
556 540 525 510 496 483
503 489 475 461 449 437
463 450 437 425 413 402
411 399 388 377 367 357
371 360 350 340 331 322
335 325 316 307 299 291
302 293 285 277 269 262
40 42 44 46 48 50
459 437 417 399 383 367
415 395 378 361 346 332
382 364 348 332 319 306
339 323 308 295 283 271
306 292 278 266 255 245
276 263 251 240 230 221
249 237 226 216 207 199
52 54 56 58 60 62
353 340 328 317 306 296
319 308 297 286 277 268
294 283 273 264 255 247
261 251 242 234 226 219
236 227 219 211 204 198
213 205 197 191 184 178
191 184 178 172 166 161
64 66
287 278
260 252
239 232
212 206
191 186
173 168
156 151
567 12200 392 122 26.1 206 10.6 186 14.1 207
512 11100 354 108 23.8 171 8.86 154 11.8 185
461 9960 322 91.9 21.8 142 7.62 128 10.2 163
15 16 17 18 19 20
1100 1080 1020 966 918
1010 977 923 874 831
21 22 23 24 25 26
874 835 798 765 734 706
27 28 29 30 31 32
217
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
850 18400 552 221 35.3 395 16.8 362 22.5 335
769 16600 507 189 32.8 337 15.0 308 20.0 296
708 15300 459 163 29.9 283 12.3 260 16.4 261
628 13600 410 139 27.0 230 10.3 211 13.7 227
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 44
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W 27
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
W 27
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
129
102
94
84
605 570 529 494 463
542 507 471 439 412
513 500 462 429 400 375
478 439 405 376 351 329
502 474 449 427 406 388
436 412 390 370 353 337
388 366 347 329 314 299
353 334 316 300 286 273
310 293 277 264 251 240
23 24 25 26 27 28
371 356 341 328 316 305
322 309 296 285 274 265
286 275 264 253 244 235
261 250 240 231 222 214
229 220 211 203 195 188
29 30 31 32 33 34
294 284 275 267 259 251
255 247 239 232 225 218
227 220 213 206 200 194
207 200 194 188 182 177
182 176 170 165 160 155
36 38 40 42 44 46
237 225 213 203 194 185
206 195 185 176 168 161
183 173 165 157 150 143
167 158 150 143 136 131
146 139 132 125 120 115
48 50 52 54 56 58
178 171 164 158 152 147
154 148 142 137 132 128
137 132 127 122 118 114
125 120 115 111 107 104
110 105 101 98 94 91
60 62 64 66
142 138 133 129
123 119 116 112
110 106 103 100
100 97 94 91
88 85 82 80
278 6000 256 63.4 17.6 90.6 5.39 80.9 7.18 108
244 5270 239 56.9 16.6 76.4 5.23 67.1 6.97 93.4
11 12 13 14 15 16
655 609 569 533
17 18 19 20 21 22
114
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
395 8530 328 99.5 22.0 153 6.86 140 9.14 171
343 7410 302 83.4 20.5 127 6.70 115 8.93 149
305 6590 271 72.4 18.5 103 5.58 93.0 7.44 121
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 45
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 24
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 24 229
207
192
176
146
131
117
104
685 674 632 595 562
625 602 564 531 502
576 571 533 500 470 444
519 505 471 441 415 392
468 446 416 390 367 347
581 552 526 502 480 460
532 505 481 459 440 421
475 451 430 410 393 376
421 400 381 363 347 333
372 353 336 321 307 294
329 312 297 284 271 260
483 464 447 431 416 402
442 425 409 394 381 368
404 389 374 361 349 337
361 347 334 322 311 301
320 307 296 285 276 266
283 272 262 252 244 235
250 240 231 223 215 208
422 409 397 385 374 364
389 377 366 355 345 335
356 345 334 325 315 307
326 316 306 297 289 281
291 282 274 266 258 251
258 250 242 235 228 222
228 221 214 208 202 196
201 195 189 184 178 173
384 365 348 332 317 304
344 327 312 297 285 273
318 302 287 274 262 252
290 276 263 251 240 230
266 253 241 230 220 211
238 226 215 205 196 188
210 200 190 182 174 167
186 177 168 161 154 147
164 156 149 142 136 130
292 281 270 261 252 243
262 252 242 234 226 218
241 232 224 216 208 201
221 212 204 197 190 184
202 194 187 181 174 168
181 174 167 161 156 150
160 154 148 143 138 133
141 136 131 126 122 118
125 120 116 111 108 104
676 14600 486 216 34.6 379 18.0 347 24.1 328
606 13100 435 186 31.3 311 15.0 285 20.0 288
370 7990 288 95.3 21.8 141 8.65 127 11.5 166
327 7060 259 80.4 19.8 115 7.41 103 9.88 139
289 6240 234 67.5 18.0 93.7 6.36 83.5 8.48 114
13 14 15 16 17 18
971 913 859 811
870 818 770 727
802 755 710 671
736 736 690 649 613
19 20 21 22 23 24
769 730 695 664 635 608
689 654 623 595 569 545
635 604 575 549 525 503
25 26 27 28 29 30
584 562 541 521 504 487
524 503 485 467 451 436
31 32 33 34 35 36
471 456 442 429 417 406
38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60
162
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
559 12100 401 164 29.2 270 13.1 247 17.5 259
511 11000 368 143 27.0 230 11.5 211 15.3 231
468 10100 343 127 25.4 200 10.5 182 14.1 209
418 9030 313 110 23.4 167 9.35 152 12.5 186
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 46
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 24
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 24 103
94
84
W 24 76
68
62
55
397 367 330 300 275
362 362 322 289 263 241
7 8 9 10 11 12
525 504
487 457
440 440 403
409 393 360
383 382 348 319
13 14 15 16 17 18
465 432 403 378 356 336
422 392 366 343 323 305
372 346 323 302 285 269
332 309 288 270 254 240
294 273 255 239 225 212
254 236 220 207 194 184
223 207 193 181 170 161
19 20 21 22 23 24
318 302 288 275 263 252
289 274 261 249 239 229
255 242 230 220 210 202
227 216 206 196 188 180
201 191 182 174 166 159
174 165 157 150 144 138
152 145 138 132 126 121
25 26 27 28 29 30
242 233 224 216 209 202
219 211 203 196 189 183
194 186 179 173 167 161
173 166 160 154 149 144
153 147 142 137 132 127
132 127 122 118 114 110
116 111 107 103 100 96
31 32 33 34 35 36
195 189 183 178 173 168
177 171 166 161 157 152
156 151 147 142 138 134
139 135 131 127 123 120
123 119 116 112 109 106
107 103 100 97 94 92
93 90 88 85 83 80
38 40 42 44 46 48
159 151 144 137 131 126
144 137 131 125 119 114
127 121 115 110 105 101
114 108 103 98 94 90
101 96 91 87 83 80
87 83 79 75 72 69
76 72 69 66 63 60
50 52 54 56 58 60
121 116 112 108 104 101
110 106 102 98 95 91
97 93 90 86 83 81
86 83 80 77 74
76 74 71 68 66
66 64 61 59 57
58 56 54 52 50
177 3820 191 51.4 14.9 62.6 4.73 55.1 6.30 77.9
153 3300 198 53.2 15.5 66.3 5.21 58.0 6.95 83.2
134 2890 181 46.7 14.2 54.0 4.75 46.5 6.34 69.4
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
280 6050 262 86.6 19.8 124 6.35 113 8.47 144
254 5490 243 75.3 18.5 106 5.89 96.2 7.86 125
224 4840 220 66.1 16.9 86.5 5.14 78.3 6.85 103
200 4320 205 56.9 15.8 73.6 4.81 66.0 6.41 89.3
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 47
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 21
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 21 201
182
166
147
132
122
111
101
552 514 480 450 423 400
506 474 442 414 390 368
460 430 402 377 354 335
415 390 364 342 321 304
13 14 15 16 17 18
815 763 716 673 636
733 685 643 605 571
656 622 583 549 518
618 575 537 504 474 448
19 20 21 22 23 24
603 572 545 520 498 477
541 514 490 467 447 428
491 467 444 424 406 389
424 403 384 366 350 336
379 360 343 327 313 300
349 332 316 301 288 276
317 301 287 274 262 251
288 273 260 248 238 228
25 26 27 28 29 30
458 440 424 409 395 382
411 395 381 367 355 343
373 359 346 333 322 311
322 310 298 288 278 269
288 277 266 257 248 240
265 255 246 237 229 221
241 232 223 215 208 201
219 210 202 195 188 182
31 32 33 34 35 36
369 358 347 337 327 318
332 321 312 302 294 286
301 292 283 274 267 259
260 252 244 237 230 224
232 225 218 212 206 200
214 207 201 195 189 184
194 188 183 177 172 167
176 171 166 161 156 152
38 40 42 44 46 48
301 286 273 260 249 239
271 257 245 234 224 214
246 233 222 212 203 194
212 201 192 183 175 168
189 180 171 163 156 150
175 166 158 151 144 138
159 151 143 137 131 126
144 137 130 124 119 114
50 52
229 220
206 198
187 179
161 155
144 138
133 128
121 116
109 105
307 6630 253 91.1 21.6 139 9.53 126 12.7 161
279 6030 230 80.4 19.8 117 8.11 105 10.8 143
253 5460 208 70.3 18.0 96.8 6.72 87.2 8.95 119
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
530 11400 407 195 32.8 339 18.4 311 24.6 301
476 10300 367 168 29.9 281 15.6 258 20.8 265
432 9330 328 143 27.0 232 12.7 213 16.9 231
373 8060 309 122 25.9 200 13.5 181 18.0 206
333 7190 276 106 23.4 163 11.2 147 14.9 182
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 48
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 21
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 21 93
83
73
W 21 68
62
57
50
44 281 258 229 206 187 172
7 8 9 10 11 12
488 477 434 398
429 423 385 353
376 372 338 310
353 346 314 288
326 311 283 259
332 310 279 253 232
308 297 264 238 216 198
13 14 15 16 17 18
367 341 318 298 281 265
326 302 282 265 249 235
286 265 248 232 219 206
266 247 230 216 203 192
239 222 207 194 183 173
214 199 186 174 164 155
183 170 158 149 140 132
159 147 137 129 121 114
19 20 21 22 23 24
251 239 227 217 208 199
223 212 202 192 184 176
196 186 177 169 162 155
182 173 165 157 150 144
164 156 148 141 135 130
147 139 133 127 121 116
125 119 113 108 103 99
108 103 98 94 90 86
25 26 27 28 29 30
191 184 177 170 165 159
169 163 157 151 146 141
149 143 138 133 128 124
138 133 128 123 119 115
124 120 115 111 107 104
111 107 103 100 96 93
95 91 88 85 82 79
82 79 76 74 71 69
31 32 33 34 35 36
154 149 145 140 136 133
137 132 128 125 121 118
120 116 113 109 106 103
111 108 105 102 99 96
100 97 94 91 89 86
90 87 84 82 80 77
77 74 72 70 68 66
66 64 62 61 59 57
38 40 42 44 46 48
126 119 114 108 104 99
111 106 101 96 92 88
98 93 88 84 81 77
91 86 82 79 75 72
82 78 74 71 68 65
73 70 66 63 61 58
63 59 57 54 52 50
54 52 49 47 45 43
50 52
95 92
85 81
74 71
69 66
62 60
56 54
48 46
41
129 2790 166 50.1 14.6 63.6 4.45 57.3 5.94 78.1
110 2380 154 44.9 13.7 52.4 4.52 46.2 6.03 67.1
95.4 2060 141 37.4 12.6 42.5 4.23 36.7 5.64 56.3
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
221 4770 244 88.1 20.9 130 8.91 118 11.9 156
196 4230 215 72.4 18.5 103 7.01 93.3 9.34 126
172 3720 188 61.4 16.4 80.8 5.50 73.0 7.34 98.7
160 3460 177 55.6 15.5 71.4 5.04 64.3 6.72 87.8
144 3110 163 49.5 14.4 60.7 4.55 54.3 6.07 75.5
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 49
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 18
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation Wt./ft
W 18 192
175
158
W 18 143
130
119
106
97
86
76
430 414 382 355 331 311
387 380 351 326 304 285
343 335 309 287 268 251
301 293 271 251 235 220
693 661 614 573 537
621 592 549 513 481
553 535 497 464 435
501 484 449 419 393
17 18 19 20 21 22
562 530 502 477 455 434
506 478 452 430 409 391
452 427 405 384 366 350
409 386 366 348 331 316
370 349 331 314 299 286
332 313 297 282 268 256
292 276 261 248 237 226
268 253 240 228 217 207
236 223 211 201 191 183
207 196 185 176 168 160
23 24 25 26 27 28
415 398 382 367 354 341
374 358 344 331 318 307
334 320 308 296 285 275
302 290 278 268 258 248
273 262 251 242 233 224
245 235 226 217 209 201
216 207 199 191 184 177
198 190 182 175 169 163
175 167 161 155 149 143
153 147 141 135 130 126
29 30 31 32 33 34
329 318 308 298 289 281
296 287 277 269 261 253
265 256 248 240 233 226
240 232 224 217 211 205
217 210 203 196 190 185
194 188 182 176 171 166
171 166 160 155 151 146
157 152 147 142 138 134
139 134 130 126 122 118
121 117 114 110 107 104
35 36 37 38 39 40
273 265 258 251 245 239
246 239 232 226 220 215
220 214 208 202 197 192
199 193 188 183 178 174
180 175 170 165 161 157
161 157 152 148 145 141
142 138 134 131 127 124
130 127 123 120 117 114
115 112 109 106 103 100
101 98 95 93 90 88
42 44
227 217
205 195
183 175
166 158
150 143
134 128
118 113
109 104
96 91
84 80
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
442 9550 380 211 34.6 381 22.8 350 30.4 323
398 8600 347 180 32.0 324 20.3 297 27.1 284
230 4970 215 86.3 21.2 134 10.7 121 14.3 155
211 4560 193 75.2 19.3 112 8.69 101 11.6 138
186 4020 172 62.1 17.3 89.3 7.17 80.5 9.56 113
163 3520 150 52.6 15.3 69.9 5.69 63.0 7.59 88.4
Span (ft)
760 734 682 636 597
483 470 434 403 376 352
Fy = 36 ksi
11 12 13 14 15 16
Properties and Reaction Values 356 7690 311 155 29.2 268 17.2 245 22.9 250
322 6960 277 131 26.3 219 13.9 201 18.5 217
291 6290 251 113 24.1 184 12.0 168 15.9 191
261 5640 242 103 23.6 167 12.8 151 17.1 180
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 50
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 18
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 18 71
65
6 7 8 9 10 11
355 348 313 285
321 319 287 261
12 13 14 15 16 17
261 241 224 209 196 184
18 19 20 21 22 23
60
W 18 55
50
46
40
35
294 266 242
275 269 242 220
248 242 218 198
253 245 218 196 178
219 212 188 169 154
206 205 180 160 144 131
239 221 205 192 180 169
221 204 190 177 166 156
202 186 173 161 151 142
182 168 156 145 136 128
163 151 140 131 122 115
141 130 121 113 106 100
120 110 103 96 90 84
174 165 157 149 142 136
160 151 144 137 131 125
148 140 133 127 121 116
134 127 121 115 110 105
121 115 109 104 99 95
109 103 98 93 89 85
94 89 85 81 77 74
80 76 72 68 65 62
24 25 26 27 28 29
131 125 120 116 112 108
120 115 110 106 103 99
111 106 102 98 95 92
101 97 93 90 86 83
91 87 84 81 78 75
82 78 75 73 70 68
71 68 65 63 60 58
60 57 55 53 51 50
30 31 32 33 34 35
104 101 98 95 92 89
96 93 90 87 84 82
89 86 83 81 78 76
81 78 76 73 71 69
73 70 68 66 64 62
65 63 61 59 58 56
56 55 53 51 50 48
48 46 45 44 42 41
36 38 40 42 44
87 82 78 75 71
80 76 72 68 65
74 70 66 63 60
67 64 60 58 55
61 57 55 52 50
54 52 49 47 45
47 45 42 40 38
40 38 36 34 33
90.7 1960 126 40.5 13.0 51.4 3.92 46.7 5.23 64.2
78.4 1690 110 33.7 11.3 39.2 3.05 35.6 4.07 49.1
66.5 1440 103 30.4 10.8 32.8 3.29 28.9 4.39 43.5
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
145 3130 178 66.8 17.8 95.9 7.44 86.7 9.92 120
133 2870 161 58.2 16.2 80.0 6.08 72.6 8.10 99.8
123 2660 147 51.4 14.9 68.2 5.18 61.9 6.90 85.0
112 2420 137 46.1 14.0 59.2 4.77 53.4 6.36 74.7
101 2180 124 39.9 12.8 48.9 4.01 44.1 5.34 61.9
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 51
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 16
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 16 100
89
W 16
77
6 7 8 9 10 11
386
342
292
12 13 14 15 16 17
356 329 305 285 267 252
315 291 270 252 236 222
18 19 20 21 22 23
238 225 214 204 194 186
24 25 26 27 28 29
67
57
50
45
W 16 40
36
31
26 153 136 119 106 95 87
251
275 252 227 206
240 221 199 181
216 198 178 162
190 175 157 143
182 173 154 138 126
170 167 146 130 117 106
270 249 231 216 203 191
234 216 201 187 176 165
189 174 162 151 142 133
166 153 142 132 124 117
148 137 127 119 111 105
131 121 112 105 98 93
115 106 99 92 86 81
97 90 83 78 73 69
80 73 68 64 60 56
210 199 189 180 172 164
180 171 162 154 147 141
156 148 140 134 128 122
126 119 113 108 103 99
110 105 99 95 90 86
99 94 89 85 81 77
87 83 79 75 72 68
77 73 69 66 63 60
65 61 58 56 53 51
53 50 48 45 43 42
178 171 164 158 153 147
158 151 145 140 135 130
135 130 125 120 116 112
117 112 108 104 100 97
95 91 87 84 81 78
83 79 76 74 71 69
74 71 68 66 63 61
66 63 61 58 56 54
58 55 53 51 49 48
49 47 45 43 42 40
40 38 37 35 34 33
30 31 32 33 34 35
143 138 134 130 126 122
126 122 118 115 111 108
108 105 101 98 95 93
94 91 88 85 83 80
76 73 71 69 67 65
66 64 62 60 58 57
59 57 56 54 52 51
52 51 49 48 46 45
46 45 43 42 41 39
39 38 36 35 34 33
32 31 30 29 28 27
36 38 40
119 113 107
105 99 95
90 85 81
78 74 70
63 60 57
55 52 50
49 47 44
44 41 39
38 36
32 31
27 25
198 4280 193 88.8 21.1 136 11.0 123 14.7 157
175 3780 171 73.8 18.9 109 9.06 98.8 12.1 135
72.9 1570 94.9 32.6 11.0 36.6 3.22 33.2 4.30 47.1
64.0 1380 91.0 29.9 10.6 32.2 3.46 28.5 4.61 43.5
54.0 1170 84.9 27.8 9.90 29.3 2.73 26.4 3.64 38.2
44.2 955 76.3 23.9 9.00 22.5 2.65 19.7 3.53 31.2
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
150 3240 146 58.9 16.4 81.9 6.89 74.3 9.18 104
130 2810 125 48.9 14.2 61.9 5.21 56.3 6.95 78.9
105 2270 137 53.2 15.5 73.0 6.21 66.2 8.28 93.2
92.0 1990 120 44.9 13.7 56.9 4.92 51.6 6.56 72.9
82.3 1780 108 38.8 12.4 46.6 4.14 42.2 5.52 60.1
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 52
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W 14
Fy = 36 ksi
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113
Designation Wt./ft
W 14 132
120
109
W 14 99
90
82
74
68
61
248 247 227 209 194 181
227 226 207 191 177 166
203 200 184 169 157 147
332 327 305
292 276
267 267 249
240 226
16 17 18 19 20 21
316 297 281 266 253 241
286 269 254 241 229 218
259 244 230 218 207 197
234 220 208 197 187 178
212 199 188 178 170 161
188 177 167 158 150 143
170 160 151 143 136 130
155 146 138 131 124 118
138 130 122 116 110 105
22 23 24 25 26 27
230 220 211 202 194 187
208 199 191 183 176 170
189 180 173 166 160 154
170 162 156 149 144 138
154 147 141 136 130 126
136 131 125 120 115 111
124 118 113 109 105 101
113 108 104 99 96 92
100 96 92 88 85 82
28 29 30 31 32 33
181 174 168 163 158 153
164 158 153 148 143 139
148 143 138 134 130 126
133 129 125 121 117 113
121 117 113 109 106 103
107 104 100 97 94 91
97 94 91 88 85 82
89 86 83 80 78 75
79 76 73 71 69 67
34
149
135
122
110
100
88
80
73
65
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
234 5050 184 98.0 23.2 161 16.3 145 21.8 173
212 4580 166 86.3 21.2 134 13.9 121 18.5 155
139 3000 142 74.6 18.4 103 9.95 93.6 13.3 134
126 2720 124 63.3 16.2 81.8 7.52 74.7 10.0 107
115 2480 113 56.0 14.9 69.4 6.49 63.3 8.65 91.5
102 2200 101 48.5 13.5 56.4 5.40 51.4 7.20 74.8
Span (ft)
368 361 337
284 273 250 231 214 200
Fy = 36 ksi
10 11 12 13 14 15
Properties and Reaction Values 192 4150 146 73.8 18.9 108 10.8 97.6 14.4 135
173 3740 134 62.7 17.5 91.3 9.48 82.3 12.6 119
157 3390 120 54.5 15.8 75.3 7.86 67.9 10.5 102
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 53
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 14
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 14 53
48
5 6 7 8 9 10
200 188
182 169
11 12 13 14 15 16
171 157 145 134 125 118
17 18 19 20 21 22
W 14 43
38
34
W 14 30
26
22
162 150
170 166 148 133
155 147 131 118
145 128 114 102
138 124 109 96 87
123 120 102 90 80 72
154 141 130 121 113 106
137 125 116 107 100 94
121 111 102 95 89 83
107 98 91 84 79 74
93 85 79 73 68 64
79 72 67 62 58 54
65 60 55 51 48 45
111 105 99 94 90 86
100 94 89 85 81 77
88 84 79 75 72 68
78 74 70 66 63 60
69 66 62 59 56 54
60 57 54 51 49 46
51 48 46 43 41 39
42 40 38 36 34 33
23 24 25 26 27 28
82 78 75 72 70 67
74 71 68 65 63 60
65 63 60 58 56 54
58 55 53 51 49 47
51 49 47 45 44 42
44 43 41 39 38 36
38 36 35 33 32 31
31 30 29 28 27 26
29 30 31 32 33 34
65 63 61 59 57 55
58 56 55 53 51 50
52 50 48 47 46 44
46 44 43 42 40 39
41 39 38 37 36 35
35 34 33 32 31 30
30 29 28 27 26 26
25 24 23 22 22 21
47.3 1020 72.6 22.8 9.72 26.6 3.39 23.5 4.52 38.2
40.2 868 69.0 21.5 9.18 25.5 2.61 23.1 3.47 34.4
33.2 717 61.4 18.1 8.28 19.5 2.43 17.3 3.24 27.8
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
87.1 1880 100 47.9 13.3 55.9 5.06 51.3 6.75 73.2
78.4 1690 91.1 42.1 12.2 46.8 4.40 42.8 5.86 61.8
69.6 1500 81.0 36.0 11.0 37.5 3.60 34.2 4.80 49.8
61.5 1330 85.0 29.6 11.2 37.9 3.77 34.4 5.02 50.7
54.6 1180 77.5 25.7 10.3 31.4 3.34 28.3 4.45 42.8
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 54
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W 12
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation Wt./ft
W 12 120
106
96
87
W 12 79
72
65
58
53 162 153 140 129 120 112
306 295 272 253 236
272 265 244 227 212
251 238 219 204 190
226 214 198 184 171
205 194 179 167 156
184 174 161 149 139
16 17 18 19 20 21
251 236 223 211 201 191
221 208 197 186 177 169
198 187 176 167 159 151
178 168 158 150 143 136
161 151 143 135 129 122
146 137 130 123 117 111
131 123 116 110 105 100
117 110 104 98 93 89
105 99 93 89 84 80
22 23 24 25 26 27
183 175 167 161 155 149
161 154 148 142 136 131
144 138 132 127 122 118
130 124 119 114 110 106
117 112 107 103 99 95
106 101 97 93 90 86
95 91 87 84 80 77
85 81 78 75 72 69
76 73 70 67 65 62
28 29 30
143 139 134
127 122 118
113 109 106
102 98 95
92 89 86
83 80 78
75 72 70
67 64 62
60 58 56
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
186 4020 181 116 25.6 192 22.7 173 30.2 199
164 3540 153 92.6 22.0 145 16.3 131 21.8 164
108 2330 102 53.2 15.5 70.6 8.89 63.4 11.9 102
96.8 2090 91.9 46.1 14.0 58.0 7.43 52.0 9.90 84.1
86.4 1870 85.3 44.6 13.0 52.9 5.49 48.4 7.32 72.2
77.9 1680 80.9 38.8 12.4 47.0 5.44 42.6 7.25 66.2
Span (ft)
362 335 309 287 268
171 170 156 144 133 124
Fy = 36 ksi
10 11 12 13 14 15
Properties and Reaction Values 147 3180 136 80.4 19.8 118 13.4 107 17.8 145
132 2850 125 69.5 18.5 102 12.4 91.5 16.5 130
119 2570 113 60.8 16.9 84.5 10.5 75.9 14.0 116
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 55
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 12
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 12 50
45
W 12 40
4 5 6 7 8 9
175 174
157 155
10 11 12 13 14 15
156 142 130 120 112 104
16 17 18 19 20 21
35
30
W 12 26
22
19
16
14
111 107 89 76 67 59
103 87 72 62 54 48
93 75 63 54 47 42
137
146 138 123
125 116 103
109 100 89
124 105 90 79 70
140 127 116 108 100 93
124 113 104 96 89 83
111 101 92 85 79 74
93 85 78 72 66 62
80 73 67 62 57 54
63 58 53 49 45 42
53 49 44 41 38 36
43 39 36 33 31 29
38 34 31 29 27 25
98 92 87 82 78 74
87 82 78 74 70 67
78 73 69 65 62 59
69 65 61 58 55 53
58 55 52 49 47 44
50 47 45 42 40 38
40 37 35 33 32 30
33 31 30 28 27 25
27 26 24 23 22 21
23 22 21 20 19 18
22 23 24 25 26 27
71 68 65 63 60 58
64 61 58 56 54 52
56 54 52 50 48 46
50 48 46 44 43 41
42 40 39 37 36 34
37 35 33 32 31 30
29 28 26 25 24 23
24 23 22 21 21 20
20 19 18 17 17 16
17 16 16 15 14 14
28 29 30
56 54 52
50 48 47
44 43 37
39 38 31
33 32 27
29 28 21
23 22 18
19 18
16 15
13 13
72.4 1560 87.7 45.8 13.3 55.1 5.96 50.3 7.95 76.1
64.7 1400 78.5 37.7 12.1 45.0 4.98 41.0 6.64 62.6
29.3 633 62.2 20.5 9.36 26.4 3.08 23.9 4.11 37.3
24.7 534 55.6 17.2 8.46 20.6 2.80 18.4 3.73 30.5
20.1 434 51.3 14.9 7.92 16.3 3.08 13.8 4.10 27.1
17.4 376 46.3 12.4 7.20 13.0 2.74 10.8 3.65
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
57.5 1240 68.5 33.2 10.6 35.2 3.83 32.1 5.11 48.7
51.2 1110 72.9 27.0 10.8 36.3 3.81 33.1 5.08 49.6
43.1 931 62.4 21.9 9.36 26.9 2.97 24.5 3.96 37.3
37.2 804 54.6 18.1 8.28 20.8 2.41 18.8 3.21 29.3
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
22.7
4 - 56
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 10
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
W 10 112
100
88
77
68
60
54
49
9 10 11 12 13 14
333 318 289 265 244 227
293 281 255 234 216 201
255 244 222 203 188 174
218 211 192 176 162 151
190 184 167 154 142 132
167 161 146 134 124 115
145 144 131 120 111 103
132 130 119 109 100 93
15 16 17 18 19 20
212 198 187 176 167 159
187 176 165 156 148 140
163 153 144 136 128 122
141 132 124 117 111 105
123 115 108 102 97 92
107 101 95 90 85 81
96 90 85 80 76 72
87 82 77 72 69 65
21 22 23 24
151 144 138 132
134 128 122 117
116 111 106 102
100 96 92 88
88 84 80 77
77 73 70 67
69 65 63 60
62 59 57 54
74.6 1610 83.4 49.6 15.1 68.7 9.79 62.0 13.0 98.8
66.6 1440 72.6 41.6 13.3 54.0 7.49 49.0 9.99 81.4
60.4 1300 66.0 36.3 12.2 45.4 6.46 41.1 8.61 69.1
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
147 3180 167 127 27.2 224 27.8 203 37.1 216
130 2810 147 107 24.5 182 23.2 164 31.0 187
113 2440 127 88.5 21.8 143 18.9 130 25.3 159
97.6 2110 109 71.5 19.1 110 14.8 99.7 19.8 134
85.3 1840 95.0 58.2 16.9 86.5 11.9 78.3 15.9 113
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 57
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 10
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
W 10 45
3 4 5 6 7 8
137
9 10 11 12 13 14
39
W 10 33
30
26
W 10 22
19
17
15
12 73 68 54 45 39 34
100 93 78 67 58
94 81 67 58 50
89 86 69 58 49 43
121
110 105
122 113 99
104 97 85
95 94 80 70
132 119 108 99 91 85
112 101 92 84 78 72
93 84 76 70 64 60
88 79 72 66 61 56
75 68 61 56 52 48
62 56 51 47 43 40
52 47 42 39 36 33
45 40 37 34 31 29
38 35 31 29 27 25
30 27 25 23 21 19
15 16 17 18 19 20
79 74 70 66 62 59
67 63 59 56 53 51
56 52 49 47 44 42
53 49 47 44 42 40
45 42 40 38 36 34
37 35 33 31 30 28
31 29 27 26 25 23
27 25 24 22 21 20
23 22 20 19 18 17
18 17 16 15 14 14
21 22 23 24
56 54 52 49
48 46 44 42
40 38 36 35
38 36 34 33
32 31 29 28
27 26 24 23
22 21 20 19
19 18 18 17
16 16 15 14
13 12 12 11
54.9 1190 68.7 39.4 12.6 49.9 6.29 45.7 8.38 72.9
46.8 1010 60.7 31.9 11.3 39.4 5.46 35.8 7.28 59.4
21.6 467 49.8 18.3 9.00 24.0 3.55 21.6 4.73 37.0
18.7 404 47.2 16.2 8.64 20.7 3.80 18.1 5.07 34.6
16.0 346 44.7 14.2 8.28 17.5 4.14 14.8 5.52 32.7
12.6 272 36.5 10.7 6.84 11.6 3.04 9.61 4.05 22.8
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
38.8 838 54.9 27.7 10.4 31.5 5.29 28.1 7.05 51.0
36.6 791 61.1 25.3 10.8 35.9 4.64 32.7 6.19 52.8
31.3 676 52.2 20.5 9.36 26.9 3.55 24.5 4.73 39.8
26.0 562 47.4 16.2 8.64 21.6 3.47 19.2 4.62 34.3
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 58
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W8
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
W8 67
58
48
7 8 9 10 11 12
199 190 168 152 138 126
40
35
31
174 161 144 129 117 108
132 118 106 96 88
115 107 96 86 78 72
98 94 83 75 68 62
89 82 73 66 60 55
13 14 15 16 17 18
117 108 101 95 89 84
99 92 86 81 76 72
81 76 71 66 62 59
66 61 57 54 51 48
58 54 50 47 44 42
51 47 44 41 39 36
19 20
80 76
68 65
56 53
45 43
39 37
35 33
39.8 860 57.7 34.4 13.0 49.5 9.27 44.4 12.4 76.5
34.7 750 48.9 27.9 11.2 37.2 6.80 33.5 9.07 63.0
30.4 657 44.3 24.0 10.3 30.7 6.11 27.4 8.14 53.9
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
70.2 1520 99.7 73.7 20.5 127 20.2 115 26.9 140
59.8 1290 86.8 60.2 18.4 100 17.2 90.3 22.9 120
49.0 1060 66.1 42.8 14.4 64.1 10.1 58.4 13.5 89.6
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 59
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W8
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
W8
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
28
W8 24
21
W8 18
15
13
10
71 62 49 41 35 31
52 48 38 32 27 24
3 4 5 6 7 8
89 84 73
76 72 63
80 73 63 55
73 61 52 46
77 73 59 49 42 37
9 10 11 12 13 14
65 59 53 49 45 42
56 50 46 42 39 36
49 44 40 37 34 31
41 37 33 31 28 26
33 29 27 24 23 21
27 25 22 21 19 18
21 19 17 16 15 14
15 16 17 18 19 20
39 37 35 33 31 29
33 31 29 28 26 22
29 28 26 24 23 18
24 23 22 20 19 15
20 18 17 16 15
16 15 14 14 13
13 12 11 11 10
13.6 294 38.6 16.5 8.82 20.8 5.28 18.0 7.05 40.9
11.4 246 35.7 14.2 8.28 17.0 5.48 14.1 7.31 37.9
8.87 192 26.1 9.56 6.12 9.71 2.79 8.24 3.72 20.3
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
27.2 588 44.7 24.0 10.3 31.7 5.67 28.7 7.56 53.3
23.2 501 37.8 19.3 8.82 23.5 4.26 21.2 5.67 39.7
20.4 441 40.2 18.3 9.00 24.2 4.33 21.8 5.77 40.6
17.0 367 36.4 15.5 8.28 19.4 4.16 17.1 5.54 35.2
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 60
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W 6–5–4
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
W6 25
2 3 4 5 6 7
79 68 58
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
20
W6 15*
16
W5
12
9
63 54 46
54 46 38 33
63 63 51 42 36
54 45 36 30 26
39 34 27 22 19
51 45 41 37 34 31
40 36 32 29 27 25
29 26 23 21 19 18
32 28 25 23 21 19
22 20 18 16 15 14
17 15 13 12 11 10
29
23
16
18
13
18.9 408 39.7 23.4 11.5 37.4 10.4 33.0 13.8 60.8
14.9 322 31.3 17.5 9.36 24.5 7.13 21.6 9.51 48.0
19
W4 16
13
54 50 42 36
47 41 35 30
45 45 34 27 23 19
31 28 25 23 21
26 23 21 19 17
17 15 14
11.6 251 27.0 19.7 9.72 28.2 8.16 25.4 10.9 51.3
9.59 207 23.4 16.2 8.64 21.6 7.04 19.2 9.38 44.3
6.28 136 22.6 17.3 10.1 26.6 14.0 22.7 18.7 50.1
9.6
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
10.8 230 26.8 12.9 8.28 17.2 7.17 14.3 9.56 39.8
11.7 253 31.7 17.5 9.36 25.8 6.34 23.2 8.46 48.0
8.30 179 27.0 12.9 8.28 17.9 6.62 15.2 8.82 39.8
6.23 135 19.5 8.61 6.12 9.95 3.56 8.55 4.74 24.0
*Indicates noncompact shape. Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 61
BEAMS S Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
S 24–20
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation Wt./ft
S 24 121
12 13 14 15 16 17
90
S 20 80
96
S 20 86
75
66
521 494 439 395 359
494 472 413 367 330 300
393 378 336 302 275
591 548
695 648 576 518 471
583 533 480 436
467 441 401
551 508 472 441 413 389
502 464 430 402 377 354
432 399 370 346 324 305
400 369 343 320 300 282
367 339 315 294 275 259
356 329 305 285 267 252
329 304 282 264 247 233
275 254 236 220 207 194
252 233 216 202 189 178
18 19 20 21 22 23
367 348 330 315 300 287
335 317 301 287 274 262
288 273 259 247 236 225
266 252 240 228 218 208
245 232 220 210 200 192
238 225 214 204 194 186
220 208 198 188 180 172
184 174 165 157 150 144
168 159 151 144 137 131
24 25 26 27 28 29
275 264 254 245 236 228
251 241 232 223 215 208
216 207 199 192 185 179
200 192 184 178 171 165
184 176 169 163 157 152
178 171 164 158 153 147
165 158 152 146 141 136
138 132 127 122 118 114
126 121 116 112 108 104
30 32 34 36 38 40
220 207 194 184 174 165
201 188 177 167 159 151
173 162 152 144 136 130
160 150 141 133 126 120
147 138 130 122 116 110
143 134 126 119 113 107
132 124 116 110 104 99
110 103 97 92 87 83
101 95 89 84 80 76
42 44 46 48 50 52
157 150 144 138 132 127
143 137 131 126 121 116
123 118 113 108 104 100
114 109 104 100 96 92
105 100 96 92 88 85
102 97 93 89 86
94 90 86 82 79
79 75 72 69 66
72 69 66 63 60
54 56 58 60
122 118 114 110
112 108 104 100
96 93 89 86
89 86 83 80
82 79 76 73
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
306 6610 381 144 28.8 229 17.6 200 23.5 238
279 6030 295 112 22.3 156 8.19 143 10.9 183
183 3950 260 104 23.8 157 14.1 138 18.8 181
153 3300 247 92.9 22.9 138 14.8 118 19.7 167
140 3020 196 73.9 18.2 97.9 7.44 88.0 9.91 122
Span (ft)
762 734 661 601
100
631 611 535 475 428 389
Fy = 36 ksi
6 7 8 9 10 11
S 24 106
Properties and Reaction Values 240 5180 348 117 26.8 184 18.2 154 24.2 205
222 4800 292 98.4 22.5 141 10.7 124 14.3 172
204 4410 233 78.8 18.0 101 5.50 92.1 7.33 119
198 4280 316 126 28.8 210 25.2 176 33.6 220
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 62
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
S 18–15–12–10
BEAMS S Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
S 18 70
3 4 5 6 7 8
498 450 386 338
9 10 11 12 13 14
S 15
54.7
50
S 12
42.9
50
S 12
40.8
35
S 10
31.8
35
25.4
121 102 88 77
240 214 187
321 264 220 189 165
216 191 164 143
200 194 161 138 121
163 151 130 113
231 191 153 127 109 96
185 167 151 139 128 119
166 150 136 125 115 107
147 132 120 110 102 94
127 115 104 96 88 82
108 97 88 81 74 69
101 91 82 76 70 65
85 76 70 64 59 55
68 61 56 51 47 44
151 142 133 126 119 113
111 104 98 93 88 83
100 94 88 83 79 75
88 83 78 73 70 66
76 72 67 64 60 57
65 60 57 54 51 48
60 57 53 50 48 45
51 48 45 42 40 38
41 38 36 34 32 31
129 123 117 113 108 104
108 103 99 95 91 87
79 76 72 69 67 64
71 68 65 62 60 58
63 60 57 55 53 51
55 52 50 48 46 44
46 44 42 40 39 37
43 41 39 38 36 35
36 35 33 32 31
29 28 27 26 25
27 28 29 30 31 32
100 96 93 90 87 84
84 81 78 76 73 71
62 59 57 56 54 52
55 53 52 50 48 47
49 47 46 44
42 41 40 38
36 35 33 32
34 32 31 30
33 34 35 36 37 38
82 79 77 75 73 71
69 67 65 63 61 60
50 49 48 46 45
45 44 43 42 40
40 42 44
68 64 61
57 54 52
125 2700 249 96.0 25.6 152 26.5 121 35.4 179
105 2270 161 62.2 16.6 79.6 7.23 70.9 9.64 103
44.8 968 99.8 45.7 15.4 63.2 11.0 54.4 14.7 95.8
42.0 907 81.6 37.4 12.6 46.7 6.03 41.9 8.04 68.0
35.4 765 115 60.1 21.4 98.2 39.2 72.0 52.2 130
28.4 613 60.5 31.5 11.2 37.2 5.62 33.4 7.50 57.8
323 284
321 278 238 208
300 270 245 225 208 193
252 227 206 189 174 162
15 16 17 18 19 20
180 169 159 150 142 135
21 22 23 24 25 26
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
77.1 1670 160 68.1 19.8 98.4 16.4 82.1 21.8 132
69.3 1500 120 50.9 14.8 63.6 6.83 56.8 9.11 86.4
61.2 1320 160 88.9 24.7 141 37.6 111 50.2 169
53.1 1150 108 59.8 16.6 78.0 11.4 68.8 15.3 114
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 63
BEAMS S 8–6–5–4–3 S Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113
Designation Wt./ft
S8 23
1 2 3 4 5 6
137 104 83 69
7 8 9 10 11 12
S6 18.4
17.25
S5 12.5
10 42 41 31 24 20
60 52 46 42 38 35
51 45 40 36 32 30
33 29 25 23 21 19
26 23 20 18 17 15
17 15 14 12 11 10
13
32
27
18
14
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
19.3 417 68.6 39.7 15.9 58.5 23.1 46.2 30.8 91.3
16.5 356 42.1 24.4 9.76 28.2 5.36 25.3 7.15 48.5
S3 7.7
7.5
5.7
41 25 17 13 10 8.50
20 14 11 8.42 7.02
51 44 29 22 17 15
30 25 19 15 13
12 11 9.70 8.73
11 9.48 8.42 7.58
7.28
6.02
3.51 75.8 15.0 13.0 6.95 14.0 5.63 12.5 7.51 35.6
2.36 51.0 20.4 21.6 12.6 32.2 50.0 22.2 66.7 62.4
1.95 42.1 9.91 10.5 6.12 10.9 5.78 9.78 7.71 30.4
Span (ft)
54 46 37 30
Fy = 36 ksi
84 71 59
108 76 57 46 38
S4 9.5
Properties and Reaction Values 10.6 229 54.2 36.6 16.7 58.1 42.9 41.0 57.1 91.0
8.47 183 27.1 18.3 8.35 20.5 5.32 18.4 7.10 41.4
5.67 122 20.8 15.6 7.70 17.3 5.52 15.5 7.36 39.4
4.04 87.3 25.3 22.0 11.7 30.8 27.1 23.6 36.2 60.1
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 64
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
MC,C 18–15
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
MC 18
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
58
51.9
C 15 45.8
42.7
50
40
33.9
303 247 206 177 154
233 218 181 156 136
3 4 5 6 7 8
490 409 341 292 255
420 374 311 267 234
350 339 282 242 212
315 268 230 201
418 368 295 246 210 184
9 10 11 12 13 14
227 204 186 170 157 146
208 187 170 156 144 133
188 169 154 141 130 121
179 161 146 134 124 115
164 147 134 123 113 105
137 124 112 103 95 88
121 109 99 91 84 78
15 16 17 18 19 20
136 128 120 114 108 102
125 117 110 104 98 93
113 106 100 94 89 85
107 100 95 89 85 80
98 92 87 82 78 74
82 77 73 69 65 62
73 68 64 60 57 54
21 22 23 24 25 26
97 93 89 85 82 79
89 85 81 78 75 72
81 77 74 71 68 65
77 73 70 67 64 62
70 67 64 61 59 57
59 56 54 51 49 48
52 49 47 45 44 42
28 30 32 34 36 38
73 68 64 60 57 54
67 62 58 55 52 49
60 56 53 50 47 45
57 54 50 47 45 42
53 49 46 43 41
44 41 39 36 34
39 36 34 32 30
40 42 44
51 49 46
47 44 42
42 40 38
40 38 37
68.2 1470 209 92.6 25.8 149 34.6 115 46.1 176
57.2 1240 152 67.3 18.7 92.5 13.2 79.3 17.7 128
50.4 1090 117 51.8 14.4 62.4 6.03 56.4 8.03 82.5
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
94.6 2040 245 86.6 25.2 142 28.0 108 37.3 169
86.5 1870 210 74.3 21.6 112 17.6 91.3 23.5 144
78.4 1690 175 61.9 18.0 85.5 10.2 73.3 13.6 119
74.4 1610 157 55.7 16.2 73.0 7.44 64.1 9.91 97.2
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 65
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
MC 13
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
MC 13
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
50
40
35
31.8
3 4 5 6 7 8
398 327 261 218 187 163
283 275 220 183 157 137
226 200 166 143 125
190 186 155 133 116
9 10 11 12 13 14
145 131 119 109 101 93
122 110 100 92 85 79
111 100 91 83 77 71
103 93 85 78 72 66
15 16 17 18 19 20
87 82 77 73 69 65
73 69 65 61 58 55
67 62 59 55 53 50
62 58 55 52 49 47
21 22 23 24 25 26
62 59 57 54 52 50
52 50 48 46 44 42
48 45 43 42 40 38
44 42 40 39 37 36
27 28 29 30 31 32
48 47 45 44 42 41
41 39 38 37 35 34
37 36 34 33 32 31
34 33 32 31 30 29
46.2 998 113 55.3 16.1 71.4 10.3 62.5 13.8 107
43.1 931 94.8 46.4 13.5 54.9 6.10 49.6 8.14 76.0
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
60.5 1310 199 97.4 28.3 167 56.4 118 75.2 189
50.9 1100 142 69.3 20.2 100 20.3 82.5 27.1 135
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 66
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
C, MC 12
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation Wt./ft
C 12 30
25
MC 12 20.7
50
45
40
MC 12 35
31
10.6
181 158 126 105 90
132 110 91 78
390 303 242 202 173
332 279 223 186 160
275 255 204 170 146
218 185 154 132
173 170 141 121
8 9 10 11 12 13
91 81 73 66 60 56
79 70 63 57 53 49
69 61 55 50 46 42
151 135 121 110 101 93
140 124 112 102 93 86
128 114 102 93 85 79
116 103 92 84 77 71
106 94 85 77 71 65
31 28 25 23 21 19
14 15 16 17 18 19
52 48 45 43 40 38
45 42 39 37 35 33
39 37 34 32 30 29
87 81 76 71 67 64
80 74 70 66 62 59
73 68 64 60 57 54
66 62 58 54 51 49
61 57 53 50 47 45
18 17 16 15 14 13
20 21 22 23 24 25
36 35 33 32 30 29
32 30 29 27 26 25
27 26 25 24 23 22
61 58 55 53 50 48
56 53 51 49 47 45
51 49 46 44 43 41
46 44 42 40 39 37
42 40 39 37 35 34
13 12 11 11 10 10
26 27 28 29 30
28 27 26 25 24
24 23 23 22 21
21 20 20 19 18
47 45 43 42 40
43 41 40 39 37
39 38 36 35 34
36 34 33 32 31
33 31 30 29 28
9.64 9.28 8.95 8.64 8.35
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
33.6 726 119 51.6 18.4 78.9 20.3 62.7 27.0 111
29.2 631 90.3 39.2 13.9 52.1 8.85 45.1 11.8 83.4
47.3 1020 138 69.7 21.2 116 22.4 98.1 29.9 139
42.8 924 109 55.2 16.8 81.7 11.1 72.8 14.8 110
39.3 849 86.3 43.7 13.3 57.6 5.54 53.2 7.38 77.2
11.6 251 44.3 11.8 6.84 14.1 1.70 12.7 2.26 20.1
Span (ft)
238 181 145 121 104
89 84 63 50 42 36
Fy = 36 ksi
2 3 4 5 6 7
Properties and Reaction Values 25.4 549 65.8 28.6 10.2 32.4 3.42 29.7 4.57 44.5
56.1 1210 195 98.6 30.1 195 63.6 144 84.8 196
51.7 1120 166 84.1 25.6 154 39.4 122 52.6 167
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 67
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
C, MC 10
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
C 10
MC 10
30
25
20
2 3 4 5 6 7
262 192 144 115 96 82
205 166 124 99 83 71
8 9 10 11 12 13
72 64 57 52 48 44
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
33.6
MC 10 28.5
25
MC 10
15.3
41.1
22
147 139 104 83 69 60
93 85 68 57 49
309 280 210 168 140 120
224 180 144 120 103
165 160 128 107 91
148 139 111 93 80
113 102 85 73
66 57 42 34 28 24
8.4
62 55 50 45 41 38
52 46 42 38 35 32
43 38 34 31 28 26
105 93 84 76 70 65
90 80 72 66 60 55
80 71 64 58 53 49
70 62 56 51 46 43
64 57 51 46 42 39
21 19 17 15 14 13
41 38 36 34 32 30
35 33 31 29 28 26
30 28 26 25 23 22
24 23 21 20 19 18
60 56 53 49 47 44
52 48 45 42 40 38
46 43 40 38 36 34
40 37 35 33 31 29
36 34 32 30 28 27
12 11 11 10 9.4 8.9
29 27 26 25 24
25 24 23 22 21
21 20 19 18 17
17 16 16 15 14
42 40 38 37 35
36 34 33 31 30
32 30 29 28 27
28 27 25 24 23
25 24 23 22 21
8.5 8.1 7.7 7.4 7.1
26.6 575 131 60.6 24.2 112 64.2 68.8 85.6 139
23.0 497 102 47.3 18.9 77.1 30.6 56.7 40.9 109
29.6 639 82.6 47.8 15.3 64.3 12.3 56.1 16.3 97.5
25.8 557 73.9 42.8 13.7 54.4 8.76 48.5 11.7 86.5
23.6 510 56.4 32.6 10.4 36.2 3.89 33.6 5.19 50.5
7.86 170 33.0 10.5 6.12 11.3 1.61 10.3 2.15
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
19.3 417 73.7 34.1 13.6 47.1 11.5 39.5 15.3 78.5
15.8 341 46.7 21.6 8.64 23.8 2.91 21.8 3.88 34.4
38.9 840 155 89.6 28.7 165 80.5 111 107 183
33.4 721 112 64.7 20.7 101 30.4 80.9 40.5 132
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
17.3
4 - 68
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
C, MC 9
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
C9
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
MC 9
20
15
13.4
25.4
23.9
2 3 4 5 6 7
157 121 91 73 60 52
100 97 73 58 49 42
82 68 54 45 39
157 125 100 84 72
140 120 96 80 69
8 9 10 11 12 13
45 40 36 33 30 28
36 32 29 27 24 22
34 30 27 25 23 21
63 56 50 46 42 39
60 53 48 44 40 37
14 15 16 17 18 19
26 24 23 21 20 19
21 19 18 17 16 15
19 18 17 16 15 14
36 33 31 29 28 26
34 32 30 28 27 25
20 21 22
18 17 16
15 14 13
14 13 12
25 24 23
24 23 22
23.2 501 78.7 48.1 16.2 68.5 16.9 58.4 22.5 101
22.2 480 70.0 42.8 14.4 57.4 11.9 50.3 15.8 89.6
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
16.8 363 78.4 37.8 16.1 59.0 22.2 45.6 29.6 90.2
13.5 292 49.9 24.0 10.3 29.9 5.72 26.5 7.62 51.3
12.5 270 40.8 19.7 8.39 22.1 3.12 20.2 4.17 33.8
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 69
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
C, MC 8
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
C8
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
MC 8
MC 8
MC 8
18.75
13.75
11.5
22.8
21.4
20
18.7
1 2 3 4 5 6
151 149 99 75 60 50
8.5
94 78 59 47 39
68 52 41 34
133 102 81 68
117 97 78 65
124 117 87 70 58
110 83 67 55
56 50 37 30 25
7 8 9 10 11 12
43 37 33 30 27 25
34 29 26 24 21 20
29 26 23 21 19 17
58 51 45 41 37 34
56 49 43 39 35 32
50 44 39 35 32 29
48 42 37 33 30 28
21 19 17 15 14 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
23 21 20 19 18 17
18 17 16 15 14 13
16 15 14 13 12 11
31 29 27 25 24 23
30 28 26 24 23 22
27 25 23 22 21 19
26 24 22 21 20 18
11 11 10 9.3 8.8 8.3
19 20
16 15
12 12
11 10
21 20
20 19
18 17
18 17
7.9 7.5
16.2 350 62.2 40.5 14.4 54.7 14.7 46.9 19.6 87.3,
15.4 333 54.9 35.7 12.7 45.4 10.1 40.0 13.5 77.0
6.91 149 27.8 12.1 6.44 12.9 2.12 11.8 2.82 21.0
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
13.8 298 75.7 41.1 17.5 64.9 34.0 46.8 45.3 98.1
10.9 235 47.1 25.6 10.9 31.9 8.18 27.5 10.9 61.0
9.55 206 34.2 18.6 7.92 19.7 3.13 18.0 4.18 31.6
18.8 406 66.4 45.6 15.4 61.9 17.0 52.8 22.7 95.6
18.0 389 58.3 40.1 13.5 50.9 11.5 44.8 15.4 84.0
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 70
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
C, MC 7–6
Fy = 36 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
C7 12.25
MC 7 9.8
22.7
C6
19.1
13
10.5 73 66 44 33 27 22
1 2 3 4 5 6
85 60 45 36 30
57 51 38 31 26
137 117 87 70 58
96 77 62 51
102 78 52 39 31 26
7 8 9 10 11 12
26 23 20 18 16 15
22 19 17 15 14 13
50 44 39 35 32 29
44 39 34 31 28 26
22 20 17 16 14 13
19 17 15 13 12 11
13 14 15 16
14 13 12 11
12 11 10 9.61
27 25 23 22
24 22 21 19
12 11 10
10 9.49 8.86
8.40 181 42.7 24.7 11.3 32.6 11.1 27.4 14.8 61.5
7.12 154 28.6 16.5 7.56 17.8 3.32 16.3 4.42 30.6
MC 6 8.2
MC 6
MC 6
18
16.3
15.1
12
47 37 28 22 18
88 83 62 50 41
87 73 55 44 37
74 70 52 42 35
72 53 40 32 27
16 14 12 11 10 9.23
35 31 28 25 23 21
31 28 24 22 20 18
30 26 23 21 19 17
23 20 18 16 14 13
8.52 7.91 7.39
19 18 17
17 16 15
16 15 14
12 11 11
11.5 248 44.2 36.2 13.6 49.2 17.5 42.2 23.4 80.6
10.2 220 43.7 35.9 13.5 48.4 17.0 41.6 22.6 79.7
9.69 209 36.9 30.2 11.4 37.5 10.2 33.4 13.6 67.2
7.38 159 36.2 22.7 11.2 32.3 12.2 27.5 16.2 58.9
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
Wt./ft
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
16.2 350 68.4 50.9 18.1 77.2 33.4 61.6 44.5 110
14.3 309 47.9 35.6 12.7 45.2 11.4 39.8 15.3 76.8
7.26 157 51.0 32.0 15.7 51.8 37.2 36.9 49.6 83.1
6.15 133 36.6 23.0 11.3 31.5 13.8 26.0 18.4 59.7
5.13 111 23.3 14.6 7.20 16.0 3.57 14.6 4.76 30.1
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 36 ksi
4 - 71
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
C 5–4–3
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-113 Designation
C5
Wt./ft
9 1 2 3 4 5 6
C3
7.25
5.4
6
5
4.1
63 47 31 24 19 16
37 25 19 15 13
50 30 20 15 12 10
29 24 16 12 9.8 8.1
37 19 12 9.3 7.4 6.2
30 16 11 8.1 6.5 5.4
20 14 9.4 7.0 5.6 4.7
13 12 10 9.4 8.6 7.9
11 9.5 8.4 7.6 6.9 6.3
7.0 6.1 5.4 4.9
5.3
4.6
4.0
1.72 37.2 20.8 22.0 12.8 34.0 50.6 23.8 67.4 63.7
1.50 32.4 15.0 16.0 9.29 21.0 19.2 17.1 25.7 46.1
1.30 28.1 9.91 10.5 6.12 11.2 5.51 10.1 7.34 30.4
8.7 7.6 6.7 6.1
Span (ft)
Fy = 36 ksi
7 8 9 10 11 12
C4 6.7
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
4.36 94.2 31.6 21.9 11.7 32.1 19.7 25.5 26.3 60.0
3.51 75.8 18.5 12.8 6.84 14.3 3.94 13.0 5.25 30.1
2.81 60.7 25.0 19.9 11.6 30.3 25.6 23.4 34.2 57.4
2.26 48.8 14.3 11.4 6.62 13.1 4.83 11.9 6.44 32.8
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 72
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 44
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
W 44
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
335
290
262
230
20 21 22 23 24 25
2420 2310 2210 2110 2030 1940
2050 2030 1940 1850 1780 1700
1850 1810 1730 1660 1590 1520
1650 1570 1500 1430 1380 1320
26 27 28 29 30 31
1870 1800 1740 1680 1620 1570
1640 1580 1520 1470 1420 1370
1470 1410 1360 1310 1270 1230
1270 1220 1180 1140 1100 1060
32 33 34 35 36 38
1520 1470 1430 1390 1350 1280
1330 1290 1250 1220 1180 1120
1190 1150 1120 1090 1060 1000
1030 1000 971 943 917 868
40 42 44 46 48 50
1220 1160 1100 1060 1010 972
1070 1010 968 926 888 852
953 907 866 828 794 762
825 786 750 717 688 660
52 54 56 58 60 62
935 900 868 838 810 784
819 789 761 734 710 687
733 706 680 657 635 615
635 611 589 569 550 532
64 66 68 70 72
759 736 715 694 675
666 645 626 609 592
595 577 560 544 529
516 500 485 471 458
1270 38100 924 216 39.5 302 8.67 277 11.6 330
1100 33000 823 178 35.5 238 7.40 217 9.86 262
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
1620 48600 1212 327 51.0 494 14.7 451 19.6 492
1420 42600 1025 258 43.5 368 10.3 338 13.8 400
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 73
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 40
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation Wt./ft
W 40 431
372
321
297
277
249
199
174*
1360 1300
1340 1330 1250 1180 1120 1070
1370 1310 1260 1200 1160 1110
1240 1180 1130 1090 1040 1000
1010 969 927 888 852 820
1240 1200 1160 1120 1080 1050
1070 1030 996 963 932 903
964 930 898 868 840 814
789 761 735 710 687 666
1140 1100 1070 1040 987 938
1020 988 960 933 884 840
875 850 825 803 760 722
789 766 744 723 685 651
646 627 609 592 561 533
950 907 867 831 798 767
893 852 815 781 750 721
800 764 730 700 672 646
688 657 628 602 578 556
620 592 566 543 521 501
507 484 463 444 426 410
789 761 734 710 687 666
739 713 688 665 644 623
694 670 647 625 605 586
622 600 579 560 542 525
535 516 498 482 466 451
482 465 449 434 420 407
395 381 367 355 344 333
645 626 609 592
605 587 570 554
568 551 536 521
509 494 480 467
438 425 413 401
395 383 372 362
323 313 304 296
1120 33600 797 264 37.5 279 8.16 258 10.9 306
963 28900 684 213 32.5 209 6.25 193 8.33 229
868 26000 679 198 32.5 195 7.21 176 9.62 218
715 21300 670 163 32.5 172 9.37 148 12.5 203
2550 2510
2160 2130
2000 2000
21 22 23 24 25 26
2790 2660 2540 2440 2340 2250
2390 2280 2180 2090 2000 1930
2030 1940 1850 1780 1700 1640
1900 1810 1730 1660 1600 1530
1780 1700 1630 1560 1500 1440
1590 1530 1460 1400 1340 1290
27 28 29 30 31 32
2170 2090 2020 1950 1890 1830
1860 1790 1730 1670 1620 1570
1580 1520 1470 1420 1370 1330
1480 1430 1380 1330 1290 1250
1390 1340 1290 1250 1210 1170
33 34 35 36 38 40
1770 1720 1670 1630 1540 1460
1520 1470 1430 1390 1320 1250
1290 1250 1220 1180 1120 1070
1210 1170 1140 1110 1050 998
42 44 46 48 50 52
1390 1330 1270 1220 1170 1130
1190 1140 1090 1040 1000 963
1010 968 926 888 852 819
54 56 58 60 62 64
1080 1040 1010 975 944 914
928 895 864 835 808 783
66 68 70 72
886 860 836 813
759 737 716 696
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
1950 58500 1493 597 67.0 859 26.7 786 35.6 814
1670 50100 1273 471 58.0 645 20.3 590 27.0 660
Span (ft)
2990 2930
Fy = 50 ksi
15 16 17 18 19 20
215
Properties and Reaction Values 1420 42600 1082 367 50.0 480 15.3 439 20.3 529
1330 39900 1000 356 46.5 415 13.2 380 17.7 458
1250 37500 889 311 41.5 342 9.90 316 13.2 374
*Noncompact shape; Fy = 50 ksi. Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 74
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 40
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 40 331
278
264
235
211
167
149
1370 1300
1350 1300 1220 1150
1300 1280 1190 1120 1050 995
1430 1360 1290 1230 1180 1130
1230 1170 1120 1070 1020 976
1090 1040 989 944 903 865
943 896 853 814 779 746
1210 1170 1120 1080 1040 1010
1090 1040 1010 970 936 905
937 901 868 837 808 781
830 798 769 741 716 692
716 689 663 640 618 597
1090 1060 1030 997 969 942
977 947 918 891 866 842
876 848 823 799 776 754
756 732 710 689 669 651
670 649 629 611 593 577
578 560 543 527 512 498
939 893 850 811 776 744
892 848 807 770 737 706
797 758 721 689 659 631
714 679 646 617 590 566
617 586 558 533 509 488
546 519 494 472 451 433
471 448 426 407 389 373
858 825 794 766 740 715
714 687 661 638 616 595
678 652 628 605 584 565
606 583 561 541 522 505
543 522 503 485 468 453
469 451 434 418 404 391
415 399 384 371 358 346
358 344 332 320 309 299
692 670 650 631 613 596
576 558 541 525 510 496
547 530 514 499 484 471
489 473 459 446 433 421
438 424 411 399 388 377
378 366 355 345 335 325
335 324 315 305 297 288
289 280 271 263 256 249
781 23400 684 213 32.5 209 6.25 193 8.33 229
692 20800 677 198 32.5 191 7.51 172 10.0 216
597 17900 650 177 31.5 164 8.53 143 11.4 192
13 14 15 16 17 18
2690 2680 2520 2380
2210 2100 1980
2070 1990 1880
1780 1680
1590 1510
19 20 21 22 23 24
2260 2150 2040 1950 1870 1790
1880 1790 1700 1620 1550 1490
1780 1700 1610 1540 1470 1410
1590 1520 1440 1380 1320 1260
25 26 27 28 29 30
1720 1650 1590 1530 1480 1430
1430 1370 1320 1280 1230 1190
1360 1300 1260 1210 1170 1130
31 32 33 34 35 36
1380 1340 1300 1260 1230 1190
1150 1120 1080 1050 1020 992
38 40 42 44 46 48
1130 1070 1020 975 933 894
50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72
183
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
1430 42900 1344 505 61.0 709 22.6 648 30.1 703
1190 35700 1106 383 51.0 500 15.8 458 21.1 548
1130 33900 1037 353 48.0 446 13.8 409 18.4 491
1010 30300 889 285 41.5 342 9.90 316 13.2 374
905 27200 797 246 37.5 279 8.19 257 10.9 305
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 75
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 36
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
W 36
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
300
280
260
245
230
1560 1520 1440 1380 1320 1260
1470 1410 1350 1290 1230 1180
19 20 21 22 23 24
1870 1800 1720 1640 1580
1750 1670 1600 1530 1460
1640 1620 1540 1470 1410 1350
25 26 27 28 29 30
1510 1450 1400 1350 1300 1260
1400 1350 1300 1250 1210 1170
1300 1250 1200 1160 1120 1080
1210 1170 1120 1080 1040 1010
1130 1090 1050 1010 976 943
31 32 33 34 35 36
1220 1180 1150 1110 1080 1050
1130 1100 1060 1030 1000 975
1050 1010 982 953 926 900
977 947 918 891 866 842
913 884 857 832 808 786
38 40 42 44 46 48
995 945 900 859 822 788
924 878 836 798 763 731
853 810 771 736 704 675
797 758 721 689 659 631
744 707 674 643 615 589
50 52 54 56 58 60
756 727 700 675 652 630
702 675 650 627 605 585
648 623 600 579 559 540
606 583 561 541 522 505
566 544 524 505 488 472
62 64 66 68 70 72
610 591 573 556 540 525
566 548 532 516 501 488
523 506 491 476 463 450
489 473 459 446 433 421
456 442 429 416 404 393
1010 30300 779 250 40.0 300 11.4 272 15.2 337
943 28300 737 226 38.0 268 10.5 243 14.0 302
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
1260 37800 937 332 47.3 429 14.8 393 19.7 477
1170 35100 873 297 44.3 376 13.1 344 17.4 419
1080 32400 822 269 42.0 333 12.3 303 16.4 373
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 76
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W 36
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation Wt./ft
W 36 256
19 20 21 22 23 24
194
182
170
160
150
135
1740 1650 1560
1640 1560 1470 1390
1510 1440 1350 1280
1420 1350 1270 1200
1330 1250 1180 1110
1260 1250 1170 1100 1040
1210 1160 1090 1030 968
1640 1560 1490 1420 1360 1300
1480 1400 1340 1280 1220 1170
1320 1250 1190 1140 1090 1040
1210 1150 1100 1050 1000 959
1130 1080 1030 979 937 898
1050 1000 954 911 871 835
985 936 891 851 814 780
917 872 830 792 758 726
804 764 727 694 664 636
25 26 27 28 29 30
1250 1200 1160 1110 1080 1040
1120 1080 1040 1000 968 936
1000 961 926 893 862 833
920 885 852 822 793 767
862 828 798 769 743 718
802 771 742 716 691 668
749 720 693 669 646 624
697 670 646 623 601 581
611 587 566 545 527 509
31 32 33 34 35 36
1010 975 945 918 891 867
906 878 851 826 802 780
806 781 757 735 714 694
742 719 697 677 657 639
695 673 653 634 615 598
646 626 607 589 573 557
604 585 567 551 535 520
562 545 528 513 498 484
493 477 463 449 436 424
38 40 42 44 46 48
821 780 743 709 678 650
739 702 669 638 610 585
658 625 595 568 543 521
606 575 548 523 500 479
567 539 513 490 468 449
527 501 477 455 436 418
493 468 446 425 407 390
459 436 415 396 379 363
402 382 364 347 332 318
50 52 54 56 58 60
624 600 578 557 538 520
562 540 520 501 484 468
500 481 463 446 431 417
460 443 426 411 397 384
431 414 399 385 371 359
401 385 371 358 346 334
374 360 347 334 323 312
349 335 323 311 301 291
305 294 283 273 263 255
62 64 66 68 70 72
503 488 473 459 446 433
453 439 425 413 401 390
403 390 379 368 357 347
371 360 349 338 329 320
347 337 326 317 308 299
323 313 304 295 286 278
302 293 284 275 267 260
281 272 264 256 249 242
246 239 231 225 218 212
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
1040 31200 970 315 48.0 446 14.8 409 19.7 471
936 28100 872 272 43.5 367 12.2 336 16.3 406
668 20000 664 170 34.0 212 8.55 191 11.4 240
624 18700 632 157 32.5 191 8.09 171 10.8 217
581 17400 605 146 31.3 173 7.84 154 10.5 198
509 15300 576 127 30.0 149 8.32 129 11.1 176
Span (ft)
1940 1840 1730
210
1150 1090 1020 954 898 848
Fy = 50 ksi
13 14 15 16 17 18
232
Properties and Reaction Values 833 25000 822 240 41.5 318 12.4 288 16.5 358
767 23000 754 209 38.3 271 10.5 245 14.0 305
718 21500 711 193 36.3 242 9.62 219 12.8 273
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 77
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 33
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 33 241
221
W 33 201
169
152
141
130
118
1050 986 932 883 839 799
964 907 857 812 771 734
876 824 778 737 701 667
778 732 692 655 623 593
16 17 18 19 20 21
1530 1480 1410 1340
1420 1350 1280 1220
1300 1290 1220 1160 1100
1180 1110 1050 993 944 899
22 23 24 25 26 27
1280 1220 1170 1130 1080 1040
1170 1120 1070 1030 987 950
1050 1010 965 926 891 858
858 820 786 755 726 699
762 729 699 671 645 621
701 670 643 617 593 571
637 609 584 560 539 519
566 541 519 498 479 461
28 29 30 31 32 33
1010 971 939 909 880 854
916 884 855 827 802 777
827 799 772 747 724 702
674 651 629 609 590 572
599 578 559 541 524 508
551 532 514 497 482 467
500 483 467 452 438 425
445 429 415 402 389 377
34 35 36 37 38 40
829 805 783 761 741 704
754 733 713 693 675 641
681 662 643 626 609 579
555 539 524 510 497 472
493 479 466 453 441 419
454 441 428 417 406 386
412 400 389 379 369 350
366 356 346 336 328 311
42 44 46 48 50 52
671 640 612 587 563 542
611 583 558 534 513 493
551 526 503 483 463 445
449 429 410 393 377 363
399 381 365 349 335 323
367 350 335 321 308 297
334 318 305 292 280 269
296 283 271 259 249 239
54 56 58 60 62 64
522 503 486 470 454 440
475 458 442 428 414 401
429 414 399 386 374 362
349 337 325 315 304 295
311 299 289 280 270 262
286 275 266 257 249 241
259 250 242 234 226 219
231 222 215 208 201 195
66 68 70 72
427 414 402 391
389 377 366 356
351 341 331 322
286 278 270 262
254 247 240 233
234 227 220 214
212 206 200 195
189 183 178 173
514 15400 544 132 30.3 166 7.49 150 9.99 191
467 14000 518 122 29.0 147 7.46 131 9.95 172
415 12500 488 107 27.5 127 7.40 110 9.87 151
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
939 28200 766 227 41.5 323 12.9 293 17.2 362
855 25700 710 200 38.8 278 11.6 251 15.5 316
772 23200 650 173 35.8 234 10.2 211 13.6 267
629 18900 612 173 33.5 218 7.89 201 10.5 244
559 16800 574 149 31.8 187 7.84 170 10.5 213
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 78
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W 30
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
W 30
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
261
235
191
173
1290 1250 1180 1120 1070
1180 1120 1060 1010 961
1080 1070 1010 955 908 864
1150 1100 1060 1010 975 939
1020 977 936 899 864 832
918 878 841 808 777 748
825 789 756 726 698 672
1010 973 941 911 882 855
905 874 845 818 792 768
803 775 749 725 702 681
721 696 673 651 631 612
648 626 605 585 567 550
34 36 38 40 42 44
830 784 743 706 672 642
746 704 667 634 604 576
661 624 591 562 535 511
594 561 531 505 481 459
534 504 478 454 432 413
46 48 50 52 54 56
614 588 565 543 523 504
551 528 507 488 469 453
488 468 449 432 416 401
439 421 404 388 374 361
395 378 363 349 336 324
58 60 62 64 66 68
487 471 455 441 428 415
437 423 409 396 384 373
387 375 362 351 340 330
348 337 326 315 306 297
313 303 293 284 275 267
70 72
403 392
362 352
321 312
288 280
259 252
673 20200 588 172 35.5 235 10.7 213 14.2 269
605 18200 538 154 32.8 197 9.38 178 12.5 228
16 17 18 19 20 21
1590 1570 1490 1410 1340
1400 1330 1270 1210
22 23 24 25 26 27
1280 1230 1180 1130 1090 1050
28 29 30 31 32 33
211
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
941 28200 794 283 46.5 415 16.7 380 22.2 434
845 25400 701 233 41.5 334 13.2 306 17.6 368
749 22500 647 206 38.8 282 12.4 257 16.5 322
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 79
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 30
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 30 148
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72
1080 1070 1000 938 882 833 789 750 714 682 652 625 600 577 556 536 517 500 484 469 455 441 417 395 375 357 341 326 313 300 288 278 268 259 250 242 234 227 221 214 208
132
1010 936 874 819 771 728 690 656 624 596 570 546 524 504 486 468 452 437 423 410 397 386 364 345 328 312 298 285 273 262 252 243 234 226 219 211 205 199 193 187 182
124 953 942 874 816 765 720 680 644 612 583 556 532 510 490 471 453 437 422 408 395 383 371 360 340 322 306 291 278 266 255 245 235 227 219 211 204 197 191 185 180 175 170
116
108
99
90
916 872 810 756 709 667 630 597 567 540 515 493 473 454 436 420 405 391 378 366 354 344 334 315 298 284 270 258 247 236 227 218 210 203 196 189 183 177 172 167 162 158
878 865 798 741 692 649 611 577 546 519 494 472 451 433 415 399 384 371 358 346 335 324 315 305 288 273 260 247 236 226 216 208 200 192 185 179 173 167 162 157 153 148 144
833 780 720 669 624 585 551 520 493 468 446 425 407 390 374 360 347 334 323 312 302 293 284 275 260 246 234 223 213 203 195 187 180 173 167 161 156 151 146 142 138 134 130
749 708 653 606 566 531 499 472 447 425 404 386 369 354 340 327 314 303 293 283 274 265 257 250 236 223 212 202 193 185 177 170 163 157 152 146 142 137 133 129 125 121 118
346 10400 439 106 27.3 126 7.73 111 10.3 152
312 9360 416 93.4 26.0 111 7.66 95.6 10.2 136
283 8490 375 77.1 23.5 90.8 6.24 78.5 8.31 111
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
500 15000 538 163 32.5 205 8.21 189 10.9 232
437 13100 503 135 30.8 174 8.30 157 11.1 201
408 12200 477 123 29.2 156 7.72 140 10.3 181
378 11300 458 115 28.3 141 7.65 126 10.2 166
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 80
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 27
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 27 258
235
194
178
161
146
1270 1250 1180 1120 1060
1140 1110 1050 992 942
1090 1060 1000 945 895 851
983 960 904 853 808 768
895 864 814 768 728 692
1100 1050 1000 961 923 887
1010 965 923 885 850 817
897 856 819 785 754 725
810 773 740 709 680 654
731 698 668 640 614 591
659 629 601 576 553 532
944 911 879 850 823 797
854 824 796 769 744 721
787 759 732 708 685 664
698 673 650 628 608 589
630 608 587 567 549 532
569 549 530 512 495 480
512 494 477 461 446 432
33 34 35 36 37 38
773 750 729 708 689 671
699 679 659 641 624 607
644 625 607 590 574 559
571 554 538 523 509 496
515 500 486 473 460 448
465 452 439 427 415 404
419 407 395 384 374 364
40 42 44 46 48 50
638 607 580 554 531 510
577 549 524 502 481 461
531 506 483 462 443 425
471 449 428 410 393 377
425 405 387 370 354 340
384 366 349 334 320 307
346 329 314 301 288 277
52 54 56 58 60 62
490 472 455 440 425 411
444 427 412 398 385 372
408 393 379 366 354 343
362 349 336 325 314 304
327 315 304 293 284 274
295 284 274 265 256 248
266 256 247 238 231 223
64 66
398 386
360 350
332 322
294 285
266 258
240 233
216 210
567 17000 544 170 36.3 243 12.5 220 16.6 283
512 15400 492 150 33.0 201 10.4 182 13.9 235
461 13800 447 128 30.3 168 8.97 151 12.0 197
15 16 17 18 19 20
1530 1500 1420 1340 1280
1410 1360 1280 1210 1150
21 22 23 24 25 26
1210 1160 1110 1060 1020 981
27 28 29 30 31 32
217
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
850 25500 767 306 49.0 465 19.9 427 26.5 466
769 23100 704 263 45.5 397 17.7 363 23.6 411
708 21200 637 227 41.5 334 14.5 306 19.3 362
628 18800 569 193 37.5 271 12.1 248 16.2 311
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 81
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 27
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
W 27
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
129
102
94
84
840 792 735 686 643
753 704 654 610 572
712 695 642 596 556 521
663 610 563 523 488 458
697 658 624 593 564 539
605 572 542 515 490 468
538 508 482 458 436 416
491 463 439 417 397 379
431 407 385 366 349 333
23 24 25 26 27 28
515 494 474 456 439 423
447 429 412 396 381 368
398 381 366 352 339 327
363 348 334 321 309 298
318 305 293 282 271 261
29 30 31 32 33 34
409 395 382 370 359 349
355 343 332 322 312 303
316 305 295 286 277 269
288 278 269 261 253 245
252 244 236 229 222 215
36 38 40 42 44 46
329 312 296 282 269 258
286 271 257 245 234 224
254 241 229 218 208 199
232 219 209 199 190 181
203 193 183 174 166 159
48 50 52 54 56 58
247 237 228 219 212 204
214 206 198 191 184 177
191 183 176 169 163 158
174 167 160 154 149 144
153 146 141 136 131 126
60 62 64 66
198 191 185 180
172 166 161 156
153 148 143 139
139 135 130 126
122 118 114 111
278 8340 356 88.0 24.5 107 6.35 95.4 8.46 127
244 7320 332 79.1 23.0 90.0 6.16 79.0 8.21 110
11 12 13 14 15 16
910 846 790 741
17 18 19 20 21 22
114
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
395 11900 455 138 30.5 180 8.08 165 10.8 206
343 10300 420 116 28.5 150 7.89 135 10.5 175
305 9150 377 101 25.8 121 6.57 110 8.76 143
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 82
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W 24
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation Wt./ft
W 24 131
117
104
952 936 878 826 780
868 836 784 738 697
800 793 740 694 653 617
721 701 654 613 577 545
650 619 578 542 510 482
807 767 730 697 667 639
739 702 669 638 610 585
660 627 597 570 545 523
584 555 529 505 483 463
516 491 467 446 427 409
456 434 413 394 377 361
671 645 621 599 578 559
613 590 568 548 529 511
562 540 520 501 484 468
502 482 464 448 432 418
444 427 411 396 383 370
392 377 363 350 338 327
347 333 321 310 299 289
586 568 551 535 519 505
541 524 508 493 479 466
495 479 465 451 438 426
453 439 425 413 401 390
405 392 380 369 358 348
358 347 336 326 317 308
316 307 297 289 280 273
280 271 263 255 248 241
534 507 483 461 441 423
478 455 433 413 395 379
441 419 399 381 365 349
403 383 365 348 333 319
369 351 334 319 305 293
330 314 299 285 273 261
292 278 264 252 241 231
258 245 234 223 213 204
228 217 206 197 188 181
50 52 54 56 58 60
406 390 376 362 350 338
364 350 337 325 313 303
335 323 311 299 289 280
307 295 284 274 264 256
281 270 260 251 242 234
251 241 232 224 216 209
222 213 206 198 191 185
196 189 182 175 169 164
173 167 161 155 149 145
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
676 20300 674 300 48.0 446 21.3 409 28.4 456
606 18200 604 258 43.5 367 17.6 336 23.5 400
370 11100 400 132 30.3 166 10.2 150 13.6 199
327 9810 360 112 27.5 136 8.73 121 11.6 164
289 8670 325 93.8 25.0 110 7.49 98.4 9.99 135
Span (ft)
146
Fy = 50 ksi
229
207
192
176
13 14 15 16 17 18
1350 1270 1190 1130
1210 1140 1070 1010
1110 1050 986 932
1020 1020 958 902 852
19 20 21 22 23 24
1070 1010 966 922 882 845
957 909 866 826 790 758
883 839 799 762 729 699
25 26 27 28 29 30
811 780 751 724 699 676
727 699 673 649 627 606
31 32 33 34 35 36
654 634 615 596 579 563
38 40 42 44 46 48
162
Properties and Reaction Values 559 16800 557 228 40.5 318 15.5 291 20.6 359
511 15300 511 199 37.5 271 13.5 248 18.0 315
468 14000 476 176 35.3 236 12.4 215 16.6 276
418 12500 434 152 32.5 197 11.0 179 14.7 233
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 83
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 24
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 24 103
94
84
W 24 76
68
62
55
551 510 459 417 383
503 503 447 402 365 335
7 8 9 10 11 12
729 700
676 635
612 611 560
568 545 500
532 531 483 443
13 14 15 16 17 18
646 600 560 525 494 467
586 544 508 476 448 423
517 480 448 420 395 373
462 429 400 375 353 333
408 379 354 332 312 295
353 328 306 287 270 255
309 287 268 251 236 223
19 20 21 22 23 24
442 420 400 382 365 350
401 381 363 346 331 318
354 336 320 305 292 280
316 300 286 273 261 250
279 266 253 241 231 221
242 230 219 209 200 191
212 201 191 183 175 168
25 26 27 28 29 30
336 323 311 300 290 280
305 293 282 272 263 254
269 258 249 240 232 224
240 231 222 214 207 200
212 204 197 190 183 177
184 177 170 164 158 153
161 155 149 144 139 134
31 32 33 34 35 36
271 263 255 247 240 233
246 238 231 224 218 212
217 210 204 198 192 187
194 188 182 176 171 167
171 166 161 156 152 148
148 143 139 135 131 128
130 126 122 118 115 112
38 40 42 44 46 48
221 210 200 191 183 175
201 191 181 173 166 159
177 168 160 153 146 140
158 150 143 136 130 125
140 133 126 121 115 111
121 115 109 104 100 96
106 101 96 91 87 84
50 52 54 56 58 60
168 162 156 150 145 140
152 147 141 136 131 127
134 129 124 120 116 112
120 115 111 107 103
106 102 98 95 92
92 88 85 82 79
80 77 74 72 69
177 5310 266 71.3 20.8 73.7 5.57 64.9 7.43 91.8
153 4590 276 73.9 21.5 78.1 6.14 68.4 8.19 98.1
134 4020 251 64.8 19.8 63.6 5.60 54.8 7.47 81.8
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
280 8400 364 120 27.5 146 7.49 133 9.98 170
254 7620 338 105 25.8 125 6.95 113 9.26 147
224 6720 306 91.8 23.5 102 6.05 92.2 8.07 122
200 6000 284 79.1 22.0 86.8 5.67 77.8 7.55 105
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 84
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 21
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 21 201
182
166
147
132
122
111
101
766 714 666 624 588 555
702 658 614 576 542 512
639 598 558 523 492 465
577 542 506 474 446 422
13 14 15 16 17 18
1130 1060 994 935 883
1020 952 893 840 793
910 864 810 762 720
858 799 746 699 658 622
19 20 21 22 23 24
837 795 757 723 691 663
752 714 680 649 621 595
682 648 617 589 563 540
589 560 533 509 487 466
526 500 476 454 434 416
485 461 439 419 400 384
441 419 399 380 364 349
399 380 361 345 330 316
25 26 27 28 29 30
636 612 589 568 548 530
571 549 529 510 492 476
518 498 480 463 447 432
448 430 414 400 386 373
400 384 370 357 344 333
368 354 341 329 318 307
335 322 310 299 289 279
304 292 281 271 262 253
31 32 33 34 35 36
513 497 482 468 454 442
461 446 433 420 408 397
418 405 393 381 370 360
361 350 339 329 320 311
322 312 303 294 285 278
297 288 279 271 263 256
270 262 254 246 239 233
245 237 230 223 217 211
38 40 42 44 46 48
418 398 379 361 346 331
376 357 340 325 310 298
341 324 309 295 282 270
294 280 266 254 243 233
263 250 238 227 217 208
242 230 219 209 200 192
220 209 199 190 182 174
200 190 181 173 165 158
50 52
318 306
286 275
259 249
224 215
200 192
184 177
167 161
152 146
307 9210 351 127 30.0 164 11.2 148 15.0 201
279 8370 319 112 27.5 138 9.56 124 12.8 169
253 7590 288 97.7 25.0 114 7.91 103 10.6 140
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
530 15900 566 270 45.5 400 21.7 366 29.0 418
476 14300 509 233 41.5 332 18.4 304 24.5 368
432 13000 455 199 37.5 273 14.9 251 19.9 321
373 11200 429 169 36.0 236 15.9 213 21.2 286
333 9990 383 147 32.5 192 13.1 173 17.5 235
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 85
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 21
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 21 93
83
73
W 21 68
62
57
50
44 390 358 318 286 260 239
7 8 9 10 11 12
677 663 603 553
596 588 535 490
522 516 469 430
491 480 436 400
453 432 393 360
461 430 387 352 323
427 413 367 330 300 275
13 14 15 16 17 18
510 474 442 414 390 368
452 420 392 368 346 327
397 369 344 323 304 287
369 343 320 300 282 267
332 309 288 270 254 240
298 276 258 242 228 215
254 236 220 206 194 183
220 204 191 179 168 159
19 20 21 22 23 24
349 332 316 301 288 276
309 294 280 267 256 245
272 258 246 235 224 215
253 240 229 218 209 200
227 216 206 196 188 180
204 194 184 176 168 161
174 165 157 150 143 138
151 143 136 130 124 119
25 26 27 28 29 30
265 255 246 237 229 221
235 226 218 210 203 196
206 198 191 184 178 172
192 185 178 171 166 160
173 166 160 154 149 144
155 149 143 138 133 129
132 127 122 118 114 110
114 110 106 102 99 95
31 32 33 34 35 36
214 207 201 195 189 184
190 184 178 173 168 163
166 161 156 152 147 143
155 150 145 141 137 133
139 135 131 127 123 120
125 121 117 114 111 108
106 103 100 97 94 92
92 89 87 84 82 80
38 40 42 44 46 48
174 166 158 151 144 138
155 147 140 134 128 123
136 129 123 117 112 108
126 120 114 109 104 100
114 108 103 98 94 90
102 97 92 88 84 81
87 83 79 75 72 69
75 72 68 65 62 60
50 52
133 128
118 113
103 99
96 92
86 83
77 74
66 63
57
129 3870 230 69.6 20.3 74.9 5.25 67.6 7.00 92.0
110 3300 214 62.3 19.0 61.8 5.33 54.4 7.10 79.1
95.4 2860 195 52.0 17.5 50.1 4.99 43.2 6.65 66.3
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
221 6630 339 122 29.0 154 10.5 138 14.0 188
196 5880 298 101 25.8 122 8.26 110 11.0 149
172 5160 261 85.3 22.8 95.2 6.48 86.0 8.64 116
160 4800 245 77.3 21.5 84.2 5.94 75.8 7.92 103
144 4320 227 68.8 20.0 71.5 5.36 64.0 7.15 89.0
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 86
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W 18
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 18 192
175
158
W 18 143
130
119
106
97
86
76
597 575 531 493 460 431
537 528 487 452 422 396
477 465 429 399 372 349
418 408 376 349 326 306
11 12 13 14 15 16
1050 1020 947 884 829
963 918 853 796 746
863 822 763 712 668
768 743 690 644 604
696 672 624 582 546
671 653 602 559 522 489
17 18 19 20 21 22
780 737 698 663 631 603
702 663 628 597 569 543
628 593 562 534 509 485
568 537 508 483 460 439
514 485 459 437 416 397
461 435 412 392 373 356
406 383 363 345 329 314
372 352 333 317 301 288
328 310 294 279 266 254
288 272 257 245 233 222
23 24 25 26 27 28
577 553 530 510 491 474
519 498 478 459 442 426
464 445 427 411 396 381
420 403 386 372 358 345
380 364 349 336 323 312
340 326 313 301 290 280
300 288 276 265 256 246
275 264 253 243 234 226
243 233 223 215 207 199
213 204 196 188 181 175
29 30 31 32 33 34
457 442 428 414 402 390
412 398 385 373 362 351
368 356 345 334 324 314
333 322 312 302 293 284
301 291 282 273 265 257
270 261 253 245 237 230
238 230 223 216 209 203
218 211 204 198 192 186
192 186 180 174 169 164
169 163 158 153 148 144
35 36 37 38 39 40
379 368 358 349 340 332
341 332 323 314 306 299
305 297 289 281 274 267
276 268 261 254 248 242
249 243 236 230 224 218
224 218 212 206 201 196
197 192 186 182 177 173
181 176 171 167 162 158
159 155 151 147 143 140
140 136 132 129 125 122
42 44
316 301
284 271
254 243
230 220
208 198
186 178
164 157
151 144
133 127
116 111
442 13300 527 293 48.0 449 26.9 412 35.8 449
398 11900 482 250 44.5 382 23.9 350 31.9 395
230 6900 298 120 29.5 158 12.6 143 16.8 199
211 6330 269 104 26.8 132 10.2 119 13.7 165
186 5580 238 86.3 24.0 105 8.45 94.9 11.3 133
163 4890 209 73.0 21.3 82.4 6.71 74.3 8.94 104
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
356 10700 431 215 40.5 315 20.2 289 27.0 347
322 9660 384 183 36.5 258 16.4 237 21.8 301
291 8730 348 157 33.5 217 14.1 199 18.8 262
261 7830 335 143 32.8 197 15.1 178 20.2 246
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 87
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 18
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 18 71
65
6 7 8 9 10 11
494 483 435 395
446 443 399 363
12 13 14 15 16 17
363 335 311 290 272 256
18 19 20 21 22 23
60
W 18 55
50
46
40
35
409 369 335
381 373 336 305
345 337 303 275
351 340 302 272 247
304 294 261 235 214
287 285 249 222 200 181
333 307 285 266 249 235
308 284 264 246 231 217
280 258 240 224 210 198
253 233 216 202 189 178
227 209 194 181 170 160
196 181 168 157 147 138
166 153 143 133 125 117
242 229 218 207 198 189
222 210 200 190 181 173
205 194 185 176 168 160
187 177 168 160 153 146
168 159 152 144 138 132
151 143 136 130 124 118
131 124 118 112 107 102
111 105 100 95 91 87
24 25 26 27 28 29
181 174 167 161 155 150
166 160 153 148 143 138
154 148 142 137 132 127
140 134 129 124 120 116
126 121 117 112 108 104
113 109 105 101 97 94
98 94 90 87 84 81
83 80 77 74 71 69
30 31 32 33 34 35
145 140 136 132 128 124
133 129 125 121 117 114
123 119 115 112 109 105
112 108 105 102 99 96
101 98 95 92 89 87
91 88 85 82 80 78
78 76 74 71 69 67
67 64 62 60 59 57
36 38 40 42 44
121 114 109 104 99
111 105 100 95 91
103 97 92 88 84
93 88 84 80 76
84 80 76 72 69
76 72 68 65 62
65 62 59 56 53
55 53 50 48 45
90.7 2720 176 56.3 18.0 60.6 4.62 55.0 6.16 75.6
78.4 2350 152 46.8 15.8 46.2 3.60 41.9 4.80 57.9
66.5 2000 143 42.2 15.0 38.6 3.88 34.0 5.18 51.3
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
145 4350 247 92.8 24.8 113 8.77 102 11.7 142
133 3990 223 80.9 22.5 94.3 7.16 85.5 9.55 118
123 3690 204 71.3 20.8 80.4 6.10 73.0 8.13 100
112 3360 191 64.0 19.5 69.7 5.62 62.9 7.50 88.0
101 3030 172 55.5 17.8 57.6 4.72 51.9 6.29 72.9
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 88
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 16
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 16 100
89
77
6 7 8 9 10 11
536
475
406
12 13 14 15 16 17
495 457 424 396 371 349
438 404 375 350 328 309
18 19 20 21 22 23
330 313 297 283 270 258
24 25 26 27 28 29
W 16 67
57
50
45
W 16 40
36
31
26 212 189 166 147 133 121
348
382 350 315 286
334 307 276 251
301 274 247 224
264 243 219 199
253 240 213 192 175
236 231 203 180 162 147
375 346 321 300 281 265
325 300 279 260 244 229
263 242 225 210 197 185
230 212 197 184 173 162
206 190 176 165 154 145
182 168 156 146 137 129
160 148 137 128 120 113
135 125 116 108 101 95
111 102 95 88 83 78
292 276 263 250 239 228
250 237 225 214 205 196
217 205 195 186 177 170
175 166 158 150 143 137
153 145 138 131 125 120
137 130 123 118 112 107
122 115 109 104 99 95
107 101 96 91 87 83
90 85 81 77 74 70
74 70 66 63 60 58
248 238 228 220 212 205
219 210 202 194 188 181
188 180 173 167 161 155
163 156 150 144 139 134
131 126 121 117 113 109
115 110 106 102 99 95
103 99 95 91 88 85
91 87 84 81 78 75
80 77 74 71 69 66
68 65 62 60 58 56
55 53 51 49 47 46
30 31 32 33 34 35
198 192 186 180 175 170
175 169 164 159 154 150
150 145 141 136 132 129
130 126 122 118 115 111
105 102 98 95 93 90
92 89 86 84 81 79
82 80 77 75 73 71
73 71 68 66 64 62
64 62 60 58 56 55
54 52 51 49 48 46
44 43 41 40 39 38
36 38 40
165 156 149
146 138 131
125 118 113
108 103 98
88 83 79
77 73 69
69 65 62
61 58 55
53 51
45 43
37 35
198 5940 268 123 29.2 160 13.0 145 17.3 202
175 5250 237 103 26.2 128 10.7 116 14.2 163
72.9 2190 132 45.3 15.3 43.2 3.80 39.1 5.06 55.6
64.0 1920 126 41.5 14.7 37.9 4.07 33.6 5.43 51.2
54.0 1620 118 38.7 13.8 34.5 3.22 31.1 4.29 45.0
44.2 1330 106 33.2 12.5 26.5 3.12 23.2 4.16 36.7
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
150 4500 203 81.8 22.8 96.5 8.12 87.5 10.8 123
130 3900 174 67.9 19.8 73.0 6.14 66.3 8.19 93.0
105 3150 191 73.9 21.5 86.0 7.32 78.0 9.76 110
92.0 2760 167 62.3 19.0 67.1 5.80 60.8 7.73 85.9
82.3 2470 150 53.9 17.3 54.9 4.87 49.7 6.50 70.8
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 89
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 14
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation Wt./ft
W 14 132
120
109
W 14 99*
90*
82
74
68
61
344 344 315 291 270 252
315 314 288 265 246 230
281 278 255 235 219 204
461 454 424
406 384
371 370 345
333 329 307
16 17 18 19 20 21
439 413 390 369 351 334
398 374 353 335 318 303
360 339 320 303 288 274
323 304 287 272 259 246
288 271 256 243 230 219
261 245 232 219 209 199
236 222 210 199 189 180
216 203 192 182 173 164
191 180 170 161 153 146
22 23 24 25 26 27
319 305 293 281 270 260
289 277 265 254 245 236
262 250 240 230 222 213
235 225 216 207 199 192
210 200 192 184 177 171
190 181 174 167 160 154
172 164 158 151 145 140
157 150 144 138 133 128
139 133 128 122 118 113
28 29 30 31 32 33
251 242 234 226 219 213
227 219 212 205 199 193
206 199 192 186 180 175
185 178 172 167 162 157
165 159 154 149 144 140
149 144 139 135 130 126
135 130 126 122 118 115
123 119 115 111 108 105
109 106 102 99 96 93
34
206
187
169
152
136
123
111
101
90
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
234 7020 255 136 32.3 190 19.2 171 25.6 241
212 6360 231 120 29.5 158 16.3 143 21.8 213
126 3780 172 87.9 22.5 96.5 8.86 88.1 11.8 126
115 3450 157 77.8 20.8 81.8 7.65 74.6 10.2 108
102 3060 141 67.4 18.8 66.5 6.37 60.6 8.49 88.2
Span (ft)
511 501 468
394 379 348 321 298 278
Fy = 50 ksi
10 11 12 13 14 15
Properties and Reaction Values 192 5760 203 103 26.2 127 12.7 115 16.9 170
173 5170 185 87.1 24.3 108 11.2 97.0 14.9 145
157 4610 167 75.6 22.0 88.7 9.26 80.0 12.3 120
139 4170 197 104 25.5 121 11.7 110 15.6 161
*Noncompact shape; Fy = 50 ksi. Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 90
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 14
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 14 53
48
5 6 7 8 9 10
278 261
253 235
11 12 13 14 15 16
238 218 201 187 174 163
17 18 19 20 21 22
W 14 43
38
34
W 14 30
26
22
225 209
236 231 205 185
215 205 182 164
202 177 158 142
192 172 151 134 121
171 166 142 125 111 100
214 196 181 168 157 147
190 174 161 149 139 131
168 154 142 132 123 115
149 137 126 117 109 102
129 118 109 101 95 89
110 101 93 86 80 75
91 83 77 71 66 62
154 145 138 131 124 119
138 131 124 118 112 107
123 116 110 104 99 95
109 103 97 92 88 84
96 91 86 82 78 74
83 79 75 71 68 65
71 67 63 60 57 55
59 55 52 50 47 45
23 24 25 26 27 28
114 109 105 101 97 93
102 98 94 90 87 84
91 87 84 80 77 75
80 77 74 71 68 66
71 68 66 63 61 59
62 59 57 55 53 51
52 50 48 46 45 43
43 42 40 38 37 36
29 30 31 32 33 34
90 87 84 82 79 77
81 78 76 74 71 69
72 70 67 65 63 61
64 62 60 58 56 54
56 55 53 51 50 48
49 47 46 44 43 42
42 40 39 38 37 35
34 33 32 31 30 29
47.3 1420 101 31.6 13.5 31.4 4.00 27.7 5.33 45.0
40.2 1210 95.8 29.9 12.8 30.1 3.07 27.2 4.09 40.6
33.2 996 85.3 25.2 11.5 23.0 2.86 20.4 3.81 32.8
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
87.1 2610 139 66.5 18.5 65.9 5.96 60.4 7.95 86.2
78.4 2350 127 58.4 17.0 55.1 5.18 50.4 6.91 72.8
69.6 2090 112 50.0 15.3 44.2 4.24 40.4 5.65 58.7
61.5 1850 118 41.2 15.5 44.7 4.44 40.5 5.92 59.7
54.6 1640 108 35.6 14.3 37.0 3.94 33.3 5.25 50.4
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 91
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 12
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation Wt./ft
W 12 120
106
96
87
W 12 79
72
65*
58
53 225 212 195 180 167 156
425 410 378 351 328
377 368 339 315 294
348 330 305 283 264
314 298 275 255 238
284 270 249 231 216
255 238 220 204 191
16 17 18 19 20 21
349 328 310 294 279 266
308 289 273 259 246 234
276 259 245 232 221 210
248 233 220 208 198 189
223 210 198 188 179 170
203 191 180 171 162 154
179 168 159 151 143 136
162 152 144 136 130 123
146 137 130 123 117 111
22 23 24 25 26 27
254 243 233 223 215 207
224 214 205 197 189 182
200 192 184 176 170 163
180 172 165 158 152 147
162 155 149 143 137 132
147 141 135 130 125 120
130 124 119 114 110 106
118 113 108 104 100 96
106 102 97 93 90 87
28 29 30
199 192 186
176 170 164
158 152 147
141 137 132
128 123 119
116 112 108
102 99 95
93 89 86
83 81 78
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
186 5580 252 161 35.5 227 26.7 203 35.6 276
164 4920 212 129 30.5 171 19.2 154 25.7 228
96.8 2860 128 64.0 19.5 68.3 8.75 61.2 11.7 99.2
86.4 2590 118 61.9 18.0 62.3 6.47 57.1 8.63 85.1
77.9 2340 112 53.9 17.3 55.4 6.41 50.3 8.54 78.0
Span (ft)
503 465 429 399 372
237 236 216 199 185 173
Fy = 50 ksi
10 11 12 13 14 15
Properties and Reaction Values 147 4410 189 112 27.5 140 15.7 126 21.0 194
132 3960 174 96.6 25.8 120 14.6 108 19.4 171
119 3570 157 84.5 23.5 99.6 12.3 89.4 16.5 143
108 3240 142 73.9 21.5 83.2 10.5 74.7 14.0 120
*Indicates noncompact shape; Fy = 50 ksi. Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 92
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 12
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 12 50
45
4 5 6 7 8 9
244 241
218 216
10 11 12 13 14 15
217 197 181 167 155 145
16 17 18 19 20 21
W 12 40
35
30
W 12 26
22
19
16
14
154 148 124 106 93 82
142 121 101 86 75 67
129 104 87 75 65 58
190
203 192 171
173 162 144
152 140 124
173 147 126 110 98
194 176 162 149 139 129
173 157 144 133 123 115
154 140 128 118 110 102
129 118 108 99 92 86
112 101 93 86 80 74
88 80 73 68 63 59
74 67 62 57 53 49
60 55 50 46 43 40
52 47 44 40 37 35
136 128 121 114 109 103
121 114 108 102 97 92
108 101 96 91 86 82
96 90 85 81 77 73
81 76 72 68 65 62
70 66 62 59 56 53
55 52 49 46 44 42
46 44 41 39 37 35
38 35 34 32 30 29
33 31 29 27 26 25
22 23 24 25 26 27
99 94 91 87 84 80
88 84 81 78 75 72
78 75 72 69 66 64
70 67 64 61 59 57
59 56 54 52 50 48
51 49 47 45 43 41
40 38 37 35 34 33
34 32 31 30 29 27
27 26 25 24 23 22
24 23 22 21 20 19
28 29 30
78 75 72
69 67 65
62 59 51
55 53 43
46 45 37
40 38 29
31 30 25
26 26
22 21
19 18
72.4 2170 122 63.6 18.5 64.9 7.02 59.2 9.37 89.7
64.7 1940 109 52.3 16.8 53.0 5.87 48.3 7.82 73.7
29.3 879 86.4 28.4 13.0 31.2 3.63 28.2 4.85 43.9
24.7 741 77.2 23.9 11.8 24.3 3.30 21.6 4.40 35.9
20.1 603 71.2 20.6 11.0 19.2 3.63 16.3 4.83 32.0
17.4 522 64.3 17.2 10.0 15.3 3.23 12.7 4.31 26.7
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
57.5 1730 95.1 46.1 14.7 41.5 4.52 37.9 6.02 57.4
51.2 1540 101 37.5 15.0 42.7 4.49 39.0 5.99 58.5
43.1 1290 86.6 30.5 13.0 31.7 3.50 28.8 4.67 44.0
37.2 1120 75.9 25.2 11.5 24.5 2.83 22.2 3.78 34.5
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 93
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 10
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
W 10 112
100
88
77
68
60
54
49
9 10 11 12 13 14
463 441 401 368 339 315
408 390 355 325 300 279
354 339 308 283 261 242
303 293 266 244 225 209
264 256 233 213 197 183
232 224 203 187 172 160
202 200 182 167 154 143
183 181 165 151 139 129
15 16 17 18 19 20
294 276 259 245 232 221
260 244 229 217 205 195
226 212 199 188 178 170
195 183 172 163 154 146
171 160 151 142 135 128
149 140 132 124 118 112
133 125 118 111 105 100
121 113 107 101 95 91
21 22 23 24
210 200 192 184
186 177 170 163
161 154 147 141
139 133 127 122
122 116 111 107
107 102 97 93
95 91 87 83
86 82 79 76
74.6 2240 116 68.9 21.0 80.9 11.5 73.1 15.4 123
66.6 2000 101 57.8 18.5 63.6 8.83 57.7 11.8 96.0
60.4 1810 91.6 50.5 17.0 53.5 7.61 48.4 10.1 81.4
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
147 4410 232 177 37.8 265 32.8 240 43.7 300
130 3900 204 149 34.0 214 27.4 194 36.5 259
113 3390 177 123 30.3 169 22.3 153 29.8 221
97.6 2930 152 99.4 26.5 130 17.5 117 23.3 185
85.3 2560 132 80.8 23.5 102 14.0 92.2 18.7 153
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of φR (N = 31⁄4) in boldface exceed maximum web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 94
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 10
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
W 10 45
3 4 5 6 7 8
191
9 10 11 12 13 14
39
W 10 33
30
26
W 10 22
19
17
15
12* 101 94 75 63 54 47
138 130 108 93 81
131 112 94 80 70
124 120 96 80 69 60
169
152 146
170 157 137
145 134 117
132 130 111 98
183 165 150 137 127 118
156 140 128 117 108 100
129 116 106 97 90 83
122 110 100 91 84 78
104 94 85 78 72 67
87 78 71 65 60 56
72 65 59 54 50 46
62 56 51 47 43 40
53 48 44 40 37 34
42 38 34 31 29 27
15 16 17 18 19 20
110 103 97 92 87 82
94 88 83 78 74 70
78 73 68 65 61 58
73 69 65 61 58 55
63 59 55 52 49 47
52 49 46 43 41 39
43 41 38 36 34 32
37 35 33 31 30 28
32 30 28 27 25 24
25 23 22 21 20 19
21 22 23 24
78 75 72 69
67 64 61 59
55 53 51 49
52 50 48 46
45 43 41 39
37 35 34 33
31 29 28 27
27 26 24 23
23 22 21 20
18 17 16 16
54.9 1650 95.4 54.7 17.5 58.8 7.41 53.8 9.88 85.9
46.8 1400 84.4 44.3 15.8 46.4 6.43 42.2 8.58 70.0
21.6 648 69.1 25.4 12.5 28.3 4.18 25.5 5.57 43.6
18.7 561 65.5 22.5 12.0 24.4 4.48 21.3 5.98 40.8
16.0 480 62.0 19.8 11.5 20.7 4.88 17.4 6.51 38.6
12.6 376 50.6 14.8 9.50 13.7 3.58 11.3 4.77 26.8
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
38.8 1160 76.2 38.5 14.5 37.1 6.23 33.1 8.31 60.1
36.6 1100 84.8 35.2 15.0 42.3 5.47 38.5 7.29 62.2
31.3 939 72.5 28.4 13.0 31.7 4.18 28.8 5.58 47.0
26.0 780 65.9 22.5 12.0 25.4 4.08 22.7 5.45 40.4
*Indicates noncompact shape; Fy = 50 ksi. Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 95
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W8
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
W8 67
58
48
7 8 9 10 11 12
277 263 234 211 191 175
40
35
31
241 224 199 179 163 150
184 163 147 134 123
160 149 133 119 109 100
136 130 116 104 95 87
123 114 101 91 83 76
13 14 15 16 17 18
162 150 140 132 124 117
138 128 120 112 106 100
113 105 98 92 86 82
92 85 80 75 70 66
80 74 69 65 61 58
70 65 61 57 54 51
19 20
111 105
94 90
77 74
63 60
55 52
48 46
39.8 1190 80.2 47.8 18.0 58.3 10.9 52.3 14.6 99.6
34.7 1040 68.0 38.8 15.5 43.8 8.02 39.5 10.7 74.2
30.4 912 61.6 33.4 14.3 36.2 7.20 32.3 9.60 63.5
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
70.2 2110 139 102 28.5 150 23.8 136 31.7 195
59.8 1790 120 83.7 25.5 118 20.2 106 27.0 167
49.0 1470 91.8 59.4 20.0 75.5 11.9 68.8 15.9 120
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 96
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W8
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
W8
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
28
W8 24
21
W8 18
15
13
10*
99 86 68 57 49 43
72 66 53 44 38 33
3 4 5 6 7 8
124 117 102
105 99 87
112 102 87 77
101 85 73 64
107 102 82 68 58 51
9 10 11 12 13 14
91 82 74 68 63 58
77 70 63 58 54 50
68 61 56 51 47 44
57 51 46 43 39 36
45 41 37 34 31 29
38 34 31 29 26 24
29 26 24 22 20 19
15 16 17 18 19 20
54 51 48 45 43 41
46 44 41 39 37 31
41 38 36 34 32 26
34 32 30 28 27 20
27 26 24 23 21
23 21 20 19 18
18 16 16 15 14
13.6 408 53.6 23.0 12.3 24.5 6.23 21.2 8.30 48.2
11.4 342 49.6 19.8 11.5 20.1 6.46 16.6 8.61 44.6
8.87 264 36.2 13.3 8.50 11.4 3.29 9.72 4.38 24.0
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
27.2 816 62.0 33.4 14.3 37.4 6.68 33.8 8.91 62.8
23.2 696 52.5 26.8 12.3 27.7 5.02 25.0 6.69 46.7
20.4 612 55.9 25.4 12.5 28.5 5.10 25.7 6.81 47.8
17.0 510 50.5 21.6 11.5 22.9 4.90 20.2 6.53 41.4
*Indicates noncompact shape; Fy = 50 ksi. Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 97
BEAMS W Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
W 6–5–4
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation Wt./ft
W6 25
2 3 4 5 6 7
110 95 81
8 9 10 11 12 13
20
W6 15*
16
W5
12
9
75 62 50 42 36
54 47 37 31 27
71 63 57 52 47 44
56 50 45 41 37 34
38 34 31 28 26 24
44 39 35 32 29 27
31 28 25 23 21 19
23 21 19 17 16 14
14
41
32
22
25
18
13
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
18.9 567 55.1 32.5 16.0 44.0 12.2 38.8 16.3 84.5
14.9 447 43.5 24.4 13.0 28.9 8.40 25.4 11.2 61.8
W4 16
13
75 70 58 50
65 58 48 41
63 63 47 38 31 27
44 39 35 32 29
36 32 29 26 24
24 21 19
11.6 348 37.5 27.4 13.5 33.2 9.62 29.9 12.8 71.3
9.59 288 32.5 22.5 12.0 25.4 8.29 22.7 11.1 58.6
6.28 188 31.4 24.1 14.0 31.4 16.5 26.8 22.1 69.6
Span (ft)
88 88 70 59 50
Fy = 50 ksi
87 75 64
74 62 51 44
19
Properties and Reaction Values 10.8 308 37.2 18.0 11.5 20.3 8.45 16.9 11.3 53.5
11.7 351 44.1 24.4 13.0 30.4 7.48 27.3 9.97 59.7
8.30 249 37.4 18.0 11.5 21.0 7.80 17.9 10.4 51.7
6.23 187 27.1 12.0 8.50 11.7 4.19 10.1 5.59 28.2
*Indicates noncompact shape; Fy = 50 ksi. Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 98
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
S 24–20
BEAMS S Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation Wt./ft
S 24 121
12 13 14 15 16 17
90
S 20 80
96
S 20 86
75
66
723 686 610 549 499
686 656 574 510 459 417
545 525 467 420 382
820 761
966 900 800 720 655
810 740 666 605
648 612 556
765 706 656 612 574 540
698 644 598 558 523 492
600 554 514 480 450 424
555 512 476 444 416 392
510 471 437 408 383 360
495 457 424 396 371 349
458 422 392 366 343 323
383 353 328 306 287 270
350 323 300 280 263 247
18 19 20 21 22 23
510 483 459 437 417 399
465 441 419 399 380 364
400 379 360 343 327 313
370 351 333 317 303 290
340 322 306 291 278 266
330 313 297 283 270 258
305 289 275 261 250 239
255 242 230 219 209 200
233 221 210 200 191 183
24 25 26 27 28 29
383 367 353 340 328 317
349 335 322 310 299 289
300 288 277 267 257 248
278 266 256 247 238 230
255 245 235 227 219 211
248 238 228 220 212 205
229 220 211 203 196 189
191 184 177 170 164 158
175 168 162 156 150 145
30 32 34 36 38 40
306 287 270 255 242 230
279 262 246 233 220 209
240 225 212 200 189 180
222 208 196 185 175 167
204 191 180 170 161 153
198 186 175 165 156 149
183 172 161 153 144 137
153 143 135 128 121 115
140 131 124 117 111 105
42 44 46 48 50 52
219 209 200 191 184 177
199 190 182 174 167 161
171 164 157 150 144 138
159 151 145 139 133 128
146 139 133 128 122 118
141 135 129 124 119
131 125 119 114 110
109 104 100 96 92
100 95 91 88 84
54 56 58 60
170 164 158 153
155 149 144 140
133 129 124 120
123 119 115 111
113 109 106 102
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
306 9180 529 200 40.0 269 20.7 236 27.7 330
279 8370 410 155 31.0 184 9.66 168 12.9 215
183 5490 362 144 33.0 185 16.7 163 22.2 240
153 4590 343 129 31.8 163 17.4 139 23.2 219
140 4200 273 103 25.3 115 8.76 104 11.7 144
Span (ft)
1060 1020 918 835
100
877 849 743 660 594 540
Fy = 50 ksi
6 7 8 9 10 11
S 24 106
Properties and Reaction Values 240 7200 483 163 37.3 216 21.4 182 28.6 284
222 6660 405 137 31.3 166 12.6 146 16.9 207
204 6120 324 109 25.0 119 6.48 109 8.64 140
198 5940 438 175 40.0 248 29.7 207 39.5 305
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 99
BEAMS S 18–15–12–10 S Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139
Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
S 18 70
3 4 5 6 7 8
691 625 536 469
9 10 11 12 13 14
S 15
54.7
50
S 12
42.9
50
S 12
40.8
35
S 10
31.8
35
25.4
168 142 122 107
333 297 260
445 367 306 262 230
299 266 228 199
277 269 224 192 168
227 210 180 158
321 266 212 177 152 133
257 231 210 193 178 165
231 208 189 173 160 149
204 184 167 153 141 131
177 159 145 133 123 114
149 134 122 112 103 96
140 126 115 105 97 90
118 106 97 89 82 76
95 85 77 71 66 61
210 197 185 175 166 158
154 145 136 129 122 116
139 130 122 116 109 104
122 115 108 102 97 92
106 100 94 89 84 80
90 84 79 75 71 67
84 79 74 70 66 63
71 66 62 59 56 53
57 53 50 47 45 43
179 170 163 156 150 144
150 143 137 131 126 121
110 105 101 96 93 89
99 95 90 87 83 80
87 83 80 77 73 71
76 72 69 66 64 61
64 61 58 56 54 52
60 57 55 53 50 48
51 48 46 44 42
41 39 37 36 34
27 28 29 30 31 32
139 134 129 125 121 117
117 113 109 105 102 98
86 83 80 77 75 72
77 74 72 69 67 65
68 66 63 61
59 57 55 53
50 48 46 45
47 45 43 42
33 34 35 36 37 38
114 110 107 104 101 99
95 93 90 88 85 83
70 68 66 64 63
63 61 59 58 56
40 42 44
94 89 85
79 75 72
125 3750 346 133 35.6 180 31.3 142 41.7 249
105 3150 224 86.4 23.1 93.8 8.52 83.6 11.4 122
44.8 1340 139 63.5 21.4 74.5 13.0 64.1 17.3 120
42.0 1260 113 52.0 17.5 55.1 7.11 49.4 9.47 80.2
35.4 1060 160 83.5 29.7 116 46.2 84.9 61.6 180
28.4 852 84.0 43.7 15.5 43.8 6.63 39.4 8.84 68.1
448 394
446 386 330 289
417 375 341 313 288 268
350 315 286 263 242 225
15 16 17 18 19 20
250 234 221 208 197 188
21 22 23 24 25 26
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
77.1 2310 223 94.5 27.5 116 19.3 96.7 25.7 180
69.3 2080 166 70.6 20.6 74.9 8.05 66.9 10.7 102
61.2 1840 223 123 34.3 167 44.4 131 59.1 235
53.1 1590 150 83.0 23.1 91.9 13.5 81.1 18.0 140
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 100
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
S 8–6–5–4–3
BEAMS S Shapes Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation Wt./ft
S8 23
1 2 3 4 5 6
191 145 116 96
7 8 9 10 11 12
S6 18.4
17.25
S5 12.5
9.5
75 64 51 42
58 57 43 34 28
83 72 64 58 53 48
71 62 55 50 45 41
45 40 35 32 29 27
36 32 28 25 23 21
24 21 19 17 15 14
13
45
38
24
20
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
19.3 579 95.3 55.1 22.1 68.9 27.2 54.4 36.3 127
16.5 495 58.5 33.9 13.6 33.2 6.32 29.8 8.42 57.2
S3 7.7
7.5
5.7
70 61 40 30 24 20
42 35 26 21 18
57 35 24 18 14 12
28 20 15 12 9.75
17 15 13 12
15 13 12 11
10
8.36
4.04 121 35.2 30.6 16.3 36.3 32.0 27.8 42.6 83.5
3.51 105 20.8 18.1 9.65 16.6 6.64 14.8 8.85 43.5
2.36 70.8 28.3 30.0 17.5 37.9 59.0 26.1 78.6 86.7
1.95 58.5 13.8 14.6 8.50 12.9 6.81 11.5 9.09 41.1
Span (ft)
117 99 83
151 106 80 64 53
Fy = 50 ksi
S4
10
Properties and Reaction Values 10.6 318 75.3 50.9 23.3 68.5 50.5 48.3 67.3 126
8.47 254 37.6 25.4 11.6 24.1 6.27 21.6 8.36 48.8
5.67 170 28.9 21.7 10.7 20.4 6.50 18.2 8.67 46.4
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 101
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
MC,C 18–15
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
MC 18
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
58
51.9
C 15 45.8
42.7
50
40
33.9
421 343 286 245 215
324 302 252 216 189
3 4 5 6 7 8
680 568 473 405 355
583 519 433 371 324
486 470 392 336 294
437 372 319 279
580 511 409 341 292 256
9 10 11 12 13 14
315 284 258 237 218 203
288 260 236 216 200 185
261 235 214 196 181 168
248 223 203 186 172 159
227 205 186 170 157 146
191 172 156 143 132 123
168 151 137 126 116 108
15 16 17 18 19 20
189 177 167 158 149 142
173 162 153 144 137 130
157 147 138 131 124 118
149 140 131 124 117 112
136 128 120 114 108 102
114 107 101 95 90 86
101 95 89 84 80 76
21 22 23 24 25 26
135 129 123 118 114 109
124 118 113 108 104 100
112 107 102 98 94 90
106 101 97 93 89 86
97 93 89 85 82 79
82 78 75 72 69 66
72 69 66 63 60 58
28 30 32 34 36 38
101 95 89 83 79 75
93 87 81 76 72 68
84 78 74 69 65 62
80 74 70 66 62 59
73 68 64 60 57
61 57 54 50 48
54 50 47 44 42
40 42 44
71 68 65
65 62 59
59 56 53
56 53 51
68.2 2050 290 129 35.8 176 40.7 135 54.3 245
57.2 1720 211 93.4 26.0 109 15.6 93.4 20.8 161
50.4 1510 162 71.9 20.0 73.6 7.10 66.5 9.47 97.2
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
94.6 2840 340 120 35.0 167 33.0 127 44.0 234
86.5 2600 292 103 30.0 133 20.8 108 27.7 200
78.4 2350 243 85.9 25.0 101 12.0 86.4 16.0 140
74.4 2230 219 77.3 22.5 86.1 8.76 75.5 11.7 115
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 102
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
MC 13
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
MC 13
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
50
40
35
31.8
3 4 5 6 7 8
552 454 363 303 259 227
393 382 305 255 218 191
314 277 231 198 173
263 259 216 185 162
9 10 11 12 13 14
202 182 165 151 140 130
170 153 139 127 117 109
154 139 126 116 107 99
144 129 118 108 99 92
15 16 17 18 19 20
121 113 107 101 96 91
102 95 90 85 80 76
92 87 82 77 73 69
86 81 76 72 68 65
21 22 23 24 25 26
86 83 79 76 73 70
73 69 66 64 61 59
66 63 60 58 55 53
62 59 56 54 52 50
27 28 29 30 31 32
67 65 63 61 59 57
57 55 53 51 49 48
51 50 48 46 45 43
48 46 45 43 42 40
46.2 1390 157 76.8 22.4 84.2 12.2 73.6 16.2 126
43.1 1290 132 64.5 18.8 64.7 7.19 58.4 9.59 89.6
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
60.5 1820 276 135 39.3 197 66.5 139 88.7 263
50.9 1530 197 96.3 28.0 118 24.0 97.3 31.9 187
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 103
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
C,MC 12
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation Wt./ft
C 12 50
45
40
251 219 175 146 125
183 152 127 109
541 421 337 281 240
461 388 310 259 222
382 355 284 237 203
126 112 101 92 84 78
110 97 88 80 73 67
95 85 76 69 64 59
210 187 168 153 140 129
194 172 155 141 129 119
14 15 16 17 18 19
72 67 63 59 56 53
63 58 55 52 49 46
54 51 48 45 42 40
120 112 105 99 94 89
20 21 22 23 24 25
50 48 46 44 42 40
44 42 40 38 37 35
38 36 35 33 32 30
26 27 28 29 30
39 37 36 35 34
34 32 31 30 29
29 28 27 26 25
Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
33.6 1010 165 71.7 25.5 93.0 23.9 73.9 31.8 155
29.2 876 125 54.4 19.4 61.5 10.4 53.1 13.9 98.3
Span (ft)
25
2 3 4 5 6 7
330 252 202 168 144
8 9 10 11 12 13
MC 12 20.7
Fy = 50 ksi
30
MC 12 35
31
10.6
303 257 214 183
240 236 197 168
123 116 87 70 58 50
177 158 142 129 118 109
161 143 128 117 107 99
147 131 118 107 98 91
44 39 35 32 29 27
111 103 97 91 86 82
101 95 89 83 79 75
92 86 80 76 71 68
84 79 74 69 66 62
25 23 22 20 19 18
84 80 77 73 70 67
78 74 71 67 65 62
71 68 65 62 59 57
64 61 58 56 54 51
59 56 54 51 49 47
17 17 16 15 15 14
65 62 60 58 56
60 57 55 53 52
55 53 51 49 47
49 48 46 44 43
45 44 42 41 39
13 13 12 12 12
47.3 1420 191 96.8 29.5 137 26.5 116 35.3 193
42.8 1280 151 76.6 23.4 96.3 13.1 85.8 17.5 143
39.3 1180 120 60.7 18.5 67.9 6.52 62.7 8.70 91.0
11.6 348 61.6 16.3 9.50 16.6 2.00 15.0 2.67 23.7
Properties and Reaction Values 25.4 762 91.4 39.7 14.1 38.2 4.04 35.0 5.38 52.5
56.1 1680 271 137 41.8 230 75.0 170 100.0 273
51.7 1550 231 117 35.6 181 46.5 144 62.0 233
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 104
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
C,MC 10
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
C 10
MC 10
30
25
20
2 3 4 5 6 7
363 266 200 160 133 114
284 230 173 138 115 99
8 9 10 11 12 13
100 89 80 73 67 61
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
33.6
MC 10 28.5
25
MC 10
15.3
41.1
22
205 193 145 116 96 83
130 119 95 79 68
430 389 292 233 195 167
311 251 200 167 143
230 222 178 148 127
205 194 155 129 111
157 142 118 101
92 79 59 47 39 34
8.4
86 77 69 63 58 53
72 64 58 53 48 45
59 53 47 43 40 36
146 130 117 106 97 90
125 111 100 91 84 77
111 99 89 81 74 68
97 86 77 70 65 60
89 79 71 64 59 54
29 26 24 21 20 18
57 53 50 47 44 42
49 46 43 41 38 36
41 39 36 34 32 30
34 32 30 28 26 25
83 78 73 69 65 61
72 67 63 59 56 53
63 59 56 52 49 47
55 52 48 46 43 41
51 47 44 42 39 37
17 16 15 14 13 12
40 38 36 35 33
35 33 31 30 29
29 28 26 25 24
24 23 22 21 20
58 56 53 51 49
50 48 46 44 42
44 42 40 39 37
39 37 35 34 32
35 34 32 31 30
12 11 11 10 9.83
26.6 798 182 84.1 33.6 131 75.6 81.0 101 193
23.0 690 142 65.8 26.3 90.8 36.1 66.8 48.1 151
29.6 888 115 66.4 21.3 75.8 14.4 66.1 19.3 129
25.8 774 103 59.4 19.0 64.1 10.3 57.2 13.8 102
23.6 708 78.3 45.3 14.5 42.7 4.59 39.6 6.12 59.5
7.86 236 45.9 14.6 8.50 13.4 1.90 12.1 2.53 20.3
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
19.3 579 102 47.4 19.0 55.6 13.5 46.6 18.0 105
15.8 474 64.8 30.0 12.0 28.0 3.43 25.7 4.57 40.6
38.9 1170 215 124 39.8 194 94.9 131 127 254
33.4 1000 155 89.8 28.8 119 35.8 95.4 47.7 183
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 105
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
C,MC 9
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
C9
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
MC 9
20
15
13.4
25.4
23.9
2 3 4 5 6 7
218 168 126 101 84 72
139 135 101 81 68 58
113 94 75 63 54
219 174 139 116 99
194 167 133 111 95
8 9 10 11 12 13
63 56 50 46 42 39
51 45 41 37 34 31
47 42 38 34 31 29
87 77 70 63 58 54
83 74 67 61 56 51
14 15 16 17 18 19
36 34 31 30 28 27
29 27 25 24 23 21
27 25 23 22 21 20
50 46 44 41 39 37
48 44 42 39 37 35
20 21 22
25 24 23
20 19 18
19 18 17
35 33 32
33 32 30
23.2 696 109 66.8 22.5 80.7 19.9 68.8 26.6 140
22.2 666 97.2 59.4 20.0 67.7 14.0 59.3 18.7 120
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
16.8 504 109 52.5 22.4 69.5 26.2 53.8 34.9 125
13.5 405 69.3 33.4 14.3 35.3 6.74 31.2 8.98 60.4
12.5 375 56.6 27.3 11.7 26.1 3.68 23.9 4.91 39.8
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 106
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
C,MC 8
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
C8
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
MC 8
MC 8
MC 8
18.75
13.75
11.5
22.8
21.4
20
18.7
8.5
1 2 3 4 5 6
210 207 138 104 83 69
131 109 82 65 55
95 72 57 48
184 141 113 94
162 135 108 90
173 162 122 97 81
152 116 92 77
77 69 52 41 35
7 8 9 10 11 12
59 52 46 41 38 35
47 41 36 33 30 27
41 36 32 29 26 24
81 70 63 56 51 47
77 68 60 54 49 45
69 61 54 49 44 41
66 58 51 46 42 39
30 26 23 21 19 17
13 14 15 16 17 18
32 30 28 26 24 23
25 23 22 20 19 18
22 20 19 18 17 16
43 40 38 35 33 31
42 39 36 34 32 30
37 35 32 30 29 27
36 33 31 29 27 26
16 15 14 13 12 12
19 20
22 21
17 16
15 14
30 28
28 27
26 24
24 23
11 10
16.2 486 86.4 56.3 20.0 64.5 17.3 55.3 23.1 121
15.4 462 76.2 49.6 17.7 53.5 11.9 47.1 15.9 98.7
6.91 207 38.7 16.8 8.95 15.2 2.49 13.9 3.33 24.7
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
13.8 414 105 57.1 24.3 76.5 40.1 55.2 53.4 136
10.9 327 65.4 35.5 15.2 37.6 9.65 32.4 12.9 74.2
9.55 287 47.5 25.8 11.0 23.2 3.69 21.3 4.92 37.3
18.8 564 92.2 63.4 21.3 72.9 20.1 62.2 26.7 133
18.0 540 81.0 55.7 18.8 60.0 13.6 52.8 18.1 112
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
FACTORED UNIFORM LOAD TABLES
Fy = 50 ksi
4 - 107
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
C,MC 7–6
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
C7 12.25
MC 7 9.8
22.7
C6
MC 6
MC 6
MC 6
19.1
13
10.5
8.2
18
16.3
15.1
12
102 92 62 46 37 31
65 51 38 31 26
123 115 86 69 58
122 102 77 61 51
102 97 73 58 48
100 74 55 44 37
1 2 3 4 5 6
119 84 63 50 42
79 71 53 43 36
190 162 122 97 81
133 107 86 72
142 109 73 54 44 36
7 8 9 10 11 12
36 31 28 25 23 21
31 27 24 21 19 18
69 61 54 49 44 41
61 54 48 43 39 36
31 27 24 22 20 18
26 23 21 18 17 15
22 19 17 15 14 13
49 43 38 35 31 29
44 38 34 31 28 26
42 36 32 29 26 24
32 28 25 22 20 18
13 14 15 16
19 18 17 16
16 15 14 13
37 35 32 30
33 31 29 27
17 16 15
14 13 12
12 11 10
27 25 23
24 22 20
22 21 19
17 16 15
8.40 252 59.3 34.3 15.7 38.4 13.1 32.3 17.4 85.4
7.12 214 39.7 23.0 10.5 21.0 3.91 19.2 5.21 36.1
11.5 345 61.4 50.3 19.0 58.0 20.7 49.7 27.6 112
10.2 306 60.8 49.8 18.8 57.1 20.0 49.1 26.7 111
9.69 291 51.2 42.0 15.8 44.2 12.0 39.4 16.0 91.3
7.38 221 50.2 31.5 15.5 38.1 14.3 32.4 19.1 81.9
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
16.2 486 95.1 70.7 25.2 91.0 39.3 72.6 52.5 152
14.3 429 66.5 49.5 17.6 53.3 13.5 47.0 18.0 105
7.26 218 70.8 44.4 21.9 61.0 43.9 43.5 58.5 115
6.15 185 50.9 31.9 15.7 37.2 16.3 30.7 21.7 82.9
5.13 154 32.4 20.3 10.0 18.9 4.21 17.2 5.61 35.4
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 108
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAMS Channels Maximum factored uniform loads in kips for beams laterally supported
C 5–4–3
Fy = 50 ksi
For beams laterally unsupported, see page 4-139 Designation
C5 9
C4
C3
6.7
7.25
5.4
69 42 28 21 17 14
40 34 23 17 14 11
1 2 3 4 5 6
88 65 44 33 26 22
51 35 26 21 18
7 8 9 10 11 12
19 16 15 13 12 11
15 13 12 11 9.6 8.8
12 11 9.4 8.4
9.7 8.5 7.5 6.8
6
5
4.1
52 26 17 13 10 8.6
42 23 15 11 9.0 7.5
28 20 13 9.8 7.8 6.5
7.4
6.4
5.6
1.72 51.6 28.8 30.6 17.8 40.0 59.6 28.1 79.5 88.4
1.50 45.0 20.9 22.2 12.9 24.7 22.7 20.2 30.2 64.1
1.30 39.0 13.8 14.6 8.50 13.2 6.49 11.9 8.65 40.0
Span (ft)
Fy = 50 ksi
Wt./ft
Properties and Reaction Values Zx in.3 φbWc kip-ft φvVn kips φR1 kips φR2 kips/in. φr R3 kips φr R4 kips/in. φr R5 kips φr R6 kips/in. φR (N = 31⁄4) kips
4.36 131 43.9 30.5 16.3 37.8 23.2 30.1 30.9 83.3
3.51 105 25.7 17.8 9.50 16.9 4.64 15.3 6.18 35.4
2.81 84.3 34.7 27.6 16.1 35.7 30.2 27.6 40.3 79.7
2.26 67.8 19.9 15.8 9.20 15.5 5.69 14.0 7.59 38.6
Load above heavy line is limited by design shear strength. Values of R in bold face exceed maximum design web shear φvVn.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 109
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH GREATER THAN Lp General Notes
Spacing of lateral bracing at distances greater than Lp creates a problem in which the designer is confronted with a given laterally unbraced length (usually less than the total span) along the compression flange, and a calculated required bending moment. The beam cannot be selected from its plastic section modulus alone, since depth, flange proportions, and other properties have an influence on its bending strength. The following charts show the design moment φbMn for W and M shapes of Fy = 36 ksi and Fy = 50 ksi steels, used as beams, with respect to the maximum unbraced length for which this moment is permissible. In bending, φb of 0.9 is given in Section F1.2 of the LRFD Specification. The charts extend over varying unbraced lengths, depending upon the flexural strengths of the beams represented. In general, they extend beyond most unbraced lengths frequently encountered in design practice. The design moment φbMn, kip-ft, is plotted with respect to the unbraced length with no consideration of the moment due to weight of the beam. Design moments are shown for unbraced lengths in feet, starting at spans less than Lp, for spans between Lp and Lr and for spans beyond Lr. The unbraced length Lp, in feet, with the limit indicated by a solid symbol, , is the maximum unbraced length of the compression flange, with Cb = 1.0, for which the design moment is given by φbMp, where Fy Lp = 300ry / √ Mp = ZxFy
(F1-4)
For those noncompact rolled shapes, which meet the requirements of compact sections Fy , but is less than 141 / √ Fy −Fr , the design moment is except that bf / 2tf exceeds 65 / √ obtained from Equation A-F1-3 in Appendix F1 of the LRFD Specification. This criterion applies to one W shape when Fy is equal to 36 ksi and to seven W shapes when Fy is equal to 50 ksi. (Noncompact W shapes are given on p. 4-7.) For the case Cb = 1.0 and noncompact shapes: λ − λp Mn′ = Mp − (Mp − Mr) λr − λp
(A-F1-3)
Mp − Mn′ Lp′ = Lp + (Lr − Lp) Mp − Mr λ = bf / 2tf λp = 65 / √ Fy λr = 141 / √ Fy −Fr Lr =
ryX1 √ 1+√ 1 + X2(Fy − Fr)2 Fy − Fr
X1 =
π Sx
√
EGJA 2
(F1-6)
(F1-8) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 110
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
4Cw X2 = Iy
Sx GJ
2
(F1-9)
Mr = (Fy − Fr )Sx Mp = ZxFy Fr = 10 ksi for rolled shapes
(F1-7)
The unbraced length in the charts may be either the total span or any part of the total span between braced points. The plots shown in these charts were computed for beams for which Cb = 1.0. When a moment gradient exists between points of bracing, Cb may be larger than unity. (See Table 4-1.) Using this larger value of Cb may provide a more liberal flexural strength for the section chosen if the unbraced length is greater than Lp. In these cases, the design moment can be determined using the provisions of Section F1.2a of the LRFD Specification. Lb − Lp φbMn = φbCb Mp − (Mp − Mr) ≤ φbMp Lr − Lp The unbraced length Lr, ft, with the limit indicated by an open symbol , is the maximum unbraced length of the compression flange beyond which the design moment is governed by Specification Section F1.2b. For unbraced lengths greater than Lr:
φbMn = φbMcr = φbCb
π Lb
√ 2
πE EIyGJ + IyCw ≤ φbCbMr and φbMp Lb
In computing the points for the curves, Cb in the above formulas was taken as unity, E = 29,000 ksi and G = 11,200 ksi. The properties of the beams are taken from the Tables of Dimensions and Properties in Part 1 of this LRFD Manual. The beam strengths have been reduced by multiplying the nominal flexural strength Mn by 0.9, the resistance factor φb for flexure. Over a limited range of length, a given beam is the lightest available for various combinations of unbraced length and design moment. The charts are designed to assist in selection of the lightest available beam for the given combination. The solid portion of each curve indicates the most economical section by weight. The dashed portion of each curve indicates ranges in which a lighter weight beam will satisfy the loading conditions. The curves are plotted without regard to shear strength and deflection criteria, therefore due care must be exercised in their use. The curves do not extend beyond an arbitrary span/depth limit of 30. The following examples illustrate the use of the charts.
EXAMPLE 4-8
Given:
Using Fy = 50 ksi steel, determine the size of a “simple” framed girder with a span of 35 feet, which supports two equal concentrated loads. The factored loads produce a required moment of 440 kip-ft in the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 111
center 15-ft section between the loads. The load points are laterally braced. Solution:
For this loading condition, Cb = 1.0 due to nearly uniform moment across the central portion of the span. Center section of 15 feet is longest unbraced length. With total span equal to 35 feet and Mn = 440 kip-ft, assume approximate weight of beam at 70 lbs/ft (equal to 0.07 kips/ft). 0.07 × (35)2 × 1.2 = 453 kip-ft Total Mu = 440 + 8 Entering chart, with unbraced length equal to 15 feet on the bottom scale (abscissa), proceed upward to meet the horizontal line corresponding to a design moment equal to 453 kip-ft on the left hand scale (ordinate). Any beam listed above and to the right of the point so located satisfies the design moment requirement. In this case, the lightest section satisfying this criterion is a W21×68, for which the total design moment with an unbraced length of 15 feet is 457 kip-ft. Use: W21×68 Note: If depth is limited, a W14×82 could be selected, provided deflection conditions are not critical.
EXAMPLE 4-9
Given:
A “fixed end” girder with a span of 60 feet supports a concentrated load at the center. The compression flange is laterally supported at the concentrated load point and at the inflection points. The factored load produces a maximum calculated moment of 440 kip-ft at the load point and the supports. Determine the size of the beam using Fy = 50 ksi steel.
Solution:
For this loading condition, Cb = 1.67 (by comparison with Table 4-1), with an unbraced length of 15 feet. With the total span equal to 60 feet and Mu = 440 kip-ft, assume approximate weight of beam at 60 lbs/ft (0.06 kips/ft). 0.06 × (60)2 Total Mu = 440 + ×1.2 24 = 451 kip-ft at the centerline and 462 at the supports Compute Mequiv by dividing the required design moment by Cb
Mequiv = 462 / 1.67 = 277 kip-ft Enter charts with unbraced length equal to 15 feet and proceed upward to 277 kip-ft. Any beam listed above and to the right of the point satisfies the design moment. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 112
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
The lightest section satisfying the criteria of a design moment of 277 kip-ft at an unbraced length of 15 feet and φbMp greater than 462 kip-ft is a W21×62. The design moment for a W21×62 with an unbraced length of 15 feet is 406 kip-ft and φbMp is 540 kip-ft. Since (φbMn = 406 kip-ft) > (Mequiv = 277 kip-ft) and (φbMp = 540 kip-ft) > (Mu = 462 kip-ft), a W21×62 is o.k. A 21-in. nominal depth beam spanning 60 feet should be checked for deflection since the span/depth ratio exceeds 30.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 113
4 - 114
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 115
4 - 116
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 117
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN 4 - 118
W3 x3
18
30
3x3 W
97
26
0x2
31
W4 0x3
W44
x26
2
0x2
W
24
W4
49
x3
x2
77
35
0x2
30
W4 61
0x2
78
W4
4x2
30
W
11
35
x2
x2
30
27
W
67
W4
79 x2
0x1
0x2
15
W
24
x2
50
W4
0x
4
24
99
W
0x1
49
W4
17
0x1
x2
07
W
92
30
x1
W
24
x1
91
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
0
92 W4
W
35
11
94
W4
W21x201
28
x2
6x
30
07
4
35 x2
0x2
6x1
W4
8 25 8x W1
W18x234
W
x3
x26
0x2 30
W4
W3
W27x178
29 x2 24 W
W
24 3 28 8x W1
1 31 8x W1
W3
27
W40
W4 W
W40x183
W4
W
W40x199
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 119
W 24 x4 08
W4 0x2 97 W 27 x3 68
W 30 x3 26
W
W
27
30
x3
x2
07
92
W 24 x3 35
30
W3
W
91
61
3x2
x2
W
24
W
x2
27
79
x2 58
W1
W 24 x2 50 W
W1
8x
27
28
3
x2 35
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8x
31
1
4 - 120
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W
W3 11 W2
4
4x 9
x169
22
W33
x183
01
W18x211
x17
8
x2
34
W40
17
21
x2
W40
7x
W
18
0x2
W2
W
18
W40x
W 24
167
x1
W21x182
92 W 24 x2 07
W36 x170
W2 7x 19
18
4
W
x1
92
W40 x149
W3 0x1 16
W
18
x1
W 58
18
x1
75
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
x2
58
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 121
W2 79
35
W36
7x2
4x2
W2 x245 W
18
x2
83
W2 4x 25 0
W3 0x1 91 W2 4x 22
W
9
W36 x210
W 24 x2 07
W 21 x2 01
W
18
x2
34
W 24 x1 92
W
18
x1
92 W
x1
7x1
21
W2
W
18
x2
11
94
82
W 24 x1 76
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
18
x2
58
4 - 122
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W30x1 32
W1 15
W1
8x
8x
8
17 5
W 3 3 x1 3 0
W30x90 W24x103
W27 x94 W 36 x1 60
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 123
W21 x20 1
W1
W 36 x1 70
8x 21 1
W1 8x1
W 33 x1 69
92
W1 8x1 75 W21 x18 2
W1 8x1 58 W 36 x1 60
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 124
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W14x132
W
14
x1
32
W30 x90 W27
x90
x94
W30
W12x120
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 125
W1 8x 78 5 17 W27x1
W1 8x 15 8
W
W24x
14
x1
32
117
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 126
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W x1 20
W30x9
12
0
W12x106
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 127
W 14 x1 32
W 12 x1 20
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 128
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W12x96
W 12 x9 6
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 129
W 12 x1 20
W 12 x1 06
W
10
x1
12
W 12 x9 6
W
10
x1
00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 130
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 131
W
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
10
x1
00
4 - 132
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 133
W 10 x6 8
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 134
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 135
W 8x 48 W1 0x4 5
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 136
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
M12x1 0 .8
M10 x8
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 137
4 - 138
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
M10 x8
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 139
4 - 140
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 141
4 - 142
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 143
4 - 144
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W24x250
0x2 61
x3
0x2
18
W4
x183
W
W27x217
W3
x235
4
W40
x19
x211
W40
W40
W36
W40x174
15
11
W40x167
W 24 x2 79
W2
7x2
21
58
3x2
5
83
W3
23
x2
7x
18
W2
W
W4
W x2
0x1
24
99
29 W4 0x1 74
W18x258
0x
W33x
W3
W40x149
3
241
17 W 07
3x2
x2
W3
24
01
W24x192 W18x234
W21x201
W18x211
W21x182
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
30
92
7x
0x2
W2
W3
7 W 24 x3 35
W3 0x 26 1 W2 7x 25 8
W
18
x3
11
W 24 x2 79
W 50 235 x x2 24 W27
W1 8x 28 3
W
18
x2
83
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 145
4 - 146
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W x2
W
7
11
20
x2
4x
34
18
W2
18
W21x182
W2 1x 20 1
W18x192
W2 4x1
x149
W18x158
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
92
W40
W18x175
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 147
W2
07
29
4x2
4x2
W2
W 18 x2 58
W 18 x2 34
W2 4x 19 2
W 18 x2 11
W 21 x2 01
W 21 x1 82
W 18 x1 92
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 148
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W 18 x1 75
W 18 x1 58
W30x90
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 149
W
W2
18
1x
x2
2
11
18 W 18 x1 92
W 18 x1 75
W 18 x1 58
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 150
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W30 x90 W 27 x9 4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 151
4 - 152
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 153
W 14 x1 32
W
12
x1
20
W
12
x1
06
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 154
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W1 2x 96
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
W1 2x 10 6
W1 2x 96
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 155
4 - 156
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 157
W 12 x9 6 W 10 x1 00
W1 2x 72
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 158
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
W 10 x7 7
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 159
4 - 160
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
4 - 161
W 8x 67
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 162
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
W8 x48
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 163
4 - 164
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
M12x10 .8
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH OF BEAMS WITH UNBRACED LENGTH > Lp
M12x1 0 .8
M10x 8
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 165
4 - 166
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
PLATE GIRDER DESIGN
4 - 167
PLATE GIRDER DESIGN General Notes
The distinction between a beam and a plate girder, according to Chapter G of the LRFD Specification, must be made before the design can be undertaken. A beam can be a rolled or welded shape, but its web width-thickness ratio h / tw must be less than or equal to 970 / √ Fyf. For doubly symmetric plate girders h / tw is greater than 970 / √ Fyf. The limit states that must be considered in plate girder design include: flexural strength, bearing under concentrated loads, shear strength, and flexure-shear interaction (for tension field action only). From these checks, the adequacy of the design and the need for stiffeners can be determined. This section contains design examples to explain these items from the LRFD Specification. A flowchart covering plate girder design has been published (Zahn, 1987). Flexural and Shear Strength
General
In the design of welded girders, the flexural strength of the trial section must be determined to ensure that an adequate section modulus is provided. Although there are preliminary steps, flexural strength, using elastic design, is determined from LRFD Specification Section F1 if the section is compact. For sections with more slender webs, either LRFD Specification Appendix F1 or Appendix G2 is used, depending on the section’s classification as a beam or plate girder. A shear strength calculation is required to ascertain if there is a need for intermediate stiffeners. The applicable formulas are found in LRFD Specification Section F2, or Appendix G3 if tension field action is implemented. Note, however, that Appendix G cannot be used if h / tw exceeds the limits given in Appendix G1. Table of Dimensions and Properties of Built-up Wide Flange sections
This table serves as a guide for selecting welded built-up I sections of economical proportions. It provides dimensions and properties for a wide range of sections with nominal depths from 45 to 92 inches. No preference is intended for the tabulated flange plate dimensions, as compared to other flange plates having the same area. Substitution of wider but thinner flange plates, without a change in flange area, will result in a slight reduction in section modulus. In analyzing overall economy, weight savings must be balanced against higher fabrication costs incurred in splicing the flanges. In some cases, it may prove economical to reduce the size of flange plates at one or more points near the girder ends, where the bending moment is substantially less. Economy through reduction of flange plate sizes is most likely to be realized with long girders, where flanges must be spliced in any case. Only one thickness of web plate is given for each depth of girder. When the design is dominated by shear in the web, rather than flexural strength, overall economy may dictate selection of a thicker web plate. The resultant increase in elastic section modulus can be obtained by multiplying the value S′, given in the table, by the number of sixteenths of an inch increase in web thickness, and adding the value obtained to the section modulus value S for the girder profile shown in the table. The increase in plastic section modulus Z can be calculated in the same way with Z′. Overall economy may often be obtained by using a web plate of such thickness that intermediate stiffeners are not required. This is not always the case, however. The girder AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 168
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
section listed in the table will provide a “balanced” design with respect to bending moment and web shear without excessive use of intermediate stiffeners. The maximum design end shear strength without transverse stiffeners is given in the table column labeled φvVn. These values come from the equation, φvVn = 0.6φvAwFywCv where Cv =
44,000k with k = 5.0 (h / tw)2Fyw
It is evident from this formula that a thicker web plate increases the design shear strength. Design Examples
Design of a plate girder should begin with a preliminary design or selection of a trial section. The initial choice may require one or more adjustments before arriving at a final cross section that satisfies all the provisions of the LRFD Specification with maximum economy. In the following design examples, applicable provisions of the LRFD Specification are indicated at the left of each page. In addition, references to Tables 9 and 10 in the LRFD Specification are listed. These tables may be used in place of the equations for φvVn. Values for φvVn / Aw are given in ksi for plate girders. Tables 9-36 and 9-50 do not include the tension field action equation and, therefore, are based on LRFD Specification Section F2. For design with tension field action, Tables 10-36 and 10-50, based on Appendix G3, are applicable. Table 10 also includes the required gross area of pairs of stiffeners, as a percent of (h × tw), from LRFD Specification Formula A-G4-1. Example 4-10 illustrates a recommended procedure for designing a welded plate girder of constant depth. The selection of a suitable trial cross section is obtained by the flange area method, and then checked by the moment of inertia method. Example 4-11 shows a recommended procedure for designing a welded hybrid girder of constant depth. Example 4-12 illustrates use of the Table of Dimensions and Properties of Built-up Wide-Flange Sections to obtain an efficient trial profile. The 52-in. depth specified for this example demonstrates how tabular data may be used for girder depths intermediate to those listed. Another design requirement in this example is the omission of intermediate web stiffeners.
EXAMPLE 4-10 Design a welded plate girder to support a factored uniform load of
7 kips per foot and two concentrated factored loads of 150 kips located 17 feet from each end. The compression flange of the girder will be laterally supported only at points of concentrated load. (See Figure 4-3.) Given:
Maximum bending moment: 4,566 kip-ft Maximum vertical shear: 318 kips Span: 48 feet Maximum depth: 72 inches Steel: Fy = 50 ksi AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
PLATE GIRDER DESIGN
Solution: LRFD Specification Reference Section B5 & Table B5.1
4 - 169
A. Preliminary web design:
1. Assume web depth, h = 70 inches. For noncompact web, 640 / √ Fy < h / tw ≤ 970 / √ Fy = 137 Corresponding thickness of web = 70 / 137 = 0.51 in.
(A-G1-2)
2. Assuming a / h > 1.5, minimum thickness of web = 70 / 243 = 0.29 in. Choose thinnest web. Try web plate 5⁄16×70: Aw = 21.9 in.2 h / tw = 70 / 0.313 = 224 Since 0.31 < 0.51 in. as calculated above, expect RPG to be less than 1.0 B. Preliminary flange design: 1. Required flange area: An approximate formula for the area of one flange is: Af ≈
Mu 4,566(12) = = 15.7 in.2 Fy h 50(70)
Try 1×16 plate. Af = 16 in.2
150 kips
150 kips
7 kips/ft 17 ft.
14 ft.
17 ft.
318 kips
318 kips
199 kips
318 kips
49 kips 318 kips
M max = 4566 kip-ft
M1 = 4395 kip-ft
M1 = 4395 kip-ft
Figure 4-3 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 170
Table B5.1
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
2. Check for compactness for no reduction in critical stress: bf 16 = = 8 ≤ 65 / √ 50 = 9.2 o.k. 2tf 2(1) C. Trial girder section: Web 5⁄16×70; two flange plates 1×16 1. Find section modulus by moment of inertia method: Section
A in.2
1 web 5⁄16×70
21.9
1 flange 1×16 1 flange 1×16
16 16
y in.
35.5
ΣA2y in.4
Io in.4
Igr in.4
8,932
8,932
3
40,331
40,328
Moment of inertia
49,263
Section modulus furnished: 49,263 / 36.0 = 1,368 in.3 Section F1 & Appendix G2
2. Check flexural strength using elastic design: Fyf, Appendix G2 applies. Since h / tw > 970 / √ Moment of inertia of flange plus 1⁄6 web about Y-Y axis: Ioy = 1 × (16)3 / 12 = 341 in.4 Af + 1⁄6Aw = 16.0 + 1⁄6(21.9) = 19.65 in.2 rT = √ 341 / 19.65 = 4.17 in. a. Check limitations of Appendix G: Assume a / h ≤ 1.5
(A-G1-1)
(h / tw) max =
2,000 = 283 > 224 o.k. Fyf √
b. Check strength of 14-ft panel: Mu = 4,566 kip-ft The moment in the 14-ft unbraced segment is nearly constant. Section F1.2a
Therefore, Cb ≈ 1.0
Appendix G2
For the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling:
(A-G2-7)
λ=
(A-G2-8)
λp = 300 / √ Fyf = 42.4
(A-G2-9)
λr = 756 / √ Fyf = 106.9
(A-G2-4)
Since λ ≤ λp, Fcr = Fyf = 50 ksi
Lb 14 × 12 = = 36.0 4.67 rT
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
PLATE GIRDER DESIGN
4 - 171
For the limit state of flange local buckling: (A-G2-11)
λ = bf / 2tf = 16 / (2 × 1.0) = 8.0
(A-G2-12)
λp = 65 / √ Fyf = 9.2
(A-G2-13)
λr =
(A-G2-4)
Since λ ≤ λp, Fcr = Fyf = 50 ksi
230 √ Fyf / kc
Design flexural strength: ar (A-G2-3)
= 21.9 / 16 = 1.37
RPG = 1 −
1.37 1,200 + 300(1.37)
70 970 = 0.927 0.313 − √50
With Fcr = 50 ksi use Equation A-G2-1 or A-G2-2 as applicable: (A-G2-1) or (A-G2-2)
Mn = 1,368(1 / 12)(0.927)(1.0)(50) = 5,284 kip-ft Therefore, φMn = 0.90(5,284) = 4,756 kip-ft > 4,566 kip-ft req’d o.k. c. Check strength of 17-ft panels: Mu = 4,395 kip-ft
Appendix G2 and (F1-3)
For moment increasing approximately linearly from zero at one end of the unbraced segment to a maximum value at the other end, Cb ≈ 1.67. For the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling:
(A-G2-7)
λ =
(A-G2-8)
λp = 300 / √ Fyf = 42.4
(A-G2-9)
λr = 756 / √ Fyf = 106.9
(A-G2-5)
Lb 17(12) = = 48.9 4.17 rT
1 λ − λp Since λp ≤ λ ≤ λr, Fcr = CbFyf 1 − ≤F 2 λr − λp yf As the middle term exceeds Fyf, Fcr = Fyf = 50.0 ksi. For the limit state of flange local buckling:
(A-G2-4)
Fcr = Fyf = 50 ksi (as for the 14-ft panel)
(A-G2-3)
RPG = 0.927 (as for the 14-ft panel) Again, with Fcr = 50 ksi use Equation A-G2-1 or A-G2-2 as applicable: Mn = 5,284 kip-ft (see Step C.2a) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 172
(A-G2-1) or (A-G2-2)
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
φbMn = 0.90 × 5,284 = 4,756 kip-ft > 4,395 kip-ft req’d. o.k. Use: Web: One plate 5⁄16×70 Use: Flanges: Two plates 7⁄8×18 D. Stiffener requirements: 1. Bearing stiffeners:
Section K1
a. Check bearing at end reactions: Assume point bearing (N = 0) and 5⁄16-in. web-to-flange welds. Check local web yielding:
(K1-2)
Rn = (5k + N)Fywtw; k = 7⁄8 + 5⁄16 = 1.188 in. φRn = 1.0[5(1.188) + 0](50)(5⁄16) = 92.8 kips < 318 n.g. Therefore, provide bearing stiffeners at unframed girder ends. (Note: If local web yielding criteria are satisfied, criteria set forth in Section K1.4 and K1.5 should also be checked.) b. Bearing stiffeners are also required at concentrated load points since 92.8 < 150 n.g. 2. Intermediate stiffeners:
Appendix G3
a. Check shear strength in unstiffened end panel: h / tw = 224 > 418 / √ Fyw = 59.1 a / h = 17 × 12 / 70 = 2.9 Vu / Aw = 318 / 21.9 = 14.5 ksi
Appendix G3
Tension field action is not permitted for end panels, or when a / h > 3.0 or [260 / (h / tw)]2. Here, 2.9 > (260 / 224)2 = 1.35. In either of these cases, Equations A-G3-3 and F2-3 are both applicable, as they are equivalent formulas.
Section F2.2
Using Equation F2-3,
(F2-3) or (A-G3-3) or Table 9-50
φvVn 0.9(132,000) = = 2.4 < 14.5 ksi Aw (224)2 Therefore, provide intermediate stiffeners. b. End panel stiffener spacing
(F2-3) or (A-G3-3) or Table 9-50
Let
φvVn = 14.5 ksi and solve for a / h. Aw
Result: a / h = 0.45 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
PLATE GIRDER DESIGN
4 - 173
a ≤ (0.45)(70) = 31.5 in. Use: 30 in. c. Check for additional stiffeners: Shear at first intermediate stiffener: Vu = 318 − [7(30 / 12)] = 301 kips Vu 301 = = 13.7 ksi Aw 21.9 Distance between first intermediate stiffener and concentrated load: a (A-G3-4)
= (17)(12) − 30 = 174 in.
a / h = 174 / 70 = 2.5 Then k = 5.8, and the shear strength is inadequate. Therefore, provide intermediate stiffeners spaced at 174 / 2 = 87 in. a / h = 87 / 70 = 1.24
Appendix G3
Maximum a / h for tension field action: 2
2
260 = 260 = 1.35 > 1.24 (h / t ) 224 w Design for tension field action: For a / h = 1.24 and h / tw = 224, (A-G3-4)
Appendix G3 (A-G3-6)
(A-G3-2) or Table 10-50
k
=5+
5 = 8.2 (1.24)2
h / tw = 224 > 234 √ 8.2 / 50 = 95 Cv
=
44,000(8.2) = 0.14 (224)2(50)
1 − 0.14 φvVn = (0.9)(0.6)(50) 0.14 + 2 Aw 1.15√ 1 + (1.24) = 16.5 ksi > 13.7 ksi o.k. d. Check center 14-ft panel: h / tw = 224 a / h = (14)(12) / 70 = 2.4 > 1.35 k = 5.0 Cv = 0.12
(A-G3-3) or Table 9-50
φvVn = 2.4 ksi Aw Vu 49 = = 2.2 ksi < 2.4 ksi o.k. 21.9 Aw AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 174
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
3. Flexure-shear interaction: Appendix G5
Check Vu / φVn and Mu / φMn at intermediate stiffener and concentrated load locations in tension field panel: Location
Vu
φVn
Vu / φVn
Mu
φMn
Mu / φMn
2.5 ft 9.75 ft 17.0 ft
301 250 199
318 361 361
0.95 0.69 0.55
744 2769 4395
4756 4756 4756
0.16 0.58 0.92
Vu Mu ≤ 1.0 and 0.75 ≤ ≤ 1.0 (with φ = 0.9 for both φVn φMn shear and bending) do not occur simultaneously at 2.5 ft, 9.75 ft, and 17.0 ft, Interaction Equation A-G5-1 need not be checked. Since 0.6 ≤
Summary: space stiffeners as shown in Figure 4-4: E. Stiffener design: Let stiffener Fyst = 36 ksi. 1. For intermediate stiffeners: a. Area required (single plate stiffener): Vu < 1, use Equation A-G4-2 For a single plate stiffener, or when φVn instead of Table 10. Fyw Vu 0.15Dhtw(1 − Cv) − 18t2w ≥ 0 Fyst φV n where
(A-G4-1)
Ast =
h = 70 in. tw = 0.3125 in. D = 2.4 Cv = 0.14 Vu = 250 kips φVn = 361 kips 250 50 0.15(2.4)(70)(0.3125)(10.14) − 18(0.3125)2 36 361 = 4.07 in.2
Ast =
Try one bar 5⁄8×7
2 ′-6
′ 2@7 -3
14 ′-0
′ 2@7 -3
Figure 4-4 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 ′-6
PLATE GIRDER DESIGN
4 - 175
Ast = 4.38 in.2 > 4.07 in.2 req’d. o.k. b. Check width-thickness ratio: Table B5.1
7 / 0.625 = 11.2 < 95 / √ Fy = 15.8 o.k. c. Check moment of inertia:
Appendix F2.3
Ireq’d = at3wj
(A-F2-4)
2.5 − 2 = −0.4 < 0.5; take j = 0.5 (1.24)2 Ireq’d = 87(5⁄16)3(0.5) = 1.33 in.4 Ifurn = 1⁄3(0.625)(7)3 = 71.5 in.4 j
=
71.5 in.4 > 1.33 in.4 o.k. d. Minimum length required: Section F3
It is suggested that intermediate stiffeners be stopped short of the tension flange and the weld by which they are attached to the web not closer than four times nor more than six times the web thickness from the near toe of the web-to-flange weld.* 70 − 5⁄16 − (4)(5⁄16) = 68.4 in. 70 − 5⁄16 − (6)(5⁄16) = 67.8 in. Use for intermediate stiffeners: One plate 5⁄8×7×5′-8, fillet-welded to the compression flange and web. 2. For bearing stiffeners: At end of girder, design for end reaction. Try two 5⁄8×8-in. bars (see Figure 4-5). a. Check width-thickness ratio (local buckling check):
Table B5.1
8 / 0.625 = 12.8 < 95 / √ Fy = 15.8 o.k. b. Check compressive strength: (16.31)3 = 226 in.4 12 Aeff = (2)(8)(5⁄8) + [(12)(5⁄16)2] = 11.17 in.2 I
= (5⁄8)
r
=
√
226 = 4.50 in. 11.17
*When single stiffeners are used, they shall be attached to the compression flange, if it consists of a rectangular plate, to resist any uplift tendency due to torsion in the plate. When lateral bracing is attached to a stiffener, or a pair of stiffeners, these, in turn, shall be connected to the compression flange to transmit one percent of the total flange stress, unless the flange is composed only of angles. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 176
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
Section K1.9
KL = 0.75h = (0.75)70 = 52.5 in. Kl 52.5 = = 11.7 r 4.50 λc = 0.13
(E2-2) or Table 3-36
Design stress: φFcr = 30.38 Design strength: φPn = φFcr Ag= (30.38)11.17 = 339 kips 339 kips > 318 kips req’d o.k.
Section J8
c. Check bearing criterion Design strength: φRn = (0.75)1.8Fy Apb Apb = 2(16 − 0.5)(5⁄8) = 19.4 in.2 (The 0.5 accounts for cutout for welds.) φRn = 943 kips > 318 kips req’d. o.k. Use for bearing stiffeners: Two plates 5⁄8×8×5′-93⁄4 with close bearing on flange receiving reaction or concentrated loads. Use same size stiffeners for bearing under concentrated loads.*
EXAMPLE 4-11 Design a hybrid girder to support a factored uniform load of three kips
per foot and three concentrated factored loads of 300 kips located at the quarter points. The girder depth must be limited to five feet. The compression flange will be laterally supported throughout its length. (See Figure 4-6.) Given:
Maximum bending moment: 14,400 kip-ft
*In this example, bearing stiffeners were designed for end bearing; however, 25tw may be used in determining effective area of web for bearing stiffeners under concentrated loads at interior panels (Section K1-9).
5/ 8 x8
End bearing stiffeners
tw 12t w
Web
5/ 8 x8
Figure 4-5 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
PLATE GIRDER DESIGN
4 - 177
Maximum vertical shear: 570 kips Span: 80 ft Maximum depth: 60 in. Steel: Flanges: Fy = 50 ksi Steel: Web: Fy = 36 ksi Solution:
A. Preliminary web design:
LRFD Specification Reference
Assume web depth, h = 54 in.
(A-G1-2)
For a / h > 1.5 minimum thickness of web: 54 / 243 = 0.22 in.
(A-G2-3)
For RPG = 1.0, h / tw ≤ 970 / √ Fyf = 137
(F2-1) or Table 9-36
Corresponding web thickness = 54 / 137 = 0.39 φvVn Minimum tw required for maximum of 19.4 ksi: Aw tw
=
Vn 570 = = 0.54 in. 19.4h 19.4 × 54
Try web plate 5⁄8×54; Aw = 33.75 in.2 Vu Aw Table B5.1
= 570 / 33.75 = 16.9 ksi < 19.4 ksi o.k.
h / tw = 54 / 0.625 = 86.4 < (640 / √ Fyf = 90.5) o.k. Web is compact.
300 kips 300 kips
300 kips
3 kips/ft 20 ft.
20 ft.
20 ft.
20 ft.
80 ft.
570 kips
570 kips 510 kips
570 kips
210 kips 150 kips
230 kips
14400 kip-ft
10800 kip-ft
10800 kip-ft
Figure 4-6 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 178
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
B. Preliminary flange design: 1. An approximate formula for the area of one flange is: Af ≈
Mu 14,400(12) = = 64.0 in.2 Fyf h (50)(54)
2. Check adequacy against local buckling: Table B5.1
bf / 2tf = 24 / (2)(2.625) = 4.6 < (65 / √ Fy = 9.2) o.k. Flange is compact. C. Trial girder section: Web 5⁄8×54; two flange plates 25⁄8×24 1. Determine plastic section moduli: 54 2.625 3 Zf = 2 (2.625)(24) + = 3.567 in. 2 2 54 54 Zw = 2 (5⁄8) = 456 in.3 2 4 2. Check flexural strength: Compression flange is supported laterally for its full length and the section is compact.
Appendix F1
Mn = Mp = Fyf Zf + FywZw Mn = [(50)(3,567) + (36)(456)] 1 / 12 = 16,230 kip-ft φbMn = (0.90)16,230 = 14,610 kip-ft > 14,400 kip-ft o.k. Use: Web: One plate 5⁄8×54 (Fy = 36 ksi) Use: Flanges: Two plates 25⁄8×24 (Fy = 50 ksi) D. Stiffener requirements: 1. Bearing stiffeners
Section K1
a. Check bearing at end reactions: Assume point bearing (N = 0) and 5⁄16-in. web-to-flange welds. Check local web yielding:
(K1-2)
Rn = (5k + N)Fywtw; k = 25⁄8 + 5⁄16 = 215⁄16-in. φRn = 1.0[(5)(215⁄16) + 0](36)(5⁄8) = 330 kips 330 kips < 570 kips n.g. Note: If local web yielding criteria are satisfied, applicable criteria set for in Sections K1.4 and K1.5 should also be checked. b. Bearing stiffeners at points of concentrated loads are also required. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
PLATE GIRDER DESIGN
4 - 179
2. Intermediate stiffeners: The LRFD Specification does not permit design of hybrid girders on the basis of tension field action. Therefore, determine the need for intermediate stiffeners by use of Equations F2-1, F2-2, F2-3, Table 9-36. a. Check shear strength without intermediate stiffeners: Section F2
h / tw = 86.4, a / h exceeds 3.0 Therefore, k = 5.0 Vu 570 = = 16.9 ksi Aw 33.75 Since h / tw = 86.4 > 523 / √ 36 = 87, but h / tw = 86.4 < 418 / √ 36 = 70, use Equation F2-2:
(F2-2) or Table 9-36
φvVn Vu = 15.5 ksi < = 16.9 ksi Aw Aw Therefore, intermediate stiffeners required. b. End panel stiffener spacing
(F2-2) or Table 9-36
φvVn = 16.9 ksi Aw Therefore, a / h = 2.5 for h / tw = 86.4. Max. a1 = 2.5(54) = 135 in. (Use 10 ft = 120 in.) c. Check need for stiffeners between concentrated loads: h / tw = 86.4, a / h is over 3, k = 5 Vu Aw
(F2-3) or Table 9-36
=
210 = 6.2 ksi 33.75
φvVn = 15.5 ksi > 6.2 ksi o.k. Aw Therefore, intermediate stiffeners not required between the concentrated loads. Summary (see Figure 4-7): E. Stiffener design: 1. Bearing stiffeners: See Step E.2, Example 4-10, for design procedure. Use for bearing stiffeners: Two plates 3⁄4×11×4′-53⁄4 with close bearing on flange receiving reaction or concentrated loads. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 180
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
2. Intermediate stiffeners: Assume 5⁄16×4 in., Fy = 36 ksi, on each side of web. a. Check width-thickness ratio: 4 / 0.313 = 12.8 < 95 / √ Fy = 15.8 o.k.
Table B5.1
b. Check moment of inertia: Ireq’d = 120(5⁄8)3(0.5) = 14.6 in.4 Ifurn = 1⁄12(0.313)(8.63)3 = 16.8 in.4 16.8 in.4 > 14.6 in.4 o.k.
Appendix F2.3
c. Length required (see Step E.1.d. Example 4-10): 54 − 5⁄16 − (6)(9⁄16) = 505⁄16 54 − 5⁄16 − (4)(9⁄16) = 517⁄16 (use 51 in.) Use for intermediate stiffeners: Two plates 5⁄16×4×4′-3, fillet-welded to the compression flange and web, one on each side of the web.
EXAMPLE 4-12 Design the section of a nominal 52-in. deep welded girder with no
intermediate stiffeners to support a factored uniform load of 5.0 kips per linear foot on an 85-ft span. The girder will be framed between columns and its compression flange will be laterally supported for its entire length. Required bending moment: 4,516 kip-ft Required vertical shear: 213 kips Span: 85 ft Nominal depth: 52 in. Steel: Fy = 50 ksi
Given:
For compact web and flange, Mn = Fy Z
Solution:
20 ′-0
20 ′-0 Bearing stiffener
Bearing stiffeners
4 ′-9
5 ′-1
5 ′-1
Intermediate stiffeners
5 ′-1
40 ′-0
Figure 4-7 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sym. about cL
PLATE GIRDER DESIGN
LRFD Specification Reference
4 - 181
Design for a compact web and flange: Design for plastic moment, Fy Z: Required plastic section modulus: Zreq’d =
Mu 4,516 × 12 = = 1,204 in.3 φFy 0.90 × 50
Enter Table of Built-up Wide-Flange Sections, Dimensions and Properties: For girder having 3⁄8×48 web with 11⁄4×16 flange plates: Z = 1,200 in.3 < 1,204 in.3 For girder having 3⁄8×52 web with 11⁄4×18 flange plates: Z = 1,450 in.3 > 1,204 in.3 A. Determine web required: Table B5.1
For compact web, h / tw ≤ 640 / √ Fyf = 91 Assume h = 50 in. Minimum tw = 50 / 91 = 0.55 in. Try: web = 9⁄16×50; Aw = 28.1 in.2 h / tw = 50 / 0.56 = 89 < 91 The web is compact. Intermediate stiffeners can be avoided if the design shear strength Fyf, of the web is adequate. (For plate girders with h / tw > 970 / √ refer to Appendix G4 of the LRFD Specification.)
(F2-3)
φvVn = φv(132,000Aw) / (h / tw)2 = 0.9(132,000 × 28.1) / (89)2 = 421 kips > 213 kips req’d. o.k. Therefore, no intermediate stiffeners are necessary. B. Determine flange required. Af ≈
(4,516)(12) = 21.7 in.2 50 × 50
Try 1×18 plate: Af = 18.0 in.2 Table B5.1
bf / 2tf = 18 / (2)(1.0) = 9.0 < 65 / √ Fy = 9.2 o.k. Flange is compact. C. Check plastic section modulus: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 182
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
51.0 9 50 50 Zx = 2 (18)(1.0) + = 1,270 in.3 2 16 2 4 3 3 1,270 in. > 1,204 in. req’d. o.k. Use: Web: One plate 9⁄16×50 Use: Flanges:* Two plates 1×18 Section K1.8
Note: Because this girder will be framed between columns, the usual end bearing stiffeners are not required.
*Because this girder is longer than 60 feet, some economy may be gained by decreasing the flange size in areas of smaller moment, i.e., near ends of girder. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
PLATE GIRDER DESIGN
4 - 183
bf
tf
Nominal Size (h / tw)
Wt. per Ft
Area Depth
In.
Lb.
In.2
92× 30 (131)
823 721 619 568 517 466 415
86× 28 (134)
80× 26 (125)
74× 24 (128)
68× 22 (132)
d
Flange
Web
In.
In.
In.
In.
242 212 182 167 152 137 122
96.00 95.00 94.00 93.50 93.00 92.50 92.00
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
3 21⁄2 2 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄4 1
90 90 90 90 90 90 90
11⁄
16
11⁄
16
11⁄
16
11⁄
16
11⁄
16
11⁄
16
11⁄
16
750 654 559 512 464 416 369
220 192 164 150 136 122 108
90.00 89.00 88.00 87.50 87.00 86.50 86.00
28 28 28 28 28 28 28
3 21⁄2 2 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄4 1
84 84 84 84 84 84 84
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
696 609 519 475 431 387 343 320
205 179 153 140 127 114 101 94.2
84.00 83.00 82.00 81.50 81.00 80.50 80.00 79.75
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
3 21⁄2 2 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄4 1
78 78 78 78 78 78 78 78
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
5⁄
8
627 546 464 423 382 342 301 280
184 160 136 124 112 100 88.5 82.5
78.00 77.00 76.00 75.50 75.00 74.50 74.00 73.75
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
3 21⁄2 2 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄4 1
72 72 72 72 72 72 72 72
9⁄
16
9⁄
16
9⁄
16
9⁄
16
9⁄
16
9⁄
16
9⁄
16
9⁄
16
561 486 411 374 337 299 262 243 224
165 143 121 110 99.0 88.0 77.0 71.5 66.0
72.00 71.00 70.00 69.50 69.00 68.50 68.00 67.75 67.50
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
3 21⁄2 2 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄4 1
66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66
1⁄
2
1⁄
2
1⁄
2
1⁄
2
1⁄
2
1⁄
2
1⁄
2
1⁄
2
1⁄
2
7⁄
8
8
7⁄
8
3⁄
4
X
X
h
tw
f
Axis X-X
Width Thick Depth Thick bf tf h tw
7⁄
d=h+2t f
BUILT-UP WIDE-FLANGE SECTIONS Dimensions and properties
In.
Z
In.3
In.3
In.3
431000 363000 296000 263000 230000 198000 166000
8980 7640 6290 5620 4950 4280 3610
79.1 79.9 80.8 81.2 81.7 82.1 82.5
9760 8330 6910 6210 5510 4810 4120
127 127 127 127 127 127 127
428.9 428.9 428.9 428.9 428.9 428.9 428.9
349000 293000 238000 211000 184000 158000 132000
7750 6580 5410 4820 4240 3650 3070
68.6 69.4 70.2 70.6 71.0 71.4 71.8
8410 7160 5920 5300 4690 4090 3480
110 110 110 110 110 110 110
345.3 345.3 345.3 345.3 345.3 345.3 345.3
281000 235000 191000 169000 148000 127000 106000 95500
6680 5670 4660 4160 3650 3150 2650 2390
58.8 59.6 60.3 60.7 61.0 61.4 61.8 62.0
7270 6180 5110 4580 4050 3530 3000 2750
95.1 95.1 95.1 95.1 95.1 95.1 95.1 95.1
371.8 371.8 371.8 371.8 371.8 371.8 371.8 371.8
220000 184000 149000 132000 115000 98000 81400 73300
5640 4780 3920 3490 3060 2630 2200 1990
49.8 50.5 51.2 51.5 51.8 52.2 52.5 52.7
6130 5200 4280 3830 3380 2930 2480 2260
81.0 81.0 81.0 81.0 81.0 81.0 81.0 81.0
293.7 293.7 293.7 293.7 293.7 293.7 293.7 293.7
169000 141000 114000 100000 87000 74000 61000 55000 49000
4700 3970 3250 2890 2530 2170 1800 1620 1440
41.6 42.2 42.8 43.1 43.4 43.7 44.0 44.2 44.4
5100 4310 3540 3150 2770 2390 2020 1830 1650
68.1 68.1 68.1 68.1 68.1 68.1 68.1 68.1 68.1
225.0 225.0 225.0 225.0 225.0 225.0 225.0 225.0 225.0
S
In.4
a
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Z′
φvVn
S′
I
b
c
In.3
Kips
4 - 184
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
bf
d=h+2t f
tf
X
X
h
tw
f
BUILT-UP WIDE-FLANGE SECTIONS Dimensions and properties
Flange
Web
Axis X-X
Nominal Size (h / tw)
Wt. per Ft
Area Depth
In.
Lb.
In.2
In.
In.
In.
In.
In.
61× 20 (137)
429 361 327 293 259 225 208 191
126 106 96.2 86.2 76.2 66.2 61.2 56.2
65.00 64.00 63.50 63.00 62.50 62.00 61.75 61.50
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21⁄2 2 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄4 1
60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
389 328 298 267 236 206 190 175 160
115 96.5 87.5 78.5 69.5 60.5 56.0 51.5 47.0
61.00 60.00 59.50 59.00 58.50 58.00 57.75 57.50 57.25
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
21⁄2 2 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄4 1
56 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 56
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
7⁄
16
342 311 280 250 219 189 173 158 143
100 91.5 82.5 73.5 64.5 55.5 51.0 46.5 42.0
56.50 56.00 55.50 55.00 54.50 54.00 53.75 53.50 53.25
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
21⁄4 2 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄4 1
52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 52
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
306 279 252 224 197 170 156 143 129
90.0 82.0 74.0 66.0 58.0 50.0 46.0 42.0 38.0
52.50 52.00 51.50 51.00 50.50 50.00 49.75 49.50 49.25
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
21⁄4 2 13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄4 1
48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
3⁄
8
237 210 183
69.8 61.8 53.8
47.50 47.00 46.50
16 16 16
13⁄4 11⁄2 11⁄4
44 44 44
5⁄
16
5⁄
16
5⁄
16
57× 18 (128)
53× 18 (138)
49× 16 (128)
45× 16 (141)
d
Width Thick Depth Thick bf tf h tw
7⁄
8
3⁄
4
7⁄
8
3⁄
4
5⁄
8
7⁄
8
3⁄
4
5⁄
8
7⁄
8
3⁄
4
5⁄
8
S′
Z
In.3
In.3
106000 84800 74600 64600 54800 45100 40300 35600
3250 2650 2350 2050 1750 1450 1310 1160
83500 67000 58900 51000 43300 35600 31900 28100 24400
Z′
φvVn
b
c
In.3
In.3
Kips
34.6 35.2 35.4 35.7 36.0 36.3 36.4 36.6
3520 2870 2560 2240 1930 1610 1460 1310
56.3 56.3 56.3 56.3 56.3 56.3 56.3 56.3
165.8 165.8 165.8 165.8 165.8 165.8 165.8 165.8
2740 2230 1980 1730 1480 1230 1100 979 854
30.0 30.5 30.7 31.0 31.3 31.5 31.7 31.8 32.0
2980 2430 2160 1900 1630 1370 1240 1110 980
49.0 49.0 49.0 49.0 49.0 49.0 49.0 49.0 49.0
177.6 177.6 177.6 177.6 177.6 177.6 177.6 177.6 177.6
64000 56900 49900 43000 36300 29700 26400 23200 20000
2270 2030 1800 1570 1330 1100 983 866 750
25.9 26.2 26.4 26.6 26.9 27.1 27.2 27.4 27.5
2450 2200 1950 1700 1450 1210 1090 966 846
42.3 42.3 42.3 42.3 42.3 42.3 42.3 42.3 42.3
120.5 120.5 120.5 120.5 120.5 120.5 120.5 120.5 120.5
48900 43500 38100 32900 27700 22700 20200 17700 15300
1860 1670 1480 1290 1100 910 811 716 620
21.9 22.2 22.4 22.6 22.8 23.0 23.2 23.3 23.4
2030 1820 1610 1400 1200 1000 900 801 702
36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0
130.5 130.5 130.5 130.5 130.5 130.5 130.5 130.5 130.5
31500 27100 22700
1330 1150 976
18.7 18.9 19.1
1430 1240 1060
30.3 30.3 30.3
82.4 82.4 82.4
I
S
In.4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
a
PLATE GIRDER DESIGN
4 - 185
bf
tf
Flange
Nominal Size (h / tw)
Wt. per Ft
Area Depth
In.
Lb.
In.2
In.
In.
45× 16 (141)
156 142 129 116
45.8 41.8 37.8 33.8
46.00 45.75 45.50 45.25
16 16 16 16
d
Web
In.
In.
In.
1
44 44 44 44
5⁄
16
5⁄
16
5⁄
16
5⁄
16
8
3⁄
4
5⁄
8
X
X
h
tw
f
Axis X-X
Width Thick Depth Thick bf tf h tw
7⁄
d=h+2t f
BUILT-UP WIDE-FLANGE SECTIONS Dimensions and properties
S′
Z
In.3
In.3
801 713 626 538
19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6
I
S
In.4 18400 16300 14200 12200
a
Z′
φvVn
b
c
In.3
In.3
Kips
871 780 688 598
30.3 30.3 30.3 30.3
82.4 82.4 82.4 82.4
a S′ = Additional section modulus corresponding to 1⁄16″ increase in web thickness. b Z′ = Additional plastic section modulus corresponding to 1⁄16″ increase in web thickness. c φvVn = Maximum design end shear strength permissible without transverse stiffeners for tabulated web plate (LRFD Specification Section F2). φv = 0.90.
Notes: Based on their width-thickness ratios the girders in this table are noncompact shapes in accordance with LRFD Specification Section B5 for Fy = 36 ksi steel. For steels of higher yield strengths, check flanges for compliance with this section. This table does not consider local effects on the web due to concentrated loads. (See LRFD Specification Section K1.) See LRFD Specification Appendix G4 for design of stiffeners. Welds are not included in the tabulated weight per foot.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 186
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS
4 - 187
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS Nomenclature
E = modulus of elasticity of steel at 29,000 ksi I = moment of inertia of beam (in.4) L = total length of beam between reaction points (ft) Mmax = maximum moment (kip-in.) M1 = maximum moment in left section of beam (kip-in.) M2 = maximum moment in right section of beam (kip-in.) M3 = maximum positive moment in beam with combined end moment conditions (kip-in.) Mx = moment at distance x from end of beam (kip-in.) P = concentrated load (kips) P1 = concentrated load nearest left reaction (kips) P2 = concentrated load nearest right reaction, and of different magnitude than P1 (kips) R = end beam reaction for any condition of symmetrical loading (kips) R1 = left end beam reaction (kips) R2 = right end or intermediate beam reaction (kips) R3 = right end beam reaction (kips) V = maximum vertical shear for any condition of symmetrical loading (kips) V1 = maximum vertical shear in left section of beam (kips) V2 = vertical shear at right reaction point, or to left of intermediate reaction point of beam (kips) V3 = vertical shear at right reaction point, or to right of intermediate reaction point of beam (kips) Vx = vertical shear at distance x from end of beam (kips) W = total load on beam (kips) a = measured distance along beam (in.) b = measured distance along beam which may be greater or less than a (in.) l = total length of beam between reaction points (in.) w = uniformly distributed load per unit of length (kips per in.) w1 = uniformly distributed load per unit of length nearest left reaction (kips per in.) w2 = uniformly distributed load per unit of length nearest right reaction, and of different magnitude than w1 (kips per in.) x = any distance measured along beam from left reaction (in.) x1 = any distance measured along overhang section of beam from nearest reaction point (in.) ∆max = maximum deflection (in.) ∆a
= deflection at point of load (in.)
∆x
= deflection at any point x distance from left reaction (in.)
∆x1 = deflection of overhang section of beam at any distance from nearest reaction point (in.) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 188
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS Frequently Used Formulas The formulas given below are frequently required in structural designing. They are included herein for the convenience of those engineers who have infrequent use for such formulas and hence may find reference necessary. Variation from the standard nomenclature on page 4-187 is noted. BEAMS Flexural stress at extreme fiber: f = Mc / I = M / S Flexural stress at any fiber: f = My / I y = distance from neutral axis to fiber Average vertical shear (for maximum see below): v = V / A = V / dt (for beams and girders) Horizontal shearing stress at any section A-A: v = VQ / Ib Q = statical moment about the neutral axis of that portion of the cross section lying outside of section A-A b = width at section A-A (Intensity of vertical shear is equal to that of horizontal shear acting normal to it at the same point and both are usually a maximum at mid-height of beam.) Shear and deflection at any point: x and y are abscissa and ordinate respectively of a point on the neutral d 2y EI 2 = M axis, referred to axes of rectangular coordinates through a selected dx point of support. (First integration gives slopes; second integration gives deflections. Constants of integration must be determined.) CONTINUOUS BEAMS (the theorem of three moments) Uniform load: w1l31 w2l32 l1 l2 l1 l2 Ma + 2Mb + + Mc = − 1⁄4 + I1 I2 I2 I1 I1 I2 Concentrated loads: l1 l2 l1 l2 P1a1b1 a1 p2a2b2 b2 Ma + 2Mb + + Mc = − 1 + − 1 + I1 I2 I1 l1 I2 I2 I1 I2 Considering any two consecutive spans in any continuous structure: Ma, Mb, Mc = moments at left, center, and right supports respectively, of any pair of adjacent spans = length of left and right spans, respectively, of the pair l1 and l2 = moment of inertia of left and right spans, respectively I1 and I2 w1 and w2 = load per unit of length on left and right spans, respectively = concentrated loads on left and right spans, respectively P1 and P2 a1 and a2 = distance of concentrated loads from left support, in left and right spans, respectively = distance of concentrated loads from right support, in left and right spans, b1 and b2 respectively The above equations are for beam with moment of inertia constant in each span but differing in different spans, continuous over three or more supports. By writing such an equation for each successive pair of spans and introducing the known values (usually zero) of end moments, all other moments can be found.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS
4 - 189
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS Table of Concentrated Load Equivalents
n
Loading
P
2 P
3 P
4 P
P
P
5 P
P
P
Beam Fixed One End, Supported at Other
Beam Fixed Both Ends
a b c d e f g
0.125 — 0.500 — 0.013 1.000 1.000
0.070 0.125 0.375 0.625 0.005 1.000 0.415
0.042 0.083 — 0.500 0.003 0.667 0.300
a b c d e f g
0.250 — 0.500 — 0.021 2.000 0.800
0.156 0.188 0.313 0.688 0.009 1.500 0.477
0.125 0.125 — 0.500 0.005 1.000 0.400
a b c d e f g
0.333 — 1.000 — 0.036 2.667 1.022
0.222 0.333 0.667 1.333 0.015 2.667 0.438
0.111 0.222 — 1.000 0.008 1.778 0.333
a b c d e f g
0.500 — 1.500 — 0.050 4.000 0.950
0.266 0.469 1.031 1.969 0.021 3.750 0.428
0.188 0.313 — 1.500 0.010 2.500 0.320
a b c d e f g
0.600 — 2.000 — 0.063 4.800 1.008
0.360 0.600 1.400 2.600 0.027 4.800 0.424
0.200 0.400 — 2.000 0.013 3.200 0.312
Coeff.
∞
P
Simple Beam
P
Maximum positive moment (kip-ft): aPL Maximum negative moment (kip-ft): bPL Pinned end reaction (kips): cP Fixed end reaction (kips): dP Maximum deflection (in): ePl3 / EI
Equivalent simple span uniform load (kips): f P Deflection coefficient for equivalent simple span uniform load: g Number of equal load spaces: n Span of beam (ft): L Span of beam (in): l
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 190
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 1. SIMPLE BEAM—UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . = wl
l wl
x
R
R
l 2
l 2
V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Vx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = w − x
M max Shear
V
Mx
l 2
∆x
Moment
wl 2 (at center) . . . . . . . . . . . . = 8 wx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = (l − x) 2
∆ max (at center) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mmax
wl 2
R=V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5wl 4 384 EI wx = (l2 − 2lx 2 + x3 ) 24EI
=
2. SIMPLE BEAM—LOAD INCREASING UNIFORMLY TO ONE END Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . = l x
R 1 = V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W
R2
R1
V1
Shear
V2
max
Vx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M max (at x = Mx
M max
l = .5774 l) . . . . . . . √3
√ 158 √
∆x
W Wx 2 − 2 3 l 2Wl = = .1283 Wl 9√ 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
∆ max (at x = l 1 −
Moment
W 3 2W = 3
=
R 2 = V2
.5774 l
= .5193 l) . .
16W = 1.0264W 9√ 3
Wx 3l2
(l2 − x2 )
= 0.1304
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Wl 3 EI
Wx 180 EIl2
(3x4 − 10l2 x2 + 7l4 )
3. SIMPLE BEAM—LOAD INCREASING UNIFORMLY TO CENTER 4W 3 W = 2 W
Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . = l x
W
R
R=V R
l 2
Vx
l 2
V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 2
(when x < ) . . . . . . . . . . =
M max (at center) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shear
V
Mx M max
∆x
(l2 − 4x2)
1
l 2
(when x < ) . . . . . . . . . . = Wx −
∆ max (at center) . . . . . . . . . . . . Moment
2l2 Wl = 6
l 2
2
=
(when x < ) . . . . . . . . . . =
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Wl 3 60EI Wx 480 EIl2
2x 2 3l2
(5l2 − 4x2 )2
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS
4 - 191
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 4. SIMPLE BEAM—UNIFORMLY LOAD PARTIALLY DISTRIBUTED l b wb
a
R
1
R2
x
V1
wb (2c + b) 2l wb (2a + b) R 2 = V2 (max. when a > c) . . . . . . . = 2l
R 1 = V1 (max. when a < c) . . . . . . . =
c
Vx
(when x > a and < (a + b)) . . . = R 1 − w(x − a)
M max Mx
R1 R1 at x = a + w . . . . . . . . = R 1 a + 2w (when x < a) . . . . . . . . . = R 1x
Mx
(when x > a and < (a + b)) . . . = R 1x −
Mx
(when x > (a + b)) . . . . . . . = R 2(l − x)
Shear
V2 R1 a+ w M max
Moment
w (x − a)2 2
5. SIMPLE BEAM—UNIFORM LOAD PARTIALLY DISTRIBUTED AT ONE END R 1 = V1
max
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .=
l a wa
R 2 = V2
R
1
R2
x
V1
R1 w M max
wa 2 2l
Vx
(when x < a) . . . . . . . . . = R 1 − wx
M max
R at x = 1 w
Mx
(when x < a) . . . . . . . . . = R 1x −
Mx
(when x > a) . . . . . . . . . = R 2 (l − x)
∆x
(when x < a) . . . . . . . . . =
wx (a 2 (2l − a)2 − 2ax 2 (2l − a) + lx 3 ) 24EIl
∆x
(when x > a) . . . . . . . . . =
wa 2 (l − x) (4xl − 2x2 − a 2 ) 24EIl
V2 Shear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .=
wa (2l − a) 2l
. . . . . . . . . .=
Moment
R 21 2w wx 2 2
6. SIMPLE BEAM—UNIFORM LOAD PARTIALLY DISTRIBUTED AT EACH END
l
a w1 a R1
b
c
w2 c R2
x
R 1 = V1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .=
w 1a(2l − a) + w 2 c2 2l
R 2 = V2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .=
w 2c(2l − c) + w 1 a2 2l
Vx
(when x < a) . . . . . . . . . = R 1 − w 1x
Vx
(when x > a and < (a + b))
Vx
(when x > (a + b)) . . . . . . . = R 2 − w 2 (l − x)
= R 1 − w 1a
R1 R1 = at x = w when R 1 < w 1a 2w 1 1 R 22 R1 at x = l − w when R 2 < w 2 c = 2w 2 2 2
V1
Shear
R1 w1
V2
M max M max
M max
Mx Moment
Mx Mx
w 1x2 2 w1a (when x > a and < (a + b)) . . . = R 1x − (2x − a) 2
(when x < a) . . . . . . . . . = R 1x −
(when x > (a + b)) . . . . . . . = R 2(l − x) −
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
w 2(l − x)2 2
4 - 192
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 7. SIMPLE BEAM—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT CENTER Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . . . = 2P
l P
x
R
l 2
R=V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
P 2
M max
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pl 4
Mx
Px 1 when x < . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2 2
∆ max
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . . . =
∆x
1 Px (3l2 − 4x2 ) when x < . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2 48EI
R
l 2
V
Shear
V
M max
Moment
Pl 3 48EI
8. SIMPLE BEAM—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT ANY POINT Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . . . =
l x
P
R
1
a
Pb l
R 2 = V2 (max when a > b ) . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pa l
M max
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pab l
Mx
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pbx l
∆ max
at x =
Pab (a + 2b)√ 3a(a + 2b) 27EIl
∆a
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pa 2b 2 3EIl
∆x
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pbx 2 (l − b 2 − x2 ) 6EIl
V1
V2 Shear
M max
Moment
l2
R 1 = V1 (max when a < b ) . . . . . . . . . . . =
R2
b
8Pab
a(a + 2b) √ when a > b 3
. . . =
9. SIMPLE BEAM—TWO EQUAL CONCENTRATED LOADS SYMMETRICALLY PLACED Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . . . =
l x
P
P
R
R
a
a
V
Shear
V
M max
Moment
8Pa l
R=V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =P
M max
(between loads) . . . . . . . . . . . . = Pa
Mx
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = Px
∆ max
(at center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pa (3l2 − 4a2 ) 24EI
∆x
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Px (3la − 3a 2 − x2 ) 6EI
∆x
(when x > a and < (l − a)) . . . . . . . =
Pa (3lx − 3x2 − a 2) 6EI
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS
4 - 193
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 10. SIMPLE BEAM—TWO EQUAL CONCENTRATED LOADS UNSYMMETRICALLY PLACED l P
x
P
R
1
a
b
R2
V1
V2
Shear
M2
M1
Moment
R 1 = V1
(max. when a < b ) . . . . . . . . . =
P (l − a + b) l
R 2 = V2
(max. when a > b ) . . . . . . . . . =
P (l − b + a) l
Vx
(when x > a and < (l − b)) . . . . . =
P (b − a) l
M1
(max. when a > b ) . . . . . . . . . = R 1 a
M2
(max. when a < b ) . . . . . . . . . = R 2 b
Mx
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . = R 1 x
Mx
(when x > a and < (l − b)) . . . . . = R 1 x − P(x − a)
11. SIMPLE BEAM—TWO UNEQUAL CONCENTRATED LOADS UNSYMMETRICALLY PLACED l
x
P1
P2
R
1
a
b
R2
V1
V2
Shear
M2
M1
Moment
R 1 = V1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
P1 (l − a) + P2 b l
R 2 = V2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
P1 a + P2 (l − b) l
Vx
(when x > a and < (l − b)) . . . . . = R 1 − P1
M1
(max. when R 1 < P1) . . . . . . . . = R 1 a
M2
(max. when R 2 < P2) . . . . . . . . = R 2 b
Mx
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . = R 1 x
Mx
(when x > a and < (l − b)) . . . . . = R 1 x − P(x − a)
12. BEAM FIXED AT ONE END, SUPPORTED AT OTHER—UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . . . = wl R 1 = V1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
3wl 8
R 2 = V2 max
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
5wl 8
Vx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = R 1 − wx
M max
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
l
wl R
1
R2
x
V1
Shear
V2
3 l 8
l 4
M1
Moment
M max
wl 2 8
Mx
9 3 wl 2 at x = l . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 128 8
Mx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = R1x −
∆ max ∆x
wx 2 2
l wl 4 33 ) = .4215 l . . . = at x = (1 + √ 16 185 EI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
wx 3 (l − 3lx + 2x3 ) 48EI
4 - 194
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 13. BEAM FIXED AT ONE END, SUPPORTED AT OTHER—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT CENTER
l
l 2
1
3P 2
R 1 = V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
5P 15
R 2 = V2 max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
11P 16
M max (at fixed end) . . . . . . . . . . . =
3Pl 16
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . . =
5Pl 32
P
x
R
Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . =
l 2
R
2
M1
V1
Shear
V2
Mx Mx
M1
∆ max
Moment
M max
3 11 l
∆x ∆x ∆x
l 5Px when x < . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2 16 l 11x l when x > . . . . . . . . . . . . = P − 2 2 16 3 3 at x = l√ 15 = .4472 l . . . . . . . = Pl = .009317 PlEI 48EI√ 5 (at point of load) . . . . . . . . . . =
7PL 3 768 EI
Px l (3l2 − 5x2 ) when x < . . . . . . . . . . . . = 96EI 2 l P (x − l)2(11x − 2l) when x > . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2 96EI
14. BEAM FIXED AT ONE END, SUPPORTED AT OTHER—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT ANY POINT R 1 = V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = R 2 = V2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = l
P
x R
1
a
b
R2
V1
Shear
Pa 2l3
(a + 2l)
(3l2 − a2 )
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . . = R 1 a
M2
(at fixed end) . . . . . . . . . . . =
Mx
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . = R 1 x
Mx
(when x > a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . = R 1 x − P(x − a)
∆ max when a < .414 l at x = l
∆ max when a > .414 l at x = l Moment Pa R2
2l3
M
V2
M1
Pb 2
M2
∆a
Pab 2l2
(a + l)
Pa(l2 + a2 )3 (l2 + a 2) = 2 2 (3l − a ) 3EI(3l2 − a2 )2
.......... √ 2l + a a
=
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . . =
∆
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . =
∆x
(when x > a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . =
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Pab 2 6EI
2l+ a √
Pa 2 b3 12EIl3 2
Pb x 12EIl3 Pa 12EIl2
a
(3l + a) (3al 2 − 2lx 2 − ax 2) (l − x)2 (3l2 x − a 3 x − 2a 2l)
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS
4 - 195
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 15. BEAM FIXED AT BOTH ENDS—UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOADS 2wl 3 wl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2
Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . = l
x
R=V
wl
R
R l 2
l 2
V V
Shear .2113 l
M1
Moment
M max
M max
Vx M max
(at ends) . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
M1
(at center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Mx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
∆ max ∆x
l 2 wl 2 12 wl 2 24 w (6lx − l2 − 6x2 ) 12 wl 4 384 EI wx 2 (l − x)2 24EI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = w − x
(at center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
16. BEAM FIXED AT BOTH ENDS—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT CENTER l
R
Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . = P P
x l 2
R=V R
l 2
V V
Shear
M max Mx ∆ max
l 4
M max
Moment
M max
M max
∆x
P 2 Pl (at center and ends) . . . . . . . . = 8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
when x <
P l . . . . . . . . . . . = (4x − l) 8 2 Pl 3 (at center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . = 192 EI
when x <
l Px 2 (3l − 4x) . . . . . . . . . . . = 2 48EI
17. BEAM FIXED AT BOTH ENDS—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT ANY POINT R 1 = V1 (max. when a < b ) . . . . . . . . = R 2 = V2 (max. when a > b ) . . . . . . . . = l
P
x
R1
b
a
R2
V1
Ma M1
Moment
M2
l3 Pa 2
(3a + b)
(a + 3b) l3 Pab 2
M1
(max. when a < b ) . . . . . . . . =
M2
(max. when a > b ) . . . . . . . . =
Ma
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . =
Mx
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . = R 1 x −
∆ max
2Pa 3b 2 2al . . . . = when a > b at x = 3a + b 3EI(3a + b)2
∆a
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . =
∆x
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . =
V2
Shear
Pb 2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
l2 Pa 2 b l2 2Pa 2b 2 l3 Pab 2 l2
Pa 3 b3 3EIl3 Pb 2 x2 6EIl2
(3al − 3ax − bx)
4 - 196
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 18. CANTILEVER BEAM—LOAD INCREASING UNIFORMLY TO FIXED END 8 3
Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . = W l
R=V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =W
W
Vx
R
x2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =W
l2
x
M max (at fixed end) . . . . . . . . . . . . = V
Shear
Mx M max
Moment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
∆ max (at free end) . . . . . . . . . . . . . = ∆x
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Wl 3 Wx 3 3l2 Wl 3 15EI W 60EIl2
(x5 − 5l4 x + 4l5 )
19. CANTILEVER BEAM—UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . = 4wl
l
R = V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = wl
wl
Vx
R x
V
M max
Moment
M max (at fixed end) . . . . . . . . . . . . =
wl 2 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
wx 2 2
∆ max (at free end) . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
wl 4 8EI
∆x
w (x 4 − 4l3 x + 3l4 ) 24EI
Mx
Shear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = wx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
20. BEAM FIXED AT ONE END, FREE TO DEFLECT VERTICALLY BUT NOT ROTATE AT OTHER—UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . = l
R = V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = wl
wl M R
Vx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = wx
x
M max (at fixed end) . . . . . . . . . . . . = V
Shear
Mx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
.4227 l M1 Moment
8 wl 3
wl 2 3 w 2 (l − 3x2 ) 6
∆ max (at deflected end) . . . . . . . . . . =
wl 4 24EI
∆x
w(l2 − x2 )2 24EI
M max
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS
4 - 197
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 21. CANTILEVER BEAM—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT ANY POINT Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . = R=V
8Pb l
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =P
l
M max (at fixed end) . . . . . . . . . . . . = Pb
P
x
a
(when x > a) . . . . . . . . . . . . = P(x − a)
R
Mx
V
∆ max (at free end) . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pb 2 (3l − b) 6EI
∆a
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . . =
Pb 3 3EI
∆x
(when x < a) . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pb 2 (3l − 3x − b) 6EI
∆x
(when x > a) . . . . . . . . . . . . =
P(l − x)2 (3b − l + x) 6EI
b
Shear
Mmax
Moment
22. CANTILEVER BEAM—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT FREE END l
Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . = 8P
P
R=V
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =P
R
x
M max (at fixed end) . . . . . . . . . . . . = Pl Mx
V
Shear
M max Moment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = Px
∆ max (at free end) . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pl 3 3EI
∆x
P (2l3 − 3l2x + x3 ) 6EI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
23. BEAM FIXED AT ONE END, FREE TO DEFLECT VERTICALLY BUT NOT ROTATE AT OTHER—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT DEFLECTED END Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . = 4P
l
R=V
P M x
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =P
R
M max (at both ends) . . . . . . . . . . . . =
V
Mx
l 2
l 2
Moment
M max
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = P − x
Shear M max
Pl 2
3
∆ max (at deflected end) . . . . . . . . . . =
pl 12EI
∆x
P(l − x)2 (l + 2x) 12EI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 198
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 24. BEAM OVERHANGING ONE SUPPORT—UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD
l
x
R1
w(l +a)
a2 l 1 – 2) 2 ( l
a x1
R 2 = V2 + V3 . . . . . . . . . . . =
w (l + a)2 2l
V2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = wa
V3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
V3
Moment
(between supports) . . . . . = R 1 − wx
M2
a 2 w l 2 2 1 − 2 . . . . . = 2 (l + a) (l − a) 2 l 8l wa 2 (at R 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . = 2
M 1 at x = M2
M1
a2 l (1 – 2 ) l
w 2 (l + a2 ) 2l
Vx 1 (for overhang) . . . . . . . = w(a − x 1) V2
Shear
w 2 (l − a2 ) 2l
Vx
R2
V1
R 1 = V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
M x (between supports) . . . . . =
wx 2 (l − a 2 − xl) 2l
M x1 (for overhang) . . . . . . . =
w (a − x1 )2 2
∆x
wx (l4 − 2l2 x2 + lx 3 − 2a 2l2 + 2a 2x 2) 24EIl
(between supports) . . . . . =
∆ x 1 (for overhang) . . . . . . . =
wx 1 (4a2 l − l3 + 6a 2 x1 − 4ax 21 + x31 ) 24EI
25. BEAM OVERHANGING ONE SUPPORT—UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD ON OVERHANG R 1 = V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = R2
V1 + V2 . . . . . . . . . . . . =
x
a x1
Vx 1 (for overhang) . . . . . . . = w(a − x 1)
wa
R1
R2
M max (at R 2) . . . . . . . . . . . =
wa 2 2
M x (between supports) . . . . . =
wa 2 x 2l
M x1 (for overhang) . . . . . . . =
w (a − x 1)2 2
V2 V1
Shear
∆ max between supports at x = Moment
wa (2l + a) 2l
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = wa
V2 l
wa 2 2l
M max
wa 2 l2 l wa 2 l2 = 0.03208 = EI 18√ 3 EI √3
∆ max (for overhang at x1 = a ) . . . =
wa 3 (4l + 3a) 24EI
∆x
wa 2x 2 (l − x 2) 12EIl
(between supports) . . . . . =
∆ x 1 (for overhang) . . . . . . . =
wx 1 (4a2 l + 6a 2x 1 − 4ax 21 + x31) 24EI
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS
4 - 199
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 26. BEAM OVERHANGING ONE SUPPORT—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT END OF OVERHANG Pa l P = (l + a) l =P = Pa Pax = l = P(a − x 1)
R 1 = V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = a x1
l
x
R 2 = V1 + V2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P
R2
R1
V2
V2 M max
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (at R 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mx
(between supports) . . . . . . . . . .
M x1
(for overhang) . . . . . . . . . . . . . l Pal 2 Pal 2 = .06415 . . . . . = between supports at x = EI √3 9√ 3 EI
∆ max
V1
Shear
∆ max M max
Moment
∆x ∆ x1
Pa 2 (l + a) 3EI Pax 2 (between supports) . . . . . . . . . . = (l − x2) 6EIl Px 1 (for overhang) . . . . . . . . . . . . . = (2al + 3ax 1 − x21 ) 6EI
(for overhang at x1 = a) . . . . . . . . =
27. BEAM OVERHANGING ONE SUPPORT—UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD BETWEEN SUPPORTS Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . . . = wl a
l
x
R
l 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Vx
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = w − x
x1
wl
l 2
R
M max Mx
V V
Shear M max
wl 2
R=V
∆ max
(at center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = (at center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
∆x
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
∆ x1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Moment
l 2 wl 2 8 wx (l − x) 2 5wl 4 384 EI wx 2 (l − 2lx 2 + x3) 24EI 3 wl x1 24EI
28. BEAM OVERHANGING ONE SUPPORT—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT ANY POINT BETWEEN SUPPORTS Total Equiv. Uniform Load . . . . . . . . . . = R 1 = V1 (max. when a < b ) . . . . . . . . . . . = l
x
R1
R 2 = V2 (max. when a > b ) . . . . . . . . . . . =
x1
P
R2 a
b
V1 V2
Shear M max
Moment
M max
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Mx
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
∆ max
at x =
∆a
(at point of load) . . . . . . . . . . . . =
∆x
(when x < a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
∆x
(when x > a ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
∆ x1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
a(a + 2b) √ when a > b 3
. . . =
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8Pab l2 Pb l Pa l Pab l Pbx l Pab (a + 2b)√ 3a(a + 2b) 27EIl Pa 2b 2 3EIl Pbx 2 (l − b 2 − x2 ) 6EIl Pa(l − x) (2lx − x 2 − a2 ) 6EIl Pabx1 (l + a) 6EIl
4 - 200
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 29. CONTINUOUS BEAM—TWO EQUAL SPANS—UNIFORM LOAD ON ONE SPAN
x
Total Equiv. Uniform Load
=
49 wl 64
R 1 = V1 . . . . . . . . . . .
=
7 wl 16
R 2 = V2 + V3 . . . . . . . . .
=
5 wl 8
R 3 = V3 . . . . . . . . . . .
=−
wl
R1
R2
l
R3 l
V1
V3 V2
7l 16
Shear
V2
. . . . . . . . . . . . =
M max at x =
M max M1
7 l 16
. . . . . =
1 wl 16
9 wl 16 49 wl 2 512
M1
(at support R 2) . . . . =
1 wl 2 16
Mx
(when x < l) . . . . . =
wx (7l − 8x) 16
Moment
∆ max (at 0.472 l from R 1 ) . .
= .0092 wl 4 / EI
30. CONTINUOUS BEAM—TWO EQUAL SPANS—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT CENTER OF ONE SPAN
P
l 2
l 2
R2
R1
l
R3
Total Equiv. Uniform Load
=
13 P 8
R 1 = V1 . . . . . . . . . . .
=
13 P 32
R 2 = V2 + V3 . . . . . . . . .
=
11 P 16
R 3 = V3 . . . . . . . . . . .
=−
l
V1
V3 Shear
V2
V2
. . . . . . . . . . . . =
M1
M1
Moment
19 P 32
=
13 Pl 64
(at support R 2) . . . . =
3 Pl 32
M max (at point of load) . . .
M max
3 P 32
∆ max (at 0.480 l from R 1 ) . .
= .015 Pl 3 / EI
31. CONTINUOUS BEAM—TWO EQUAL SPANS—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT ANY POINT P
a
R1
b
R2
l
R3 l
V1 Shear
V2
M max
=
R 2 = V2 + V3 . . . . . . . . .
=
R 3 = V3 . . . . . . . . . . .
=−
V3
V2
. . . . . . . . . . . . =
M max (at point of load) . . . M1
Moment
Pb
R 1 = V1 . . . . . . . . . . .
M1
=
(at support R 2) . . . . =
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4l3 Pa 2l3
(4l2 − a(l + a)) (2l2 + b(l + a))
Pab 4l3
Pa 4l3
(4l2 + b(l + a))
Pab 4l3 Pab 4l2
(l + a)
(4l2 − a(l + a)) (l + a)
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS
4 - 201
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 32. BEAM—UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD AND VARIABLE END MOMENTS
R 1 = V1
. . . . . . . . . . .
=
wl M 1 − M 2 + 2 l
R 2 = V2
. . . . . . . . . . .
=
wl M 1 − M 2 − 2 l
l
x
M1
wl
M
1
l 2
R2
2
V
1
Shear
V2
l M 1 − M 2 M 3 at x = + . . wl 2
=
M3 M2
M1
b
. . . . . . . . . . . . . = w − x +
Vx
M >M
R1
2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Mx
M1 − M2 l
2 wl 2 M 1 + M 2 (M 1 − M 2) − + 8 2 2wl 2
wx (l − x) + 2
M − M 2 1 x − M1 l
b
Moment
M + M M − M l √ − + 4 w wl 2
b
(to locate inflection points) =
∆x =
wx 24EI
1
2
1
2
2
8M 1l 4M 2l 4M 1 4M 2 2 12M 1 3 2 x − 2l + wl − wl x + w x + l − w − w
33. BEAM—CONCENTRATED LOAD AT CENTER AND VARIABLE END MOMENTS
M1
l P
x
R
1
l 2
M1 >M
2
M2
l
R 1 = V1
. . . . . . . . . . . =
P M1 − M2 + 2 l
R 2 = V2
. . . . . . . . . . . =
P M1 − M2 − 2 l
R2
2
Pl M 1 + M 2 − 4 2
M 3 (at center) . . . . . . . .
=
l M x when x < . . . . . . 2
P M1 − M2 x − M1 = + l 2
l M x when x > . . . . . . 2
=
V
1
V2
Shear
M3
Moment M1
M2
(M 1 − M 2)x P (l − x) + − M1 2 l
8(l − x) l Px 2 3l − 4x2 − ∆ x when x < = [M 1 (2l − x) + M 2 (l + x)] 2 48EI Pl
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 202
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 34. CONTINUOUS BEAM—THREE EQUAL SPANS—ONE END SPAN UNLOADED wl
A
wl B
l
RA = 0.383 w l
C
l
0.583 w l
0.383 w l
D
l
RC = 0.450 w l
RB = 1.20 w l
RD = –0.033 w l
0.033 w l 0.617 w l
Shear
0.033 w l 0.417 w l
–0.1167 w l 2 +0.0735 w l 2
–0.0333 wl 2
+0.0534 w l 2
Moment 0.383 l
0.583 l
∆max (0.430 l from A) = 0.0059 wl 4/ El
35. CONTINUOUS BEAM—THREE EQUAL SPANS—END SPANS LOADED wl
A
wl B
l
RA = 0.450 w l
C
l
RB = 0.550 wl
D
l
RC = 0.550 w l
RD = 0.450 w l
0.550 wl
0.450 wl
0.450 w l
0.550 w l
Shear
–0.050 w l 2 +0.1013 w l 2
+0.1013 w l 2
Moment 0.450 l
0.450 l
∆max (0.479 l from A or D) = 0.0099 wl 4/ El
36. CONTINUOUS BEAM—THREE EQUAL SPANS—ALL SPANS LOADED wl
A
wl B
l
wl C
l
RB = 1.10 w l
RA = 0.400 w l
0.500 w l
0.400 w l
0.400 w l 0.500 w l
–0.100 w l 2
–0.100 w l 2 +0.080 w l 2
RD = 0.400 w l
0.600 w l 0.600 w l
Shear
D
l
R C = 1.10 w l
+0.080 w l 2
+0.025w l 2
Moment 0.400 l
0.500 l
0.500 l
0.400 l
∆max (0.446 l from A or D) = 0.0069 w / El l4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS
4 - 203
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 37. CONTINUOUS BEAM—FOUR EQUAL SPANS—THIRD SPAN UNLOADED wl
wl
A
B
l
RA = 0.380 w l
wl C
l
RE = 0.442 w l
0.558 w l 0.620 w l
Shear
0.442 w l 0.040 w l
0.397 w l
–0.058 w l 2
–0.0179 w l 2
–0.1205 w l 2
+0.0977 w l 2
+0.0611 w l 2
2
+0.072 w l
E
l
R D = 0.598 w l
0.603 w l
0.380 w l
D
l
RC = 0.357 w l
RB = 1.223 w l
Moment 0.603 l 0.442 l
0.380 l
∆ max (0.475 l from E) = 0.0094 wl 4/ El
38. CONTINUOUS BEAM—FOUR EQUAL SPANS—LOAD FIRST AND THIRD SPANS wl
wl
A
B
l
RA = 0.446 w l
C
l
RC = 0.464 w l
RB = 0.572 w l
RE = –0.054 w l 0.054 w l
0.518 w l
–0.0536 w l 2
–0.0357 w l 2
–0.0536 w l 2 +0.0996 w l
E
0.054 w l
0.554 w l
Shear
l
R D = 0.572 w l
0.482 w l
0.018 w l
0.446 w l
D
l
+0.0805 w l 2
2
Moment 0.518 l
0.446 l
∆ max (0.477 l from A) = 0.0097 wl 4/ El
39. CONTINUOUS BEAM—FOUR EQUAL SPANS—ALL SPANS LOADED wl
wl
A
B
l
0.607 w l
Shear
+0.0772
D
l
l
RD = 1.143 w l
+0.0364 w l 2
0.393 w l 0.536 w l
–0.1071 w l 2 +0.0364 w l 2 +0.0772 w l 2
Moment 0.536 l
E RE = 0.393 w l
0.607 w l 0.464 w l
–0.0714 w l 2
–0.1071 w l 2 wl 2
wl
RC = 0.928 w l
0.464 w l
0.536 w l
0.393 w l
C
l
RB = 1.143 w l
RA = 0.393 w l
wl
0.536 l 0.393 l
0.393 l
∆ max (0.440 l from A and D) = 0.0065 w l 4/ El
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 204
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS For Various Static Loading Conditions For meaning of symbols, see page 4-187 40. SIMPLE BEAM—ONE CONCENTRATED MOVING LOAD x P R2
R1 l
R 1 max = V1 max (at x = 0) . . . . . . . . . . .
=P
1 M max at point of load, when x = . . . . . 2
=
Pl 4
41. SIMPLE BEAM—TWO EQUAL CONCENTRATED MOVING LOADS R 1 max = V1 max (at x = 0) . . . . . . . . . . .
a l
= P 2 −
when a (2 − √ 2 )l . . . . . = .586 l
l
with one load at center of span =
Pl 4
(Case 40)
42. SIMPLE BEAM—TWO UNEQUAL CONCENTRATED MOVING LOADS R 1 max = V1 max (at x = 0) . . . . . . . . . . .
under P1 , at x =
P1 > P2
x
a P1
R1
P2
R2
M max
P 2a 1 l− 2 P1 + P2
= P1 + P2
l−a l
= (P1 + P2 )
x2 l
M max may occur with larger
load at center of span and other l
load off span (Case 40) . . . =
P1 l 4
GENERAL RULES FOR SIMPLE BEAMS CARRYING MOVING CONCENTRATED LOADS
l
P1
a C.G.
R1
P2 R2
x
b l 2
M
Moment
The maximum shear due to moving concentrated loads occurs at one support when one of the loads is at that support. With several moving loads, the location that will produce maximum shear must be determined by trial. The maximum bending moment produced by moving concentrated loads occurs under one of the loads when that load is as far from one support as the center of gravity of all the moving loads on the beam is from the other support. In the accompanying diagram, the maximum bending moment occurs under load P1 when x = b . It should also be noted that this condition occurs when the centerline of the span is midway between the center of gravity of loads and the nearest concentrated load.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS
4 - 205
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS Design properties of cantilevered beams Equal loads, equally spaced No. Spans
System a
2
M1 M1
M1
A
B
3
A
b
b
M3
M3
M2
M2
M3
C
D
c
c
C
D
M1
M1 M1
M1
M4
A
E
4
A
E
d
M1 M1
b
D
M1
D M1 M1
A
F
H
f
f
H M3
C M1
M5
H
G
3
F
A
4 P 2
P
P
5 P
P 2
P 2
P
P
P
P
Moments
P
P 2
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5
0.086PL 0.096PL 0.063PL 0.039PL 0.051PL
0.167PL 0.188PL 0.125PL 0.083PL 0.104PL
0.250PL 0.278PL 0.167PL 0.083PL 0.139PL
0.333PL 0.375PL 0.250PL 0.167PL 0.208PL
0.429PL 0.480PL 0.300PL 0.171PL 0.249PL
Reactions
P
D M1
M3
H
M2 d
e
A B C D E F G H
0.414P 1.172P 0.438P 1.063P 1.086P 1.109P 0.977P 1.000P
0.833P 2.333P 0.875P 2.125P 2.167P 2.208P 1.958P 2.000P
1.250P 3.500P 1.333P 3.167P 3.250P 3.333P 2.917P 3.000P
1.667P 4.667P 1.750P 4.250P 4.333P 4.417P 3.917P 4.000P
2.071P 5.857P 2.200P 5.300P 5.429P 5.557P 4.871P 5.000P
Cantilever Dimensions
P
H
M3
P 2
M3 M3
M3
M3
P 2
b
M3 M3
M3
2 P 2
P
C
f
M3
M3
G
∞
D
f
M3
M5
M2
H
M3 H e M3
d
M3 M3
f
M3 M3
b
M3 M3
H
f
M3
A
f
f
M3
G
b
C M1
F
M3
F
D M1
G
M5
M2
d
M5
e M3
M1
C
e
M3
G
d
Typical Span Loading
H
M3
F
M2
M3
H e M3
d
M5
A
b
M3
M3 M3
M1 A
C
f
M3
M3
M1
n
D
f M3
M2 C
M2
G
F
5
≥7 (odd)
M3 M3
M5
A
≥6 (even)
b
e M3
a b c d e f
0.172L 0.125L 0.220L 0.204L 0.157L 0.147L
0.250L 0.200L 0.333L 0.308L 0.273L 0.250L
0.200L 0.143L 0.250L 0.231L 0.182L 0.167L
0.182L 0.143L 0.222L 0.211L 0.176L 0.167L
0.176L 0.130L 0.229L 0.203L 0.160L 0.150L
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
P 2
4 - 206
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
BEAM DIAGRAMS AND FORMULAS CONTINUOUS BEAMS MOMENT AND SHEAR COEFFICIENTS EQUAL SPANS, EQUALLY LOADED
MOMENT in terms of wl2
UNIFORM LOAD
SHEAR in terms of wl
+.07
+.07 –.125
+.08
+.025
0 3 8
+.08
–.10
–.10
–.073
–.105 0 15 38
+.078
+.078 –.106
–.077
–.077
–.086
–.106 0 41 104
+.078
+.078 –.106
–.077
–.085
–.085
–.077
–.106 0 36 142
MOMENT in terms of Pl
+.156
23 20 38 63 55 104
86 75 142
18 19 38
67 70 142
4 0 10
15 17 28
19 18 38
53 53 104
72 71 142
CONCENTRATED LOADS at center
+.156
5 6 10
13 13 28
43 51 104
0 8
6 5 10 17 15 28
0 11 28
+.078 –.073
3
5
8
0 4 10
+.077 +.036 +.036 +.077 –.107 –.071 –.107 +.078 –.105
5
11 0 28
20 23 38
51 49 104
71 72 142
P
15 0 38
55 63 104
70 67 142
41 0 104
75 86 142
36 0 142
SHEAR in terms of P
P
+.157 .31 +.178
+.10
P
+.175
–.15
+.13
+.11
–.119
–.119
+.222
+.111
+.111
.65
P
+.171
P
.50
.50
P
.65
.35
P
P
P
–.158 .34
MOMENT in terms of Pl
.31
–.15
+.11
–.138
.69 P
.35 +.171
.69
+.222
.66
.54
.46
.50
.50
.46
.54
CONCENTRATED LOADS at 1⁄3 points
.66
.34
SHEAR in terms of P P
P
P
P
–.333
.67 +.156
+.244
+.066 –.267
+.066 +.156 –.267
+.244
P .73
+.24
+.146
+.076 –.281
+.099 +.122 –.211
+.122 +.099 –.211
+.076 +.146 –.281
+.24
P .72
MOMENT in terms of Pl +.258
+.267 +.267 +.022 +.022 +.258 -.465
P 1.28
P
P
1.0
1.0
+.155 +.303 +.204 +.155 +.303 +.079 +.006 +.054 +.079 +.079 +.054 +.277 +.006 +.079 -.394 -.296 -.296 -.394
1.97
P P P
P P P
1.11
1.89
P
P
.93
.73
1.07
P
P 1.28
.72
1.87
1.40
P P P 1.97
P P P 1.50
P P P 1.60
P
SHEAR in terms of P P P P
+.314 +.128 +.314 +.097 +.003 +.003 +.097 +.282 -.372 -.372
P 1.27
CONCENTRATED LOADS at 1⁄4 points
1.13
+.277
1.0 P
.93
.67
P
1.0
P
1.03
+.282
1.33
P
1.27 P
1.07
1.33
1.50
P P P 1.50
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.50
1.03
P P P 1.87
1.13
P P P 1.40
1.60
P P P 1.89
1.11
FLOOR DEFLECTIONS AND VIBRATIONS
4 - 207
FLOOR DEFLECTIONS AND VIBRATIONS Serviceability
Serviceability checks are necessary in design to provide for the satisfactory performance of structures. Chapter L of the LRFD Specification and Commentary contains general guidelines on serviceability. In contrast with the factored forces used to determine the required strength, the (unfactored) working loads are used in serviceability calculations. The primary concern regarding the serviceability of floor beams is the prevention of excessive deflections and vibrations. The use of higher strength steels and composite construction has resulted in shallower and lighter beams. Serviceability has become a more important consideration than in the past, as the design of more beams is governed by deflection and vibration criteria. Deflections and Camber
Criteria for acceptable vertical deflections have traditionally been set by the design engineer, based on the intended use of the given structure. What is appropriate for an office building, for example, may not be satisfactory for a hospital. An illustration of deflection criteria is the following: 1. Live load deflections shall not exceed a specified fraction of the span (e.g., 1⁄360) nor a specific quantity (e.g., one inch). A deeper and/or heavier beam shall be selected, if necessary, to meet these requirements. 2. Under dead load, plus a given portion of the design live load (say, 10 psf), the floor shall be theoretically level. Where feasible and necessary, upward camber of the beam shall be specified. Regarding camber, the engineer is cautioned that: 1. It is unrealistic to expect precision in cambering. The limits and tolerances given in Part 1 of of this Manual for cambering of rolled beams are typical for mill camber. Kloiber (1989) states that camber tolerances are dependent on the method used (hot or cold cambering) and whether done at the mill or the fabrication shop. According to the AISC Code of Standard Practice, Section 6.4.5: “When members are specified on the contract documents as requiring camber, the shop fabrication tolerance shall be −0 / +1⁄2 in. for members 50 ft and less in length, or −0 / + (1⁄2 in. + 1⁄8 in. for each 10 ft or fraction thereof in excess of 50 ft in length) for members over 50 ft. Members received from the rolling mill with 75 percent of the specified camber require no further cambering. For purposes of inspection, camber must be measured in the fabricator’s shop in the unstressed condition.” Some of the camber may be lost in transportation prior to placement of the beam, due to vibration. 2. There are two methods for erection of floors: uniform slab thickness and level floor. As a consequence of possible overcamber, the latter may result in a thinner concrete slab for composite action and fire protection at midspan, and may cause the shear studs to protrude above the slab. 3. Due to end restraint at the connections, actual beam deflections are often less than the calculated values. 4. The deflections of a composite beam (under live load for shored construction, and under dead and live loads for unshored) cannot be determined as easily and accurately as the deflections of a bare steel beam. Equation C-I3-6 in Section I3.2 of the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 208
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
Commentary on the LRFD Specification provides an approximate effective moment of inertia for partially composite beams. 5. Cambers of less than 3⁄4-in. should not be specified, and beams less than 24 ft in length should not be cambered (Kloiber, 1989). Vibrations
Annoying floor motion may be caused by the normal activities of the occupants. Remedial action is usually very difficult and expensive and not always effective. The prevention of excessive and objectionable floor vibration should be part of the design process. Several researchers have developed procedures to enable structural engineers to predict occupant acceptability of proposed floor systems. Based on field measurement of approximately 100 floor systems, Murray (1991) developed the following acceptability criterion: D > 35Ao f + 2.5
(4-1)
where D = damping in percent of critical Ao = maximum initial amplitude of the floor system due to a heel-drop excitation, in. f = first natural frequency of the floor system, hz Damping in a completed floor system can be estimated from the following ranges: Bare Floor: 1–3 percent Lower limit for thin slab of lightweight concrete; upper limit for thick slab of normal weight concrete. Ceiling: 1–3 percent Lower limit for hung ceiling; upper limit for sheetrock on furring attached to beams or joists. Ductwork and Mechanical: 1–10 percent Depends on amount and attachment. Partitions: 10–20 percent If attached to the floor system and not spaced more than every five floor beams or the effective joist floor width. Note: The above values are based on observation only. Beam or girder frequency can be estimated from 1⁄2
gEIt f = K 3 WL where
f = first natural frequency, hz K = 1.57 for simply supported beams = 0.56 for cantilevered beams = from Figure 4-8 for overhanging beams g = acceleration of gravity = 386 in./sec2 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(4-2)
FLOOR DEFLECTIONS AND VIBRATIONS
4 - 209
E = modulus of elasticity, psi It = transformed moment of inertia of the tee-beam model, Figure 4-9, in.4 (to be used for both composite and noncomposite construction) W= total weight supported by the tee beam, dead load plus 10–25 percent of design live load, lbs L = tee-beam span, in. System frequency is estimated using 1 1 1 = + fs2 fb2 fg2
1.6
1.4
L
Frequency Coefficient, K
1.2
H
1.0
.8
gElt
f=K
WL3
.6
.4
.2
0 .2
.4
.6
.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
Cantilever - Backspan Ratio, H / L
Fig. 4-8. Frequency coefficients for overhanging beams. Beam spacing S
Beam spacing S
Slab Deck
de
Actual
Model
Fig. 4-9. Tee-beam model for computing transformed moment of inertia. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2.4
4 - 210
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
where fs = system frequency, hz fb = beam or joist frequency, hz fg = girder frequency, hz Amplitude from a heel-drop impact can be estimated from Ao =
Aot Neff
(4-3)
where Ao = initial amplitude of the floor system due to a heel-drop impact, in. Neff = number of effective tee beams Aot = initial amplitude of a single tee beam due to a heel-drop impact, in. = (DLF)maxds
(4-4)
where (DLF)max = maximum dynamic load factor, Table 4-2 ds = static deflection caused by a 600 lbs force, in. See (Murray, 1975) for equations for (DLF)max and ds For girders, Neff = 1.0. For beams: 1. S < 2.5ft, usual steel joist-concrete slab floor systems. πx for x ≤ xo Neff = 1 + 2Σ cos 2xo where x = distance from the center joist to the joist under consideration, in. xo = distance from the center joist to the edge of the effective floor, in. = 1.06εL L = joist span, in. ε = (Dx / Dy)0.25 Dx = flexural stiffness perpendicular to the joists = Ect3 / 12 Dy = flexural stiffness parallel to the joists = EIt / S Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi E = modulus of elasticity of steel, psi t = slab thickness, in. It = transformed moment of inertia of the tee beam, in.4 S = joist spacing, in. 2. S > 2.5 ft, usual steel beam-concrete slab floor systems. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(4-5)
BEAMS: OTHER SUBJECTS
4 - 211
Neff = 2.97 −
S L4 + 17.3de 135EIT
(4-6)
where E is defined above and S = beam spacing, in. de = effective slab depth, in. L = beam span, in. Limitations: 15 ≤ (S / de) < 40; 1 × 106 ≤ (L4 / IT) ≤ 50 × 106 The amplitude of a two-way system can be estimated from Aos = Aob + Aog / 2 where Aos = system amplitude Aob = Aot for beam Aog = Aot for girder Additional information on building floor vibrations can be obtained from the abovereferenced paper by Murray (1991) and the references cited therein. BEAMS: OTHER SUBJECTS
Other topics related to the design of flexural members covered elsewhere in this Manual include: Beam Bearing Plates, in Part 11 (Volume II); Beam Web Penetrations, in Part 12 (Volume II).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4 - 212
BEAM AND GIRDER DESIGN
Table 4-2. Dynamic Load Factors for Heel-Drop Impact f, hz
DLF
F, hz
DLF
F, hz
DLF
1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00 2.10 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.50 2.60 2.70 2.80 2.90 3.00 3.10 3.20 3.30 3.40 3.50 3.60 3.70 3.80 3.90 4.00 4.10 4.20 4.30 4.40 4.50 4.60 4.70 4.80 4.90 5.00 5.10 5.20 5.30 5.40
0.1541 0.1695 0.1847 0.2000 0.2152 0.2304 0.2456 0.2607 0.2758 0.2908 0.3058 0.3207 0.3356 0.3504 0.3651 0.3798 0.3945 0.4091 0.4236 0.4380 0.4524 0.4667 0.4809 0.4950 0.5091 0.5231 0.5369 0.5507 0.5645 0.5781 0.5916 0.6050 0.6184 0.6316 0.6448 0.6578 0.6707 0.6835 0.6962 0.7088 0.7213 0.7337 0.7459 0.7580 0.7700
5.50 5.60 5.70 5.80 5.90 6.00 6.10 6.20 6.30 6.40 6.50 6.60 6.70 6.80 6.90 7.00 7.10 7.20 7.30 7.40 7.50 7.60 7.70 7.80 7.90 8.00 8.10 8.20 8.30 8.40 8.50 8.60 8.70 8.80 8.90 9.00 9.10 9.20 9.30 9.40 9.50 9.60 9.70 9.80 9.90
0.7819 0.7937 0.8053 0.8168 0.8282 0.8394 0.8505 0.8615 0.8723 0.8830 0.8936 0.9040 0.9143 0.9244 0.9344 0.9443 0.9540 0.9635 0.9729 0.9821 0.9912 1.0002 1.0090 1.0176 1.0261 1.0345 1.0428 1.0509 1.0588 1.0667 1.0744 1.0820 1.0895 1.0969 1.1041 1.1113 1.1183 1.1252 1.1321 1.1388 1.1434 1.1519 1.1583 1.1647 1.1709
10.00 10.10 10.20 10.30 10.40 10.50 10.60 10.70 10.80 10.90 11.00 11.10 11.20 11.30 11.40 11.50 11.60 11.70 11.80 11.90 12.00 12.10 12.20 12.30 12.40 12.50 12.60 12.70 12.80 12.90 13.00 13.10 13.20 13.30 13.40 13.50 13.60 13.70 13.80 13.90 14.00 14.10 14.20 14.30 14.40
1.1770 1.1831 1.1891 1.1949 1.2007 1.2065 1.2121 1.2177 1.2231 1.2285 1.2339 1.2391 1.2443 1.2494 1.2545 1.2594 1.2643 1.2692 1.2740 1.2787 1.2834 1.2879 1.2925 1.2970 1.3014 1.3058 1.3101 1.3143 1.3185 1.3227 1.3268 1.3308 1.3348 1.3388 1.3427 1.3466 1.3504 1.3541 1.3579 1.3615 1.3652 1.3688 1.3723 1.3758 1.3793
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
REFERENCES
4 - 213
REFERENCES
Allison, H., 1991, Low- and Medium-Rise Steel Buildings, AISC Steel Design Guide Series No. 5, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL. American Institute of Steel Construction, 1983, Torsional Analysis of Steel Members, AISC, Chicago. Fisher, J. M. and M. A. West, 1990, Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise Buildings, AISC Steel Design Guide Series No. 3, AISC, Chicago. Kloiber, L. A., 1989, “Cambering of Steel Beams,” Steel Structures: Proceedings of Structures Congress ’89, American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), New York. Murray, T. M., 1991, “Building Floor Vibrations,” Proceedings of the 1991 National Steel Construction Conference, AISC, Chicago. Zahn, C. J., 1987, “Plate Girder Design Using LRFD,” Engineering Journal, 1st Qtr., AISC, Chicago.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5-1
PART 5 COMPOSITE DESIGN
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 COMPOSITE BEAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Design Flexural Strength (Positive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Concrete Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Shear Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Strength During Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Lateral Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Design Shear Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Lower Bound Moment of Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Composite Beam Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Preliminary Section Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Floor Deflections and Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Selection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Lower Bound Elastic Moment of Inertia Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 COMPOSITE COLUMNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67 Combined Axial Compression and Bending (Interaction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69 COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE . . . . . . . . . . 5-73 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73 Tables: fc′ = 3.5 ksi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74 Tables: fc′ = 5 ksi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86 Tables: fc′ = 8 ksi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98 COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110 Steel Pipe Filled with Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110 Structural Tubing Filled with Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110 Tables: Steel Pipe (fc′ = 3.5 ksi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111 Tables: Steel Pipe (fc′ = 5 ksi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5-2
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Tables: Square Structural Tubing (fc′ = 3.5 ksi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115 Tables: Square Structural Tubing (fc′ = 5 ksi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122 Tables: Rectangular Structural Tubing (fc′ = 3.5 ksi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129 Tables: Rectangular Structural Tubing (fc′ = 5 ksi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136 REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OVERVIEW
5-3
OVERVIEW
Tables are given for the design of composite beams and columns. Composite Beam tables are located as follows: Selection Tables, Fy = 36 ksi, begin on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Selection Tables, Fy = 50 ksi, begin on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Lower Bound Elastic Moment of Inertia Tables begin on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 Composite Column tables are located as follows: W Shapes Encased in Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74 Concrete-Filled Steel Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111 Concrete-Filled Structural Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5-4
COMPOSITE DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5-5
COMPOSITE BEAMS General Notes
The Composite Beam Tables can be used for the design and analysis of simple composite steel beams. Values for the design flexural strength φMn for rolled I-shaped beams with yield strengths of 36 ksi and 50 ksi are tabulated, as well as lower bound moments of inertia. The values tabulated are independent of the concrete flange properties. The strength evaluation of the concrete flange portion of the composite section is left to the design engineer. The preparation of these tables is based upon the fact that the location of the plastic neutral axis (PNA) is uniquely determined by the horizontal shear force ΣQn at the interface between the steel section and the concrete slab. With the knowledge of the location of the PNA and the distance to the centroid of the concrete flange force ΣQn, the design flexural strengths φMn for the rolled section can be computed. Design Flexural Strength (Positive)
The design flexural strength of simple steel beams with composite concrete flanges is computed from the equilibrium of internal forces using the plastic stress distribution as shown in Figure 5-1: φMn = φTTot y = φCToty where φ = 0.85 TTot = sum of tensile forces = Fy × (tensile force beam area) CTot = sum of compressive forces = concrete flange force + Fy × (compressive force beam area) y = moment arm between centroid of tensile force and the resultant compressive force The model used in the calculation of the design strengths tabulated herein is given in Figure 5-2. A summary of the model properties follows: As = area of steel cross section, in.2 Af = flange area = bf × tf, in.2 Aw = web area = (d − 2k)tw, in.2
0.85fc ′
b
Cconc
a
Cstl
PNA
Fy TTot = Tstl
Fy
Fig. 5-1. Plastic stress distribution. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
C Tot = Cconc + Cstl y
5-6
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Kdep = k − tf, in. Karea = (As − 2Af − Aw) / 2, in.2 Limitations for the tabulated values include the following: Fy (d − 2k) / tw ≤ 640 / √ and ΣQn (min.) = 0.25AsFy The limitation of ΣQn (min.) is not required by the Specification, but is deemed to be a practical minimum value. Design strength moment values are tabulated for plastic neutral axis (PNA) locations at the top and intermediate quarter points through the thickness of the steel beam top flange. In addition, PNA locations are computed at the point where ΣQn equals 0.25AsFy, and the point where ΣQn is the average of the minimum value of (0.25AsFy) and the value of ΣQn when the PNA is at the bottom of the top flange (see Figure 5-3). To use the tables, select a valid value of ΣQn, determine the appropriate value of Y2 and read the design flexural strength moment φMn directly. Values for Y1 are also tabulated for convenience. The parameters Y1 and Y2 are defined as follows: Y1 = distance from PNA to beam top flange Y2 = distance from concrete flange force to beam top flange Valid values for ΣQn are the smaller of the following three expressions (LRFD Specification Section I5): 0.85fc′Ac AsFy nQn
bf tf K dep
k
K area K dep
tw
d
d – 2k
K dep tf
k
Fig. 5-2. Composite beam model. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5-7
where fc′ Ac As Fv n
= specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi = area of concrete slab within effective width, in.2 = area of steel cross section, in.2 = specified minimum yield stress, ksi = number of shear connectors between the point of maximum positive moment and the point of zero moment to either side Qn = shear capacity of single shear connector, kips
Concrete Flange
According to LRFD Specification Section I3.1 the effective width of the concrete slab on each side of the beam centerline shall not exceed: a. one-eighth of the beam span, center to center, of supports; b. one-half the distance to the centerline of the adjacent beams; or c. the distance to the edge of the slab. The maximum concrete flange force is equal to 0.85 fc′Ac where Ac is based on the actual slab thickness, tc. However, often the maximum concrete flange force exceeds the maximum capacity of the specified steel beam. In that case, the effective concrete flange force is determined from a value of ΣQn, which will be the smaller of AsFy or nQn. The effective concrete flange force is:
b
Ycon
Location of effective concrete flange force (∑Qn)
a/ 2
a Y2
TFL (pt. 1) BFL (pt. 5)
6 7
Y1 (varies—see figure below)
Y1 = Distance from top of steel flange to any of the seven tabulated PNA locations ∑ Qn (@ pt. 5) + ∑Q n (@ pt. 7)
∑ Qn (@ point
6 )=
∑ Qn (@ point
7 ) = .25A sFy
Beam top flange
2
4 Equal spaces
1 2 3 4 5
PNA FLANGE LOCATIONS Fig. 5-3. Composite beam table parameters. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TFL tf BFL
5-8
COMPOSITE DESIGN
ΣQn = Cconc = 0.85fc′ba where Cconc = effective concrete flange force, kips b = effective concrete flange width, in. a = effective concrete flange thickness, in. The basis of the design of most composite beams will be the relationship: a=
ΣQn 0.85fc′b
From this relationship, the value of Y2 can be computed as: Y2 = Ycon − a / 2 where Ycon = distance from top of steel beam to top of concrete, in. Shear Connectors
Shear connectors must be headed steel studs, not less than four stud diameters in length after installation, or hot-rolled steel channels. Shear connectors must be embedded in concrete slabs made with ASTM C33 aggregate or with rotary kiln produced aggregates conforming to ASTM C330, with concrete unit weight not less than 90 pcf. The nominal strength of one stud shear connector embedded in a solid concrete slab is: Qn = 0.5Asc √ fc′Ec ≤ AscFu
(I5-1)
where Asc = cross-sectional area of a stud shear connector, in.2 fc′ = specified concrete compressive strength, ksi Fu = minimum specified tensile strength of stud, ksi Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete, ksi = (w1.5)√ fc ′ w = unit weight of concrete, lb/cu ft The nominal shear strengths of 3⁄4-in. headed studs embedded in concrete slabs are listed in Table 5-1. Note the effective shear strengths of studs used in conjunction with composite or non-composite metal forms may be affected by the shape of the deck and spacing of the studs. See LRFD Specification Sections I3.5 and I5.6. Strength During Construction
When temporary shores are not used during construction, the steel section must have sufficient strength to support the applied loads prior to the concrete attaining 75 percent of the specified concrete strength fc′ (LRFD Specification Section I3.4). The effect of deflection on unshored steel beams during construction should be considered. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5-9
Table 5-1. Nominal Stud Shear Strength Qn (kips) for 3⁄4-in Headed Studs fc′ (ksi)
w (lbs/cu. ft)
Qn (kips)
3.0 3.0 3.5 3.5 4.0 4.0
115 145 115 145 115 145
17.7 21.0 19.8 23.6 21.9 26.1
Lateral Support
Adequate lateral support for the compression flange of the steel section will be provided by the concrete slab after hardening. During construction, however, lateral support must be provided, or the design strength must be reduced in accordance with Section F1 of the LRFD Specification. Steel deck with adequate attachment to the compression flange will usually provide the necessary lateral support. For construction using fully encased beams, particular attention should be given to lateral support during construction. Design Shear Strength
The design shear strength of composite beams is determined by the strength of the steel web, in accordance with the requirements of Section F2 of the LRFD Specification. Lower Bound Moment of Inertia
With regard to serviceability, a table of lower bound moments of inertia of composite sections is included to assist in the evaluation of deflection. If calculated deflections using the lower bound moment of inertia are acceptable, a complete elastic analysis of the composite section can be avoided. The lower bound moment of inertia is based on the area of the beam and an equivalent concrete area of ΣQn / Fy. The analysis includes only the horizontal shear force transferred by the shear connectors supplied; and, thus, neglects the contribution of the concrete flange not considered in the plastic distribution of forces (see Figure 5-4). The lower bound moment of inertia, therefore, is the moment of inertia of the section at the factored (ultimate) load. This is smaller than the moment of inertia at service loads where deflection is calculated. The value for the lower bound moment of inertia can be calculated as follows: ILB = Ix + As YENA −
2
d ΣQn + (d + Y2 − YENA)2 2 Fy
where YENA = distance from bottom of beam to elastic neutral axis (ENA) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 10
COMPOSITE DESIGN
=
Asd ΣQn 2 + F (d + Y2) y ΣQn As + F y
Composite Beam Reactions
Design reactions for symmetrically loaded composite beams may be computed using the Composite Beam Tables. Two situations will be considered. First, an upper bound value for a beam reaction may be computed neglecting the composite concrete flange properties other than concrete strength. Second, a more refined value for a beam reaction can be computed if the properties of the composite concrete flange are determined initially. When the properties of the composite concrete flange have not been computed, a conservative value for the maximum horizontal shear between the composite concrete slab and the steel section (ΣQn) may be taken as the smaller of AsFs or nQn. Here, n is the number of headed studs between the reaction point and point of maximum moment. The value of Qn may be taken from Table 5-1 or determined from LRFD Specification Section I5. A value for φMn of the composite section may be obtained from the Composite Beam Tables using the sum of horizontal shear ΣQn as described above. In this case, Y2 is defined as the distance from the top of the steel beam to the top of the concrete slab. The design reaction may be determined from the value of φMn as discussed in the following paragraph. When the properties of the concrete flange have been computed (effective width and depth), a slightly different method is used to find φMn. The stud efficiency can be determined in accordance with Section I5 of the LRFD Specification, or Table 5-1 can be used for 3⁄4-in. diameter stud shear connectors. The value for the sum of the horizontal shear force ΣQn can be taken as the smaller of nQn, AsFy, or 0.85fc′Ac, where fc′ is the concrete cylinder strength (ksi) and Ac is the maximum permitted concrete flange area (LRFD Specification Section I5.2). The distance Y2 is the distance from the top of the steel beam to the top of the concrete slab less [ΣQn / (0.85fc′b)] / 2. Using these values for ΣQn and Y2, the value for φMn can be selected from the Composite Beam Tables.
Equivalent concrete area =
∑Qn
Fy
Y2 d + Y2 – YENA
ENA d YENA
Fig. 5-4. Moment of inertia. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 11
The design beam reaction for a symmetrically loaded composite beam may be computed from known values of φMn and the span length as: R = CcφMn / L where R = design beam reaction, kips Cc = coefficient from Figure 5-5 φMn = composite beam flexural design strength, kip-ft L = span length, ft Preliminary Section Selection
When using the Composite Beam Tables, the approximate beam weight per unit length required for several different beam depths may be calculated as follows: Mu(12) Beam weight (lb/ft) = 3.4 (d / 2 + Y − a / 2 )φ F con y where
Mu = required flexural strength, kip-ft d = nominal beam depth, in. Ycon = distance from top of steel beam to top of concrete slab, in. a = effective concrete slab thickness, in. Fy = steel yield stress, ksi φ = 0.85 3.4 = ratio of the weight of a beam to its area, lb/in.2 For convenience in the preliminary selection phase the nominal depth may be used. A value for a/2 must also be selected. For relatively light sections and loads, this value can be assumed to be one inch. With the PNA at the top of the steel beam, i.e., ΣQn = AsFy, the flexural design strength is: φMn = φAsFy (d / 2 + Ycon − a / 2) / 12 where φMn = flexural design strength, kip-ft As = steel beam cross-sectional area, in.2
Uniform load R
Pu R
Cc = 4
R
Pu R
Pu
R
Cc = 2
Pu Pu Pu R
Cc = 3
R=
Cc φM n L
Fig. 5-5. Beam reaction coeficients. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
R
R Cc = 3
5 - 12
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Floor Deflections and Vibrations
Refer to the discussion of Floor Deflections and Vibrations at the end of Part 4 of this LRFD Manual.
EXAMPLE 5-1
Given:
Determine the beam, with Fy = 50 ksi, required to support a service live load of 1.3 kips/ft and a service dead load of 0.9 kips/ft. The beam span is 30 ft and the beam spacing 10 ft. The slab is 31⁄4-in. 1ight weight concrete (fc′ = 3.5 ksi, 115 pcf) supported by a 3-in. deep composite metal deck with an average rib width of six inches. The ribs are oriented perpendicular to the beam. Shored construction is specified. Also, determine the number of 3⁄4-in. diameter headed studs required and the service live load deflection.
Solution:
A. Load tabulation:
LL DL Total
Service load (kips/ft) 1.3 0.9 2.2
(L.F.) (1.6) (1.2)
Factored load (kips/ft) 2.1 1.1 3.2
B. Flexural design strength: Beam moments Mu = 3.2(30)2/8 = 360 kip-ft MLL = 1.3(30)2/8 = 146 kip-ft C. Select section and determine properties: At this point, go directly to the Composite Beam Tables and select a section or compute a preliminary trial section size using the formula: Mu(12) Beam weight = 3.4 (d / 2 + Y − a /2)φF con y where
Ycon = 3 + 3.25 = 6.25 in. a / 2= 1 in. (estimate) φ = 0.85 Fy = 50 ksi Mu(12)(3.4) d/2 φFy 16 346 8 d
18
346
9
(Ycon − a / 2)
Beam Weight
5.25
26
5.25
24
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 13
From the results above, a W16×26 would be the most appropriate selection. Let ΣQn = AsFy = 7.68(50) = 384 kips. The effective width of the concrete flange is
≤ 2 × L / 8 = 2 × 30 ft / 8 = 7.5 ft = 90 in. (gover ns) 10 ft spacing ΣQn 384 areq’d = = = 1.43 in. 0.85fc′b 0.85(3.5)(90) Y2 = 6.25 − 1.43 / 2 = 5.53 in.
b
By interpolation from the Composite Beam Tables for a W16×26 and a value of Y2 equal to 5.53 in., φMn = 363 + (0.03 / 0.50)(377 − 363) = 364 kip-ft > 360 kip-ft req’d o.k. The selected section is adequate for Y2 = 5.5 in. and Y1 = 0.0 in., for which φMn = 363 kip-ft D. Compute number of studs required: The stud reduction is calculated to be: Reduction factor =
0.85 (wr / hr)(Hs / hr − 1.0) ≤ 1.0 Nr √
Reductionfactor=
0.85 (6 / 3)(5.5 / 3 − 1.0) = 1.0 2 √
(I3-1)
where Nr = number of stud connectors in one rib; not to exceed three in computations, although more than three may be installed wr = average width of rib, in. hr = nominal rib height, in. Hs = length of stud connector after welding, in.; not to exceed the value (hr + 3) in computations, although actual length may be greater. Also must not be less than four stud diameters The value for Hs = 5.5 was selected to ensure the stud capacity reduction factor is 1.0. The number of studs required is: with Qn = 19.8 kips (Table 5-1) 2(ΣQn) / Qn = 2(384) / 19.8 = 38.8, say 40 studs AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 14
COMPOSITE DESIGN
E. Check deflection: For the selected section, a W16×26, Fy = 50 ksi, Y2 = 5.5 in. and Y1 = 0.0 in.; from the Elastic Moment of Inertia Tables one can find the lower bound moment of inertia is 985 in.4 Thus, the service live load deflection can be calculated as follows (see LRFD Manual Part 4): ∆LL =
MLLL2 146(30)2 L L = = 0.83 in. = < o.k. 434 360 161ILB 161(985)
F. Shear check: Vu = 3.2(15) = 48 kips φVn = φ0.6FywAw = (0.9)(0.6)(50)(15.69 × 0.250) = 106 kips > 48 kips req’d o.k.
EXAMPLE 5-2
Given:
Determine the beam, with Fy = 50 ksi, required to support a service live load of 250 psf and a service dead load of 90 psf. The beam span is 40 ft and the beam spacing is 10 ft. Assume 3 in. metal deck is used with a 4.5 in. slab of 4 ksi normal weight concrete (145 pcf). The stud reduction factor is 1.0. Unshored construction is specified. Determine the beam size and service dead and live load deflections. Also select a non-composite section (no shear connectors).
Solution:
A. Load tabulation:
LL DL Total
Service load (kips/ft) 2.5 0.9 3.4
(L.F.) (1.6) (1.2)
Factored load (kips/ft) 4.0 1.1 5.1
B. Beam moments: Mu = 5.1(40)2 / 8 = 1,020 kip-ft MLL = 2.5(40)2 / 8 = 500 kip-ft MDL = 0.9(40)2 / 8 = 180 kip-ft C. Select section and determine properties: Assume a = 2 in.; therefore, take Y2 = 7.5 − 2 / 2 = 6.5 in. From the Composite Beam Tables, for Fy = 50 ksi and Y2 = 6.5 in., W21×62, W24×55, and W24×62 are possible sizes. Try a W24×55: Fy = 50 ksi Y2 = 6.5 in. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 15
Y1 = 0.0 in. Qn = 810 kips φMn = 1,050 kip-ft Compute Y2 for ΣQn = 810 kips: 2 × L / 8 = 2 × 40 ft / 8 = 10 ft b ≤ 10 ft spacing = 120 in. ΣQn 810 = = 1.99 a = 0.85fc′b 0.85(4)(120) Y2 = 7.5 − 1.99 / 2 = 6.5 in.
D. Compute the number of studs required: Qn = 26.1 kips (Table 5-1) Number of studs = (2)ΣQn / Qn = 2(810) / 26.1 = 62.1, say 64 studs E. Construction phase strength check: A construction live load of 20 psf will be assumed. From the LRFD Specification (Section A4.1), the relevant load combinations are 1.4D = 1.4 × 0.9 = 1.26 k/ft 1.2D + 1.6L = 1.2 × 0.9 + 1.6 × 0.2 = 1.40 k/ft = 1.40 × (40)2 / 8 = 280 kip-ft Mu From the Composite Beam Tables for a W24×55 with Fy = 50 ksi, and assuming adequate lateral support is provided by the attachment of the steel deck to the compression flange, φMn = φMp = 503 kip-ft > 280 kip-ft F. Service load deflections: Assume that the wet concrete load moment is equal to the service dead load moment. With Ix = 1,350 in.4 for a W24×55, ∆DL =
180(40)2 = 1.33 in. 161(1,350)
For the W24×55 with Y2 = 6.5 in. and Y1 = 0.0 in., the lower bound moment of inertia can be found in the Lower Bound Elastic Moment of Inertia Tables; ILB = 4,060 in.4 500(40)2 = 1.22 in. 161(4,060) L L < o.k. =
∆LL =
393
360
Specify a beam camber of 11⁄4-in. to overcome the dead load deflection. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 16
COMPOSITE DESIGN
G. Check shear: Vu = 5.1(40) / 2 = 102 kips φV = φ(0.6)FywAw = (0.9)(0.6)(50)(23.57 × 0.395) = 251 kips > 102 kips o.k. H. Final section selection: Use: W24×55, Fy = 50 ksi, camber 11⁄4-in., 64 studs, 3⁄4-in. diameter (32 each side of midspan) I. Noncomposite section: Considering the given problem without shear connectors (i.e., noncomposite), a steel section can be selected from the φMp values tabulated under each section in either the Composite Beam Tables or the Load Factor Design Selection Tables. For Mu = 1,020 kip-ft, select a W27×94, Fy = 50 ksi, with a φMp flexural design strength equal to 1,040 kip-ft. ∆DL =
180(40)2 = 0.55 in. 161(3,270)
∆LL =
500(40)2 = 1.52 in. > L / 360 161(3,270)
For ∆ = L / 360 = 1.33 in. Ireq’d =
500(40)2 = 3,736 in.4 161(1.33)
Use: W30×99, Fy = 50 ksi, φMn = φbMp = 1,170 kip-ft
EXAMPLE 5-3
Given:
A W21×44, Fy = 50 ksi, steel girder spans 30 feet and supports intermediate beams at the third points. A total of fifty 3⁄4-in. diameter headed studs are applied to the beam as follows: 24 between each support and the beams at the one-third points, and two between the intermediate beams. The slab consists of 31⁄4-in. light-weight concrete (115 pcf) with a specified design strength of 3.5 ksi over a 3-in. deep composite metal deck with an average rib width of six inches. The ribs are oriented parallel to the beam centerline. Determine the design beam reactions.
Solutions:
For studs in a single row the spacing between the support and first intermediate beam would be 10(12) / 24 = 5.0 in. which is greater than the specified minimum of six stud diameters (LRFD Specification Section I5.6). Since wr / hr = 6 / 3 = 2 is greater than 1.5, the stud AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 17
reduction factor is not necessary (LRFD Specification I3.5c). Therefore, from Table 5.1, the stud shear strength is:
ΣQn = nQn = 24(19.8) = 475 kips For ΣQn = 475 kips, the required effective concrete flange thickness can be calculated to be: a =
475 = 1.77 in. 0.85(3.5)(7.5)(12)
Y2 = 3 + 3.25 − 1.77 / 2 = 5.36 in. Beam reaction: From the Composite Beam Selection Table, for a W21×44, Fy = 50 ksi, ΣQn = 475 kips places the PNA at Y1 = 0.27 in. For Y2 = 5.36 in. and Y1 = 0.27 in., φMn = 655 kip-ft R = CcφMn / L = 3(655) / 30 = 65.5 kips where R = design reaction, kips Cc = coefficient from Figure 5-5 φMn = flexural design strength of beam, kip-ft L = span length, ft Note: The beam weight was neglected in this example.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 18
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) Kip-ft
W40×297
3590
W 40 X 278 3210
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
0.00 0.41 0.83 1.24 1.65 4.59 8.17
3150 2680 2210 1740 1270 1030 787
4890 4810 4720 4620 4510 4420 4280
5000 4910 4800 4690 4550 4460 4310
5110 5000 4880 4750 4600 4500 4340
5220 5100 4960 4810 4640 4540 4370
5330 5190 5040 4870 4690 4570 4390
5440 5290 5120 4930 4730 4610 4420
5550 5380 5190 4990 4780 4640 4450
5670 5480 5270 5050 4820 4680 4480
5780 5570 5350 5120 4870 4720 4500
5890 5660 5430 5180 4910 4750 4530
6000 5760 5510 5240 4960 4790 4560
TFL 0.00 2 0.45 3 0.91 4 1.36 BFL 1.81 6 5.64 7 10.06
2940 2550 2160 1770 1380 1060 736
4610 4540 4470 4380 4280 4160 3930
4710 4630 4550 4450 4330 4190 3960
4810 4730 4620 4510 4380 4230 3980
4920 4820 4700 4570 4430 4270 4010
5020 4910 4780 4640 4480 4310 4040
5130 5000 4850 4700 4530 4340 4060
5230 5090 4930 4760 4580 4380 4090
5340 5180 5010 4820 4630 4420 4110
5440 5270 5080 4890 4680 4460 4140
5540 5360 5160 4950 4730 4490 4170
5650 5450 5240 5010 4780 4530 4190
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
W40×277
3380
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.39 0.79 1.18 1.58 4.25 7.60
2930 2480 2030 1580 1130 932 732
4530 4460 4380 4280 4170 4110 3990
4630 4550 4450 4340 4210 4140 4020
4740 4630 4520 4390 4250 4170 4050
4840 4720 4590 4450 4290 4210 4070
4940 4810 4660 4510 4330 4240 4100
5050 4900 4740 4560 4370 4270 4120
5150 4990 4810 4620 4410 4300 4150
5250 5070 4880 4670 4450 4340 4180
5360 5160 4950 4730 4490 4370 4200
5460 5250 5020 4790 4540 4400 4230
5570 5340 5100 4840 4580 4440 4250
W40×264
3050
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.43 0.87 1.30 1.73 5.49 9.90
2790 2420 2050 1680 1310 1000 698
4350 4300 4230 4140 4050 3930 3730
4450 4380 4300 4200 4100 3970 3750
4550 4470 4370 4260 4140 4000 3780
4650 4550 4440 4320 4190 4040 3800
4750 4640 4520 4380 4240 4070 3820
4850 4720 4590 4440 4280 4110 3850
4950 4810 4660 4500 4330 4150 3870
5050 4900 4730 4560 4380 4180 3900
5140 4980 4810 4620 4420 4220 3920
5240 5070 4880 4680 4470 4250 3950
5340 5150 4950 4740 4510 4290 3970
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 19
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W40×249
Kip-ft
3020
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.36 0.71 1.07 1.42 4.06 7.47
2640 2240 1830 1430 1030 844 660
4050 3990 3920 3840 3750 3690 3580
4150 4070 3980 3890 3780 3720 3610
4240 4150 4050 3940 3820 3750 3630
4330 4230 4110 3990 3850 3770 3650
4430 4310 4180 4040 3890 3800 3680
4520 4390 4240 4090 3930 3830 3700
4610 4470 4310 4140 3960 3860 3720
4710 4550 4370 4190 4000 3890 3750
4800 4630 4440 4240 4040 3920 3770
4900 4700 4500 4290 4070 3950 3790
4990 4780 4570 4340 4110 3980 3820
W40×235
2730
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.39 0.79 1.18 1.58 5.18 9.47
2480 2140 1810 1470 1130 876 620
3840 3790 3720 3650 3570 3480 3310
3930 3860 3790 3700 3610 3510 3330
4010 3940 3850 3760 3650 3540 3350
4100 4010 3920 3810 3690 3570 3370
4190 4090 3980 3860 3730 3600 3400
4280 4170 4040 3910 3770 3630 3420
4370 4240 4110 3960 3810 3660 3440
4450 4320 4170 4020 3850 3690 3460
4540 4390 4240 4070 3890 3730 3480
4630 4470 4300 4120 3930 3760 3510
4720 4540 4360 4170 3970 3790 3530
W40×215
2600
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.31 0.61 0.92 1.22 3.84 7.32
2280 1930 1590 1240 895 733 570
3470 3420 3360 3290 3210 3160 3080
3550 3480 3410 3330 3240 3190 3100
3630 3550 3470 3380 3280 3210 3120
3710 3620 3520 3420 3310 3240 3140
3790 3690 3580 3460 3340 3270 3160
3870 3760 3640 3510 3370 3290 3180
3950 3830 3690 3550 3400 3320 3200
4030 3900 3750 3600 3440 3340 3220
4110 3960 3810 3640 3470 3370 3240
4200 4030 3860 3680 3500 3400 3260
4280 4100 3920 3730 3530 3420 3280
W40×211
2440
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.35 0.71 1.06 1.42 4.99 9.35
2230 1930 1630 1330 1030 793 558
3430 3380 3330 3270 3200 3110 2960
3510 3450 3390 3310 3230 3140 2980
3590 3520 3440 3360 3270 3170 3000
3670 3590 3500 3410 3310 3200 3020
3740 3660 3560 3460 3340 3230 3040
3820 3720 3620 3500 3380 3250 3060
3900 3790 3670 3550 3420 3280 3080
3980 3860 3730 3600 3450 3310 3100
4060 3930 3790 3640 3490 3340 3120
4140 4000 3850 3690 3530 3370 3140
4220 4070 3910 3740 3560 3400 3160
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 20
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W40×199
Kip-ft
2340
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.27 0.53 0.80 1.07 4.16 8.10
2100 1800 1500 1200 895 710 526
3180 3130 3080 3020 2960 2900 2800
3250 3200 3130 3070 2990 2930 2820
3330 3260 3190 3110 3020 2950 2830
3400 3320 3240 3150 3060 2980 2850
3480 3390 3290 3190 3090 3000 2870
3550 3450 3350 3240 3120 3030 2890
3620 3510 3400 3280 3150 3050 2910
3700 3580 3450 3320 3180 3080 2930
3770 3640 3500 3360 3210 3100 2950
3850 3710 3560 3400 3250 3130 2960
3920 3770 3610 3450 3280 3150 2980
W40×183
2110
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.31 0.61 0.92 1.22 4.76 9.16
1930 1670 1410 1160 896 690 483
2940 2900 2860 2810 2750 2680 2550
3010 2960 2910 2850 2780 2710 2570
3080 3020 2960 2890 2810 2730 2580
3150 3080 3010 2930 2850 2750 2600
3220 3140 3060 2970 2880 2780 2620
3290 3200 3110 3010 2910 2800 2640
3350 3260 3160 3050 2940 2830 2650
3420 3320 3210 3090 2970 2850 2670
3490 3380 3260 3130 3000 2880 2690
3560 3440 3310 3180 3040 2900 2700
3630 3500 3360 3220 3070 2930 2720
W40×174
1930
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.21 0.42 0.62 0.83 4.59 9.27
1840 1600 1370 1130 898 679 460
2750 2710 2680 2630 2590 2520 2380
2810 2770 2720 2670 2620 2540 2400
2880 2830 2770 2710 2650 2570 2410
2940 2880 2820 2750 2680 2590 2430
3010 2940 2870 2790 2720 2620 2450
3080 3000 2920 2830 2750 2640 2460
3140 3060 2970 2870 2780 2660 2480
3210 3110 3020 2910 2810 2690 2490
3270 3170 3060 2960 2840 2710 2510
3340 3230 3110 3000 2870 2740 2530
3400 3280 3160 3040 2910 2760 2540
W40×167
1870
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.26 0.51 0.77 1.03 5.00 9.85
1770 1550 1330 1110 896 669 442
2670 2630 2600 2560 2510 2430 2280
2730 2690 2640 2600 2540 2460 2300
2790 2740 2690 2630 2570 2480 2310
2850 2800 2740 2670 2610 2510 2330
2920 2850 2790 2710 2640 2530 2350
2980 2910 2830 2750 2670 2550 2360
3040 2960 2880 2790 2700 2580 2380
3100 3020 2930 2830 2730 2600 2390
3170 3070 2970 2870 2760 2620 2410
3230 3130 3020 2910 2800 2650 2420
3290 3180 3070 2950 2830 2670 2440
W40×149
1610
TFL 0.00 2 0.21 3 0.42 4 0.62 BFL 0.83 6 5.15 7 10.41
1580 1400 1220 1050 871 633 394
2360 2330 2300 2270 2240 2160 1990
2410 2380 2340 2310 2270 2180 2010
2470 2430 2390 2340 2300 2200 2020
2520 2480 2430 2380 2330 2220 2030
2580 2530 2470 2420 2360 2250 2050
2640 2580 2520 2460 2390 2270 2060
2690 2630 2560 2490 2420 2290 2070
2750 2680 2600 2530 2450 2310 2090
2800 2730 2650 2570 2480 2340 2100
2860 2780 2690 2600 2510 2360 2120
2920 2830 2730 2640 2540 2380 2130
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 21
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 36×300
Kip-ft
3400
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.42 0.84 1.26 1.68 3.97 6.69
3180 2680 2170 1670 1160 979 795
4590 4510 4410 4310 4180 4120 4020
4700 4600 4490 4360 4220 4150 4050
4810 4700 4570 4420 4260 4190 4080
4920 4790 4640 4480 4310 4220 4110
5040 4890 4720 4540 4350 4260 4140
5150 4980 4800 4600 4390 4290 4160
5260 5080 4880 4660 4430 4330 4190
5370 5170 4950 4720 4470 4360 4220
5490 5270 5030 4780 4510 4400 4250
5600 5360 5110 4840 4550 4430 4280
5710 5460 5180 4900 4590 4470 4300
W 36×280
3160
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.39 0.79 1.18 1.57 3.88 6.62
2970 2500 2030 1560 1090 916 742
4260 4180 4100 4000 3890 3830 3740
4360 4270 4170 4050 3930 3860 3770
4470 4360 4240 4110 3960 3890 3790
4570 4450 4310 4160 4000 3930 3820
4680 4540 4390 4220 4040 3960 3850
4780 4630 4460 4280 4080 3990 3870
4890 4710 4530 4330 4120 4020 3900
4990 4800 4600 4390 4160 4060 3920
5100 4890 4670 4440 4200 4090 3950
5200 4980 4740 4500 4230 4120 3980
5310 5070 4820 4550 4270 4150 4000
W 36×260
2920
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.36 0.72 1.08 1.44 3.86 6.75
2750 2330 1900 1470 1040 863 689
3930 3860 3780 3700 3600 3540 3450
4020 3940 3850 3750 3630 3570 3470
4120 4030 3920 3800 3670 3600 3500
4220 4110 3980 3850 3710 3630 3520
4320 4190 4050 3900 3740 3660 3550
4410 4270 4120 3960 3780 3690 3570
4510 4350 4190 4010 3820 3720 3600
4610 4440 4250 4060 3850 3750 3620
4710 4520 4320 4110 3890 3780 3640
4800 4600 4390 4160 3930 3820 3670
4900 4680 4450 4210 3960 3850 3690
W 36×245
2730
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.34 0.68 1.01 1.35 3.81 6.77
2600 2190 1790 1390 991 820 649
3680 3620 3550 3470 3380 3330 3240
3780 3700 3620 3520 3420 3360 3260
3870 3780 3680 3570 3450 3380 3280
3960 3860 3740 3620 3490 3410 3310
4050 3930 3810 3670 3520 3440 3330
4140 4010 3870 3720 3560 3470 3350
4240 4090 3930 3770 3590 3500 3380
4330 4170 4000 3820 3630 3530 3400
4420 4240 4060 3870 3660 3560 3420
4510 4320 4120 3910 3700 3590 3440
4600 4400 4190 3960 3730 3620 3470
W 36×230
2550
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.32 0.63 0.95 1.26 3.81 6.83
2430 2060 1690 1310 939 774 608
3440 3380 3320 3240 3160 3110 3020
3530 3450 3380 3290 3190 3140 3040
3610 3530 3440 3340 3230 3160 3070
3700 3600 3500 3380 3260 3190 3090
3780 3670 3560 3430 3290 3220 3110
3870 3750 3620 3480 3330 3250 3130
3960 3820 3670 3520 3360 3270 3150
4040 3890 3730 3570 3390 3300 3170
4130 3970 3790 3610 3430 3330 3200
4210 4040 3850 3660 3460 3360 3220
4300 4110 3910 3710 3490 3380 3240
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 22
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 36×210
Kip-ft
2250
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.34 0.68 1.02 1.36 5.06 9.04
2220 1930 1630 1330 1030 794 556
3210 3160 3110 3050 2980 2890 2740
3280 3230 3170 3090 3020 2920 2760
3360 3300 3220 3140 3050 2950 2780
3440 3370 3280 3190 3090 2980 2800
3520 3430 3340 3240 3130 3010 2820
3600 3500 3400 3280 3160 3030 2840
3680 3570 3450 3330 3200 3060 2860
3760 3640 3510 3380 3240 3090 2880
3840 3710 3570 3420 3270 3120 2900
3920 3770 3630 3470 3310 3150 2920
3990 3840 3680 3520 3350 3170 2940
W 36×194
2070
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.32 0.63 0.95 1.26 4.94 8.93
2050 1780 1500 1230 953 733 513
2940 2900 2850 2800 2740 2660 2520
3020 2960 2910 2840 2770 2690 2540
3090 3030 2960 2890 2810 2710 2560
3160 3090 3010 2930 2840 2740 2580
3230 3150 3070 2970 2870 2760 2590
3310 3220 3120 3020 2910 2790 2610
3380 3280 3170 3060 2940 2820 2630
3450 3340 3220 3100 2970 2840 2650
3520 3400 3280 3150 3010 2870 2670
3600 3470 3330 3190 3040 2890 2680
3670 3530 3380 3230 3080 2920 2700
W 36×182
1940
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.29 0.59 0.89 1.18 4.89 8.92
1930 1670 1420 1160 904 693 482
2760 2720 2670 2620 2570 2490 2360
2820 2780 2720 2660 2600 2520 2380
2890 2840 2770 2710 2630 2540 2400
2960 2890 2820 2750 2660 2570 2410
3030 2950 2870 2790 2700 2590 2430
3100 3010 2920 2830 2730 2620 2450
3170 3070 2970 2870 2760 2640 2460
3230 3130 3020 2910 2790 2670 2480
3300 3190 3070 2950 2820 2690 2500
3370 3250 3120 2990 2860 2720 2520
3440 3310 3170 3030 2890 2740 2530
W 36×170
1800
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.28 0.55 0.83 1.10 4.84 8.89
1800 1560 1320 1090 847 649 450
2560 2520 2480 2440 2390 2320 2200
2620 2580 2530 2480 2420 2340 2210
2690 2640 2580 2520 2450 2370 2230
2750 2690 2620 2550 2480 2390 2240
2820 2750 2670 2590 2510 2410 2260
2880 2800 2720 2630 2540 2440 2280
2940 2860 2770 2670 2570 2460 2290
3010 2910 2810 2710 2600 2480 2310
3070 2970 2860 2750 2630 2500 2320
3130 3020 2910 2780 2660 2530 2340
3200 3080 2950 2820 2690 2550 2360
W 36×160
1680
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.26 0.51 0.77 1.02 4.82 8.97
1690 1470 1250 1030 811 617 423
2400 2360 2330 2290 2240 2170 2050
2460 2420 2370 2320 2270 2200 2070
2520 2470 2420 2360 2300 2220 2080
2580 2520 2460 2400 2330 2240 2100
2640 2570 2500 2430 2360 2260 2110
2700 2630 2550 2470 2380 2280 2130
2760 2680 2590 2510 2410 2310 2140
2820 2730 2640 2540 2440 2330 2160
2880 2780 2680 2580 2470 2350 2170
2940 2830 2730 2610 2500 2370 2190
3000 2890 2770 2650 2530 2390 2200
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 23
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 36×150
Kip-ft
1570
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1590 2250 2300 2360 2410 2470 2530 0.24 1390 2220 2260 2310 2360 2410 2460 0.47 1190 2180 2220 2270 2310 2350 2390 0.71 983 2140 2180 2210 2250 2280 2320 0.94 781 2100 2130 2160 2190 2210 2240 4.83 589 2040 2060 2080 2100 2120 2140 9.08 398 1920 1930 1950 1960 1970 1990
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
2580 2510 2430 2350 2270 2160 2000
2640 2560 2480 2390 2300 2190 2020
2700 2610 2520 2420 2330 2210 2030
2750 2660 2560 2460 2350 2230 2040
2810 2710 2600 2490 2380 2250 2060
W 36×135
1370
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1430 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 2260 0.20 1260 1980 2020 2070 2110 2160 2200 0.40 1090 1950 1990 2030 2060 2100 2140 0.59 919 1920 1950 1980 2020 2050 2080 0.79 749 1890 1910 1940 1970 1990 2020 4.96 553 1820 1840 1860 1880 1900 1920 9.50 357 1690 1710 1720 1730 1740 1760
2310 2240 2180 2110 2050 1940 1770
2360 2290 2220 2150 2070 1960 1780
2410 2330 2260 2180 2100 1980 1790
2460 2380 2300 2210 2130 2000 1810
2510 2420 2330 2240 2150 2020 1820
W 33×221
2310
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.32 0.64 0.96 1.28 3.76 6.48
2340 1980 1610 1250 889 737 585
3140 3090 3020 2950 2870 2820 2750
3230 3160 3080 3000 2900 2850 2770
3310 3230 3140 3040 2940 2880 2790
3390 3300 3200 3090 2970 2900 2810
3470 3370 3250 3130 3000 2930 2830
3560 3440 3310 3170 3030 2960 2850
3640 3510 3370 3220 3060 2980 2870
3720 3580 3420 3260 3090 3010 2890
3810 3650 3480 3310 3120 3030 2910
3890 3720 3540 3350 3160 3060 2930
3970 3790 3600 3400 3190 3090 2960
W 33×201
2080
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.29 0.58 0.86 1.15 3.67 6.51
2130 1800 1480 1150 824 678 532
2840 2790 2730 2670 2600 2560 2480
2910 2850 2790 2710 2630 2580 2500
2990 2920 2840 2750 2660 2600 2520
3070 2980 2890 2790 2690 2630 2540
3140 3050 2940 2830 2720 2650 2560
3220 3110 2990 2870 2750 2680 2580
3290 3170 3050 2920 2780 2700 2600
3370 3240 3100 2960 2810 2720 2620
3440 3300 3150 3000 2830 2750 2630
3520 3360 3200 3040 2860 2770 2650
3590 3430 3260 3080 2890 2800 2670
W 33×141
1390
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1500 1980 2030 2080 2140 2190 2240 0.24 1300 1950 1990 2040 2090 2130 2180 0.48 1100 1920 1950 1990 2030 2070 2110 0.72 900 1880 1910 1940 1970 2010 2040 0.96 700 1840 1860 1890 1910 1940 1960 4.31 537 1790 1810 1820 1840 1860 1880 8.05 374 1690 1710 1720 1730 1740 1760
2300 2220 2150 2070 1990 1900 1770
2350 2270 2190 2100 2010 1920 1780
2400 2320 2230 2130 2040 1940 1800
2460 2360 2270 2170 2060 1960 1810
2510 2410 2300 2200 2090 1980 1820
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 24
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 33×130
Kip-ft
1260
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1380 1810 1860 1910 1960 2010 2060 0.21 1200 1780 1830 1870 1910 1950 2000 0.43 1020 1760 1790 1830 1860 1900 1940 0.64 847 1720 1750 1780 1810 1840 1870 0.86 670 1690 1710 1740 1760 1780 1810 4.39 507 1640 1660 1670 1690 1710 1730 8.29 345 1540 1550 1570 1580 1590 1600
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
2100 2040 1970 1900 1830 1750 1610
2150 2080 2010 1930 1860 1760 1630
2200 2130 2050 1960 1880 1780 1640
2250 2170 2080 1990 1900 1800 1650
2300 2210 2120 2020 1930 1820 1660
W 33×118
1120
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1250 1630 1680 1720 1760 1810 1850 0.19 1100 1610 1650 1690 1720 1760 1800 0.37 943 1580 1620 1650 1680 1720 1750 0.56 790 1560 1580 1610 1640 1670 1700 0.74 638 1530 1550 1570 1600 1620 1640 4.44 475 1480 1490 1510 1530 1540 1560 8.54 312 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430
1900 1840 1780 1720 1660 1580 1450
1940 1880 1820 1750 1690 1590 1460
1980 1920 1850 1780 1710 1610 1470
2030 1960 1880 1810 1730 1630 1480
2070 2000 1920 1840 1750 1650 1490
W 30×116
1020
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1230 1480 1530 1570 1610 1660 1700 0.21 1070 1460 1500 1530 1570 1610 1650 0.43 910 1430 1460 1500 1530 1560 1590 0.64 749 1400 1430 1460 1480 1510 1540 0.85 589 1370 1390 1410 1440 1460 1480 3.98 448 1330 1350 1360 1380 1390 1410 7.44 308 1250 1260 1270 1290 1300 1310
1740 1690 1630 1560 1500 1430 1320
1790 1720 1660 1590 1520 1440 1330
1830 1760 1690 1620 1540 1460 1340
1880 1800 1720 1640 1560 1470 1350
1920 1840 1750 1670 1580 1490 1360
W 30×108
934
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1140 1370 1410 1450 1490 1530 1570 0.19 998 1350 1380 1420 1450 1490 1520 0.38 855 1320 1350 1380 1410 1440 1470 0.57 711 1300 1320 1350 1370 1400 1420 0.76 568 1270 1290 1310 1330 1350 1370 4.04 427 1230 1240 1260 1270 1290 1300 7.64 285 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200
1610 1560 1500 1450 1390 1320 1210
1650 1590 1530 1470 1410 1330 1220
1690 1630 1570 1500 1430 1350 1230
1730 1660 1600 1520 1450 1360 1240
1770 1700 1630 1550 1470 1380 1250
W 30×99
842
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1050 1250 1290 1320 1360 1400 1430 0.17 922 1230 1260 1300 1330 1360 1390 0.34 796 1210 1240 1270 1290 1320 1350 0.50 670 1190 1210 1240 1260 1280 1310 0.67 543 1170 1180 1200 1220 1240 1260 4.07 403 1120 1140 1150 1170 1180 1190 7.83 262 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090
1470 1430 1380 1330 1280 1210 1100
1510 1460 1410 1350 1300 1220 1110
1550 1490 1440 1380 1320 1240 1120
1580 1520 1460 1400 1340 1250 1130
1620 1560 1490 1430 1360 1270 1140
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 25
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 27×102
Kip-ft
824
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1080 1190 1230 1270 1300 1340 1380 0.21 930 1170 1200 1230 1270 1300 1330 0.42 781 1140 1170 1200 1230 1250 1280 0.62 631 1120 1140 1160 1180 1210 1230 0.83 482 1090 1100 1120 1140 1160 1170 3.41 376 1060 1070 1080 1100 1110 1120 6.26 270 1010 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050
In.
Kips
2
1420 1360 1310 1250 1190 1140 1060
1460 1400 1340 1270 1210 1150 1070
1500 1430 1360 1290 1220 1160 1080
1530 1460 1390 1320 1240 1180 1090
1570 1500 1420 1340 1260 1190 1100
W 27×94
751
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.19 0.37 0.56 0.75 3.39 6.39
997 863 729 595 461 355 249
1300 1260 1210 1150 1100 1050 974
1340 1290 1230 1170 1120 1060 982
1370 1320 1260 1200 1130 1070 991
1410 1350 1280 1220 1150 1090 1000
1450 1380 1310 1240 1170 1100 1010
W 27×84
659
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.16 0.32 0.48 0.64 3.44 6.62
893 778 663 549 434 329 223
971 1000 1030 1070 1100 1130 1160 1190 1220 954 982 1010 1040 1060 1090 1120 1150 1170 936 959 983 1010 1030 1050 1080 1100 1120 916 936 955 975 994 1010 1030 1050 1070 896 911 926 942 957 972 988 1000 1020 866 878 890 901 913 925 936 948 960 814 822 830 838 846 854 861 869 877
1260 1200 1150 1090 1030 971 885
1290 1230 1170 1110 1050 983 893
W 24×76
540
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.17 0.34 0.51 0.68 3.00 5.60
806 696 586 476 366 284 202
797 781 764 745 724 703 666
826 806 784 762 737 713 673
855 830 805 778 750 723 680
883 855 826 795 763 733 687
912 880 847 812 776 743 694
940 904 867 829 789 753 702
969 929 888 846 802 763 709
997 1030 1050 1080 954 978 1000 1030 909 930 950 971 863 880 896 913 815 828 841 854 773 783 793 803 716 723 730 737
W 24×68
478
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.15 0.29 0.44 0.59 3.05 5.81
724 629 535 440 346 263 181
711 697 682 666 649 628 590
736 719 701 682 662 637 596
762 741 720 697 674 646 603
788 764 739 713 686 656 609
813 786 758 729 698 665 616
839 808 777 744 711 674 622
864 830 796 760 723 684 628
890 853 815 775 735 693 635
1090 1070 1050 1030 1000 972 921
2.5
1130 1100 1080 1050 1020 985 929
3
1160 1130 1100 1070 1030 997 938
3.5
1200 1160 1130 1090 1050 1010 947
4
1230 1190 1150 1110 1070 1020 956
4.5
1270 1230 1180 1130 1080 1040 965
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
916 875 833 791 747 702 641
941 897 852 807 760 712 648
967 920 871 822 772 721 654
5 - 26
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 24×62
Kip-ft
413
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.15 0.29 0.44 0.59 3.47 6.58
655 580 506 431 356 260 164
644 633 621 608 595 568 520
667 653 639 624 608 577 526
690 674 657 639 620 587 532
713 694 675 654 633 596 538
737 715 693 669 646 605 543
760 736 711 685 658 614 549
783 756 728 700 671 623 555
806 777 746 715 683 633 561
829 797 764 731 696 642 567
853 818 782 746 709 651 572
876 838 800 761 721 660 578
W 24×55
362
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.25 0.38 0.51 3.45 6.66
583 520 456 392 328 237 146
569 560 550 540 529 504 458
590 579 566 554 540 512 463
611 597 583 568 552 520 468
631 615 599 582 564 529 474
652 634 615 595 575 537 479
673 652 631 609 587 546 484
693 671 647 623 599 554 489
714 689 663 637 610 562 494
735 707 679 651 622 571 499
755 726 696 665 634 579 505
776 744 712 679 645 588 510
W 21×62
389
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.15 0.31 0.46 0.62 2.53 4.78
659 568 476 385 294 229 165
583 570 555 540 523 507 482
606 590 572 553 534 516 487
630 610 589 567 544 524 493
653 630 606 581 555 532 499
676 650 623 594 565 540 505
700 670 640 608 575 548 511
723 690 656 622 586 556 517
746 710 673 635 596 564 522
770 730 690 649 607 572 528
793 751 707 663 617 581 534
816 771 724 676 628 589 540
W 21×57
348
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.16 0.33 0.49 0.65 2.90 5.38
601 525 448 371 294 222 150
534 522 510 497 483 464 433
555 541 526 510 493 472 438
576 559 542 523 504 480 443
597 578 558 536 514 488 449
619 597 574 550 525 496 454
640 615 589 563 535 504 459
661 634 605 576 546 511 465
683 652 621 589 556 519 470
704 671 637 602 566 527 475
725 689 653 615 577 535 481
747 708 669 628 587 543 486
W 21×50
297
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.27 0.40 0.54 2.92 5.58
529 466 403 341 278 205 132
465 456 446 436 425 406 374
484 473 461 448 435 413 379
503 489 475 460 445 421 383
522 506 489 472 454 428 388
540 522 504 484 464 435 393
559 539 518 496 474 442 397
578 555 532 508 484 450 402
597 572 546 520 494 457 407
615 588 561 532 504 464 411
634 605 575 545 513 472 416
653 621 589 557 523 479 421
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 27
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 21×44
Kip-ft
258
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.23 0.34 0.45 2.90 5.69
468 415 363 310 257 187 117
409 401 393 384 376 358 326
425 416 406 395 385 364 331
442 430 419 406 394 371 335
458 445 432 417 403 378 339
475 460 444 428 412 384 343
492 475 457 439 421 391 347
508 489 470 450 430 398 351
525 504 483 461 439 404 355
541 519 496 472 448 411 360
558 533 509 483 458 417 364
574 548 521 494 467 424 368
W 18×60
332
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.17 0.35 0.52 0.70 2.19 3.82
634 539 445 350 256 207 158
499 485 470 454 436 424 407
522 504 486 466 445 432 413
544 523 501 478 454 439 418
566 542 517 491 463 446 424
589 561 533 503 472 454 430
611 581 549 516 481 461 435
634 600 564 528 491 468 441
656 619 580 540 500 476 447
679 638 596 553 509 483 452
701 657 612 565 518 490 458
723 676 627 578 527 498 463
W 18×55
302
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.16 0.32 0.47 0.63 2.16 3.86
583 498 412 327 242 194 146
457 444 431 416 401 389 372
477 462 445 428 409 396 377
498 479 460 439 418 403 383
519 497 474 451 426 410 388
539 515 489 462 435 417 393
560 532 504 474 443 424 398
581 550 518 486 452 430 403
601 568 533 497 461 437 408
622 585 547 509 469 444 414
643 603 562 520 478 451 419
663 620 577 532 486 458 424
W 18×50
273
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.14 0.29 0.43 0.57 2.07 3.82
529 452 375 299 222 177 132
412 401 389 376 362 352 336
431 417 402 387 370 358 341
450 433 415 397 378 365 346
468 449 429 408 386 371 350
487 465 442 418 394 377 355
506 481 455 429 402 383 360
525 497 469 439 409 390 365
543 513 482 450 417 396 369
562 529 495 461 425 402 374
581 545 508 471 433 408 379
600 561 522 482 441 415 383
W 18×46
245
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.15 0.30 0.45 0.61 2.40 4.34
486 420 354 288 222 172 122
380 370 360 348 337 324 305
397 385 372 359 345 330 310
414 400 385 369 352 336 314
431 415 397 379 360 343 318
449 430 410 389 368 349 322
466 444 422 399 376 355 327
483 459 435 410 384 361 331
500 474 447 420 392 367 335
517 489 460 430 400 373 340
535 504 472 440 407 379 344
552 519 485 450 415 385 348
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 28
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 18×40
Kip-ft
212
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.26 0.39 0.53 2.26 4.27
425 368 311 254 197 152 106
329 321 312 303 293 282 265
345 334 323 312 300 288 269
360 347 334 321 307 293 273
375 360 345 330 314 298 277
390 373 356 339 321 304 280
405 386 367 348 328 309 284
420 399 378 357 335 315 288
435 412 389 366 342 320 292
450 425 400 375 349 325 295
465 438 411 384 356 331 299
480 451 423 393 363 336 303
W 18×35
180
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.21 0.32 0.43 2.37 4.56
371 325 279 233 187 140 92.7
285 278 271 264 256 245 227
298 290 281 272 263 250 230
311 301 291 280 269 255 233
324 313 301 289 276 260 237
338 324 311 297 283 265 240
351 336 321 305 289 270 243
364 347 331 313 296 275 246
377 359 340 322 303 280 250
390 370 350 330 309 285 253
403 382 360 338 316 290 256
416 393 370 346 323 295 260
W 16×36
173
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.32 0.43 1.79 3.44
382 328 273 219 165 130 95.4
268 261 252 244 234 227 215
282 272 262 251 240 232 219
295 284 272 259 246 236 222
309 295 281 267 252 241 226
322 307 291 275 258 245 229
336 319 301 282 264 250 232
349 330 310 290 270 255 236
363 342 320 298 275 259 239
377 353 330 306 281 264 243
390 365 339 314 287 268 246
404 377 349 321 293 273 249
W 16×31
146
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.33 0.44 2.00 3.79
328 285 241 197 153 118 82.1
231 225 218 211 204 196 183
243 235 227 218 209 200 186
254 245 235 225 214 204 189
266 255 244 232 220 208 192
278 265 252 239 225 212 195
289 275 261 246 231 217 198
301 285 269 253 236 221 201
313 295 278 260 242 225 204
324 305 286 267 247 229 207
336 315 295 274 253 233 209
347 326 303 281 258 237 212
W 16×26
119
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.09 0.17 0.26 0.35 2.04 4.01
276 242 208 174 140 104 69.1
193 188 183 177 172 164 151
203 196 190 184 177 168 154
212 205 197 190 182 171 156
222 214 205 196 187 175 159
232 222 212 202 192 179 161
242 231 220 208 197 182 164
252 239 227 214 202 186 166
261 248 234 220 206 190 169
271 257 242 227 211 194 171
281 265 249 233 216 197 173
291 274 256 239 221 201 176
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 29
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 14×38
Kip-ft
166
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.26 0.39 0.52 1.38 2.53
403 340 278 215 152 126 101
258 249 240 229 218 213 206
273 261 249 237 224 218 209
287 273 259 244 229 222 213
301 285 269 252 234 226 217
316 298 279 260 240 231 220
330 310 289 267 245 235 224
344 322 299 275 251 240 227
358 334 308 283 256 244 231
373 346 318 290 261 249 234
387 358 328 298 267 253 238
401 370 338 305 272 258 242
W 14×34
147
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.23 0.34 0.46 1.41 2.60
360 305 250 194 139 115 90.0
229 221 213 204 194 189 182
242 232 222 211 199 193 186
255 243 230 218 204 197 189
267 254 239 224 209 202 192
280 264 248 231 214 206 195
293 275 257 238 219 210 198
306 286 266 245 224 214 202
318 297 275 252 229 218 205
331 308 283 259 234 222 208
344 318 292 266 239 226 211
357 329 301 273 244 230 214
W 14×30
128
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.19 0.29 0.39 1.48 2.82
319 272 225 179 132 106 79.7
201 195 187 180 172 167 159
213 204 195 186 177 171 162
224 214 203 193 182 174 165
235 223 211 199 186 178 168
246 233 219 205 191 182 171
258 243 227 212 196 186 173
269 252 235 218 200 189 176
280 262 243 224 205 193 179
292 272 251 231 210 197 182
303 281 259 237 214 201 185
314 291 267 243 219 204 187
W 14×26
109
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.21 0.32 0.42 1.67 3.19
277 239 201 163 125 97.0 69.2
176 170 164 158 152 146 137
185 179 171 164 156 149 140
195 187 179 170 161 153 142
205 195 186 175 165 156 145
215 204 193 181 170 160 147
225 212 200 187 174 163 149
234 221 207 193 178 167 152
244 229 214 199 183 170 154
254 238 221 204 187 173 157
264 246 228 210 192 177 159
274 255 235 216 196 180 162
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.08 0.17 0.25 0.34 1.69 3.34
234 203 173 143 113 85.7 58.4
147 142 138 133 128 123 114
155 150 144 138 132 126 116
163 157 150 143 136 129 118
172 164 156 148 140 132 120
180 171 162 153 144 135 122
188 178 169 159 148 138 124
196 186 175 164 152 141 126
205 193 181 169 156 144 128
213 200 187 174 160 147 130
221 207 193 179 164 150 132
230 215 199 184 168 153 135
W 14×22
89.6
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 30
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 12×30
Kip-ft
116
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.33 0.44 1.12 1.94
316 265 213 162 110 94.5 79.1
183 176 168 159 151 148 144
194 185 175 165 155 151 147
206 194 183 171 158 154 149
217 204 190 177 162 158 152
228 213 198 182 166 161 155
239 223 205 188 170 164 158
250 232 213 194 174 168 161
262 241 221 199 178 171 163
273 251 228 205 182 174 166
284 260 236 211 186 178 169
295 269 243 217 190 181 172
W 12×26
100
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.19 0.29 0.38 1.08 1.95
275 231 187 142 97.8 83.3 68.9
158 152 145 138 131 128 124
168 160 152 143 134 131 127
178 168 158 148 138 134 129
187 176 165 153 141 137 132
197 184 171 158 145 140 134
207 193 178 163 148 143 136
217 201 185 168 151 146 139
226 209 191 173 155 149 141
236 217 198 178 158 151 144
246 225 205 183 162 154 146
256 234 211 188 165 157 149
W 12×22
79.1
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.21 0.32 0.43 1.66 3.04
233 202 172 141 110 84.1 58.3
135 130 126 121 115 110 102
143 137 132 126 119 113 104
151 145 138 131 123 116 106
160 152 144 136 127 119 108
168 159 150 141 131 122 110
176 166 156 146 135 125 112
184 173 162 151 139 128 114
193 180 168 156 143 131 116
201 188 174 160 147 134 119
209 195 180 165 150 137 121
217 202 186 170 154 140 123
W 12×19
66.7
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.09 0.18 0.26 0.35 1.66 3.12
201 175 150 125 99.6 74.9 50.1
115 111 107 103 99.2 94.0 86.3
122 117 113 108 103 96.7 88.1
129 124 118 112 106 99.3 89.9
136 130 123 117 110 102 91.7
143 136 129 121 113 105 93.5
150 142 134 125 117 107 95.2
157 148 139 130 120 110 97.0
164 155 145 134 124 113 98.8
172 161 150 139 127 115 101
179 167 155 143 131 118 102
186 173 160 148 134 121 104
W 12×16
54.3
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.07 0.13 0.20 0.26 1.71 3.32
170 151 131 112 93.4 67.9 42.4
96.0 93.3 90.5 87.5 84.5 79.2 71.1
102 98.6 95.1 91.5 87.8 81.6 72.6
108 104 99.8 95.5 91.1 84.0 74.1
114 109 104 99.5 94.5 86.4 75.6
120 115 109 103 97.8 88.8 77.1
126 120 114 107 101 91.2 78.6
132 125 118 111 104 93.6 80.1
138 131 123 115 108 96.1 81.6
144 136 128 119 111 98.5 83.1
150 141 132 123 114 101 84.6
156 147 137 127 118 103 86.1
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 31
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 12×14
Kip-ft
47.0
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.06 0.11 0.17 0.23 1.69 3.36
150 134 118 102 85.4 61.4 37.4
84.4 82.1 79.7 77.3 74.8 69.8 62.2
89.7 86.8 83.9 80.9 77.8 72.0 63.5
95.0 91.5 88.0 84.5 80.8 74.2 64.8
100 96.3 92.2 88.1 83.8 76.4 66.1
106 101 96.4 91.6 86.9 78.5 67.5
111 106 101 95.2 89.9 80.7 68.8
116 110 105 98.8 92.9 82.9 70.1
122 115 109 102 95.9 85.1 71.4
127 120 113 106 99.0 87.2 72.8
132 125 117 110 102 89.4 74.1
137 129 121 113 105 91.6 75.4
W 10×26
84.5
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.33 0.44 0.90 1.51
274 228 183 137 91.2 79.8 68.5
139 132 125 118 110 108 106
149 140 132 123 114 111 108
158 149 138 128 117 114 110
168 157 145 133 120 117 113
178 165 151 137 123 119 115
188 173 158 142 126 122 118
197 181 164 147 130 125 120
207 189 171 152 133 128 123
217 197 177 157 136 131 125
226 205 184 162 139 134 127
236 213 190 166 143 136 130
W 10×22
70.2
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.09 0.18 0.27 0.36 0.95 1.70
234 196 159 122 84.6 71.5 58.4
117 112 106 100 94.2 91.8 88.7
126 119 112 105 97.2 94.3 90.8
134 126 117 109 100 96.9 92.9
142 133 123 113 103 99.4 94.9
150 140 129 118 106 102 97.0
159 147 134 122 109 104 99.1
167 154 140 126 112 107 101
175 161 146 131 115 110 103
183 167 151 135 118 112 105
192 174 157 139 121 115 107
200 181 163 144 124 117 109
W 10×19
58.3
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 1.27 2.31
202 102 174 97.9 145 93.5 117 89.0 88.0 84.2 69.3 80.5 50.6 75.5
109 104 98.7 93.1 87.4 83.0 77.3
116 110 104 97.2 90.5 85.4 79.1
124 116 109 101 93.6 87.9 80.9
131 123 114 106 96.7 90.4 82.7
138 129 119 110 99.8 92.8 84.5
145 135 124 114 103 95.3 86.3
152 141 130 118 106 97.7 88.1
159 147 135 122 109 100 89.8
167 153 140 126 112 103 91.6
174 159 145 130 115 105 93.4
W 10×17
50.5
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.08 0.17 0.25 0.33 1.31 2.46
180 156 132 108 84.4 64.6 44.9
96.1 91.8 87.4 82.9 78.1 73.6 67.4
102 97.4 92.1 86.7 81.1 75.8 69.0
109 103 96.8 90.5 84.1 78.1 70.6
115 108 101 94.3 87.1 80.4 72.2
122 114 106 98.2 90.1 82.7 73.8
128 119 111 102 93.1 85.0 75.4
134 125 115 106 96.1 87.3 77.0
141 130 120 110 99.1 89.6 78.6
147 136 125 114 102 91.9 80.2
153 142 129 117 105 94.2 81.7
89.8 86.3 82.7 79.0 75.2 71.3 65.8
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 32
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 10×15
Kip-ft
43.2
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.07 0.14 0.20 0.27 1.35 2.60
159 139 120 100 81.0 60.3 39.7
78.7 75.9 73.0 70.0 66.9 62.9 57.0
84.3 80.8 77.2 73.5 69.8 65.0 58.4
89.9 85.7 81.5 77.1 72.6 67.1 59.9
95.5 90.7 85.7 80.7 75.5 69.3 61.3
101 95.6 90.0 84.2 78.4 71.4 62.7
107 101 94.2 87.8 81.2 73.5 64.1
112 105 98.4 91.3 84.1 75.7 65.5
118 110 103 94.9 87.0 77.8 66.9
124 115 107 98.4 89.9 80.0 68.3
129 120 111 102 92.7 82.1 69.7
135 125 115 106 95.6 84.2 71.1
W 10×12
34.0
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 127 0.05 112 0.11 97.5 0.16 82.5 0.21 67.6 1.30 49.7 2.61 31.9
62.6 60.5 58.2 56.0 53.7 50.3 45.3
67.1 64.4 61.7 58.9 56.1 52.0 46.4
71.6 68.4 65.2 61.8 58.5 53.8 47.5
76.1 72.4 68.6 64.8 60.9 55.5 48.6
80.7 76.4 72.1 67.7 63.2 57.3 49.8
85.2 80.4 75.5 70.6 65.6 59.1 50.9
89.7 84.4 79.0 73.5 68.0 60.8 52.0
94.2 88.3 82.4 76.5 70.4 62.6 53.2
98.7 92.3 85.9 79.4 72.8 64.3 54.3
103 96.3 89.3 82.3 75.2 66.1 55.4
108 100 92.8 85.2 77.6 67.9 56.5
W 8×28
73.4
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.12 0.23 0.35 0.47 0.53 0.59
297 242 188 133 78.2 76.2 74.3
127 119 110 102 92.3 91.9 91.5
137 127 117 106 95.0 94.6 94.2
148 136 124 111 97.8 97.3 96.8
158 145 130 116 101 100 99.4
169 153 137 120 103 103 102
179 162 144 125 106 105 105
190 170 150 130 109 108 107
200 179 157 135 112 111 110
211 188 164 139 114 114 113
222 196 170 144 117 116 115
232 205 177 149 120 119 118
W 8×24
62.6
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.47 0.55
255 108 208 101 161 93.8 115 86.3 67.8 78.5 65.8 78.2 63.7 77.8
117 108 99.5 90.4 80.9 80.5 80.1
126 116 105 94.4 83.3 82.8 82.3
135 123 111 98.5 85.7 85.2 84.6
144 130 117 103 88.2 87.5 86.9
153 138 122 107 90.6 89.8 89.1
162 145 128 111 93.0 92.2 91.4
171 152 134 115 95.4 94.5 93.6
180 160 139 119 97.8 96.8 95.9
189 167 145 123 100 99.2 98.1
198 175 151 127 103 101 100
W 8×21
55.1
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.70 1.06
222 184 146 108 70.0 62.7 55.4
104 97.4 90.3 82.9 75.3 73.7 72.0
112 104 95.5 86.8 77.8 75.9 73.9
120 110 101 90.6 80.2 78.1 75.9
128 117 106 94.4 82.7 80.4 77.9
136 123 111 98.2 85.2 82.6 79.8
144 130 116 102 87.7 84.8 81.8
151 137 121 106 90.1 87.0 83.8
159 143 126 110 92.6 89.3 85.7
167 150 132 114 95.1 91.5 87.7
175 156 137 117 97.6 93.7 89.6
96.4 90.9 85.2 79.1 72.8 71.5 70.0
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 33
Fy = 36 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 8×18
Kip-ft
45.9
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 189 0.08 158 0.17 127 0.25 95.8 0.33 64.6 0.71 56.0 1.21 47.3
In.
Kips
81.4 76.9 72.2 67.3 62.3 60.7 58.9
88.1 82.5 76.7 70.7 64.6 62.7 60.6
94.8 88.1 81.2 74.1 66.9 64.7 62.3
102 93.7 85.7 77.5 69.2 66.7 64.0
108 99.3 90.2 80.9 71.4 68.7 65.6
115 105 94.7 84.3 73.7 70.7 67.3
122 111 99.2 87.7 76.0 72.6 69.0
128 116 104 91.1 78.3 74.6 70.7
135 122 108 94.5 80.6 76.6 72.4
142 127 113 97.9 82.9 78.6 74.0
148 133 117 101 85.2 80.6 75.7
W 8×15
36.7
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 160 0.08 137 0.16 114 0.24 91.5 0.32 68.8 0.97 54.4 1.79 40.0
68.6 65.3 61.9 58.3 54.6 52.0 48.5
74.2 70.1 65.9 61.6 57.1 53.9 49.9
79.9 75.0 69.9 64.8 59.5 55.8 51.3
85.5 79.8 74.0 68.0 61.9 57.7 52.8
91.2 84.7 78.0 71.3 64.4 59.7 54.2
96.9 89.5 82.1 74.5 66.8 61.6 55.6
103 94.4 86.1 77.8 69.3 63.5 57.0
108 99.2 90.2 81.0 71.7 65.4 58.4
114 104 94.2 84.2 74.1 67.4 59.8
120 109 98.3 87.5 76.6 69.3 61.2
125 114 102 90.7 79.0 71.2 62.7
W 8×13
30.8
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 138 0.06 120 0.13 102 0.19 83.2 0.26 64.8 1.00 49.7 1.91 34.6
58.7 56.1 53.3 50.5 47.6 44.9 41.2
63.6 60.3 56.9 53.5 49.9 46.6 42.4
68.5 64.6 60.5 56.4 52.2 48.4 43.6
73.4 68.8 64.1 59.4 54.5 50.1 44.8
78.3 73.0 67.7 62.3 56.8 51.9 46.1
83.2 77.3 71.3 65.3 59.1 53.7 47.3
88.1 81.5 74.9 68.2 61.4 55.4 48.5
93.0 85.8 78.5 71.1 63.7 57.2 49.7
97.9 90.0 82.1 74.1 66.0 58.9 51.0
103 94.3 85.7 77.0 68.3 60.7 52.2
108 98.5 89.3 80.0 70.6 62.5 53.4
W 8×10
23.9
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 107 0.05 92.0 0.10 77.5 0.15 62.9 0.21 48.4 0.88 37.5 1.77 26.6
44.9 42.8 40.6 38.5 36.2 34.3 31.7
48.6 46.0 43.4 40.7 37.9 35.6 32.7
52.4 49.3 46.1 42.9 39.6 36.9 33.6
56.2 52.6 48.9 45.1 41.4 38.3 34.5
60.0 55.8 51.6 47.4 43.1 39.6 35.5
63.7 59.1 54.4 49.6 44.8 40.9 36.4
67.5 62.3 57.1 51.8 46.5 42.2 37.4
71.3 65.6 59.9 54.1 48.2 43.6 38.3
75.1 68.9 62.6 56.3 49.9 44.9 39.3
78.8 72.1 65.3 58.5 51.6 46.2 40.2
82.6 75.4 68.1 60.7 53.4 47.6 41.1
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 34
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W40×297
4990
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.41 0.83 1.24 1.65 4.59 8.17
4370 3720 3060 2410 1760 1430 1090
6790 6680 6560 6420 6260 6150 5950
6940 6810 6670 6510 6320 6200 5990
7090 6950 6780 6590 6390 6250 6020
7250 7080 6890 6680 6450 6300 6060
7400 7210 7000 6760 6510 6350 6100
7560 7340 7100 6850 6570 6400 6140
7710 7470 7210 6930 6640 6450 6180
7870 7600 7320 7020 6700 6500 6220
8020 7740 7430 7110 6760 6550 6260
8180 7870 7540 7190 6820 6600 6300
8330 8000 7650 7280 6890 6650 6330
W40×278
4460
TFL 0.00 2 0.45 3 0.91 4 1.36 BFL 1.81 6 5.64 7 10.06
4090 3550 3010 2470 1920 1470 1020
6400 6310 6210 6090 5950 5770 5460
6540 6440 6320 6180 6020 5820 5500
6690 6560 6420 6260 6090 5880 5530
6830 6690 6530 6350 6160 5930 5570
6980 6810 6630 6440 6220 5980 5600
7120 6940 6740 6520 6290 6030 5640
7270 7070 6850 6610 6360 6080 5680
7410 7190 6950 6700 6430 6140 5710
7560 7320 7060 6790 6500 6190 5750
7700 7440 7170 6870 6560 6240 5790
7850 7570 7270 6960 6630 6290 5820
W40×277
4690
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.39 0.79 1.18 1.58 4.25 7.60
4070 3440 2820 2200 1570 1290 1020
6290 6190 6080 5950 5800 5700 5550
6430 6310 6180 6020 5850 5750 5580
6580 6440 6280 6100 5910 5790 5620
6720 6560 6380 6180 5960 5840 5660
6870 6680 6480 6260 6020 5880 5690
7010 6800 6580 6340 6080 5930 5730
7150 6920 6680 6410 6130 5980 5760
7300 7050 6780 6490 6190 6020 5800
7440 7170 6880 6570 6240 6070 5840
7590 7290 6980 6650 6300 6110 5870
7730 7410 7080 6720 6350 6160 5910
W40×264
4240
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.43 0.87 1.30 1.73 5.49 9.90
3880 3360 2850 2330 1820 1390 970
6050 5970 5870 5760 5630 5470 5170
6180 6080 5970 5840 5690 5510 5210
6320 6200 6070 5920 5760 5560 5240
6460 6320 6170 6000 5820 5610 5280
6600 6440 6270 6090 5880 5660 5310
6730 6560 6370 6170 5950 5710 5350
6870 6680 6470 6250 6010 5760 5380
7010 6800 6570 6330 6080 5810 5420
7150 6920 6680 6420 6140 5860 5450
7280 7040 6780 6500 6210 5910 5480
7420 7160 6880 6580 6270 5960 5520
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 35
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W40×249
4200
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.36 0.71 1.07 1.42 4.06 7.47
3670 3110 2550 1990 1430 1170 916
5630 5540 5440 5330 5200 5120 4980
5760 5650 5530 5400 5250 5160 5010
5890 5760 5620 5470 5300 5200 5040
6020 5870 5710 5540 5350 5240 5070
6150 5980 5810 5610 5400 5280 5110
6280 6090 5900 5680 5450 5320 5140
6410 6200 5990 5750 5510 5370 5170
6540 6310 6080 5820 5560 5410 5200
6670 6420 6170 5890 5610 5450 5240
6800 6530 6260 5960 5660 5490 5270
6930 6640 6350 6030 5710 5530 5300
W40×235
3790
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.39 0.79 1.18 1.58 5.18 9.47
3450 2980 2510 2040 1570 1220 861
5330 5260 5170 5070 4960 4830 4600
5450 5360 5260 5150 5020 4880 4630
5570 5470 5350 5220 5070 4920 4660
5700 5570 5440 5290 5130 4960 4690
5820 5680 5530 5360 5180 5000 4720
5940 5780 5620 5430 5240 5050 4750
6060 5890 5700 5510 5290 5090 4780
6180 6000 5790 5580 5350 5130 4810
6310 6100 5880 5650 5410 5180 4840
6430 6210 5970 5720 5460 5220 4870
6550 6310 6060 5800 5520 5260 4900
W40×215
3610
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.31 0.61 0.92 1.22 3.84 7.32
3170 2680 2200 1720 1240 1020 791
4820 4740 4660 4570 4460 4390 4270
4930 4840 4740 4630 4510 4430 4300
5040 4930 4820 4690 4550 4470 4330
5150 5030 4900 4750 4590 4500 4360
5270 5120 4970 4810 4640 4540 4380
5380 5220 5050 4870 4680 4570 4410
5490 5320 5130 4930 4730 4610 4440
5600 5410 5210 4990 4770 4650 4470
5710 5510 5290 5060 4810 4680 4500
5830 5600 5360 5120 4860 4720 4520
5940 5700 5440 5180 4900 4760 4550
W40×211
3390
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.35 0.71 1.06 1.42 4.99 9.35
3100 2680 2260 1850 1430 1100 775
4760 4700 4620 4540 4440 4330 4110
4870 4790 4700 4600 4490 4360 4140
4980 4890 4780 4670 4540 4400 4170
5090 4980 4860 4730 4590 4440 4200
5200 5080 4940 4800 4640 4480 4220
5310 5170 5020 4860 4690 4520 4250
5420 5270 5100 4930 4740 4560 4280
5530 5360 5180 4990 4800 4600 4310
5640 5460 5260 5060 4850 4640 4330
5750 5550 5340 5130 4900 4680 4360
5860 5650 5420 5190 4950 4710 4390
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 36
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W40×199
3250
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.27 0.53 0.80 1.07 4.16 8.10
2920 2500 2080 1660 1240 986 730
4410 4350 4280 4200 4110 4030 3880
4520 4440 4350 4260 4160 4070 3910
4620 4530 4430 4320 4200 4100 3940
4720 4620 4500 4380 4240 4140 3960
4830 4700 4570 4430 4290 4170 3990
4930 4790 4650 4490 4330 4210 4010
5030 4880 4720 4550 4380 4240 4040
5140 4970 4790 4610 4420 4280 4070
5240 5060 4870 4670 4460 4310 4090
5340 5150 4940 4730 4510 4350 4120
5450 5240 5020 4790 4550 4380 4140
W40×183
2930
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.31 0.61 0.92 1.22 4.76 9.16
2690 2320 1960 1600 1240 958 671
4090 4030 3970 3900 3820 3720 3540
4180 4110 4040 3960 3860 3760 3570
4280 4200 4110 4010 3910 3790 3590
4370 4280 4180 4070 3950 3830 3610
4470 4360 4250 4130 4000 3860 3640
4560 4440 4320 4180 4040 3890 3660
4660 4530 4390 4240 4090 3930 3690
4750 4610 4460 4300 4130 3960 3710
4850 4690 4530 4350 4170 4000 3730
4940 4770 4600 4410 4220 4030 3760
5040 4860 4670 4470 4260 4060 3780
W40×174
2680
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.21 0.42 0.62 0.83 4.59 9.27
2560 2230 1900 1570 1250 943 639
3820 3770 3720 3660 3600 3500 3310
3910 3850 3780 3710 3640 3530 3330
4000 3930 3850 3770 3680 3570 3350
4090 4010 3920 3830 3730 3600 3370
4180 4090 3990 3880 3770 3630 3400
4270 4160 4050 3940 3820 3670 3420
4360 4240 4120 3990 3860 3700 3440
4450 4320 4190 4050 3900 3730 3460
4540 4400 4260 4100 3950 3770 3490
4630 4480 4320 4160 3990 3800 3510
4720 4560 4390 4220 4040 3830 3530
W40×167
2600
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.26 0.51 0.77 1.03 5.00 9.85
2460 2150 1850 1550 1240 929 614
3700 3660 3610 3550 3490 3380 3170
3790 3730 3670 3600 3530 3410 3190
3880 3810 3740 3660 3580 3450 3210
3960 3890 3800 3710 3620 3480 3240
4050 3960 3870 3770 3660 3510 3260
4140 4040 3930 3820 3710 3550 3280
4220 4110 4000 3880 3750 3580 3300
4310 4190 4060 3930 3800 3610 3320
4400 4270 4130 3990 3840 3640 3340
4490 4340 4200 4040 3880 3680 3370
4570 4420 4260 4100 3930 3710 3390
W40×149
2240
TFL 0.00 2 0.21 3 0.42 4 0.62 BFL 0.83 6 5.15 7 10.41
2190 1940 1700 1450 1210 879 548
3270 3240 3200 3150 3110 2990 2770
3350 3310 3260 3200 3150 3030 2780
3430 3370 3320 3260 3190 3060 2800
3510 3440 3380 3310 3230 3090 2820
3580 3510 3440 3360 3280 3120 2840
3660 3580 3500 3410 3320 3150 2860
3740 3650 3560 3460 3360 3180 2880
3820 3720 3620 3510 3410 3210 2900
3890 3790 3680 3560 3450 3240 2920
3970 3860 3740 3620 3490 3280 2940
4050 3930 3800 3670 3530 3310 2960
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 37
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 36×300
4730
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.42 0.84 1.26 1.68 3.97 6.69
4420 3720 3020 2320 1620 1360 1100
6370 6260 6130 5980 5810 5720 5590
6530 6390 6240 6060 5860 5770 5630
6680 6520 6340 6140 5920 5820 5670
6840 6660 6450 6230 5980 5870 5710
7000 6790 6560 6310 6040 5910 5740
7150 6920 6660 6390 6090 5960 5780
7310 7050 6770 6470 6150 6010 5820
7460 7180 6880 6550 6210 6060 5860
7620 7310 6990 6640 6270 6110 5900
7780 7450 7090 6720 6320 6150 5940
7930 7580 7200 6800 6380 6200 5980
W 36×280
4390
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.39 0.79 1.18 1.57 3.88 6.62
4120 3470 2820 2170 1510 1270 1030
5910 5810 5690 5550 5400 5320 5190
6060 5930 5790 5630 5450 5360 5230
6200 6060 5890 5710 5510 5410 5270
6350 6180 5990 5780 5560 5450 5300
6500 6300 6090 5860 5610 5500 5340
6640 6430 6190 5940 5670 5540 5380
6790 6550 6290 6010 5720 5590 5410
6930 6670 6390 6090 5770 5630 5450
7080 6790 6490 6170 5830 5680 5490
7230 6920 6590 6240 5880 5720 5520
7370 7040 6690 6320 5930 5770 5560
W 36×260
4050
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.36 0.72 1.08 1.44 3.86 6.75
3830 3230 2630 2040 1440 1200 956
5450 5360 5250 5130 4990 4920 4790
5590 5480 5350 5200 5050 4960 4830
5720 5590 5440 5280 5100 5000 4860
5860 5710 5530 5350 5150 5040 4890
6000 5820 5630 5420 5200 5090 4930
6130 5930 5720 5490 5250 5130 4960
6270 6050 5810 5570 5300 5170 4990
6400 6160 5910 5640 5350 5210 5030
6540 6280 6000 5710 5400 5260 5060
6670 6390 6090 5780 5450 5300 5100
6810 6510 6190 5850 5510 5340 5130
W 36×245
3790
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.34 0.68 1.01 1.35 3.81 6.77
3610 3050 2490 1930 1380 1140 901
5120 5030 4930 4820 4690 4620 4500
5240 5140 5020 4890 4740 4660 4530
5370 5250 5110 4960 4790 4700 4560
5500 5360 5200 5030 4840 4740 4590
5630 5460 5290 5090 4890 4780 4620
5760 5570 5370 5160 4940 4820 4660
5880 5680 5460 5230 4990 4860 4690
6010 5790 5550 5300 5040 4900 4720
6140 5900 5640 5370 5080 4940 4750
6270 6000 5730 5440 5130 4980 4780
6390 6110 5810 5510 5180 5020 4820
W 36×230
3540
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.32 0.63 0.95 1.26 3.81 6.83
3380 2860 2340 1820 1300 1070 845
4780 4700 4610 4500 4390 4320 4200
4900 4800 4690 4570 4440 4350 4230
5020 4900 4770 4630 4480 4390 4260
5140 5000 4860 4700 4530 4430 4290
5260 5100 4940 4760 4570 4470 4320
5370 5200 5020 4830 4620 4510 4350
5490 5310 5100 4890 4670 4540 4380
5610 5410 5190 4960 4710 4580 4410
5730 5510 5270 5020 4760 4620 4440
5850 5610 5350 5090 4810 4660 4470
5970 5710 5440 5150 4850 4690 4500
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 38
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 36×210
3120
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.34 0.68 1.02 1.36 5.06 9.04
3090 2680 2260 1850 1430 1100 773
4450 4390 4320 4230 4140 4020 3810
4560 4480 4400 4300 4190 4060 3830
4670 4580 4480 4360 4240 4100 3860
4780 4670 4560 4430 4290 4130 3890
4890 4770 4640 4490 4340 4170 3920
5000 4860 4720 4560 4390 4210 3940
5110 4960 4800 4620 4440 4250 3970
5220 5050 4880 4690 4490 4290 4000
5330 5150 4960 4760 4540 4330 4030
5440 5240 5040 4820 4600 4370 4050
5550 5340 5120 4890 4650 4410 4080
W 36×194
2880
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.32 0.63 0.95 1.26 4.94 8.93
2850 2470 2090 1710 1320 1020 713
4090 4030 3960 3890 3800 3690 3500
4190 4120 4040 3950 3850 3730 3530
4290 4200 4110 4010 3900 3770 3550
4390 4290 4180 4070 3940 3800 3580
4490 4380 4260 4130 3990 3840 3600
4590 4470 4330 4190 4040 3880 3630
4690 4550 4410 4250 4080 3910 3650
4790 4640 4480 4310 4130 3950 3680
4890 4730 4550 4370 4180 3980 3700
5000 4820 4630 4430 4220 4020 3730
5100 4900 4700 4490 4270 4060 3750
W 36×182
2690
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.29 0.59 0.89 1.18 4.89 8.92
2680 2320 1970 1610 1260 963 670
3830 3770 3710 3640 3570 3460 3280
3920 3860 3780 3700 3610 3500 3300
4020 3940 3850 3760 3660 3530 3330
4110 4020 3920 3810 3700 3570 3350
4210 4100 3990 3870 3740 3600 3370
4300 4190 4060 3930 3790 3640 3400
4400 4270 4130 3990 3830 3670 3420
4490 4350 4200 4040 3880 3700 3450
4590 4430 4270 4100 3920 3740 3470
4680 4510 4340 4160 3970 3770 3490
4780 4600 4410 4210 4010 3810 3520
W 36×170
2500
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.28 0.55 0.83 1.10 4.84 8.89
2500 2170 1840 1510 1180 901 625
3560 3510 3450 3390 3320 3220 3050
3650 3580 3520 3440 3360 3250 3070
3730 3660 3580 3490 3400 3290 3090
3820 3740 3650 3550 3440 3320 3120
3910 3810 3710 3600 3480 3350 3140
4000 3890 3780 3650 3530 3380 3160
4090 3970 3840 3710 3570 3410 3180
4180 4040 3910 3760 3610 3450 3200
4270 4120 3970 3810 3650 3480 3230
4350 4200 4040 3870 3690 3510 3250
4440 4270 4100 3920 3730 3540 3270
W 36×160
2340
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.26 0.51 0.77 1.02 4.82 8.97
2350 2040 1740 1430 1130 857 588
3330 3280 3230 3180 3110 3020 2850
3410 3360 3290 3230 3150 3050 2870
3500 3430 3360 3280 3190 3080 2890
3580 3500 3420 3330 3230 3110 2910
3660 3570 3480 3380 3270 3140 2930
3750 3650 3540 3430 3310 3170 2960
3830 3720 3600 3480 3350 3200 2980
3910 3790 3660 3530 3390 3230 3000
4000 3860 3720 3580 3430 3260 3020
4080 3940 3790 3630 3470 3290 3040
4160 4010 3850 3680 3510 3320 3060
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 39
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 36×150
2180
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.24 0.47 0.71 0.94 4.83 9.08
2210 1930 1650 1370 1080 818 553
3120 3080 3030 2980 2920 2830 2660
3200 3150 3090 3030 2960 2860 2680
3280 3210 3150 3080 3000 2890 2700
3350 3280 3210 3120 3040 2920 2720
3430 3350 3260 3170 3080 2950 2740
3510 3420 3320 3220 3110 2980 2760
3590 3490 3380 3270 3150 3010 2780
3670 3560 3440 3320 3190 3040 2800
3750 3620 3500 3370 3230 3060 2820
3820 3690 3560 3410 3270 3090 2840
3900 3760 3610 3460 3310 3120 2860
W 36×135
1910
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.20 0.40 0.59 0.79 4.97 9.50
1990 1750 1510 1280 1040 769 496
2780 2750 2710 2670 2620 2530 2350
2850 2810 2760 2710 2660 2560 2370
2920 2870 2810 2760 2690 2580 2390
2990 2930 2870 2800 2730 2610 2400
3060 2990 2920 2850 2770 2640 2420
3130 3060 2970 2890 2800 2660 2440
3200 3120 3030 2940 2840 2690 2460
3270 3180 3080 2980 2880 2720 2470
3340 3240 3140 3030 2920 2750 2490
3410 3300 3190 3070 2950 2770 2510
3480 3360 3240 3120 2990 2800 2530
W 33×221
3210
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.32 0.64 0.96 1.28 3.76 6.48
3250 2750 2240 1740 1230 1020 813
4370 4290 4200 4100 3990 3920 3820
4480 4390 4280 4160 4030 3960 3850
4600 4480 4360 4220 4080 3990 3870
4710 4580 4440 4290 4120 4030 3900
4830 4680 4520 4350 4160 4070 3930
4940 4780 4600 4410 4210 4100 3960
5060 4870 4680 4470 4250 4140 3990
5170 4970 4760 4530 4300 4170 4020
5290 5070 4840 4590 4340 4210 4050
5400 5160 4920 4650 4380 4250 4080
5520 5260 4990 4720 4430 4280 4100
W 33×201
2900
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.29 0.58 0.86 1.15 3.67 6.51
2960 2500 2050 1600 1140 942 739
3940 3870 3800 3710 3610 3550 3450
4050 3960 3870 3770 3650 3580 3480
4150 4050 3940 3820 3690 3620 3500
4260 4140 4010 3880 3730 3650 3530
4360 4230 4090 3940 3780 3680 3550
4470 4320 4160 3990 3820 3720 3580
4570 4410 4230 4050 3860 3750 3610
4680 4500 4300 4110 3900 3780 3630
4780 4580 4380 4160 3940 3820 3660
4890 4670 4450 4220 3980 3850 3680
4990 4760 4520 4280 4020 3880 3710
W 33×141
1930
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.24 0.48 0.72 0.96 4.31 8.05
2080 1800 1530 1250 973 746 520
2750 2710 2660 2610 2550 2480 2350
2820 2770 2710 2650 2590 2510 2370
2900 2830 2770 2700 2620 2530 2390
2970 2900 2820 2740 2660 2560 2410
3040 2960 2880 2790 2690 2590 2420
3120 3030 2930 2830 2730 2610 2440
3190 3090 2980 2870 2760 2640 2460
3260 3150 3040 2920 2790 2670 2480
3340 3220 3090 2960 2830 2690 2500
3410 3280 3150 3010 2860 2720 2520
3480 3340 3200 3050 2900 2750 2530
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 40
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 33×130
1750
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.21 0.43 0.64 0.86 4.39 8.29
1920 1670 1420 1180 931 705 479
2520 2480 2440 2390 2350 2270 2140
2580 2540 2490 2440 2380 2300 2160
2650 2600 2540 2480 2410 2320 2170
2720 2660 2590 2520 2450 2350 2190
2790 2720 2640 2560 2480 2370 2210
2850 2770 2690 2600 2510 2400 2230
2920 2830 2740 2640 2540 2420 2240
2990 2890 2790 2690 2580 2450 2260
3060 2950 2840 2730 2610 2470 2280
3130 3010 2890 2770 2640 2500 2290
3190 3070 2940 2810 2680 2520 2310
W 33×118
1560
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.19 0.37 0.56 0.74 4.44 8.54
1740 1520 1310 1100 885 660 434
2260 2230 2200 2160 2120 2050 1920
2330 2290 2250 2200 2150 2070 1930
2390 2340 2290 2240 2190 2100 1950
2450 2400 2340 2280 2220 2120 1960
2510 2450 2380 2320 2250 2140 1980
2570 2500 2430 2360 2280 2170 1990
2630 2560 2480 2400 2310 2190 2010
2700 2610 2520 2430 2340 2210 2020
2760 2660 2570 2470 2370 2240 2040
2820 2720 2620 2510 2400 2260 2050
2880 2770 2660 2550 2440 2280 2070
W 30×116
1420
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.21 0.43 0.64 0.85 3.98 7.44
1710 1490 1260 1040 818 623 428
2060 2030 1990 1950 1910 1850 1740
2120 2080 2030 1990 1940 1870 1760
2180 2130 2080 2020 1960 1890 1770
2240 2180 2120 2060 1990 1910 1790
2300 2240 2170 2100 2020 1940 1800
2360 2290 2210 2130 2050 1960 1820
2420 2340 2260 2170 2080 1980 1830
2480 2400 2300 2210 2110 2000 1850
2540 2450 2350 2240 2140 2020 1860
2600 2500 2390 2280 2170 2050 1880
2670 2550 2440 2320 2200 2070 1890
W 30×108
1300
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1590 1900 1960 2010 2070 2120 2180 0.19 1390 1870 1920 1970 2020 2070 2110 0.38 1190 1840 1880 1920 1960 2010 2050 0.57 988 1800 1840 1870 1910 1940 1980 0.76 789 1760 1790 1820 1850 1880 1900 4.04 593 1710 1730 1750 1770 1790 1810 7.64 396 1600 1610 1620 1640 1650 1670
2240 2160 2090 2010 1930 1830 1680
2290 2210 2130 2050 1960 1850 1690
2350 2260 2170 2080 1990 1870 1710
2400 2310 2220 2120 2020 1890 1720
2460 2360 2260 2150 2040 1920 1740
W 30×99
1170
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1460 1730 1790 1840 1890 1940 1990 0.17 1280 1710 1750 1800 1840 1890 1930 0.34 1100 1680 1720 1760 1800 1840 1880 0.50 930 1650 1680 1720 1750 1780 1810 0.67 755 1620 1640 1670 1700 1730 1750 4.07 559 1560 1580 1600 1620 1640 1660 7.83 364 1450 1460 1480 1490 1500 1510
2040 1980 1920 1850 1780 1680 1530
2090 2030 1950 1880 1810 1700 1540
2150 2070 1990 1910 1830 1720 1550
2200 2120 2030 1950 1860 1740 1570
2250 2160 2070 1980 1890 1760 1580
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 41
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
In.
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Kips
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 27×102
1140
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1500 1650 1700 1760 1810 1860 1920 0.21 1290 1620 1670 1710 1760 1800 1850 0.42 1080 1590 1630 1660 1700 1740 1780 0.62 877 1550 1580 1610 1640 1670 1700 0.83 669 1510 1530 1560 1580 1600 1630 3.41 522 1470 1490 1500 1520 1540 1560 6.26 375 1400 1410 1420 1440 1450 1460
2
2.5
3
3.5
1970 1900 1820 1740 1650 1580 1480
2020 1940 1860 1770 1680 1600 1490
2080 1990 1890 1800 1700 1620 1500
2130 2030 1930 1830 1720 1630 1520
2180 2080 1970 1860 1750 1650 1530
W 27×94
1040
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1390 1520 1570 1610 1660 1710 1760 0.19 1200 1490 1530 1570 1620 1660 1700 0.37 1010 1460 1490 1530 1570 1600 1640 0.56 827 1430 1460 1490 1510 1540 1570 0.75 641 1390 1410 1440 1460 1480 1510 3.39 493 1350 1370 1390 1400 1420 1440 6.39 346 1280 1290 1300 1320 1330 1340
1810 1740 1670 1600 1530 1460 1350
1860 1790 1710 1630 1550 1470 1360
1910 1830 1750 1660 1570 1490 1380
1960 1870 1780 1690 1600 1510 1390
2010 1910 1820 1720 1620 1530 1400
W 27×84
915
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1240 1350 1390 1440 1480 1520 1570 0.16 1080 1330 1360 1400 1440 1480 1520 0.32 921 1300 1330 1370 1400 1430 1460 0.48 762 1270 1300 1330 1350 1380 1410 0.64 603 1240 1270 1290 1310 1330 1350 3.44 456 1200 1220 1240 1250 1270 1280 6.62 310 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1190
1610 1550 1500 1430 1370 1300 1200
1660 1590 1530 1460 1390 1320 1210
1700 1630 1560 1490 1410 1330 1220
1740 1670 1590 1520 1440 1350 1230
1790 1710 1630 1540 1460 1360 1240
W 24×76
750
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1120 1110 1150 1190 1230 1270 0.17 967 1080 1120 1150 1190 1220 0.34 814 1060 1090 1120 1150 1180 0.51 662 1030 1060 1080 1100 1130 0.68 509 1010 1020 1040 1060 1080 3.00 394 976 990 1000 1020 1030 5.60 280 925 935 945 955 964
1310 1260 1200 1150 1100 1050 974
1350 1290 1230 1170 1110 1060 984
1390 1320 1260 1200 1130 1070 994
1420 1360 1290 1220 1150 1090 1000
1460 1390 1320 1250 1170 1100 1010
1500 1430 1350 1270 1190 1120 1020
W 24×68
664
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 1010 0.15 874 0.29 743 0.44 612 0.59 481 3.05 366 5.81 251
1160 1120 1080 1030 987 936 864
1200 1150 1100 1060 1000 949 873
1240 1180 1130 1080 1020 962 882
1270 1220 1160 1100 1040 975 891
1310 1250 1180 1120 1060 988 899
1340 1280 1210 1140 1070 1000 908
987 1020 1060 1090 1130 968 999 1030 1060 1090 947 973 1000 1030 1050 925 947 969 990 1010 902 919 936 953 970 872 885 898 910 923 819 828 837 846 855
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 42
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
W 24×62
574
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.15 0.29 0.44 0.59 3.47 6.58
910 806 702 598 495 361 228
894 879 862 845 827 789 723
926 907 887 866 844 802 731
958 936 912 887 862 815 739
991 1020 1060 1090 1120 1150 1180 1220 964 993 1020 1050 1080 1110 1140 1160 937 962 987 1010 1040 1060 1090 1110 909 930 951 972 993 1010 1040 1060 879 897 914 932 949 967 984 1000 827 840 853 866 879 891 904 917 747 755 763 771 779 787 795 803
3.5
W 24×55
503
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.25 0.38 0.51 3.45 6.66
810 722 633 545 456 329 203
791 778 764 750 734 700 636
820 804 787 769 751 711 643
848 829 809 788 767 723 651
877 855 832 808 783 735 658
906 880 854 827 799 746 665
934 906 876 846 815 758 672
W 21×62
540
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.15 0.31 0.46 0.62 2.53 4.78
915 788 662 535 408 318 229
810 791 771 750 727 705 669
842 819 795 769 741 716 677
875 847 818 788 756 727 685
907 875 841 807 770 739 693
939 903 865 826 785 750 701
972 1000 1040 1070 1100 1130 931 959 987 1010 1040 1070 888 912 935 959 982 1010 845 863 882 901 920 939 799 814 828 843 857 872 761 772 784 795 806 818 709 717 726 734 742 750
W 21×57
484
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.16 0.33 0.49 0.65 2.90 5.38
835 728 622 515 409 309 209
741 725 708 690 671 645 601
771 751 730 709 685 656 608
800 777 753 727 700 667 616
830 803 775 745 714 677 623
859 829 797 763 729 688 631
889 854 819 782 743 699 638
919 880 841 800 758 710 645
948 906 863 818 772 721 653
978 1010 1040 932 958 983 885 907 929 836 855 873 787 801 816 732 743 754 660 668 675
W 21×50
413
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.27 0.40 0.54 2.92 5.58
735 648 560 473 386 285 184
646 634 620 606 590 564 519
672 657 640 622 604 574 526
698 679 660 639 618 584 532
724 702 679 656 631 594 539
750 725 699 673 645 604 545
777 748 719 689 659 615 552
803 771 739 706 672 625 559
829 794 759 723 686 635 565
855 817 779 740 700 645 572
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
963 931 899 866 831 770 679
5.5
6
6.5
7
992 1020 1050 1080 957 982 1010 1030 921 944 966 989 885 904 923 943 848 864 880 896 781 793 805 816 686 694 701 708
881 840 799 756 713 655 578
907 863 818 773 727 665 585
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 43
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 21×44
358
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.23 0.34 0.45 2.90 5.69
650 577 504 431 358 260 163
568 557 546 534 522 497 453
591 577 564 549 534 506 459
614 598 581 564 547 515 465
637 618 599 580 560 525 471
660 639 617 595 572 534 476
683 659 635 610 585 543 482
706 680 653 626 598 552 488
729 700 671 641 610 561 494
752 720 689 656 623 571 499
775 741 706 671 636 580 505
798 761 724 687 648 589 511
W 18×60
461
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.17 0.35 0.52 0.70 2.19 3.82
880 749 617 486 355 287 220
693 674 653 630 606 590 566
724 700 675 647 618 600 573
755 727 696 665 631 610 581
787 753 718 682 644 620 589
818 780 740 699 656 630 597
849 806 762 716 669 640 605
880 833 784 733 681 651 612
911 859 806 751 694 661 620
942 886 828 768 706 671 628
974 1000 912 939 850 871 785 802 719 732 681 691 636 644
W 18×55
420
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.16 0.32 0.47 0.63 2.16 3.86
810 691 573 454 336 269 203
634 617 598 578 556 541 517
663 641 618 594 568 550 524
692 666 639 610 580 560 531
720 690 659 626 592 569 539
749 715 679 642 604 579 546
778 739 699 658 616 588 553
806 764 720 674 628 598 560
835 788 740 691 640 607 567
864 813 760 707 652 617 574
892 837 781 723 663 626 582
921 862 801 739 675 636 589
W 18×50
379
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.14 0.29 0.43 0.57 2.07 3.82
735 628 521 415 308 246 184
572 557 540 522 503 489 467
598 579 558 537 514 498 474
624 601 577 552 525 506 480
651 624 595 566 536 515 487
677 646 614 581 547 524 493
703 668 632 596 558 532 500
729 690 651 610 569 541 506
755 712 669 625 580 550 513
781 735 688 640 590 559 519
807 757 706 654 601 567 526
833 779 725 669 612 576 532
W 18×46
340
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.15 0.30 0.45 0.61 2.40 4.34
675 583 492 400 308 239 169
527 514 499 484 468 450 424
551 535 517 498 478 459 430
575 555 534 512 489 467 436
599 576 552 527 500 476 442
623 597 569 541 511 484 448
647 617 587 555 522 493 454
671 638 604 569 533 501 460
695 659 621 583 544 510 466
719 679 639 597 555 518 472
743 700 656 612 566 526 478
766 720 674 626 577 535 484
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 44
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 18×40
294
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.26 0.39 0.53 2.26 4.27
590 511 432 353 274 211 148
458 446 434 421 407 392 369
479 464 449 433 417 400 374
499 482 464 446 426 407 379
520 500 480 458 436 415 384
541 518 495 471 446 422 389
562 537 510 483 456 429 395
583 555 526 496 465 437 400
604 573 541 508 475 444 405
625 591 556 521 485 452 410
646 609 572 533 494 459 416
667 627 587 546 504 467 421
W 18×35
249
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.21 0.32 0.43 2.37 4.56
515 451 388 324 260 194 129
396 387 377 367 356 340 315
414 403 391 378 365 347 320
432 418 404 389 374 354 324
451 434 418 401 383 361 329
469 450 432 412 393 368 333
487 466 445 424 402 375 338
505 482 459 435 411 382 342
523 498 473 447 420 389 347
542 514 487 458 430 395 351
560 530 500 470 439 402 356
578 546 514 481 448 409 361
W 16×36
240
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.32 0.43 1.79 3.44
530 455 380 305 230 181 133
373 362 350 338 326 315 299
392 378 364 349 334 322 304
410 394 377 360 342 328 309
429 410 391 371 350 334 313
448 426 404 381 358 341 318
467 442 418 392 366 347 323
485 459 431 403 374 354 327
504 475 445 414 383 360 332
523 491 458 425 391 366 337
542 507 471 435 399 373 342
560 523 485 446 407 379 346
W 16×31
203
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.33 0.44 2.00 3.79
456 395 334 274 213 163 114
321 312 303 293 283 272 255
337 326 315 303 290 278 259
353 340 327 312 298 283 263
370 354 338 322 305 289 267
386 368 350 332 313 295 271
402 382 362 342 321 301 275
418 396 374 351 328 307 279
434 410 386 361 336 312 283
450 424 398 371 343 318 287
466 438 410 380 351 324 291
483 452 421 390 358 330 295
W 16×26
166
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.09 0.17 0.26 0.35 2.04 4.01
384 337 289 242 194 145 96.0
268 261 254 246 239 228 210
281 273 264 255 245 233 214
295 285 274 263 252 238 217
309 297 284 272 259 243 220
322 309 295 281 266 248 224
336 321 305 289 273 253 227
349 332 315 298 280 259 231
363 344 325 306 287 264 234
377 356 336 315 294 269 237
390 368 346 323 301 274 241
404 380 356 332 307 279 244
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 45
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 14×38
231
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.26 0.39 0.52 1.38 2.53
560 473 386 299 211 176 140
359 346 333 318 303 296 286
379 363 346 329 311 302 291
399 380 360 340 318 308 296
418 396 374 350 326 315 301
438 413 387 361 333 321 306
458 430 401 371 341 327 311
478 447 415 382 348 333 316
498 463 428 392 356 339 321
518 480 442 403 363 346 326
537 497 456 414 371 352 331
557 514 469 424 378 358 335
W 14×34
205
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.23 0.34 0.46 1.41 2.60
500 423 347 270 193 159 125
318 307 295 283 270 263 253
336 322 308 293 277 269 258
354 337 320 302 284 274 262
372 352 332 312 290 280 267
389 367 345 321 297 286 271
407 382 357 331 304 291 275
425 397 369 340 311 297 280
442 412 381 350 318 302 284
460 427 394 359 325 308 289
478 442 406 369 332 314 293
495 457 418 379 338 319 298
W 14×30
177
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.19 0.29 0.39 1.48 2.82
443 378 313 248 183 147 111
280 270 260 250 239 232 221
295 284 271 259 246 237 225
311 297 283 268 252 242 229
327 310 294 276 259 248 233
342 324 305 285 265 253 237
358 337 316 294 272 258 241
374 350 327 303 278 263 245
389 364 338 312 285 268 249
405 377 349 320 291 274 253
421 391 360 329 298 279 256
436 404 371 338 304 284 260
W 14×26
151
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.21 0.32 0.42 1.67 3.19
385 332 279 226 173 135 96.1
244 236 228 220 211 203 191
258 248 238 228 217 207 194
271 260 248 236 223 212 197
285 271 258 244 229 217 201
298 283 268 252 235 222 204
312 295 278 260 242 227 208
326 307 287 268 248 231 211
339 318 297 276 254 236 214
353 330 307 284 260 241 218
366 342 317 292 266 246 221
380 354 327 300 272 250 225
W 14×22
125
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.08 0.17 0.25 0.34 1.69 3.34
325 283 241 199 157 119 81.1
204 198 192 185 178 170 158
215 208 200 192 184 174 161
227 218 209 199 189 179 164
238 228 217 206 195 183 167
250 238 226 213 200 187 170
261 248 234 220 206 191 172
273 258 243 227 212 196 175
284 268 251 234 217 200 178
296 278 260 241 223 204 181
307 288 268 248 228 208 184
319 298 277 255 234 212 187
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 46
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 12×30
162
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.33 0.44 1.12 1.94
440 368 296 224 153 131 110
254 244 233 221 209 205 200
270 257 243 229 215 210 204
285 270 254 237 220 214 207
301 283 264 245 225 219 211
317 296 275 253 231 224 215
332 309 285 261 236 228 219
348 322 296 269 242 233 223
363 335 306 277 247 238 227
379 348 317 285 252 242 231
394 361 327 293 258 247 235
410 374 338 301 263 252 239
W 12×26
140
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.19 0.29 0.38 1.08 1.95
383 321 259 198 136 116 95.6
220 211 201 192 181 178 173
233 222 211 199 186 182 176
247 234 220 206 191 186 179
260 245 229 213 196 190 183
274 256 238 220 201 194 186
287 268 247 227 206 198 190
301 279 257 234 210 202 193
315 290 266 241 215 206 196
328 302 275 248 220 210 200
342 313 284 255 225 215 203
355 324 293 262 230 219 206
W 12×22
110
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.21 0.32 0.43 1.66 3.04
324 281 238 196 153 117 81.0
187 181 174 168 160 153 142
199 191 183 174 166 157 145
210 201 191 181 171 161 147
222 211 200 188 177 165 150
233 221 208 195 182 169 153
245 231 217 202 187 173 156
256 241 225 209 193 178 159
267 251 233 216 198 182 162
279 261 242 223 204 186 165
290 271 250 230 209 190 167
302 281 259 237 214 194 170
W 12×19
92.6
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.09 0.18 0.26 0.35 1.66 3.12
279 243 208 173 138 104 69.6
159 154 149 144 138 131 120
169 163 156 150 143 134 122
179 172 164 156 148 138 125
189 180 171 162 152 142 127
199 189 179 168 157 145 130
209 197 186 174 162 149 132
219 206 193 180 167 153 135
228 215 201 187 172 156 137
238 223 208 193 177 160 140
248 232 215 199 182 164 142
258 241 223 205 187 167 145
W 12×16
75.4
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.07 0.13 0.20 0.26 1.71 3.32
236 209 183 156 130 94.3 58.9
133 130 126 122 117 110 98.7
142 137 132 127 122 113 101
150 144 139 133 127 117 103
158 152 145 138 131 120 105
167 159 152 144 136 123 107
175 167 158 149 140 127 109
183 174 164 155 145 130 111
192 181 171 160 150 133 113
200 189 177 166 154 137 115
208 196 184 171 159 140 117
217 204 190 177 163 143 120
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 47
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
W 12×14
W 10×26
65.2
117
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.06 0.11 0.17 0.23 1.69 3.36
208 186 163 141 119 85.3 52.0
117 114 111 107 104 97.0 86.3
125 121 116 112 108 100 88.2
132 127 122 117 112 103 90.0
139 134 128 122 116 106 91.8
147 140 134 127 121 109 93.7
154 147 140 132 125 112 95.5
161 153 145 137 129 115 97.4
169 160 151 142 133 118 99.2
176 167 157 147 137 121 101
184 173 163 152 142 124 103
191 180 169 157 146 127 105
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.33 0.44 0.90 1.51
381 317 254 190 127 111 95.1
193 184 174 164 153 150 147
207 195 183 171 158 154 150
220 206 192 177 162 158 153
234 218 201 184 167 162 157
247 229 210 191 171 166 160
260 240 219 198 176 170 163
274 251 228 204 180 174 167
287 262 237 211 185 178 170
301 274 246 218 189 182 174
314 285 255 225 194 186 177
328 296 264 231 198 189 180
W 10×22
97.5
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.09 0.18 0.27 0.36 0.95 1.70
325 273 221 169 117 99.3 81.1
163 155 148 139 131 127 123
174 165 155 145 135 131 126
186 175 163 151 139 135 129
197 184 171 157 143 138 132
209 194 179 163 148 142 135
220 204 187 169 152 145 138
232 213 194 175 156 149 140
243 223 202 181 160 152 143
255 233 210 187 164 156 146
266 242 218 193 168 159 149
278 252 226 199 173 163 152
W 10×19
81.0
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 1.27 2.31
281 241 202 162 122 96.2 70.3
142 136 130 124 117 112 105
152 145 137 129 121 115 107
162 153 144 135 126 119 110
172 162 151 141 130 122 112
182 170 158 147 134 125 115
191 179 166 152 139 129 117
201 187 173 158 143 132 120
211 196 180 164 147 136 122
221 204 187 169 152 139 125
231 213 194 175 156 143 127
241 221 201 181 160 146 130
W 10×17
70.1
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.08 0.17 0.25 0.33 1.31 2.46
249 216 183 150 117 89.8 62.4
125 120 115 110 104 99.0 91.4
134 128 121 115 109 102 93.7
142 135 128 120 113 105 95.9
151 143 134 126 117 109 98.1
160 151 141 131 121 112 100
169 158 147 136 125 115 102
178 166 154 142 129 118 105
187 174 160 147 133 121 107
195 181 167 152 138 124 109
204 189 173 158 142 128 111
213 197 180 163 146 131 114
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 48
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
W 10×15
60.0
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.07 0.14 0.20 0.27 1.35 2.60
221 109 194 105 167 101 139 97.2 112 92.9 83.8 87.3 55.1 79.2
W 10×12
47.3
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.05 0.11 0.16 0.21 1.30 2.61
177 156 135 115 93.8 69.0 44.3
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.12 0.23 0.35 0.47 0.53 0.59
413 337 261 185 109 106 103
176 165 153 141 128 128 127
191 177 163 148 132 131 131
W 8×28
102
2
86.9 84.0 80.9 77.8 74.5 69.8 62.9
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
117 112 107 102 96.9 90.3 81.2
125 119 113 107 101 93.2 83.1
133 126 119 112 105 96.2 85.1
140 133 125 117 109 99.2 87.0
148 140 131 122 113 102 89.0
156 146 137 127 117 105 90.9
164 153 143 132 121 108 92.9
172 160 149 137 125 111 94.8
180 167 154 142 129 114 96.8
187 174 160 147 133 117 98.7
93.2 89.5 85.7 81.8 77.9 72.3 64.4
99.5 95.0 90.5 85.9 81.2 74.7 66.0
106 101 95.3 89.9 84.5 77.1 67.6
112 106 100 94.0 87.8 79.6 69.1
118 112 105 98.1 91.2 82.0 70.7
125 117 110 102 94.5 84.5 72.3
131 123 114 106 97.8 86.9 73.8
137 128 119 110 101 89.4 75.4
143 134 124 114 104 91.8 77.0
150 139 129 118 108 94.3 78.5
205 189 172 154 136 135 134
220 201 181 161 140 139 138
235 213 190 167 144 143 142
249 225 200 174 147 146 145
264 237 209 180 151 150 149
278 249 218 187 155 154 153
293 260 227 193 159 158 156
308 272 236 200 163 161 160
322 284 246 206 167 165 164
W 8×24
87.0
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.47 0.55
354 289 224 159 94.2 91.3 88.5
150 140 130 120 109 109 108
162 150 138 126 112 112 111
175 161 146 131 116 115 114
187 171 154 137 119 118 117
200 181 162 142 122 122 121
212 191 170 148 126 125 124
225 202 178 154 129 128 127
237 212 186 159 132 131 130
250 222 194 165 136 134 133
262 232 202 171 139 138 136
275 243 210 176 142 141 139
W 8×21
76.5
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.70 1.06
308 255 203 150 97.2 87.1 77.0
134 126 118 110 101 99.3 97.2
145 135 125 115 105 102 100
156 144 133 120 108 105 103
167 153 140 126 111 109 105
178 162 147 131 115 112 108
188 172 154 136 118 115 111
199 181 161 142 122 118 114
210 190 169 147 125 121 116
221 199 176 152 129 124 119
232 208 183 158 132 127 122
243 217 190 163 136 130 125
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 49
Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE DESIGN COMPOSITE BEAM SELECTION TABLE W Shapes φ = 0.85 φb = 0.90 Shape
φb M p PNAc Y1a
Kip-ft
ΣQ n
φM n (kip-ft)
Y2b (in.) 4 4.5 5
In.
Kips
2.5
3
3.5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 8×18
63.7
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.08 0.17 0.25 0.33 0.71 1.21
263 113 220 107 176 100 133 93.5 89.8 86.5 77.8 84.4 65.8 81.9
2
122 115 107 98.2 89.7 87.1 84.2
132 122 113 103 92.9 89.9 86.5
141 130 119 108 96.0 92.6 88.8
150 138 125 112 99.2 95.4 91.2
160 146 132 117 102 98.1 93.5
169 154 138 122 106 101 95.8
178 161 144 127 109 104 98.2
188 169 150 131 112 106 100
197 177 157 136 115 109 103
206 185 163 141 118 112 105
W 8×15
51.0
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.08 0.16 0.24 0.32 0.97 1.79
222 190 159 127 95.5 75.5 55.5
95.2 90.6 85.9 81.0 75.9 72.2 67.4
103 97.4 91.5 85.5 79.3 74.8 69.3
111 104 97.1 90.0 82.7 77.5 71.3
119 111 103 94.5 86.0 80.2 73.3
127 118 108 99.0 89.4 82.9 75.2
135 124 114 103 92.8 85.5 77.2
142 131 120 108 96.2 88.2 79.2
150 138 125 113 99.6 90.9 81.1
158 145 131 117 103 93.6 83.1
166 151 137 122 106 96.2 85.1
174 158 142 126 110 98.9 87.0
W 8×13
42.7
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.06 0.13 0.19 0.26 0.99 1.91
192 167 141 116 90.0 69.0 48.0
81.5 77.9 74.1 70.2 66.2 62.3 57.2
88.3 83.8 79.1 74.3 69.3 64.7 58.9
95.1 89.7 84.1 78.4 72.5 67.2 60.6
102 95.6 89.1 82.4 75.7 69.6 62.3
109 101 94.1 86.5 78.9 72.1 64.0
116 107 99.0 90.6 82.1 74.5 65.7
122 113 104 94.7 85.3 77.0 67.4
129 119 109 98.8 88.5 79.4 69.1
136 125 114 103 91.7 81.8 70.8
143 131 119 107 94.8 84.3 72.5
150 137 124 111 98.0 86.7 74.2
W 8×10
33.3
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 148 0.05 128 0.10 108 0.15 87.4 0.21 67.2 0.88 52.1 1.77 37.0
62.3 59.4 56.5 53.4 50.3 47.6 44.0
67.6 64.0 60.3 56.5 52.7 49.5 45.4
72.8 68.5 64.1 59.6 55.1 51.3 46.7
78.0 73.0 67.9 62.7 57.4 53.1 48.0
83.3 77.5 71.7 65.8 59.8 55.0 49.3
88.5 82.1 75.5 68.9 62.2 56.8 50.6
93.8 86.6 79.3 72.0 64.6 58.7 51.9
99.0 91.1 83.1 75.1 67.0 60.5 53.2
104 95.6 86.9 78.2 69.3 62.4 54.5
109 100 90.8 81.3 71.7 64.2 55.8
115 105 94.6 84.4 74.1 66.1 57.2
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 50
COMPOSITE DESIGN
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS
LB
Shaped PNAc
Y1a
ILB (in.4)
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W40×297 (23200)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.41 0.83 1.24 1.65 4.59 8.17
44200 42500 40500 38100 35300 33500 31600
45200 43400 41300 38800 35800 34000 32000
46200 44300 42100 39500 36400 34500 32400
47200 45200 43000 40200 37000 35000 32800
48200 46200 43800 41000 37600 35500 33200
49300 47200 44700 41700 38200 36000 33600
50300 48100 45600 42500 38800 36600 34100
51400 49200 46500 43300 39400 37100 34500
52600 50200 47400 44100 40100 37600 34900
53700 51200 48300 44900 40700 38200 35400
54900 52300 49300 45700 41400 38800 35900
W40×278 (20500)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.45 0.91 1.36 1.81 5.64 10.06
40400 39000 37400 35500 33300 31100 28500
41400 39900 38200 36200 33800 31500 28800
42300 40700 39000 36900 34400 32000 29200
43200 41600 39800 37600 35000 32500 29600
44200 42500 40600 38300 35700 33100 30000
45200 43500 41400 39100 36300 33600 30400
46200 44400 42300 39800 37000 34100 30800
47300 45400 43200 40600 37600 34700 31200
48300 46300 44100 41400 38300 35200 31600
49400 47300 45000 42200 39000 35800 32100
50500 48400 45900 43100 39700 36400 32500
W40×277 (21900)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.39 0.79 1.18 1.58 4.25 7.60
41300 39700 37800 35500 32700 31300 29700
42200 40500 38500 36100 33200 31700 30000
43100 41400 39300 36800 33700 32100 30400
44100 42200 40000 37400 34300 32600 30800
45000 43100 40800 38100 34800 33100 31100
46000 44000 41600 38800 35300 33500 31500
47000 44900 42400 39500 35900 34000 31900
48000 45800 43300 40200 36500 34500 32300
49100 46800 44100 40900 37000 35000 32800
50100 47800 45000 41700 37600 35500 33200
51200 48800 45900 42400 38200 36000 33600
W40×264 (19400)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.43 0.87 1.30 1.73 5.49 9.90
38200 36800 35300 33500 31400 29300 26900
39000 37600 36000 34100 31900 29800 27300
39900 38500 36800 34800 32500 30200 27600
40800 39300 37500 35500 33100 30700 28000
41700 40200 38300 36200 33700 31200 28300
42700 41000 39100 36900 34300 31700 28700
43700 41900 39900 37600 34900 32200 29100
44600 42800 40800 38300 35500 32700 29500
45600 43800 41600 39100 36100 33300 29900
46600 44700 42500 39900 36800 33800 30300
47700 45700 43300 40600 37400 34300 30700
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 51
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS Shaped PNAc
Y1a
LB
ILB (in.4 )
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W40×249 (19500)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.36 0.71 1.07 1.42 4.06 7.47
36700 35300 33600 31600 29200 27900 26400
37500 36100 34300 32200 29600 28200 26700
38400 36800 35000 32800 30100 28600 27000
39200 37600 35700 33400 30600 29100 27400
40100 38400 36400 34000 31000 29500 27700
40900 39200 37100 34600 31500 29900 28100
41800 40000 37800 35200 32000 30300 28400
42800 40800 38600 35900 32500 30800 28800
43700 41700 39300 36500 33100 31200 29200
44600 42600 40100 37200 33600 31700 29600
45600 43500 40900 37900 34100 32200 29900
W40×235 (17400)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.39 0.79 1.18 1.58 5.18 9.47
33800 32600 31300 29600 27700 26000 24000
34600 33300 31900 30200 28200 26400 24300
35400 34100 32600 30800 28700 26800 24600
36200 34800 33200 31400 29200 27200 24900
37000 35600 33900 32000 29700 27600 25200
37800 36300 34600 32600 30200 28100 25600
38700 37100 35300 33200 30700 28500 25900
39500 37900 36000 33900 31300 29000 26300
40400 38700 36800 34500 31800 29400 26600
41300 39600 37500 35200 32400 29900 27000
42200 40400 38300 35900 33000 30400 27300
W40×215 (16700)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.31 0.61 0.92 1.22 3.84 7.32
31300 30100 28700 27000 24900 23800 22500
32000 30700 29300 27500 25300 24100 22800
32700 31400 29800 28000 25700 24500 23100
33400 32100 30400 28500 26100 24800 23400
34200 32700 31000 29000 26600 25200 23700
34900 33400 31700 29500 27000 25600 24000
35700 34100 32300 30100 27400 25900 24300
36500 34800 32900 30600 27900 26300 24600
37300 35600 33600 31200 28300 26700 24900
38100 36300 34300 31800 28800 27100 25300
38900 37100 34900 32400 29200 27500 25600
W40×211 (15500)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.35 0.71 1.06 1.42 4.99 9.35
30100 29000 27800 26400 24700 23100 21300
30800 29700 28400 26900 25100 23500 21600
31500 30300 29000 27400 25600 23900 21900
32200 31000 29600 27900 26000 24200 22200
32900 31600 30200 28500 26500 24600 22500
33600 32300 30800 29000 26900 25000 22800
34400 33000 31400 29600 27400 25400 23100
35200 33700 32100 30200 27900 25800 23400
36000 34500 32800 30800 28400 26200 23700
36800 35200 33400 31400 28900 26600 24000
37600 36000 34100 32000 29400 27100 24300
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 52
COMPOSITE DESIGN
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS
LB
Shaped PNAc
Y1a
ILB (in.4)
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W40×199 (14900)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.27 0.53 0.80 1.07 4.16 8.10
28200 27200 26000 24500 22800 21600 20200
28800 27700 26500 25000 23200 21900 20500
29500 28300 27000 25500 23600 22300 20700
30100 28900 27600 25900 24000 22600 21000
30800 29600 28100 26400 24400 22900 21300
31500 30200 28700 26900 24800 23300 21500
32200 30900 29300 27400 25200 23600 21800
32900 31500 29900 28000 25700 24000 22100
33600 32200 30500 28500 26100 24400 22400
34400 32900 31100 29000 26500 24700 22700
35200 33600 31800 29600 27000 25100 23000
W40×183 (13300)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.31 0.61 0.92 1.22 4.76 9.16
25700 24800 23800 22600 21200 19800 18300
26300 25400 24300 23000 21500 20100 18500
26900 25900 24800 23500 21900 20400 18700
27500 26500 25300 23900 22300 20800 19000
28100 27100 25800 24400 22700 21100 19200
28800 27600 26400 24900 23100 21400 19500
29400 28200 26900 25300 23500 21800 19700
30100 28900 27500 25800 23900 22100 20000
30700 29500 28000 26400 24300 22500 20300
31400 30100 28600 26900 24800 22800 20600
32100 30800 29200 27400 25200 23200 20800
W40×174 (12200)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.21 0.42 0.62 0.83 4.59 9.27
23600 22800 21900 20900 19700 18300 16800
24100 23300 22400 21300 20000 18600 17000
24700 23800 22800 21700 20400 18900 17200
25200 24400 23300 22200 20800 19200 17400
25800 24900 23800 22600 21100 19600 17700
26400 25500 24300 23100 21500 19900 17900
27000 26000 24900 23500 21900 20200 18100
27700 26600 25400 24000 22300 20500 18400
28300 27200 25900 24500 22800 20900 18600
28900 27800 26500 25000 23200 21200 18900
29600 28400 27100 25500 23600 21600 19200
W40×167 (11600)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.26 0.51 0.77 1.03 5.00 9.85
22700 22000 21200 20200 19100 17700 16100
23300 22500 21600 20600 19400 18000 16300
23800 23000 22100 21000 19800 18300 16500
24400 23500 22600 21500 20200 18600 16700
24900 24000 23000 21900 20600 18900 16900
25500 24600 23500 22300 21000 19200 17200
26100 25100 24100 22800 21300 19600 17400
26700 25700 24600 23300 21800 19900 17600
27300 26300 25100 23700 22200 20200 17900
27900 26900 25600 24200 22600 20600 18100
28600 27500 26200 24700 23000 20900 18400
W40×149 (9780)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.21 0.42 0.62 0.83 5.15 10.41
19500 19000 18300 17600 16700 15400 13700
20000 19400 18700 17900 17100 15600 13900
20500 19800 19100 18300 17400 15900 14100
21000 20300 19600 18700 17700 16200 14300
21500 20800 20000 19100 18100 16500 14500
22000 21300 20400 19500 18500 16800 14700
22500 21700 20900 19900 18800 17100 14900
23000 22200 21400 20400 19200 17400 15100
23600 22800 21800 20800 19600 17700 15300
24100 23300 22300 21200 20000 18000 15500
24700 23800 22800 21700 20400 18300 15700
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 53
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS Shaped PNAc
Y1a
LB
ILB (in.4 )
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 36×300 (20300)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.42 0.84 1.26 1.68 3.97 6.69
38600 37000 35200 32900 30100 28900 27600
39500 37900 35900 33500 30600 29400 28000
40500 38700 36700 34200 31100 29800 28400
41400 39600 37400 34800 31600 30200 28700
42400 40500 38200 35500 32100 30700 29100
43400 41400 39000 36200 32700 31200 29500
44400 42300 39900 36900 33200 31700 29900
45500 43300 40700 37600 33800 32200 30400
46500 44300 41600 38300 34400 32700 30800
47600 45300 42500 39100 34900 33200 31200
48700 46300 43400 39900 35500 33700 31700
W 36×280 (18900)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.39 0.79 1.18 1.57 3.88 6.62
35800 34400 32600 30600 28000 26900 25700
36700 35100 33300 31100 28400 27300 26000
37500 35900 34000 31700 28900 27700 26300
38400 36700 34700 32300 29400 28100 26700
39300 37600 35500 33000 29900 28500 27100
40200 38400 36200 33600 30400 29000 27400
41200 39300 37000 34300 30900 29400 27800
42200 40200 37800 34900 31400 29900 28200
43100 41100 38600 35600 31900 30300 28600
44200 42000 39400 36300 32500 30800 29000
45200 42900 40300 37000 33000 31300 29400
W 36×260 (17300)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.36 0.72 1.08 1.44 3.86 6.75
32800 31500 29900 28100 25800 24700 23500
33600 32200 30600 28600 26200 25100 23800
34400 32900 31200 29200 26700 25500 24100
35200 33700 31900 29700 27100 25800 24500
36000 34500 32600 30300 27600 26200 24800
36900 35200 33300 30900 28000 26600 25100
37800 36000 34000 31500 28500 27100 25500
38700 36900 34700 32100 29000 27500 25800
39600 37700 35500 32800 29500 27900 26200
40500 38500 36200 33400 30000 28400 26600
41500 39400 37000 34100 30500 28800 27000
W 36×245 (16100)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.34 0.68 1.01 1.35 3.81 6.77
30600 29400 27900 26200 24100 23100 21900
31300 30000 28500 26700 24500 23400 22200
32100 30700 29100 27200 24900 23800 22500
32800 31400 29800 27800 25300 24100 22800
33600 32100 30400 28300 25800 24500 23100
34400 32900 31100 28900 26200 24900 23400
35200 33600 31700 29500 26700 25300 23800
36100 34400 32400 30000 27100 25700 24100
36900 35200 33100 30600 27600 26100 24400
37800 36000 33800 31300 28100 26500 24800
38700 36800 34600 31900 28600 27000 25100
W 36×230 (15000)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.32 0.63 0.95 1.26 3.81 6.83
28500 27300 26000 24400 22500 21500 20400
29100 28000 26600 24900 22900 21800 20700
29800 28600 27100 25400 23300 22200 20900
30600 29300 27700 25900 23700 22500 21200
31300 29900 28300 26400 24100 22900 21500
32000 30600 28900 26900 24500 23200 21800
32800 31300 29600 27500 24900 23600 22100
33600 32000 30200 28000 25400 24000 22400
34400 32800 30900 28600 25800 24400 22800
35200 33500 31500 29200 26300 24800 23100
36000 34300 32200 29700 26700 25200 23400
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 54
COMPOSITE DESIGN
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS
LB
Shaped PNAc
Y1a
ILB (in.4)
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 36×210 (13200)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.34 0.68 1.02 1.36 5.06 9.04
26000 25100 24000 22800 21300 19900 18300
26600 25700 24500 23200 21700 20300 18600
27300 26300 25100 23700 22100 20600 18800
27900 26900 25700 24200 22500 21000 19100
28600 27500 26200 24700 23000 21300 19400
29300 28200 26800 25300 23400 21700 19700
30000 28800 27400 25800 23900 22100 19900
30800 29500 28100 26300 24300 22400 20200
31500 30200 28700 26900 24800 22800 20500
32300 30900 29300 27500 25300 23200 20800
33000 31600 30000 28100 25800 23600 21100
W 36×194 (12100)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.32 0.63 0.95 1.26 4.94 8.93
23800 22900 22000 20800 19500 18200 16800
24400 23500 22500 21300 19900 18600 17000
25000 24000 23000 21700 20300 18900 17200
25600 24600 23500 22200 20600 19200 17500
26200 25200 24000 22700 21000 19500 17700
26800 25800 24600 23100 21500 19900 18000
27500 26400 25100 23600 21900 20200 18300
28200 27000 25700 24100 22300 20600 18500
28900 27700 26300 24600 22700 20900 18800
29600 28300 26900 25200 23200 21300 19100
30300 29000 27500 25700 23600 21700 19400
W 36×182 (11300)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.29 0.59 0.89 1.18 4.89 8.92
22200 21400 20500 19500 18300 17100 15700
22700 21900 21000 19900 18600 17300 15900
23300 22500 21500 20300 19000 17600 16100
23900 23000 22000 20700 19300 17900 16300
24500 23500 22400 21200 19700 18300 16600
25100 24100 23000 21600 20100 18600 16800
25700 24700 23500 22100 20500 18900 17100
26300 25200 24000 22600 20900 19200 17300
26900 25800 24600 23100 21300 19600 17600
27600 26400 25100 23500 21700 19900 17800
28300 27100 25700 24000 22100 20300 18100
W 36×170 (10500)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.28 0.55 0.83 1.10 4.84 8.89
20600 19900 19000 18100 17000 15800 14500
21100 20300 19500 18500 17300 16100 14700
21600 20800 19900 18900 17600 16400 14900
22100 21300 20400 19300 18000 16700 15200
22700 21800 20800 19700 18300 17000 15400
23300 22300 21300 20100 18700 17300 15600
23800 22900 21800 20500 19000 17600 15800
24400 23400 22300 21000 19400 17900 16100
25000 24000 22800 21400 19800 18200 16300
25600 24500 23300 21900 20200 18500 16500
26200 25100 23800 22300 20600 18800 16800
W 36×160 (9750)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.26 0.51 0.77 1.02 4.82 8.97
19200 18500 17700 16900 15800 14800 13500
19600 18900 18200 17200 16200 15000 13700
20100 19400 18600 17600 16500 15300 13900
20600 19900 19000 18000 16800 15600 14100
21100 20300 19400 18400 17100 15800 14300
21700 20800 19900 18800 17500 16100 14500
22200 21300 20300 19200 17800 16400 14700
22700 21800 20800 19600 18200 16700 14900
23300 22300 21300 20000 18500 17000 15200
23900 22900 21700 20400 18900 17300 15400
24400 23400 22200 20900 19300 17600 15600
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 55
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS Shaped PNAc
Y1a
LB
ILB (in.4 )
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 36×150 (9040)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.24 0.47 0.71 0.94 4.83 9.08
17800 17200 16500 15700 14800 13800 12500
18300 17600 16900 16100 15100 14000 12700
18700 18100 17300 16400 15400 14300 12900
19200 18500 17700 16800 15700 14500 13100
19700 18900 18100 17200 16000 14800 13300
20200 19400 18500 17500 16400 15000 13500
20700 19900 19000 17900 16700 15300 13700
21200 20300 19400 18300 17000 15600 13900
21700 20800 19800 18700 17400 15900 14100
22200 21300 20300 19100 17700 16200 14300
22800 21800 20800 19500 18100 16500 14500
W 36×135 (7800)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.20 0.40 0.59 0.79 4.96 9.50
15600 15100 14500 13900 13100 12100 10900
16000 15400 14900 14200 13400 12400 11100
16400 15800 15200 14500 13700 12600 11200
16800 16200 15600 14800 14000 12800 11400
17200 16600 15900 15200 14300 13100 11600
17600 17000 16300 15500 14600 13300 11700
18100 17400 16700 15900 14900 13500 11900
18600 17900 17100 16200 15200 13800 12100
19000 18300 17500 16600 15500 14100 12300
19500 18800 17900 17000 15800 14300 12500
20000 19200 18300 17300 16200 14600 12700
W 33×221 (12800)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.32 0.64 0.96 1.28 3.76 6.48
24500 23500 22300 20900 19200 18400 17500
25100 24100 22900 21400 19600 18700 17700
25800 24700 23400 21800 19900 19000 18000
26400 25300 23900 22300 20300 19300 18200
27100 25900 24500 22800 20700 19600 18500
27800 26500 25000 23200 21000 20000 18800
28500 27200 25600 23700 21400 20300 19100
29200 27800 26200 24200 21800 20700 19400
29900 28500 26800 24700 22200 21000 19700
30700 29200 27400 25300 22700 21400 20000
31500 29900 28000 25800 23100 21700 20300
W 33×201 (11500)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.29 0.58 0.86 1.15 3.67 6.51
22000 21100 20100 18900 17400 16600 15700
22600 21600 20600 19300 17700 16800 15900
23100 22200 21000 19700 18000 17100 16200
23700 22700 21500 20100 18300 17400 16400
24300 23300 22000 20500 18700 17700 16600
25000 23800 22500 20900 19000 18000 16900
25600 24400 23000 21400 19400 18300 17100
26200 25000 23600 21800 19700 18600 17400
26900 25600 24100 22300 20100 18900 17700
27600 26300 24700 22800 20500 19300 17900
28300 26900 25300 23300 20900 19600 18200
W 33×141 (7450)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.24 0.48 0.72 0.96 4.31 8.05
14700 14200 13600 12900 12100 11300 10300
15100 14500 13900 13200 12300 11500 10500
15500 14900 14200 13500 12600 11700 10700
15900 15300 14600 13800 12800 11900 10800
16300 15700 15000 14100 13100 12100 11000
16800 16100 15300 14400 13400 12400 11200
17200 16500 15700 14800 13700 12600 11300
17700 16900 16100 15100 14000 12800 11500
18100 17400 16500 15500 14200 13100 11700
18600 17800 16900 15800 14600 13300 11900
19100 18300 17300 16200 14900 13600 12100
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 56
COMPOSITE DESIGN
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS
LB
Shaped PNAc
Y1a
ILB (in.4 )
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 33×130 (6710)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.21 0.43 0.64 0.86 4.39 8.29
13300 12800 12300 11700 11000 10300 9340
13700 13200 12600 12000 11300 10400 9490
14000 13500 12900 12300 11500 10600 9640
14400 13900 13300 12600 11700 10900 9790
14800 14200 13600 12900 12000 11100 9940
15200 14600 13900 13200 12300 11300 10100
15600 15000 14300 13500 12500 11500 10300
16000 15400 14600 13800 12800 11700 10400
16400 15800 15000 14100 13100 11900 10600
16900 16200 15400 14500 13400 12200 10800
17300 16600 15800 14800 13700 12400 11000
W 33×118 (5900)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.19 0.37 0.56 0.74 4.44 8.54
11800 11400 11000 10500 9880 9150 8260
12100 11700 11300 10700 10100 9330 8390
12500 12000 11500 11000 10300 9510 8520
12800 12300 11800 11200 10600 9700 8660
13100 12700 12100 11500 10800 9890 8800
13500 13000 12400 11800 11000 10100 8940
13900 13300 12800 12100 11300 10300 9090
14200 13700 13100 12400 11500 10500 9240
14600 14100 13400 12700 11800 10700 9390
15000 14400 13700 13000 12100 10900 9550
15400 14800 14100 13300 12300 11100 9710
W 30×116 (4930)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.21 0.43 0.64 0.85 3.98 7.44
9870 10200 10500 10800 11100 11400 11800 9530 9800 10100 10400 10700 11000 11300 9130 9380 9640 9910 10200 10500 10700 8670 8900 9130 9360 9600 9850 10100 8130 8320 8520 8720 8930 9140 9360 7570 7730 7890 8060 8230 8400 8580 6910 7030 7150 7270 7400 7530 7670
12100 11600 11000 10400 9580 8770 7810
12500 11900 11300 10600 9810 8960 7950
12800 12300 11700 10900 10000 9150 8090
13200 12600 12000 11200 10300 9350 8240
W 30×108 (4470)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.19 0.38 0.57 0.76 4.04 7.64
9000 8700 8350 7950 7480 6940 6280
9280 8960 8590 8160 7660 7090 6390
9560 9220 8830 8380 7850 7240 6500
9840 10100 10400 10800 11100 11400 11700 9480 9760 10000 10300 10600 10900 11300 9070 9330 9590 9850 10100 10400 10700 8600 8820 9060 9300 9540 9790 10100 8040 8240 8440 8650 8860 9080 9300 7400 7560 7720 7890 8070 8240 8430 6620 6740 6860 6980 7110 7240 7380
12100 11600 11000 10300 9530 8610 7510
W 30×99 (3990)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.17 0.34 0.50 0.67 4.07 7.83
8110 7850 7550 7200 6800 6280 5640
8360 8080 7760 7400 6970 6420 5740
8610 8320 7980 7600 7150 6560 5840
8880 8560 8210 7800 7330 6700 5940
9150 8820 8440 8010 7510 6850 6050
9420 9080 8680 8230 7700 7010 6160
9710 10000 10300 10600 10900 9340 9620 9900 10200 10500 8930 9180 9440 9700 9970 8450 8680 8910 9150 9390 7900 8100 8300 8510 8720 7170 7330 7490 7660 7840 6280 6390 6510 6640 6760
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 57
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS Shaped PNAc
Y1a
LB
ILB (in.4 )
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 27×102 (3620)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.21 0.42 0.62 0.83 3.41 6.26
7240 6970 6660 6290 5860 5490 5070
7480 7190 6860 6470 6000 5610 5160
7730 7420 7070 6650 6150 5740 5260
7980 7650 7280 6830 6310 5870 5360
8240 7890 7490 7030 6470 6000 5470
8500 8140 7720 7220 6630 6140 5570
8780 8390 7950 7430 6800 6280 5680
9060 8660 8190 7630 6980 6430 5800
9350 8920 8430 7850 7150 6580 5910
9650 9200 8680 8070 7340 6730 6030
9950 9480 8930 8290 7520 6890 6150
W 27×94 (3270)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.19 0.37 0.56 0.75 3.39 6.39
6580 6340 6070 5740 5360 5010 4590
6800 6540 6250 5910 5500 5120 4680
7020 6750 6440 6080 5640 5240 4770
7250 6970 6640 6250 5790 5360 4860
7490 7190 6840 6430 5940 5490 4960
7740 7420 7040 6610 6100 5620 5060
7990 7650 7260 6800 6260 5750 5160
8250 7890 7480 6990 6420 5890 5260
8510 8140 7700 7190 6590 6030 5370
8790 8390 7930 7400 6760 6170 5480
9070 8650 8170 7600 6940 6320 5590
W 27×84 (2850)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.16 0.32 0.48 0.64 3.44 6.62
5770 5570 5340 5080 4760 4420 4020
5970 5750 5510 5220 4890 4530 4100
6170 5940 5680 5370 5020 4630 4180
6370 6130 5850 5530 5150 4750 4260
6580 6330 6030 5690 5290 4860 4340
6800 6530 6220 5860 5440 4980 4430
7030 6740 6410 6030 5580 5100 4520
7260 6960 6610 6210 5730 5220 4610
7500 7180 6810 6390 5890 5350 4710
7740 7400 7020 6570 6050 5480 4810
7990 7630 7230 6760 6210 5610 4910
W 24×76 (2100)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.17 0.34 0.51 0.68 3.00 5.60
4280 4120 3940 3720 3460 3240 2970
4440 4270 4070 3840 3560 3320 3040
4610 4420 4210 3960 3670 3410 3100
4780 4580 4350 4090 3770 3490 3170
4950 4740 4500 4220 3880 3590 3240
5130 4910 4650 4350 4000 3680 3310
5320 5090 4810 4490 4110 3780 3390
5510 5260 4970 4640 4230 3880 3470
5710 5450 5140 4780 4360 3980 3550
5920 5640 5310 4930 4480 4090 3630
6130 5830 5490 5090 4610 4200 3710
W 24×68 (1830)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.15 0.29 0.44 0.59 3.05 5.81
3760 3630 3470 3290 3080 2860 2600
3900 3760 3590 3400 3170 2940 2660
4050 3900 3720 3510 3270 3020 2720
4200 4040 3850 3630 3370 3100 2780
4360 4180 3980 3740 3470 3180 2840
4520 4330 4120 3870 3570 3270 2910
4690 4490 4260 3990 3680 3360 2970
4860 4650 4410 4120 3790 3450 3040
5040 4810 4560 4260 3910 3540 3110
5220 4980 4710 4390 4020 3640 3190
5410 5160 4870 4540 4140 3740 3260
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 58
COMPOSITE DESIGN
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS
LB
Shaped PNAc
Y1a
ILB (in.4)
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 24×62 (1550)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.15 0.29 0.44 0.59 3.47 6.58
3300 3190 3080 2940 2780 2540 2250
3430 3320 3190 3040 2870 2620 2300
3560 3440 3300 3150 2970 2690 2350
3700 3570 3420 3260 3060 2770 2410
3840 3700 3550 3370 3160 2850 2470
3990 3840 3670 3480 3270 2940 2530
4140 3980 3810 3600 3370 3020 2590
4300 4130 3940 3730 3480 3110 2650
4460 4280 4080 3860 3600 3200 2710
4620 4440 4230 3990 3710 3290 2780
4790 4590 4370 4120 3830 3390 2850
W 24×55 (1350)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.25 0.38 0.51 3.45 6.66
2890 2800 2700 2590 2460 2240 1970
3000 2910 2800 2680 2540 2310 2010
3120 3020 2900 2770 2630 2370 2060
3240 3130 3010 2870 2710 2440 2110
3370 3250 3120 2970 2800 2520 2160
3500 3370 3230 3080 2900 2590 2210
3630 3500 3350 3190 2990 2670 2260
3770 3630 3470 3300 3090 2750 2320
3910 3760 3600 3410 3200 2830 2370
4060 3900 3730 3530 3300 2920 2430
4210 4040 3860 3650 3410 3000 2490
W 21×62 (1330)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.15 0.31 0.46 0.62 2.53 4.78
2760 2650 2530 2380 2210 2070 1900
2880 2760 2630 2470 2280 2130 1950
3000 2870 2730 2560 2360 2190 2000
3120 2990 2830 2650 2440 2260 2050
3250 3110 2940 2750 2520 2320 2100
3390 3230 3060 2850 2600 2390 2150
3530 3360 3170 2950 2690 2460 2210
3670 3500 3290 3060 2770 2540 2270
3820 3630 3420 3170 2870 2620 2330
3970 3780 3550 3280 2960 2690 2390
4130 3920 3680 3400 3060 2780 2450
W 21×57 (1170)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.16 0.33 0.49 0.65 2.90 5.38
2480 2390 2290 2170 2030 1880 1690
2590 2490 2380 2250 2100 1940 1740
2700 2590 2480 2340 2170 2000 1780
2810 2700 2570 2420 2250 2060 1830
2930 2810 2680 2520 2330 2120 1880
3060 2930 2780 2610 2410 2190 1920
3180 3050 2890 2710 2490 2260 1980
3320 3170 3000 2810 2580 2330 2030
3450 3300 3120 2910 2670 2400 2080
3590 3430 3240 3020 2760 2480 2140
3740 3560 3360 3130 2860 2560 2200
W 21×50 (984)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.27 0.40 0.54 2.92 5.58
2120 2050 1960 1870 1760 1620 1440
2210 2130 2040 1940 1830 1670 1470
2310 2220 2130 2020 1890 1720 1510
2410 2320 2220 2100 1960 1780 1550
2510 2410 2310 2180 2040 1840 1590
2620 2520 2400 2260 2110 1900 1640
2730 2620 2500 2350 2190 1960 1680
2850 2730 2590 2440 2270 2020 1730
2960 2840 2700 2530 2350 2090 1780
3090 2950 2800 2630 2430 2160 1830
3210 3070 2910 2730 2520 2230 1880
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 59
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS Shaped PNAc
Y1a
LB
ILB (in.4 )
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 21×44 (843)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.23 0.34 0.45 2.90 5.69
1830 1770 1710 1630 1540 1410 1240
1910 1850 1780 1700 1600 1450 1270
2000 1930 1850 1760 1660 1500 1300
2090 2010 1930 1830 1730 1550 1340
2180 2100 2010 1910 1790 1610 1380
2270 2190 2090 1980 1860 1660 1410
2370 2280 2180 2060 1930 1720 1450
2470 2370 2270 2140 2000 1770 1490
2580 2470 2360 2220 2070 1830 1540
2680 2570 2450 2310 2150 1900 1580
2800 2680 2550 2400 2230 1960 1620
W 18×60 (984)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.17 0.35 0.52 0.70 2.19 3.82
2070 1980 1880 1760 1610 1520 1420
2170 2080 1960 1830 1670 1570 1460
2280 2170 2050 1900 1730 1620 1500
2390 2270 2140 1980 1790 1670 1540
2500 2380 2230 2060 1850 1730 1590
2620 2480 2330 2150 1920 1790 1640
2740 2600 2430 2230 1990 1850 1690
2860 2710 2540 2320 2070 1910 1740
3000 2830 2640 2420 2140 1970 1790
3130 2960 2750 2510 2220 2040 1840
3270 3090 2870 2610 2300 2110 1900
W 18×55 (890)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.16 0.32 0.47 0.63 2.16 3.86
1880 1800 1710 1600 1470 1380 1290
1970 1890 1790 1670 1520 1430 1320
2070 1970 1870 1740 1580 1480 1360
2170 2070 1950 1810 1640 1530 1400
2270 2160 2030 1880 1700 1580 1440
2380 2260 2120 1960 1760 1630 1490
2490 2360 2220 2040 1830 1690 1530
2610 2470 2310 2120 1900 1750 1580
2730 2580 2410 2210 1970 1810 1620
2850 2700 2510 2300 2040 1870 1670
2980 2810 2620 2390 2110 1930 1730
W 18×50 (800)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.14 0.29 0.43 0.57 2.07 3.82
1690 1620 1540 1440 1320 1250 1160
1770 1700 1610 1500 1370 1290 1190
1860 1770 1680 1560 1420 1330 1220
1950 1860 1750 1630 1480 1380 1260
2040 1940 1830 1700 1530 1420 1300
2140 2030 1910 1770 1590 1470 1340
2240 2130 1990 1840 1650 1520 1380
2340 2220 2080 1910 1710 1570 1420
2450 2320 2170 1990 1780 1630 1460
2560 2430 2260 2070 1840 1680 1510
2680 2530 2360 2160 1910 1740 1550
W 18×46 (712)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.15 0.30 0.45 0.61 2.40 4.34
1530 1470 1400 1320 1230 1140 1040
1610 1540 1470 1380 1270 1180 1070
1690 1620 1540 1440 1320 1220 1100
1770 1690 1610 1500 1380 1270 1140
1860 1770 1680 1560 1430 1310 1170
1950 1860 1750 1630 1490 1360 1210
2040 1940 1830 1700 1550 1410 1240
2140 2030 1910 1770 1610 1460 1280
2240 2130 2000 1850 1670 1510 1320
2340 2220 2080 1920 1730 1560 1360
2450 2320 2170 2000 1800 1620 1410
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 60
COMPOSITE DESIGN
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS
LB
Shaped PNAc
Y1a
ILB (in.4)
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 18×40 (612)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.26 0.39 0.53 2.26 4.27
1320 1270 1210 1140 1060 985 895
1390 1330 1270 1190 1100 1020 921
1450 1390 1320 1240 1150 1060 949
1530 1460 1390 1300 1190 1090 978
1600 1530 1450 1350 1240 1130 1010
1680 1600 1510 1410 1290 1170 1040
1760 1680 1580 1470 1340 1220 1070
1840 1760 1650 1530 1390 1260 1100
1930 1840 1730 1600 1450 1310 1140
2020 1920 1800 1670 1510 1350 1180
2110 2010 1880 1740 1560 1400 1210
W 18×35 (510)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.21 0.32 0.43 2.37 4.56
1120 1080 1030 978 917 842 753
1170 1130 1080 1020 955 874 775
1230 1190 1130 1070 995 906 799
1300 1240 1180 1120 1040 940 824
1360 1300 1240 1170 1080 976 850
1430 1370 1300 1220 1130 1010 877
1500 1430 1360 1270 1170 1050 905
1570 1500 1420 1330 1220 1090 934
1650 1570 1490 1390 1270 1130 964
1720 1640 1550 1450 1320 1170 995
1800 1720 1620 1510 1380 1220 1030
W 16×36 (448)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.32 0.43 1.79 3.44
971 931 884 830 764 714 657
1020 981 929 869 797 742 679
1080 1030 977 910 831 770 701
1140 1090 1030 954 867 801 725
1200 1140 1080 999 904 832 750
1270 1200 1130 1050 943 865 776
1330 1270 1190 1090 984 899 802
1400 1330 1250 1150 1030 935 830
1480 1400 1310 1200 1070 972 859
1550 1470 1370 1250 1120 1010 889
1630 1540 1430 1310 1160 1050 921
W 16×31 (375)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.33 0.44 2.00 3.79
826 793 756 713 662 613 555
872 837 796 748 691 637 574
921 882 837 784 722 663 593
972 929 880 823 755 690 614
1030 979 925 863 789 718 635
1080 1030 972 904 824 747 657
1140 1080 1020 948 861 778 680
1200 1140 1070 993 899 810 704
1260 1200 1120 1040 939 843 729
1330 1260 1180 1090 980 877 755
1390 1320 1240 1140 1020 912 782
W 16×26 (301)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.09 0.17 0.26 0.35 2.04 4.01
673 649 621 589 551 505 450
712 685 654 618 577 526 465
753 723 689 650 604 549 482
795 763 726 683 633 572 499
840 804 764 717 663 597 517
886 848 804 753 694 622 535
935 893 845 790 727 649 554
985 940 888 829 760 676 575
1040 989 933 870 796 705 595
1090 1040 980 911 832 734 617
1150 1090 1030 955 870 765 639
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 61
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS Shaped PNAc
Y1a
LB
ILB (in.4 )
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 14×38 (385)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.13 0.26 0.39 0.52 1.38 2.53
844 805 759 704 636 604 568
896 853 802 740 665 629 589
951 903 846 778 695 655 611
1010 956 893 818 727 683 634
1070 1010 943 861 760 712 659
1130 1070 994 905 794 742 684
1200 1130 1050 950 831 773 710
1270 1190 1100 998 868 806 738
1340 1260 1160 1050 908 840 766
1410 1330 1220 1100 948 876 796
1490 1400 1290 1150 991 913 827
W 14×34 (340)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.23 0.34 0.46 1.41 2.60
744 711 671 623 565 535 502
790 753 709 656 591 557 520
839 798 749 690 618 581 540
890 844 790 726 647 606 560
944 894 834 763 677 631 582
1000 945 880 803 708 659 604
1060 999 929 844 741 687 628
1120 1060 979 887 775 716 652
1180 1110 1030 931 810 747 677
1250 1170 1080 978 847 779 704
1320 1240 1140 1030 885 812 731
W 14×30 (291)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.19 0.29 0.39 1.48 2.82
643 615 583 544 497 467 432
684 653 616 573 521 487 448
726 692 652 604 546 508 465
771 734 689 636 573 531 483
819 777 728 670 600 554 502
868 823 769 706 629 579 522
920 870 812 743 659 605 542
974 920 857 782 691 631 564
1030 971 903 822 724 659 586
1090 1020 951 864 758 688 610
1150 1080 1000 907 793 719 634
W 14×26 (245)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.21 0.32 0.42 1.67 3.19
553 531 504 473 437 405 368
589 563 534 500 459 423 382
626 598 565 527 482 443 397
665 634 598 556 506 463 413
706 672 633 587 532 485 430
750 712 669 619 559 507 447
795 754 707 652 587 530 465
841 798 747 687 616 555 484
890 843 788 723 646 580 503
941 890 830 761 678 606 523
994 939 875 800 711 634 545
W 14×22 (199)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.08 0.17 0.25 0.34 1.69 3.34
454 437 416 393 365 336 301
484 464 442 416 385 352 313
515 493 468 439 405 369 325
548 524 496 464 427 386 339
582 556 526 490 449 405 352
619 590 556 518 473 424 367
656 625 588 546 497 444 382
696 661 622 576 523 466 398
736 699 657 607 550 488 414
779 739 693 640 577 510 431
823 780 731 673 606 534 449
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 62
COMPOSITE DESIGN
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS
LB
Shaped PNAc
Y1a
ILB (in.4)
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 12×30 (238)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.33 0.44 1.12 1.94
531 505 474 436 389 373 355
568 539 504 461 408 390 370
608 575 536 488 429 408 386
649 612 569 516 450 427 402
693 652 604 545 472 447 420
738 694 641 576 496 468 438
786 738 679 609 521 490 457
837 783 720 643 547 513 477
889 831 762 678 574 537 498
944 881 806 715 602 562 520
1000 933 852 753 631 589 543
W 12×26 (204)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.19 0.29 0.38 1.08 1.95
456 434 407 375 336 321 305
488 463 433 397 353 336 317
521 494 460 420 370 351 331
557 526 489 445 389 368 345
595 561 520 470 409 386 360
635 597 552 497 430 404 376
676 635 585 526 452 423 393
720 674 621 555 474 444 410
765 716 657 586 498 465 428
812 759 695 618 523 487 447
861 804 735 652 549 509 467
W 12×22 (156)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.21 0.32 0.43 1.66 3.04
371 356 339 318 294 270 242
399 382 362 339 312 285 253
428 408 386 360 330 300 265
458 437 412 383 350 316 277
490 466 439 408 370 333 290
524 498 468 433 392 351 303
559 531 498 459 414 370 317
596 565 529 487 438 389 332
635 601 562 516 463 410 347
675 638 596 547 488 431 364
717 677 631 578 515 453 380
W 12×19 (130)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.09 0.18 0.26 0.35 1.66 3.12
312 300 286 270 251 229 203
335 321 306 287 266 241 212
360 344 327 306 282 255 222
386 368 349 326 300 269 232
413 394 372 347 318 284 243
442 421 397 369 337 299 255
472 449 423 392 357 316 267
503 478 450 417 378 333 279
536 509 478 442 400 351 293
571 541 507 468 423 370 306
606 574 538 496 446 389 321
W 12×16 (103)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.07 0.13 0.20 0.26 1.71 3.32
254 245 234 223 210 189 163
273 263 251 239 224 200 171
294 282 269 255 238 212 179
315 303 288 272 254 224 188
338 324 309 291 270 238 197
362 347 330 310 287 251 207
388 371 352 330 305 266 217
414 396 375 351 324 281 227
442 422 399 373 344 297 239
471 449 424 396 364 313 250
501 477 450 420 386 330 262
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 63
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS Shaped PNAc
Y1a
LB
ILB (in.4 )
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 12×14 (88.6)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.06 0.11 0.17 0.23 1.69 3.36
220 213 204 195 184 165 141
237 229 219 209 197 175 148
255 246 235 223 210 186 155
275 264 252 239 224 197 163
295 283 270 255 238 209 171
316 303 289 272 254 221 180
338 324 308 290 270 234 188
362 346 329 309 287 247 198
386 369 350 329 305 262 208
411 393 372 349 323 276 218
438 418 396 371 342 292 228
W 10×26 (144)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.11 0.22 0.33 0.44 0.90 1.51
339 322 300 274 242 232 222
368 347 323 293 256 245 233
398 375 347 313 271 258 245
430 404 372 334 287 273 258
464 435 400 357 304 288 272
499 467 428 381 321 304 286
537 501 458 406 340 321 301
577 537 490 432 360 339 317
618 575 523 460 381 358 334
662 615 558 489 403 378 351
707 656 594 519 425 398 369
W 10×22 (118)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.09 0.18 0.27 0.36 0.95 1.70
281 267 250 230 205 194 183
305 289 269 246 217 205 193
330 312 290 263 231 217 203
357 336 312 282 245 230 214
386 363 335 302 260 244 225
416 390 360 322 277 258 237
448 419 385 344 293 273 250
482 450 413 367 311 288 263
517 482 441 391 330 305 277
554 516 471 417 350 322 292
592 551 502 443 370 340 308
W 10×19 (96.3)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 1.27 2.31
239 228 215 200 183 169 153
259 247 233 216 195 180 162
282 267 251 232 209 191 170
305 289 271 249 223 203 180
330 312 292 267 238 216 190
356 337 314 286 254 229 200
384 362 337 307 271 243 211
413 389 361 328 288 258 223
444 417 387 350 307 274 235
476 447 413 374 326 290 248
509 478 441 398 347 307 261
W 10×17 (81.9)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.08 0.17 0.25 0.33 1.31 2.46
206 197 187 175 161 148 132
224 214 203 189 173 157 139
244 232 219 204 185 168 147
265 252 237 219 199 179 155
286 272 255 236 213 190 164
310 294 275 253 227 202 173
334 316 296 272 243 215 183
360 340 317 291 260 229 193
387 365 340 311 277 243 204
415 391 364 332 295 258 215
444 419 389 354 314 274 227
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 64
COMPOSITE DESIGN
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS
LB
Shaped PNAc
Y1a
ILB (in.4)
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 10×15 (68.9)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.07 0.14 0.20 0.27 1.35 2.60
177 170 162 153 142 128 112
193 185 175 165 153 137 118
210 201 190 178 164 147 125
228 218 206 192 176 157 133
247 236 222 207 189 167 140
268 255 240 223 203 178 148
289 275 258 240 218 190 157
312 296 278 257 233 203 166
335 318 298 275 249 216 176
360 341 320 295 266 229 185
386 365 342 315 283 244 196
W 10×12 (53.8)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.05 0.11 0.16 0.21 1.30 2.61
139 134 128 121 113 102 87.9
152 146 139 131 122 109 92.9
165 158 150 141 131 116 98.4
180 172 163 153 141 124 104
195 186 176 165 152 133 110
211 202 190 178 163 142 117
229 218 205 191 175 152 124
247 235 221 205 187 162 131
265 252 237 220 200 173 138
285 271 254 236 214 184 146
306 290 272 252 229 195 155
W 8×28 (98)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.12 0.23 0.35 0.47 0.53 0.59
248 233 214 191 161 159 158
274 256 234 207 171 170 168
302 281 256 224 183 181 180
332 308 279 243 196 194 192
364 337 304 262 209 207 204
398 368 330 284 223 221 218
434 400 358 306 238 235 233
473 435 388 330 254 251 248
513 471 419 355 271 268 264
555 509 452 381 289 285 281
600 549 487 408 307 303 299
W 8×24 (82.8)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.47 0.55
209 196 180 161 136 134 133
231 216 198 175 145 143 142
255 237 216 189 155 153 151
280 260 236 205 166 164 162
307 285 257 222 177 175 173
336 311 279 240 189 187 184
367 339 303 259 202 200 197
400 368 329 280 216 213 210
434 399 355 301 231 227 223
470 431 383 323 246 242 238
508 465 413 347 262 257 253
W 8×21 (75.3)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.70 1.06
191 181 167 151 131 126 122
211 198 183 164 140 135 130
232 218 200 178 151 145 138
255 238 218 193 162 155 147
279 260 237 209 173 165 157
305 284 258 226 186 177 167
333 309 279 244 199 189 178
362 335 302 263 213 201 190
392 362 327 283 227 215 202
424 391 352 304 243 229 215
458 422 379 326 259 244 228
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE BEAMS
5 - 65
LOWER BOUND ELASTIC MOMENT OF INERTIA FOR PLASTIC COMPOSITE SECTIONS Shaped PNAc
Y1a
LB
ILB (in.4 )
Y2b (in.) In.
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
W 8×18 (61.9)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.08 0.17 0.25 0.33 0.71 1.21
159 150 140 127 111 106 101
175 165 153 138 120 114 107
193 182 167 150 129 122 114
213 199 183 163 139 131 122
233 218 199 177 149 140 130
255 238 217 192 160 150 139
278 259 236 207 172 161 148
303 281 255 224 184 172 158
329 305 276 241 198 184 169
356 329 298 259 211 196 179
384 355 321 278 226 209 191
W 8×15 (48)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.08 0.16 0.24 0.32 0.97 1.79
129 123 116 107 97.0 89.3 80.6
143 136 128 117 105 96.4 86.2
158 150 140 128 114 104 92.2
175 165 154 140 124 112 98.7
192 181 168 153 135 121 106
210 198 183 166 146 130 113
230 216 200 181 158 140 121
251 235 217 196 170 151 129
272 255 235 211 183 162 138
295 276 254 228 197 174 147
319 299 274 246 211 186 157
W 8×13 (39.6)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.06 0.13 0.19 0.26 1.00 1.91
109 104 98.0 91.4 83.6 76.1 67.2
121 115 108 100 91.3 82.4 72.0
134 127 119 110 99.6 89.3 77.2
147 140 131 121 108 96.6 82.7
162 154 144 132 118 104 88.7
178 168 157 144 128 113 95.0
195 184 171 156 139 122 102
213 200 186 170 150 131 109
231 218 202 184 162 141 116
251 236 219 198 175 151 124
272 255 236 214 188 162 132
W 8×10 (30.8)
TFL 2 3 4 BFL 6 7
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.21 0.88 1.77
83.1 79.3 74.8 69.6 63.5 58.0 51.7
92.3 102 113 87.8 97.0 107 82.6 90.9 99.9 76.5 83.8 91.7 69.2 75.4 82.0 62.8 68.0 73.5 55.4 59.4 63.6
124 117 109 100 89.2 79.5 68.2
136 129 120 109 96.7 85.8 73.0
149 141 131 119 105 92.5 78.2
163 153 142 129 113 99.6 83.6
177 166 154 140 122 107 89.4
192 180 167 151 132 115 95.4
208 195 180 162 142 123 102
aY1 = distance from top of the steel beam to plastic neutral axis. bY2 = distance from top of the steel beam to concrete flange force. cSee Figure 5-3 for PNA locations. dValue in parentheses is I (in.4) of non-composite steel shape. x
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 66
COMPOSITE DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS
5 - 67
COMPOSITE COLUMNS General Notes
Load tables for composite columns are presented for a variety of W shapes, pipe, and structural tubing. Tabular loads have been computed in accordance with Section I2.2 of the LRFD Specification for axially loaded members having effective unsupported lengths indicated at the left of each table. The effective length KL is the actual unbraced length, in feet, multiplied by factor K, which depends on the rotational restraint at the ends of the unbraced length and the means available to resist lateral movements. The K factor may be selected using as a guide Table C-C2.1 in the Commentary of the LRFD Specification. Interpolation between the idealized cases is a matter of engineering judgment. More precise values for K may be obtained, if desired, from the alignment chart in Figure C-C2.2 in the LRFD Commentary (also shown in Part 3 of this Manual under Design Strength of Columns) once sections have been selected for several framing members. Load tables are provided for W shapes encased in reinforced normal-weight concrete of square or rectangular cross section, and for steel pipe and structural tubing filled with normal-weight concrete. The following W shapes are included: Nominal depth, in. 14 12 10 8
Weight, lb per ft 426-61 336-58 112-45 67-35
Two values of yield stress, Fy equal to 36 and 50 ksi, and three values of concrete cylinder strength, fc′ equal to 3.5, 5, and 8 ksi, are included for W shapes. All reinforcing steel is Grade 60. The tables for steel pipe columns include nominal pipe diameters of 4 to 12 in., yield stress Fy = 36 ksi, and concrete cylinder strength fc′ equal to 3.5 and 5 ksi. The tables for tubular columns include tubes of nominal side dimensions 4 to 16 in., yield stress Fy equal to 46 ksi, and concrete cylinder strength fc′ equal to 3.5 and 5 ksi. All axial design strengths are tabulated in kips. Strength values are omitted when Kl / r exceeds 200. Resistance factor φ = 0.85 was used in computing the axial design strengths of all composite columns. In all tables, the design strengths are given for effective lengths with respect to the minor axis. When the minor axis is braced at closer intervals than the major axis, the strength of the column must be investigated with reference to both the major (X-X) and minor (Y-Y) axes. The ratio rmx / rmy included in the tables provides a convenient method for investigating the strength of a column with respect to its major axis. Properties useful to the designer are listed at the bottom of the Column Load Tables. They are helpful in considering buckling about the major axis as discussed above and in the design of members under combined axial compression and bending as discussed subsequently. Both of these cases are illustrated with design examples. The properties have the following units: modified radius of gyration rm, in. nominal flexural strength Mn, kip-ft Euler buckling term Pe (KL)2, kip-ft2 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 68
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Subscripts x and y refer to the major and minor axes. Resistance factor φb = 0.9 was used in computing the flexural design strength φbMn. Additional notes relating specifically to the W shapes, steel pipe, and structural tube column tables precede each of these groups of tables.
EXAMPLE 5-4
Given:
Using tables on the pages that follow, design the smallest composite column with a W shape of Fy = 50 ksi to support a factored concentric load of 1,000 kips. The effective length with respect to its minor axis is 16 feet and that with respect to its major axis is 31 feet.
Solution:
Use composite column tables for W shapes of fc′ = 8 ksi since the strongest concrete requires the smallest size column. An inspection of the tables reveals that the tabulated values of rmx / rmy do not exceed 1.22 and in most cases are equal to 1.0 (square columns). Assuming that rmx / rmy is equal to 1.0, enter the tables with equivalent effective column length of KL = 31 ft. Select an 18 in. × 18 in. column with a W10×49 and rmx / rmy = 1.0. By interpolation, the column has an axial design strength φPn of 1,029 kips. Use: 18 in. × 18 in. column with W10×49 of Fy = 50 ksi, fc′ = 8 ksi, four #8 Gr. 60 longitudinal bars and #3 Gr. 60 ties spaced 12 inches on center.
EXAMPLE 5-5
Given:
Redesign the column from Example 5-4 using (a) rectangular and (b) square structural tubing, both filled with structural concrete.
Solution:
a. Enter the Composite Column Tables for rectangular structural tubing filled with 5 ksi concrete at an effective column length of KL = 16 ft. Select 14×10 tubing with 1⁄2-in. thick walls; φPn = 1,090 kips. rmx / rmy = 1.30 Equivalent effective length for X-X axis: 31 / 1.30 = 23.8 ft Since 23.8 ft > 16 ft, X-X axis controls. Re-enter the table at an effective length of KL = 23.8 ft. It is apparent that 14×10 tube will not satisfy the axial load of 1,000 kips. Select 16×12 steel tube with 1⁄2-in. walls: rmx / rmy = 1.25 KL = 31 / 1.25 = 24.8 ft AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS
5 - 69
By interpolation, the column provides an axial design strength of 1,206 kips. The same tubing filled with 3.5 ksi concrete is good for 1,094 kips > 1,000 kips. Use: 16-in. × 12-in. × 1⁄2-in. tubing filled with 3.5-ksi concrete. b. Enter the Composite Column Tables for square structural tubing filled with 5 ksi concrete at effective column length KL = 31 ft. Select 14×14 tubing with 1⁄2-in. thick walls good for 1,135 kips. The same tubing filled with 3.5 ksi concrete is good for 1,035 kips > 1,000 kips. Use: 14-in. × 14-in. × 1⁄2-in. tubing filled with 3.5-ksi concrete. Note: The weight of both the 16×12 and 14×14 steel tubing with 1⁄ -in. thick walls is 89.68 lb. per ft. 2 Combined Axial Compression and Bending (Interaction)
Loads given in the Composite Column Tables are for concentrically loaded columns. For columns subjected to combined compression and flexure, the nominal flexural design strength φbMn determined from Equation C-I4-1 of the Commentary on the LRFD Specification (only valid for Pu / φcPn > 0.3) and the elastic buckling load Pe times the square of the effective column length are given at the bottom of the tables. With these quantities and the loads tabulated for concentric loading, the column may be designed by successive approximations based on LRFD Specification Section I4. The procedure is illustrated in Example 5-6 for a column subjected to a large bending moment combined with a moderate axial load and in Example 5-7 for a column subjected to a large axial load combined with a moderate bending moment. EXAMPLE 5-6
Given:
Design a composite encased W shape column to resist a factored axial load of 350 kips and a factored moment about the X-X axis of 240 kip-ft. The unsupported length of the column is 12 feet, Fy = 50 ksi, fc′ = 3.5 ksi and Cm = 1.0. The loads were obtained by first order elastic analysis and there is no lateral translation of column ends.
Solution:
Since the moment is large in relation to the axial load, assume that Pu / φPn = 1⁄2 and B1 = 1.0. From Equation H1-1a φbMnx = (8 / 9) × 240 × 2 = 427 kip-ft From the Composite Column Tables, find a column with φbMnx close to 427 kip-ft. Try a W10×60 with 18-in. encasement: φbMnx = 439 kip-ft, φPn = 1,300 kips and Pex = 142 × 104 / 122 = 9,861 kips. Therefore, Pu / φPn = 350 / 1,300 = 0.2692 ≥ 0.2 From Equation C1-1 and C1-2, with Mlt = 0 since there is no lateral translation, AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 70
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Mux =
240 = 248.8 kip-ft 350 1− 9,861
and from Equation H1-1a φbMnx =
8(248.8) 9 1 −
350 1,300
= 302.6 kip-ft
Since 302.6 kip-ft is much less than the 439 kip-ft provided, select a smaller size. Tr y a W8×58 with 16-in. × 16-in. encasement: φbMnx = 345 kip-ft, φPn = 1,130 kips and Pex = 103 × 104 / 122 = 7,153 kips. Mux =
240 = 252.4 kip-ft 350 1−
7,153
From Equation H1-1a, with φbMnx = 345 kip-ft since φPn / Pu > 0.3,
8(252.3) 350 + = 0.960 < 1.0 o.k. 1,130 9(345) Use: 16-in. × 16-in. column with W8×58 of Fy = 50 ksi, fc′ = 3.5 ksi, four #7 Gr. 60 longitudinal bars and #3 Gr. 60 ties spaced at 10 inches.
EXAMPLE 5-7
Given:
Design a composite encased W shape column to resist a factored axial load of 1,100 kips and factored moment of 200 kip-ft. Use 50 ksi structural steel and 5 ksi concrete. The unsupported column length is 11 feet and Cm = 0.85. Assume that sidesway is prevented.
Solution:
Since the axial load is large in relation to the moment, assume that: 8 Mu = 0.5 9 φbMnx From Equation H1-1a φPn = 1,100 / 0.5 = 2,200 kips From the Composite Column Tables, find a column with φPn close to 2,200 kips at KL = 11 ft. Try a W12×106 with 20-in. encasement: φPn = 2,270 kips, φbMnx = 899 kip-ft and Pex = 294 × 104 / 112 = 24,300 kips. From Equation C1-2 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS
B1 =
5 - 71
0.85 = 0.890 < 1.0 1,100 1− 24,300
Therefore, B1 = 1.0. From Equation H1-1a Pu 8 200 =1− × = 0.802 9 899 φPn and φPn = 1,100 / 0.802 = 1,372 kips Try a W10×45 with 18-in. × 18-in. encasement: φPn = 1,360 kips, φbMnx = 356 kip-ft and Pex = 125 × 104 / 112 = 10,330 kips. From Equation C1-2 B1 =
0.85
1−
1,100 10,300
= 0.951 < 1.0
Therefore, B1 = 1.0 and Pu 8 200 =1− × = 0.501 9 356 φPn and φPn = 1,100 / 0.501 = 2,196 kips Since the convergence is slow, estimate a new φPn as: φPn =
2,196 + 1,372 = 1,784 kips 2
Try a W10×77 with 18-in. × 18-in. encasement: φPn = 1,720 kips, φbMnx = 555 kip-ft and Pex = 178 × 104 / 112 = 14,710 kips. B1 =
0.85
1−
1,100 14,710
= 0.919 < 1.0
and 1,100 8 200 + × = 0.960 < 1.0 o.k. 1,720 9 555 Use: 18-in. × 18-in. column with W10×77 of Fy = 50 ksi, fc′ = 5 ksi, four #8 Gr. 60 longitudinal bars and #3 Gr. 60 ties spaced at 12 inches. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 72
COMPOSITE DESIGN
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 73
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE General Notes
Concentric load design strengths in the tables that follow are tabulated for the effective length KL in feet, listed at the left of each table. They are applicable to axially loaded members with respect to their minor axis in accordance with Section I2.2 of the LRFD Specification. Two steel yield stresses, Fy = 36 ksi and Fy = 50 ksi, and three concrete strengths, fc′ = 3.5 ksi, fc′ = 5 ksi, and fc′ = 8 ksi, are covered. The tables apply to normal-weight concrete. All reinforcing steel is Gr. 60; however, Fyr = 55 ksi is used in the calculation of φPn in accordance with LRFD Specification Section I2.1. Each W shape is embedded in concrete of a square or rectangular cross section reinforced with four longitudinal reinforcing bars placed in the four corners and with lateral ties spaced as required in Section I2.1. For the design of additional confinement reinforcement, see LRFD Specification Section I2.1. The size of the concrete section was selected so as to provide at least the minimum required cover over the reinforcing bars in the column. For discussion of the effective length, range of Kl / r, strength about the major axis, combined axial and bending strength, and for sample problems, see Composite Columns, General Notes. The properties listed at the bottom of each table are for use in checking strength about the strong axis and in design for combined axial load and bending. Additional information on W shapes encased in concrete, including numerous tables for columns and beam-columns, is available in the AISC Steel Design Guide No. 6, Load and Resistance Factor Design of W-Shapes Encased in Concrete (Griffis, 1992).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 74
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y X
h
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
X
Y 24 in.×26 in. 4-#11 bars
Ties
#4 bars spaced 16 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
426
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
398
370
342
311
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
4910
6400
4680
6070
4450
5740
4220
5420
3940
5030
6 7 8 9 10
4880 4870 4850 4840 4820
6340 6330 6300 6280 6250
4650 4640 4630 4610 4600
6020 6000 5980 5960 5930
4420 4410 4400 4380 4370
5700 5680 5660 5640 5620
4190 4180 4170 4160 4140
5370 5360 5340 5320 5300
3910 3910 3890 3880 3870
4990 4970 4950 4930 4910
11 12 13 14 15
4810 4790 4770 4750 4720
6220 6190 6160 6120 6080
4580 4560 4540 4520 4500
5910 5880 5840 5810 5770
4350 4340 4320 4300 4270
5590 5560 5530 5490 5460
4130 4110 4090 4070 4050
5270 5240 5210 5180 5150
3850 3840 3820 3800 3780
4890 4860 4830 4800 4770
16 17 18 19 20
4700 4670 4640 4610 4580
6040 5990 5950 5900 5850
4470 4450 4420 4390 4360
5730 5690 5640 5590 5540
4250 4230 4200 4170 4140
5420 5380 5340 5290 5240
4030 4000 3980 3950 3930
5110 5070 5030 4990 4940
3760 3740 3710 3690 3660
4740 4700 4660 4620 4580
22 24 26 28 30
4520 4440 4370 4290 4200
5740 5620 5490 5360 5220
4300 4230 4160 4080 4000
5440 5330 5210 5080 4950
4080 4020 3950 3870 3790
5140 5040 4920 4800 4680
3870 3800 3740 3660 3590
4850 4750 4640 4520 4410
3610 3550 3480 3420 3340
4490 4400 4300 4190 4080
32 34 36 38 40
4110 4020 3930 3830 3720
5080 4930 4780 4620 4460
3910 3820 3730 3640 3540
4810 4670 4530 4380 4230
3710 3630 3540 3450 3350
4550 4410 4270 4130 3990
3510 3430 3340 3260 3170
4280 4150 4020 3890 3750
3270 3190 3110 3030 2940
3960 3840 3720 3590 3460
2600 1560 1460 1240
3380 1960 1460 1240
2420 1460 1360 1160
3150 1840 1360 1160
2210 1360 1250 1060
2890 1720 1250 1060
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
2970 1750 1650 1400
3850 2170 1650 1400
7.20 1.08
2780 1660 1550 1320
3610 2070 1550 1320
7.20 1.08
7.20 1.08
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.20 1.08
7.20 1.08
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 75
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 24 in.×24 in. 4-#11 bars
Ties
#4 bars spaced 16 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
283
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
257
233
211
193
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
3620
4610
3400
4300
3200
4010
3010
3750
2860
3530
6 7 8 9 10
3600 3590 3580 3570 3560
4570 4560 4540 4530 4510
3380 3370 3360 3350 3340
4260 4250 4230 4220 4200
3170 3170 3160 3150 3130
3980 3960 3950 3930 3910
2990 2980 2970 2960 2950
3710 3700 3690 3670 3660
2840 2830 2820 2810 2800
3500 3490 3480 3460 3450
11 12 13 14 15
3540 3530 3510 3490 3470
4480 4460 4430 4410 4380
3320 3310 3290 3280 3260
4180 4150 4130 4100 4080
3120 3110 3090 3080 3060
3900 3870 3850 3830 3800
2940 2920 2910 2890 2880
3640 3620 3590 3570 3550
2790 2780 2760 2750 2730
3430 3410 3390 3370 3340
16 17 18 19 20
3460 3430 3410 3390 3360
4340 4310 4280 4240 4200
3240 3220 3200 3180 3150
4050 4010 3980 3950 3910
3040 3020 3000 2980 2960
3770 3740 3710 3680 3640
2860 2840 2820 2800 2780
3520 3490 3460 3430 3400
2720 2700 2680 2660 2640
3320 3290 3260 3230 3200
22 24 26 28 30
3310 3260 3200 3140 3070
4120 4030 3940 3840 3740
3100 3050 2990 2930 2870
3830 3750 3660 3570 3470
2910 2860 2810 2750 2690
3570 3490 3410 3320 3230
2740 2690 2630 2580 2520
3330 3250 3180 3090 3010
2590 2550 2500 2440 2390
3140 3060 2990 2910 2830
32 34 36 38 40
3000 2930 2850 2780 2700
3630 3520 3410 3290 3170
2810 2740 2670 2590 2520
3370 3270 3160 3050 2940
2630 2560 2490 2420 2350
3140 3040 2940 2830 2730
2460 2400 2330 2270 2200
2920 2820 2730 2630 2530
2330 2270 2210 2140 2080
2740 2660 2560 2470 2380
1650 1070 822 822
2160 1360 822 822
1510 991 757 757
1980 1260 757 757
1400 924 704 704
1830 1170 704 704
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
1970 1250 971 971
2580 1570 971 971
7.20 1.00
1810 1150 894 894
2360 1460 894 894
7.20 1.00
7.20 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.20 1.00
7.20 1.00
5 - 76
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
Y Size b × h
24 in.×24 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 16 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
176
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
159
145
132
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
2680
3290
2530
3090
2420
2920
2300
2770
6 7 8 9 10
2660 2650 2640 2630 2620
3270 3250 3240 3230 3210
2510 2510 2500 2490 2480
3060 3050 3040 3020 3010
2400 2390 2380 2370 2370
2900 2890 2880 2860 2850
2290 2280 2270 2260 2250
2740 2730 2720 2710 2690
11 12 13 14 15
2610 2600 2590 2570 2560
3200 3180 3160 3140 3120
2470 2460 2440 2430 2420
2990 2980 2960 2940 2920
2350 2340 2330 2320 2300
2830 2820 2800 2780 2760
2240 2230 2220 2210 2190
2680 2660 2650 2630 2610
16 17 18 19 20
2540 2530 2510 2490 2470
3090 3070 3040 3010 2980
2400 2380 2370 2350 2330
2890 2870 2840 2820 2790
2290 2270 2260 2240 2220
2740 2720 2690 2670 2640
2180 2160 2150 2130 2110
2590 2560 2540 2520 2490
22 24 26 28 30
2430 2380 2340 2290 2230
2920 2860 2790 2710 2630
2290 2250 2200 2150 2100
2730 2670 2600 2530 2460
2180 2140 2090 2050 2000
2580 2520 2460 2390 2320
2070 2030 1990 1940 1890
2440 2380 2320 2250 2190
32 34 36 38 40
2180 2120 2060 2000 1940
2550 2470 2390 2300 2210
2050 1990 1940 1880 1820
2380 2310 2230 2140 2060
1940 1890 1840 1780 1720
2250 2170 2100 2020 1940
1840 1790 1740 1680 1630
2120 2050 1970 1900 1820
1520 987 603 603
1060 719 563 563
1400 921 563 563
983 656 523 523
1290 835 523 523
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
1260 837 654 654
1660 1070 654 654 7.20 1.00
1150 771 603 603 7.20 1.00
7.20 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.20 1.00
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 77
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
h
X
X
Y Size b × h
22 in.×22 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 14 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
120
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
109
99
90
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
2040
2460
1940
2320
1860
2210
1780
2100
6 7 8 9 10
2020 2010 2010 2000 1990
2430 2420 2410 2400 2380
1920 1920 1910 1900 1890
2300 2290 2280 2270 2250
1840 1840 1830 1820 1810
2180 2170 2160 2150 2140
1770 1760 1750 1750 1740
2080 2070 2060 2050 2030
11 12 13 14 15
1980 1960 1950 1940 1920
2370 2350 2330 2310 2290
1880 1870 1860 1850 1830
2240 2220 2200 2190 2170
1800 1790 1780 1760 1750
2120 2110 2090 2070 2050
1730 1710 1700 1690 1680
2020 2000 1990 1970 1950
16 17 18 19 20
1910 1890 1880 1860 1840
2270 2250 2220 2200 2170
1820 1800 1780 1770 1750
2140 2120 2100 2070 2050
1740 1720 1700 1690 1670
2030 2010 1990 1970 1940
1660 1650 1630 1610 1600
1930 1910 1890 1870 1840
22 24 26 28 30
1800 1760 1710 1670 1620
2120 2060 1990 1930 1860
1710 1670 1630 1580 1530
2000 1940 1880 1820 1750
1630 1590 1550 1510 1460
1890 1830 1780 1720 1650
1560 1520 1480 1440 1390
1790 1740 1680 1630 1570
32 34 36 38 40
1570 1520 1460 1410 1350
1790 1720 1650 1570 1500
1480 1430 1380 1330 1280
1680 1620 1550 1480 1410
1410 1360 1310 1260 1210
1590 1520 1460 1390 1320
1340 1300 1250 1200 1150
1500 1440 1380 1310 1250
1050 677 364 364
740 498 340 340
966 631 340 340
684 465 318 318
892 587 318 318
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
871 574 392 392
1140 729 392 392 6.60 1.00
801 533 364 364 6.60 1.00
6.60 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.60 1.00
5 - 78
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
Y Size b × h
18 in.×22 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#9 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 12 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
82
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
74
68
61
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1530
1810
1460
1720
1410
1640
1350
1560
6 7 8 9 10
1500 1500 1490 1480 1470
1780 1770 1760 1740 1730
1440 1430 1420 1410 1400
1690 1680 1670 1650 1640
1390 1380 1370 1360 1350
1620 1610 1590 1580 1570
1330 1320 1310 1300 1290
1530 1520 1510 1500 1480
11 12 13 14 15
1450 1440 1430 1410 1390
1710 1690 1670 1650 1630
1390 1370 1360 1350 1330
1620 1600 1580 1560 1540
1340 1320 1310 1300 1280
1550 1530 1510 1490 1470
1280 1260 1250 1240 1220
1470 1450 1430 1410 1390
16 17 18 19 20
1380 1360 1340 1320 1300
1600 1580 1550 1530 1500
1310 1300 1280 1260 1240
1520 1490 1470 1440 1420
1260 1250 1230 1210 1190
1450 1430 1400 1380 1350
1200 1190 1170 1150 1130
1370 1350 1320 1300 1270
22 24 26 28 30
1260 1210 1160 1110 1060
1440 1380 1310 1250 1180
1200 1150 1100 1060 1010
1360 1300 1240 1170 1110
1150 1100 1060 1010 963
1300 1240 1180 1120 1060
1090 1050 1000 957 910
1220 1170 1110 1050 991
32 34 36 38 40
1010 960 908 855 804
1110 1050 978 911 846
957 906 856 805 755
1050 981 917 853 791
914 864 815 765 717
993 930 868 807 747
862 814 766 718 671
931 871 812 753 696
744 370 261 175
535 279 246 164
693 348 246 164
490 259 228 153
633 323 228 153
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
623 319 280 188
808 398 280 188 5.40 1.22
574 296 261 175 5.40 1.22
5.40 1.22
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.40 1.22
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 79
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 22 in.×24 in. 4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 14 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
336
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
305
279
252
230
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
3950
5120
3680
4750
3460
4430
3230
4120
3050
3860
6 7 8 9 10
3920 3910 3890 3880 3870
5070 5060 5030 5010 4990
3650 3640 3630 3620 3600
4700 4680 4670 4640 4620
3430 3420 3410 3400 3390
4390 4370 4360 4340 4310
3210 3200 3190 3180 3160
4080 4060 4040 4020 4000
3030 3020 3010 3000 2980
3820 3800 3790 3770 3750
11 12 13 14 15
3850 3830 3810 3790 3770
4960 4930 4890 4860 4820
3590 3570 3550 3530 3510
4590 4570 4530 4500 4470
3370 3350 3340 3320 3300
4290 4260 4230 4200 4170
3150 3130 3120 3100 3080
3980 3950 3930 3900 3870
2970 2950 2940 2920 2900
3730 3700 3680 3650 3620
16 17 18 19 20
3740 3720 3690 3660 3630
4780 4740 4690 4650 4600
3490 3460 3440 3410 3380
4430 4390 4350 4300 4260
3270 3250 3230 3200 3180
4130 4100 4060 4020 3970
3060 3040 3010 2990 2960
3830 3800 3760 3720 3680
2880 2860 2840 2810 2790
3590 3550 3520 3480 3450
22 24 26 28 30
3570 3500 3430 3350 3270
4500 4390 4270 4150 4020
3320 3260 3190 3120 3040
4160 4060 3950 3840 3720
3120 3060 2990 2920 2850
3880 3780 3680 3570 3460
2910 2850 2790 2730 2660
3600 3510 3410 3310 3200
2740 2680 2620 2560 2500
3360 3280 3190 3090 2990
32 34 36 38 40
3190 3110 3020 2930 2830
3890 3750 3610 3470 3330
2970 2880 2800 2710 2630
3590 3470 3340 3210 3070
2780 2700 2620 2540 2450
3350 3230 3110 2980 2860
2590 2510 2440 2360 2280
3100 2980 2870 2750 2640
2430 2360 2290 2210 2140
2890 2780 2680 2570 2460
1770 1020 946 795
2290 1270 946 795
1610 942 868 729
2090 1180 868 729
1480 879 803 675
1930 1100 803 675
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
2110 1180 1120 938
2730 1450 1120 938
6.60 1.09
1920 1090 1020 860
2490 1350 1020 860
6.60 1.09
6.60 1.09
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.60 1.09
6.60 1.09
5 - 80
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y X
h
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
X
Y 20 in.×22 in. 4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 13 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
210
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
190
170
152
136
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
2720
3460
2550
3210
2380
2980
2230
2760
2090
2570
6 7 8 9 10
2700 2690 2680 2670 2650
3420 3400 3380 3360 3340
2530 2520 2510 2490 2480
3170 3160 3140 3130 3110
2360 2350 2340 2330 2320
2940 2930 2910 2900 2880
2210 2200 2190 2180 2170
2730 2710 2700 2680 2670
2070 2060 2050 2040 2030
2530 2520 2510 2490 2480
11 12 13 14 15
2640 2620 2600 2580 2560
3320 3290 3270 3240 3200
2470 2450 2440 2420 2400
3080 3060 3030 3000 2970
2300 2290 2270 2260 2240
2850 2830 2810 2780 2750
2150 2140 2120 2110 2090
2650 2620 2600 2580 2550
2020 2010 1990 1970 1960
2460 2440 2410 2390 2370
16 17 18 19 20
2540 2520 2500 2470 2450
3170 3140 3100 3060 3020
2380 2360 2330 2310 2290
2940 2910 2880 2840 2800
2220 2200 2180 2150 2130
2720 2690 2660 2630 2590
2070 2050 2030 2010 1990
2520 2490 2460 2430 2400
1940 1920 1900 1880 1860
2340 2310 2280 2250 2220
22 24 26 28 30
2390 2330 2270 2210 2140
2930 2840 2750 2650 2550
2230 2180 2120 2060 1990
2720 2640 2550 2450 2360
2080 2030 1970 1910 1850
2510 2430 2350 2260 2170
1940 1890 1840 1780 1720
2330 2250 2170 2090 2010
1810 1760 1710 1660 1600
2150 2080 2010 1930 1850
32 34 36 38 40
2070 2000 1930 1850 1780
2440 2340 2230 2120 2010
1930 1860 1790 1720 1650
2260 2160 2060 1960 1850
1790 1720 1660 1590 1520
2080 1990 1890 1800 1700
1660 1600 1540 1470 1410
1920 1830 1740 1650 1560
1550 1490 1430 1370 1300
1770 1690 1600 1520 1440
1080 646 508 420
1410 813 508 420
983 594 463 383
1280 748 463 383
892 547 423 349
1160 689 423 349
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
1310 759 608 502
1690 946 608 502
6.00 1.10
1190 704 557 460
1550 883 557 460
6.00 1.10
6.00 1.10
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.00 1.10
6.00 1.10
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 81
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 20 in.×20 in. 4-#9 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 13 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
120
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
106
96
87
79
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1850
2270
1740
2110
1650
1990
1580
1880
1510
1780
6 7 8 9 10
1840 1830 1820 1810 1800
2250 2240 2220 2210 2190
1720 1710 1700 1690 1680
2080 2070 2060 2050 2030
1630 1630 1620 1610 1600
1960 1950 1940 1930 1910
1560 1550 1540 1540 1530
1850 1850 1830 1820 1810
1490 1480 1470 1470 1460
1760 1750 1740 1730 1710
11 12 13 14 15
1790 1780 1760 1750 1740
2180 2160 2140 2120 2100
1670 1660 1650 1640 1620
2020 2000 1980 1960 1940
1590 1580 1570 1550 1540
1900 1880 1860 1850 1830
1520 1500 1490 1480 1470
1800 1780 1760 1740 1730
1450 1440 1420 1410 1400
1700 1690 1670 1650 1630
16 17 18 19 20
1720 1700 1690 1670 1650
2070 2050 2020 2000 1970
1610 1590 1570 1560 1540
1920 1900 1870 1850 1820
1520 1510 1490 1470 1460
1800 1780 1760 1730 1710
1450 1440 1420 1400 1390
1710 1680 1660 1640 1610
1380 1370 1350 1340 1320
1610 1590 1570 1550 1530
22 24 26 28 30
1610 1570 1520 1470 1420
1910 1850 1780 1710 1640
1500 1460 1410 1370 1320
1760 1700 1640 1580 1510
1420 1380 1340 1290 1250
1660 1600 1540 1480 1420
1350 1310 1270 1230 1180
1560 1510 1450 1390 1330
1280 1250 1210 1160 1120
1480 1420 1370 1310 1260
32 34 36 38 40
1370 1320 1270 1210 1160
1570 1500 1430 1350 1280
1270 1220 1170 1120 1070
1450 1380 1310 1240 1170
1200 1150 1100 1050 1000
1350 1290 1220 1160 1090
1140 1090 1040 993 945
1270 1210 1150 1080 1020
1080 1030 984 937 891
1200 1140 1080 1020 957
613 398 261 261
803 505 261 261
566 372 243 243
739 471 243 243
521 347 226 226
680 438 226 226
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
746 474 311 311 6.00 1.00
977 599 311 311
669 429 282 282 6.00 1.00
878 545 282 282
6.00 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.00 1.00
6.00 1.00
5 - 82
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
X
Y Size b × h
20 in.×20 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#9 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 13 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
72
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
65
58
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1450
1700
1390
1620
1330
1530
6 7 8 9 10
1430 1420 1410 1410 1400
1670 1660 1650 1640 1630
1370 1360 1360 1350 1340
1590 1580 1570 1560 1550
1310 1300 1300 1290 1280
1510 1500 1490 1480 1470
11 12 13 14 15
1390 1380 1370 1350 1340
1620 1600 1590 1570 1550
1330 1320 1310 1300 1280
1540 1520 1510 1490 1480
1270 1260 1250 1240 1220
1460 1440 1430 1410 1390
16 17 18 19 20
1330 1310 1300 1280 1260
1530 1510 1490 1470 1450
1270 1260 1240 1220 1210
1460 1440 1420 1400 1370
1210 1200 1180 1170 1150
1380 1360 1340 1320 1300
22 24 26 28 30
1230 1190 1150 1110 1070
1400 1350 1300 1240 1190
1170 1140 1100 1060 1020
1330 1280 1230 1180 1120
1120 1080 1040 1000 962
1250 1210 1160 1110 1060
32 34 36 38 40
1020 979 934 889 843
1130 1070 1020 958 901
973 930 886 842 797
1070 1010 958 902 847
920 878 835 792 749
1000 949 896 843 790
445 302 197 197
577 380 197 197
410 264 183 183
530 328 183 183
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
483 325 211 211
629 409 211 211 6.00 1.00
6.00 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.00 1.00
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 83
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 18 in.×18 in. 4-#8 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 12 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 10
Wt./ft
112
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
100
88
77
68
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1620
2020
1520
1870
1420
1730
1330
1600
1250
1490
6 7 8 9 10
1600 1600 1590 1580 1570
1980 1970 1960 1950 1930
1500 1500 1490 1480 1470
1840 1830 1820 1810 1790
1400 1400 1390 1380 1370
1700 1690 1680 1670 1650
1310 1300 1300 1290 1280
1570 1560 1550 1540 1520
1230 1230 1220 1210 1200
1470 1460 1450 1430 1420
11 12 13 14 15
1560 1540 1530 1520 1500
1910 1890 1870 1850 1830
1460 1450 1430 1420 1400
1780 1760 1740 1720 1700
1360 1350 1340 1320 1310
1640 1620 1600 1580 1560
1270 1260 1240 1230 1220
1510 1490 1480 1460 1440
1190 1180 1170 1160 1150
1410 1390 1380 1360 1340
16 17 18 19 20
1480 1470 1450 1430 1410
1800 1780 1750 1720 1690
1390 1370 1360 1340 1320
1670 1650 1620 1600 1570
1290 1280 1260 1240 1230
1540 1520 1490 1470 1440
1200 1190 1170 1160 1140
1420 1400 1370 1350 1330
1130 1120 1100 1080 1070
1320 1300 1280 1260 1230
22 24 26 28 30
1370 1330 1280 1230 1180
1630 1570 1500 1430 1360
1280 1240 1190 1150 1100
1510 1450 1390 1320 1260
1190 1150 1110 1060 1020
1390 1330 1270 1210 1150
1100 1060 1020 981 939
1280 1220 1170 1110 1050
1030 996 957 917 876
1190 1130 1080 1030 973
32 34 36 38 40
1130 1080 1030 979 927
1290 1220 1150 1080 1000
1050 1000 955 905 856
1190 1120 1060 988 922
972 926 879 832 785
1090 1030 963 901 839
895 850 806 761 717
994 935 876 818 761
833 791 748 705 663
918 862 807 752 699
467 305 189 189
612 387 189 189
415 276 170 170
543 350 170 170
373 251 155 155
488 318 155 155
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
576 366 228 228 5.40 1.00
756 464 228 228
522 336 208 208 5.40 1.00
685 426 208 208
5.40 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.40 1.00
5.40 1.00
5 - 84
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
Y Size b × h
18 in.×18 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#8 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 12 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 10
Wt./ft
60
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
54
49
45
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1180
1390
1130
1320
1090
1260
1060
1220
6 7 8 9 10
1170 1160 1150 1140 1140
1370 1360 1350 1340 1330
1110 1110 1100 1090 1080
1300 1290 1280 1270 1260
1070 1070 1060 1050 1040
1240 1230 1220 1210 1200
1040 1040 1030 1020 1010
1200 1190 1180 1170 1160
11 12 13 14 15
1130 1120 1100 1090 1080
1310 1300 1280 1270 1250
1070 1060 1050 1040 1030
1240 1230 1210 1200 1180
1040 1020 1010 1000 989
1190 1170 1160 1140 1130
1000 994 983 971 958
1140 1130 1120 1100 1090
16 17 18 19 20
1060 1050 1040 1020 1000
1230 1210 1190 1170 1150
1010 1000 986 971 955
1160 1140 1120 1100 1080
976 962 947 932 917
1110 1090 1070 1050 1030
945 931 917 902 886
1070 1050 1030 1010 992
22 24 26 28 30
969 933 896 857 817
1100 1050 1000 952 900
921 886 849 811 772
1040 992 944 895 845
884 849 813 775 737
989 944 898 850 802
854 820 784 747 709
950 907 861 815 768
32 34 36 38 40
776 735 694 653 612
848 795 743 692 641
733 693 653 613 574
795 745 695 646 598
698 659 620 582 543
753 705 657 610 564
671 633 595 557 519
721 674 627 581 537
337 230 142 142
439 290 142 142
399 267 131 131
286 199 123 123
370 249 123 123
272 179 117 117
351 222 117 117
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
5.40 1.00
307 212 131 131 5.40 1.00
5.40 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.40 1.00
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 85
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 3.5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 16 in.×16 in. 4-#7 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 10 in. c. to c.
Designation
W8
Wt./ft
67
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
58
48
40
35
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1100
1330
1020
1230
938
1110
868
1010
828
951
6 7 8 9 10
1080 1070 1070 1060 1050
1310 1300 1290 1270 1260
1010 1000 992 984 975
1200 1190 1180 1170 1160
920 914 907 899 890
1080 1070 1060 1050 1040
851 845 839 831 822
985 977 968 957 946
811 805 799 791 783
929 921 912 902 891
11 12 13 14 15
1040 1030 1010 1000 988
1240 1230 1210 1190 1170
965 954 942 930 917
1140 1130 1110 1090 1080
881 870 859 847 834
1030 1010 997 981 963
813 803 792 780 768
933 920 905 890 874
773 763 753 741 729
879 866 852 837 822
16 17 18 19 20
973 958 943 926 909
1150 1130 1110 1080 1060
903 888 873 857 841
1060 1040 1010 992 970
821 807 793 778 762
945 927 907 887 866
755 742 728 713 698
857 839 821 802 782
717 703 690 675 661
805 788 770 752 733
22 24 26 28 30
874 836 798 758 717
1010 958 904 850 795
807 772 735 697 658
923 874 824 773 722
730 696 661 625 588
823 778 732 685 638
667 634 601 566 532
742 700 657 614 570
630 598 565 532 498
695 654 613 572 530
32 34 36 38 40
677 636 595 554 515
740 686 633 581 532
619 580 542 504 466
671 621 572 524 478
552 515 479 444 410
592 546 501 458 416
497 462 428 395 363
527 485 444 404 366
464 431 398 366 335
489 449 410 373 337
298 197 114 114
390 250 114 114
264 178 103 103
223 153 89.3 89.3
291 193 89.3 89.3
194 136 78.5 78.5
251 171 78.5 78.5
174 124 72.3 72.3
224 155 72.3 72.3
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
4.80 1.00
4.80 1.00
345 225 103 103
4.80 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4.80 1.00
4.80 1.00
5 - 86
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y X
h
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
X
Y 24 in.×26 in. 4-#11 bars
Ties
#4 bars spaced 16 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
426
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
398
370
342
311
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
5290
6770
5060
6450
4840
6130
4610
5810
4340
5430
6 7 8 9 10
5250 5240 5220 5210 5190
6720 6700 6670 6650 6620
5030 5020 5000 4990 4970
6400 6380 6360 6330 6300
4800 4790 4780 4760 4750
6080 6060 6040 6020 5990
4580 4570 4560 4540 4520
5760 5750 5730 5700 5680
4310 4300 4290 4270 4260
5380 5370 5350 5320 5300
11 12 13 14 15
5170 5150 5120 5100 5070
6580 6550 6510 6470 6430
4950 4930 4910 4880 4850
6270 6240 6200 6160 6120
4730 4710 4690 4660 4640
5960 5930 5890 5850 5810
4510 4490 4470 4440 4420
5650 5620 5580 5550 5510
4240 4220 4200 4180 4160
5270 5240 5210 5180 5140
16 17 18 19 20
5040 5010 4980 4950 4910
6380 6330 6280 6220 6170
4830 4800 4770 4730 4700
6070 6030 5980 5930 5870
4610 4580 4550 4520 4490
5770 5720 5680 5630 5570
4390 4360 4330 4300 4270
5470 5420 5380 5330 5280
4130 4100 4070 4050 4010
5100 5060 5010 4970 4920
22 24 26 28 30
4840 4760 4670 4580 4480
6050 5920 5780 5640 5490
4630 4550 4460 4380 4280
5760 5630 5500 5360 5220
4410 4340 4260 4170 4080
5460 5340 5220 5090 4950
4200 4130 4050 3970 3880
5170 5060 4940 4810 4680
3950 3880 3800 3720 3640
4820 4710 4600 4480 4350
32 34 36 38 40
4380 4280 4170 4060 3940
5330 5170 5000 4830 4660
4190 4080 3980 3870 3760
5060 4910 4750 4590 4420
3990 3890 3790 3680 3580
4800 4650 4500 4340 4180
3790 3690 3600 3500 3390
4540 4400 4250 4100 3950
3550 3460 3370 3270 3170
4220 4090 3950 3810 3660
3090 1850 1670 1420
4070 2380 1670 1420
2890 1750 1580 1340
2690 1640 1480 1260
3550 2120 1480 1260
2490 1540 1390 1180
3300 1980 1390 1180
2280 1420 1280 1090
3010 1830 1280 1090
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
7.20 1.08
3810 2250 1580 1340
7.20 1.08
7.20 1.08
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.20 1.08
7.20 1.08
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 87
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 24 in.×24 in. 4-#11 bars
Ties
#4 bars spaced 16 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
283
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
257
233
211
193
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
3990
4980
3780
4680
3580
4390
3400
4130
3250
3930
6 7 8 9 10
3970 3960 3940 3930 3920
4940 4920 4910 4890 4860
3750 3740 3730 3720 3700
4640 4620 4600 4580 4560
3550 3540 3530 3520 3500
4350 4340 4320 4300 4280
3370 3360 3350 3340 3320
4100 4080 4070 4050 4030
3220 3220 3200 3190 3180
3890 3880 3860 3840 3820
11 12 13 14 15
3900 3880 3860 3840 3820
4840 4810 4780 4750 4720
3690 3670 3650 3630 3610
4540 4510 4480 4450 4420
3490 3470 3450 3440 3410
4260 4230 4210 4180 4150
3310 3290 3280 3260 3240
4010 3980 3960 3930 3900
3160 3150 3130 3110 3090
3800 3780 3750 3730 3700
16 17 18 19 20
3800 3770 3750 3720 3690
4680 4640 4600 4560 4520
3590 3560 3540 3510 3480
4390 4350 4310 4270 4230
3390 3370 3340 3320 3290
4110 4080 4040 4010 3970
3210 3190 3170 3140 3120
3870 3830 3800 3760 3720
3070 3050 3030 3000 2980
3670 3640 3600 3570 3530
22 24 26 28 30
3630 3560 3490 3420 3340
4420 4320 4220 4110 3990
3420 3360 3290 3220 3150
4140 4050 3950 3840 3730
3230 3170 3110 3040 2970
3880 3790 3690 3590 3490
3060 3000 2940 2870 2800
3640 3560 3460 3370 3270
2920 2860 2800 2730 2670
3450 3370 3280 3190 3090
32 34 36 38 40
3260 3180 3090 3000 2910
3870 3750 3620 3490 3360
3070 2990 2900 2820 2730
3610 3500 3380 3250 3130
2890 2810 2730 2650 2560
3380 3270 3150 3030 2920
2730 2650 2570 2490 2410
3160 3060 2950 2830 2720
2590 2520 2440 2360 2290
2990 2890 2780 2670 2570
2020 1300 993 993
2680 1680 993 993
1850 1200 916 916
1690 1110 845 845
2230 1430 845 845
1540 1020 780 780
2040 1320 780 780
1420 949 728 728
1880 1220 728 728
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
7.20 1.00
2450 1550 916 916
7.20 1.00
7.20 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.20 1.00
7.20 1.00
5 - 88
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
Y Size b × h
24 in.×26 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 16 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
176
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
159
145
132
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
3080
3690
2930
3490
2820
3330
2710
3170
6 7 8 9 10
3050 3040 3030 3020 3010
3660 3640 3630 3610 3590
2910 2900 2890 2880 2870
3450 3440 3430 3410 3390
2800 2790 2780 2770 2750
3290 3280 3270 3250 3240
2690 2680 2670 2660 2650
3140 3130 3110 3100 3080
11 12 13 14 15
2990 2980 2960 2940 2920
3570 3550 3530 3500 3480
2850 2840 2820 2800 2780
3370 3350 3330 3310 3280
2740 2730 2710 2690 2670
3220 3200 3170 3150 3120
2630 2620 2600 2580 2570
3060 3040 3020 3000 2970
16 17 18 19 20
2900 2880 2860 2840 2810
3450 3420 3380 3350 3320
2760 2740 2720 2700 2670
3250 3220 3190 3160 3130
2650 2630 2610 2590 2560
3100 3070 3040 3010 2980
2550 2530 2500 2480 2460
2950 2920 2890 2860 2830
22 24 26 28 30
2760 2700 2640 2580 2510
3240 3160 3080 2990 2900
2620 2570 2510 2450 2380
3050 2980 2900 2810 2720
2510 2460 2400 2340 2280
2910 2830 2750 2670 2590
2410 2350 2300 2240 2180
2760 2690 2620 2540 2450
32 34 36 38 40
2450 2370 2300 2230 2150
2800 2710 2610 2510 2400
2320 2250 2170 2100 2030
2630 2540 2440 2350 2250
2210 2140 2070 2000 1930
2500 2410 2320 2220 2130
2110 2040 1980 1910 1830
2370 2280 2190 2100 2010
1280 860 678 678
1700 1110 678 678
1550 1020 627 627
1080 734 587 587
1430 950 587 587
996 670 547 547
1320 861 547 547
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
7.20 1.00
1170 789 627 627 7.20 1.00
7.20 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.20 1.00
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 89
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
h
X
X
Y Size b × h
22 in.×22 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 14 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
120
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
109
99
90
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
2380
2800
2290
2670
2200
2550
2130
2450
6 7 8 9 10
2350 2340 2330 2320 2310
2760 2750 2740 2720 2700
2260 2250 2240 2230 2220
2630 2620 2610 2590 2580
2180 2170 2160 2150 2140
2520 2510 2490 2480 2460
2110 2100 2090 2080 2070
2410 2400 2390 2380 2360
11 12 13 14 15
2300 2280 2270 2250 2230
2690 2670 2640 2620 2590
2200 2190 2170 2160 2140
2560 2540 2520 2490 2470
2120 2110 2090 2080 2060
2440 2420 2400 2380 2360
2050 2040 2020 2000 1990
2340 2320 2300 2280 2260
16 17 18 19 20
2210 2190 2170 2140 2120
2570 2540 2510 2480 2440
2120 2100 2080 2050 2030
2440 2410 2380 2350 2320
2040 2020 2000 1970 1950
2330 2300 2270 2250 2210
1970 1950 1920 1900 1880
2230 2200 2180 2150 2120
22 24 26 28 30
2070 2020 1960 1900 1840
2380 2300 2230 2150 2070
1980 1930 1870 1810 1750
2260 2190 2110 2030 1950
1900 1850 1790 1740 1680
2150 2080 2010 1930 1860
1830 1780 1720 1670 1610
2050 1990 1920 1840 1770
32 34 36 38 40
1770 1710 1640 1570 1500
1980 1890 1810 1720 1630
1690 1620 1560 1490 1420
1870 1790 1710 1620 1540
1610 1550 1490 1420 1350
1780 1700 1620 1530 1450
1550 1480 1420 1350 1290
1690 1610 1530 1450 1380
883 586 409 409
1160 752 409 409
1070 695 381 381
748 507 357 357
982 647 357 357
691 472 335 335
905 600 335 335
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
6.60 1.00
811 543 381 381 6.60 1.00
6.60 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.60 1.00
5 - 90
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
Y Size b × h
18 in.×22 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#9 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 12 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
82
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
74
68
61
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1810
2090
1740
2000
1690
1930
1630
1850
6 7 8 9 10
1780 1770 1760 1740 1730
2050 2040 2020 2010 1990
1710 1700 1690 1680 1660
1960 1950 1930 1920 1900
1660 1650 1640 1630 1610
1890 1880 1860 1850 1830
1600 1590 1580 1570 1550
1810 1800 1780 1760 1740
11 12 13 14 15
1710 1690 1670 1650 1630
1960 1940 1920 1890 1860
1650 1630 1610 1590 1570
1880 1850 1830 1800 1770
1600 1580 1560 1540 1520
1810 1780 1760 1730 1710
1540 1520 1500 1480 1460
1720 1700 1680 1650 1630
16 17 18 19 20
1610 1590 1560 1530 1510
1830 1800 1770 1730 1700
1550 1520 1500 1470 1450
1740 1710 1680 1650 1620
1500 1470 1450 1420 1400
1680 1650 1620 1580 1550
1440 1410 1390 1360 1340
1600 1570 1540 1510 1470
22 24 26 28 30
1450 1390 1330 1270 1200
1620 1550 1470 1390 1310
1390 1330 1270 1210 1140
1540 1470 1390 1310 1240
1340 1280 1220 1160 1100
1480 1410 1330 1260 1180
1280 1230 1170 1110 1040
1410 1340 1260 1190 1110
32 34 36 38 40
1140 1070 1010 941 877
1220 1140 1060 983 906
1080 1020 952 888 826
1160 1080 999 923 849
1040 972 909 847 786
1100 1030 950 876 805
982 920 858 797 738
1040 965 892 821 752
634 328 294 197
830 416 294 197
761 384 275 184
543 285 260 174
708 360 260 174
496 264 242 162
644 332 242 162
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
5.40 1.22
582 303 275 184 5.40 1.22
5.40 1.22
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.40 1.22
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 91
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 22 in.×24 in. 4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 14 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
336
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
305
279
252
230
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
4270
5450
4010
5080
3800
4770
3580
4460
3400
4200
6 7 8 9 10
4240 4230 4210 4200 4180
5390 5370 5350 5320 5300
3980 3970 3960 3940 3920
5030 5010 4990 4960 4940
3770 3750 3740 3730 3710
4720 4700 4680 4660 4640
3550 3540 3520 3510 3490
4410 4400 4380 4350 4330
3370 3360 3350 3330 3320
4160 4140 4120 4100 4080
11 12 13 14 15
4160 4140 4110 4090 4060
5260 5230 5190 5150 5110
3900 3880 3860 3840 3810
4910 4870 4840 4800 4760
3690 3670 3650 3630 3610
4610 4580 4540 4510 4470
3480 3460 3440 3420 3390
4300 4270 4240 4210 4170
3300 3280 3260 3240 3220
4050 4030 4000 3960 3930
16 17 18 19 20
4040 4010 3980 3940 3910
5070 5020 4970 4920 4870
3790 3760 3730 3700 3670
4720 4680 4630 4580 4530
3580 3550 3520 3490 3460
4430 4390 4340 4300 4250
3370 3340 3310 3290 3260
4140 4100 4050 4010 3960
3190 3170 3140 3110 3090
3890 3860 3820 3770 3730
22 24 26 28 30
3840 3760 3680 3590 3500
4750 4630 4500 4370 4230
3600 3520 3450 3360 3280
4420 4310 4190 4060 3930
3400 3320 3250 3170 3090
4150 4040 3920 3800 3680
3190 3120 3050 2970 2890
3870 3760 3650 3540 3420
3020 2960 2890 2810 2730
3640 3540 3430 3320 3210
32 34 36 38 40
3410 3310 3210 3110 3000
4080 3930 3780 3630 3470
3190 3090 3000 2900 2800
3790 3650 3510 3360 3220
3000 2910 2820 2720 2630
3550 3410 3280 3140 3000
2810 2720 2630 2540 2450
3300 3170 3040 2910 2780
2650 2570 2480 2400 2310
3090 2970 2850 2730 2600
2190 1260 1140 954
2890 1600 1140 954
1990 1150 1040 877
1830 1080 966 812
2410 1380 966 812
1660 990 888 746
2190 1270 888 746
1530 919 824 692
2010 1180 824 692
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
6.60 1.09
2630 1480 1040 877
6.60 1.09
6.60 1.09
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.60 1.09
6.60 1.09
5 - 92
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y X
h
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
X
Y 20 in.×22 in. 4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 13 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
210
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
190
170
152
136
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
3010
3740
2840
3500
2680
3270
2530
3060
2390
2870
6 7 8 9 10
2980 2970 2950 2940 2920
3700 3680 3660 3640 3610
2810 2800 2790 2770 2760
3460 3440 3420 3400 3380
2650 2640 2630 2610 2600
3230 3210 3200 3180 3150
2500 2490 2480 2470 2450
3020 3000 2990 2970 2950
2370 2360 2340 2330 2320
2830 2810 2800 2780 2760
11 12 13 14 15
2910 2890 2870 2840 2820
3590 3560 3520 3490 3450
2740 2720 2700 2680 2660
3350 3320 3290 3260 3230
2580 2560 2540 2520 2500
3130 3100 3070 3040 3010
2430 2420 2400 2380 2360
2920 2900 2870 2840 2810
2300 2280 2270 2250 2220
2740 2710 2690 2660 2630
16 17 18 19 20
2790 2770 2740 2710 2680
3420 3380 3330 3290 3240
2630 2610 2580 2550 2520
3190 3150 3110 3070 3030
2480 2450 2430 2400 2370
2970 2940 2900 2860 2820
2330 2310 2280 2260 2230
2780 2740 2700 2670 2630
2200 2180 2150 2130 2100
2600 2560 2530 2490 2450
22 24 26 28 30
2620 2550 2480 2400 2320
3150 3040 2940 2830 2710
2460 2390 2320 2250 2180
2940 2840 2740 2630 2520
2310 2250 2180 2110 2030
2730 2640 2540 2440 2340
2170 2110 2040 1970 1900
2540 2460 2360 2270 2170
2040 1980 1920 1850 1780
2370 2290 2200 2110 2020
32 34 36 38 40
2240 2160 2070 1980 1900
2590 2470 2350 2230 2110
2100 2020 1930 1850 1770
2410 2300 2180 2070 1950
1960 1880 1800 1720 1640
2230 2130 2020 1910 1800
1830 1760 1680 1600 1530
2070 1970 1870 1760 1660
1710 1640 1570 1490 1420
1920 1830 1730 1630 1530
1350 796 622 514
1770 1020 622 514
1230 734 572 472
1110 671 523 432
1460 860 523 432
1010 614 478 395
1320 787 478 395
910 563 438 362
1190 721 438 362
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
6.00 1.10
1610 941 572 472
6.00 1.10
6.00 1.10
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.00 1.10
6.00 1.10
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 93
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 20 in.×20 in. 4-#9 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 13 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
120
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
106
96
87
79
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
2130
2550
2020
2390
1930
2270
1860
2160
1790
2070
6 7 8 9 10
2110 2100 2090 2080 2060
2520 2500 2490 2470 2450
1990 1980 1970 1960 1950
2350 2340 2330 2310 2290
1910 1900 1890 1880 1870
2230 2220 2210 2190 2180
1830 1830 1820 1810 1790
2130 2120 2110 2090 2070
1770 1760 1750 1740 1730
2040 2020 2010 2000 1980
11 12 13 14 15
2050 2030 2020 2000 1980
2430 2410 2390 2360 2340
1930 1920 1900 1890 1870
2270 2250 2230 2210 2180
1850 1840 1820 1800 1790
2160 2140 2120 2090 2070
1780 1760 1750 1730 1710
2060 2040 2020 1990 1970
1710 1700 1680 1670 1650
1960 1940 1920 1900 1880
16 17 18 19 20
1960 1940 1920 1890 1870
2310 2280 2250 2220 2180
1850 1830 1810 1780 1760
2150 2130 2100 2070 2030
1770 1750 1730 1700 1680
2040 2010 1990 1960 1920
1700 1680 1650 1630 1610
1940 1920 1890 1860 1830
1630 1610 1590 1570 1540
1850 1830 1800 1770 1740
22 24 26 28 30
1820 1770 1710 1650 1590
2110 2040 1960 1880 1800
1710 1660 1600 1550 1490
1970 1890 1820 1740 1660
1630 1580 1530 1470 1410
1860 1790 1720 1640 1570
1560 1510 1460 1400 1340
1770 1700 1630 1560 1480
1500 1450 1390 1340 1280
1680 1620 1550 1480 1410
32 34 36 38 40
1530 1460 1400 1330 1260
1710 1620 1540 1450 1370
1430 1360 1300 1240 1170
1580 1500 1420 1340 1260
1350 1290 1230 1170 1100
1490 1410 1330 1250 1180
1290 1230 1170 1110 1040
1410 1330 1260 1180 1110
1220 1170 1110 1050 989
1330 1260 1190 1110 1040
760 489 322 322
1000 628 322 322
680 440 294 294
622 407 273 273
820 522 273 273
573 380 255 255
754 486 255 255
528 353 238 238
693 450 238 238
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
6.00 1.00
6.00 1.00
899 566 294 294
6.00 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.00 1.00
6.00 1.00
5 - 94
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
X
Y Size b × h
20 in.×20 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#9 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 13 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
72
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
65
58
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1730
1980
1680
1900
1620
1820
6 7 8 9 10
1710 1700 1690 1680 1670
1950 1940 1930 1910 1900
1650 1640 1630 1620 1610
1870 1860 1850 1840 1820
1590 1590 1580 1560 1550
1790 1780 1770 1750 1740
11 12 13 14 15
1650 1640 1620 1610 1590
1880 1860 1840 1820 1800
1600 1580 1570 1550 1530
1800 1780 1760 1740 1720
1540 1520 1510 1490 1480
1720 1700 1680 1660 1640
16 17 18 19 20
1570 1550 1530 1510 1490
1770 1750 1720 1690 1660
1520 1500 1480 1450 1430
1700 1670 1650 1620 1590
1460 1440 1420 1400 1370
1620 1590 1570 1540 1510
22 24 26 28 30
1440 1390 1340 1280 1230
1600 1540 1480 1410 1340
1380 1340 1280 1230 1180
1530 1470 1410 1340 1270
1330 1280 1230 1170 1120
1460 1400 1330 1270 1200
32 34 36 38 40
1170 1110 1060 997 939
1270 1200 1120 1050 984
1120 1060 1000 948 891
1200 1130 1060 996 929
1060 1010 951 895 840
1140 1070 1000 935 871
449 307 209 209
586 388 209 209
414 268 195 195
537 335 195 195
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
489 330 223 223
640 419 223 223 6.00 1.00
6.00 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.00 1.00
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 95
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 18 in.×18 in. 4-#8 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 12 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 10
Wt./ft
112
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
100
88
77
68
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1840
2240
1750
2100
1650
1960
1560
1820
1480
1720
6 7 8 9 10
1820 1810 1800 1790 1770
2200 2190 2170 2150 2130
1720 1710 1700 1690 1680
2060 2050 2030 2020 2000
1620 1610 1600 1590 1580
1920 1910 1900 1880 1860
1530 1520 1510 1500 1490
1790 1780 1770 1750 1730
1460 1450 1440 1430 1420
1690 1680 1660 1650 1630
11 12 13 14 15
1760 1740 1730 1710 1690
2110 2090 2070 2040 2010
1660 1650 1630 1610 1600
1980 1960 1930 1910 1880
1570 1550 1540 1520 1500
1840 1820 1800 1780 1750
1480 1460 1450 1430 1410
1720 1700 1670 1650 1630
1400 1390 1370 1360 1340
1620 1600 1580 1550 1530
16 17 18 19 20
1670 1650 1630 1600 1580
1980 1950 1920 1890 1850
1580 1560 1530 1510 1490
1850 1830 1790 1760 1730
1480 1460 1440 1420 1400
1720 1700 1670 1640 1610
1390 1370 1350 1330 1310
1600 1580 1550 1520 1490
1320 1300 1280 1260 1240
1510 1480 1450 1430 1400
22 24 26 28 30
1530 1480 1420 1360 1300
1780 1710 1630 1550 1470
1440 1390 1330 1280 1220
1660 1590 1520 1440 1360
1350 1300 1250 1190 1140
1540 1470 1400 1330 1260
1260 1210 1160 1110 1050
1430 1360 1300 1230 1160
1190 1140 1090 1040 990
1340 1270 1210 1140 1080
32 34 36 38 40
1240 1180 1120 1060 995
1380 1300 1220 1140 1060
1160 1100 1040 982 923
1280 1210 1130 1050 975
1080 1020 963 906 850
1180 1110 1030 962 891
1000 944 889 834 779
1090 1020 946 878 811
936 883 829 776 723
1010 942 876 811 748
589 379 236 236
780 488 236 236
532 346 216 216
475 313 196 196
627 402 196 196
421 282 178 178
555 361 178 178
378 256 163 163
497 327 163 163
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
5.40 1.00
5.40 1.00
704 445 216 216
5.40 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.40 1.00
5.40 1.00
5 - 96
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
Y Size b × h
18 in.×18 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#8 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 12 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 10
Wt./ft
60
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
54
49
45
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1420
1620
1360
1550
1330
1500
1290
1450
6 7 8 9 10
1390 1380 1370 1360 1350
1590 1580 1570 1560 1540
1340 1330 1320 1310 1300
1520 1510 1500 1490 1470
1300 1290 1280 1270 1260
1470 1460 1440 1430 1420
1270 1260 1250 1240 1230
1420 1410 1400 1390 1370
11 12 13 14 15
1340 1320 1310 1290 1270
1520 1500 1480 1460 1440
1290 1270 1260 1240 1220
1450 1430 1410 1390 1370
1250 1230 1220 1200 1190
1400 1380 1360 1340 1320
1220 1200 1190 1170 1150
1360 1340 1320 1300 1280
16 17 18 19 20
1260 1240 1220 1200 1170
1420 1390 1370 1340 1310
1210 1190 1170 1150 1120
1350 1320 1300 1270 1250
1170 1150 1130 1110 1090
1300 1270 1250 1220 1200
1140 1120 1100 1080 1060
1250 1230 1210 1180 1160
22 24 26 28 30
1130 1080 1030 981 929
1250 1190 1130 1070 1000
1080 1030 984 934 883
1190 1130 1070 1010 947
1040 995 947 897 847
1140 1080 1020 963 903
1010 965 917 868 818
1100 1040 987 927 868
32 34 36 38 40
877 825 772 721 670
938 874 811 749 689
832 781 729 679 630
884 822 761 702 644
796 746 695 646 598
842 782 723 665 609
768 718 668 620 572
808 749 692 636 581
341 234 149 149
446 297 149 149
405 272 139 139
288 201 131 131
375 254 131 131
275 182 125 125
356 227 125 125
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
5.40 1.00
310 215 139 139 5.40 1.00
5.40 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.40 1.00
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 97
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 5 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
X
h
X
Y 16 in.×16 in. 4-#7 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 10 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 18
Wt./ft
67
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
58
48
40
35
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1280
1510
1200
1410
1120
1290
1050
1190
1010
1140
6 7 8 9 10
1250 1250 1240 1220 1210
1480 1470 1450 1440 1420
1180 1170 1160 1150 1140
1380 1360 1350 1340 1320
1100 1090 1080 1070 1060
1260 1250 1230 1220 1200
1030 1020 1010 1000 990
1160 1150 1140 1130 1110
991 982 973 962 951
1110 1100 1090 1070 1060
11 12 13 14 15
1200 1180 1170 1150 1130
1400 1380 1360 1340 1310
1130 1110 1100 1080 1060
1300 1280 1260 1240 1220
1040 1030 1010 999 982
1190 1170 1150 1130 1110
977 963 948 932 916
1100 1080 1060 1040 1020
938 924 909 893 877
1040 1020 1010 986 965
16 17 18 19 20
1120 1100 1080 1060 1030
1290 1260 1230 1210 1180
1050 1030 1010 987 966
1190 1170 1140 1120 1090
964 946 927 907 886
1080 1060 1040 1010 984
898 880 861 841 821
996 973 949 925 900
859 841 822 803 783
944 922 898 875 850
22 24 26 28 30
989 942 894 844 794
1120 1050 990 926 861
922 876 829 781 733
1030 971 910 849 787
844 799 754 707 661
929 873 816 759 702
779 736 692 647 602
848 795 741 686 632
741 698 655 610 566
800 748 696 643 591
32 34 36 38 40
743 693 644 595 548
796 733 672 612 555
684 636 589 542 498
727 667 610 554 501
614 569 524 480 438
646 591 537 486 438
557 513 470 429 389
579 528 478 431 389
522 480 438 398 360
540 491 444 398 360
303 202 119 119
400 259 119 119
268 182 107 107
226 155 94.1 94.1
296 198 94.1 94.1
196 138 83.4 83.4
255 175 83.4 83.4
175 125 77.2 77.2
227 157 77.2 77.2
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
4.80 1.00
353 233 107 107 4.80 1.00
4.80 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4.80 1.00
4.80 1.00
5 - 98
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y X
h
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
X
Y 24 in.×26 in. 4-#11 bars
Ties
#4 bars spaced 16 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
426
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
398
370
342
311
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
6040
7530
5830
7220
5620
6910
5400
6610
5150
6240
6 7 8 9 10
6000 5980 5960 5940 5920
7460 7430 7410 7370 7340
5780 5770 5750 5730 5710
7150 7130 7100 7070 7040
5570 5560 5540 5520 5500
6850 6820 6800 6770 6730
5360 5350 5330 5310 5290
6540 6520 6490 6460 6430
5110 5090 5070 5060 5030
6180 6150 6130 6100 6070
11 12 13 14 15
5890 5870 5840 5800 5770
7300 7260 7210 7160 7110
5680 5660 5630 5590 5560
7000 6960 6910 6860 6810
5470 5450 5420 5390 5350
6700 6660 6610 6570 6520
5260 5240 5210 5180 5140
6400 6360 6310 6270 6220
5010 4980 4960 4930 4890
6030 6000 5960 5910 5860
16 17 18 19 20
5730 5690 5650 5610 5570
7050 6990 6930 6870 6800
5530 5490 5450 5410 5360
6760 6700 6640 6580 6510
5320 5280 5240 5200 5160
6460 6410 6350 6290 6230
5110 5070 5030 4990 4950
6170 6120 6060 6000 5940
4860 4820 4790 4750 4700
5820 5760 5710 5650 5590
22 24 26 28 30
5470 5370 5260 5150 5030
6660 6500 6340 6170 5990
5270 5170 5060 4950 4830
6370 6220 6070 5900 5730
5070 4970 4860 4750 4640
6090 5940 5790 5630 5460
4860 4770 4660 4550 4440
5810 5670 5520 5360 5200
4620 4520 4420 4310 4200
5460 5330 5190 5040 4880
32 34 36 38 40
4900 4770 4640 4500 4360
5800 5610 5420 5220 5010
4710 4580 4450 4320 4180
5550 5360 5170 4980 4780
4520 4390 4260 4130 4000
5290 5110 4920 4740 4550
4320 4200 4070 3940 3810
5030 4850 4680 4500 4310
4090 3970 3840 3720 3590
4720 4550 4380 4210 4030
3190 1940 1710 1460
4270 2550 1710 1460
2970 1830 1620 1380
2770 1710 1530 1300
3700 2260 1530 1300
2560 1600 1430 1220
3430 2100 1430 1220
2330 1470 1320 1130
3120 1930 1320 1130
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
7.20 1.08
3980 2410 1620 1380
7.20 1.08
7.20 1.08
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.20 1.08
7.20 1.08
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 99
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 24 in.×24 in. 4-#11 bars
Ties
#4 bars spaced 16 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
283
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
257
233
211
193
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
4740
5730
4530
5430
4350
5160
4170
4910
4040
4710
6 7 8 9 10
4700 4690 4670 4650 4630
5670 5650 5630 5600 5570
4500 4480 4470 4450 4430
5380 5360 5340 5310 5280
4310 4290 4280 4260 4240
5110 5090 5070 5040 5010
4140 4120 4110 4090 4070
4860 4840 4820 4790 4770
4000 3980 3970 3950 3930
4660 4640 4620 4600 4570
11 12 13 14 15
4610 4590 4560 4530 4500
5540 5510 5470 5430 5390
4410 4380 4360 4330 4300
5250 5220 5180 5140 5100
4220 4200 4170 4140 4110
4980 4950 4920 4880 4840
4050 4020 4000 3970 3940
4740 4710 4670 4630 4590
3910 3890 3860 3830 3810
4540 4510 4480 4440 4400
16 17 18 19 20
4470 4440 4400 4370 4330
5340 5290 5240 5190 5130
4270 4240 4200 4170 4130
5060 5010 4960 4910 4860
4080 4050 4020 3980 3940
4790 4750 4700 4650 4600
3910 3880 3850 3810 3770
4550 4510 4460 4410 4360
3780 3740 3710 3670 3640
4360 4320 4270 4220 4170
22 24 26 28 30
4250 4160 4060 3970 3860
5020 4890 4760 4620 4480
4050 3960 3870 3770 3670
4740 4620 4490 4360 4220
3860 3780 3690 3590 3490
4490 4370 4250 4120 3980
3690 3610 3520 3430 3330
4250 4140 4020 3890 3760
3560 3470 3380 3290 3190
4070 3960 3840 3710 3590
32 34 36 38 40
3760 3640 3530 3410 3300
4330 4170 4010 3850 3690
3570 3460 3340 3230 3110
4070 3930 3770 3620 3460
3390 3280 3170 3060 2950
3840 3700 3550 3400 3250
3220 3120 3010 2900 2790
3630 3490 3340 3200 3060
3090 2990 2880 2770 2660
3450 3320 3180 3040 2900
2070 1350 1030 1030
2770 1770 1030 1030
1890 1240 952 952
1720 1140 882 882
2300 1490 882 882
1570 1050 817 817
2090 1370 817 817
1440 972 765 765
1920 1270 765 765
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
7.20 1.00
2530 1620 952 952
7.20 1.00
7.20 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.20 1.00
7.20 1.00
5 - 100
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
Y Size b × h
24 in.×24 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 16 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
176
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
159
145
132
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
3870
4490
3730
4290
3630
4140
3520
3990
6 7 8 9 10
3830 3820 3800 3790 3770
4440 4420 4400 4370 4350
3700 3680 3670 3650 3630
4240 4220 4200 4180 4160
3590 3580 3560 3540 3530
4090 4070 4050 4030 4000
3490 3470 3460 3440 3420
3940 3920 3900 3880 3850
11 12 13 14 15
3750 3720 3700 3670 3640
4320 4290 4260 4220 4180
3610 3590 3560 3540 3510
4130 4100 4070 4030 3990
3500 3480 3460 3430 3400
3980 3950 3910 3880 3840
3400 3380 3350 3330 3300
3830 3800 3770 3730 3700
16 17 18 19 20
3610 3580 3550 3510 3480
4140 4100 4060 4010 3960
3480 3450 3410 3380 3340
3950 3910 3870 3820 3780
3370 3340 3310 3270 3240
3800 3760 3720 3680 3630
3270 3240 3200 3170 3130
3660 3620 3580 3530 3490
22 24 26 28 30
3400 3320 3230 3140 3040
3860 3750 3640 3520 3400
3270 3180 3100 3010 2910
3680 3570 3460 3340 3220
3160 3080 2990 2900 2800
3530 3430 3320 3200 3080
3050 2970 2880 2790 2700
3390 3290 3180 3070 2950
32 34 36 38 40
2950 2840 2740 2630 2530
3270 3140 3010 2870 2740
2810 2710 2610 2500 2400
3100 2970 2840 2710 2580
2710 2610 2500 2400 2300
2960 2840 2710 2580 2450
2600 2500 2400 2300 2190
2830 2710 2580 2460 2330
1300 879 716 716
1740 1150 716 716
1580 1050 665 665
1090 748 625 625
1450 975 625 625
1010 681 587 587
1340 884 587 587
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
7.20 1.00
1190 805 665 665 7.20 1.00
7.20 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.20 1.00
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 101
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
h
X
X
Y Size b × h
22 in.×22 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 14 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
120
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
109
99
90
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
3060
3480
2970
3350
2890
3240
2820
3140
6 7 8 9 10
3020 3010 2990 2970 2950
3430 3410 3390 3370 3340
2930 2920 2900 2880 2860
3300 3280 3260 3240 3220
2850 2840 2820 2810 2790
3190 3170 3150 3130 3110
2780 2770 2750 2740 2720
3090 3070 3050 3030 3010
11 12 13 14 15
2930 2910 2880 2860 2830
3320 3290 3250 3220 3180
2840 2820 2790 2770 2740
3190 3160 3130 3090 3060
2770 2740 2720 2690 2660
3080 3050 3020 2990 2950
2700 2670 2650 2620 2590
2980 2950 2920 2890 2850
16 17 18 19 20
2800 2770 2730 2700 2660
3140 3100 3060 3020 2970
2710 2680 2640 2610 2570
3020 2980 2940 2900 2850
2630 2600 2560 2530 2490
2910 2870 2830 2790 2740
2560 2530 2490 2460 2420
2810 2770 2730 2690 2650
22 24 26 28 30
2590 2510 2420 2330 2240
2870 2770 2670 2560 2440
2500 2420 2330 2240 2150
2750 2650 2550 2440 2330
2420 2340 2250 2160 2070
2650 2550 2450 2340 2230
2340 2260 2180 2090 2000
2550 2450 2350 2250 2140
32 34 36 38 40
2150 2050 1950 1860 1760
2330 2210 2090 1970 1850
2060 1960 1870 1770 1670
2220 2100 1980 1870 1760
1980 1880 1790 1690 1600
2120 2000 1890 1780 1670
1910 1810 1720 1620 1530
2030 1920 1810 1700 1590
894 597 436 436
1190 773 436 436
1080 712 409 409
755 514 385 385
996 661 385 385
697 478 363 363
917 612 363 363
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
6.60 1.00
819 551 409 409 6.60 1.00
6.60 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.60 1.00
5 - 102
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
Y Size b × h
18 in.×22 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#9 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 12 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 14
Wt./ft
82
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
74
68
61
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
2370
2660
2310
2570
2260
2500
2200
2420
6 7 8 9 10
2320 2310 2290 2270 2240
2600 2580 2550 2530 2500
2260 2240 2230 2200 2180
2510 2490 2470 2440 2410
2210 2200 2180 2160 2130
2440 2420 2400 2370 2340
2160 2140 2120 2100 2070
2360 2340 2320 2290 2260
11 12 13 14 15
2220 2190 2160 2130 2090
2470 2430 2390 2350 2310
2150 2130 2100 2060 2030
2380 2340 2310 2270 2230
2110 2080 2050 2010 1980
2310 2280 2240 2200 2160
2050 2020 1990 1960 1920
2230 2200 2160 2120 2080
16 17 18 19 20
2060 2020 1980 1940 1900
2270 2220 2180 2130 2080
1990 1960 1920 1880 1840
2180 2140 2090 2040 1990
1940 1910 1870 1830 1790
2120 2070 2020 1980 1930
1890 1850 1810 1770 1730
2040 1990 1950 1900 1850
22 24 26 28 30
1820 1730 1630 1540 1440
1970 1860 1750 1640 1520
1750 1660 1570 1480 1380
1890 1780 1670 1560 1450
1700 1610 1520 1430 1330
1820 1720 1610 1500 1390
1640 1550 1460 1360 1270
1750 1640 1540 1430 1320
32 34 36 38 40
1350 1250 1160 1070 983
1410 1300 1190 1090 989
1290 1190 1100 1010 926
1340 1230 1130 1030 929
1240 1140 1050 966 882
1280 1180 1080 977 882
1180 1090 998 911 827
1220 1110 1010 917 827
644 336 317 212
849 431 317 212
776 396 298 199
549 290 283 189
720 370 283 189
501 268 265 178
654 341 265 178
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
5.40 1.22
590 309 298 199 5.40 1.22
5.40 1.22
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.40 1.22
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 103
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 22 in.×24 in. 4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 14 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
336
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
305
279
252
230
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
4920
6100
4680
5740
4470
5450
4260
5150
4100
4900
6 7 8 9 10
4880 4860 4840 4820 4800
6030 6000 5980 5950 5910
4630 4620 4600 4580 4560
5680 5650 5630 5600 5570
4430 4410 4400 4380 4360
5380 5360 5340 5310 5270
4220 4210 4190 4170 4150
5090 5060 5040 5010 4980
4050 4040 4020 4000 3980
4840 4820 4800 4770 4740
11 12 13 14 15
4770 4750 4720 4690 4650
5870 5830 5790 5740 5690
4530 4510 4480 4450 4420
5530 5490 5450 5400 5350
4330 4310 4280 4250 4220
5240 5200 5160 5120 5070
4130 4100 4070 4040 4010
4950 4910 4870 4830 4780
3960 3930 3910 3880 3840
4710 4670 4630 4590 4540
16 17 18 19 20
4620 4580 4540 4500 4460
5640 5580 5520 5460 5390
4380 4340 4310 4260 4220
5300 5250 5190 5130 5070
4180 4140 4110 4070 4030
5020 4970 4910 4850 4790
3980 3940 3910 3870 3830
4730 4680 4630 4570 4510
3810 3780 3740 3700 3660
4500 4450 4400 4340 4290
22 24 26 28 30
4360 4270 4160 4050 3940
5260 5110 4960 4790 4630
4130 4040 3940 3830 3720
4930 4790 4650 4490 4330
3940 3840 3740 3640 3530
4670 4530 4390 4240 4080
3740 3650 3550 3450 3340
4390 4260 4120 3980 3830
3580 3480 3390 3290 3180
4170 4040 3910 3770 3620
32 34 36 38 40
3820 3700 3570 3440 3310
4450 4280 4100 3920 3730
3600 3480 3360 3240 3110
4170 4000 3830 3650 3480
3420 3300 3180 3060 2940
3920 3760 3600 3430 3260
3230 3120 3000 2880 2760
3680 3520 3370 3210 3050
3070 2960 2850 2730 2620
3480 3330 3170 3020 2870
2270 1320 1170 980
3030 1730 1170 980
2050 1210 1080 904
1880 1130 999 839
2510 1470 999 839
1710 1030 921 774
2280 1350 921 774
1570 954 857 720
2090 1250 857 720
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
6.60 1.09
2750 1580 1080 904
6.60 1.09
6.60 1.09
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.60 1.09
6.60 1.09
5 - 104
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y X
h
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
X
Y 20 in.×22 in. 4-#10 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 13 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
210
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
190
170
152
136
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
3580
4320
3420
4080
3270
3860
3130
3660
3000
3470
6 7 8 9 10
3540 3520 3500 3480 3460
4250 4230 4210 4180 4150
3380 3360 3350 3330 3310
4020 4000 3980 3950 3920
3230 3210 3190 3170 3150
3800 3780 3760 3730 3700
3080 3070 3050 3030 3010
3600 3580 3560 3530 3500
2960 2940 2930 2910 2880
3420 3400 3380 3350 3320
11 12 13 14 15
3440 3410 3380 3350 3320
4110 4070 4030 3990 3940
3280 3260 3230 3200 3170
3890 3850 3810 3770 3730
3130 3100 3080 3050 3010
3670 3630 3600 3560 3510
2990 2960 2940 2910 2880
3470 3440 3400 3360 3320
2860 2840 2810 2780 2750
3290 3260 3220 3180 3140
16 17 18 19 20
3290 3250 3220 3180 3140
3900 3850 3790 3740 3680
3130 3100 3060 3020 2980
3680 3630 3580 3520 3470
2980 2950 2910 2870 2830
3470 3420 3370 3320 3260
2840 2810 2770 2730 2690
3270 3230 3180 3130 3070
2720 2680 2650 2610 2570
3100 3050 3000 2950 2900
22 24 26 28 30
3050 2960 2860 2760 2660
3560 3430 3300 3160 3010
2900 2810 2710 2610 2510
3350 3230 3100 2960 2830
2750 2660 2570 2470 2370
3150 3030 2900 2770 2640
2610 2520 2430 2340 2240
2960 2850 2730 2600 2470
2490 2400 2310 2210 2120
2800 2680 2570 2440 2320
32 34 36 38 40
2550 2440 2330 2220 2110
2870 2720 2570 2430 2280
2410 2300 2190 2080 1980
2690 2540 2400 2260 2120
2270 2160 2060 1950 1850
2510 2370 2240 2100 1970
2140 2030 1930 1830 1730
2340 2210 2080 1950 1830
2020 1920 1820 1710 1610
2190 2070 1940 1820 1690
1380 828 645 533
1840 1080 645 533
1250 760 595 492
1130 692 546 452
1510 901 546 452
1020 631 502 415
1360 821 502 415
926 578 462 382
1230 749 462 382
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
6.00 1.10
1670 991 595 492
6.00 1.10
6.00 1.10
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.00 1.10
6.00 1.10
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 105
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 20 in.×20 in. 4-#9 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 13 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
120
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
106
96
87
79
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
2680
3100
2570
2950
2490
2830
2430
2730
2360
2640
6 7 8 9 10
2650 2630 2620 2600 2580
3050 3040 3010 2990 2970
2540 2520 2510 2490 2470
2900 2880 2860 2840 2810
2460 2440 2430 2410 2390
2780 2760 2740 2720 2700
2390 2370 2360 2340 2320
2680 2670 2650 2620 2600
2320 2310 2290 2280 2260
2590 2570 2550 2530 2510
11 12 13 14 15
2560 2540 2510 2490 2460
2940 2910 2880 2840 2800
2450 2430 2400 2380 2350
2780 2750 2720 2690 2650
2370 2350 2320 2300 2270
2670 2640 2610 2580 2540
2300 2280 2250 2230 2200
2570 2540 2510 2480 2440
2240 2210 2190 2160 2130
2480 2450 2420 2390 2350
16 17 18 19 20
2430 2400 2370 2330 2300
2770 2730 2680 2640 2590
2320 2290 2260 2220 2190
2610 2570 2530 2490 2450
2240 2210 2180 2140 2110
2500 2460 2420 2380 2340
2170 2140 2110 2070 2040
2410 2370 2330 2290 2240
2100 2070 2040 2010 1970
2320 2280 2240 2200 2150
22 24 26 28 30
2220 2140 2060 1980 1890
2500 2400 2290 2180 2070
2110 2040 1960 1870 1790
2350 2250 2150 2050 1940
2030 1960 1880 1790 1710
2240 2150 2050 1940 1840
1960 1890 1800 1720 1640
2150 2060 1960 1860 1750
1900 1820 1740 1660 1570
2060 1970 1870 1770 1670
32 34 36 38 40
1800 1710 1620 1530 1440
1960 1850 1730 1620 1510
1700 1610 1520 1430 1340
1830 1720 1610 1500 1400
1620 1530 1440 1360 1270
1730 1630 1520 1420 1320
1550 1460 1380 1290 1200
1650 1550 1440 1340 1240
1480 1400 1310 1230 1140
1570 1470 1370 1270 1170
773 501 340 340
1030 653 340 340
690 450 312 312
629 415 291 291
835 537 291 291
580 387 273 273
767 499 273 273
534 359 257 257
704 461 257 257
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
6.00 1.00
6.00 1.00
917 584 312 312
6.00 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.00 1.00
6.00 1.00
5 - 106
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
X
Y Size b × h
20 in.×20 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#9 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 13 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 12
Wt./ft
72
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
65
58
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
2310
2560
2250
2480
2200
2400
6 7 8 9 10
2270 2250 2240 2220 2200
2510 2490 2470 2450 2430
2210 2200 2180 2170 2150
2430 2420 2400 2380 2350
2160 2140 2130 2110 2090
2350 2340 2320 2290 2270
11 12 13 14 15
2180 2160 2130 2100 2080
2400 2370 2340 2310 2270
2120 2100 2080 2050 2020
2320 2300 2270 2230 2200
2070 2040 2020 1990 1960
2240 2220 2190 2150 2120
16 17 18 19 20
2050 2010 1980 1950 1910
2240 2200 2160 2120 2080
1990 1960 1920 1890 1860
2160 2130 2090 2040 2000
1930 1900 1870 1830 1790
2080 2050 2010 1970 1920
22 24 26 28 30
1840 1760 1680 1600 1510
1990 1900 1800 1700 1600
1780 1700 1620 1540 1450
1910 1820 1730 1630 1530
1720 1640 1560 1480 1390
1840 1750 1650 1560 1460
32 34 36 38 40
1430 1340 1260 1170 1090
1500 1400 1300 1210 1110
1370 1280 1200 1120 1040
1430 1340 1240 1150 1050
1310 1220 1140 1060 978
1360 1270 1170 1080 991
453 311 229 229
593 396 229 229
417 271 214 214
544 342 214 214
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
494 335 242 242
649 428 242 242 6.00 1.00
6.00 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.00 1.00
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 107
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
b Y X
h
X
Y 18 in.×18 in. 4-#8 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 12 in. c. to c.
Designation
W 10
Wt./ft
112
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
100
88
77
68
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
2280
2680
2190
2540
2100
2410
2010
2280
1940
2180
6 7 8 9 10
2250 2230 2220 2200 2180
2630 2610 2590 2560 2540
2160 2140 2130 2110 2090
2490 2470 2450 2430 2410
2060 2050 2030 2020 2000
2360 2340 2320 2300 2270
1970 1960 1950 1930 1910
2230 2220 2200 2170 2150
1910 1890 1880 1860 1840
2130 2120 2100 2080 2050
11 12 13 14 15
2160 2140 2120 2090 2060
2510 2480 2450 2410 2370
2070 2050 2020 2000 1970
2380 2350 2320 2280 2250
1980 1950 1930 1900 1880
2250 2220 2190 2150 2120
1890 1870 1840 1820 1790
2120 2090 2060 2030 2000
1820 1800 1770 1750 1720
2020 2000 1970 1930 1900
16 17 18 19 20
2030 2000 1970 1940 1900
2340 2290 2250 2210 2160
1940 1910 1880 1850 1810
2210 2170 2130 2080 2040
1850 1820 1790 1750 1720
2080 2040 2000 1960 1920
1760 1730 1700 1670 1630
1960 1920 1880 1840 1800
1690 1660 1630 1600 1560
1860 1830 1790 1750 1710
22 24 26 28 30
1830 1760 1680 1600 1520
2070 1970 1870 1760 1660
1740 1670 1590 1510 1430
1950 1850 1750 1650 1550
1650 1580 1500 1420 1340
1830 1730 1640 1540 1440
1560 1490 1410 1340 1260
1710 1620 1530 1430 1340
1490 1420 1340 1270 1190
1620 1530 1440 1350 1260
32 34 36 38 40
1430 1350 1270 1180 1100
1550 1450 1340 1240 1140
1350 1270 1190 1110 1030
1450 1350 1250 1150 1050
1260 1180 1100 1020 948
1340 1250 1150 1060 968
1180 1100 1020 946 872
1240 1150 1060 970 885
1110 1030 957 883 811
1160 1070 985 900 817
599 389 248 248
800 509 248 248
541 354 228 228
482 320 208 208
640 416 208 208
426 287 190 190
565 371 190 190
382 260 175 175
505 335 175 175
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
5.40 1.00
5.40 1.00
721 462 228 228
5.40 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.40 1.00
5.40 1.00
5 - 108
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
h
X
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
Y Size b × h
18 in.×18 in.
Reinf. bars
4-#8 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 12 in. c. to c.
Steel Shape
Designation
W 10
Wt./ft
60
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Fy
54
49
45
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1880
2090
1830
2020
1790
1970
1770
1920
6 7 8 9 10
1840 1830 1810 1790 1770
2040 2020 2010 1980 1960
1790 1780 1760 1750 1730
1970 1960 1940 1910 1890
1760 1740 1730 1710 1690
1920 1900 1880 1860 1840
1730 1710 1700 1680 1660
1880 1860 1840 1820 1800
11 12 13 14 15
1750 1730 1710 1680 1650
1930 1910 1880 1840 1810
1700 1680 1660 1630 1600
1870 1840 1810 1780 1740
1670 1640 1620 1590 1560
1810 1780 1750 1720 1690
1640 1610 1590 1560 1530
1770 1740 1710 1680 1650
16 17 18 19 20
1620 1590 1560 1530 1490
1770 1740 1700 1660 1620
1570 1540 1510 1480 1440
1710 1670 1630 1590 1550
1530 1500 1470 1440 1400
1650 1620 1580 1540 1500
1500 1470 1440 1410 1370
1610 1580 1540 1500 1460
22 24 26 28 30
1420 1350 1280 1200 1120
1540 1450 1360 1270 1180
1370 1300 1230 1150 1070
1470 1380 1300 1210 1120
1330 1260 1180 1110 1030
1420 1330 1250 1160 1070
1300 1230 1150 1080 1000
1380 1290 1210 1120 1040
32 34 36 38 40
1050 970 895 822 752
1090 1000 916 834 754
996 921 847 776 707
1030 946 863 784 707
956 882 809 739 671
987 903 822 743 671
925 851 779 709 642
951 868 788 711 642
344 237 162 162
452 304 162 162
410 277 152 152
290 204 144 144
379 258 144 144
277 184 138 138
361 231 138 138
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
5.40 1.00
313 217 152 152 5.40 1.00
5.40 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5.40 1.00
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—W SHAPES ENCASED IN CONCRETE
5 - 109
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
b Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS W Shapes fc′ = 8 ksi All reinforcing steel is Grade 60 Axial design strength in kips
X
h
X
Y 16 in.×16 in. 4-#7 bars
Ties
#3 bars spaced 10 in. c. to c.
Designation
W8
Wt./ft
67
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration rmy
Steel Shape
Size b × h Reinf. bars
58
48
40
35
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
36
50
0
1640
1870
1570
1770
1490
1650
1420
1560
1390
1510
6 7 8 9 10
1600 1590 1570 1550 1530
1820 1800 1790 1760 1740
1530 1520 1500 1480 1470
1720 1710 1690 1660 1640
1450 1440 1420 1400 1380
1610 1590 1570 1550 1530
1380 1370 1360 1340 1320
1520 1500 1480 1460 1440
1350 1330 1320 1300 1280
1460 1450 1430 1410 1380
11 12 13 14 15
1510 1490 1470 1440 1420
1710 1680 1650 1620 1590
1440 1420 1400 1370 1350
1620 1590 1560 1530 1490
1360 1340 1320 1290 1260
1500 1470 1450 1410 1380
1300 1270 1250 1220 1200
1410 1380 1360 1320 1290
1260 1240 1210 1180 1160
1360 1330 1300 1270 1240
16 17 18 19 20
1390 1360 1330 1300 1270
1550 1520 1480 1440 1400
1320 1290 1260 1230 1200
1460 1420 1380 1350 1310
1240 1210 1180 1150 1120
1350 1310 1280 1240 1200
1170 1140 1110 1080 1050
1260 1220 1190 1150 1120
1130 1100 1070 1040 1010
1210 1170 1140 1100 1060
22 24 26 28 30
1200 1130 1060 993 922
1310 1230 1140 1060 972
1130 1060 996 926 857
1230 1140 1060 977 895
1050 983 915 846 778
1120 1040 963 884 805
981 914 847 779 713
1040 961 883 807 731
940 873 806 739 673
989 912 836 761 687
32 34 36 38 40
852 784 717 653 590
888 806 729 654 590
789 722 657 595 537
815 737 663 595 537
712 648 586 526 475
729 656 586 526 475
648 586 525 471 425
659 589 525 471 425
609 548 490 439 397
617 549 490 439 397
307 206 127 127
408 268 127 127
272 186 115 115
228 157 102 102
300 202 102 102
197 140 91.3 91.3
258 178 91.3 91.3
177 127 85.1 85.1
230 160 85.1 85.1
Properties φ b M nx (kip-ft) φ b M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K xL x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K yL y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy (in./in.)
4.80 1.00
359 240 115 115 4.80 1.00
4.80 1.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4.80 1.00
4.80 1.00
5 - 110
COMPOSITE DESIGN
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING General Notes
Concentric load design strengths in the tables that follow are tabulated for the effective lengths KL in feet, shown at the left of each table. They are applicable to axially loaded members with respect to their minor axis in accordance with Section I2.2 of the LRFD Specification. The tables apply to normal-weight concrete. For discussion of the effective length, range of Kl / r strength about the major axis, combined axial and bending strength, and for sample problems, see Composite Columns, General Notes. The properties listed at the bottom of each table are for use in checking strength about the strong axis and in design for combined axial compression and bending. The heavy horizontal lines within the tables indicate Kl / r = 200. No values are listed beyond these lines. Steel Pipe Filled with Concrete
Design strengths for filled pipe are tabulated for Fy = 36 ksi and fc′ equal to 3.5 and 5 ksi. Steel pipe is manufactured to Fy = 36 ksi under ASTM A501 and to Fy = 35 ksi under ASTM A53 Types E or S, Grade B. Both are designed for 36 ksi yield stress. Structural Tubing Filled with Concrete
Design strengths for square and rectangular structural tubing filled with concrete are tabulated for Fy = 46 ksi and fc′ equal to 3.5 and 5 ksi. Structural tubing is manufactured to Fy = 46 ksi under ASTM A500, Grade B.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
5 - 111
Fy = 36 ksi
Nominal Diameter (in.)
12
10
8
Wall Thickness (in.)
0.500
0.375
0.500
0.365
0.875
0.500
0.322
Wt./ft
65.42
49.56
54.74
40.48
72.42
43.39
28.55
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Steel Pipe
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Steel pipe fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
36 ksi 0
862
733
681
564
746
507
384
6 7 8 9 10
847 842 836 829 822
720 716 711 705 698
665 660 653 646 638
550 545 540 534 527
718 708 697 684 671
489 482 475 467 458
370 365 359 353 346
11 12 13 14 15
814 805 796 786 775
691 684 675 667 658
629 620 610 599 587
520 512 503 494 485
656 640 623 606 588
448 438 427 415 403
338 330 322 313 304
16 17 18 19 20
764 752 739 727 713
648 638 627 616 604
576 563 550 537 523
475 464 454 442 431
569 549 529 509 488
390 377 364 351 337
294 284 274 264 254
22 24 26 28 30
686 656 626 595 563
580 555 529 502 475
495 466 436 406 376
407 383 358 333 308
447 405 365 325 288
309 281 254 228 202
232 211 191 170 151
32 34 36 38 40
531 499 467 436 405
448 420 393 366 339
347 318 290 263 237
284 260 236 214 193
253 224 200 179 162
178 158 141 126 114
133 118 105 94 85
3.63 142 51.0
3.67 106 41.4
2.76 143 34.8
2.88 89.2 24.5
2.94 60.0 18.3
Properties 4.33 203 89.8
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
4.38 155 75.1
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 112
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Nominal Diameter (in.)
6
5
4
Wall Thickness (in.)
0.864
0.432
0.280
0.750
0.375
0.258
0.674
0.337
0.237
Wt./ft
53.16
28.57
18.97
38.55
20.78
14.62
27.54
14.98
10.79
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Steel Pipe
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Steel pipe fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
36 ksi 0
525
323
244
379
233
182
268
164
129
6 7 8 9 10
491 479 466 451 436
303 297 289 281 271
229 224 218 212 205
344 332 319 305 290
213 206 199 191 182
167 161 156 149 142
230 218 205 191 176
143 136 129 121 112
113 107 102 95 89
11 12 13 14 15
419 401 383 364 345
262 252 241 230 219
197 190 182 173 165
274 258 241 225 208
173 163 154 144 134
135 128 120 112 105
162 147 132 118 105
104 95 87 78 70
82 75 69 62 56
16 17 18 19 20
326 306 287 268 249
207 196 184 173 161
156 147 139 130 121
191 175 160 145 131
124 114 105 96 87
97 89 82 75 68
92 82 73 65 59
62 55 49 44 40
49 44 39 35 32
22 24 26 28 30
213 180 153 132 115
139 119 101 87 76
105 89 76 66 57
108 91 77 67
72 60 51 44 39
56 47 40 35 30
49
33 28
26 22
32 34 36
101 90
67 59 53
50 45 40
1.72 47.3 6.99
1.84 27.3 4.66
1.88 19.6 3.65
1.37 26.9 3.15
1.48 15.8 2.15
1.51 11.6 1.70
Properties 2.06 78.0 13.9
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
2.19 44.8 9.13
2.25 30.5 6.92
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
5 - 113
Fy = 36 ksi
Nominal Diameter (in.)
12
10
8
Wall Thickness (in.)
0.500
0.375
0.500
0.365
0.875
0.500
0.322
Wt./ft
65.42
49.56
54.74
40.48
72.42
43.39
28.55
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Steel Pipe
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Steel pipe fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
36 ksi 0
979
855
762
649
786
557
438
6 7 8 9 10
961 955 947 939 930
839 833 827 819 811
743 736 728 720 710
632 626 619 611 603
755 745 732 719 704
535 528 519 510 499
420 414 407 399 391
11 12 13 14 15
920 909 897 885 872
802 792 781 770 758
699 688 676 663 649
594 584 573 562 550
688 671 653 633 614
488 476 463 449 435
382 372 361 351 339
16 17 18 19 20
858 844 828 813 797
746 733 719 705 691
635 620 605 589 573
537 524 511 497 483
593 572 550 528 506
421 406 391 375 360
327 315 303 291 278
22 24 26 28 30
763 727 691 653 615
660 628 596 562 528
540 505 471 436 401
454 424 394 364 334
461 417 374 332 292
328 297 266 236 208
253 228 203 180 158
32 34 36 38 40
577 539 502 465 429
495 461 428 395 363
367 334 302 272 245
305 276 249 224 202
256 227 203 182 164
183 162 145 130 117
139 123 109 98.2 88.7
3.63 142 52.7
3.67 106 43.2
2.76 143 35.3
2.88 89.2 25.2
2.94 60.0 19.1
Properties 4.33 203 93.3
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
4.38 155 78.9
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 114
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 36 ksi
Nominal Diameter (in.)
6
5
4
Wall Thickness (in.)
0.864
0.432
0.280
0.750
0.375
0.258
0.674
0.337
0.237
Wt./ft
53.16
28.57
18.97
38.55
20.78
14.62
27.54
14.98
10.79
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Steel Pipe
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Steel pipe fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
36 ksi 0
545
351
275
393
253
204
276
176
143
6 7 8 9 10
509 496 482 467 450
329 321 312 302 292
257 251 244 236 228
356 343 330 315 299
230 222 214 204 195
185 179 172 164 156
237 224 210 196 180
153 145 137 128 118
124 117 110 103 96
11 12 13 14 15
432 414 394 374 354
281 269 257 245 232
219 209 200 190 180
282 265 247 230 212
184 173 162 151 140
148 139 130 121 112
165 149 134 120 106
109 99 90 81 72
88 80 72 65 58
16 17 18 19 20
334 313 293 273 253
219 206 193 180 168
169 159 149 139 129
195 178 162 146 132
129 119 108 98 89
103 94 86 78 70
93 82 74 66 60
64 56 50 45 41
51 45 40 36 33
22 24 26 28 30
216 181 155 133 116
144 121 104 89 78
110 93 79 68 59
109 92 78 67
73 62 53 45 40
58 49 42 36
49
34 28
27
32 34 36
102 90
68 61 54
52 46
1.84 27.3 4.77
1.88 19.6 3.78
1.48 15.8 2.19
1.51 11.6 1.75
23
31
41
Properties 2.06 78.0 14.0
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
2.19 44.8 9.35
2.25 30.5 7.18
1.72 47.3 7.06
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.37 26.9 3.18
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
5 - 115
Fy = 46 ksi
Steel Tube
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips Nominal Size
16× ×16
Thickness (in.)
1⁄ 2
1⁄ 2
14× ×14 3⁄ 8
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
12× ×12 3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
Wt./ft
103.30
89.68
68.31
93.34
76.07
58.10
48.86
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi 0
1760
1460
1230
1360
1180
988
890
6 7 8 9 10
1740 1730 1730 1720 1710
1440 1430 1430 1420 1410
1210 1210 1200 1190 1190
1340 1330 1320 1310 1300
1160 1150 1150 1140 1130
971 965 958 950 942
875 869 863 856 848
11 12 13 14 15
1700 1690 1680 1670 1650
1400 1390 1370 1360 1350
1180 1170 1160 1150 1140
1280 1270 1250 1240 1220
1110 1100 1090 1070 1060
932 922 911 899 887
839 830 820 810 798
16 17 18 19 20
1640 1620 1610 1590 1580
1330 1320 1300 1280 1270
1120 1110 1100 1080 1070
1200 1180 1160 1140 1120
1040 1030 1010 992 973
874 860 845 830 815
786 774 761 747 734
22 24 26 28 30
1540 1500 1460 1420 1380
1230 1190 1150 1110 1060
1040 1000 968 931 894
1080 1030 979 928 877
934 894 852 808 764
783 749 713 677 640
704 674 642 609 576
32 34 36 38 40
1330 1280 1240 1190 1140
1020 969 922 875 828
855 816 777 737 697
826 774 723 672 623
720 675 631 587 544
603 566 529 493 457
543 509 476 443 411
4.60 400 137
4.66 329 120
4.72 255 101
4.75 216 90.7
Properties rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
6.29 604 319
5.48 455 203
5.54 352 171
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 116
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
10× ×10
Nominal Size
8× ×8
Thickness (in.)
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄
Wt./ft
76.33
62.46
47.90
40.35
32.63
59.32
48.85
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Steel Tube
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
16
1⁄ 4
37.69
31.84
25.82
8
5⁄
46 ksi 0
1070
924
767
687
603
795
686
567
503
439
6 7 8 9 10
1040 1030 1020 1010 995
900 892 883 872 861
748 742 734 725 716
670 664 657 650 641
588 583 577 570 562
762 751 738 724 708
659 650 639 627 614
545 537 528 519 508
484 477 470 461 452
422 416 409 402 394
11 12 13 14 15
980 964 947 929 909
848 835 820 805 788
705 694 682 669 656
632 622 611 600 588
554 545 536 526 515
691 673 654 634 613
600 584 568 551 534
496 484 471 457 443
441 431 419 407 394
385 376 365 355 344
16 17 18 19 20
889 869 847 825 802
771 754 735 716 697
642 627 612 597 581
575 562 549 535 520
504 493 481 469 456
591 569 546 524 501
516 497 478 459 439
428 413 398 382 366
381 368 354 340 326
333 321 309 297 285
22 24 26 28 30
755 707 658 609 560
657 616 574 532 490
548 514 479 445 410
491 460 430 398 368
430 403 376 349 322
454 408 364 321 280
400 361 323 286 251
334 302 271 241 212
298 269 242 215 189
260 235 211 188 165
32 34 36 38 40
513 466 422 379 342
449 409 371 333 301
376 343 311 280 253
337 308 279 251 227
295 269 244 220 198
246 218 195 175 158
220 195 174 156 141
186 165 147 132 119
166 147 131 118 106
145 129 115 103 93
3.12 92.1 22.8
3.15 75.6 20.0
Properties rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
3.78 3.84 3.90 3.93 3.96 2.96 3.03 3.09 268 223 174 148 120 163 137 108 73.4 64.6 54.3 48.7 42.6 33.9 30.3 25.5
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
5 - 117
Fy = 46 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips 7× ×7
Steel Tube
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
5⁄
Wt./ft
50.81
1⁄
8
2
42.05
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
32.58
27.59
22.42
17.08
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi 0
667
575
473
420
364
307
6 7 8 9 10
631 618 604 588 571
545 535 523 510 496
449 441 431 421 410
399 391 383 374 364
346 340 333 325 316
292 287 281 274 267
11 12 13 14 15
553 534 514 493 471
481 465 448 430 412
397 384 371 357 342
353 342 330 317 305
307 297 287 276 265
259 250 242 233 223
16 17 18 19 20
449 427 405 382 360
394 375 356 337 318
327 312 297 281 266
291 278 265 251 237
254 242 230 219 207
214 204 194 184 174
22 24 26 28 30
316 274 235 202 176
281 245 211 182 158
236 206 178 154 134
211 185 160 138 120
184 161 140 120 105
155 136 118 101 88
32 34 36 38 40
155 137 122 110 99
139 123 110 99 89
118 104 93 84 75
106 94 83 75 68
92 82 73 65 59
78 69 61 55 50
2.68 81.1 16.2
2.71 69.3 14.5
2.74 56.9 12.7
2.77 43.8 10.7
Properties 2.56 120 21.3
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
2.62 102 19.1
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 118
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips 6× ×6
Steel Tube
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄
4
3⁄ 16
Wt./ft
42.30
35.24
27.48
23.34
19.02
14.53
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi 0
542
469
385
341
295
247
6 7 8 9 10
502 488 472 455 436
436 424 411 397 382
359 350 339 328 316
318 310 301 291 280
275 268 261 252 243
230 225 218 211 204
11 12 13 14 15
417 397 376 354 333
365 348 331 313 295
303 289 275 261 246
269 257 245 232 220
233 223 213 202 191
196 187 178 169 160
16 17 18 19 20
311 290 268 248 228
276 258 240 222 205
232 217 202 188 174
207 194 181 168 156
180 169 157 147 136
151 141 132 123 114
22 24 26 28 30
189 159 136 117 102
172 145 123 106 93
147 123 105 91 79
132 111 95 82 71
116 97 83 71 62
97 82 70 60 52
32 34
90 79
81 72
69 62
62 55
55 48
46 41
64
55
36 38
49
43
36
44
39
33
2.30 49.7 8.58
2.33 41.1 7.50
2.36 31.9 6.30
Properties 2.15 83.9 12.3
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
2.21 72.1 11.2
2.27 58.0 9.54
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
5 - 119
Fy = 46 ksi
51⁄2×51⁄2
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
Wt./ft
24.93
21.21
17.32
5× ×5 3⁄
16
13.25
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Steel Tube
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
1⁄ 8
1⁄
2
3⁄ 8
9.01
28.43
5⁄
16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
22.37
19.08
15.62
11.97
46 ksi 0
343
304
262
219
173
367
303
268
231
192
6 7 8 9 10
315 305 294 283 270
279 271 261 251 240
241 234 226 217 208
201 195 189 182 174
159 155 149 144 137
328 315 301 286 269
272 262 251 239 226
241 232 223 212 201
208 201 193 184 174
173 167 160 153 145
11 12 13 14 15
257 243 229 215 200
229 217 204 192 179
198 188 177 167 156
166 157 148 139 130
131 124 117 110 103
252 235 218 200 183
212 198 184 170 156
189 177 165 152 140
164 154 143 133 122
137 128 120 111 102
16 17 18 19 20
186 172 158 145 132
167 154 142 130 119
145 134 124 114 104
121 113 104 95 87
96 89 82 75 69
166 150 134 121 109
143 130 117 105 95
128 117 106 95 86
112 102 93 83 75
94 86 78 70 63
22 24 26 28 30
109 91 78 67 59
98 82 70 61 53
86 72 62 53 46
72 61 52 45 39
57 48 41 35 31
90 76 64 56 48
78 66 56 48 42
71 59 51 44 38
62 52 44 38 33
52 44 37 32 28
32 34 36
51 46
46 41
41 36
34 30
27 24 21
29
25
1.92 27.8 4.03
1.95 21.7 3.39
Properties rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
2.07 47.7 7.07
2.10 41.2 6.37
2.13 34.2 5.58
2.16 26.5 4.69
2.19 18.3 3.69
1.80 47.3 5.84
1.86 38.6 5.08
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.89 33.5 4.59
5 - 120
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips 41⁄2×41⁄2
Steel Tube
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
3⁄ 8
Wt./ft
19.82
5⁄
16.96
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
1⁄
16
4
13.91
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
10.70
7.31
46 ksi 0
263
233
200
166
130
6 7 8 9 10
230 220 208 195 182
204 195 185 174 163
177 169 160 151 141
147 140 133 126 118
115 110 104 98 92
11 12 13 14 15
168 155 141 128 115
151 139 127 115 104
131 121 111 101 91
109 101 93 84 76
86 79 73 66 60
16 17 18 19 20
102 91 81 73 66
93 83 74 66 60
82 73 65 58 53
69 61 55 49 44
54 48 43 38 35
22 24 26 28
54 46 39
49 41 35 30
43 36 31 27
37 31 26 23
29 24 21 18
1.69 26.5 3.20
1.72 22.2 2.82
1.75 17.4 2.37
1.78 12.1 1.86
Properties 1.66 30.4 3.52
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
5 - 121
Fy = 46 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips 4× ×4
Steel Tube
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
1⁄
Wt./ft
21.63
2
3⁄
8
17.27
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
14.83
12.21
9.42
6.46
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi 0
271
225
199
171
141
110
6 7 8 9 10
225 211 195 179 162
189 178 166 153 140
169 159 148 137 125
146 137 128 119 109
121 114 107 99 91
94 89 83 77 71
11 12 13 14 15
145 129 114 99 86
126 113 100 88 77
114 102 91 80 70
99 90 80 71 62
83 75 67 60 52
65 59 53 47 41
16 17 18 19 20
76 67 60 54 48
68 60 53 48 43
62 55 49 44 40
55 48 43 39 35
46 41 36 33 30
36 32 29 26 23
22 24 26
40
36 30
33 27
29 24
24 21
1.48 20.4 2.12
1.51 17.1 1.88
1.54 13.5 1.58
19 16 14
Properties 1.39 27.7 2.59
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
1.45 23.2 2.33
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.57 9.5 1.24
5 - 122
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Steel Tube
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips Nominal Size
16×16
Thickness (in.)
1⁄ 2
1⁄ 2
14×14 3⁄
12×12
Wt./ft
103.30
89.68
68.31
8
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Fy
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄
8
5⁄ 16
93.34
76.07
58.10
48.86
46 ksi 0
2000
1640
1420
1490
1310
1130
1030
6 7 8 9 10
1980 1970 1960 1950 1940
1620 1610 1600 1590 1580
1400 1390 1380 1380 1370
1460 1450 1440 1430 1410
1290 1280 1270 1260 1250
1100 1100 1090 1080 1070
1010 1000 996 987 977
11 12 13 14 15
1930 1920 1900 1890 1870
1570 1550 1540 1520 1510
1350 1340 1330 1320 1300
1400 1380 1360 1340 1320
1230 1220 1200 1190 1170
1060 1040 1030 1020 1000
966 954 942 928 914
16 17 18 19 20
1860 1840 1820 1800 1780
1490 1470 1450 1430 1410
1290 1270 1250 1230 1220
1300 1280 1260 1230 1210
1150 1130 1110 1090 1070
984 967 950 932 913
899 884 868 851 833
22 24 26 28 30
1730 1690 1640 1590 1530
1360 1320 1270 1220 1160
1180 1140 1090 1050 1000
1160 1100 1050 991 933
1020 974 924 874 823
873 832 790 747 703
797 759 720 680 640
32 34 36 38 40
1480 1420 1370 1310 1250
1110 1060 1000 946 891
954 907 859 811 763
875 817 760 704 649
772 721 671 621 573
658 614 571 528 487
599 559 519 480 442
5.54 352 180
4.60 400 141
4.66 329 125
4.72 255 106
4.75 216 95.8
Properties 6.29 604 334
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
5.48 455 212
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
5 - 123
Fy = 46 ksi
Nominal Size
10×10
Thickness (in.)
5⁄ 8
1⁄
Wt./ft
76.33
62.46
2
3⁄ 8
47.90
8×8 5⁄
16
40.35
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Steel Tube
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
1⁄ 4
5⁄
8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
32.63
59.32
48.85
37.69
31.84
25.82
46 ksi 0
1150
1010
860
782
701
844
739
623
562
500
6 7 8 9 10
1120 1110 1100 1080 1070
984 975 964 952 938
837 829 820 809 798
761 754 745 736 725
682 675 667 659 649
808 796 781 766 748
709 698 686 672 657
598 589 579 567 555
539 531 522 512 500
479 472 464 454 444
11 12 13 14 15
1050 1030 1010 993 972
924 908 891 873 855
785 772 758 742 727
714 702 689 675 660
639 628 616 603 590
730 710 689 667 644
641 624 606 587 568
542 527 512 496 480
488 475 462 447 433
434 422 410 397 384
16 17 18 19 20
949 926 902 877 852
835 815 794 772 750
710 693 675 656 637
645 629 613 596 578
576 562 547 531 516
620 596 571 547 522
548 527 506 484 463
463 446 428 410 392
417 401 385 369 353
370 356 341 327 312
22 24 26 28 30
800 746 692 638 585
704 658 610 563 516
598 559 518 478 438
543 507 470 433 397
484 451 417 384 352
471 422 374 328 286
419 376 335 295 257
355 319 284 251 219
320 287 256 226 197
283 254 226 199 173
32 34 36 38 40
532 482 433 389 351
471 426 383 344 311
399 362 325 292 263
361 327 294 263 238
320 289 259 232 210
251 223 199 178 161
226 200 179 160 145
192 170 152 136 123
173 153 137 123 111
152 135 120 108 98
3.12 92.1 23.8
3.15 75.6 20.9
Properties rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
3.78 3.84 3.90 3.93 3.96 2.96 3.03 3.09 268 223 174 148 120 163 137 108 75.3 66.7 56.5 51.0 45.0 34.5 31.1 26.4
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 124
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips 7× ×7
Steel Tube
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄
4
3⁄ 16
Wt./ft
50.81
42.05
32.58
27.59
22.42
17.08
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi 0
702
614
515
464
410
355
6 7 8 9 10
663 649 634 617 599
581 569 556 542 526
488 478 467 455 442
439 430 421 410 398
388 381 372 362 352
335 329 321 313 304
11 12 13 14 15
579 558 536 514 490
509 491 473 453 433
429 414 398 382 366
386 373 359 344 329
341 329 317 304 291
294 284 273 262 250
16 17 18 19 20
467 443 419 395 371
413 393 372 351 331
349 332 315 297 280
314 299 283 268 252
277 264 250 236 223
238 227 215 203 191
22 24 26 28 30
324 280 239 206 179
290 252 216 186 162
247 214 184 159 138
222 193 166 143 124
196 170 146 126 110
167 145 124 107 93
32 34 36 38 40
158 140 125 112 101
142 126 112 101 91
121 107 96 86 78
109 97 86 78 70
96 85 76 68 62
82 73 65 58 52
2.68 81.1 16.7
2.71 69.3 15.0
2.74 56.9 13.2
2.77 43.8 11.3
Properties 2.56 120 21.7
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
2.62 102 19.5
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
5 - 125
Fy = 46 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips 6× ×6
Steel Tube
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
5⁄
Wt./ft
42.30
8
1⁄
2
35.24
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
27.48
23.34
19.02
14.53
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi 0
566
496
415
372
328
281
6 7 8 9 10
523 508 491 473 453
459 447 432 417 400
385 375 363 350 337
346 336 326 315 303
304 296 287 277 266
261 254 246 237 228
11 12 13 14 15
432 410 388 365 343
383 364 345 326 306
322 307 292 276 259
290 276 262 248 234
255 243 231 218 206
218 208 197 187 176
16 17 18 19 20
320 297 275 253 232
286 267 248 229 210
243 227 211 195 180
219 205 190 176 162
193 180 167 155 143
164 154 143 132 122
22 24 26 28 30
192 161 138 119 103
175 147 126 108 94
151 127 108 93 81
136 114 98 84 73
120 101 86 74 64
102 86 73 63 55
32 34 36 38
91 80
83 73 66
71 63 56
64 57 51 46
57 50 45 40
48 43 38 34
2.27 58.0 9.79
2.30 49.7 8.84
2.33 41.1 7.79
2.36 31.9 6.61
Properties 2.15 83.9 12.5
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
2.21 72.1 11.4
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 126
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
51⁄2×51⁄2
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
3⁄ 8
Wt./ft
24.93
5⁄
16
21.21
5× ×5
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄
17.32
13.25
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Steel Tube
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄
4
3⁄ 16
9.01
28.43
22.37
19.08
15.62
11.97
46 ksi 0
367
329
289
247
203
384
322
288
252
215
6 7 8 9 10
336 325 313 300 286
301 292 281 269 257
265 256 247 237 226
226 219 211 202 193
185 179 172 165 157
342 328 313 297 279
289 277 265 251 237
259 249 238 226 213
227 218 208 198 187
193 185 177 169 159
11 12 13 14 15
272 256 241 225 209
244 231 217 203 189
215 203 191 178 166
183 173 162 152 141
149 141 132 123 114
261 243 224 206 187
223 207 192 177 162
200 187 173 160 146
176 164 152 141 129
149 140 129 119 109
16 17 18 19 20
194 178 163 149 135
175 161 148 135 122
154 142 130 119 108
131 121 111 101 91
106 97 89 81 73
170 153 136 122 111
147 133 119 107 97
133 121 108 97 88
117 106 96 86 78
100 90 81 73 66
22 24 26 28 30
111 94 80 69 60
101 85 72 62 54
89 75 64 55 48
76 63 54 47 41
60 51 43 37 32
91 77 65 56 49
80 67 57 49 43
73 61 52 45 39
64 54 46 40 34
54 46 39 34 29
30
26
1.92 27.8 4.16
1.95 21.7 3.53
32
53
48
42
36
29
34 36
47
42
37
32
25 23
Properties rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
2.07 47.7 7.23
2.10 41.2 6.55
2.13 34.2 5.78
2.16 26.5 4.90
2.19 18.3 3.92
1.80 47.3 5.93
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.86 38.6 5.19
1.89 33.5 4.71
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
5 - 127
Fy = 46 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips 41⁄2×41⁄2
Steel Tube
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
Wt./ft
19.82
16.96
13.91
10.70
7.31
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Fy
46 ksi 0
278
249
217
184
149
6 7 8 9 10
242 231 218 204 190
217 207 196 184 171
190 181 172 161 150
161 154 146 137 127
130 124 117 110 103
11 12 13 14 15
175 160 146 132 118
158 145 132 119 107
139 128 117 105 95
118 108 99 90 80
95 87 79 72 64
16 17 18 19 20
104 92 82 74 67
95 84 75 68 61
84 75 67 60 54
72 64 57 51 46
57 51 45 40 37
22 24 26 28
55 46 40
50 42 36 31
45 38 32 28
38 32 27 23
30 25 22 19
1.69 26.5 3.27
1.72 22.2 2.90
1.75 17.4 2.46
1.78 12.1 1.96
Properties 1.66 30.4 3.58
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 128
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Square structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips 4× ×4
Steel Tube
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄
Wt./ft
21.63
17.27
14.83
12.21
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to radius of gyration
Fy
4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 8
9.42
6.46
46 ksi 0
280
236
211
184
156
125
6 7 8 9 10
232 217 200 183 166
198 186 172 158 144
178 167 155 143 131
156 146 136 126 115
132 124 115 107 98
105 99 92 85 78
11 12 13 14 15
148 131 115 100 87
130 116 103 90 78
118 106 94 82 72
104 93 83 73 64
88 79 71 62 54
71 63 56 49 43
16 17 18 19 20
76 68 60 54 49
69 61 54 49 44
63 56 50 45 40
56 50 44 40 36
48 42 38 34 31
38 34 30 27 24
22 24 26
40
36 31
33 28
30 25
25 21
20 17 14
1.48 20.4 2.16
1.51 17.1 1.92
1.54 13.5 1.64
1.57 9.45 1.30
Properties 1.39 27.7 2.62
rm (in.) φb M n (kip-ft)
P e (KL )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
1.45 23.2 2.36
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
Fy = 46 ksi
5 - 129
Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
X
Nominal Size
16× ×12
16× ×8
Thickness (in.)
1⁄
1⁄ 2
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
1⁄
2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
Wt./ft
89.68
76.07
76.07
58.10
69.27
53.00
44.60
2
14× ×10
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Steel Tube
Y
12× ×10
46 ksi 0
1450
1140
1170
978
1050
872
782
6 7 8 9 10
1430 1420 1410 1400 1380
1100 1090 1070 1060 1040
1140 1130 1120 1110 1100
956 948 939 928 917
1020 1010 1000 990 978
851 844 835 826 816
763 757 749 741 732
11 12 13 14 15
1370 1360 1340 1330 1310
1020 994 970 946 920
1080 1070 1050 1030 1010
905 892 877 862 846
964 949 933 917 899
804 792 779 765 750
721 710 699 686 673
16 17 18 19 20
1290 1270 1250 1230 1210
893 865 837 808 778
992 971 949 926 903
830 812 794 775 756
880 861 841 820 799
735 719 703 685 668
659 645 630 615 599
22 24 26 28 30
1160 1120 1070 1020 964
718 657 597 539 482
855 806 755 704 653
716 675 633 591 548
755 710 664 617 571
632 594 556 517 479
566 533 498 464 429
32 34 36 38 40
911 858 805 753 702
427 379 338 303 273
602 553 505 459 414
506 465 425 386 349
525 481 438 395 357
441 404 368 333 300
395 362 330 298 269
4.02 1.30 362 288 150 88.8
4.08 1.29 281 224 125 74.8
3.94 1.15 290 256 101 76.6
4.00 1.15 225 199 85.3 64.4
4.03 1.15 191 168 76.4 57.8
Properties 4.84 1.25 497 407 245 157
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
3.30 1.72 390 240 174 58.7
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 130
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
12× ×8
Nominal Size
12× ×6
Thickness (in.)
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
Wt./ft
76.33
62.46
47.90
40.35
67.82
55.66
42.79
36.10
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Steel Tube
Y
46 ksi 0
1060
914
757
677
906
780
642
569
6 7 8 9 10
1020 1010 991 973 954
881 869 856 842 826
731 721 711 699 686
653 645 635 625 613
850 830 808 783 757
732 716 697 677 655
604 591 576 559 542
536 524 511 497 481
11 12 13 14 15
934 912 888 864 838
808 790 770 749 728
671 656 640 623 606
600 587 572 557 541
729 699 668 637 604
631 606 580 553 526
523 503 482 460 438
464 447 429 410 390
16 17 18 19 20
812 785 757 728 699
705 682 658 634 610
587 568 549 529 509
525 508 491 473 455
571 538 506 473 441
498 470 443 415 387
416 393 371 348 326
370 351 331 311 291
22 24 26 28 30
641 583 525 470 416
560 510 461 413 368
468 427 387 348 310
418 382 346 310 277
379 321 273 236 205
335 284 242 209 182
283 241 206 177 154
253 216 184 159 138
32 34 36 38
366 324 289 260
324 287 256 230
273 242 216 194
244 216 193 173
180 160 142 128
160 142 126 113
136 120 107 96
122 108 96 86
40
234
207
175
156
102
87
78
Properties 3.14 1.38 300 226 95.2 50.3 Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200. rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
3.20 1.37 250 189 83.7 44.5
3.26 1.37 195 147 69.9 37.5
3.28 1.37 165 125 62.8 33.5
2.37 1.73 252 154 74.5 24.8
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2.42 1.73 210 129 65.8 22.0
2.48 1.72 165 101 55.0 18.6
2.51 1.71 140 86.6 49.1 16.7
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
Fy = 46 ksi
5 - 131
Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
X
10× ×8
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
1⁄
Wt./ft
55.66
2
3⁄
8
42.79
10× ×6 5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
36.10
29.23
48.85
37.69
31.84
25.82
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Steel Tube
Y
46 ksi 0
800
662
589
516
676
556
493
429
6 7 8 9 10
770 759 747 734 720
638 629 619 608 597
568 560 551 542 531
497 490 483 475 465
633 619 602 584 564
522 511 497 483 467
463 453 441 428 415
403 394 384 373 361
11 12 13 14 15
704 687 669 650 630
584 570 555 540 524
520 508 495 481 467
455 445 433 421 409
543 521 497 474 449
450 432 413 394 375
400 384 368 351 334
348 335 320 306 291
16 17 18 19 20
610 589 568 546 524
507 490 473 455 437
452 437 422 406 390
396 383 369 355 341
425 400 375 351 327
355 335 315 295 275
316 299 281 263 246
276 261 245 230 215
22 24 26 28 30
479 435 391 349 308
400 364 328 293 260
357 325 293 262 233
313 285 257 230 204
281 237 202 174 152
238 202 172 148 129
213 181 154 133 116
186 159 135 116 101
32 34 36 38
271 240 214 192
228 202 181 162
204 181 162 145
179 159 142 127
133 118 105 95
113 101 90 80
102 90 80 72
89 79 70 63
40
173
146
131
115
73
65
57
2.43 1.49 124 86.9 34.6 15.6
2.46 1.48 106 74.2 30.8 14.0
2.49 1.48 86.6 61.1 26.9 12.3
Properties rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
3.12 1.19 190 163 52.9 37.2
3.18 1.19 149 128 44.3 31.4
3.21 1.19 127 109 39.6 28.1
3.24 1.19 104 89.0 34.6 24.6
2.37 1.50 157 110 41.1 18.3
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 132
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
10× ×5
Nominal Size
8× ×6
Thickness (in.)
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
3⁄
8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
Wt./ft
35.13
29.72
24.12
42.05
32.58
27.59
22.42
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Steel Tube
Y
46 ksi 0
502
445
385
573
471
417
362
6 7 8 9 10
459 445 428 411 392
408 395 381 365 349
353 342 330 317 302
535 522 507 491 473
440 430 418 405 391
391 381 371 360 347
339 331 322 312 302
11 12 13 14 15
372 351 330 309 288
331 313 295 276 257
287 272 256 240 223
455 435 415 394 373
376 360 344 327 310
334 321 306 291 276
291 279 266 254 241
16 17 18 19 20
266 245 225 205 186
239 220 202 185 168
207 191 176 161 146
352 330 309 288 267
293 275 258 241 224
261 246 231 216 201
228 214 201 188 175
22 24 26 28 30
154 129 110 95 83
139 117 99 86 75
121 101 86 74 65
228 192 163 141 123
192 162 138 119 104
172 145 124 107 93
151 127 108 93 81
32 34 36 38 40
73 64
66 58
57 50
108 96 85 76
91 81 72 65
82 72 65 58
72 63 57 51 46
2.04 1.72 111 68.7 29.5 9.98
2.07 1.71 95.2 58.7 26.5 9.01
2.31 1.25 111 91.1 23.2 14.8
2.36 1.25 88.3 72.5 19.7 12.5
2.39 1.25 75.6 62.1 17.6 11.2
2.42 1.25 62.1 51.1 15.3 9.83
Properties rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
2.09 1.72 78.3 48.3 23.1 7.83
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
Fy = 46 ksi
5 - 133
Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
X
8× ×4
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
5⁄ 8
1⁄
Wt./ft
42.30
35.24
2
3⁄
8
27.48
7× ×5 5⁄
16
23.34
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Steel Tube
Y
1⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
3⁄
8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
19.02
35.24
27.48
23.34
19.02
14.53
46 ksi 0
532
459
375
331
285
467
383
339
292
244
6 7 8 9 10
453 427 399 370 340
394 373 350 326 301
325 309 291 272 252
287 273 258 241 224
248 236 223 209 194
422 407 390 372 353
347 336 322 308 293
308 298 286 273 260
266 257 248 237 226
223 215 207 198 189
11 12 13 14 15
309 279 250 221 194
275 250 225 200 177
232 212 192 172 153
206 188 171 154 137
179 164 149 134 120
333 312 291 270 249
276 260 243 226 209
246 232 217 202 187
214 201 189 176 163
179 169 158 148 137
16 17 18 19 20
170 151 135 121 109
156 138 123 110 100
135 120 107 96 87
121 107 96 86 78
107 94 84 76 68
228 208 189 170 153
192 176 160 145 131
172 158 144 131 118
150 138 126 115 103
126 116 106 96 87
22 24 26 28 30
90 76
82 69
72 60 51
64 54 46
56 47 40
127 107 91 78 68
108 91 77 67 58
97 82 70 60 52
85 72 61 53 46
72 60 52 44 39
51
46
40
34 30
1.95 1.30 63.8 50.4 11.9 7.01
1.98 1.30 54.9 43.5 10.7 6.32
2.01 1.30 45.5 35.9 9.35 5.55
2.04 1.29 35.2 27.9 7.83 4.67
32 34
Properties 1.49 1.76 φb M nx (kip-ft) 99.3 φb M ny (kip-ft) 59.8 P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) 18.1 P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) 5.85 rmy (in.)
rmx / rmy
1.54 1.75 85.2 51.8 16.3 5.34
1.60 1.73 68.7 42.1 13.9 4.65
1.62 1.73 59.0 36.2 12.4 4.16
1.65 1.72 48.6 30.1 10.9 3.66
1.90 1.31 79.7 62.8 14.0 8.23
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 134
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
Y
7× ×4
Steel Tube
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
3⁄
Wt./ft
24.93
8
6× ×4
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
21.21
17.32
3⁄
16
13.25
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Fy
1⁄
2
3⁄ 8
28.43
5⁄
16
1⁄
4
3⁄ 16
22.37
19.08
15.62
11.97
46 ksi 0
338
298
256
213
364
300
265
228
189
6 7 8 9 10
291 276 259 242 224
258 245 230 215 200
223 212 200 187 173
185 176 166 156 145
309 291 272 252 231
257 243 228 212 196
228 216 203 189 175
197 187 176 164 152
164 156 147 137 127
11 12 13 14 15
205 187 168 151 134
183 167 151 136 121
160 146 132 119 106
134 122 111 100 90
210 189 168 149 130
179 162 146 130 115
160 146 131 118 104
140 127 115 103 92
117 107 97 87 77
16 17 18 19 20
118 104 93 83 75
107 94 84 76 68
94 83 74 67 60
79 70 63 56 51
114 101 90 81 73
101 89 80 71 65
92 81 72 65 59
81 72 64 57 52
68 60 54 48 44
22 24 26
62 52 45
56 47 40
50 42 36
42 35 30
61 51
53 45
48 41 35
43 36 31
36 30 26
1.48 1.39 53.1 39.7 7.61 3.93
1.54 1.38 43.1 32.6 6.62 3.46
1.57 1.38 37.6 28.3 5.96 3.15
1.60 1.37 31.3 23.6 5.20 2.78
1.63 1.37 24.4 18.4 4.39 2.34
Properties rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft)
P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
1.57 1.56 55.2 37.3 9.83 4.04
1.60 1.56 47.6 32.3 8.87 3.66
1.63 1.55 39.7 26.8 7.72 3.23
1.66 1.54 30.7 20.9 6.42 2.72
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
Fy = 46 ksi
5 - 135
Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 3.5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
X
Y
5× ×4
Steel Tube
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
3⁄
5⁄
Wt./ft
19.82
8
16.96
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
1⁄
16
4
3⁄
16
13.91
10.70
46 ksi 0
252
216
177
136
6 7 8 9 10
215 203 190 176 162
185 175 164 153 141
153 145 136 127 118
118 112 106 99 92
11 12 13 14 15
147 133 119 106 93
129 117 105 93 82
108 98 89 79 70
85 77 70 63 56
16 17 18 19 20
81 72 64 58 52
73 64 57 51 46
62 55 49 44 40
49 44 39 35 32
22 24 26
43 36
38 32
33 28 23
26 22 19
1.53 1.20 28.4 24.3 3.56 2.49
1.56 1.19 23.8 20.4 3.03 2.13
1.59 1.19 18.6 16.0 2.40 1.70
Properties 1.50 1.19 32.6 27.9 3.98 2.80
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft)
P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 136
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
Nominal Size
16× ×12
16× ×8
Thickness (in.)
1⁄ 2
1⁄ 2
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄
8
5⁄ 16
Wt./ft
89.68
76.07
76.07
58.10
69.27
53.00
44.60
14× ×10
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Steel Tube
Y
12× ×10
46 ksi 0
1630
1250
1300
1110
1150
984
897
6 7 8 9 10
1600 1590 1580 1560 1550
1210 1190 1180 1150 1130
1270 1250 1240 1230 1210
1080 1070 1060 1050 1040
1120 1110 1100 1090 1070
959 950 940 929 916
874 866 857 846 835
11 12 13 14 15
1530 1520 1500 1480 1460
1110 1080 1060 1030 1000
1190 1170 1150 1130 1110
1020 1000 987 969 949
1060 1040 1020 1000 981
902 888 872 855 837
822 808 794 778 762
16 17 18 19 20
1440 1410 1390 1360 1340
967 935 902 869 835
1090 1060 1040 1010 983
929 908 886 863 840
960 937 914 890 866
819 800 780 759 738
745 727 709 690 671
22 24 26 28 30
1290 1230 1170 1110 1050
766 698 630 565 502
928 870 812 753 695
792 743 693 643 593
815 763 711 658 605
695 650 605 560 515
631 591 549 508 467
32 34 36 38 40
987 926 865 804 745
442 391 349 313 283
638 582 528 476 429
544 496 450 405 365
554 504 456 409 369
471 428 387 348 314
426 387 350 314 283
4.02 1.30 362 288 155 92.1
4.08 1.29 281 224 131 78.4
3.94 1.15 290 256 105 79.3
4.00 1.15 225 199 89.2 67.3
4.03 1.15 191 168 80.4 60.8
Properties 4.84 1.25 497 407 256 164
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
3.30 1.72 390 240 180 60.7
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
Fy = 46 ksi
5 - 137
Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
X
12× ×8
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
5⁄
Wt./ft
76.33
8
1⁄
2
62.46
12× ×6 3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄
8
5⁄ 16
47.90
40.35
67.82
55.66
42.79
36.10
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Steel Tube
Y
46 ksi 0
1140
997
845
768
961
839
705
635
6 7 8 9 10
1090 1080 1060 1040 1020
959 946 931 914 896
814 802 790 775 760
739 728 717 704 689
899 877 853 826 797
785 767 746 723 698
661 646 629 610 589
595 581 566 549 531
11 12 13 14 15
997 972 946 919 890
876 854 832 808 783
743 725 706 686 665
674 658 640 622 603
766 734 701 666 631
672 644 615 586 555
567 544 520 496 470
511 490 469 446 424
16 17 18 19 20
861 831 800 768 736
758 732 705 677 650
643 621 598 575 552
583 562 542 520 499
595 559 524 489 454
525 494 463 433 403
445 419 394 368 343
401 378 355 332 309
22 24 26 28 30
672 608 545 485 427
594 538 483 431 380
505 457 411 366 323
456 413 371 330 291
388 327 279 240 209
345 291 248 214 187
295 250 213 183 160
266 225 192 165 144
32 34 36 38
375 332 296 266
334 296 264 237
284 252 225 202
255 226 202 181
184 163 145 130
164 145 130 116
140 124 111 100
127 112 100 90
40
240
214
182
163
105
90
81
2.42 1.73 210 129 67.5 22.5
2.48 1.72 165 101 56.9 19.3
2.51 1.71 140 86.6 51.0 17.4
Properties rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
3.14 1.38 300 226 97.5 51.5
3.20 1.37 250 189 86.3 45.9
3.26 1.37 195 147 72.8 39.0
3.28 1.37 165 125 65.8 35.1
2.37 1.73 252 154 76.0 25.3
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 138
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
10× ×8
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
Wt./ft
55.66
42.79
10× ×6 5⁄
16
36.10
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Steel Tube
Y
1⁄
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
48.85
4
29.23
5⁄
16
1⁄
37.69
31.84
25.82
4
46 ksi 0
868
734
664
593
725
609
548
485
6 7 8 9 10
834 822 808 793 776
706 696 684 671 657
638 629 618 607 594
569 561 552 541 530
677 660 642 621 599
569 556 540 524 505
512 500 486 471 455
454 443 431 417 403
11 12 13 14 15
758 739 719 697 675
642 626 609 591 572
580 565 550 534 517
517 504 490 476 460
576 551 526 499 472
486 466 444 423 400
437 419 400 381 361
387 371 354 337 319
16 17 18 19 20
652 628 604 580 555
553 533 512 492 471
499 481 463 444 425
444 428 412 395 378
445 418 391 365 339
378 355 333 311 289
340 320 300 280 261
301 283 265 248 230
22 24 26 28 30
506 456 408 362 317
429 387 347 308 270
387 349 313 277 243
344 310 277 245 215
289 243 207 178 155
247 208 177 153 133
223 188 160 138 120
197 166 141 122 106
32 34 36 38
279 247 220 198
237 210 187 168
213 189 169 151
189 167 149 134
137 121 108 97
117 104 93 83
106 94 84 75
93 83 74 66
40
178
152
137
121
75
68
60
2.43 1.49 124 86.9 35.7 16.1
2.46 1.48 106 74.2 32.0 14.5
2.49 1.48 86.6 61.1 28.1 12.8
Properties rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
3.12 1.19 190 163 54.4 38.3
3.18 1.19 149 128 46.0 32.6
3.21 1.19 127 109 41.3 29.3
3.24 1.19 104 89.0 36.4 25.9
2.37 1.50 157 110 42.1 18.8
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
Fy = 46 ksi
5 - 139
Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
X
10× ×5
Nominal Size
8× ×6
Thickness (in.)
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
Wt./ft
35.13
29.72
24.12
42.05
32.58
27.59
22.42
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Steel Tube
Y
46 ksi 0
544
489
431
610
512
460
406
6 7 8 9 10
496 479 461 441 419
446 431 415 397 378
393 380 365 349 332
568 554 538 520 500
477 465 451 437 421
429 418 406 393 379
379 369 359 347 334
11 12 13 14 15
397 374 350 326 303
358 337 316 295 273
315 296 278 259 240
480 459 436 414 390
404 386 367 349 329
363 347 331 314 297
321 307 292 277 262
16 17 18 19 20
279 256 234 212 191
252 232 212 192 174
221 203 185 168 152
367 344 321 298 276
310 291 271 252 234
279 262 245 228 211
247 231 216 201 186
22 24 26 28 30
158 133 113 98 85
143 121 103 89 77
126 106 90 78 68
233 196 167 144 125
198 167 142 122 107
179 150 128 111 96
158 133 113 97 85
32 34 36 38 40
75 66
68 60
59 53
110 98 87 78
94 83 74 66
85 75 67 60
75 66 59 53 48
2.04 1.72 111 68.7 30.4 10.3
2.07 1.71 95.2 58.7 27.4 9.31
2.31 1.25 111 91.1 23.7 15.1
2.36 1.25 88.3 72.5 20.2 12.9
2.39 1.25 75.6 62.1 18.2 11.6
2.42 1.25 62.1 51.1 16.0 10.3
Properties rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft) P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
2.09 1.72 78.3 48.3 24.1 8.15
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 140
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
8× ×4
Nominal Size
7× ×5
Thickness (in.)
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
Wt./ft
42.30
35.24
27.48
23.34
19.02
35.24
27.48
23.34
19.02
14.53
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Steel Tube
Y
3⁄
16
46 ksi 0
552
482
401
358
313
492
411
369
324
278
6 7 8 9 10
468 441 411 380 349
411 389 364 338 311
345 327 307 286 265
308 292 275 256 237
271 257 241 225 208
444 427 409 390 369
372 358 343 327 310
333 322 308 294 279
293 283 271 259 246
251 242 232 221 210
11 12 13 14 15
317 285 254 224 196
284 257 230 205 180
242 220 199 178 157
217 198 178 160 142
191 174 157 141 125
347 325 302 279 257
292 274 255 237 218
263 247 230 213 197
232 217 203 188 174
198 186 173 161 148
16 17 18 19 20
172 153 136 122 110
158 140 125 112 101
138 123 109 98 89
124 110 98 88 80
110 98 87 78 71
235 213 193 173 156
200 182 165 148 134
181 165 149 134 121
159 145 132 119 107
136 124 112 101 91
22 24 26 28 30
91 77
84 70
73 62 52
66 55 47
58 49 42
129 108 92 80 69
111 93 79 68 59
100 84 72 62 54
89 74 63 55 48
75 63 54 47 41
52
47
42
36 32
1.95 1.30 63.8 50.4 12.2 7.18
1.98 1.30 54.9 43.5 11.1 6.51
2.01 1.30 45.5 35.9 9.70 5.75
2.04 1.29 35.2 27.9 8.20 4.90
32 34
Properties rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft)
P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
1.49 1.76 99.3 59.8 18.3 5.92
1.54 1.75 85.2 51.8 16.6 5.43
1.60 1.73 68.7 42.1 14.2 4.75
1.62 1.73 59.0 36.2 12.8 4.28
1.65 1.72 48.6 30.1 11.2 3.79
1.90 1.31 79.7 62.8 14.3 8.38
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
COMPOSITE COLUMNS—CONCRETE-FILLED STEEL PIPE AND STRUCTURAL TUBING
Fy = 46 ksi
5 - 141
Y
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
X
Y
7× ×4
Steel Tube
Nominal Size
6× ×4
Thickness (in.)
3⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 2
3⁄
8
5⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 16
Wt./ft
24.93
21.21
17.32
13.25
28.43
22.37
19.08
15.62
11.97
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
Fy
46 ksi 0
360
321
281
239
380
318
285
249
211
6 7 8 9 10
308 291 273 254 234
276 261 245 228 211
242 229 215 201 186
206 195 183 171 158
321 302 282 260 238
271 256 240 222 204
243 230 215 200 184
213 202 189 176 162
181 171 161 149 138
11 12 13 14 15
214 194 174 155 137
193 175 158 141 124
170 155 139 125 110
145 131 119 106 94
215 193 172 151 132
186 168 150 133 117
168 152 137 121 107
148 134 121 108 95
126 114 103 92 81
16 17 18 19 20
120 106 95 85 77
109 97 86 78 70
97 86 77 69 62
83 73 65 59 53
116 103 92 82 74
103 91 81 73 66
94 83 74 67 60
83 74 66 59 53
71 63 56 50 45
22 24 26
64 53 45
58 49 41
51 43 37
44 37 31
61 52
54 46
50 42 36
44 37 32
38 32 27
1.48 1.39 53.1 39.7 7.72 3.99
1.54 1.38 43.1 32.6 6.76 3.53
1.57 1.38 37.6 28.3 6.10 3.22
1.60 1.37 31.3 23.6 5.36 2.86
1.63 1.37 24.4 18.4 4.56 2.44
Properties rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft)
P ex (K x L x )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y )2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2)
1.57 1.56 55.2 37.3 10.0 4.12
1.60 1.56 47.6 32.3 9.10 3.76
1.63 1.55 39.7 26.8 7.97 3.33
1.66 1.54 30.7 20.9 6.70 2.84
Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
5 - 142
COMPOSITE DESIGN
Fy = 46 ksi
Y
X
COMPOSITE COLUMNS Rectangular structural tubing fc′ = 5 ksi Axial design strength in kips
X
Y
5× ×4
Steel Tube
Nominal Size Thickness (in.)
3⁄ 8
5⁄
Wt./ft
19.82
16.96
Fy
Effective length KL (ft) with respect to least radius of gyration, rmy
1⁄ 4
16
3⁄
16
13.91
10.70
46 ksi 0
262
224
185
142
6 7 8 9 10
222 210 196 181 166
192 181 170 157 145
159 150 141 131 121
123 117 110 102 95
11 12 13 14 15
151 136 121 107 94
132 119 107 95 84
111 101 91 81 71
87 79 72 64 57
16 17 18 19 20
83 73 65 59 53
73 65 58 52 47
63 56 50 45 40
50 44 40 36 32
22 24 26
44 37
39 33
33 28 24
27 22 19
1.53 1.20 28.4 24.3 3.61 2.52
1.56 1.19 23.8 20.4 3.07 2.16
1.59 1.19 18.6 16.0 2.44 1.72
Properties 1.50 1.19 32.6 27.9 4.04 2.83
rmy (in.) rmx / rmy φb M nx (kip-ft) φb M ny (kip-ft)
P ex (K x L x)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) P ey (K y L y)2 / 10 4 (kip-ft2) Note: Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
REFERENCES
5 - 143
REFERENCES
Allison, H., 1991, Low- and Medium-Rise Steel Buildings, AISC Steel Design Guide Series No. 5, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL. Fisher, J. M. and M. A. West, 1990, Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise Buildings, AISC Steel Design Guide Series No. 3, AISC, Chicago. Griffis, L. G., 1992, Load and Resistance Factor Design of W-Shapes Encased in Concrete, AISC Steel Design Guide Series No. 6, AISC, Chicago.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6-1
PART 6 SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS (1993) . . . . . . 6-3 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Appendixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105 Numerical Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144 Commentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-161 SPECIFICATION FOR LRFD OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS (1993) . . . . . . . 6-277 Commentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-289 SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS (1992) . . . . . 6-301 Commentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-329 RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS USING ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS (1988) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-371 Commentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-399 CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES (1992) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-423 Commentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-455 AISC QUALITY CERTIFICATION PROGRAM (1993) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-477
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6-2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6-3
Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings December 1, 1993
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100 Chicago, Illinois 60601-2001 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6-4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6-5
PREFACE
The AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings is based on reliability theory. As have all AISC Specifications, this LRFD Specification has been based upon past successful usage, advances in the state of knowledge, and changes in design practice. The LRFD Specification has been developed as a consensus document to provide a uniform practice in the design of steel-framed buildings. The intention is to provide design criteria for routine use and not to provide specific criteria for infrequently encountered problems which occur in the full range of structural design. Providing definitive provisions to cover all cases would make the LRFD Specification too cumbersome for routine design usage. The LRFD Specification is the result of the deliberations of a committee of structural engineers with wide experience and high professional standing, representing a wide geographical distribution throughout the U.S. The committee includes approximately equal numbers of engineers in private practice and code agencies, engineers involved in research and teaching, and engineers employed by steel fabricating and producing companies. In order to avoid reference to proprietary steels which may have limited availability, only those steels which can be identified by ASTM specifications are approved under this Specification. However, some steels covered by ASTM specifications, but subject to more costly manufacturing and inspection techniques than deemed essential for structures covered by this Specification, are not listed, even though they may provide all the necessary characteristics for reliable usage in structural applications. Approval of such steels in lieu of less expensive steels is left to the owner’s representative. The Appendices to this Specification are an integral part of the Specification. A non-mandatory Commentary has been prepared to provide background for the Specification provisions and the user is encouraged to consult it. The principal changes incorporated in this edition of the Specification include: • Updated web crippling design provisions. • Recommendations for the use of heavy rolled shapes and welded members made up of thick plates. • Updated provisions for slender web girders and unsymmetric members. • Revised provisions for built-up compression members. • Improved Cb equation. • Provisions for slip-critical joints designed at factored loads. • Reorganization and expansion of material on stability of unbraced frames. • Reorganization and expansion of Chapters F and K. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6-6
PREFACE
• Alternative fillet-weld design strength. • Addition of beam-web opening provisions. The reader is cautioned that professional judgment must be exercised when data or recommendations in the Specification are applied. The publication of the material contained herein is not intended as a representation or warranty on the part of the American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.—or any other person named herein— that this information is suitable for general or particular use, or freedom from infringement of any patent or patents. Anyone making use of this information assumes all liability arising from such use. The design and detailing of steel structures is within the expertise of professional individuals who are competent by virtue of education, training, and experience for the application of engineering principles and the provisions of this specification to the design and/or detailing of a particular structure. By the Committee, Arthur P. Arndt, Chairman William E. Moore, II, Vice Chairman Horatio Allison Reidar Bjorhovde Roger L. Brockenbrough W. F. Chen Andrew K. Courtney Robert O. Disque Joseph Dudek Duane S. Ellifritt Bruce Ellingwood Shu-Jin Fang Steven J. Fenves Roger E. Ferch James M. Fisher John W. Fisher Theodore V. Galambos Geerhard Haaijer Richard B. Haws Mark Holland Ira Hooper Donald L. Johnson L. A. Kloiber
Jay W. Larson William J. LeMessurier H. S. Lew Bill Lindley, II Stanley D. Lindsey Richard W. Marshall Lisa McCasland Robert McCluer William A. Milek Duane K. Miller Walter P. Moore, Jr. Thomas M. Murray Gary G. Nichols Clarkson W. Pinkham Egor P. Popov Donald R. Sherman Frank Sowokinos William A. Thornton Raymond H. R. Tide Ivan M. Viest Lyle L. Wilson Joseph A. Yura Nestor R. Iwankiw, Secretary
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 A.
B.
GENERAL PROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 A1.
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
A2.
Limits of Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 1. Structural Steel Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 2. Types of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
A3.
Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . 2. Steel Castings and Forgings . . . 3. Bolts, Washers, and Nuts . . . . . 4. Anchor Bolts and Threaded Rods 5. Filler Metal and Flux for Welding 6. Stud Shear Connectors . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
26 26 28 28 28 29 29
A4.
Loads and Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . 1. Loads, Load Factors, and Load Combinations 2. Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Crane Runway Horizontal Forces . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
29 30 30 31
A5.
Design Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Required Strength at Factored Loads . . . . . . . 2. Limit States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Design for Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Design for Serviceability and Other Considerations
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
31 31 31 32 32
A6.
Referenced Codes and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
A7.
Design Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Standard Symbols and Nomenclature 3. Notation for Welding . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
33 33 33 33
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 B1.
Gross Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
B2.
Net Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
B3.
Effective Net Area for Tension Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
B4.
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
B5.
Local Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Classification of Steel Sections . . . . 2. Design by Plastic Analysis . . . . . . . 3. Slender-Element Compression Sections
B6.
Bracing at Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
B7.
Limiting Slenderness Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
B8.
Simple Spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
B9.
End Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
36 36 36 37
B10. Proportions of Beams and Girders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6-8
C.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41 41 41 41 41 44 44 44 45 47 47 47 47 47 48 48 51 52
Design for Flexure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Yielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F2. Design for Shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F3. Web-Tapered Members (see Appendix F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F4. Beams and Girders with Web Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G. PLATE GIRDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H. MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION . . . . . . . . H1. Symmetric Members Subject to Bending and Axial Force . . . . . . . 1. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members in Flexur and Tension . . . 2. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members in Flexure and Compression H2. Unsymmetric Members and Members Under Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear, and/or Axial Force . . . . . . . . . H3. Alternative Interaction Equations for Members Under Combined Stress (see Appendix H3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I. COMPOSITE MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I1. Design Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I2. Compression Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Design Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Columns with Multiple Steel Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Load Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I3. Flexural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Effective Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Strength of Beams with Shear Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
52 52 53 56 56 57 58 59 59 59 60
D.
E.
F.
FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1. Second Order Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C2. Frame Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Braced Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Unbraced Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TENSION MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1. Design Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2. Built-Up Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3. Pin-Connected Members and Eyebars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS . . . . . . E1. Effective Length and Slenderness Limitations . . . . . . . . . 1. Effective Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Design by Plastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2. Design Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling . . . . . . E3. Design Compressive Strength for Flexural-Torsional Buckling E4. Built-Up Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E5. Pin-Connected Compression Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . F1.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . 60 . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
60 61 61 62 62 63 63 63 64 64 64
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3. 4. 5. 6.
J.
Strength of Concrete-Encased Beams Strength During Construction . . . . Formed Steel Deck . . . . . . . . . . Design Shear Strength . . . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
6-9
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
64 65 65 66
I4.
Combined Compression and Flexure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
I5.
Shear Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Horizontal Shear Force . . . . . . . . . . 3. Strength of Stud Shear Connectors . . . . 4. Strength of Channel Shear Connectors . . 5. Required Number of Shear Connectors . 6. Shear Connector Placement and Spacing
I6.
Special Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
67 67 67 68 68 68 68
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 J1.
General Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Design Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Simple Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Moment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Compression Members with Bearing Joints . . . 5. Splices in Heavy Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes . . . . . . 7. Minimum Strength of Connections . . . . . . . 8. Placement of Welds and Bolts . . . . . . . . . . 9. Bolts in Combination with Welds . . . . . . . . 10. High-Strength Bolts in Combination with Rivets 11. Limitations on Bolted and Welded Connections .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
70 70 70 70 70 70 71 71 72 72 72 72
J2.
Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Groove Welds . . . . . . . 2. Fillet Welds . . . . . . . . 3. Plug and Slot Welds . . . 4. Design Strength . . . . . . 5. Combination of Welds . . 6. Matching Weld Metal . . . 7. Mixed Weld Metal . . . . 8. Preheat for Heavy Shapes
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
73 73 74 76 77 77 77 79 79
J3.
Bolts and Threaded Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. High-Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Size and Use of Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Minimum Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Minimum Edge Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Maximum Spacing and Edge Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Design Tension or Shear Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Combined Tension and Shear in Bearing-Type Connections 8. High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical Connections . . . . . . 9. Combined Tension and Shear in Slip-Critical Connections . 10. Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. Long Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
79 79 79 80 81 82 83 83 83 84 85 87
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
J4.
Design Rupture Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Shear Rupture Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Tension Rupture Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Block Shear Rupture Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J5. Connecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Eccentric Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Design Strength of Elements in Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Other Connecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J6. Fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J7. Splices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J8. Bearing Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J9. Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J10. Anchor Bolts and Embedments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K. CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE . . . . . . K1. Flanges and Webs with Concentrated Forces . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Design Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Local Flange Bending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Local Web Yielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Web Crippling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Sidesway Web Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Compression Buckling of the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Panel-Zone Web Shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. Unframed Ends of Beams and Girders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. Additional Stiffener Requirements for Concentrated Forces . . 10. Additional Doubler Plate Requirements for Concentrated Forces K2. Ponding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K3. Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L. SERVICEABILITY DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . L1. Camber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L2. Expansion and Contraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L3. Deflections, Vibrations, and Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Floor Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L4. Connection Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L5. Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M. FABRICATION, ERECTION, AND QUALITY CONTROL . . . . . . M1. Shop Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M2. Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Cambering, Curving, and Straightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Thermal Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Planing of Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Welded Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Bolted Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Compression Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87 87 87 87 88 88 88 88 89 89 89 90 90 91 91 91 91 92 92 93 94 95 96 96 96 97 97 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 99 99 100 100 100 100 100 100 101 101 101
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6 - 11
7. Dimensional Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 8. Finish of Column Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 M3. Shop Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Inaccessible Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Contact Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Finished Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds . . . . . . . . . M4. Erection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Alignment of Column Bases . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fit of Column Compression Joints and Base Plates 5. Field Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Field Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Field Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 102 103 103 103 103 103
M5. Quality Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Cooperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Rejections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Inspection of Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Inspection of Slip-Critical High-Strength Bolted Connections 5. Identification of Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
103 103 103 104 104 104
APPENDICES B.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 B5.
Local Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 1. Classification of Steel Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 3. Slender-Element Compression Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
E.
COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
F.
BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
E3.
Design Compressive Strength for Flexural-Torsional Buckling . . . . . . 109
F1.
Design for Flexure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
F2.
Design for Shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 2. Design Shear Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 3. Transverse Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
F3.
Web-Tapered Members . . . . . . . . 1. General Requirements . . . . . . . 2. Design Tensile Strength . . . . . . 3. Design Compressive Strength . . . 4. Design Flexural Strength . . . . . . 5. Design Shear Strength . . . . . . . 6. Combined Flexure and Axial Force
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
118 118 118 118 119 120 120
G. PLATE GIRDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 G1.
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
G2.
Design Flexural Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
G3.
Design Shear Strength with Tension Field Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 12
TABLE OF CONTENTS
G4.
Transverse Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
G5.
Flexure-Shear Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
H. MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION . . . . . . . . . . 127 H3. J.
Alternative Interaction Equations for Members Under Combined Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 J2. J3.
Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Design Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolts and Threaded Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical Connections . . . . . 9. Combined Tension and Shear in Slip-Critical Connections
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
129 129 130 130 130
K. CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE . . . . . . . . . . . 132 K2. Ponding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 K3.
Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Loading Conditions; Type and Location of Material 2. Design Stress Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Design Strength of Bolts in Tension . . . . . . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
135 135 135 135
NUMERICAL VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 COMMENTARY A. GENERAL PROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 A1. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
B.
C.
A2.
Limits of Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 2. Types of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
A3.
Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . 3. Bolts, Washers, and Nuts . . . . . 4. Anchor Bolts and Threaded Rods 5. Filler Metal and Flux for Welding
A4.
Loads and Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 1. Loads, Load Factors, and Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 2. Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
A5.
Design Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Required Strength at Factored Loads . . . . . . . 2. Limit States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Design for Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Design for Serviceability and Other Considerations
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
163 163 164 165 165
167 167 167 168 171
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 B2.
Net Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
B3.
Effective Net Area for Tension Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
B5. B7.
Local Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Limiting Slenderness Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 C1.
Second Order Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
C2. Frame Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TENSION MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1. Design Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2. Built-Up Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3. Pin-Connected Members and Eyebars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS . . . . . . E1. Effective Length and Slenderness Limitations . . . . . . . . . 1. Effective Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Design by Plastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2. Design Compressive Strength for Flexural Buckling . . . . . . E3. Design Compressive Strength for Flexural-Torsional Buckling E4. Built-Up Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . F1. Design for Flexure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Yielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F2. Design for Shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F4. Beams and Girders with Web Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . H. MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION . . . . H1. Symmetric Members Subject to Bending and Axial Force . . . H2. Unsymmetric Members and Members Under Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear, and/or Axial Force . . . . . I. COMPOSITE MEMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I1. Design Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I2. Compression Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Design Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Columns with Multiple Steel Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Load Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I3. Flexural Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Effective Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Strength of Beams with Shear Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Strength of Concrete-Encased Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Strength During Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Formed Steel Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Design Shear Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I4. Combined Compression and Flexure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I5. Shear Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Horizontal Shear Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Strength of Stud Shear Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Strength of Channel Shear Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Shear-Connector Placement and Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . I6. Special Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
183 191 191 191 191 192 192 192 192 192 193 194 195 195 195 195 199 200 201 201
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202 203 203 204 204 205 205 205 205 205 206 209 210 210 212 213 213 213 214 214 214 214 215
6 - 14
J.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 J1.
General Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Splices in Heavy Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. Placement of Welds and Bolts . . . . . . . . . . 9. Bolts in Combination with Welds . . . . . . . . 10. High-Strength Bolts in Combination with Rivets
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
216 216 217 217 219
J2.
Welds . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Groove Welds . . . . . 2. Fillet Welds . . . . . . 4. Design Strength . . . . 5. Combination of Welds 7. Mixed Weld Metal . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
219 219 219 222 223 223
J3.
Bolts and Threaded Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. High-Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Size and Use of Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Minimum Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Minimum Edge Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Maximum Spacing and Edge Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Design Tension or Shear Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Combined Tension and Shear in Bearing-Type Connections 8. High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical Connections . . . . . . 10. Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. Long Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
223 223 224 224 224 225 225 226 226 227 228
J4.
Design Rupture Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
J5.
Connecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 2. Design Strength of Connecting Elements in Tension . . . . . . . . . . . 229
J6.
Fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
J8.
Bearing Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
J9.
Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
J10. Anchor Bolts and Embedments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 K. CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE . . . . . . . . . . . 231
L.
K1.
Flanges and Webs with Concentrated Forces 1. Design Basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Local Flange Bending . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Local Web Yielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Web Crippling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Sidesway Web Buckling . . . . . . . . . . 6. Compression Buckling of the Web . . . . . 7. Panel-Zone Web Shear . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
231 231 231 231 232 232 233 234
K2.
Ponding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
SERVICEABILITY DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 L1.
Camber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
L2.
Expansion and Contraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
L3.
Deflections, Vibration, and Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 1. Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. Floor Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Drift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L5. Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M. FABRICATION, ERECTION, AND QUALITY CONTROL . . . . . . . . M2. Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Cambering, Curving, and Straightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Thermal Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Bolted Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M3. Shop Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M4. Erection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fit of Column Compression Joints and Base Plates . . . . . . . . . 5. Field Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B5. Local Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Classification of Steel Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX E. COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS . . . E3. Design Compressive Strength for Flexural-Torsional Buckling . . . APPENDIX F. BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS . . . . . . . . F1. Design for Flexure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F3. Web-Tapered Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Design Compressive Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Design Flexural Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX G. PLATE GIRDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G2. Design Flexural Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX H. MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION H3. Alternative Interaction Equations for Members Under Combined Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX J. CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . J2. Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Design Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX K. CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE . K3. Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 240 . 241 . 241 . 242 . 242 . 242 . 242 . 242 . 243 . 243 . 243 . 243 . 243 . 244 . 244 . 244 . 245 . 245 . 246 . 246 . 247 . 247 . 247 . 248 . 249 . 249 . 250
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. 250 . 251 . 251 . 251 . 254 . 254 . 257 . 267
6 - 16
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 17
Symbols The section number in parentheses after the definition of a symbol refers to the section where the symbol is first defined. A AB Ab Ac Ac AD Ae Af Afe Afg Afn Ag Agt Agv An Ant Anv Apb Ar As Asc Asf Aw A1 A2 B B B1, B2 CPG Cb Cm
Cross-sectional area, in.2 (F1.2) Loaded area of concrete, in.2 (I2.4) Nominal body area of a fastener, in.2 (J3.7) Area of concrete, in.2 (I2.2) Area of concrete slab within effective width, in.2 (I5.2) Area of an upset rod based on the major diameter of its threads, in.2 (J3.6) Effective net area, in.2 (B3) Area of flange, in.2 (Appendix F3) Effective tension flange area, in.2 (B10) Gross area of flange, in.2 (B10) Net area of flange, in.2 (B10) Gross area, in.2 (A5) Gross area subject to tension, in.2 (J4.3) Gross area subject to shear, in.2 (J4.3) Net area, in.2 (B2) Net area subject to tension, in.2 (J4.2) Net area subject to shear, in.2 (J4.1) Projected bearing area, in.2 (J8.1) Area of reinforcing bars, in.2 (I2.2) Area of steel cross section, in.2 (I2.2) Cross-sectional area of stud shear connector, in.2 (I5.3) Shear area on the failure path, in.2 (D3) Web area, in.2 (F2.1) Area of steel bearing concentrically on a concrete support, in.2 (J9) Total cross-sectional area of a concrete support, in.2 (J9) Factor for bending stress in tees and double angles (F1.2) Factor for bending stress in web-tapered members, in., defined by Equations A-F3-8 through A-F3-11 (Appendix F3) Factors used in determining Mu for combined bending and axial forces when first-order analysis is employed (C1) Plate-girder coefficient (Appendix G2) Bending coefficient dependent on moment gradient (F1.2a) Coefficient applied to bending term in interaction formula for prismatic members and dependent on column curvature caused by applied moments (C1) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 18
Cm′ Cp Cs Cv Cw D D D E E Ec Em FBM FEXX FL Fbγ Fcr Fcrft, Fcry, Fcrz Fe Fex Fey Fez Fmy Fn Fr Fsγ Fu Fw Fwγ Fy
Fyf Fyr Fyst
SYMBOLS
Coefficient applied to bending term in interaction formula for tapered members and dependent on axial stress at the small end of the member (Appendix F3) Ponding flexibility coefficient for primary member in a flat roof (K2) Ponding flexibility coefficient for secondary member in a flat roof (K2) Ratio of “critical” web stress, according to linear buckling theory, to the shear yield stress of web material (Appendix G3) Warping constant, in.6 (F1.2) Outside diameter of circular hollow section, in. (Appendix B5.3) Dead load due to the weight of the structural elements and permanent features on the structure (A4.1) Factor used in Equation A-G4-2, dependent on the type of transverse stiffeners used in a plate girder (Appendix G4) Modulus of elasticity of steel (E = 29,000 ksi) (E2) Earthquake load (A4.1) Modulus of elasticity of concrete, ksi (I2.2) Modified modulus of elasticity, ksi (I2.2) Nominal strength of the base material to be welded, ksi (J2.4) Classification number of weld metal (minimum specified strength), ksi (J2.4) Smaller of (Fyf −Fr ) or Fyw, ksi (F1.2) Flexural stress for tapered members defined by Equations A-F3-4 and A-F3-5 (Appendix F3) Critical stress, ksi (E2) Flexural-torsional buckling stresses for double-angle and tee-shaped compression members, ksi (E3) Elastic buckling stress, ksi (Appendix E3) Elastic flexural buckling stress about the major axis, ksi (Appendix E3) Elastic flexural buckling stress about the minor axis, ksi (Appendix E3) Elastic torsional buckling stress, ksi (Appendix E3) Modified yield stress for composite columns, ksi (I2.2) Nominal shear rupture strength, ksi (J4) Compressive residual stress in flange (10 ksi for rolled; 16.5 ksi for welded), ksi (Table B5.1) Stress for tapered members defined by Equation A-F3-6, ksi (Appendix F3) Specified minimum tensile strength of the type of steel being used, ksi (B10) Nominal strength of the weld electrode material, ksi (J2.4) Stress for tapered members defined by Equation A-F3-7, ksi (Appendix F3) Specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used, ksi. As used in this Specification, “yield stress” denotes either the specified minimum yield point (for those steels that have a yield point) or specified yield strength (for those steels that do not have a yield point) (A5) Specified minimum yield stress of the flange, ksi (Table B5.1) Specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing bars, ksi (I2.2) Specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener material, ksi (Appendix G4) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SYMBOLS
Fyw G H H Hs I Id Ip Is Ist Iyc J K Kz Kγ L L L Lb Lc Le Lp Lp Lpd Lr Lr Ls MA MB MC Mcr Mlt Mmax Mn M′n x , M′n y
6 - 19
Specified minimum yield stress of the web, ksi (Table B5.1) Shear modulus of elasticity of steel, ksi (G = 11,200) (F1.2) Horizontal force, kips (C1) Flexural constant (E3) Length of stud connector after welding, in. (I3.5) Moment of inertia, in.4 (F1.2) Moment of inertia of the steel deck supported on secondary members, in.4 (K2) Moment of inertia of primary members, in.4 (K2) Moment of inertia of secondary members, in.4 (K2) Moment of inertia of a transverse stiffener, in.4 (Appendix G4) Moment of inertia about y axis referred to compression flange, or if reverse curvature bending referred to smaller flange, in.4 (Appendix F1) Torsional constant for a section, in.4 (F1.2) Effective length factor for prismatic member (B7) Effective length factor for torsional buckling (Appendix E3) Effective length factor for a tapered member (Appendix F3) Story height, in. (C1) Length of connection in the direction of loading, in. (B3) Live load due to occupancy and moveable equipment (A4.1) Laterally unbraced length; length between points which are either braced against lateral displacement of compression flange or braced against twist of the cross section, in. (F1.2) Length of channel shear connector, in. (I5.4) Edge distance, in. (J3.10) Limiting laterally unbraced length for full plastic bending capacity, uniform moment case (Cb = 1.0), in. (F1.2) Column spacing in direction of girder, ft (K2) Limiting laterally unbraced length for plastic analysis, in. (F1.2) Limiting laterally unbraced length for inelastic lateral-torsional buckling, in. (F1.2) Roof live load (A4.1) Column spacing perpendicular to direction of girder, ft (K2) Absolute value of moment at quarter point of the unbraced beam segment, kip-in. (F1.2) Absolute value of moment at centerline of the unbraced beam segment, kip-in. (F1.2) Absolute value of moment at three-quarter point of the unbraced beam segment, kip-in. (F1.2) Elastic buckling moment, kip-in. (F1.2) Required flexural strength in member due to lateral frame translation only, kip-in. (C1) Absolute value of maximum moment in the unbraced beam segment, kip-in. (F1.2) Nominal flexural strength, kip-in. (F1.1) Flexural strength defined in Equations A-H3-7 and A-H3-8 for use in alternate interaction equations for combined bending and axial force, kip-in. (Appendix H3) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 20
Mnt Mp Mp′ Mr Mu My
M1 M2 N Nr Pe1 , Pe2 Pn Pp Pu Py Q Qa Qn Qs R RPG Re Rn Rv S S S Sx′ Seff Sxt , Sxc T Tb Tu U Vn
SYMBOLS
Required flexural strength in member assuming there is no lateral translation of the frame, kip-in. (C1) Plastic bending moment, kip-in. (F1.1) Moment defined in Equations A-H3-5 and A-H3-6, for use in alternate interaction equations for combined bending and axial force, kip-in. (Appendix H3) Limiting buckling moment, Mcr, when λ = λr and Cb = 1.0, kip-in. (F1.2) Required flexural strength, kip-in. (C1) Moment corresponding to onset of yielding at the extreme fiber from an elastic stress distribution (= Fy S for homogeneous sections), kip-in. (F1.1) Smaller moment at end of unbraced length of beam or beam-column, kip-in. Larger moment at end of unbraced length of beam or beam-column, kip-in. Length of bearing, in. (K1.3) Number of stud connectors in one rib at a beam intersection (I3.5) Elastic Euler buckling load for braced and unbraced frame, respectively, kips (C1) Nominal axial strength (tension or compression), kips (D1) Bearing load on concrete, kips (J9) Required axial strength (tension or compression), kips (Table B5.1) Yield strength, kips (Table B5.1) Full reduction factor for slender compression elements (Appendix E3) Reduction factor for slender stiffened compression elements (Appendix B5) Nominal strength of one stud shear connector, kips (I5) Reduction factor for slender unstiffened compression elements (Appendix B5.3) Load due to initial rainwater or ice exclusive of the ponding contribution (A4.1) Plate girder bending strength reduction factor (Appendix G) Hybrid girder factor (Appendix F1) Nominal strength (A5.3) Web shear strength, kips (K1.7) Elastic section modulus, in.3 (F1.2) Spacing of secondary members, ft (K2) Snow load (A4.1) Elastic section modulus of larger end of tapered member about its major axis, in.3 (Appendix F3) Effective section modulus about major axis, in.3 (Appendix F1) Elastic section modulus referred to tension and compression flanges, respectively, in.3 (Appendix F1) Tension force due to service loads, kips (J3.9) Specified pretension load in high-strength bolt, kips (J3.9) Required tensile strength due to factored loads, kips (Appendix J3.9b) Reduction coefficient, used in calculating effective net area (B3) Nominal shear strength, kips (F2.2) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SYMBOLS
Vu W X1 X2 Z a a a ar a′ b be beff bf c1, c2, c3 d d d d dL db dc do e f fb1 fb2 fc′ fo fun fuv fv g h
h hc
6 - 21
Required shear strength, kips (Appendix G4) Wind load (A4.1) Beam buckling factor defined by Equation F1-8 (F1.2) Beam buckling factor defined by Equation F1-9 (F1.2) Plastic section modulus, in.3 (F1.1) Clear distance between transverse stiffeners, in. (Appendix F2.2) Distance between connectors in a built-up member, in. (E4) Shortest distance from edge of pin hole to edge of member measured parallel to direction of force, in. (D3) Ratio of web area to compression flange area (Appendix G2) Weld length, in. (B10) Compression element width, in. (B5.1) Reduced effective width for slender compression elements, in. (Appendix B5.3) Effective edge distance, in. (D3) Flange width, in. (B5.1) Numerical coefficients (I2.2) Nominal fastener diameter, in. (J3.3) Overall depth of member, in. (B5.1) Pin diameter, in. (D3) Roller diameter, in. (J8.2) Depth at larger end of unbraced tapered segment, in. (Appendix F3) Beam depth, in. (K1.7) Column depth, in. (K1.7) Depth at smaller end of unbraced tapered segment, in. (Appendix F3) Base of natural logarithm = 2.71828. . . Computed compressive stress in the stiffened element, ksi (Appendix B5.3) Smallest computed bending stress at one end of a tapered segment, ksi (Appendix F3) Largest computed bending stress at one end of a tapered segment, ksi (Appendix F3) Specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi (I2.2) Stress due to 1.2D + 1.2R, ksi (Appendix K2) Required normal stress, ksi (H2) Required shear stress, ksi (H2) Required shear stress due to factored loads in bolts or rivets, ksi (J3.7) Transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between fastener gage lines, in. (B2) Clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius for rolled shapes; and for built-up sections, the distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear distance between flanges when welds are used, in. (B5.1) Distance between centroids of individual components perpendicular to the member axis of buckling, in. (E4) Twice the distance from the centroid to the following: the inside face of the compression flange less the fillet or corner radius, for rolled shapes; the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside faces AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 22
hr hs hw j k kv l l l l m r rTo ri rib rm _ ro rox , roy rx, ry ryc s t tf tf tw tw w w wr x _xo, yo x y z
SYMBOLS
of the compression flange when welds are used, for built-up sections, in., (B5.1) Nominal rib height, in. (I3.5) Factor used in Equation A-F3-6 for web-tapered members (Appendix F3) Factor used in Equation A-F3-7 for web-tapered members (Appendix F3) Factor defined by Equation A-F2-4 for minimum moment of inertia for a transverse stiffener (Appendix F2.3) Distance from outer face of flange to web toe of fillet, in. (K1.3) Web plate buckling coefficient (Appendix F2.2) Laterally unbraced length of member at the point of load, in. (B7) Length of bearing, in. (J8.2) Length of connection in the direction of loading, in. (B3) Length of weld, in. (B3) Ratio of web to flange yield stress or critical stress in hybrid beams (Appendix G2) Governing radius of gyration, in. (B7) For the smaller end of a tapered member, the radius of gyration, considering only the compression flange plus one-third of the compression web area, taken about an axis in the plane of the web, in. (Appendix F3.4) Minimum radius of gyration of individual component in a built-up member, in. (E4) Radius of gyration of individual component relative to centroidal axis parallel to member axis of buckling, in. (E4) Radius of gyration of the steel shape, pipe, or tubing in composite columns. For steel shapes it may not be less than 0.3 times the overall thickness of the composite section, in. (I2) Polar radius of gyration about the shear center, in. (E3) Radius of gyration about x and y axes at the smaller end of a tapered member, respectively, in. (Appendix F3.3) Radius of gyration about x and y axes, respectively, in. (E3) Radius of gyration about y axis referred to compression flange, or if reverse curvature bending, referred to smaller flange, in. (Appendix F1) Longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of any two consecutive holes, in. (B2) Thickness of connected part, in. (D3) Flange thickness, in. (B5.1) Flange thickness of channel shear connector, in. (I5.4) Web thickness of channel shear connector, in. (I5.4) Web thickness, in. (B5.3) Plate width; distance between welds, in. (B3) Unit weight of concrete, lbs/cu ft. (I2) Average width of concrete rib or haunch, in. (I3.5) Subscript relating symbol to strong axis bending Coordinates of the shear center with respect to the centroid, in. (E3) Connection eccentricity, in. (B3) Subscript relating symbol to weak axis bending Distance from the smaller end of tapered member used in Equation A-F3-1 for the variation in depth, in. (Appendix F3) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SYMBOLS
α ∆oh γ ζ η λc λe λeff λp λr φ φb φc φc φsf φt φv
6 - 23
h (E4) 2rib Translation deflection of the story under consideration, in. (C1) Depth tapering ratio (Appendix F3). Subscript for tapered members (Appendix F3) Exponent for alternate beam-column interaction equation (Appendix H3) Exponent for alternate beam-column interaction equation (Appendix H3) Column slenderness parameter (C1) Equivalent slenderness parameter (Appendix E3) Effective slenderness ratio defined by Equation A-F3-2 (Appendix F3) Limiting slenderness parameter for compact element (B5.1) Limiting slenderness parameter for noncompact element (B5.1) Resistance factor (A5.3) Resistance factor for flexure (F1) Resistance factor for compression (A5) Resistance factor for axially loaded composite columns (I2.2) Resistance factor for shear on the failure path (D3) Resistance factor for tension (D1) Resistance factor for shear (F2.2)
Separation ratio for built-up compression members =
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 24
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 25
CHAPTER A GENERAL PROVISIONS
A1. SCOPE The Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings governs the design, fabrication, and erection of steel-framed buildings. As an alternative, the AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design is permitted. A2. LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY 1.
Structural Steel Defined As used in this Specification, the term structural steel refers to the steel elements of the structural steel frame essential to the support of the required loads. Such elements are enumerated in Section 2.1 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. For the design of cold-formed steel structural members, whose profiles contain rounded corners and slender flat elements, the provisions of the American Iron and Steel Institute Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members are recommended.
2.
Types of Construction Two basic types of construction and associated design assumptions are permissible under the conditions stated herein, and each will govern in a specific manner the strength of members and the types and strength of their connections. Type FR (fully restrained), commonly designated as “rigid-frame” (continuous frame), assumes that connections have sufficient rigidity to maintain the angles between intersecting members. Type PR (partially restrained) assumes that connections have insufficient rigidity to maintain the angles between intersecting members. The type of construction assumed in the design shall be indicated on the design documents. The design of all connections shall be consistent with the assumption. Type PR construction under this Specification depends upon a predictable proportion of full end restraint. When a portion of the full end restraint of members is used in the design for strength of the connected members or for the stability of the structure as a whole, the capacity of the connections to provide the needed restraint shall be documented in the technical literature or established by analytical or empirical means. When the connection restraint is ignored, commonly designated “simple framAMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 26
GENERAL PROVISIONS
[Chap. A
ing,” it is assumed that for the transmission of gravity loads the ends of the beams and girders are connected for shear only and are free to rotate. For “simple framing” the following requirements apply: (1) The connections and connected members shall be adequate to resist the factored gravity loads as “simple beams.” (2) The connections and connected members shall be adequate to resist the factored lateral loads. (3) The connections shall have sufficient inelastic rotation capacity to avoid overload of fasteners or welds under combined factored gravity and lateral loading. Type PR construction may necessitate some inelastic, but self-limiting, deformation of a structural steel part. A3. MATERIAL 1.
Structural Steel
1a.
ASTM Designations Material conforming to one of the following standard specifications is approved for use under this Specification: Structural Steel, ASTM A36 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless ASTM A53, Gr. B High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel, ASTM A242 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes, ASTM A500 Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing, ASTM A501 High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding, ASTM A514 High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality, ASTM A529 Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality, ASTM A570, Gr. 40, 45, and 50 High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality, ASTM A572 High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 ksi Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. Thick, ASTM A588 Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and ColdRolled, with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance, ASTM A606 Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Columbium or Vanadium, or Both, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, ASTM A607 Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing, ASTM A618 Structural Steel for Bridges, ASTM A709 Quenched and Tempered Low-Alloy Structural Steel Plate with 70 ksi Minimum Yield Strength to 4-in. Thick, ASTM A852 Certified mill test reports or certified reports of tests made by the fabricator or AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A3]
MATERIAL
6 - 27
a testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM A6 or A568, as applicable, shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity with one of the above ASTM standards. If requested, the fabricator shall provide an affidavit stating that the structural steel furnished meets the requirements of the grade specified. 1b.
Unidentified Steel Unidentified steel, if surface conditions are acceptable according to criteria contained in ASTM A6, may be used for unimportant members or details, where the precise physical properties and weldability of the steel would not affect the strength of the structure.
1c.
Heavy Shapes For ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 rolled shapes to be used as members subject to primary tensile stresses due to tension or flexure, toughness need not be specified if splices are made by bolting. If such members are spliced using complete-joint penetration welds, the steel shall be specified in the contract documents to be supplied with Charpy V-Notch testing in accordance with ASTM A6, Supplementary Requirement S5. The impact test shall meet a minimum average value of 20 ft-lbs. absorbed energy at +70°F and shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM A673 with the following exceptions: (1) The center longitudinal axis of the specimens shall be located as near as practical to midway between the inner flange surface and the center of the flange thickness at the intersection with the web mid-thickness. (2) Tests shall be conducted by the producer on material selected from a location representing the top of each ingot or part of an ingot used to produce the product represented by these tests. For plates exceeding 2-in. thick used for built-up cross-sections with bolted splices and subject to primary tensile stresses due to tension or flexure, material toughness need not be specified. If such cross-sections are spliced using complete-joint penetration welds, the steel shall be specified in the contract documents to be supplied with Charpy V-Notch testing in accordance with ASTM A6, Supplementary Requirement S5. The impact test shall be conducted by the producer in accordance with ASTM A673, Frequency P, and shall meet a minimum average value of 20 ft-lbs. absorbed energy at +70°F. The above supplementary requirements also apply when complete-joint penetration welded joints through the thickness of ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and built-up cross sections with thickness exceeding two inches are used in connections subjected to primary tensile stress due to tension or flexure of such members. The requirements need not apply to ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and built-up members with thickness exceeding two inches to which members other than ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and built-up members are connected by complete-joint penetration welded joints through the thickness of the thinner material to the face of the heavy material. Additional requirements for joints in heavy rolled and built-up members are given in Sections J1.5, J1.6, J2, and M2.2. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 28
2.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
[Chap. A
Steel Castings and Forgings Cast steel shall conform to one of the following standard specifications: Mild-to-Medium-Strength Carbon-Steel Castings for General Applications, ASTM A27, Gr. 65-35 High-Strength Steel Castings for Structural Purposes, ASTM A148 Gr. 80-50 Steel forgings shall conform to the following standard specification: Steel Forgings Carbon and Alloy for General Industrial Use, ASTM A668 Certified test reports shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity with standards.
3.
Bolts, Washers, and Nuts Steel bolts, washers, and nuts shall conform to one of the following standard specifications: Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service, ASTM A194 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength, ASTM A307 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, ASTM A325 Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs, ASTM A449 Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Min. Tensile Strength, ASTM A490 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts, ASTM A563 Hardened Steel Washers, ASTM F436 A449 bolts are permitted to be used only in connections requiring bolt diameters greater than 11⁄2-in. and shall not be used in slip-critical connections. Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity with the standards.
4.
Anchor Bolts and Threaded Rods Anchor bolt and threaded rod steel shall conform to one of the following standard specifications: Structural Steel, ASTM A36 Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service, ASTM A193 Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners, ASTM A354 High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality, ASTM A572 High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50,000 psi Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. Thick, ASTM A588 High-Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts and Studs, ASTM A687 Threads on bolts and rods shall conform to the Unified Standard Series of ANSI B18.1 and shall have Class 2A tolerances. Steel bolts conforming to other provisions of Section A3.3 are permitted as AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A4]
LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS
6 - 29
anchor bolts. A449 material is acceptable for high-strength anchor bolts and threaded rods of any diameter. Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity with the standards. 5.
Filler Metal and Flux for Welding Welding electrodes and fluxes shall conform to one of the following specifications of the American Welding Society: Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shield Metal Arc Welding, AWS A5.1 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes, AWS A5.5 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding, AWS A5.17 Specification for Carbon Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding, AWS A5.18 Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding, AWS A5.20 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding, AWS A5.23 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Arc Welding, AWS A5.28 Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding, AWS A5.29 Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity with the standards. Electrodes (filler metals) that are suitable for the intended application shall be selected. Weld metal notch toughness is generally not critical for building construction.
6.
Stud Shear Connectors Steel stud shear connectors shall conform to the requirements of Structural Welding Code—Steel, AWS D1.1. Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute sufficient evidence of conformity with the code.
A4. LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS The nominal loads shall be the minimum design loads stipulated by the applicable code under which the structure is designed or dictated by the conditions involved. In the absence of a code, the loads and load combinations shall be those stipulated in the American Society of Civil Engineers Standard Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE 7. For design purposes, the loads stipulated by the applicable code shall be taken as nominal loads. For ease of reference, the more common ASCE load combinations are listed in the following section. Seismic design of buildings assigned to the higher risk Seismic Performance Categories defined in the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings shall comply with that document. Seismic design not covered by the AISC AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 30
GENERAL PROVISIONS
[Chap. A
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings shall be in accordance with this Specification. 1.
Loads, Load Factors, and Load Combinations The following nominal loads are to be considered: D : dead load due to the weight of the structural elements and the permanent features on the structure L : live load due to occupancy and moveable equipment Lr : roof live load W : wind load S : snow load E : earthquake load determined in accordance with Part I of the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings R : load due to initial rainwater or ice exclusive of the ponding contribution The required strength of the structure and its elements must be determined from the appropriate critical combination of factored loads. The most critical effect may occur when one or more loads are not acting. The following load combinations and the corresponding load factors shall be investigated: 1.4D
(A4-1)
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5(Lr or S or R)
(A4-2)
1.2D + 1.6(Lr or S or R) + (0.5L or 0.8W)
(A4-3)
1.2D + 1.3W + 0.5L + 0.5(Lr or S or R)
(A4-4)
1.2D ± 1.0E + 0.5L + 0.2S
(A4-5)
0.9D ± (1.3W or 1.0E)
(A4-6)
Exception: The load factor on L in combinations A4-3, A4-4, and A4-5 shall equal 1.0 for garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly, and all areas where the live load is greater than 100 psf. 2.
Impact For structures carrying live loads which induce impact, the assumed nominal live load shall be increased to provide for this impact in combinations A4-2 and A4-3. If not otherwise specified, the increase shall be: For supports of elevators and elevator machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100% For supports of light machinery, shaft or motor driven, not less than . . . . 20% For supports of reciprocating machinery or power driven units, not less than. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50% For hangers supporting floors and balconies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33% For cab-operated traveling crane support girders and their connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25% For pendant-operated traveling crane support girders and their connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10% AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A5]
3.
DESIGN BASIS
6 - 31
Crane Runway Horizontal Forces The nominal lateral force on crane runways to provide for the effect of moving crane trolleys shall be a minimum of 20 percent of the sum of weights of the lifted load and of the crane trolley, but exclusive of other parts of the crane. The force shall be assumed to be applied at the top of the rails, acting in either direction normal to the runway rails, and shall be distributed with due regard for lateral stiffness of the structure supporting the rails. The nominal longitudinal force shall be a minimum of 10 percent of the maximum wheel loads of the crane applied at the top of the rail, unless otherwise specified.
A5. DESIGN BASIS 1.
Required Strength at Factored Loads The required strength of structural members and connections shall be determined by structural analysis for the appropriate factored load combinations given in Section A4. Design by either elastic or plastic analysis is permitted, except that design by plastic analysis is permitted only for steels with specified yield stresses not exceeding 65 ksi and is subject to provisions of Sections B5.2, C2, E1.2, F1.2d, H1, and I1. Beams and girders composed of compact sections, as defined in Section B5.1, and satisfying the unbraced length requirements of Section F1.2d (including composite members) which are continuous over supports or are rigidly framed to columns may be proportioned for nine-tenths of the negative moments produced by gravity loading at points of support, provided that the maximum positive moment is increased by one-tenth of the average negative moments. This reduction is not permitted for hybrid beams, members of A514 steel, or moments produced by loading on cantilevers. If the negative moment is resisted by a column rigidly framed to the beam or girder, the one-tenth reduction may be used in proportioning the column for combined axial force and flexure, provided that the axial force does not exceed φc times 0.15AgFy, where Ag = gross area, in.2 Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi φc = resistance factor for compression
2.
Limit States LRFD is a method of proportioning structures so that no applicable limit state is exceeded when the structure is subjected to all appropriate factored load combinations. Strength limit states are related to safety and concern maximum load carrying capacity. Serviceability limit states are related to performance under normal service conditions. The term “resistance” includes both strength limit states and serviceability limit states. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 32
3.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
[Chap. A
Design for Strength The design strength of each structural component or assemblage must equal or exceed the required strength based on the factored loads. The design strength φRn for each applicable limit state is calculated as the nominal strength Rn multiplied by a resistance factor φ. The required strength is determined for each applicable load combination as stipulated in Section A4. Nominal strengths Rn and resistance factors φ are given in Chapters D through K.
4.
Design for Serviceability and Other Considerations The overall structure and the individual members, connections, and connectors shall be checked for serviceability. Provisions for design for serviceability are given in Chapter L.
A6. REFERENCED CODES AND STANDARDS The following documents are referenced in this Specification: American National Standards Institute ANSI B18.1-72 American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE 7-88 American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM A6-91b ASTM A27-87 ASTM A53-88 ASTM A148-84 ASTM A194-91 ASTM A242-91a ASTM A325-91c ASTM A354-91 ASTM A490-91 ASTM A500-90a ASTM A502-91 ASTM A514-91 ASTM A563-91c ASTM A570-91 ASTM A588-91a ASTM A606-91a ASTM A618-90a ASTM A668-85a ASTM A709-91 ASTM A852-91 ASTM C330-89 ASTM F436-91 American Welding Society AWS D1.1-92 AWS A5.1-91 AWS A5.17-89 AWS A5.18-79 AWS A5.23-90 AWS A5.28-79
ASTM A36-91 ASTM A193-91 ASTM A307-91 ASTM A449-91a ASTM A501-89 ASTM A529-89 ASTM A572-91 ASTM A607-91 ASTM A687-89 ASTM C33-90
AWS A5.5-81 AWS A5.20-79 AWS A5.29-80
Research Council on Structural Connections Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, 1988 American Iron and Steel Institute Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Members, 1991 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A7]
DESIGN DOCUMENTS
6 - 33
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, 1992 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, 1992 Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members, 1993 A7. DESIGN DOCUMENTS 1.
Plans The design plans shall show a complete design with sizes, sections, and relative locations of the various members. Floor levels, column centers and offsets shall be dimensioned. Drawings shall be drawn to a scale large enough to show the information clearly. Design documents shall indicate the type or types of construction as defined in Section A2.2 and include the required strengths (moments and forces) if necessary for preparation of shop drawings. Where joints are to be assembled with high-strength bolts, the design documents shall indicate the connection type (i.e., snug-tight bearing, fully-tensioned bearing, direct tension, or slip-critical). Camber of trusses, beams, and girders, if required, shall be specified in the design documents. The requirements for stiffeners and bracing shall be shown in the design documents.
2.
Standard Symbols and Nomenclature Welding and inspection symbols used on plans and shop drawings shall be the American Welding Society symbols. Welding symbols for special requirements not covered by AWS is permitted to be used provided a complete explanation thereof is shown in the design documents.
3.
Notation for Welding Weld lengths called for in the design documents and on the shop drawings shall be the net effective lengths.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 34
CHAPTER B DESIGNREQUIREMENTS REQUIREMENTS DESIGN
This chapter contains provisions which are common to the Specification as a whole. B1. GROSS AREA The gross area Ag of a member at any point is the sum of the products of the thickness and the gross width of each element measured normal to the axis of the member. For angles, the gross width is the sum of the widths of the legs less the thickness. B2. NET AREA The net area An of a member is the sum of the products of the thickness and the net width of each element computed as follows: In computing net area for tension and shear, the width of a bolt hole shall be taken as 1⁄16-in. greater than the nominal dimension of the hole. For a chain of holes extending across a part in any diagonal or zigzag line, the net width of the part shall be obtained by deducting from the gross width the sum of the diameters or slot dimensions as provided in Section J3.2, of all holes in the chain, and adding, for each gage space in the chain, the quantity s2 / 4g where s = longitudinal center-to-center spacing (pitch) of any two consecutive holes, in. g = transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between fastener gage lines, in. For angles, the gage for holes in opposite adjacent legs shall be the sum of the gages from the back of the angles less the thickness. In determining the net area across plug or slot welds, the weld metal shall not be considered as adding to the net area. B3. EFFECTIVE NET AREA FOR TENSION MEMBERS The effective net area for tension members shall be determined as follows: 1. When a tension load is transmitted directly to each of the cross-sectional elements by fasteners or welds, the effective net area Ae is equal to the net area An. 2. When a tension load is transmitted by bolts or rivets through some but not AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. B4]
STABILITY
6 - 35
all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, the effective net area Ae shall be computed as: Ae = AU
(B3-1)
where A U _ x L
= area as defined below = reduction coefficient _ = 1 − (x / L) ≤ 0.9 or as defined in B3c or B3d = connection eccentricity, in. = length of connection in the directions of loading, in.
(B3-2)
Larger values of U are permitted to be used when justified by tests or other rational criteria. (a) When the tension load is transmitted only by bolts or rivets: A = An = net area of member, in.2 (b) When the tension load is transmitted only by longitudinal welds to other than a plate member or by longitudinal welds in combination with transverse welds: A = Ag = gross area of member, in.2 (c) When the tension load is transmitted only by transverse welds: A = area of directly connected elements, in.2 U = 1.0 (d) When the tension load is transmitted to a plate by longitudinal welds along both edges at the end of the plate for l ≥ w: A = area of plate, in.2 For l ≥ 2w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . U = 1.00 For 2w > l ≥ 1.5w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . U = 0.87 For 1.5w > l ≥ w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . U = 0.75 where l = length of weld, in. w = plate width (distance between welds), in. For effective area of connecting elements, see Section J5.2. B4. STABILITY General stability shall be provided for the structure as a whole and for each of its elements. Consideration shall be given to the significant effects of the loads on the deflected shape of the structure and its individual elements. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 36
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
[Chap. B
B5. LOCAL BUCKLING 1.
Classification of Steel Sections Steel sections are classified as compact, noncompact, or slender-element sections. For a section to qualify as compact, its flanges must be continuously connected to the web or webs and the width-thickness ratios of its compression elements must not exceed the limiting width-thickness ratios λp from Table B5.1. If the width-thickness ratio of one or more compression elements exceeds λp, but does not exceed λr, the section is noncompact. If the width-thickness ratio of any element exceeds λr from Table B5.1, the section is referred to as a slender-element compression section. For unstiffened elements which are supported along only one edge parallel to the direction of the compression force, the width shall be taken as follows: (a) For flanges of I-shaped members and tees, the width b is half the full-flange width, bf . (b) For legs of angles and flanges of channels and zees, the width b is the full nominal dimension. (c) For plates, the width b is the distance from the free edge to the first row of fasteners or line of welds. (d) For stems of tees, d is taken as the full nominal depth. For stiffened elements which are supported along two edges parallel to the direction of the compression force, the width shall be taken as follows: (a) For webs of rolled or formed sections, h is the clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius at each flange; hc is twice the distance from the centroid to the inside face of the compression flange less the fillet or corner radius. (b) For webs of built-up sections, h is the distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear distance between flanges when welds are used, and hc is twice the distance from the centroid to the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression flange when welds are used. (c) For flange or diaphragm plates in built-up sections, the width b is the distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or lines of welds. (d) For flanges of rectangular hollow structural sections, the width b is the clear distance between webs less the inside corner radius on each side. If the corner radius is not known, the width may be taken as the total section width minus three times the thickness. For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the thickness is the nominal value halfway between the free edge and the corresponding face of the web.
2.
Design by Plastic Analysis Design by plastic analysis is permitted when flanges subject to compression involving hinge rotation and all webs have a width-thickness ratio less than or AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. B10]
PROPORTIONS OF BEAMS AND GIRDERS
6 - 37
equal to the limiting λp from Table B5.1. For circular hollow sections see Footnote d of Table B5.1. Design by plastic analysis is subject to the limitations in Section A5.1. 3.
Slender-Element Compression Sections For the flexural design of I-shaped sections, channels and rectangular or circular sections with slender flange elements, see Appendix F1. For other shapes in flexure or members in axial compression that have slender compression elements, see Appendix B5.3. For plate girders with slender web elements, see Appendix G.
B6. BRACING AT SUPPORTS At points of support for beams, girders and trusses, restraint against rotation about their longitudinal axis shall be provided. B7. LIMITING SLENDERNESS RATIOS For members in which the design is based on compression, the slenderness ratio Kl / r preferably should not exceed 200. For members in which the design is based on tension, the slenderness ratio l / r preferably should not exceed 300. The above limitation does not apply to rods in tension. Members in which the design is dictated by tension loading, but which may be subject to some compression under other load conditions, need not satisfy the compression slenderness limit. B8. SIMPLE SPANS Beams, girders and trusses designed on the basis of simple spans shall have an effective length equal to the distance between centers of gravity of the members to which they deliver their end reactions. B9. END RESTRAINT When designed on the assumption of full or partial end restraint due to continuous, semicontinuous, or cantilever action, the beams, girders, and trusses, as well as the sections of the members to which they connect, shall be designed to carry the factored forces and moments so introduced, as well as all other factored forces, without exceeding the design strengths prescribed in Chapters D through K, except that some inelastic but self-limiting deformation of a part of the connection is permitted. B10. PROPORTIONS OF BEAMS AND GIRDERS Rolled or welded shapes, plate girders and cover-plated beams shall, in general, be proportioned by the moment of inertia of the gross section. No deduction shall be made for bolt or rivet holes in either flange provided that 0.75Fu Afn ≥ 0.9Fy Afg
(B10-1)
where Afg is the gross flange area and Afn is the net flange area calculated in AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 38
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
[Chap. B
TABLE B5.1 Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements λp (compact)
λr (non compact)
Flanges of I-shaped rolled beams and channels in flexure
b/t
65 / √ Fy [c]
141 / √ Fy − 10
Flanges of I-shaped hybrid or welded beams in flexure
b/t
65 / √ Fyf
162 [f] √ (Fyf − 16.5) / kc
Flanges projecting from built-up compression members
b/t
NA
109 / √ Fy / kc [f]
Outstanding legs of pairs of angles in continuous contact, flanges of channels in axial compression; angles and plates projecting from beams or compression members
b/t
NA
95 / √ Fy
Legs of single angle struts; legs of double angle struts with separators; unstiffened elements, i.e., supported along one edge
b/t
NA
76 / √ Fy
Stems of tees
d/t
NA
127 / √ Fy
Description of Element
Unstiffened Elements
Limiting WidthThickness Ratios
Width Thickness Ratio
accordance with the provisions of Sections B1 and B2 and Fu is the specified minimum tensile strength. If 0.75Fu Afn < 0.9Fy Afg
(B10-2)
the member flexural properties shall be based on an effective tension flange area Afe Afe =
5 Fu A 6 Fy fn
(B10-3)
Hybrid girders may be proportioned by the moment of inertia of their gross section, subject to the applicable provisions in Appendix G1, provided they are not required to resist an axial force greater than φb times 0.15Fyf Ag, where Fyf is the specified yield stress of the flange material and Ag is the gross area. No limit is placed on the web stresses produced by the applied bending moment for which a hybrid girder is designed, except as provided in Section K3 and Appendix K3. To qualify as hybrid girders, the flanges at any given section shall have the same cross-sectional area and be made of the same grade of steel. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. B10]
PROPORTIONS OF BEAMS AND GIRDERS
6 - 39
TABLE B5.1 (cont.) Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements λp (compact)
λr (non compact)
Flanges of square and rectangular box and hollow structural sections of uniform thickness subject to bending or compression; flange cover plates and diaphragm plates between lines of fasteners or welds
b/t
190 / √ Fy
238 / √ Fy
Unsupported width of cover plates perforated with a succession of access holes [b]
b/t
NA
317 / √ Fy
Webs in flexural compression [a]
h / tw
640 / √ Fy [c]
970 / √ Fy [g]
Webs in combined flexural and axial compression
h / tw
for Pu / φbPy ≤ 0.125 [c] 2.75Pu 640 1− FY √ φbPy
[g]
Description of Element
Stiffened Elements
Limiting WidthThickness Ratios
Width Thickness Ratio
for Pu / φbPy > 0.125 [c] Pu 253 191 ≥ 2.33 − FY √ φbPy √Fy
Pu 970 1 − 0.74 φbPy FY √
253 / √ Fy
All other uniformly compressed stiffened elements, i.e., supported along two edges
b/t h / tw
Circular hollow sections In axial compression In flexure
D/t
[a] For hybrid beams, use the yield strength of the flange Fyf instead of Fy [b] Assumes net area of plate at widest hole. [c] Assumes an inelastic rotation capacity of 3. For structures in zones of high seismicity, a greater rotation capacity may be required. [d] For plastic design use 1,300 / Fy.
[e] Fr = compressive residual stress in flange = 10 ksi for rolled shapes = 16.5 ksi for welded shapes 4 [f] kc = but not less than 0.35 ≤ kc ≤ 0.763 √ h / tw [g] For members with unequal flanges, see Appendix B5.1. Fy is the specified minimum yield stress of the type of steel being used.
NA
[d] NA 2,070 / Fy
3,300 / Fy 8,970 / Fy
Flanges of welded beams or girders may be varied in thickness or width by splicing a series of plates or by the use of cover plates. The total cross-sectional area of cover plates of bolted or riveted girders shall not exceed 70 percent of the total flange area. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 40
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
[Chap. B
High-strength bolts, rivets, or welds connecting flange to web, or cover plate to flange, shall be proportioned to resist the total horizontal shear resulting from the bending forces on the girder. The longitudinal distribution of these bolts, rivets, or intermittent welds shall be in proportion to the intensity of the shear. However, the longitudinal spacing shall not exceed the maximum permitted for compression or tension members in Section E4 or D2, respectively. Bolts, rivets, or welds connecting flange to web shall also be proportioned to transmit to the web any loads applied directly to the flange, unless provision is made to transmit such loads by direct bearing. Partial length cover plates shall be extended beyond the theoretical cutoff point and the extended portion shall be attached to the beam or girder by high-strength bolts in a slip-critical connection, rivets, or fillet welds. The attachment shall be adequate, at the applicable design strength given in Sections J2.2, J3.8, or K3 to develop the cover plate’s portion of the flexural design strength in the beam or girder at the theoretical cutoff point. For welded cover plates, the welds connecting the cover plate termination to the beam or girder in the length a′, defined below, shall be adequate, at the applicable design strength, to develop the cover plate’s portion of the design strength in the beam or girder at the distance a′ from the end of the cover plate. The length a′, measured from the end of the cover plate, shall be: (a) A distance equal to the width of the cover plate when there is a continuous weld equal to or larger than three-fourths of the plate thickness across the end of the plate and continuous welds along both edges of the cover plate in the length a′. (b) A distance equal to one and one-half times the width of the cover plate when there is a continuous weld smaller than three-fourths of the plate thickness across the end of the plate and continuous welds along both edges of the cover plate in the length a′. (c) A distance equal to two times the width of the cover plate when there is no weld across the end of the plate, but continuous welds along both edges of the cover plate in the length a′.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 41
CHAPTER C FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
This chapter contains general requirements for stability of the structure as a whole. C1. SECOND ORDER EFFECTS Second order (P∆) effects shall be considered in the design of frames. In structures designed on the basis of plastic analysis, the required flexural strength Mu shall be determined from a second-order plastic analysis that satisfies the requirements of Section C2. In structures designed on the basis of elastic analysis, Mu for beam-columns, connections, and connected members shall be determined from a second-order elastic analysis or from the following approximate second-order analysis procedure: Mu = B1Mnt + B2Mlt
(C1-1)
where Mnt = required flexural strength in member assuming there is no lateral = translation of the frame, kip-in. Mlt = required flexural strength in member as a result of lateral translation = of the frame only, kip-in. B1 =
Cm ≥1 (1 − Pu / Pe1 )
(C1-2)
Pe1 = AgFy / λ2c where λc is the slenderness parameter, in which the effective = K in the plane of bending shall be determined in accordance with = Section C2.1, for the braced frame.
λc =
Kl rπ
√
Fy E
Pu = required axial compressive strength for the member under = consideration, kips Cm = a coefficient based on elastic first-order analysis assuming no lateral = translation of the frame whose value shall be taken as follows: (a) For compression members not subject to transverse loading between their supports in the plane of bending, Cm = 0.6 − 0.4(M1 / M2) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(C1-3)
6 - 42
FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
[Chap. C
(a) where M1 / M2 is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends of that portion of the member unbraced in the plane of bending under consideration. M1 / M2 is positive when the member is bent in reverse curvature, negative when bent in single curvature. (b) For compression members subjected to transverse loading between their supports, the value of Cm shall be determined either by rational analysis or by the use of the following values: For members whose ends are restrained. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cm = 0.85 For members whose ends are unrestrained. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cm = 1.00 1 ∆oh 1 − ΣPu ΣHL
B2
=
B2
=
ΣPu ∆oh ΣH L Pe2
= required axial strength of all columns in a story, kips = lateral inter-story deflection, in. = sum of all story horizontal forces producing ∆oh, kips = story height, in. = AgFy / λ2c, kips, where λc is the slenderness parameter, in which the = effective length factor K in the plane of bending shall be determined = in accordance with Section C2.2, for the unbraced frame.
(C1-4)
or 1 ΣPu 1− ΣPe2
(C1-5)
C2. FRAME STABILITY 1.
Braced Frames In trusses and frames where lateral stability is provided by diagonal bracing, shear walls, or equivalent means, the effective length factor K for compression members shall be taken as unity, unless structural analysis shows that a smaller value may be used. The vertical bracing system for a braced multistory frame shall be determined by structural analysis to be adequate to prevent buckling of the structure and to maintain the lateral stability of the structure, including the overturning effects of drift, under the factored loads given in Section A4. The vertical bracing system for a multistory frame may be considered to function together with in-plane shear-resisting exterior and interior walls, floor slabs, and roof decks, which are properly secured to the structural frames. The columns, girders, beams, and diagonal members, when used as the vertical bracing system, may be considered to comprise a vertically cantilevered simply connected truss in the analyses for frame buckling and lateral stability. Axial deformation of all members in the vertical bracing system shall be included in the lateral stability analysis. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C2]
FRAME STABILITY
6 - 43
In structures designed on the basis of plastic analysis, the axial force in these members caused by factored gravity plus factored horizontal loads shall not exceed 0.85φc times AgFy. Girders and beams included in the vertical bracing system of a braced multistory frame shall be proportioned for axial force and moment caused by concurrent factored horizontal and gravity loads. 2.
Unbraced Frames In frames where lateral stability depends upon the bending stiffness of rigidly connected beams and columns, the effective length factor K of compression members shall be determined by structural analysis. The destabilizing effects of gravity loaded columns whose simple connections to the frame do not provide resistance to lateral loads shall be included in the design of the moment-frame columns. Stiffness reduction adjustment due to column inelasticity is permitted. Analysis of the required strength of unbraced multistory frames shall include the effects of frame instability and column axial deformation under the factored loads given in Section A4. In structures designed on the basis of plastic analysis, the axial force in the columns caused by factored gravity plus factored horizontal loads shall not exceed 0.75φc times AgFy.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 44
CHAPTER D TENSION MEMBERS
This chapter applies to prismatic members subject to axial tension caused by static forces acting through the centroidal axis. For members subject to combined axial tension and flexure, see Section H1.1. For threaded rods, see Section J3. For block shear rupture strength at end connections of tension members, see Section J4.3. For the design tensile strength of connecting elements, see Section J5.2. For members subject to fatigue, see Section K3. D1. DESIGN TENSILE STRENGTH The design strength of tension members φt Pn shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of yielding in the gross section and fracture in the net section. (a) For yielding in the gross section: φt = 0.90 Pn = Fy Ag
(D1-1)
(b) For fracture in the net section: φt = 0.75 Pn = Fu Ae
(D1-2)
where Ae Ag Fy Fu Pn
= effective net area, in.2 = gross area of member, in.2 = specified minimum yield stress, ksi = specified minimum tensile strength, ksi = nominal axial strength, kips
When members without holes are fully connected by welds, the effective net section used in Equation D1-2 shall be as defined in Section B3. When holes are present in a member with welded-end connections, or at the welded connection in the case of plug or slot welds, the net section through the holes shall be used in Equation D1-2. D2. BUILT-UP MEMBERS For limitations on the longitudinal spacing of connectors between elements in AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. D3]
PIN-CONNECTED MEMBERS AND EYEBARS
6 - 45
continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates, see Section J3.5. The longitudinal spacing of connectors between components should preferably limit the slenderness ratio in any component between the connectors to 300. Either perforated cover plates or tie plates without lacing are permitted to be used on the open sides of built-up tension members. Tie plates shall have a length not less than two-thirds the distance between the lines of welds or fasteners connecting them to the components of the member. The thickness of such tie plates shall not be less than one-fiftieth of the distance between these lines. The longitudinal spacing of intermittent welds or fasteners at tie plates shall not exceed six inches. The spacing of tie plates shall be such that the slenderness ratio of any component in the length between tie plates should preferably not exceed 300. D3. PIN-CONNECTED MEMBERS AND EYEBARS The pin diameter shall not be less than seven-eighths times the eyebar body width. The pin-hole diameter shall not be more than 1⁄32-in. greater than the pin diameter. For steels having a yield stress greater than 70 ksi, the hole diameter shall not exceed five times the plate thickness and the width of the eyebar body shall be reduced accordingly. In pin-connected members, the pin hole shall be located midway between the edges of the member in the direction normal to the applied force. For pinconnected members in which the pin is expected to provide for relative movement between connected parts while under full load, the diameter of pin hole shall not be more than 1⁄32-in. greater than the diameter of the pin. The width of the plate beyond the pin hole shall be not less than the effective width on either side of the pin hole. In pin-connected plates other than eyebars, the minimum net area beyond the bearing end of the pin hole, parallel to the axis of the member, shall not be less than two-thirds of the net area required for strength across the pin hole. The design strength of a pin-connected member φPn shall be the lowest value of the following limit states: (a) Tension on the net effective area: φ = φt = 0.75 Pn = 2tbeff Fu
(D3-1)
(b) Shear on the effective area: φsf = 0.75 Pn = 0.6AsfFu (c) For bearing on the projected area of the pin, see Section J8.1. (d) For yielding in the gross section, use Equation D1-1. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(D3-2)
6 - 46
TENSION MEMBERS
[Chap. D
where a = shortest distance from edge of the pin hole to the edge of the member measured parallel to the direction of the force, in. Asf = 2t(a + d / 2), in.2 beff = 2t + 0.63, but not more than the actual distance from the edge of the = hole to the edge of the part measured in the direction normal to the = applied force, in. d = pin diameter, in. t = thickness of plate, in. The corners beyond the pin hole are permitted to be cut at 45° to the axis of the member, provided the net area beyond the pin hole, on a plane perpendicular to the cut, is not less than that required beyond the pin hole parallel to the axis of the member. The design strength of eyebars shall be determined in accordance with Section D1 with Ag taken as the cross-sectional area of the body. Eyebars shall be of uniform thickness, without reinforcement at the pin holes, and have circular heads whose periphery is concentric with the pin hole. The radius of transition between the circular head and the eyebar body shall be not less than the head diameter. The width of the body of the eyebars shall not exceed eight times its thickness. The thickness of less than 1⁄2-in. is permissible only if external nuts are provided to tighten pin plates and filler plates into snug contact. The width b from the hole edge to the plate edge perpendicular to the direction of applied load shall be greater than two-thirds and, for the purpose of calculation, not more than three-fourths times the eyebar body width.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 47
CHAPTER E COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS
This chapter applies to compact and non-compact prismatic members subject to axial compression through the centroidal axis. For members subject to combined axial compression and flexure, see Section H1.2. For members with slender compression elements, see Appendix B5.3. For tapered members, see Appendix F3. For single-angle members, see AISC Specification for Load and Resistance Design of Single-Angle Members. E1. EFFECTIVE LENGTH AND SLENDERNESS LIMITATIONS 1.
Effective Length The effective length factor K shall be determined in accordance with Section C2.
2.
Design by Plastic Analysis Design by plastic analysis, as limited in Section A5.1, is permitted if the column slenderness parameter λc does not exceed 1.5K.
E2. DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH FOR FLEXURAL BUCKLING The design strength for flexural buckling of compression members whose elements have width-thickness ratios less than λr from Section B5.1 is φcPn: φc = 0.85 Pn = AgFcr
(E2-1)
(a) For λc ≤ 1.5 2
Fcr = (0.658λc)Fy
(E2-2)
0.877 Fcr = 2 Fy λc
(E2-3)
(b) For λc > 1.5
where λc =
Kl rπ
√
Fy E
(E2-4)
Ag = gross area of member, in.2 Fy = specified yield stress, ksi E = modulus of elasticity, ksi AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 48
COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS
[Chap. E
K = effective length factor l = laterally unbraced length of member, in. r = governing radius of gyration about the axis of buckling, in. For members whose elements do not meet the requirements of Section B5.1, see Appendix B5.3. E3. DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH FOR FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING The design strength for flexural-torsional buckling of double-angle and teeshaped compression members whose elements have width-thickness ratios less than λr from Section B5.1 is φcPn: φc = 0.85 Pn = AgFcrft Fcry + Fcrz 1 − Fcrft = 2H
4F F H √ 1− (F + F ) cry crz
2
cry
crz
(E3-1)
where: Fcrz _ ro
GJ = _2 Aro = polar radius of gyration about shear center, in. (see Equation A-E3-8)
H
xo2 + yo2 = 1 − _2 ro
xo, yo = coordinate of shear center with respect to the centroid, in. = 0 for double-angle and tee-shaped members (y-axis of symmetry) xo Fcry is determined according to Section E2 for flexural buckling about the y-axis of symmetry for λc =
Kl ryπ
√
Fy . E
For double-angle and tee-shaped members whose elements do not meet the requirements of Section B5.1, see Appendix B5.3 to determine Fcry for use in Equation E3-1. Other singly symmetric and unsymmetric columns, and doubly symmetric columns, such as cruciform or built-up columns, with very thin walls shall be designed for the limit states of flexural-torsional and torsional buckling in accordance with Appendix E3. E4. BUILT-UP MEMBERS At the ends of built-up compression members bearing on base plates or milled surfaces, all components in contact with one another shall be connected by a weld having a length not less than the maximum width of the member or by bolts spaced longitudinally not more than four diameters apart for a distance equal to 11⁄2 times the maximum width of the member. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. E4]
BUILT-UP MEMBERS
6 - 49
Along the length of built-up compression members between the end connections required above, longitudinal spacing for intermittent welds, bolts, or rivets shall be adequate to provide for the transfer of the required forces. For limitations on the longitudinal spacing of connectors between elements in continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates, see Section J3.5. Where a component of a built-up compression member consists of an outside plate, the maximum spacing shall not exceed the thickness of the thinner outside plate Fy , nor 12 inches, when intermittent welds are provided along the times 127 / √ edges of the components or when fasteners are provided on all gage lines at each section. When fasteners are staggered, the maximum spacing on each gage line Fy nor 18 shall not exceed the thickness of the thinner outside plate times 190 / √ inches. Individual components of compression members composed of two or more shapes shall be connected to one another at intervals, a, such that the effective slenderness ratio Ka / ri of each of the component shapes, between the connectors, does not exceed three-fourths times the governing slenderness ratio of the built-up member. The least radius of gyration ri shall be used in computing the slenderness ratio of each component part. The end connection shall be welded or fully tensioned bolted with clean mill scale or blasted cleaned faying surfaces with Class A coatings. The design strength of built-up members composed of two or more shapes shall be determined in accordance with Section E2 and Section E3 subject to the following modification. If the buckling mode involves relative deformations that produce shear forces in the connectors between individual shapes, Kl / r is replaced by (Kl / r)m determined as follows: (a) For intermediate connectors that are snug-tight bolted: Kl = r m
√ 2
Kl a r + r o i
2
(E4-1)
(b) For intermediate connectors that are welded or fully-tensioned bolted: Kl = r m
√ 2
2
Kl α2 a r + 0.82 (1 + α2) rib o
where Kl = column slenderness of built-up member acting as a unit r o Kl = modified column slenderness of built-up member r m
a ri
= largest column slenderness of individual components AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(E4-2)
6 - 50
COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS
a rib a ri rib
α h
[Chap. E
= column slenerness of individual components relative to its centroidal axis parallel to axis of buckling = distance between connectors, in. = minimum radius of gyration of individual component, in. = radius of gyration of individual component relative to its centroidal = axis parallel to member axis of buckling, in. = separation ratio = h / 2rib = distance between centroids of individual components perpendicular = to the member axis of buckling, in.
Open sides of compression members built up from plates or shapes shall be provided with continuous cover plates perforated with a succession of access holes. The unsupported width of such plates at access holes, as defined in Section B5.1, is assumed to contribute to the design strength provided that: (1) The width-thickness ratio conforms to the limitations of Section B5.1. (2) The ratio of length (in direction of stress) to width of hole shall not exceed two. (3) The clear distance between holes in the direction of stress shall be not less than the transverse distance between nearest lines of connecting fasteners or welds. (4) The periphery of the holes at all points shall have a minimum radius of 11⁄2-in. As an alternative to perforated cover plates, lacing with tie plates is permitted at each end and at intermediate points if the lacing is interrupted. Tie plates shall be as near the ends as practicable. In main members providing design strength, the end tie plates shall have a length of not less than the distance between the lines of fasteners or welds connecting them to the components of the member. Intermediate tie plates shall have a length not less than one-half of this distance. The thickness of tie plates shall be not less than one-fiftieth of the distance between lines of welds or fasteners connecting them to the segments of the members. In welded construction, the welding on each line connecting a tie plate shall aggregate not less than one-third the length of the plate. In bolted and riveted construction, the spacing in the direction of stress in tie plates shall be not more than six diameters and the tie plates shall be connected to each segment by at least three fasteners. Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels, or other shapes employed as lacing, shall be so spaced that l / r of the flange included between their connections shall not exceed the governing slenderness ratio for the member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to provide a shearing strength normal to the axis of the member equal to two percent of the compressive design strength of the member. The l / r ratio for lacing bars arranged in single systems shall not exceed 140. For double lacing this ratio shall not exceed 200. Double lacing bars shall be joined at the intersections. For lacing bars in compression, l is permitted to be taken as the unsupported length of the lacing bar between welds or fasteners connecting it to the components of the built-up member for single lacing, and 70 percent of that distance for double lacing. The inclination of lacing bars to the axis of the member shall preferably be not less than 60° for single lacing and AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. E5]
PIN-CONNECTED COMPRESSION MEMBERS
6 - 51
45° for double lacing. When the distance between the lines of welds or fasteners in the flanges is more than 15 inches, the lacing shall preferably be double or be made of angles. For additional spacing requirements, see Section J3. E5. PIN-CONNECTED COMPRESSION MEMBERS Pin connections of pin-connected compression members shall conform to the requirements of Section D3 except Equations D3-1 and D3-2 do not apply.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 52
CHAPTER F BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
This chapter applies to compact and noncompact prismatic members subject to flexure and shear. For members subject to combined flexure and axial force, see Section H1. For members subject to fatigue, see Section K4. For members with slender compression elements, see Appendix B5. For web-tapered members, see Appendix F3. For members with slender web elements (plate girders), see Appendix G. For single-angle members, the AISC Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of SingleAngle Members is applicable. F1.
DESIGN FOR FLEXURE The nominal flexural strength Mn is the lowest value obtained according to the limit stress of: (a) yielding; (b) lateral-torsional buckling; (c) flange local buckling; and (d) web local buckling. For laterally braced compact beams with Lb ≤ Lp, only the limit state of yielding is applicable. For unbraced compact beams and noncompact tees and double angles, only the limit states of yielding and lateral-torsional buckling are applicable. The lateral-torsional buckling limit state is not applicable to members subject to bending about the minor axis, or to square or circular shapes. This section applies to homogeneous and hybrid shapes with at least one axis of symmetry and which are subject to simple bending about one principal axis. For simple bending, the beam is loaded in a plane parallel to a principal axis that passes through the shear center or the beam is restrained against twisting at load points and supports. Only the limit states of yielding and lateral-torsional buckling are considered in this section. The lateral-torsional buckling provisions are limited to doubly symmetric shapes, channels, double angles, and tees. For lateral-torsional buckling of other singly symmetric shapes and for the limit states of flange local buckling and web local buckling of noncompact or slender-element sections, see Appendix F1. For unsymmetric shapes and beams subject to torsion combined with flexure, see Section H2. For biaxial bending, see Section H1.
1.
Yielding The flexural design strength of beams, determined by the limit state of yielding, is φbMn:
φb = 0.90 Mn = Mp AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(F1-1)
Sect. F1]
DESIGN FOR FLEXURE
6 - 53
where
Mp = plastic moment (= Fy Z ≤ 1.5My for homogeneous sections), kip-in. My = moment corresponding to onset of yielding at the extreme fiber from an elastic stress distribution (= Fy S for homogeneous section and Fyf S for hybrid sections), kip-in. 2.
Lateral-Torsional Buckling This limit state is only applicable to members subject to major axis bending. The flexural design strength, determined by the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling, is φbMn:
φb = 0.90 Mn = nominal strength determined as follows: 2a.
Doubly Symmetric Shapes and Channels with Lb ≤ Lr The nominal flexural strength is: L − Lp Mn = Cb Mp − (Mp − Mr) b ≤ Mp Lr − Lp
(F1-2)
where:
Lb = distance between points braced against lateral displacement of the compression flange, or between points braced to prevent twist of the cross section, in. In the above equation, Cb is a modification factor for non-uniform moment diagrams where, when both ends of the beam segment are braced:
Cb =
12.5Mmax 2.5Mmax + 3MA + 4MB + 3MC
(F1-3)
where
Mmax = absolute value of maximum moment in the unbraced segment, kip-in. MA = absolute value of moment at quarter point of the unbraced segment MB = absolute value of moment at centerline of the unbraced beam segment MC = absolute value of moment at three-quarter point of the unbraced beam segment Cb is permitted to be conservatively taken as 1.0 for all cases. For cantilevers or overhangs where the free end is unbraced, Cb = 1.0. The limiting unbraced length for full plastic bending capacity, Lp, shall be determined as follows. (a) For I-shaped members including hybrid sections and channels:
Lp =
300ry Fyf √
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(F1-4)
6 - 54
BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
[Chap. F
(b) For solid rectangular bars and box sections: 3,750ry JA √ Mp
Lp =
(F1-5)
where
A = cross-sectional area, in.2 J = torsional constant, in.4 The limiting laterally unbraced length Lr and the corresponding buckling moment Mr shall be determined as follows: (a) For doubly symmetric I-shaped members and channels:
Lr =
ryX1 √ 1+√ 1 + X2FL 2 FL
Mr = FL Sx
(F1-6) (F1-7)
where
X1 =
π Sx
√ EGJA 2
(F1-8)
2
C S X2 = 4 w x Iy GJ
(F1-9)
= section modulus about major axis, in.3 = modulus of elasticity of steel (29,000 ksi) = shear modulus of elasticity of steel (11,200 ksi) = smaller of (Fyf − Fr) or Fyw = compressive residual stress in flange; 10 ksi for rolled shapes, 16.5 ksi for welded shapes Fyf = yield stress of flange, ksi Fyw = yield stress of web, ksi Iy = moment of inertia about y-axis, in.4 Cw = warping constant, in.6
Sx E G FL Fr
Equations F1-4 and F1-6 are conservatively based on Cb = 1.0. (b) For solid rectangular bars and box sections:
Lr =
57,000ry√ JA
Mr
Mr = Fyf Sx 2b.
(F1-10) (F1-11)
Doubly Symmetric Shapes and Channels with Lb > Lr The nominal flexural strength is:
Mn = Mcr ≤ Mp where Mcr is the critical elastic moment, determined as follows: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(F1-12)
Sect. F1]
DESIGN FOR FLEXURE
6 - 55
(a) For doubly symmetric I-shaped members and channels: π Mcr = Cb Lb
Mcr =
√ 2
πE EIyGJ + IyCw Lb
Cb Sx X1√ 2 Lb / ry
(F1-13)
√ (L / ) 1+
X21X2 2 b ry
2
(b) For solid rectangular bars and symmetric box sections:
Mcr = 2c.
JA 57,000 Cb √ Lb / ry
(F1-14)
Tees and Double Angles For tees and double-angle beams loaded in the plane of symmetry:
Mn = Mcr =
π√ EIyGJ [B + √ 1+B 2 ] Lb
(F1-15)
where
Mn ≤ 1.5My for stems in tension Mn ≤ 1.0My for stems in compression Iy / J B = ±2.3(d / Lb) √
(F1-16)
The plus sign for B applies when the stem is in tension and the minus sign applies when the stem is in compression. If the tip of the stem is in compression anywhere along the unbraced length, use the negative value of B. 2d.
Unbraced Length for Design by Plastic Analysis Design by plastic analysis, as limited in Section A5.1, is permitted for a compact section member bent about the major axis when the laterally unbraced length Lb of the compression flange adjacent to plastic hinge locations associated with the failure mechanism does not exceed Lpd, determined as follows: (a) For doubly symmetric and singly symmetric I-shaped members with the compression flange equal to or larger than the tension flange (including hybrid members) loaded in the plane of the web Lpd =
[3,600 + 2,200 (M1 / M2)] ry Fy
(F1-17)
where = specified minimum yield stress of the compression flange, ksi Fy = smaller moment at end of unbraced length of beam, kip-in. M1 = larger moment at end of unbraced length of beam, kip-in. M2 = radius of gyration about minor axis, in. ry (M1 / M2) is positive when moments cause reverse curvature and negative for single curvature AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 56
BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
[Chap. F
(b) For solid rectangular bars and symmetric box beams Lpd =
5,000 + 3,000 (M1 / M2) ry ≥ 3,000ry / Fy Fy
(F1-18)
There is no limit on Lb for members with circular or square cross sections nor for any beam bent about its minor axis. In the region of the last hinge to form, and in regions not adjacent to a plastic hinge, the flexural design strength shall be determined in accordance with Section F1.2. F2.
DESIGN FOR SHEAR This section applies to unstiffened webs of singly or doubly symmetric beams, including hybrid beams, and channels subject to shear in the plane of the web. For the design shear strength of webs with stiffeners, see Appendix F2 or Appendix G3. For shear in the weak direction of the shapes above, pipes, and unsymmetric sections, see Section H2. For web panels subject to high shear, see Section K1.7. For shear strength at connections, see Sections J4 and J5.
1.
Web Area Determination The web area Aw shall be taken as the overall depth d times the web thickness tw.
2.
Design Shear Strength The design shear strength of unstiffened webs, with h / tw ≤ 260, is φvVn, where φv = 0.90 Vn = nominal shear strength defined as follows For h / tw ≤ 418 / √ Fyw Vn = 0.6Fyw Aw
(F2-1)
Fyw For 418 / √ Fyw < h / tw ≤ 523 / √ Vn = 0.6Fyw Aw(418 / √ Fyw ) / (h / tw)
(F2-2)
For 523 / √ Fyw < h / tw ≤ 260 Vn = (132,000Aw) / (h / tw)2
(F2-3)
The general design shear strength of webs with or without stiffeners is given in Appendix F2.2 and an alternative method utilizing tension field action is given in Appendix G3. 3.
Transverse Stiffeners See Appendix F2.3.
F3.
WEB-TAPERED MEMBERS See Appendix F3. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. F4]
F4.
BEAMS AND GIRDERS WITH WEB OPENINGS
6 - 57
BEAMS AND GIRDERS WITH WEB OPENINGS The effect of all web openings on the design strength of steel and composite beams shall be determined. Adequate reinforcement shall be provided when the required strength exceeds the net strength of the member at the opening.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 58
CHAPTER G PLATE GIRDERS
I-shaped plate girders shall be distinguished from I-shaped beams on the basis of the web slenderness ratio h / tw . When this value is greater than λr the provisions of Appendices G1 and G2 shall apply for design flexural strength. For h / tw ≤ λr, the provisions of Chapter F or Appendix F shall apply for design flexural strength. For girders with unequal flanges, see Appendix B5.1. The design shear strength and transverse stiffener design shall be based on either Section F2 (without tension-field action) or Appendix G3 (with tension-field action). For girders with unequal flanges, see Appendix B5.1.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 59
CHAPTER H MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
This chapter applies to prismatic members subject to axial force and flexure about one or both axes of symmetry, with or without torsion, and torsion only. For web-tapered members, see Appendix F3. H1. SYMMETRIC MEMBERS SUBJECT TO BENDING AND AXIAL FORCE 1.
Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members in Flexure and Tension The interaction of flexure and tension in symmetric shapes shall be limited by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b. (a) For
Pu φPn
≥ 0.2 Muy 8 Mux + ≤ 1.0 9 φbMnx φbMny
(H1-1a)
Mux Pu Muy + + ≤ 1.0 2φPn φbMnx φbMny
(H1-1b)
Pu φPn (b) For
Pu φPn
+
< 0.2
where
Pu = required tensile strength, kips Pn = nominal tensile strength determined in accordance with Section D1, kips Mu = required flexural strength determined in accordance with Section C1, kip-in. Mn = nominal flexural strength determined in accordance with Section F1, kip-in. x = subscript relating symbol to strong axis bending y = subscript relating symbol to weak axis bending. φ = φt = resistance factor for tension (see Section D1) φb = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90 A more detailed analysis of the interaction of flexure and tension is permitted in lieu of Equations H1-1a and H1-1b. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 60
2.
MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
[Chap. H
Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members in Flexure and Compression The interaction of flexure and compression in symmetric shapes shall be limited by Equations H1-1a and H1-1b where Pu = required compressive strength, kips Pn = nominal compressive strength determined in accordance with Section E2, kips Mu = required flexural strength determined in accordance with Section C1 kip-in. Mn = nominal flexural strength determined in accordance with Section F1, kip-in. x = subscript relating symbol to strong axis bending y = subscript relating symbol to weak axis bending. φ = φc = resistance factor for compression, = 0.85 (see Section E2) φb = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90
H2. UNSYMMETRIC MEMBERS AND MEMBERS UNDER TORSION AND COMBINED TORSION, FLEXURE, SHEAR, AND/OR AXIAL FORCE The design strength φFy of the member shall equal or exceed the required strength expressed in terms of the normal stress fun or the shear stress fuv, determined by elastic analysis for the factored loads: (a) For the limit state of yielding under normal stress: fun ≤ φFy φ = 0.90
(H2-1)
(b) For the limit state of yielding under shear stress: fuv ≤ 0.6φFy φ = 0.90
(H2-2)
(c) For the limit state of buckling: fun or fuv ≤ φcFcr, as applicable φc = 0.85
(H2-3)
Some constrained local yielding is permitted adjacent to areas which remain elastic. H3. ALTERNATIVE INTERACTION EQUATIONS FOR MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED STRESS See Appendix H3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 61
CHAPTER I COMPOSITE MEMBERS
This chapter applies to composite columns composed of rolled or built-up structural steel shapes, pipe or tubing, and structural concrete acting together and to steel beams supporting a reinforced concrete slab so interconnected that the beams and the slab act together to resist bending. Simple and continuous composite beams with shear connectors and concrete-encased beams, constructed with or without temporary shores, are included. I1.
DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS Force Determination. In determining forces in members and connections of a structure that includes composite beams, consideration shall be given to the effective sections at the time each increment of load is applied. Elastic Analysis. For an elastic analysis of continuous composite beams without haunched ends, it is permissible to assume that the stiffness of a beam is uniform throughout the beam length. The stiffness is permitted to be computed using the moment of inertia of the composite transformed section in the positive moment region. Plastic Analysis. When plastic analysis is used, the strength of flexural composite members shall be determined from plastic stress distributions. Plastic Stress Distribution for Positive Moment. If the slab in the positive moment region is connected to the steel beam with shear connectors, a concrete stress of 0.85fc′ is permitted to be assumed uniformly distributed throughout the effective compression zone. Concrete tensile strength shall be neglected. A uniformly distributed steel stress of Fy shall be assumed throughout the tension zone and throughout the compression zone in the structural steel section. The net tensile force in the steel section shall be equal to the compressive force in the concrete slab. Plastic Stress Distribution for Negative Moment. If the slab in the negative moment region is connected to the steel beam with shear connectors, a tensile stress of Fyr shall be assumed in all adequately developed longitudinal reinforcing bars within the effective width of the concrete slab. Concrete tensile strength shall be neglected. A uniformly distributed steel stress of Fy shall be assumed throughout the tension zone and throughout the compression zone in the structural steel section. The net compressive force in the steel section shall be equal to the total tensile force in the reinforcing steel. Elastic Stress Distribution. When a determination of elastic stress distribution is required, strains in steel and concrete shall be assumed directly proportional AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 62
COMPOSITE MEMBERS
[Chap. I
to the distance from the neutral axis. The stress shall equal strain times modulus of elasticity for steel, E, or modulus of elasticity for concrete, Ec. Concrete tensile strength shall be neglected. Maximum stress in the steel shall not exceed Fy. Maximum compressive stress in the concrete shall not exceed 0.85fc′ where fc′ is the specified compressive strength of the concrete. In composite hybrid beams, the maximum stress in the steel flange shall not exceed Fyf but the strain in the web may exceed the yield strain; the stress shall be taken as Fyw at such locations. Fully Composite Beam. Shear connectors are provided in sufficient numbers to develop the maximum flexural strength of the composite beam. For elastic stress distribution it shall be assumed that no slip occurs. Partially Composite Beam. The shear strength of shear connectors governs the flexural strength of the partially composite beam. Elastic computations such as those for deflections, fatigue, and vibrations shall include the effect of slip. Concrete-Encased Beam. A beam totally encased in concrete cast integrally with the slab may be assumed to be interconnected to the concrete by natural bond, without additional anchorage, provided that: (1) concrete cover over beam sides and soffit is at least two inches; (2) the top of the beam is at least 11⁄2-in. below the top and two inches above the bottom of the slab; and (3) concrete encasement contains adequate mesh or other reinforcing steel to prevent spalling of concrete. Composite Column. A steel column fabricated from rolled or built-up steel shapes and encased in structural concrete or fabricated from steel pipe or tubing and filled with structural concrete shall be designed in accordance with Section I2. I2.
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
1.
Limitations To qualify as a composite column, the following limitations shall be met: (1) The cross-sectional area of the steel shape, pipe, or tubing shall comprise at least four percent of the total composite cross section. (2) Concrete encasement of a steel core shall be reinforced with longitudinal load carrying bars, longitudinal bars to restrain concrete, and lateral ties. Longitudinal load carrying bars shall be continuous at framed levels; longitudinal restraining bars may be interrupted at framed levels. The spacing of ties shall be not greater than two-thirds of the least dimension of the composite cross section. The cross-sectional area of the transverse and longitudinal reinforcement shall be at least 0.007 sq. in. per inch of bar spacing. The encasement shall provide at least 11⁄2-in. of clear cover outside of both transverse and longitudinal reinforcement. (3) Concrete shall have a specified compressive strength fc′ of not less than 3 ksi nor more than 8 ksi for normal weight concrete and not less than 4 ksi for light weight concrete. (4) The specified minimum yield stress of structural steel and reinforcing bars AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. I2]
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
6 - 63
used in calculating the strength of a composite column shall not exceed 55 ksi. (5) The minimum wall thickness of structural steel pipe or tubing filled with concrete shall be equal to b√ Fy / 3E for each face of width b in rectangular sections and D√ Fy / 8E for circular sections of outside diameter D. 2.
Design Strength The design strength of axially loaded composite columns is φcPn, where φc = 0.85 Pn = nominal axial compressive strength determined from Equations E2-1 through E2-4 with the following modifications: (1) As = gross area of steel shape, pipe, or tubing, in.2 (replaces Ag) rm = radius of gyration of the steel shape, pipe, or tubing except that for steel shapes it shall not be less than 0.3 times the overall thickness of the composite cross section in the plane of buckling, in. (replaces r) (2) Replace Fy with modified yield stress Fmy from Equation I2-1 and replace E with modified modulus of elasticity Em from Equation I2-2. Fmy = Fy + c1Fyr (Ar / As) + c2 fc′(Ac / As)
(I2-1)
Em = E + c3Ec (Ac / As)
(I2-2)
where = area of concrete, in.2 = area of longitudinal reinforcing bars, in.2 = area of steel, in.2 = modulus of elasticity of steel, ksi = modulus of elasticity of concrete. Ec is permitted to be computed from fc ′ where w, the unit weight of concrete, is expressed in lbs./cu. Ec = w1.5√ ft and fc′ is expressed in ksi. Fy = specified minimum yield stress of steel shape, pipe, or tubing, ksi Fyr = specified minimum yield stress of longitudinal reinforcing bars, ksi fc′ = specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi c1, c2, c3 = numerical coefficients. For concrete-filled pipe and tubing: c1 = 1.0, c2 = 0.85, and c3 = 0.4; for concrete encased shapes c1 = 0.7, c2 = 0.6, and c3 = 0.2 Ac Ar As E Ec
3.
Columns with Multiple Steel Shapes If the composite cross section includes two or more steel shapes, the shapes shall be interconnected with lacing, tie plates, or batten plates to prevent buckling of individual shapes before hardening of concrete.
4.
Load Transfer The portion of the design strength of axially loaded composite columns resisted AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 64
COMPOSITE MEMBERS
[Chap. I
by concrete shall be developed by direct bearing at connections. When the supporting concrete area is wider than the loaded area on one or more sides and otherwise restrained against lateral expansion on the remaining sides, the maximum design strength of concrete shall be 1.7φc fc′AB, where φc = 0.60 AB = loaded area I3.
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
1.
Effective Width The effective width of the concrete slab on each side of the beam center-line shall not exceed: (a) one-eighth of the beam span, center to center of supports; (b) one-half the distance to the center-line of the adjacent beam; or (c) the distance to the edge of the slab.
2.
Strength of Beams with Shear Connectors The positive design flexural strength φbMn shall be determined as follows: Fyf : (a) For h / tw ≤ 640 / √ φb = 0.85; Mn shall be determined from the plastic stress distribution on the composite section.
Fyf : (b) For h / tw > 640 / √ φb = 0.90; Mn shall be determined from the superposition of elastic stresses, considering the effects of shoring. The negative design flexural strength φbMn shall be determined for the steel section alone, in accordance with the requirements of Chapter F. Alternatively, the negative design flexural strength φbMn shall be computed with: φb = 0.85 and Mn determined from the plastic stress distribution on the composite section, provided that: (1) Steel beam is an adequately braced compact section, as defined in Section B5. (2) Shear connectors connect the slab to the steel beam in the negative moment region. (3) Slab reinforcement parallel to the steel beam, within the effective width of the slab, is properly developed. 3.
Strength of Concrete-Encased Beams The design flexural strength φbMn shall be computed with φb = 0.90 and Mn determined from the superposition of elastic stresses, considering the effects of shoring. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. I3]
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
6 - 65
Alternatively, the design flexural strength φbMn shall be computed with φb = 0.90 and Mn determined from the plastic stress distribution on the steel section alone. 4.
Strength During Construction When temporary shores are not used during construction, the steel section alone shall have adequate strength to support all loads applied prior to the concrete attaining 75 percent of its specified strength fc′. The design flexural strength of the steel section shall be determined in accordance with the requirements of Section F1.
5.
Formed Steel Deck
5a.
General The design flexural strength φbMn of composite construction consisting of concrete slabs on formed steel deck connected to steel beams shall be determined by the applicable portions of Section I3.2, with the following modifications. This section is applicable to decks with nominal rib height not greater than three inches. The average width of concrete rib or haunch wr shall be not less than two inches, but shall not be taken in calculations as more than the minimum clear width near the top of the steel deck. See Section I3.5c for additional restrictions. The concrete slab shall be connected to the steel beam with welded stud shear connectors 3⁄4-in. or less in diameter (AWS D1.1). Studs shall be welded either through the deck or directly to the steel beam. Stud shear connectors, after installation, shall extend not less than 11⁄2-in. above the top of the steel deck. The slab thickness above the steel deck shall be not less than two inches.
5b.
Deck Ribs Oriented Perpendicular to Steel Beam Concrete below the top of the steel deck shall be neglected in determining section properties and in calculating Ac for deck ribs oriented perpendicular to the steel beams. The spacing of stud shear connectors along the length of a supporting beam shall not exceed 36 inches. The nominal strength of a stud shear connector shall be the value stipulated in Section I5 multiplied by the following reduction factor: 0.85 (wr / hr) [(Hs / hr) − 1.0] ≤ 1.0 Nr √
(I3-1)
where hr = nominal rib height, in. Hs = length of stud connector after welding, in., not to exceed the value (hr + 3) in computations, although actual length may be greater Nr = number of stud connectors in one rib at a beam intersection, not to exceed three in computations, although more than three studs may be installed AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 66
COMPOSITE MEMBERS
[Chap. I
wr = average width of concrete rib or haunch (as defined in Section I3.5a), in. To resist uplift, steel deck shall be anchored to all supporting members at a spacing not to exceed 18 inches. Such anchorage shall be provided by stud connectors, a combination of stud connectors and arc spot (puddle) welds, or other devices specified by the designer. 5c.
Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to Steel Beam Concrete below the top of the steel deck may be included in determining section properties and shall be included in calculating Ac in Section I5. Steel deck ribs over supporting beams may be split longitudinally and separated to form a concrete haunch. When the nominal depth of steel deck is 11⁄2-in. or greater, the average width wr of the supported haunch or rib shall be not less than two inches for the first stud in the transverse row plus four stud diameters for each additional stud. The nominal strength of a stud shear connector shall be the value stipulated in Section I5, except that when wr / hr is less than 1.5, the value from Section I5 shall be multiplied by the following reduction factor: 0.6(wr / hr)[(Hs / hr) − 1.0] ≤ 1.0
(I3-2)
where hr and Hs are as defined in Section I3.5b and wr is the average width of concrete rib or haunch as defined in Section I3.5a. 6.
Design Shear Strength The design shear strength of composite beams shall be determined by the shear strength of the steel web, in accordance with Section F2.
I4.
COMBINED COMPRESSION AND FLEXURE The interaction of axial compression and flexure in the plane of symmetry on composite members shall be limited by Section H1.2 with the following modifications: = nominal flexural strength determined from plastic stress distribution on the composite cross section except as provided below, kip-in. Pe1 , Pe2 = AsFmy / λ2c elastic buckling load, kips = modified yield stress, ksi, see Section I2 Fmy φb = resistance factor for flexure from Section I3 = resistance factor for compression = 0.85 φc = column slenderness parameter defined by Equation E2-4 as λc modified in Section I2.2 Mn
When the axial term in Equations H1-1a and H1-1b is less than 0.3, the nominal flexural strength Mn shall be determined by straight line transition between the nominal flexural strength determined from the plastic distribution on the composite cross sections at (Pu / φcPn ) = 0.3 and the flexural strength at Pu = 0 as AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. I5]
SHEAR CONNECTORS
6 - 67
determined in Section I3. If shear connectors are required at Pu = 0, they shall be provided whenever Pu / φcPn is less than 0.3. I5.
SHEAR CONNECTORS This section applies to the design of stud and channel shear connectors. For connectors of other types, see Section I6.
1.
Materials Shear connectors shall be headed steel studs not less than four stud diameters in length after installation, or hot rolled steel channels. The stud connectors shall conform to the requirements of Section A3.6. The channel connectors shall conform to the requirements of Section A3. Shear connectors shall be embedded in concrete slabs made with ASTM C33 aggregate or with rotary kiln produced aggregates conforming to ASTM C330, with concrete unit weight not less than 90 pcf.
2.
Horizontal Shear Force Except for concrete-encased beams as defined in Section I1, the entire horizontal shear at the interface between the steel beam and the concrete slab shall be assumed to be transferred by shear connectors. For composite action with concrete subject to flexural compression, the total horizontal shear force between the point of maximum positive moment and the point of zero moment shall be taken as the smallest of the following: (1) 0.85fc′Ac; (2) AsFy; and (3) ΣQn; where fc′ Ac As Fy ΣQn
= specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi = area of concrete slab within effective width, in.2 = area of steel cross section, in.2 = minimum specified yield stress, ksi = sum of nominal strengths of shear connectors between the point of maximum positive moment and the point of zero moment, kips
For hybrid beams, the yield force shall be computed separately for each component of the cross section; AsFy of the entire cross section is the sum of the component yield forces. In continuous composite beams where longitudinal reinforcing steel in the negative moment regions is considered to act compositely with the steel beam, the total horizontal shear force between the point of maximum negative moment and the point of zero moment shall be taken as the smaller of ArFyr and ΣQn; where = area of adequately developed longitudinal reinforcing steel within the effective width of the concrete slab, in.2 Fyr = minimum specified yield stress of the reinforcing steel, ksi ΣQn = sum of nominal strengths of shear connectors between the point of maximum negative moment and the point of zero moment, kips
Ar
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 68
3.
COMPOSITE MEMBERS
[Chap. I
Strength of Stud Shear Connectors The nominal strength of one stud shear connector embedded in a solid concrete slab is fc′Ec ≤ AscFu Qn = 0.5Asc√
(I5-1)
where Asc fc′ Fu Ec
= cross-sectional area of a stud shear connector, in.2 = specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi = minimum specified tensile strength of a stud shear connector, ksi = modulus of elasticity of concrete, ksi
For stud shear connector embedded in a slab on a formed steel deck, refer to Section I3 for reduction factors given by Equations I3-1 and I3-2 as applicable. √ fc′Ec term in Equation I5-1. The reduction factors apply only to 0.5Asc 4.
Strength of Channel Shear Connectors The nominal strength of one channel shear connector embedded in a solid concrete slab is
fc′Ec Qn = 0.3(tf + 0.5tw)Lc√
(I5-2)
where tf = flange thickness of channel shear connector, in. tw = web thickness of channel shear connector, in. Lc = length of channel shear connector, in. 5.
Required Number of Shear Connectors The number of shear connectors required between the section of maximum bending moment, positive or negative, and the adjacent section of zero moment shall be equal to the horizontal shear force as determined in Section I5.2 divided by the nominal strength of one shear connector as determined from Section I5.3 or Section I5.4.
6.
Shear Connector Placement and Spacing Unless otherwise specified shear connectors required each side of the point of maximum bending moment, positive or negative, shall be distributed uniformly between that point and the adjacent points of zero moment. However, the number of shear connectors placed between any concentrated load and the nearest point of zero moment shall be sufficient to develop the maximum moment required at the concentrated load point. Except for connectors installed in the ribs of formed steel decks, shear connectors shall have at least one inch of lateral concrete cover. Unless located over the web, the diameter of studs shall not be greater than 2.5 times the thickness of the flange to which they are welded. The minimum center-to-center spacing of stud connectors shall be six diameters along the longitudinal axis of the supporting composite beam and four diameters transverse to the longitudinal axis of the supporting composite beam, except that within the ribs of formed steel decks the center-to-center spacing may be as small as four diameters in any AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. I6]
SPECIAL CASES
6 - 69
direction. The maximum center-to-center spacing of shear connectors shall not exceed eight times the total slab thickness. Also see Section I3.5b. I6.
SPECIAL CASES When composite construction does not conform to the requirements of Section I1 through Section I5, the strength of shear connectors and details of construction shall be established by a suitable test program.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6-70
CHAPTER J CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
This chapter applies to connecting elements, connectors, and the affected elements of the connected members subject to static loads. For connections subject to fatigue, see Appendix K3. J1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.
Design Basis Connections consist of affected elements of connected members (e.g. beam webs), connecting elements (e.g., gussets, angles, brackets), and connectors (welds, bolts, rivets). These components shall be proportioned so that their design strength equals or exceeds the required strength determined by structural analysis for factored loads acting on the structure or a specified proportion of the strength of the connected members, whichever is appropriate.
2.
Simple Connections Except as otherwise indicated in the design documents, connections of beams, girders, or trusses shall be designed as flexible, and are permitted to ordinarily be proportioned for the reaction shears only. Flexible beam connections shall accommodate end rotations of unrestrained (simple) beams. To accomplish this, some inelastic but self-limiting deformation in the connection is permitted.
3.
Moment Connections End connections of restrained beams, girders, and trusses shall be designed for the combined effect of forces resulting from moment and shear induced by the rigidity of the connections.
4.
Compression Members with Bearing Joints When columns bear on bearing plates or are finished to bear at splices, there shall be sufficient connectors to hold all parts securely in place. When compression members other than columns are finished to bear, the splice material and its connectors shall be arranged to hold all parts in line and shall be proportioned for 50 percent of the required strength of the member. All compression joints shall be proportioned to resist any tension developed by the factored loads specified by load combination A4-6.
5.
Splices in Heavy Sections This paragraph applies to ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 rolled shapes, or shapes built-up by welding plates more than two inches thick together to form the cross AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. J1]
GENERAL PROVISIONS
6 - 71
section, and where the cross section is to be spliced and subject to primary tensile stresses due to tension or flexure. When the individual elements of the cross section are spliced prior to being joined to form the cross section in accordance with AWS D1.1, Article 3.4.6, the applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 apply in lieu of the requirements of this section. When tensile forces in these sections are to be transmitted through splices by complete-joint-penetration groove welds, material notch-toughness requirements as given in Section A3.1c, weld access hole details as given in Section J1.6, welding preheat requirements as given in Section J2.8, and thermal-cut surface preparation and inspection requirements as given in Section M2.2 apply. At tension splices in ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and built-up members of material more than two inches thick, weld tabs and backing shall be removed and the surfaces ground smooth. When splicing ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 rolled shapes or shapes built-up by welding plates more than two inches thick to form a cross section, and where the section is to be used as a primary compression member, all weld access holes required to facilitate groove welding operations shall satisfy the provisions of Section J1.6. Alternatively, splicing of such members subject to compression, including members which are subject to tension due to wind or seismic loads, shall be accomplished using splice details which do not induce large weld shrinkage strains; for example partial-joint-penetration flange groove welds with filletwelded surface lap plate splices on the web, bolted lap plate splices, or combination bolted/fillet-welded lap plate splices. 6.
Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes All weld access holes required to facilitate welding operations shall have a length from the toe of the weld preparation not less than 11⁄2 times the thickness of the material in which the hole is made. The height of the access hole shall be adequate for deposition of sound weld metal in the adjacent plates and provide clearance for weld tabs for the weld in the material in which the hole is made, but not less than the thickness of the material. In hot-rolled shapes and built-up shapes, all beam copes and weld access holes shall be shaped free of notches and sharp re-entrant corners except, when fillet web-to-flange welds are used in built-up shapes, access holes are permitted to terminate perpendicular to the flange. For ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and built-up shapes of material more than two inches thick, the thermally cut surfaces of beam copes and weld access holes shall be ground to bright metal and inspected by either magnetic particle or dye penetrant methods prior to deposition of splice welds. If the curved transition portion of weld access holes and beam copes are formed by predrilled or sawed holes, that portion of the access hole or cope need not be ground. Weld access holes and beam copes in other shapes need not be ground nor inspected by dye penetrant or magnetic particle methods.
7.
Minimum Strength of Connections Except for lacing, sag rods, or girts, connections providing design strength shall be designed to support a factored load not less than 10 kips. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 72
8.
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Chap J
Placement of Welds and Bolts Groups of welds or bolts at the ends of any member which transmit axial force into that member shall be sized so that the center of gravity of the group coincides with the center of gravity of the member, unless provision is made for the eccentricity. The foregoing provision is not applicable to end connections of statically-loaded single angle, double angle, and similar members.
9.
Bolts in Combination with Welds In new work, A307 bolts or high-strength bolts proportioned as bearing-type connections shall not be considered as sharing the load in combination with welds. Welds, if used, shall be proportioned for the entire force in the connection. In slip-critical connections, high-strength bolts are permitted to be considered as sharing the load with the welds. In making welded alterations to structures, existing rivets and high-strength bolts tightened to the requirements for slip-critical connections are permitted to be utilized for carrying loads present at the time of alteration and the welding need only provide the additional design strength required.
10.
High-Strength Bolts in Combination with Rivets In both new work and alterations, in connections designed as slip-critical connections in accordance with the provisions of Section J3, high-strength bolts are permitted to be considered as sharing the load with rivets.
11.
Limitations on Bolted and Welded Connections Fully tensioned high-strength bolts (see Table J3.1) or welds shall be used for the following connections: Column splices in all tier structures 200 ft or more in height. Column splices in tier structures 100 to 200 ft in height, if the least horizontal dimension is less than 40 percent of the height. Column splices in tier structures less than 100 ft in height, if the least horizontal dimension is less than 25 percent of the height. Connections of all beams and girders to columns and of any other beams and girders on which the bracing of columns is dependent, in structures over 125 ft in height. In all structures carrying cranes of over five-ton capacity: roof-truss splices and connections of trusses to columns, column splices, column bracing, knee braces, and crane supports. Connections for supports of running machinery, or of other live loads which produce impact or reversal of stress. Any other connections stipulated on the design plans. In all other cases connections are permitted to be made with A307 bolts or snug-tight high-strength bolts. For the purpose of this section, the height of a tier structure shall be taken as the vertical distance from the curb level to the highest point of the roof beams in the case of flat roofs, or to the mean height of the gable in the case of roofs having a rise of more than 22⁄3 in 12. Where the curb level has not been established, or where the structure does not adjoin a street, the mean level of the adjoining land AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. J2]
WELDS
6 - 73
shall be used instead of curb level. It is permissible to exclude penthouses in computing the height of structure. J2.
WELDS All provisions of the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code Steel,, AWS D1.1, apply under this specification, except Chapter 10—Tubular Structures, which is outside the scope of this specification, and except that the provisions of the listed AISC LRFD Specification Sections apply under this Specification in lieu of the cited AWS Code provisions as follows: AISC Section J1.5 and J1.6 in lieu of AWS Section 3.2.5 AISC Section J2.2 in lieu of AWS Section 2.3.2.4 AISC Table J2.5 in lieu of AWS Table 8.1 AISC Table A-K3.2 in lieu of AWS Section 2.5 AISC Section K3 and Appendix K3 in lieu of AWS Chapter 9 AISC Section M2.2 in lieu of AWS Section 3.2.2
1.
Groove Welds
1a.
Effective Area The effective area of groove welds shall be considered as the effective length of the welds times the effective throat thickness. The effective length of a groove weld shall be the width of the part joined. The effective throat thickness of a complete-joint-penetration groove weld shall be the thickness of the thinner part joined. The effective throat thickness of a partial-joint-penetration groove weld shall be as shown in Table J2.1. The effective throat thickness of flare groove weld when flush to the surface of a bar or 90º bend in formed section shall be as shown in Table J2.2. Random sections of production welds for each welding procedure, or such test sections as may be required by design documents, shall be used to verify that the effective throat is consistently obtained. Larger effective throat thicknesses than those in Table J2.2 are permitted, provided the fabricator can establish by qualification the consistent production of such larger effective throat thicknesses. Qualification shall consist of sectioning the weld normal to its axis, at mid-length and terminal ends. Such sectioning shall be made on a number of combinations of material sizes representative of the range to be used in the fabrication or as required by the designer.
1b.
Limitations The minimum effective throat thickness of a partial-joint-penetration groove weld shall be as shown in Table J2.3. Weld size is determined by the thicker of the two parts joined, except that the weld size need not exceed the thickness of the thinnest part joined when a larger size is required by calculated strength. For this exception, particular care shall be taken to provide sufficient preheat for soundness of the weld. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 74
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Chap J
TABLE J2.1 Effective Throat Thickness of Partial-Penetration Groove Welds Welding Process
Included Angle at Root of Groove
Welding Position
Shielded metal arc Submerged arc
Effective Throat Thickness
J or U joint Depth of chamfer Bevel or V joint ≥ 60º
All
Gas metal arc
Bevel or V joint < 60º but ≥ 45º
Flux-cored arc
Depth of chamfer minus 1⁄8-in.
TABLE J2.2 Effective Throat Thickness of Flare Groove Welds Radius (R) of Bar or Bend
Type of Weld
Effective Throat Thickness
Flare bevel groove
All
5⁄
Flare V-groove
All
1⁄ R 2
16R
[a] Use 3⁄8R for Gas Metal Arc Welding (except short circuiting transfer process) when R ≥ 1 in.
TABLE J2.3 Minimum Effective Throat Thickness of Partial-Joint-Penentration Groove Welds Material Thickness of Thicker Part Joined (in.)
Minimum Effective Throat Thickness[a] (in.)
To 1⁄4 inclusive Over 1⁄4 to 1⁄2 Over 1⁄2 to 3⁄4 Over 3⁄4 to 11⁄2 Over 11⁄2 to 21⁄4 Over 21⁄4 to 6 Over 6
1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8
[a] See Section J2.
2.
Fillet Welds
2a.
Effective Area The effective area of fillet welds shall be as defined in American Welding Society Code D1.1 Article 2.3.2, except 2.3.2.4. The effective throat thickness of a fillet weld shall be the shortest distance from the root of the joint to the face of the diagrammatic weld, except that for the fillet welds made by the submerged AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. J2]
WELDS
6 - 75
TABLE J2.4 Minimum Size of Fillet Welds[b] Material Thickness of Thicker Part Joined (in.)
Minimum Size of Fillet Weld[a] (in.)
To 1⁄4 inclusive Over 1⁄4 to 1⁄2 Over 1⁄2 to 3⁄4 Over 3⁄4
1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16
[a] Leg dimension of fillet welds. Single pass welds must be used. [b] See Section J2.2b for maximum size of fillet welds.
arc process, the effective throat thickness shall be taken equal to the leg size for 3⁄ -in. and smaller fillet welds, and equal to the theoretical throat plus 0.11-in. 8 for fillet welds over 3⁄8-in. For fillet welds in holes and slots, the effective length shall be the length of the centerline of the weld along the center of the plane through the throat. In the case of overlapping fillets, the effective area shall not exceed the nominal cross-sectional area of the hole or slot, in the plane of the faying surface. 2b.
Limitations The minimum size of fillet welds shall be not less than the size required to transmit calculated forces nor the size as shown in Table J2.4 which is based upon experiences and provides some margin for uncalculated stress encountered during fabrication, handling, transportation, and erection. These provisions do not apply to fillet weld reinforcements of partial- or complete-joint-penetration welds. The maximum size of fillet welds of connected parts shall be: (a) Along edges of material less than 1⁄4-in. thick, not greater than the thickness of the material. (b) Along edges of material 1⁄4-in. or more in thickness, not greater than the thickness of the material minus 1⁄16-in., unless the weld is especially designated on the drawings to be built out to obtain full-throat thickness. In the as-welded condition, the distance between the edge of the base metal and the toe of the weld is permitted to be less than 1⁄16-in. provided the weld size is clearly verifiable. (c) For flange-web welds and similar connections, the actual weld size need not be larger than that required to develop the web capacity, and the requirements of Table J2.4 need not apply. The minimum effective length of fillet welds designed on the basis of strength shall be not less than four times the nominal size, or else the size of the weld shall be considered not to exceed 1⁄4 of its effective length. If longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in end connections of flat-bar tension members, the length of each fillet weld shall be not less than the perpendicular distance between AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 76
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Chap J
them. The transverse spacing of longitudinal fillet welds used in end connections of tension members shall comply with Section B3. The maximum effective length of fillet welds loaded by forces parallel to the weld, such as lap splices, shall not exceed 70 times the fillet weld leg. A uniform stress distribution may be assumed throughout the maximum effective length. Intermittent fillet welds may be used to transfer calculated stress across a joint or faying surfaces when the strength required is less than that developed by a continuous fillet weld of the smallest permitted size, and to join components of built-up members. The effective length of any segment of intermittent fillet welding shall be not less than four times the weld size, with a minimum of 11⁄2-in. In lap joints, the minimum amount of lap shall be five times the thickness of the thinner part joined, but not less than one inch. Lap joints joining plates or bars subjected to axial stress shall be fillet welded along the end of both lapped parts, except where the deflection of the lapped parts is sufficiently restrained to prevent opening of the joint under maximum loading. Fillet welds terminations shall not be at the extreme ends or sides of parts or members. They shall be either returned continuously around the ends or sides, respectively for a distance of not less than two times the nominal weld size or shall terminate not less than the nominal weld size from the sides or ends except as follows. For details and structural elements such as brackets, beam seats, framing angles, and simple end plates which are subject to cyclic (fatigue) out-of-plane forces and/or moments of frequency and magnitude that would tend to initiate a progressive failure of the weld, fillet welds shall be returned around the side or end for a distance not less than two times the nominal weld size. For framing angles and simple end-plate connections which depend upon flexibility of the outstanding legs for connection flexibility, if end returns are used, their length shall not exceed four times the nominal size of the weld. Fillet welds which occur on opposite sides of a common plane shall be interrupted at the corner common to both welds. End returns shall be indicated on the design and detail drawings. Fillet welds in holes or slots may be used to transmit shear in lap joints or to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts and to join components of built-up members. Such fillet welds may overlap, subject to the provisions of Section J2. Fillet welds in holes or slots are not to be considered plug or slot welds. 3.
Plug and Slot Welds
3a.
Effective Area The effective shearing area of plug and slot welds shall be considered as the nominal cross-sectional area of the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface.
3b.
Limitations Plug or slot welds are permitted to be used to transmit shear in lap joints or to prevent buckling of lapped parts and to join component parts of built-up members. The diameter of the holes for a plug weld shall not be less than the thickness of AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. J2]
WELDS
6 - 77
the part containing it plus 5⁄16-in., rounded to the next larger odd 1⁄16-in., nor greater than the minimum diameter plus 1⁄8-in. or 21⁄4 times the thickness of the weld. The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the diameter of the hole. The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed 10 times the thickness of the weld. The width of the slot shall be not less than the thickness of the part containing it plus 5⁄16-in. rounded to the next larger odd 1⁄16-in., nor shall it be larger than 21⁄4 times the thickness of the weld. The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners rounded to a radius of not less than the thickness of the part containing it, except those ends which extend to the edge of the part. The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their length shall be four times the width of the slot. The minimum center-to-center spacing in a longitudinal direction on any line shall be two times the length of the slot. The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 5⁄8-in. or less in thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the material. In material over 5⁄8-in. thick, the thickness of the weld shall be at least one-half the thickness of the material but not less than 5⁄8-in. 4.
Design Strength The design strength of welds shall be the lower value of φFBM ABM and φFw Aw, when applicable. The values of φ, FBM , and Fw and limitations thereon are given in Table J2.5, where FBM Fw ABM Aw φ
= nominal strength of the base material, ksi = nominal strength of the weld electrode, ksi = cross-sectional area of the base material, in.2 = effective cross-sectional area of the weld, in.2 = resistance factor
Alternatively, fillet welds loaded in-plane are permitted to be designed in accordance with Appendix J2.4. 5.
Combination of Welds If two or more of the general types of welds (groove, fillet, plug, slot) are combined in a single joint, the design strength of each shall be separately computed with reference to the axis of the group in order to determine the design strength of the combination.
6.
Matching Weld Metal The choice of electrode for use with complete-joint-penetration groove welds subject to tension normal to the effective area shall comply with the requirements for matching weld metals given in AWS D1.1. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 78
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Chap J
TABLE J2.5 Design Strength of Welds Types of Weld and Stress [a]
Material
Resistance Factor φ
Nominal Strength FBM or Fw
Required Weld Strength Level [b,c]
Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Weld Tension normal to effective area
Base
0.90
Fy
Compression normal to effective area Tension or compression parallel to axis of weld Shear on effective area
Base
0.90
Fy
Base Weld electrode
0.90 0.80
0.60Fy 0.60FEXX
Matching weld must be used. Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less than matching weld metal is permitted to be used.
Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Weld Compression normal to effective area Tension or compression parallel to axis of weld [d]
Base
0.90
Fy
Shear parallel to axis of weld
Base Weld electrode
0.75
[e] 0.60FEXX
Tension normal to effective area
Base Weld electrode
0.90 0.80
Fy 0.60FEXX
Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less than matching weld metal is permitted to be used.
Fillet Welds Shear on effective area Tension or compression parallel to axis of weld [d]
Base Weld electrode
0.75
[f] 0.60FEXX
Base
0.90
Fy
Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less than matching weld metal is permitted to be used.
Plug or Slot Welds Shear parallel to faying surfaces (on effective area)
Base Weld electrode
0.75
[e] 0.60FEXX
Weld metal with a strength level equal to or less than matching weld metal is permitted to be used.
[a] For definition of effective area, see Section J2. [b] For matching weld metal, see Table 4.1, AWS D1.1. [c] Weld metal one strength level stronger than matching weld metal is permitted. [d] Fillet welds and partial-joint-penetration groove welds joining component elements of built-up members, such as flange-to-web connections, are not required to be designed with to the tensile or compressive stress in these elements parallel to the axis of the welds. [e] The design of connected material is governed by Sections J4 and J5. [f] For alternative design strength, see Appendix J2.4.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. J3]
7.
BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
6 - 79
Mixed Weld Metal When notch-toughness is specified, the process consumables for all weld metal, tack welds, root pass, and subsequent passes deposited in a joint shall be compatible to assure notch-tough composite weld metal.
8.
Preheat for Heavy Shapes For ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and welded built-up members made of plates more than two inches thick, a preheat equal to or greater than 350ºF shall be used when making groove-weld splices.
J3.
BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
1.
High-Strength Bolts Use of high-strength bolts shall conform to the provisions of the Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, as approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections, except as otherwise provided in this Specification. If required to be tightened to more than 50 percent of their minimum specified tensile strength, A449 bolts in tension and bearing-type shear connections shall have an ASTM F436 hardened washer installed under the bolt head, and the nuts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A563. When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the washers, shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale. Except as noted below, all A325 and A490 bolts shall be tightened to a bolt tension not less than that given in Table J3.1. Tightening shall be done by any of the following methods: turn-of-nut method, a direct tension indicator, calibrated wrench, or alternative design bolt. Bolts in connections not subject to tension loads, where slip can be permitted and where loosening or fatigue due to vibration or load fluctuations are not design considerations, need only to be tightened to the snug-tight condition. The snug-tight condition is defined as the tightness attained by either a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a worker with an ordinary spud wrench that brings the connected plies into firm contact. The nominal strength value given in Table J3.2 for bearing-type connections shall be used for bolts tightened to the snug-tight condition. Bolts tightened only to the snug-tight condition shall be clearly identified on the design and erection drawings. When A490 bolts over one inch in diameter are used in slotted or oversize holes in external plies, a single hardened washer conforming to ASTM F436, except with 5⁄16-in. minimum thickness, shall be used in lieu of the standard washer. In slip-critical connections in which the direction of loading is toward an edge of a connected part, adequate bearing strength at factored load shall be provided based upon the applicable requirements of Section J3.10.
2.
Size and Use of Holes In slip-critical connections in which the direction of loading is toward edge of connected part, adequate bearing capacity at factored load shall be provided based upon the applicable requirements of Section J3.10. The maximum sizes of holes for rivets and bolts are given in Table J3.3, except AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 80
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Chap J
TABLE J3.1 Minimum Bolt Tension, kips* Bolt Size, in.
A325 Bolts
A490 Bolts
1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
12 19 28 39 51 56 71 85 103
15 24 35 49 64 80 102 121 148
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2
* Equal to 0.70 of minimum tensile strength of bolts, rounded off to nearest kip, as specified in ASTM specifications for A325 and A490 bolts with UNC threads.
that larger holes, required for tolerance on location of anchor bolts in concrete foundations, are allowed in column base details. Standard holes shall be provided in member-to-member connections, unless oversized, short-slotted, or long-slotted holes in bolted connections are approved by the designer. Finger shims up to 1⁄4-in. are permitted in slip-critical connections designed on the basis of standard holes without reducing the nominal shear strength of the fastener to that specified for slotted holes. Oversized holes are allowed in any or all plies of slip-critical connections, but they shall not be used in bearing-type connections. Hardened washers shall be installed over oversized holes in an outer ply. Short-slotted holes are allowed in any or all plies of slip-critical or bearing-type connections. The slots are permitted to be used without regard to direction of loading in slip-critical connections, but the length shall be normal to the direction of the load in bearing-type connections. Washers shall be installed over short-slotted holes in an outer ply; when high-strength bolts are used, such washers shall be hardened. Long-slotted holes are allowed in only one of the connected parts of either a slip-critical or bearing-type connection at an individual faying surface. Longslotted holes are permitted to be used without regard to direction of loading in slip-critical connections, but shall be normal to the direction of load in bearingtype connections. Where long-slotted holes are used in an outer ply, plate washers, or a continuous bar with standard holes, having a size sufficient to completely cover the slot after installation, shall be provided. In high-strength bolted connections, such plate washers or continuous bars shall be not less than 5⁄ -in. thick and shall be of structural grade material, but need not be hardened. 16 If hardened washers are required for use of high-strength bolts, the hardened washers shall be placed over the outer surface of the plate washer or bar. 3.
Minimum Spacing The distance between centers of standard, oversized, or slotted holes, shall not AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. J3]
BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
6 - 81
TABLE J3.2 Design Strength of Fasteners Tensile Strength Description of Fasteners
Resistance Factor φ
Nominal Strength, ksi
Shear Strength in Bearing-type Connections Resistance Factor φ
Nominal Strength, ksi
A307 bolts
45 [a]
24 [b,e]
A325 bolts, when threads are not excluded from shear planes
90 [d]
48 [e]
A325 bolts, when threads are excluded from shear planes
90 [d]
60 [e]
A490 bolts, when threads are not excluded from shear planes
113 [d]
60 [e]
A490 bolts, when threads are excluded from shear planes
0.75
113 [d]
0.75
75 [e]
Threaded parts meeting the requirements of Sect. A3, when threads are not excluded from shear planes
0.75Fu [a,c]
0.40Fu
Threaded parts meeting the requirements of Sect. A3, when threads are excluded from shear planes
0.75Fu [a,c]
0.50Fu [a,c]
A502, Gr. 1, hot-driven rivets
45 [a]
25 [e]
A502, Gr. 2 & 3, hot-driven rivets
60 [a]
33 [e]
[a] Static loading only. [b] Threads permitted in shear planes. [c] The nominal tensile strength of the threaded portion of an upset rod, based upon the cross-sectional area at its major thread diameter, AD shall be larger than the nominal body area of the rod before upsetting times Fy. [d] For A325 and A490 bolts subject to tensile fatigue loading, see Appendix K3. [e] When bearing-type connections used to splice tension members have a fastener pattern whose length, measured parallel to the line of force, exceeds 50 in., tabulated values shall be reduced by 20 percent.
be less than 22⁄3 times the nominal diameter of the fastener; a distance of 3d is preferred. Refer to Section J3.10 for bearing strength requirement. 4.
Minimum Edge Distance The distance from the center of a standard hole to an edge of a connected part shall not be less than either the applicable value from Table J3.4, or as required AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 82
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Chap J
TABLE J3.3 Nominal Hole Dimensions Hole Dimensions Bolt Diameter
Standard (Dia.)
Oversize (Dia.)
1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
9⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 11⁄16 d + 1⁄16
5⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 1 1 ⁄16 11⁄4 d + 5⁄16
1 ≥11⁄8
Short-slot (Width × Length)
(d
Long-slot Width × Length)
9⁄ × 11⁄ 16 16 11⁄ × 7⁄ 16 8 13⁄ × 1 16 15⁄ × 11⁄ 16 8 11⁄16 × 15⁄16 + 1⁄16) × (d + 3⁄8)
(d
9⁄ × 11⁄ 16 4 11⁄ × 19⁄ 16 16 13⁄ × 17⁄ 16 8 15⁄ × 23⁄ 16 16 11⁄16 × 21⁄2 + 1⁄16) × (2.5 ×
d)
TABLE J3.4 Minimum Edge Distance,[a] in. (Center of Standard Hole[b] to Edge of Connected Part) Nominal Rivet or Bolt Diameter (in.) 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 Over 11⁄4
At Sheared Edges
At Rolled Edges of Plates, Shapes or Bars, or Gas Cut Edges [c]
7⁄ 8
11⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄2 [d] 13⁄4 [d] 2 21⁄4 13⁄4 × Diameter
3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 11⁄2 15⁄8 11⁄4 × Diameter
[a] Lesser edge distances are permitted to be used provided Equations from J3.10, as appropriate, are satisfied. [b] For oversized or slotted holes, see Table J3.8. [c] All edge distances in this column are permitted to be reduced 1⁄8-in. when the hole is at a point where stress does not exceed 25 percent of the maximum design strength in the element. [d] These are permitted to be 11⁄4-in. at the ends of beam connection angles and shear end plates.
in Section J3.10. The distance from the center of an oversized or slotted hole to an edge of a connected part shall be not less than that required for a standard hole to an edge of a connected part plus the applicable increment C2 from Table J3.8. Refer to Section J3.10 for bearing strength requirement. 5.
Maximum Spacing and Edge Distance The maximum distance from the center of any bolt or rivet to the nearest edge of parts in contact shall be 12 times the thickness of the connected part under consideration, but shall not exceed six inches. The longitudinal spacing of connectors between elements in continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates shall be as follows: (a) For painted members or unpainted members not subject to corrosion, the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. J3]
BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
6 - 83
spacing shall not exceed 24 times the thickness of the thinner plate or 12 inches. (b) For unpainted members of weathering steel subject to atmospheric corrosion, the spacing shall not exceed 14 times the thickness of the thinner plate or seven inches. 6.
Design Tension or Shear Strength The design tension or shear strength of a high-strength bolt or threaded part is φFn Ab where φ = resistance factor tabulated in Table J3.2 Fn = nominal tensile strength Ft , or shear strength, Fv, tabulated in Table J3.2, ksi Ab = nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or threaded part (for upset rods, see Footnote c, Table J3.2), in.2 The applied load shall be the sum of the factored loads and any tension resulting from prying action produced by deformation of the connected parts.
7.
Combined Tension and Shear in Bearing-Type Connections The design strength of a bolt or rivet subject to combined tension and shear is φFt Ab, where φ is 0.75 and the nominal tension stress Ft shall be computed from the equations in Table J3.5 as a function of fv, the required shear stress produced by the factored loads. The design shear strength φFv, tabulated in Table J3.2, shall equal or exceed the shear stress, fv.
8.
High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical Connections The design for shear of high-strength bolts in slip-critical connections shall be in accordance with either Section J3.8a or J3.8b and checked for bearing in accordance with J3.2 and J3.10.
8a.
Slip-Critical Connections Designed at Service Loads The design resistance to shear of a bolt in a slip-critical connection is φFv Ab, where φ = 1.0 for standard, oversized, short-slotted, and long-slotted holes when the long slot is perpendicular to the line of force φ = 0.85 for long-slotted holes when the long slot is parallel to the line of force Fv = nominal slip-critical shear resistance tabulated in Table J3.6, ksi The design resistance to shear shall equal or exceed the shear on the bolt due to service loads. When the loading combination includes wind loads in addition to dead and live loads, the total shear on the bolt due to combined load effects, at service load, may be multiplied by 0.75. The values for Fv in Table J3.6 are based on Class A (slip coefficient 0.33), clean mill scale and blast cleaned surfaces with class A coatings. When specified by AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 84
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Chap J
TABLE J3.5 Tension Stress Limit (Ft), ksi Fasteners in Bearing-type Connections Description of Fasteners
Threads Included in the Shear Plane
Threads Excluded from the Shear Plane
59 − 1.9fv ≤ 45
A307 bolts A325 bolts
117 − 1.9fv ≤ 90
117 − 1.5fv ≤ 90
A490 bolts
147 − 1.9fv ≤ 113
147 − 1.5fv ≤ 113
0.98Fu − 1.9fv ≤ 0.75Fu
0.98Fu − 1.5fv ≤ 0.75Fu
Threaded parts A449 bolts over 11⁄2 diameter A502 Gr.1 rivets
59 − 1.8fv ≤ 45
A502 Gr.2 rivets
78 − 1.8fv ≤ 60
TABLE J3.6 Slip-Critical Nominal Resistance to Shear, ksi, of High-Strength Bolts[a] Nominal Resistance to Shear Type of Bolt
Standard Size Holes
Oversized and Short-slotted Holes
Long-slotted Holes
A325 A490
17 21
15 18
12 15
[a] For each shear plane.
the designer, the nominal slip resistance for connections having special faying surface conditions are permitted to be adjusted to the applicable values in the RCSC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification. Finger shims up to 1⁄4-in. are permitted to be introduced into slip-critical connections designed on the basis of standard holes without reducing the design shear stress of the fastener to that specified for slotted holes. 8b.
Slip-Critical Connections Designed at Factored Loads See Appendix J3.8b.
9.
Combined Tension and Shear in Slip-Critical Connections The design of slip-critical connections subject to tensile forces shall be in accordance with either Sections J3.9a and J3.8a or Sections J3.9b and J3.8b.
9a.
Slip-Critical Connections Designed at Service Loads The design resistance to shear of a bolt in a slip-critical connection subject to a AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. J3]
BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
6 - 85
tensile force T due to service loads shall be computed according to Section J3.8a multiplied by the following reduction factor, 1 −
T Tb
where
Tb = minimum bolt pre-tension from Table J3.1 9b.
Slip-Critical Connections Designed at Factored Loads See Appendix J3.9b.
10.
Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes The design bearing strength at bolt holes is φRn, where
φ = 0.75 Rn = nominal bearing strength Bearing strength shall be checked for both bearing-type and slip-critical connections. The use of oversize holes and short- and long-slotted holes parallel to the line of force is restricted to slip-critical connections per Section J3.2. In the following sections:
Le = distance (in.) along the line of force from the edge of the connected part to the center of a standard hole or the center of a short- and longslotted hole perpendicular to the line of force. For oversize holes and short- and long-slotted holes parallel to the line of force, Le shall be increased by the increment C2 of Table J3.8. s = distance (in.) along the line of force between centers of standard holes, or between centers of short- and long-slotted holes perpendicular to the line of force. For oversize holes and short- and long-slotted holes parallel to the line of force, s shall be increased by the spacing increment C1 of Table J3.7. d = diameter of bolt, in. Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of the critical part, ksi t = thickness of the critical connected part, in. For countersunk bolts and rivets, deduct one-half the depth of the countersink. (a) When Le ≥ 1.5d and s ≥ 3d and there are two or more bolts in line of force: For standard holes; short and long-slotted holes perpendicular to the line of force; oversize holes in slip-critical connections; and long and short-slotted holes in slip-critical connections when the line of force is parallel to the axis of the hole: When deformation around the bolt holes is a design consideration
Rn = 2.4dtFu
(J3-1a)
When deformation around the bolt holes is not a design consideration, for the bolt nearest the edge
Rn = LetFu ≤ 3.0dtFu AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(J3-1b)
6 - 86
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Chap J
TABLE J3.7 Values of Spacing Increment C1, in. Slotted Holes Nominal Diameter of Fastener
≤7⁄8 1 ≥11⁄8
Oversize Holes
Perpendicular to Line of Force
Short-slots
Long-slots [a]
1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
0 0 0
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16
11⁄2d − 1⁄16 17⁄16 11⁄2d − 1⁄16
Parallel to Line of Force
[a] When length of slot is less than maximum allowed in Table J3.5, C1 are permitted to be reduced by the difference between the maximum and actual slot lengths.
TABLE J3.8 Values of Edge Distance Increment C2, in. Slotted Holes Nominal Diameter of Fastener (in.)
≤7⁄8
Long Axis Perpendicular to Edge Oversized Holes 1⁄
Short Slots
16
1⁄ 8
1
1⁄ 8
1⁄ 8
≥11⁄8
1⁄ 8
3⁄ 16
Long Slots [a]
Long Axis Parallel to Edge
3⁄ d 4
0
[a] When length of slot is less than maximum allowable (see Table J3.5), C2 are permitted to be reduced by one-half the difference between the maximum and actual slot lengths.
and for the remaining bolts
Rn = (s − d / 2)tFu ≤ 3.0dtFu
(J3-1c)
For long-slotted bolt holes perpendicular to the line of force:
Rn = 2.0dtFu
(J3-1d)
(b) When Le < 1.5d or s < 3d or for a single bolt in the line of force: For standard holes; short and long-slotted holes perpendicular to the line of force; oversize holes in slip-critical connections; and long and short-slotted holes in slip-critical connections when the line of force is parallel to the axis of the hole: For a single bolt hole or the bolt hole nearest the edge when there are two or more bolt holes in the line of force
Rn = LetFu ≤ 2.4dtFu For the remaining bolt holes AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(J3-2a)
Sect. J4]
DESIGN RUPTURE STRENGTH
6 - 87
Rn = (s − d / 2)tFu ≤ 2.4dtFu
(J3-2b)
For long-slotted bolt holes perpendicular to the line of force: For a single bolt hole or the bolt hole nearest the edge where there are two or more bolt holes in the line of force
Rn = LetFu ≤ 2.0dtFu
(J3-2c)
For the remaining bolt holes
Rn = (s − d / 2)tFu ≤ 2.0dtFu 11.
(J3-2d)
Long Grips A307 bolts providing design strength, and for which the grip exceeds five diameters, shall have their number increased one percent for each additional 1⁄ -in. in the grip. 16
J4.
DESIGN RUPTURE STRENGTH
1.
Shear Rupture Strength The design strength for the limit state of rupture along a shear failure path in the affected elements of connected members shall be taken as φRn where
φ = 0.75 Rn = 0.6Fu Anv Anv = net area subject to shear, in.2 2.
(J4-1)
Tension Rupture Strength The design strength for the limit state of rupture along a tension path in the affected elements of connected members shall be taken as φRn where
φ = 0.75 Rn = Fu Ant Ant = net area subject to tension, in.2 3.
(J4-2)
Block Shear Rupture Strength Block shear is a limit state in which the resistance is determined by the sum of the shear strength on a failure path(s) and the tensile strength on a perpendicular segment. It shall be checked at beam end connections where the top flange is coped and in similar situations, such as tension members and gusset plates. When ultimate rupture strength on the net section is used to determine the resistance on one segment, yielding on the gross section shall be used on the perpendicular segment. The block shear rupture design strength, φRn, shall be determined as follows: (a) When Fu Ant ≥ 0.6Fu Anv :
φRn = φ[0.6Fy Agv + Fu Ant] AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(J4-3a)
6 - 88
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Chap J
(b) When 0.6Fu Anv > Fu Ant :
φRn = φ[0.6Fu Anv + Fy Agt]
(J4-3b)
where
φ = 0.75 Agv = gross area subject to shear, in.2 Agt = gross area subject to tension, in.2 Anv = net area subjected to shear, in.2 Ant = net area subjected to tension, in.2 J5.
CONNECTING ELEMENTS This section applies to the design of connecting elements, such as plates, gussets, angles, brackets, and the panel zones of beam-to-column connections.
1.
Eccentric Connections Intersecting axially stressed members shall have their gravity axis intersect at one point, if practicable; if not, provision shall be made for bending and shearing stresses due to the eccentricity. Also see Section J1.8.
2.
Design Strength of Connecting Elements in Tension The design strength, φRn, of welded, bolted, and riveted connecting elements statically loaded in tension (e.g., splice and gusset plates) shall be the lower value obtained according to limit states of yielding, rupture of the connecting element, and block shear rupture. (a) For tension yielding of the connecting element:
φ = 0.90 Rn = AgFy
(J5-1)
(b) For tension rupture of the connecting element:
φ = 0.75 Rn = AnFu
(J5-2)
where An is the net area, not to exceed 0.85Ag. (c) For block shear rupture of connecting elements, see Section J4.3. 3.
Other Connecting Elements For all other connecting elements, the design strength, φRn, shall be determined for the applicable limit state to ensure that the design strength is equal to or greater than the required strength, where Rn is the nominal strength appropriate to the geometry and type of loading on the connecting element. For shear yielding of the connecting element: φ = 0.90 Rn = 0.60AgFy AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(J5-3)
Sect. J8]
BEARING STRENGTH
6 - 89
If the connecting element is in compression an appropriate limit state analysis shall be made. J6.
FILLERS In welded construction, any filler 1⁄4-in. or more in thickness shall extend beyond the edges of the splice plate and shall be welded to the part on which it is fitted with sufficient weld to transmit the splice plate load, applied at the surface of the filler. The welds joining the splice plate to the filler shall be sufficient to transmit the splice plate load and shall be long enough to avoid overloading the filler along the toe of the weld. Any filler less than 1⁄4-in. thick shall have its edges made flush with the edges of the splice plate and the weld size shall be the sum of the size necessary to carry the splice plus the thickness of the filler plate. When bolts or rivets carrying loads pass through fillers thicker than 1⁄4-in., except in connections designed as slip-critical connections, the fillers shall be extended beyond the splice material and the filler extension shall be secured by enough bolts or rivets to distribute the total stress in the member uniformly over the combined section of the member and the filler, or an equivalent number of fasteners shall be included in the connection. Fillers between 1⁄4-in. and 3⁄4-in. thick, inclusive, need not be extended and developed, provided the design shear strength of the bolts is reduced by the factor, 0.4(t − 0.25), where t is the total thickness of the fillers, up to 3⁄4-in.
J7.
SPLICES Groove-welded splices in plate girders and beams shall develop the full strength of the smaller spliced section. Other types of splices in cross sections of plate girders and beams shall develop the strength required by the forces at the point of splice.
J8.
BEARING STRENGTH The strength of surfaces in bearing is φRn, where φ = 0.75 Rn is defined below for the various types of bearing (a) For milled surfaces, pins in reamed, drilled, or bored holes, and ends of fitted bearing stiffeners, Rn = 1.8Fy Apb
(J8-1)
where Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi Apb = projected bearing area, in.2 (b) For expansion rollers and rockers, If d ≤ 25 in., Rn = 1.2(Fy − 13)ld / 20 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(J8-2)
6 - 90
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Chap J
Rn = 6.0(Fy − 13)l√ d / 20
(J8-3)
If d > 25 in.,
where d = diameter, in. l = length of bearing, in. J9.
COLUMN BASES AND BEARING ON CONCRETE Proper provision shall be made to transfer the column loads and moments to the footings and foundations. In the absence of code regulations, design bearing loads on concrete may be taken as φcPp: (a) On the full area of a concrete support Pp = 0.85fc′A1
(J9-1)
(b) On less than the full area of a concrete support Pp = 0.85fc′A1√ A2 / A 1
(J9-2)
where φc = 0.60 A1 = area of steel concentrically bearing on a concrete support, in. A2 = maximum area of the portion of the supporting surface that is geometrically similar to and concentric with the loaded area, in.2 √ A2 / A 1 ≤ 2 J10. ANCHOR BOLTS AND EMBEDMENTS Anchor bolts and embedments shall be designed in accordance with American Concrete Institute or Prestressed Concrete Institute criteria. If the load factors and combinations given in Section A4.1 are used, a reduction in the φ factors specified by ACI shall be made based on the ratio of load factors given in Section A4.1 and in ACI.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 91
CHAPTER K CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
This chapter covers member strength design considerations pertaining to concentrated forces, ponding, and fatigue. K1. FLANGES AND WEBS WITH CONCENTRATED FORCES 1.
Design Basis Sections K1.2 through K1.7 apply to single and double concentrated forces as indicated in each Section. A single concentrated force is tensile or compressive. Double concentrated forces, one tensile and one compressive, form a couple on the same side of the loaded member. Transverse stiffeners are required at locations of concentrated tensile forces in accordance with Section K1.2 for the flange limit state of local bending, and at unframed ends of beams and girders in accordance with Section K1.8. Transverse stiffeners or doubler plates are required at locations of concentrated forces in accordance with Sections K1.3 through K1.6 for the web limit states of yielding, crippling, sidesway buckling, and compression buckling. Doubler plates or diagonal stiffeners are required in accordance with Section K1.7 for the web limit state of panel-zone shear. Transverse stiffeners and diagonal stiffeners required by Sections K1.2 through K1.8 shall also meet the requirements of Section K1.9. Doubler plates required by Sections K1.3 through K1.6 shall also meet the requirements of Section K1.10.
2.
Local Flange Bending This Section applies to both tensile single-concentrated forces and the tensile component of double-concentrated forces. A pair of transverse stiffeners extending at least one-half the depth of the web shall be provided adjacent to a concentrated tensile force centrally applied across the flange when the required strength of the flange exceeds φRn, where φ = 0.90 Rn = 6.25tf2Fyf where Fyf = specified minimum yield stress of the flange, ksi tf = thickness of the loaded flange, in. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(K1-1)
6 - 92
CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
[Chap. K
If the length of loading measured across the member flange is less than 0.15b, where b is the member flange width, Equation K1-1 need not be checked. When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the member end that is less than 10tf, Rn shall be reduced by 50 percent. When transverse stiffeners are required, they shall be welded to the loaded flange to develop the welded portion of the stiffener. The weld connecting transverse stiffeners to the web shall be sized to transmit the unbalanced force in the stiffener to the web. Also, see Section K1.9. 3.
Local Web Yielding This Section applies to single-concentrated forces and both components of double-concentrated forces. Either a pair of transverse stiffeners or a doubler plate, extending at least one-half the depth of the web, shall be provided adjacent to a concentrated tensile or compressive force when the required strength of the web at the toe of the fillet exceeds φRn, where φ = 1.0 and Rn is determined as follows: (a) When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the member end that is greater than the depth of the member d, Rn = (5k + N)Fyw tw
(K1-2)
(b) When the concentrated force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the member end that is less than or equal to the depth of the member d, Rn = (2.5k + N)Fywtw
(K1-3)
In Equations K1-2 and K1-3, the following definitions apply: Fyw N k tw
= specified minimum yield stress of the web, ksi = length of bearing (not less than k for end beam reactions), in. = distance from outer face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet, in. = web thickness, in.
When required for a tensile force normal to the flange, transverse stiffeners shall be welded to the loaded flange to develop the connected portion of the stiffener. When required for a compressive force normal to the flange, transverse stiffeners shall either bear on or be welded to the loaded flange to develop the force transmitted to the stiffener. The weld connecting transverse stiffeners to the web shall be sized to transmit the unbalanced force in the stiffener to the web. Also, see Section K1.9. Alternatively, when doubler plates are required, see Section K1.10. 4.
Web Crippling This Section applies to both compressive single-concentrated forces and the compressive component of double-concentrated forces. Either a transverse stiffener, a pair of transverse stiffeners, or a doubler plate, AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. K1]
FLANGES AND WEBS WITH CONCENTRATED FORCES
6 - 93
extending at least one-half the depth of the web, shall be provided adjacent to a concentrated compressive force when the required strength of the web exceeds φRn, where φ = 0.75 and Rn is determined as follows: (a) When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the member end that is greater than or equal to d / 2, 1.5
√
N tw Rn = 135t2w 1 + 3 d tf
Fywtf tw
(K1-4)
(b) When the concentrated compressive force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the member end that is less than d / 2, For N / d ≤ 0.2, N tw Rn = 68t 1 + 3 d tf
1.5
2 w
t √
Fywtf
(K1-5a)
w
For N / d > 0.2, 1.5
4N tw Rn = 68t2w 1 + − 0.2 tf d
√
Fywtf tw
(K1-5b)
In Equations K1-4 and K1-5, the following definitions apply: d = overall depth of the member, in. tf = flange thickness, in. When transverse stiffeners are required, they shall either bear on or be welded to the loaded flange to develop the force transmitted to the stiffener. The weld connecting transverse stiffeners to the web shall be sized to transmit the unbalanced force in the stiffener to the web. Also, see Section K1.9. Alternatively, when doubler plates are required, see Section K1.10. 5.
Sidesway Web Buckling This Section applies only to compressive single-concentrated forces applied to members where relative lateral movement between the loaded compression flange and the tension flange is not restrained at the point of application of the concentrated force. The design strength of the web is φRn, where φ = 0.85 and Rn is determined as follows: (a) If the compression flange is restrained against rotation: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 94
CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
[Chap. K
for (h / tw) / (l / bf) ≤ 2.3, 3
h / tw Cr t3w tf Rn = 1 + 0.4 h2 l / bf
(K1-6)
for (h / tw) / (l / bf) > 2.3, the limit state of sidesway web buckling does not apply. When the required strength of the web exceeds φRn, local lateral bracing shall be provided at the tension flange or either a pair of transverse stiffeners or a doubler plate, extending at least one-half the depth of the web, shall be provided adjacent to the concentrated compressive force. When transverse stiffeners are required, they shall either bear on or be welded to the loaded flange to develop the full applied force. The weld connecting transverse stiffeners to the web shall be sized to transmit the force in the stiffener to the web. Also, see Section K1.9. Alternatively, when doubler plates are required, they shall be sized to develop the full applied force. Also, see Section K1.10. (b) If the compression flange is not restrained against rotation: for (h / tw) / (l / bf) ≤ 1.7, 3
Cr t3w tf Rn = h2
h / tw 0.4 l / bf
(K1-7)
for (h / tw) / (l / bf) > 1.7, the limit state of sidesway web buckling does not apply. When the required strength of the web exceeds φRn, local lateral bracing shall be provided at both flanges at the point of application of the concentrated forces. In Equations K1-6 and K1-7, the following definitions apply: l bf tw h
= largest laterally unbraced length along either flange at the point of load, in. = flange width, in. = web thickness, in. = clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius for rolled shapes; distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear distance between flanges when welds are used for built-up shapes, in. Cr = 960,000 when Mu < My at the location of the force, ksi = 480,000 when Mu ≥ My at the location of the force, ksi
6.
Compression Buckling of the Web This Section applies to a pair of compressive single-concentrated forces or the compressive components in a pair of double-concentrated forces, applied at both flanges of a member at the same location. Either a single transverse stiffener, or pair of transverse stiffeners, or a doubler plate, extending the full depth of the web, shall be provided adjacent to AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. K1]
FLANGES AND WEBS WITH CONCENTRATED FORCES
6 - 95
concentrated compressive forces at both flanges when the required strength of the web exceeds φRn, where φ = 0.90 and Rn =
4,100t3w√ Fyw
(K1-8)
h
When the pair of concentrated compressive forces to be resisted is applied at a distance from the member end that is less than d / 2, Rn shall be reduced by 50 percent. When transverse stiffeners are required, they shall either bear on or be welded to the loaded flange to develop the force transmitted to the stiffener. The weld connecting transverse stiffeners to the web shall be sized to transmit the unbalanced force in the stiffener to the web. Also, see Section K1.9. Alternatively, when doubler plates are required, see Section K1.10. 7.
Panel-Zone Web Shear Either doubler plates or diagonal stiffeners shall be provided within the boundaries of the rigid connection of members whose webs lie in a common plane when the required strength exceeds φRv, where φ = 0.90 and Rv is determined as follows: (a) When the effect of panel-zone deformation on frame stability is not considered in the analysis, For Pu ≤ 0.4Py Rv = 0.60Fy dc tw
(K1-9)
For Pu > 0.4Py Rv = 0.60Fy dc tw 1.4 −
Pu Py
(K1-10)
(b) When frame stability, including plastic panel-zone deformation, is considered in the analysis: For Pu ≤ 0.75Py 3bcf tcf2 Rv = 0.60Fy dc tw 1 + db d c t
(K1-11)
3bcf tcf2 1.2Pu Rv = 0.60Fy dc tw 1 + 1.9 − db dc tw Py
(K1-12)
For Pu > 0.75Py
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 96
CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
[Chap. K
In Equations K1-9 through K1-12, the following definitions apply: tw bcf tcf db dc Fy Py A
= column web thickness, in. = width of column flange, in. = thickness of the column flange, in. = beam depth, in. = column depth, in. = yield strength of the column web, in. = Fy A, axial yield strength of the column, in. = column cross-sectional area, in.
When doubler plates are required, they shall meet the criteria of Section F2 and shall be welded to develop the proportion of the total shear force which is to be carried. Alternatively, when diagonal stiffeners are required, the weld connecting diagonal stiffeners to the web shall be sized to transmit the stiffener force caused by unbalanced moments to the web. Also, see Section K1.9. 8.
Unframed Ends of Beams and Girders At unframed ends of beams and girders not otherwise restrained against rotation about their longitudinal axes, a pair of transverse stiffeners, extending the full depth of the web, shall be provided. Also, see Section K1.9.
9.
Additional Stiffener Requirements for Concentrated Forces Transverse and diagonal stiffeners shall also comply with the following criteria: (1) The width of each stiffener plus one-half the thickness of the column web shall not be less than one-third of the width of the flange or moment connection plate delivering the concentrated force. (2) The thickness of a stiffener shall not be less than one-half the thickness of the flange or moment connection plate delivering the concentrated load, and not less than its width times √ Fy / 95. Full depth transverse stiffeners for compressive forces applied to a beam or plate girder flange shall be designed as axially compressed members (columns) in accordance with the requirements of Section E2, with an effective length of 0.75h, a cross section composed of two stiffeners and a strip of the web having a width of 25tw at interior stiffeners and 12tw at the ends of members. The weld connecting bearing stiffeners to the web shall be sized to transmit the excess web shear force to the stiffener. For fitted bearing stiffeners, see Section J8.1.
10.
Additional Doubler Plate Requirements for Concentrated Forces Doubler plates required by Sections K1.3 through K1.6 shall also comply with the following criteria: (1) The thickness and extent of the doubler plate shall provide the additional material necessary to equal or exceed the strength requirements. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. K3]
FATIGUE
6 - 97
(2) The doubler plate shall be welded to develop the proportion of the total force transmitted to the doubler plate. K2. PONDING The roof system shall be investigated by structural analysis to assure adequate strength and stability under ponding conditions, unless the roof surface is provided with sufficient slope toward points of free drainage or adequate individual drains to prevent the accumulation of rainwater. The roof system shall be considered stable and no further investigation is needed if:
Cp + 0.9Cs ≤ 0.25
(K2-1)
Id ≥ 25(S4)10−6
(K2-2)
where
Cp =
32LsL4p 107Ip
Cs =
32SL4s 107Is
Lp = column spacing in direction of girder (length of primary members), ft Ls = column spacing perpendicular to direction of girder (length of secondary members), ft S = spacing of secondary members, ft Ip = moment of inertia of primary members, in.4 Is = moment of inertia of secondary members, in.4 Id = moment of inertia of the steel deck supported on secondary members, in.4 per ft For trusses and steel joists, the moment of inertia Is shall be decreased 15 percent when used in the above equation. A steel deck shall be considered a secondary member when it is directly supported by the primary members. See Appendix K2 for an alternate determination of flat roof framing stiffness. K3. FATIGUE Few members or connections in conventional buildings need to be designed for fatigue, since most load changes in such structures occur only a small number of times or produce only minor stress fluctuations. The occurrence of full design wind or earthquake loads is too infrequent to warrant consideration in fatigue design. However, crane runways and supporting structures for machinery and equipment are often subject to fatigue loading conditions. Members and their connections subject to fatigue loading shall be proportioned in accordance with the provisions of Appendix K3 for service loads. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 98
CHAPTER L SERVICEABILITY DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
This chapter is intended to provide design guidance for serviceability considerations. Serviceability is a state in which the function of a building, its appearance, maintainability, durability, and comfort of its occupants are preserved under normal usage. The general design requirement for serviceability is given in Section A5.4. Limiting values of structural behavior to ensure serviceability (e.g., maximum deflections, accelerations, etc.) shall be chosen with due regard to the intended function of the structure. Where necessary, serviceability shall be checked using realistic loads for the appropriate serviceability limit state. L1. CAMBER If any special camber requirements are necessary to bring a loaded member into proper relation with the work of other trades, as for the attachment of runs of sash, the requirements shall be set forth in the design documents. Beams and trusses detailed without specified camber shall be fabricated so that after erection any camber due to rolling or shop assembly shall be upward. If camber involves the erection of any member under a preload, this shall be noted in the design documents. L2. EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION Adequate provision shall be made for expansion and contraction appropriate to the service conditions of the structure. L3. DEFLECTIONS, VIBRATION, AND DRIFT 1.
Deflections Deformations in structural members and structural systems due to service loads shall not impair the serviceability of the structure.
2.
Floor Vibration Vibration shall be considered in designing beams and girders supporting large areas free of partitions or other sources of damping where excessive vibration due to pedestrian traffic or other sources within the building is not acceptable.
3.
Drift Lateral deflection or drift of structures due to code-specified wind or seismic loads shall not cause collision with adjacent structures nor exceed the limiting values of such drifts which may be specified or appropriate. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. L5]
CORROSION
6 - 99
L4. CONNECTION SLIP For the design of slip-critical connections see Sections J3.8 and J3.9. L5. CORROSION When appropriate, structural components shall be designed to tolerate corrosion or shall be protected against corrosion that may impair the strength or serviceability of the structure.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 100
CHAPTER M FABRICATION, ERECTION, AND QUALITY CONTROL
This chapter provides requirements for shop drawings, fabrication, shop painting, erection, and quality control. M1. SHOP DRAWINGS Shop drawings giving complete information necessary for the fabrication of the component parts of the structure, including the location, type, and size of all welds, bolts, and rivets, shall be prepared in advance of the actual fabrication. These drawings shall clearly distinguish between shop and field welds and bolts and shall clearly identify slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. Shop drawings shall be made in conformity with good practice and with due regard to speed and economy in fabrication and erection. M2. FABRICATION 1.
Cambering, Curving, and Straightening Local application of heat or mechanical means is permitted to be used to introduce or correct camber, curvature, and straightness. The temperature of heated areas, as measured by approved methods, shall not exceed 1,100°F for A514 and A852 steel nor 1,200°F for other steels.
2.
Thermal Cutting Thermally cut edges shall meet the requirements of AWS 3.2.2 with the exception that thermally cut free edges which will be subject to calculated static tensile stress shall be free of round bottom gouges greater than 3⁄16-in. deep and sharp V-shaped notches. Gouges greater than 3⁄16-in. deep and notches shall be removed by grinding or repaired by welding. Re-entrant corners, except re-entrant corners of beam copes and weld access holes, shall meet the requirements of AWS 3.2.4. If other specified contour is required it must be shown on the contract documents. Beam copes and weld access holes shall meet the geometrical requirements of Section J1.6. For beam copes and weld access holes in ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and welded built-up shapes with material thickness greater than two inches, a preheat temperature of not less than 150°F shall be applied prior to thermal cutting.
3.
Planing of Edges Planing or finishing of sheared or thermally cut edges of plates or shapes is not AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. M2]
FABRICATION
6 - 101
required unless specifically called for in the design documents or included in a stipulated edge preparation for welding. 4.
Welded Construction The technique of welding, the workmanship, appearance, and quality of welds and the methods used in correcting nonconforming work shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 except as modified in Section J2.
5.
Bolted Construction All parts of bolted members shall be pinned or bolted and rigidly held together during assembly. Use of a drift pin in bolt holes during assembly shall not distort the metal or enlarge the holes. Poor matching of holes shall be cause for rejection. If the thickness of the material is not greater than the nominal diameter of the bolt plus 1⁄8-in., the holes are permitted to be punched. If the thickness of the material is greater than the nominal diameter of the bolt plus 1⁄8-in., the holes shall be either drilled or sub-punched and reamed. The die for all sub-punched holes, and the drill for all sub-drilled holes, shall be at least 1⁄16-in. smaller than the nominal diameter of the bolt. Holes in A514 steel plates over 1⁄2-in. thick shall be drilled. Fully inserted finger shims, with a total thickness of not more than 1⁄4-in. within a joint, are permitted in joints without changing the design strength (based upon hole type) for the design of connections. The orientation of such shims is independent of the direction of application of the load. The use of high-strength bolts shall conform to the requirements of the RCSC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
6.
Compression Joints Compression joints which depend on contact bearing as part of the splice strength shall have the bearing surfaces of individual fabricated pieces prepared by milling, sawing, or other suitable means.
7.
Dimensional Tolerances Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with the AISC Code of Standard Practice.
8.
Finish of Column Bases Column bases and base plates shall be finished in accordance with the following requirements: (1) Steel bearing plates two inches or less in thickness are permitted without milling, provided a satisfactory contact bearing is obtained. Steel bearing plates over two inches but not over four inches in thickness are permitted to be straightened by pressing or, if presses are not available, by milling for all bearing surfaces (except as noted in subparagraphs 2 and 3 of this section), to obtain a satisfactory contact bearing. Steel bearing plates over four inches AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 102
FABRICATION, ERECTION, AND QUALITY CONTROL
[Chap. M
in thickness shall be milled for all bearing surfaces (except as noted in subparagraphs 2 and 3 of this section). (2) Bottom surfaces of bearing plates and column bases which are grouted to ensure full bearing contact on foundations need not be milled. (3) Top surfaces of bearing plates need not be milled when full-penetration welds are provided between the column and the bearing plate. M3. SHOP PAINTING 1.
General Requirements Shop painting and surface preparation shall be in accordance with the provisions of the AISC Code of Standard Practice. Shop paint is not required unless specified by the contract documents.
2.
Inaccessible Surfaces Except for contact surfaces, surfaces inaccessible after shop assembly shall be cleaned and painted prior to assembly, if required by the design documents.
3.
Contact Surfaces Paint is permitted unconditionally in bearing-type connections. For slip-critical connections, the faying surface requirements shall be in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, paragraph 3(b).
4.
Finished Surfaces Machine-finished surfaces shall be protected against corrosion by a rustinhibitive coating that can be removed prior to erection, or which has characteristics that make removal prior to erection unnecessary.
5.
Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds Unless otherwise specified in the design documents, surfaces within two inches of any field weld location shall be free of materials that would prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes during welding.
M4. ERECTION 1.
Alignment of Column Bases Column bases shall be set level and to correct elevation with full bearing on concrete or masonry.
2.
Bracing The frame of steel skeleton buildings shall be carried up true and plumb within the limits defined in the AISC Code of Standard Practice. Temporary bracing shall be provided, in accordance with the requirements of the Code of Standard Practice, wherever necessary to support all loads to which the structure may be subjected, including equipment and the operation of same. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as required for safety. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. M5]
3.
QUALITY CONTROL
6 - 103
Alignment No permanent bolting or welding shall be performed until the adjacent affected portions of the structure have been properly aligned.
4.
Fit of Column Compression Joints and Base Plates Lack of contact bearing not exceeding a gap of 1⁄16-in., regardless of the type of splice used (partial-joint-penetration groove welded, or bolted), is permitted. If the gap exceeds 1⁄16-in., but is less than 1⁄4-in., and if an engineering investigation shows that sufficient contact area does not exist, the gap shall be packed out with non-tapered steel shims. Shims need not be other than mild steel, regardless of the grade of the main material.
5.
Field Welding Shop paint on surfaces adjacent to joints to be field welded shall be wire brushed if necessary to assure weld quality. Field welding of attachments to installed embedments in contact with concrete shall be done in such a manner as to avoid excessive thermal expansion of the embedment which could result in spalling or cracking of the concrete or excessive stress in the embedment anchors.
6.
Field Painting Responsibility for touch-up painting, cleaning, and field painting shall be allocated in accordance with accepted local practices, and this allocation shall be set forth explicitly in the design documents.
7.
Field Connections As erection progresses, the structure shall be securely bolted or welded to support all dead, wind, and erection loads.
M5. QUALITY CONTROL The fabricator shall provide quality control procedures to the extent that the fabricator deems necessary to assure that all work is performed in accordance with this Specification. In addition to the fabricator’s quality control procedures, material and workmanship at all times may be subject to inspection by qualified inspectors representing the purchaser. If such inspection by representatives of the purchaser will be required, it shall be so stated in the design documents. 1.
Cooperation As far as possible, all inspection by representatives of the purchaser shall be made at the fabricator’s plant. The fabricator shall cooperate with the inspector, permitting access for inspection to all places where work is being done. The purchaser’s inspector shall schedule this work for minimum interruption to the work of the fabricator.
2.
Rejections Material or workmanship not in reasonable conformance with the provisions of this Specification may be rejected at any time during the progress of the work. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 104
FABRICATION, ERECTION, AND QUALITY CONTROL
[Chap. M
The fabricator shall receive copies of all reports furnished to the purchaser by the inspection agency. 3.
Inspection of Welding The inspection of welding shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of AWS D1.1 except as modified in Section J2. When visual inspection is required to be performed by AWS certified welding inspectors, it shall be so specified in the design documents. When nondestructive testing is required, the process, extent, and standards of acceptance shall be clearly defined in the design documents.
4.
Inspection of Slip-Critical High-Strength Bolted Connections The inspection of slip-critical high-strength bolted connections shall be in accordance with the provisions of the RCSC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.
5.
Identification of Steel The fabricator shall be able to demonstrate by a written procedure and by actual practice a method of material application and identification, visible at least through the “fit-up” operation, of the main structural elements of a shipping piece. The identification method shall be capable of verifying proper material application as it relates to: (1) Material specification designation (2) Heat number, if required (3) Material test reports for special requirements.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 105
APPENDIX B DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Appendix B5.1 provides an expanded definition of limiting width-thickness ratio for webs in combined flexure and axial compression. Appendix B5.3 applies to the design of members containing slender compression elements. B5. LOCAL BUCKLING 1.
Classification of Steel Sections For members with unequal flanges and with webs in combined flexural and axial compression, λr for the limit state of web local buckling is λr =
h P 253 1 + 2.83 1 − u h Fy √ φ c bPy
(A-B5-1)
3 h 3 ≤ ≤ 4 hc 2 For members with unequal flanges with webs subjected to flexure only, λr for the limit state of web local buckling is λr =
h 253 1 + 2.83 Fy √ hc
(A-B5-2)
3 h 3 ≤ ≤ 4 hc 2 where λr, h, and hc are as defined in Section B5.1. These substitutions shall be made in Appendices F and G when applied to members with unequal flanges. If the compression flange is larger than the tension flange, λr shall be determined using Equation A-B5-1, A-B5-2, or Table B5.1. 3.
Slender-Element Compression Sections Axially loaded members containing elements subject to compression which have a width-thickness ratio in excess of the applicable λr as stipulated in Section B5.1 shall be proportioned according to this Appendix. Flexural members with slender compression elements shall be designed in accordance with Appendices F and G. Flexural members with proportions not covered by Appendix F1 shall be designed in accordance with this Appendix. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 106
3a.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
[App. B
Unstiffened Compression Elements The design strength of unstiffened compression elements whose width-thickness ratio exceeds the applicable limit λr as stipulated in Section B5.1 shall be subject to a reduction factor Qs. The value of Qs shall be determined by Equations A-B5-3 through A-B5-10, as applicable. When such elements comprise the compression flange of a flexural member, the maximum required bending stress shall not exceed φbFy Qs, where φb = 0.90. The design strength of axially loaded compression members shall be modified by the appropriate reduction factor Q, as provided in Appendix B5.3c. (a) For single angles:
Fy : when 76.0 / √ Fy < b / t < 155 / √ Fy Qs = 1.340 − 0.00447(b / t)√
(A-B5-3)
when b / t > 155 / √ Fy : Qs = 15,500 / [Fy (b / t)2]
(A-B5-4)
(b) For flanges, angles, and plates projecting from rolled beams or columns or other compression members:
Fy : when 95.0 / √ Fy < b / t < 176 / √ Fy Qs = 1.415 − 0.00437(b / t)√
(A-B5-5)
when b / t ≥ 176 / √ Fy : Qs = 20,000 / [Fy (b / t)2]
(A-B5-6)
(c) For flanges, angles and plates projecting from built-up columns or other compression members: Fy / kc : when 109 / √ Fy / kc < b / t < 200 / √ Fy / kc Qs = 1.415 − 0.00381(b / t)√
(A-B5-7)
when b / t ≥ 200 / √ Fy / kc : Qs = 26,200kc / [Fy (b / t)2] The coefficient, kc, shall be computed as follows: (a) For I-shaped sections: kc =
4 , 0.35 ≤ kc ≤ 0.763 √ h / tw
where: h = depth of web, in. tw = thickness of web, in. (b) For other sections: kc = 0.763 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(A-B5-8)
Sect. A-B5]
LOCAL BUCKLING
6 - 107
(d) For stems of tees: when 127 / √ Fy < b / t < 176 / √ Fy : Qs = 1.908 − 0.00715(b / t)√ Fy
(A-B5-9)
Fy : when b / t ≥ 176 / √ Qs = 20,000 / [Fy (b / t)2]
(A-B5-10)
where b = width of unstiffened compression element as defined in Section B5.1, in. t = thickness of unstiffened element, in. Fy = specified minimum yield stress, ksi 3b.
Stiffened Compression Elements When the width-thickness ratio of uniformly compressed stiffened elements (except perforated cover plates) exceeds the limit λr stipulated in Section B5.1, a reduced effective width be shall be used in computing the design properties of the section containing the element. (a) For flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness: b 238 : when ≥ t f √ 64.9 326t 1− (A-B5-11) be = (b / t)√ f √ f otherwise be = b. (b) For other uniformly compressed elements: b 253 when ≥ : t √f 57.2 326t 1− be = (b / t)√ f √ f
(A-B5-12)
otherwise be = b where b = actual width of a stiffened compression element, as defined in Section B5.1, in. be = reduced effective width, in. t = element thickness, in. f = computed elastic compressive stress in the stiffened elements, based on the design properties as specified in Appendix B5.3c, ksi. If unstiffened elements are included in the total cross section, f for the stiffened element must be such that the maximum compressive stress in the unstiffened element does not exceed φcFcr as defined in Appendix B5.3c with Q = Qs and φc = 0.85, or φbFy Qs with φb = 0.90, as applicable. (c) For axially loaded circular sections with diameter-to-thickness ratio D / t greater than 3,300 / Fy but less than 13,000 / Fy AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 108
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Q = Qa =
2 1,100 + Fy (D / t) 3
[App. B
(A-B5-13)
where D = outside diameter, in. t = wall thickness, in. 3c.
Design Properties Properties of sections shall be determined using the full cross section, except as follows: In computing the moment of inertia and elastic section modulus of flexural members, the effective width of uniformly compressed stiffened elements be, as determined in Appendix B5.3b, shall be used in determining effective cross-sectional properties. For unstiffened elements of the cross section, Qs is determined from Appendix B5.3a. For stiffened elements of the cross section Qa =
effective area actual area
(A-B5-14)
where the effective area is equal to the summation of the effective areas of the cross section. 3d.
Design Strength For axially loaded compression members the gross cross-sectional area and the radius of gyration r shall be computed on the basis of the actual cross section. The critical stress Fcr shall be determined as follows: (a) For λc√ Q ≤ 1.5: 2
Fcr = Q(0.658Qλc)Fy
(A-B5-15)
0.877 Fcr = 2 Fy λc
(A-B5-16)
Q = QsQa
(A-B5-17)
(a) For λc√ Q > 1.5:
where
Cross sections comprised of only unstiffened elements, Q = Qs, (Qa = 1.0) Cross sections comprised of only stiffened elements, Q = Qa, (Qs = 1.0) Cross sections comprised of both stiffened and unstiffened elements, Q = QsQa
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 109
APPENDIX E COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS
This Appendix applies to the strength of doubly symmetric columns with thin plate elements, singly symmetric and unsymmetric columns for the limit states of flexuraltorsional and torsional buckling. E3. DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH FOR FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING The strength of compression members determined by the limit states of torsional and flexural-torsional buckling is φcPn, where φc = 0.85 Pn = nominal resistance in compression, kips Pn = AgFcr Ag = gross area of cross section, in.2
(A-E3-1)
The nominal critical stress Fcr is determined as follows: (a) For λe√ Q ≤ 1.5: 2
Fcr = Q(0.658Qλe)Fy
(A-E3-2)
0.877 Fcr = 2 Fy λe
(A-E3-3)
Fy / Fe λe = √
(A-E3-4)
Q > 1.5: (b) For λe√
where
Fy = specified minimum yield stress of steel, ksi Q = 1.0 for elements meeting the width-thickness ratios λr of Section B5.1 Q = QsQa for elements not meeting the width-thickness ratios λr of Section B5.1 and determined in accordance with the provisions of Appendix B5.3 The critical torsional or flexural-torsional elastic buckling stress Fe is determined as follows:
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 110
COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS
[App. E
(a) For doubly symmetric shapes: π2ECw 1 + GJ Fe = 2 ( K l) z Ix + Iy
(A-E3-5)
(b) For singly symmetric shapes where y is the axis of symmetry:
Fey + Fez 1− Fe = 2H
4Fey Fez H 1− (Fey + Fez )2
√
(A-E3-6)
(c) For unsymmetric shapes, the critical flexural-torsional elastic buckling stress Fe is the lowest root of the cubic equation 2
2
xo yo (Fe −Fex)(Fe −Fey)(Fe −Fez) − Fe (Fe −Fey) _ − Fe 2 (Fe −Fex) __ = 0 (A-E3-7) ro ro 2
where Kz E G Cw J Ix, Iy xo, yo
= effective length factor for torsional buckling = modulus of elasticity, ksi = shear modulus, ksi = warping constant, in.6 = torsional constant, in.4 = moment of inertia about the principal axes, in.4 = coordinates of shear center with respect to the centroid, in. _ Ix + Iy ro2 = x2o + y2o + A
(A-E3-8)
x2o + y2o H=1− _2 ro
(A-E3-9)
Fex =
π2E (Kxl / rx)2
(A-E3-10)
Fey =
π2E (Kyl / ry)2
(A-E3-11)
π2ECw 1 + GJ _ 2 Fez = 2 (Kzl) Aro where A = cross-sectional area of member, in.2 l = unbraced length, in. Kx, Ky = effective length factors in x and y directions _rx, ry = radii of gyration about the principal axes, in. = polar radius of gyration about the shear center, in. ro AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(A-E3-12)
6 - 111
APPENDIX F BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
Appendix F1 provides the design flexural strength of beams and girders. Appendix F2 provides the design shear strength of webs with and without stiffeners and requirements on transverse stiffeners. Appendix F3 applies to web-tapered members. F1.
DESIGN FOR FLEXURE The design strength for flexural members is φbMn where φb = 0.90 and Mn is the nominal strength. Table A-F1.1 provides a tabular summary of Equations F1-1 through F1-15 for determining the nominal flexural strength of beams and girders. For slenderness parameters of cross sections not included in Table A-F1.1, see Appendix B5.3. For flexural members with unequal flanges see Appendix B5.1 for the determination of λr for the limit state of web local buckling. The nominal flexural strength Mn is the lowest value obtained according to the limit states of yielding: lateral-torsional buckling (LTB); flange local buckling (FLB); and web local buckling (WLB). The nominal flexural strength Mn shall be determined as follows for each limit state: (a) For λ ≤ λp: Mn = Mp
(A-F1-1)
(b) For λp < λ ≤ λr: For the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling: λ − λp Mn = Cb Mp − (Mp − Mr) ≤ Mp λr − λp
(A-F1-2)
For the limit states of flange and web local buckling: λ − λp Mn = Mp − (Mp − Mr) λr − λp
(A-F1-3)
(c) For λ > λr: For the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling and flange local buckling: Mn = Mcr = SFcr ≤ Mp AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(A-F1-4)
6 - 112
BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
[App. F
For design of girders with slender webs, the limit state of web local buckling is not applicable. See Appendix G2. For λ of the flange > λr in shapes not included in Table A-F1.1, see Appendix B5.3. For λ of the web > λr, see Appendix G. The terms used in the above equations are: Mn Mp Mcr Mr
λ λ λ λ
λp λr Fcr Cb S Lb ry
= nominal flexural strength, kip-in. = Fy Z, plastic moment ≤ 1.5 Fy S, kip-in. = buckling moment, kip-in. = limiting buckling moment (equal to Mcr when λ = λr), kip-in. = controlling slenderness parameter = minor axis slenderness ratio Lb / ry for lateral-torsional buckling = flange width-thickness ratio b / t for flange local buckling as defined in Section B5.1 = web depth-thickness ratio h / tw for web local buckling as defined in Section B5.1 = largest value of λ for which Mn = Mp = largest value of λ for which buckling is inelastic = critical stress, ksi = Bending coefficient dependent on moment gradient, see Section F1.2a, Equation F1-3 = section modulus, in.3 = laterally unbraced length, in. = radius of gyration about minor axis, in.
The applicable limit states and equations for Mp, Mr, Fcr, λ, λp, and λr are given in Table A-F1.1 for shapes covered in this Appendix. The terms used in the table are: A FL Fr Fr Fr Fy Fyf Fyw Iyc J Re Seff Sxc Sxt Z b d
= cross-sectional area, in.2 = smaller of (Fyf −Fr) or Fyw, ksi = compressive residual stress in flange = 10 ksi for rolled shapes = 16.5 ksi for welded shapes = specified minimum yield strength, ksi = yield strength of the flange, ksi = yield strength of the web, ksi = moment of inertia of compression flange about y axis or if reverse curvature bending, moment of inertia of smaller flange, in.4 = torsional constant, in.4 = see Appendix G2 = effective section modulus about major axis, in.3 = section modulus of the outside fiber of the compression flange, in.3 = section modulus of the outside fiber of the tension flange, in.3 = plastic section modulus, in.3 = flange width, in. = overall depth, in. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A-F2]
f h ryc tf tw
DESIGN FOR SHEAR
6 - 113
= computed compressive stress in the stiffened element, ksi = clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius at each flange, in. = radius of gyration of compression flange about y axis or if reverse curvature bending, smaller flange, in. = flange thickness, in. = web thickness, in.
F2.
DESIGN FOR SHEAR
2.
Design Shear Strength The design shear strength of stiffened or unstiffened webs is φvVn, where φv = 0.90 Vn = nominal shear strength defined as follows: kv /Fyw: For h / tw ≤ 187√ Vn = 0.6FywAw
(A-F2-1)
kv /Fyw: For 187√ kv /Fyw < h / tw ≤ 234√ kv /Fyw ) / (h / tw) Vn = 0.6FywAw(187√
(A-F2-2)
For h / tw > 234√ kv /Fyw: Vn = Aw(26,400kv) / (h / tw)2
(A-F2-3)
where kv = 5 + 5 / (a / h)2 kv = 5 when a / h > 3 or a / h > [260 / (h / t)]2 a = distance between transverse stiffeners, in. h = for rolled shapes, the clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius, in. h = for built-up welded sections, the clear distance between flanges, in. h = for built-up bolted or riveted sections, the distance between fastener lines, in. 3.
Transverse Stiffeners Fyw, Transverse stiffeners are not required in plate girders where h / tw ≤ 418 / √ or where the required shear, Vu, as determined by structural analysis for the factored loads, is less than or equal to 0.6φvAwFywCv, where Cv is determined for kv = 5 and φv = 0.90. Transverse stiffeners used to develop the web design shear strength as provided in Appendix F2.2 shall have a moment of inertia about an axis in the web center for stiffener pairs or about the face in contact with the web plate for single stiffeners, which shall not be less than at3w j, where j = 2.5 / (a / h)2 − 2 ≥ 0.5 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(A-F2-4)
6 - 114
BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
[App. F
TABLE A-F1.1 Nominal Strength Parameters Plastic Moment Mp
Shape
Fy Zx [b]
Channels and doubly and singly symmetric I-shaped beams (including hybrid beams) bent about major axis [a]
Limit State of Buckling LTB doubly symmetric members and channels LTB singly symmetric members
Channels and doubly and singly symmetric I-shaped members bent about minor axis [a]
π Sx
√
[d] λr =
X1 FL
√ 1+√ 1 + X2F2L
[e] Fcr =
EGJA 2
Mcr
Sxc
, where Mcr =
FL Sxc ≤ Fyf Sxt
FL Sx
WLB
ReFyf Sx
FLB
Fy Sy
Fy Zy
2
X2 = 4
FL Sx
FLB
NOTE: LTB applies only for strong axis bending. [a] Excluding double angles and tees. [b] Computed from fully plastic stress distribution for hybrid sections.
[c] X1 =
Limiting Buckling Moment Mr
Cw Sx Iy GJ
57,000Cb √ IyJ [B1 + √ (1 + B2 + B21) ] ≤ Mp Lb
where B1 = 2.25[2(Iyc / Iy) − 1](h / Lb)√ (Iy / J) B2 = 25(1 − Iyc / Iy)(Iyc / J)(h / Lb)2 Cb = 1.0 if Iyc / Iy < 0.1 or Iyc / Iy > 0.9.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A-F2]
DESIGN FOR SHEAR
6 - 115
TABLE A-F1.1 (cont’d) Nominal Strength Parameters Slenderness Parameters λ
λp
Lb ry
300 √Fyf
[e]
Lb ryc
300 √Fyf
[f]
b t
65 √Fyf
Not applicable
h tw
640 √Fyf
Critical Stress Fcr
CbX1√ 2 λ
1 + √ 2λ
X21X2 2
λr [c, d]
Value of λ for which Mcr (Cb = 1) = Mr [g]
λr as defined in Section B5.1
Same as for major axis
20,000
[f] Fcr =
λ2
Fcr =
for rolled shapes
26,200kc for welded shapes λ2
where kc = 4 / √ h / tw and 0.35 ≤ kc ≤ 0.763 [g] λr = λr =
141 for rolled shapes FL √ 162 √ FL / kc
for welded shapes
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Limitations Applicable for I-shaped members if h / tw ≤ λr when h / tw > λr See Appendix G.
6 - 116
BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
[App. F
TABLE A-F1.1 (cont’d) Nominal Strength Parameters Shape
Plastic Moment Mp
Limit State of Buckling
Limiting Buckling Moment Mr
Solid symmetric shapes, except rectangular bars, bent about major axis
Fy Zx
Solid rectangular bars bent about major axis
Fy Zx
LTB
Fy Sx
Symmetric box sections loaded in a plane of symmetry
Fy Z
LTB
Fyf Seff
FLB
FL Seff
WLB
Same as for I-shape
LTB
Not applicable
FLB
600 Mn = + Fy S [h] D / t
WLB
Not applicable
Circular tubes
Fy Z
Not applicable
[h] This equation is to be used in place of Equation A-F1-4.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A-F2]
DESIGN FOR SHEAR
6 - 117
TABLE A-F1.1 (cont’d) Nominal Strength Parameters Slenderness Parameters Critical Stress Fcr
λ
λp
λr
Limitations
Not applicable
57,000Cb√ JA λSx
Lb ry
3,750√ JA Mp
57,000√ JA Mr,
57,000Cb√ JA λSx
Lb ry
3,750√ JA Mp
57,000√ JA Mr
Seff F [i] Sx y
b t
190 Fy √
238 Fy √
Applicable if h / tw ≤ 970 / √ Fyf
Same as for I-shape Not applicable 9,570 D/t
D/t
2,070 Fy
8,970 Fy
D/t
1.5:
where a = clear distance between transverse stiffeners, in. h = clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius for rolled shapes; and for built-up sections, the distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear distance between flanges when welds are used, in. tw = web thickness, in. Fyf = specified minimum yield stress of a flange, ksi In unstiffened girders h / tw shall not exceed 260. G2. DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH The design flexural strength for plate girders with slender webs shall be φbMn, where φb = 0.90 and Mn is the lower value obtained according to the limit states of tension-flange yield and compression-flange buckling. For girders with unequal flanges, see Appendix B5.1 for the determination of λr for the limit state of web local buckling. (a) For tension-flange yield: Mn = SxtReFyt (b) For compression-flange buckling: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(A-G2-1)
Sect. A-G2]
DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH
Mn = SxcRPG ReFcr
6 - 123
(A-G2-2)
where RPG = 1 −
hc 970 ar − ≤ 1.0 1,200 + 300ar tw √ Fcr
(A-G2-3)
Re
= hybrid girder factor 12 + ar (3m − m3) Re = ≤ 1.0 (for non-hybrid girders, Re = 1.0) 12 + 2ar ar = ratio of web area to compression flange area (≤ 10) m = ratio of web yield stress to flange yield stress or to Fcr Fcr = critical compression flange stress, ksi Fyt = yield stress of tension flange, ksi Sxc = section modulus referred to compression flange, in.3 Sxt = section modulus referred to tension flange, in.3 hc = twice the distance from the centroid to the nearest line of fasteners at the compression flange or the inside of the face of the compression flange when welds are used The critical stress Fcr to be used is dependent upon the slenderness parameters λ, λp, λr, and CPG as follows: For λ ≤ λp: Fcr = Fyf
(A-G2-4)
For λp < λ ≤ λr: Fcr = CbFyf 1 −
1 λ − λp ≤F 2 λr − λp yf
(A-G2-5)
For λ > λr: Fcr =
CPG λ2
(A-G2-6)
In the foregoing, the slenderness parameter shall be determined for both the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling and the limit state of flange local buckling; the slenderness parameter which results in the lowest value of Fcr governs. (a) For the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling: Lb rT
(A-G2-7)
λp =
300 √ Fyf
(A-G2-8)
λr =
756 √Fyf
(A-G2-9)
λ=
CPG = 286,000Cb AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(A-G2-10)
6 - 124
PLATE GIRDERS
[App. G
where Cb = see Section F1.2, Equation F1-3 rT = radius of gyration of compression flange plus one-third of the compression portion of the web, in. (b) For the limit state of flange local buckling: λ=
bf 2tf
(A-G2-11)
λp =
65 √Fyf
(A-G2-12)
230 √ Fyf / kc
(A-G2-13)
λr =
CPG = 26,200kc
(A-G2-14)
Cb = 1.0 h / tw and 0.35 ≤ kc ≤ 0.763. where kc = 4 / √ The limit state of flexural web local buckling is not applicable. G3. DESIGN SHEAR STRENGTH WITH TENSION FIELD ACTION The design shear strength with tension field action shall be φvVn, kips, where φv = 0.90 and Vn is determined as follows: (a) For h / tw ≤ 187√ kv /Fyw: Vn = 0.6AwFyw
(A-G3-1)
kv /Fyw: (b) For h / tw > 187√
Vn = 0.6AwFywCv +
1 − Cv 2 1.15√ 1 + (a / h)
(A-G3-2)
where Cv = ratio of “critical” web stress, according to linear buckling theory, to the shear yield stress of web material Also see Appendix G4 and G5. For end-panels in non-hybrid plate girders, all panels in hybrid and web-tapered plate girders, and when a / h exceeds 3.0 or [260 / (h / tw)]2, tension field action is not permitted and Vn = 0.6AwFywCv
(A-G3-3)
The web plate buckling coefficient kv is given as kv = 5 +
5 (a / h)2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(A-G3-4)
Sect. A-G5]
FLEXURE-SHEAR INTERACTION
6 - 125
except that kv shall be taken as 5.0 if a / h exceeds 3.0 or [260 / (h / tw)]2. The shear coefficient Cv is determined as follows: (a) For 187
√
√
kv h ≤ ≤ 234 Fyw tw
kv : Fyw
Cv =
(b) For
√
h > 234 tw
187√ kv /Fyw h / tw
(A-G3-5)
44,000kv (h / tw)2Fyw
(A-G3-6)
kv : Fyw Cv =
G4. TRANSVERSE STIFFENERS Fyw , Transverse stiffeners are not required in plate girders where h / tw ≤ 418 / √ or where the required shear Vu, as determined by structural analysis for the factored loads, is less than or equal to 0.6φvAwFywCv, where Cv is determined for kv = 5 and φv = 0.90. Stiffeners may be required in certain portions of a plate girder to develop the required shear or to satisfy the limitations given in Appendix G1. Transverse stiffeners shall satisfy the requirements of Appendix F2.3. When designing for tension field action, the stiffener area Ast shall not be less than Fyw Vu 0.15Dhtw(1 − Cv) − 18t2w ≥ 0 Fyst φvVn
(A-G4-1)
where Fyst D D D
= specified yield stress of the stiffener material, ksi = 1 for stiffeners in pairs = 1.8 for single angle stiffeners = 2.4 for single plate stiffeners
Cv and Vn are defined in Appendix G3, and Vu is the required shear at the location of the stiffener. G5. FLEXURE-SHEAR INTERACTION For 0.6φVn ≤ Vu ≤φVn (φ = 0.90) and 0.75φMn ≤ Mu ≤ φMn (φ = 0.90), plate girders with webs designed for tension field action shall satisfy the additional AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 126
PLATE GIRDERS
[App. G
flexure-shear interaction criteria: Vu Mu + 0.625 ≤ 1.375 φMn φVn
(A-G5-1)
where Mn is the nominal flexural strength of plate girders from Appendix G2 or Section F1, φ = 0.90, and Vn is the nominal shear strength from Appendix G3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 127
APPENDIX H MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
This appendix provides alternative interaction equations for biaxially loaded I-shaped members with bf / d ≤ 1.0 and box-shaped members. H3. ALTERNATIVE INTERACTION EQUATIONS FOR MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED STRESS For biaxially loaded I-shaped members with bf / d ≤ 1.0 and box-shaped members in braced frames only, the use of the following interaction equations in lieu of Equations H1-1a and H1-1b is permitted. Both Equations A-H3-1 and A-H3-2 shall be satisfied. ζ
ζ
Mux Muy + ≤ 1.0 φbM′px φbM′py η
(A-H3-1)
η
CmxMux CmyMuy (A-H3-2) + ≤ 1.0 φbM′nx φbM′ny The terms in Equations A-H3-1 and A-H3-2 are determined as follows: (a) For I-shaped members: For bf / d < 0.5: ζ = 1.0 For 0.5 ≤ bf / d ≤ 1.0:
ζ = 1.6 −
Pu / Py 2[ln(Pu / Py )]
(A-H3-3)
For bf / d < 0.3: η = 1.0 For 0.3 ≤ bf / d ≤ 1.0:
η = 0.4 +
Pu bf + ≥ 1.0 Py d
(A-H3-4)
where bf = flange width, in. d = member depth, in. Cm = coefficient applied to the bending term in interaction equation for AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 128
MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
[App. H
prismatic members and dependent on column curvature caused by applied moments, see Section C1. M′px = 1.2Mpx[1 − (Pu / Py )] ≤ Mpx
(A-H3-5)
M′py = 1.2Mpy[1 − (Pu / Py ) ] ≤ Mpy
(A-H3-6)
Pu Pu M′nx = Mnx 1 − 1 − P φcPn ex
(A-H3-7)
Pu Pu M′ny = Mny 1 − 1 − P φ P ey c n
(A-H3-8)
2
(b) For box-section members:
ζ = 1.7 −
Pu / Py ln(Pu / Py)
(A-H3-9) b
P P /P η = 1.7 − u y − aλx u > 1.1 ln(Pu / Py ) Py
(A-H3-10)
For Pu / Py ≤ 0.4, a = 0.06, and b = 1.0; For Pu / Py > 0.4, a = 0.15, and b = 2.0; M′px = 1.2Mpx[1 − Pu / Py] ≤ Mpx
(A-H3-11a)
M′py = 1.2Mpy[1 − Pu / Py] ≤ Mpy
(A-H3-11b)
Pu Pu 1.25 M′nx = Mnx 1 − 1 − P 1/3 φ P ex (B / H) c n
(A-H3-12)
Pu Pu 1.25 M′ny = Mny 1 − 1 − P 1/2 φcPn ey (B / H)
(A-H3-13)
where Pn = nominal compressive strength determined in accordance with Section E2, kips Pu = required axial strength, kips Py = compressive yield strength AgFy, kips φb = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90 φc = resistance factor for compression = 0.85 Pe = Euler buckling strength AgFy / λc2, where λc is the column slenderness parameter defined by Equation E2-4, kips Mu = required flexural strength, kip-in. Mn = nominal flexural strength, determined in accordance with Section F1, kip-in. Mp = plastic moment ≤ 1.5Fy S, kip-in. B = outside width of box section parallel to major principal axis x, in. H = outside depth of box section perpendicular to major principal axis x, in.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 129
APPENDIX J CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
Appendix J2.4 provides the alternative design strength for fillet welds. Appendices J3.8 and J3.9 pertain to the design of slip-critical connections using factored loads. J2.
WELDS
4.
Design Strength In lieu of the constant design strength for fillet welds given in Table J2.5, the following procedure is permitted. (a) The design strength of a linear weld group loaded in-plane through the center of gravity is φFw Aw: Fw = 0.60FEXX(1.0 + 0.50 sin1.5θ) where φ Fw FEXX θ Aw
= 0.75 = nominal stress, ksi = electrode classification number, i.e., minimum specified strength, ksi = angle of loading measured from the weld longitudinal axis, degrees = effective area of weld throat, in.2
(b) The design strength of weld elements within a weld group that are loaded in-plane and analyzed using an instantaneous center of rotation method to maintain deformation compatibility and non-linear load deformation behavior of variable angle loaded welds is φFwx Aw and φFwy Aw: where Fwx Fwy Fwi f(p) φ Fwi Fwix Fwiy p ∆m
= ΣFwix = ΣFwiy = 0.60FEXX(1.0 + 0.50 sin1.5θ) f(p) = [p(1.9 − 0.9p)]0.3 = 0.75 = nominal stress in any ith weld element, ksi = x component of stress Fwi = y component of stress Fwi = ∆i / ∆m, ratio of element i deformation to its deformation at maximum stress = 0.209(θ + 2)−0.32D, deformation of weld element at maximum stress, in. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 130
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
∆i
∆u D rcrit
[App. J
= deformation of weld elements at intermediate stress levels, linearly proportioned to the critical deformation based on distance from the instantaneous center of rotation, ri, in. = ri∆u / rcrit = 1.087(θ + 6)−0.65D ≤ 0.17D, deformation of weld element at ultimate stress (fracture), usually in element furthest from instantaneous center of rotation, in. = leg size of the fillet weld, in. = distance from instantaneous center of rotation to weld element with minimum ∆u / ri ratio
J3.
BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
8.
High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical Connections
8b.
Slip-Critical Connections Designed at Factored Loads It is permissible to proportion slip-critical connections at factored loads. The design slip resistance for use at factored loads, φRstr, shall equal or exceed the required force due to the factored loads, where: Rstr = 1.13µTmNbNs
(A-J3-1)
where: Tm = minimum fastener tension given in Table J3.1, kips Nb = number of bolts in the joint Ns = number of slip planes µ = mean slip coefficient for Class A, B, or C surfaces, as applicable, or as established by tests (a) For Class A surfaces (unpainted clean mill scale steel surfaces or surfaces with Class A coating on blast-cleaned steel), µ = 0.33 (b) For Class B surfaces (unpainted blast-cleaned steel surfaces or surfaces with Class B coatings on blast-cleaned steel), µ = 0.50 (c) For Class C surfaces (hot-dip galvanized and roughened surfaces), µ = 0.40 = resistance factor φ (a) For standard holes, φ = 1.0 (b) For oversize and short-slotted holes, φ = 0.85 (c) For long-slotted holes transverse to the direction of load, φ = 0.70 (d) For long-slotted holes parallel to the direction of load, φ = 0.60 9.
Combined Tension and Shear in Slip-Critical Connections
9b.
Slip-Critical Connections Designed at Factored Loads When using factored loads as the basis for design of slip-critical connections subject to applied tension, T, that reduces the net clamping force, the slip AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A-J3]
BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
6 - 131
resistance φRstr according to Appendix J3.8b shall be multiplied by the following factor in which Tu is the required tensile strength at factored loads: [1 − Tu / (1.13TmNb)]
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(A-J3-2)
6 - 132
APPENDIX K CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
Appendix K2 provides an alternative determination of roof stiffness. Appendix K4 pertains to members and connections due to fatigue loading. K2. PONDING The provisions of this Appendix are permitted to be used when a more exact determination of flat roof framing stiffness is needed than that given by the provision of Section K2 that Cp + 0.9Cs ≤ 0.25. For any combination of primary and secondary framing, the stress index is computed as Fy − fo for the primary member Up = fo p
(A-K2-3)
Fy − fo for the secondary member Us = fo s
(A-K2-4)
where fo = the stress due to 1.2D + 1.2R (D = nominal dead load, R = nominal load due to rain water or ice exclusive of the ponding contribution)* Enter Figure A-K2.1 at the level of the computed stress index Up determined for the primary beam; move horizontally to the computed Cs value of the secondary beams and then downward to the abscissa scale. The combined stiffness of the primary and secondary framing is sufficient to prevent ponding if the flexibility constant read from this latter scale is more than the value of Cp computed for the given primary member; if not, a stiffer primary or secondary beam, or combination of both, is required. In the above, Cp =
32LsLp4 107Ip
Cs =
32L4s 107Is
* Depending upon geographic location, this loading should include such amount of snow as might also be present, although ponding failures have occurred more frequently during torrential summer rains when the rate of precipitation exceeded the rate of drainage runoff and the resulting hydraulic gradient over large roof areas caused substantial accumulation of water some distance from the eaves. A load factor of 1.2 shall be used for loads resulting from these phenomena.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A-K2]
PONDING
6 - 133
where Lp = column spacing in direction of girder (length of primary members), ft Ls = column spacing perpendicular to direction of girder (length of secondary members), ft S = spacing of secondary members, ft Ip = moment of inertia of primary members, in.4 Is = moment of inertia of secondary members, in.4 A similar procedure must be followed using Figure A-K2.2. Roof framing consisting of a series of equally spaced wall-bearing beams is considered as consisting of secondary members supported on an infinitely stiff 3.4
3.2 3.0 2.8 2.6
2.4
0.5
2.2
1.8
0.4
1.6
0.3 1.4
0.2
Stress Index Up
2.0
1.2
1
0.
1.0
Cs
0.8
=
0
0.6
0.4 0.2 0 0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
Upper Limit of Flexibility Constant Cp Fig. A-K2.1. Limiting flexibility coefficient for the primary systems. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
0.7
6 - 134
CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
[App. K
primary member. For this case, enter Figure A-K2.2 with the computed stress index Us. The limiting value of Cs is determined by the intercept of a horizontal line representing the Us value and the curve for Cp = 0. The ponding deflection contributed by a metal deck is usually such a small part of the total ponding deflection of a roof panel that it is sufficient merely to limit its moment of inertia (per foot of width normal to its span) to 0.000025 times the fourth power of its span length. However, the stability against ponding of a roof consisting of a metal roof deck of relatively slender depth-span ratio, spanning between beams supported directly on columns, may need to be checked. This can be done using Figure A-K2.1 or A-K2.2 using as Cs the flexibility constant for a one-foot width of the roof deck (S = 1.0).
0.7
3.4
3.2
0.6
3.0 2.8
0.5
2.6
2.4
2.0
1.8
0.3
1.6
0.2
Stress Index Us
0.4
2.2
1.4 1
0.
1.2 1.0
Cp
=
0
0.8 0.6
0.4 0.2 0 0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
Upper Limit of Flexibility Constant Cs Fig. A-K2.2. Limiting flexibility coefficient for the secondary systems. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
0.7
Sect. A-K3]
FATIGUE
6 - 135
TABLE A-K3.1 Number of Loading Cycles Loading Condition
From
To
1
20,000 [a]
100,000 [b]
2
100,000
500,000 [c]
3
500,000
2,000,000 [d]
4
Over 2,000,000
[a] Approximately equivalent to two applications every day for 25 years. [b] Approximately equivalent to 10 applications every day for 25 years. [c] Approximately equivalent to 50 applications every day for 25 years. [d] Approximately equivalent to 200 applications every day for 25 years.
Since the shear rigidity of the web system of steel joists and trusses is less than that of a solid plate, their moment of inertia shall be taken as 85 percent of their chords. K3. FATIGUE Members and connections subject to fatigue loading shall be proportioned in accordance with the provisions of this Appendix. Fatigue, as used in this Specification, is defined as the damage that may result in fracture after a sufficient number of fluctuations of stress. Stress range is defined as the magnitude of these fluctuations. In the case of a stress reversal, the stress range shall be computed as the numerical sum of maximum repeated tensile and compressive stresses or the sum of maximum shearing stresses of opposite direction at a given point, resulting from differing arrangement of live load. 1.
Loading Conditions; Type and Location of Material In the design of members and connections subject to repeated variation of live load, consideration shall be given to the number of stress cycles, the expected range of stress, and the type and location of member or detail. Loading conditions shall be classified according to Table A-K3.1. The type and location of material shall be categorized according to Table A-K3.2.
2.
Design Stress Range The maximum range of stress at service loads shall not exceed the design stress range specified in Table A-K3.3.
3.
Design Strength of Bolts in Tension When subject to tensile fatigue loading, fully tensioned A325 or A490 bolts shall be designed for the combined tensile design strength due to combined external and prying forces in accordance with Table A-K3.4. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 136
CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
[App. K
TABLE A-K3.2 Type and Location of Material General Condition
Situation
Kind of Stress [a]
Illustrative Stress Example Category Nos. (see Table (see Fig. A-K3.3) A-K3.1) [b]
Plain Material
Base metal with rolled or cleaned surface. Flame-cut edges with ANSI smoothness of 1,000 or less
T or Rev.
A
1,2
Built-up Members
Base metal and weld metal in members without attachments, built-up plates or shapes connected by continuous fullpenetration groove welds or by continuous fillet welds parallel to the direction of applied stress
T or Rev.
B
3,4,5,6
Base metal and weld metal in members without attachments, built-up plates, or shapes connected by full-penetration groove welds with backing bars not removed, or by partialpenetration groove welds parallel to the direction of applied stress
T or Rev.
B′
3,4,5,6
Base metal at toe of welds on girder webs or flanges adjacent to welded transverse stiffeners
T or Rev.
C
7
T or Rev. T or Rev.
E E′
5 5
E′
5
Base metal at ends of partial length welded coverplates narrower than the flange having square or tapered ends, with or without welds across the ends or wider than flange with welds across the ends Flange thickness ≤ 0.8 in. Flange thickness > 0.8 in. Base metal at end of partial length welded coverplates wider than the flange without welds across the ends
[a] “T” signifies range in tensile stress only; “Rev.” signifies a range involving reversal of tensile or compressive stress; “S” signifies range in shear, including shear stress reversal. [b] These examples are provided as guidelines and are not intended to exclude other reasonably similar situations. [c] Allowable fatigue stress range for transverse partial-penetration and transverse fillet welds is a function of the effective throat, depth of penetration, and plate thickness. See Frank and Fisher, Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 105 No. ST9, Sept. 1979.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A-K3]
FATIGUE
6 - 137
TABLE A-K3.2 (cont’d) Type and Location of Material General Condition Groove Welds
Situation Base metal and weld metal at fullpenetration groove welded splices of parts of similar cross section ground flush, with grinding in the direction of applied stress and with weld soundness established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with the requirements of 9.25.2 or 9.25.3 of AWS D1.1
Kind of Stress [a]
Illustrative Stress Example Category Nos. (see Table (see Fig. A-K3.3) A-K3.1) [b]
T or Rev.
B
10,11
A514 base metal Other base metals
T or Rev. T or Rev.
B′ B
12,13 12,13
Base metal and weld metal at fullpenetration groove welded splices, with or without transitions having slopes no greater than 1 to 21⁄2 when reinforcement is not removed but weld soundness is established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with requirements of 9.25.2 or 9.25.3 of AWS D1.1
T or Rev.
C
10,11,12,13
Partial-Penetration Groove Welds
Weld metal of partial-penetration transverse groove welds, based on effective throat area of the weld or welds
T or Rev.
F [c]
Fillet-welded Connections
Base metal at intermittent fillet welds
T or Rev.
E
Base metal and weld metal at fullpenetration groove welded splices at transitions in width or thickness, with welds ground to provide slopes no steeper than 1 to 21⁄2 with grinding in the direction of applied stress, and with weld soundness established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with the requirements of 9.25.2 or 9.25.3 of AWS D1.1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 138
CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
[App. K
TABLE A-K3.2 (cont’d) Type and Location of Material General Condition Fillet-welded Connections (Continued)
Situation
Kind of Stress [a]
Illustrative Stress Example Category Nos. (see Table (see Fig. A-K3.3) A-K3.1) [b]
Base metal at junction of axially loaded members with fillet-welded end connections. Welds shall be disposed about the axis of the member so as to balance weld stresses
b ≤ 1 in. b > 1 in.
T or Rev. T or Rev.
E E′
17,18 17,18
T or Rev.
C See Note
20,21
S
F [c]
15,17,18 20,21
T or Rev.
E
27
S
F
27
Base metal at gross section of high-strength bolted slip-critical connections, except axially loaded joints which induce out-of-plane bending in connected material
T or Rev.
B
8
Base metal at net section of other mechanically fastened joints
T or Rev.
D
8,9
Base metal at net section of fully tensioned high-strength, boltedbearing connections
T or Rev.
B
8,9
Eyebar or Pin Plates
Base metal at net section of eyebar head or pin plate
T or Rev.
E
28,29
Attachments
Base metal at details attached by full-penetration groove welds subject to longitudinal and/or transverse loading when the detail embodies a transition radius R with the weld termination ground smooth and for transverse loading, the weld soundness established by radiographic or ultrasonic inspection in accordance with 9.25.2 or 9.25.3 of AWS D1.1
Base metal at members connected with transverse fillet welds
b ≤ 1⁄2-in. b > 1⁄2-in. Fillet Welds
Weld metal of continuous or intermittent longitudinal or transverse fillet welds
Plug or Slot Welds
Base metal at plug or slot welds Shear on plug or slot welds
Mechanically Fastened Connections
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A-K3]
FATIGUE
6 - 139
TABLE A-K3.2 (cont’d) Type and Location of Material
General Condition Attachments (Continued)
Situation Longitudinal loading R > 24 in. 24 in. > R > 6 in. 6 in. > R > 2 in. 2 in. > R
Kind of Stress [a]
Illustrative Stress Example Category Nos. (see Table (see Fig. A-K3.3) A-K3.1) [b]
T or Rev. T or Rev. T or Rev. T or Rev.
B C D E
14 14 14 14
T or Rev. T or Rev. T or Rev. T or Rev.
B C D E
14 14 14 14,15
T or Rev. T or Rev. T or Rev. T or Rev.
C C D E
14 14 14 14,15
T or Rev. T or Rev.
D E
14 14,15
T or Rev.
E
14,15
T or Rev. T or Rev. T or Rev.
C D E
19 19 19
T or Rev. T or Rev. T or Rev.
D E E′
15 15 15
Detail base metal for transverse loading: equal thickness and reinforcement removed
R > 24 in. 24 in. > R > 6 in. 6 in. > R > 2 in. 2 in. > R Detail base metal for transverse loading: equal thickness and reinforcement not removed
R > 24 in. 24 in. > R > 6 in. 6 in. > R > 2 in. 2 in. > R Detail base metal for transverse loading: unequal thickness and reinforcement removed
R > 2 in. 2 in. > R Detail base metal for transverse loading: Unequal thickness and reinforcement not removed All R Detail base metal for transverse loading
R > 6 in. 6 in. > R > 2 in. 2 in. > R Base metal at detail attached by full-penetration groove welds subject to longitudinal loading 2 < a < 12b or 4 in. a > 12b or 4 in. when b ≤ 1 in. a >12b or 4 in. when b >1 in.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 140
CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
[App. K
TABLE A-K3.2 (cont’d) Type and Location of Material General Condition Attachments (Continued)
Situation
Kind of Stress [a]
Illustrative Stress Example Category Nos. (see Table (see Fig. A-K3.3) A-K3.1) [b]
Base metal at detail attached by fillet welds or partial-penetration groove welds subject to longitudinal loading
a < 2 in.
T or Rev.
C
15,23,24 25,26
2 in. < a < 12b or 4 in.
T or Rev.
D
15,23,24,26
a > 12b or 4 in. when b ≤ 1 in.
T or Rev.
E
15,23,24,26
a > 12b or 4 in. when b > 1 in.
T or Rev.
E′
15,23,24,26
T or Rev. T or Rev.
D E
19 19
R > 2 in. R < 2 in.
T or Rev. T or Rev.
D E
19 19
Base metal at stud-type shear connector attached by fillet weld or automatic end weld
T or Rev.
C
22
S
F
Base metal attached by fillet welds or partial-penetration groove welds subjected to longitudinal loading when the weld termination embodies a transition radius with the weld termination ground smooth
R > 2 in. R ≤ 2 in. Fillet-welded attachments where the weld termination embodies a transition radius, weld termination ground smooth, and main material subject to longitudinal loading Detail base metal for transverse loading:
Shear stress on nominal area of stud-type shear connectors
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. A-K3]
FATIGUE
6 - 141
TABLE A-K 3.3 Design Stress Range, ksi Category (From Table A-K3.2)
Loading Condition 1
Loading Condition 2
Loading Condition 3
Loading Condition 4
A
63
37
24
24
B
49
29
18
16
B′
39
23
15
12
C
35
21
13
10 [a]
D
28
16
10
7
E
22
13
8
4.5
E′
16
5.8
2.6
F
15
9
8
9.2 12
[a] Flexural stress range of 12 ksi permitted at toe of stiffener welds or flanges.
TABLE A-K3.4 Design Strength of A325 or A490 Bolts Subject to Tension Number of cycles
Design strength
Not more than 20,000
As specified in Section J3
From 20,000 to 500,000
0.30 AbFu [a]
More than 500,000
0.25 AbFu [a]
[a] At service loads.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 142
CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
1
[App. K
7
8 2
3
9
or
10 4
Plate as sh or wider own than flange B
E or E′ Category
5
11
12
6
13
Fig. A-K3.1. Illustrative examples.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
continued
Sect. A-K3]
FATIGUE
6 - 143
Groove weld
14
R 22 b (avg.)
a a
15
23
a
b 16
24
a
b=thickness
17
25
b=thickness a
18
26
b
Groove or fillet weld
19 R 27 b=thickness
20
net section area
28 net section area
21
29
Fig. A-K3.1. Illustrative examples (cont.). AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 144
NUMERICAL VALUES TABLE 1 Design Strength as a Function of Fy Design Stress (ksi)
Fy (ksi)
0.54Fy [a]
0.85Fy [b]
0.90Fy [c]
33
17.8
28.1
29.7
35
18.9
29.8
31.5
36
19.4
30.6
32.4
42
21.6
34.0
36.0
42
22.7
35.7
37.8
45
24.3
38.3
40.5
46
24.8
39.1
41.4
40
27.0
42.5
45.0
55
29.7
46.8
49.5
60
32.4
51.0
54.0
65
35.1
55.3
58.5
70
37.8
59.5
63.0
90
48.6
76.5
81.0
100
54.0
85.0
90.0
[a] See Section F2, Equations F2-1 [b] See Section E2, Equation E2-1 [c] See Section D1, Equation D1-1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
NUMERICAL VALUES
6 - 145
TABLE 2 Design Strength as a Function of Fy
Shapes, Plates, Bars, Sheet and Tubing or Threaded parts
Item
Design Strength (ksi) Connection Part of Designated Steel
Bolt of Threaded Part of Designated Steel
ASTM Designation
Fy (ksi)
Fu (ksi)
Tension 0.75 × Fu [a]
Bearing 0.75 × 2.4Fu [b]
A36
36
58-80
43.5
104
32.6
17.4
21.8
A53
35
60
45.0
108
—
—
—
A242 A588
50 42 40
70 63 60
52.5 47.3 45.0
126 113 108
39.4 35.4 33.8
21.0 18.9 18.0
26.3 23.2 22.5
A500
33/39 [f] 42/46 [f] 46/50 [f]
45 58 62
33.8 43.5 46.5
81 104 112
— — —
— — —
— — —
A501
36
58
43.5
104
—
—
—
A529
42
60-85
45.0
108
33.8
18.0
22.5
A570
40 42
55 58
41.3 43.5
99 104
— —
— —
— —
A572
42 50 60 65
60 65 75 80
45.0 48.8 56.3 60.0
108 117 135 144
33.8 36.6 42.2 45.0
18.0 19.5 22.5 24.0
22.5 24.4 28.1 30.0
A514
100 90
110-130 100-130
82.5 75.0
198 180
61.9 56.3
33.0 30.0
41.3 37.5
A606
45 50
65 70
48.8 52.5
117 126
— —
— —
— —
A607
45 50 55 60 65 70
60 65 70 75 80 85
45.0 48.8 52.5 56.3 60.0 63.8
108 117 126 135 144 153
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
— — — — — —
A618
50 50
70 65
52.5 48.8
126 117
— —
— —
— —
Tension Shear Shear 0.75 × 0.75 × 0.75 × 0.75Fu [c] 0.40Fu [d] 0.50Fu [e]
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 146
NUMERICAL VALUES
TABLE 2 (cont’d) Design Strength as a Function of Fu Design Strength (ksi) Item
Connection Part of Designated Steel
Bolts
ASTM Designation A449
Fy (ksi)
Fu (ksi)
Tension 0.75 × Fu [a]
Bearing 0.75 × 2.4Fu [b]
92 81 58
120 105 90
— — —
— — —
Bolt of Threaded Part of Designated Steel Tension Shear Shear 0.75 × 0.75 × 0.75 × 0.75Fu [c] 0.40Fu [d] 0.50Fu [e] 67.5 59.1 50.6
36.0 31.5 27.0
[a] On effective net area, see Sections D1, J5.2. [b] Produced by fastener in shear, see Section J3.10. Note that smaller maximum design bearing stresses, as a function of hole type spacing, are given. [c] On nominal body area, see Table J3.2. [d] Threads not excluded from shear plane, see Table J3.2. [e] Threads excluded from shear plane, see Table J3.2. [f] Smaller value for circular shapes, larger for square or rectangular shapes. Note: For dimensional and size limitations, see the appropriate ASTM Specification.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
45.0 39.4 33.8
NUMERICAL VALUES
6 - 147
TABLE 3-36 Design Stress for Compression Members of 36 ksi Specified Yield Stress Steel, φc = 0.85[a] Kl r
φcFcr ksi
Kl r
φcFcr ksi
Kl r
φcFcr ksi
Kl r
φcFcr ksi
Kl r
φcFcr ksi
1 2 3 4 5
30.60 30.59 30.59 30.57 30.56
41 42 43 44 45
28.01 27.89 27.76 27.64 27.51
81 82 83 84 85
21.66 21.48 21.29 21.11 20.92
121 122 123 124 125
14.16 13.98 13.80 13.62 13.44
161 162 163 164 165
8.23 8.13 8.03 7.93 7.84
6 7 8 9 10
30.54 30.52 30.50 30.47 30.44
46 47 48 49 50
27.37 27.24 27.11 26.97 26.83
86 87 88 89 90
20.73 20.54 20.36 20.17 19.98
126 127 128 129 130
13.27 13.09 12.92 12.74 12.57
166 167 168 169 170
7.74 7.65 7.56 7.47 7.38
11 12 13 14 15
30.41 30.37 30.33 30.29 30.24
51 52 53 54 55
26.68 26.54 26.39 26.25 26.10
91 92 93 94 95
19.79 19.60 19.41 19.22 19.03
131 132 133 134 135
12.40 12.23 12.06 11.88 11.71
171 172 173 174 175
7.30 7.21 7.13 7.05 6.97
16 17 18 19 20
30.19 30.14 30.08 30.02 29.96
56 57 58 59 60
25.94 25.79 25.63 25.48 25.32
96 97 98 99 100
18.84 18.65 18.46 18.27 18.08
136 137 138 139 140
11.54 11.37 11.20 11.04 10.89
176 177 178 179 180
6.89 6.81 6.73 6.66 6.59
21 22 23 24 25
29.90 29.83 29.76 26.69 29.61
61 62 63 64 65
25.16 24.99 24.83 24.67 24.50
101 102 103 104 105
17.89 17.70 17.51 17.32 17.13
141 142 143 144 145
10.73 10.58 10.43 10.29 10.15
181 182 183 184 185
6.51 6.44 6.37 6.30 6.23
26 27 28 29 30
29.53 29.45 29.36 29.28 29.18
66 67 68 69 70
24.33 24.16 23.99 23.82 23.64
106 107 108 109 110
16.94 16.75 16.56 16.37 16.19
146 147 148 149 150
10.01 9.87 9.74 9.61 9.48
186 187 188 189 190
6.17 6.10 6.04 5.97 5.91
31 32 33 34 35
29.09 28.99 28.90 28.79 28.69
71 72 73 74 75
23.47 23.29 23.12 22.94 22.76
111 112 113 114 115
16.00 15.81 15.63 15.44 15.26
151 152 153 154 155
9.36 9.23 9.11 9.00 8.88
191 192 193 194 195
5.85 5.79 5.73 5.67 5.61
36 37 38 39 40
28.58 28.47 28.36 28.25 28.13
76 77 78 79 80
22.58 22.40 22.22 22.03 21.85
116 117 118 119 120
15.07 14.89 14.70 14.52 14.34
156 157 158 159 160
8.77 8.66 8.55 8.44 8.33
196 197 198 199 200
5.55 5.50 5.44 5.39 5.33
[a] When element width-to-thickness ration exceeds λr , see Appendix B5.3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 148
NUMERICAL VALUES
TABLE 3-50 Design Stress for Compression Members of 50 ksi Specified Yield Stress Steel, φc = 0.85[a] Kl r
φcFcr ksi
Kl r
φcFcr ksi
Kl r
φcFcr ksi
Kl r
φcFcr ksi
Kl r
φcFcr ksi
1 2 3 4 5
42.50 42.49 42.47 42.45 42.42
41 42 43 44 45
37.59 37.36 37.13 36.89 36.65
81 82 83 84 85
26.31 26.00 25.68 25.37 25.06
121 122 123 124 125
14.57 14.33 14.10 13.88 13.66
161 162 163 164 165
8.23 8.13 8.03 7.93 7.84
6 7 8 9 10
42.39 42.35 42.30 42.25 42.19
46 47 48 49 50
36.41 36.16 35.91 35.66 35.40
86 87 88 89 90
24.75 24.44 24.13 23.82 23.51
126 127 128 129 130
13.44 13.23 13.02 12.82 12.62
166 167 168 169 170
7.74 7.65 7.56 7.47 7.38
11 12 13 14 15
42.13 42.05 41.98 41.90 41.81
51 52 53 54 55
35.14 34.88 34.61 34.34 34.07
91 92 93 94 95
23.20 22.89 22.58 22.28 21.97
131 132 133 134 135
12.43 12.25 12.06 11.88 11.71
171 172 173 174 175
7.30 7.21 7.13 7.05 6.97
16 17 18 19 20
41.71 41.61 41.51 41.39 41.28
56 57 58 59 60
33.79 33.51 33.23 32.95 32.67
96 97 98 99 100
21.67 21.36 21.06 20.76 20.46
136 137 138 139 140
11.54 11.37 11.20 11.04 10.89
176 177 178 179 180
6.89 6.81 6.73 6.66 6.59
21 22 23 24 25
41.15 41.02 40.89 40.75 40.60
61 62 63 64 65
32.38 32.09 31.80 31.50 31.21
101 102 103 104 105
20.16 19.86 19.57 19.28 18.98
141 142 143 144 145
10.73 10.58 10.43 10.29 10.15
181 182 183 184 185
6.51 6.44 6.37 6.30 6.23
26 27 28 29 30
40.45 40.29 40.13 39.97 39.79
66 67 68 69 70
30.91 30.61 30.31 30.01 29.70
106 107 108 109 110
18.69 18.40 18.12 17.83 17.55
146 147 148 149 150
10.01 9.87 9.74 9.61 9.48
186 187 188 189 190
6.17 6.10 6.04 5.97 5.91
31 32 33 34 35
39.62 39.43 39.25 39.06 38.86
71 72 73 74 75
29.40 20.09 28.79 28.48 28.17
111 112 113 114 115
17.27 16.99 16.71 16.42 16.13
151 152 153 154 155
9.36 9.23 9.11 9.00 8.88
191 192 193 194 195
5.85 5.79 5.73 5.67 5.61
36 37 38 39 40
38.66 38.45 38.24 38.03 37.81
76 77 78 79 80
27.86 27.55 27.24 26.93 26.62
116 117 118 119 120
15.86 15.59 15.32 15.07 14.82
156 157 158 159 160
8.77 8.66 8.55 8.44 8.33
196 197 198 199 200
5.55 5.50 5.44 5.39 5.33
[a] When element width-to-thickness ratio exceeds λr , see Appendix B5.3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
NUMERICAL VALUES
6 - 149
TABLE 4 Values of φcFcr / Fy , φc = 0.85 for Determining Design Stress for Compression Members for Steel of Any Yield Stress[a] λc
φcFcr / Fy
λc
φcFcr / Fy
λc
φcFcr / Fy
λc
φcFcr / Fy
0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10
0.850 0.849 0.849 0.848 0.846
0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88 0.90
0.641 0.632 0.623 0.614 0.605
1.62 1.64 1.66 1.68 1.70
0.284 0.277 0.271 0.264 0.258
2.42 2.44 2.46 2.48 2.50
0.127 0.125 0.123 0.121 0.119
0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20
0.845 0.843 0.841 0.839 0.836
0.92 0.94 0.96 0.98 1.00
0.596 0.587 0.578 0.568 0.559
1.72 1.74 1.76 1.78 1.80
0.252 0.246 0.241 0.235 0.230
2.52 2.54 2.56 2.58 2.60
0.117 0.116 0.114 0.112 0.110
0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.30
0.833 0.830 0.826 0.823 0.819
1.02 1.04 1.06 1.08 1.10
0.550 0.540 0.531 0.521 0.512
1.82 1.84 1.86 1.88 1.90
0.225 0.220 0.215 0.211 0.206
2.62 2.64 2.66 2.68 2.70
0.109 0.107 0.105 0.104 0.102
0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 0.40
0.814 0.810 0.805 0.800 0.795
1.12 1.14 1.16 1.18 1.20
0.503 0.493 0.484 0.474 0.465
1.92 1.94 1.96 1.98 2.00
0.202 0.198 0.194 0.190 0.186
2.72 2.74 2.76 2.78 2.80
0.101 0.099 0.098 0.096 0.095
0.42 0.44 0.46 0.48 0.50
0.789 0.784 0.778 0.772 0.765
1.22 1.24 1.26 1.28 1.30
0.456 0.446 0.437 0.428 0.419
2.02 2.04 2.06 2.08 2.10
0.183 0.179 0.176 0.172 0.169
2.82 2.84 2.86 2.88 2.90
0.094 0.092 0.091 0.090 0.089
0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60
0.759 0.752 0.745 0.738 0.731
1.32 1.34 1.36 1.38 1.40
0.410 0.401 0.392 0.383 0.374
2.12 2.14 2.16 2.18 2.20
0.166 0.163 0.160 0.157 0.154
2.92 2.94 2.96 2.98 3.00
0.087 0.086 0.085 0.084 0.083
0.62 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.70
0.724 0.716 0.708 0.700 0.692
1.42 1.44 1.46 1.48 1.50
0.365 0.357 0.348 0.339 0.331
2.22 2.24 2.26 2.28 2.30
0.151 0.149 0.146 0.143 0.141
3.02 3.04 3.06 3.08 3.10
0.082 0.081 0.080 0.079 0.078
0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80
0.684 0.676 0.667 0.659 0.650
1.52 1.54 1.56 1.58 1.60
0.323 0.314 0.306 0.299 0.291
2.32 2.34 2.36 2.38 2.40
0.138 0.136 0.134 0.132 0.129
3.12 3.14 3.16 3.18 3.20
0.077 0.076 0.075 0.074 0.073
[a] When element width-to-thickness ratios exceed λr , see Appendix B5.3. Values of λc > 2.24 exceed Kl / r of 200 for Fy = 36 Values of λc > 2.64 exceed Kl / r of 200 for Fy = 50
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 150
NUMERICAL VALUES
TABLE 5 Values of Kl / r for Fy = 36 and 50 ksi Kl / r
Kl / r
λc
Fy = 36
Fy = 50
λc
0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10
1.8 3.6 4.3 7.1 8.9
1.5 3.0 4.5 6.1 7.6
0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20
10.7 12.5 14.3 16.0 17.8
0.22 0.24 0.26 0.28 0.30
Fy = 36
Fy = 50
0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88 0.90
73.1 74.9 76.7 78.5 80.2
62.0 63.6 65.1 66.6 68.1
9.1 10.6 12.1 13.6 15.1
0.92 0.94 0.96 0.98 1.00
82.0 83.8 85.6 87.4 89.2
69.6 71.1 72.6 74.1 75.7
19.6 21.4 23.2 25.0 26.7
16.6 18.2 19.7 21.2 22.7
1.02 1.04 1.06 1.08 1.10
90.9 92.7 94.5 96.3 98.1
77.2 78.7 80.2 81.7 83.2
0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 0.40
28.5 30.3 32.1 33.9 35.7
24.2 25.7 27.2 28.8 30.3
1.12 1.14 1.16 1.18 1.20
99.9 101.6 103.4 105.2 107.0
84.7 86.3 87.8 89.3 90.8
0.42 0.44 0.46 0.48 0.50
37.4 39.2 41.0 42.8 44.6
31.8 33.3 34.8 36.3 37.8
1.22 1.24 1.26 1.28 1.30
108.8 110.6 112.3 114.1 115.9
92.3 93.8 95.3 96.8 98.4
0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.60
46.4 48.1 49.9 51.7 53.5
39.3 40.9 42.4 43.9 45.4
1.32 1.34 1.36 1.38 1.40
117.7 119.5 121.3 123.0 124.8
99.9 101.4 102.9 104.4 105.9
0.62 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.70
55.3 57.1 58.8 60.6 62.4
46.9 48.4 49.9 51.4 53.0
1.42 1.44 1.46 1.48 1.50
126.6 128.4 130.2 132.0 133.7
107.4 108.9 110.5 112.0 113.5
0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.80
64.2 66.0 67.8 69.5 71.3
54.5 56.0 57.5 59.0 60.5
1.52 1.54 1.56 1.58 1.60
135.5 137.3 139.1 140.9 142.7
115.0 116.5 118.0 119.5 121.1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
NUMERICAL VALUES
6 - 151
TABLE 5 (cont’d) Values of Kl / r for Fy = 36 and 50 ksi Kl / r
Kl / r
λc
Fy = 36
Fy = 50
λc
Fy = 50
1.62 1.64 1.66 1.68 1.70
144.4 146.2 148.0 149.8 151.6
122.6 124.1 125.6 127.1 128.6
2.42 2.44 2.46 2.48 2.50
183.1 184.6 186.1 187.6 189.1
1.72 1.74 1.76 1.78 1.80
153.4 155.1 156.9 158.7 160.5
130.1 131.6 133.2 134.7 136.2
2.52 2.54 2.56 2.58 2.60
190.7 192.2 193.7 195.2 196.7
1.82 1.84 1.86 1.88 1.90
162.3 164.1 165.8 167.6 169.4
137.7 139.2 140.7 142.2 143.8
2.62 2.64
198.2 199.7
1.92 1.94 1.96 1.98 2.00
171.2 173.0 174.8 176.5 178.3
145.3 146.8 148.3 149.8 151.3
2.02 2.04 2.06 2.08 2.10
180.1 181.9 183.7 185.5 187.2
152.8 154.3 155.9 157.4 158.9
2.12 2.14 2.16 2.18 2.20
189.0 190.8 192.6 194.4 196.2
160.4 161.9 163.4 164.9 166.5
2.22 2.24 2.26 2.28 2.30
197.9 199.7
168.0 169.5 171.0 172.5 174.0
2.32 2.34 2.36 2.38 2.40
175.5 177.0 178.6 180.1 181.6
Heavy line indicates Kl / r of 200.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 152
NUMERICAL VALUES
TABLE 6 Slenderness Ratios of Elements as a Function of Fy From Table B5.1 Fy (ksi) Ratio
36
42
65 / √ Fy
10.8
10.0
√Fy 76 /
12.7
√Fy 95 /
15.8
Fy 127 / √
21.2
19.6
46
50
60 8.4
65
9.6
9.2
8.1
11.7
11.2
10.7
9.8
9.4
14.7
14.0
13.4
12.3
11.8
18.7
18.0
16.4
15.8
Fy − 10 141 / √
27.7
24.9
23.5
22.3
19.9
19.0
Fy 190 / √
31.7
29.3
28.0
26.9
24.5
23.6
238 / √ Fy
39.7
36.7
35.1
33.7
30.7
29.5
253 / √ Fy
42.2
39.0
37.3
35.8
32.7
31.4
Fy 317 / √
52.8
48.9
46.7
44.8
40.9
39.3
640 / √ Fy
107.0
98.8
94.4
90.5
82.6
79.4
Fy 970 / √
162.0
150.0
143.0
137.0
125.0
120.0
1,300 / Fy
36.1
31.0
28.3
26.0
21.7
20.0
2,070 / Fy
57.5
49.3
45.0
41.4
34.5
31.8
3,300 / Fy
91.7
78.6
71.7
66.0
55.0
50.8
8,970 / Fy
249.0
214.0
195.0
179.0
150.0
138.0
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
NUMERICAL VALUES
6 - 153
TABLE 7 Values of Cm for Use in Section C1 M1 M2
Cm
M1 M2
Cm
M1 M2
Cm
−1.00
1.00
−0.45
0.78
0.10
0.56
−0.95
0.98
−0.40
0.76
0.15
0.54
−0.90
0.96
−0.35
0.74
0.20
0.52
−0.85
0.94
−0.30
0.72
0.25
0.50
−0.80
0.92
−0.25
0.70
0.30
0.48
−0.75
0.90
−0.20
0.68
0.35
0.46
−0.70
0.88
−0.15
0.66
0.40
0.44
−0.65
0.86
−0.10
0.64
0.45
0.42
−0.60
0.84
−0.05
0.62
0.50
0.40
0.60
0.36
−0.55
0.82
0
0.60
0.80
0.28
−0.50
0.80
0.05
0.58
1.00
0.20
Note 1: Cm = 0.6 − 0.4(M1 / M2). Note 2: M1 / M2 is positive for reverse curvature and negative for single curvature. |M1| ≤ |M2|
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 154
NUMERICAL VALUES
TABLE 8 Values of Pe / Ag for Use in Section C1 for Steel of Any Yield Stress Kl r
Pe / Ag (ksi)
Kl r
Pe / Ag (ksi)
Kl r
Pe / Ag (ksi)
Kl r
Pe / Ag (ksi)
Kl r
Pe / Ag (ksi)
Kl r
Pe / Ag (ksi)
21 22 23 24 25
649.02 591.36 541.06 496.91 457.95
51 52 53 54 55
110.04 105.85 101.89 98.15 94.62
81 82 83 84 85
43.62 42.57 41.55 40.56 39.62
111 112 113 114 115
23.23 22.82 22.42 22.02 21.64
141 142 143 144 145
14.40 14.19 14.00 13.80 13.61
171 172 173 174 175
9.79 9.67 9.56 9.45 9.35
26 27 28 29 30
423.40 392.62 365.07 340.33 318.02
56 57 58 59 60
91.27 88.09 85.08 82.22 79.51
86 87 88 89 90
38.70 37.81 36.96 36.13 35.34
116 117 118 119 120
21.27 20.91 20.56 20.21 19.88
146 147 148 149 150
13.43 13.25 13.07 12.89 12.72
176 177 178 179 180
9.24 9.14 9.03 8.93 8.83
31 32 33 34 35
297.83 279.51 262.83 247.59 233.65
61 62 63 64 65
76.92 74.46 72.11 69.88 67.74
91 92 93 94 95
34.56 33.82 33.09 32.39 31.71
121 122 123 124 125
19.55 19.23 18.92 18.61 18.32
151 152 153 154 155
12.55 12.39 12.23 12.07 11.91
181 182 183 184 185
8.74 8.64 8.55 8.45 8.36
36 37 38 39 40
220.85 209.07 198.21 188.18 178.89
66 67 68 69 70
65.71 63.76 61.90 60.12 58.41
96 97 98 99 100
31.06 30.42 29.80 29.20 28.62
126 127 128 129 130
18.03 17.75 17.47 17.20 16.94
156 157 158 159 160
11.76 11.61 11.47 11.32 11.18
186 187 188 189 190
8.27 8.18 8.10 8.01 7.93
41 42 43 44 45
170.27 162.26 154.80 147.84 141.34
71 72 73 74 75
56.78 55.21 53.71 52.57 50.88
101 102 103 104 105
28.06 27.51 26.98 26.46 25.96
131 132 133 134 135
16.68 16.43 16.18 15.94 15.70
161 162 163 164 165
11.04 10.91 10.77 10.64 10.51
191 192 193 194 195
7.85 7.76 7.68 7.60 7.53
46 47 48 49 50
135.26 129.57 124.23 119.21 114.49
76 77 78 79 80
49.55 48.27 47.04 45.86 44.72
106 107 108 109 110
25.47 25.00 24.54 24.09 23.65
136 137 138 139 140
15.47 15.25 15.03 14.81 14.60
166 167 168 169 170
10.39 10.26 10.14 10.02 9.90
196 197 198 199 200
7.45 7.38 7.30 7.23 7.16
Note: Pe / Ag =
π2E
(Kl / r)2
, use for both Pe1 and Pe2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
NUMERICAL VALUES
6 - 155
TABLE 9-36 φvVn (ksi) for Plate Girders by Appendix F2 Aw for 36 ksi Yield Stress Steel, Tension Field Action Not Included Aspect ratio a / h: Stiffener Spacing to Web Depth
h tw
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
Over 3.0
60 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 70 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 80 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 18.9 18.2 17.9 16.9 90 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 18.5 17.8 17.2 16.8 16.2 15.9 14.7 100 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.2 17.6 16.6 16.0 15.5 14.9 13.8 13.2 11.9 110
19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 18.4 17.4 16.0 14.8 13.7 12.8 12.3 11.4 10.9
9.8
120 19.4 19.4 19.4 18.1 16.9 16.0 14.0 12.5 11.5 10.8 10.3
9.6
9.2
8.3
130 19.4 19.4 18.2 16.7 15.6 14.1 11.9 10.6
9.8
9.2
8.8
8.2
7.8
7.0
140 19.4 18.8 16.9 15.5 13.5 12.1 10.3
9.2
8.4
7.9
7.6
7.0
6.7
6.1
150 19.4 17.6 15.7 13.5 11.8 10.6
8.9
8.0
7.3
6.9
6.6
6.1
5.9
5.3
160 18.9 16.5 14.1 11.9 10.4
9.3
7.9
7.0
6.5
6.1
5.8
5.4
170 17.8 15.5 12.5 10.5
9.2
8.2
7.0
6.2
5.7
5.4
5.1
4.1
180 16.8 13.9 11.1
9.4
8.2
7.3
6.2
5.5
5.1
4.8
4.6
3.7
200 14.9 11.2
9.0
7.6
6.6
5.9
5.0
4.5
4.1
220 12.3
9.3
7.5
6.3
5.5
4.9
4.2
240 10.3
7.8
6.3
5.3
4.6
4.1
2.1
260
8.8
6.6
5.3
4.5
3.9
3.5
1.8
280
7.6
5.7
4.6
3.9
300
6.6
5.0
4.0
320
5.8
4.4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4.6
3.0 2.5
6 - 156
NUMERICAL VALUES
TABLE 9-50 φvVn (ksi) for Plate Girders by Appendix F2 Aw for 50 ksi Yield Stress Steel, Tension Field Action Not Included Aspect ratio a / h: Stiffener Spacing to Web Depth
h tw
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
Over 3.0
60 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 26.6 70 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 26.9 26.1 25.5 24.6 24.0 22.8 80 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 26.0 24.5 23.5 22.8 22.3 21.5 20.6 18.6 90 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 26.5 25.1 23.1 21.8 20.4 19.2 18.3 17.0 16.3 14.7 100 27.0 27.0 27.0 25.6 23.9 22.6 20.1 17.9 16.5 15.5 14.9 13.8 13.2 11.9 110
27.0 27.0 25.3 23.2 21.7 19.6 16.6 14.8 13.7 12.8 12.3 11.4 10.9
9.8
120 27.0 25.9 23.2 21.1 18.4 16.5 14.0 12.5 11.5 10.8 10.3
9.6
9.2
8.3
130 27.0 23.9 21.4 18.0 15.7 14.1 11.9 10.6
9.8
9.2
8.8
8.2
7.8
7.0
140 25.5 22.2 18.4 15.5 13.5 12.1 10.3
9.2
8.4
7.9
7.6
7.0
6.7
6.1
150 23.8 19.9 16.1 13.5 11.8 10.6
8.9
8.0
7.3
6.9
6.6
6.1
5.9
5.3
160 22.3 17.5 14.1 11.9 10.4
9.3
7.9
7.0
6.5
6.1
5.8
5.4
170 20.6 15.5 12.5 10.5
9.2
8.2
7.0
6.2
5.7
5.4
5.1
4.1
180 18.3 13.9 11.1
9.4
8.2
7.3
6.2
5.5
5.1
4.8
4.6
3.7
200 14.9 11.2
9.0
7.6
6.6
5.9
5.0
4.5
4.1
220 12.3
9.3
7.5
6.3
5.5
4.9
4.2
240 10.3
7.8
6.3
5.3
4.6
4.1
2.1
260
8.8
6.6
5.3
4.5
3.9
3.5
1.8
280
7.6
5.7
4.6
3.9
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4.6
3.0 2.5
NUMERICAL VALUES
6 - 157
TABLE 10-36 φvVn (ksi) for Plate Girders by Appendix G Aw for 36 ksi Yield Stress Steel, Tension Field Action Included[b] (Italic values indicate gross area, as percent of (h × tw) required for pairs of intermediate stiffeners of 36 ksi yield stress steel with Vu / φVn = 1.0) [a] Aspect ratio a / h: Stiffener Spacing to Web Depth
h tw
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
Over 3.0 [c]
60 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 70 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 80 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.1 18.6 18.3 16.9 90 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.0 18.5 18.2 17.8 17.3 16.8 14.7 100 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.3 18.6 18.1 17.6 17.2 16.6 15.6 14.9 11.9 110
19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.1 18.7 17.9 17.2 16.3 15.6 15.1 14.0 13.3
9.8
120 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.0 18.5 18.1 17.0 16.0 15.1 14.4 13.9 12.8 12.0
8.3
130 19.4 19.4 19.1 18.6 18.1 17.4 16.1 15.1 14.2 13.5 12.9 11.8 11.0
7.0
140 19.4 19.3 18.7 18.2 17.4 16.6 15.4 14.4 13.5 12.8 12.2 11.0 10.2
6.1
150 19.4 19.0 18.4 17.5 16.7 16.0 14.8 13.8 12.9 12.2 11.6 10.4
5.3
160 19.3 18.7 17.9 17.0 16.2 15.5 14.3 13.3 12.4 11.7 11.1
9.9
9.6
4.6
170 19.1 18.4 17.4 16.6 15.8 15.1 13.9 12.9 12.0 11.3 10.7 0.3 0.4
4.1
180 18.9 18.0 17.1 16.2 15.5 14.8 13.6 12.6 11.7 11.0 10.4 0.2 0.7 1.1 1.3 1.5
3.7
200 18.4 17.3 16.4 15.6 14.9 14.2 13.1 12.0 11.2 0.1 0.9 1.4 2.1 2.5 2.8
3.0
220 17.8 16.9 16.0 15.2 14.5 13.8 12.7 1.1 2.0 2.6 3.0 3.6
2.5
240 17.4 16.5 15.7 14.9 14.2 13.5 1.5 2.7 3.4 3.9 4.3
2.1
260 17.1 16.2 15.4 14.6 14.0 13.3 1.3 3.0 4.0 4.6 5.0 5.4
1.8
280 16.8 16.0 15.2 14.4 2.7 4.2 5.0 5.6
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 158
NUMERICAL VALUES
TABLE 10-36 (cont’d) φvVn (ksi) for Plate Girders by Appendix G Aw for 36 ksi Yield Stress Steel, Tension Field Action Included[b] (Italic values indicate gross area, as percent of (h x tw) required for pairs of intermediate stiffeners of 36 ksi yield stress steel with Vu / φVn = 1.0)[a] Aspect ratio a / h: Stiffener Spacing to Web Depth
h tw
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
Over 3.0 [c]
300 16.6 15.8 15.0 3.9 5.2 5.9 320 16.4 15.6 4.9 6.0 [a] For area of single-angle and single-plate stiffeners, or when Vu / φVn < 1.0, see Equation A-G4-1. [b] For end-panels and all panels in hybrid and web-tapered plate girders, use Table 9-36. [c] Same as for Table 9-36. Note: Girders so proportioned that the computed shear is less than that given in right-hand column do not require intermediate stiffeners.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
NUMERICAL VALUES
6 - 159
TABLE 10-50 φvVn (ksi) for Plate Girders by Appendix G Aw for 50 ksi Yield Stress Steel, Tension Field Action Included[b] (Italic values indicate gross area, as percent of (h × tw) required for pairs of intermediate stiffeners of 50 ksi yield stress steel with Vu / φVn = 1.0)[a] Aspect ratio a / h: Stiffener Spacing to Web Depth
h tw
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.5
3.0
Over 3.0 [c]
60 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 26.6 70 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 26.9 26.5 26.1 25.4 24.9 22.8 80 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 26.5 25.8 25.1 24.6 24.1 23.3 22.4 18.6 90 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 26.8 26.3 25.3 24.4 23.4 22.5 21.7 20.2 19.2 14.7 100 27.0 27.0 27.0 26.5 25.9 25.3 24.0 22.5 21.4 20.4 19.6 18.0 17.0 11.9 110
27.0 27.0 26.5 25.8 25.1 24.2 22.4 21.0 19.8 18.8 18.0 16.4 15.3
9.8
120 27.0 26.7 25.9 25.1 24.0 23.0 21.2 19.8 18.6 17.6 16.8 15.2 14.1
8.3
130 27.0 26.2 25.4 24.1 23.0 22.0 20.3 18.9 17.7 16.7 15.9 14.2 13.1
7.0
140 26.7 25.8 24.5 23.3 22.2 21.3 19.6 18.2 17.0 16.0 15.1 13.5 12.3
6.1
150 26.3 25.2 23.9 22.7 21.6 20.7 19.0 17.6 16.4 15.4 14.5 12.9 11.7
5.3
160 26.0 24.6 23.3 22.2 21.1 20.2 18.5 17.1 15.9 14.9 14.0 12.4 0.2 0.4 0.5 0.8
4.6
170 25.6 24.1 22.8 21.7 20.7 19.8 18.1 16.7 15.2 14.5 13.6 0.5 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6
4.1
180 25.1 23.7 22.4 21.3 20.3 19.4 17.8 16.4 15.2 14.2 13.3 0.4 0.9 1.5 1.9 2.2 2.3 2.5
3.7
200 24.3 23.0 21.8 20.8 19.8 18.9 17.3 15.9 14.7 1.0 1.8 2.3 2.7 3.2 3.5 3.7
3.0
220 23.7 22.5 21.4 20.4 19.4 18.5 16.9 1.7 2.7 3.3 3.8 4.1 4.5
2.5
240 23.2 22.1 21.0 20.0 19.1 18.2 1.8 3.2 4.0 4.6 4.9 5.2
2.1
260 23.0 21.8 20.8 19.8 18.8 18.0 3.2 4.4 5.1 5.6 5.9 6.1 280 22.7 21.6 20.6 19.6 4.4 5.4 6.0 6.4 [a] For area of single-angle and single-plate stiffeners, or when Vu / φVn < 1.0, see Equation A-G4-1. [b] For end-panels and all panels in hybrid and web-tapered plate girders, use Table 9-50. [c] Same as for Table 9-50. Note: Girders so proportioned that the computed shear is less than that given in right-hand column do not require intermediate stiffeners.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 160
NUMERICAL VALUES
TABLE 11 Nominal Horizontal Shear Load for One Connector Qn, kips[a] From Equations I5-1 and I5-2 Specified Compressive Strength of Concrete, fc′, ksi [d] Connector [b]
3.0
3.5
4.0
dia. × 2-in. hooked or headed stud
9.4
10.5
11.6
dia. × 21⁄2-in. hooked or headed stud
14.6
16.4
18.1
dia. × 3-in. hooked or headed stud
21.0
23.6
26.1
dia. × 31⁄2-in. hooked or headed stud
28.6
32.1
35.5
Channel C3 × 4.1
10.2 Lc [c]
11.5 Lc [c]
12.7 Lc [c]
Channel C4 × 5.4
11.1 Lc [c]
12.4 Lc [c]
13.8 Lc [c]
Channel C5 × 6.7
11.9 Lc [c]
13.3 Lc [c]
14.7 Lc [c]
1⁄ -in. 2 5⁄ -in. 8
3⁄ -in. 4 7⁄ -in. 8
[a] Applicable only to concrete made with ASTM C33 aggregates. [b] The nominal horizontal loads tabulated may also be used for studs longer than shown. [c] Lc = length of channel, inches. [d] Fu > 0.5(fc′w)0.75, w = 145 lbs./cu. ft.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 161
COMMENTARY on the Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings December 1, 1993
INTRODUCTION The Specification is intended to be complete for normal design usage. The Commentary furnishes background information and references for the benefit of the engineer seeking further understanding of the derivations and limits of the specification. The Specification and Commentary are intended for use by design professionals with demonstrated engineering competence.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 162
CHAPTER A GENERALPROVISIONS
A1. SCOPE Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) is an improved approach to the design of structural steel for buildings. It involves explicit consideration of limit states, multiple load factors, and resistance factors, and implicit probabilistic determination of reliability. The designation LRFD reflects the concept of factoring both loads and resistance. This type of factoring differs from the AISC allowable stress design (ASD) Specification (AISC, 1989), where only the resistance is divided by a factor of safety (to obtain allowable stress) and from the plastic design portion of that Specification, where only the loads are multiplied by a common load factor. The LRFD method was devised to offer the designer greater flexibility, more rationality, and possible overall economy. The format of using resistance factors and multiple load factors is not new, as several such design codes are in effect [the ACI-318 Strength Design for Reinforced Concrete (ACI, 1989) and the AASHTO Load Factor Design for Bridges (AASHTO, 1989)]. Nor should the new LRFD method give designs radically different from the older methods, since it was tuned, or “calibrated,” to typical representative designs of the earlier methods. The principal new ingredient is the use of a probabilistic mathematical model in the development of the load and resistance factors, which made it possible to give proper weight to the accuracy with which the various loads and resistances can be determined. Also, it provides a rational methodology for transference of test results into design provisions. A more rational design procedure leading to more uniform reliability is the practical result. A2. LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY 2.
Types of Construction The provisions for these types of construction have been revised to provide for a truer recognition of the actual degree of connection restraint in the structural design. All connections provide some restraint. Depending on the amount of restraint offered, connections are classified as either Type FR or PR. This classification renames the Type I connection of the AISC ASD Specification to Type FR and includes both Type II and Type III of that Specification under a new, more general classification of Type PR. Just as in the allowable stress design (ASD) provisions, construction utilizing Type FR connections may be designed in LRFD using either elastic or plastic analysis provided the appropriate Specification provisions are satisfied. For Type PR construction which uses the “simple framing” approach, the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-A3]
MATERIAL
6 - 163
restraint of the connection is ignored, provided the given conditions are met. This is no change from the ASD provisions. Where there is evidence of the actual moment rotation capability of a given type of connection, the use of designs incorporating the connection restraint is permitted just as in ASD. The designer should, when incorporating connection restraint into the design, take into account the reduced connection stiffness on the stability of the structure and its effect on the magnitude of second order effects. A3. MATERIAL 1.
Structural Steel
1a.
ASTM Designations The grades of structural steel approved for use under the LRFD Specification, covered by ASTM standard specifications, extend to a yield stress of 100 ksi. Some of these ASTM standards specify a minimum yield point, while others specify a minimum yield strength. The term “yield stress” is used in the Specification as a generic term to denote either the yield point or the yield strength. It is important to be aware of limitations of availability that may exist for some combinations of strength and size. Not all structural section sizes are included in the various material specifications. For example, the 60 ksi yield strength steel in the A572 specification includes plate only up to 11⁄4-in. in thickness. Another limitation on availability is that even when a product is included in the specifications, it may be only infrequently produced by the mills. Specifying these products may result in procurement delays or require ordering large quantities directly from the producing mills. Consequently, it is prudent to check availability before completing the details of a design. Properties in the direction of rolling are of principal interest in the design of steel structures. Hence, yield stress as determined by the standard tensile test is the principal mechanical property recognized in the selection of the steels approved for use under the Specification. It must be recognized that other mechanical and physical properties of rolled steel, such as anisotropy, ductility, notch toughness, formability, corrosion resistance, etc., may also be important to the satisfactory performance of a structure. It is not possible to incorporate in the Commentary adequate information to impart full understanding of all factors which might merit consideration in the selection and specification of materials for unique or especially demanding applications. In such a situation the user of the Specification is advised to make use of reference material contained in the literature on the specific properties of concern and to specify supplementary material production or quality requirements as provided for in ASTM material specifications. One such case is the design of highly restrained welded connections (AISC, 1973). Rolled steel is anisotropic, especially insofar as ductility is concerned; therefore, weld contraction strains in the region of highly restrained welded connections may exceed the capabilities of the material if special attention is not given to material selection, details, workmanship, and inspection. Another special situation is that of fracture control design for certain types of AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 164
GENERAL PROVISIONS
[Comm. A
service conditions (AASHTO, 1989). The relatively warm temperatures of steel in buildings, the essentially static strain rates, the stress intensity, and the number of cycles of full design stress make the probability of fracture in building structures extremely remote. Good workmanship and good design details incorporating joint geometry that avoids severe stress concentrations are generally the most effective means of providing fracture-resistant construction. However, for especially demanding service conditions such as low temperatures with impact loading, the specification of steels with superior notch toughness may be warranted. 1c.
Heavy Shapes The web-to-flange intersection and the web center of heavy hot-rolled shapes as well as the interior portions of heavy plates may contain a coarser grain structure and/or lower toughness material than other areas of these products. This is probably caused by ingot segregation, as well as somewhat less deformation during hot rolling, higher finishing temperature, and a slower cooling rate after rolling for these heavy sections. This characteristic is not detrimental to suitability for service for compression members, or for non-welded members. However, when heavy cross sections are joined by splices or connections using complete-joint penetration welds which extend through the coarser and/or lower notch-tough interior portions, tensile strains induced by weld shrinkage may result in cracking, for example a complete-joint penetration welded connection of a heavy cross section beam to any column section. When members of lesser thickness are joined by complete-joint penetration welds, which induce smaller weld shrinkage strains, to the finer grained and/or more notch-tough surface material of ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and heavy built-up cross sections, the potential for cracking is significantly lower, for example a complete penetration groove welded connection of a non-heavy cross-section beam to a heavy cross-section column. For critical applications such as primary tension members, material should be specified to provide adequate toughness at service temperatures. Because of differences in the strain rate between the Charpy V-Notch (CVN) impact test and the strain rate experienced in actual structures, the CVN test is conducted at a temperature higher than the anticipated service temperature for the structure. The location of the CVN test is shown in Figure C-A3.1. The toughness requirements of A3.1c are intended only to provide material of reasonable toughness for ordinary service application. For unusual applications and/or low temperature service, more restrictive requirements and/or toughness requirements for other section sizes and thicknesses may be appropriate. To minimize the potential for fracture, the notch toughness requirements of A3.1c must be used in conjunction with good design and fabrication procedures. Specific requirements are given in Sections J1.5, J1.6, J2.3, and M2.2.
3.
Bolts, Washers, and Nuts The ASTM standard for A307 bolts covers two grades of fasteners. Either grade may be used under the LRFD Specification; however, it should be noted that Gr. B is intended for pipe flange bolting and Gr. A is the quality long in use for structural applications. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-A3]
4.
MATERIAL
6 - 165
Anchor Bolts and Threaded Rods Since there is a limit on the maximum available length of A325 and A490, the use of these bolts for anchor bolts with design lengths longer than the maximum available lengths has presented problems in the past. The inclusion of A687 material in this Specification allows the use of higher strength material for bolts longer than A325 and A490 bolts. The designer should be aware that pretensioning anchor bolts is not recommended due to relaxation and stress corrosion after pretensioning. The designer should specify the appropriate thread and SAE fit for threaded rods used as load-carrying members.
5.
Filler Metal and Flux for Welding The filler metal specifications issued by the American Welding Society are general specifications which include filler metals suitable for building construction, as well as consumables that would not be suitable for building construction. For example, some electrodes covered by the specifications are specifically limited to single pass applications, while others are restricted to sheet metal applications. Many of the filler metals listed are “low hydrogen”, that is, they deposit weld metal with low levels of diffusable hydrogen. Other materials are not. Filler metals listed under the various A5 specifications may or may not have required impact toughness, depending on the specific electrode classification. Notch toughness is generally not critical for weld metal used in building construction. However, on structures subject to dynamic loading, the engineer may require the filler metals used to deliver notch-tough weld deposits. Filler metals may be classified in either the as welded or post weld heat treated (stress relieved) condition. Since most structural applications will not involve stress relief, it is important to utilize filler materials that are classified in conditions similar to those experienced by the actual structure. When specifying filler metal and/or flux by AWS designation, the applicable standard specifications should be carefully reviewed to assure a complete understanding of the designation reference. This is necessary because the AWS designation systems are not consistent. For example, in the case of electrodes for shielded metal arc welding (AWS A5.1), the first two or three digits indicate the nominal tensile strength classification, in ksi, of the weld metal and the final two digits indicate the type of coating; however, in the case of mild steel 1
/4 tf
CVN specimen location
Fig. C-A3.1. Location from which Charpy impact specimen shall be taken. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 166
GENERAL PROVISIONS
[Comm. A
electrodes for submerged arc welding (AWS A5.17), the first one or two digits times 10 indicate the nominal tensile strength classification, while the final digit or digits times 10 indicate the testing temperature in degrees F, for weld metal impact tests. In the case of low-alloy steel covered arc welding electrodes (AWS A5.5), certain portions of the designation indicate a requirement for stress relief, while others indicate no stress relief requirement. Engineers do not, in general, specify the exact filler metal to be employed on a particular structure. Rather, the decision as to which welding process and which filler metal is to be utilized is usually left with the fabricator. To ensure that the proper filler metals are used, codes restrict the usage of certain filler materials, or impose qualification testing to prove the suitability of the specific electrode. A4. LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS 1.
Loads, Load Factors, and Load Combinations The load factors and load combinations given in Section A4.1 were developed to be used with the recommended minimum loads given in ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE, 1988). The load factors and load combinations are developed in Ellingwood et al. (1982). The target reliability indices β underlying the load factors are approximately 3.0 for combinations with gravity loads only (dead, snow, and live loads), 2.5 for combinations with wind included, and 1.75 for combinations with earthquake loads. See Commentary A5.3 for definition of β. The load factors and load combinations recognize that when several loads act in combination with the dead load (e.g., dead plus live plus wind), only one of these takes on its maximum lifetime value, while the other load is at its “arbitrary point-in-time value” (i.e., at a value which can be expected to be on the structure at any time). For example, under dead, live, and wind loads the following combinations are appropriate: γD D + γLL
(C-A4-1)
γD D + γLaLa + γwW
(C-A4-2)
γD D + γLL + γwaWa
(C-A4-3)
where γ is the appropriate load factor as designated by the subscript symbol. Subscript a refers to an “arbitrary point-in-time” value. The mean value of arbitrary point-in-time live load La is on the order of 0.24 to 0.4 times the mean maximum lifetime live load L for many occupancies, but its dispersion is far greater. The arbitrary point-in-time wind load Wa, acting in conjunction with the maximum lifetime live load, is the maximum daily wind. It turns out that γWa Wa is a negligible quantity so only two load combinations remain: 1.2D + 1.6L
(C-A4-4)
1.2D + 0.5L + 1.3W
(C-A4-5)
The load factor 0.5 assigned to L in the second equation reflects the statistical AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-A5]
DESIGN BASIS
6 - 167
properties of La, but to avoid having to calculate yet another load, it is reduced so it can be combined with the maximum lifetime wind load. The nominal loads D, L, W, E, and S are the code loads or the loads given in ASCE 7. The new specified earthquake loads are based on post-elastic energy dissipation in the structure, and are higher than those traditionally specified for allowable stress design (NEHRP, 1992). The new edition of ASCE Standard 7 on structural loads expected to be released in 1993 has adopted the new seismic design recommendations, as has the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings (AISC, 1992). The load factors on E in Load Combinations A4-5 and A4-6 have been reduced from 1.5 to 1.0 to be consistent with the specification of earthquake force in these new documents. The reader is referred to the commentaries to these documents for an expanded discussion on seismic loads, load factors, and seismic design of steel buildings. 2.
Impact A mass of the total moving load (wheel load) is used as the basis for impact loads on crane runway girders, because maximum impact load results when cranes travel while supporting lifted loads. The increase in load, in recognition of random impacts, is not required to be applied to supporting columns because the impact load effects (increase in eccentricities or increases in out-of-straightness) will not develop or will be negligible during the short duration of impact. For additional information on crane girder design criteria see AISE Technical Report No. 13.
A5. DESIGN BASIS 1.
Required Strength at Factored Loads LRFD permits the use of both elastic and plastic structural analyses. LRFD provisions result in essentially the same methodology for, and end product of, plastic design as included in the AISC ASD Specification (AISC, 1989), except that the LRFD provisions tend to be more liberal, reflecting added experience and the results of further research. The 10 percent redistribution permitted is consistent with that in the AISC ASD Specification (AISC, 1989).
2.
Limit States A limit state is a condition which represents the limit of structural usefulness. Limit states may be dictated by functional requirements, such as maximum deflections or drift; they may be conceptual, such as plastic hinge or mechanism formation; or they may represent the actual collapse of the whole or part of the structure, such as fracture or instability. Design criteria ensure that a limit state is violated only with an acceptably small probability by selecting the load and resistance factors and nominal load and resistance values which will never be exceeded under the design assumptions. Two kinds of limit states apply for structures: limit states of strength which define safety against the extreme loads during the intended life of the structure, and limit states of serviceability which define the functional requirements. The LRFD Specification, like other structural codes, focuses on the limit states of strength because of overriding considerations of public safety for the life, limb, AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 168
GENERAL PROVISIONS
[Comm. A
and property of human beings. This does not mean that limit states of serviceability are not important to the designer, who must equally ensure functional performance and economy of design. However, these latter considerations permit more exercise of judgment on the part of designers. Minimum considerations of public safety, on the other hand, are not matters of individual judgment and, therefore, specifications dwell more on the limit states of strength than on the limit states of serviceability. Limit states of strength vary from member to member, and several limit states may apply to a given member. The following limit states of strength are the most common: onset of yielding, formation of a plastic hinge, formation of a plastic mechanism, overall frame or member instability, lateral-torsional buckling, local buckling, tensile fracture, development of fatigue cracks, deflection instability, alternating plasticity, and excessive deformation. The most common serviceability limit states include unacceptable elastic deflections and drift, unacceptable vibrations, and permanent deformations. 3.
Design for Strength The general format of the LRFD Specification is given by the formula:
ΣγiQi ≤ φRn
(C-A5-1)
where = summation Σ i = type of load, i.e., dead load, live load, wind, etc. Qi = nominal load effect = load factor corresponding to Qi γi ΣγiQi = required resistance Rn = nominal resistance = resistance factor corresponding to Rn φ φRn = design strength The left side of Equation C-A5-1 represents the required resistance computed by structural analysis based upon assumed loads, and the right side of Equation C-A5-1 represents a limiting structural capacity provided by the selected members. In LRFD, the designer compares the effect of factored loads to the strength actually provided. The term design strength refers to the resistance or strength φRn that must be provided by the selected member. The load factors γ and the resistance factors φ reflect the fact that loads, load effects (the computed forces and moments in the structural elements), and the resistances can be determined only to imperfect degrees of accuracy. The resistance factor φ is equal to or less than 1.0 because there is always a chance for the actual resistance to be less than the nominal value Rn computed by the equations given in Chapters D through K. Similarly, the load factors γ reflect the fact that the actual load effects may deviate from the nominal values of Qi computed from the specified nominal loads. These factors account for unavoidable inaccuracies in the theory, variations in the material properties and dimensions, and uncertainties in the determination of loads. They provide a margin of reliability to account for unexpected loads. They do not account for gross error or negligence. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-A5]
DESIGN BASIS
6 - 169
The LRFD Specification is based on (1) probabilistic models of loads and resistance, (2) a calibration of the LRFD criteria to the 1978 edition of the AISC ASD Specification for selected members, and (3) the evaluation of the resulting criteria by judgment and past experience aided by comparative design office studies of representative structures. The following is a brief probabilistic basis for LRFD (Ravindra and Galambos, 1978, and Ellingwood et al., 1982). The load effects Q and the resistance factor R are assumed to be statistically independent random variables. In Figure C-A5.1, frequency distributions for Q and R are portrayed as separate curves on a common plot for a hypothetical case. As long as the resistance R is greater than (to the right of) the effects of the loads Q, a margin of safety for the particular limit state exists. However, because Q and R are random variables, there is some small probability that R may be less than Q, (R < Q). This limit state probability is related to the degree of overlap of the frequency distributions in Figure C-A5.1, which depends on their relative positioning (Rm vs. Qm) and their dispersions. An equivalent situation may be represented as in Figure C-A5.2. If the expression R < Q is divided by Q and the result expressed logarithmically, the result will be a single frequency distribution curve combining the uncertainties of both R and Q. The probability of attaining a limit state (R < Q) is equal to the probability that ln(R / Q) < 0 and is represented by the shaded area in the diagram. The shaded area may be reduced and thus reliability increased in either of two ways: (1) by moving the mean of ln(R / Q) to the right, or (2) by reducing the spread of the curve for a given position of the mean relative to the origin. A convenient way of combining these two approaches is by defining the position of the mean using the standard deviation of ln(R / Q), as the unit of measure. Thus, the distance from the origin to the mean is measured as the number of standard deviations of the function ln(R / Q). As shown in Figure C-A5.2, this
FREQUENCY
R Q
Qm
}
0
OVERLAP
Rm RESISTANCE R LOAD EFFECT Q
Fig. C-A5.1. Frequency distribution of load effect Q and resistance R. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 170
GENERAL PROVISIONS
[Comm. A
is stated as β times σln(R / Q), the standard deviation of ln(R / Q). The factor β therefore is called the “reliability index.” If the actual shape of the distribution of ln(R / Q) were known, and if an acceptable value of the probability of reaching the limit state could be agreed upon, one could establish a completely probability-based set of design criteria. Unfortunately, this much information frequently is not known. The distribution shape of each of the many variables (material, loads, etc.) has an influence on the shape of the distribution of ln(R / Q). Often only the means and the standard deviations of the many variables involved in the makeup of the resistance and the load effect can be estimated. However, this information is enough to build an approximate design criterion which is independent of the knowledge of the distribution, by stipulating the following design condition:
βσln(R / Q) ≈ β√ VR2+ VQ2 ≤ ln(Rm / Qm)
(C-A5-2)
In this formula, the standard deviation has been replaced by the approximation √ VR2+VQ2, where VR = σR / Rm and VQ = σQ / Qm (σR and σQ are the standard deviations, Rm and Qm are the mean values, VR and VQ are the coefficients of variation, respectively, of the resistance R and the load effect Q). For structural elements and the usual loadings Rm, Qm, and the coefficients of variation, VR and VQ, can be estimated, so a calculation of β=
ln(Rm / Qm) √ VR2+VQ2
(C-A5-3)
will give a comparative value of the measure of reliability of a structure or component. The description of the determination of β as given above is a simple way of defining the probabilistic method used in the development of LRFD. A more refined method, which can accommodate more complex design situations (such as the beam-column interaction equation) and include probabilistic distributions other than the lognormal distribution used to derive Equation C-A5-3, has been developed since the publication of Ravindra and Galambos (1978), and is fully described in Galambos, et al. (1982). This latter method has been used in the development of the recommended load factors (see Section A4). The two methods give essentially the same β values for most steel structural members and connections.
PF 0
βσIn(R
/Q)
[In(R/Q)]m
In( R/Q)
Fig. C-A5.2. Definition of reliability index. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-A5]
DESIGN BASIS
6 - 171
Statistical properties (mean values and coefficients of variations) are presented for the basic material properties and for steel beams, columns, composite beams, plate girders, beam-columns, and connection elements in a series of eight articles in the September 1978 issue of the Journal of the Structural Division of ASCE (Vol. 104, ST9). The corresponding load statistics are given in Galambos, et al. (1982). Based on these statistics, the values of β inherent in the 1978 edition of the AISC ASD Specification were evaluated under different load combinations (live/dead, wind/dead, etc.), and for various tributary areas for typical members (beams, columns, beam-columns, structural components, etc.). As might be expected, there was a considerable variation in the range of β values. Examination of the many β values associated with ASD revealed certain trends. For example, compact rolled beams (flexure) and tension members (yielding) had β values that decreased from about 3.1 at L / D = 0.50 to 2.4 at L / D = 4. This decrease is a result of ASD applying the same factor to dead load, which is relatively predictable, and live load, which is more variable. For bolted or welded connections, β was on the order of 4 to 5. Reliability indices for load combinations involving wind and earthquake loads tended to be lower. Based on a thorough assessment of implied reliabilities in existing acceptable design practice, common load factors for various structural materials (steel, reinforced concrete, etc.) were developed in Ellingwood et al. (1982). One of the features of the probability-based method used in the development of LRFD is that the variations of β values can be reduced by specifying several “target” β values and selecting multiple load and resistance factors to meet these targets. The Committee on Specifications set the point at which LRFD is calibrated to ASD at L / D = 3.0 for braced compact beams in flexure and tension members at yield. The resistance factor, φ, for these limit states is 0.90, and the implied β is approximately 2.6 for members and 4.0 for connections; this larger β value for connections reflects the fact that connections are expected to be stronger than the members that they connect. Limit states for other members are handled consistently. Computer methods as well as charts are given in Ellingwood et al. (1982) for the use of specification writers to determine the resistance factors φ. These factors can also be approximately determined by the following: φ = (Rm / Rn) exp (−0.55βVr )
(C-A5-4)*
where Rm = mean resistance Rn = nominal resistance according to the equations in Chapters D through K Vr = coefficient of variation of the resistance 4.
Design for Serviceability and Other Considerations Nominally, serviceability should be checked at the unfactored loads. For combinations of gravity and wind or seismic loads some additional reduction factor may be warranted.
* Note that exp (x) is identical to the more familiar ex..
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 172
CHAPTER B DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
B2. NET AREA Critical net area is based on net width and load transfer at a particular chain. B3. EFFECTIVE NET AREA FOR TENSION MEMBERS Section B3 deals with the effect of shear lag, which is applicable to both welded and bolted tension members. The reduction coefficient U is applied to the net area An of bolted members and to the gross area Ag of welded members. As the length of connection l is increased, the shear lag effect is diminished. This concept is expressed empirically by Equation B3-3. Munse and Chesson (1963) have shown, using this expression to compute an effective net area, with few exceptions, the estimated strength of some 1,000 bolted and riveted connection test specimens correlated with observed test results within a scatterband of ±10 percent. Newer research (Easterling and Gonzales, 1993) provides further justification for current provisions. _ For any given profile and connected elements, x is a fixed geometric property. It is illustrated as the distance from the connection plane, or face of the member, to the centroid of the member section resisting the connection force. See Figure C-B3.1. Length l is dependent upon the number of fasteners or equivalent length of weld required to develop the given tensile force, and this in turn is dependent upon the mechanical properties of the member and the capacity of the fasteners or weld used. The length l is illustrated as the distance, parallel to the line of force, between the first and last fasteners in a line for bolted connections. The number of bolts in a line, for the purpose of the determination of l, is determined by the line with the maximum number of bolts in the connection. For staggered bolts, the out-to-out dimension is used for l. See Figure C-B3.2. There is insufficient data to establish a value of U if all lines have only one bolt, but it is probably conservative to use Ae equal to the net area of the connected element. For welded connections, l is the length of the member parallel to the line of force that is welded. For combinations of longitudinal and transverse welds (see Figure C-B3.3), l is the length of longitudinal weld because the transverse weld has little or no effect on the shear lag problem, i.e., it does little to get the load into the unattached portions of the member. Previous issues of this Specification have presented values for U for bolted or riveted connections of W, M, and S shapes, tees cut from these shapes, and other shapes. These values are acceptable for use in lieu of calculated values from Equation B3-3 and are retained here for the convenience of designers. For bolted or riveted connections the following values of U may be used: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-B3]
EFFECTIVE NET AREA FOR TENSION MEMBERS
6 - 173
(a) W, M, or S shapes with flange widths not less than two-thirds the depth, and structural tees cut from these shapes, provided the connection is to the flanges and has no fewer than three fasteners per line in the direction of stress, U = 0.90 (b) W, M, or S shapes not meeting the conditions of subparagraph a, structural tees cut from these shapes, and all other shapes including built-up cross
T
x Treat as a WT
(a)
T
x x Treat as an angle Use maximum x (b) Treat half the flange and portion of web as an angle
T
x
Use maximum x (c)
_ Fig. C-B3.1. Determination of x for U. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
x
6 - 174
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
[Comm. B
sections, provided the connection has no fewer than three fasteners per line in the direction of stress, U = 0.85 (c) All members having only two fasteners per line in the direction of stress, U = 0.75 When a tension load is transmitted by fillet welds to some but not all elements of a cross section, the weld strength will control. B5. LOCAL BUCKLING For the purposes of this Specification, steel sections are divided into compact sections, noncompact sections, and sections with slender compression elements. Compact sections are capable of developing a fully plastic stress distribution and they possess a rotational capacity of approximately 3 before the onset of local buckling (Yura et al., 1978). Noncompact sections can develop the yield stress in compression elements before local buckling occurs, but will not resist inelastic local buckling at the strain levels required for a fully plastic stress distribution. Slender compression elements buckle elastically before the yield stress is achieved.
T Use out-to-out distance for l Use maximum x x
l x
Fig. C-B3.2. Staggered holes.
T
l
l
Fig. C-B3.3. Longitudinal and transverse welds. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-B5]
LOCAL BUCKLING
6 - 175
TABLE C-B5.1 Limiting Width-Thickness Ratios for Compression Elements Limiting Width-thickness Ratios λp
WidthThickness Ratio
Non-seismic
Seismic
Flanges of I-shaped sections (including hybrid sections) and channels in flexure [a]
b/t
65 / √ Fy
52 / √ Fy
Webs in combined flexural and axial compression
h / tw
Description of Element
For Pu / φb Py ≤ 0.125 2.75Pu 640 1− Fy √ φbPy
1.54Pu 520 1− Fy √ φbPy
For Pu / φb Py > 0.125
Pu 253 191 2.33 − ≥ Fy √ φbPy √Fy [a] For hybrid beams use Fyf in place of Fy.
The dividing line between compact and noncompact sections is the limiting width-thickness ratio λp. For a section to be compact, all of its compression elements must have width-thickness ratios smaller than the limiting λp. A greater inelastic rotation capacity than provided by the limiting values λp given in Table C-B5.1 may be required for some structures in areas of high seismicity. It has been suggested that in order to develop a ductility of from 3 to 5 in a structural member, ductility factors for elements would have to lie in the range of 5 to 15. Thus, in this case it is prudent to provide for an inelastic rotation of 7 to 9 times the elastic rotation (Chopra and Newmark, 1980). In order to provide for this rotation capacity, the limits λp for local flange and web buckling would be as shown in Table C-B5.1 (Galambos, 1976). More information on seismic design is contained in the AISC Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings. Another limiting width-thickness ratio is λr, representing the distinction between noncompact sections and sections with slender compression elements. As long as the width-thickness ratio of a compression element does not exceed the limiting value λr, local elastic buckling will not govern its strength. However, for those cases where the width-thickness ratios exceed λr, elastic buckling strength must be considered. A design procedure for such slender-element compression sections, based on elastic buckling of plates, is given in Appendix B5.3. The effective width Equation A-B5-12 applies strictly to stiffened elements under uniform compression. It does not apply to cases where the compression element is under stress gradient. A method of dealing with the stress gradient in a compression element is provided in Section B2 of the AISI Design Specifications for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, 1986 and Addendum, 1989. An exception is plate girders with slender webs. Such plate girders AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 176
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
[Comm. B
are capable of developing postbuckling strength in excess of the elastic buckling load. A design procedure for plate girders including tension field action is given in Appendix G. The values of the limiting ratios λp and λr specified in Table B5.1 are similar to those in AISC (1989) and Table 2.3.3.3 of Galambos (1976), except that: Fy , limited in Galambos (1976) to indeterminate beams when (1) λp = 65 / √ moments are determined by elastic analysis and to determinate beams, was adopted for all conditions on the basis of Yura et al. (1978); and (2) λp = 1,300 / Fy for circular hollow sections was obtained from Sherman (1976). The high shape factor for circular hollow sections makes it impractical to use the same slenderness limits to define the regions of behavior for different types of loading. In Table B5.1, the values of λp for a compact shape that can achieve the plastic moment, and λr for bending, are based on an analysis of test data from several projects involving the bending of pipes in a region of constant moment (Sherman and Tanavde, 1984 and Galambos, 1988). The same analysis produced the equation for the inelastic moment capacity in Table A-F1.1 in Appendix F1. However, a more restrictive value of λp is required to prevent inelastic local buckling from limiting the plastic hinge rotation capacity needed to develop a mechanism in a circular hollow beam section (Sherman, 1976). The values of λr for axial compression and for bending are both based on test data. The former value has been used in building specifications since 1968 (Winter, 1970). Appendices B5 and F1 also limit the diameter-to-thickness ratio for any circular section to 13,000 / Fy. Beyond this, the local buckling strength decreases rapidly, making it impractical to use these sections in building construction. Following the SSRC recommendations (Galambos, 1988) and the approach used for other shapes with slender compression elements, a Q factor is used for circular sections to account for interaction between local and column buckling. The Q factor is the ratio between the local buckling stress and the yield stress. The local buckling stress for the circular section is taken from the inelastic AISI criteria (Winter, 1970) and is based on tests conducted on fabricated and manufactured cylinders. Subsequent tests on fabricated cylinders (Galambos, 1988) confirm that this equation is conservative. The definitions of the width and thickness of compression elements agree with the 1978 AISC ASD Specification with minor modifications. Their applicability extends to sections formed by bending and to unsymmetrical and hybrid sections. For built-up I-shaped sections under axial compression, modifications have been made to the flange local buckling criterion to include web-flange interaction. The kc in the λr limit, in Equations A-B5-7 and A-B5-8 and the elastic buckling Equation A-B5-8 are the same that are used for flexural members. Theory indicates that the web-flange interaction in axial compression is at least as severe as in flexure. Rolled shapes are excluded from this criteria because there are no standard sections with proportions where the interaction would occur. In built-up sections where the interaction causes a reduction in the flange local buckling strength, it is likely that the web is also a thin stiffened element. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-B7]
LIMITING SLENDERNESS RATIOS
6 - 177
The kc factor accounts for the interaction of flange and web local buckling demonstrated in experiments conducted by Johnson (1985). The maximum limit of 0.763 corresponds to Fcr = 20,000 / λ2 which was used as the local buckling strength in earlier editions of both the ASD and LRFD Specifications. An h / tw = 27.5 is required to reach kc = 0.763. Fully fixed restraint for an unstiffened compression element corresponds to kc = 1.3 while zero restraint gives kc = 0.42. Because of web-flange interactions it is possible to get kc < 0.42 from Fy use h / tw = 970 / √ Fy in the kc equation, the new kc formula. If h / tw > 970 / √ which corresponds to the 0.35 limit. Illustrations of some of the requirements of Table B5.1 are shown in Figure C-B5.1. B7. LIMITING SLENDERNESS RATIOS Chapters D and E provide reliable criteria for resistance of axially loaded members based on theory and confirmed by test for all significant parameters including slenderness. The advisory upper limits on slenderness contained in Section B7 are based on professional judgment and practical considerations of economics, ease of handling, and care required to minimize inadvertent damage during fabrication, transport, and erection. Out-of-straightness within reasonable tolerances does not affect the strength of tension members, and the effect of out-of-straightness within specified tolerances on the strength of compression members is accounted for in formulas for resistance. Applied tension tends to reduce, whereas compression tends to amplify, out-of-straightness. Therefore, more liberal criteria are suggested for tension members, including those subject to small compressive forces resulting from transient loads such as earthquake and wind. For members with slenderness ratios greater than 200, these compressive forces correspond to stresses less than 2.6 ksi.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 178
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
b
[Comm. B
AXIAL COMPRESSION
BENDING 65
141
,
λr =
640 , Fy √
λr =
970 Fy √
(perforated λr = 190 λp = , λr = Fy √
317 √Fy
λp =
Fy √
√ Fy − 10
λr =
95 Fy √
t
tw
h
b b
t
t
t
hc
λp =
65 λp = , Fy √
λr =
b
h
λr =
λr =
253 Fy √
317 ) Fy √ 238 λr = Fy √ λr =
238 Fy √
162 √ (Fyw − 16.5) / kc
95 Fy √
hc
109 λr = √ Fy / kc
λr =
109 √ Fy / kc
λp =
640 , Fy √
λr =
970 Fy √
λr =
253 Fy √
λp =
190 , Fy √
λr =
238 Fy √
λr =
238 Fy √
λp =
640 , Fy √
λr =
970 Fu √
λr =
238 Fy √
λr =
253 Fy √
λr =
253 Fy √
λr =
970 Fy √
λr =
253 Fy √
b
h b
b
h b
Fig. C-B5.1. Selected examples of Table B5.1 requirements.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 179
CHAPTER C FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
C1. SECOND ORDER EFFECTS While resistance to wind and seismic loading can be provided in certain buildings by means of shear walls, which also provide for overall frame stability at factored gravity loading, other building frames must provide this resistance by frame action. This resistance can be achieved in several ways, e.g., by a system of bracing, by a moment-resisting frame, or by any combination of lateral force-resisting elements. For frames under combined gravity and lateral loads, drift (horizontal deflection caused by applied loads) occurs at the start of loading. At a given value of the applied loads, the frame has a definite amount of drift ∆. In unbraced frames, additional secondary bending moments, known as the P∆ moments, may be developed in the columns and beams of the lateral load-resisting systems in each story. P is the total gravity load above the story and ∆ is the story drift. As the applied load increases, the P∆ moments also increase. Therefore, the P∆ effect must often be accounted for in frame design. Similarly, in braced frames, increases in axial forces occur in the members of the bracing systems; however, such effects are usually less significant. The designer should consider these effects for all types of frames and determine if they are significant. Since P∆ effects can cause frame drifts to be larger than those calculated by ignoring them, they should also be included in the service load drift analysis when they are significant. In unbraced frames designed by plastic analysis, the limit of 0.75φcPy on column axial loads has also been retained to help ensure stability. The designer may use second-order elastic analysis to compute the maximum factored forces and moments in a member. These represent the required strength. Alternatively, for structures designed on the basis of elastic analysis, the designer may use first order analysis and the amplification factors B1 and B2. In the general case, a member may have first order moments not associated with sidesway which are multiplied by B1, and first order moments produced by forces causing sidesway which are multiplied by B2. The factor B2 applies only to moments caused by forces producing sidesway and is calculated for an entire story. In building frames designed to limit ∆oh / L to a predetermined value, the factor B2 may be found in advance of designing individual members. Drift limits may also be set for design of various categories of buildings so that the effect of secondary bending can be insignificant (Kanchanalai and Lu, 1979; AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 180
FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
[Comm. C
ATC, 1978). It is conservative to use the B2 factor with the sum of the sway and the no-sway moments, i.e., with Mlt + Mnt. The two kinds of first order moment Mnt and Mlt may both occur in sidesway frames from gravity loads. Mnt is defined as a moment developed in a member with frame sidesway prevented. If a significant restraining force is necessary to prevent sidesway of an unsymmetrical structure (or an unsymmetrically loaded symmetrical structure), the moments induced by releasing the restraining force will be Mlt moments, to be multiplied by B2. In most reasonably symmetric frames, this effect will be small. If such a moment B2Mlt is added algebraically to the B1Mnt moment developed with sidesway prevented, a fairly accurate value of Mu will result. End moments produced in sidesway frames by lateral loads from wind or earthquake will always be Mlt moments to be multiplied by B2. When first order end moments in members subjected to axial compression are magnified by B1 and B2 factors, equilibrium requires that they be balanced by moments in connected members (Figure C-C1.1). This can generally be accomplished satisfactorily by distributing the difference between the magnified moment and the first order moment to any other moment-resisting members attached to the compressed member (or members) in proportion to the relative stiffness of the uncompressed members. Minor imbalances may be neglected in the judgment of the engineer. However, complex conditions, such as occur when there is significant magnification in several members meeting at a joint, may require a second order elastic analysis. Connections shall also be designed to resist the magnified end moments. For compression members in braced frames, B1 is determined from Cm values which are similar to the values in the AISC ASD Specification. A significant First order moment P
w
Total moment
P H
B1 Mo
Mo l H
B2 u Mou
B1 Mo
Mo
(a)
Σ B2 Mo
(b)
Fig. C-C1.1. Moment amplification. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
B2 l Mo l
Sect. C-C1]
SECOND ORDER EFFECTS
6 - 181
difference, however, is that B1 is never less than 1. When Cm = 1 for a compression member loaded between its supports, the factors of 8⁄9 and 1⁄2 make the new equations more liberal than Equation H1-1 of the AISC ASD Specification. For Cm ≤ 1 (for members with unequal end moments), the new equations will be slightly more conservative than the AISC ASD Specification for a very slender member with low Cm. For the entire range of l / r and Cm, the equations compare very closely to exact inelastic solutions of braced members. The center-to-center member length is usually used in the structural analysis. In braced and unbraced frames, Pn is governed by the maximum slenderness ratio regardless of the plane of bending. However, Pe1 and Pe2 are always calculated using the slenderness ratio in the plane of bending. Thus, when flexure is about the strong axis only, two different values of slenderness ratio may be involved in solving a given problem. When second order analysis is used, it must account for the interaction of the factored load effects, that is, combinations of factored loads must be used in analysis. Superposition of forces obtained from separate analyses is not adequate. When bending occurs about both the x and the y axes, the required flexural strength calculated about each axis is adjusted by the value of Cm and Pe1 or Pe2 corresponding to the distribution of moment and the slenderness ratio in its plane of bending, and is then taken as a fraction of the design bending strength, φbMn, about that axis, with due regard to the unbraced length of the compression flange where this is a factor. Equations C1-2 and C1-3 approximate the maximum second order moments in compression members with no relative joint translation and no transverse loads between the ends of the member. This approximation is compared to an exact solution (Ketter, 1961) in Figure C-C1.2. For single curvature, Equation C1-3 is slightly unconservative, for a zero end moment it is almost exact, and for double curvature it is conservative. The 1978 AISC ASD Specification imposed the limit Cm ≥ 0.4 which corresponds to a M1 / M2 ratio of 0.5. However, Figure C-C1.2 shows that if, for example, M1 / M2 = 0.8, the Cm = 0.28 is already very conservative, so the limit has been removed. The limit was originally adopted from Austin (1961), which was intended to apply to lateral-torsional buckling, not second-order in-plane bending strength. The AISC Specifications, both in the 1989 ASD and LRFD, use a modification factor Cb as given in Equation F1-3 for lateral-torsional buckling. Cb is approximately the inverse of Cm as presented in Austin (1961) with a 0.4 limit. In Zandonini (1985) it was pointed out that Equation C1-3 could be used for in-plane second order moments if the 0.4 limit was eliminated. Unfortunately, Austin (1961) was misinterpreted and a lateraltorsional buckling solution was used for an in-plane second-order analysis. This oversight has now been corrected. For beam columns with transverse loadings, the second-order moment can be approximated by using the following equation Cm = 1 + ψPu / Pe1 For simply supported members AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 182
FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
[Comm. C
where
ψ =
π2δ0EI −1 M0L2
δ0 = maximum deflection due to transverse loading, in. M0 = maximum factored design moment between supports due to transverse loading, kip-in. For restrained ends some limiting cases (Iwankiw, 1984) are given in Table C-C1.1 together with two cases of simply supported beam-columns. These values of Cm are always used with the maximum moment in the member. For the restrained-end cases, the values of B1 will be most accurate if values of K < 1.0 corresponding to the end boundary conditions are used in calculating Pe1. In lieu of using the equations above, Cm = 1.0 can be used conservatively for transversely loaded members with unrestrained ends and 0.85 for restrained ends. Pu Pe 1.0 0.8
} 0.5 } 0 .80
M1 M2
–0.5 –0.8
.63 .60
Pu M1
.44 .40
M2
Mmax
M1
.25
M2
Classical solution
.20
0.6 – 0.4( M1/ M2 )
.11
1–
Pu Pe1
0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
Mmax M2
Fig. C-C1.2. Second-order moments for braced beam-column. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Pu
Sect. C-C2]
FRAME STABILITY
6 - 183
TABLE C-C1.1 Amplification Factors ψ and Cm Case
Pu
ψ
Cm
0
1.0
−0.4
1 − 0.4
Pu Pe1
−0.4
1 − 0.4
Pu Pe1
−0.2
1 − 0.2
Pu Pe1
−0.3
1 − 0.3
Pu Pe1
−0.2
1 − 0.2
Pu Pe1
L
/2
If, as in the case of a derrick boom, a beam-column is subject to transverse (gravity) load and a calculable amount of end moment, the value δ0 should include the deflection between supports produced by this moment. Stiffness reduction adjustment due to column inelasticity is permitted. C2. FRAME STABILITY The stability of structures must be considered from the standpoint of the structure as a whole, including not only the compression members, but also the beams, bracing system, and connections. The stability of individual elements must also be provided. Considerable attention has been given in the technical literature to this subject, and various methods of analysis are available to assure stability. The SSRC Guide to Stability Design Criteria for Metal Structures (Galambos, 1988) devotes several chapters to the stability of different types of members considered as individual elements, and then considers the effects of individual elements on the stability of the structure as a whole. The effective length concept is one method of estimating the interaction effects of the total frame on a compression element being considered. This concept uses AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 184
FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
[Comm. C
TABLE C-C2.1 K Values for Columns (a)
(b)
(c)
Theoretical K value
0.5
0.7
1.0
Recommended design value when ideal conditions are approximated
0.65
0.80
1.2
(e)
(f)
1.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
2.10
2.0
(d)
Buckled shape of column is shown by dashed line.
Rotation fixed and translation fixed End condition code
Rotation free and translation fixed
Rotation fixed and translation free Rotation free and translation free
K factors to equate the strength of a framed compression element of length L to an equivalent pin-ended member of length KL subject to axial load only. Other rational methods are available for evaluating the stability of frames subject to gravity and side loading and individual compression members subject to axial load and moments. However, the effective-length concept is the only tool currently available for handling several cases which occur in practically all structures, and it is an essential part of many analysis procedures. Although the concept is completely valid for ideal structures, its practical implementation involves several assumptions of idealized conditions which will be mentioned later. Two conditions, opposite in their effect upon column strength under axial loading, must be considered. If enough axial load is applied to the columns in an unbraced frame dependent entirely on its own bending stiffness for resistance to lateral deflection of the tops of the columns with respect to their bases (see Figure C-C2.1), the effective length of these columns will exceed the actual length. On the other hand, if the same frame were braced to resist such lateral movement, the effective length would be less than the actual length, due to the restraint (resistance to joint translation) provided by the bracing or other lateral support. The ratio K, effective column length to actual unbraced length, may be greater or less than 1.0. The theoretical K values for six idealized conditions in which joint rotation and translation are either fully realized or nonexistent are tabulated in Table C-C2.1. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-C2]
FRAME STABILITY
6 - 185
Also shown are suggested design values recommended by the Structural Stability Research Council (formerly the Column Research Council) for use when these conditions are approximated in actual design. In general, these suggested values are slightly higher than their theoretical equivalents, since joint fixity is seldom fully realized. If the column base in Case f of Table C-C2.1 were truly pinned, K would actually exceed 2.0 for a frame such as that pictured in Figure C-C2.1, because the flexibility of the horizontal member would prevent realization of full fixity at the top of the column. On the other hand, it has been shown (Galambos, 1960) that the restraining influence of foundations, even where these footings are designed only for vertical load, can be very substantial in the case of flat-ended column base details with ordinary anchorage. For this condition, a design K value of 1.5 would generally be conservative in Case f. While in some cases masonry walls provide enough lateral support for building frames to control lateral deflection, light curtain wall construction and wide column spacing can create a situation where only the bending stiffness of the frame provides this support. In this case the effective length factor K for an unbraced length of column L is dependent upon the bending stiffness provided by the other in-plane members entering the joint at each end of the unbraced segment. If the combined stiffness provided by the beams is sufficiently small, relative to that of the unbraced column segments, KL could exceed two or more story heights (Bleich, 1952). Several rational methods are available to estimate the effective length of the columns in an unbraced frame with sufficient accuracy. These range from simple interpolation between the idealized cases shown in Table C-C2.1 to very complex analytical procedures. Once a trial selection of framing members has been made, the use of the alignment chart in Figure C-C2.2 affords a fairly rapid
P
P
Kl
l
Fig. C-C2.1. Column effective length. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 186
FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
[Comm. C
method for determining adequate K values. However, it should be noted that this alignment chart is based upon assumptions of idealized conditions which seldom exist in real structures (Galambos, 1988). These assumptions are as follows: (1) Behavior is purely elastic. (2) All members have constant cross section. (3) All joints are rigid. (4) For braced frames, rotations at opposite ends of beams are equal in magnitude, producing single-curvature bending.
GA 50.0 10.0
K 1.0
5.0 3.0
GA
GB 50.0 10.0 5.0 0.9
2.0
GB 20.0 10.0
100.0 50.0 30.0
5.0
100.0 50.0 30.0
20.0
4.0
20.0
3.0
10.0 9.0 8.0 7.0
3.0 2.0
1.0
1.0
10.0 9.0 8.0 7.0
0.8 0.7
0.8 0.7
5.0
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.7
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.2
K
0.3 0.6
6.0
6.0 5.0
4.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
2.0 1.5
0.2 1.0
0.1
0
4.0
1.0
0.1
0.5
0
1.0
0
SIDESWAY INHIBITED
0
SIDESWAY UNINHIBITED
The subscripts A and B refer to the joints at the two ends of the column section being considered. G is defined as G=
Σ(Ic / Lc) Σ(Ig / Lg)
in which Σ indicates a summation of all members rigidly connected to that joint and lying on the plane in which buckling of the column is being considered. I c is the moment of inertia and Lc the unsupported length of a column section, and I g is the moment of inertia and Lg the unsupported length of a girder or other restraining member. I c and Ig are taken about axes perpendicular to the plane of buckling being considered. For column ends supported by but not rigidly connected to a footing or foundation, G is theoretically infinity, but, unless actually designed as a true friction-free pin, may be taken as “10” for practical designs. If the column end is rigidly attached to a properly designed footing, G may be taken as 1.0. Smaller values may be used if justified by analysis. Fig. C-C2.2. Alignment chart for effective length of columns in continuous frames. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-C2]
FRAME STABILITY
6 - 187
(5) For unbraced frames, rotations at opposite ends of the restraining beams are equal in magnitude, producing reverse-curvature bending. (6) The stiffness parameters L√ P / EI of all columns are equal. (7) Joint restraint is distributed to the column above and below the joint in proportion to I / L of the two columns. (8) All columns buckle simultaneously. (9) No significant axial compression force exists in the girders. Where the actual conditions differ from these assumptions, unrealistic designs may result. There are design procedures available which may be used in the calculation of G for use in Figure C-C2.2 to give results that better reflect the conditions in real structures (Yura, 1971; Disque, 1973; Bjorhovde, 1984; Davison et al., 1988). Leaning columns (sized for gravity loads only, based on an assumed K of 1.0) may be used in unbraced frames provided that the destabilizing effects due to their lack of lateral stiffness from simple connections to the frame (K = ∞) is included in the design of the moment frame columns. A stabilizing column in one direction may be a leaning column in the transverse direction if it is rigidly connected in only one plane. LeMessurier (1977) presented an overall discussion of this problem and recommended a general solution for unbraced frames. In lieu of this and more exact analyses, the following design approximations are suggested. When unbraced moment-resisting frames are the only source of lateral rigidity for a given direction of a story, the upper bound of sidesway stiffness in that direction, measured, in shear force per radian of drift, is ΣPL = ΣHL / ∆oh. This force may be found from a first-order lateral load analysis, without gravity loads, where ΣH is the total story shear. (The calculation of B2 using interstory drift as in LRFD Equation C1-4 also uses the term ΣHL / ∆oh). Since most of the moment-resisting columns in the frame will directly support axial loads, the bending stiffness of the columns will be reduced, lowering the sidesway stiffness ΣPL. An estimate of the reduced sidesway stiffness of the frame may be found by calculating Pe2 for each moment-resisting column, in the direction under consideration, by using the nomograph for sidesway K based on local boundary conditions measured by GA and GB. G is normally assumed as: Ic Lc G= Ig Σ Lg Σ
This definition of G is based on the assumption that girders restraining columns have equal moments (same clockwise direction) at each end determined by an analysis for lateral loads only. When this assumption is violated, a significant overestimate of ΣPe2 may occur. Accurate G values may be found from an examination of girder end moments from such an analysis. The correct Lg should AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 188
FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
[Comm. C
MF be taken as Lg′ = Lg 2 − where MF is the moment at the far end of the girder M N MF under consideration and MN is the moment at the near end. When > 2, Lg′ MN becomes negative which, although real, will result in negative values of G. Negative values of G are beyond the scope of the nomograph but are valid for use in Equation C-C2-2. The reduced total stiffness of the whole story, when each rigidly connected column is loaded with its maximum load Pe2, is ΣPe2. ΣPe2 calculated in this way will always satisfy: .82ΣPL < ΣPe2 < ΣPL Many common framing arrangements include within a story loaded columns designed, in a particular direction, with K = 1. Such columns, often called leaning columns, receive lateral stability from the stiffness of columns with rigid moment-resisting connections. The required axial compressive strength of such leaning columns is called Puo where the subscript implies no shear resistance to lateral loads. The ratio of the loads on all leaning columns in a story to the total of all loads on the story is: ΣPuo = RL ΣPu The ratio of all story loads to the loads on columns providing sidesway is: N=
ΣPu 1 = 1 − RL ΣPu − ΣPuo
If the story stiffness ΣPe2 is calculated from the nomograph K values, the net stiffness available to stabilize the rigid column is: ΣPe2 (1 − RL) =
ΣPe2 N
If there is no redistribution of ΣPe2 / N among the rigid columns, the modified capacity of an individual column is, conservatively: Pe2′ =
Pe2 N
It follows that a modified Ki′ including leaning effects is: Ki′ = √ N × Ki
(C-C2-1)
A more exact value of K′ to account for loss of stiffness to leaning columns can be found from an iterative solution of: π π 2 tan π 2K′ ′ K i = 0 − RL [GA + GB] − GAGB + 36 1 − RL 6 K′ π π tan 2K′ K ′ (C-C2-2) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-C2]
FRAME STABILITY
6 - 189
When RL = 0, this equation reduces to the equation solved by the sidesway uninhibited nomograph. The 1993 LRFD Specification no longer limits K to unity in sidesway frames and redistribution of stiffness between members of a frame may be advantageous. There are several ways of doing this. Based on the assumption that ΣPe2 is constant, regardless of loading distribution, an adjusted distribution of stiffness to the ith column of a story is: 2
π EIi Pui [ΣPe2 ] = 2 Pei′ = ΣPu Ki′ L
(C-C2-3a)
Pei′ < 1.6Pei
(C-C2-3b)
except
or in terms of K directly with E and L2 constant, Ki′ =
√
(C-C2-4a)
√
(C-C2-4b)
ΣPu × Pui
Ii Ii Σ 2 Ki
except Ki′ ≥
5 K 8 i
where Ki′ = effective length factor with story stability effect for ith rigid column Ii = moment of inertia in plane of bending for ith rigid column Ki = effective length for ith rigid-column factor based on alignment chart for unbraced frame Pui = required axial compressive strength for ith rigid column ΣPu = required axial compressive strength of all columns in a story These expressions include consideration of leaning effects but, in addition, allow concentration of lateral stiffness on relatively weak columns. To limit the error involved with the assumption that ΣPe2 is constant and to avoid the possibility of failure of a weak column in the sidesway prevented mode, the modified Pei′ for a member should not exceed 1.6 times the Pei for the member included in the sum ΣPe2. An alternate formulation which is simple to use but may give lower design values than the expressions above when leaning effects are minimal is: 2
π EI Pui [ΣPL ] [.85 + .15RL] = 2i Pei′ = ΣPu Ki′ L except AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(C-C2-5a)
6 - 190
FRAMES AND OTHER STRUCTURES
Pei′ ≤ 1.7PLi where PLi =
[Comm. C
(C-C2-5b)
HiL and Hi is the shear in the ith column included in ΣH. ∆oh
The limits set by Equations C-C2-3b, C-C2-4b, and C-C2-5b have been chosen to avoid unconservative error exceeding five percent in extreme cases. Although Ki′ may be found, it is an unnecessary step since the key parameter λ2c = AFy / Pe ′ is the only one required by Chapter E to find the design capacity φcPn. Design values may be found directly from: AFy
φcPn = φc .658 Pe′ AFy when Pe ′ > φcPn = φc .877Pe ′ when Pe ′ ≤
4 AF 9 y
4 AF 9 y
(C-C2-6a) (C-C2-6b)
Because frames that use partially restrained (PR) connections violate the condition that all joints are rigid, special attention should be paid to calculation of the proper G value (Barakat and Chen, 1991). If roof decks or floor slabs, anchored to shear walls or vertical plane bracing systems, are counted upon to provide lateral support for individual columns in a building frame, due consideration must be given to their stiffness when functioning as horizontal diaphragms (Winter, 1958). Translation of the joints in the plane of a truss is inhibited and, due to end restraint, the effective length of compression members might be assumed to be less than the distance between panel points. However, it is usual practice to take K as equal to 1.0 (Galambos, 1988); if all members of the truss reached their ultimate load capacity simultaneously, the restraints at the ends of the compression members would be greatly reduced.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 191
CHAPTER D TENSION MEMBERS
D1. DESIGN TENSILE STRENGTH Due to strain hardening, a ductile steel bar loaded in axial tension can resist, without fracture, a force greater than the product of its gross area and its coupon yield stress. However, excessive elongation of a tension member due to uncontrolled yielding of its gross area not only marks the limit of its usefulness, but can precipitate failure of the structural system of which it is a part. On the other hand, depending upon the reduction of area and other mechanical properties of the steel, the member can fail by fracture of the net area at a load smaller than required to yield the gross area. Hence, general yielding of the gross area and fracture of the net area both constitute failure limit states. The relative values of φt given for yielding and fracture reflect the same basic difference in factor of safety as between design of members and design of connections in the AISC ASD Specification. The length of the member in the net area is negligible relative to the total length of the member. As a result, the strain hardening condition is quickly reached and yielding of the net area at fastener holes does not constitute a limit state of practical significance. D2. BUILT-UP MEMBERS The slenderness ratio L / r of tension members other than rods, tubes, or straps should preferably not exceed the limiting value of 300. This slenderness limit recommended for tension members is not essential to the structural integrity of such members; it merely assures a degree of stiffness such that undesirable lateral movement (“slapping” or vibration) will be unlikely. See Section B7 and Commentary Section E4. D3. PIN-CONNECTED MEMBERS AND EYEBARS Forged eyebars have generally been replaced by pin-connected plates or eyebars thermally cut from plates. Provisions for the proportioning of eyebars contained in the LRFD Specification are based upon standards evolved from long experience with forged eyebars. Through extensive destructive testing, eyebars have been found to provide balanced designs when they are thermally cut instead of forged. The somewhat more conservative rules for pin-connected members of nonuniform cross section and those not having enlarged “circular” heads are likewise based on the results of experimental research (Johnston, 1939). Somewhat stockier proportions are provided for eyebars and pin-connected members fabricated from steel having a yield stress greater than 70 ksi, in order to eliminate any possibility of their “dishing” under the higher design stress. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 192
CHAPTER E COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS
E1. EFFECTIVE LENGTH AND SLENDERNESS LIMITATIONS 1.
Effective Length The Commentary on Section C2 regarding frame stability and effective length factors applies here. Further analytic methods, formulas, charts, and references for the determination of effective length are provided in Chapter 15 of the SSRC Guide (Galambos, 1988).
2.
Design by Plastic Analysis The limitation on λc is essentially the same as that for l / r in Chapter N of the 1989 AISC Specification—Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design.
E2. DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH FOR FLEXURAL BUCKLING BUCKLING* FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL Equations E2-2 and E2-3 are based on a reasonable conversion of research data into design equations. Conversion of the allowable stress design (ASD) equations which was based on the CRC—Column Research Council—curve (Galambos, 1988) was found to be cumbersome for two reasons. The first was the nature of the ASD variable safety factor. Secondly, the difference in philosophical origins of the two design procedures requires an assumption of a live load-to-dead load ratio (L / D). Since all L / D ratios could not be considered, a value of approximately 1.1 at λ equal to 1.0 was used to calibrate the exponential equation for columns with the lower range of λ against the appropriate ASD provision. The coefficient with the Euler equation was obtained by equating the ASD and LRFD expressions at λ of 1.5. Equations E2-2 and E2-3 are essentially the same curve as column-strength curve 2P of the Structural Stability Research Council which is based on an initial out-of-straightness curve of l / 1,500 (Bjorhovde, 1972 and 1988; Galambos, 1988; Tide, 1985). It should be noted that this set of column equations has a range of reliability (β) values. At low- and high-column slenderness, β values exceeding 3.0 and 3.3 respectively are obtained compared to β of 2.60 at L / D of 1.1. This is considered satisfactory, since the limits of out-of-straightness combined with residual stress have not been clearly established. Furthermore, there has been * For tapered members see Commentary Appendix F3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-E3]
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING
6 - 193
no history of unacceptable behavior of columns designed using the ASD procedure. This includes cases with L / D ratios greater than 1.1. Equations E2-2 and E2-3 can be restated in terms of the more familiar slenderness ratio Kl / r. First, Equation E2-2 is expressed in exponential form, Fcr = [exp( − 0.419λ2c )]Fy
(C-E2-1)
Note that exp(x) is identical to ex. Substitution of λc according to definition of λc in Section E2 gives,
For
Kl ≤ 4.71 r
√
E Fy 2
Fy Kl Fcr = exp − 0.0424 Fy E r
For
(C-E2-2)
F √
Kl > 4.71 r
E
y
Fcr =
0.877π2E
Kl r
2
(C-E2-3)
E3. DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH FOR FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING Torsional buckling of symmetric shapes and flexural-torsional buckling of unsymmetric shapes are failure modes usually not considered in the design of hot-rolled columns. They generally do not govern, or the critical load differs very little from the weak axis planar buckling load. Such buckling loads may, however, control the capacity of symmetric columns made from relatively thin plate elements and unsymmetric columns. Design equations for determining the strength of such columns are given in Appendix E3. Tees that conform to the limits in Table C-E3.1 need not be checked for flexural-torsional buckling. A simpler and more accurate design strength for the special case of tees and double-angles is based on Galambos (1991) wherein the y-axis of symmetry flexural-buckling strength component is determined directly from the column formulas. The separate AISC Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members contains detailed provisions not only for the limit state of compression, but also for tension, shear, flexure, and combined forces. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 194
COLUMNS AND OTHER COMPRESSION MEMBERS
[Comm. E
TABLE C-E3.1 Limiting Proportions for Tees Shape
Ratio of Full Flange Width to Profile Depth
Ratio of Flange Thickness to Web or Stem Thickness
Built-up tees
≥ 0.50
≥ 1.25
Rolled tees
≥ 0.50
≥ 1.10
E4. BUILT-UP MEMBERS Requirements for detailing and design of built-up members, which cannot be stated in terms of calculated stress, are based upon judgment and experience. The longitudinal spacing of connectors connecting components of built-up compression members must be such that the slenderness ratio l / r of individual shapes does not exceed three-fourths of the slenderness ratio of the entire member. Additional requirements are imposed for built-up members consisting of angles. However, these minimum requirements do not necessarily ensure that the effective slenderness ratio of the built-up member is equal to that for the built-up member acting as a single unit. Section E4 gives formulas for modified slenderness ratios that are based on research and take into account the effect of shear deformation in the connectors (Zandonini, 1985). Equation E4-1 for snug-tight intermediate connectors is emperically based on test results (Zandonini, 1985). The new Equation E4-2 is derived from theory and verified by test data. In both cases the end connection must be welded or slip-critical bolted (Aslani and Goel, 1991). The connectors must be designed to resist the shear forces which develop in the buckled member. The shear stresses are highest where the slope of the buckled shape is maximum (Bleich, 1952). Maximum fastener spacing less than that required for strength may be needed to ensure a close fit over the entire faying surface of components in continuous contact. Specific requirements are given for weathering steel members exposed to atmospheric corrosion (Brockenbrough, 1983). The provisions governing the proportioning of perforated cover plates are based upon extensive experimental research (Stang and Jaffe, 1948).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 195
CHAPTER F BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
F1.
DESIGN FOR FLEXURE
1.
Yielding The bending strength of a laterally braced compact section is the plastic moment Mp. If the shape has a large shape factor (ratio of plastic moment to the moment corresponding to the onset of yielding at the extreme fiber), significant inelastic deformation may occur at service load if the section is permitted to reach Mp at factored load. The limit of 1.5My at factored load will control the amount of inelastic deformation for sections with shape factors greater than 1.5. This provision is not intended to limit the plastic moment of a hybrid section with a web yield stress lower than the flange yield stress. Yielding in the web does not result in significant inelastic deformations. In hybrid sections, My = FyfS. Lateral-torsional buckling cannot occur if the moment of inertia about the bending axis is equal to or less than the moment of inertia out of plane. Thus, for shapes bent about the minor axis and shapes with Ix = Iy , such as square or circular shapes, the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling is not applicable and yielding controls if the section is compact.
2.
Lateral-Torsional Buckling
2a.
Doubly Symmetric Shapes and Channels with Lb ≤ Lr The basic relationship between nominal moment Mn and unbraced length Lb is shown in Figure C-F1.1 for a compact section with Cb = 1.0. There are four principal zones defined on the basic curve by Lpd, Lp, and Lr. Equation F1-4 defines the maximum unbraced length Lp to reach Mp with uniform moment. Elastic lateral-torsional buckling will occur when the unbraced length is greater than Lr given by Equation F1-6. Equation F1-2 defines the inelastic lateral-torsional buckling as a straight line between the defined limits Lp and Lr. Buckling strength in the elastic region Lb > Lr is given by Equation F1-14 for I-shaped members. For other moment diagrams, the lateral buckling strength is obtained by multiplying the basic strength by Cb as shown in Figure C-F1.1. The maximum Mn, however, is limited to Mp. Note that Lp given by Equation F1-4 is merely a definition which has physical meaning when Cb = 1.0. For Cb greater than 1.0, larger unbraced lengths are permitted to reach Mp as shown by the curve for Cb > 1.0. For design, this length could be calculated by setting Equation F1-2 equal to Mp and solving this equation for Lb using the desired Cb value. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 196
BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
[Comm. F
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05(M1 / M2) + 0.3(M1 / M2)2 ≤ 2.3
(C-F1-1)
The equation
has been used since 1961 to adjust the flexural-torsional buckling equation for variations in the moment diagram within the unbraced length. This equation is applicable only to moment diagrams that are straight lines between braced points. The equation provides a lower bound fit to the solutions developed by Salvadori (1956) which are shown in Figure C-F1.2. Another equation
Mn
Basic strength × Cb
Mp (F1-2)
Mr
(F1-14)
plastic design Mp
inelastic elastic LTB
Cb = 1.0 (Basic strength)
LTB
Lb
L pd Lp Lr (F1-18) (F1-4) (F1-6)
Fig. C-F1.1. Nominal moment as a function of unbraced length and moment gradient.
Cb
Max Cb — warping significant
3.0
(C-F1-2)
2.5
Min Cb — no warping
2.0
(C-F1-1)
1.5 1.0 0 +1.0
M1 M2
+0.5
0
– 0.5
Fig. C-F1.2. Moment modifier Cb for beams. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
–1.0
Sect. C-F1]
DESIGN FOR FLEXURE
Cb =
1
0.6 − 0.4
M1 M2
6 - 197
≤ 2.5
(C-F1-2)
fits the average value theoretical solutions when the beams are bent in reverse curvature and also provides a reasonable fit to the theory. If the maximum moment within the unbraced segment is equal to or larger than the end moment, Cb = 1.0 is used. The equations above can be easily misinterpreted and misapplied to moment diagrams that are not straight within the unbraced segment. Kirby and Nethercot (1979) presented an equation which applies to various shapes of moment diagrams within the unbraced segment. Their equation has been adjusted slightly to the following Cb =
12.5Mmax 2.5Mmax + 3MA + 4MB + 3MC
(C-F1-3)
This equation gives more accurate solutions for fixed-end beams, and the adjusted equation reduces exactly to Equation C-F1-2 for a straight line moment diagram in single curvature. The new Cb equation is shown in Figure C-F1.3 for straight line moment diagrams. Other moment diagrams along with exact theoretical solutions in the SSRC Guide (Galambos, 1988) show good comparison with the new equation. The absolute value of the three interior quarter-point moments plus the maximum moment, regardless of its location are used in the equation. The maximum moment in the unbraced segment is always used for comparison with the resistance. The length between braces, not the distance to inflection points, and Cb is used in the resistance equation. Cb M
M
2
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05 M 1+ 0.3( M 1) ≤ 2.3
2.5
2
2
2.0
1.5
1.0
12.5M max Cb =
0.5
2.5Mmax + 3MA + 4MB + 3MC
M1 MA MB MC M2 +, ratio shown M1 M2
+1.0
+0.5
0
– 0.5
–1.0
Fig. C-F1.3. Cb for a straight line moment diagram—prismatic beam. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 198
BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
[Comm. F
It is still satisfactory to use the former Cb factor, Equation C-F1-1, for straight line moment diagrams within the unbraced length. The elastic strength of hybrid beams is identical to homogeneous beams. The strength advantage of hybrid sections becomes evident only in the inelastic and plastic slenderness ranges. 2b.
Doubly Symmetric Shapes and Channels with Lb > Lr The equation given in the Specification assumes that the loading is applied along the beam centroidal axis. If the load is placed on the top flange and the flange is not braced, there is a tipping effect that reduces the critical moment; conversely, if the load is suspended from the bottom flange and is not braced, there is a stabilizing effect which increases the critical moment (Galambos, 1988). For unbraced top flange loading, the reduced critical moment may be conservatively approximated by setting the warping buckling factor X2 to zero. An effective length factor of unity is implied in these critical moment equations to represent a worst case pinned-pinned unbraced segment. Including consideration of any end restraint of the adjacent segments on the critical segment can increase its buckling capacity. The effects of beam continuity on lateral-torsional buckling have been studied and a simple and conservative design method, based on the analogy of end-restrained nonsway columns with an effective length factor less than one, has been proposed (Galambos, 1988).
2c.
Tees and Double-Angles The lateral-torsional buckling strength (LTS) of singly symmetric tee beams is given by a fairly complex formula (Galambos, 1988). Equation F1-15 is a simplified formulation based on Kitipornchai and Trahair (1980). See also Ellifritt, et al., 1992. The Cb used for I-shaped beams is unconservative for tee beams with the stem in compression. For such cases Cb = 1.0 is appropriate. When beams are bent in reverse curvature, the portion with the stem in compression may control the LTB resistance even though the moments may be small relative to other portions of the unbraced length with Cb ≈ 1.0. This is because the LTB strength of a tee with the stem in compression may be only about one-fourth of the capacity for the stem in tension. Since the buckling strength is sensitive to the moment diagram, Cb has been conservatively taken as 1.0. In cases where the stem is in tension, connection details should be designed to minimize any end restraining moments which might cause the stem to be in compression.
2d.
Unbraced Length for Plastic Analysis In the AISC ASD Specification, Chapter N, the unbraced length of a beam that permits the attainment of plastic moments, and ensures sufficient rotation capacity to redistribute moments, is given by two formulas which depend on the moment ratio at the ends of the unbraced length. One length is permitted for M1 / M2 < −0.5 (almost uniform moment), and a substantially larger length for M1 / M2 > −0.5. These two equations are replaced by Equation F1-18 to provide a continuous function between unbraced length and end moment ratio so there is no abrupt change for a slight change in moment ratio near −0.5. At M1 / M2 = −0.5 (uniform moment) the maximum unbraced length is almost the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-F2]
DESIGN FOR SHEAR
6 - 199
same as that in the AISC ASD Specification. There is a substantial increase in unbraced length for positive moment ratios (reverse curvature) because the yielding is confined to zones close to the brace points (Yura, et al., 1978). Equation F1-19 is an equation in similar form for solid rectangular bars and symmetric box beams. Equations F1-18 and F1-19 assume that the moment diagram within the unbraced length next to plastic hinge locations is reasonably linear. For nonlinear diagrams between braces, judgment should be used in choosing a representative ratio. Equations F1-18 and F1-19 were developed to provide rotation capacities of at least 3.0, which are sufficient for most applications (Yura, et al., 1978). When inelastic rotations of 7 to 9 are deemed appropriate in areas of high seismicity, as discussed in Commentary Section B5, Equation F1-18 would become: Lpd = F2.
2500ry Fy
(C-F1-3)
DESIGN FOR SHEAR For unstiffened webs kv = 5.0, Fyw , and 234√ kv / Fyw = 523 / √ Fyw . therefore 187√ kv / Fyw = 418 / √ kv / Fyw , the nominal shear strength Vn is based on For webs with h / tw ≤ 187√ shear yielding of the web, Equation F2-1 and Equation A-F2-1. This h / tw limit was determined by setting the critical stress causing shear buckling Fcr equal to the yield stress of the web Fyw in Equation 35 of Cooper et al. (1978) and kv / Fyw , the web shear strength Timoshenko and Gere (1961). When h / tw > 187√ is based on buckling. Basler (1961) suggested taking the proportional limit as 80 percent of the yield stress of the web. This corresponds to h / tw = (187/0.8) kv / Fyw ), the web strength is determined (√ kv / Fyw ). Thus, when h / tw > 234(√ from the elastic buckling stress given by Equation 6 of Cooper et al., (1978) and Timoshenko and Gere (1961): Fcr =
π2Ekv 12(1 − v2)(h / tw)2
(C-F2-1)
The nominal shear strength, given by Equation F2-3 and A-F2-3, was obtained by multiplying Fcr by the web area and using E = 29,000 ksi and v = 0.3. A straight line transition, Equation F2-2 and AF2-2, is used between the limits kv / Fyw ). 187(√ kv / Fyw ) and 234(√ The shear strength of flexural members follows the approach used in the AISC ASD Specification, except for two simplifications. First, the expression for the plate buckling coefficient kv has been simplified; it corresponds to that given by AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges (1989). The earlier expression for kv was a curve fit to the exact expression; the new expression is just as accurate. Second, the alternate method (tension field action) for web shear strength is placed in Appendix G because it was desired that only one method appear in the main body of the Specification with alternate methods given in the Appendix. When designing plate girders, thicker unstiffened webs will frequently be less costly than lighter stiffened web designs because of the additional AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 200
BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
[Comm. F
fabrication. If a stiffened girder design has economic advantages, the tension field method in Appendix G will require fewer stiffeners. The equations in this section were established assuming monotonically increasing loads. If a flexural member is subjected to load reversals causing cyclic yielding over large portions of a web, such as may occur during a major earthquake, special design considerations may apply (Popov, 1980). F4.
BEAMS AND GIRDERS WITH WEB OPENINGS Web openings in structural floor members may be necessary to accommodate various mechanical, electrical, and other systems. Strength limit states, including local buckling of the compression flange, web, and tee-shaped compression zone above or below the opening, lateral buckling and moment-shear interaction, or serviceability may control the design of a flexural member with web openings. The location, size, and number of openings are important and empirical limits for them have been identified. One general procedure for assessing these effects and the design of any needed reinforcement for both steel and composite beams is given in Darwin (1990) and in ASCE (1992, 1992a).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 201
CHAPTER H MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
H1. SYMMETRIC MEMBERS SUBJECT TO BENDING AND AXIAL FORCE Equations H1-1a and H1-1b are simplifications and clarifications of similar equations used in the AISC ASD Specification since 1961. Previously, both equations had to be checked. In the new formulation the applicable equation is governed by the value of the first term, Pu / φPn. For bending about one axis only, the equations have the form shown in Figure C-H1.1. The first term Pu / φPn has the same significance as the axial load term fa / Fa in Equations H1-1 of the AISC ASD Specification. This means that for members in compression Pn must be based on the largest effective slenderness ratio Kl / r. In the development of Equations H1-1a and H1-1b, a number of alternative formulations were compared to the exact inelastic solutions of 82 sidesway cases reported in Kanchanalai (1977). In particular, the possibility of using Kl / r as the actual column length (K = 1) in determining Pn, combined with an elastic second order moment Mu, was studied. In those cases where the true Pn based on Kl / r, with K = 1.0, was in the inelastic range, the errors proved to be unacceptably large without the additional check that Pu ≤ φcPn, Pn being based on effective length. Although deviations from exact solutions were reduced, they still remained high. In summary, it is not possible to formulate a safe general interaction equation φPn
Pu
8 Mu Pu φPn + 9 φb Mn = 1 0.2 φPn
1 2
( φPP ) + φ MM = 1 u
u
n
b
n
Mu
0.9 φb Mn
φb Mn
Fig. C-H1.1. Beam-column interaction equations. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 202
MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
[Comm. H
for compression without considering effective length directly (or indirectly by a second equation). Therefore, the requirement that the nominal compressive strength Pn be based on the effective length KL in the general equation is continued in the LRFD Specification as it has been in the AISC ASD Specification since 1961. It is not intended that these provisions be applicable to limit nonlinear secondary flexure that might be encountered in large amplitude earthquake stability design (ATC, 1978). The defined term Mu is the maximum moment in a member. In the calculation of this moment, inclusion of beneficial second order effects of tension is optional. But consideration of detrimental second order effects of axial compression and translation of gravity loads is required. Provisions for calculation of these effects are given in Chapter C. The interaction equations in Appendix H3 have been recommended for biaxially loaded H and wide flange shapes in Galambos (1988) and Springfield (1975). These equations which can be used only in braced frames represent a considerable liberalization over the provisions given in Section H1; it is, therefore, also necessary to check yielding under service loads, using the appropriate load and resistance factors for the serviceability limit state in Equation H1-1a or H1-1b with Mux = SxFy and Muy = SyFy. Appendix H3 also provides interaction equations for rectangular box-shaped beam-columns. These equations are taken from Zhou and Chen (1985). H2. UNSYMMETRIC MEMBERS AND MEMBERS UNDER TORSION AND COMBINED TORSION, FLEXURE, SHEAR, AND/OR AXIAL FORCE This section deals with types of cross sections and loadings not covered in Section H1, especially where torsion is a consideration. For such cases it is recommended to perform an elastic analysis based on the theoretical numerical methods available from the literature for the determination of the maximum normal and shear stresses, or for the elastic buckling stresses. In the buckling calculations an equivalent slenderness parameter is determined for use in Equation E2-2 or E2-3, as follows:
λe = √ Fy / Fe where Fe is the elastic buckling stress determined from a stability analysis. This procedure is similar to that of Appendix E3. For the analysis of members with open sections under torsion refer to AISC (1983).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 203
CHAPTER I COMPOSITE MEMBERS
I1.
DESIGN ASSUMPTIONS Force Determination. Loads applied to an unshored beam before the concrete has hardened are resisted by the steel section alone, and only loads applied after the concrete has hardened are considered as resisted by the composite section. It is usually assumed for design purposes that concrete has hardened when it attains 75 percent of its design strength. In beams properly shored during construction, all loads may be assumed as resisted by the composite cross section. Loads applied to a continuous composite beam with shear connectors throughout its length, after the slab is cracked in the negative moment region, are resisted in that region by the steel section and by properly anchored longitudinal slab reinforcement. For purposes of plastic analysis all loads are considered resisted by the composite cross section, since a fully plastic strength is reached only after considerable yielding at the locations of plastic hinges. Elastic Analysis. The use of constant stiffness in elastic analyses of continuous beams is analogous to the practice in reinforced concrete design. Plastic Analysis. For composite beams with shear connectors, plastic analysis may be used only when the steel section in the positive moment region has a Fyf , and when the steel section in the negative compact web, i.e., h / tw ≤ 640√ moment region is compact, as required for steel beams alone. No compactness limitations are placed on encased beams, but plastic analysis is permitted only if the direct contribution of concrete to the strength of sections is neglected; the concrete is relied upon only to prevent buckling. Plastic Stress Distribution for Positive Moment. Plastic stress distributions are described in Commentary Section I3, and a discussion of the composite participation of slab reinforcement is presented. Plastic Stress Distribution for Negative Moment. Plastic stress distributions are described in Commentary Section I3. Elastic Stress Distribution. The strain distribution at any cross section of a composite beam is related to slip between the structural steel and concrete elements. Prior to slip, strain in both steel and concrete is proportional to the distance from the neutral axis for the elastic transformed section. After slip, the strain distribution is discontinuous, with a jump at the top of the steel shape. The strains in steel and concrete are proportional to distances from separate neutral axes, one for steel and the other for concrete. Fully Composite Beam. Either tensile yield strength of the steel section or the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 204
COMPOSITE MEMBERS
[Comm. I
compressive stress of the concrete slab governs the maximum flexural strength of a fully composite beam subjected to a positive moment. The tensile yield strength of the longitudinal reinforcing bars in the slab governs the maximum flexural strength of a fully composite beam subjected to a negative moment. When shear connectors are provided in sufficient numbers to fully develop this maximum flexural strength, any slip that occurs prior to yielding is minor and has negligible influence both on stresses and stiffness. Partially Composite Beam. The effects of slip on elastic properties of a partially composite beam can be significant and should be accounted for in calculations of deflections and stresses at service loads. Approximate elastic properties of partially composite beams are given in Commentary Section I3. For simplified design methods, see Hansell, et al. (1978). Concrete-Encased Beam. When the dimensions of a concrete slab supported on steel beams are such that the slab can effectively serve as the flange of a composite T-beam, and the concrete and steel are adequately tied together so as to act as a unit, the beam can be proportioned on the assumption of composite action. Two cases are recognized: fully encased steel beams, which depend upon natural bond for interaction with the concrete, and those with mechanical anchorage to the slab (shear connectors), which do not have to be encased. I2.
COMPRESSION MEMBERS
1.
Limitations (a) The lower limit of four percent on the cross-sectional area of structural steel differentiates between composite and reinforced concrete columns. If the area is less than four percent, a column with a structural steel core should be designed as a reinforced concrete column. (b) The specified minimum quantity of transverse and longitudinal reinforcement in the encasement should be adequate to prevent severe spalling of the surface concrete during fires. (c) Very little of the supporting test data involved concrete strengths in excess of 6 ksi, even though the cylinder strength for one group of four columns was 9.6 ksi. Normal weight concrete is believed to have been used in all tests. Thus, the upper limit of concrete strength is specified as 8 ksi for normal weight concrete. A lower limit of 3 ksi is specified for normal weight concrete and 4 ksi for lightweight concrete to encourage the use of good quality, yet readily available, grades of structural concrete. (d) Encased steel shapes and longitudinal reinforcing bars are restrained from buckling as long as the concrete remains sound. A limit strain of 0.0018, at which unconfined concrete remains unspalled and stable, serves analytically to define a failure condition for composite cross sections under uniform axial strain. The limit strain of 0.0018 corresponds approximately to 55 ksi. (e) The specified minimum wall thicknesses are identical to those in the 1989 ACI Building Code (1989). The purpose of this provision is to prevent buckling of the steel pipe or tubing before yielding. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-I3]
2.
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
6 - 205
Design Strength The procedure adopted for the design of axially loaded composite columns is described in detail in Galambos and Chapuis (1980). It is based on the equation for the strength of a short column derived in Galambos and Chapuis (1980), and the same reductions for slenderness as those specified for steel columns in Section E2. The design follows the same path as the design of steel columns, except that the yield stress of structural steel, the modulus of elasticity of steel, and the radius of gyration of the steel section, are modified to account for the effect of concrete and longitudinal reinforcing bars. A detailed explanation of the origin of these modifications may be found in SSRC Task Group 20 (1979). Galambos and Chapuis (1980) includes comparisons of the design procedure with 48 tests of axially loaded stub columns, 96 tests of concrete-filled pipes or tubing, and 26 tests of concrete-encased steel shapes. The mean ratio of the test failure loads to the predicted strengths was 1.18 for all 170 tests, and the corresponding coefficient of variation was 0.19.
3.
Columns with Multiple Steel Shapes This limitation is based on Australian research reported in Bridge and Roderick (1978), which demonstrated that after hardening of concrete the composite column will respond to loading as a unit even without lacing, tie plates, or batten plates connecting the individual steel sections.
4.
Load Transfer To avoid overstressing either the structural steel section or the concrete at connections, a transfer of load to concrete by direct bearing is required. When a supporting concrete area is wider on all sides than the loaded area, the maximum design strength of concrete is specified by ACI (1989) as 1.7φB fc′AB where φB = 0.7 is the strength reduction factor in bearing on concrete and AB is the loaded area. Because the AISC LRFD Specification is based on the lower ASCE 7 load factors (ASCE, 1988), φB = 0.60 in the AISC LRFD Specification. The portion of the design load of an axially loaded column φPn resisted by the concrete may be expressed as (c2 fc′Ac / AsFmy)φBPn. Accordingly, AB ≥
I3.
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
1.
Effective Width
φB c2 Ac Pn c2 Ac Pn = φB 1.7 As Fmy 1.7 As Fmy
(C-I2-1)
LRFD provisions for effective width omit any limit based on slab thickness, in accordance with both theoretical and experimental studies, as well as current composite beam codes in other countries (ASCE, 1979). The same effective width rules apply to composite beams with a slab on either one side or both sides of the beam. To simplify design, effective width is based on the full span, center-to-center of supports, for both simple and continuous beams. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 206
2.
COMPOSITE MEMBERS
[Comm. I
Strength of Beams with Shear Connectors This section applies to simple and continuous composite beams with shear connectors, constructed with or without temporary shores. Positive Flexural Design Strength. Flexural strength of a composite beam in the positive moment region may be limited by the plastic strength of the steel section, the concrete slab, or shear connectors. In addition, web buckling may limit flexural strength if the web is slender and a significantly large portion of the web is in compression. According to Table B5.1, local web buckling does not reduce the plastic strength of a bare steel beam if the beam depth-to-web thickness ratio is not larger than Fy . In the absence of web buckling research on composite beams, the 640 / √ same ratio is conservatively applied to composite beams. Furthermore, for more slender webs, the LRFD Specification conservatively adopts first yield as the flexural strength limit. In this case, stresses on the steel section from permanent loads applied to unshored beams before the concrete has hardened must be superimposed on stresses on the composite section from loads applied to the beams after hardening of concrete. In this superposition, all permanent loads should be multiplied by the dead load factor and all live loads should be multiplied by the live load factor. For shored beams, all loads may be assumed as resisted by the composite section. When first yield is the flexural strength limit, the elastic transformed section is used to calculate stresses on the composite section. The modular ratio n = E / Ec used to determine the transformed section depends on the specified unit weight and strength of concrete. Note that this procedure for compact beams differs from the requirements of Section I2 of the 1989 AISC ASD Specification. Plastic Stress Distribution for Positive Moment. When flexural strength is determined from the plastic stress distribution shown in Figure C-I3.1, compression force C in the concrete slab is the smallest of: C = AswFyw + 2AsfFyf
(C-I3-1)
C = 0.85fc′Ac
(C-I3-2)
C = ΣQn
(C-I3-3)
For a non-hybrid steel section, Equation C-I3-1 becomes C = AsFy where fc′ = specified compressive strength of concrete, ksi Ac = area of concrete slab within effective width, in.2 As = area of steel cross section, in.2 Asw = area of steel web, in.2 Asf = area of steel flange, in.2 Fy = minimum specified yield stress of steel, ksi Fyw = minimum specified yield stress of web steel, ksi Fyf = minimum specified yield stress of flange steel, ksi ΣQn = sum of nominal strengths of shear connectors between the point of AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-I3]
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
6 - 207
maximum positive moment and the point of zero moment to either side, kips Longitudinal slab reinforcement makes a negligible contribution to the compression force, except when Equation C-I3-2 governs. In this case, the area of longitudinal reinforcement within the effective width of the concrete slab times the yield stress of the reinforcement may be added in determining C. The depth of the compression block is a=
C 0.85fc′b
(C-I3-4)
where b = effective width of concrete slab, in. A fully composite beam corresponds to the case of C governed by the yield strength of the steel beam or the compressive strength of the concrete slab, as in Equation C-I3-1 or C-I3-2. The number and strength of shear connectors govern C for a partially composite beam as in Equation C-I3-3. The plastic stress distribution may have the plastic neutral axis (PNA) in the web, in the top flange of the steel section or in the slab, depending on the value of C. The nominal plastic moment resistance of a composite section in positive bending is given by the following equation and Figure C-I3.1: Mn = C(d1 + d2) + Py (d3 − d2)
(C-I3-5)
where Py = tensile strength of the steel section; for a non-hybrid steel section Py = AsFy , kips d1 = distance from the centroid of the compression force C in concrete to the top of the steel section, in. d2 = distance from the centroid of the compression force in the steel section to the top of the steel section, in. For the case of no compression in the steel section d2 = 0.
0.85f c′ a d3
C
d1
Fy
d2
(Py – C) 2
(Py + C) 2 Fy
Fig. C-I3.1. Plastic stress distribution for positive moment in composite beams.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 208
COMPOSITE MEMBERS
[Comm. I
d3 = distance from Py to the top of the steel section, in. Equation C-I3-5 is generally applicable including both non-hybrid and hybrid steel sections symmetrical about one or two axes. Approximate Elastic Properties of Partially Composite Beams. Elastic calculations for stress and deflection of partially composite beams should include the effects of slip. The effective moment of inertia Ieff for a partially composite beam is approximated by
(ΣQn / Cf) (Itr − Is) Ieff = Is + √
(C-I3-6)
where = moment of inertia for the structural steel section, in.4 = moment of inertia for the fully composite uncracked transformed section, in.4 ΣQn = strength of shear connectors between the point of maximum positive moment and the point of zero moment to either side, kips Cf = compression force in concrete slab for fully composite beam; smaller of Equations C-I3-1 and C-I3-2, kips
Is Itr
The effective section modulus Seff, referred to the tension flange of the steel section for a partially composite beam, is approximated by
(ΣQn / Cf) (Str − Ss) Seff = Ss + √
(C-I3-7)
where Ss = section modulus for the structural steel section, referred to the tension flange, in.3 Str = section modulus for the fully composite uncracked transformed section, referred to the tension flange of the steel section, in.3 Equations C-I3-6 and C-I3-7 should not be used for ratios ΣQn / Cf less than 0.25. This restriction is to prevent excessive slip, as well as substantial loss in beam stiffness. Studies indicate that Equations C-I3-6 and C-I3-7 adequately reflect the reduction in beam stiffness and strength, respectively, when fewer connectors are used than required for full composite action (Grant et al., 1977). Negative Flexural Design Strength. The flexural strength in the negative moment region is the strength of the steel beam alone or the plastic strength of the composite section made up of the longitudinal slab reinforcement and the steel section. Plastic Stress Distribution for Negative Moment. When an adequately braced compact steel section and adequately developed longitudinal reinforcing bars act compositely in the negative moment region, the nominal flexural strength is determined from the plastic stress distributions as shown in Figure C-I3.2. The tensile force T in the reinforcing bars is the smaller of: T = ArFyr AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(C-I3-8)
Sect. C-I3]
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
6 - 209
T = ΣQn
(C-I3-9)
where Ar = area of properly developed slab reinforcement parallel to the steel beam and within the effective width of the slab, in.2 Fyr = specified yield stress of the slab reinforcement, ksi ΣQn = sum of the nominal strengths of shear connectors between the point of maximum negative moment and the point of zero moment to either side, kips A third theoretical limit on T is the product of the area and yield stress of the steel section. However, this limit is redundant in view of practical limitations on slab reinforcement. The nominal plastic moment resistance of a composite section in negative bending is given by the following equation: Mn = T (d1 + d2) + Pyc (d3 − d2)
(C-I3-10)
where Pyc = the compressive strength of the steel section; for a non-hybrid section Pyc = AsFy , kips d1 = distance from the centroid of the longitudinal slab reinforcement to the top of the steel section, in. d2 = distance from the centroid of the tension force in the steel section to the top of the steel section, in. d3 = distance from Pyc to the top of the steel section, in. Transverse Reinforcement for the Slab. Where experience has shown that longitudinal cracking detrimental to serviceability is likely to occur, the slab should be reinforced in the direction transverse to the supporting steel section. It is recommended that the area of such reinforcement should be at least 0.002 times the concrete area in the longitudinal direction of the beam and should be uniformly distributed. 3.
Strength of Concrete-Encased Beams Tests of concrete-encased beams demonstrated that (1) the encasement drastically reduces the possibility of lateral-torsional instability and prevents local buckling of the encased steel, (2) the restrictions imposed on the encasement
d3
(Pyc – T) 2
T d2
d1 Fy (Pyc + T) 2 Fy
Fig. C-I3.2. Plastic stress distribution for negative moment. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 210
COMPOSITE MEMBERS
[Comm. I
practically prevent bond failure prior to first yielding of the steel section, and (3) bond failure does not necessarily limit the moment capacity of an encased steel beam (ASCE, 1979). Accordingly, the LRFD Specification permits two alternate design methods: one based on the first yield in the tension flange of the composite section and the other based on the plastic moment capacity of the steel beam alone. No limitations are placed on the slenderness of either the composite beam or the elements of the steel section, since the encasement effectively inhibits both local and lateral buckling. In the method based on first yield, stresses on the steel section from permanent loads applied to unshored beams before the concrete has hardened must be superimposed on stresses on the composite section from loads applied to the beams after hardening of the concrete. In this superposition, all permanent loads should be multiplied by the dead load factor and all live loads should be multiplied by the live load factor. For shored beams, all loads may be assumed as resisted by the composite section. Complete interaction (no slip) between the concrete and steel is assumed. The contribution of concrete to the strength of the composite section is ordinarily larger in positive moment regions than in negative moment regions. Accordingly, design based on the composite section is more advantageous in the regions of positive moments. 4.
Strength During Construction When temporary shores are not used during construction, the steel beam alone must resist all loads applied before the concrete has hardened enough to provide composite action. Unshored beam deflection caused by wet concrete tends to increase slab thickness and dead load. For longer spans this may lead to instability analogous to roof ponding. An excessive increase of slab thickness may be avoided by beam camber. When forms are not attached to the top flange, lateral bracing of the steel beam during construction may not be continuous and the unbraced length may control flexural strength, as defined in Section F1. The LRFD Specification does not include special requirements for a margin against yield during construction. According to Section F1, maximum factored moment during construction is 0.90Fy Z where Fy Z is the plastic moment (0.90Fy Z ≈ 0.90 × 1.1Fy S). This is equivalent to approximately the yield moment, Fy S. Hence, required flexural strength during construction prevents moment in excess of the yield moment. Load factors for construction loads should be determined for individual projects according to local conditions, with the factors listed in Section A4 as a guide. Once the concrete has hardened, slab weight becomes a permanent dead load and the dead load factor applies to any load combinations.
5.
Formed Steel Deck Figure C-I3.3 is a graphic presentation of the terminology used in Section I3.5. When studs are used on beams with formed steel deck, they may be welded directly through the deck or through prepunched or cut-in-place holes in the deck. The usual procedure is to install studs by welding directly through the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-I3]
FLEXURAL MEMBERS
6 - 211
deck; however, when the deck thickness is greater than 16 gage for single thickness, or 18 gage for each sheet of double thickness, or when the total thickness of galvanized coating is greater than 1.25 ounces/sq. ft, special precautions and procedures recommended by the stud manufacturer should be followed. The design rules for composite construction with formed steel deck are based upon a study (Grant, et al., 1977) of the then available test results. The limiting parameters listed in Section I3.5 were established to keep composite construction with formed steel deck within the available research data. Seventeen full size composite beams with concrete slab on formed steel deck
2 ″min. hr ≤ 3 ″
Hs wr
11/2 ″min.
2 ″min.
2 ″min. hr ≤ 3 ″
Hs wr
11/2 ″min.
2 ″min.
2 ″min. hr ≤ 3 ″
Hs wr
11/2 ″min.
2 ″min. 11/2 ″min.
Hs wr 2 ″min.
wr 2 ″min.
Fig. C-I3.3. Steel deck limits. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2 ″min. hr ≤ 3 ″
6 - 212
COMPOSITE MEMBERS
[Comm. I
were tested at Lehigh University and the results supplemented by the results of 58 tests performed elsewhere. The range of stud and steel deck dimensions encompassed by the 75 tests were limited to: (1) Stud dimensions: 3⁄4-in. dia. × 3.00 to 7.00 in. (2) Rib width: 1.94 in. to 7.25 in. (3) Rib height: 0.88 in. to 3.00 in. (4) Ratio wr / hr: 1.30 to 3.33 (5) Ratio Hs / hr: 1.50 to 3.41 (6) Number of studs in any one rib: 1, 2, or 3 The strength of stud connectors installed in the ribs of concrete slabs on formed steel deck with the ribs oriented perpendicular to the steel beam is reasonably estimated by the strength of stud connectors in flat soffit composite slabs multiplied by values computed from Equation I3-1. For the case where ribs run parallel to the beam, limited testing (Grant et al., 1977) has shown that shear connection is not significantly affected by the ribs. However, for narrow ribs, where the ratio wr / hr is less than 1.5, a shear stud reduction factor, Equation I3-2, has been employed in view of lack of test data. The Lehigh study (Grant et al., 1977) also indicated that Equation C-I3-7 for effective section modulus and Equation C-I3-6 for effective moment of inertia were valid for composite construction with formed steel deck. Based on the Lehigh test data (Grant, et al., 1977), the maximum spacing of steel deck anchorage to resist uplift was increased from 16 to 18 inches in order to accommodate current production profiles. When metal deck includes units for carrying electrical wiring, crossover headers are commonly installed over the cellular deck perpendicular to the ribs. They create trenches which completely or partially replace sections of the concrete slab above the deck. These trenches, running parallel to or transverse to a composite beam, may reduce the effectiveness of the concrete flange. Without special provisions to replace the concrete displaced by the trench, the trench should be considered as a complete structural discontinuity in the concrete flange. When trenches are parallel to the composite beam, the effective flange width should be determined from the known position of the trench. Trenches oriented transverse to composite beams should, if possible, be located in areas of low bending moment and the full required number of studs should be placed between the trench and the point of maximum positive moment. Where the trench cannot be located in an area of low moment, the beam should be designed as non-composite. 6.
Design Shear Strength A conservative approach to vertical shear provisions for composite beams is adopted by assigning all shear to the steel section web. This neglects any concrete slab contribution and serves to simplify the design. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-I5]
I4.
SHEAR CONNECTORS
6 - 213
COMBINED COMPRESSION AND FLEXURE The procedure adopted for the design of beam-columns is described and supported by comparisons with test data in Galambos and Chapuis (1980). The basic approach is identical to that specified for steel columns in Section H1. The nominal axial strength of a beam-column is obtained from Section I2.2, while the nominal flexural strength is determined from the plastic stress distribution on the composite section. An approximate formula for this plastic moment resistance of a composite column is given in Galambos and Chapuis (1980).
h2 AwFy − AwFy 2 1.7fc′h1
Mn = Mp = ZFy + 1⁄3(h2 − 2cr) ArFyr +
(C-I4-1)
where Aw = web area of encased steel shape; for concrete-filled tubes, Aw = 0, in.2 Z = plastic section modulus of the steel section, in.3 cr = average of distance from compression face to longitudinal reinforcement in that face and distance from tension face to longitudinal reinforcement in that face, in. h1 = width of composite cross section perpendicular to the plane of bending, in. h2 = width of composite cross section parallel to the plane of bending, in. The supporting comparisons with beam-column tests included 48 concretefilled pipes or tubing and 44 concrete-encased steel shapes (Galambos and Chapuis, 1980). The overall mean test-to-prediction ratio was 1.23 and the coefficient of variation 0.21. The last paragraph in Section I4 provides a transition from beam-columns to beams. It involves bond between the steel section and concrete. Section I3 for beams requires either shear connectors or full, properly reinforced encasement of the steel section. Furthermore, even with full encasement, it is assumed that bond is capable of developing only the moment at first yielding in the steel of the composite section. No test data are available on the loss of bond in composite beam-columns. However, consideration of tensile cracking of concrete suggests Pu / φcPn = 0.3 as a conservative limit. It is assumed that when Pu / φcPn is less than 0.3, the nominal flexural strength is reduced below that indicated by plastic stress distribution on the composite cross section unless the transfer of shear from the concrete to the steel is provided for by shear connectors. I5.
SHEAR CONNECTORS
1.
Materials Tests (Ollgaard et al., 1971) have shown that fully composite beams with concrete meeting the requirements of Part 3, Chapter 4, “Concrete Quality,” of ACI (1989), made with ASTM C33 or rotary-kiln produced C330 aggregates, develop full flexural capacity. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 214
2.
COMPOSITE MEMBERS
[Comm. I
Horizontal Shear Force Composite beams in which the longitudinal spacing of shear connectors was varied according to the intensity of statical shear, and duplicate beams in which the connectors were uniformly spaced, exhibited the same ultimate strength and the same amount of deflection at normal working loads. Only a slight deformation in the concrete and the more heavily stressed connectors is needed to redistribute the horizontal shear to other less heavily stressed connectors. The important consideration is that the total number of connectors be sufficient to develop the shear Vh on either side of the point of maximum moment. The provisions of the LRFD Specification are based upon this concept of composite action. In computing the design flexural strength at points of maximum negative bending, reinforcement parallel to the steel beam within the effective width of the slab may be included, provided such reinforcement is properly anchored beyond the region of negative moment. However, enough shear connectors are required to transfer, from the slab to the steel beam, the ultimate tensile force in the reinforcement.
3.
Strength of Stud Shear Connectors Studies have defined stud shear connector strength in terms of normal weight and lightweight aggregate concretes as a function of both concrete modulus of elasticity and concrete strength as given by Equation I5-1. Equation I5-1, obtained from Ollgaard, et al. (1971), corresponds to Tables I4.1 and I4.2 in Section I4 of the 1989 AISC ASD Specification. Note that an upper bound on stud shear strength is the product of the cross-sectional area of the stud times its ultimate tensile strength. The LRFD Specification does not specify a resistance factor for shear connector strength. The resistance factor for the flexural strength of a composite beam accounts for all sources of variability, including those associated with the shear connectors.
4.
Strength of Channel Shear Connectors Equation I5-2 is a modified form of the formula for the strength of channel connectors developed by Slutter and Driscoll (1965). The modification has extended its use to lightweight concrete.
6.
Shear Connector Placement and Spacing Uniform spacing of shear connectors is permitted except in the presence of heavy concentrated loads. When stud shear connectors are installed on beams with formed steel deck, concrete cover at the sides of studs adjacent to sides of steel ribs is not critical. Tests have shown that studs installed as close as is permitted to accomplish welding of studs does not reduce the composite beam capacity. Studs not located directly over the web of a beam tend to tear out of a thin flange before attaining full shear-resisting capacity. To guard against this contingency, the size of a stud not located over the beam web is limited to 21⁄2 times the flange thickness (Goble, 1968). AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-I6]
SPECIAL CASES
6 - 215
The minimum spacing of connectors along the length of the beam, in both flat soffit concrete slabs and in formed steel deck with ribs parallel to the beam, is six diameters; this spacing reflects development of shear planes in the concrete slab (Ollgaard et al., 1971). Since most test data are based on the minimum transverse spacing of four diameters, this transverse spacing was set as the minimum permitted. If the steel beam flange is narrow, this spacing requirement may be achieved by staggering the studs with a minimum transverse spacing of three diameters between the staggered row of studs. The reduction in connector Nr , capacity in the ribs of formed steel decks is provided by the factor 0.85 / √ which accounts for the reduced capacity of multiple connectors, including the effect of spacing. When deck ribs are parallel to the beam and the design requires more studs than can be placed in the rib, the deck may be split so that adequate spacing is available for stud installation. Figure C-I5.1 shows possible connector arrangements. I6.
SPECIAL CASES Tests are required for construction that falls outside the limits given in the Specification. Different types of shear connectors may require different spacing and other detailing than stud and channel connectors.
4d d 6d
6d
3d
4d
Fig. C-I5.1. Shear connector arrangements.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 216
CHAPTER J CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
J1.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
5.
Splices in Heavy Sections Solidified but still-hot weld metal contracts significantly as it cools to ambient temperature. Shrinkage of large welds between elements which are not free to move to accommodate the shrinkage, causes strains in the material adjacent to the weld that can exceed the yield point strain. In thick material, the weld shrinkage is restrained in the thickness direction as well as in the width and length directions, causing triaxial stresses to develop that may inhibit the ability of ductile steel to deform in a ductile manner. Under these conditions, the possibility of brittle fracture increases. When splicing ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 rolled sections or heavy welded built-up members, the potentially harmful weld shrinkage strains can be avoided by using bolted splices or fillet-welded lap splices or splices that combine a welded and bolted detail (see Figure C-J1.1). Details and techniques that perform well for materials of modest thickness usually must be changed or supplemented by more demanding requirements when welding thick material. Also, the provisions of the Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1, are minimum requirements that apply to most structural welding situations; however, when designing and fabricating welded splices of ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and similar built-up cross sections, special consideration must be given to all aspects of the welded splice detail. • Notch-toughness requirements should be specified for tension members. See Commentary A3. • Generously sized weld access holes, Figure C-J1.2, are required to provide increased relief from concentrated weld shrinkage strains, to avoid close juncture of welds in orthogonal directions, and to provide adequate clearance for the exercise of high quality workmanship in hole preparation, welding, and ease of inspection. • Preheating for thermal cutting is required to minimize the formation of a hard surface layer. • Grinding to bright metal and inspection using magnetic particle or dye-penetrant methods is required to remove the hard surface layer and to assure smooth transitions free of notches or cracks. In addition to tension splices of truss chord members and tension flanges of flexural members, other joints fabricated of heavy sections subject to tension should be given special consideration during design and fabrication. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-J1]
8.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
6 - 217
Placement of Welds and Bolts Slight eccentricities between the gravity axis of single and double angle members and the center of gravity of connecting rivets or bolts have long been ignored as having negligible effect on the static strength of such members. Tests (Gibson and Wake, 1942) have shown that similar practice is warranted in the case of welded members in statically loaded structures. However, the fatigue life of eccentrically loaded welded angles has been shown to be very short (Kloppel and Seeger, 1964). Notches at the roots of fillet welds are harmful when alternating tensile stresses are normal to the axis of the weld, as could occur due to bending when axial cyclic loading is applied to angles with end welds not balanced about the neutral axis. Accordingly, balanced welds are indicated when such members are subjected to cyclic loading (see Figure C-J1.3).
9.
Bolts in Combination with Welds Welds will not share the load equally with mechanical fasteners in bearing-type connections. Before ultimate loading occurs, the fastener will slip and the weld will carry an indeterminately larger share of the load. Accordingly, the sharing of load between welds and A307 bolts or high-strength bolts in a bearing-type connection is not recommended. For similar reasons, A307 bolts and rivets should not be assumed to share loads in a single group of fasteners. For high-strength bolts in slip-critical connections to share the load with welds it is advisable to fully tension the bolts before the weld is made. If the weld is placed first, angular distortion from the heat of the weld might prevent the faying action required for development of the slip-critical force. When the bolts are fully tensioned before the weld is made, the slip-critical bolts and the weld may be assumed to share the load on a common shear plane (Kulak, et al., 1987). The heat of welding near bolts will not alter the mechanical properties of the bolts.
2 or 3 in.
In making alterations to existing structures, it is assumed that whatever slip is
(a) Shear plate welded to web
(b) Shear plate welded to flange tips
(c) Bolted splice plates
Fig. C-J1.1. Alternative splices that minimize weld restraint tensile stresses. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 218
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Comm. J
likely to occur in high-strength bolted bearing-type connections or riveted connections will have already taken place. Hence, in such cases the use of welding to resist all stresses, other than those produced by existing dead load present at the time of making the alteration, is permitted. It should be noted that combinations of fasteners as defined herein does not refer to connections such as shear plates for beam-to-column connections which are welded to the column and bolted to the beam flange or web (Kulak, et al., 1987) and other comparable connections.
Backing if used 5
Backing if used 5
≥1.5t w
Radius precut by drill or hole saw D ≥ ¾ in.
R (see note 2)
≥ tw ≥ ¾ in.
≥1.5t w
R (see note 2)
≥1.5t w
≥ tw ≥ ¾ in.
Angle of slope not critical
Need not be tangent, notches prohibited ≥ tw ≥ ¾ in.
Optional method for making corner radius
≥1.5t w
≥1.5t w
R (see note 2)
R (see note 2)
≥ tw ≥ ¾ in.
≥ tw ≥ ¾ in.
Rolled shape 1 or groove welded shape 1,3
Fillet 1,4 welded shape
Notes: 1. For ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 shapes and welded built-up shapes with plate thickness more than 2 in., preheat to 150°F prior to thermal cutting, grind and inspect thermally cut edges of access hole using magnetic particle or dye penetration methods prior to making web and flange splice groove welds. 2. Radius shall provide smooth notch-free transition; R ≥ 3⁄8-in. (typical 1⁄2-in.) 3. Access opening made after welding web to flange. 4. Access opening made before welding web to flange. 5. These are typical details for joints welded from one side against steel backing. Alternative joint designs should be considered. Fig. C-J1.2. Weld access hole and beam cope geometry. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-J2]
10.
WELDS
6 - 219
High-Strength Bolts in Combination with Rivets When high-strength bolts are used in combination with rivets, the ductility of the rivets permits the direct addition of the strengths of both fastener types.
J2.
WELDS
1.
Groove Welds The engineer preparing contract design drawings cannot specify the depth of groove without knowing the welding process and the position of welding. Accordingly, only the effective throat for partial joint-penetration groove welds should be specified on design drawings, allowing the fabricator to produce this effective throat with his own choice of welding process and position. The weld reinforcement is not used in determining the effective throat thickness of a groove weld (see Table J2.1).
2.
Fillet Welds
2a.
Effective Area The effective throat of a fillet weld is based upon the root of the joint and the face of the diagrammatic weld, hence this definition gives no credit for weld penetration or reinforcement at the weld face. If the fillet weld is made by the submerged arc welding process, some credit for penetration is made. If the leg size of the resulting fillet weld exceeds 3⁄8-in., then 0.11 in. is added to the theoretical throat. This increased weld throat is allowed because the submerged arc process produces deep penetration of welds of consistent quality. However, it is necessary to run a short length of fillet weld to be assured that this increased penetration is obtained. In practice, this is usually done initially by crosssectioning the runoff plates of the joint. Once this is done, no further testing is required, as long as the welding procedure is not changed. F
F
Welds balanced about the center line of the angle
Welds balanced about the neutral axis of the angle Figure C-J1.3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 220
2b.
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Comm. J
Limitations Table J2.4 provides a minimum size of fillet weld for a given thickness of the thicker part joined. The requirements are not based upon strength considerations, but upon the quench effect of thick material on small welds. Very rapid cooling of weld metal may result in a loss of ductility. Further, the restraint to weld-metal shrinkage provided by thick material may result in weld cracking. Because a 5⁄16-in. fillet weld is the largest that can be deposited in a single pass by SMAW process, 5⁄ -in. applies to all material 3⁄ -in. and greater in thickness, but minimum preheat 16 4 and interpass temperature are required by AWS D1.1.* Both the design engineer and the shop welder must be governed by the requirements. Table J2.3 gives the minimum effective throat of a partial joint-penetration groove weld. Notice that Table J2.3 for partial joint-penetration groove welds goes up to a plate thickness of over 6 in. and a minimum weld throat of 5⁄8-in., whereas, for fillet welds Table J2.4 goes up to a plate thickness of over 3⁄4-in. and a minimum leg size of fillet weld of only 5⁄16-in. The additional thickness for partial-penetration welds is to provide for reasonable proportionality between weld and material thickness. For plates of 1⁄4-in. or more in thickness, it is necessary that the inspector be able to identify the edge of the plate to position the weld gage. This is assured if the weld is kept back at least 1⁄16-in. from the edge, as shown in Figure C-J2.1. Where longitudinal fillet welds are used alone in a connection (see Figure C-J2.2), Section J2.2b requires the length of each weld to be at least equal to the width of the connecting material because of shear lag (Fisher, et al., 1978). By providing a minimum lap of five times the thickness of the thinner part of a lap joint, the resulting rotation of the joint when pulled will not be excessive, as shown in Figure C-J2.3. Fillet welded lap joints under tension tend to open and
* See Table J2.4.
Apparent edge of plate
Apparent weld throat
Actual edge of plate before welding
Actual edge of plate is distinguishable
Actual weld throat Fig. C-J2.1. Identification of plate edge. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Actual weld throat is distinguishable
Sect. C-J2]
WELDS
6 - 221
apply a tearing action at the root of the weld as shown in Figure C-J2.4b, unless restrained by a force F as shown in Figure C-J2.4a. End returns are not essential for developing the capacity of fillet welded connections and have a negligible effect on their strength. Their use has been encouraged to insure that the weld size is maintained over the length of the weld, to enhance the fatigue resistance of cyclically loaded flexible end connections, and to increase the plastic deformation capability of such connections. The weld capacity database on which the specifications were developed had no end returns. This includes the study by Higgins and Preece (1968), seat angle tests by Lyse and Schreiner (1935), the seat and top angle tests by Lyse and Gibson (1937), beam webs welded directly to column or girder by fillet welds by Johnston and Deits (1941), and the eccentrically loaded welded connections reported by Butler, Pal, and Kulak (1972). Hence, the current design-resistance values and joint-capacity models do not require end returns, when the required weld size is provided. Johnston and Green (1940) noted that movement consistent with the design assumption of no end restraint (i.e., joint flexibility) was
L
L≥W
t
W
L
Fig. C-J2.2. Longitudinal fillet welds.
Overlap
Overlap
Fig. C-J2.3. Minimum lap. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 222
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Comm. J
enhanced without end returns. They also verified that greater plastic deformation of the connection was achieved when end returns existed, although the strength was not significantly different. There are numerous welded joints where it is not possible to provide end returns and where it is also possible to provide the desired weld size. These joints as well as the seat angle and the web angle connections cited earlier do not require end returns when the weld size is adequate and fatigue is not a design consideration. 4.
Design Strength The strength of welds is governed by the strength of either the base material or the deposited weld metal. Table J2.5 contains the resistance factors and nominal weld strengths, as well as a number of limitations. It should be noted that in Table J2.5 the nominal strength of fillet welds is determined from the effective throat area, whereas the strength of the connected parts is governed by their respective thicknesses. Figure C-J2.5 illustrates the shear planes for fillet welds and base material: (a) Plane 1-1, in which the resistance is governed by the shear strength for material A. (b) Plane 2-2, in which the resistance is governed by the shear strength of the weld metal. (c) Plane 3-3, in which the resistance is governed by the shear strength of the material B. The resistance of the welded joint is the lowest of the resistance calculated in each plane of shear transfer. Note that planes 1-1 and 3-3 are positioned away from the fusion areas between the weld and the base material. Tests have
F (a) Unrestrained
(a) Restrained Fig. C-J2.4. Restraint of lap joints.
Material A
1
3
2 Material B
2 1
2
1
2 Material A
2
1
2
3
Fig. C-J2.5. Shear planes for fillet welds loaded in longitudinal shear. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-J3]
BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
6 - 223
demonstrated that the stress on this fusion area is not critical in determining the shear strength of fillet welds (Preece, 1968). The shear planes for plug and partial penetration groove welds are shown in Figure C-J2.6 for the weld and base metal. Generally the base metal will govern the shear strength. 5.
Combination of Welds This method of adding weld strengths does not apply to a welded joint using a partial-penetration single bevel groove weld with a superimposed fillet weld. In this case, the effective throat of the combined joint must be determined and the design strength based upon this throat area.
7.
Mixed Weld Metal Problems can occur when incompatible weld metals are used in combination and notch-tough composite weld metal is required. For instance, tack welds deposited using a self-shielded process with aluminum deoxidizers in the electrodes and subsequently covered by SAW weld passes can result in composite weld metal with low notch-toughness, despite the fact that each process by itself could provide notch-tough weld metal.
J3.
BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
1.
High-Strength Bolts In general, the use of high-strength bolts is required to conform to the provisions of the Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts (RCSC, 1988) as approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections.
(a) Plug welds
(b) Partial penetration welds Fig. C-J2.6. Shear planes for plug and partial-penetration welds. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 224
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Comm. J
Occasionally the need arises for the use of high-strength bolts of diameters and lengths in excess of those available for A325 and A490 bolts, as for example, anchor bolts for fastening machine bases. For this situation Section A3.3 permits the use of A449 bolts and A354 threaded rods. 2.
Size and Use of Holes To provide some latitude for adjustment in plumbing up a frame during erection, three types of enlarged holes are permitted, subject to the approval of the designer. The nominal maximum sizes of these holes are given in Table J3.3. The use of these enlarged holes is restricted to connections assembled with bolts and is subject to the provisions of Sections J3.3 and J3.4.
3.
Minimum Spacing The maximum factored strength Rn at a bolt or rivet hole in bearing requires that the distance between the centerline of the first fastener and the edge of a plate toward which the force is directed should not be less than 11⁄2d, where d is the fastener diameter (Kulak et al., 1987). By similar reasoning the distance measured in the line of force, from the centerline of any fastener to the nearest edge of an adjacent hole, should not be less than 3d, to ensure maximum design strength in bearing. Plotting of numerous test results indicates that the critical bearing strength is directly proportional to the above defined distances up to a maximum value of 3d, above which no additional bearing strength is achieved (Kulak et al., 1987). Table J3.7 lists the increments that must be added to adjust the spacing upward to compensate for an increase in hole dimension parallel to the line of force. Section J3.10 gives the bearing strength criteria as a function of spacing.
4.
Minimum Edge Distance Critical bearing stress is a function of the material tensile strength, the spacing of fasteners, and the distance from the edge of the part to the center line of the nearest fastener. Tests have shown (Kulak et al., 1987) that a linear relationship exists between the ratio of critical bearing stress to tensile strength (of the connected material) and the ratio of fastener spacing (in the line of force) to fastener diameter. The following equation affords a good lower bound to published test data for single-fastener connections with standard holes, and is conservative for adequately spaced multi-fastener connections: Fpcr le = Fu d
(C-J3-1)
where Fpcr = critical bearing stress, ksi Fu = tensile strength of the connected material, ksi le = distance, along a line of transmitted force, from the center of a fastener to the nearest edge of an adjacent fastener or to the free edge of a connected part (in the direction of stress), in. d = diameter of fastener, in. The provisions of Section J3.3 are concerned with le as hole spacing, whereas Section J3.4 is concerned with le as edge distance in the direction of stress. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-J3]
BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
6 - 225
Section J3.10 establishes a maximum bearing strength. Spacing and/or edge distance may be increased to provide for a required bearing strength, or bearing force may be reduced to satisfy a spacing and/or edge distance limitation. It has long been known that the critical bearing stress of a single fastener connection is more dependent upon a given edge distance than multi-fastener connections (Jones, 1940). For this reason, longer edge distances (in the direction of force) are required for connections with one fastener in the line of transmitted force than required for those having two or more. The recommended minimum distance transverse to the direction of load is primarily a workmanship tolerance. It has little, if any, effect on the strength of the member. 5.
Maximum Spacing and Edge Distance Limiting the edge distance to not more than 12 times the thickness of an outside connected part, but not more than six inches, is intended to provide for the exclusion of moisture in the event of paint failure, thus preventing corrosion between the parts which might accumulate and force these parts to separate. More restrictive limitations are required for connected parts of unpainted weathering steel exposed to atmospheric corrosion.
6.
Design Tension or Shear Strength Tension loading of fasteners is usually accompanied by some bending due to the deformation of the connected parts. Hence, the resistance factor φ, by which Rn is multiplied to obtain the design tensile strength of fasteners, is relatively low. The nominal tensile strength values in Table J3.2 were obtained from the equation Rn = 0.75AbFu
(C-J3-2)
While the equation was developed for bolted connections (Kulak et al., 1987), it was also conservatively applied to threaded parts and to rivets. The nominal strength of A307 bolts was discounted by 5 ksi. In connections consisting of only a few fasteners, the effects of strain on the shear in bearing fasteners is negligible (Kulak et al., 1987; Fisher et al., 1978). In longer joints, the differential strain produces an uneven distribution between fasteners (those near the end taking a disproportionate part of the total load), so that the maximum strength per fastener is reduced. The AISC ASD Specification permits connections up to 50 in. in length without a reduction in maximum shear stress. With this in mind the resistance factor φ for shear in bearing-type connections has been selected to accommodate the same range of connections. The values of nominal shear strength in Table J3.2 were obtained from the equation Rn / mAb = 0.50Fu
(C-J3-3)
when threads are excluded from the shear planes and Rn / mAb = 0.40Fu
(C-J3-4)
when threads are not excluded from the shear plane, where m is the number of AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 226
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Comm. J
shear planes (Kulak et al., 1987). While developed for bolted connections, the equations were also conservatively applied to threaded parts and rivets. The value given for A307 bolts was obtained from Equation C-J3-4 but is specified for all cases regardless of the position of threads. For A325 bolts, no distinction is made between small and large diameters, even though the minimum tensile strength Fu is lower for bolts with diameters in excess of one inch. It was felt that such a refinement of design was not justified, particularly in view of the low resistance factor φ, increasing ratio of tensile area to gross area and other compensating factors. 7.
Combined Tension and Shear in Bearing-Type Connections Tests have shown that the strength of bearing fasteners subject to combined shear and tension resulting from externally applied forces can be closely defined by an ellipse (Kulak et al., 1987). Such a curve can be replaced, with only minor deviations, by three straight lines as shown in Figure C-J3.1. This latter representation offers the advantage that no modification of either type stress is required in the presence of fairly large magnitudes of other types. This linear representation was adopted for Table J3.5, giving a limiting tensile stress Ft as a function of the shearing stress fv for bearing-type connections.
8.
High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical Connections Connections classified as slip-critical include those cases where slip could theoretically exceed an amount deemed by the Engineer of Record to affect the suitability for service of the structure by excessive distortion or reduction in strength or stability, even though the nominal strength of the connection may be adequate. Also included are those cases where slip of any magnitude must be prevented, for example, joints subject to fatigue, connectors between elements of built-up members at their ends (Sections D2 and E4), and bolts in combination with welds (Section J1.9). The onset of slipping in a high-strength bolted, slip-critical connection is not an ft
Ft
C– RFv
C = 1.3Ft , approximately F R = t/Fv , approximately F ft = F t Fv 2– fv2 v
Fv
fv
Figure C-J3.1. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-J3]
BOLTS AND THREADED PARTS
6 - 227
indication that maximum capacity of the connection has been reached. Its occurrence may be only a serviceability limit state. In the case of bolts in holes with only small clearance, such as standard holes and slotted holes loaded transverse to the axis of the slot in practical connections, the freedom to slip generally does not exist because one or more bolts are in bearing even before load is applied due to normal fabrication tolerances and erection procedures. Further, the consequences of slip, if it can occur at all, are trivial except for a few situations as noted above. Slip of slip-critical connections is likely to occur at approximately 1.4 to 1.5 times the service loads. For standard holes, oversized holes, and short slotted holes the connection can be designed either at service loads (Section J3.8a) or at factored loads (Appendix J3.8b). The nominal loads and φ factors have been adjusted accordingly. The number of connectors will be essentially the same for the two procedures because they have been calibrated to give similar results. Slight differences will occur because of variation in the ratio of live load to dead load. In connections containing long slots that are parallel to the direction of the applied load, slip of the connection prior to attainment of the factored load might be large enough to alter the usual assumption of analysis that the undeformed structure can be used to obtain the internal forces. To guard against this occurring, the design slip resistance is further reduced by 0.85 when designing at service load (Section J3.8a) and by setting φ to 0.60 in conjunction with factored loads (Appendix J3.8b). While the possibility of a slip-critical connection slipping into bearing under anticipated service conditions is small, such connections must comply with the provisions of Section J3.10 in order to prevent connection failure at the maximum load condition. 10.
Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes The recommended bearing stress on pins is not the same as for bolts as explained in Section J8. Bearing values are not provided as a protection to the fastener, because it needs no such protection. Therefore, the same bearing value applies to joints assembled by bolts, regardless of fastener shear strength or the presence or absence of threads in the bearing area. Tests (Frank and Yura, 1981) have demonstrated that hole elongation greater than 0.25 in. will begin to develop as the bearing stress is increased beyond the values given in Equations J3-1a and J3-1d, especially if it is combined with high tensile stress on the net section, even though rupture does not occur. Equations J3-1b and J3-1c consider the effect of hole ovalization (deformation greater than 0.25 in.) whenever the upper design limit (3.0dtFu) is deemed acceptable. These latter equations also establish the design limit for a single bolt, or two or more bolts, whenever the bolt arrangement results in each bolt singly in line with the direction of the applied force. Because two separate limit states are considered (deformation and strength) with both limit states equated to a bearing stress (2.4Fu or 2.0Fu and 3.0Fu , respectively) conflicting design strengths may result, AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 228
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Comm. J
either acceptable, when intermediate edge distance and bolt spacing values are considered. 11.
Long Grips Provisions requiring a decrease in calculated stress for A307 bolts having long grips (by arbitrarily increasing the required number in proportion to the grip length) are not required for high-strength bolts. Tests (Bendigo et al., 1963) have demonstrated that the ultimate shearing strength of high-strength bolts having a grip of eight or nine diameters is no less than that of similar bolts with much shorter grips.
J4.
DESIGN RUPTURE STRENGTH Tests (Birkemoe and Gilmor, 1978) on coped beams indicated that a tearing failure mode (rupture) can occur along the perimeter of the bolt holes as shown in Figure C-J4.1. This block shear mode combines tensile strength on one plane and shear strength on a perpendicular plane. The failure path is defined by the center lines of the bolt holes. The block shear failure mode is not limited to the coped ends of beams. Other examples are shown in Figure CJ4.1 and C-J4.2.
Cope Beam
Shear area
Failure by tearing out of shaded portion
Failure by tearing out of shaded portion Shear area
Tensile area
Tensile area Po
Fig. C-J4.1. Failure surface for block shear rupture limit state.
Po Po Small tension force
Large tension force
Large shear force Po (a)
Po (b) Fig. C-J4.2 Block shear rupture in tension. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Small shear force
Sect. C-J6]
FILLERS
6 - 229
The block shear failure mode should also be checked around the periphery of welded connections. Welded connection block shear is determined using φ = 0.75 in conjunction with the area of both the fracture and yielding planes (Yura, 1988). The LRFD Specification has adopted a conservative model to predict block shear strength. Test results suggest that it is reasonable to add the yield strength on one plane to the rupture strength of the perpendicular plane (Ricles and Yura, 1983 and Hardash and Bjorhovde, 1985). Therefore, two possible block shear strengths can be calculated; rupture strength Fu on the net tensile section along with shear yielding 0.6Fy on the gross section on the shear plane(s), or rupture 0.6Fu on the net shear area(s) combined with yielding Fy on the gross tensile area. This is the basis of Equations J4-3 and J4-4. These equations are consistent with the philosophy in Chapter D for tension members, where gross area is used for the limit state of yielding and net area is used for rupture. The controlling equation is the one that produces the larger rupture force. This can be explained by the two extreme examples given in Figure C-J4.2. In Case a, the total force is resisted primarily by shear, so shear rupture, not shear yielding, should control the block shear tearing mode; therefore, use Equation J4-4. For Case b, block shear cannot occur until the tension area ruptures as given by Equation J4-3. If Equation J4-4 (shear rupture on the small area and yielding on the large tension area) is checked for Case b, a smaller Po will result. In fact, as the shear area gets smaller and approaches zero, the use of Equation J4-4 for Case b would give a block shear strength based totally on yielding of the gross tensile area. Block shear is a rupture or tearing phenomenon not a yielding limit state. Therefore, the proper equation to use is the one with the larger rupture term. J5.
CONNECTING ELEMENTS
2.
Design Strength of Connecting Elements in Tension Tests have shown that yield will occur on the gross section area before the tensile capacity of the net section is reached, if the ratio An / Ag ≤ 0.85 (Kulak et al., 1987). Since the length of connecting elements is small compared to the member length, inelastic deformation of the gross section is limited. Hence, the effective net area An of the connecting element is limited to 0.85Ag in recognition of the limited inelastic deformation and to provide a reserve capacity.
J6.
FILLERS The practice of securing fillers by means of additional fasteners, so that they are, in effect, an integral part of a shear-connected component, is not required where a connection is designed to be a slip-critical connection using highstrength bolts. In such connections, the resistance to slip between filler and either connected part is comparable to that which would exist between the connected parts if no fill were present. Filler plates may be used in lap joints of welded connections that splice parts of different thickness, or where there may be an offset in the joint. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 230
J8.
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Comm. J
BEARING STRENGTH The LRFD Specification provisions for bearing on milled surfaces, Section J8, follow the same philosophy of earlier AISC ASD Specifications. In general, the design is governed by a deformation limit state at service loads resulting in stresses nominally at 9⁄10 of yield. Adequate safety is provided by post-yield strength as deformation increases. Tests on pin connections (Johnston, 1939) and on rockers (Wilson, 1934) have confirmed this behavior. As used throughout the LRFD Specification, the terms “milled surface,” “milled,” and “milling” are intended to include surfaces which have been accurately sawed or finished to a true plane by any suitable means.
J9.
COLUMN BASES AND BEARING ON CONCRETE The equations for resistance of concrete in bearing are the same as ACI 318-89 except that AISC equations use φ = 0.60 while ACI uses φ = 0.70, since ACI specifies larger load factors than the ASCE load factors specified by AISC.
J10. ANCHOR BOLTS AND EMBEDMENTS ACI 318 and 349 Appendix B and the PCI Handbook include recommended procedures for the design of anchor bolts and embedments.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 231
CHAPTER K CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
K1. FLANGES AND WEBS WITH CONCENTRATED FORCES 1.
Design Basis The LRFD Specification separates flange and web strength requirements into distinct categories representing different limit state criteria, i.e., local flange bending (Section K1.2), local web yielding (Section K1.3), web crippling (Section K1.4), sidesway web buckling (Section K1.5), compression buckling of the web (Section K1.6), and panel zone web shear (Section K1.7). These criteria are applied to two distinct types of concentrated forces which act on member flanges. Single concentrated forces may be tensile, such as those delivered by tension hangers, or compressive, such as those delivered by bearing plates at beam interior positions, reactions at beam ends, and other bearing connections. Double concentrated forces, one tensile and one compressive, form a couple on the same side of the loaded member, such as that delivered to column flanges through welded and bolted moment connections.
2.
Local Flange Bending Where a tensile force is applied through a plate welded across a flange, that flange must be sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation of the flange and the corresponding high-stress concentration in the weld in line with the web. The effective column flange length for local flange bending is 12tf (Graham, et al., 1959). Thus, it is assumed that yield lines form in the flange at 6tf in each direction from the point of the applied concentrated force. To develop the fixed edge consistent with the assumptions of this model, an additional 4tf and therefore a total of 10tf, is required for the full flange-bending strength given by Equation K1-1. In the absence of applicable research, a 50 percent reduction has been introduced for cases wherein the applied concentrated force is less than 10tf from the member end. This criterion given by Equation K1-1 was originally developed for moment connections, but it also applies to single concentrated forces such as tension hangers consisting of a plate welded to the bottom flange of a beam and transverse to the beam web.
3.
Local Web Yielding The web strength criteria have been established to limit the stress in the web of a member into which a force is being transmitted. It should matter little whether the member receiving the force is a beam or a column; however, Galambos (1976) and AISC (1978), references upon which the LRFD Specification is AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 232
CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
[Comm. K
based, did make such a distinction. For beams, a 2:1 stress gradient through the flange was used, whereas the gradient through column flanges was 21⁄2:1. In Section K1.3, the 21⁄2:1 gradient is used for both cases. This criterion applies to both bearing and moment connections. 4.
Web Crippling The expression for resistance to web crippling at a concentrated force is a departure from previous specifications (IABSE, 1968; Bergfelt, 1971; Hoglund, 1971; and Elgaaly, 1983). Equations K1-4 and K1-5 are based on research by Roberts (1981). The increase in Equation K1-5b for N / d > 0.2 was developed after additional testing (Elgaaly, 1991) to better represent the effect of longer bearing lengths at ends of members. All tests were conducted on bare steel beams without the expected beneficial contributions of any connection or floor attachments. Thus, the resulting criteria are considered conservative for such applications. These equations were developed for bearing connections, but are also generally applicable to moment connections. However, for the rolled shapes listed in Part 1 of the LRFD Manual with Fy not greater than 50 ksi, the web crippling criterion will never control the design in a moment connection except for a W12×50 or W10×33 column. The web crippling phenomenon has been observed to occur in the web adjacent to the load flange. For this reason, a half-depth stiffener (or stiffeners) or a half-depth doubler plate is expected to eliminate this limit state.
5.
Sidesway Web Buckling The sidesway web buckling criterion was developed after observing several unexpected failures in tested beams (Summers and Yura, 1982). In those tests the compression flanges were braced at the concentrated load, the web was squeezed into compression, and the tension flange buckled (see Figure C-K1.1). Sidesway web buckling will not occur in the following cases. For flanges restrained against rotation: h / tw > 2.3 l / bf
(C-K1-1)
Brace
Tension flange
Fig. C-K1.1. Sidesway web buckling. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ay Sidesw kle c u b b e w
Sect. C-K1]
FLANGES AND WEBS WITH CONCENTRATED FORCES
6 - 233
For flanges not restrained against rotation: h / tw > 1.7 l / bf
(C-K-1-2)
where l is as shown in Figure C-K1.2. Sidesway web buckling can also be prevented by the proper design of lateral bracing or stiffeners at the load point. It is suggested that local bracing at both flanges be designed for one percent of the concentrated force applied at that point. Stiffeners must extend from the load point through at least one-half the beam or girder depth. In addition, the pair of stiffeners should be designed to carry the full load. If flange rotation is permitted at the loaded flange, neither stiffeners nor doubler plateswill be effective. In the 1st Edition LRFD Manual, the sidesway web buckling equations were based on the assumption that h / tf = 40, a convenient assumption which is generally true for economy beams. This assumption has been removed so that the equations will be applicable to all sections. These equations were developed only for bearing connections and do not apply to moment connections. 6.
Compression Buckling of the Web When compressive forces are applied to both flanges of a member at the same
l=L
l=L
l=L
l = L/ 2 L
/2 L
= Braced point Fig. C-K1.2. Unbraced flange length. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 234
CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
[Comm. K
location, as by moment connections at both flanges of a column, the member web must have its slenderness ratio limited to avoid the possibility of buckling. This is done in the LRFD Specification with Equation K1-8, which is a modified form of a similar equation used in the ASD Specification. This equation is applicable to a pair of moment connections, and to other pairs of compressive forces applied at both flanges of a member, for which N / d is small ( 0.5Fy. This is accomplished through the use of the equivalent slenderFy / Fe . √ ness factor λe =
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 246
APPENDIX F BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
F1.
DESIGN FOR FLEXURE Three limit states must be investigated to determine the moment capacity of flexural members: lateral-torsional buckling (LTB), local buckling of the compression flange (FLB), and local buckling of the web (WLB). These limit states depend, respectively, on the beam slenderness ratio Lb / ry, the width-thickness ratio b / t of the compression flange and the width-thickness ratio h / tw of the web. For convenience, all three measures of slenderness are denoted by λ. Variations in Mn with Lb are shown in Figure C-A-F1.1. The discussion of plastic, inelastic, and elastic buckling in Commentary Section F1 with reference to lateral-torsional buckling applies here except for an important difference in the significance of λp for lateral-torsional buckling and local buckling. Values of λp for FLB and WLB produce a compact section with a rotation capacity of about three (after reaching Mp) before the onset of local buckling, and therefore meet the requirements for plastic analysis of load effects (Commentary Section B5). On the other hand, values of λp for LTB do not allow plastic analysis because they do not provide rotation capacity beyond that needed to develop Mp. Instead Lb ≤ Lpd (Section F1.2d) must be satisfied. Analyses to include restraint effects of adjoining elements are discussed in Galambos (1988). Analysis of the lateral stability of members with shapes not covered in this appendix must be performed according to the available literature (Galambos, 1988). bT1
b
bT2
T
IT
IT 2 IT
1
IO
IB
l
IB1
IO
l
bB2
bB1
bB
IB2
bI GT = l T O IT
GT =
I O bT l IT
bI GB = l B O IB
GB =
I O bB l IB
Figure C-A-F1.1 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-A-F3]
WEB-TAPERED MEMBERS
6 - 247
See the Commentary for Section B5 for the discussion of the equation regarding the bending capacity of circular sections. F3.
WEB-TAPERED MEMBERS
1.
General Requirements The provision contained in Appendix F3 covers only those aspects of the design of tapered members that are unique to tapered members. For other criteria of design not specifically covered in Appendix F3, see the appropriate portions of this Specification and Commentary. The design of wide-flange columns with a single web taper and constant flanges follows the same procedure as for uniform columns according to Section E2, except the column slenderness parameter λc for major axis buckling is determined for a slenderness ratio Kγ L / rox, and for minor axis buckling for KL / roy, where Kγ is an effective length factor for tapered members, K is the effective length factor for prismatic members, and rox and roy are the radii of gyration about the x and the y axes, respectively, taken at the smaller end of the tapered member. For stepped columns or columns with other than a single web taper, the elastic critical stress is determined by analysis or from data in reference texts or research reports (Chapters 11 and 13 in Timoshenko and Gere (1961) and Bleich (1952) and Kitipornchai and Trahair [1980], and then the same procedure of using λeff is utilized in calculating the factored resistance. This same approach is recommended for open section built-up columns (columns with perforated cover plates, lacing, and battens) where the elastic critical buckling stress determination must include a reduction for the effect of shear. Methods for calculating the elastic buckling strength of such columns are given in Chapter 12 of the SSRC Guide (Galambos, 1988) and in Timoshenko and Gere (1961) and Bleich (1952).
3.
Design Compressive Strength The approach in formulating Faγ of tapered columns is based on the concept that the critical stress for an axially loaded tapered column is equal to that of a prismatic column of different length, but of the same cross section as the smaller end of the tapered column. This has resulted in an equivalent effective length factor Kγ for a tapered member subjected to axial compression (Lee et al., 1972). This factor, which is used to determine the value of S in Equations A-F3-2 and λc in Equation E2-3, can be determined accurately for a symmetrical rectangular rigid frame comprised of prismatic beams and tapered columns. With modifying assumptions, such a frame can be used as a mathematical model to determine with sufficient accuracy the influence of the stiffness Σ(I / b)g of beams and rafters which afford restraint at the ends of a tapered column in other cases such as those shown in Figure C-A-F1.1. From Equations A-F3-2 and E2-3, the critical load Pcr can be expressed as π2EIo / (Kγl)2. The value of Kγ can be obtained by interpolation, using the appropriate chart from Lee et al. (1972) and restraint modifiers GT and GB. In each of these modifiers the tapered column, treated as a prismatic member having a moment of inertia Io, computed at the smaller end, and its actual length l, is assigned the stiffness Io / l, which is then AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 248
BEAMS AND OTHER FLEXURAL MEMBERS
[Comm. A-F
divided by the stiffness of the restraining members at the end of the tapered column under consideration. 4.
Design Flexural Strength The development of the design bending stress for tapered beams follows closely with that for prismatic beams. The basic concept is to replace a tapered beam by an equivalent prismatic beam with a different length, but with a cross section identical to that of the smaller end of the tapered beam (Lee et al., 1972). This has led to the modified length factors hs and hw in Equations A-F3-6 and A-F3-7. Equations A-F3-6 and A-F3-7 are based on total resistance to lateral buckling, using both St. Venant and warping resistance. The factor B modifies the basic Fbγ to members which are continuous past lateral supports. Categories a, b, and c of Appendix F3.4 usually apply; however, it is to be noted that they apply only when the axial force is small and adjacent unbraced segments are approximately equal in length. For a single member, or segments which do not fall into category a, b, c, or d, the recommended value of B is unity. The value of B should also be taken as unity when computing the value of Fbγ to obtain Mn to be used in Equations H1-1 and C1-1, since the effect of moment gradient is provided for by the factor Cm. The background material is given in WRC Bulletin No. 192 (Morrell and Lee, 1974).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 249
APPENDIX G PLATE GIRDERS
Appendix G is taken from AISI Bulletin 27 (Galambos, 1978). Comparable provisions are included in the AISC ASD Specification. The provisions are presented in an appendix as they are seldom used and produce designs which are often less economical than plate girders designed without tension-field action. Fyf that distinguishes plate girders The web slenderness ratio h / tw = 970 / √ from beams is written in terms of the flange yield stress, because for hybrid girders inelastic buckling of the web due to bending depends on the flange strain. The equation for Re used in the 1986 LRFD Specification was the same as that used in the AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges. In this edition, the equation for Re, used in the AISC ASD Specification since 1969, is used because its derivation is published (Gaylord and Gaylord, 1992 and ASCE-AASHTO, 1968) and it is more accurate than the AASHTO equation. G2. DESIGN FLEXURAL STRENGTH In previous versions of the AISC Specification a coefficient of 0.0005ar was used in RPG based on the work of Basler (1961). This value is valid for ar ≤ 2. In that same paper, Basler developed a more general coefficient, applicable to all ratios of Aw / Af which has now been adopted because application of the previous equation to sections with large ar values gives unreasonable results. An arbitrary limit of ar ≤ 10 is imposed so that the RPG expression is not applied to sections approaching a tee shape.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 250
APPENDIX H MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
H3. ALTERNATIVE INTERACTION EQUATIONS FOR MEMBERS UNDER COMBINED STRESS In the case of members not subject to flexural buckling, i.e., Lb < Lpd, the use of somewhat more liberal interaction Equations A-H3-5 and A-H3-6 is acceptable as an alternative when the flexure is about one axis only. The alternative interaction Equations A-H3-1 and A-H3-2 for biaxially loaded H and wide-flange column shapes were taken from Galambos (1988), Springfield (1975), and Tebedge and Chen (1974). For I-shaped members with bf / d > 1.0, use of Section H1 is recommended, because no additional research is available for this case.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 251
APPENDIX J CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
J2.
WELDS
4.
Design Strength When weld groups are loaded in shear by an external load that does not act through the center of gravity of the group, the load is eccentric and will tend to cause a relative rotation and translation between the parts connected by the weld. The point about which rotation tends to take place is called the instantaneous center of rotation. Its location is dependent upon the load eccentricity, geometry of the weld group, and deformation of the weld at different angles of the resultant elemental force relative to the weld axis. The individual resistance force of each unit weld element can be assumed to act on a line perpendicular to a ray passing through the instantaneous center and that element’s location (see Figure C-A-J2.1). The ultimate shear strength of weld groups can be obtained from the load deformation relationship of a single-unit weld element. This relationship was originally given by Butler (1972) for E60 electrodes. Curves for E70 electrodes used in the Appendix were obtained by Lesik (1990). Unlike the load-deformation relationship for bolts, strength and deformation performance in welds are dependent on the angle θ that the resultant elemental force makes with the axis of the weld element (see Figure C-A-J2.1). The actual load deformation relationship for welds is given in Figure C-A-J2.2, taken from Kennedy and Lesik (1990). Conversion of the SI equation to foot-pound units results in the following weld strength equation for Rn: Rn = 0.852(1.0 + 0.50 sin1.5θ)FEXX Aw Because the maximum strength is limited to 0.60FEXX for longitudinally loaded welds (θ = 0º), the LRFD Specification provision provides, in the reduced equation coefficient, a reasonable margin for any variation in welding techniques and procedures. To eliminate possible computational difficulties, the maximum deformation in the weld elements is limited to 0.17D. For design convenience, a simple elliptical formula is used for f(p) to closely approximate the empirically derived polynomial in Lesik (1990). The total resistance of all the weld elements combine to resist the eccentric ultimate load, and when the correct location of the instantaneous center has been selected, the three in-plane equations of statics (ΣFx , ΣFy , ΣM) will be satisfied. Numerical techniques, such as those given by Brandt (1982), have been develAMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 252
CONNECTIONS, JOINTS, AND FASTENERS
[Comm. A-J
oped to locate the instantaneous center of rotation subject to convergence tolerances. Earlier editions of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction (AISC, 1980, 1986, 1989) took advantage of the inelastic redistribution of stresses that is inherent in the Appendix J2.4 procedure. However, in each of the utilized computational techniques the resulting coefficients were factored down so that the maximum A
Y ro
al
xl R
P
θ l
c.g.
i.c.
X
R θ
kl
Figure C-A-J2.1
1.6 90° 75° 60°
1.4
45°
1.2
30°
P/ Po
1.0
15°
0.8
θ = 0°
0.6 0.4 0.2
0
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
∆/ D
Figure C-A-J2.2 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
0.35
0.40
Sect. C-A-J2]
WELDS
6 - 253
stress, at any point in the weld group, did not exceed the limiting value specified by either the Allowable Stress Design or LRFD Specifications, 0.3Fu or 0.6Fu, respectively. As a result, the tabulated weld-capacity data shown in the appropriate referenced manual tables will be found to be conservative relative to the data obtained using the computational procedure presented in Appendix J2.4.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 254
APPENDIX K CONCENTRATED FORCES, PONDING, AND FATIGUE
K3. FATIGUE Because most members in building frames are not subject to a large enough number of cycles of full design stress application to require design for fatigue, the provisions covering such designs have been placed in Appendix K3. When fatigue is a design consideration, its severity is most significantly affected by the number of load applications, the magnitude of the stress range, and the severity of the stress concentrations associated with the particular details. These factors are not encountered in normal building designs; however, when encountered and when fatigue is of concern, all provisions of Appendix K3 must be satisfied. Members or connections subject to less than 20,000 cycles of loading will not involve a fatigue condition, except in the case of repeated loading involving large ranges of stress. For such conditions, the admissible range of stress can conservatively be taken as one and one-half times the applicable value given in Table A-K3.3 for “Loading Condition 1.” Fluctuation in stress which does not involve tensile stress does not cause crack propagation and is not considered to be a fatigue situation. On the other hand, in elements of members subject solely to calculated compression stress, fatigue cracks may initiate in regions of high tensile residual stress. In such situations, the cracks generally do not propagate beyond the region of the residual tensile stress, because the residual stress is relieved by the crack. For this reason stress ranges that are completely in compression are not included in the column headed by “Kind of Stress” in Table A-K3.2. This is also true of comparable tables of the current AASHTO and AREA specifications. When fabrication details involving more than one category occur at the same location in a member, the stress range at that location must be limited to that of the most restrictive category. By locating notch-producing fabrication details in regions subject to a small range of stress, the need for a member larger than required by static loading will often be eliminated. Extensive test programs (Fisher et al., 1970; and Fisher et al., 1974) using full size specimens, substantiated by theoretical stress analysis, have confirmed the following general conclusions: (1) Stress range and notch severity are the dominant stress variables for welded details and beams. (2) Other variables such as minimum stress, mean stress, and maximum stress are not significant for design purposes. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Sect. C-A-K3]
FATIGUE
6 - 255
(3) Structural steels with yield points of 36 to 100 ksi do not exhibit significantly different fatigue strength for given welded details fabricated in the same manner. Allowable stress ranges can be read directly from Table A-K3.3 for a particular category and loading condition. The values are based on extensive research (Keating and Fisher, 1985). Provisions for bolts subjected to tension are given in Table A-K3.4. Tests have uncovered dramatic differences in fatigue life, not completely predictable from the various published equations for estimating the actual magnitude of prying force (Kulak et al., 1987). To limit the uncertainties regarding prying action on the fatigue behavior of these bolts, the tensile stresses given in Table J3.2 are approved for use under extended cyclic loading only if the prying force, included in the design tensile force, is small. When this cannot be assured, the design tensile stress is drastically reduced to cover any conceivable prying effect. The use of other types of mechanical fasteners to resist applied cyclic loading in tension is not recommended. Lacking a high degree of assured pretension, the range of stress is generally too great to resist such loading for long. However, all types of mechanical fasteners survive unharmed when subject to cyclic shear stresses sufficient to fracture the connected parts, which is provided for elsewhere in Appendix K3.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 256
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 257
References Ad Hoc Committee on Serviceability Research (1986), “Structural Serviceability: A Critical Appraisal and Research Needs,” Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 112, No. 12, 1986. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (1989), Standard Specification for Highway Bridges, 1989. American Concrete Institute (1989), Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, ACI 318-89, Detroit, MI, 1989. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (1973), “Commentary on Highly Restrained Welded Connections,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 10, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, 1973. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (1978), Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, Chicago, IL, 1978. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (1983), Torsional Analysis of Steel Members, Chicago, IL, 1983. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (1986), Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Chicago, IL, 1986. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (1989), Specification for Structural Steel Buildings—Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design, Chicago, IL, 1989. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (1992), Seismic Provisions of Structural Steel Buildings, AISC, Chicago, IL, 1992. American Society of Civil Engineers (1971), “Plastic Design in Steel,” ASCE Manual of Engineering Practice, No. 41, 2nd Edition, New York, 1971. American Society of Civil Engineers (1979), Structural Design of Tall Steel Buildings, New York, 1979. American Society of Civil Engineers (1988), Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE7-88, New York. ASCE Task Committee on Design Criteria for Composite Structures in Steel and Concrete (1992), “Proposed Specification for Structural Steel Beams with Web Openings,” D. Darwin, Chmn., Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 118, No. ST12, December 1992. ASCE Task Committee on Design Criteria for Composite Structures in Steel and Concrete (1992a), “Commentary on Proposed Specification for Structural Steel AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 258
REFERENCES
Beams with Web Openings,” D. Darwin, Chmn., Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 118, No. ST12, December 1992. Joint ASCE-AASHTO Committee on Flexural Members (1968), “Design of Hybrid Steel Beams,” Report of Subcommitte 1, Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 94, No. ST6, June 1968. Aslani, F. and S. C. Goel (1991), “An Analytical Criteria for Buckling Strength of Built-Up Compression Members,” Engineering Journal, AISC, 4th Quarter, 1991. ATC (1978), Tentative Provisions for the Development of Seismic Regulations for Buildings, ATC Publication 3-06, June 1978. American Welding Bureau (1931), Report of Structural Welding Committee, 1931. Austin, W. J. (1961), “Strength and Design of Metal Beam-Columns,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 87, No. ST4, April 1961. Basler, K. (1961), “Strength of Plate Girders in Shear,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, October 1961. Basler, K. and B. Thurlimann (1963), “Strength of Plate Girders in Bending,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 89, No. ST4, August 1963. Barakat, Munzer and Wai-Fah Chen (1991), “Design Analysis of Semi-Rigid Frames: Evaluation and Implementation,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 28, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, 1991. Beedle, L. S and L. Tall (1960), “Basic Column Strength,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 86, No. ST7, July 1960. Bendigo, R. A., R. M. Hansen, and J. L. Rumpf (1963), “Long Bolted Joints,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 89, No. ST6, December 1963. Bergfelt, A. (1971), Studies and Tests on Slender Plate Girders Without Stiffeners, March 1971. Bigos, J., G. W. Smith, E. F. Ball, and P. J. Foehl (1954), Shop Paint and Painting Practice, 1954 Proceedings, AISC National Engineering Conference, Milwaukee, WI. Birkemoe, P. C. and M. I. Gilmor (1978), “Behavior of Bearing-Critical Double-Angle Beam Connections,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 15, No. 4, 4th Quarter, 1978. Bjorhovde, Reidar (1972), Deterministic and Probabilistic Approaches to the Strength of Steel Columns, Ph.D. Dissertation, Lehigh University, Bethlehem, PA, May. Bjorhovde, Reidar (1984), “Effect of End Restraint on Column Strength—Practical Applications,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 21, No. 1, 1st Quarter, 1984. Bjorhovde, Reidar (1988), “Columns: From Theory to Practice,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 25, No. 1, 1st Quarter 1988. Bjorhovde, Reidar, T. V. Galambos, and M. K. Ravindra (1978), “LRFD Criteria for Steel Beam-Columns,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, September. Bleich, F. (1952), Buckling Strength of Metal Structures, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, NY, 1952. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
REFERENCES
6 - 259
Brandt, G. D. (1982), “A General Solution for Eccentric Loads on Weld Groups,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 19, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, 1982. Bridge, P. Q. and J. W. Roderick (1978), “Behavior of Built-Up Composite Columns,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST7, July 1978, pp. 1141– 1165. Brockenbrough, R. L. (1983), “Considerations in the Design of Bolted Joints for Weathering Steel,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 20, No. 1, 1st Quarter, 1983. Butler, Lorne J., Shubendu Pal, and Geoffrey L. Kulak (1972), “Eccentrically Loaded Welded Connections,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 98, No. ST5, May 1972. Canadian Standards Association (1989), Limit States Design of Steel Structures, Appendices G, H, and I, CSA S16.1-M89, Rexdale, Ontario, Canada, 1989. Chen, W. F. and T. Atsuta (1976), Theory of Beam Columns, Volume I: In-Plane Behavior and Design, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1976. Chen, W. F. and T. Atsuta (1977), Theory of Beam Columns, Volume II: Space Behavior and Design, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1977. Cheong-Siat Moy, F., E. Ozer, and L. W. Lu (1977), “Strength of Steel Frames Under Gravity Loads,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 103, No. ST6, June 1977. Chopra, A. K. and N. M. Newmark (1980), Design of Earthquake Resistant Structures, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, NY, 1980. Cooper, P. B., T. V. Galambos, and M. K. Ravindra (1978), “LRFD Criteria for Plate Girders,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, September 1978. Daniels, J. H. and L. W. Lu (1972), “Plastic Subassemblage Analysis for Unbraced Frames,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 98, No. ST8, August 1972. Darwin, David (1990), Steel and Composite Beams with Web Openings, AISC Steel Design Guide Series No. 2, AISC, Chicago, IL, 1990. Davison, J. B., P. A. Kirby, and D. A. Nethercot (1988), “Semi-Rigid Connections in Isolation and in Frames,” in Connections in Steel Structures: Behavior, Strength and Design, Elsevier Applied Science Publishers, London. Disque, R. O. (1973), “Inelastic K-Factor in Design,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 10, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, 1973. Easterling, W. S. and L. Gonzales (1993), “Shear Lag Effects in Steel Tension Members,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 30, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, 1993. Elgaaly, M. (1983), “Web Design Under Compressive Edge Loads,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 20, No. 4, 4th Quarter, 1983. Elgaaly, M. and R. Salkar (1991), “Web Crippling Under Edge Loading,” Proceedings of AISC National Steel Construction Conference, Washington, D.C., 1991. Ellifritt, D. S., G. Wine, T. Sputo, and S. Samuel (1992), “Flexural Strength of WT Sections,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 29, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, 1992. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 260
REFERENCES
Ellingwood, B. E., J. G. MacGregor, T. V. Galambos, and C. A. Cornell (1982), “Probability-Based Load Criteria: Load Factors and Load Combinations,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 108, No. 5, 1982. Fielding, D. J. and J. S. Huang (1971), “Shear in Steel Beam-to-Column Connections,” Welding Journal, AWS, Vol. 50, No. 7, Research Supplement 1971, pp. 313–326. Fielding, D. J. and W. F. Chen (1973), “Steel Frame Analysis and Connection Shear Deformation,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 99, No. ST1, January 1973. Fisher, J. W., P. A. Albrecht, B. T. Yen, D. J. Klingerman, and B. M. McNamee (1974), Fatigue Strength of Steel Beams With Welded Stiffeners and Attachments, National Cooperative Highway Research Program, Report 147, Washington, D.C., 1974. Fisher, J. W., K. H. Frank, M. A. Hirt, and B. M. McNamee (1970), Effect of Weldments on the Fatigue Strength of Beams, National Cooperative Highway Research Program, Report 102, Washington, D.C., 1970. Fisher, J. W., T. V. Galambos, G. L. Kulak, and M. K. Ravindra (1978), “Load and Resistance Factor Design Criteria for Connectors,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, September 1978. Frank, K. H. and J. A. Yura (1981), An Experimental Study of Bolted Shear Connections, FHWA/RD-81/148, December 1981. Freeman, F. R. (1930), The Strength of Arc-Welded Joints, Proc. Inst. Civil Engineers, Vol. 231, London, England, 1930. Galambos, T. V. (1960), “Influence of Partial Base Fixity on Frame Stability,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 86, No. ST5, May 1960. Galambos, T. V. (1968), Structural Members and Frames, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1968. Galambos, T. V. (1976), Proposed Criteria for Load Resistance Factor Design of Steel Building Structures, Research Report No. 45, Civil Engineering Dept., Washington University, St. Louis, MO, May 1976. Galambos, T. V. (1978), Bulletin No. 27, American Iron and Steel Institute, Washington, D.C., January 1978. Galambos, T. V. (1980), Reliability of Axially Loaded Columns, Washington University, Department of Civil Engineering, St. Louis, MO, December 1980. Galambos, T. V. (ed.) (1988), Guide to Stability Design Criteria for Metal Structures, Structural Stability Research Council, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1988. Galambos, T. V. (1991), “Design of Axially Loaded Compressed Angles,” Structural Stability Research Council Annual Technical Session Proceedings, 1991. Galambos, T.V. and J. Chapuis (1980), LRFD Criteria for Composite Columns and Beam-Columns, Revised Draft, Washington University, Dept. of Civil Engineering, St. Louis, MO, December 1980. Galambos, T. V., B. Ellingwood, J. G. MacGregor, and C. A. Cornell (1982), “Probability-Based Load Criteria: Assessment of Current Design Practice,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 108, No. ST5, May 1982. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
REFERENCES
6 - 261
Galambos, T. V. and M. K. Ravindra (1973), Tentative Load and Resistance Factor Design Criteria for Steel Buildings, Research Report No. 18, Washington University, Dept. of Civil Engineering, St. Louis, MO, September 1973. Galambos, T. V. and M. K. Ravindra (1976), Load and Resistance Factor Design Criteria for Steel Beams, Research Report No. 27, Washington University, Dept. of Civil Engineering, St. Louis, MO, February 1976. Galambos, T. V. and M. K. Ravindra (1978), “Properties of Steel for Use in LRFD,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, September 1978. Gaylord, Edwin H. Jr., Charles N. Gaylord, and James E. Stallmeyer (1992), Design of Steel Structures, 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, 1992. Gibson, G. T. and B. T. Wake (1942), “An Investigation of Welded Connections for Angle Tension Members,” The Welding Journal, American Welding Society, January 1942. Goble, G. G. (1968), “Shear Strength of Thin Flange Composite Specimens,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 5., No. 2, 2nd Quarter, 1968. Grant, J. A., J. W. Fisher, and R. G. Slutter (1977), “Composite Beams with Formed Steel Deck,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 14, No. 1, 1st Quarter, 1977. Hall, D. H. (1981), “Proposed Steel Column Strength Criteria,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 107, No. ST4, April 1981. Hansell, W. C., T. V. Galambos, M. K. Ravindra, and I. M. Viest (1978), “Composite Beam Criteria in LRFD,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, September 1978. Hardash, S. G. and R. Bjorhovde (1985), “New Design Criteria for Gusset Plates in Tension,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 22, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, 1985. Hoglund, T. (1971), Simply Supported Long Thin Plate I-Girders Without Web Stiffeners, Subjected to Distributed Transverse Load, Dept. of Building Statics and Structural Engineering of the Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden, 1971. International Association of Bridge and Structural Engineering (1968), Final Report of the Eighth Congress, Zurich, September 1968. International Organization for Standardization (1974), Guide for the Evaluation of Human Exposure to Whole-Body Vibration, Document ISO 2631, September 1974. Iwankiw, N. (1984), “Note on Beam-Column Moment Amplification Factor,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 21, No. 1, 1st Quarter, 1984. Johnson, D. L. (1985), An Investigation into the Interaction of Flanges and Webs in Wide-Flange Shapes, 1985 Proceeding SSRC Annual Technical Session, Cleveland, OH, Structural Stability Research Council, Lehigh University, Bethlehem, PA. Johnston, B. G. (1939), Pin-Connected Plate Links, 1939 ASCE Transactions. Johnston, B. G. and Deits, “Tests of Miscellaneous Welded Building Connections,” Welding Journal, November 1941. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 262
REFERENCES
Johnston, B. G. and L. F. Green (1940), “Flexible Welded Angle Connections,” The Welding Journal, October 1940. Jones, J. (1940), “Static Tests on Riveted Joints,” Civil Engineering, May 1940. Kanchanalai, T. (1977), The Design and Behavior of Beam-Columns in Unbraced Steel Frames, AISI Project No. 189, Report No. 2, Civil Engineering/Structures Research Lab, University of Texas-Austin, October 1977. Kanchanalai, T. and L. W. Lu (1979), “Analysis and Design of Framed Columns Under Minor Axis Bending,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 16, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, 1979. Keating, P. B. and J. W. Fisher (1985), Review of Fatigue Tests and Design Criteria on Welded Details, NCHRP Project 12-15(50), October 1985, Washington, D.C. Ketter, R. L. (1961), “Further Studies of the Strength of Beam-Columns,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 87, No. ST6, August 1961. Kirby, P. A. and D. A. Nethercot (1979), Design for Structural Stability, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, NY, 1979. Kitipornchai, S. and N. S. Trahair (1980), “Buckling Properties of Monosymmetric I-Beams,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 109, No. ST5, May 1980. Kloppel, K. and T. Seeger (1964), “Dauerversuche Mit Einsohnittigen Hv-Verbindurgen Aus ST37,” Der Stahlbau, Vol. 33, No. 8, August 1964, pp. 225–245 and Vol. 33, No. 11, November 1964, pp. 335–346. Kotecki, D. S. and R. A. Moll (1970), “A Toughness Study of Steel Weld Metal from Self-Shielded, Flux-Cored Electrodes, Part 1,” Welding Journal, Vol. 49, April 1970. Kotecki, D. S. and R. A. Moll (1972), “A Toughness Study of Steel Weld Metal from Self-Shielded, Flux-Cored Electrodes, Part 2,” Welding Journal, Vol. 51, March 1972. Kulak, G. L., J. W. Fisher, and J. H. A. Struik (1987), Guide to Design Criteria for Bolted and Riveted Joints, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY, 1987. Lee, G. D., M. L. Morrell, and R. L. Ketter (1972), “Design of Tapered Members,” WRC Bulletin, No. 173, June 1972. LeMessurier, W. J. (1976), “A Practical Method of Second Order Analysis, Part 1— Pin-Jointed Frames,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 13, No. 4, 4th Quarter, 1976. LeMessurier, W. J. (1977), “A Practical Method of Second Order Analysis, Part 2— Rigid Frames,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 14, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, 1977. LeMessurier, W. J., R. J. McNamara, and J. C. Scrivener (1974), “Approximate Analytical Model for Multi-Story Frames,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 11, No. 4, 4th Quarter, 1974. Lesik, D. F. and D. J. L. Kennedy (1990), “Ultimate Strength of Fillet Welded Connections Loaded in Plane,” Canadian Journal of Civil Engineering, National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa, Canada, Vol. 17, No. 1, 1990. Liapunov, S. (1974), “Ultimate Load Studies of Plane Multi-Story Steel Rigid AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
REFERENCES
6 - 263
Frames,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 100, No. ST8, Proc. Paper 10750, August 1974. Lim, L. C. and L. W. Lu (1970), The Strength and Behavior of Laterally Unsupported Columns, Fritz Engineering Laboratory Report No. 329.5, Lehigh University, Bethlehem, PA, June 1970. Lu, L. W. (1967), “Design of Braced Multi-Story Frames by the Plastic Method,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 4, No. 1, 1st Quarter, 1967. Lu, L. W., E. Ozer, J. H. Daniels, O. S. Okten, and S. Morino (1977), “Strength and Drift Characteristics of Steel Frames,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 103, No. ST11, November 1977. Lyse, I. and Schreiner, “An Investigation of Welded Seat Angle Connections,” Welding Journal, February 1935. Lyse, I. and G. J. Gibson, “Effect of Welded Top Angles on Beam-Column Connections,” Welding Journal, October 1937. Marino, F. J. (1966), “Ponding of Two-Way Roof Systems,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 3, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, 1966. Morrell, M. L. and G. C. Lee (1974), Allowable Stress for Web-Tapered Members, WRC Bulletin 192, Welding Research Council, New York, February 1974. Munse, W. H. and E. Chesson, Jr. (1963), “Riveted and Bolted Joints: Net Section Design,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 89, No. ST1, February 1963. Murray, Thomas M. (1991), “Building Floor Vibrations,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 28, No. 3, 3rd Quarter 1991. NEHRP (1992), NEHRP Recommended Provisions for the Development of Seismic Regulations for New Buildings, Federal Emergency Management Agency Report, FEMA 222, January 1992. Ollgaard, J. G., R. G. Slutter, and J. W. Fisher (1971), “Shear Strength of Stud Shear Connections in Lightweight and Normal Weight Concrete,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 8, No. 2, 2nd Quarter, 1971. Popov, E. P. (1980), “An Update on Eccentric Seismic Bracing,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 17, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, 1980. Popov, E. P. and R. M. Stephen (1977), “Capacity of Columns with Splice Imperfections,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 14, No. 1, 1st Quarter, 1977. Preece, F. R. (1968), AWS-AISC Fillet Weld Study—Longitudinal and Transverse Shear Tests, Testing Engineers, Inc., Los Angeles, May 31, 1968. Rao, N. R. N., M. Lohrmann, and L. Tall (1966), “Effect of Strain Rate on the Yield Stress of Structural Steels,” Journal of Materials, Vol. 1, No. 1, ASTM, March 1966. Ravindra, M. K. and T. V. Galambos (1978), “Load and Resistance Factor Design for Steel,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, September 1978. Research Council on Structural Connections (1988), Load and Resistance Factor AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 264
REFERENCES
Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, 1988, AISC, Chicago, IL. Ricles, J. M. and J. A. Yura (1983), “Strength of Double-Row Bolted Web Connections,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 109, No. ST1, January 1983. Roberts, T. M. (1981), “Slender Plate Girders Subjected to Edge Loading,” Proceedings, Institution of Civil Engineers, Part 2, 71, September 1981, London. Ross, D. A. and W. F. Chen (1976), “Design Criteria for Steel I-Columns Under Axial Load and Biaxial Bending,” Canadian Journal of Civil Engineering, Vol. 3, No. 3, 1976. Salvadori, M. (1956), “Lateral Buckling of Eccentrically Loaded I-Columns,” 1956 ASCE Transactions, Vol. 122-1. Sherman, D. R. (1976), Tentative Criteria for Structural Applications of Steel Tubing and Pipe, American Iron and Steel Institute, Washington, D.C., August 1976. Sherman, D. R. and A. S. Tanavde (1984), Comparative Study of Flexural Capacity of Pipes, Civil Engineering Department Report, University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee, March 1984. Slutter, R. G. and G. C. Driscoll (1965), “Flexural Strength of Steel-Concrete Composite Beams,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 91, No. ST2, April 1965. Springfield, J. (1975), “Design of Column Subject to Biaxial Bending,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 12, No. 3, 3rd Quarter, 1975. Springfield, J. and P. F. Adams (1972), “Aspects of Column Design in Tall Steel Buildings,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 9, No. ST5, May 1972. Stang, A. H. and B. S. Jaffe (1948), Perforated Cover Plates for Steel Columns, Research Paper RP1861, National Bureau of Standards, 1948, Washington, D.C. Steel Structures Painting Council (1989), Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems and Specifications, SSPC, Pittsburgh, PA, 1982. Structural Stability Research Council Task Group 20 (1979), “A Specification for the Design of Steel-Concrete Composite Columns,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 16, No. 4, 4th Quarter, 1979. Summers, Paul A. and Joseph A. Yura (1982), The Behavior of Beams Subjected to Concentrated Loads, Phil M. Ferguson Structural Engineering Laboratory Report No. 82-5, University of Texas, Austin, TX, August 1982. Tebedge, N. and W. F. Chen (1974), “Design Criteria for H-Columns Under Biaxial Loading,” ASCE Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 100, ST3, 1974. Terashima, H. and P. H. M. Hart (1984), “Effect of Aluminum on Carbon, Manganese, Niobium Steel Submerged Arc Weld Metal Properties,” Welding Journal, Vol. 63, June 1984. Tide, R. H. R. (1985), Reasonable Column Design Equations, Annual Technical Session of Structural Stability Research Council, April 16–17, 1985, Cleveland, OH, SSRC, Lehigh University, Bethlehem, PA. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
REFERENCES
6 - 265
Timoshenko, S. P. and J. M. Gere (1961), Theory of Elastic Stability, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1961. Wilson, W. M. (1934), The Bearing Value of Rollers, Bulletin No. 263, University of Illinois Engineering Experiment Station, Urbana, IL, 1934. Winter, G. (1958), “Lateral Bracing of Columns and Beams,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 84, No. ST2, March 1958. Winter, G. (1970), Commentary on the 1968 Edition of Light Gage Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual, American Iron and Steel Institute, Washington, D.C., 1970. Wood, B. R., D. Beaulieu, and P. F. Adams (1976), “Column Design by P-Delta Method,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 102, No. ST2, February 1976. Yura, J. A. (1971), “The Effective Length of Columns in Unbraced Frames,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 8, No. 2, April 1971. Yura, J. A., et al. (1978), “The Bending Resistance of Steel Beams,” Journal of the Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 104, No. ST9, September 1978. Yura, Joseph A. (1988), Elements for Teaching Load & Resistance Factor Design, AISC, Chicago, IL, April 1988. Zandonini, R. (1985), “Stability of Compact Built-Up Struts: Experimental Investigation and Numerical Simulation,” (in Italian) Construzioni Metalliche, No. 4, 1985. Zhou, S. P. and W. F. Chen (1985), “Design Criteria for Box Columns Under Biaxial Loading,” Journal of Structural Engineering, ASCE, Vol. 111, No. ST12, December 1985.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 266
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 267
Glossary Alignment chart for columns. A nomograph for determining the effective length factor K for some types of columns Amplification factor. A multiplier of the value of moment or deflection in the unbraced length of an axially loaded member to reflect the secondary values generated by the eccentricity of the applied axial load within the member Aspect ratio. In any rectangular configuration, the ratio of the lengths of the sides Batten plate. A plate element used to join two parallel components of a built-up column, girder, or strut rigidly connected to the parallel components and designed to transmit shear between them Beam. A structural member whose primary function is to carry loads transverse to its longitudinal axis Beam-column. A structural member whose primary function is to carry loads both transverse and parallel to its longitudinal axis Bent. A plane framework of beam or truss members which support loads and the columns which support these members Biaxial bending. Simultaneous bending of a member about two perpendicular axes Bifurcation. The phenomenon whereby a perfectly straight member under compression may either assume a deflected position or may remain undeflected, or a beam under flexure may either deflect and twist out of plane or remain in its in-plane deflected position Braced frame. A frame in which the resistance to lateral load or frame instability is primarily provided by a diagonal, a K brace, or other auxiliary system of bracing Brittle fracture. Abrupt cleavage with little or no prior ductile deformation Buckling load. The load at which a perfectly straight member under compression assumes a deflected position Built-up member. A member made of structural metal elements that are welded, bolted, or riveted together Cladding. The exterior covering of the structural components of a building Cold-formed members. Structural members formed from steel without the application of heat Column. A structural member whose primary function is to carry loads parallel to its longitudinal axis Column curve. A curve expressing the relationship between an axial column strength and slenderness ratio Combined mechanism. A mechanism determined by plastic analysis procedure which combines elementary beam, panel, and joint mechanisms Compact section. Compact sections are capable of developing a fully plastic stress distribution and possess rotation capacity of approximately three before the onset of local buckling AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 268
GLOSSARY
Composite beam. A steel beam structurally connected to a concrete slab so that the beam and slab respond to loads as a unit. See also Concrete-encased beam Concrete-encased beam. A beam totally encased in concrete cast integrally with the slab Connection. Combination of joints used to transmit forces between two or more members. Categorized by the type and amount of force transferred (moment, shear, end reaction). See also Splices Critical load. The load at which bifurcation occurs as determined by a theoretical stability analysis Curvature. The rotation per unit length due to bending Design documents. See Structural design documents Design strength. Resistance (force, moment, stress, as appropriate) provided by element or connection; the product of the nominal strength and the resistance factor Diagonal bracing. Inclined structural members carrying primarily axial load employed to enable a structural frame to act as a truss to resist horizontal loads Diaphragm. Floor slab, metal wall, or roof panel possessing a large in-plane shear stiffness and strength adequate to transmit horizontal forces to resisting systems Diaphragm action. The in-plane action of a floor system (also roofs and walls) such that all columns framing into the floor from above and below are maintained in their same position relative to each other Double concentrated forces. Two equal and opposite forces which form a couple on the same side of the loaded member Double curvature. A bending condition in which end moments on a member cause the member to assume an S shape Drift. Lateral deflection of a building Drift index. The ratio of lateral deflection to the height of the building Ductility factor. The ratio of the total deformation at maximum load to the elastic-limit deformation Effective length. The equivalent length KL used in compression formulas and determined by a bifurcation analysis Effective length factor K. The ratio between the effective length and the unbraced length of the member measured between the centers of gravity of the bracing members Effective moment of inertia. The moment of inertia of the cross section of a member that remains elastic when partial plastification of the cross section takes place, usually under the combination of residual stress and applied stress. Also, the moment of inertia based on effective widths of elements that buckle locally. Also, the moment of inertia used in the design of partially composite members Effective stiffness. The stiffness of a member computed using the effective moment of inertia of its cross section Effective width. The reduced width of a plate or slab which, with an assumed uniform stress distribution, produces the same effect on the behavior of a structural member as the actual plate width with its nonuniform stress distribution Elastic analysis. Determination of load effects (force, moment, stress, as appropriate) on members and connections based on the assumption that material deformation disappears on removal of the force that produced it Elastic-perfectly plastic. A material which has an idealized stress-strain curve that varies linearly from the point of zero strain and zero stress up to the yield point AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
GLOSSARY
6 - 269
of the material, and then increases in strain at the value of the yield stress without any further increases in stress Embedment. A steel component cast in a concrete structure which is used to transmit externally applied loads to the concrete structure by means of bearing, shear, bond, friction, or any combination thereof. The embedment may be fabricated of structural-steel plates, shapes, bars, bolts, pipe, studs, concrete reinforcing bars, shear connectors, or any combination thereof Encased steel structure. A steel-framed structure in which all of the individual frame members are completely encased in cast-in-place concrete Euler formula. The mathematical relationship expressing the value of the Euler load in terms of the modulus of elasticity, the moment of inertia of the cross section, and the length of a column Euler load. The critical load of a perfectly straight, centrally loaded pin-ended column Eyebar. A particular type of pin-connected tension member of uniform thickness with forged or flame cut head of greater width than the body proportioned to provide approximately equal strength in the head and body Factored load. The product of the nominal load and a load factor Fastener. Generic term for welds, bolts, rivets, or other connecting device Fatigue. A fracture phenomenon resulting from a fluctuating stress cycle First-order analysis. Analysis based on first-order deformations in which equilibrium conditions are formulated on the undeformed structure Flame-cut plate. A plate in which the longitudinal edges have been prepared by oxygen cutting from a larger plate Flat width. For a rectangular tube, the nominal width minus twice the outside corner radius. In absence of knowledge of the corner radius, the flat width may be taken as the total section width minus three times the thickness Flexible connection. A connection permitting a portion, but not all, of the simple beam rotation of a member end Floor system. The system of structural components separating the stories of a building Force. Resultant of distribution of stress over a prescribed area. A reaction that develops in a member as a result of load (formerly called total stress or stress). Generic term signifying axial loads, bending moment, torques, and shears Fracture toughness. Measurement of the ability to absorb energy without fracture. Generally determined by impact loading of specimens containing a notch having a prescribed geometry Frame buckling. A condition under which bifurcation may occur in a frame Frame instability. A condition under which a frame deforms with increasing lateral deflection under a system of increasing applied monotonic loads until a maximum value of the load called the stability limit is reached, after which the frame will continue to deflect without further increase in load Fully composite beam. A composite beam with sufficient shear connectors to develop the full flexural strength of the composite section High-cycle fatigue. Failure resulting from more than 20,000 applications of cyclic stress Hybrid beam. A fabricated steel beam composed of flanges with a greater yield strength than that of the web. Whenever the maximum flange stress is less than or equal to the web yield stress the girder is considered homogeneous Hysteresis loop. A plot of force versus displacement of a structure or member subjected to reversed, repeated load into the inelastic range, in which the path followed AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 270
GLOSSARY
during release and removal of load is different from the path for the addition of load over the same range of displacement Inclusions. Nonmetallic material entrapped in otherwise sound metal Incomplete fusion. Lack of union by melting of filler and base metal over entire prescribed area Inelastic action. Material deformation that does not disappear on removal of the force that produced it Instability. A condition reached in the loading of an element or structure in which continued deformation results in a decrease of load-resisting capacity Joint. Area where two or more ends, surfaces, or edges are attached. Categorized by type of fastener or weld used and method of force transfer K bracing. A system of struts used in a braced frame in which the pattern of the struts resembles the letter K, either normal or on its side Lamellar tearing. Separation in highly restrained base metal caused by through-thickness strains induced by shrinkage of adjacent weld metal Lateral bracing member. A member utilized individually or as a component of a lateral bracing system to prevent buckling of members or elements and/or to resist lateral loads Lateral (or lateral-torsional) buckling. Buckling of a member involving lateral deflection and twist Leaning column. Gravity-loaded column where connections to the frame (simple connections) do not provide resistance to lateral loads Limit state. A condition in which a structure or component becomes unfit for service and is judged either to be no longer useful for its intended function (serviceability limit state) or to be unsafe (strength limit state) Limit states. Limits of structural usefulness, such as brittle fracture, plastic collapse, excessive deformation, durability, fatigue, instability, and serviceability Load factor. A factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the actual load from the nominal value and for uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load into a load effect Loads. Forces or other actions that arise on structural systems from the weight of all permanent construction, occupants and their possessions, environmental effects, differential settlement, and restrained dimensional changes. Permanent loads are those loads in which variations in time are rare or of small magnitude. All other loads are variable loads. See Nominal loads LRFD (Load and Resistance Factor Design). A method of proportioning structural components (members, connectors, connecting elements, and assemblages) such that no applicable limit state is exceeded when the structure is subjected to all appropriate load combinations Local buckling. The buckling of a compression element which may precipitate the failure of the whole member Low-cycle fatigue. Fracture resulting from a relatively high-stress range resulting in a relatively small number of cycles to failure Lower bound load. A load computed on the basis of an assumed equilibrium moment diagram in which the moments are not greater than Mp that is less than or at best equal to the true ultimate load Mechanism. An articulated system able to deform without an increase in load, used in the special sense that the linkage may include real hinges or plastic hinges, or both Mechanism method. A method of plastic analysis in which equilibrium between AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
GLOSSARY
6 - 271
external forces and internal plastic hinges is calculated on the basis of an assumed mechanism. The failure load so determined is an upper bound Nominal loads. The magnitudes of the loads specified by the applicable code Nominal strength. The capacity of a structure or component to resist the effects of loads, as determined by computations using specified material strengths and dimensions and formulas derived from accepted principles of structural mechanics or by field tests or laboratory tests of scaled models, allowing for modeling effects and differences between laboratory and field conditions Noncompact section. Noncompact sections can develop the yield stress in compression elements before local buckling occurs, but will not resist inelastic local buckling at strain levels required for a fully plastic stress distribution P-Delta effect. Secondary effect of column axial loads and lateral deflection on the moments in members Panel zone. The zone in a beam-to-column connection that transmits moment by a shear panel Partially composite beam. A composite beam for which the shear strength of shear connectors governs the flexural strength Plane frame. A structural system assumed for the purpose of analysis and design to be two-dimensional Plastic analysis. Determination of load effects (force, moment, stress, as appropriate) on members and connections based on the assumption of rigid-plastic behavior, i.e., that equilibrium is satisfied throughout the structure and yield is not exceeded anywhere. Second order effects may need to be considered Plastic design section. The cross section of a member which can maintain a full plastic moment through large rotations so that a mechanism can develop; the section suitable for plastic design Plastic hinge. A yielded zone which forms in a structural member when the plastic moment is attained. The beam is assumed to rotate as if hinged, except that it is restrained by the plastic moment Mp Plastic-limit load. The maximum load that is attained when a sufficient number of yield zones have formed to permit the structure to deform plastically without further increase in load. It is the largest load a structure will support, when perfect plasticity is assumed and when such factors as instability, second-order effects, strain hardening, and fracture are neglected Plastic mechanism. See Mechanism Plastic modulus. The section modules of resistance to bending of a completely yielded cross section. It is the combined static moment about the neutral axis of the cross-sectional areas above and below that axis Plastic moment. The resisting moment of a fully yielded cross section Plastic strain. The difference between total strain and elastic strain Plastic zone. The yielded region of a member Plastification. The process of successive yielding of fibers in the cross section of a member as bending moment is increased Plate girder. A built-up structural beam Post-buckling strength. The load that can be carried by an element, member, or frame after buckling Primary stress. A primary stress is any normal stress or shear stress developed by an imposed loading which is necessary to satisfy the laws of equilibrium of external and internal forces, moments, and torques. A primary stress is not self-limiting. Redistribution of moment. A process which results in the successive formation of AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 272
GLOSSARY
plastic hinges so that less highly stressed portions of a structure may carry increased moments Required strength. Load effect (force, moment, stress, as appropriate) acting on element or connection determined by structural analysis from the factored loads (using most appropriate critical load combinations) Residual stress. The stresses that remain in an unloaded member after it has been formed into a finished product. (Examples of such stresses include, but are not limited to, those induced by cold bending, cooling after rolling, or welding.) Resistance. The capacity of a structure or component to resist the effects of loads. It is determined by computations using specified material strengths, dimensions and formulas derived from accepted principles of structural mechanics, or by field tests or laboratory tests of scaled models, allowing for modeling effects and differences between laboratory and field conditions. Resistance is a generic term that includes both strength and serviceability limit states Resistance factor. A factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the actual strength from the nominal value and the manner and consequences of failure Rigid frame. A structure in which connections maintain the angular relationship between beam and column members under load Root of the flange. Location on the web of the corner radius termination point or the toe of the flange-to-web weld. Measured as the k distance from the far side of the flange Rotation capacity. The incremental angular rotation that a given shape can accept prior to local failure defined as R = (θu / θp) − 1 where θu is the overall rotation attained at the factored load state and θp is the idealized rotation corresponding to elastic theory applied to the case of M = Mp St. Venant torsion. That portion of the torsion in a member that induces only shear stresses in the member Second-order analysis. Analysis based on second-order deformations, in which equilibrium conditions are formulated on the deformed structure Service load. Load expected to be supported by the structure under normal usage; often taken as the nominal load Serviceability limit state. Limiting condition affecting the ability of a structure to preserve its appearance, maintainability, durability, or the comfort of its occupants or function of machinery under normal usage Shape factor. The ratio of the plastic moment to the yield moment, or the ratio of the plastic modulus to the section modulus for a cross section Shear friction. Friction between the embedment and the concrete that transmits shear loads. The relative displacement in the plane of the shear load is considered to be resisted by shear-friction anchors located perpendicular to the plane of the shear load Shear lugs. Plates, welded studs, bolts, and other steel shapes that are embedded in the concrete and located transverse to the direction of the shear force and that transmit shear loads, introduced into the concrete by local bearing at the shear lug-concrete interface Shear wall. A wall that in its own plane resists shear forces resulting from applied wind, earthquake, or other transverse loads or provides frame stability. Also called a structural wall Sidesway. The lateral movement of a structure under the action of lateral loads, unsymmetrical vertical loads, or unsymmetrical properties of the structure AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
GLOSSARY
6 - 273
Sidesway buckling. The buckling mode of a multistory frame precipitated by the relative lateral displacements of joints, leading to failure by sidesway of the frame Simple plastic theory. See Plastic design Single curvature. A deformed shape of a member having one smooth continuous arc, as opposed to double curvature which contains a reversal Slender-element section. The cross section of a member which will experience local buckling in the elastic range Slenderness ratio. The ratio of the effective length of a column to the radius of gyration of the column, both with respect to the same axis of bending Slip-critical joint. A bolted joint in which the slip resistance of the connection is required Space frame. A three-dimensional structural framework (as contrasted to a plane frame) Splice. The connection between two structural elements joined at their ends to form a single, longer element Stability-limit load. Maximum (theoretical) load a structure can support when secondorder instability effects are included Stepped column. A column with changes from one cross section to another occurring at abrupt points within the length of the column Stiffener. A member, usually an angle or plate, attached to a plate or web of a beam or girder to distribute load, to transfer shear, or to prevent buckling of the member to which it is attached Stiffness. The resistance to deformation of a member or structure measured by the ratio of the applied force to the corresponding displacement Story drift. The difference in horizontal deflection at the top and bottom of a story Strain hardening. Phenomenon wherein ductile steel, after undergoing considerable deformation at or just above yield point, exhibits the capacity to resist substantially higher loading than that which caused initial yielding Strain-hardening strain. For structural steels that have a flat (plastic) region in the stress-strain relationship, the value of the strain at the onset of strain hardening Strength design. A method of proportioning structural members using load factors and resistance factors such that no applicable limit state is exceeded (also called load and resistance factor design) Strength limit state. Limiting condition affecting the safety of the structure, in which the ultimate load-carrying capacity is reached Stress. Force per unit area Stress concentration. Localized stress considerably higher than average (even in uniformly loaded cross sections of uniform thickness) due to abrupt changes in geometry or localized loading Strong axis. The major principal axis of a cross section Structural design documents. Documents prepared by the designer (plans, design details, and job specifications) Structural system. An assemblage of load-carrying components which are joined together to provide regular interaction or interdependence Stub column. A short compression-test specimen, long enough for use in measuring the stress-strain relationship for the complete cross section, but short enough to avoid buckling as a column in the elastic and plastic ranges Subassemblage. A truncated portion of a structural frame Supported frame. A frame which depends upon adjacent braced or unbraced frames for resistance to lateral load or frame instability. (This transfer of load is AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 274
GLOSSARY
frequently provided by the floor or roof system through diaphragm action or by horizontal cross bracing in the roof.) Tangent modulus. At any given stress level, the slope of the stress-strain curve of a material in the inelastic range as determined by the compression test of a small specimen under controlled conditions Temporary structure. A general term for anything that is built or constructed (usually to carry construction loads) that will eventually be removed before or after completion of construction and does not become part of the permanent structural system Tensile strength. The maximum tensile stress that a material is capable of sustaining Tension field action. The behavior of a plate girder panel under shear force in which diagonal tensile stresses develop in the web and compressive forces develop in the transverse stiffeners in a manner analogous to a Pratt truss Toe of the fillet. Termination point of fillet weld or of rolled section fillet Torque-tension relationship. Term applied to the wrench torque required to produce specified pre-tension in high-strength bolts Turn-of-nut method. Procedure whereby the specified pre-tension in high-strength bolts is controlled by rotation of the wrench a predetermined amount after the nut has been tightened to a snug fit Unbraced frame. A frame in which the resistance to lateral load is provided by the bending resistance of frame members and their connections Unbraced length. The distance between braced points of a member, measured between the centers of gravity of the bracing members Undercut. A notch resulting from the melting and removal of base metal at the edge of a weld Universal-mill plate. A plate in which the longitudinal edges have been formed by a rolling process during manufacture. Often abbreviated as UM plate Upper bound load. A load computed on the basis of an assumed mechanism which will always be at best equal to or greater than the true ultimate load Vertical bracing system. A system of shear walls, braced frames, or both, extending through one or more floors of a building Von Mises yield criterion. A theory which states that inelastic action at any point in a body under any combination of stresses begins only when the strain energy of distortion per unit volume absorbed at the point is equal to the strain energy of distortion absorbed per unit volume at any point in a simple tensile bar stressed to the elastic limit under a state of uniaxial stress. It is often called the maximum strain-energy-of-distortion theory. Accordingly, shear yield occurs at 0.58 times the yield strength Warping torsion. That portion of the total resistance to torsion that is provided by resistance to warping of the cross section Weak axis. The minor principal axis of a cross section Weathering steel. A type of high-strength, low-alloy steel which can be used in normal environments (not marine) and outdoor exposures without protective paint covering. This steel develops a tight adherent rust at a decreasing rate with respect to time Web buckling. The buckling of a web plate Web crippling. The local failure of a web plate in the immediate vicinity of a concentrated load or reaction Working load. Also called service load. The actual load assumed to be acting on the structure AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
GLOSSARY
6 - 275
Yield moment. In a member subjected to bending, the moment at which an outer fiber first attains the yield stress Yield plateau. The portion of the stress-strain curve for uniaxial tension or compression in which the stress remains essentially constant during a period of substantially increased strain Yield point. The first stress in a material at which an increase in strain occurs without an increase in stress, the yield point less than the maximum attainable stress Yield strength. The stress at which a material exhibits a specified limiting deviation from the proportionality of stress to strain. Deviation expressed in terms of strain Yield stress. Yield point, yield strength, or yield stress level as defined Yield-stress level. The average stress during yielding in the plastic range, the stress determined in a tension test when the strain reaches 0.005 in. per in.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6-276
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 277
Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members December 1, 1993
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100, Chicago, IL 60601-2001
6 - 278
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
6 - 279
PREFACE
The intention of the AISC Specification is to cover the common everyday design criteria in routine design office usage. It is not feasible to also cover the many special and unique problems encountered within the full range of structural design practice. This separate Specification and Commentary addresses one such topic—single-angle members—to provide needed design guidance for this more complex structural shape under various load and support conditions. The single-angle design criteria were developed through a consensus process by the AISC Task Committee 116 on Single-Angle Members: Donald R. Sherman, Chairman Hansraj G. Ashar Wai-Fah Chen Raymond D. Ciatto Mohamed Elgaaly Theodore V. Galambos Thomas G. Longlais LeRoy A. Lutz William A. Milek Raymond H. R. Tide Nestor R. Iwankiw, Secretary The assistance of the Structural Stability Research Council Task Group on Single Angles in the preparation and review of this document is acknowledged. The full AISC Committee on Specifications has reviewed and endorsed this Specification. A non-mandatory Commentary provides background for the Specification provisions and the user is encouraged to consult it. The principal changes in this edition include: • establishing upper limit of single-angle flexural strength at 1.25 of the yield moment • increasing resistance factor for compression to 0.90 • removing flexural-torsional buckling consideration for compression members • considering the sense of flexural stresses in the combined force interaction check The reader is cautioned that professional judgment must be exercised when data or recommendations in this Specification are applied. The publication of the material contained herein is not intended as a representation or warranty on the part of the American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.—or any other person named herein—that this information is suitable for general or particular use, or freedom from infringement of any patent or patents. Anyone making use of this information assumes all liability arising from such use. The design of structures is within the scope of expertise of a competent licensed structural engineer, architect, or other licensed professional for the application of principles to a particular structure. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 280
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
6 - 281
Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members December 1, 1993
1.
SCOPE This document contains Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) criteria for hot-rolled, single-angle members with equal and unequal legs in tension, shear, compression, flexure, and for combined forces. It is intended to be compatible with, and a supplement to, the 1993 AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings—Load and Resistance Factor Design (AISC LRFD) and repeats some common criteria for ease of reference. For design purposes, the conservative simplifications and approximations in the Specification provisions for single angles are permitted to be refined through a more precise analysis. As an alternative to this Specification, the 1989 AISC Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members is permitted. The Specification for single-angle design supersedes any comparable but more general requirements of the AISC LRFD. All other design, fabrication, and erection provisions not directly covered by this document shall be in compliance with the AISC LRFD. In the absence of a governing building code, the factored load combinations in AISC LRFD Section A4 shall be used to determine the required strength. For design of slender, cold-formed steel angles, the current AISI LRFD Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members is applicable.
2.
TENSION The tensile design strength φtPn shall be the lower value obtained according to the limit states of yielding, φt = 0.9, Pn = Fy Ag, and fracture, φt = 0.75, Pn = Fu Ae. a. For members connected by bolting, the net area and effective net area shall be determined from AISC LRFD Specification Sections B1 to B3 inclusive. b. When the load is transmitted by longitudinal welds only or a combination of AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 282
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
longitudinal and transverse welds through just one leg of the angle, the effective net area Ae shall be: Ae = AgU
(2-1)
where Ag = gross area of member _ x U = 1 − ≤ 0.9 l _ x = connection eccentricity l = length of connection in the direction of loading c. When a load is transmitted by transverse weld through just one leg of the angle, Ae is the area of the connected leg and U = 1. For members whose design is based on tension, the slenderness ratio l / r preferably should not exceed 300. Members in which the design is dictated by tension loading, but which may be subject to some compression under other load conditions, need not satisfy the compression slenderness limits. 3.
SHEAR For the limit state of yielding in shear, the shear stress, fuv, due to flexure and torsion shall not exceed: fuv ≤ φv0.6Fy φv = 0.9
4.
(3-1)
COMPRESSION The design strength of compression members shall be φcPn where φc = 0.90 Pn = AgFcr a. For λc √ Q ≤ 1.5: 2
Fcr = Q (0.658Qλc) Fy
(4-1)
0.877 Fcr = 2 Fy λc
(4-2)
b. For λc √ Q ≥ 1.5:
λc =
Kl rπ
√
Fy E
Fy = specified minimum yield stress of steel Q = reduction factor for local buckling AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
6 - 283
The reduction factor Q shall be:
when
b ≤ 0.446 t
√
E : Fy Q = 1.0
when 0.446
√
√
E b < < 0.910 Fy t
E : Fy
Q = 1.34 − 0.761
when
b ≥ 0.910 t
√
(4-3a)
b t
√
Fy E
(4-3b)
E : Fy Q=
0.534E
b Fy t b = full width of longest angle leg t = thickness of angle
2
(4-3c)
For members whose design is based on compressive force, the largest effective slenderness ratio preferably should not exceed 200. 5.
FLEXURE The flexure design strengths of Section 5.1 shall be used as indicated in Sections 5.2 and 5.3
5.1. Flexural Design Strength The flexural design strength shall be limited to the minimum value φbMn determined from Sections 5.1.1, 5.1.2, and 5.1.3, as applicable, with φb = 0.9. 5.1.1. For the limit state of local buckling when the tip of an angle leg is in compression: when
b ≤ 0.382 t
√
E : Fy Mn = 1.25Fy Sc
when 0.382
√
E b < ≤ 0.446 Fy t
√
E : Fy
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(5-1a)
6 - 284
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
b/t Mn = Fy Sc 1.25 − 1.49 − 1 E 0.382 Fy
√
when
b > 0.446 t
√
(5-1b)
E : Fy Mn = QFy Sc
(5-1c)
where b = full width of angle leg with tip in compression Q = reduction factor per Equations 4-3a, b, and c Sc = elastic section modulus to the tip in compression relative to axis of bending E = modulus of elasticity 5.1.2. For the limit state of yielding when the tip of an angle leg is in tension Mn = 1.25My
(5-2)
where My = yield moment about the axis of bending 5.1.3. For the limit state of lateral-torsional buckling: when Mob ≤ My : Mn = [0.92 − 0.17Mob / My]Mob
(5-3a)
when Mob > My : My / Mob ]My ≤ 1.25My Mn = [1.58 − 0.83 √
(5-3b)
where Mob = elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, from Section 5.2 or 5.3 as applicable 5.2. Bending about Geometric Axes 5.2.1. a. Angle bending members with lateral-torsion restraint along the length shall be designed on the basis of geometric axis bending with the nominal flexural strength Mn limited to the provisions of Sections 5.1.1 and 5.1.2. b. For equal-leg angles if the lateral-torsional restraint is only at the point of maximum moment, the required moment shall be limited to φbMn per Section 5.1. My shall be computed using the geometric axis section modulus and Mob shall be substituted by using 1.25 times Mob computed from Equation 5-4. 5.2.2. Equal-leg angle members without lateral-torsional restraint subjected to flexure applied about one of the geometric axes are permitted to be designed considering only geometric axis bending provided: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
6 - 285
a. The yield moment shall be based on use of 0.80 of the geometric axis section modulus. b. For the angle-leg tips in compression, the nominal flexural strength Mn shall be determined by the provisions in Section 5.1.1 and in Section 5.1.3, where Mob =
0.66Eb4tCb [√ 1 + 0.78(lt / b2)2 − 1] l2
(5-4)
l = unbraced length 12.5Mmax ≤ 1.5 Cb = 2.5Mmax + 3MA + 4MB + 3MC where Mmax = absolute value of maximum moment in the unbraced beam segment MA = absolute value of moment at quarter point of the unbraced beam segment MB = absolute value of moment at centerline of the unbraced beam segment MC = absolute value of moment at three-quarter point of the unbraced beam segment c. For the angle-leg tips in tension, the nominal flexural strength shall be determined according to Section 5.1.2. 5.2.3. Unequal-leg angle members without lateral-torsional restraint subjected to bending about one of the geometric axes shall be designed using Section 5.3. 5.3. Bending about Principal Axes Angles without lateral-torsional restraint shall be designed considering principal-axis bending, except for the alternative of Section 5.2.2, if appropriate. Bending about both of the principal axes shall be evaluated as required in Section 6. 5.3.1. Equal-leg angles: a. Major-axis bending: The nominal flexural strength Mn about the major principal axis shall be determined by the provisions in Section 5.1.1 and in Section 5.1.3, where Mob = Cb
0.46Eb2t2 l
(5-5)
b. Minor-axis bending: The nominal design strength Mn about the minor principal axis shall AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 286
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
be determined by Section 5.1.1 when the leg tips are in compression, and by Section 5.1.2 when the leg tips are in tension. 5.3.2. Unequal-leg angles: a. Major-axis bending: The nominal flexural strength Mn about the major principal axis shall be determined by the provisions in Section 5.1.1 for the compression leg and in Section 5.1.3, where Mob = 4.9E
Iz Cb [√ β2w + 0.052(lt / rz)2 + βw] l2
(5-6)
Iz = minor principal axis moment of inertia rz = radius of gyration for minor principal axis 1 βw = ∫ z(w2 + z2)dA − 2zo, special section property for Iw A unequal-leg angles, positive for short leg in compression and negative for long leg in compression (see Commentary for values for common angle sizes). If the long leg is in compression anywhere along the unbraced length of the member, the negative value of βw shall be used. zo = coordinate along z axis of the shear center with respect to centroid Iw = moment of inertia for major principal axis b. Minor-axis bending: The nominal design strength Mn about the minor principal axis shall be determined by Section 5.1.1 when leg tips are in compression and by Section 5.1.2 when the leg tips are in tension. 6.
COMBINED FORCES The interaction equation shall be evaluated for the principal bending axes either by addition of all the maximum axial and flexural terms, or by considering the sense of the associated flexural stresses at the critical points of the cross section, the flexural terms are either added to or subtracted from the axial load term.
6.1. Members in Flexure and Axial Compression 6.1.1. The interaction of flexure and axial compression applicable to specific locations on the cross section shall be limited by Equations 6-1a and 6-1b: For
Pu ≥ 0.2 φPn Muz Pu 8 Muw φP + 9 φ M + φ M ≤ 1.0 b nz b nw n AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(6-1a)
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
For
6 - 287
Pu ≤ 0.2 φPn
Muw Muz Pu (6-1b) 2φP + φ M + φ M ≤ 1.0 b nz n b nw Pu = required compressive strength Pn = nominal compressive strength determined in accordance with Section 4 Mu = required flexural strength Mn = nominal flexural strength for tension or compression in accordance with Section 5, as appropriate. Use section modulus for specific location in the cross section and consider the type of stress. φ = φc = resistance factor for compression = 0.90 φb = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90 w = subscript relating symbol to major-axis bending z = subscript relating symbol to minor-axis bending In Equations 6-1a and 6-1b when Mn represents the flexural strength of the compression side, the corresponding Mu shall be multiplied by B1. B1 =
Cm ≥ 1.0 Pu 1− Pe1
(6-2)
Cm = bending coefficient defined in AISC LRFD Pe1 = elastic buckling load for the braced frame defined in AISC LRFD 6.1.2. For members constrained to bend about a geometric axis with nominal flexural strength determined per Section 5.2.1, the radius of gyration r for Pe1 shall be taken as the geometric axis value. The bending terms for the principal axes in Equations 6-1a and 6-1b shall be replaced by a single geometric axis term. 6.1.3. Alternatively, for equal-leg angles without lateral-torsional restraint along the length and with bending applied about one of the geometric axes, the provisions of Section 5.2.2 are permitted for the required and design bending strength. If Section 5.2.2 is used for Mn, the radius of gyration about the axis of bending r for Pe1 shall be taken as the geometric axis value of r divided by 1.35 in the absence of a more detailed analysis. The bending terms for the principal axes in Equations 6-1a and 6-1b shall be replaced by a single geometric axis term. 6.2. Members in Flexure and Axial Tension The interaction of flexure and axial tension shall be limited by Equations 6-1a and 6-1b where Pu = required tensile strength Pn = nominal tensile strength determined in accordance with Section 2 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 288
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
Mu = required flexural strength Mn = nominal flexural strength for tension or compression in accordance with Section 5, as appropriate. Use section modulus for specific location in the cross section and consider the type of stress. φ = φt = resistance factor for tension = 0.90 φb = resistance factor for flexure = 0.90 For members subject to bending about a geometric axis, the required bending strength evaluation shall be in accordance with Sections 6.1.2 and 6.1.3. Second-order effects due to axial tension and bending interaction are permitted to be considered in the determination of Mu for use in Formulas 6-1a and 6-1b. In lieu of using Formulas 6-1a and 6-1b, a more detailed analysis of the interaction of flexure and tension is permitted.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
6 - 289
Commentary on the Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single-Angle Members December 1, 1993
INTRODUCTION This Specification is intended to be complete for normal design usage in conjunction with the main 1993 AISC LRFD Specification and Commentary. This Commentary furnishes background information and references for the benefit of the engineer seeking further understanding of the derivation and limits of the specification. The Specification and Commentary are intended for use by design professionals with demonstrated engineering competence. C2. TENSION The criteria for the design of tension members in AISC LRFD Specification Section D1 have been adopted for angles with bolted connections. However, recognizing the effect of shear lag when the connection is welded, the criteria in Section B3 of the AISC LRFD Specification have been applied. The advisory upper slenderness limits are not due to strength considerations but are based on professional judgment and practical considerations of economics, ease of handling, and transportability. The radius of gyration about the z axis will produce the maximum l / r and, except for very unusual support conditions, the maximum Kl / r. Since the advisory slenderness limit for compression members is less than for tension members, an accommodation has been made for members with Kl / r > 200 that are always in tension, except for unusual load conditions which produce a small compression force. C3. SHEAR Shear stress due to factored loads in a single-angle member are the result of the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 290
COMMENTARY
gradient in the bending moment along the length (flexural shear) and the torsional moment. The maximum elastic stress due to flexural shear may be computed by fv =
1.5Vb bt
(C3-1)
where Vb = component of the shear force parallel to the angle leg with length b and thickness t, kips The stress, which is constant through the thickness, should be determined for both legs to determine the maximum. The 1.5 factor is the calculated elastic value for equal-leg angles loaded along one of the principal axes. For equal-leg angles loaded along one of the geometric axes (laterally braced or unbraced) the factor is 1.35. Constants between these limits may be calculated conservatively from Vb Q / It to determine the maximum stress at the neutral axis. Alternatively, if only flexural shear is considered, a uniform flexural shear stress in the leg of Vb / bt may be used due to inelastic material behavior and stress redistribution. If the angle is not laterally braced against twist, a torsional moment is produced equal to the applied transverse load times the perpendicular distance e to the shear center, which is at the heel of the angle cross section. Torsional moments are resisted by two types of shear behavior: pure torsion (St. Venant) and warping torsion (AISC, 1983). If the boundary conditions are such that the cross section is free to warp, the applied torsional moment MT is resisted by pure shear stresses as shown in Figure C3.1a. Except near the ends of the legs, these stresses are constant along the length of the leg, and the maximum value can be approximated by fv = MT t / J =
3MT At
(C3-2)
e
P MT = Pe
(a) Pure torsion
(b) In-plane warping
(c) Across-thickness warping
Fig. C.3.1. Shear stresses due to torsion. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
6 - 291
where J = torsional constant (approximated by Σbt3 / 3 when precomputed value unavailable) A = angle cross-sectional area At section where warping is restrained, the torsional moment is resisted by warping shear stresses of two types (Gjelsvik, 1981). One type is in-plane (contour) as shown in Figure C3.1b, which varies from zero at the toe to a maximum at the heel of the angle. The other type is across the thickness and is sometimes referred to as secondary warping shear. As indicated in Figure C3.1c, it varies from zero at the heel to a maximum at the toe. In an angle with typical boundary conditions and unrestrained load point, the torsional moment produces all three types of shear stresses (pure, in-plane warping, and secondary warping) in varying proportions along its length. The total applied moment is resisted by a combination of three types of internal moments that differ in relative proportions according to the distance from the boundary condition. Using typical angle dimensions, it can be shown that the two warping shears are approximately the same order of magnitude and are less than 20 percent of the pure shear stress for the same torsional moment. Therefore, it is conservative to compute the torsional shear stress using the pure shear equation and total applied torsional moment MT as if no warping restraint were present. This stress is added directly to the flexural shear stress to produce a maximum surface shear stress near the mid-length of a leg. Since this sum is a local maximum that does not extend through the thickness, applying the limit of φv0.6Fy adds another degree of conservatism relative to the design of other structural shapes. In general, torsional moments from laterally unrestrained transverse loads also produce warping normal stresses that are superimposed on bending stresses. However, since the warping strength for a single angle is relatively small, this additional bending effect is negligible and often ignored in design practice. C4. COMPRESSION The provisions for the critical compression stress account for the three possible limit states that may occur in an angle column depending on its proportions: general column flexural buckling, local buckling of thin legs, and flexural-torsional buckling of the member. The Q-factor in the equation for critical stress accounts for the local buckling, and the expressions for Q are nondimensionalized from AISC LRFD Specification (AISC, 1993) Appendix B5. Flexural-torsional buckling is covered in Appendix E of the AISC LRFD Specification (AISC, 1993). This strength limit state is approximated by the Q-factor reduction for slender-angle legs. For non-slender sections where Q = 1, flexural-torsional buckling is relevant for relatively short columns, but it was shown by Galambos (1991) that the error of neglecting this effect is not significant. For this reason no explicit consideration of this effect is required in these single-angle specifications. The provisions of Appendix E of AISC LRFD may be conservatively used to directly consider flexural-torsional buckling for single-angle members. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 292
COMMENTARY
The effective length factors for angle columns may be determined by consulting the paper by Lutz (1992). The resistance factor φ was increased from 0.85 in AISC LRFD for all cross sections to 0.90 for single angles only because it was shown that a φ of 0.90 provides an equivalent degree of reliability (Galambos, 1992). C5. FLEXURE Flexural strength limits are established for yielding, local buckling, and lateraltorsional buckling. In addition to addressing the general case of unequal-leg single angles, the equal-leg angle is treated as a special case. Furthermore, bending of equal-leg angles about a geometric axis, an axis parallel to one of the legs, is addressed separately as it is a very common situation. The tips of an angle refer to the free edges of the two legs. In most cases of unrestrained bending, the flexural stresses at the two tips will have the same sign (tension or compression). For constrained bending about a geometric axis, the tip stresses will differ in sign. Criteria for both tension and compression at the tip should be checked as appropriate, but in most cases it will be evident which controls. Appropriate serviceability limits for single-angle beams need also to be considered. In particular, for longer members subjected to unrestrained bending, deflections are likely to control rather than lateral-torsional or local buckling strength. C5.1.1. These provisions follow the LRFD format for nominal flexural resistance. There is a region of full yielding, a linear transition to the yield moment, and a region of local buckling. The strength at full yielding is limited to a shape factor of 1.25, which is less than that corresponding to the plastic moment of an angle. The factor of 1.25 corresponds to an allowable stress of 0.75Fy, which has traditionally been used for rectangular shapes and for weak axis bending. It is used for angles due to uncertainties in developing the full plastic moment and to limit the large distortion of sections with large shape factors. The b / t limits and the criteria for local buckling follow typical AISC criteria for single angles under uniform compression. They are conservative when the leg is subjected to non-uniform compression due to flexure. C5.1.2. Since the shape factor for angles is in excess of 1.5, the nominal design strength Mn = 1.25My for compact members is justified provided that instability does not control. C5.1.3. Lateral-torsional instability may limit the flexural strength of an unbraced single-angle beam. As illustrated in Figure C5.1, Equation 5-3a represents the elastic buckling portion with the nominal flexural strength, Mn, varying from 75 percent to 92 percent of the theoretical buckling moment, Mob. Equation 5-3b represents the inelastic buckling transition expression between 0.75My and 1.25My. At Mob greater than approximately 6My, the unbraced length is adequate to develop the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
6 - 293
maximum beam flexural strength of Mn = 1.25My. These formulas were based on Australian research on single angles in flexure and on an analytical model consisting of two rectangular elements of length equal to the actual angle leg width minus one-half the thickness (Leigh and Lay, 1984; Australian Institute of Steel Construction, 1975; Leigh and Lay, 1978; Madugula and Kennedy, 1985). Figure C5.1 reflects the higher nominal moment strength than was implied by the 0.66Fy allowable stress in the ASD version. A new and more general Cb moment gradient formula consistent with the 1993 AISC LRFD Specification is used to correct lateral-torsional stability equations from the assumed most severe case of uniform moment throughout the unbraced length (Cb = 1.0). The equation for Cb used in the ASD version is applicable only to moment diagrams that are straight lines between brace points. In lieu of a more detailed analysis, the reduced maximum limit of 1.5 is imposed for single-angle beams to represent conservatively the lower envelope of this cross section’s non-uniform bending response. C5.2.1. An angle beam loaded parallel to one leg will deflect and bend about that leg only if the angle is restrained laterally along the length. In this case simple bending occurs without any torsional rotation or lateral
Mn My
1.25
Eq. 5-3b
Eq. 5-3a
0.75
Inelastic Full yielding
Elastic
Unbraced length l
0
0.16
1.0
Fig. C5.1. Lateral-torsional buckling of a single-angle beam. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
My Mob
6 - 294
COMMENTARY
deflection and the geometric axis section properties should be used in the evaluation of the flexural design strength and deflection. If only the point of maximum moment is laterally braced, lateral-torsional buckling of the unbraced length under simple bending must also be checked, as outlined in Section 5.2.1b. C5.2.2. When bending is applied about one leg of a laterally unrestrained single angle, it will deflect laterally as well as in the bending direction. Its behavior can be evaluated by resolving the load and/or moments into principal axis components and determining the sum of these principal axis flexural effects. Section 5.2.2 is provided to simplify and expedite the design calculations for this common situation with equal-leg angles. For such unrestrained bending of an equal-leg angle, the resulting maximum normal stress at the angle tip (in the direction of bending) will be approximately 25 percent greater than calculated using the geometric axis section modulus. The value of Mob in Equation 5-4 and the evaluation of My using 0.80 of the geometric axis section modulus reflect bending about the inclined axis shown in Figure C5.2. The deflection calculated using the geometric axis moment of inertia has to be increased 82 percent to approximate the total deflection. Deflection has two components, a vertical component (in the direction of applied load) 1.56 times the calculated value and a horizontal component of 0.94 of the calculated value. The resultant total deflection is in the general direction of the weak principal axis bending of the angle (see Figure C5.2). These unrestrained bending deflections
δv = 1.56δ
Flexural load Y
Neutral axis
δh = 0.94δ X Geometric axis δ = deflection calculated using geometric axis moment of inertia
Fig. C5.2. Geometric axis bending of laterally unrestrained equal-leg angles. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
6 - 295
should be considered in evaluating serviceability and will often control the design over lateral-torsional buckling. The horizontal component of deflection being approximately 60 percent of the vertical deflection means that the lateral restraining force required to achieve purely vertical deflection (Section 5.2.1) must be 60 percent of the applied load value (or produce a moment 60 percent of the applied value) which is very significant. Lateral-torsional buckling is limited by Mob (Leigh and Lay, 1984 and 1978) in Equation 5-4, which is based on Mcr =
2.33Eb4t × (1 + 3cos2θ) (Kl)2
0.156 (1 + 3cos θ) (Kl) t √ sin θ + b 2
2
4
2 2
+ sinθ
(C5-1)
(the general expression for the critical moment of an equal-leg angle) with θ = −45° which is the most severe condition with the angle heel (shear center) in tension. Flexural loading which produces angle-heel compression can be conservatively designed by Equation 5-4 or more exactly by using the above general Mcr equation with θ = 45º (see Figure C5.3). With the angle heel in compression, Equation C5-1 will slightly exceed the yield moment limit of 1.25(0.8SxFy ) only for relatively few high slenderness cases. For pure bending situations, deflections would be unreasonably large under these conditions. However, considering the interaction of flexure and compression in an angle with Fy = 50 ksi, b / t equal to 16 and the largest l / r of 200, Equation C5-1 will produce results eight percent less than the modified yield moment. This situation could arise in a compression angle where the load is transferred by end gusset plates attached to one leg only. In this case the flexure term in the interaction is about 0.5 which reduces the effect Z (minor principal axis) W (major principal axis) b +θ
Shear center t
Mcr Centroid
Fig. C5.3. Equal-leg angle with general moment loading. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 296
COMMENTARY
to less than four percent and the end restraints provide an unknown increase in the lateral-torsional buckling strength. Consequently only the yield limit is required to be checked in Section 5.2.2 when the leg tips are in tension. Lateral-torsional buckling will reduce the nominal bending strength only when l / b is relatively large. If the lt / b2 parameter (which is a ratio of l / b over b / t) is small (less than approximately 2.5 with Cb = 1), there is no need to check lateral-torsional stability inasmuch as local buckling provisions of Section 5.1.1 will control the nominal bending strength. Lateral-torsional buckling will produce Mn < 1.25My for equal-leg angles only if Mob by Equation 5-4 is less than about 6My, for Cb = 1.0. Limits for l / b as a function of b / t are shown graphically in Figure C5.4. Local buckling and deflections must be checked separately. Stress at the tip of the angle leg parallel to the applied bending axis is of the same sign as the maximum stress at the tip of the other leg when the single angle is unrestrained. For an equal-leg angle this stress is about one-third of the maximum stress. It is only necessary to check the nominal bending strength based on the tip of the angle leg with the maximum stress when evaluating such an angle. Since this maximum moment per Section 5.2.2 represents combined principal axis moments and Equation 5-4 represents the design limit for these combined
400
300 l
b 200
100
0 1
2
3
4
5 Fy = 36
b
6
7
8
t Fy = 50
Fig. C5.4. Equal leg single-angle lateral buckling limits for Mn = 1.25My about geometric axis. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9
10
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
6 - 297
flexural moments, only a single flexural term needs to be considered when evaluating combined flexural and axial effects. C5.2.3. For unequal-leg angles without lateral-torsional restraint the applied load or moment must be resolved into components along the two principal axis in all cases and designed for biaxial bending using the interaction equation. C5.3.1. Under major axis bending of equal-leg angles Equation 5-5 in combination with 5-3a or 5-3b controls the nominal design moment against overall lateral-torsional buckling of the angle. This is based on Mcr, given earlier with θ = 0. Lateral-torsional buckling for this case will reduce the stress below 1.25My only for l / t ≥ 4800 / Fy or 0.160E / Fy (Mob = 6My). If the lt / b2 parameter is small (less than approximately 1.5Cb for this case), local buckling will control the nominal design moment and Mn based on lateral-torsional buckling need not be evaluated. Local buckling must be checked using Section 5.1.1. C5.3.2. Lateral-torsional buckling about the major principal W axis of an unequal-leg angle is controled by Mob in Equation 5-6. Section property βw reflects the location of the shear center relative to the principal axis of the section and the bending direction under uniform bending. Positive βw and maximum Mob occurs when the shear center is in flexural compression while negative βw and minimum Mob occurs when the shear center is in flexural tension (see Figure C5.5). This βw effect is consistent with behavior of singly symmetric I-shaped beams which are more stable when the compression flange is larger than the tension flange. For principal W-axis bending of equal-leg angles, βw is equal to zero due to symmetry and Equation 5-6 reduces to Equation 5-5 for this special case.
Shear center
Mob
W
Z
Shear center
Mob
W
(Special case: for equal legs, βw = 0) (a) + βw
(b) – βw Fig. C5.5. Unequal-leg angle in bending. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Z
6 - 298
COMMENTARY
TABLE C5.1 βw Values for Angles Angle Size (in.)
βw (in.)*
9×4
6.54
8×6 8×4
3.31 5.48
7×4
4.37
6×4 6 × 3.5
3.14 3.69
5 × 3.5 5×3
2.40 2.99
4 × 3.5 4×3
0.87 1.65
3.5 × 3 3.5 × 2.5
0.87 1.62
3 × 2.5 3×2
0.86 1.56
2.5 × 2
0.85
Equal legs
0.00
* Has positive or negative value depending on direction of bending (see Figure C5.5).
For reverse curvature bending, part of the unbraced length has positive βw, while the remainder negative βw, and conservatively, the negative value is assigned for that entire unbraced segment.
βw is essentially independent of angle thickness (less than one percent variation from mean value) and is primarily a function of the leg widths. The average values shown in Table C5.1 may be used for design. C6. COMBINED STRESSES The stability and strength interaction equations of AISC LRFD Specification Chapter H have been adopted with modifications to account for various conditions of bending that may be encountered. Bending will usually accompany axial loading in a single-angle member since the axial load and connection along the legs are eccentric to the centroid of the cross section. Unless the situation conforms to Section 5.2.1 or 5.2.2 in that Section 6.1.2 or 6.1.3 may be used, the applied moment should be resolved about the principal axes for the interaction check. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
6 - 299
For the non-symmetric and singly symmetric single angles, the interaction expression related to stresses at a particular location on the cross section is the most accurate due to lack of double symmetry. At a particular location, it is possible to have stresses of different sign from the various components such that a combination of tensile and compressive stress will represent a critical condition. The absolute value of the combined terms must be checked at the angle-leg tips and heel and compared with 1.0. When using the combined force expressions for single angles, Muw and Muz are positive as customary. The evaluation of Mn in Section 5.1 is dependent on the location on the cross section being examined by using the appropriate value of section modulus, S. Since the sign of the stress is important in using Equations 6-1a and 6-1b, Mn is considered either positive or negative by assigning a sign to S to reflect the stress condition as adding to, or subtracting from, the axial load effect. A designer may choose to use any consistent sign convention. It is conservative to ignore this refinement and simply use positive critical Mn values in the bending terms and add the absolute values of all terms (Elgaaly, Davids, and Dagher, 1992 and Adluri and Madugula, 1992). Alternative special interaction equations for single angles have recently been published (Adluri and Madugula, 1992). C6.1.3. When the total maximum flexural stress is evaluated for a laterally unrestrained length of angle per Section 5.2, the bending axis is the inclined axis shown in Figure C5.2. The radius of gyration modification for the moment amplification about this axis is equal to √ 1.82 = 1.35 to account for the increased unrestrained bending deflection relative to that about the geometric axis for the laterally unrestrained length. The 1.35 factor is retained for angles braced only at the point of maximum moment to maintain a conservative calculation for this case. If the brace exhibits any flexibility permitting lateral movement of the angle, use of r = rx would not be conservative.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 300
LRFD SPECIFICATION FOR DESIGN OF SINGLE-ANGLE MEMBERS
List of References Alduri, S. M. and Madugula, M. K. S. (1992), “Eccentrically Loaded Steel SingleAngle Struts,” AISC Engineering Journal, 2nd Quarter. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (1983), Torsional Analysis of Steel Members, Chicago, IL. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (1993), Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Chicago, IL. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (1989), Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members, Chicago, IL. Australian Institute of Steel Construction (1975), Australian Standard AS1250, 1975. Elgaaly, M., Davids, W. and Dagher, H. (1992), “Non-Slender Single-Angle Struts,” AISC Engineering Journal, 2nd Quarter. Galambos, T. V. (1991), “Stability of Axially Loaded Compressed Angles,” Structural Stability Research Council, Annual Technical Session Proceedings, Apr. 15–17, 1991, Chicago, IL. Gjelsvik, A. (1981), The Theory of Thin-walled Bars, John Wiley and Sons, New York. Leigh, J. M. and M. G. Lay (1978), “Laterally Unsupported Angles with Equal and Unequal Legs,” Report MRL 22/2 July 1978, Melbourne Research Laboratories, Clayton. Leigh, J. M. and M. G. Lay (1984), “The Design of Laterally Unsupported Angles,” in Steel Design Current Practice, Section 2, Bending Members, American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., January 1984. Lutz, L. A. (1992), “Critical Slenderness of Compression Members with Effective Lengths About Nonprincipal Axes,” Structural Stability Research Council, Annual Technical Session Proceedings, Apr. 6–7, 1992, Pittsburgh, PA. Madugula, M. K. S. and J. B. Kennedy (1985), Single and Compound Angle Members, Elsevier Applied Science, New York.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 301
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings June 15, 1992
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100, Chicago, IL 60601-2001
6 - 302
6 - 303
PREFACE
The intention of the main AISC Specification is to cover the common everyday design criteria in routine office usage. It is not feasible to also cover the many special and unique problems encountered within the full range of structural design practice. This document is a separate Specification which addresses one such topic, steel seismic provisions. It contains its own list of Symbols, a Glossary and a non-mandatory Commentary which has been included to provide background for the provisions. The AISC Specification Task Committee 113 on Seismic Provisions to supplement the current Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) and Allowable Stress Design (ASD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings acknowledges the various contributions of several groups to the completion of this document: the Structural Engineers Association of California (SEAOC), the National Science Foundation, and the Building Seismic Safety Council. The main AISC Committee on Specification enhanced these provisions by careful scrutiny, discussions, suggestions for improvements, and endorsement. The members of this Task Committee, as principal authors of the AISC Seismic Provisions, are most grateful to all of the above groups and people. Special recognition must also be given to the leadership expertise, and perseverance of Task Committee Chairman Egor Popov and Technical Secretary Clarkson Pinkham. The principal changes in this edition of the Seismic Provisions are the conversion to the loads and design format recommended by the 1991 National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program (NEHRP) document. The reader is cautioned that professional judgment must be exercised when data or recommendations in this Specification are applied. The publication of the material contained herein is not intended as a representation or warranty on the part of the American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.—or any other person named herein— that this information is suitable for general or particular use, or freedom from infringement of any patent or patents. Anyone making use of this information assumes all liability arising from such use. The design of structures is within the scope of expertise of a competent licensed structural engineer, architect, or other licensed professional for the application of principles to a particular structure. By the AISC Subcommittee, E. P. Popov, Chair R. Becker G. G. Deierlein M. D. Engelhardt S. J. Fang R. E. Ferch R. D. Hanson J. R. Harris K. Kasai
S. D. Lindsey H. W. Martin C. M. Saunders J. B. Shantz I. M. Viest N. F. G. Youssef C. W. Pinkham, Technical Secretary N. Iwankiw, Recording Secretary
May 22, 1992
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 304
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 305
Symbols The section numbers in parentheses after the definition of a symbol refers to the section where the symbol is first used. Effective net area, in.2 (9) Flange area of member, in.2 (6) Gross area, in.2 (8) Area of link stiffener, in.2 (10) Seismic coefficient representing the effective peak velocity-related acceleration. (2) Effective area of weld, in.2 (6) Link web area, in.2 (10) Response factor related to the fundamental period of the building. (3) Dead load due to the self-weight of the structure and the permanent elements on the structure, kips. (3) E Earthquake load. (3) FBM Nominal strength of the base material to be welded, ksi. (6) FEXX Classification strength of weld metal, ksi. (6) Fw Nominal strength of the weld electrode material, ksi. (6) Fy Specified minimum yield strength of the type of steel being used, ksi. (8) Fyb Fy of a beam, ksi. (8) Fyc Fy of a column, ksi. (6) H Average story height above and below a beam-to-column connection., in. (8) L Live load due to occupancy and moveable equipment, kips. (3) L Unbraced length of compression or bracing member, in. (8) Lr Roof live load, kips. (3) Mn Nominal moment strength of a member or joint, kip-in. (8) Mp Plastic bending moment, kip-in. (8) Mpa Plastic bending moment modified by axial load ratio, kip-in. (10) Mu Required flexural strength on a member or joint, kip-in. (8) PD Required axial strength on a column resulting from application of dead load, D, kips. (6) PE Required axial strength on a column resulting from application of the specified earthquake load, E, kips. (6) PL Required axial strength on a column resulting from application of live load, L, kips. (6) Pu Required axial strength on a column or a link, kips. (10) Pn Nominal axial strength of a column, kips. (6) Pu∗ Required axial strength on a brace, kips. (9) Puc Required axial strength on a column based on load combination with seismic loads, kips. (8) Py Nominal yield axial strength of a member = Fy Ag, kips. (10)
Ae Af Ag Ast Av Aw Aw Cs D
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 306
R R′ Rn S V Vn Vu Vp Vpa W Wg Zb Zc b bf bcf db dc dz e h r ry tbf tcf tf tp tw tz wz α ρ k kp kr φ φb φc φt φv φw
SYMBOLS
Response modification factor. (3) Load due to initial rainwater or ice exclusive of the ponding contribution, kips. (Symbol R is used in the Specification). (3) Nominal strength of a member. (8) Snow load, kips. (3) Base shear due to earthquake load, kips. (3) Nominal shear strength of a member, kips. (8) Required shear strength on a member, kips. (8) Nominal shear strength of an active link, kips. (10) Nominal shear strength of an active link modified by the axial load magnitude, kips. (10) Wind load, kips. (3) Total weight of the building, kips. (3) Plastic section modulus of a beam, in.3 (8) Plastic section modulus of a column, in.3 (8) Width of compression element, in. (Table 8-1) Flange width, in. (8) Column flange width, in. (8) Overall beam depth, in. (8) Overall column depth, in. (8) Overall panel zone depth between continuity plates, in. (8) EBF link length, in. (10) Assumed web depth for stability, in. (Table 8-1) Governing radius of gyration, in. (9) Radius of gyration about y axis, in. (8) Thickness of beam flange, in. (8) Thickness of column flange, in. (8) Thickness of flange, in. (8) Thickness of panel zone including doubler plates, in. (8) Thickness of web, in. (8) Thickness of panel zone (doubler plates not necessarily included), in. (8) Width of panel zone between column flanges, in. (8) Fraction of member force transferred across a particular net section. (9) Ratio of required axial force Pu to required shear strength Vu of a link. (10) Slenderness parameter. (9) Limiting slenderness parameter for compact element. (8) Limiting slenderness parameter for non-compact element. (9) Resistance factor. (6,10) Resistance factor for beams. (6) Resistance factor for columns in compression. (6,10) Resistance factor for columns in tension. (6) Resistance factor for shear strength of panel zone of beam-to-column connections. (8) Resistance factor for welds. (6)
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 307
Glossary Beam. A structural member whose primary function is to carry loads transverse to its longitudinal axis, usually a horizontal member in a seismic frame system. Braced Frame. An essentially vertical truss system of concentric or eccentric type that resists lateral forces on the structural system. Concentrically Braced Frame (CBF). A braced frame in which all members of the bracing system are subjected primarily to axial forces. The CBF shall meet the requirements of Sect. 9. Connection. Combination of joints used to transmit forces between two or more members. Categorized by the type and amount of force transferred (moment, shear, end reaction). Continuity Plates. Column stiffeners at top and bottom of the panel zone. Design strength. Resistance (force, moment, stress, as appropriate) provided by element or connection; the product of the nominal strength and the resistance factor. Diagonal Bracing. Inclined structural members carrying primarily axial load employed to enable a structural frame to act as a truss to resist horizontal loads. Dual System. A dual system is a structural system with the following features: • An essentially complete space frame which provides support for gravity loads. • Resistance to lateral load is provided by moment resisting frames (SMF) or (OMF) which is capable of resisting at least 25 percent of the base shear and concrete or steel shear walls, steel eccentrically (EBF) or concentrically (CBF) braced frames. • Each system shall be also designed to resist the total lateral load in proportion to its relative rigidity. Eccentrically Braced Frame (EBF). A diagonal braced frame in which at least one end of each bracing member connects to a beam a short distance from a beam-to-column connection or from another beam-to-brace connection. The EBF shall meet the requirements of Sect. 10. Essential Facilities. Those facilities defined as essential in the applicable code under which the structure is designed. In the absence of such a code, see ASCE 7-92. Joint. Area where two or more ends, surfaces, or edges are attached. Categorized by type of fastener or weld used and method of force transfer. K Braced Frame. A concentric braced frame (CBF) in which a pair of diagonal braces located on one side of a column is connected to a single point within the clear column height. Lateral Support Member. Member designed to inhibit lateral buckling or lateral-torsional buckling of primary frame members. Link. In EBF, the segment of a beam which extends from column to column, located between the end of a diagonal brace and a column or between the ends of two diagonal braces of the EBF. The length of the link is defined as the clear distance AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 308
GLOSSARY
between the diagonal brace and the column face or between the ends of two diagonal braces. Link Intermediate Web Stiffeners. Vertical web stiffeners placed within the link. Link Rotation Angle. The link rotation angle is the plastic angle between the link and the beam outside of the link when the total story drift is E′ / E times the drift derived using the specified base shear, V. Link Shear Design Strength. The lesser of φVp or 2φMp/e, where φ = 0.9, Vp = 0.55Fy dtw and e = the link length except as modified by Sect. S9.2.f. LRFD. (Load and Resistance Factor Design). A method of proportioning structural components (members, connectors, connecting elements, and assemblages) such that no applicable limit state is exceeded when the structure is subjected to all design load combinations. Moment Frame. A building frame system in which seismic shear forces are resisted by shear and flexure in members and joints of the frame. Nominal loads. The magnitudes of the loads specified by the applicable code. Nominal strength. The capacity of a structure or component to resist the effects of loads, as determined by computations using specified material strengths and dimensions and formulas derived from accepted principles of structural mechanics or by field tests or laboratory tests of scaled models, allowing for modeling effects, and differences between laboratory and field conditions. Ordinary Moment Frame (OMF). A moment frame system which meets the requirements of Sect. 7. P - Delta effect. Secondary effect of column axial loads and lateral deflection on the shears and moments in members. Panel Zone. Area of beam-to-column connection delineated by beam and column flanges. Required Strength. Load effect (force, moment, stress, as appropriate) acting on element of connection determined by structural analysis from the factored loads (using most appropriate critical load combinations). Resistance Factor. A factor that accounts for unavoidable deviations of the actual strength from the nominal value and the manner and consequences of failure. Slip-Critical Joint. A bolted joint in which slip resistance of the connection is required. Special Moment Frame (SMF). A moment frame system which meets the requirements of Sect. 8. Structural System. An assemblage of load-carrying components which are joined together to provide regular interaction or interdependence. V Braced Frame. A concentrically braced frame (CBF) in which a pair of diagonal braces located either above or below a beam is connected to a single point within the clear beam span. Where the diagonal braces are below the beam, the system is also referred to as an Inverted V Braced Frame. X Braced Frame. A concentrically braced frame (CBF) in which a pair of diagonal braces crosses near mid-length of the braces. Y Braced Frame. An eccentrically braced frame (EBF) in which the stem of the Y is the link of the EBF system.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 309
Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings June 15, 1992
Part I—Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) 1.
SCOPE These special seismic requirements are to be applied in conjunction with the AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (LRFD), 1986; hereinafter referred to as the Specification. They are intended for the design and construction of structural steel members and connections in buildings for which the design forces resulting from earthquake motions have been determined on the basis of energy dissipation in the non-linear range of response. Seismic provisions and the nominal loads for each Seismic Performance Category, Seismic Hazard Exposure Group, or Seismic Zone shall be as specified by the applicable code under which the structure is designed or where no code applies, as dictated by the conditions involved. In the absence of a code, the Performance Categories, Seismic Hazard Exposure Groups, loads and load combinations shall be as given herein.
2.
SEISMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORIES Seismic Performance Categories vary with the Seismic Hazard Exposure Group shown in Table 2-1, the Effective Peak Velocity Related Acceleration, Av, and the Seismic Hazard Exposure Group shown in Table 2-2. In addition to the general requirements assigned to the various Seismic Performance Categories in the applicable building code for all types of construction, the following requirements apply to fabricated steel construction for buildings and structures with similar structural characteristics.
2.1. Seismic Performance Categories A, B, and C Buildings assigned to Categories A, B, and C, except Category C in Seismic Hazard Exposure Group III where the value of Av ≥ 0.10, shall be designed either in accordance with solely the Specification or in accordance with the Specification and these provisions. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 310
PART I—LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN (LRFD)
TABLE 2-1 Seismic Hazard Exposure Groups Group III
Buildings having essential facilities that are necessary for postearthquake recovery and requiring special requirements for access and functionality.
Group II
Buildings that constitute a substantial public hazard because of occupancy or use.
Group I
All buildings not classified in Groups II and III.
2.2. Seismic Performance Category C Buildings assigned to Category C in Seismic Hazard Exposure Group III where the value of Av ≥ 0.10 shall be designed in accordance with the Specification as modified by the additional provisions of this section. 2.2.a. Steel used in seismic resisting systems shall be limited by the provisions of Sect. 5. 2.2.b. Columns in seismic resisting systems shall be designed in accordance with Sect. 6. 2.2.c. Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF) shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of Sect. 7. 2.2.d. Special Moment Frames (SMF) are required to conform only to the requirements of Sects. 8.2, 8.7, and 8.8. 2.2.e. Braced framed systems shall conform to the requirements of Sects. 9 or 10 when used alone or in combination with the moment frames of the seismic resisting system. 2.2.f. A quality assurance plan shall be submitted to the regulatory agency for the seismic force resisting system of the building. 2.3. Seismic Performance Categories D and E Buildings assigned to Categories D and E shall be designed in accordance with the Specification as modified by the additional provisions of this section. 2.3.a. Steel used in seismic resisting systems shall be limited by the provisions of Sect. 5. 2.3.b. Columns in seismic resisting systems shall be designed in accordance with Sect. 6. 2.3.c. Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF) shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of Sect. 7. 2.3.d. Special Moment Frames (SMF) shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of Sect. 8. 2.3.e. Braced framed systems shall conform to the requirements of Sects. 9. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 311
TABLE 2-2 Seismic Performance Categories Seismic Hazard Exposure Group Value of Av
I
II
III
0.20 ≤ Av < 0.20 0.15 ≤ Av < 0.20 0.10 ≤ Av < 0.15 0.05 ≤ Av < 0.10 0.15 ≤ Av < 0.05
D C C B A
D D C B A
E D C C A
(CBF) or 10. (EBF) when used alone or in combination with the moment frames of the seismic resisting system. The use of K-bracing systems shall not be permitted as part of the seismic resisting system except as permitted by Sect. 9.5. (Low Buildings) 2.3.f. A quality assurance plan shall be submitted to the regulatory agency for the seismic force resisting system of the building. 3.
LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS, AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS
3.1. Loads and Load Combinations The following specified loads and their effects on the structure shall be taken into account: D : dead load due to the weight of the structural elements and the permanent features on the structure. L : live load due to occupancy and moveable equipment. Lr : roof live load. W : wind load. S : snow load. E : earthquake load (where the horizontal component is derived from base shear Formula V = CsWg). R′ : load due to initial rainwater or ice exclusive of the ponding contribution. In the Formula V = CsWg for base shear: Cs = Seismic design coefficient Wg = Total weight of the building, see the applicable code. For the nominal loads as defined above, see the applicable code. The required strength of the structure and its elements shall be determined from the appropriate critical combination of factored loads. The following Load Combinations and corresponding load factors shall be investigated: 1.4D
(3-1)
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5(Lr or S or R′)
(3-2)
1.2D + 1.6(Lr or S or R′) + (0.5L or 0.8W)
(3-3)
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 312
PART I—LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN (LRFD)
1.2D + 1.3W + 0.5L + 0.5(Lr or S or R′)
(3-4)
1.2D ± 1.0E + 0.5L + 0.2S
(3-5)
0.9D ± (1.0E or 1.3W)
(3-6)
Exception: The load factor on L in Load Combinations 3-3, 3-4, and 3-5 shall equal 1.0 for garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly, and all areas where the live load is greater than 100 psf. Other special load combinations are included with specific design requirements throughout these provisions. Orthogonal earthquake effects shall be included in the analysis unless noted specifically otherwise in the governing building code. Where required by these provisions, an amplified horizontal earthquake load of 0.4R × E (where the term 0.4R is greater or equal to 1.0) shall be applied in lieu of the horizontal component of earthquake load E in the load combinations above. The term R is the earthquake response modification coefficient contained in the applicable code. The additional load combinations using the amplified horizontal earthquake load are: 1.2D + 0.5L + 0.2S ± 0.4R × E
(3-7)
0.9D ± 0.4R × E
(3-8)
Exception: The load factor on L in Load Combinations 3-7 shall equal 1.0 for garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly and all areas where the live load is greater than 100 psf. The term 0.4R in Load Combinations 3-7 and 3-8 shall be greater or equal to 1.0. Where the amplified load is required, orthogonal effects are not required to be included. 3.2. Nominal Strengths The nominal strengths shall be as provided in the Specification. 4.
STORY DRIFT Story drift shall be calculated using the appropriate load effects consistent with the structural system and the method of analysis. Limits on story drift shall be in accordance with the governing code and shall not impair the stability of the structure.
5.
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Steel used in seismic force resisting systems shall be as listed in Sect. A3.1 of the Specification, except for buildings over one story in height. The steel used in seismic resisting systems described in Sections 8, 9, and 10 shall be limited to the following ASTM Specifications: A36, A500 (Grades B and C), A501, A572 (Grades 42 and 50), and A588. The steel used for base plates shall meet one of the preceding ASTM Specifications or ASTM A283 Grade D. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6.
6 - 313
COLUMN REQUIREMENTS
6.1. Column Strength When Pu / φPn > 0.5, columns in seismic resisting frames, in addition to complying with the Specification, shall be limited by the following requirements: 6.1.a. Axial compression loads: 1.2PD + 0.5PL + 0.2PS + 0.4R × PE ≤ φcPn
(6-1)
where the term 0.4R is greater or equal to 1.0. Exception: The load factor on PL in Load Combination 6-1 shall equal 1.0 for garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly, and all areas where the live load is greater than 100 psf. 6.1.b. Axial tension loads: 0.9PD − 0.4R × PE ≤ φtPn
(6-2)
where the term 0.4R is greater or equal to 1.0. 6.1.c. The axial Load Combinations 6-1 and 6-2 are not required to exceed either of the following: 1. The maximum loads transferred to the column, considering 1.25 times the design strengths of the connecting beam or brace elements of the structure. 2. The limit as determined by the foundation capacity to resist overturning uplift. 6.2. Column Splices Column splices shall have a design strength to develop the column axial loads given in Sect. 6.1.a, b, and c as well as the Load Combinations 3-1 to 3-6. 6.2.a. In column splices using either complete or partial penetration welded joints, beveled transitions are not required when changes in thickness and width of flanges and webs occur. 6.2.b. Splices using partial penetration welded joints shall not be within 3 ft of the beam-to-column connection. Column splices that are subject to net tension forces shall comply with the more critical of the following: 1. The design strength of partial penetration welded joints, the lesser of φwFw Aw or φwFBM Aw, shall be at least 150 percent of the required strength, where φw = 0.8 and Fw = 0.6FEXX. 2. The design strength of welds shall not be less than 0.5Fyc Af, where Fyc is the yield strength of the column material and Af is the flange area of the smaller column connected. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 314
7.
PART I—LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN (LRFD)
REQUIREMENTS FOR ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (OMF)
7.1. Scope Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF) shall have a design strength as provided in the Specification to resist the Load Combinations 3-1 through 3-6 as modified by the following added provisions: 7.2. Joint Requirements All beam-to-column and column to beam connections in OMF which resist seismic forces shall meet one of the following requirements: 7.2.a. FR (fully restrained) connections conforming with Sect. 8.2, except that the required flexural strength, Mu, of a column-to-beam joint is not required to exceed the nominal plastic flexural strength of the connection. 7.2.b. FR connections with design strengths of the connections meeting the requirements of Sect. 7.1 using the Load Combinations 3-7 and 3-8. 7.2.c. Either FR or PR (partially restrained) connections shall meet the following: 1. The design strengths of the members and connections meet the requirements of Sect. 7.1. 2. The connections have been demonstrated by cyclic tests to have adequate rotation capacity at a story drift calculated at a horizontal load of 0.4R × E, (where the term 0.4R is equal to or greater than 1.0). 3. The additional drift due to PR connections shall be considered in design. FR and PR connections are described in detail in Sect. A2 of the Specification. 8.
REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SMF)
8.1. Scope Special Moment Frames (SMF) shall have a design strength as provided in the Specification to resist the Load Combinations 3-1 through 3-6 as modified by the following added provisions: 8.2. Beam-to-Column Joints 8.2.a. The required flexural strength, Mu, of each beam-to-column joint shall be the lesser of the following quantities: 1. The plastic bending moment, Mp, of the beam. 2. The moment resulting from the panel zone nominal shear strength, Vn, as determined using Equation 8-1. The joint is not required to develop either of the strengths defined above if it is shown that under an amplified frame deformation produced by Load Combinations 3-7 and 3-8, the design strength of the members at the connection is adequate to support the vertical loads, and the required lateral force resistance is provided by other means. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 315
8.2.b. The required shear strength, Vu, of a beam-to-column joint shall be determined using the Load Combination 1.2D + 0.5L + 0.2S plus the shear resulting from Mu, as defined in Sect. 8.2.a., on each end of the beam. Alternatively, Vu shall be justified by a rational analysis. The required shear strength is not required to exceed the shear resulting from Load Combination 3-7. 8.2.c. The design strength, φRn, of a beam-to-column joint shall be considered adequate to develop the required flexural strength, Mu, of the beam if it conforms to the following: 1. The beam flanges are welded to the column using complete penetration welded joints. 2. The beam web joint has a design shear strength φVn greater than the required shear, Vu, and conforms to either: a. Where the nominal flexural strength of the beam, Mn, considering only the flanges is greater than 70 percent of the nominal flexural strength of the entire beam section [i.e., bf tf (d−tf)Fyf ≥ 0.7Mp]; the web joint shall be made by means of welding or slip-critical high strength bolting, or; b. Where bf tf (d−tf)Fyf < 0.7Mp, the web joint shall be made by means of welding the web to the column directly or through shear tabs. That welding shall have a design strength of at least 20 percent of the nominal flexural strength of the beam web. The required beam shear, Vu, shall be resisted by further welding or by slip-critical high-strength bolting or both. 8.2.d. Alternate Joint Configurations: For joint configurations utilizing welds or high-strength bolts, but not conforming to Sect. 8.2.c, the design strength shall be determined by test or calculations to meet the criteria of Sect. 8.2.a. Where conformance is shown by calculation, the design strength of the joint shall be 125 percent of the design strengths of the connected elements. 8.3. Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Connections (Beam web parallel to column web) 8.3.a. Shear Strength: The required shear strength, Vu, of the panel zone shall be based on beam bending moments determined from the Load Combinations 3-5 and 3-6. However, Vu is not required to exceed the shear forces determined from 0.9ΣφbMp of the beams framing into the column flanges at the connection. The design shear strength, φvVn, of the panel zone shall be determined by the following formula: 3bcf t2cf where for this case φv = 0.75. φvVn = 0.6φvFy dc tp 1 + db dc tp where: tp = Total thickness of panel zone including doubler plates, in. dc = Overall column section depth, in. bcf = Width of the column flange, in. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(8-1)
6 - 316
PART I—LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN (LRFD)
tcf = Thickness of the column flange, in. db = Overall beam depth, in. Fy = Specified yield strength of the panel zone steel, ksi. 8.3.b. Panel Zone Thickness: The panel zone thickness, tz, shall conform to the following: tz ≥ (dz + wz) / 90
(8-2)
where: dz = the panel zone depth between continuity plates, in. wz = the panel zone width between column flanges, in. For this purpose, tz shall not include any doubler plate thickness unless the doubler plate is connected to the web with plug welds adequate to prevent local buckling of the plate. Where a doubler plate is used without plug welds to the column web, the doubler plate shall conform to Eq. 8-2. 8.3.c. Panel Zone Doubler Plates: Doubler plates provided to increase the design strength of the panel zone or to reduce the web depth thickness ratio shall be placed next to the column web and welded across the plate width along the top and bottom with at least a minimum fillet weld. The doubler plates shall be fastened to the column flanges using either butt or fillet welded joints to develop the design shear strength of the doubler plate. 8.4. Beam and Column Limitations 8.4.a. Beam Flange Area: There shall be no abrupt changes in beam flange areas in plastic hinge regions. 8.4.b. Width-Thickness Ratios: Beams and columns shall comply with λp in Table 8-1 in lieu of those in Table B5.1 of the Specification. 8.5. Continuity Plates Continuity plates shall be provided if required by the provisions in the Specification for webs and flanges with concentrated forces and if the nominal column local flange bending strength Rn is less than 1.8Fyb bf tbf, where: Rn = 6.25(tcf)2Fyf, and Fyb = Specified minimum yield strength of beam, ksi. Fyf = Specified minimum yield strength of column flange, ksi. bf = Beam flange width, in. tbf = Beam flange thickness, in. tcf = Column flange thickness, in. Continuity plates shall be fastened by welds to both the column flanges and either the column webs or doubler plates. 8.6. Column-Beam Moment Ratio At any beam-to-column connection, one of the following relationships shall be satisfied: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 317
TABLE 8-1 Limiting Width Thickness Ratios λp for Compression Elements Description of Element Flanges of I-shaped nonhybrid sections and channels in flexure.
WidthThickness Ratio
Limiting WidthThickness Ratios λp
b/t
52 / √ Fy
h / tw
For Pu / φbPy ≤ 0.125
Flanges of I-shaped hybrid beams in flexure. Webs in combined flexural and axial compression.
520 Fy √
1.54Pu 1 − φ P b y
For Pu / φbPy > 0.125 191 Fy √
Pu 253 2.33 − φ P ≥ √ Fy b y
ΣZc(Fyc − Puc / Ag) ≥ 1.0, ΣZbFyb
(8-3)
ΣZc(Fyc − Puc / Ag) ≥ 1.0, Vn dbH / (H − db)
(8-4)
where: Ag = Gross area of a column, in.2 Fyb = Specified minimum yield strength of a beam, ksi. Fyc = Specified minimum yield strength of a column, ksi. H = Average of the story heights above and below the joint, in. Puc = Required axial strength in the column (in compression) ≥ 0 Vn = Nominal strength of the panel zone as determined from Equation 8-1, ksi. Zb = Plastic section modulus of a beam, in.3 Zc = Plastic section modulus of a column, in.3 db = Average overall depth of beams framing into the connection, in. These requirements do not apply in any of the following cases, provided the columns conform to the requirements of Sect. 8.4: 8.6.a. Columns with Puc < 0.3Fyc Ag. 8.6.b. Columns in any story that has a ratio of design shear strength to design force 50 percent greater than the story above. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 318
PART I—LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN (LRFD)
8.6.c. Any column not included in the design to resist the required seismic shears, but included in the design to resist axial overturning forces. 8.7. Beam-to-Column Connection Restraint 8.7.a. Restrained Connection: 1. Column flanges at a beam-to-column connection require lateral support only at the level of the top flanges of the beams when a column is shown to remain elastic outside of the panel zone, using one of the following conditions: a. Ratios calculated using Eqs. 8-3 or 8-4 are greater than 1.25. b. Column remains elastic when loaded with Load Combination 3-7. 2. When a column cannot be shown to remain elastic outside of the panel zone, the following provisions apply: a. The column flanges shall be laterally supported at the levels of both top and bottom beam flanges. b. Each column flange lateral support shall be designed for a required strength equal to 2.0 percent of the nominal beam flange strength (Fy bf tf). c. Column flanges shall be laterally supported either directly, or indirectly, by means of the column web or beam flanges. 8.7.b. Unrestrained Connections: A column containing a beam-to-column connection with no lateral support transverse to the seismic frame at the connection shall be designed using the distance between adjacent lateral supports as the column height for buckling transverse to the seismic frame and conform to Sect. H of the Specification except that: 1. The required column strength shall be determined from the Load Combination 3-5 where E is the least of: a. The amplified earthquake force 0.4R × E (where the term 0.4R shall be equal to or greater than 1.0). b. 125 percent of the frame design strength based on either beam or panel zone design strengths. 2. The L / r for these columns shall not exceed 60. 3. The required column moment transverse to the seismic frame shall include that caused by the beam flange force specified in Sect. 8.7.a.2.b plus the added second order moment due to the resulting column displacement in this direction. 8.8. Lateral Support of Beams Both flanges of beams shall be laterally supported directly or indirectly. The unbraced length between lateral supports shall not exceed 2,500 ry / Fy. In addition, lateral supports shall be placed at concentrated loads where an analysis indicates a hinge will be formed during inelastic deformations of the SMF. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
9.
6 - 319
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCENTRICALLY BRACED (CBF) BUILDINGS
9.1. Scope Concentrically Braced Frames (CBF) are braced systems whose worklines essentially intersect at points. Minor eccentricities, where the worklines intersect within the width of the bracing members, are acceptable if accounted for in the design. CBF shall have a design strength as provided in the Specification to resist the Load Combinations 3-1 through 3-6 as modified by the following added provisions: 9.2. Bracing Members L 720 except as permit9.2.a. Slenderness: Bracing members shall have an ≤ r √ Fy ted in Sect. 9.5. 9.2.b. Compressive Design Strength: The design strength of a bracing member in axial compression shall not exceed 0.8φcPn. 9.2.c. Lateral Force Distribution: Along any line of bracing, braces shall be deployed in alternate directions such that, for either direction of force parallel to the bracing, at least 30 percent but no more than 70 percent of the total horizontal force shall be resisted by tension braces, unless the nominal strength, Pn, of each brace in compression is larger than the required strength, Pu, resulting from the application of the Load Combinations 3-7 or 3-8. A line of bracing, for the purpose of this provision, is defined as a single line or parallel lines whose plan offset is 10 percent or less of the building dimension perpendicular to the line of bracing. 9.2.d. Width-Thickness Ratios: Width-thickness ratios of stiffened and unstiffened compression elements in braces shall comply with Sect. B5 in the Specification. Braces shall be compact or non-compact, but not slender (i.e., λ < λr). Circular sections shall have an outside diameter to wall thickness ratio not exceeding 1,300 / Fy; rectangular tubes shall have a flat-width to wall thickness not exceeding 110 / √ Fy , unless the circular section or tube walls are stiffened. 9.2.e. Built-up Member Stitches: For all built-up braces, the first bolted or welded stitch on each side of the midlength of a built up member shall be designed to transmit a force equal to 50 percent of the nominal strength of one element to the adjacent element. Not less than two stitches shall be equally spaced about the member centerline. 9.3. Bracing Connections 9.3.a. Forces: The required strength of bracing joints (including beam-to-column joints if part of the bracing system) shall be the least of the following: 1. The design axial tension strength of the bracing member. 2. The force in the brace resulting from the Load Combinations 3-7 or 3-8. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 320
PART I—LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN (LRFD)
3. The maximum force, indicated by an analysis, that is transferred to the brace by the system. 9.3.b. Net Area: In bolted brace joints, the minimum ratio of effective net section area to gross section area shall be limited by: Ae 1.2αPu∗ ≥ Ag φtPn
(9-1)
where: Ae = Effective net area as defined in Equation B3-1 of the Specification. Pu∗ = Required strength on the brace as determined in Sect. 9.3.a. Pn = Nominal tension strength as specified in Chapter D of the Specification. φt = Special resistance factor for tension = 0.75. α = Fraction of the member force from Sect. 9.3.a that is transferred across a particular net section. 9.3.c. Gusset Plates: 1. Where analysis indicates that braces buckle in the plane of the gusset plates, the gusset and other parts of the connection shall have a design strength equal to or greater than the in-plane nominal bending strength of the brace. 2. Where the critical buckling strength is out-of-plane of the gusset plate, the brace shall terminate on the gusset a minimum of two times the gusset thickness from the theoretical line of bending which is unrestrained by the column or beam joints. The gusset plate shall have a required compressive strength to resist the compressive design strength of the brace member without local buckling of the gusset plate. For braces designed for axial load only, the bolts or welds shall be designed to transmit the brace forces along the centroids of the brace elements. 9.4. Special Bracing Configuration Requirements 9.4.a. V and Inverted V Type Bracing: 1. The design strength of the brace members shall be at least 1.5 times the required strength using Load Combinations 3-5 and 3-6. 2. The beam intersected by braces shall be continuous between columns. 3. A beam intersected by V braces shall be capable of supporting all tributary dead and live loads assuming the bracing is not present. 4. The top and bottom flanges of the beam at the point of intersection of V braces shall be designed to support a lateral force equal to 1.5 percent of the nominal beam flange strength (Fy bf tf). 9.4.b. K bracing, where permitted: 1. The design strength of K brace members shall be at least 1.5 times the required strength using Load Combinations 3-5 and 3-6. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 321
2. A column intersected by K braces shall be continuous between beams. 3. A column intersected by K braces shall be capable of supporting all dead and live loads assuming the bracing is not present. 4. Both flanges of the column at the point of intersection of K braces shall be designed to support a lateral force equal to 1.5 percent of the nominal column flange strength (Fy bf tf). 9.5. Low Buildings Braced frames not meeting the requirements of Sect. 9.2 through 9.4 shall only be used in buildings not over two stories and in roof structures if Load Combinations 3-7 and 3-8 are used for determining the required strength of the members and connections. 10.
REQUIREMENTS FOR ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (EBF)
10.1. Scope Eccentrically braced frames shall be designed so that under inelastic earthquake deformations, yielding will occur in the links. The diagonal braces, the columns, and the beam segments outside of the links shall be designed to remain elastic under the maximum forces that will be generated by the fully yielded and strain hardened links, except where permitted by this section. 10.2. Links 10.2.a. Beams with links shall comply with the width-thickness ratios in Table 8-1. 10.2.b. The specified minimum yield stress of steel used for links shall not exceed Fy = 50 ksi. 10.2.c. The web of a link shall be single thickness without doubler plate reinforcement and without openings. 10.2.d. Except as limited by Sect. 10.2.f., the required shear strength of the link, Vu, shall not exceed the design shear strength of the link, φVn, where: φVn = Link design shear strength of the link = the lesser of φVp or 2φMp / e, kips. Vp = 0.6Fy (d − 2tf) tw, kips. φ = 0.9. e = link length, in. 10.2.e. If the required axial strength, Pu, in a link is equal to or less than 0.15Py, where Py = AgFy, the effect of axial force on the link design shear strength need not be considered. 10.2.f. If the required axial strength, Pu, in a link exceeds 0.15Py, the following additional limitations shall be required: 1. The link design shear strength shall be the lesser of φVpa or 2φMpa / e, where: Vpa = Vp √ 1 − (Pu / Py)2 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 322
PART I—LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN (LRFD)
Mpa = 1.18Mp[1 − (Pu / Py )] φ = 0.9 2. The length of the link shall not exceed: [1.15 − 0.5ρ(Aw / Ag)]1.6Mp / Vp for ρ(Aw / Ag) ≥ 0.3 and 1.6Mp / Vp for ρ(Aw / Ag) < 0.3, where: Aw = (d − 2tf) tw ρ = Pu / Vu 10.2.g. The link rotation angle is the plastic angle between the link and the beam outside of the link when the total story drift is 0.4R times the drift determined using the specified base shear V. The term 0.4R shall be equal to or greater than 1.0. Except as noted in Sect. 10.4.d, the link rotation angle shall not exceed the following values: 1. 0.09 radians for links of length 1.6Mp / Vp or less. 2. 0.03 radians for links of length 2.6Mp / Vp or greater. 3. Linear interpolation shall be used for links of length between 1.6Mp / Vp and 2.6Mp / Vp. 10.2.h. Alternatively, the top story of an EBF building having over five stories shall be a CBF. 10.3. Link Stiffeners 10.3.a. Full depth web stiffeners shall be provided on both sides of the link web at the diagonal brace ends of the link. These stiffeners shall have a combined width not less than (bf − 2tw) and a thickness not less than 0.75tw or 3⁄8-in., whichever is larger, where bf and tw are the link flange width and link web thickness, respectively. 10.3.b. Links shall be provided with intermediate web stiffeners as follows: 1. Links of lengths 1.6Mp / Vp or less shall be provided with intermediate web stiffeners spaced at intervals not exceeding (30tw − d / 5) for a link rotation angle of 0.09 radians or (52tw − d / 5) for link rotation angles of 0.03 radians or less. Linear interpolation shall be used for values between 0.03 and 0.09 radians. 2. Links of length greater than 2.6Mp / Vp and less than 5Mp / Vp shall be provided with intermediate web stiffeners placed at a distance of 1.5bf from each end of the link. 3. Links of length between 1.6Mp / Vp and 2.6Mp / Vp shall be provided with intermediate web stiffeners meeting the requirements of 1 and 2 above. 4. No intermediate web stiffeners are required in links of lengths greater than 5Mp / Vp. 5. Intermediate link web stiffeners shall be full depth. For links less than 25 inches in depth, stiffeners are required on only one side of the link web. The thickness of one-sided stiffeners shall not be less than tw or AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 323
3⁄ -in., whichever is larger, and the width shall be not less than 8 (bf / 2) − tw. For links 25 inches in depth or greater, similar intermediate stiffeners are required on both sides of the web.
10.3.c. Fillet welds connecting link stiffener to the link web shall have a design strength adequate to resist a force of AstFy, in which Ast = area of the stiffener. The design strength of fillet welds fastening the stiffener to the flanges shall be adequate to resist a force of AstFy / 4. 10.4. Link-to-Column Connections Where a link is connected to a column, the following additional requirements shall be met: 10.4.a. The length of links connected to columns shall not exceed 1.6Mp / Vp unless it is demonstrated that the link-to-column connection is adequate to develop the required inelastic rotation of the link. 10.4.b. The link flanges shall have complete penetration welded joints to the column. The joint of the link web to the column shall be welded. The required strength of the welded joint shall be at least the nominal axial, shear, and flexural strengths of the link web. 10.4.c. The need for continuity plates shall be determined according to the requirements of Sect. 8.5. 10.4.d. Where the link is connected to the column web, the link flanges shall have complete penetration welded joints to plates and the web joint shall be welded. The required strength of the link web shall be at least the nominal axial, shear, and flexural strength of the link web. The link rotation angle shall not exceed 0.015 radians for any link length. 10.5. Lateral Support of Link Lateral supports shall be provided at both the top and bottom flanges of link at the ends of the link. End lateral supports of links shall have a design strength of 6 percent of the link flange nominal strength computed as Fy bf tf. 10.6. Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Link 10.6.a. The required combined axial and moment strength of the diagonal brace shall be the axial forces and moments generated by 1.25 times the nominal shear strength of the link as defined in Sect. 10.2. The design strengths of the diagonal brace, as determined by Sect. H (including Appendix H) of the Specification, shall exceed the required strengths as defined above. 10.6.b. The required strength of the beam outside of the link shall be the forces generated by at least 1.25 times the nominal shear strength of the link and shall be provided with lateral support to maintain the stability of the beam. Lateral supports shall be provided at both top and bottom flanges of the beam and each shall have a design strength to resist at least 1.5 percent of the beam flange nominal strength computed as Fy bf tf. 10.6.c. At the connection between the diagonal brace and the beam at the link end of the brace, the intersection of the brace and beam centerlines shall AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 324
PART I—LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN (LRFD)
be at the end of the link or in the link. The beam shall not be spliced within or adjacent to the connection between the beam and the brace. 10.6.d. The required strength of the diagonal brace-to-beam connection at the link end of the brace shall be at least the nominal strength of the brace. No part of this connection shall extend over the link length. If the brace resists a portion of the link end moment, the connection shall be designed as Type FR (Fully Restrained). 10.6.e. The width-thickness ratio of brace shall satisfy λp of Table B5.1 of the Specification. 10.7. Beam-to-Column Connections Beam-to-column connections away from links are permitted to be designed as a pin in the plane of the web. The connection shall have a design strength to resist torsion about the longitudinal axis of the beam based on two equal and opposite forces of at least 1.5 percent of the beam flange nominal strength computed as Fy bf tf acting laterally on the beam flanges. 10.8. Required Column Strength The required strength of columns shall be determined by Load Combinations 3-5 and 3-6 except that the moments and axial loads introduced into the column at the connection of a link or brace shall not be less than those generated by 1.25 times the nominal strength of the link. 11.
QUALITY ASSURANCE The general requirements and responsibilities for performance of a quality assurance plan shall be in accordance with the requirements of the regulatory agency and specifications by the design engineer. The special inspections and special tests needed to establish that the construction is in conformance with these provisions shall be included in a quality assurance plan. The minimum special inspection and testing contained in the quality assurance plan beyond that required by the Specification shall be as follows: Groove welded joints subjected to net tensile forces which are part of the seismic force resisting systems of Sects. 8, 9, and 10 shall be tested 100 percent either by ultrasonic testing or by other approved equivalent methods conforming to AWS D1.1. Exception: The nondestructive testing rate for an individual welder shall be reduced to 25 percent with the concurrence of the person responsible for structural design, provided the reject rate is demonstrated to be 5 percent or less of the welds tested for the welder.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 325
Part II—Allowable Stress Design (ASD) Alternative As an alternative to the LRFD seismic design procedures for structural steel design given in PART I, the design procedures in the Specification for Structural Steel Buildings—Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design, AISC 1989 are permitted as modified by PART II of these provisions. When using ASD, the provisions of PART I of these seismic provisions shall apply except the following sections shall be substituted for, or added to, the appropriate sections as indicated: 1.
SCOPE
Revise the first paragraph of PART I, Sect. 1 to read as follows: These special requirements are to be applied in conjunction with the AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings—Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design hereinafter referred to as Specification. They are intended for the design and construction of structural steel members and connections in buildings for which the design forces resulting from earthquake motions have been determined on the basis of energy dissipation in the nonlinear range of response. 3.
LOADS, LOAD COMBINATIONS AND NOMINAL STRENGTHS
Substitute the following for Section 3.2 in PART I: 3.2. Nominal Strengths The nominal strengths of members shall be determined as follows: 3.2.a. Replace Sect. A5.2 of the Specification to read: “The nominal strength of structural steel members for resisting seismic forces acting alone or in combination with dead and live loads shall be determined by multiplying 1.7 times the allowable stresses in Sect. D, E, F, G, J, and K.” 3.2.b. Amend the first paragraph of Sect. N1 of the Specification by deleting “or earthquake” and adding: “The nominal strength of members shall be determined by the requirements contained herein. Except as modified by these rules, all pertinent provisions of Chapters A through M shall govern.” 3.2.c. In Sect H1 of the Specification the definition of Fe ′ shall read as follows: Fe ′ =
π2E (Klb / rb)2
where: lb = the actual length in the plane of bending. rb = the corresponding radius of gyration. K = the effective length factor in the plane of bending. Add the following section to PART I: 3.3. Design Strengths 3.3.a. The design strengths of structural steel members and connections subjected to seismic forces in combination with other prescribed loads shall AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 326
PART II—ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN (ASD) ALTERNATIVE
be determined by converting allowable stresses into nominal strengths and multiplying such nominal strengths by the resistance factors herein. 3.3.b. Resistance factors, φ, for use in Part II shall be as follows: Flexure
φb = 0.90
Compression and axially loaded composite members
φc = 0.85
Eyebars and pin connected members: Shear of the effective area Tension on net effective area Bearing on the project area of pin
φsf = 0.75 φt = 0.75 φt = 1.0
Tension members: Yielding on gross section Fracture in the net section
φt = 0.90 φt = 0.75
Shear
φv = 0.90
Connections: Base plates that develop the strength of the members or structural systems Welded connections that do not develop the strength of the member or structural system, including connection of base plates and anchor bolts Partial Penetration welds in columns when subjected to tension stresses High strength bolts (A325 and A490) and rivets: Tensile strength Shear strength in bearing-type joints Slip-critical joints A307 bolts: Tensile strength Shear strength in bearing-type joints
φ = 0.90 φ = 0.67 φ = 0.80 φ = 0.75 φ = 0.65 φ = 1.0 φ = 0.75 φ = 0.60
Substitute the following for Section 7 in PART I in its entirety: 7.
REQUIREMENTS FOR ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (OMF)
7.1. Scope Ordinary Moment Frames (OMF) shall have a design strength as provided in the Specification to resist the Load Combinations 3-5 and 3-6 as modified by the following added provisions: 7.2. Joint Requirements All beam-to-column and column to beam connections in OMF which resist seismic forces shall meet one of the following requirements: 7.2.a. Type 1 connections conforming with Sect. 8.2, except that the required flexural strength, Mu, of a column-to-beam joint are not required to exceed that required to develop the nominal plastic flexural strength of the connection. 7.2.b. Type 1 connections capable of inelastic deformation and the design AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 327
strengths of the connections meeting the requirements of Sect. 7.1 using the Load Combinations 3-7 and 3-8. 7.2.c. Either Type 1 or Type 3 connections are permitted provided: 1. The design strengths of the members and connections meet the requirements of Sect. 7.1. 2. The connections have been demonstrated by cyclic tests to have adequate rotation capacity at a story drift calculated at a horizontal load of 0.4R × E (where the term 0.4R is equal to or greater than 1.0). 3. The additional drift due to Type 3 connections shall be considered in design. Type 1 and Type 3 connections are described in detail in Sect. A2 of the Specification. Substitute the following in Sections 10.6.a and 10.6.d in PART I: 10.6.a. Delete reference to Appendix H. 10.6.d. The last sentence shall read: “If the brace resists a portion of the link end moment as described above, the connection shall be designed as a Type 1 connection.”
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 328
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 329
Commentary on the Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings June 15, 1992
Part I—LRFD Provisions 1.
SCOPE Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) is an improved approach to the design of structural steel for buildings. The method involves explicit consideration of limit states, multiple load and resistance factors, and implicit probabilistic determination of reliability. The designation LRFD reflects the concept of factoring both loads and resistance. The LRFD method was devised to offer the designer greater flexibility, more rationality and possible overall economy. The First Edition of the LRFD Specification was published and distributed in 1986.1 It did not contain the special requirements necessary in the design and construction of steel buildings which are required to respond to high earthquake input by deformations into the nonlinear range. The seismic design forces specified in the building codes have been set with consideration given to the energy dissipation generated during the non-linear response. The provisions contained in this document are to be used in conjunction with the AISC LRFD Specification in the design of buildings in the areas of moderate and high seismicity. The load provisions have been modified from those contained in the Specification to be consistent with the load provisions contained in the soon to be published BOCA and SBCCI building codes and the ASCE 7-93, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.2 All these new seismic load provisions are modeled on the the 1991 NEHRP3 earthquake provisions.
2.
SEISMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORIES Buildings are classified into three types depending on the occupancy and use of each as related to the special hazards resulting from earthquake environment. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 330
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
The Seismic Hazard Exposure Groups listed in Table 2-1 are defined in detail, with examples of buildings in each type, in ASCE 7-93. The Seismic Performance Category to be used in the design of a specific building is defined by the seismic coefficient representing the peak velocity-related acceleration of the building site, Av, and the Seismic Hazard Exposure Group related to the occupancy and use of the building. The five categories, A through E, given in Table 2-2 specify design and detail requirements that would be required for the seismic design of the building. These categories establish the level of requirements to be used in items such as detailing limitations, quality assurance, method of analyses, orthogonal effects, and change of building use. The general requirements for each of the categories are given in ASCE 7-93. The differences related specifically to structural steel design are repeated in this Specification. 3.
LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS The most frequently used load factors and load combinations given in Sect. A4.1 of the Specification are repeated in this Section to reduce the amount of cross-referencing to other documents. They have been modified to be consistent with the anticipated ASCE 7-93. The most notable modification is the reduction of the load factor on E to 1.0. This results from the limit states load model used in ASCE 7-93. For design of structures subjected to impact loads, see the Specification. The earthquake load and load effects E in ASCE 7-93 are composed of two parts. E is the sum of the seismic horizontal load effects and one half of Av times the dead load effects. The second part adds an effect simulating vertical accelerations concurrent to the usual horizontal earthquake effects. The load factors and load combinations reflect the fact that when several loads act in combination with the dead load, e.g., dead plus live plus earthquake loads, only one of these takes on its maximum lifetime value, while the other load is at its “arbitrary point-in-time value,” at a value which can be expected to be on the structure at any time. The most critical effect may occur when one or more load types are not acting. The basic requirements for dual systems are given in the Glossary to clarify the use of the EBF in a dual system and to indicate that steel moment frames can also be used as part of a dual system with concrete shear walls. An amplification factor to earthquake load E of 0.4R is prescribed for limited use in this set of provisions. It is used as an amplification of the deflections determined using the earthquake forces specified in ASCE 7-93. It was derived by assuming that deflections due to large earthquake response would be the same regardless of the reductions in applied forces due to the inelastic response of the type of lateral force resisting system.56 The amount of this amplification was assumed to be two times the deflections generated by forces specified for a buildings with R = 5. This amplification factor is thus 2R / 5 or 0.4R. However, with R = 2.5 or less it is felt that the amplification factor should not be less than 1.0. The load combinations to be used with the amplification factor are given by formulas 3-7 and 3-8. Specific values of R are not needed for determination of the amplified load because R is cancelled out when substituted in the formula for the horizontal seismic base shear, V. The added complication that would be AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 331
required to consider orthogonal effects with the amplified force is not deemed to be necessary. The ASCE 7-93 provisions are detailed earthquake load provisions in which two methods of analysis are provided. The first is frequently referred to as the “Static Force Procedure” or “Equivalent Lateral Force Procedure.” The second method is the “Modal Analysis Procedure.” In both methods a linearly elastic model is assumed. Other “Dynamic Analysis Procedures” are permitted both with linearly elastic or non-linear models as long as the internal forces and deformations in the members are determined using a model consistent with the procedure adopted. Guidelines for use of these other methods of analyses are provided in the Commentary to ASCE 7-93. These earthquake provisions refer to the load provisions of ASCE 7-93. By changing the load combination portion of Section 3, these provisions can be made compatible with other sets of load provisions.4 For instance, the following changes can be made to the provisions in Section 3 to make them compatible with the following document: (Sn is used in this Commentary for snow loads to distinguish them from site effects that use the symbol S). 1991 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE:5 (SEAOC seismic provisions are similar)6 The required strength on the structure and its elements must be determined from the appropriate critical combination of factored loads. The most critical effect may occur when one or more loads are not acting. The following load combinations and corresponding load factors shall be investigated: 1.4D
(3-1)
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5(Lr or S or R′)
(3-2)
1.2D + 1.6(Lr or S or R′) + (0.5L or 0.8W)
(3-3)
1.2D + 1.3W + 0.5L + 0.5(Lr or S or R′)
(3-4)
1.2D + 1.5E + 0.5L + 0.2S
(3-5)
0.9D − (1.3W or 1.5E)
(3-6)
Exception: The load factor on L in Load Combinations 3-3, 3-4, and 3-5 shall equal 1.0 for garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly, and all areas where the live load is greater than 100 psf. Other special load combinations are included with specific design requirements throughout these provisions. Where required by these provisions, an amplification factor is applied on the earthquake load E = 3⁄8Rw, where Rw is a response factor similar to the factor R except used to reduce the earthquake load to a working stress design level. Earthquake loads are similar to those found in ASCE 7-93 except for the Rw factor. Earthquake loads are defined in detail in Section 2334 of 1991 UBC. The revised load combinations are: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 332
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
1.2D + (3Rw / 8)E + 0.5L + 0.2S
(3-7)
0.9D − (3Rw / 8)E
(3-8)
Exception: The load factor on L in Load Combination 3-7 shall equal 1.0 for garages, areas occupied as places of public assembly, and all areas where the live load is greater than 100 psf. The amplification factor was derived by using the similar assumptions that were used in deriving the factor for ASCE 7-93. The same type of building with R = 5 in ASCE 7-93 has a Structure System Coefficient Rw = 8 in 1991 UBC. The deflection determined by this Rw was used as the value to be amplified by 3. Thus (3Rw / 8)E. Where the use of the amplification factor to load E is required, orthogonal effects need not be included. The 1991 UBC outlines in detail many of the requirements for “Dynamic Lateral Force Procedure.” The following is a summary of these requirements: The ground motion may be defined in one of five ways: 1. The plot of a normalized response spectra may be used. 2. A site specific response spectra based on geologic, tectonic seismologic, and soil characteristics of the site may be used. As per SEAOC the damping ratio shall be 5 percent unless another value is shown to be consistent with the structural behavior of the building. 3. Site specific time histories are to be representative of actual earthquake motions. Spectra developed from these time histories would follow item (2) above. 4. Site specific response spectra and time histories developed for sites with a profile having more than 40 feet of soft clay per SEAOC shall be based on ground motion having a 10 percent probability of exceedance in 50 years; the effects of lengthening of the structural period on response amplification due to soil-structure resonance shall be included; and the design base shear shall be determined by dividing by a factor not greater than Rw for the structure. 5. A two-thirds factor shall be used on horizontal motions to determine the vertical component of ground motion unless specifically determined otherwise for the site. The mathematical model shall represent the actual structure adequately for the calculation of all the significant features of the dynamic response. Three dimensional models shall be used for highly irregular plan configurations if a rigid or semi-rigid diaphragm is used. A response spectrum analysis shall be an elastic dynamic analysis of all the significant peak modal responses combined in a statistical manner to obtain an approximate total structural response. When the base shear is less than that determined from the Static Lateral Force Procedure, it shall be increased to 100 percent of the static base shear for irregular structures, shall be taken as 90 percent of the static base shear for regular structures where the fundamental period is determined using the structural characteristics of the building system, AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 333
and shall be set at 80 percent for regular structures. Accidental torsion shall be accounted for by appropriate adjustments in the model. Where a dual system is used, the combined system shall be accounted for in the modelling; the backup Special Moment Frame (SMF) shall be capable of resisting 25 percent of the base shear used for the design of the total system. The analysis of the backup SMF may either use the Static of Dynamic Lateral Force Procedures. A time history analysis shall be an elastic or inelastic dynamic analysis of a model of a structure subjected to specified time history of ground motion. The time dependent dynamic response of the structure to these motions is obtained through numerical integration of its equations of motion. These analyses shall be based on established principles of mechanics. Scaling of base shear determined by a response spectrum analysis results in making the Load Combinations 3-1 through 3-6 as well as 3-7 and 3-8 applicable to this method of analysis in the 1991 UBC. No scaling effect is specified for the results of time history dynamic analysis (either elastic or inelastic). In this case, it is necessary to define the specified time histories which will result in the structure responding to the limit of essentially elastic response. This would be the level to determine the required resistance of the system. In order to determine the deformations corresponding to the specified drift limits, the force level shall be divided by a factor of 1.5. 4.
STORY DRIFT Deflection limits are commonly used in design to assure the serviceability of the structure. These serviceability limit states are variable, since they depend upon the structural usage and contents. The Specification does not specify these serviceability limits, since they are regarded as a matter of engineering judgment, rather than general design limits.54 Like deflection limits, drift limits for both wind and seismic design are excluded from these Seismic Provisions. Research has shown that seismic drift control provides a function beyond assuring the serviceability of the structure. The added strength and stiffness which drift limits often provide in moment frames improves the performance of structures during earthquakes. Model codes, load standards, and resource documents contain specific seismic drift limits but there are major differences among them. There is neither uniform agreement regarding appropriate code specified drift limits nor how they should be applied. Further it is difficult to estimate the actual story drift of moment frames with panel zone yielding. Nevertheless, drift control is important to serviceability and stability of the structure. It is recommended the designer review drift limits in the appropriate code and use those applicable for the serviceability and stability of the structure under consideration. The story drift limitations of ASCE 7-93 are applied to an amplified story drift that estimates the story drift that would occur during a large earthquake. The story drift is defined as the difference of deflection between the top and bottom of the story under consideration. For determining the story drift the deflection determined using the earthquake forces E is amplified by a deflection amplification factor, Cd, which is dependent on the type of building system. The story drifts when determined by an elastic analysis, including the P-∆ effect when AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 334
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
TABLE C-4.1 Tentative Allowable Story Drift Seismic Hazard Exposure Group Building
I
II
III
Single story buildings without equipment attached to the structural resisting system and with interior walls, partitions, ceilings, and exterior wall system that have been designed to accommodate the story drifts.
No limit
0.020hsx
0.015hsx
Buildings with 4 stories or less with interior walls, partitions ceilings, and exterior wall system that have been designed to accommodate the story drifts.
0.025hsx
0.020hsx
0.015hsx
All other buildings.
0.020hsx
0.015hsx
0.010hsx
Where hsx is the story height of the story drift calculated.
applicable, have limits depending on the Seismic Hazard Exposure Group of the building as shown in Table C-4.1. In calculating the elastic drift, the forces may be based on the fundamental period of the building without the arbitrary limit specified for determining the seismic design forces in the framing members. ASCE 7-93 does not prescribe explicit requirements for building separations. An admonition is included, however, that all portions of the building shall be designed and constructed as an integral unit in resisting seismic forces unless separated structurally by a sufficient distance to avoid damaging contact between components under amplified deformations. The latter are determined by multiplying the elastic deflection by a deflection amplification factor, Cd, which is based on the type and materials of the seismic resisting system. If the effects of hammering between segments can be shown not to be detrimental, separations could be reduced. 1991 UBC Requirements: In order to comply with the 1991 UBC requirements, the story drift shall be calculated including the translational and torsional deflections resulting from the application of unfactored lateral forces. Story drift is defined as the displacement of one level relative to the level above or below. The calculated story drift shall not exceed 0.04 / Rw nor 0.005 times the story height for structures with fundamental periods of less than 0.7 seconds and shall not exceed 0.03 / Rw nor 0.004 times the story height for structures with fundamental periods of 0.7 seconds or greater. For the purpose of this limit the fundamental period is the same as that used for determining the base shear. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 335
For calculating the drift, the lateral forces may be calculated using a base shear V defined as: V=
ZIC W, in which Rw
Z = The seismic zone coefficient. I = An importance factor. Rw = A numerical coefficient related to the type of construction. C=
1.25S , in which 2 T ⁄3
S = Site coefficient. T = Fundamental period of vibration, which may be determined using the structural properties and deformational characteristics of the resisting elements of the lateral force resisting framing. Method A of determining T need not be applied for drift determination. The lower bound of 0.075 on the ratio C / Rw may also be neglected. W = Dead load used to calculate seismic loads. The story drift limits need not be applied if it is demonstrated that greater drift can be tolerated without affecting life safety by damage to either structural and non-structural elements. There are no drift limits on single story steel framed structures with low occupancies. This would generally apply to buildings such as warehouses, parking garages, aircraft hangers, factories, workshops and agricultural buildings. These buildings are not allowed to have brittle finishes and are not allowed to have equipment attached to the structural frame unless the finish or equipment attachment is detailed to accommodate the additional drift. 5.
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS The list of structural steels for use in designing to earthquake motion has been chosen with consideration given to the inelastic properties of the steels and their weldability. In general, the steels selected possess the following characteristics: • Ratio of tensile strength to yield strength between 1.2 to 1.8. • Pronounced stress-strain plateau at yield strength. • Large inelastic strain capability. • Tension elongation of 20 percent or greater in a 2-in. gage length. • Good weldability for inelastic behavior. Other steels including those with a specified yield point greater than 50 ksi should not be used without demonstrating that equivalent inelastic behavior can be attained.
6.
COLUMN REQUIREMENTS
6.1. Column Strength During the maximum probable earthquake expected at any site, axial forces AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 336
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
calculated using the specified design earthquake may be exceeded. This is a result of the reduction in lateral force for use in analysis of an elastic model of the structure, the underestimation of the overturning forces in this analysis, and the concurrent vertical accelerations which are not explicitly specified as a required design load. The amplifications required in this section provide an approximation of these actions by providing a limit to the required axial force. The two special Load Combinations 6-1 and 6-2 account for these effects; one as a minimum required column compressive required strength and the other on the minimum required tensile strength. They are to be applied without consideration of any concurrent flexure on the members. The exceptions provided for these limits are self limiting conditions stating that the required axial strengths need not exceed the limits based on the design strength of the overall system to transfer axial loads to the column. For instance, if pile foundations are used, the design strength of the piles in tension may be much larger than the required strength because the size of the foundation may depend on the required strength in compression. 6.2. Column Splices Column splices are required to have design strengths adequate to join column elements together not only to resist the axial, flexural, and shear forces required at the splice location by the usual load combinations 3-1 through 3-6 but also the forces specified in 6.1. Butt weld splices in columns where it is anticipated that potential dynamic loading consists only of wind or earthquake forces are not required by these specifications to provide the transition of thicknesses given in Section 9.20 of AWS D1.1.7 If other types of frequent, high cycle dynamic loadings are also present, the transition requirements should be met. Partial penetration welds in thick members, such as occur in column flange splices, are very brittle under tensile loading, showing virtually no ductility.8–9 Recognizing this behavior in seismic design, the location of column splices is moved away from the beam-to-column connection to reduce bending and a 50 percent increase is stipulated in required strength of the splice. The possibility for developing tensile stresses in such welds during a maximum probable seismic event should be considered. If there is probability of such a condition developing, the use of splice plates welded to the lower part of the column and bolted to the upper part is suggested. If for the noted adverse condition, the suggested detail is not practical, the possibility of fracture in partial penetration welded joints should be recognized, and some restraint from uncontrolled relative movement at the splice be provided. This can be achieved, for example, by having wide splice plates on both sides of the column web to maintain alignment. Shake table experiments have shown that if some columns, unattached at the base, reseat themselves after lifting, the performance of a steel frame remains tolerable.10 These provisions apply for common frame configurations. The designer should review the conditions found in columns in tall stories, large changes in column sizes at the splice, or where the possibility of a single curvature exists on a AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 337
column over multiple stories to determine if special design strength or special detailing is necessary at the splice. 7.
REQUIREMENTS FOR ORDINARY MOMENT FRAMES (OMF)
7.1. Scope Ordinary moment frames of structural steel are moment frames which do not meet the requirements for special design and detailing contained in Section 8. OMF of structural steel do exist and are being built in all areas of seismic activity. Experience has shown that in most instances the buildings of this type have responded without significant structural damage. In recent years advances in analytical procedures have minimized the natural margins of safety normally found in buildings that were designed by approximate methods. Thus it is prudent to require that the design of the beam-to-column connection be adequate to develop the strength of the members framing into the connection as is specified in Sect. 8.2 unless the connection has a design strength significantly larger than the required strengths required by Load Combinations 3-5 and 3-6. Thus unless the connection can develop the full strength of members framing into it, the Load Combinations 3-7 and 3-8 should be used to provide the required strength on the connection. 7.2. Joint Requirements Although for OMF it is not required to meet most of the special detailing requirements given in Sect. 8, consideration should be given to using as many of the requirements as practical, particularly in those locations where good engineering judgment would suggest that the use of the special detailing requirements would provide improved system and member ductility and stability. The provision requiring a demonstration of rotation capacity is included to permit the use of connections not permitted under the provisions of Sect. 8, such as top and bottom angle joints, in areas where the added drift is acceptable. 8.
REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES (SMF)
8.1. Scope The requirements in this Section are for those buildings whose lateral force resisting systems are moment frames in the higher seismic zones. The special provisions, when reasonably applied, provide SMF with reliable ductile systems. Non-ductile behavior is inhibited so that nonlinear response to large earthquake motions can occur in components of the frames having a capability of ductile behavior. The concepts are not new but the provisions are supported by tests and analyses.11–17 SMF systems when properly designed have, in general, resulted in reliable ductile structural systems that respond well to high earthquake motions for both low and high rise buildings. Inelastic energy absorption through ductile behavior of members of SMF can occur at three places usually adjacent to the beam-to-column connection. Flexural hinges can form in the beams and columns and shear yielding can occur in the area of the panel zone. Within limits and specific restraints, inelastic yielding is permitted in each or in combinations of these three areas. The primary concern when designing the frame for inelastic behavior is to prevent brittle AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 338
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
fracture and severe buckling in and adjacent to the zone of inelasticity. The final selection of the appropriate zones of inelasticity is left to the design engineer. Different problems are presented to the design engineer depending on which of the three areas is chosen to have the lowest inelastic threshold. Yielding in columns is permitted but is considered by many design engineers to be the least desirable. Special limitations are provided for this type of yielding by the provisions in Sect. 8.6. and the bracing required in Sect. 8.7. If the first inelastic mode is chosen to be shear yielding of the panel zone, the limitations of Sect. 8.3 would be required. This usually results in the flexibility of the panel zone being a significant contributor to the total story drift and consideration of this flexibility should be included in analyses.18 If the designer chooses to avoid inelastic behavior at the above two locations, the yield hinge will form in the beam. This requires the critical design items to be the beam-to-column connection and the beam stability. 8.2. Beam-to-Column Joints The special limitations provided for these joints are intended to assure that inelastic hinging that may occur in the connection during the response to high seismic activity will not take place at the joinery but in one of the two adjoining locations, namely in the beam or in the panel zone.19–24 Some of the more common beam-to-column connections are illustrated in Fig. C-8.1. Beam-tocolumn connections are not only designed to meet the loads prescribed by the Load Combinations 3-1 through 3-6 but also designed to resist the requirements based on the nominal strengths of the members actually used in the framing system. Frequently the frame member sizes may be sized to limit drift or to meet requirements of load combinations other than those containing seismic loads. Thus to provide frames having the capability of deforming into the nonlinear range without having a connection failure, the required strength on the connection is most frequently based on the design strength of the members actually used. An exception is provided for joints that are not designed to contribute to the lateral force resisting system. In order to demonstrate that the joint will be capable of undergoing large deformation, the elastic or inelastic joint rotations that would be induced by deforming the frame into an amplified displacement of 0.4R times that under Load Combinations 3-5 and 3-6 are required. The term 0.4R should not be less than 1.0. If the “non-moment resisting” web connection were to be a shear tab joined to the column flange by welding and bolted to the beam web, the connection should be proportioned to either yield in the tab or by use of horizontally slotted holes for the bolts. Fracture should not occur in the welded joint to the column. (See Fig. C-8.2.) The required shear strength, Vu, of the beam-to-column joint is defined as the summation of the factored gravity loads and the shear resulting from the required moments on the two ends of the beam. The easy method is to assume that Mp occurs at each end of the beam. However, when Load Combination 3-7 is used in which one end only of the beam reaches Mp, or the panel zone nominal shear reaches Vn as defined in Sect. 8.2.a, the shear resulting from hinging at both ends of the beam need not be used. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 339
a
b
c
d
e
f
Fig. C-8.1. Beam-to-column connections.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 340
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
When the required flexural strength of the joint is Mp of the beam, the type of joint is prescribed to be one of three types: First is the joint where both flanges and web are fully welded to develop their portions of the moment and shear strength of the beam. (See Fig. C-8.3.) Second is the joint of those beams which have a ratio of the flexural nominal strength of the flanges only to the flexural nominal strength of the full section of at least 70 percent. For this connection, the flanges are joined with complete penetration welded joints whereas the web would be designed to carry the
ROTATION BY NON LINEAR BENDING OF JOINT MEMBERS
SHORT SLOTTED HOLES
ROTATION BY BOLT SLIP
Fig. C-8.2. Simple connections.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 341
CONTINUITY PLATE, TOP & BOTTOM ERECTION BOLTS SHEAR PLATE
TYP.
FULL PENETRATION TOP & BOTTOM FLANGE (a)
ERECTION BOLT CONTINUITY PLATE, TOP & BOTTOM
SHEAR PLATE ERECTION BOLT
TYP.
FULL PENETRATION TOP & BOTTOM FLANGE (b)
Fig. C-8.3. Beam-column joint.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 342
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
required shear by either welds or by slip-critical high strength bolts. (See Fig. C-8.4.) Third is the joint of beams not meeting the 70 percent criteria. This would be similar to the second joint except that the beam web is required to be welded directly or through shear tabs even though the web is bolted to the shear tab. The welds are required to have a nominal moment strength at least equal to 20 percent of the nominal moment strength of the full beam web. (See Fig. C-8.5.) Other joints than the ones specified are permitted to be used but the adequacy of the joint requires substantiation either by tests or by calculations. Where the adequacy is demonstrated by calculations, additional conservatism is provided by requiring the joint to develop at least 125 percent of the nominal moment and shear strength of the beam. 8.3. Panel Zone of Beam-to-Column Connection (Beam web parallel to column web) During recent years many cyclic tests have shown the ductility of shear yielding in panel zones through many cycles of inelastic distortions.17,25–28 Thus the panel zone does not need to develop beam hinging and a method of determining the nominal shear strength of the panel zone is needed. The usual assumption of Von Mises shear limit of 0.577Fy dt did not predict the actual behavior of many of the tests. Many panel zone and beam tests have shown that strain hardening and other phenomena have enabled shear strengths in excess of 1.0Fy dt to be developed. Eq. 8-1 reflects the significant strength provided by thick column flanges. In calculating the required panel zone shear strength the UBC 1991 magnifies the specified load by a factor of 1.85. For the LRFD specification, the typical Load Combinations 3-5 and 3-6 are used and the nominal web shear strength is defined as 0.6Fy dt, rather than 0.55Fy dt which had been used in plastic design and in some previous references. In order to provide the same level of safety as determined by tests and as contained in the UBC 1991, a lower resistance factor φv = 0.75 was selected. An upper limit is placed on the required shear strength of the panel zone of 0.9 times the summation of the beam design plastic moments φb Mp framing into the connection. In order to minimize the chances of shear buckling during inelastic deformations of the panel zone, the thickness of the panel zone material is limited to not less than 1⁄90 of the sum of its depth and width. The thickness of any doubler plate used is assumed ineffective in inhibiting buckling unless it is connected to the panel zone plate in such a manner, such as plug welds, to prevent local buckling of the plate. (See Fig. C-8.6.) Whenever doubler plates are used (i.e., increased strength, compliance with Eq. 8-2, or to reduce panel zone deformations), the plates are required to be close to the column web. The doubler plates are to have at least minimum fillet welds across the top and bottom and to have either butt or fillet welds to the column flanges. These details are provided to closely simulate the joints that have been found to perform satisfactorily in the cyclic tests that have been performed. Fillet AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 343
CONTINUITY PLATE, TOP & BOTTOM
SHEAR PLATE
TYP.
FULL PENETRATION TOP & BOTTOM FLANGE (a)
CONTINUITY PLATE, TOP & BOTTOM
SHEAR PLATE
TYP.
FULL PENETRATION TOP & BOTTOM FLANGE (b)
Fig. C-8.4. Beam-column joint, bf tf (db − tf)Fy ≥ 0.7Fy Zx. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 344
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
CONTINUITY PLATE, TOP & BOTTOM
SHEAR PLATE
TYP.
FULL PENETRATION TOP & BOTTOM FLANGE (a)
CONTINUITY PLATE, TOP & BOTTOM
SHEAR PLATE
TYP.
FULL PENETRATION TOP & BOTTOM FLANGE (b)
Fig. C-8.5. Beam-column joint, bf tf (db − tf)Fy < 0.7Fy Zx. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 345
welding is encouraged to assist in minimizing the built-in weld stresses and the cost of welding. Doubler plates may be designed to extend between continuity plates which are welded directly to the column web or they may extend above and below the continuity plates which are welded to the doubler plate. For the latter case, the horizontal welds at the top and bottom of the doubler plate should be sized to transfer all loads imposed by the design system. In particular, the welds to the column web should be designed to transfer load from the doubler plate to the column web for their portion of load from the continuity plate. For the fillet or butt welds of the doubler plate to the column flanges, the following items should be considered: • The vertical shear and bending loads of beams or girders framing perpendicular to the column web and supported by the doubler plate. • The compression or tension load delivered to the column web and doubler plate by the flanges of the girders framing into the column flanges. For examples of doubler plate connections, see Ref. 55 and Fig. C-8.6. The use of diagonal stiffeners for strengthening and stiffening of the panel zone has not been adequately tested for low cycle reversed loading into the inelastic range. Thus no specific recommendations are made at this time for special seismic requirements for this detail. TOP & BOTT.
1″
BEAM JOINT NOT SHOWN
EA. END
WEB DOUBLER AS REQ’D
Fig. C-8.6. Panel zone detail (with doubler).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 346
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
8.4. Beam Limitations In order to minimize the cost of connections it has occasionally been suggested that the beam cross-section be reduced immediately adjacent to the column. This type of assemblage can result in a very brittle mode of failure. Detailing that results in a concentration of stress in an area where inelastic deformations are anticipated under large seismic response is discouraged. The width thickness ratio of projecting elements should be within those which provide the cross-section with stability against local buckling. The limits given in Table 8-1 are deemed adequate by the Committee for ductilities to 6 or 7 based on the tests performed to date.29–32 Further testing may result in some modifications of these limits. 8.5. Continuity Plates Sect. K1 of the Specification gives the design requirements for webs and flanges with concentrated forces. Sect. K1.2 gives the design strength in local buckling in a flange under the action of a tensile force. When the design strength is inadequate, column web stiffeners are required. In moment resisting frames, an interior beam-to-column connection has tension on one flange and compression on the opposite side. When stiffeners are required, it is normal to place a full depth stiffener on each side of the column web. As this stiffener provides a load path for the flanges on both sides of the column, it is commonly called a continuity plate. The stiffener not only provides resistance to local flange buckling but also provides a boundary to the very highly stressed panel zone. When it is anticipated that there could be a plastic hinge adjacent to the column, the required force to determine whether a continuity plate is required is not the design earthquake force given by the load combinations 3-1 through 3-6. It is the force exerted by the beam connection when the full plastic moment with possible strain hardening has been formed. Tests have shown that hinging occurs due to local flange buckling when a compact section is strain hardened to about 1.3Fy.20 At the joint, the flanges of the beam can be strain-hardened to a force of 1.8Fy bf tf. Using this force as the required strength on the continuity plate is conservative as there is only a small moment strength contributed by the bolted web connection. Since the flange continuity plate is needed to protect the weld at the joint of the beam flange to column flange, consideration should be given to their use in connections where the calculations indicate they may not be required. Continuity plates have been used in almost all cyclic joint tests that have performed well.17 When tests have been performed on specimens not meeting the requirements of Sect. K1.2, the joints have performed poorly. For the actual design of the continuity plates, Sect. K1.8 of the LRFD specification would apply. 8.6. Column-Beam Moment Ratio Tests have shown that moment frame subassemblages in which yielding of columns occurred did not exhibit any loss of lateral force resistance at displacements representative of maximum expected earthquake response.33 Most engineers believe, however, that the performance of seismic moment frames is more AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 347
predictable if columns outside of the panel zone do not yield. The tests necessary to formulate truly appropriate criteria have not been conducted. In the past, many frames have been designed with the assumption that the first hinging occurs in the columns and until recently no code provisions for this behavior have been enforced. There have not been any documented failures in past earthquakes directly attributable to column hinging. Design situations do occur where elimination of the “strong beam-weak column” connection type would be grossly impractical. The committee feels that some interim provisions are appropriate. Thus Eqs. 8-3 and 8-4 are introduced. These formulas require that the initial potential for yielding at a beam-to-column connection be in the beam or panel zone rather than in the column. The exceptions to the “strong column-weak beam” connection type require that the column be a compact section and include one of the following characteristics: a. Have a low required axial strength. b. Be a column in a story which has a significantly stronger design story shear strength than the story above. c. Be a column that is not part of the lateral force resisting system except to support the axial load from the overturning moment of the building as a whole. Wherever possible the committee recommends that the hinging conform to the requirements of Sect. 8.2. 8.7. Beam-to-Column Connection Restraint In order to function properly, particularly if inelastic behavior in or adjacent to the beam-to-column connection occurs during high seismic activity, the column needs to be braced to prevent rotation out of the plane of the moment frame. 8.7.a. Restrained Connections: Beam-to-column connections are usually restrained laterally by roof or floor framing. For these cases, lateral support of the connection is required only at the level of the top flanges of the beams as long as the column can be shown to remain elastic. The two criteria to demonstrate that the column remains elastic are arbitrary but appear to be reasonable assumptions until otherwise demonstrated by test. If the column cannot be demonstrated to remain elastic, a hinge would be potentially forming and the column should be laterally supported at the levels of both the top and bottom flanges of the beam. The lateral support provided at the beam-to-column connection is to be designed using a required strength of 2 percent of the nominal beam strength. It is recognized from the limited test data available that the lateral support provided should also be rigid enough to inhibit lateral movement of the column flanges.32 Designers should carefully design the lateral support member to be composed of reasonably rigid elements and be anchored to rigid supports. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 348
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
The lateral support provided the beam-to-column connection is not required to be a separate member at the connection in all cases. It may be shown that the lateral support force can be adequately carried by the column web or the beam flanges. 8.7.b. Unrestrained Connection: Unrestrained connections can occur in special cases as in two story frames, at mechanical floors or for architectural space layout. When this does occur, special care should be provided to minimize the potential of out-of-plane buckling at the connection. Three arbitrary provisions are given for the columns to assure that this buckling does not occur. 8.8. Lateral Support of Beams The lateral support for beams is defined in Chapter F in the LRFD design specifications. In moment resisting frames, the beams are nearly always in double curvature between columns unless one end is pinned. If the formula for plastic design were used as a guide and assuming Mp at one end and pinned at the other, formula F1-1 would yield 3,600ry / Fy. With Fy =36 ksi, Lpd = 100ry. The 1991 UBC has 96ry for this limitation. Due to the low cycle oscillating motion of the frames under earthquake loading and the uncertainty of the locations of hinging under the various loading combinations, a more conservative approach was appropriate and set the maximum limit of the spacing of lateral support for frame beams at 2,500ry / Fy for both top and bottom flanges. 9.
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (CBF)
9.1
Scope The provisions contained in the Section are for braced frame systems of Building Categories C, D, and E where the braces are designed to carry all the lateral force shears or are used in combination with a moment resisting frame. If used in combination with a moment frame system, the moment frames should follow the requirements of Sects. 7 or 8 as required by the local Building Code. In a Concentrically Braced Frame (CBF), the bracing members are so arranged that the brace members primarily act with axial loading. CBF usually are in one of the following five types. (See Figs. C-9.1 through C-9.5). Ductility of CBF systems producing a pattern of reasonably stable reversible distortions provides justification for basing seismic design on reduced displacements that can be expected during a strong earthquake. CBF systems, by the fact that the primary forces in the bracing system are axial tension and compression, are very limited in reversible inelastic distortions. Tests have shown that after buckling, an axially loaded member rapidly loses strength with repeated inelastic load reversals and does not return to its original straight position.34 For this reason in high seismic areas, CBF systems have not been permitted by codes for tall or special buildings without being combined with a moment resisting frame. Codes also have required significantly higher levels of design force so that the possibility of large uncontrolled inelastic deformations will not occur. For instance, ASCE 7-88 in Sect. 9.9.5 requires that CBF be designed to a force 1.25 times the normal design force given in Sect. 9.4 for the system involved. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
Fig. C-9.1. Diagonal braced frame.
Fig. C-9.2. X-braced frame.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 349
6 - 350
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
Fig. C-9.3. V-braced frame.
Fig. C-9.4. Inverted V-braced frame.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 351
In Sect. 9.4 of this specification, for Special Configurations, this higher force factor is raised to 1.5. The performance of CBF systems in earthquakes is acceptable as long as they retain stable configuration. The emphasis of these provisions is on raising the level of stable behavior and protecting against brittle failures. When an axially loaded brace buckles in compression, several developments take place: a. When buckling occurs, additional load is transferred to the tension brace increasing the force it must carry. b. The buckling of the brace may cause excessive rotation at the brace ends and local connection failure. c. The buckling can cause local or torsional buckling to occur near mid span. d. If the buckling causes the brace to bow out of plane of the braced frame, non-structural encasement of the frame system can be destroyed. e. Brace buckling can occur non-symmetrically which would induce large torsional response. f. Excessive buckling can affect non-structural systems which are attached to the frame.6
Fig. C-9.5. K-braced frame.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 352
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
9.2. Bracing Members 9.2.a. Slenderness: Except for low buildings using the required strength given in Sect. 9.5, the slenderness (L / r) of members of CBF systems is limited. In the post-buckling range, the compressive nominal axial strength deteriorates.34 Hysteresis loops of tested assemblies take on a severely pinched shape. (See Fig. C-9.6.) Braces with small L / r dissipate more energy because in the post-buckling range they undergo cyclic inelastic bending which slender braces cannot. Very slender braces have almost no stiffness in a buckled configuration. On a load reversal, the brace quickly assumes a straightened configuration and very rapidly picks up a tensile force. This rapid increase in the brace force may cause impact loading and may lead to a brittle failure of the connection. The curvatures associated with cyclic inelastic bending of braces may be large and local buckling can develop. This local buckling may be so severe as to result in localized kinking of the brace or the connection plate elements causing crack propagation and fracture. Such fractures have been obseved rather early in tests of tubular bracing members.35 This characteristic is more prevalent in rectangular and square tube braces. Consideration should be given to using composite tubes with concrete fill to inhibit buckling.36 9.2.b. Compressive Design Strength: Due to the cyclic nature of seismic response, the compressive design strength of bracing members is reduced to 80 percent of the value given in the Specification, Chapter E. P (kips) 264 200
100 –1.0
1.0
0
Finish
2.0
δ Axial (in.) –100
–200
W6x20 L = 10 ft KL / r = 80
9 in. 3.5 in. Lateral ∆ Fig. C-9.6. P−δ diagram for a strut.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 353
This reduction factor is a simplified value from the factor proposed by others which varies with KL / r.6 When evaluating the nominal strength of the bracing system for the purpose of determining the maximum load the bracing will impose on other systems (such as Eq. 6-1), the reduction for cyclic behavior should not be used for design as it would underestimate the nominal strength of the bracing system during the early cycles of seismic response. 9.2.c. Lateral Force Distribution: This provision attempts to balance the tensile and compressive resistances across the width and breadth of the building since at large loads the capacity of buckled compression braces may be substantially less than that of tension braces. An exception is provided for the case where the bracing members were sufficiently oversized to provide essentially elastic seismic response. 9.2.d. Width-Thickness Ratios: In Sect. B5 of the Specification, definitions are given to three types of sections. The compact section is one which has elements with width-thickness ratios, λ, less than λp. Non-compact sections are those with elements λp ≤ λ ≤ λr. Slender compression sections are those which have at least one element for which λ is greater than λr. The latter sections are prone to local buckling and are not to be used for the bracing members covered in this Section. The circular section wall thickness limitation was chosen to be the same as for Plastic Design in the Specification. Due to the repetitive nature of cyclic loading for rectangular tubular sections, a more stringent requirement on the b / t ratios is specified based on tests.35–36 Filling of tubing with lean concrete has been shown to effectively stiffen the tube walls. 9.2.e. Built-up Member Stitches: The special requirements for built-up member stitches were chosen from test data.37 They are intended for members built up from double angles and channels, and may not be appropriate for markedly different shapes. 9.3. Bracing Connections 9.3.a. In CBF systems, the bracing members normally carry most of the seismic story shear, particularly if a dual system is not used. The required strength on brace connections should be adequate so that failure by out-of-plane buckling of gussets or brittle fracture of the connection are not the critical failure mechanism. The minimum of the three criteria, (i.e., the design axial tension strength of the bracing member, the force generated by the amplified load combinations of 3-7 and 3-8, and the maximum force that could be generated by the overall system) determine the required strength on both the brace connection and the beam-to-column connection if it is part of the bracing system. The latter criterion is intended to cover the possibility that the shear could be limited by the amount of overturning that could be developed. 9.3.b. Net Area: Eq. 9-1 extends the concepts of LRFD Sect. B3 to the forces given in Section 9.2.a above. 9.3.c. Gusset Plates: Gusset plates in CBF systems are frequently the critical AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 354
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
design element in a system required to deform into the inelastic range. The increased force required for design of CBF tends to reduce the inelastic demand but may be insufficient to totally eliminate the problem. If the critical buckling mode of the braced member is in the plane of the CBF, the gussets and their joints should have a design strength capable to resist the nominal strength of the brace in that direction. If the critical buckling mode is out of the plane of the CBF, each gusset shall be detailed to permit the formation of a hinge line in the gusset. (See Fig. C-9.7.) 9.4. Special Bracing Configuration Requirements In addition to the general requirements for bracing members and their connections given above, special limitations are applied to V and K types of CBF systems due to their special configurations. 9.4.a. V and Inverted V Type Bracing: If one diagonal of a V type brace were to buckle in compression, the force in the tension brace would become larger than the force in the buckled brace. The vertical resultant of these two forces could then impose a large vertical deformation on the horizontal member of the bracing system. (See Fig. C-9.8.) If the connection at the point of the V tip were pinned, there would be no resistance to this deformation. If a continuous horizontal member survives and undergoes a deformation reversal, the previously buckled diagonal member would
BRACING MEMBER 2t
GUSSET PLATE
t = THICKNESS OF GUSSET PLATE
Fig. C-9.7. Brace-to-gusset plate requirement for buckling out-of-plane bracing system.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 355
not return to its original alignment and the diagonal member which was in tension could exceed its capacity in compression. In this manner both diagonal members would be in a buckled condition. This behavior would cause the post buckling strength of the braced system to deteriorate rapidly.38 (See Fig. C-9.9.) Near the tip point of the V is a zone where inelastic rotations are likely to occur, members should be braced against out-of-plane buckling. Several options were considered for CBF systems using the V type bracing. One was to prohibit its use, a second was to impose stringent limitations on the slenderness ratios of the bracing members, and a third was to provide a larger axial load capacity for the diagonal members. The latter option was adopted by providing a design axial strength 1.5 times the required axial strength in lieu of the 1.25 normally required for other CBF. It is also required that the beam be continuous throughout the bay and that this beam be designed to carry the tributary vertical gravity loads without considering the support provided by the diagonal members of the V. A review of more recent testing of V braced systems may in future editions be able to modify some of the current limitations. 9.4.b. K Bracing: In areas of high seismicity where it is envisioned that inelastic response to large motions will be required, the K type of CBF system is not a desirable method for seismic resistance. The same behavior discussed in the V type bracing occurs, but in the case of the K system a buckled brace causes the column to deform horizontally. Potentially this could cause column buckling and subsequent collapse. In buildings of Categories A, B, and a portion of C, the K system is permitted unrestricted by these provisions. For the remainder of Category C as per
Fig. C-9.8. Failure mechanism of inverted V-braced frame.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 356
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
Sect. 2.2, however, K braces shall meet the requirements Sects. 9.4.b and 9.5. This requires a 50 percent increase in design axial load for the braces and a continuous column though at the story mid-height. It is recommended that K type bracing not be used even where permitted for seismic resistance unless other configurations are impractical. 9.5. Low Buildings One of the few problem areas observed in the seismic performance of smaller steel buildings using the CBF system pertain to the size and type of member connections used. Quite frequently the critical design horizontal load is wind rather than seismic. In these cases, the sizing of bracing members is larger than would be required if seismic loads were the only design horizontal loads. Thus for smaller buildings and roof structures, the special provisions for CBF systems have been waived if the seismic resisting system has been designed using the amplified loads given in Load Combinations 3-7 and 3-8. This waiver would permit, for instance, an X braced or diagonal braced system in which the bracing members would be assumed to be in tension only. 10.
REQUIREMENTS FOR ECCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAMES (EBF)
10.1. Scope
THIRD STORY SHEAR (KIPS)
Research39–49 has shown that buildings using the EBF system possess the ability to combine high stiffness in the elastic range together with excellent ductility and energy dissipation capacity in the inelastic range. In the elastic range, the lateral stiffness of an EBF system is comparable to that of a CBF system, particularly when short link lengths are used. In the inelastic range, EBF systems
800
400
0
–400
–800 –4
–2
0
2
4
THIRD STORY DRIFT (IN.) Fig. C-9.9. Story shear–story drift diagram for frame with inverted V-bracing.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 357
provide stable, ductile behavior under severe cyclic loading, comparable to that of a SMF system. The EBF is composed of columns, beams, and braces in which at least one end of each bracing member connects to a beam at a short distance from a beam-to- column connection or from an adjacent beam-to-brace connection. (See Fig. C-10.1.) The short distance of the beam between the brace connection and the column or between brace connections is called the link. The design purpose of an EBF system creates a system that will yield primarily in the links. The special provisions for EBF systems are intended to satisfy this criterion and to ensure that cyclic yielding in the links can occur in a stable manner. The yielding in the links is accomplished by ensuring that the diagonal braces, the columns, and the portion of the beam outside of the links remain essentially elastic under forces that can be generated by fully yielding and strain hardened links. Arrangements of braces can be made in which links may not be fully effective. One such arrangement is the one shown on Fig. C-10.2 in which links are provided at each end of the brace. If the upper link has significantly lower design shear strength than the story below, the upper link deforms inelastically and limits the force that can be delivered to the brace to deform the lower link inelastically. When this condition occurs the upper link is termed an active link, whereas the lower link is an inactive link. Having potentially inactive links in the EBF system increases the difficulty of analysis. The plastic analyses show that in some cases the lower link yields due to the combined effect of D, L, and E loads, and the frame capacity becomes smaller than expected.50 It also increases the cost of the structure by requiring full link details on the inactive links even though the brace would be sized by the strength of the active link and the brace connection at an inactive link could be designed as a pin. Thus it is best to arrange a system that contains only active links as those shown in Fig. C-10.1. Design suggestions have been compiled in Ref. 48. In Sect. 10.1 in conformity with the strong column–weak beam concept, plastic hinges should not develop in columns at floor beam levels in EBF. The occurrence of such plastic hinges, together with those forming in the links, could result in a soft story and must be prevented. There are two important code provisions intended to prevent this from happening. First, according to Sect. 6.1, the required axial column strength includes PE, based on application of the amplified earthquake load 0.4RE. Second, per Sect. 10.8, the required strength of columns due to the forces introduced at the connection of a link and/or brace is based on these forces multiplied by a factor of 1.25. Note that for a severe earthquake the formation of plastic hinges at column bases is generally unavoidable. 10.2. Links The general provisions for links to ensure that stable yielding occurs are included under this heading. 10.2.a. Beams with links are required to be compact shapes following the same criteria as SMF systems (Table 8-1). 10.2.b. In order to provide steel with proven ductile behavior the yield stress of steel is limited to 50 ksi. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 358
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
10.2.c. Doubler plates on the link web are not permitted as they do not perform as intended in inelastic deformations. Openings are not permitted as they adversely affect the yielding of the link web. 10.2.d. The link design shear strength φVn is the lesser of that determined from the yield shear or twice the plastic moment strength divided by the link length. This φVn should be greater than or equal to the required shear determined from the Load Combinations 3-5 or 3-6. 10.2.e. If the required axial load on the link is less than 0.15Py, the effects of the axial load can be ignored, In general, the axial load is negligible because the horizontal component of the brace load is transmitted to the beam outside of the link. However, due to a particular arrangement of the framing, substantial axial forces can develop in the link. For such cases, the limitations given in f. apply, and the design shear strength and link lengths are required to be reduced to ensure stable yielding.
c
d
c
a c
d
c
d
b
b
a
d
a
c b
d
b
a
c
d
c
d
c
b
c
b
d
b
a
d
c
d
d
d c
b
d
b
b
a
a c
b
d
d
d c
b
d
b
b
a
a c
b
d
d
d
b
a
b
c a
b
a = column b = brace c = link d = portion of beam outside of link
Fig. C-10.1. Common types of eccentric braced frames.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
b
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 359
10.2.f. See Commentary 10.2.e. 10.2.g. The link rotation angle is defined in the Specifications as the plastic angle between the link and the beam outside the link when the total story drift ∆t, calculated using amplified earthquake forces 0.4R × E. The plastic link rotation can be conservatively determined assuming that the EBF bay will deform in a rigid-plastic mechanism. Several such mechanisms are illustrated for various EBF configurations in Fig. C-10.3. The plastic angle is determined using a story drift ∆p = ∆t − ∆e, where ∆e the elastic story drift can conservatively be assumed to be zero. The plastic story drift angle θp = ∆p / h follows from geometry. The actual plastic link rotation angle can be determined by non-linear elastic-plastic analyses if a more explicit definition of the angle is desired. An inverted Y system is shown on Fig. C-10.1. In this system the precise definition given in the Glossary for the link rotation angle does not apply but the concept is the same as in the other systems, as shown on Fig. C-10.3. As usual both ends of the link are required to be laterally supported. The link length of 1.6Mp / Vp indicates the limit chosen for the link to act primarily in shear. The link length 2.6Mp / Vp is the lower limit of a flexural link. Straight line interpolation is used for the intermediate link lengths. It has been demonstrated experimentally51–52 as well as analytically48 that the first floor links usually experience the largest plastic deformation. In extreme cases this may result in a tendency to develop a soft story. The
a
b
φVn − link a (active link) < φVn − link b (inactive link)
Fig. C-10.2. EBF—active and inactive link.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 360
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
plastic link rotations tend to attenuate at higher floors, and decrease with the increasing frame periods. Therefore for severe seismic applications a conservative design for the links in the first two or three floors is recommended. This can be achieved by increasing the minimum design shear strengths of these links on the order of 10 percent over that specified in Sect. 10.2.d. An even more conservative approach would be to have vertical connecting members at the ends of the links in a few lower floors. The use of the framing shown in Fig. C-10.1 can be advantageous where ∆p
∆p
e
e θp
γp
γp h
h
e γp
θp
L
L/2
L/2
γp = L θp e
γp = L θp 2e
∆p
∆p γp e
γp
L/2
e/2 e/2
h
h
θp
θp
L/2
γp = L θp e ∆v ∆t ∆e ∆p e h L θp γp
L γp = h θp e
= Story drift determined using base shear v, inches. = Total story drift, inches = ∆v × e′ / e. = Elastic story drift, inches = ∆v times the earthquake load factor. = Plastic story drift, inches = ∆t − ∆e (conservatively, ∆e = 0). = Link length, inches. = Story height, inches. = Column to column distance, inches. = Plastic story drift angle, radians = ∆p / h. = Link rotation angle, radians.
Fig. C-10.3. Link rotation angle. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 361
the beam-column-brace connections can be designed as simple connections. Welds of the link flanges are avoided in this kind of framing. By changing the link lengths the stiffness of an EBF can be modified. In this manner the frame periods can be optimized. 10.2.h. The intent of this provision is to permit a CBF on the top floor of an EBF building over five stories tall with application of an earthquake response modification coefficient R appropriate for an EBF. 10.3. Link Stiffeners Properly detailed and restrained webs can provide stable, ductile, and predictable behavior under severe cyclic loading. The design of the EBF link requires close attention to the detailing of the link web thickness and stiffeners. 10.3.a. Full depth stiffeners are required at the end of all EBF links and serve to transfer the link shears to the reacting elements as well as restraining the link web against buckling. 10.3.b. In shear links, the spacing of intermediate web stiffeners is varied depending on the magnitude of the link rotation angle.45 The closer spacing is provided for the system with the greatest angle. Flexural links having lengths greater than 2.6Mp / Vp but less than 5Mp / Vp are required to have an intermediate stiffener at a distance from the link end equal to 1.5 times the beam flange width. Links between shear and flexural limits would have intermediate stiffeners meeting the requirement of both shear and flexural links. When the link length is greater than 5Mp / Vp, no intermediate stiffeners are required. Intermediate stiffeners are required to be full depth in order to effectively react against shear buckling. Intermediate stiffeners are required on both sides of the web for links 25 inches in depth or greater. For links less than 25 in. deep, the stiffener need be on one side only. 10.3.c. All link stiffeners are required to be fillet welded to the link web. These welds shall have a required strength equal to the nominal vertical tensile strength of the stiffener. The connection to the link flanges should be similar. 10.4. Link-to-Column Connections There are special connection requirements for the connections of links to columns. The intent is to provide connections which can transfer not only the shear and moment forces of the links but also torsion due to flange buckling. The Specification does not explicitly address the column panel zone design requirements at link-column connections, as little research is available on this issue. However, from research on panel zones for SMF systems, it is believed that limited yielding of panel zones in EBF systems would not be detrimental. Pending future research on this topic, a suggested design approach is as follows: Compute the required shear strength of the panel zone based on the bending moment at the column end of the link, as given by the equations in Sect. 10.6.a in the commentary of these provisions. The corresponding panel zone design shear strength should then be computed according to Eq. 8-1 of these provisions. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 362
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
10.5. Lateral Support of the Link One of the essential items to ensure stable inelastic behavior of the EBF system is to restrain the ends of the link from twisting out of plane. The 6 percent of the nominal strength of the beam flange defines the required strength on the lateral support member and its connections. 10.6. Diagonal Brace and Beam Outside of Links 10.6.a. A basic requirement of EBF design is that yielding be restricted primarily to the links. Accordingly, the diagonal brace and the beam segment outside of the link should be designed to resist the maximum forces that can be generated by the link, accounting for the sources of link overstrength. Link overstrength can be attributed primarily to strain hardening, effects of composite floor systems, and the actual yield strength of the link exceeding the specified yield strength. In EBF research literature, for design of the brace and the beam, an overstrength factor of 1.5 has generally been applied to the nominal strength of the link. Using this overstrength factor, the brace and beam segments were checked using their nominal strength, i.e., using φ =1.0. This approach considers that designing for an overstrength factor of 1.5 represents an extreme loading condition for the beam and brace, and therefore a relaxation of the φ factor was appropriate to avoid an overly conservative design.49 Sect. 10.6.a specifies that the design strength of the beam and diagonal brace exceed the forces generated by 1.25 times the nominal link shear strength, maintaining approximately the same basic design approach for the diagonal brace and beam. That is, based on a φ factor of 0.85 on axial compression in the beam or brace, the effective overstrength factor becomes 1.25 / 0.85, or about 1.5. For bending moments in the beam or diagonal brace, for which φ is 0.9, the overstrength factor becomes 1.25 / 0.9, or about 1.4, representing a slight relaxation from the test criterion. Based on a link overstrength factor of 1.25, the required strength of the diagonal brace and beam segment outside of the link can be taken as the forces generated by the following values of link shear and link end moment: For e ≤ 2Mp / Vp,
link shear link end moment
= 1.25Vp = e(1.25Vp ) / 2
For e > 2Mp / Vp,
link shear link end moment
= 2(1.25Mp) / e = 1.25Mp
The above equations are based on the assumption that link end moments will be equal when the link achieves its limit strength. For links of length e ≤ 1.3Mp / Vp attached to columns, experiments have shown that link end moments do not equalize.44 For this situation, link shear and link end moments can be taken as: For e ≤ 1.3Mp / Vp next to column, link shear
= 1.25Vp
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
moment at column end of link moment at brace end of link
6 - 363
= 0.8Mp = e(1.25Vp ) − 0.8Mp
The link shear force will generate axial force in the diagonal brace, and for most EBF configurations, will also generate substantial axial force in the beam segment outside of the link. The ratio of beam or brace axial force to link shear force is controlled primarily by the geometry of the EBF and is therefore not affected by inelastic activity within the EBF.47 Therefore, this ratio can be taken from an elastic frame analysis and used to scale up the beam and brace axial force to a level corresponding to the link shear force specified in the above equations. At the brace end of the link, the link end moment will be transferred to the brace and to the beam. If the diagonal brace and its connection remains elastic, based on link overstrength design considerations, some minor inelastic rotation can be tolerated in the beam outside of the link. 10.6.b. Typically in EBF design, the intersection of the brace and beam centerlines is located at the end of the link. However, as permitted by Sect. 10.6.b, the brace connection should be designed with an eccentricity so that the brace and beam centerlines intersect inside of the link. This eccentricity in the connection generates a moment that is opposite in sign to the link end moment. Consequently, the value of link end moment
STIFF PLATE EA. SIDE OF WEB. USE FILLET WELD CONT. @ WEB & FLANGE BEAM OUTSIDE OF LINK
LINK LENGTH – e
FULL PENETRATION TOP & BOTT.
W SHAPE LINE OF INTERSECTION OF BRACE AND BEAM SHALL BE AT THE EDGE OF LINK OR INSIDE THE LINK
INTERMEDIATE STIFFENER PLATES EA. SIDE OF WEB FOR LINKS ≥ 25″ CONT. FILLET WELD @ WEB AND FLANGE
Fig. C-10.4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 364
COMMENTARY: PART I—LRFD PROVISIONS
given above can be reduced by the moment generated by this brace connection eccentricity. This may substantially reduce the moment that will be required to be resisted by the beam and brace, and may be advantageous in design. The intersection of the brace and beam centerlines should not be located outside of the link, as this increases the bending moment generated in the beam and brace. See Figs. C-10.4 and C-10.5. 10.6.c. If the brace connection at the link is designed as a pin, the beam by itself shall be adequate to resist the entire link end moment. This condition normally would occur only on EBF with short links. If the brace is considered to resist a portion of the link end moment, then the brace connection at the link should be designed as fully restrained, as required by Sect. 10.6.c. Test results on several brace connection details subject to axial force and bending moment are reported in Ref. 47. 10.6.d. When checking the requirements of Sect. 10.6, both the beam and diagonal brace should, in general, be treated as beam-columns in strength and stability computations. Unlike CBF, the brace of an EBF may be subject to significant bending moments. For the beam segment outside of the link, adequate lateral bracing should be provided to maintain its stability under the axial force and bending moment generSTIFF. PLATE EA. SIDE OF WEB. USE FILLET WELD CONT. @ WEB & FLANGE
LINK LENGTH – e
BEAM OUTSIDE OF LINK
FULL PENETRATION TOP & BOTT.
LINE OF INTERSECTION OF BRACE AND BEAM SHALL BE AT THE EDGE OF LINK OR INSIDE THE LINK
BENT PLATE OR TWO WELDED PLATES GUSSET PLATE TS (BRACE) SPLIT END TO FIT GUSSET
Fig. C-10.5
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
INTERMEDIATE STIFFENER PLATES EA. SIDE OF WEB FOR LINKS ≥ 25″ CONT. FILLET WELD @ WEB & FLANGE
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 365
ated by the link, as required by Sect. 10.6.d. If the stability of the beam is provided by adequate lateral support, tests have shown that limited yielding of the beam segment is not detrimental to EBF performance, and for some EBF configurations may be unavoidable.47 However, the combined flexural strength of the beam and the brace, reduced for the presence of axial force, should be adequate to resist the link end moment. For EBF geometries with very small angles between the beam and the brace and/or for EBF with long links, satisfying the requirements of Sect. 10.6.e. may require very heavy braces, and in extreme cases, may require cover plates on the beams. EBF with relatively steep braces, e.g., brace-beam angles greater than about 40 degrees, combined with short links are preferable for avoiding design problems with the brace and beam segment outside of the link. A general discussion on design issues related to the beams and braces of an EBF is provided in Ref. 49, with further details provided in Ref. 47. 10.7. Beam-to-Column Connection If the arrangement of the EBF system is such that a link is not adjacent to a column, a simple pinned connection is considered to be adequate if the connection provides some restraint against torsion in the beam. The magnitude of torsion is calculated by considering perpendicular forces equal to 1.5 percent of the nominal axial flange tensile strength applied in opposite directions on each flange. 10.8. Required Column Strength As the shear strength of the adjoining critical link is potentially greater than the nominal strength due to strain hardening, the required column strength is required to be designed for the increased moment and axial load due to the load from the adjacent link or brace. 11.
QUALITY ASSURANCE As the behavior of all steel framing during a major earthquake is dependent on the workmanship of the fabricator in providing sound joints, the design engineer is advised to provide for adequate assurance control, particularly on the tension groove welded joints of the seismic resisting system. ASCE 7-92 provides special requirements for inspection and testing based on the Seismic Performance Category of the building to be built. The special requirements for structural steel construction are in general those that would normally be required for construction in all areas of seismic activity.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 366
COMMENTARY: PART II—ASD PROVISIONS
Part II—ASD Provisions 1.
SCOPE As noted in PART I, the special seismic requirements are collateral provisions related to the AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification. As that document was first published in 1986, the references to earthquake load were not current. The provisions in PART I use limit state load models derived from the 1991 NEHRP3 and the soon to be published ASCE 7-93.2 The provisions in PART II allow a designer to apply AISC Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (ASD)53 in the design of the seismic lateral force resisting system based upon limit state loads. If the user wishes to use ASD in the design of the seismic lateral force resisting system where the loads are based upon service loads, the loads need to be converted to factored levels consistent with those in PART I. The PART II provisions are intended to be used in conjunction with PART I by either adding to or substituting to the provisions of Part I.
3.2
Nominal Strengths, and
3.3
Design Strengths These provisions modify PART I to convert allowable stresses into equivalent nominal strengths by multiplying allowable stresses by 1.7 as noted. Design strengths are determined by multiplying φ times the nominal strengths.
7.2, 10.6.a, and 10.6.d These modifications to PART I requirements change FR and PR connections to Type 1 and Type 3 connections consistent with ASD nomenclature.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 367
List of References 1. AISC, Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification, American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., Chicago, IL, 1986. 2. ASCE 7-93, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, NY, 1993 (to be published). 3. BSSC, NEHRP (National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program) Recommended Provisions for the Development of Seismic Regulations for New Buildings, Building Seismic Safety Council, Federal Emergency Management Agency, Washington, DC, 1992. 4. Luft, R. W., “Comparison Among Earthquake Codes,” Earthquake Spectra, Earthquake Engineering Research Institute, Vol. 5, No. 4, November 1989. 5. ICBO, Uniform Building Code, International Conference of Building Officials, Whittier, CA, 1991. 6. SEAOC, Recommended Lateral Force Requirements, Seismology Committee, Structural Engineers Association of California, Sacramento/San Francisco/Los Angeles, CA, 1988. 7. AWS, D1.1-92, Structural Welding Code, American Welding Society, Inc., Miami, FL, 1992. 8. Popov, E. P., Stephen, R. M., “Tensile Capacity of Partial Penetration Welds,” Journal of the Structural Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 103, No. ST9, September 1977. 9. Bruneau, M., Mahin, S. A., and Popov, E. P., Ultimate Behavior of Butt Welded Splices in Heavy Rolled Steel Sections, Report No. UCB/EERC-87/10, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, CA, 1987. 10. Huckelbridge, A. A., Clough, R. W., Earthquake Simulator Tests of Nine-Story Steel Frame with Columns Allowed to Uplift, Report No. UCB/EERC-77/23, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, CA, 1977. 11. Carpenter, L. D., Lu, L-W., Reversed and Repeated Load Tests of Full Scale Steel Frames, Fritz Engineering Laboratory Report No. 332.7, Lehigh University, Bethlehem, PA, 1972. 12. Galambos, T. V., Deformation and Energy Absorption Capacity of Steel Structures in the Inelastic Range, Bulletin No. 8, American Iron and Steel Institute, New York, NY, 1968. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 368
LIST OF REFERENCES
13. Krawinkler, H., Bertero, V. V., and Popov, E. P., Inelastic Behavior of Steel Beam-to-Column Subassemblages, Report No. UCB/EERC-71/7, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, CA, 1971. 14. Bertero, V. V., Popov, E. P., and Krawinkler, H., Further Studies on Seismic Behavior of Steel Beam-Column Subassemblages, Report No. UCB/EERC73/27, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, CA, 1973. 15. Popov, E. P., “Seismic Behavior of Structural Assemblages,” Journal of the Structural Division, American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 106, No. ST7, July 1980. 16. Tall Building Systems and Concepts, Monograph on Planning and Design of Tall Buildings, Council on Tall Buildings and Urban Habitat, American Society of Civil Engineers, New York, NY, 1980. 17. Popov, E. P., Amin, N. R., Louie, J. J., and Stephen, R. M., “Cyclic Behavior of Large Beam Column Assemblies,” Earthquake Spectra, Professional Journal of the Earthquake Engineering Research Institute, Vol. 1, No. 2, February 1985. 18. Tsai, K. C. and Popov, E. P., “Seismic Panel Zone Design Effect on Elastic Story Drift in Steel Moment Resisting Frames,” Journal of Structural Division, in press. 19. Nicoletti, J. P., Pinkham, C. W., Saunders, C. M., Teal, E. J., A Synthesis of Steel Research for Code Development, Structural Steel Educational Council, San Francisco, CA, 1984. 20. Popov, E. P. and Pinkney, R. B., Behavior of Steel Building Connections Subjected to Inelastic Strain Reversals—Experimental Data, Bulletin No. 14, American Iron and Steel Institute, November 1968. 21. Popov, E. P. and Stephen, R. M., Cyclic Loading of Full-Size Steel Connections, Bulletin No 21, American Iron and Steel Institute, February 1972. 22. Driscoll, G. C. and Beedle, L. S., “Suggestions for Avoiding Beam-to-Column Web Connection Failure,” Engineering Journal, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL, 1st Qtr., 1982. 23. Tsai, K. C. and Popov, E. P., Two Beam-to-Column Web Connections, Report No. UCB/EERC-86/05, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, CA, 1986. 24. Popov, E. P. and Tsai, K. C., Performance of Large Seismic Steel Moment Connections Under Cyclic Loads, Proceedings; Structural Engineers Association of California Convention, San Diego, CA, October 1987. 25. Slutter, R., Tests of Panel Zone Behavior in Beam Column Connections, Lehigh University, Report No. 200.81.403.1, Bethlehem, PA. 26. Becker, E. R., Panel Zone Effect on the Strength of Rigid Steel Frames, University of Southern California Structural Mechanics Laboratory, USCOE 001, June 1971. 27. Fielding, D. J., Huang, J. S., “Shear in Steel Beam-to-Column Connections,” Welding Journal, Vol. 50, No. 7, Research Supplement, 1971. 28. Krawinkler, H., “Shear in Beam-Column Joints in Seismic Design of Steel AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
6 - 369
Frames,” Engineering Journal, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL, Vol. 15, 1978. 29. Sawyer, H. A., “Post-Elastic Behavior of Wide-Flange Steel Beams,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 87, No. ST8, American Society of Civil Engineers, December 1961. 30. Lay, M. G., “Flange Local Buckling in Wide-Flange Shapes,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 91, No. ST6, American Society of Civil Engineers, December 1965. 31. Kemp, A. R., “Factors Affecting the Rotation Capacity of Plastically Designed Members,” The Structural Engineer, Vol. 64B, No. 2, June 1986. 32. Bansal, J. P., The Lateral Instability of Continuous Steel Beams, CESRL Dissertation No. 71-1, University of Texas, Austin, TX, 1971. 33. Krawinkler, H., Bertero, V. V., Popov, E. P., Hysteresis Behavior of Steel Columns, Report No. UCB/EERC-75/11, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, CA, 1975. 34. Black, R. C., Wenger, W. A., Popov, E. P., Inelastic Buckling of Steel Struts Under Cyclic Load Reversals, Report No. UCB/EERC-80/40, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, CA, 1980. 35. Tang, X., Goel, S. C., Seismic Analysis and Design Considerations of Braced Steel Structures, UMCE Report 87-4, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI, 1987. 36. Uang, C-M., and Bertero, V. V., Earthquake Simulation Tests and Associated Studies of 0.3-Scale Model of a Six-Story Concentrically Braced Steel Structure, Report No. UCB/EERC—86/10, EERC, Berkeley, CA, December 1986. 37. Liu, Z., Goel, S. C., Investigation of Concrete Filled Steel Tubes under Cyclic Bending and Buckling, UMCE Report 87-3, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI, 1987. 38. Astaneh, A., Goel, S. C., Hanson, R, D., “Earthquake-Resistant Design of Double Angle Bracings,” Engineering Journal, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL, Vol. 23, No. 4, 1986. 39. Roeder, C. W. and Popov, E. P., “Eccentrically Braced Frames for Earthquakes,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 104, No. 3, American Society of Civil Engineers, March 1978. 40. Libby, J. R., “Eccentrically Braced Frame Construction—A Case History,” Engineering Journal, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL, Vol. 18, No. 4, 1981. 41. Merovich, A. T., Nicoletti, J. P. and Hartle, E., “Eccentric Bracing in Tall Buildings,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 108, No. 9, American Society of Civil Engineers, September 1982. 42. Hjelmstad, K. D. and Popov, E. P., “Cyclic Behavior and Design of Link Beams,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 109, No. 10, American Society of Civil Engineers, October 1983. 43. Malley, J. O. and Popov, E. P., “Shear Links in Eccentrically Braced Frames,” AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 370
LIST OF REFERENCES
Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 110, No. 9, American Society of Civil Engineers, September 1984. 44. Kasai, K. and Popov, E. P., “General Behavior of WF Steel Shear Link Beams,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 112, No. 2, American Society of Civil Engineers, February 1986. 45. Kasai, K. and Popov, E. P., “Cyclic Web Buckling Control for Shear Link Beams,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 112, No. 3, American Society of Civil Engineers, March 1986. 46. Ricles, J. M. and Popov, E. P., Dynamic Analysis of Seismically Resistant Eccentrically Braced Frames, Report No. UCB/EERC-87/107, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, CA, 1987. 47. Engelhardt, M. D. and Popov, E. P., Behavior of Long Links in Eccentrically Braced Frames, Report No. UCB/EERC-89/01, Earthquake Engineering Research Center, University of California, Berkeley, CA, 1989. 48. Popov, E. P., Engelhardt, M. D. and Ricles, J. M., “Eccentrically Brace Frames: U. S. Practice,” Engineering Journal, American Institute of Steel Construction, Chicago, IL., Vol. 26, No. 2, 1989. p. 66–80. 49. Engelhardt, M. D. and Popov, E. P., “On Design of Eccentrically Braced Frames,” Earthquake Engineering Research Institute, El Cerrito, CA, Earthquake Spectra, Vol. 5, No.3, August 1989. 50. Kasai, K. and Popov, E. P., On Seismic Design of Eccentrically Braced Steel Frames, Proceedings, 8th World Conference on Earthquake Engineering, July 1984, San Francisco, CA., Vol. 5, pp.387–394. 51. Whittaker, A. S., Uang, C-M., and Bertero, V. V., Earthquake Simulation Tests and Associated studies of a 0.3-Scale Model of a Six-Story Eccentrically Braced Steel Structure, Report No. UBC/EERC-87/02, EERC, Berkeley, CA., 1987. 52. Foutch, D. A., “Seismic Behavior of Eccentrically Braced Steel Building,” ASCE Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol. 115, No. 8, August 1989, pp 1857–1876. 53. AISC, Allowable Stress Design Specification, American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., Chicago, IL, 1989. 54. AISC, Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise Buildings, Steel Design Guide Series 3, American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 55. Structural Steel Education Council, Steel Connections/Details and Relative Costs, Moraga, CA., 1986. 56. Uang, C. M., “EstablishingR (or Rw) and Cd Factors for Building Seismic Provisions,” Journal of Structural Engineering, Vol. 117, No. 1, American Society of Civil Engineers, Jan. 1991.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 371
LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts Approved by Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation, June 8, 1988. Endorsed by American Institute of Steel Construction Endorsed by Industrial Fasteners Institute
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100, Chicago, IL 60601-2001 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 372
PREFACE
The purpose of the Research Council on Structural Connections is to stimulate and support such investigation as may be deemed necessary and valuable to determine the suitability and capacity of various types of structural connections, to promote the knowledge of economical and efficient practices relating to such structural connections, and to prepare and publish related standards and such other documents as necessary to achieving its purpose. The Council membership consists of qualified structural engineers from the academic and research institutions, practicing design engineers, suppliers, and manufacturers of threaded fasteners, fabricators and erectors and code writing authorities. Each version of the Specification is based upon deliberations and letter ballot of the full Council membership. The first Specification for Assembly of Structural Joints Using High Tensile Steel Bolts approved by the Council was published in January 1951. Since that time the Council has published 12 succeeding editions each based upon past successful usage, advances in the state of knowledge and changes in engineering design practice. This version of the Council’s Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification is significantly reorganized and revised from earlier versions. The intention of the Specifications is to cover the design criteria and normal usage and practices involved in the everyday use of high-strength bolts in steel-tosteel structural connections. It is not intended to cover the full range of structural connections using threaded fasteners nor the use of high-strength bolts other than those included in ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Specifications nor the use of ASTM A325 or A490 bolts in connections with material other than steel within the grip. A Commentary has been prepared to accompany these Specifications to provide background and aid the user to better understand and apply the provisions. The user is cautioned that independent professional judgment must be exercised when data or recommendations set forth in these Specifications are applied. The design and the proper installation and inspection of bolts in structural connections is within the scope of expertise of a competent licensed architect, structural engineer or other licensed professional for the application of the principles to a particular case.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 373
LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN
Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts Approved by Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation, June 8, 1988. Endorsed by American Institute of Steel Construction Endorsed by Industrial Fasteners Institute
1. Scope This Specification relates to the load and resistance factor design of structural joints using ASTM A325 high-strength bolts, ASTM A490 high-strength bolts or equivalent fasteners, and for the installation of such bolts in connections of structural steel members. The Specification relates only to those aspects of the connected materials that bear upon the performance of the fasteners. Design and construction shall conform to an applicable load and resistance factor design code or specification for structures of carbon, high-strength low alloy steel or quenched and tempered structural steel. Load and resistance factor design is a method of proportioning structural components such that no applicable limit state is exceeded when the structure is subject to all appropriate load combinations. When a structure or component ceases to fulfill the intended purpose in some way, it is said to have exceeded a limit state. Strength limit states concern maximum load carrying capacity, and thus generally are related to safety. Serviceability limit states are usually related to performance under normal service conditions, and thus usually are not related to strength or safety. (See Commentary. ) The term “resistance” includes both strength limit states and serviceability limit states. The design strength, φRn (nominal strength multiplied by a resistance factor), of each structural component or assemblage must equal or exceed the effect of the factored loads (nominal loads multiplied by load factors, with due recognition for load combinations). Thus, both the load factor and the resistance factor must be known to determine the reliability of the design, identified in load and resistance factor design as the “safety index.” Although the load factors are not stated in this Specification, load criteria contained in American National Standard “Building Code Requirements
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 374
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS (6/8/88)
for Minimum Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures,” ANSI A58.1-1982, were used as the basis for determining the resistance factors. For construction governed by other design load criteria, appropriate adjustment of resistance factors may be required. The attached Commentary provides background information in order that the user may better understand the provisions of the Specification. 2. Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Paint (a) Bolt Specifications. Bolts shall conform to the requirements of the current edition of the American Society for Testing and Materials’ “Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints,” ASTM A325, or “Specification for Heat Treated, Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Tensile Strength,” ASTM A490, except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section. The Engineer of Record shall specify the type of bolts to be used. (b) Bolt Geometry. Bolt dimensions shall conform to the current American National Standards Institute’s standard, “Heavy Hex Structural Bolts,” ANSI Standard B18.2.1, except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section. The length of bolts shall be such that the end of the bolt will be flush with or project beyond the face of the nut when properly installed. (c) Nut Specifications. Nuts shall conform to the current chemical and mechanical requirements of the American Society for Testing and Materials’ Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts,” ASTM A563, or “Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service,” ASTM A194. The grade and surface finish of nuts for each type shall be as follows: A325 Bolt Type
Nut Specification, Grade and Finish
1 and 2, plain (uncoated) A563 C, C3, D, D3 and DH3 or Al94 2 and 2H; plain 1 and 2, galvanized A563 DH or A194 2H; galvanized and lubricated 3, plain A563 C3 and DH3; plain A490 Bolt Type 1 and 2, plain 3, plain
Nut Specification, Grade and Finish A563 DH and DH3 or A194 2H; plain A563 DH3; plain
Nut dimensions shall conform to the current American National Standards Institute’s standard, “Heavy Hex Nuts,” ANSI Standard B18.2.2., except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section. (d) Alternative Fastener Designs. Other fasteners or fastener assemblies which meet the materials, manufacturing and chemical composition requirements of ASTM A325 or ASTM A490, as applicable, and which meet the mechanical property requirements of the same specifications in full-size tests, and which have a body diameter and bearing areas under the head and nut not less than those provided by a bolt and nut of the same nominal dimensions prescribed by paragraphs 2(b) and 2(c), may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer of Record. Such alternative fasteners may differ in other AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 375
dimensions from those of the specified bolts and nuts. Their installation procedure and inspection may differ from procedures specified for regular high-strength bolts in Sections 8 and 9. When a different installation procedure or inspection is used, it shall be detailed in a supplemental specification applying to the alternative fastener, and that specification must be approved by the Engineer of Record. (e) Washers. Flat circular washers and square or rectangular beveled washers shall conform to the current requirements of the American Society for Testing and Materials, “Specification for Hardened Steel Washers,” ASTM F436. (f) Load Indicating Devices. Load indicating devices may be used in conjunction with bolts, nuts and washers specified in 2(a) through 2(e). Load indicating devices shall conform to the requirements of American Society for Testing and Materials’ “Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners,” ASTM F959. Subject to the approval of the Engineer of Record, direct tension indicating devices different from those meeting the requirements of ASTM F959 may be used provided they satisfy the requirements of 8(d)(4). If their installation procedure and inspection are not identical to that specified in 8(d)(4), they shall be detailed in supplemental specifications provided by the manufacturer and subject to the approval of the Engineer of Record. (g) Faying Surface Coatings. Paint, if used on faying surfaces of connections which are not specified to be slip critical, may be of any formulation. Paint, used on the faying surfaces of connections specified to be slip critical, shall be qualified by test in accordance with “Test Method to Determine the Slip Coefficient for Coatings Used in Bolted Joints” as published by the Research Council on Structural Connections. (See Appendix A.) Manufacturer’s certification shall include a certified copy of the test report. 3. Bolted Parts (a) Connected Material. All material within the grip of the bolt shall be steel. There shall be no compressible material such as gaskets or insulation within the grip. Bolted steel parts shall fit solidly together after the bolts are tightened, and may be coated or noncoated. The slope of the surfaces of parts in contact with the bolt head or nut shall not exceed 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. (b) Surface Conditions. When assembled, all joint surfaces, including surfaces adjacent to the bolt head and nut, shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale, and shall be free of dirt or other foreign material. Burrs that would prevent solid seating of the connected parts in the snug tight condition shall be removed. Paint is permitted unconditionally on the faying surfaces in connections except in slip-critical connections as defined in Section 5(a). The faying surfaces of slip-critical connections shall meet the requirements of the following paragraphs, as applicable. (1) In noncoated joints, paint, including any inadvertent overspray, shall be excluded from areas closer than one bolt diameter but not less AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 376
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS (6/8/88)
(2)
(3)
(4) (5)
than one inch from the edge of any hole and all areas within the bolt pattern. Joints specified to have painted faying surfaces shall be blast cleaned and coated with a paint which has been qualified as Class A or B in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 2(g), except as provided in 3(b)3. Subject to the approval of the Engineer of Record, coatings providing a slip coefficient less than 0.33 may be used provided the mean slip coefficient is established by test in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 2(g), and the design slip resistance, φRs, calculated in accordance with the formula in Section 5(b) or 5(c). Coated joints shall not be assembled before the coatings have cured for the minimum time used in the qualifying test. Faying surfaces specified to be galvanized shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with American Society for Testing and Materials’ “Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip,” ASTM A123 and shall subsequently be roughened by means of hand wire brushing. Power wire brushing is not permitted.
(c) Hole Types. Hole types recognized under this specification are standard holes, oversize holes, short slotted holes and long slotted holes. The nominal dimensions for each type hole shall be not greater than those shown in Table 1. Holes not more than 1⁄32 inch larger in diameter than the true decimal equivalent of the nominal diameter that may result from a drill or reamer of the nominal diameter are considered acceptable. The slightly conical hole that naturally results from punching operations is considered acceptable. The width of slotted holes which are produced by flame cutting or a combination of drilling or punching and flame cutting shall generally be not more than 1⁄32 inch greater than the nominal width except that gouges not more than 1⁄16 inch deep shall be permitted. For statically loaded connections, the flame cut surface need not be ground. For dynamically loaded connections, the flame cut surface shall be ground smooth. 4. Design of Bolted Connections Expressions for design strengths, φRn, of bolts subject to axial tension, shear and combined shear and tension are given in 4(a) and 4(b). They are to be compared to the effect of the factored loads. The design resistances of bolts subject to cyclic application of axial tension are given in 4(e). They are to be compared to effect of cyclically applied nominal (service) loads. (a) Tension and Shear Strength Limit States. The design strength in axial tension for A325 and A490 bolts which are tightened to the minimum fastener tension specified in Table 4 is φRn. The design strength in shear for A325 and A490 bolts, independent of the installed bolt pretension, is φRn where: Rn = Fn Ab AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
(LRFD 4.1)
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 377
Table 1. Nominal Hole Dimensions Bolt Dia. 1⁄
2
5⁄
8
3⁄
4
7⁄
8
1 ≥ 11⁄8
Hole DImensions Standard (Dia.)
Oversize (Dia.)
9⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 11⁄16
5⁄ 8 13⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 11⁄16 11⁄4
d + 1⁄16
d + 5⁄16
Short Slot (Width × Length)
(d
9⁄ × 11⁄ 16 16 11⁄ × 7⁄ 16 8 13⁄ × 1 16 15⁄ × 11⁄ 16 8 11⁄16 × 15⁄16 + 1⁄16) × (d + 3⁄8)
Long Slot (Width × Length) 9⁄
1 16 × 1 ⁄4 9 16 × 1 ⁄16 13⁄ × 17⁄ 16 8 15⁄ × 23⁄ 16 16 11⁄16 × 21⁄2 + 1⁄16) × (2.5 × 11⁄
(d
d)
In this expression: Rn = nominal strength of a bolt subject to axial tension or shear, kips Fn = nominal strength from Table 2 for appropriate kind of load, ksi Ab = area of bolt corresponding to nominal diameter, in.2 φ = resistance factor from Table 2. (b) Combined Tension and Shear Strength Limit State. In bearing connections in which the applied shear force is greater than 1⁄3 the design shear strength according to 4(a). the design strength in axial tension for A325 and A190 bolts is φRn where: Rn = Fnt Ab (LRFD 4.2) Where Rn = nominal tension strength of a bolt subject to concurrent shear. kips Fnt = nominal tension strength of a bolt as calculated by formulas in Table 3, ksi Ab = area of bolt corresponding to nominal diameter, in.2 φ = resistance factor equal to 0.75 In Table 3. fv, equals the shear force on the bolt in ksi. (c) Bearing Strength Limit State. The design bearing strength on the connected material for all bolts in a connection with two or more bolts in the line of force in standard, oversize, or short slotted holes when the edge distance in direction of force is not less than 11⁄2d and the distance center to center of bolts is not less than 3d is φRn, where: Rn = 2.4dtFu
(LRFD 4.3)
The design bearing strength on the connected material for all bolts in a connection with two or more bolts in the line of force in long slotted holes perpendicular to the direction of force when the edge distance, L, is not less than 11⁄2d and the distance center to center of bolts is not less than 3d is φRn where: Rn = 2.0dtFu
(LRFD 4.4)
The design bearing strength on the connected material for the bolt nearest to the free edge in the direction of force when two or more bolts are in the line of force in standard, oversize, or short slotted holes but with the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 378
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS (6/8/88)
Table 2. Nominal Strength of Fasteners Nominal Strength (ksi)
Load Condition a,b,c
Applied Static Tension Shear on bolt with threads in shear plane. Shear on bolt without threads in shear plane. a. b. c. d.
A325
A490
Resistance Factor, φ
90 d 48 d 60
113 d 60 d 75
0.75 0.75 0.75
Bolts must be tensioned to requirements of Table 4. See 4(e) for bolts subject to tensile fatigue. Except as required by 4(b). In shear connections transmitting axial force whose length between extreme fasteners measured parallel to the line of force exceeds 50 inches, tabulated values shall be reduced 20 percent.
Table 3. Nominal Tension Strength for Bolts in Bearing Connections (Nominal Tensile Strength, Fnt, ksi.) Fastener Grade
Threads Not Excluded from Shear Plane 2
2 0.5
Threads Excluded from Shear Plane 2
2 0.5
ASTM A325
(90 − 3.52fv )
(90 − 2.25fv )
ASTM A490
(113 − 3.54fv )
(113 − 2.27fv )
2
2 0.5
2
2 0.5
edge distance less than 11⁄2d and for a single bolt in the line of force is φRn where: Rn = LtFu ≤ 3.0dtFu
(LRFD 4.5)
When two or more bolts are in the line of force in standard, oversize, or short slotted holes and if deformation around the bolt holes is not a design consideration, the design strength in bearing for the individual bolts of a connection may be taken as φRn where: Rn = LtFu ≤ 3.0dtFu
(LRFD 4.6)
In the foregoing: Rn = nominal bearing strength of connected material, kips Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of the connected part, ksi L = distance in the direction of the force from the center of a standard hole or transverse slotted hole to the edge of the connected part or the distance center to center of standard holes or transverse slots, as applicable, in. d = nominal diameter of bolt, in. t = thickness of connected material, in. φ = resistance factor = 0.75 (d) Prying Action. The force in bolts required to support loads by means of direct tension shall be calculated considering the effects of the external load and any tension resulting from prying action produced by deformation of the connected parts. (e) Tensile Fatigue. When subject to tensile fatigue loading, the tensile stress in the bolt due to the nominal (service) load plus the prying force resulting from cyclic application of nominal load shall not exceed the following design AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 379
resistances in kips per square inch. The nominal diameter of the bolt shall be used in calculating the bolt stress. In no case shall the calculated prying force exceed 60 percent of the externally applied load. Number of Cycles Not more than 20,000 From 20,000 to 500,000 More than 500,000
A325 44 40 31
A490 54 49 38
Bolts subject to tensile fatigue load must be tensioned to requirements of Table 4. 5. Design Check for Slip Resistance (a) Slip-Critical Joints. Joints in which, in the judgment of the Engineer of Record, slip would be detrimental to the behavior of the joint, are defined as slip-critical. As discussed in the Commentary, these include but are not necessarily limited to joints subject to fatigue or significant load reversal, joints with bolts in oversize holes or slotted holes with the applied force approximately in the direction of the long dimension of the slots and joints in which welds and bolts share in transmitting shear loads at a common faying surface. Slip-critical joints shall be checked for slip resistance. At the option of the Engineer of Record, the required check may be based upon either nominal loads or factored loads. When serviceability at the nominal (service) load is the design criterion, the design slip resistance specified in Section 5(b) shall be compared with the effects of the nominal loads. When slip of the joint at the factored load level would affect the ability of the structure to support the factored load, the design slip resistance specified in Section 5(c) shall be compared to the effects of the factored loads. Slip-critical joints shall also be checked to ensure that the ultimate strength of the joint as a bearing joint is equal to or greater than the effect of the factored loads. Slip-critical joints must be designated on the contract plans and in the specifications. Bolts used in slip-critical joints shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of Section 8(d). (b) Slip-Critical Joints Designed at the Nominal Load Level. Slip-critical joints for which nominal loads are the design criterion shall, in addition to meeting the requirements of Section 4, be proportioned so that the force due to nominal (service) loads does not exceed the design slip resistance for use at nominal loads (service) loads, φRs, where: Rs = DµTm Nb Ns
(LRFD 5.1)
Where: Rs = nominal slip resistance of a bolt for use at nominal loads, kips Tm = minimum fastener tension given in Table 4, kips Nb = number of bolts in the joint Ns = number of slip planes D = slip probability factor* = 0.81 for µ equal to 0.33 = 0.86 for µ equal to 0.40 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 380
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS (6/8/88)
= 0.86 for µ equal to 0.50 µ = mean slip coefficient for Class A, B or C surfaces, † as applicable, or as established by tests = 0.33 for Class A surfaces (unpainted clean mill scale steel surfaces or surfaces with Class A coating on blast-cleaned steel) = 0.50 for Class B surfaces (unpainted blast-cleaned steel surfaces or surfaces with Class B coatings on blast-cleaned steel) = 0.40 for Class C surfaces (hot-dip galvanized and roughened surfaces) φ = 1.0 for standard holes = 0.85 for oversize and short slotted holes = 0.70 for long slotted holes transverse to the direction of load = 0.60 for long slotted holes parallel to the direction of load * D is a multiplier that reflects the distribution of actual slip coefficient values about the mean, the ratio of measured bolt tensile strength to the specified minimum values, and a slip probability level. Use of other values of D (see Commentary) must be approved by the Engineer of Record. † Coatings classified as Class A or Class B includes those coatings which provide a mean slip coefficient not less than 0.33 or 0.50, respectively, as determined by “Test Method to Determine the Slip Coefficient for Coatings Used in Bolted Connections.”
Table 4. Fastener Tension Required for Slip-Critical Connections and Connections Subject to Direct Tension Nominal Bolt Size, Inches
a
Minimum Tension in 1,000s of Pounds (kips) A325 Bolts
A490 Bolts
12 19 28 39
15 24 35 49
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8
51 56 71 85
64 80 102 121
11⁄2
103
148
1⁄
5⁄ 3⁄ 7⁄
2 8 4 8
a. Equal to 70 percent of specified minimum tensile strengths of bolts (as specified in ASTM Specifications for tests of full size A325 and A490 bolts with UNC threads loaded in axial tension) rounded to the nearest kip.
When using nominal loads as the basis for design of slip-critical connections subject to applied tension, T, that reduces the net clamping force, the slip resistance (φRs) shall be multiplied by the following factor in which T is the applied tensile force at nominal loads [1 − T / (0.82TmNb)]
(LRFD 5.2)
(c) Slip-Critical Joints Designed at Factored Load Level. Slip-critical joints for which factored loads are the design criterion shall, in addition to meeting the requirements of Section 4, be proportioned so that the force due to the factored loads shall not exceed the design slip resistance for use at factored loads, φRstr, where: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 381
Rstr = 1.13µTm Nb Ns
(LRFD 5.3)
Where terms in Formula (LRFD 5.3) are as defined in 5(b). When using factored loads as the basis for design of slip-critical connections subject to applied tension, T, that reduces the net clamping force, the slip resistance (φRs) shall be multiplied by the following factor in which T is the applied tensile force at nominal loads [1 − T / (1.13Tm Nb)]
(LRFD 5.4)
6. Loads in Combination When the reduced probabilities of maximum loads acting concurrently are accounted for by load combination factors, the resistances given in this Specification shall not be increased. 7. Design Details of Bolted Connections (a) Standard Holes. In the absence of approval by the Engineer of Record for use of other hole types, standard holes shall be used in high-strength bolted connections. (b) Oversize and Slotted Holes. When approved by the Engineer of Record, oversize holes, short slotted holes or long slotted holes may be used subject to the following joint detail requirements: (1) Oversize holes may be used in all plies of connections in which the design slip resistance of the connection is greater than the factored nominal load. (2) Short slotted holes may be used in any or all plies of connections in which the design strength (Section 4(a)) is greater than the factored nominal load provided the load is applied approximately normal (between 80 and 100 degrees) to the axis of the slot. Short slotted holes may be used without regard for the direction of applied load in any or all plies of connections in which the design slip resistance (Section 5(b)) is greater than the factored nominal load. (3) Long slotted holes may be used in one of the connected parts at any individual faying surface in connections in which the design strength (Section 4(a)) is greater than the factored nominal load provided the load is applied approximately normal (between 80 and 100 degrees) to the axis of the slot. Long slotted holes may be used in one of the connected parts at any individual faying surface without regard for the direction of applied load on connections in which the design slip resistance (Section 5(b)) is greater than the factored nominal load. (4) Fully inserted finger shims between the faying surfaces of load transmitting elements of connections are not to be considered a long slot element of a connection. (c) Washer Requirements. Design details shall provide for washers in highstrength bolted connections as follows: (1) Where the outer face of the bolted parts has a slope greater than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis, a hardened beveled washer shall be used to compensate for the lack of parallelism. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 382
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS (6/8/88)
(2) Hardened washers are not required for connections using A325 and A490 bolts except as required in paragraphs 7(c)(3) through 7(c)(7) for slip-critical connections and connections subject to direct tension or as required by paragraph 8(c) for shear/bearing connections. (3) Hardened washers shall be used under the element turned in tightening when the tightening is to be performed by calibrated wrench method. (4) Irrespective of the tightening method, hardened washers shall be used under both the head and the nut when A490 bolts are to be installed and tightened to the tension specified in Table 4 in material having a specified yield point less than 40 ksi. (5) Where A325 bolts of any diameter or A490 bolts equal to or less than 1 inch in diameter are to be installed and tightened in an oversize or short slotted hole in an outer ply, a hardened washer conforming to ASTM F436 shall be used. (6) When A490 bolts over 1 inch in diameter are to be installed and tightened in an oversize or short slotted hole in an outer ply, hardened washers conforming to ASTM F436 except with 5⁄16 inch minimum thickness shall be used under both the head and the nut in lieu of standard thickness hardened washers. Multiple hardened washers with combined thickness equal to or greater than 5⁄16 inch do not satisfy this requirement. (7) Where A325 bolts of any diameter or A490 bolts equal to or less than 1 inch in diameter are to be installed and tightened in a long slotted hole in an outer ply, a plate washer or continuous bar of at least 5⁄16 inch thickness with standard holes shall be provided. These washers or bars shall have a size sufficient to completely cover the slot after installation and shall be of structural grade material, but need not be hardened except as follows. When A490 bolts over 1 inch in diameter are to be used in long slotted holes in external plies, a single hardened washer conforming to ASTM F436 but with 5⁄16 inch minimum thickness shall be used in lieu of washers or bars of structural grade material. Multiple hardened washers with combined thickness equal to or greater than 5⁄16 inch do not satisfy this requirement. (8) Alternative design fasteners meeting the requirements of 2(d) with a geometry which provides a bearing circle on the head or nut with a diameter equal to or greater than the diameter of hardened washers meeting the requirements ASTM F436 satisfy the requirements for washers specified in paragraphs 7(c)(4) and 7(c)(5). 8. Installation and Tightening (a) Handling and Storage of Fasteners. Fasteners shall be protected from dirt and moisture at the job site. Only as many fasteners as are anticipated to be installed and tightened during a work shift shall be taken from protected storage. Fasteners not used shall be returned to protected storage at the end of the shift. Fasteners shall not be cleaned of lubricant that is present in asdelivered condition. Fasteners which accumulate rust or dirt resulting from job site conditions shall be cleaned and relubricated prior to installation. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 383
(b) Tension Calibrator. A tension measuring device shall be at all job sites where bolts in slip-critical joints or connections subject to direct tension are being installed and tightened. The tension measuring device shall be used to confirm (1) the suitability of the complete fastener assembly and method of tightening, including lubrication, if required to satisfy the requirements of Table 4, (2) to calibrate the wrenches, if applicable, and (3) to confirm the understanding and proper use by the bolting crew of the method to be used. The frequency of confirmation testing, the number of tests to be performed, and the test procedure shall be as specified in 8(d), as applicable. The accuracy of the tension measuring device shall be confirmed through calibration by an approved testing agency at least annually. (c) Joint Assembly and Tightening of Shear/Bearing Connections. (1) Snug Tightened Bolts. Bolts in connections not within the slipcritical category as defined in Section 5(a) nor subject to tension loads nor required to be pretensioned bearing connections in accordance with 8(c)(2) shall be installed in properly aligned holes, but need only be tightened to the snug tight condition. The snug tight condition is defined as the tightness that exists when all plies in a joint are in firm contact. (See Commentary.) If a slotted hole occurs in an outer ply, a flat hardened washer or common plate washer shall be installed over the slot. (2) Tensioned Shear/Bearing Connections. The Engineer of Record may designate certain shear/bearing connections to be tightened to pretension in excess of snug tight. When so designated and identified on the contract drawings, the bolts in such connections shall be installed and tightened in accordance with one of the methods described in Subsections 8(d)(1) through 8(d)(4), but shall not be subject to the requirements for faying surface conditions of slipcritical connections contained in 3(b). The bolts need not be subject to inspection testing to determine the actual level of bolt pretension unless required by the Engineer of Record. (d) Joint Assembly and Tightening of Slip-Critical and Direct Tension Connections. In slip-critical connections and connections subject to direct tension, fasteners together with washers of size and quality specified, located as required by Section 7(c), shall be installed in properly aligned holes and tightened by any of the methods described in Subsections 8(d)(1) through 8(d)(4) to at least the minimum tension specified in Table 4 when all the fasteners are tight. Tightening may be done by turning the bolt while the nut is prevented from rotating when it is impractical to turn the nut. Impact wrenches, if used, shall be of adequate capacity and sufficiently supplied with air to perform the required tightening of each bolt in approximately 10 seconds. Slip-critical connections and connections subject to direct tension shall be clearly identified on the drawings. (1) Turn-of-Nut Tightening. When turn-of-nut tightening is used, hardened washers are not required except as may be specified in 7(c). A representative sample of not less than three bolt and nut assemblies of each diameter, length, grade and lot to be used in the work shall be checked at the start of work in a device capable AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 384
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS (6/8/88)
of indicating bolt tension. The test shall demonstrate that the method for estimating the snug tight condition and controlling the turns from snug tight to be used by the bolting crew develops a tension not less than 5 percent greater than the tension required by Table 4. Bolts shall be installed in all holes of the connection and brought to a “snug tight” condition. Snug tight is defined as the tightness that exists when the plies of the joint are in firm contact. Snug tightening shall progress systematically from the most rigid part of the connection to the free edges until all bolts are simultaneously snug tight and the connection is fully compacted. In some cases, proper tensioning of the bolts may require more than a single cycle of systematic tightening to produce a uniform snug tight condition. Following this initial operation, all bolts in the connection shall be tightened further by application of the rotation specified in Table 5. During the tightening operation, there shall be no rotation of the part not turned by the wrench. Tightening shall progress systematically from the most rigid part of the joint to its free edges. (2) Calibrated Wrench Tightening: Calibrated wrench tightening may be used only when installation procedures are calibrated on a daily basis and when a hardened washer is used under the element turned in tightening. (See the Commentary to this Section.) This specification does not recognize standard torques determined from tables or from formulas which are assumed to relate torque to tension. When calibrated wrenches are used for installation, they shall be set to provide a tension not less than 5 percent in excess of the minimum tension specified in Table 4. The installation procedures shall be calibrated at least once each working day by tightening representative sample fastener assemblies in a device capable of indicating actual bolt tension. The representative fastener assemblies shall consist of three bolts from each lot diameter, length and grade with nuts from each lot, diameter and grade and with a hardened washer from the washers being used in the work under the element turned in tightening. Wrenches shall be recalibrated when significant difference is noted in the surface condition of the bolts’ threads, nuts or washers. It shall be verified during actual installation in the assembled steelwork that the wrench adjustment selected by the calibration does not produce a nut or bolt head rotation from snug tight greater than that permitted in Table 5. If manual torque wrenches are used, nuts shall be turned in the tightening direction when torque is measured. When calibrated wrenches are used to install and tension bolts in a connection, bolts shall be installed with hardened washers under the element turned in tightening bolts in all holes of the connection and brought to a snug tight condition. Snug tightening shall progress systematically from the most rigid part of the connections to the free edges until bolts are uniformly snug tight and the plies of the joint are in firm contact. Following this initial tightening operation, the connection shall be tightened using the calibrated wrench. Tightening shall progress systematically from the most rigid part AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 385 a,b
Table 5. Nut Rotation from Snug Tight Condition
Disposition of Outer Face of Bolted Parts Bolt length (underside of head to end of bolt)
Both faces normal to bolt axis
One face normal to bolt axis and other sloped not more than 1:20 (beveled washer not used)
Both faces sloped not more than 1:20 from normal to the bolt axis (beveled washer not used)
Up to and including 4 diameters
1⁄ 3
turn
1⁄ 2
turn
2⁄
3
turn
Over 4 diameters but not exceeding 8 dia.
1⁄ 2
turn
2⁄ 3
turn
5⁄
6
turn
Over 8 diameters but not exceedc ing 12 dia.
2⁄ 3
turn
5⁄ 6
turn
1 turn
a. Nut rotation is relative to bolt regardless of the element (nut or bolt) being turned. For bolts installed by 1⁄2 turn and less, the tolerance should be plus or minus 30 degrees; for bolts installed by 2⁄3 turn and more, the tolerance should be plus or minus 45 degrees. b. Applicable only to connections in which all material within the grip of the bolt is steel. c. No research has been performed by the Council to establish the turn-of-nut procedure for bolt lengths exceeding 12 diameters. Therefore, the required rotation must be determined by actual test in a suitable tension measuring device which simulates conditions of solidly fitted steel.
of the joint to its free edges. During snugging and final tightening the element not turned in tightening shall be held to prevent rotation which will damage threads. In some cases, proper tensioning of the bolts may require more than a single cycle of systematic tightening to ensure all bolts are tightened to at least the prescribed amount. (3) Installation of Alternative Design Bolts. When fasteners which incorporate a design feature intended to indicate a predetermined tension or torque has been applied or to control bolt installation tension or torque, and which have been qualified under Section 2(d) are to be installed, a representative sample of not less than three bolts of each diameter, length and grade shall be checked at the job site in a device capable of indicating bolt tension. The test assembly shall include flat hardened washers, if required in the actual connection, arranged as in the actual connections to be tensioned. The calibration test shall demonstrate that each bolt develops a tension not less than 5 percent greater than the tension required by Table 4. Manufacturer’s installation procedure as required by Section 2(d) shall be followed for installation of bolts in the calibration device and in all connections. When alternative design fasteners are used in the work, bolts shall be installed in all holes of the connection and initially tightened sufficiently to bring all plies of the joint into firm contact with the bolts uniformly tight but without yielding or fracturing the control or indicator element of the fasteners. In some cases, proper AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 386
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS (6/8/88)
tensioning of the bolts may require more than a single cycle of systematic partial tightening. After all plies of the joint are in firm contact, all fasteners shall be further tightened, progressing systematically from the most rigid part of the connection to the free edges in a manner that will minimize relaxation of previously tightened fasteners. In some cases, proper tensioning of the bolts may require more than a single cycle of systematic partial tightening prior to final yielding or fracture of the control or indicator element of individual fasteners. (4) Direct Tension Indicator Tightening. When bolts are to be installed using direct tension indicator devices to indicate bolt tension, a representative sample of not less than three devices for each diameter and grade of fastener shall be tested with three typical bolts in a calibration device capable of indicating bolt tension. The test assembly shall include flat hardened washers, if required in the actual connection, arranged as those in the actual connections to be tensioned. The calibration test shall demonstrate that the device indicates a tension not less than 5 percent greater than that required by Table 4. When bolts are installed in the work using direct tension indicators meeting the requirements of ASTM F959, bolts shall be installed in all holes of the connection and tightened until all plies of the joint are in firm contact and fasteners are uniformly snug tight. Snug tight is indicated by partial compression of the direct tension indicator protrusions. All fasteners shall then be tightened, progressing systematically from the most rigid part of the connection to the free edges in a manner that will minimize relaxation of previously tightened fasteners. In some cases, proper tensioning of the bolts may require more than a single cycle of systematic partial tightening prior to final tightening to deform the protrusion to the specified gap. Special attention shall be given to proper installation of flat hardened washers when direct tension indicator devices are used with bolts installed in oversize or slotted holes and when the load indicating devices are used under the turned element. If direct tension indicators different from those meeting the requirements of ASTM F959 are used, manufacturer’s installation procedure as required by Section 2(f), shall be followed for installation of bolts in the calibration device and in all connections, and in addition the general requirements for use of direct tension indicators meeting the requirements of ASTM F959 shall be met. (e) Identification of Tightening Requirements. Bolts in slip-critical connections or bolts subject to axial tension which are to be installed and tightened in accordance by one of the methods in 8(d) and which require inspection to ensure that requirements of Table 4 are satisfied shall be clearly identified on the contract drawings. Shear/bearing connections which are to be installed by one of the methods in 8(d) but which need not be inspected to ensure bolt tensions specified in Table 4 are met shall be clearly identified on the contract drawings. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 387
(f) Reuse of Bolts. A490 bolts and galvanized A325 bolts shall not be reused. Other A325 bolts may be reused if approved by the Engineer of Record. Touching up or retightening previously snug tightened bolts which may have been loosened by the snugging of adjacent bolts shall not be considered to be a reuse. 9. Inspection (a) Inspector Responsibility. When inspection is required by the contract documents, the Inspector shall determine while the work is in progress that the requirements of Sections 2, 3 and 8, as appropriate, of this Specification are met in the work. All connections shall be inspected to ensure that the plies of the connected elements have been brought into firm contact. Bolts in connections not identified as being slip-critical nor subject to direct tension nor as tensioned bearing connections as provided in 8(c)(2) should not be inspected for bolt tension. For connections identified to be installed in accordance with 8(c)(2), the Inspector shall monitor installation and tightening of bolts to ensure that bolts are tightened in accordance with one of the methods of 8(d), but should not test the bolts for actual installed pretension. For all connections specified to be slip critical or subject to axial tension the Inspector shall observe the demonstration testing, and calibration procedures when such calibration is required, and shall monitor the installation of bolts to determine that all plies of the material have been drawn together and that the selected procedure has been used to tighten all bolts to ensure that the specified procedure was followed to achieve the pretension specified in Table 4. Bolts installed by procedures in Section 8(d) may reach tensions substantially greater than values given in Table 4, but this shall not be cause for rejection. (b) Arbitration Inspection. When high-strength bolts in slip-critical connections and connections subject to direct tension have been installed by any of the tightening methods in Section 8(d) and inspected in accordance with Section 9(a) and a disagreement exists as to the minimum tension of the installed bolts, the following arbitration procedure may be used. Other methods for arbitration inspection may be used if approved by the Engineer of Record. (1) The Inspector shall use a manual torque wrench which indicates torque by means of a dial or which may be adjusted to give an indication that the job inspecting torque has been reached. (2) This Specification does not recognize standard torques determined from tables or from formulas which are assumed to relate torque to tension. Testing using such standard torques shall not be considered valid. (3) A representative sample of five bolts from the diameter, length and grade of the bolts being inspected shall be tightened in the tension measuring device by any convenient means to an initial condition equal to approximately 15 percent of the required fastener tension and then to the minimum tension specified in Table 4. Material under the turned element in the tension measuring device shall be the same as in the actual installation, that is, structural steel or AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 388
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS (6/8/88)
hardened washer. Tightening beyond the initial condition must not produce greater nut rotation than 11⁄2 times that permitted in Table 5. The job inspecting torque shall be taken as the average of three values thus determined after rejecting the high and low values. The inspecting wrench shall then be applied to the tightened bolts in the work and the torque necessary to turn the nut or head 5 degrees (approximately 1 inch at 12 inch radius) in the tightening direction shall be determined. (4) Bolts represented by the sample in the foregoing paragraph which have been tightened in the structure shall be inspected by applying, in the tightening direction, the inspecting wrench and its job torque to 10 percent of the bolts, but not less than 2 bolts, selected at random in each connection in question. If no nut or bolt head is turned by application of the job inspecting torque, the connection shall be accepted as properly tightened. If any nut or bolt is turned by the application of the job inspecting torque, all bolts in the connection shall be tested, and all bolts whose nut or head is turned by the job inspecting torque shall be tightened and reinspected. Alternatively, the fabricator or erector, at his option, may retighten all of the bolts in the connection and then resubmit the connection for the specified inspection. (c) Delayed Verification Inspection. The procedures specified in Sections 9(a) and (b) are intended for inspection of bolted connections and verification of pretension at the time of tensioning the joint. If verification of bolt tension is required after a passage of a period of time and exposure of the completed joints, the procedure of Section 9(b) will provide indication of bolt tension which is of questionable accuracy. Procedures appropriate to the specific situation should be used for verification of bolt tension. This might involve use of the arbitration inspection procedure contained herein, or might require the development and use of alternate procedures. (See Commentary.)
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 389
APPENDIX A
Testing Method to Determine the Slip Coefficient for Coatings Used in Bolted Joints Reprinted from Engineering Journal American Institute of Steel Construction, Third Quarter, 1985.
JOSEPH A. YURA and KARL H. FRANK
In 1975, the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) contacted the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints (RCRBSJ), now the Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC), regarding the difficulties and costs which steel fabricators encounter with restrictions on coatings of contact surfaces for friction-type structural joints. The SSPC also expressed the need for a “standardized test which can be conducted by any certified testing agency at the initiative and expense of any interested party, including the paint manufacturer.” And finally, the RCSC was requested to “prepare and promulgate a specification for the conduct of such a standard test for slip coefficients.” The following Testing Method is the answer of Research Council on Structural Connections to the SSPC request. The test method was developed by Professors Joseph A. Yura and Karl H. Frank of the University of Texas at Austin under a grant from the Federal Highway Administration. The Testing Method was approved by the RCSC on June 14, 1984. 1.0 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Purpose and Scope The purpose of the testing procedure is to determine the slip coefficient of a coating for use in high-strength bolted connections. The testing specification ensures that the creep deformation of the coating due to both the clamping force of the bolt and the service load joint shear are such that the coating will provide satisfactory performance under sustained loading. Joseph A. Yura, M. ASCE, is Warren S. Bellows Centennial Professor in Civil Engineering, University of Texas at Austin, Austin, Texas. Karl H. Frank, A.M. ASCE, is Associate Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, University of Texas at Austin, Austin, Texas.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 390
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS
1.2 Definition of Essential Variables Essential variables mean those variables which, if changed, will require retesting of the coating to determine its slip coefficient. The essential variables are given below. The relationship of these variables to the limitation of application of the coating for structural joints is also given. The time interval between application of the coating and the time of testing is an essential variable. The time interval must be recorded in hours and any special curing procedures detailed. Curing according to published manufacturer’s recommendations would not be considered a special curing procedure. The coatings are qualified for use in structural connections which are assembled after coating for a time equal to or greater than the interval used in the test specimens. Special curing conditions used in the test specimens will also apply to the use of the coating in the structural connections. The coating thickness is an essential variable. The maximum average coating thickness allowed on the bolted structure will be the average thickness, rounded to the nearest whole mil, of the coating used on the creep test specimens minus 2 mils. The composition of the coating, including the thinners used, and its method of manufacture are essential variables. Any change will require retesting of the coating. 1.3 Retesting A coating which fails to meet the creep or the post-creep slip test requirements given in Sect. 4 may be retested in accordance with methods in Sect. 4 at a lower slip coefficient, without repeating the static short-term tests specified in Sect. 3. Essential variables must remain unchanged in the retest. 2.0 TEST PLATES AND COATING OF THE SPECIMENS 2.1 Test Plates The test specimen plates for the short-term static tests are shown in Fig. 1. The plates are 4×4 in. plates, 5⁄8-in. thick, with a 1-in. dia. hole drilled 11⁄2 in. ± 1⁄16 in. from one edge. The specimen plates for the creep specimen are shown in Fig. 2. The plates are 4×7 in., 5⁄8-in. thick, with two 1-in. holes, 11⁄2 in. ± 1⁄16 in. from each end. The edges of the plates may be milled, as rolled or saw cut. Flame cut edges 4″
Load
1″ Clamping force
1 1/2 ″
cL
5″ 11/2 ″
11/2 ″
4″ 1-in. Dia.
1″ All plates 5/8 ″thick
Fig. 1. Compression test specimen
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 391
are not permitted. The plates should be flat enough to ensure they will be in reasonably full contact over the faying surface. Any burrs, lips or rough edges should be filed or milled flat. The arrangement of the specimen plates for the testing is shown in Figs. 2 and 3. The plates are to be fabricated from a steel with a minimum yield strength between 36 to 50 ksi. If specimens with more than one bolt are desired, the contact surface per bolt should be 4×3 in. as shown for the single bolt specimen in Fig. 1. 2.2 Specimen Coating The coatings are to be applied to the specimens in a manner consistent with the actual intended structural application. The method of applying the coating and the surface preparation should be given in the test report. The specimens are to be coated to an average thickness 2 mils (0.05 mm) greater than average thickness to be used in the structure. The thickness of the total coating and the primer, if used, shall be measured on the contact surface of the specimens. The thickness should be measured in accordance with the Steel Structures Painting Council specification SSPCPA2, Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages.1 Two spot readings (six gage readings) should be made for each contact surface. The overall average thickness from the three plates comprising a specimen is the average thickness for the specimen. This value should be reported for each specimen. The average coating thickness of the three creep specimens will be calculated and reported. The average thickness of the creep specimen minus two mils rounded to the nearest whole mil is the maximum average thickness of the coating to be used in the faying surface of a structure. The time between painting and specimen assembly is to be the same for all specimens within ±4 hours. The average time is to be calculated and reported. The two coating applications required in Sect. 3 are to use the same equipment and procedures. 3.0 SLIP TESTS The methods and procedures described herein are used to determine experimentally the slip coefficient (sometimes called the coefficient of friction) under shortterm static loading for high-strength bolted connections. The slip coefficient will be determined by testing two sets of five specimens. The two sets are to be coated at different times at least one week apart. 3.1 Compression Test Setup The test setup shown in Fig. 3 has two major loading components, one to apply a clamping force to the specimen plates and another to apply a compressive load to the specimen so that the load is transferred across the faying surfaces by friction. Clamping Force System. The clamping force system consists of a 7⁄8-in. dia. threaded rod which passes through the specimen and a centerhole compression ram. A 2H nut is used at both ends of the rod, and a hardened washer is used at each side of the test specimen. Between the ram and the specimen is a specially fabricated 7⁄8-in. 2H nut in which the threads have been drilled out so that it will slide with little resistance along the rod. When oil is pumped into the centerhole ram, 1. Steel Structures Painting Council, Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vols. 1 and 2, Pittsburgh, Pa., 1982.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 392
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS
2″ Load indicating washer Clamping bolt
4″
1″
7″
Pin bolt
1″ 11/2 ″
Specimen
7″
17/ 8 ″
4″
Fig. 2. Creep test specimens
Drilled nut
Load
Testing machine
Nut 7/ 8
Spherical head 50 kip Center hole ram
Dia. rod
Nut 7/ 8 -2M
Hardened washer Specimen
Plate Piston
Base
Fig. 3. Test setup AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 393
the piston rod extends, thus forcing the special nut against one of the outside plates of the specimen. This action puts tension in the threaded rod and applies a clamping force to the specimen which simulates the effect of a tightened bolt. If the diameter of the centerhole ram is greater than 1 in., additional plate washers will be necessary at the ends of the ram. The clamping force system must have a capability to apply a load of at least 49 kips and maintain this load during the test with an accuracy of ±1%. Compressive Load System. A compressive load is applied to the specimen until slip occurs. This compressive load can be applied by a compression test machine or compression ram. The machine, ram and the necessary supporting elements should be able to support a force of 90 kips. The compression loading system should have an accuracy of 1.0% of the slip load. 3.2 Instrumentation Clamping Force. The clamping force must be measured within 0.5 kips. This may be accomplished by measuring the pressure in the calibrated ram or placing a load cell in series with the ram. Compression Load. The compression load must be measured during the test. This may be accomplished by direct reading from a compression testing machine, a load cell in series with the specimen and the compression loading device, or pressure readings on a calibrated compression ram. Slip Deformation. The relative displacement of the center plate and the two outside plates must be measured. This displacement, called slip for simplicity, should be the average which occurs at the centerline of the specimen. This can be accomplished by using the average of two gages placed on the two exposed edges of the specimen or by monitoring the movement of the loading head relative to the base. If the latter method is used, due regard must be taken for any slack that may be present in the loading system prior to application of the load. Deflections can be measured by dial gages or any other calibrated device which has an accuracy of 0.001 in. 3.3 Test Procedure The specimen is installed in the test setup as shown in Fig. 3. Before the hydraulic clamping force is applied, the individual plates should be positioned so that they are in, or are close to, bearing contact with the 7⁄8-in. threaded rod in a direction opposite to the planned compressive loading to ensure obvious slip deformation. Care should be taken in positioning the two outside plates so that the specimen will be straight and both plates are in contact with the base. After the plates are positioned, the centerhold ram is engaged to produce a clamping force of 49 kips. The applied clamping force should be maintained within ±0.5 kips during the test until slip occurs. The spherical head of the compression loading machine should be brought in contact with the center plate of the specimen after the clamping force is applied. The spherical head or other appropriate device ensures uniform contact along the edge of the plate, thus eliminating eccentric loading. When 1 kip or less of compressive load is applied, the slip gages should be engaged or attached. The purpose of engaging the deflection gage(s), after a slight load is applied, is to eliminate initial specimen settling deformation from the slip readings. When the slip gages are in place, the compression load is applied at a rate not AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 394
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS
exceeding 25 kips (109 kN) per minute, or 0.003 in. of slip displacement per minute until the slip load is reached. The test should be terminated when a slip of 0.05 in. or greater is recorded. The load-slip relationship should preferably be monitored continuously on an X-Y plotter throughout the test, but in lieu of continuous data, sufficient load-slip data must be recorded to evaluate the slip load defined below. 3.4 Slip Load Typical load-slip response is shown in Fig. 4. Three types of curves are usually observed and the slip load associated with each type is defined as follows: Curve (a). Slip load is the maximum load, provided this maximum occurs before a slip of 0.02 in. is recorded. Curve (b). Slip load is the load at which the slip rate increases suddenly. Curve (c). Slip load is the load corresponding to a deformation of 0.02 in. This definition applies when the load vs. slip curves show a gradual change in response.
-slip load
a
LOAD
b c
Load Slip
0
0.020
0.040 SLIP (in.)
Fig. 4. Definition of slip load
3.5 Coefficient of Slip The slip coefficient ks for an individual specimen is calculated as follows: ks =
slip load 2 × clamping force
The mean slip coefficient for both sets of five specimens must be compared. If the two means differ by more than 25%, using the smaller mean as the base, a third five-specimen set must be tested. The mean and standard deviation of the data from all specimens tested define the slip coefficient of the coating. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 395
3.6 Alternate Test Methods Other test methods to determine slip may be used provided the accuracy of load measurement and clamping satisfies the conditions presented in the previous sections. For example, the slip load may be determined from a tension-type test setup rather than the compression-type as long as the contact surface area per fastener of the test specimen is the same as shown in Fig. 1. The clamping force of at least 49 kips may be applied by any means provided the force can be established within ±1%. Strain-gaged bolts can usually provide the desired accuracy. However, bolts installed by turn-of-nut method, tension indicating fasteners and load indicator washers usually show too much variation to be used in the slip test. 4.0 TENSION CREEP TESTS The test method outlined is intended to ensure the coating will not undergo significant creep deformation under service loading. The test also determines the loss in clamping force in the fastener due to the compression or creep of the paint. Three replicate specimens are to be tested. 4.1 Test Setup Tension-type specimens, as shown in Fig. 2, are to be used. The replicate specimens are to be linked together in a single chain-like arrangement, using loose pin bolts, so the same load is applied to all specimens. The specimens shall be assembled so the specimen plates are bearing against the bolt in a direction opposite to the applied tension loading. Care should be taken in the assembly of the specimens to ensure the centerline of the holes used to accept the pin bolts is in line with the bolts used to assemble the joint. The load level, specified in Sect. 4.2, shall be maintained constant within ±1% by springs, load maintainers, servo controllers, dead weights or other suitable equipment. The bolts used to clamp the specimens together shall be 7⁄8-in. dia. A490 bolts. All bolts should come from the same lot. The clamping force in the bolts should be a minimum of 49 kips. The clamping force is to be determined by calibrating the bolt force with bolt elongation, if standard bolts are used. Special fasteners which control the clamping force by other means such as bolt torque or strain gages may be used. A minimum of three bolt calibrations must be performed using the technique selected for bolt force determination. The average of the three-bolt calibration is to be calculated and reported. The method of measuring bolt force must ensure the clamping force is within ±2 kips (9 kN) of the average value. The relative slip between the outside plates and the center plates shall be measured to an accuracy of 0.001 in. (0.02 mm). This is to be measured on both sides of each specimen. 4.2 Test Procedure The load to be placed on the creep specimens is the service load permitted for 7⁄8-in. A490 bolts in slip-critical connections by the latest edition of the Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts2 for the particular slip coefficient category under consideration. The load is to be placed on the specimen and held 2. Research Council of Structural Connections, Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., Chicago, November 1985.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 396
RCSC SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS
for 1,000 hours. The creep deformation of a specimen is calculated using the average reading of the two displacements on each side of the specimen. The difference between the average after 1,000 hours and the initial average reading taken within one-half hour after loading the specimens is defined as the creep deformation of the specimen. This value is to be reported for each specimen. If the creep deformation of any specimen exceeds 0.005 in. (0.12 mm), the coating has failed the test for the slip coefficient used. The coating may be retested using new specimens in accordance with this section at a load corresponding to a lower value of slip coefficient. If the value of creep deformation is less than 0.005 in. (0.12 mm) for all specimens, the specimens are to be loaded in tension to a load calculated as Pu = average clamping force × design slip coefficient × 2 since there are two slip planes. The average slip deformation which occurs at this load must be less than 0.015 in. (0.38 mm) for the three specimens. If the deformation is greater than this value, the coating is considered to have failed to meet the requirements for the particular slip coefficient used. The value of deformation for each specimen is to be reported. COMMENTARY The slip coefficient under short-term static loading has been found to be independent of clamping force, paint thickness and hole diameter.3 The slip coefficient can be easily determined using the hydraulic bolt test setup included in this specification. The slip load measured in this setup yields the slip coefficient directly since the clamping force is controlled. The slip coefficient k, is given by ks =
slip load 2 × clamping force
The resulting slip coefficient has been found to correlate with both tension and compression tests of bolted specimens. However, tests of bolted specimens revealed that the clamping force may not be constant but decreases with time due to the compressive creep of the coating on the faying surfaces and under the nut and bolt head. The reduction of the clamping force can be considerable for joints with high clamping force and thick coatings, as much as a 20% loss. This reduction in clamping force causes a corresponding reduction in the slip load. The resulting reduction in slip load must be considered in the procedure used to determine the design allowable slip loads for the coating. The loss in clamping force is a characteristic of the coating. Consequently, it cannot be accounted for by an increase in the factor of safety or a reduction in the clamping force used for design without unduly penalizing coatings which do not exhibit this behavior. The creep deformation of the bolted joint under the applied shear loading is also an important characteristic and a function of the coating applied. Thicker coatings tend to creep more than thinner coatings. Rate of creep deformation increases as the applied load approaches the slip load. Extensive testing has shown the rate of creep is not constant with time, rather it decreases with time. After 1,000 hours of loading, the additional creep deformation is negligible. 3. Frank, K. H., and J. A. Yura, An Experimental Study of Bolted Shear Connections, FHWA/RD-81-148, Federal Highway Administration, Washington, D.C., December 1981.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 397
The proposed test methods are designed to provide the necessary information to evaluate the suitability of a coating for slip critical bolted connections and to determine the slip coefficient to be used in the design of the connections. The initial testing of the compression specimens provides a measure of the scatter of the slip coefficient. In order to get better statistical information, a third set of specimens must be tested whenever the means of the initial two sets differ by more than 25%. The creep tests are designed to measure the paint’s creep behavior under the service loads determined by the paint’s slip coefficient based on the compression test results. The slip test conducted at the conclusion of the creep test is to ensure the loss of clamping force in the bolt does not reduce the slip load below that associated with the design slip coefficient. A490 bolts are specified, since the loss of clamping force is larger for these bolts than A325 bolts. Qualifying of the paint for use in a structure at an average thickness of 2 mils less than the test specimen is to ensure that a casual buildup of paint due to overspray, etc., does not jeopardize the coating’s performance. The use of 1-in. (25 mm) holes in the specimens is to ensure that adequate clearance is available for slip. Fabrication tolerances, coating buildup on the holes and assembly tolerances reduce the apparent clearances.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 398
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 399
Commentary on Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts June 8, 1988.
Historical Notes When first approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation, January 1951, the “Specification for Assembly of Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts” merely permitted the substitution of a like number of A325 high-strength bolts for hot driven ASTM A141 (presently identified as A502, Grade 1) steel rivets of the same nominal diameter. It was required that all contact surfaces be free of paint. As revised in 1954, the omission of paint was required to apply only to “joints subject to stress reversal, impact or vibration, or to cases where stress redistribution due to joint slippage would be undesirable.” This relaxation of the earlier provision recognized the fact that, in a great many cases, movement of the connected parts that brings the bolts into bearing against the sides of their holes is in no way detrimental. In the first edition of the Specification published in 1951, a table of torque to tension relationships for bolts of various diameters was included. It was soon demonstrated in research that a variation in the torque to tension relationship of as high as plus or minus 40 percent must be anticipated unless the relationship is established individually for each bolt lot, diameter and fastener condition. Hence, by the 1954 edition of the Specification, recognition of standard torque to tension relationships in the form of tabulated values or formulas was withdrawn. Recognition of the calibrated wrench method of tightening was retained, however, until 1980, but with the requirement that the torque required for installation or inspection be determined specifically for the bolts being installed on a daily basis. Recognition of the method was withdrawn in 1980 because of continuing controversy resulting from failure of users to adhere to the detailed requirements for valid use of the method both during installation and inspection. With the 1985 version of the Specification, the calibrated wrench method was reinstated, but with more detailed requirements which should be carefully followed. The increasing use of high-strength steels created the need for bolts substantially stronger than A325 in order to resist the much greater forces they support without resort to very large connections. To meet this need, a new ASTM specification, A490, was developed. When provisions for the use of these bolts were included in this Specification in 1964, it was required that they be tightened to their specified proof load, as was required for the installation of A325 bolts. However, the ratio of proof load to specified minimum tensile strength is approximately 0.7 for A325 bolts, whereas it is 0.8 for A490 bolts. Calibration studies have shown that highstrength bolts have ultimate load capacities in torqued tension which vary from about
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 400
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
80 to 90 percent of the pure-tension tensile strength.1 Hence, if minimum strength A490 bolts were supplied and they experienced the maximum reduction due to torque required to induce the tension, there is a possibility that these bolts could not be tightened to proof load by any method of installation. Also, statistical studies have shown that tightening to the 0.8 times tensile strength under calibrated wrench control may result in some “twist-off” bolt failures during installation or in some cases a slight amount of under-tightening.2 Therefore, the required installed tension for A490 bolts was reduced to 70 percent of the specified minimum tensile strength. For consistency, but with only minor change, the initial tension required for A325 bolts was also set at 70 percent of their specified minimum tensile strength and, at the same time, the values for minimum required pretension were rounded off to the nearest kip. C1 Scope This Specification deals only with two types of high-strength bolts, namely, ASTM A325 and A490, and to their installation in structural steel joints. The provisions may not be relied upon for high-strength fasteners of other chemical composition or mechanical properties or size. The provisions do not apply to ASTM A325 or A490 fasteners when material other than steel is included in the grip. The provisions do not apply to high-strength anchor bolts. The Specification relates only to the performance of fasteners in structural steel connections and those few aspects of the connected material that affect the performance of the fasteners in connections. Many other aspects of connection design and fabrication are of equal importance and must not be overlooked. For information on questions of design of connected material, not covered herein, the user is directed to standard textbooks on design of structural steel and also to Kulak, G. L., J. W. Fisher, and J. H. A. Struik, Guide to Design Criteria for Bolted and Riveted Joints, 2nd ed., New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1987. (Hereinafter referred to as the Guide.) C2 Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Paint Complete familiarity with the referenced ASTM Specification requirements is necessary for the proper application of this Specification. Discussion of referenced specifications in this Commentary is limited to only a few frequently overlooked or littleunderstood items. In this Specification, a single style of fastener (heavy hex structural bolts with heavy hex nuts) available in two strength grades (A325 and A490) is specified as a principal style, but conditions for acceptance of other types of fasteners are provided. Bolt Specifications. ASTM A325 and A490 bolts are manufactured to dimensions as specified in ANSI Standard B18.2.1 for Heavy Hex Structural Bolts. The basic dimensions, as defined in Fig. C1, are shown in Table C1. The principal geometric features of heavy hex structural bolts that distinguish them from bolts for general application are the size of the head and the body length. The head of the heavy hex 1. Christopher, R. J., G. L. Kulak, and J. W. Fisher, “Calibration of Alloy Steel Bolts,” ASCE Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 92, No. ST2, Proc. Paper 4768, April, 1966, pp. 19–40. 2. Gill, P. J., “Specifications of Minimum Preloads for Structural Bolts,” Memorandum 30, G.K.N. Group Research Laboratory, England, 1966 (Unpublished Report).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 401
Table C1 Nominal Bolt Size, Inches D
Bolt Dimensions, Inches Heavy Hex Structural Bolts
Nut Dimensions, Inches Heavy Hex Nuts
Width across flats, F
Height H
Thread length
Width across flats, W
Height H
7⁄ 8 11⁄16 11⁄4 17⁄16 15⁄8 113⁄16 2 23⁄16 23⁄8
5⁄ 16 25⁄ 64 15⁄ 32 35⁄ 64 39⁄ 64 11⁄ 16 25⁄ 32 27⁄ 32 15⁄ 16
1 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2 13⁄4 2 2 21⁄4 21⁄4
7⁄ 8 11⁄16 11⁄4 17⁄16 15⁄8 113⁄16 2 23⁄16 23⁄8
31⁄ 64 39⁄ 64 47⁄ 64 55⁄ 64 64⁄ 64 17⁄64 17⁄32 111⁄32 115⁄32
1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2
Thread Length A325
F
H
Bolt Length
H
W
Nut may be chamfered on both faces Fig. C1. Heavy hex structural bolt and heavy hex nut
structural bolt is specified to be the same size as a heavy hex nut of the same nominal diameter in order that the ironworker may use a single size wrench or socket on both the bolt head and the nut. Heavy hex structural bolts have shorter thread length than bolts for general application. By making the body length of the bolt the control dimension, it has been possible to exclude the thread from all shear planes, except in the case of thin outside parts adjacent to the nut. Depending upon the amount of bolt length added to adjust for incremental stock lengths, the full thread may extend into the grip by as much as 3⁄8 inch for 1⁄2, 5⁄8, 3⁄4, 7⁄8, 11⁄4, and 11⁄2 in. diameter bolts and as much as 1⁄2 inch for 1, 11⁄8 and 13⁄8 in. diameter bolts. Inclusion of some thread run-out in the plane of shear is permissible. Of equal or even greater importance is exercise of care to provide sufficient thread for nut tightening to keep the nut threads from jamming into the thread run-out. When the thickness of an outside part is less than the amount the threads may extend into the grip tabulated above, it may be necessary to call for the next increment of bolt length together with sufficient flat washers to ensure full tightening of the nut without jamming nut threads on the thread run-out. There is an exception to the short thread length requirements for ASTM A325 bolts discussed in the foregoing. Beginning with ASTM A325-83, supplementary requirements have been added to the ASTM A325 Specification which permit the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 402
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
purchaser, when the bolt length is equal to or shorter than four times the nominal diameter, to specify that the bolt be threaded for the full length of the shank. This exception to the requirements for thread length of heavy hex structural bolts was provided in the Specification in order to increase economy through simplified ordering and inventory control in the fabrication and erection of structures using relatively thin materials where strength of the connection is not dependent upon shear strength of the bolt, whether threads are in the shear plane or not. The Specification requires that bolts ordered to such supplementary requirements be marked with the symbol A325T. In order to determine the required bolt length, the value shown in Table C2 should be added to the grip (i.e., the total thickness of all connected material, exclusive of washers). For each hardened flat washer that is used, add 5⁄32 inch, and for each beveled washer add 5⁄16 inch. The tabulated values provide appropriate allowances for manufacturing tolerances, and also provide for full thread engagement (defined as having the end of the bolt at least flush with the face of the nut) with an installed heavy hex nut. The length determined by the use of Table C2 should be adjusted to the next longer 1⁄4 inch length. ASTM A325 and ASTM A490 currently provide for three types (according to metallurgical classification) of high-strength structural bolts, supplied in sizes 1⁄2 inch to 11⁄2 inch inclusive except for A490 Type 2 bolts which are available in diameters from 1⁄2 inch to 1 inch inclusive: Type 1. Type 2. Type 3.
Medium carbon steel for A325 bolts, alloy steel for A490 bolts. Low carbon martensitic steel for both A325 and A490 bolts. Bolts having improved atmospheric corrosion resistance and weathering characteristics for both A325 and A490 bolts.
When the bolt type is not specified, either Type 1, Type 2 or Type 3 may be supplied at the option of the manufacturer. Special attention is called to the requirement in ASTM A325 that, where elevated temperature applications are involved, Type 1 bolts shall be specified by the purchaser. This is because the chemistry of Type 2 bolts permits heat treatment at sufficiently low temperatures that subsequent heating to elevated temperatures may affect the mechanical properties. Heavy Hex Nuts. Heavy hex nuts for use with A325 bolts may be manufactured to the requirements of ASTM A194 for grades 2 or 2H or the requirements of ASTM A563 for grades DH, except that nuts to be galvanized for use with galvanized bolts must be hardened nuts meeting the requirements for ASTM A563 grade DH. The heavy hex nuts for use with A490 bolts may be manufactured to the requirements of ASTM A194 for grade 2H or the requirements of ASTM A563 for grade DH. Galvanized High-Strength Bolts. Galvanized high-strength bolts and nuts must be considered as a manufactured matched assembly; hence, comments relative to them have not been included in the foregoing paragraphs where bolts and nuts have been considered separately. Insofar as the hot-dip galvanized bolt and nut assembly, per se, is concerned, four principal factors need be discussed in order that the provisions of the Specification may be understood and properly applied. These are (1) the effect of the hot-dip galvanizing process on the mechanical properties of highstrength steels, (2) the effect of hot-dip galvanized coatings on the nut stripping strength, (3) the effect of galvanizing upon the torque involved in the tightening operation, and (4) shipping requirements. The ASTM Specifications for galvanized A325 high-strength bolts recognize AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 403
Table C2 Nominal Bolt Size, Inches 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
To Determine Required Bolt Length Add to Grip, in Inches 11⁄
16 7⁄ 8
1 11⁄8
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8
11⁄4 11⁄2 15⁄8 13⁄4
11⁄2
17⁄8
both the hot-dip galvanizing process and the mechanical galvanizing process. The effects of the two processes upon the performance characteristics and requirements for proper installation are distinctly different: therefore, distinction between the two must be noted in the comments which follow. ASTM A325 Specifications require that all components of a fastener assembly (nuts, bolts and washers) shall have been coated by the same process and that the supplier’s option is limited to one process per item with no mixed processes in a lot. Mixing a bolt galvanized by one process with a nut galvanized by the other may result in a unworkable assembly. Effect of Hot-Dip Galvanizing on the Strength of Steels. Steels in the 200 ksi and higher tensile strength range are subject to embrittlement if hydrogen is permitted to remain in the steel and the steel is subjected to high tensile stress. The minimum tensile strength of A325 bolts is 105 or 120 ksi, depending upon the size, comfortably below the critical range. The required maximum tensile strength for A490 bolts was set at 170 ksi in order to provide a little more than a 10 percent margin below 200 ksi; however, because manufacturers must target their production slightly higher than the required minimum, A490 bolts close to the critical range of tensile strength must be anticipated. For black bolts this is not a cause for concern, but, if the bolt is hot-dip galvanized, a hazard of delayed brittle fracture in service exists because of the real possibility of introduction of hydrogen into the steel during the pickling operation of the hot-dip galvanizing process and the subsequent “sealingin” of the hydrogen by the zinc coating. There also exists the possibility of cathodic hydrogen adsorption arising from corrosion process in service in aggressive environments. ASTM Specifications provide for the galvanizing of A325 bolts but not A490 bolts. Galvanizing of A490 bolts is not permitted. Because pickling and emersion in molten zinc is not involved, galvanizing by the mechanical process essentially avoids potential for hydrogen embrittlement. The heat treatment temperatures for Type 2 ASTM A325 bolts are in the range of the molten zinc temperatures for hot-dip galvanizing; therefore there is a potential for diminishing the heat treated mechanical properties of Type 2 A325 bolts by the hot-dip galvanizing process. For this reason, the current Specifications require that only mechanical galvanizing shall be used on Type 2 ASTM A325 bolts. Nut Stripping Strength. Hot-dip galvanizing affects the stripping strength of the nut-bolt assembly primarily because, to accommodate the relatively thick zinc coatAMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 404
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
ings of non-uniform thickness on bolt threads, it is usual practice to hot-dip galvanize the blank nut and then to tap the nut oversize after galvanizing. This overtapping results in a reduction in the amount of engagement between the steel portions of the male and female threads with a consequent approximately 25 percent reduction in the stripping strength. Only the stronger hardened nuts have adequate strength to meet specification requirements even with the reduction due to overtapping; therefore, ASTM A325 specifies that only Grades DH and 2H be used for galvanized nuts. This requirement should not be overlooked if non-galvanized nuts are purchased and then sent to a local galvanizer for hot-dip galvanizing. Because the mechanical galvanizing process results in a more uniformly distributed and smooth zinc coating, nuts may be tapped oversize before galvanizing by an amount less than required for the hot-dip process before galvanizing. This results in a better bolt-nut fit with zinc coating on the internal threads of the nut. Effect of Galvanizing Upon Torque Involved in Tightening. Research3 has shown that, in the as-galvanized condition, galvanizing both increases the friction between the bolt and nut threads and also makes the torque induced tension much more variable. Lower torque and more consistent results are provided if the nuts are lubricated; thus, ASTM A325 requires that a galvanized bolt and lubricated galvanized nut shall be assembled in a steel joint with a galvanized washer and tested in accordance with ASTM A563 by the manufacturer prior to shipment to ensure that the galvanized nut with the lubricant provided may be rotated from the snug tight condition well in excess of the rotation required for full tensioning of the bolts without stripping. The requirement applies to both hot-dip and mechanical galvanized fasteners. Shipping Requirements for Galvanized Bolts and Nuts. The above requirements clearly indicate (1) that galvanized bolts and nuts are to be treated as a matched assembly, (2) that the seller must supply nuts which have been lubricated and tested with the supplied bolts, and (3) that nuts and bolts must be shipped together in the same shipping container. Purchase of galvanized bolts and galvanized nuts from separate sources is not in accordance with the intent of the ASTM Specifications because the control of overtapping and the testing and application of lubricant would be lost. Because some of the lubricants used to meet the requirements of ASTM Specifications are water soluble, it is advisable that galvanized bolts and nuts be shipped and stored in plastic bags in wood or metal containers. Washers. The primary function of washers is to provide a hardened non-galling surface under the element turned in tightening, particularly for those installation procedures which depend upon torque for control or inspection. Circular hardened washers meeting the requirements of ASTM A436 provide an increase in bearing area of 45 to 55 percent over the area provided by a heavy hex bolt head or nut; however, tests have shown that standard thickness washers play only a minor role in distributing the pressure induced by the bolt pretension, except where oversize or short slotted holes are used. Hence, consideration is given to this function only in the case of oversize and short slotted holes. The requirement for standard thickness hardened washers, when such washers are specified as an aid in the distribu3. Birkemoe, P. C., and D. C. Herrschaft, “Bolted Galvanized Bridges—Engineering Acceptance Near,” ASCE Civil Engineering, April 1970.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
TYPE
A325 BOLT
A490 NUT
(1)
1
6 - 405
NUT
XYZ A490
XYZ
MFGR IDENTIFICATION (TYPICAL) XYZ
XYZ A325
BOLT
XYZ
DH
D ARCS INDICATE GRADE C
2
XYZ A325
DH OR 2H (2)
GRADE MARK (2) D, DH, 2 OR 2H
XYZ A490
SAME AS TYPE 1
NOTE MANDATORY 3 RADIAL LINES AT 60
NOTE MANDATORY 6 RADIAL LINES AT 30
(3)
3
XYZ A325 NOTE MANDATORY UNDERLINE
SAME AS TYPE 1
(3) XYZ 3
(3)
XYZ A490
XYZ DH3
DH3 NOTE MANDATORY
(1) ADDITIONAL OPTIONAL 3 RADIAL LINES AT 120 MAY BE ADDED. (2) TYPE 3 ALSO ACCEPTABLE (3) ADDITIONAL OPTIONAL MARK INDICATING WEATHERING MAY BE ADDED
Fig. C2. Required marking for acceptable bolt and nut assemblies
tion of pressure, is waived for alternative design fasteners which incorporate a bearing surface under the head of the same diameter as the hardened washer; however, the requirements for hardened washers to satisfy the principal requirement of providing a non-galling surface under the element turned in tightening is not waived. The maximum thickness is the same for all standard washers up to and including 11⁄2 inch bolt diameter in order that washers may be produced from a single stock of material. The requirement that heat-treated washers not less than 5⁄16 inch thick be used to cover oversize and slotted holes in external plies, when A490 bolts of 11⁄8 inch or larger diameter are used, was found necessary to distribute the high clamping pressure so as to prevent collapse of the hole perimeter and enable development of the desired clamping force. Preliminary investigation has shown that a similar but less severe deformation occurs when oversize or slotted holes are in the interior plies. The reduction in clamping force may be offset by “keying,” which tends to increase the resistance to slip. These effects are accentuated in joints of thin plies . Marking. Heavy hex structural bolts and heavy hex nuts are required by ASTM Specifications to be distinctively marked. Certain markings are mandatory. In addition to the mandatory markings, the manufacturer may apply additional distinguishing marking. The mandatory and optional markings are shown in Figure C2. Paint. In the previous edition of the Specification, generic names for paints applied to faying surfaces was the basis for categories of allowable working stresses in “fricAMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 406
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
tion” type connections. Research4 completed since the adoption of the 1980 Specification has demonstrated that the slip coefficients for paints described by a generic type are not single values but depend also upon the type of vehicle used. Small differences in formulation from manufacturer to manufacturer or from lot to lot with a single manufacturer significantly affect slip coefficients if certain essential variables within a generic type are changed. It is unrealistic to assign paints to categories with relatively small incremental differences between categories based solely upon a generic description. As a result of the research, a test method was developed and adopted by the Council titled “Test Method to Determine the Slip Coefficient for Coatings Used in Bolted Joints.” A copy of this document is appended to this Specification as Appendix A. The method, which requires requalification if an essential variable is changed, is the sole basis for qualification of any coating to be used under this Specification. Further, normally only two categories of slip coefficient for paints to be used in slip-critical joints are recognized: Class A for coatings which do not reduce the slip coefficient below that provided by clean mill scale, and Class B for paints which do not reduce the slip coefficient below that of blast-cleaned steel surfaces. The research cited in the preceding paragraph also investigated the effect of varying the time from coating the faying surfaces to assembly of the connection and tightening the bolts. The purpose was to ascertain if partially cured paint continued to cure within the assembled joint over a period of time. It was learned that all curing ceased at the time the joint was assembled and tightened and that paint coatings that were not fully cured acted much as a lubricant would; thus, the slip resistance of the joint was severely reduced from that which was provided by faying surfaces that were fully cured prior to assembly. C3 Bolted Parts Material Within the Grip. The Specification is intended to apply to structural joints in which all of the material within the grip of the bolt is steel. Surface Conditions. The Test Method to Determine the Slip Coefficient for Coatings Used in Bolted Joints includes long-term creep test requirements to ensure reliable performance for qualified paint coatings. However, it must be recognized that in the case of hot-dip galvanized coatings, especially if the joint consists of many plies of thickly coated material, relaxation of bolt tension may be significant and may require retensioning of the bolts subsequent to the initial tightening. Research5 has shown that a loss of pretension of approximately 6.5 percent occurred for galvanized plates and bolts due to relaxation as compared with 2.5 percent for uncoated joints. This loss of bolt tension occurred in five days with negligible loss recorded thereafter. This loss can be allowed for in design or pretension may be brought back to the prescribed level by retightening the bolts after an initial period of “settling-in.” Since it was first published, this Specification has permitted the use of bolt holes 6 1⁄ 16 inch larger than the bolts installed in them. Research has shown that, where 4. Frank, Karl H. and J. A. Yura, “An Experimental Study of Bolted Shear Connections.” FHWA/RD-81/148, December 1981. 5. Munse, W. H., “Structural Behavior of Hot Galvanized Bolted Connections,” 8th International Conference on Hot-dip Galvanizing, London, England, June 1967. 6. Allen. R. N. and J. W. Fisher, “Bolted Joints With Oversize or Slotted Holes,” ASCE Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 94, No. ST9, September, 1968.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 407
greater latitude is needed in meeting dimensional tolerances during erection, somewhat larger holes can be permitted for bolts 5⁄8 inch diameter and larger without adversely affecting the performance of shear connections assembled with highstrength bolts. The oversize and slotted hole provisions of this Specification are based upon these findings. Because an increase in hole size generally reduces the net area of a connected part, the use of oversize holes is subject to approval by the Engineer of Record. Burrs. Based upon tests7 which demonstrated that the slip resistance of joints was unchanged or slightly improved by the presence of burrs, burrs which do not prevent solid seating of the connected parts in the snug tight condition need not be removed. On the other hand, parallel tests in the same program demonstrated that large burrs can cause a small increase in the required turns from snug tight condition to achieve specified pretension with turn-of-nut method of tightening. Unqualified Paint on Faying Surfaces. An extension to the research on the slip resistance of shear connections cited in footnote 4 investigated the effect of ordinary paint coatings on limited portions of the contact area within joints and the effect of overspray over the total contact area. The tests8 demonstrated that the effective area for transfer of shear by friction between contact surfaces was concentrated in an annular ring around and close to the bolts. Paint on the contact surfaces approximately one inch but not less than the bolt diameter away from the edge of the hole did not reduce the slip resistance. On the other hand, in recognition of the fact that, in connections of thick material involving a number of bolts on multiple gage lines, bolt pretension might not be adequate to completely flatten and pull thick material into tight contact around every bolt, the Specification requires that all areas between bolts also be free of paint. (See Figure C3.) The new requirements have a potential for increased economy because the paint-free area may easily be protected using masking tape located relative to the hole pattern, and, further, the narrow paint strip around the perimeter of the faying surface will minimize uncoated material outside the connection requiring field touch-up. This research also investigated the effect of various degrees of inadvertent overspray on slip resistance. It was found that even the smallest amount of overspray of ordinary paint (that is, not qualified as Class A) within the specified paint-free area on clean mill scale reduced the slip resistance significantly. On blast-cleaned surfaces, the presence of a small amount of overspray was not as detrimental. For simplicity, the Specification prohibits any overspray from areas required to be free of paint in slip-critical joints regardless of whether the surface is clean mill scale or blast cleaned. Galvanized Faying Surfaces. The slip factor for initial slip with clean hot-dip galvanized surfaces is of the order of 0.19 as compared with a factor of about 0.35 for clean mill scale. However, research (see note 3) has shown that the slip factor of galvanized surfaces is significantly improved by treatments such as hand wire brushing or light “brush-off” grit blasting. In either case, the treatment must be controlled in order to achieve the necessary roughening or scoring. Power wire brushing is unsatisfactory because it tends to polish rather than roughen the surface. 7. Polyzois, D. and J. A. Yura, “Effect of Burrs on Bolted Friction Connections,” AISC Engineering Journal, 22 (No. 3) Third Quarter 1985. 8. Polyzois, D. and K. Frank, “Effect of Overspray and Incomplete Masking of Faying Surfaces on the Slip Resistance of Bolted Connections,” AISC Engineering Journal, 23 (No. 2), 2nd Quarter 1986.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 408
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
Circular area around all holes
1 ″ but not less than d d 1 ″ but not less than d and All areas in between
Perimeter of contact area
Fig. C3. Areas outside the defined area need not be free of paint
Field experience and test results have indicated that galvanized members may have a tendency to continue to slip under sustained loading.9 Tests of hot-dip galvanized joints subject to sustained loading show a creep-type behavior. Treatments to the galvanized faying surfaces prior to assembly of the joint which caused an increase in the slip resistance under short duration loads did not significantly improve the slip behavior under sustained loading. C4 Design for Strength Of Bolted Connections Background for Design Stresses. With the 1985 edition of the Specification, the arbitrary designations “friction type” and “bearing type” connections used in former editions, and which were frequently misinterpreted as implying an actual difference in the manner of performance or strength of the two types of connection, were discontinued in order to focus attention more upon the real manner of performance of bolted connections. In bolted connections subject to shear-type loading, the load is transferred between the connected parts by friction up to a certain level of force which is dependent upon the total clamping force on the faying surfaces and the coefficient of friction of the faying surfaces. The connectors are not subject to shear, nor is the connected material subject to bearing stress. As loading is increased to a level in excess of the frictional resistance between the faying surfaces, slip occurs, but failure in the sense of rupture does not occur. As even higher levels of load are applied, the load is resisted by shear in the fastener and bearing upon the connected material plus some uncertain amount of friction between the faying surfaces. The final failure will be by shear failure of the connectors, or by tear out of the connected 9. Kulak, G. L., J. W. Fisher, and J. H. A. Struik, “Guide to Design Criteria for Bolted and Riveted Joints,” 2nd ed., New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1987, p. 208. (Hereinafter referred to as the Guide.)
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 409
material, or by unacceptable ovalization of the holes. Final failure load is independent of the clamping force provided by the bolts.10 The design of high-strength bolted connections under this Specification begins with consideration of strength required to prevent premature failure by shear of the connectors or bearing failure of the connected material. Next, for connections which are defined as “slip-critical,” the resistance to slip load is checked. Because the combined effect of frictional resistance with shear or bearing has not been systematically studied and is uncertain, any potential greater resistance due to combined effect is ignored. Connection Slip. There are practical cases in the design of structures where slip of the connection is desirable in order to permit rotation in a joint or to minimize the transfer of moment. Additionally there are cases where, because of the number of fasteners in a joint, the probability of slip is extremely small or where, if slip did occur, it would not be detrimental to the serviceability of the structure. In order to provide for such cases while at the same time making use of the higher shear strength of high-strength bolts, as contrasted to ASTM A307 bolts, the Specification now permits joints tightened only to the snug tight condition. The maximum amount of slip that can occur in connections that are not classified as slip-critical is, theoretically, an amount equal to two hole clearances. In practical terms, it is observed to be much less than this. In laboratory tests it is usually about one-half a hole clearance. This is because the acceptable inaccuracies in the location of holes within a pattern of bolts would usually cause one or more bolts to be in bearing in the initial unloaded condition. Further, in statically loaded structures, even with perfectly positioned holes, the usual method of erection would cause the weight of the connected elements to put the bolts into direct bearing at the time the member is supported on loose bolts and the lifting crane is unhooked. Subsequent additional gravity loading could not cause additional connection slip. Connections classified as slip-critical include those cases where slip could theoretically exceed an amount deemed by the Engineer of Record to affect the suitability for service of the structure by excessive distortion or reduction in strength or stability, even though the resistance to fracture of the connection, per se, may be adequate. Also included are those cases where slip of any magnitude must be prevented, for example, joints subject to load reversal. Shear and Bearing on Fasteners. Several interrelated parameters influence the shear and bearing strength of connections. These include such geometric parameters as the net-to-gross-area ratio of the connected parts, the ratio of the net area of the connected parts to the total shear-resisting area of the fasteners, and the ratio of transverse fastener spacing to fastener diameter and to the connected part thickness. In addition, the ratio of yield strength to tensile strength of the steel comprising the connected parts, as well as the total distance between extreme fasteners, measured parallel to the line of direct tensile force, play a part. In the past, a balanced design concept had been sought in developing criteria for mechanically fastened joints to resist shear between connected parts by means of bearing of the fasteners against the sides of the holes. This philosophy resulted in wide variations in the factor of safety for the fasteners, because the ratio of yield to tensile strength increases significantly with increasingly stronger grades of steel. It had no application at all in the case of very long joints used to transfer direct 10. Ibid., pp. 49–52.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 410
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
tension, because the end fasteners “unbutton” before the plate can attain its full strength or before the interior fasteners can be loaded to their rated shear capacity. By means of a mathematical model it was possible to study the interrelationship of the previously mentioned parameters.11,12 It has been shown that the factor of safety against shear failure ranged from 3.3 for compact (short) joints to approximately 2.0 for joints with an overall length in excess of 50 inches. It is of interest to note that the longest (and often the most important) joints had the lowest factor, indicating that a factor of safety of 2.0 has proven satisfactory in service. The absence of design strength provisions specifically for the case where a bolt in double shear has a non-threaded shank in one shear plane and a threaded section in the other shear plane is because of the uncertainty of manner of sharing the load between the two different shear areas. It also recognizes that knowledge as to the bolt placement (which might leave both shear planes in the threaded section) is not ordinarily available to the detailer. If threads occur in one shear plane, the conservative assumption is made that threads are in all shear planes. The nominal strength and resistance factors for fasteners subject to applied tension or shear are given in Table 2. The values are based upon the research and recommendations reported in the Guide. With the wealth of data available, it was possible through statistical analyses to adjust resistances to provide more uniform reliability for all loading and joint types. The design resistances provide designs approximately equivalent to the designs provided by the allowable stresses in the 1980 edition of the Specification. The design of connections is more conservative than that of the connected members of buildings and bridges by a substantial margin, in the sense that the failure load of the fasteners is substantially in excess of the maximum serviceability limit (yield) of the connected material. Design for Tension. The nominal strengths specified for applied tension13 are intended to apply to the external bolt load plus any tension resulting from prying action produced by deformation of the connected parts. The recommended design strength is approximately equal to the initial tightening force; thus, when loaded to the nominal (service) load, high-strength bolts will experience little if any actual change in stress. For this reason, bolts in connections in which the applied loads subject the bolts to axial tension are required to be fully tensioned, even though the connection may not be subject to fatigue loading nor classified as slip-critical. Properly tightened A325 and A490 bolts are not adversely affected by repeated application of the recommended service load tensile stress, provided the fitting material is sufficiently stiff, so that the prying force is a relatively small part of the applied tension.14 The provisions covering bolt tensile fatigue are based upon study of test reports of bolts that were subjected to repeated tensile load to failure. Design for Shear. The nominal strength in shear is based upon the observation that the shear strength of a single high-strength bolt is about 0.62 times the tensile strength of that bolt.15 However, in shear connections with more than two bolts in the line of force, deformation of the connected material causes nonuniform bolt shear force distribution so that the strength of the connection in terms of the average bolt strength 11. Fisher, J. W. and L. S. Beedle, “Analysis of Bolted Butt Joints,” ASCE Journal of the Structural Division, 91 (No. ST5), October 1965. 12. Guide, pp. 89–116; 126–132. 13. Ibid., pp. 263–286. 14. Ibid., pp. 272. 15. Ibid., pp. 44–50.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 411
goes down as the joint length increases.16 Rather than provide a function that reflects this decrease in average fastener strength with joint length, a single reduction factor of 0.80 was applied to the 0.62 multiplier. The result will accommodate bolts in all joints up to about 50 inches in length without seriously affecting the economy of very short joints. As noted in the footnotes to Table 2, bolts in joints longer than 50 inches in length must be further discounted by an additional 20 percent. The average value of the nominal strength for bolts with threads in the shear plane has been determined by a series of tests17 to be 0.833 Fu with a standard deviation of 0.03. A value of 0.80 was taken as a factor to account for the shear strength of a bolt with threads in the shear plane based upon the area corresponding to the nominal body area of the bolt. The shear strength of bolts is not affected by pretension in the fasteners provided the connected material is in contact at the faying surfaces. The design shear strength equals the nominal shear strength multiplied by a resistance factor of 0.75. Combined Tension and Shear. The nominal strength of fasteners subject to combined tension and shear is provided by elliptical interaction curves in Table 3 which account for the connection length effect on bolts loaded in shear, the ratio of shear strength to tension strength of threaded fasteners, and the ratios of root area to nominal body area and tensile stress area to nominal body area.18 No reduction in the design shear strength is required when applied tensile stress is equal to or less than the design tensile strength. Although the elliptical interaction curve provides the best estimate of the strength of bolts subject to combined shear and tension and thus is used in this Specification, it would be within the intent of the Specification for invoking specifications to use a three straight line approximation of the ellipse. Design for Bearing. Bearing stress produced by a high-strength bolt pressing against the side of the hole in a connected part is important only as an index to behavior of the connected part. It is of no significance to the bolt. The critical value can be derived from the case of a single bolt at the end of a tension member. It has been shown,19 using finger-tight bolts, that a connected plate will not fail by tearing through the free edge of the material if the distance L, measured parallel to the line of applied force from a single bolt to the free edge of the member toward which the force is directed, is not less than the diameter of the bolt multiplied by the ratio of the bearing stress to the tensile strength of the connected part. The criterion for nominal bearing strength is L / d ≥ Rn / Fu where Rn = nominal bearing pressure Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of the connected part. As a practical consideration, a lower limit of 1.5 is placed on the ratio L/d and an upper limit of 1.5 on the ratio Fp / Fu and an upper limit of 3.0 on the ratio Rn / Fu. The foregoing leads to the rules governing bearing strength in the specification. 16. Ibid., pp. 99–104. 17. Yura. J. A., K. H. Frank, and D. Polyois, “High Strength Bolts for Bridges.” PMFSEL Report No. 87-3, May 1987, Phil M. Ferguson Structural Engineering Laboratory, University of Texas at Austin. 18. Guide, pp. 50–51. 19. Ibid., pp. 141–143.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 412
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
The bearing pressure permitted in the 1980 Specification and the current provisions are fully justifiable from the standpoint of strength of the connected material. However, even though rupture does not occur, recent tests have demonstrated that ovalization of the hole will begin to develop as the bearing stress is increased beyond the previously permitted stress, especially if it is combined with high tensile stress on the net section. Furthermore, when high bearing stress is combined with high tensile stress on the net section and the effect of exterior versus interior plies, lower ultimate strengths than previously reported result in addition to the hole ovalization. Recognizing that initiation of hole ovalization occurs well below the ultimate strength, and to facilitate standardization in detailing and fabrication, sufficiently conservative simplified criteria have been provided in a formula format for usual applications. The more accurate formula in which the strength is related to the distance L may be used for special cases such as those with very large bolts or very thin material. For connections with more than a single bolt in the direction of force, the resistance may be taken as the sum of the resistances of the individual bolts. C5 Design Check for Slip Resistance The Specification recognizes that, for a number of cases, slip of a joint would be undesirable or must be precluded. Such joints are termed “slip-critical” joints. This is somewhat different from the previous term “friction type” connection. The new terminology was adopted in order to focus attention on the fact that all tightened high-strength bolted joints resist load by friction between the faying surfaces up to the slip load and subsequently are able to resist even greater loads by shear and bearing. The strength of the joint is not related to the slip load. The Specification requires that the two different resistances be considered separately. The consequences of slip into bearing varies from application to application; hence the determination of which connections shall be designed and installed as slipcritical is best left to judgment and a conscious decision on the part of the Engineer of Record. Also, the determination of whether the potential slippage of a joint is critical at nominal load level as a serviceability consideration or whether slippage could result in distortions of the frame such that the ability of the frame to resist factored loads would be reduced can be determined only by the Engineer of Record. The following comments reflect the collective thinking of the Council as developed during numerous meetings and reviews of drafts of the Specification and Commentary. They are provided as guidance and an indication of the intent of the Specification. In the case of bolts in holes with only small clearance, such as standard holes and slotted holes loaded transverse to the axis of the slot in practical connections, the freedom to slip generally does not exist because one or more bolts are in bearing even before load is applied due to normal fabrication tolerances and erection procedures. Further, the consequences of slip, if it can occur at all, are trivial except for a few situations. If for some reason it is deemed critical, design should probably be on the basis of nominal loads (Section 5(b)). In connections containing long slots that are parallel to the direction of the applied load, slip of the connection prior to attainment of the factored load might be large enough to alter the usual assumption of analysis that the undeformed structure can be used to obtain the internal forces. The Specification allows the designer two alternatives in this case. If the connection is designed so that it will not slip under the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 413
effect of the nominal loads, then the effect of the factored loads acting on the deformed structure (deformed by the maximum amount of slip in the long slots at all locations) must be included in the structural analysis. Alternatively the connection can be designed so that it will not slip at loads up to the factored load level. These requirements are noted in Clause 7(b)(3). Joints subject to full reverse cyclic loading are clearly slip-critical joints since slip would permit back-and-forth movement of the joint and early fatigue failure. However, for joints subject to pulsating load that does not involve reversal of load direction, proper fatigue design could be provided either as a slip-critical joint on the basis of stress on the gross section or as a non-slip-critical joint on the basis of stress on the net section. Because fatigue results from repeated application, the service load rather than the overload load design should be based upon nominal load criteria (Section 5(b)). For high-strength bolts in combination with welds in statically loaded conditions and considering new work only, the nominal strength may be taken as the sum of two contributions.20 One results from the slip resistance of the bolted parts and may be determined in accordance with Section 5(c). The second results from the resistance of the welds as provided by applicable welding specifications. If one type of connector is already loaded when the second type of connector is introduced, the nominal strength cannot be obtained by adding the two resistances. The Guide should be consulted in these cases. From the definition of the term “coefficient of slip” (friction), the expression for nominal slip resistances for bolts in standard holes is apparent and needs no explanation. The mean value of slip coefficients from many tests on clean mill scale, blast-cleaned steel surfaces and galvanized and roughened surfaces were taken as the basis for the three classes of surfaces. In the 1978 edition of the Specification, nine classes of faying surface conditions were introduced, and significant increases were made in the recommended allowable stresses for proportioning connections which function by transfer of shear between connected parts by friction. These classes and stresses were adopted on the basis of statistical evaluation of the information then available. Extensive data developed through research sponsored by the Council and others during the past ten years has been statistically analyzed to provide improved information on slip probability of connections in which the bolts have been preloaded to the requirements of Table 4. Two principal variables—coefficient of friction of the faying surfaces and bolt pretension—were found to dominate the slip resistance of connections. An examination of the slip (friction) coefficient data for a wide range of surface conditions indicates that the data are distributed normally, and the standard deviation is essentially the same for each surface condition class. This means that different reduction factors should be applied to classes of surfaces with different mean values of coefficients of friction—the smaller the mean value of the coefficient of friction, the smaller (more severe) the appropriate reduction factor—in order to provide equivalent reliability of slip resistance. The bolt clamping force data indicate that bolt tensions are distributed normally for each method of tightening. However, the data also indicate that the mean values of the bolt tensions are different for each method. If the calibrated wrench method is used to tighten ASTM A325 bolts, the mean value of bolt tension is about 1.13 20. Ibid., pp. 238–40.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 414
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
times the minimum specified tension in Table 4. If the turn-of-nut method is used, the mean value of tension is about 1.35 times the minimum specified preload for A325 bolts and about 1.27 for A490 bolts. The combined effects of the variability of coefficient of friction and bolt tension have been accounted for in the slip probability factor, D, of the formula for nominal slip resistance in Section 5(b). The values of the slip probability factor, D, given by 5(b) imply a 90 percent reliability that slip will not occur if the calibrated wrench method of installation is used. If the turn-of-nut method is used, a reliability of about 95 percent will be provided. Reference is made to Guide to Design Criteria for Bolted and Riveted Joints (2nd ed., New York: John Wiley and Sons. 1987 p. 135) for tables of values of D appropriate for other mean slip coefficients and slip probabilities and suitable for direct substitution into the formula for slip resistance in Section 5(b). The frequency distribution and mean value of clamping force for bolts tightened by turn-of-nut method are higher than calibrated wrench installation because of the elimination of variables which affect torque-tension ratios and due to higherthan-specified minimum strength of production bolts. Because properly applied turnof-nut installation induces yield point strain in the bolt, the higher-thanspecified yield strength of production bolts will be mobilized and result in higher clamping force by the method. On the other hand, the calibrated wrench method, which is dependent upon the calibration of wrenches to slightly more than Table 4 tensions, independent of the actual bolt properties, will not mobilize any additional strength of production bolts. High clamping force might be achieved by the calibrated wrench method if the wrench was set to a higher torque value. However, this would require more attention to the degrees of rotation to prevent excessive deformation of the bolt or torsional bolt failure. Because of the effects of oversize and slotted holes on the induced tension in bolts using any of the specified installation methods, lower values are provided for bolts in these hole types. In the case of bolts in long slotted holes, even though the slip load is the same for bolts loaded transverse or parallel to the axis of the slot, the values for bolts loaded parallel to the axis has been further reduced based upon judgment in recognition of the greater consequences of slip. Attention is called to the fact that the criteria for slip resistance are for the case of connections subject to a coaxial load. For cases in which the load tends to rotate the connection in the plane of the faying surface, a modified formula accounting for the placement of bolts relative to the center of rotation should be used.21 Connections of the type shown in Figure C4(a), in which some of the bolts (A) lose a part of their clamping force due to applied tension, suffer no overall loss of frictional resistance. The bolt tension produced by the moment is coupled with a compensating compressive force (C) on the other side of the axis of bending. In a connection of the type shown in Fig. C4(b), however, all fasteners (B) receive applied tension which reduces the initial compression force at the contact surface. If slip under load cannot be tolerated, the design slip-load value of the bolts in shear should be reduced in proportion to the ratio of residual axial force to initial tension. If slip of the joint can be tolerated, the bolt shear stress should be reduced according to the tension-shear interaction as outlined in the Guide. page 71. Because the bolts are subject to applied axial tension, they are required to be pretensioned in either case. 21. Ibid., pp. 217–30.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 415
B A
M
C V (a)
T
(b)
Fig. C4
While connections with bolts pretensioned to the levels specified in Table 4 do not ordinarily slip into bearing when subject to anticipated loads, it is required that they meet the requirements of Section 5 in order to maintain the factor of safety of 2 against fracture in the event that the bolts do slip into bearing as a result of large unforeseen loads. To cover those cases where a coefficient of friction less than 0.33 might be adequate for a given situation, the Specification provides that, subject to the approval of the Engineer of Record, and provided the mean slip coefficient is determined by the specified test procedure and the appropriate slip probability factor, D, is selected from the literature, faying surface coatings providing lower slip resistance than Class A coating may be used. It should be noted that both Class A and Class B coatings are required to be applied to blast-cleaned steel. High-Strength Bolts in Combination with Welds or Rivets. For high-strength bolts in combination with welds in statically loaded conditions and considering new work only, the nominal strength may be taken as the sum of the two contributions. If one type of connector is already loaded when the second type of connector is introduced, the nominal strength cannot be obtained by sum of the two resistances. The Guide should be consulted in these cases. For high-strength bolts in combination with welds in fatigue loaded applications, available data are not sufficient to develop general design recommendations at this time. High-strength bolts in combination with rivets are rarely encountered in modern practice. If need arises, guidance may be found in the Guide. C7 Design Details of Bolted Connections A new section has been added with this edition of the Specification in order to bring together a number of requirements for proper design and detailing of high-strength bolted connections. The material covered in the Specification, and in Section 7 in particular, is not intended to provide comprehensive coverage of the design of highstrength bolted connections. For example, other design considerations of importance AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 416
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
to the satisfactory performance of the connected material such as block shear, shear lag, prying action, connection stiffness, effect on the performance of the structure and others are beyond the scope of this Specification and Commentary. Proper location of hardened washers is as important as other elements of a detail to the performance of the fasteners. Drawings and details should clearly reflect the number and disposition of washers, especially the thick hardened washers that are required for several slotted hole applications. Location of washers is a design consideration that should not be left to the experience of the iron worker. While hardened washers are not required with some methods of installation, their use will overcome the effects of galling under the element turned in tightening. Finger shims are a necessary device or tool of the trade to permit adjusting alignment and plumbing of structures. When these devices are fully and properly inserted, they do not have the same effect on bolt tension relaxation or the connection performance as do long slotted holes in an outer ply. When fully inserted, the shim provides support around approximately 75 percent of the perimeter of the bolt in contrast to the greatly reduced area that exists with a bolt centered in a long slot. Further, finger shims would always be enclosed on both sides by the connected material which would be fully effective in bridging the space between the fingers. C8 Installation and Tightening Several methods for installation and tensioning of high-strength bolts, when tensioning is required, are provided without preference in the Specification. Each method recognized in Section 8, when properly used as specified, may be relied upon to provide satisfactory results. All methods may be misused or abused. At the expense of redundancy, the provisions stipulating the manner in which each method is intended to be used are set forth in complete detail in order that the rules for each method may stand alone without need for footnotes or reference to other sections. If the methods are conscientiously implemented, good results should be routinely achieved. Connections Not Requiring Full Tensioning. In the Commentary, Section C6 of the previous edition of the Specification, it was pointed out that “bearing” type connections need not be tested to ensure that the specified pretension in the bolts had been provided, but specific provision permitting relaxation of the tensioning requirement was not contained in the body of the Specification. In the present edition of the Specification, separate installation procedures are provided for bolts that are not within the slip-critical or direct tension category. The intent in making this change is to improve the quality of bolted steel construction and reduce the frequency of costly controversies by focusing attention, both during the installation and tensioning phase and during inspection, on the true slip-critical connections, rather than diluting the effort through the requirement for costly tensioning and tension testing of the great many connections where such effort serves no useful purpose. The requirement for identification of connections on the drawings may be satisfied either by identifying the slip-critical and direct tension connections which must be fully tightened and inspected or by identifying the connections which need be tightened only to the snug tight condition. Under the provisions of some other specifications, certain shear/bearing connections are required to be tightened well beyond the snug tight conditions;22 how22. For example, American Institute of Steel Construction, “Specification for Design Fabrication and
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 417
ever, because the joints are in bearing, prevention of slip of the joint is not a concern in these connections. Because they are not slip-critical joints, they should not be subject to the same requirements as slip-critical joints, especially the requirements for faying surface coatings and conditions. To ensure proper tightness of the connections, they should be tightened by one of the four methods in 8(d); however, inspection should be limited to monitoring the work to confirm that the bolt tightening procedure is properly applied. Inspection should not include testing to ensure that any specific level of tension has been achieved. In the Specification, snug tight is defined as the tightness that exists when all plies are in firm contact. This may usually be attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. In actuality, snug tight is a degree of tightness which will vary from joint to joint depending upon the thickness, flatness and degree of parallelism of the connected material. In most joints, the plies will pull together at snug tight; however, in some joints in thick material, it may not be possible to have continuous contact throughout the faying surface area. In such joints, the slip resistance of the completed joints will not be reduced because compressive forces between the faying surfaces, however distributed, must be in equilibrium with the total of the tensile forces in all bolts. Tension Calibrating Devices. At the present time, there is no known economical means for determining the tension in a bolt that has previously been installed in a connection. The actual tension in a bolt installed in a tension calibrator (hydraulic tension indicating device) is directly indicated by the dial of the device, provided the device is properly calibrated. Such a device is an economical and valuable tool that should be readily available whenever high-strength bolts are to be installed in either slip-critical or shear/bearing connections. The testing of as-received bolts and nuts at the job site is a requirement of the Specification because instances of counterfeit under strength fasteners not meeting the requirements of the ASTM Specification have not infrequently occurred. Job site testing provides a practical means for ensuring that nonconforming fasteners are not incorporated in the work. Further, although the several elements of a fastener assembly may conform to the minimum requirements of their separate ASTM Specifications, their compatibility in an assembly or the need for lubrication can only be ensured by testing of the assembly. Hence, such devices are important for testing the complete fastener assembly as it will be used with the method of tightening to be used to ensure the suitability of bolts and nuts (probably produced by different manufacturers), other elements, and the adequacy of impact wrenches and/or air pressure to provide the specified tension using the selected method. Testing before start of installation of fasteners in the work will also identify potential sources of problems, such as the need for lubrication to prevent failure of bolts by combined high torque with tension, under-strength assemblies due to excessive overtapping of hot-dip galvanized nuts, and to clarify for the bolting crews and inspectors the proper implementation of the selected installation method to be used. Such devices are essential to the confirmation testing of alternative design fasteners, direct tension indicators, and to verify the proper use of the turn-of-nut procedure. They are also essential to the specified procedure for the calibrated wrench method of installation, and for the specified procedure for determining a valid testing torque when such inspection by a torque method is required. Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,” Section 1.15.12, stipulates several cases where high-strength bolts in bearing connections are to be fully tensioned independent of whether potential slip is a concern or not.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 418
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
They are the only known economically available tool for field use for determining realistic torque to tension relationships for given fastener assemblies. Experience on many projects has shown that bolts and/or nuts not meeting the requirements of the applicable ASTM specification would have been identified prior to installation if they had been tested as an assembly in a tension calibrator. The controversy and great expense of replacing bolts installed in the structure when the nonconforming bolts were discovered at a later date would have been avoided. Hydraulic tension calibrating devices capable of indicating bolt tension undergo a slight deformation under load. Hence, the nut rotation corresponding to a given tension reading may be somewhat larger than it would be if the same bolt were tightened against a solid steel abutment. Stated differently, the reading of the calibrating device tends to underestimate the tension which a given rotation of the turned element would induce in a bolt in an actual joint. This should be borne in mind when using such devices to establish a tension-rotation relationship. Slip-critical Connections and Connections Subject to Direct Tension. Four methods for joint assembly and tightening are provided for slip-critical and direct tension connections. It has repeatedly been demonstrated in the laboratory that each of the four installation methods provides the specified pretension when used properly with specified fasteners in good condition, but improperly applied methods or understrength fasteners or fasteners in poor condition provide uncertain pretensions. Therefore, regardless of the method used and prior to the commencement of work, it is required to be demonstrated by installation of a representative sample of the fastener assemblies in the tension calibrator that the specified pretension can be achieved using the procedure to be used with the fasteners to be used by the crews who will be doing the work. With any of the four described tensioning methods, it is important to install bolts in all holes of the connection and bring them to an intermediate level of tension generally corresponding to snug tight in order to compact the joint. Even after being fully tightened, some thick parts with uneven surfaces may not be in contact over the entire faying surface. In itself, this is not detrimental to the performance of the joint. As long as the specified bolt tension is present in all bolts of the completed connection, the clamping force equal to the total of the tensions in all bolts will be transferred at the locations that are in contact and be fully effective in resisting slip through friction. If however, individual bolts are installed and tightened in a single continuous operation, bolts which are tightened first will be subsequently relaxed by the tightening of the adjacent bolts. The total of the forces in all bolts will be reduced, which will reduce the slip load whether there is uninterrupted contact between the surfaces or not. With all methods, tightening should begin at the most rigidly fixed or stiffest point and progress toward the free edges, both in the initial snugging up and in the final tightening. Turn-of-Nut-Tightening. When properly implemented, turn-of-nut method provides more uniform tension in the bolts than does torque controlled tensioning methods because it is primarily dependent upon bolt elongation into the inelastic range. Consistency and reliability method is dependent upon ensuring that the joint is well compacted and all bolts are uniformly tight at a snug tight condition prior to application of the final required partial turn. Under-tightened bolts will result if this starting condition is not achieved because subsequent turning of the nut will first close the gap before meaningful elongation of the bolt occurs as would be the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 419
case with solid steel in the grip. Reliability is also dependent upon ensuring that the turn that is applied is relative between the bolt and nut; thus the element not turned in tightening should be prevented from rotating while the required degree of turn is applied to the turned element. Reliability and inspectability of the method may be improved by having the outer face of the nut match-marked to the protruding end of the bolt after the joint has been snug tightened but prior to final tightening. Such marks may be applied by the wrench operator using a crayon or dab of paint. Such marks in their relatively displaced position after tightening will afford the inspector a means for noting the rotation that was applied. Problems with turn-of-nut tightening have been encountered with hot-dip galvanized bolts. In some cases, the problems have been attributed to especially effective lubricant applied by the manufacturer to ensure that bolts from stock will meet the ASTM Specification requirements without the need for relubricating and retesting. Job site tests in the tension indicating device demonstrated the lubricant reduced the coefficient of friction between the bolt and nut to the degree that “the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench” to snug tighten the joint actually induced the full required tension. Also, because the nuts could be removed by an ordinary spud wrench they were erroneously judged improperly tightened by the inspector. Research (see note 3) confirms that lubricated high-strength bolts may require only one-half as much torque to induce the specified tension. In other cases of problems with hot-dip galvanized bolts, the absence of lubrication or lack of proper overtapping caused seizing of the nut and bolt threads which resulted in twist failure of the bolt at less than specified tension. For such situations, use of a tension indicating device and the fasteners being installed may be helpful in establishing either the need for lubrication or alternate criteria for snug tight at about one-half the tension required by Table 4. Because reliability of the method is independent of the presence or absence of washers, washers are not required except for oversize and slotted holes in an outer ply. In the absence of washers, testing after the fact using a torque wrench method is highly unreliable. That is, the turn-of-nut method of installation, properly applied, is more reliable and consistent than the testing method. The best method for inspection of the method is for the Inspector to observe the required job site confirmation testing of the fasteners and the method to be used, followed by monitoring of the work in progress to ensure that the method is routinely properly applied. Calibrated Wrench Method. Research has demonstrated that scatter in induced tension is to be expected when torque is used as an indirect indicator of tension. Numerous variables, which are not related to tension, affect torque. For example, the finish and tolerance on bolt threads, the finish and tolerance on the nut threads, the fact that the bolt and nut may not be produced by the same manufacturer, the degree of lubrication, the job site conditions contributing to dust and dirt or corrosion on the threads, the friction that exists to varying degree between the turned element and the supporting surface, the variability of the air pressure on the torque wrenches due to length of air lines or number of wrenches operating from the same source, the condition and lubrication of the wrench which may change within a work shift, and other factors all bear upon the effectiveness of the calibrated torque wrench to induce tension. Recognition of the calibrated wrench method of tightening was removed from the Specification with the 1980 edition. This action was taken because it is the least AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 420
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
reliable of all methods of installation and many costly controversies had occured. It is suspected that shortcut procedures in the use of the calibrated wrench method of installation, not in accordance with the Specification provisions, were probably being used. Further, torque controlled inspection procedures based upon “standard” or calculated inspection torques rather than torques determined as required by the Specification were being routinely used. These incorrect procedures plus others had a compounding effect upon the uncertainty of the installed bolt tension, and were responsible for many of the controversies. It is recognized, however, that if the calibrated wrench method is implemented without shortcuts as intended by the Specification, that there will be a 90 percent assurance that the tensions specified in Table 4 will be equaled or exceeded. Because the Specification should not prohibit any method which will give acceptable results when used as specified, the calibrated wrench method of installation was reinstated in the 1985 edition of the Council Specification. However, to improve upon the previous situation, the 1985 version of the Specification was modified to require better control. Wrenches must be calibrated daily for each diameter and grade of bolt. Hardened washers must be used. Fasteners must be protected from dirt and moisture at the job site. Additionally, to achieve reliable results attention should be given to the control, insofar as it is practical, of those controllable factors which contribute to variability. For example, bolts and nuts should be purchased from reliable manufacturers with a record of good quality control to minimize the variability of the fit. Bolts and nuts should be adequately and uniformly lubricated. Water soluble lubricants should be avoided. Installation of Alternative Design Fasteners. It is the policy of the Council to recognize only fasteners covered by ASTM Specifications; however, it cannot be denied that a general type of alternative design fastener produced by several manufacturers, is used on a significant number of projects as permitted by Section 2(d). The bolts referred to involve a splined end extending beyond the threaded portion of the bolt which is gripped by a specially designed wrench chuck which provides a means for turning the nut relative to the bolt. While such bolts are subject to many of the variables affecting torque mentioned in the preceding section, they are produced and shipped by the manufacturers as a nut-bolt assembly under good quality control, which apparently minimizes some of the negative aspects of the torque controlled process. While these alternative design fasteners have been demonstrated to consistently provide tension in the fastener meeting the requirements of Table 5 in controlled tests in tension indicating devices, it must be recognized that the fastener may be misused and provide results as unreliable as those with other methods. They must be used in the as-delivered clean lubricated condition. The requirements of this Specification and the installation requirements of the manufacturer’s specification required by Section 2(d) must be adhered to. As with other methods, a representative sample of the bolts to be used should be tested to ensure that, when used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, they do, in fact, provide tension, as specified in Table 5. In the actual joints, bolts must be installed in all holes of a connection and all fasteners tightened to an intermediate level of tension adequate to pull all material into contact. Only after this has been accomplished should the fasteners be fully tensioned in a systematic manner and the splined end sheared off. The sheared off splined end merely signifies that at some time the bolt has been subjected to a torque adequate to cause the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS
6 - 421
shearing. If the fasteners are installed and tensioned in a single continuous operation, they will give a misleading indication to the Inspector that the bolts are properly tightened. Therefore, the only way to inspect these fasteners with assurance is to observe the job site testing of the fasteners and installation procedure and then monitor the work while in progress to ensure that the specified procedure is routinely followed. Direct Tension Indicator Tightening. This Specification recognizes load indicating devices covered by the American Society for Testing and Materials’ “Specification for Compressible-Washer Type Direct Tension Indicators For Use With Structural Fasteners,” ASTM F959, in Section 2(f). The referenced device is a hardened washer incorporating several small formed arches which are designed to deform in a controlled manner when subjected to load. These load indicator washers are the sole type of device known which is directly dependent upon the tension load in the bolt, rather than upon some indirect parameter, to indicate the tension in a bolt. As with the alternative design load indicating bolts, load indicating washers are dependent upon the quality control of the producer and proper use in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation procedures and these Specifications. If the load indicator washers delivered for use in a specific application are tested at the job site to demonstrate that all components of the assembly do provide a proper indication of bolt tension, they are reliable if they are properly used by the bolting crews. Direct tension indicators meeting the requirements of ASTM F959 depend upon tension in the fastener to cause inelastic deformation of the formed arches. Bolts together with the load indicator washer plus any other washers required by Specification should be installed in all holes of the connection and the bolts tightened to approximately one-half the specified tension (deformation of the formed arches by about one-half the amount required to compress them to the specified gap) to ensure that plies of the joint have been brought into firm contact. Only after this initial tightening operation should the bolts be fully tensioned in a systematic manner. If the bolts are installed and tensioned in a single continuous operation, the load indicator washers will give the inspector a misleading indication that bolts are uniformly tensioned to the specified tension. Therefore, the only way to inspect fasteners with which load indicator washers are used with assurance is to observe the job site testing of the devices and installation procedure and then routinely monitor the work while in progress to ensure that the specified procedure is followed. Use of direct tension indicators provides a reliable means for tensioning galvanized fasteners because it avoids the factors which affect other methods. During installation, care must be taken to ensure that the indicator nubs are oriented to bear against the hardened bearing surface of the bolt head or against a hardened flat washer if used under the nut. C9 Inspection It is apparent from the commentary on installation procedures that the inspection procedures giving the best assurance that bolts are properly installed and tensioned is provided by Inspector observation of the calibration testing of the fasteners using the selected installation procedure followed by monitoring of the work in progress to ensure that the procedure that was demonstrated to provide the specified tension is routinely adhered to. When such a program is followed, no further evidence of proper bolt tension is required. If testing for bolt tension using torque wrenches is conducted subsequent to the time the work of installation and tightening of bolts performed, the test procedure AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 422
COMMENTARY ON THE RCSC SPECIFICATION (6/8/88)
is subject to all of the uncertainties of torque controlled calibrated wrench installation. Additionally, the absence of many of the controls necessary to minimize variability of the torque to tension relationship, which are unnecessary for the other methods of bolt installation, such as use of hardened washers, careful attention to lubrication and the uncertainty of the effect of passage of time and exposure in the installed condition all reduce the reliability of the arbitration inspection results. The fact that in many cases it may have to be based upon a job test torque determined by using bolts only assumed to be representative of the bolts in the actual job, or using bolts removed from completed joints, makes the test procedure less reliable than a properly implemented installation procedure it is used to verify. Verification inspection using ultrasonic extensometers is accurate but costly and time-consuming, and requires that each tested bolt must be loosened to zero tension for calibration. Therefore, extensometers should be used for inspection only in the most critical cases. The arbitration inspection procedure contained in the Specification is provided, in spite of its limitations, as the most feasible available at this time.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 423
Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
Adopted Effective June 10, 1992 American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100, Chicago, IL 60601-2001 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 424
Copyright 1992 by The American Institute of Steel Construction All rights reserved. This book or any part thereof must not be reproduced in any form without the written permission of the publisher
PREFACE
When contractual documents do not contain specific provisions to the contrary, existing trade practices are considered to be incorporated into the relationships between the parties to a contract. As in any industry, trade practices have developed among those involved in the purchase, design, fabrication and erection of structural steel. The American Institute of Steel Construction has continuously surveyed the structural steel fabrication industry to determine standard practices and, commencing in 1924, published its Code of Standard Practice. Since that date, the Code has been periodically updated to reflect new and changing technology and practices of the industry. It is the Institute’s intention to provide to owners, architects, engineers, contractors and others associated with construction, a useful framework for a common understanding of acceptable standards when contracting for structural steel construction. This edition is the fourth complete revision of the Code since it was first published. It includes a number of new sections covering new subjects not included in the previous Code, but which are an integral part of the relationship of the parties to a contract. The Institute acknowledges the valuable information and suggestions provided by trade associations and other organizations associated with construction and the fabricating industry in developing this current Code of Standard Practice. While every precaution has been taken to insure that all data and information presented is as accurate as possible, the Institute cannot assume responsibility for errors or oversights in the information published herein, or the use of the information published or incorporation of such information in the preparation of detailed engineering plans. The Code should not replace the judgment of an experienced architect or engineer who has the responsibility of design for a specific structure.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 425
Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges Adopted Effective June 10, 1992 American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1. Scope The practices defined herein have been adopted by the AISC as the commonly accepted standards of the structural steel fabricating industry. In the absence of other instructions in the contract documents, the trade practices defined in this Code of Standard Practice, as revised to date, govern the fabrication and erection of structural steel. 1.2. Definitions AISC Specification—The Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings as adopted by the American Institute of Steel Construction. ANSI—American National Standards Institute. Architect/Engineer—The owner’s designated representative with full responsibility for the design and integrity of the structure. (The EOR) ASTM—The material standard of the American Society for Testing and Materials. AWS Code—The Structural Welding Code of the American Welding Society. Code—The Code of Standard Practice as adopted by the American Institute of Steel Construction. Contract Documents—The documents which define the responsibilities of the parties involved in bidding, purchasing, supplying and erecting structural steel. Such documents normally consist of a contract, plans and specifications. Drawings—Shop and field erection drawings prepared by the fabricator and erector for the performance of the work. Erector—The party responsible for the erection of the structural steel. Fabricator—The party responsible for furnishing fabricated structural steel. General Contractor—The owner’s designated representative with full responsibility for the construction of the structure. MBMA—Metal Building Manufacturers Association.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 426
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
Mill Material—Steel mill products ordered expressly for the requirements of a specific project. Owner—The owner of the proposed structure or his designated representatives, who may be the architect, engineer, general contractor, construction manager, public authority or others. Owner’s Authorized Representative—That person designated by the owner to have the responsibility for the approval of shop drawings. This is usually the structural engineer of record for the project. Plans—Design drawings furnished by the party responsible for the design of the structure. Release for Construction—The release by the owner permitting the fabricator to commence work under the contract, including ordering material and preparing shop drawings. SSPC—The Steel Structures Painting Council, publishers of the Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2, “Systems and Specifications.” Tier—The word Tier used in Section 7.11 is defined as a column shipping piece. 1.3. Design Criteria for Buildings and Similar Type Structures In the absence of other instructions, the provisions of the AISC Specification govern the design of the structural steel. 1.4. Design for Bridges In the absence of other instructions, the following provisions govern, as applicable: Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges of the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials Specifications for Steel Railway Bridges of the American Railway Engineering Association Structural Welding Code of the American Welding Society 1.5. Responsibility for Design 1.5.1. When the owner provides the design, plans and specifications, the fabricator and erector are not responsible for the suitability, adequacy or legality of the design. The fabricator is not responsible for the safety of erection if the structure is erected by others. 1.5.2. When the owner enters into a direct contract with the fabricator to both design and fabricate an entire, completed steel structure, the fabricator is responsible for the structural adequacy of the design. The fabricator is not responsible for the safety of erection if the structure is erected by others.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 427
1.6. Patented Devices Except when the contract documents call for the design to be furnished by the fabricator or erector, the fabricator and erector assume that all necessary patent rights have been obtained by the owner and that the fabricator or erector will be fully protected in the use of patented designs, devices or parts required by the contract documents.
SECTION 2.0. CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS 2.1. Definition of Structural Steel “Structural Steel,” as used to define the scope of work in the contract documents, consists of the steel elements of the structural steel frame essential to support the design loads. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, these elements consist of material as shown on the structural steel plans and described as: Anchor bolts for structural steel Base or bearing plates Beams, girders, purlins and girts Bearings of steel for girders, trusses or bridges Bracing Columns, posts Connecting materials for framing structural steel to structural steel Crane rails, splices, stops, bolts and clamps Door frames constituting part of the structural steel frame Expansion joints connected to the structural steel frame Fasteners for connecting structural steel items: Shop rivets Permanent shop bolts Shop bolts for shipment Field rivets for permanent connections Field bolts for permanent connections Permanent pins Floor plates (checkered or plain) attached to the structural steel frame Grillage beams and girders Hangers essential to the structural steel frame Leveling plates, wedges, shims & leveling screws Lintels, if attached to the structural steel frame Marquee or canopy framing Machinery foundations of rolled steel sections and/or plate attached to the structural frame AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 428
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
Monorail elements of standard structural shapes when attached to the structural frame Roof frames of standard structural shapes Shear connectors—if specified to be shop attached Struts, tie rods and sag rods forming part of the structural steel frame Trusses. 2.2. Other Steel or Metal Items The classification “Structural Steel,” does not include steel, iron or other metal items not generally described in Section 2.1, even when such items are shown on the structural steel plans or are attached to the structural frame. These items include but are not limited to: Cables for permanent bracing or suspension systems Chutes and hoppers Cold-formed steel products Concrete or masonry reinforcing steel Door and corner guards Embedded steel parts in precast or poured concrete Flagpole support steel Floor plates (checkered or plain) not attached to the structural steel frame Grating and metal deck Items required for the assembly or erection of materials supplied by trades other than structural steel fabricators or erectors Ladders and safety cages Lintels over wall recesses Miscellaneous metal Non-steel bearings Open-web, long-span joists and joist girders Ornamental metal framing Shear connectors — if specified to be field installed Stacks, tanks and pressure vessels Stairs, catwalks, handrail and toeplates Trench or pit covers.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 429
SECTION 3. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.1. Structural Steel In order to insure adequate and complete bids, and to enable the timely preparation of shop drawings and timely fabrication, the fabricator must be able to rely upon the completeness of the contract documents. The contract documents can be assumed to provide complete structural steel design plans clearly showing the work to be performed and giving the size, section, material grade and the location of all members, floor levels, column centers and offsets, and camber of members, with sufficient dimensions to convey accurately the quantity and nature of the structural steel to be furnished. Structural steel specifications include any special requirements controlling the fabrication and erection of the structural steel. Contract drawings, specifications and addenda must be numbered and dated for purposes of identification. 3.1.1. Wind bracing, connections, column stiffeners, column web doubler plates, bearing stiffeners on beams and girders, web reinforcement, openings for other trades, and other special details where required are shown in sufficient detail so that they may be readily understood. 3.1.2. Plans include sufficient data concerning assumed loads, shears, moments and axial forces to be resisted by the individual members and their connections, as may be required for the development of connection details on the shop drawings. Unless otherwise indicated in the contract documents, the plans are based upon consideration of the loads and forces to be resisted by the steel frame in the completed and fully connected condition. See Section 7.9. 3.1.3. Where connections are not shown, the connections are to be in accordance with the requirements of the AISC Specification. 3.1.4. When loose lintels and leveling plates are required to be furnished as part of the contract requirements, the plans and specifications show the size, section and location of all pieces. 3.1.5. Whenever steel frames, in the completely erected and fully connected state, require interaction with other elements not classified as structural steel (see Section 2) to provide stability and strength to resist loads for which the frame is designed, the non-self-supporting frame and the major elements not classified as structural steel, such as diaphragms, masonry and/or concrete shear walls, shall be identified in the contract documents. See Section 7.9.3. 3.1.6. When camber is required for cantilevered members, the magnitude and direction of camber are shown.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 430
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
3.1.7. The contract documents specify all the painting requirements, including the identification of members to be painted, surface preparation, paint specifications, manufacturer’s product identification and the required minimum and maximum dry film thickness, in mils, of the shop coat. Contract documents must clearly indicate all individual members which are to be left unpainted so as to receive concrete, sprayed on fireproofing or for other reasons. 3.2. Architectural, Electrical and Mechanical Architectural, electrical and mechanical plans may be used as a supplement to the structural steel plans to define detail configurations and construction information, provided all requirements for the quantities and locations of structural steel are noted on the structural steel plans. 3.3. Discrepancies In case of discrepancies between plans and specifications for buildings, the specifications govern. In case of discrepancies between plans and specifications for bridges, the plans govern. In case of discrepancies between scale dimensions on the plans and figures written on them, the figures govern. In case of discrepancies between the structural steel plans and the architectural plans or plans for other trades, the structural steel plans govern. 3.4. Legibility of Plans Plans are clearly legible and made to a scale not less than 1⁄8 in. to the foot. More complex information is furnished to an adequate scale to convey the information clearly. 3.5. Special Conditions When it is required that a project be advertised for bidding before the requirements of Section 3.1 can be met, the owner must provide sufficient information in the form of scope, drawings, weights, outline specifications, and other descriptive data to enable the fabricator and erector to prepare a knowledgeable bid.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 431
SECTION 4. SHOP AND ERECTION DRAWINGS 4.1. Owner Responsibility To enable the fabricator and erector to properly and expeditiously proceed with the work, the owner must furnish, in a timely manner and in accordance with the contract documents, complete structural steel plans and specifications released for construction. “Released for construction” plans and specifications are required by the fabricator for ordering mill material and the preparation and completion of shop and erection drawings. Plans provided as part of a contract bid package are considered to be “released for construction” unless otherwise noted. 4.2. Approval When shop drawings are made by the fabricator, prints thereof are submitted to the owner for his examination and approval. The fabricator includes a maximum allowance of fourteen (14) calendar days in his schedule for the return of shop drawings. Return of shop drawings is noted with the owner’s approval, or approval subject to corrections as noted. The fabricator makes the corrections and furnishes corrected prints to the owner. Approval of shop drawings, approval “subject to corrections noted,” or similar approvals, constitute the owner’s release for the fabricator to begin fabrication. The fabricator retains flexibility to determine the fabrication schedule necessary to meet the project’s requirements. 4.2.1. Approval by the owner’s authorized representative of shop drawings prepared by the fabricator indicates that the fabricator has correctly interpreted the contract requirements, and may rely upon these drawings in the fabrication process. Where the fabricator must select or complete connection details, this approval constitutes acceptance by the owner’s authorized representative of design responsibility for the structural adequacy of such connections. If a fabricator wishes to change a connection that is fully detailed in the contract documents, the fabricator shall submit the change for review by the owner’s authorized representative in a manner that clearly indicates that a change is being requested. Approval of this submittal constitutes acceptance by the owner’s authorized representative of design responsibility for the structural adequacy of the changed detail. Approval under any of the circumstances described in this Section does not relieve the fabricator of the responsibility for accuracy of detailed dimensions on shop drawings, nor the general fit-up of parts to be assembled in the field. 4.2.2. Unless specifically stated to the contrary, any additions, deletions or changes indicated on the approval of shop and erection drawings are authorizations by the owner to release the additions, deletions or revisions for construction.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 432
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
4.3. Drawings Furnished by Owner When the shop drawings are furnished by the owner, he must deliver them to the fabricator in time to permit material procurement and fabrication to proceed in an orderly manner in accordance with the prescribed time schedule. The owner prepares these shop drawings, insofar as practicable, in accordance with the shop and drafting room standards of the fabricator. The owner is responsible for the completeness and accuracy of shop drawings so furnished.
SECTION 5. MATERIALS 5.1. Mill Materials When the fabricator receives “released for construction” plans and specifications, the fabricator may immediately place orders for the materials necessary for fabrication. The contract documents must note any material or areas which should not be ordered due to a design which is incomplete or subject to revision. 5.1.1. Mill tests are performed to demonstrate material conformance to ASTM specifications in accordance with the contract requirements. Unless special requirements are included in the contract documents, mill testing is limited to those tests required by the applicable ASTM material specifications. Mill test reports are furnished by the fabricator only if requested by the owner, either in the contract documents or in separate written instructions prior to the time the fabricator places his material orders with the mill. 5.1.2. When material received from the mill does not satisfy ASTM A6 tolerances for camber, profile, flatness or sweep, the fabricator is permitted to perform corrective work by the use of controlled heating and mechanical straightening, subject to the limitations of the AISC Specification. 5.1.3. Corrective procedures described in ASTM A6 for reconditioning the surface of structural steel plates and shapes before shipment from the producing mill may also be performed by the fabricator, at the fabricator’s option, when variations described in ASTM A6 are discovered or occur after receipt of the steel from the producing mill. 5.1.4. When special requirements demand tolerances more restrictive than allowed by ASTM A6, such requirements are defined in the contract documents and the fabricator has the option of corrective measures as described above.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 433
5.2. Stock Materials 5.2.1. Many fabricators maintain stocks of steel products for use in their fabricating operations. Materials taken from stock by the fabricator to be used for structural purposes must be of a quality at least equal to that required by the ASTM specifications applicable to the classification covering the intended use. 5.2.2. Mill test reports are accepted as sufficient record of the quality of materials carried in stock by the fabricator. The fabricator reviews and retains the mill test reports covering the materials he purchases for stock, but the fabricator does not maintain records that identify individual pieces of stock material against individual mill test reports. Such records are not required if the fabricator purchases for stock under established specifications as to grade and quality. 5.2.3. Stock materials purchased under no particular specifications or under specifications less rigid than those mentioned above, or stock materials which have not been subject to mill or other recognized test reports, are not used without the express approval of the owner, except where the quality of the material could not affect the integrity of the structure.
SECTION 6. FABRICATION AND DELIVERY 6.1. Identification of Material 6.1.1. High strength steel and steel ordered to special requirements is marked by the supplier, in accordance with ASTM A6 requirements, prior to delivery to the fabricator’s shop or other point of use. 6.1.2. High strength steel and steel ordered to special requirements that has not been marked by the supplier in accordance with Section 6.1.1 is not used until its identification is established by means of tests as specified in Section A3.1 of the AISC Specification, and until a fabricator’s identification mark, as described in Section 6.1.3, has been applied. 6.1.3. During fabrication, up to the point of assembling members, each piece of high strength steel and steel ordered to special requirements carries a fabricator’s identification mark or an original supplier’s identification mark. The fabricator’s identification mark is in accordance with the fabricator’s established identification system, which is on record and available for the information of the owner or his representative, the building commissioner and the inspector, prior to the start of fabrication.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 434
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
6.1.4. Members made of high strength steel and steel ordered to special requirements are not given the same assembling or erecting mark as members made of other steel, even though they are of identical dimensions and detail. 6.2. Preparation of Material 6.2.1. Thermal cutting of structural steel may be performed by hand or mechanically guided means. 6.2.2. Surfaces noted as “finished” on the drawings are defined as having a maximum ANSI roughness height value of 500. Any fabricating technique, such as friction sawing, cold sawing, milling, etc., that produces such a finish may be used. 6.3. Fitting and Fastening 6.3.1. Projecting elements of connection attachments need not be straightened in the connecting plane if it can be demonstrated that installation of the connectors or fitting aids will provide reasonable contact between faying surfaces. 6.3.2. Runoff tabs are often required to produce sound welds. The fabricator or erector does not remove them unless specified in the contract documents. When their removal is required, they may be hand flame-cut close to the edge of the finished member with no further finishing required, unless other finishing is specifically called for in the contract documents. 6.3.3. All high-strength bolts for shop attached connection material are to be installed in the shop in accordance with the Specification for Structural Joints Using A325 or A490 Bolts, unless otherwise noted on the shop drawings. 6.4. Dimensional Tolerances 6.4.1. A variation of 1⁄32 in. is permissible in the overall length of members with both ends finished for contact bearing as defined in Section 6.2.2. 6.4.2. Members without ends finished for contact bearing, which are to be framed to other steel parts of the structure, may have a variation from the detailed length not greater than 1⁄16 in. for members 30 ft or less in length, and not greater than 1⁄8 in. for members over 30 ft in length. 6.4.3. Unless otherwise specified, structural members, whether of a single-rolled shape or built-up, may vary from straightness within the tolerances allowed for wideflange shapes by ASTM Specification A6, except that the tolerance on deviation from
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 435
straightness of compression members is 1⁄1000 of the axial length between points which are to be laterally supported. Completed members should be free from twists, bends and open joints. Sharp kinks or bends are cause for rejection of material. 6.4.4. Beams and trusses detailed without specified camber are fabricated so that after erection any camber due to rolling or shop fabrication is upward. 6.4.5. When members are specified on the contract documents as requiring camber, the shop fabrication tolerance shall be minus zero / plus 1⁄2 in. for members 50 ft and less in length, or minus zero / plus (1⁄2 in. plus 1⁄8 in. for each 10 ft or fraction thereof in excess of 50 ft in length) for members over 50 ft. Members received from the rolling mill with 75% of the specified camber require no further cambering. For purposes of inspection, camber must be measured in the fabricator’s shop in the unstressed condition. 6.4.6. Any permissible deviation in depths of girders may result in abrupt changes in depth at splices. Any such difference in depth at a bolted joint, within the prescribed tolerances, is taken up by fill plates. At welded joints the weld profile may be adjusted to conform to the variation in depth, provided that the minimum cross section of required weld is furnished and that the slope of the weld surface meets AWS Code requirements. 6.5. Shop Painting (See also Section 3.1.7.) 6.5.1. The shop coat of paint is the prime coat of the protective system. It protects the steel for only a short period of exposure in ordinary atmospheric conditions, and is considered a temporary and provisional coating. The fabricator does not assume responsibility for deterioration of the prime coat that may result from exposure to ordinary atmospheric conditions, nor from exposure to corrosive conditions more severe than ordinary atmospheric conditions. 6.5.2. In the absence of other requirements in the contract documents, the fabricator hand cleans the steel of loose rust, loose mill scale, dirt and other foreign matter, prior to painting, by means of wire brushing or by other methods elected by the fabricator, to meet the requirements of SSPC-SP2. The fabricator’s workmanship on surface preparation is considered accepted by the owner unless specifically disapproved prior to paint application. 6.5.3. Unless specifically excluded, paint is applied by brush, spray, roller coating, flow coating or dipping, at the election of the fabricator. When the term “shop coat” or “shop paint” is used with no paint system specified, the fabricator’s standard paint shall be applied to a minimum dry film thickness of one mil.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 436
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
6.5.4. Steel not requiring shop paint is cleaned of oil or grease by solvent cleaners and cleaned of dirt and other foreign material by sweeping with a fiber brush or other suitable means. 6.5.5. Abrasions caused by handling after painting are to be expected. Touch-up of these blemished areas is the responsibility of the contractor performing field touchup or field painting. 6.6. Marking and Shipping of Materials 6.6.1. Erection marks are applied to the structural steel members by painting or other suitable means, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 6.6.2. Rivets and bolts are commonly shipped in separate containers according to length and diameter; loose nuts and washers are shipped in separate containers according to sizes. Pins and other small parts, and packages of rivets, bolts, nuts and washers are usually shipped in boxes, crates, kegs or barrels. A list and description of the material usually appears on the outside of each closed container. 6.7. Delivery of Materials 6.7.1. Fabricated structural steel is delivered in such sequence as will permit the most efficient and economical performance of both shop fabrication and erection. If the owner wishes to prescribe or control the sequence of delivery of materials, the owner reserves such right and defines the requirements in the contract documents. If the owner contracts separately for delivery and erection, the owner must coordinate planning between contractors. 6.7.2. Anchor bolts, washers and other anchorage or grillage materials to be built into masonry should be shipped so that they will be on hand when needed. The owner must allow the fabricator sufficient time to fabricate and ship such materials before they are needed. 6.7.3. The quantities of material shown by the shipping statement are customarily accepted by the owner, fabricator and erector as correct. If any shortage is claimed, the owner or erector should immediately notify the carrier and the fabricator in order that the claim may be investigated. 6.7.4. The size and weight of structural steel assemblies may be limited by shop capabilities, the permissible weight and clearance dimensions of available transportation and the job site conditions. The fabricator limits the number of field splices to those consistent with minimum project cost.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 437
6.7.5. If material arrives at its destination in damaged condition, it is the responsibility of the receiving party to promptly notify the fabricator and carrier prior to unloading the material, or immediately upon discovery.
SECTION 7. ERECTION 7.1. Method of Erection When the owner wishes to control the method and sequence of erection, or when certain members cannot be erected in their normal sequence, the owner so specifies in the contract documents. In the absence of such restrictions, the erector will proceed using the most efficient and economical method and sequence available to the erector consistent with the contract documents. When the owner contracts separately for fabrication and erection services, the owner is responsible for coordinating planning between contractors. 7.2. Site Conditions The owner provides and maintains adequate access roads into and through the site for the safe delivery and movement of derricks, cranes, trucks, other necessary equipment, and the material to be erected. The owner affords the erector a firm, properly graded, drained, convenient and adequate space at the site for the operation of the erector’s equipment, and removes all overhead obstructions such as power lines, telephone lines, etc., in order to provide a safe working area for erection of the steelwork. The erector provides and installs the safety protection required for his own work. Any protection for other trades not essential to the steel erection activity is the responsibility of the owner. When safety protection provided by the erector is left remaining in an area to be used by other trades after the steel erection activity is completed, the owner shall be responsible for accepting and maintaining this protection, assuring that it is adequate for the protection of all other affected trades, assuring that it complies with all applicable safety regulations when being used by other trades, indemnifying the erector from any damages incurred as a result of the safety protection’s use by other trades, removing the safety equipment when no longer required, and returning it to the erector in the same condition as it was received. When the structure does not occupy the full available site, the owner provides adequate storage space to enable the fabricator and erector to operate at maximum practicable speed. 7.3. Foundations, Piers and Abutments The accurate location, strength, suitability and access to all foundations, piers and abutments is the sole responsibility of the owner.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 438
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
7.4. Building Lines and Bench Marks The owner is responsible for accurate location of building lines and bench marks at the site of the structure, and for furnishing the erector with a plan containing all such information. At each level the owner establishes offset building lines and reference elevations for the use of the erector in the positioning of adjustable construction elements. 7.5. Installation of Anchor Bolts and Embedded Items 7.5.1. Anchor bolts and foundation bolts are set by the owner in accordance with an approved drawing. They must not vary from the dimensions shown on the erection drawings by more than the following: (a)
(b) (c) (d)
(e) (f)
1⁄ 8
in. center to center of any two bolts within an anchor bolt group, where an anchor bolt group is defined as the set of anchor bolts which receive a single fabricated steel shipping piece. 1⁄ in. center to center of adjacent anchor bolt groups. 4 Elevation of the top of anchor bolts ± 1⁄2 in. Maximum accumulation of 1⁄4 in. per hundred ft along the established column line of multiple anchor bolt groups, but not to exceed a total of 1 in., where the established column line is the actual field line most representative of the centers of the as-built anchor bolt groups along a line of columns. 1⁄ in. from the center of any anchor bolt group to the established column 4 line through that group. The tolerances of paragraphs b, c and d apply to offset dimensions shown on the plans, measured parallel and perpendicular to the nearest established column line for individual columns shown on the plans to be offset from established column lines.
7.5.2. Unless shown otherwise, anchor bolts are set perpendicular to the theoretical bearing surface. 7.5.3. Other embedded items or connection materials between the structural steel and the work of other trades are located and set by the owner in accordance with approved location or erection drawings. Accuracy of these items must satisfy the erection tolerance requirements of Section 7.11.3. 7.5.4. All work performed by the owner is completed so as not to delay or interfere with the erection of the structural steel.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 439
7.6. Bearing Devices The owner sets to line and grade all leveling plates, leveling nuts and loose bearing plates which can be handled without a derrick or crane. All other bearing devices supporting structural steel are set and wedged, shimmed or adjusted with leveling screws by the erector to lines and grades established by the owner. The fabricator provides the wedges, shims or leveling screws that are required, and clearly scribes the bearing devices with working lines to facilitate proper alignment. Promptly after the setting of any bearing devices, the owner checks lines and grades, and grouts as required. The final location and proper grouting of bearing devices are the responsibility of the owner. Tolerance on elevation relative to established grades of bearing devices, whether set by the owner or by the erector, is ± 1⁄8 in. 7.7. Field Connection Material 7.7.1. The fabricator provides field connection details consistent with the requirements of the contract documents which will, in the fabricator’s opinion, result in the most economical fabrication and erection cost. 7.7.2. When the fabricator erects the structural steel, the fabricator supplies all materials required for temporary and permanent connection of the component parts of the structural steel. 7.7.3. When the erection of the structural steel is performed by someone other than the fabricator, the fabricator furnishes the following field connection material: (a)
(b)
(c) (d)
Bolts of required size and in sufficient quantity for all field connections of steel to steel which are to be permanently bolted. Unless high-strength bolts or other special types of bolts and washers are specified, common bolts are furnished. An extra 2 percent of each bolt size (diameter and length) is furnished. Rivets of required size and in sufficient quantity for all field connections of steel to steel which are to be riveted field connections. An extra 10 percent of each rivet size is furnished. Shims shown as necessary for make-up of permanent connections of steel to steel. Back-up bars or run-off tabs that may be required for field welding.
7.7.4. When the erection of the structural steel is performed by someone other than the fabricator, the erector furnishes all welding electrodes, fit-up bolts and drift pins used for erection of the structural steel.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 440
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
7.7.5. Field-installed shear connectors are supplied by the shear connector applicator. 7.7.6. Metal deck support angles are the responsibility of the metal deck supplier. 7.8. Loose Material Loose items of structural steel not connected to the structural frame are set by the owner without assistance from the erector, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 7.9. Temporary Support of Structural Steel Frames 7.9.1. General Temporary supports, such as temporary guys, braces, falsework, cribbing or other elements required for the erection operation will be determined and furnished and installed by the erector. These temporary supports will secure the steel framing, or any partly assembled steel framing, against loads comparable in intensity to those for which the structure was designed, resulting from wind, seismic forces and erection operations, but not the loads resulting from the performance of work by or the acts of others, nor such unpredictable loads as those due to tornado, explosion or collision. 7.9.2. Self-supporting Steel Frames A self-supporting steel frame is one that provides the required stability and resistance to gravity loads and design wind and seismic forces without interaction with other elements of the structure. The erector furnishes and installs only those temporary supports that are necessary to secure any element or elements of the steel framing until they are made stable without external support. Special erection sequences or other considerations which are required to provide stability during the erection process must be set out in the contract documents in detail. 7.9.3. Non-Self-supporting Steel Frames A non-self-supporting steel frame is one that, when fully assembled and connected, requires interaction with other elements not classified as Structural Steel to provide stability and strength to resist loads for which the frame is designed. Such frames shall be clearly designated as “non-self-supporting.” The major elements not classified as structural steel, such as steel deck diaphragms, masonry and/or concrete shear walls, shall be identified in the contract documents.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 441
When elements not classified as structural steel interact with the structural steel elements to provide stability and/or strength to resist loads, the owner is responsible for the installation, structural adequacy during installation, and timely completion of all such elements. The contract documents must specify the sequence and schedule of placement of such elements and the effects of the loads imposed on the structural steel frame by partially or completely installed interacting elements. The erector furnishes and installs temporary support as necessary in accordance with this information but does not thereby assume responsibility for the appropriateness of the sequence specified. 7.9.4. Special Erection Conditions When the design concept of a structure is dependent upon the use of shores, jacks or loads which must be adjusted as erection progresses to set or maintain camber or prestress, such requirement is specifically stated in the contract documents. 7.9.5. Removal of Temporary Supports The temporary guys, braces, falsework, cribbing and other elements required for the erection operation, which are furnished and installed by the erector, are not the property of the owner. In self-supporting structures, temporary supports are not required after the structural steel for a self-supporting element is located and finally fastened within the required tolerances. After such final fastening, the erector is no longer responsible for temporary support of the self-supporting element and may remove the temporary supports. In non-self-supporting structures, the erector may remove temporary supports when the necessary non-structural steel elements are complete. Temporary supports are not to be removed without the consent of the erector. At completion of steel erection, any temporary supports that are required to be left in place are removed by the owner and returned to the erector in good condition. 7.9.6. Temporary Supports for Other Work Should temporary supports beyond those defined as the responsibility of the erector in Sections 7.9.1, 7.9.2 and 7.9.3 be required, either during or after the erection of the structural steel, responsibility for the supply and installation of such supports rests with the owner. 7.10. Temporary Floors and Handrails for Buildings The erector provides floor coverings, handrails and walkways as required by law and applicable safety regulations for protection of his own personnel. As work progresses, the erector removes such facilities from units where the erection
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 442
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
operations are completed, unless other arrangements are included in the contract documents. The owner is responsible for all protection necessary for the work of other trades. When permanent steel decking is used for protective flooring and is installed by the owner, all such work is performed so as not to delay or interfere with erection progress and is scheduled by the owner and installed in a sequence adequate to meet all safety regulations. (See Section 7.2) 7.11. Frame Tolerances 7.11 7.11.1. Overall Dimensions Some variation is to be expected in the finished overall dimensions of structural steel frames. Such variations are deemed to be within the limits of good practice when they do not exceed the cumulative effect of rolling tolerances, fabricating tolerances and erection tolerances. 7.11.2. Working Points and Working Lines Erection tolerances are defined relative to member working points and working lines as follows: (a) (b) (c) (d)
For members other than horizontal members, the member work point is the actual center of the member at each end of the shipping piece. For horizontal members, the working point is the actual center line of the top flange or top surface at each end. Other working points may be substituted for ease of reference, providing they are based upon these definitions. The member working line is a straight line connecting the member working points.
7.11.3. Position and Alignment The tolerances on position and alignment of member working points and working lines are as follows: 7.11.3.1. Columns Individual column shipping pieces are considered plumb if the deviation of the working line from a plumb line does not exceed 1:500, subject to the following limitations:
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
6 - 443
The member working points of column shipping pieces adjacent to elevator shafts may be displaced no more than 1 in. from the established column line in the first 20 stories; above this level, the displacement may be increased 1⁄32 in. for each additional story up to a maximum of 2 in. The member working points of exterior column shipping pieces may be displaced from the established column line no more than 1 in. toward nor 2 in. away from the building line in the first 20 stories; above the 20th story, the displacement may be increased 1⁄16 in. for each additional story, but may not exceed a total displacement of 2 in. toward nor 3 in. away from the building line. The member working points of exterior column shipping pieces at any splice level for multi-tier buildings and at the tops of columns for single tier buildings may not fall outside a horizontal envelope, parallel to the building line, 11⁄2 in. wide for buildings up to 300 ft in length. The width of the envelope may be increased by 1⁄2 in. for each additional 100 ft in length, but may not exceed 3 in. The member working points of exterior column shipping pieces may be displaced from the established column line, in a direction parallel to the building line, no more than 2 in. in the first 20 stories; above the 20th story, the displacement may be increased 1⁄16 in. for each additional story, but may not exceed a total displacement of 3 in. parallel to the building line.
7.11.3.2. Members Other Than Columns (a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Alignment of members which consist of a single straight shipping piece containing no field splices, except cantilevered members, is considered acceptable if the variation in alignment is caused solely by the variation of column alignment and/or primary supporting member alignment within the permissible limits for fabrication and erection of such members. The elevation of members connecting to columns is considered acceptable if the distance from the member working point to the upper milled splice line of the column does not deviate more than plus 3⁄16 in. or minus 5⁄16 in. from the distance specified on the drawings. The elevation of members which consist of a single shipping piece, other than members connected to columns, is considered acceptable if the variation in actual elevation is caused solely by the variation in elevation of the supporting members which are within permissible limits for fabrication and erection of such members. Individual shipping pieces which are segments of field assembled units containing field splices between points of support are considered plumb, level and aligned if the angular variation of the working line of each shipping piece relative to the plan alignment does not exceed 1:500.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 444
(e)
(f)
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
The elevation and alignment of cantilevered members shall be considered plumb, level and aligned if the angular variation of the working line from a straight line extended in the plan direction from the working point at its supported end does not exceed 1:500. The elevation and alignment of members which are of irregular shape shall be considered plumb, level and aligned if the fabricated member is within its tolerance and its supporting member or members are within the tolerances specified in this Code.
7.11.3.3. Adjustable Items The alignment of lintels, wall supports, curb angles, mullions and similar supporting members for the use of other trades, requiring limits closer than the foregoing tolerances, cannot be assured unless the owner’s plans call for adjustable connections of these members to the supporting structural frame. The fabricator may provide nonadjustable connections unless the contract documents specifically show or specify them as adjustable. When adjustable connections are specified, the owner’s plans must provide for the total adjustment required to accommodate the tolerances on the steel frame for the proper alignment of these supports for other trades. The tolerances on position and alignment of such adjustable items are as follows: (a)
(b)
(c)
Adjustable items are considered to be properly located in their vertical position when their location is within 3⁄8 in. of the location established from the upper milled splice line of the nearest column to the support location as specified on the drawings. Adjustable items are considered to be properly located in their horizontal position when their location is within 3⁄8 in. of the proper location relative to the established finish line at any particular floor. The ends of adjustable items which abut are considered to be properly located when aligned to within 3⁄16 in. of each other both vertically and horizontally.
7.11.4. Responsibility for Clearances In the design of steel structures, the owner is responsible for providing clearances and adjustments of material furnished by other trades to accommodate all of the foregoing tolerances of the structural steel frame. 7.11.5. Acceptance of Position and Alignment Prior to placing or applying any other materials, the owner is responsible for determining that the location of the structural steel is acceptable for plumbness, level and alignment within tolerances. The erector is given timely notice of acceptance by the owner or a listing of specific items to be corrected in order to obtain acceptance.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 445
Such notice is rendered immediately upon completion of any part of the work and prior to the start of work by other trades that may be supported, attached or applied to the structural steelwork. 7.12. Correction of Errors Normal erection operations include the correction of minor misfits by moderate amounts of reaming, chipping, welding or cutting, and the drawing of elements into line through the use of drift pins. Errors which cannot be corrected by the foregoing means, or which require major changes in member configuration, are reported immediately to the owner and fabricator by the erector, to enable whoever is responsible either to correct the error or to approve the most efficient and economic method of correction to be used by others. 7.13. Cuts, Alterations and Holes for Other Trades Neither the fabricator nor the erector will cut, drill or otherwise alter his work, or the work of other trades, to accommodate other trades, unless such work is clearly specified in the contract documents. Whenever such work is specified, the owner is responsible for furnishing complete information as to materials, size, location and number of alterations in a timely manner so that the preparation of shop drawings will not be delayed. 7.14. Handling and Storage The erector takes reasonable care in the proper handling and storage of steel during erection operations to avoid accumulation of excess dirt and foreign matter. The erector is not responsible for removal from the steel of dust, dirt or other foreign matter which accumulates during the erection period as the result of site conditions or exposure to the elements. 7.15.
Field Painting
The erector does not paint field bolt heads and nuts, field rivet heads and field welds, nor touch up abrasions of the shop coat, nor perform any other field painting. 7.16. Final Cleaning Up Upon completion of erection and before final acceptance, the erector removes all of his falsework, rubbish and temporary buildings.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 446
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
SECTION 8. QUALITY CONTROL 8.1. General 8.1.1. The fabricator maintains a quality control program to the extent deemed necessary so that the work is performed in accordance with this Code, the AISC Specification, and contract documents. The fabricator has the option to use the AISC Quality Certification Program in establishing and administering the quality control program. 8.1.2. The erector maintains a quality control program to the extent the erector deems necessary so that all of the work is performed in accordance with this Code, the AISC Specification and the contract documents. The erector shall be capable of performing the erection of the structural steel, and shall provide the equipment, personnel and management for the scope, magnitude and required quality of each project. 8.1.3. When the owner requires more extensive quality control or independent inspection by qualified personnel, or requires the fabricator to be certified by the AISC Quality Certification Program, this shall be clearly stated in the contract documents, including a definition of the scope of such inspection. 8.2. Mill Material Inspection The fabricator customarily makes a visual inspection, but does not perform any material tests, depending upon mill reports to signify that the mill product satisfies material order requirements. The owner relies on mill tests required by contract and on such additional tests as he orders the fabricator to have made at the owner’s expense. If mill inspection operations are to be monitored, or if tests other than mill tests are desired, the owner so specifies in the contract documents and should arrange for such testing through the fabricator to assure coordination. 8.3. Non-Destructive Testing When non-destructive testing is required, the process, extent, technique and standards of acceptance are clearly defined in the contract documents. 8.4. Surface Preparation and Shop Painting Inspection Surface preparation and shop painting inspection must be planned for acceptance of each operation as completed by the fabricator. Inspection of the paint system, including material and thickness, is made promptly upon completion of the paint
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 447
application. When wet film thickness is inspected, it must be measured during the application. 8.5. Independent Inspection When contract documents specify inspection by other than the fabricator’s and erector’s own personnel, both parties to the contract incur obligations relative to the performance of the inspection. 8.5.1. The fabricator and erector provide the inspector with access to all places where work is being done. A minimum of 24 hours notification is given prior to commencement of work. 8.5.2. Inspection of shop work by the owner or his representative is performed in the fabricator’s shop to the fullest extent possible. Such inspections should be in sequence, timely, and performed in such a manner as will not disrupt fabrication operations and will permit repair of non-conforming work prior to any required painting while the material is still in process in the fabrication shop. 8.5.3. Inspection of field work must be completed promptly so that corrections can be made without delaying the progress of the work. 8.5.4. Rejection of material or workmanship not in conformance with the contract documents may be made at any time during the progress of the work. However, this provision does not relieve the owner of his obligation for timely, in-sequence inspections. 8.5.5. Copies of all reports prepared by the owner’s inspection representative must be given to the fabricator and erector immediately after the inspection to allow any necessary corrective work to be performed in a timely manner. 8.5.6. The owner’s inspection representative may not suggest, direct, or approve the fabricator or erector to deviate from the contract documents or approved shop drawings, or approve such deviation, without the express written approval of the engineer of record or the person designated as the owner’s authorized representative.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 448
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
SECTION 9. CONTRACTS 9.1. Types of Contracts 9.1.1. For contracts stipulating a lump sum price, the work required to be performed by the fabricator and erector is completely defined by the contract documents. 9.1.2. For contracts stipulating a price per pound, the scope of work, type of materials, character of fabrication, and conditions of erection are based upon the contract documents which must be representative of the work to be performed. 9.1.3. For contracts stipulating a price per item, the work required to be performed by the fabricator and erector is based upon the quantity and the character of items described in the contract documents. 9.1.4. For contracts stipulating unit prices for various categories of structural steel, the scope of the work required to be performed by the fabricator and erector is based upon the quantity, character and complexity of the items in each category as described in the contract documents. The contract documents must be representative of the work to be done in each category. 9.2. Calculation of Weights Unless otherwise set forth in the contract, on contracts stipulating a price per pound for fabricated structural steel delivered and/or erected, the quantities of materials for payment are determined by the calculation of gross weight of materials as shown on the shop drawings. 9.2.1. The unit weight of steel is assumed to be 490 pounds per cubic ft. The unit weight of other materials is in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data for the specific product. 9.2.2. The weights of shapes, plates, bars, steel pipe and structural tubing are calculated on the basis of shop drawings showing actual quantities and dimensions of material furnished, as follows: (a) (b)
The weight of all structural shapes, steel pipe and structural tubing is calculated using the nominal weight per ft and the detailed overall length. The weight of plates and bars is calculated using the detailed overall rectangular dimensions.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
(c)
(d)
(e)
6 - 449
When parts can be economically cut in multiples from material of larger dimensions, the weight is calculated on the basis of the theoretical rectangular dimensions of the material from which the parts are cut. When parts are cut from structural shapes, leaving a non-standard section not useable on the same contract, the weight is calculated on the basis of the nominal unit weight of the section from which the parts are cut. No deductions are to be made for material removed by cuts, copes, clips, blocks, drilling, punching, boring, slot milling, planing or weld joint preparation.
9.2.3. The calculated weights of castings are determined from the shop drawings of the pieces. An allowance of 10 percent is added for fillets and overrun. Scale weights of rough castings may be used if available. 9.2.4. The items for which weights are shown in tables in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction are calculated on the basis of tabulated unit weights. 9.2.5. The weight of items not included in the tables in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction shall be taken from the manufacturers’ catalog and the manufacturers’ shipping weight shall be used. 9.2.6. The weight of shop or field weld metal and protective coatings is not included in the calculated weight for pay purposes. 9.3. Revisions to Contract Documents 9.3.1. Revisions to the contract are made by issuance of new documents or reissuance of existing documents. In either case, all revisions, including revisions communicated by annotation of shop or erection drawings, must be clearly and individually indicated and the documents dated and identified by revision number. All contract drawings shall be identified by the same drawing number throughout the duration of the job regardless of the revision. The engineer of record is responsible for reviewing the overall structural design to identify all components which will be affected by a change to any individual component. 9.3.2. A revision to the requirements of the contract documents is made by change order, extra work order, or notations on the shop and erection drawings when returned upon approval. 9.3.3. Unless specifically stated to the contrary, the issuance of a revision is authorization by the owner to release these documents for construction.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 450
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
9.4. Contract Price Adjustment 9.4.1. When the scope of work and responsibilities of the fabricator and erector are changed from those previously established by the contract documents, an appropriate modification of the contract price is made. In computing the contract price adjustment, the fabricator and erector consider the quantity of work added or deleted, modifications in the character of the work, and the timeliness of the change with respect to the status of material ordering, detailing, fabrication and erection operations. 9.4.2. Requests for contract price adjustments are presented by the fabricator and erector in a timely manner and are accompanied by a description of the change in sufficient detail to permit evaluation and timely approval by the owner. 9.4.3. Price per pound and price per item contracts generally provide for additions or deletions to the quantity of work prior to the time work is released for construction. Changes to the character of the work, at any time, or additions and/or deletions to the quantity of the work after it is released for detailing, fabrication, or erection, may require a contract price adjustment. 9.5. Scheduling 9.5.1. The contract documents specify the schedule for the performance of the work. This schedule states when the “released for construction” plans will be issued and when the job site, foundations, piers and abutments will be ready, free from obstructions and accessible to the erector, so that erection can start at the designated time and continue without interference or delay caused by the owner or other trades. 9.5.2. The fabricator and erector have the responsibility to advise the owner, in a timely manner, of the effect any revision has on the contract schedule. 9.5.3. If the fabrication or erection is significantly delayed due to design revisions, or for other reasons which are the owner’s responsibility, the fabricator and erector are compensated for additional costs incurred. 9.6. Terms of Payment The terms of payment for the contract shall be outlined in the contract documents.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 451
SECTION 10. ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL 10.1. Scope This section of the Code defines additional requirements which apply only to members specifically designated by the contract documents as “Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel” (AESS). All provisions of Sections 1 through 9 of the Code apply unless specifically modified in this section. AESS members or components are fabricated and erected with the care and dimensional tolerances indicated in this section. 10.2. Additional Information Required in Contract Documents (a) (b) (c)
Specific identification of members or components which are to be AESS. Fabrication and erection tolerances which are more restrictive than provided for in this section. Requirements, if any, of a test panel or components for inspection and acceptance standards prior to the start of fabrication.
10.3. Fabrication 10.3.1. Rolled Shapes Permissible tolerances for out-of-square or out-of-parallel, depth, width and symmetry of rolled shapes are as specified in ASTM Specification A6. No attempt to match abutting cross-sectional configurations is made unless specifically required by the contract documents. The as-fabricated straightness tolerances of members are one-half of the standard camber and sweep tolerances in ASTM A6. 10.3.2. Built-up Members The tolerances on overall profile dimensions of members made up from a series of plates, bars and shapes by welding are limited to the accumulation of permissible tolerances of the component parts as provided by ASTM Specification A6. The asfabricated straightness tolerances for the member as a whole are one-half the standard camber and sweep tolerances for rolled shapes in ASTM A6. 10.3.3. Weld Show-through It is recognized that the degree of weld show-through, which is any visual indication of the presence of a weld or welds on the side away from the viewer, is a function of weld size and material thickness. The members or components will be
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 452
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
acceptable as produced unless specific acceptance criteria for weld show-through are included in the contract documents. 10.3.4. Joints All copes, miters and butt cuts in surfaces exposed to view are made with uniform gaps of 1⁄8 in. if shown to be open joints, or in reasonable contact if shown without gap. 10.3.5. Welding Reasonably smooth and uniform as-welded surfaces are acceptable on all welds exposed to view. Butt and plug welds do not project more than 1⁄16 in. above the exposed surface. No finishing or grinding is required except where clearances or fit of other components may necessitate, or when specifically required by the contract documents. 10.3.6. Weathering Steel Members fabricated of weathering steel which are to be AESS shall not have erection marks or other painted marks on surfaces that are to be exposed in the completed structure. If cleaning other than SSPC-SP6 is required, these requirements shall be defined in the contract documents. 10.4. Delivery of Materials The fabricator uses special care to avoid bending, twisting or otherwise distorting individual members. 10.5. Erection 10.5.1. General The erector uses special care in unloading, handling and erecting the steel to avoid marking or distorting the steel members. Care is also taken to minimize damage to any shop paint. If temporary braces or erection clips are used, care is taken to avoid unsightly surfaces upon removal. Tack welds are ground smooth and holes are filled with weld metal or body solder and smoothed by grinding or filing. The erector plans and executes all operations in such a manner that the close fit and neat appearance of the structure will not be impaired.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 453
10.5.2. Erection Tolerances Unless otherwise specifically designated in the contract documents, members and components are plumbed, leveled and aligned to a tolerance not to exceed one-half the amount permitted for structural steel. These erection tolerances for AESS require that the owner’s plans specify adjustable connections between AESS and the structural steel frame or the masonry or concrete supports, in order to provide the erector with means for adjustment. 10.5.3. Components with Concrete Backing When AESS is backed with concrete, it is the general contractor’s responsibility to provide sufficient shores, ties and strongbacks to assure against sagging, bulging, etc., of the AESS resulting from the weight and pressure of the wet concrete.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 454
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 455
Commentary on the Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
Adopted Effective June 10, 1992 American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 456
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 457
PREFACE
This Commentary has been prepared to assist those who use the Code of Standard Practice in understanding the background, basis and intent of its provisions. Each section in the Commentary is referenced by corresponding sections in the Code. Not all sections of the Code are discussed; sections are covered only if it is believed that additional explanation may be helpful. While every precaution has been taken to insure that all data and information presented is as accurate as possible, the Institute cannot assume responsibility for errors or oversights in the information published herein or the use of the information published or incorporating such information in the preparation of detailed engineering plans. The figures are for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to be applicable to any actual design. The information should not replace the judgment of an experienced architect or engineer who has the responsibility of design for a specific structure.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 458
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 459
Commentary on the Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges Adopted Effective June 10, 1992 American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1. Scope This Code is not applicable to metal building systems, which are the subject of standards published by the Metal Building Manufacturers Association in their Metal Building Systems Manual. AISC has not participated in the development of the MBMA code and, therefore, takes no position and is not responsible for any of its provisions. This Code is not applicable to standard steel joists, which are the subject of Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists, published by the Steel Joist Institute. AISC has not participated in the development of the SJI code and, therefore, takes no position and is not responsible for any of its provisions.
SECTION 2. CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS 2.2. Other Steel or Metal Items These items include materials which may be supplied by the steel fabricator which require coordination between other material suppliers and trades. If they are to be supplied by the fabricator, they must be specifically called for and detailed in contract documents.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 460
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
SECTION 3. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 3.1. Structural Steel Project specifications vary greatly in complexity and completeness. There is a benefit to the owner if the specifications leave the contractor reasonable latitude in performing his work. However, critical requirements affecting the integrity of the structure, or necessary to protect the owner’s interest, must be covered in the contract documents. The following checklist is included for reference: Standard codes and specifications governing structural steelwork Material specifications Mill test reports Welded joint configuration Weld procedure qualification Bolting specifications Special requirements for work of other trades Runoff tabs Wind bracing Connections or data for connection development Column stiffeners Column web doubler plates Bearing stiffeners on beams and girders Web reinforcement Openings for other trades Surface preparation and shop painting Shop inspection Field inspection Non-destructive testing, including acceptance criteria Special requirements on delivery Special erection limitations Temporary bracing for non-self-supporting structures Special fabrication and erection tolerances for AESS Special pay weight provisions The structural steel plans must provide the elevations of all members as well as the dimensions to the centerline of all members (or the backs of angles or channels) relative to the grid lines, column centerline or other nearby members unless the locations of those members must be coordinated by the general contractor with the requirements of another trade. When the necessary dimensions are not given, the fabricator is not in a position to order material or start shop drawings in a timely manner and may be delayed while attempting to get the information.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 461
SECTION 4. SHOP AND ERECTION DRAWINGS 4.1. Owner’s Responsibility The owner’s responsibility for the proper planning of the work and the communication of all facts of his particular project is a requirement of the Code, not only at the time of bidding, but also throughout the term of any project. The contract documents, including the plans and specification, are for the purpose of communication. It is the owner’s responsibility to properly define the scope of work, and to define information or items required and outlined in the plans and specifications. When the owner releases plans and specifications for construction, the fabricator and erector rely on the fact that these are the owner’s requirements for his project. The Code defines the owner as including a designated representative such as the architect, engineer or project manager, and when these representatives direct specific action to be taken, they are acting as and for the owner. On phased construction projects, to insure the orderly flow of material procurement, detailing, fabrication and erection activities, it is essential that designs are not continuously revised after progressive releases for construction are made. In essence, once a portion of a design is released for construction, the essential elements of that design should be “frozen” to assure adherence to the construction schedule or all parties should reach an understanding on the effects of future changes as they affect scheduled deliveries and added costs, if any. 4.2. Approval 4.2.1. From the inception of the Code of Standard Practice, AISC and the industry in general have recognized that the engineer of record is the only individual who has all the information necessary to evaluate the total impact of connection details on the overall structural design of the project. This authority has traditionally been exercised during the approval process for shop and erection drawings. The EOR has retained the final and total responsibility for the adequacy and safety of the entire structure since at least the 1927 edition of the Code of Standard Practice. In those instances where a fabricator develops the detailed configuration of connections during the preparation of shop drawings, the fabricator does not thereby become responsible for the structural integrity of that part of the overall structure. In the first issue of the Code, as printed in the first AISC Manual in 1927, this was stated as “Shop Drawings prepared by the Seller and approved by a representative of the Buyer shall be deemed the correct interpretation of the work to be done, but does not relieve the Seller of responsibility for the accuracy of details.” This statement was modified in the 1952 revision of the Code to read “...the owner must return one set of prints to the fabricator with a notation of the owner’s outright approval or approval subject to corrections as noted.” In 1972 the Code stated “Approval by the
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 462
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
owner of shop drawings prepared by the fabricator indicates that the fabricator has correctly interpreted the contract requirements, and that any connections designed by the fabricator are of adequate capacity for the design requirements.” The Code was again modified in 1976 saying “Approval by the owner of shop drawings prepared by the fabricator indicates that the fabricator has correctly interpreted the contract requirements. This approval constitutes the owner’s acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any connection designed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings.” This statement was not changed in the 1986 revision of the Code. The current revision of Paragraph 4.2.1 of the Code is intended to clarify the use of the word “Owner.” Consequently, the term “owner” has been replaced by “owner’s authorized representative,” usually meaning the engineer of record. The continuing concept that the structural engineer of record is the sole individual who can best assure the safety of the completed structure has not been modified. This system has worked well for at least the past 65 years, and has achieved a commendable safety record where its principles have been steadfastly applied. In the preparation of contract drawings, the engineer of record (EOR) has two basic choices in the showing of connection details. The EOR may fully design and detail connections for all conditions. However, in order to allow the owner to benefit from the economies inherent in allowing the fabricator to choose the most efficient connections for the fabricator’s shop and erection processes, the EOR may allow the fabricator to select the types of connection and show them in complete detail on the shop drawings for the EOR’s approval. In either case, the approval of the shop drawings by the owner’s authorized representative constitutes acceptance by the owner’s authorized representative of design responsibility for the structural adequacy of the connections shown on the shop drawings. Contracts attempting to share or allocate design responsibility are strongly discouraged. Individual state codes and licensing requirements may vary widely in allowing such allocation of responsibility. Should the engineer of record elect to fully design and detail connections on the contract documents, the EOR has the obligation to show all fastener sizes, arrangement, quantities and grades, as well as all connection material and weld types, sizes and lengths for each individual member or part to be joined. All requirements for bracing details, stiffeners, doublers, web or cope reinforcement or similar items necessary for the completeness of the design must be sized and shown in complete detail. The fabricator is responsible for correctly reflecting this information in the preparation of shop drawings. Should the fabricator wish to deviate from these specific details or call a problem to the attention of the engineer of record, the fabricator must either do so in writing prior to the preparation of shop drawings, or clearly note the deviation on the drawings submitted for approval. This requirement is not intended in any way to negate the responsibility of the owner’s authorized representative to review completely each shop drawing for structural adequacy during the approval process. If the engineer of record does not show fully designed and detailed connections on the contract documents and allows the fabricator to select connection types when
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 463
detailing shop drawings, the contract documents must give all reactions, moments, or other forces required for each individual member of parts to be joined so that when preparing shop drawings, the fabricator’s detailers and checkers may determine the appropriate connection either by selection from tables shown in AISC publications or by simple calculation. The fabricator can assume that the reactions, moments or other forces given by the engineer are appropriate for the loads to be applied to the structure. All requirements for bracing details, stiffeners, doublers, web or cope reinforcement or similar items necessary for the completeness of the design must be shown in sufficient detail so as to allow the fabricator to submit an accurate estimate of cost at the time of bid. It is suggested that highly complex connections be fully designed on the contract documents or developed in a timely manner by the EOR after consulting with the fabricator regarding accepted, current and standard practices for fabrication and erection so that the detailing and fabricating processes will not be delayed. In the latter case, a pre-detailing meeting between the EOR and the fabricator may be appropriate to facilitate this exchange of information. In the event that design loads or other information necessary for development of connections is not shown on the contract documents, this information must be furnished to the fabricator in a timely manner. If the engineer of record elects to utilize typical details which must be interpreted or modified by the fabricator to meet conditions occurring in a structure, such interpretation is forwarded to the engineer of record for review and approval by way of detail or shop drawing submittals. Where state codes and licensing requirements allow fabricators to design and fabricate complete steel structures, and a fabricator has contracted to provide such services, submittals to the owner or applicable public reviewing authority will normally include only those documents customarily submitted by licensed design professionals on comparable projects within the same licensing jurisdiction.
SECTION 5. MATERIALS 5.1. Mill Materials The fabricator may purchase materials in stock lengths, exact lengths or multiples of exact lengths to suit the dimensions shown on the contract drawings. Such purchases will normally be job-specific in nature and may not be capable of being utilized on other projects or returned for full credit if subsequent design changes make these materials unsuitable for their originally intended use. The fabricator should be paid for these materials upon delivery from the mill, subject to appropriate additional payment or credit if subsequent unanticipated modification or reorder is required. Purchasing materials to exact lengths is not considered fabrication.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 464
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
5.1.2. Mill dimensional tolerances are completely set forth as part of ASTM A6. Variation in cross sectional geometry of rolled members must be recognized by the designer, the fabricator and erector (see Fig. 1). Such tolerances are mandatory because roll wear, thermal distortions of the hot cross section immediately after leaving the forming rolls, and differential cooling distortions that take place on the cooling beds are economically beyond precise control. Absolute perfection of cross sectional geometry is not of structural significance and, if the tolerances are recognized and provided for, also not of architectural significance. ASTM A6 also stipulates straightness and camber tolerances which are adequate for most conventional construction. However, these characteristics may be controlled or corrected to closer tolerances during the fabrication process when the unique demands of a particular project justify the added cost.
+ 1/ 4 – 3/16
Actual section
½B ± 3/16 ½ 3 B /16
T
C = d+ ¼ max. A = d ± 1/ 8 d
C = d + ¼ max.
T1
T1
Theoretical section T1
bf
T
f
C = d + ¼ max.
B=b
±
Typical
Typical Typical
Typical ½B± 3/16 ½B 3/16 ±
T + T ′ — For sections 12 ″ and under - ¼ ″ max.
B — Actual flange width A — Actual depth at cL web C — Actual depth overall
For sections over 12 ″ — 5/15 ″ max. bf — Theoretical flange width d — Theoretical depth T & T ′ — Tilt of flange
Fig. 1. Mill tolerances on cross-section dimensions AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 465
SECTION 6. FABRICATION AND DELIVERY 6.4. Dimensional Tolerances Fabrication tolerances are stipulated in several specification documents, each applicable to a special area of construction. Basic fabrication tolerances are stipulated in Sections 6.4 and 10 of the Code and Section M2.7 of the AISC Specification. Other specifications and codes frequently incorporated by reference in the contract documents are the AWS Structural Welding Code and AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. 6.4.5. Due to the release of stresses, there is no known way to verify camber once members are received in the field. Camber may only be measured in the fabrication shop in the unstressed condition and does not take into account the dead weight of the member, the restraint caused by the end connections in the erected state or any dead load which may be intended to be applied. 6.5. Shop Painting 6.5.2., 6.5.3. The selection of a paint system is a design decision involving many factors including owner’s preference, service life of the structure, severity of environmental exposure, cost of both initial application and future renewals, and compatibility of the various components comprising the paint system, i.e., surface preparation, prime coat and subsequent coats. Because inspection of shop painting needs to be concerned with workmanship at each stage of the operation, the fabricator provides notice of the schedule of operations and affords access to the work site to inspectors. Inspection must be coordinated with that schedule in such a way as to avoid delay of the scheduled operations. Acceptance of the prepared surface must be made prior to application of the prime coat because the degree of surface preparation cannot be readily verified after painting. Time delay between surface preparation and application of the prime coat can result in unacceptable deterioration of a properly prepared surface, necessitating a repetition of surface preparation. This is especially true with blast-cleaned surfaces. Therefore, to avoid potential deterioration of the surface it is assumed that surface preparation is accepted unless it is inspected and rejected prior to the scheduled application of the prime coat. The prime coat in any paint system is designed to maximize the wetting and adherence characteristics of the paint, usually at the expense of its weathering capabilities. Deterioration of the shop paint normally begins immediately after exposure to the elements and worsens as the duration of exposure is extended. Consequently, extended exposure of the prime coat to weather or to a corrosive atmosphere will lead to its deterioration and may necessitate repair, possibly including
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 466
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
repetition of surface preparation and primer application in limited areas. With the introduction of high performance paint systems, delay in the application of the prime coat has become more critical. High performance paint systems generally require a greater degree of surface preparation, as well as early application of weathering protection for the prime coat. Since the fabricator does not control the selection of the paint system, the compatibility of the various components of the total paint system, nor the length of exposure of the prime coat, he cannot guarantee the performance of the prime coat or any other part of the system. Rather, the fabricator is responsible only for accomplishing the specified surface preparation and for applying the shop coat or coats in accordance with the contract documents. Section 6.5.2 stipulates cleaning the steel to the requirements of SSPC-SP2. This section is not meant as an exclusive cleaning level, but rather that level of surface preparation which will be furnished if the steel is to be painted and if the job specifications are silent or do not require more stringent surface preparation requirements. Further information regarding shop painting is available in A Guide to Shop Painting of Structural Steel, published jointly by the Steel Structures Painting Council and the American Institute of Steel Construction. 6.5.4. Extended exposure of unpainted steel which has been cleaned for subsequent fire protection material application can be detrimental to the fabricated product. Most levels of cleaning require the removal of all loose mill scale, but permit some amount of “tightly adhering mill scale.” When a piece of structural steel which has been cleaned to an acceptable level is left exposed to a normal environment, moisture can penetrate behind the scale, and some “lifting” of the scale by the oxidation products is to be expected. Cleanup of “lifted” mill scale is not the responsibility of the fabricator, but is assigned by contract requirement to an appropriate contractor. Section 6.5.4 of the Code is not applicable to weathering steel, for which special cleaning specifications are always required in the contract documents.
SECTION 7. ERECTION 7.5. Installation of Anchor Bolts and Embedded Items 7.5.1. While the general contractor must make every effort to set anchor bolts accurately to theoretical drawing dimensions, minor deviations may occur. The tolerances set forth in this section were compiled from data collected from general contractors and erectors. They can be attained by using reasonable care and will ordinarily allow the steel to be erected and plumbed to required tolerances. If special conditions require closer tolerances, the contractor responsible for setting the anchor
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 467
bolts should be so informed by the contract documents. When anchor bolts are set in sleeves, the adjustment provided may be used to satisfy the required anchor bolt setting tolerances. The tolerances established in this section of the Code have been selected to be compatible with oversize holes in base plates, as recommended in the AISC textbook Detailing for Steel Construction. An anchor bolt group is the set of anchor bolts which receive a single fabricated steel shipping piece. The established column line is the actual field line most representative of the centers of the as-built anchor bolt groups along a line of columns. It must be straight or curved as shown on the plans. 7.6. Bearing Devices The 1⁄8 in. tolerance on elevation of bearing devices relative to established grades is provided to permit some variation in setting bearing devices and to account for attainable accuracy with standard surveying instruments. The use of leveling plates larger than 22 in. × 22 in. is discouraged and grouting is recommended with larger sizes. For purposes of erection stability, the use of leveling nuts is discouraged when base plates have less than four (4) anchor bolts. 7.9.3. Non Self-Supporting Steel Frames To rationally provide temporary supports and/or bracing, the erector must be informed by the owner of the sequence of installation and the effect of loads imposed by such elements at various stages during the sequence until they become effective. The overall strength and stability of a non self-supporting steel frame may be dependent upon the installation of non-structural steel elements such as concrete floor diaphragms, concrete or masonry shear walls, precast concrete facade pieces, etc. The requirement for these elements to be in place to provide overall strength and stability for the structural steel frame should be made clear in the contract documents in order that the need for temporary support may be clearly understood. For example, precast tilt-up slabs or channel slab facia elements which depend upon attachment to the steel frame for stability against overturning due to eccentricity of their gravity load may induce significant unbalanced lateral forces on the bare steel frame when partially installed. 7.11. Framing Tolerances The erection tolerances defined in this section of the Code have been developed through long-standing usage as practical criteria for the erection of structural steel. Erection tolerances were first defined by AISC in its Code of Standard Practice of
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 468
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
October, 1924 in Section 7 (f), “Plumbing Up.” With the changes that took place in the types and use of materials in building construction after World War II, and the increasing demand by architects and owners for more specific tolerances, AISC adopted new standards for erection tolerances in Section 7 (h) of the March 15, 1959 edition of the Code. Experience has proven that those tolerances can be economically obtained. The current requirements were first published in the October 1,1972 edition of the Code. They provide an expanded set of criteria over earlier Code editions. The basic premise that the final accuracy of location of any specific point in a structural steel frame results from the combined mill, fabrication and erection tolerances, rather than from the erection tolerances alone, remains unchanged in this edition of the Code. However, to improve clarity, pertinent standard fabrication tolerances are now stipulated in Section 7.11, rather than by reference to the AISC Specification as in previous editions. Additionally, expanded coverage has been given to the definition of working points and working lines governing measurements of the actual steel location. Illustrations for defining and applying the applicable Code tolerances are provided in this Commentary. The recent trend in building work is away from built-in-place construction wherein compatibility of the frame and the facade or other collateral materials is automatically provided for by the routine procedures of the crafts. Building construction today frequently incorporates prefabricated components wherein large units are developed with machine-like precision to dimensions that are theoretically correct for a perfectly aligned steel frame with ideal member cross sections. This type of construction has made the magnitude of the tolerances allowed for structural steel building frames increasingly of concern to owners, architects and engineers. This has led to the inclusion in job specifications of unrealistically small tolerances, which indicate a general lack of recognition of the effects of the accumulation of dead load, temperature effects and mill, fabrication and erection tolerances. Such tolerances are not economically feasible and do not measurably increase the structure’s functional value. This edition of the Code incorporates tolerances previously found to be practical and presents them in a precise and clear manner. Actual application methods have been considered and the application of the tolerance limitations to the actual structure have been defined. 7.11.3. Position and Alignment The limitations described in Section 7.11.3.1 and illustrated in Figs. 2 and 3 make it possible to maintain built-in-place or prefabricated facades in a true vertical plane up to the 20th story, if connections which provide for 3 in. adjustment are used. Above the 20th story, the facade may be maintained within 1⁄16 in. per story with a maximum total deviation of 1 in. from a true vertical plane, if the 3 in. adjustment is provided. Section 7.11.3.1(c) limits the position of exterior column working points at any given splice elevation to a narrow horizontal envelope parallel to the building line
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 469
(see Fig. 4). This envelope is limited to a width of 11⁄2 in., normal to the building line, in up to 300 ft of building length. The horizontal location of this envelope is not necessarily directly above or below the corresponding envelope at the adjacent splice elevations, but should be within the limitation of the 1:500 allowable tolerance in plumbness of the controlling columns (see Fig. 3). Connections permitting adjustments of plus 2 in. to minus 3 in. (5 in. total) will be necessary in cases where the architect or owner insists upon attempting to construct the facade to a true vertical plane above the 20th story. Usually there is a differential shortening of the internal versus the external columns during construction, due to non-uniform rate of accumulation of dead load stresses (see Fig. 5). The amount of such differential shortening is indeterminate because it varies dependent upon construction sequence from day to day as the construction progresses, and does not reach its maximum shortening until the building is in service. When floor concrete is placed while columns are supporting different percentages of their full design loads, the floor must be finished to slopes established by measurements from the tops of beams at column connections. The effects of
B
/2 + h/1000 +Tp
W.P.
E.C.L.
L
C
/ 2 + h/1000 + Ta
Tp Tp
E.C.L.
C
L
/2 + h/1000 +Tp
Envelope of actual location of working points to established column line. See Fig. 3
Ta Tt
C
/ 2 + h/1000
C
L
L
/ 2 + h/1000
/2 + h/1000 B/2 + h/1000
/ 2 + h/1000 + Tt
Minimum clearance envelope
B
B
L
L
For enclosures or attachments which may follow column alignment
L
For enclosures or attachments which must be held to precise plan location
L = Actual c to c columns = Plan dimension ± column cross section tolerance ± beam length tolerance. Ta = Plumbness tolerance away from building line (varies, see Fig. 3) Tt = Plumbness tolerance toward building line (varies, see Fig. 3) Tp = Plumbness tolerance parallel to building line (= Ta )
Fig. 2. Clearance required to accommodate accumulated column tolerances AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 470
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
3″
2″
Slope 1/16 ″ per story
20th Fl 2″ Plumb Elev. varies
Slope 1/ 500
1″
Established column line
Building line
36th Fl.
Splice Braced point
W.P.
Maximum out-of-plumb of individual shipping piece as defined by straight line between working points ≤ 1/500 Maximum out-of-straightness between braced points L/1000 where L is distance between braced points.
Braced point Splice
W.P.
Braced point
Individual column sections within envelope defined at left Established column line
Elev. varies
Slope 1/500
Slope 1/ 500 ¼
¼
Tolerance on location of W.P. at base
Envelope within which all working points must fall Note: The plumb line thru the base working point for an individual column is not necessarily the precise plan location because Section 7.11.3.1 deals only with plumbness tolerance and does not include inaccuracies in location of established column line, foundations and anchor bolts beyond the erector’s control.
Fig. 3. Exterior column plumbness tolerances normal to building line Building line
Ta Tt E
Established Column lines
Maximum envelope for working points of all columns at any given elevation E = 1½ ″ for up to 300 ′of length, over 300 ′ add ½ ″ for each 100 ′ of length with 3 ″max total Column plumbness tolerance — See figs. 2 and 3 — Indicates column working points At any splice elevation, envelope “E” is located within the limits Ta and T t At any splice elevation, envelope “E” may be located offset from the corresponding envelope of the adjacent splice elevations, above and below, by an amount not greater than 1/ 500 of the column length.
Fig. 4. Tolerances in plan at any splice elevation of exterior columns
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 471
Splice elevation shown on plan
Column base
Differential shortening
Interior column Finish line
Interior column shortening due to partial dead load
Beam elevations from finish line See section 7.11.3.3 Floor elevations set by measurement from top of beams
Finish line
Floor elevations set by measurement from top of beams Beam elevations from finish line See section 7.11.3.3 Exterior column shortening due to partial dead load
Finish line
Exterior column
Finish line
On a particular date during the erection of structural steel and placement of other material, (floor concrete, facade, etc.) the interior columns will be carrying a higher percentage of their final loads than the exterior columns. Therefore, for equal design unit stresses, the actual stress on that date for interior columns will be greater than the actual stresses on exterior columns. When all dead loads have been applied, stresses and shortening in all columns will be approximately equal.
Fig. 5. Effect of differential column shortening differential shortening, plus mill camber and deflections, become very important when there is little cover over the steel, when there are electrical fittings mounted on the steel flooring whose tops are supposed to be flush with the finished floor, when there is small clearance between bottom of beams and top of door frames, etc., and when there is little clearance around ductwork. To finish floors to a precisely level plane, for example by the use of laser leveling techniques, can result in significant differential floor thicknesses, different increases above design dead loads for individual columns and, thus, permanent differential column shortening and out-oflevel completed floors. Similar considerations make it unfeasible to attempt to set the elevation of a given floor in a multistory building by reference to a bench mark at the base of the structure. Columns are fabricated to a length tolerance of ± 1⁄32 in. while under a zero state of stress. As dead loads accumulate, the column shortening which takes place is negligible within individual stories and in low buildings, but will accumulate to significant magnitude in tall buildings. Thus, the upper floors of tall buildings will be excessively thick and the lower floors will be below the initial finish elevation if floor elevations are established relative to a ground level bench mark. If foundations and base plates are accurately set to grade and the lengths of individual column sections are checked for accuracy prior to erection, and if floor
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 472
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
elevations are established by reference to the elevation of the top of beams, the effect of column shortening due to dead load will be minimized. Since a long unencased steel frame will expand or contract 1⁄8 in. per 100 ft for each change of 15°F in temperature, and since the change in length can be assumed to act about the center of rigidity, the end columns anchored to foundations will be plumb only when the steel is at normal temperature (see Fig. 6). It is therefore necessary to correct field measurements of offsets to the structure from established baselines for the expansion or contraction of the exposed steel frame. For example, a building 200-ft long that is plumbed up at 100°F should have working points at the tops of end columns positioned 1⁄2 in. out from the working point at the base in order for the column to be plumb at 60°F. Differential temperature effects on column length should also be taken into account in plumbing surveys when tall steel frames are subject to strong sun exposure on one side. The alignment of lintels, spandrels, wall supports and similar members used to connect other building construction units to the steel frame should have an adjustment of sufficient magnitude to allow for the accumulative effect of mill, fabrication and erection tolerances on the erected steel frame (see Fig. 7).
When plumbing end columns, apply temperature adjustment at rate 1/ 8 ″ per 100 ′of length from center of rigidity per each 15°F of difference between erection and working temperatures.
Length
Length
Center of rigidity Ta Tt
Tt Ta
Tt Ta
Tt Ta
C to C adjacent columns subject to mill and fabrication tolerance Tp Tp Tt Ta
Established column lines Building line
Fig. 6. Tolerances in plan location of columns AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 473
Column dimension + tolerances
D = Tolerances required by manufacturer of wall units plus survey tolerance D
D E.C.L.
Clearance line to accommodate column. See Figure 2
Provide connections with slotted holes and/or shims to accommodate tolerances
Column dimension + tolerances
If fascia joints are set from nearest column finish line, allow ± 5/ 8 ″for vertical adjustment. Owners plans for fascia details must allow for progressive shortening of steel columns.
Fig. 7. Clearance required to accommodate fascia
500 1
500
500
1
1
500 1
Support points
Field splices
Fig. 8. Alignment tolerances for members with field splices AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 474
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
7.11.3.2. Alignment Tolerance for Members with Field Splices The angular misalignment of the working line of all fabricated shipping pieces relative to the line between support points of the member as a whole in erected position must not exceed 1 in 500. Note that the tolerance is not stated in terms of a linear displacement at any point and is not to be taken as the overall length between supports divided by 500. Typical examples are shown in Fig. 8. Numerous conditions within tolerance for these and other cases are possible. This condition applies to both plan and elevation tolerances. 7.11.4. Responsibility for Clearances In spite of all efforts to minimize inaccuracies, deviations will still exist; therefore, in addition, the designs of prefabricated wall panels, partition panels, fenestrations, floor-to-ceiling door frames and similar elements must provide for clearance and details for adjustment as described in Section 7.11.4. Designs must provide for adjustment in the vertical dimension of prefabricated facade panels supported by the steel frame because the accumulation of shortening of stressed steel columns will result in the unstressed facade supported at each floor level being higher than the steel frame connections to which it must be attached. Observations in the field have shown that where a heavy facade is erected to a greater height on one side of a multistory building than on the other, the steel framing will be pulled out of alignment. Facades should be erected at a relatively uniform rate around the perimeter of the structure. 7.14. Handling and Storage Handling Painted Steel During storage, loading, transport, unloading and erection, blemish marks caused by slings, chains, blocking, tie-downs, etc., occur in varying degrees. Abrasions caused by handling or cartage after painting are to be expected. The owner/engineer must recognize that any shop applied coating, no matter how carefully protected, will require touch-up in the field. Touch-up of these blemished areas is the responsibility of the contractor performing the field touch-up of field painting. Cleaning After Erection The responsibility for proper storage and handling of fabricated steel at the construction site during erection is properly the erector’s. Shop-painted steel stored in the field pending erection should be kept free of the ground and so positioned as to minimize water-holding pockets. The owner or general contractor is responsible for providing suitable site conditions and proper access so that the fabricator/erector may perform its work.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES
6 - 475
Site conditions are frequently muddy, sandy or dusty, or a combination of all three, during the erection period. Under such conditions it may be impossible to store and handle the steel in such a way as to completely avoid accumulation of mud, dirt or sand on the surface of the steel, even though the fabricator/erector manages to proceed with the work. Repairs of damage to painted surfaces and/or removal of foreign materials due to adverse site conditions are outside the scope of responsibility of the fabricator/erector when reasonable attempts at proper handling and storage have been made.
SECTION 8. QUALITY CONTROL 8.1.1. The AISC Quality Certification Program confirms to the construction industry that a certified structural steel fabricating plant has the capability by reason of commitment, personnel, organization, experience, procedures, knowledge and equipment to produce fabricated structural steel of the required quality for a given category of structural steelwork. The AISC Quality Certification Program is not intended to involve inspection and/or judgment of product quality on individual projects. Neither is it intended to guarantee the quality of specific fabricated steel products.
SECTION 9. CONTRACTS 9.2. Calculation of Weights The standard procedure for calculation of weights that is described in the Code meets the need for a universally acceptable system for defining “pay weights” in contracts based on the weight of delivered and/or erected materials. This procedure permits owners to easily and accurately evaluate price per pound proposals from potential suppliers and enables both parties to a contract to have a clear understanding of the basis for payment. The Code procedure affords a simple, readily understood method of calculation which will produce pay weights which are consistent throughout the industry and which may be easily verified by the owner. While this procedure does not produce actual weights, it can be used by purchasers and suppliers to define a widely accepted basis for bidding and contracting for structural steel. However, any other system can be used as the basis for a contractual agreement. When other systems are used, both supplier and purchaser should clearly understand how the alternate procedure is handled.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 476
AISC CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE
9.3. Revisions to Contract Documents 9.3.1. Revisions to the Contract are implemented by issuance of new documents or re-issuance of existing documents. Individual revisions must be noted where they occur and documents must be dated with latest issue date and the reasons for issuance must be identified. 9.3.2. Revisions to the Contract are also implemented by change order, extra work order, or notations on the shop and erection drawings when returned from approval. However, revisions implemented in this manner must be incorporated subsequently as revisions to the plans and/or specifications and re-issued in accordance with Section 9.3.1. 9.3.3. The issuance of revisions authorizes the fabricator and erector to incorporate the revisions into the work. This authorization obligates the owner to pay the fabricator and erector for costs associated with changed and/or additional work. 9.6. Terms of Payment These terms include such items as progress payments for material, fabrication, erection, retainage, performance and payment bonds and final payment. If a performance or payment bond, paid for by the owner, is required by contract, then no retainage shall be required.
SECTION 10. ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL The rapidly increasing use of exposed structural steel as a medium of architectural expression has given rise to a demand for closer dimensional tolerances and smoother finished surfaces than required for ordinary structural steel framing. This section of the Code establishes standards for these requirements which take into account both the desired finished appearance and the abilities of the fabrication shop to produce the desired product. These requirements were previously contained in the AISC Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel which architects and engineers have specified in the past. It should be pointed out that the term “Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel” (AESS), as covered in this section, must be specified in the contract documents if the fabricator is required to meet the fabricating standards of Section 10, and applies only to that portion of the structural steel so identified. In order to avoid misunderstandings and to hold costs to a minimum, only those steel surfaces and connections which will remain exposed and subject to normal view by pedestrians or occupants of the completed structure should be designated as AESS.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 477
AISC Quality Certification Program
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 478
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 479
AISC Quality Certification Program In recent years. the quality of construction methods and materials has become the subject of increasing concern to building officials, highway officials, and designers. One result of this concern has been the enactment of ever more demanding inspection requirements intended to ensure product quality. In many cases, however, these more demanding inspection requirements have not been based upon demonstrated unsatisfactory performance of structures in service. Rather, they have been based upon the capacity of sophisticated test equipment. or upon standards developed for nuclear construction rather than conventional construction. Adding to the problem, arbitrary interpretation of specifications by inspectors has too often been made without rational consideration of the type of construction involved. The result has been spiraling increases in the costs of fabrication of structural steel and of inspection, which must be paid by owners without necessarily assuring that the product quality required has been improved. Product inspection. although it has a valid place in the construction process, is not the most logical or practical way to assure that structural steelwork will conform to he requirements of contract documents and satisfy the intended use. A better solution can be found in the exercise of good quality control and quality assurance by the fabricator throughout the entire production process. Recognizing this fact, and seeking some valid, objective method whereby a fabricator’s capability for assuring a quality product could be evaluated, a number of code authorities have, in recent years, instituted steps to establish fabricator registration programs. However, these independent efforts resulted in extremely inconsistent criteria. They were developed primarily by inspectors or inspection agencies who were experienced in testing, but were not familiar with the complexities of the many steps, procedures, techniques, and controls required to assure quality throughout the fabricating process. Neither were these inspection agencies qualified to determine the various levels of quality required to assure satisfactory performance in meeting the service requirements of the many different types of steel structures. Recognizing the need for a comprehensive national standard for fabricator certification, and concerned by the trend toward costly inspection requirements that could not be justified by rational quality standards, the American Institute of Steel Construction has developed and implemented a voluntary Quality Certification Program, whereby any structural steel fabricating plant—whether a member of AISC or not—can have its capability for assuring quality production evaluated on a fair and impartial basis.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6 - 480
AISC QUALITY CERTIFICATION PROGRAM
THE AISC PROGRAM
The AISC Quality Certification Program does not involve inspection and/or judgment of product quality on individual projects. Neither does it guarantee the quality of specific fabricated steel products. Rather, the purpose of the AISC Quality Certification Program is to confirm to the construction industry that a Certified structural steel fabricating plant has the personnel, organization, experience, procedures, knowledge, equipment, capability and commitment to reproduce fabricated steel of the required quality for a given category of structural steelwork. The AISC Quality Certification Program was developed by a group of highly qualified shop operation personnel from large, medium, and small structural steel fabricating plants throughout the United States. These individuals all had extensive experience and were fully aware of where and how problems can arise during the production process and of the steps and procedures that must be followed during fabrication to assure that the finished product meets the quality requirements of the contract. The program was reviewed and strongly endorsed by an Independent Board of Review comprised of 17 prominent structural engineers from throughout the United States, who were not associated with the steel fabricating industry, but were well qualified in matters of quality requirements for reliable service of all types of steel structures. CATEGORIES OF CERTIFICATION
A fabricator may apply for certification of a plant in one of the following categories of structural steelwork: I: Conventional Steel Structures — Small Public Service and Institutional
Buildings, (Schools, etc.), Shopping Centers, Light Manufacturing Plants, Miscellaneous and Ornamental Iron Work, Warehouses, Sign Structures, Low Rise, Truss Beam/Column Structures, Simple Rolled Beam Bridges. II: Complex Steel Building Structures — Large Public Service and Institutional
Buildings, Heavy Manufacturing Plants, Powerhouses (fossil, non-nuclear), Metal Producing/Rolling Facilities, Crane Bridge Girders, Bunkers and Bins, Stadia, Auditoriums, High Rise Buildings, Chemical Processing Plants, Petroleum Processing Plants. III: Major Steel Bridges — All bridge structures other than simple rolled beam
bridges. MB: Metal Building Systems — Pre-engineered Metal Building Structures. Supplement: Auxiliary and Support Structures for Nuclear Power Plants — This
supplement, applicable to nuclear plant structures designed under the AISC Specification, but not to pressure-retaining structures, offers utility companies and designers of nuclear power plants a certification program that will eliminate the need for many of the more costly, conflicting programs now in use. A fabricator must hold certification in either Category I, II or III prior to application for certification in this category. Certification in Category II automatically includes Category I. Certification in Category III automatically includes Categories I and II. Certification in Category MB is not transferable to any other Category. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
AISC QUALITY CERTIFICATION PROGRAM
6 - 481
INSPECTION-EVALUATION PROCEDURE
An outside, experienced, professional organization, ABS Quality Evaluations, Inc. (a subsidiary of American Bureau of Shipping) has been retained by AISC to perform the plant Inspection-Evaluation in accordance with a standard check list and rating procedure established by AISC for each certification category in the program. Upon completion of this Inspection-Evaluation, ABS Quality Evaluations, Inc. (commonly known as ABSQE) will recommend to AISC that a fabricator be approved or disapproved for certification. ABS-QE’s Inspection-Evaluation is totally independent of the fabricator’s and AISC’s influence, and their evaluation is not subject to review by AISC. At a time mutually agreed upon by the fabricator, AISC, and ABS-QE, the Inspection-Evaluation team visits the plant to investigate and rate the following basic plant functions directly and indirectly affecting quality assurance: General Management, Engineering and Drafting, Procurement, Shop Operations, and Quality Control. The Inspection-Evaluation team will perform the following: 1. Confirm data submitted with the Application for Certification. 2. Interview key supervisory personnel and subordinate employees. 3. Observe and rate the organization in operation, including procedures used in functions affecting quality assurance. 4. Inspect and rate equipment and facilities. 5. At an “exit interview,” review with plant management the completed check list observations and evaluation scoring, including discussions of deficiencies and omissions, if any. The number of days required for Inspection-Evaluation varies according to the size and complexity of the plant, but usually requires two to five days. CERTIFICATION
Following recommendation for Certification by the Inspection-Evaluation team, AISC will issue a certificate identifying the fabricator, the plant, and the Category of Certification. The certificate is valid for a three year period, subject to annual review in the form of unannounced inspections early in the second and third year periods. The certificate is endorsed annually, provided there is successful completion of the unannounced second and third year inspection. An annual self-audit, based on the standard check list, must be made by plant management during the 11th and 23rd months after initial Certification. This self-audit must be retained at the plant and made available to the Inspection-Evaluation team during the unannounced second and third year inspections. At the end of the third year, the cycle begins again with a complete prescheduled Inspection-Evaluation and the issuance of a new certificate.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7-1
Part 7 MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION MISCELLANEOUS DATA Wire and Sheet Metal Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 AISI Standard Nomenclature for Flat Rolled Carbon Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Coefficients of Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Weights and Specific Gravities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Weights of Building Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 SI UNITS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 SI (Metric) Weights and Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 U.S. Weights and Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 SI Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 GEOMETRIC AND TRIGONOMETRIC DATA Bracing Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Properties of the Parabola and Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Properties of the Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Properties of Geometric Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Trigonometric Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS Decimals of an Inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 Decimals of a Foot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7-2
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
MISCELLANEOUS DATA
7-3
Table 7-1. WIRE AND SHEET METAL GAGES Equivalent thickness in decimals of an inch
Gage No.
U.S. Standard Galvanized Sheet Gage Gage for for HotUncoated Dipped Hot & ColdZinc Coated Rolled Sheetsb Sheetsb
7/0 6/0 5/0 4/0 3/0 2/0 1/0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
USA Steel Wire Gage
.490 .462a .430a .394a .362a .331 .306 .283 .262a .244a .225a .207 .192 .177 .162 .148a .135 .120a .106a
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — .1681 .1532 .1382 .1233 .1084
— — — — — — — — — .2391 .2242 .2092 .1943 .1793 .1644 .1495 .1345 .1196 .1046
Gage No.
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
U.S. Standard Galvanized Gage for Sheet Gage Uncoated for HotHot & ColdDipped Rolled Zinc Coated Sheetsb Sheetsb
.0897 .0747 .0673 .0598 .0538 .0478 .0418 .0359 .0329 .0299 .0269 .0239 .0209 .0179 .0164 .0149 — —
.0934 .0785 .0710 .0635 .0575 .0516 .0456 .0396 .0366 .0336 .0306 .0276 .0247 .0217 .0202 .0187 .0172 .0157
USA Steel Wire Gage
.092a .080 .072 .062a .054 .048a .041 .035a — — — — — — — — — —
aRounded value. The steel wire gage has been taken from ASTM A510 “General Requirements for Wire Rods
and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel.” Sizes originally quoted to four decimal equivalent places have been rounded to three decimal places in accordance with rounding procedures of ASTM “Recommended Practice” E29. bThe equivalent thicknesses are for information only. The product is commonly specified to decimal thickness, not to gage number.
Table 7-2. AISI STANDARD NOMENCLATURE FOR FLAT ROLLED CARBON STEEL Width (Inches) Thickness (Inches)
To 31⁄2 incl.
Over 31⁄2 To 6
Over 6 To 8
Over 8 To 12
Over 12 To 48
Over 48
0.2300 & thicker
Bar
Bar
Bar
Plate
Plate
Plate
0.2299 to 0.2031
Bar
Bar
Strip
Strip
Sheet
Plate
0.2030 to 0.1800
Strip
Strip
Strip
Strip
Sheet
Plate
0.1799 to 0.0449
Strip
Strip
Strip
Strip
Sheet
Sheet
0.0448 to 0.0344
Strip
Strip
0.0343 to 0.0255
Strip
0.0254 & thinner
Hot-rolled sheet and strip not generally produced in these widths and thicknesses
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7-4
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
Table 7-3. COEFFICIENTS OF EXPANSION The coefficient of linear expansion (ε) is the change in length, per unit, for a change of one degree of temperature. The coefficient of surface expansion is approximately two times the linear coefficient, and the coefficient of volume expansion, for solids, is approximately three times the linear coefficient. A bar, free to move, will increase in length with an increase in temperature and will decrease in length with a decrease in temperature. The change in length will be εtl, where ε is the coefficient of linear expansion, t the change in temperature and l the length. If the ends of a bar are fixed, a change in temperature (t ) will cause a change in the unit stress of E εt, and in force of AE εt, where A is the cross-sectional area of the bar and E the modulus of elasticity. The following table gives the coefficient of linear expansion for 100°, or 100 times the value indicated above. Example: A piece of medium steel is exactly 40 ft long at 60°F. Find the length at 90°F assuming the ends free to move. change of length = εt l =
.00065 × 30 × 40 = .0078 ft 100
The length at 90° is 40.0078 ft
Example: A piece of medium carbon steel is exactly 40 ft long and the ends are fixed. If the temperature increases 30°F, what is the resulting change in the unit stress? change in unit stress = E εt =
29,000 × .00065 × 30 = 5.7 ksi 100
COEFFICIENTS OF EXPANSION FOR 100 DEGREES = 100ε Linear Expansion
Linear Expansion Centigrade
Fahrenheit
METALS AND ALLOYS Aluminum, wrought Brass Bronze Copper Iron, cast, gray Iron, wrought Iron, wire Lead Magnesium, various alloys Nickel Steel , mild Steel, stainless, 18-8 Zinc, rolled
.00231 .00188 .00181 .00168 .00106 .00120 .00124 .00286 .0029 .00126 .00117 .00178 .00311
.00128 .00104 .00101 .00093 .00059 .00067 .00069 .00159 .0016 .00070 .00065 .00099 .00173
TIMBER Fir Maple parallel to fiber Oak Pine
.00037 .00064 .00049 .00054
.00021 .00036 .00027 .00030
Materials
Centigrade
Fahrenheit
STONE AND MASONRY Ashlar masonry Brick Masonry Cement, portland Concrete Granite Limestone Marble Plaster Rubble masonry Sandstone Slate
.00063 .00061 .00126 .00099 .00080 .00076 .00081 .00166 .00063 .00097 .00080
.00035 .00034 .00070 .00055 .00044 .00042 .00045 .00092 .00035 .00054 .00044
TIMBER Fir Maple perpendicular to Oak fiber Pine
.0058 .0048 .0054 .0034
.0032 .0027 .0030 .0019
Materials
EXPANSION OF WATER Maximum Density = 1 C°°
Volume
0 1.000126 4 1.000000
C°°
Volume
10 1.000257 20 1.001732
C°°
Volume
30 1.004234 40 1.007627
C°°
Volume
50 1.011877 60 1.016954
C°°
Volume
C°°
Volume
70 1.022384 90 1.035829 80 1.029003 100 1.043116
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
MISCELLANEOUS DATA
7-5
Table 7-4. WEIGHTS AND SPECIFIC GRAVITIES Weight lb per Specific Gravity cu ft
Substance ASHLAR, MASONRY Granite, syenite, gneiss . . . . Limestone, marble . . . . . . . Sandstone, bluestone . . . . .
165 160 140
2.3–3.0 2.3–2.8 2.1–2.4
MORTAR RUBBLE MASONRY Granite, syenite, gneiss . . . . Limestone, marble . . . . . . . Sandstone, bluestone . . . . .
155 150 130
2.2–2.8 2.2–2.6 2.0–2.2
DRY RUBBLE MASONRY Granite, syenite, gneiss . . . . Limestone, marble . . . . . . . Sandstone, bluestone . . . . .
130 125 110
1.9–2.3 1.9–2.1 1.8–1.9
BRICK MASONRY Pressed brick . . . . . . . . . Common brick . . . . . . . . . Soft brick . . . . . . . . . . . .
140 120 100
2.2–2.3 1.8–2.0 1.5–1.7
CONCRETE MASONRY Cement, stone, sand . . . . . Cement, slag. etc. . . . . . . . Cement, cinder, etc. . . . . . .
144 130 100
2.2–2.4 1.9–2.3 1.5–1.7
40–45 90 183 53–64 103 67–72 98–117 96 49–55
— — 2.7–3.2 — 1.4–1.9 — — — —
VARIOUS BUILDING MATERIALS Ashes. cinders . . . . . Cement, portland, loose Cement, portland, set . Lime, gypsum, loose . . Mortar, set . . . . . . . Slags, bank slag . . . . Slags, bank screenings Slags, machine slag . . Slags, slag sand . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
EARTH, ETC., EXCAVATED Clay, dry . . . . . . . . . . Clay, damp, plastic . . . . Clay and gravel, dry . . . . Earth, dry, loose . . . . . . Earth, dry, packed . . . . . Earth, moist, loose . . . . . Earth, moist, packed . . . . Earth, mud, flowing . . . . Earth, mud, packed . . . . Riprap, limestone . . . . . Riprap, sandstone . . . . . Riprap, shale . . . . . . . Sand, gravel, dry, loose . . Sand, gravel, dry, packed . Sand, gravel, wet . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 63 . 110 . 100 . 76 . 95 . 78 . 96 . 108 . 115 . 80–85 . 90 . 105 . 90–105 . 100–120 . 118–120
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
EXCAVATIONS IN WATER Sand or gravel . . . . . . . Sand or gravel and clay . . Clay . . . . . . . . . . . . River mud . . . . . . . . . Soil . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stone riprap . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
— — — — — —
60 65 80 90 70 65
Weight lb per Specific cu ft Gravity
Substance MINERALS Asbestos . . . . . . . Barytes . . . . . . . . Basalt . . . . . . . . . Bauxite . . . . . . . . Borax . . . . . . . . . Chalk . . . . . . . . . Clay, marl . . . . . . . Dolomite . . . . . . . . Feldspar, orthoclase . . Gneiss, serpentine . . Granite, syenite . . . . Greenstone, trap . . . Gypsum, alabaster . . Hornblende . . . . . . Limestone, marble . . . Magnesite . . . . . . . Phosphate rock, apatite Porphyry . . . . . . . . Pumice, natural . . . . Quartz, flint . . . . . . Sandstone, bluestone . Shale, slate . . . . . . Soapstone, talc . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153 281 184 159 109 137 137 181 159 159 175 187 159 187 165 187 200 172 40 165 147 175 169
2.1–2.8 4.50 2.7–3.2 2.55 1.7–1.8 1.8–2.6 1.8–2.6 2.9 2.5–2.6 2.4–2.7 2.5–3.1 2.8–3.2 2.3–2.8 3.0 2.5–2.8 3.0 3.2 2.6–2.9 0.37–0.90 2.5–2.8 2.2–2.5 2.7–2.9 2.6–2.8
STONE, QUARRIED, PILED Basalt, granite, gneiss . . . Limestone, marble, quartz . Sandstone . . . . . . . . . Shale . . . . . . . . . . . Greenstone, hornblende .
. . . . .
. . . . .
96 95 82 92 107
— — — — —
BITUMINOUS SUBSTANCES Asphaltum . . . . . . . . . . Coal, anthracite . . . . . . . Coal, bituminous . . . . . . Coal, lignite . . . . . . . . . Coal, peat, turf, dry . . . . . Coal, charcoal, pine . . . . . Coal, charcoal, oak . . . . . Coal, coke . . . . . . . . . . Graphite . . . . . . . . . . . Paraffine . . . . . . . . . . . Petroleum . . . . . . . . . . Petroleum, refined . . . . . . Petroleum, benzine . . . . . Petroleum, gasoline . . . . . Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tar, bituminous . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81 97 84 78 47 23 33 75 131 56 54 50 46 42 69 75
1.1–1.5 1.4–1.7 1.2–1.5 1.1–1.4 0.65–0.85 0.28–0.44 0.47–0.57 1.0–1.4 1.9–2.3 0.87–0.91 0.87 0.79–0.82 0.73–0.75 0.66–0.69 1.07–1.15 1.20
COAL AND COKE, PILED Coal, anthracite . . . . . Coal, bituminous, lignite . Coal, peat, turf . . . . . . Coal charcoal . . . . . . Coal coke . . . . . . . .
. . . . .
47–58 40–54 20–26 10–14 23–32
— — — — —
. . . . .
. . . . .
The specific gravities of solids and liquids refer to water at 4°°C, those of gases to air at 0°°C and 760 mm pressure. The weights per cubic foot are derived from average specific gravities, except where stated that weights are for bulk, heaped, or loose material, etc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7-6
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
Table 7-4 (cont.). WEIGHTS AND SPECIFIC GRAVITIES Weight lb per Specific Gravity cu ft
Substance METALS, ALLOYS, ORES Aluminum, cast, hammered Brass, cast, rolled . . . . . Bronze, 7.9 to 14% Sn . . . Bronze, aluminum . . . . . Copper, cast, rolled . . . . Copper ore, pyrites . . . . Gold, cast, hammered . . . Iron, cast, pig . . . . . . . Iron, wrought . . . . . . . . Iron, speigel-eisen . . . . . Iron, ferro-silicon . . . . . . Iron ore, hematite . . . . . Iron ore, hematite in bank . Iron ore, hematite loose . . Iron ore, limonite . . . . . . Iron ore, magnetite . . . . Iron slag . . . . . . . . . . Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . Lead ore, galena . . . . . . Magnesium, alloys . . . . . Manganese . . . . . . . . Manganese ore, pyrolusite Mercury . . . . . . . . . . Monel Metal . . . . . . . . Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . Platinum, cast, hammered . Silver, cast, hammered . . Steel, rolled . . . . . . . . Tin, cast, hammered . . . . Tin ore, cassiterite . . . . . Zinc, cast, rolled . . . . . . Zinc ore, blende . . . . . .
VARIOUS SOLIDS Cereals, oats . . . . Cereals, barley . . . Cereals, corn, rye . . Cereals, wheat . . . . Hay and Straw . . . . Cotton, Flax, Hemp . Fats . . . . . . . . . Flour, loose . . . . . Flour, pressed . . . . Glass, common . . . Glass, plate or crown Glass, crystal . . . . Leather . . . . . . . Paper . . . . . . . . Potatoes, piled . . . . Rubber, caoutchouc . Rubber goods . . . . Salt, granulated, piled Saltpeter . . . . . . . Starch . . . . . . . . Sulphur . . . . . . . Wool . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 165 2.55–2.75 . 534 8.4–8.7 . 509 7.4–8.9 . 481 7.7 . 556 8.8–9.0 . 262 4.1–4.3 . 1205 19.25–19.3 . 450 7.2 . 485 7.6–7.9 . 468 7.5 . 437 6.7–7.3 . 325 5.2 . 160–180 — . 130–160 — . 237 3.6–4.0 . 315 4.9–5.2 . 172 2.5–3.0 . 710 11.37 . 465 7.3–7.6 . 112 1.74–1.83 . 475 7.2–8.0 . 259 3.7–4.6 . 849 13.6 . 556 8.8–9.0 . 565 8.9–9.2 . 1330 21.1–21.5 . 656 10.4–10.6 . 490 7.85 . 459 7.2–7.5 . 418 6.4–7.0 . 440 6.9–7.2 . 253 3.9–4.2
bulk bulk bulk bulk bales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32 39 48 48 20 93 58 28 47 156 161 184 59 58 42 59 94 48 67 96 125 82
Weight lb per Specific Gravity cu ft
Substance TIMBER, U.S. SEASONED Moisture content by weight: Seasoned timber 15 to 20% Green timber up to 50% Ash, white, red . . . . . . Cedar, white, red . . . . . Chestnut . . . . . . . . . Cypress . . . . . . . . . Fir, Douglas spruce . . . Fir, eastern . . . . . . . . Elm, white . . . . . . . . Hemlock . . . . . . . . . Hickory . . . . . . . . . . Locust . . . . . . . . . . Maple, hard . . . . . . . Maple, white . . . . . . . Oak, chestnut . . . . . . Oak, live . . . . . . . . . Oak, red, black . . . . . . Oak, white . . . . . . . . Pine, Oregon . . . . . . . Pine, red . . . . . . . . . Pine, white . . . . . . . . Pine, yellow, long-leaf . . Pine, yellow, short-leaf . . Poplar . . . . . . . . . . Redwood, California . . . Spruce, white, black . . . Walnut, black . . . . . . . Walnut, white . . . . . . .
VARIOUS LIQUIDS Alcohol, 100% . . . . . . Acids, muriatic 40% . . . Acids, nitric 91% . . . . . Acids, sulphuric 87% . . — Lye, soda 66% . . . . . — Oils, vegetable . . . . . . — Oils, mineral, lubricants . — Water, 4°°C max. density — Water, 100°°C . . . . . . 1.47–1.50 Water, ice . . . . . . . . 0.90–0.97 Water, snow, fresh fallen 0.40–0.50 Water, sea water . . . . 0.70–0.80 2.40–2.60 2.45–2.72 2.90–3.00 0.86–1.02 GASES 0.70–1.15 Air, 0°°C 760 mm . . . . . — Ammonia . . . . . . . . 0.92–0.96 Carbon dioxide . . . . . 1.0–2.0 Carbon monoxide . . . . — Gas, illuminating . . . . . — Gas, natural . . . . . . . 1.53 Hydrogen . . . . . . . . 1.93–2.07 Nitrogen . . . . . . . . . 1.32 Oxygen . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40 22 41 30 32 25 45 29 49 46 43 33 54 59 41 46 32 30 26 44 38 30 26 27 38 26
0.62–0.65 0.32–.038 0.66 0.48 0.51 0.40 0.72 0.42–0.52 0.74–0.84 0.73 0.68 0.53 0.86 0.95 0.65 0.74 0.51 0.48 0.41 0.70 0.61 0.48 0.42 0.40–0.46 0.61 0.41
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
49 75 94 112 106 58 57 62.428 59.830 56 8 64
0.79 1.20 1.50 1.80 1.70 0.91–0.94 0.90–0.93 1.0 0.9584 0.88–0.92 .125 1.02–1.03
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
1.0 . .08071 0.5920 . .0478 .1234 1.5291 . 0.9673 . .0781 . .028–.036 0.35–0.45 . .038–.039 0.47–0.48 0.0693 . .00559 0.9714 . .0784 1.1056 . .0892
The specific gravities of solids and liquids refer to water at 4°°C, those of gases to air at 0°°C and 760 mm pressure. The weights per cubic foot are derived from average specific gravities, except where stated that weights are for bulk, heaped, or loose material, etc.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WEIGHTS, MEASURES, AND CONVERSION FACTORS
7-7
Table 7-5. WEIGHTS OF BUILDING MATERIALS Materials CEILINGS Channel suspended system Lathing and plastering Acoustical fiber tile
FLOORS Steel Deck Concrete-Reinforced 1 in. Stone Slag Lightweight Concrete-Plain 1 in. Stone Slag Lightweight Fills 1 inch Gypsum Sand Cinders Finishes Terrazzo 1 in. Ceramic or Quarry Tile 3⁄4-in. Linoleum 1⁄4-in. Mastic 3⁄4-in. Hardwood 7⁄8-in. Softwood 3⁄4-in.
ROOFS Copper or tin Corrugated steel 3-ply ready roofing 3-ply felt and gravel 5-ply felt and gravel Shingles Wood Asphalt Clay tile Slate 1⁄4 Sheathing Wood 3⁄4-in. Gypsum 1 in. Insulation 1 in. Loose Poured Rigid
Weight lb per sq ft
Materials
PARTITIONS Clay Tile 3 in. 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. Gypsum Block 2 in. See Manufacturer 3 in. 4 in. 5 in. 121⁄2 111⁄2 6 in. 6 to 10 Wood Studs 2×4 12–16 in. o.c. Steel partitions 12 Plaster 1 inch 11 Cement 3 to 9 Gypsum Lathing Metal 6 Gypsum Board 1⁄2-in. 8 4 1 See Partitions 1
13 10 1 9 4 1 2 ⁄2
WALLS Brick 4 in. 8 in. 12 in. Hollow Concrete Block (Heavy Aggregate) 4 in. 1 6 in. See Manufactuer 8 in. 1 121⁄2-in. 1 Hollow Concrete Block 5 ⁄2 6 (Light Aggregate) 4 in. 6 in. 2 8 in. 3 12 in. 9 to 14 Clay tile (Load Bearing) 10 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 3 12 in. 4 Stone 4 in. Glass Block 4 in. Window, Glass, Frame, & Sash 1⁄ Curtain Walls 2 2 Structural Glass 1 in. 1 1 ⁄2 Corrugated Cement Asbestos 1⁄4-in.
For weights of other materials used in building construction, see Table 7-4.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Weight lb per sq ft 17 18 28 34 40 91⁄2 101⁄2 121⁄2 14 181⁄2 2 4 10 5 1⁄ 2
2
40 80 120 30 43 55 80 21 30 38 55 25 30 33 45 55 18 8 See Manufacturer 15 3
7-8
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
SI UNITS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN
Although there are seven metric base units in the SI system, only four are currently used by AISC in structural steel design. These base units are listed in the Table 7-6.
Table 7-6. Base SI Units for Steel Design Quantity
Unit
Symbol
Length mass time temperature
meter kilogram second celcius
m kg s °C
Similarly, of the numerous decimal prefixes included in the SI system, only three are used in steel design; see Table 7-7.
Table 7-7. SI Prefixes for Steel Design Prefix
Order of Magnitude
Symbol
mega kilo milli
Expression
6
M k m
1,000,000 (one million) 1,000 (one thousand) 0.001 (one thousandth)
10 103 10− 3
In addition, three derived units are applicable to the present conversion. They are shown in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8. Derived SI Units for Steel Design Quantity
Name
Symbol
Expression
force stress energy
newton pascal joule
N Pa J
N = kg × m/s2 Pa = N/m2 J=N×m
Although specified in SI, the pascal is not universally accepted as the unit of stress. Because section properties are expressed in millimeters, it is more convenient to express stress in newtons per square millimeter (1 N/mm2 = 1 MPa). This is the practice followed in recent international structural design standards. It should be noted that the joule, as the unit of energy, is used to express energy absorption requirements for impact tests. Moments are expressed in terms of N×m. A summary of the conversion factors relating traditional U.S. units of measurement to the corresponding SI units is given in Table 7-9.
Table 7-9. Summary of SI Conversion Factors Multiply
by:
to obtain:
inch (in.) foot (ft) pound-mass (lb) pound-force (lbf) ksi ft-lbf psf plf
25.4 305 0.454 4.448 6.895 1.356 47.88 14.59
millimeters (mm) millimeters (mm) kilogram (kg) newton (N) N/mm2 joule (J)
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
N / m2 N/m
WEIGHTS, MEASURES, AND CONVERSION FACTORS
7-9
Note that fractions resulting from metric conversion should be rounded to whole millimeters. Common fractions of inches and their metric equivalent are in Table 7-10.
Table 7-10. SI Equivalents of Fractions of an Inch Fraction, in. 1⁄
16 1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
1
Exact conversion, mm
Rounded to: (mm)
1.5875 3.175 4.7625 6.35 7.9375 9.525 1.1125 12.7 15.875 19.05 22.225 25.4
2 3 5 6 8 10 11 13 16 19 22 25
Bolt diameters are taken directly from the ASTM Specifications A325M and A490M rather than converting the diameters of bolts dimensioned in inches. The metric bolt designations are in Table 7-11.
Table 7-11. SI Bolt Designation Designation
Diameter, mm
Diameter, in.
M16 M20 M22 M24 M27 M30 M36
16 20 22 24 27 30 36
0.63 0.79 0.87 0.94 1.06 1.18 1.42
The yield strengths of structural steels are taken from the metric ASTM Specifications. It should be noted that the yield points are slightly different from the traditional values. See Table 7-12. The modulus of elasticity of steel E is taken as 200,000 N/mm2. The shear modulus of elasticity of steel G is 77,000 N/mm2.
Table 7-12. SI Steel Yield Stresses ASTM Designation
2
Yield stress, N/mm
Yield stress, ksi
A36M
250
36.26
A572M Gr. 345 A588M
345
50.04
A852M
485
70.34
A514M
690
100.07
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7 - 10
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
Table 7-13. WEIGHTS AND MEASURES International System of Units (SI)a (Metric practice) BASE UNITS
Quantity length mass time electric current thermodynamic temperature amount of substance luminous intensity
SUPPLEMENTARY UNITS
Unit
Symbol
metre kilogram second ampere kelvin mole candela
m kg s A K mol cd
Symbol plane angle solid angle
Unit
Symbol
radian steradian
rad sr
DERIVED UNITS (WITH SPECIAL NAMES)
Quantity force pressure, stress energy, work, quantity of heat power
Unit
Symbol
Formula
newton pascal
N Pa
kg-m/s2 N/m2
joule watt
J W
N-m J/s
DERIVED UNITS (WITHOUT SPECIAL NAMES)
Quantity area volume velocity acceleration specific volume density
Unit
Formula
square metre cubic metre metre per second metre per second squared cubic metre per kilogram kilogram per cubic metre
m2 m3 m/s m/s2 m3/kg kg/m3
SI PREFIXES
Multiplication Factor 18
000 = 10 000 = 1015 000 = 1012 000 = 109 000 = 106 000 = 103 100 = 102 10 = 101 0.1 = 10−1 0.01 = 10−2 0.001 = 10−3 0.000 001 = 10−6 0.000 000 001 = 10−9 0.000 000 000 001 = 10−12 0.000 000 000 000 001 = 10−15 0.000 000 000 000 000 001 = 10−18
1 000 000 000 1 000 000 1 000 1
000 000 000 000 1
000 000 000 000 000 1
Prefix
Symbol
exa peta tera giga mega kilo hectob dekab decib centib milli micro nano pico femto atto
E P T G M k h da d c m µ n p f a
aRefer to ASTM E380 for more complete information on SI. bUse is not recommended.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WEIGHTS, MEASURES, AND CONVERSION FACTORS
7 - 11
Table 7-14. WEIGHTS AND MEASURES United States System LINEAR MEASURE
Inches
Feet
Yards
.02778 .08333 = 1.0 = .33333 = 1.0 12.0 = 1.0 = 3.0 36.0 = 5.5 = 16.5 198.0 = = 220.0 7,920.0 = 660.0 = 1,760.0 63,360.0 = 5,280.0
Rods
Furlongs
.0050505 = = .0606061 = = .1818182 = = = = 1.0 = = 40.0 = = 320.0
.00012626 .00151515 .00454545 .025 1.0 8.0
Miles = = = = = =
.00001578 .00018939 .00056818 .003125 .125 1.0
SQUARE AND LAND MEASURE
Sq. Inches 1.0 = 144.0 = 1,296.0 = 39,204.0 =
Square Feet .006944 1.0 9.0 272.25 43,560.0
Square Yards = = = = =
Square Rods
.000772 .111111 1.0 30.25 4,840.0 3,097,600.0
Acres
.03306 = 1.0 = 160.0 = = 102,400.0
Sq. Miles
.000207 = .00625 = .0000098 = = .0015625 = 1.0 = 1.0 = 640.0
AVOIRDUPOIS WEIGHTS
Grains
Drams
Ounces
Pounds
.000143 .002286 = = .003906 .0625 = = .0625 = 1.0 = 1.0 = 16.0 = = 2,000.0 = 32,000.0
.03657 = 1.0 1.0 27.34375 = 16.0 = 437.5 256.0 = 7,000.0 = 512,000.0 140,000,000.0
DRY MEASURE
Pints 1.0 2.0 16.0 51.42627 64.0
Quarts = = = = =
.5 1.0 8.0 25.71314 32.0
Pecks
Cubic Feet
Bushels
= .0625 = .01945 = .01563 = .125 = .03891 = .03125 = .31112 = .25 = 1.0 = .80354 = 3.21414 = 1.0 = 1.2445 = 1.0 = 4.0
LIQUID MEASURE
Gills 1.0 4.0 8.0 32.0
= = = =
Pints
Quarts
.25 1.0 2.0 8.0
= .125 = .5 = 1.0 = 4.0
U.S. Gallons
Cubic Feet
= .03125 = .00418 = .125 = .01671 = .250 = .03342 = .1337 = 1.0 7.48052 = 1.0
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Tons = .0000000714 = .00000195 = .00003125 = .0005 = 1.0
7 - 12
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
Table 7-15. SI CONVERSION FACTORSa Quantity Length
Area
Volume
Mass
Multiply
by
to obtain
inch foot yard mile (U.S. Statute)
25.400 0.305 0.914 1.609
millimetre metre metre kilometre
millimetre metre metre kilometre
39.370×10−3 3.281 1.094 0.621
inch foot yard mile
square inch square foot square yard square mile (U.S. Statute) acre acre
0.645×103 0.093 0.836 2.590 4.047×103 0.405
square millimetre square metre square metre square kilometre square metre hectare
mm m m km in ft yd mi mm2 m2 m2 km2 m2
square millimetre square metre square metre square kilometre square metre hectare
1.550×10−3 10.764 1.196 0.386 0.247×10−3 2.471
square inch square foot square yard square mile acre acre
cubic inch cubic foot cubic yard gallon (U.S. liquid) quart (U.S. liquid)
16.387×103 28.317×10−3 0.765 3.785 0.946
cubic millimetre cubic metre cubic metre litre litre
cubic millimetre cubic metre cubic metre litre litre
61.024×10−6 35.315 1.308 0.264 1.057
cubic inch cubic foot cubic yard gallon (U.S. liquid) quart (U.S. liquid)
in3 ft3 yd3 gal qt
ounce (avoirdupois) pound (avoirdupois) short ton
28.350 0.454 0.907×103
gram kilogram kilogram
g kg kg
gram kilogram kilogram
35.274×10−3 2.205 1.102×10−3
ounce (avoirdupois) pound (avoirdupois) short ton
aRefer to ASTM E380 for more complete information on SI. The conversion factors tabulated herein have been rounded.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
in2 ft2 yd2 mi2
mm3 m3 m3 l l
oz av lb av
WEIGHTS, MEASURES, AND CONVERSION FACTORS
7 - 13
Table 7-15 (cont.). SI CONVERSION FACTORSa Quantity Force
Multiply 0.278 4.448
c
c
3.597 0.224
c
0.113 1.356
c
8.851 0.738
c
pound-force per square inch foot of water (39.2 F) c inch of mercury (32 F)
6.895 2.989 3.386
c
c
0.145
c
newton newton
c
pound-force-inch pound-force-foot
c c
newton-metre newton-metre
c
Pressure, Stress
to obtain
ounce-force c pound-force
c
Bending Moment
by
c
c c
kilopascal
newton c newton
c
c
c
ounce-force pound-force
N N
lbf
newton-metre newton-metre
N-m N-m
pound-force-inch pound-force-foot
lbf-in lbf-ft
kilopascal kilopascal c kilopascal c
kPa kPa kPa
lbf/in2 pound-force per square inch c foot of water (39.2 F) c inch of mercury (32 F) c
c
0.335 0.295
kilopascal kilopascal
c
Energy, Work, cfoot-pound-force b Heat British thermal unit b calorie c kilowatt hour
1.356 1.055×103 4.187 3.600×106
c
joule joule c joule c joule
0.738 0.948×10−3 0.239 0.278×10−6
c
c
foot-pound-force/second British thermal unit per hour c horsepower (550 ft lbf/s)
1.356 0.293 0.746
c
c
0.738
c
c c
Power
b
watt
joule joule c joule c joule c
foot-pound-force British thermal unit c calorie c kilowatt hour c
watt watt c kilowatt c
foot-pound-force/ second c British thermal unit c per hour c horsepower c (550 ft-lbf/s)
J J J J ft-lbf Btu kW-h W W kW ft-lbf/s
c c
3.412
kilowatt
1.341
watt
Angle
17.453×10−3 57.296
c
degree radian
c
Temperature
c
degree Fahrenheit degree Celsius
c
t°°C = (t°°F − 32)/1.8 t°°F = 1.8 × t°°C + 32
c c c c
radian degree degree Celsius degree Fahrenheit
aRefer to ASTM E380 for more complete information on SI. bInternational Table.
The conversion factors tabulated herein have been rounded.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Btu/h hp
rad
7 - 14
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
BRACING FORMULAS b
b
p
d
e
a
a
c
h
h
w
w
p
d
e
c
w
w
f
m
f m n
To Find Formula
Given bpw bw bp bp bfp bmp bpw afw cmw
( b + p )2 + w 2 √ √ b 2 +w 2 2 b ÷ (2b + p)
f m d e a c h h h
bpw bnw bnp bnp bfnp bmnp bnpw afw cmw
b (b + p ) ÷ (2 b + p ) bf ÷ (2b + p ) bm ÷ (2b + p ) bw ÷ (2b + p ) aw ÷ f cw ÷ m
(b + p )2 + w 2 √ √ (b − n )2 + w 2
b (b − n ) ÷ (2 b + p − n ) b (b + p ) ÷ (2 b + p − n ) bf ÷ (2b + p − n ) bm ÷ (2b + p − n ) bw ÷ (2b + p − n ) aw ÷ f cw ÷ m
k = (log B − log T) ÷ no. of panels. Constant k plus the logarithm of any line equals the log of the corresponding line in the next panel below.
p
d
e a
f m d e a c h h h
PARALLEL BLOCKING
b k
To Find Formula
Given
c
h
v
m
w
f
a = TH ÷ (T + e + p ) b = Th ÷ (T + e + p )
bpw bkv
T
Formula
f
√ ( b + p )2 + w 2
m
√ (b + k) + v 2
A
a
2
bkpvw
d
bw (b + k) ÷ [v (b + p ) + w (b + k )]
bkpvw
e
bv (b + p ) ÷ [v (b + p ) + w (b + k )]
bfkpvw
a
fbv ÷ [v (b + p ) + w (b + k )]
bkmpvw
c
bmw ÷ [v (b + p ) + w (b + k )]
bkpvw
h
bvw ÷ [v(b + p ) + w (b + k )]
afw
h
aw ÷ f
cmv
h
cv ÷ m
d = ce ÷ (T + e)
b
d
Given
c=√ (1 ⁄2 T + 1 ⁄2 e )2 + a 2
To Find
c e A H
f
g
h
n m
log e = k + log T log f = k + log a log g = k + log b log m = k + log c log n = k + log d log p = k + log e
p A
B
The above method can be used for any number of panels. In the formulas for ‘‘a’’ and ‘‘b’’ the sum in parenthesis, which in the case shown is (T + e + p), is always composed of all the horizontal distances except the base.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
GEOMETRIC AND TRIGONOMETRIC DATA
7 - 15
PROPERTIES OF PARABOLA AND ELLIPSE PARABOLA
ELLIPSE (x 2 ÷ H 2) + (y 2 ÷ B 2) = 1
Abscissa = x
¼
pe c. of g.
0.424H
.375B
Ordinate = y Abscissa = x
c. of g.
r ete
r
Major semi-axis = H
Ordinate = y
rim pe
ete rim
0.6H
½
Height = H
Apex
.424B
½ base = B Minor semi-axis = B 2 Parameter P = B H y2 x= P y = xP
a
b
Area =
HB
D
Area = .7854Dd
d
c
d
e a
1
b
Construction
1
2 H
c
2 H
3
3
B
e
Construction 4
4
B
B
5
AREA BETWEEN PARABOLIC CURVE AND SECANT Apex Center of gravity (shaded area)
Any secant
m .4m
H h
b
b
2
2
b B
B
Length b may vary from 0 to 2B
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7 - 16
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
PROPERTIES OF THE CIRCLE Circumference = 6.28318 r = 3.14159 d Diameter = 0.31831 circumference Area = 3.14159r 2
x
π rA° = 0.017453 rA° 180 ° 180 ° a a Angle A ° = = 57.29578 r πr 4 b 2 + c2 Radius r = 8b A Chord c = 2 √ 2 br − b 2 = 2 r sin 2 1 c A Rise b = r − √ 4 r 2− c2 = tan 2 2 4 2 A 2 r − x 2 = 2 r sin =r+y−√ 4 y=b−r+√ r 2− x 2 Arc a =
b
y c A°
r
d
x=√ r 2− (r + y − b )2
Diameter of circle of equal periphery as square Side of square of equal periphery as circle Diameter of circle circumscribed about square Side of square inscribed in circle
= 1.27324 side of square = 0.78540 diameter of circle = 1.41421 side of square = 0.70711 diameter of circle
CIRCULAR SECTOR
r = radius of circle y = angle ncp in degrees Area of Sector ncpo = 1 ⁄2 (length of arc nop x r)
o n
p
y
= Area of Circle ×
r
c
y 360
= 0.0087266 × r 2 × y CIRCULAR SEGMENT
r = radius of circle x = chord b = rise Area of Segment nop = Area of Sector ncpo − Area of triangle ncp
o b n
c
p
=
x
(Length of arc nop × r) − x (r − b) 2
Area of Segment nop = Area of Circle − Area of Segment nop
s
VALUES FOR FUNCTIONS OF π π = 3.14159265359, log = 0.4971499 _ _ 1 = 0.3183099, log = 1.5028501 1π = 0.5641896, log = 1.7514251 √ π _ _ π 1 π3 = 31.0062767, log = 1.4914496 = 0.1013212, log = 1.0057003 = 0.0174533, log = 2.2418774 180 π2 _ 1 180 = 0.0322515, log = 2.5085504 = 57.2957795, log = 1.7581226 π = 1.7724539, log = 0.2485749 √ π π3 _ _ Note: Logs of fractions such as 1 .5028501 and 2 .5085500 may also be written 9.5028501 − 10 and 8.5085500 − 10 respectively π2 = 9.8696044, log = 0.9942997
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
GEOMETRIC AND TRIGONOMETRIC DATA
7 - 17
PROPERTIES OF GEOMETRIC SECTIONS A = d2
SQUARE
c=
Axis of moments through center
I= c
S=
d
r= d
Z=
SQUARE
d 2
d4 12
d3 6
d
= .288675 d
√ 12
d3 4
A = d2 c=d
Axis of moments on base
I= d
c
S= r=
d4 3
d3 3
d = .577350 d 3 √
d
SQUARE
A = d2
Axis of moments on diagonal
c= I= c
S= r=
d4 12
d3 = .117851 d 3 6 √2 d
d
A = bd
RECTANGLE Axis of moments through center
c= I=
c
S= r= b
= .707107 d
= .288675 d √ 12 3 2c d3 = = .235702 d 3 Z= 3 3√ 2
d
d
d 2 √
Z=
d 2
bd 3 12
bd 2 6
d
= .288675 d
√ 12
bd
2
4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7 - 18
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
PROPERTIES OF GEOMETRIC SECTIONS (cont.) RECTANGLE
A = bd c=d
Axis of moments on base
bd 3
I=
3
S=
c
d
bd 2 3
d
r=
3 √
= .577350 d
b
RECTANGLE
A = bd
Axis of moments on diagonal
bd √ b2 + d 2 b3 d 3
c=
c
I=
S= b d
RECTANGLE
c a
d
b
6√ b2 + d 2
bd √ 6 (b 2 + d2 )
r=
Axis of moments any line through center of gravity
6(b 2 + d 2) b2 d 2
A = bd b sin a + d cos a c= 2 bd (b 2 sin2 a + d 2cos2 a ) I= 12 bd (b 2 sin2 a + d 2cos2 a ) S= 6 (b sin a + d cos a ) r=
√
b2 sin2 a + d 2cos2 a 12
A = bd − b 1 d 1
Axis of moments through center
I= c
d
d1
12
S=
b1
r= b
d 2 bd 3− b 1d13
c=
HOLLOW RECTANGLE
Z=
bd 3− b 1d13 6d
√
bd 3− b1d13 12 A
bd 2 b 1d 12 4
−
4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
GEOMETRIC AND TRIGONOMETRIC DATA
7 - 19
PROPERTIES OF GEOMETRIC SECTIONS (cont.) A = b(d − d 1 ) EQUAL RECTANGLES
d
c=
Axis of moments through center of gravity
2
b(d 3− d 13 )
I=
d
d1
r= b
Axis of moments through center of gravity
d
d 3− d 13
12(d − d1)
b
t
b
2
y
c
y1
c1
t1 b1
2
4
r=
√
Z=
TRIANGLE
(d 2− d 12 )
A = bt + b 1 t1 1⁄ bt 2+ b t (d − 1 ⁄ t ) 11 2 21 c= A b 1t13 bt 3 I= + bty 2 + + b1 t1 y 12 12 12 l l S= S1 = c c1
d1
t1
√
Z=
UNEQUAL RECTANGLES
t
12
b(d 3− d 13 ) S= 6d
c
I A
t + t1 A d − 2 2
bd 2 2d c= 3 bd 3 I= 36 bd 2 S= 24 d r= = .235702 d √ 18 A=
Axis of moments through center of gravity
c d
b
TRIANGLE
c
d
b
bd 2 c=d bd 3 I= 12 bd 2 S= 12 d r= = .408248 d 6 √ A=
Axis of moments on base
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7 - 20
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
PROPERTIES OF GEOMETRIC SECTIONS (cont.) TRAPEZOID Axis of moments through center of gravity b1
c
A=
d (b + b 1) 2
c=
d (2 b + b 1 ) 3 (b + b 1 )
I=
d 3(b 2 + 4 bb1 + b 21 ) 36 (b + b1)
d
S= b
d 2(b 2 + 4 bb1 + b 21 )
12 (2 b + b 1)
d r= √ 2(b 2 + 4bb1 + b 21 ) 6(b + b 1) A=
πd 2 = π R 2 = .785398 d 2= 3.141593 R 2 4
c=
d =R 2
I=
π d 4 π R4 = = .049087 d 4= .785398 R 4 64 4
CIRCLE Axis of moments through center
c
R
S=
d
π d 3 π R3 = = .098175 d 3= .785398 R 3 32 4
r=
d R = 4 2
Z=
d3 6
π(d 2− d 12 ) = .785398 (d 2− d 12 ) 4 d c= 2 π(d 4− d 14 ) I= = .049087 (d 4− d 14 ) 64 π(d 4− d 14 ) d 4− d 14 S= = .098175 32 d d
A= HOLLOW CIRCLE Axis of moments through center
c d
d1
r=
HALF CIRCLE
√ d 2+ d 12 4
Z=
d 13 d − 6 6
A=
πR 2 = 1.570796 R 2 2
3
4 = .575587 R C = R 1 − 3π
Axis of moments through center of gravity
π
R
d
c
I = R4
8
S=
−
8
9π
= .109757 R 4
2 R 3 (9π − 64 ) = .190687 R 3 24 (3π − 4)
r=R
√ 9π 2 − 64 6π
= .264336 R
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
GEOMETRIC AND TRIGONOMETRIC DATA
7 - 21
PROPERTIES OF GEOMETRIC SECTIONS (cont.) 4 ab 3 2 m= a 5 16 3 I1 = a b 175 4 ab 3 I2 = 15 32 3 I3 = a b 105
A=
PARABOLA 2
a 1 m 3
1 3 b 2
2 ab 3 2 m= a 5 3 n= b 8 8 I1 = a3b 175 19 ab 3 I2 = 480 16 3 I3 = a b 105 2 I4 = ab 3 15
A=
HALF PARABOLA 4
2
n apex
a 1 m 3
1 3
2 b 4
COMPLEMENT OF HALF PARABOLA 2
1 ab 3 7 m= a 10 3 n= b 4 37 a3b I1 = 2,100 1 I2 = ab 3 80
A=
n apex
1
1
a
m
2 b
PARABOLIC FILLET IN RIGHT ANGLE 2
t 2√ 2 t b= 2 √ 1 A = t2 6 A=
m
1
1
b
n
t 2
m=n=
a
I 1 = I2 =
4 t 5 11
2,100
t4
t
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7 - 22
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
PROPERTIES OF GEOMETRIC SECTIONS (cont.) * HALF ELLIPSE
A=
1 π ab 2
m=
4a 3π
2
a 1
1 m 3
3
π 8 I1 = a 3 b − 8 9π I2 =
1 πab3 8
I3 =
1 a3 π 8 b
b 2
1 πab 4 4a m= 3π 4b n= 3π
A=
* QUARTER ELLIPSE 2
4
n
π 4 I1 = a 3 b − 16 9π
a 1 3
1 m 3
2 b
π 4 I2 = ab 3 − 16 9π I3 =
4
1 πa3b 16
I4 = π ab3
* ELLIPTIC COMPLEMENT 2
n
π A = ab 1 − 4
1
1 a
m=
a π 6 1 − 4
n=
b π 6 1 − 4
m
2 b
1
I1 = a 3 b
3
−
π − 16
1 π 36 1 − 4
1 π 1 I2 = ab 3 − − π 3 16 36 1 − 4
*To obtain properties of half circle, quarter circle, and circular complement, substitute a = b = R.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
GEOMETRIC AND TRIGONOMETRIC DATA
7 - 23
PROPERTIES OF GEOMETRIC SECTIONS (cont.) n = Number of sides 180 º φ=
REGULAR POLYGON
n
Axis of moments through center
1
a = 2√ R2 − R 21 a R= 2 sin φ a R1 = 2 tan φ 1 1 A = na 2 cot φ = nR 2 sin 2φ = nR 12 tan φ 4 2 A (6 R 2− a 2 ) A (12 R 12 + a 2 ) I1 = I2 = = 24 48
a
2
φ R R1
2 1
r1 = r2 =
√ √ 6 R 2− a 2
24
=
12 R 12 + a 2
48
ANGLE
tan 2φ =
Axis of moments through center of gravity
2K Iy − Ix
b 2 + ct d 2 + at y= 2 (b + c ) 2(b + c ) K = Product of Inertia about XjX and YjY A = t (b + c ) x =
b
=±
a
t
Z
1 3 1 IY = 3 I z = Ix Iw = Ix Ix =
Y W
90° φ
X y
c
d
X
t
Z
Y
(t (d − y)3 + by 3 − a (y − t)3) (t (b − x)3 + dx 3 − c (x − t)3 ) sin 2 φ + IY cos 2 φ + K sin2 φ cos 2 φ + IY sin 2 φ − K sin2 φ
K is negative when heel of angle, with respect to center of gravity, is in 1st or 3rd quadrant, positive when in 2nd or 4th quadrant.
W
x
abcdt 4(b + c)
BEAMS AND CHANNELS Transverse force oblique through center of gravity F
F
Y
Y x
x
φ
φ X
3
X 3
3
3
I3 = Ix sin2 φ + IY cos 2 φ I4 = Ix cos2 φ + IY sin2 φ y x fb = M sin φ + cos φ I I x Y
where M is bending moment due to force F.
X
X y
y Y
Y 4
4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7 - 24
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
TRIGONOMETRIC FORMULAS Radius AF = 1 TRIGOMETRIC FUNCTIONS G
H
sin A cos A
D L
tan A
B
cot A
c
a
b
C
sec A A
F
cosec A
RIGHT ANGLED TRIANGLES
a 2= c 2− b 2 b 2= c 2− a 2 c 2= a 2+ b 2
B c b
A
= sin 2 A + cos 2 A = sin A cosec A = cos A sec A = tan A cot A 1 cos A = = = cos A tan A = √ 1 − cos 2 A = BC cot A cosec A sin A 1 = = = sin A cot A = √ 1 − sin2 A = AC tan A sec A sin A 1 = = = sin A sec A = FD cos A cot A cos A 1 = = = cos A cosec A = HG sin A tan A tan A 1 = = = AD sin A cos A cot A 1 = = = AG cos A sin A
a C
Required Known
A
B
a tan A = b a sin A = c
b tan B = a a cos B = c
√ c −a
A, a
90° − A
a cot A
A, b
90° − A
b tan A
A, c
90° − A
c sin A
a, b a, c
OBLIQUE ANGLED TRIANGLES
a
c b
C
b
2
s=
a+b+c 2
K=
√
B
A
a
c
Area
√ a 2+b 2
ab
2 a√ c 2− a 2 2
2
a sin A
a 2cot A 2
b cos A
b2 tan A 2 c2 sin 2A 4
c cos A
a 2= b 2+ c 2− 2bc cos A b 2= a 2+ c 2− 2ac cos B c 2= a 2+ b 2− 2 ab cos C
( s − a ) (s − b ) ( s − c ) s
Required Known
A
a, b , c
K 1 tan A = 2 s−a
B
C
180° − (A + B )
a, A, B sin B =
a , b, A a, b, C tan A =
a sin C b − a cos C
b
c
K K 1 1 tan B = tan C = 2 2 s−b s−c
b sin A
a
Area
√ s (s − a) (s − b) (s − c) a sin B sin A
a sin C sin A b sin C sin B
√ a 2+ b 2− 2 ab cos C
ab sin C
2
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS
7 - 25
DECIMALS OF AN INCH For each 64th of an inch With millimeter equivalents Fractions
1⁄ ths 64
Decimal
Millimeters (Approx.)
—
1 2 3 4
.015625 .03125 .046875 .0625
0.397 0.794 1.191 1.588
5 6 7 8
.078125 .09375 .109375 .125
1.984 2.381 2.778 3.175
9 10 11 12
.140625 .15625 .171875 .1875
3.572 3.969 4.366 4.763
13 14 15 16
.203125 .21875 .234375 .250
5.159 5.556 5.953 6.350
17 18 19 20
.265625 .28125 .296875 .3125
6.747 7.144 7.541 7.938
21 22 23 24
.328125 .34375 .359375 .375
8.334 8.731 9.128 9.525
25 26 27 28
.390625 .40625 .421875 .4375
9.922 10.319 10.716 11.113
29 30 31 32
.453125 .46875 .484375 .500
11.509 11.906 12.303 12.700
1⁄ 32
—
1⁄ 16
—
3⁄ 32
— 1⁄ 8
—
5⁄ 32
—
3⁄ 16
—
7⁄ 32
— 1⁄ 4
—
9⁄ 32
—
5⁄ 16
— 11⁄
32
— 3⁄ 8 — 13⁄ 32
— 7⁄ 16
— 15⁄ 32
— 1⁄ 2
Decimal
Millimeters (Approx.)
33 34 35 36
.515625 .53125 .546875 .5625
13.097 13.494 13.891 14.288
37 38 39 40
.578125 .59375 .609375 .675
14.684 15.081 15.478 15.875
41 42 43 44
.640625 .65625 .671875 .6875
16.272 16.669 17.066 17.463
45 46 47 48
.703125 .71875 .734375 .750
17.859 18.256 18.653 19.050
49 50 51 52
.765625 .78125 .796875 .8125
19.447 19.844 20.241 20.638
53 54 55 56
.828125 .84375 .859375 .875
21.034 21.431 21.828 22.225
57 58 59 60
.890625 .90625 .921875 .9375
22.622 23.019 23.416 23.813
61 62 63 64
.953125 .96875 .984375 1.000
24.209 24.606 25.003 25.400
Fractions
1⁄ ths 64
— 17⁄ 32
— 9⁄ 16
— 19⁄ 32
— 5⁄ 8 — 21⁄ 32
— 11⁄ 16
— 23⁄ 32
— 3⁄ 4 — 25⁄ 32
— 13⁄ 16
— 27⁄ 32
— 7⁄ 8 — 29⁄ 32
— 15⁄ 16
— 31⁄ 32
— 1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7 - 26
MISCELLANEOUS DATA AND MATHEMATICAL INFORMATION
DECIMALS OF A FOOT For each 32nd of an inch Inch
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
0 .0026 .0052 .0078
.0833 .0859 .0885 .0911
.1667 .1693 .1719 .1745
.2500 .2526 .2552 .2578
.3333 .3359 .3385 .3411
.4167 .4193 .4219 .4245
.0104 .0130 .0156 .0182
.0938 .0964 .0990 .1016
.1771 .1797 .1823 .1849
.2604 .2630 .2656 .2682
.3438 .3464 .3490 .3516
.4271 .4297 .4323 .4349
5⁄ 16 11⁄ 32
.0208 .0234 .0260 .0286
.1042 .1068 .1094 .1120
.1875 .1901 .1927 .1953
.2708 .2734 .2760 .2786
.3542 .3568 .3594 .3620
.4375 .4401 .4427 .4453
3⁄ 8 13⁄ 32 7⁄ 16 15⁄ 32
.0313 .0339 .0365 .0391
.1146 .1172 .1198 .1224
.1979 .2005 .2031 .2057
.2812 .2839 .2865 .2891
.3646 .3672 .3698 .3724
.4479 .4505 .4531 .4557
1⁄ 2 17⁄ 32 9⁄ 16 19⁄ 32
.0417 .0443 .0469 .0495
.1250 .1276 .1302 .1328
.2083 .2109 .2135 .2161
.2917 .2943 .2969 .2995
.3750 .3776 .3802 .3828
.4583 .4609 .4635 .4661
5⁄ 8 21⁄ 32 11⁄ 16 23⁄ 32
.0521 .0547 .0573 .0599
.1354 .1380 .1406 .1432
.2188 .2214 .2240 .2266
.3021 .3047 .3073 .3099
.3854 .3880 .3906 .3932
.4688 .4714 .4740 .4766
3⁄ 4 25⁄ 32 13⁄ 16 27⁄ 32
.0625 .0651 .0677 .0703
.1458 .1484 .1510 .1536
.2292 .2318 .2344 .2370
.3125 .3151 .3177 .3203
.3958 .3984 .4010 .4036
.4792 .4818 .4844 .4870
7⁄ 8 29⁄ 32 15⁄ 16 31⁄ 32
.0729 .0755 .0781 .0807
.1563 .1589 .1615 .1641
.2396 .2422 .2448 .2472
.3229 .3255 .3281 .3307
.4063 .4089 .4115 .4141
.4896 .4922 .4948 .4974
1⁄
1⁄ 3⁄
32 16 32
1⁄ 8
5⁄ 3⁄ 7⁄
32 16 32
1⁄ 4
9⁄
32
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS
7 - 27
DECIMALS OF A FOOT (cont.) For each 32nd of an inch Inch
6
7
8
9
10
11
0 1⁄ 32 1⁄ 16 3⁄ 32
.5000 .5026 .5052 .5078
.5833 .5859 .5885 .5911
.6667 .6693 .6719 .6745
.7500 .7526 .7552 .7578
.8333 .8359 .8385 .8411
.9167 .9193 .9219 .9245
1⁄ 8 5⁄ 32 3⁄ 16 7⁄ 32
.5104 .5130 .5156 .5182
.5938 .5964 .5990 .6016
.6771 .6797 .6823 .6849
.7604 .7630 .7656 .7682
.8438 .8464 .8490 .8516
.9271 .9297 .9323 .9349
1⁄ 4 9⁄ 32 5⁄ 16 11⁄ 32
.5208 .5234 .5260 .5286
.6042 .6068 .6094 .6120
.6875 .6901 .6927 .6953
.7708 .7734 .7760 .7786
.8542 .8568 .8594 .8620
.9375 .9401 .9427 .9453
3⁄
.5313 .5339 .5365 .5391
.6146 .6172 .6198 .6224
.6979 .7005 .7031 .7057
.7813 .7839 .7865 .7891
.8646 .8672 .8698 .8724
.9479 .9505 .9531 .9557
.5417 .5443 .5469 .5495
.6250 .6276 .6302 .6328
.7083 .7109 .7135 .7161
.7917 .7943 .7969 .7995
.8750 .8776 .8802 .8828
.9583 .9609 .9635 .9661
.5521 .5547 .5573 .5599
.6354 .6380 .6406 .6432
.7188 .7214 .7240 .7266
.8021 .8047 .8073 .8099
.8854 .8880 .8906 .8932
.9688 .9714 .9740 .9766
.5625 .5651 .5677 .5703
.6458 .6484 .6510 .6536
.7292 .7318 .7344 .7370
.8125 .8151 .8177 .8203
.8958 .8984 .9010 .9036
.9792 .9818 .9844 .9870
.5729 .5755 .5781 .5807
.6563 .6589 .6615 .6641
.7396 .7422 .7448 .7474
.8229 .8255 .8281 .8307
.9063 .9089 .9115 .9141
.9896 .9922 .9948 .9974
13⁄
8 32
7⁄ 16 15⁄ 32 1⁄
17⁄
2 32
9⁄ 16 19⁄ 32 5⁄
21⁄
8 32
11⁄ 16 23⁄ 32 3⁄
25⁄ 13⁄ 27⁄ 7⁄
29⁄ 15⁄ 31⁄
4 32 16 32 8 32 16 32
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8-1
PART 8 BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 BOLTED CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 High-Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Non-High-Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Design Strength of Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 ANCHOR RODS OR THREADED RODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88 OTHER MECHANICAL FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92 WELDED CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98 Fillet Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-118 Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122 Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125 Flare Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127 Plug and Slot Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128 Design Strength of Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-129 Prequalified Welded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-131 ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-154 CONSTRUCTION COMBINING BOLTS AND WELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-211 CONNECTED ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-212 Design Strength of Connecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-212 Members with Copes, Blocks, or Cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-225 Other Elements in Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-237 REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-238
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8-2
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OVERVIEW
8-3
OVERVIEW
Part 8 contains general information, design considerations, examples, and design aids for the design of bolts, anchor rods, other mechanical fasteners, welds, and connected elements in connections. It is based on the provisions of the 1993 LRFD Specification. Supplementary information may also be found in the Commentary on the LRFD Specification. Following is a detailed overview of the topics addressed. BOLTED CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 High-Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Alternative Design Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Compatible Nuts and Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Economical Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Entering and Tightening Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Snug-Tightened and Fully Tensioned Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Inspection of Fully Tensioned High-Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Galvanizing High-Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Reuse of High-Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Non-High-Strength Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Entering and Tightening Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Design Strength of Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Bolt Shear Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Bolt Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Slip Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Eccentricity in the Plane of the Faying Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Instantaneous Center of Rotation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Elastic Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Eccentricity Normal to the Plane of the Faying Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Case I—Neutral Axis Not at Center of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Case II—Neutral Axis at Center of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 ANCHOR RODS OR THREADED RODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88 Minimum Edge Distance and Embeddment Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88 Welding to Anchor Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8-4
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Hooked Anchor Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89 Headed Anchor Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90 OTHER MECHANICAL FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92 Clevises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92 Turnbuckles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92 Sleeve Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93 Recessed-Pin Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93 Cotter Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93 WELDED CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98 Weldability of Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98 Chemical Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99 Grain Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 Structural Welding Materials and Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101 SMAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102 SAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105 GMAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106 FCAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106 ESW and EGW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-107 Thermal Cutting and Air-Arc Gouging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108 VT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109 DPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109 MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109 RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-110 UT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-110 Economical Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-111 Welding Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-112 Weld Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-112 Weld Metal Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-112 Deposit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113 Prior Qualification of Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113 Minimizing Weld Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113 Lamellar Tearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113 Fatigue Cracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OVERVIEW
8-5
Notch Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114 Impact Toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114 Arc Strikes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114 Other Considerations in Welded Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115 Matching Electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115 Welding Shapes from ASTM A6 Groups 4 and 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115 Intersecting Welds and Triaxial Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-116 Painting Welded Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117 Clearances for Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-118 Fillet Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-118 Effective Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-118 Minimum Effective Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-119 Minimum Fillet Weld Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-119 Maximum Fillet Weld Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-119 End Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-120 Fillet Welds in Holes or Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-121 Other Limitations on Fillet Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-121 Minimum Shelf Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122 Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122 Extension, Runoff, Backing, and Spacer Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122 Weld Access Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125 Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125 Effective Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127 Intermittent Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127 Flare Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127 Effective Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128 Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128 Plug and Slot Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128 Design Strength of Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-129 Weld Metal Design Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-129 Base Metal Design Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-129 Prequalified Welded Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-131 ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-154 Eccentricity in the Plane of the Faying Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-154 Instantaneous Center of Rotation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-154 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8-6
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Elastic Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-159 Eccentricity Normal to the Plane of the Faying Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-211 CONSTRUCTION COMBINING BOLTS AND WELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-211 CONNECTED ELEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-212 Economical Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-212 Design Strength of Connected Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-212 Shear Yielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-212 Shear Rupture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-212 Block Shear Rupture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-212 Tension Yielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-225 Tension Rupture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-225 Members with Copes, Blocks, or Cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-225 Flexural Yielding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-225 Local Web Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-226 Lateral Torsional Buckling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-229 Other Elements In Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-237 Shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-237 Fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-237 REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-238
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
8-7
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION High-Strength Bolts
LRFD Specification Section A3.3 permits the use of ASTM A325 and A490 high-strength bolts. ASTM A325 bolts are available in diameters from 1⁄2-in. to 11⁄2-in. in two types. Type 1 medium-carbon-steel bolts are for general purpose use and use in elevated temperatures; they may be galvanized. Type 3 bolts offer improved atmospheric corrosion resistance and weathering characteristics similar to those of ASTM A242 or A588 steels. ASTM A490 bolts are available in diameters from 1⁄2-in. to 11⁄2-in. in two types. Type 1 bolts are alloy-steel bolts. Type 3 are alloy-steel bolts with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance and weathering characteristics similar to those of ASTM A242 or A588 steels. ASTM A490 bolts should not be galvanized and caution should be exercised if used in highly corrosive environments. Type 2 (martensite) bolts, popular for many years, have been discontinued. Information on this type can be found in previous editions of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction. When bolts of diameter larger than 11⁄2 in. are required, ASTM A449 bolts are permitted to be used for snug-tightened and fully tensioned bearing-type connections; this material is not recognized in LRFD Specification Section A3.3 for use in slip-critical connections nor for use as bolts in diameters not greater than 11⁄2 in. ASTM A449 bolts may be galvanized. When an ASTM A449 bolt is used in tension or bearing and is tightened in excess of 50 percent of its minimum specified tensile strength, LRFD Specification Section J3.1 requires that an ASTM F436 washer be installed under the head of the bolt. The nut must be from the approved list in RCSC Specification Section 2(c). Since ASTM A325 nuts and washers for use with high-strength bolts are available only up to 11⁄2-in. diameter, reference should be made to ASTM A563 for nuts and ASTM F436 for washers to select suitable sizes and grades for the intended application. While ASTM A449 seems to be the equal of ASTM A325, there are two important differences which should be noted. First, ASTM A449 bolts are not produced to the same inspection and quality assurance requirements as ASTM A325 bolts. Second, ASTM A449 bolts are not produced to the same heavy-hex head and nut dimensions. Alternative Design Bolts
RCSC Specification Section 2d permits the use of other fasteners when they meet the requirements as outlined therein. Figure 8-1 shows a tension-control or “twist-off” bolt which is installed with a special tool which twists off the splined end when the proper
Fig. 8-1. Tension-control or “twist-off” bolt. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8-8
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-1. Compatability of High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, Washers F436 Washer Grade
ASTM Bolt Desig.
Type
Coating
Recommended
Suitable
Recommended
A325
1
plain
C
C3, D, DH, DH3
1
galvanized
DH
—
1
3
plain
C3
DH3
3
1
plain
DH
DH3
1
3
plain
DH3
—
3
1
plain
A
C, C3, D, DH, DH3
1
galvanized
DH
D
1
A490
A449
A563 Heavy Hex Nut Grade
bolt tension is achieved. Tension-control bolts are commonly available to meet the specifications of ASTM A325 and A490. Compatible Nuts and Washers
The compatibility of ASTM A563 nuts and F436 washers with the aforementioned high-strength bolt specifications is as listed in Table 8-1. Alternatively, appropriate ASTM A194 nuts may be used. RCSC Specification Section 7c gives general requirements for when washers are required for high-strength bolts. Economical Considerations
Since the material cost per unit of strength of ASTM A490 bolts is comparable with that of ASTM A325 bolts, it might seem more cost effective to reduce the number of bolts in a given connection by specifying ASTM A490 bolts. However, ASTM A490 bolts are more difficult to tighten and raise inventory and quality control issues associated with the use of multiple fastener grades; mixing of ASTM A325 and A490 bolts of the same diameter should be avoided to assure that the ASTM A490 bolts are installed in the proper location. Thus, the net benefit of specifying ASTM A490 bolts may be less than expected; cost ratios should be considered by the designer. Similarly, cost ratios between grades of alternative design bolts will vary from those of conventional high-strength bolts. Thus, the decision regarding fastener selection will vary accordingly. Regardless of the bolt type selected, the normal sizes of 3⁄4-in., 7⁄8-in., and 1-in. diameter are usually preferred. Diameters above one inch are not commonly available, nor are they practical since special tools may be required to achieve fully tensioned installation. Bearing-type connections should be specified whenever possible. Slip-critical connections with coatings other than clean mill scale incur appreciable extra costs associated with blasting, painting, drying, assembling, reblasting, and abrasion touch-up. If slipcritical connections are required for the proper serviceablity of the structure, care should be taken to avoid requiring the faying surfaces to be masked as this also contributes great AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
8-9
expense; coatings which provide a Class A or Class B slip coefficient may be an economical alternative to masking. Dimensions and Weights
ASTM A325 and A490 bolts, A563 nuts, and F436 washers are given identifying marks as illustrated in Figure 8-2. A detailed description of identifying marks may be found in the RCSC Specification. Dimensions of ASTM A325 and A490 bolts, A563 nuts, and F436 washers are given and illustrated in Table 8-2. Threading dimensions of highstrength bolts are given in Table 8-7. Weights of conventional ASTM A325 and A490 bolts, A563 nuts, and F436 washers are given in Table 8-3. For dimensions and weights of tension-control ASTM A325 and A490 bolts, refer to manufacturers’ literature or IFI. For dimensions and weights of ASTM A449 bolts, refer to Table 8-6. Threads for high-strength bolts may be rolled or cut. Note that thread lengths for high-strength bolts are shorter than those for non-high-strength bolts. This allows the threads to be excluded from the shear plane when the thickness of the connected ply closest to the nut is as shown in Figure 8-3. While the RCSC Specification permits some thread run-out into the shear plane, it is important to provide sufficient thread to avoid jamming the nut into the run-out when tightening the bolt. Inspection controversy will be reduced by recognizing that bolts intentionally have a limited thread length, a manufacturing tolerance, and limited length increments; as with all manufactured items, dimensional tolerances must be considered. The RCSC Specification recognizes these tolerances in two ways. First, additional washers are permitted to be used under the nut or under the head when circumstances permit. Second, there is no specified bolt “stick-through” requirement since only fullthread engagement of the nut is required; from RCSC Specification Section 2(b), “…The length of bolts shall be such that the end of the bolt will be flush with or outside the face of the nut when properly installed.” A requirement for “stick-through”, sometimes written in project specifications, increases the risk of jamming the nut on the thread run-out, and thus, of preventing tightening. A “stick-through” requirement will not enhance the performance of the bolt and should not be included in a project specification. Alternatively, ASTM A325 bolts with length less than or equal to four times the nominal diameter may be ordered as fully threaded with the designation ASTM A325 T. Fully threaded ASTM A325 T bolts are not for use in bearing-type X connections since it would be impossible to exclude the threads from the shear plane. While this supplementary provision exists for ASTM A325 bolts, there is no similar supplementary provision made in ASTM A490 for full-length threading. The ordered length of ASTM A325 and A490 bolts should be calculated as the grip (see Figure 8-2) plus the thickness of the washer(s) plus the allowance from Table 8-2. A thickness of 5⁄32-in. for circular washers and 5⁄16-in. for beveled washers should be provided per washer used; refer to the RCSC Specification for washer requirements. This total should be rounded to the next higher one-quarter inch. Note that bolts longer than five inches are generally available only in 1⁄2-in. increments, except by special arrangement with the manufacturer or vendor. While longer lengths may be ordered, an 8-in. length is generally the maximum stock length available. Clipped washers are available for use in areas of tight clearance.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Type 1
Type 3*
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
HARDENED WASHER (Beveled) 2
12
3
Hex head
Marking for washer used with Type 3 bolt
ASTM A490 BOLT
Grip
ASTM A325 BOLT
Washer face
Type 1 NUT MARKING
Type 3*
3
Alt. marking “D” or “DH” for type 1 “DH3” for Type 3
Nut marking “DH” for Type 1 “DH3” for Type 3
X
*Bolt heads, nuts, & washers shall include manuf. identification symbol. The manuf. may also add other marks indicating weathering grade.
X Hex Nut* Type 1 and 3*
See RCSC Specification for rules governing use of hardened washers
Hex nut
Standard marking indicates Grade C
Fig. 8-2. Identifying high-strength bolts, nuts, and washers.
HARDENED* WASHER (Plain)
Type 1
Type 3* Optional Clip
A490
A490
Standard bolt marking
BOLT HEAD MARKING
A325
A325
Three radial lines @ 120°, optional
See RCSC Specification for rules governing use of washers Grip
Dia. Dia.
8 - 10 BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 11
Table 8-2. Dimensions of High-Strength Fasteners, in. E I.D.
Thread Length
O.D.
T
A325 E I.D.
H
F
Bolt Length
H W Nut may be chamfered on both faces
A T
A
Nominal Bolt Diameter, in.
A563 Nutsb
A325 and A490 Boltsa
Measurement Width Across Flats F Height H Thread Length Bolt Lengthf =Grip + → Width Across Flats W Height H
F436 Square or Rect. Washersc,e
F436 Circular Washersc
Nom. Outside Diameter OD
a b c
d e f
Nom. Inside Diameter ID Thckns. T
1⁄ 2
5⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
7⁄
11 ⁄16
11 ⁄4
16
25 ⁄
15 ⁄
1
11 ⁄4
13 ⁄8
11 ⁄2
13 ⁄4
2
2
21 ⁄4
21 ⁄4
7⁄
1
11 ⁄8
11 ⁄4
11 ⁄2
15 ⁄8
13 ⁄4
17 ⁄8
5⁄
11⁄
8
16
7⁄ 31 ⁄
64
8
32
1
1 1 ⁄8
17 ⁄16
15 ⁄8
113 ⁄16
35 ⁄
39 ⁄
64
64
11⁄
16
1 1 ⁄4
1 3 ⁄8
2
23⁄16
23 ⁄8
27 ⁄
15 ⁄
25 ⁄
32
32
1 1 ⁄2
16
8
11 ⁄16
11 ⁄4
17 ⁄16
15 ⁄8
113 ⁄16
2
23⁄16
23 ⁄8
64
39 ⁄
47 ⁄
55 ⁄
64
63 ⁄
17⁄64
17⁄32
111⁄32
115 ⁄32
13 ⁄4
2
21 ⁄4
21 ⁄2
23 ⁄4
3
11 ⁄8
11 ⁄4
13 ⁄8
11 ⁄2
15 ⁄8
64
11 ⁄16
15 ⁄16
17 ⁄
11⁄
32
16
64
115 ⁄32 13 ⁄
16
15 ⁄
16
64
Max.
0.097
0.122
0.122
0.136
0.136
0.136
0.136
0.136
0.136
Min.
0.177
0.177
0.177
0.177
0.177
0.177
0.177
0.177
0.177
1
1 3⁄32
17⁄32
15⁄16
Min. Edge Distance E d
7⁄
Min. Side Dimension A
13⁄4
13 ⁄4
13 ⁄4
13 ⁄4
13 ⁄4
21 ⁄4
21 ⁄4
21 ⁄4
21 ⁄4
5⁄
5⁄
5⁄
5⁄
5⁄
5⁄
5⁄
5⁄
5⁄
Mean Thckns. T Taper in Thickness Min. Edge Distance E d
16
16
2:12 7⁄
16
9⁄
16
16
2:12 9⁄
16
21 ⁄
32
16
25 ⁄
32
16
2:12
2:12
21 ⁄
25 ⁄
32
32
7⁄
8
16
2:12 7⁄
8
16
16
16
16
2:12
2:12
2:12
2:12
1
13⁄32
17⁄32
15⁄16
Tolerances as specified in ASTM A325 and A490. Tolerances as specified in ASTM A563. ASTM F436 Washer Tolerances, in.: Nominal Outside Diameter Nominal Diameter of Hole Flatness: max. deviation from straight-edge placed on cut side shall not exceed Concentricity: center of hole to outside diameter (full indicator runout) Burr shall not project above immediately adjacent washer surface more than For clipped washers only. For use with American standard beams (S) and channels (C). Tabular value does not include thickness of washer(s).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
−1/32; +1/32 −0; +1/32 0.010 0.030 0.010
8 - 12
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-3. Weights of High-Strength Fasteners, pounds per 100 count Nominal Bolt Diameter, in. 1⁄ 2
5⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
1 1 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄4
1 3 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄2
1 11 ⁄4 11 ⁄2 13 ⁄4
16.5 17.8 19.2 20.5
29.4 31.1 33.1 35.3
47.0 49.6 52.2 55.3
— 74.4 78.0 81.9
— 104 109 114
— — 148 154
— — 197 205
— — — 261
— — — 333
2 21 ⁄4 21 ⁄2 23 ⁄4
21.9 23.3 24.7 26.1
37.4 39.8 41.7 43.9
58.4 61.6 64.7 67.8
86.1 90.3 94.6 98.8
119 124 130 135
160 167 174 181
212 220 229 237
270 279 290 300
344 355 366 379
3 31 ⁄4 31 ⁄2 33 ⁄4
27.4 28.8 30.2 31.6
46.1 48.2 50.4 52.5
70.9 74.0 77.1 80.2
103 107 111 116
141 146 151 157
188 195 202 209
246 255 263 272
310 321 332 342
391 403 416 428
4 41 ⁄4 41 ⁄2 43 ⁄4
33.0 34.3 35.7 37.1
54.7 56.9 59.0 61.2
83.3 86.4 89.5 92.7
120 124 128 133
162 168 173 179
216 223 230 237
280 289 298 306
353 363 374 384
441 453 465 478
5 51 ⁄4 51 ⁄2 53 ⁄4
38.5 39.9 41.2 42.6
63.3 65.5 67.7 69.8
95.8 98.9 102 105
137 141 146 150
184 190 196 201
244 251 258 265
315 324 332 341
395 405 416 426
490 503 515 527
6 61 ⁄4 61 ⁄2 63 ⁄4
44.0 — — —
71.9 74.1 76.3 78.5
108 111 114 118
154 158 163 167
207 212 218 223
272 279 286 293
349 358 367 375
437 447 458 468
540 552 565 577
7 71 ⁄4 71 ⁄2 73 ⁄4
— — — —
80.6 82.8 84.9 87.1
121 124 127 130
171 175 179 183
229 234 240 246
300 307 314 321
384 392 401 410
479 489 500 510
589 602 614 626
8 81 ⁄4 81 ⁄2 83 ⁄4
— — — —
89.2 — — —
133 — — —
187 192 196 —
251 257 262 —
328 335 342 —
418 427 435 444
521 531 542 552
639 651 664 676
9
—
—
—
—
—
—
453
563
689
100, Conventional A325 or A490 Bolts with A563 Nuts
Bolt Length, in.
Per inch add’tl. add
5.5
8.6
12.4
16.9
22.1
28.0
34.4
42.5
49.7
100, F436 Circular Washers
2.1
3.6
4.8
7.0
9.4
11.3
13.8
16.8
20.0
100, F436 Square Washers
23.1
22.4
21.0
20.2
19.2
34.0
31.6
31.2
32.9
This table conforms to weight standards adopted by the Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI), updated for washer weights.
Entering and Tightening Clearances
The assembly of high-strength bolted connections requires clearance for entering and tightening the bolts with an impact wrench. The clearance requirements for conventional high-strength bolts are as given in Table 8-4. When high-strength tension-control bolts are specified, the entering and tightening clearances are as specified in Table 8-5. Snug-Tightened and Fully Tensioned Installation
When subjected to shear only, high-strength bolts may be used in snug-tightened bearing-type, fully tensioned bearing-type, and slip-critical connections. When subjected AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 13
Table 8-4. Entering and Tightening Clearances, in. Conventional ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts Aligned Bolts
C2
socket H1 C1
Nominal Bolt Dia., Socket in. Dia., in.
H2 C1 C1
5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
H2
1
C3
11⁄
8
fillet
11⁄
4
1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
13 ⁄4 21 ⁄4 21 ⁄2 25 ⁄8 27 ⁄8 31 ⁄8 31 ⁄4 31 ⁄2
C3 H1 25 ⁄
15 ⁄ 35 ⁄ 39 ⁄ 11⁄
64 32 64 64
16 25 ⁄ 32 27 ⁄ 32 15 ⁄ 16
H2
C1
11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2 15 ⁄8 17 ⁄8 2 21 ⁄8 21 ⁄4
1 11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8 17 ⁄16 19 ⁄16 111⁄16 13 ⁄4 15 ⁄16
C2 11⁄
16 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8 15 ⁄ 16 1 1 ⁄16 1 1 ⁄8 11 ⁄4 15 ⁄16
Circular Clipped 11⁄
16 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
9⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 13 ⁄ 16 7⁄ 8
1 11 ⁄8 11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2
1 11 ⁄8 11 ⁄4 15 ⁄16
Staggered Bolts Stagger P, in. Nominal Bolt Diameter, in.
F
5⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
1 1 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8
15 ⁄8 11 ⁄2 11 ⁄2 17 ⁄16
115 ⁄16 17 ⁄8
23 ⁄16
11⁄
11 ⁄
113 ⁄
2
C1 P
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
2
2 1 ⁄8 2 1 ⁄4 2 3 ⁄8 2 1 ⁄2 2 5 ⁄8 2 3 ⁄4 2 7 ⁄8
F
3
3 1 ⁄8 3 1 ⁄4 3 3 ⁄8
C1 = tightening clearance
4
11 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 11 ⁄8 1
13 ⁄
16
16
13 ⁄4 111⁄16 19 ⁄16 11 ⁄
2
13 ⁄8 11 ⁄4 11 ⁄8 7⁄
8
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
1 3 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄2
21 ⁄8 21 ⁄16 2 115 ⁄16
25 ⁄16 25 ⁄16 21 ⁄4 23 ⁄16
29 ⁄16 29 ⁄16 21 ⁄2
213 ⁄16 23 ⁄4
3 3
33 ⁄4
113 ⁄
21 ⁄
27 ⁄
16
8
16
215 ⁄16 27 ⁄8 213 ⁄16
31 ⁄4 33 ⁄16 33 ⁄16 31 ⁄8
27 ⁄16 25 ⁄16 21 ⁄8 21 ⁄16
23 ⁄4 27 ⁄8 21 ⁄2 23 ⁄8
31 ⁄16 3 27 ⁄8 213 ⁄16
2 17 ⁄8 13 ⁄4 15 ⁄8
21 ⁄4 21 ⁄8 2 115 ⁄16
211⁄16 21 ⁄2 23 ⁄8 21 ⁄4
13 ⁄8 11 ⁄16
13 ⁄4 19 ⁄16 15 ⁄16
21 ⁄8 2 17 ⁄8 11 1 ⁄16
4
111⁄16 19 ⁄16 11 ⁄2
2 17 ⁄8 13 ⁄4
23 ⁄8 21 ⁄4 21 ⁄8
211⁄16 25 ⁄8 21 ⁄2
13 ⁄8 13 ⁄16
15 ⁄8 11 ⁄2 13 ⁄8 13 ⁄16
2 115 ⁄16 17 ⁄8 13 ⁄4
7⁄
15 ⁄8 11 ⁄2 11 ⁄4
15 ⁄
16
8
15 ⁄
16
31⁄
2
standard socket
23 ⁄
3 5 ⁄8 3 3 ⁄4 3 7 ⁄8
4 Notes: H1 = height of head, in. H2 = maximum shank extension,* in. C1 = clearance for tightening, in. C2 = clearance for entering, in. C3 = clearance for fillet,* in. P = bolt stagger, in. F = clearance for tightening staggered bolts, in. *Based on one standard hardened washer.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
215 ⁄
16
13 ⁄8
8 - 14
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-5. Entering and Tightening Clearances, in. Tension-Control ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts Aligned Bolts Nominal Bolt Dia, in.
Tools
C3 H1
3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
C1
H2
1
1
2 /2
C1
C2
Circular Clipped
2
16 5⁄ 8
13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2 13 ⁄4
17 ⁄8 17 ⁄8 17 ⁄8
7⁄
8
1 11 ⁄8
3⁄
7⁄
4 8
1
— — —
2 1 ⁄2-in. Diameter Critical
2 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
1 C3
1⁄
9⁄
1⁄
9⁄
2
16 5⁄ 8
Small Tools
fillet
13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2 13 ⁄4
13 ⁄8 13 ⁄8 13 ⁄8
7⁄
8
1 11 ⁄8
3⁄
7⁄
4 8
1
— — —
3-in. Diameter Critical 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
3
21/2 2
C2
H2 C1
1 1 1 /2 3 /8
33/8
H1 C1
H2
3 3 ⁄8-in. Diameter Critical
Large Tools
7⁄
16 1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16
11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2
15 ⁄8 15 ⁄8 15 ⁄8
13 ⁄ 7⁄
16 8
1
11⁄
— — —
11⁄
— — —
16 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
2 3 ⁄16-in. Diameter Critical
3 2 /16
5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
2
7⁄
16 1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16
11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2
11 ⁄8 11 ⁄8 11 ⁄8
13 ⁄ 7⁄
16 8
1
16 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
Staggered Bolts Stagger P, in. Nominal Bolt Diameter, in. C1
F
5⁄ 8
11⁄
4
113 ⁄
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
2
111⁄
21 ⁄16
21 ⁄4
27 ⁄16
19 ⁄16 11 ⁄2 17 ⁄16
2 17 ⁄8 13 1 ⁄16 13 ⁄4
23 ⁄
21 ⁄16 2 17 ⁄8
23 ⁄8 21 ⁄4 23 ⁄16 21 ⁄8
2
15 ⁄16 11 ⁄4 13 ⁄16 11 ⁄8
15 ⁄8 19 ⁄16 11 ⁄2 13 ⁄8
13 ⁄4 111⁄16 19 ⁄16 11 ⁄2
2 115 ⁄16 17 ⁄8 13 ⁄4
2 1 ⁄2 2 5 ⁄8 2 3 ⁄4 2 7 ⁄8
1
15 ⁄16 13 ⁄16 11 ⁄8
13 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 13 ⁄16 11 ⁄8
111⁄16 19 ⁄16 11 ⁄2 13 ⁄8
1 3 ⁄8 11⁄
P
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8 2 1 ⁄8 2 1 ⁄4 2 3 ⁄8
F
C1 = tightening clearance
installation tool
16
13 ⁄4
3
3 3 ⁄8
16
16
15 ⁄16 15 ⁄16
Notes: H1 = height of head, in. H2 = maximum shank extension,* in. C1 = clearance for tightening, in. C2 = clearance of entering, in. C3 = clearance for fillet,* in. P = bolt stagger, in. F = clearance for tightening staggered bolts, in. *Based on one standard hardened washer.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 15
to tension or combined shear and tension, high-strength bolts must be used in fully tensioned bearing-type or slip-critical connections. Bearing-type connections are typically used for shear, moment, and diagonal bracing connections in buildings. Bolts in bearing-type connections are installed in the snug-tightened condition unless required in LRFD Specification Section J1.11 to be fully tensioned. Note that bolts in bearing-type connections required to be fully tensioned must not be confused with fully tensioned bolts in slip-critical connections. Fully tensioned bolts in bearing-type connections have no requirements regarding the slip resistance of the contact surfaces. Thus, painted surfaces in fully tensioned bearing-type connections need not meet the slip resistance requirements of slip-critical connections. Slip-critical connections are used when slip would be detrimental to the serviceability of the structure; this is essentially fatigue related and is primarily of concern in bridge design. From LRFD Specification Section K3, “The occurrence of full design wind or earthquake loads is too infrequent to warrant consideration in fatigue design.” Consequently, slip-critical connections are not normally required or used for wind or seismic loading in buildings. Slip-critical shear connections are required, however, in applications such as those involving oversized holes, fatigue loading, or in craneway and bridge connections. High-strength bolts in slip-critical connections are always fully tensioned to resist slip on the faying surface(s) of the connection. While faying surfaces in slip-critical connections are not normally painted, painted surfaces in accordance with RCSC Specification Section 3(b) are permitted. When subjected to tension only or combined shear and tension, high-strength bolts must be used in fully tensioned bearing-type or slip-critical connections. Examples of these applications are hanger connections, extended end-plate FR moment connections, and diagonal bracing connections. Fully tensioned bolts in bearing-type or slip-critical connections must meet the minimum tensioning requirements for ASTM A325 and A490 bolts as specified in Table 4 of the RCSC Specification. Fully tensioned bolts in either case may be tightened by the same methods. The methods approved by the RCSC are: (1) turn-of-nut method; (2) calibrated wrench method; (3) alternative design bolt method; and, (4) direct tension indicator method. It is important to note that the RCSC prohibits the use of any published relationship between torque and tension. Inspection of Fully Tensioned High-Strength Bolts
When a joint with fully tensioned high-strength bolts is assembled, the RCSC Specification requires that all joint surfaces, including surfaces adjacent to the bolt head and nut be free of scale, except tight mill scale, and of dirt or other foreign material. Burrs need not be removed unless they prevent solid seating of the connected parts in the snug-tightened condition. ASTM A6 lists tolerances for straightness and flatness. These tolerances can prevent the faying surfaces from sufficiently contacting in medium- to large-size connections. Section C8 of the Commentary on the RCSC Specification states: “…Even after being fully tightened, some thick parts with uneven surfaces may not be in contact over the entire faying surface. In itself, this is not detrimental to the performance of the joint. As long as the specified bolt tension is present in all bolts of the completed connection, the clamping force equal to the total of the tensions in all bolts will be transferred at the locations that are in contact and be fully effective in resisting slip through friction.” AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 16
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-6. Dimensions of Non-High-Strength Bolts and Nuts, in. F
db
db
H Square
Bolt Dia. d b, in. 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 8
C, in. 1⁄ 2
78
Hex
H Countersunk
Heavy Hex
C
Countersunk Min. Thrd. Length, in.
H, in. C, in. H, in. L ≤ 6 in. L > 6 in.
H, in.
F, in.
C, in.
H, in.
F, in.
C, in.
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
7⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 15⁄ 16 1 1 ⁄8 5 1 ⁄16 11⁄2 111⁄16 17⁄8 21⁄16 21⁄4 25⁄8
1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 1 1 ⁄16 5 1 ⁄16 11⁄2 13⁄4 115⁄16 23⁄16 23⁄8 25⁄8
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
— —
— —
— —
7⁄ 8 11⁄16 1 1 ⁄4 17⁄16
1 11⁄4 7 1 ⁄16 111⁄16
3⁄ 8 11⁄8 1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16
15⁄8 113⁄16 2 23⁄16
17⁄8 21⁄16 25⁄16 21⁄2
11⁄
16 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
3 33⁄8
3 37⁄16 37⁄8
1 13⁄16 13⁄8 11⁄2
23⁄8 23⁄4 31⁄8 31⁄2
23⁄4 33⁄16 35⁄8 41⁄16
1 13⁄16 13⁄8 11⁄2
1⁄ 2 11⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 11⁄8 3 1 ⁄8 19⁄16 113⁄16 21⁄16 21⁄4 21⁄2 211⁄16
1⁄ 8 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
— — —
3⁄ 4
1
1 11⁄4
11⁄4 11⁄2 13⁄4 2
11⁄2 13⁄4 2 21⁄4
21⁄4 21⁄2 23⁄4 3
21⁄2 23⁄4 3 31⁄4
— — —
31⁄4 33⁄4 41⁄4 43⁄4
31⁄2 4 41⁄2 5
3⁄ 4 15⁄ 16 1 1 ⁄8 5 1 ⁄16 11⁄2 111⁄16 17⁄8 21⁄16 21⁄4
13⁄ 16 11⁄16 5 1 ⁄16 19⁄16 17⁄8 21⁄8 23⁄8 25⁄8 215⁄16 33⁄16
— — —
— — —
1 — — —
21⁄2 23⁄4
— —
— —
— —
33⁄4 41⁄8
45⁄16 43⁄4
111⁄16 113⁄16
37⁄8 41⁄4
41⁄2 415⁄16
111⁄16 113⁄16
— —
— —
51⁄4 53⁄4
51⁄2 6
3 31⁄4
— —
— —
— —
41⁄2 47⁄8
53⁄16 55⁄8
2 23⁄16
45⁄8 —
55⁄16 —
2 —
— —
— —
6 6
61⁄2 7
31⁄2 33⁄4
— —
— —
— —
51⁄4 55⁄8
61⁄16 61⁄2
25⁄16 21⁄2
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
6 6
71⁄2 8
4
—
—
—
6
615⁄16
211⁄16
—
—
—
—
—
6
81⁄2
1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
Bolts
Square
F, in. 3⁄ 8 9⁄ 16
db
C
H F Hex, Heavy Hex
C
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2 13⁄4 2 21⁄4
W
C N C Square, Heavy Square
Nuts
Nut Size, in.
Square
W, in. C, in.
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
7⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 4⁄ 5
1 11⁄8 5 1 ⁄16
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8
11⁄2 111⁄16 17⁄8 21⁄16
11⁄2 13⁄4
21⁄4 —
2 21⁄4
5⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 11⁄8 17⁄16 19⁄16 17⁄8 21⁄8 23⁄8 25⁄8 215⁄16 33⁄16
Hex, Heavy Hex
Hex
N, in. W, in. C, in. 1⁄ 4 5⁄ 16 7⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
1 11⁄8 11⁄4
7⁄ 16 9⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 15⁄ 16 11⁄8 15⁄16 11⁄2 111⁄16 17⁄8 21⁄16 21⁄4
1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 7⁄ 8 11⁄16 15⁄16 11⁄2 13⁄4 115⁄16 23⁄16 23⁄8 25⁄8
—
N
W
Heavy Square
N, in. W, in. C, in. 3⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 11⁄ 16 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
1⁄ 2 11⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 11⁄16 11⁄4 17⁄16 15⁄8 113⁄16
—
11⁄
11⁄4 11⁄2 13⁄4 21⁄16
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
2 23⁄16
25⁄16 29⁄16 213⁄16 31⁄8
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8
1 —
23⁄8 —
33⁄8 —
16
1
Heavy Hex
N, in. W, in. C, in. 1⁄ 2 11⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 11⁄16 11⁄4 17⁄16 15⁄8 113⁄16
9⁄ 16 13⁄ 16
N, in.
1 11⁄4 17⁄16 111⁄16
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
2 23⁄16
17⁄8 21⁄16 25⁄16 21⁄2
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8
11⁄2 —
23⁄8 23⁄4
23⁄4 33⁄16
11⁄2 13⁄4
—
15⁄16 —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
31⁄8 31⁄2
35⁄8 41⁄16
2 23⁄16
21⁄2 23⁄4
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
37⁄8 41⁄4
41⁄2 415⁄16
27⁄16 211⁄16
3 31⁄4
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
45⁄8 5
55⁄16 53⁄4
215⁄16 33⁄16
31⁄2 33⁄4
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
53⁄8 53⁄4
63⁄16 65⁄8
37⁄16 311⁄16
4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
61⁄8
71⁄16
315⁄16
Notes: For high-strength bolt and nut dimensions, refer to Table 8-2. Square, hex, and heavy hex bolt dimensions, rounded to nearest 1⁄16-in., are in accordance with ANSI B18.2.1. Countersunk bolt dimensions, rounded to the nearest 1⁄16-in., are in accordance with ANSI 18.5. Minimum thread length = 2db + 1⁄4-in. for bolts up to 6-in. long, and 2db + 1⁄2-in. for bolts longer than 6-in.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 17
Table 8-7. Threading Dimensions for High-Strength and Non-High-Strength Bolts, in. SCREW THREADS Unified Standard Series-UNC/UNRC and 4UN/4UNR ANSI B1.1 Nominal size (basic major dia.) No. threads per inch (n)
H=0.866P
H /8
P/ 8
P
Thread series symbol c
Thread class symbol
60°
5/ 8H
H /4
Left hand thread. No symbol req’d for right hand thread.
db
P/ 4
K
3/ 4
- 10 UNC 2A LH
Thread Dimensions
Standard Designations
Diameter
Area
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Min. Root K, in.
Gross Bolt Area, in.2
Min. Root Area, in.2
Net Tensile Area, in.2 a
Threads per inch, n b
1⁄ 4 3⁄ 8
0.189 0.298
0.049 0.110
0.029 0.070
0.032 0.078
20 16
1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
0.406 0.514 0.627 0.739
0.196 0.307 0.442 0.601
0.129 0.207 0.309 0.429
0.142 0.226 0.334 0.462
13 11 10 9
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8
0.847 0.950 1.08 1.17
0.785 0.994 1.23 1.49
0.563 0.709 0.908 1.08
0.606 0.763 0.969 1.16
8 7 7 6
11⁄2 13⁄4
1.30 1.51
1.77 2.41
1.32 1.78
1.41 1.90
6 5
2 21⁄4
1.73 1.98
3.14 3.98
2.34 3.07
2.50 3.25
41⁄2 41⁄2
21⁄2 23⁄4
2.19 2.44
4.91 5.94
3.78 4.69
4.00 4.93
4 4
3 31⁄4
2.69 2.94
7.07 8.30
5.70 6.80
5.97 7.10
4 4
31⁄2 33⁄4
3.19 3.44
9.62 11.0
8.01 9.31
8.33 9.66
4 4
4
3.69
12.6
10.7
11.1
Notes:
aNet tensile area = 0.785 + d b
2
−
0.9743
n
bFor diameters listed, thread series is UNC (coarse). For larger diameters, thread series is 4UN. c2A denotes Class 2A fit applicable to external threads; c2B denotes corresponding Class 2B fit for internal threads.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
4
8 - 18
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
It should be noted that, even when bolts in bearing-type connections are required to be fully tensioned, high bolt tension is not normally required for proper connection performance. Thus, a significant reduction in inspection costs will be achieved by relying on visual inspection of the bolt head or nut to note the peening marks signifying that the tightening wrench was applied. From RCSC Specification Commentary Section C9, “It is apparent from the commentary on installation procedures that the inspection procedures giving the best assurance that bolts are properly installed and tensioned is provided by inspector observation of the calibration testing of the bolts using the selected installation procedure followed by monitoring of the work in progress to assure that the procedure which was demonstrated to provide the specified tension is routinely adhered to. When such a program is followed, no further evidence of proper bolt tension is required.” Galvanizing High-Strength Bolts
Galvanizing provides corrosion protection by applying zinc as a sacrificial metal to protect the base metal. As previously stated, ASTM A325 Type 1 high-strength bolts and A449 bolts are permitted to be galvanized; A490 bolts are not permitted to be galvanized. There are two methods of galvanizing: hot-dip galvanizing and mechanical galvanizing. Hot-dip galvanizing is a process whereby the bolt is dipped in molten zinc and spun in a centrifuge to remove the excess. This process is described in detail in ASTM A153. In contrast, mechanical galvanizing utilizes a combination of powdered zinc, chemicals, and water with the bolts in a spun hopper. As result of collisions between the bolts, zinc, and glass beads, the zinc is cold-welded to the surface of the bolts. This process is described in detail in ASTM B695. For more information, refer to AISC (1993).
Grip
Ply or plies closest to bolt head
Ply closest to nut
Nominal bolt diameter d b, in.
Min. thickness t of ply closest to nut to exclude threads from shear plane, in.*
3⁄ 4
1⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1⁄ 4
1
3⁄ 8 5⁄ -in. 32
*Values shown assume one thick washer is present. If washer is not present, increase minimum thickness by 1⁄8-in.
Shear plane
stick-through 5/ 32
t Value from RCSC specification table C2
Fig. 8-3. Minimum thickness of ply closest to nut to exclude threads from shear plane. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 19
Reuse of High-Strength Bolts
From RCSC Specification Section 8f, ASTM A490 bolts and galvanized ASTM A325 bolts shall not be reused. Other A325 bolts are permitted to be reused if approved by the engineer of record. A simple rule based on the prevention of excessive plastic deformation of the bolt is that non-galvanized A325 bolts are satisfactory for reuse, regardless of previous use, if the nut can be placed on the threads and run down the full length of the thread by hand (AISC, 1988). Kulak, et al. (1987) recommends that non-galvanized ASTM A325 bolts may be reused once or twice, provided that proper control on the number of reuses can be established; adequate nut rotation capacity will be present as long as there is some lubricant on the bolt. This lubricant can be the original lubrication or oil, grease, or wax, or a lubricant that is added later. For a detailed assessment of the performance of repetitively tightened high-strength bolts, refer to Bowman and Betancourt (1991). Non-High-Strength Bolts
LRFD Specification Section A3.3 permits the use of ASTM A307 non-high-strength bolts for structural applications not requiring fully tensioned installation, that is, snug-tightened bearing-type connections. ASTM A307 bolts are available with both hex and square heads in diameters from 1⁄4-in. to four inches in two grades: Grade A for general applications and Grade B for cast-iron-flanged piping joints. ASTM A563 Grade A nuts are recommended for use with ASTM A307 bolts. Other suitable grades are listed in ASTM A563 Table X1.1. Dimensions and Weights
Typical non-high-strength bolt head and nut dimensions are given in Table 8-6. Thread lengths listed in this table may be calculated for non-high-strength bolts as 2db + 1⁄4-in. for bolts up to six inches long and 2db + 1⁄2-in. for bolts over six inches long, where db is the bolt diameter. Note that these thread lengths are longer than those given previously for high-strength bolts in Table 8-2. Threading dimensions are given in Table 8-7. Weights of non-high-strength bolts are given in Tables 8-8, 8-9, and 8-10. Entering and Tightening Clearances
As with high-strength bolts, clearance is required for entering and tightening the bolts with an impact wrench. The required clearances are the same as those given for high-strength bolts in Table 8-4. Design Strength of Bolts
The design strength of bolts is determined in accordance with the provisions of LRFD Specification Section J3. LRFD Specification requirements are based upon the provisions of the RCSC Specification. For bolts in bearing-type connections subjected to shear only, the limit states of bolt shear strength and bearing strength at bolt holes must be checked. For bolts in bearingtype connections subjected to tension only, the limit state of bolt tensile strength, including the effect of prying action, must be checked. For bolts in bearing-type connections subjected to combined shear and tension, the limit states of bolt tensile strength, including the effects of both the bolt shear stress present and prying action, and bearing strength at bolt holes must be checked. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 20
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-8. Weights of Non-High-Strength Fasteners, pounds Bolt Length, in.
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
5⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1 1 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄4
— — — —
— — — —
104 109 114 119
143 149 155 161
— — 206 213
90.2 94.4 98.5 103
124 129 135 140
168 174 181 188
221 229 237 246
73.3 76.3 79.3 82.3
107 111 115 119
145 151 156 162
195 202 208 215
254 262 271 279
56.5 58.6 60.7 62.8
85.3 88.4 91.4 94.4
123 127 131 136
167 172 178 183
222 229 236 242
288 296 304 313
39.3 40.4 41.8 43.1
64.9 66.7 68.7 70.8
97.4 100 103 106
140 143 147 151
188 193 198 204
249 255 262 269
321 329 337 345
24.0 24.8 25.5 26.3
44.4 45.8 47.1 48.5
72.9 75.0 77.1 79.2
109 112 115 118
156 160 164 168
209 214 220 225
275 282 289 296
354 362 371 379
11.7 — — —
27.0 28.6 30.1 31.6
49.8 52.5 55.2 57.9
81.3 85.5 89.7 93.9
121 127 133 139
172 180 189 197
231 241 252 263
303 316 330 343
387 404 421 438
10
— —
66.1 34.6
60.6 63.3
98.1 102
145 151
205 213
274 284
357 371
454 471
11
— —
36.2 37.7
66.0 68.7
106 110
157 163
221 230
295 306
384 398
488 505
12
— —
39.2 —
71.3 74.0
115 119
170 176
238 246
316 327
411 425
522 538
13
— —
— —
76.7 79.4
123 127
182 188
254 263
338 349
439 452
556 572
14
— —
— —
82.1 84.8
131 135
194 200
271 279
359 370
466 479
589 605
15 1 ⁄2
15
— —
— —
87.5 90.2
140 144
206 212
287 296
381 392
493 507
622 639
16
—
—
92.9
148
218
304
402
520
656
Per inch add’tl. add
1.3
3.0
5.4
1
2.38 2.71 3.05 3.39
6.11 6.71 7.47 8.23
13.0 14.0 15.1 16.5
24.1 25.8 27.6 29.3
38.9 41.5 44.0 46.5
— — 67.3 70.8
2
3.73 4.06 4.40 4.74
8.99 9.75 10.5 11.3
17.8 19.1 20.5 21.8
31.4 33.5 35.6 37.7
49.1 52.1 55.1 58.2
74.4 77.9 82.0 86.1
3
5.07 5.41 5.75 6.09
12.0 12.8 13.5 14.3
23.2 24.5 25.9 27.2
39.8 41.9 44.0 46.1
61.2 64.2 67.2 70.2
4
6.42 6.76 7.10 7.43
15.1 15.8 16.6 17.3
28.6 29.9 31.3 32.6
48.2 50.3 52.3 54.4
5
7.77 8.11 8.44 8.78
18.1 18.9 19.6 20.4
33.9 35.3 36.6 38.0
6
9.12 9.37 9.71 10.1
21.1 21.7 22.5 23.3
7
10.4 10.7 11.0 11.4
8
1 1 ⁄4 1 1 ⁄2 1 3 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
100 Square Bolts with Hexagonal Nuts
Nominal Bolt Diameter, in. 1⁄ 4
3 1 ⁄4 3 1 ⁄2 3 3 ⁄4 4 1 ⁄4 4 1 ⁄2 4 3 ⁄4 5 1 ⁄4 5 1 ⁄2 5 3 ⁄4 6 1 ⁄4 6 1 ⁄2 6 3 ⁄4 7 1 ⁄4 7 1 ⁄2 7 3 ⁄4 8 1 ⁄2
9
9 1 ⁄2 10 1 ⁄2 111 ⁄2 12 1 ⁄2 13 1 ⁄2 14 1 ⁄2
8.4
12.1
16.5
1 — — 95.1 99.7
21.4
27.2
33.6
Notes: For weights of high-strength fasteners, see Table 8-3. This table conforms to weight standards adopted by the Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI). *Square bolt per ANSI B18.2.1, hexagonal nut per ANSI B18.2.2. For other non-high-strength fasteners, refer to Tables 8-9 and 8-10.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 21
Table 8-9. Weight Adjustments for Combinations of Non-High-Strength Fasteners Other than Tabulated in Table 8-8
100, Square Bolts with Hexagonal Nuts*
Square Bolts with
Combinations of 100:
100, Hex Bolts
Nominal Bolt Diameter, in.
Add or Subtr.
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
5⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
3.5
5.5
8.0 12.2 16.3
Square Nuts
+
0.1
1.0
2.0
3.4
Heavy Square Nuts
+
0.6
2.1
4.1
7.0 11.6 17.2 23.2 32.1 41.2
Heavy Hex Nuts
+
0.4
1.5
2.8
4.6
7.6 10.7 14.2 18.9 24.3
Square Nuts
+
0.1
0.6
1.1
1.4
0.2
0.5 −0.2 −0.1 −1.7
Hex Nuts
−
0.0
0.4
0.9
2.0
3.3
5.0
Heavy Square Nuts
+
0.6
1.7
3.2
5.0
8.3 12.2 15.0 19.8 23.2
Heavy Hex Nuts
+
0.4
1.1
1.9
2.6
4.3
Heavy Square Nuts
+
—
—
4.7
7.3 11.3 16.5 20.7 27.0 33.6
Heavy Hex Nuts
+
—
—
3.4
4.9
5.7
8.2 12.3 18.0
6.0
6.6
6.3
7.3 10.0 11.7 13.8 16.7
Notes: For weights of high-strength fasteners, see Table 8-3. This table conforms to weight standards adopted by the Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI). *Add or subtract value in this table to or from the value in Table 8-8.
Table 8-10. Weights of Non-High-Strength Bolts of Diameter Greater Than 11⁄4-in., pounds Nominal Bolt Diameter, in. 11⁄2
13⁄4
2
21⁄4
21⁄2
23⁄4
3
31⁄4
31⁄2
33⁄4
4
105
130
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Hex Bolts
84.0 112
178
259
369
508
680
900
1120
1390
1730
2130
Heavy Hex Bolts
95.0 124
195
280
397
541
720
950
—
—
—
—
139
168
200
235
272
313
356
147
178
210
246
284
325
Heads of:
Weight of 100 Each: 13⁄8 Square Bolts
One Linear Inch, Unthreaded Shank
42.0
50.0
68.2
89.0 113
One Linear Inch, Threaded Shank
35.0
42.5
57.4
75.5
97.4 120
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Square Nuts
94.5 122
Heavy Square Nuts
125
161
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Heavy Hex Nuts
102
131
204
299
419
564
738
950
1190
1530
1810
2180
Notes: For weights of high-strength fasteners, see Table 8-3. This table conforms to weight standards adopted by the Industrial Fasteners Institute (IFI).
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 22
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
For bolts in slip-critical connections subjected to shear only, the limit states of slip resistance, bolt shear strength, and bearing strength at bolt holes must be checked. For bolts in slip-critical connections subjected to combined shear and tension, the limit states of slip resistance, including the effect of the tensile force present, bolt shear strength, and bearing strength at bolt holes must be checked. Bolt Shear Strength
As illustrated in Figure 8-4a, this limit state considers a shear failure of the bolt shank on plane cdef. Since there is one shear plane, the bolt is in single shear (S). Additional plies of material may increase the number of shear planes and, therefore, the shear strength of the bolt. This condition, as illustrated in Figure 8-4b, is called double shear (D). Additionally, high-strength bolts may be specified with the threads included (N) or excluded (X) from the shear plane of the connection. Note that the shear strength of bolts with the threads included is about 25 percent less than that of bolts with the threads excluded. In spite of this, many designers prefer to specify N bolts when possible due to the difficulty in assuring that threads are excluded from the shear plane in the as-built condition. If, however, the threads are to be excluded from the shear plane, care must be taken to specify a bolt of sufficient overall length given the thread length and required bolt length from Table 8-2. Note that additional washers may be required to accomplish this; refer to Figure 8-3. From LRFD Specification Section J3.6, the design bolt shear strength is φRn, where φ = 0.75 and: Rn = (Fv Ab)n
x ′,y ′,z ′
c,b
g,f
d,a
h,e x,y,z
x,x ′
Ru
e,f d,c
y,y ′
a,b
z,z ′
Ru 2
h,g
Ru Ru
Ru 2
(a) Single shear (S)
(b) Double shear (D)
Fig. 8-4. Bolt shear. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 23
In the above equation, n is the number of bolts in the connection, Fv is the nominal shear strength, and Ab is the nominal bolt area. For convenience, the design bolt shear strengths of various bolts are summarized in Table 8-11; design bolt shear strengths of vertical rows of n bolts are summarized in Table 8-12. Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes
As illustrated in Figure 8-5, this limit state considers both a tear fracture of the connected material and deformation around the bolt holes. Bearing strength is a function of the material being connected, the type of bolt hole, and the spacing and edge distance; it is independent of both the type of bolt and the presence or absence of threads on the bearing area. From LRFD Specification Section J3.10, when deformation around the bolt holes is a design consideration for standard holes, oversized holes, short-slotted holes, and longslotted holes parallel to the line of force, the design bearing strength at bolt holes is φRn, where φ = 0.75 and, for two or more bolts in the line of force, when Le ≥ 1.5d and s ≥ 3d: Rn = (2.4dtFu )n For a single bolt in the line of force or when Le < 1.5d or s < 3d: d Rn = Let + s − (n − 1)(tFu ) ≤ (2.4dtFu )n 2 In the above equations, n is the number of bolts in the connection, d is the nominal bolt diameter, t is the thickness in bearing, and Le is the edge distance. If deformation around the bolt hole is not a design consideration, or for long-slotted holes perpendicular to the line of force, refer to LRFD Specification Section J3.10. For convenience, the design bearing strength at bolt holes is tabulated for the foregoing conditions in Tables 8-13 and 8-14, respectively. Note that these tables may be applied to bolts with countersunk heads, by subtracting one-half the depth of the countersink from the material thickness t. As illustrated in Figure 8-6, this is equivalent to subtracting one-quarter the diameter of the bolt from the material thickness t. Bolt Tensile Strength
From LRFD Specification Section J3.6, when subjected to tension only, the design bolt tensile strength is φRn, where φ = 0.75 Rn = (Ft Ab)n In the above equation, n is the number of bolts in the connection. For convenience, the design bolt tensile strengths of various bolts is summarized in Table 8-15. When subjected to combined shear and tension, the design bolt tensile strength is reduced by a function of the shear stress present in the bolt as specified in LRFD Specification Section J3.7. LRFD Specification Section J3.6 states that any tension resulting from prying action must be considered in determining the required strength of the bolts. Prying action is a phenomenon (in bolted construction only) whereby the deformation of a fitting under a tensile force increases the tensile force in the bolt. The required strength per bolt is the AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 24
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-11. Design Shear Strength of One Bolt, kips Nominal Bolt Diameter d, in. 5⁄ 8
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
φF v (ksi)
A325
N
36.0
X A490
A307
56.3
—
1 1 ⁄8
1
1 1 ⁄4
Loading 0.3068 0.4418 0.6013 0.7854 0.9940 1.227
45.0
X
7⁄ 8
1 3 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄2
1.485
1.767
Nominal Bolt Area, in.2
45.0
N
3⁄ 4
18.0
S
11.0
15.9
21.6
28.3
35.8
44.2
D
22.1
31.8
43.3
56.5
71.6
88.4
S
13.8
19.9
27.1
35.3
44.7
D
27.6
39.8
54.1
70.7
89.5
S
13.8
19.9
27.1
35.3
44.7
D
27.6
39.8
54.1
70.7
89.5
S
17.3
24.9
33.9
44.2
D
34.5
49.7
67.7
88.4
S D
5.52 11.0
7.95 15.9
56.0 112
55.2 110 55.2 110 69.1 138
53.5 107 66.8 134 66.8 134 83.6 167
63.6 127 79.5 159 79.5 159 99.5 199
10.8
14.1
17.9
22.1
26.7
31.8
21.6
28.3
35.8
44.2
53.5
63.6
N = Threads included in shear plane X = Threads excluded from shear plane S = Single shear D = Double shear
Table 8-12. Design Shear Strength of n Bolts in Double Shear* ASTM A325 N
ASTM A490 X
N
X
n
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
12
382
520
679
477
649
848
477
649
848
596
812
1060
11
350
476
622
437
595
778
437
595
778
547
744
972
10
318
433
565
398
541
707
398
541
707
497
676
884
9
286
390
509
358
487
636
358
487
636
447
609
795
8
254
346
452
318
433
565
318
433
565
398
541
707
7
223
303
396
278
379
495
278
379
495
348
474
619
6
191
260
339
239
325
424
239
325
424
298
406
530
5
159
216
283
199
271
353
199
271
353
249
338
442
4
127
173
226
159
216
283
159
216
283
199
271
353
130
170
119
162
212
119
162
212
149
203
265
108
141
108
141
135
177
3
95.4
2
63.6
86.6
1
31.8
43.3
113
79.5
56.5
39.8
54.1
70.7
79.5 39.8
54.1
N = Threads included in shear plane X = Threads excluded in shear plane *For design strength of bolts in single shear, divide tabular value by 2.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
70.7
99.4 49.7
67.6
1
88.4
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 25
sum of rut, the factored force per bolt due to the tensile force, and qu, the additional tension per bolt resulting from prying action produced by deformation of the connected parts. While the effect of prying action is considered in the design of the bolts, it is primarily a function of the connected elements; thus, the connected elements must possess adequate flexural strength and it is their stiffness which is the key to satisfactory performance. Refer to “Hanger Connections” in Part 11 for treatment of prying action. Slip Resistance
In slip-critical connections, the fully tensioned bolt creates resistance to slip through friction on the faying surface between two connected parts. This slip resistance is a function of the slip coefficient µ of the faying surface. Clean mill scale with no coating is defined as a Class A surface with µ = 0.33. Blast-cleaned surfaces with no coatings are defined as Class B surfaces with µ = 0.50. Hot-dip galvanized and roughened surfaces are defined as Class C surfaces with µ = 0.40.
Ru
Ru
Splitting of plate
(a) Tear fracture for smaller end distance
Ru
Ru
Tearout of Plate
(b) Tear fracture for longer end distance
Ru
Ru
Deformation
(c) Deformation of material at bolt hole Fig. 8-5. Bearing strength at bolt holes. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 26
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-13. Design Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes, kips/in. thickness Two or more holes in line of force with Le ≥ 1.5d and s ≥ 3d; hole deformation considered* Nominal Bolt Diameter d, in. 5⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
15⁄ 16
11⁄8
15⁄16
11⁄2
Fu, ksi
17⁄8
21⁄4
25⁄8
3
STD, OVS SSL, LSLP
58 65 70
65.3 73.1 78.8
78.3 87.8 94.5
91.4 102 110
LSLT
58 65 70
54.4 60.9 65.6
65.3 73.1 78.8
76.1 85.3 91.9
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
111⁄16
17⁄8
21⁄16
21⁄4
33⁄8
33⁄4
41⁄8
41⁄2
1.5d
Hole Type
3d 104 117 126
117 132 142
131 146 158
144 161 173
157 176 189
87.0 97.5 105
97.9 110 118
109 122 131
120 134 144
131 146 158
STD = Standard Hole OVS = Oversized Hole SSL = Short-Slotted Hole LSLP = Long-Slotted Hole parallel to line of force LSLT = Long-Slotted Hole transverse to line of force *When s < 3d, or when hole deformation is not a design consideration, refer to LRFD Specification Section J3.10. When Le < 1.5d or for one hole in the line of force, refer to Table 8-14.
Table 8-14. Design Bearing Strength at Bolt Holes, kips/in. thickness One hole in line of force or top bolt with Le < 1.5d* Nominal Bolt Diameter d, in.
Fu, ksi
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
13⁄4
17⁄8
58 65 70
43.5 48.8 52.5
48.9 54.8 59.1
54.4 60.9 65.6
59.8 67.0 72.2
65.3 73.1 78.8
70.7 79.2 85.3
76.1 85.3 91.9
81.6 91.4 98.4
*Design strength from Table 8-14 shall not exceed tabular value from Table 8-13. For remaining bolts, when s − d / 2 > 2.4d, refer to Table 8-13; otherwise refer to LRFD Specification Section J3.10.
Slip coefficients for all other coated blast-cleaned surfaces must be determined by the Testing Method to Determine the Slip Coefficient Used in Bolted Joints; refer to Appendix A of the RCSC Specification. When the tests results in 0.33 ≤ µ < 0.50, the coating is a Class A coating and the design slip coefficient is µ = 0.33. If the test results in µ ≥ 0.50, the coating is a Class B coating and the design slip coefficient is µ = 0.50. The surface requirements for slip-critical connections apply only to the faying surfaces and do not include the surfaces under the bolt, washer, or nut. Bolts in slip-critical connections may be designed at either service loads or factored loads with the provisions of LRFD Specification Section J3.8. From LRFD Specification Section J3.8a, when subjected to shear only, the resistance to slip for comparison with service loads is φRn, where Rn = (Fv Ab)n AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 27
Table 8-15. Design Tensile Strength of Bolts, kips Nominal Bolt Diameter d, in. 5⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
1.227
1.485
1.767
2
Nominal Bolt Area, in.
ASTM Desig.
φFt, ksi
A325
67.5
A490 A307
84.8 33.8
0.3068
0.4418
0.6013
20.7
29.8
40.6
41.4
59.6
81.2
26.0
37.4
52.0
74.9
51.0 102
0.7854 53.0 106 66.6 133
0.9940 67.1
82.8
134
166
84.2 169
100
119
200
239
104
126
150
208
252
300
10.4
14.9
20.3
26.5
33.5
41.4
20.7
29.8
40.6
53.0
67.1
82.8
50.1 100
59.6 119
and φ = 1.0 for standard holes, oversized holes, short-slotted holes, and long-slotted holes perpendicular to the direction of the load; φ = 0.85 for long-slotted holes parallel to the direction of the load. In the above equation, n is the number of bolts in the connection. In general, slip is likely to occur at 1.4 to 1.5 times the service loads. Note that the values of Fv tabulated in LRFD Specification Table J3.6 for bolts in slip-critical connections assume Class A surfaces with µ = 0.33. As stated in LRFD Specification Section J3.8a, it is permissible to increase Fv to the applicable value in the RCSC Specification for other surfaces. When subjected to combined shear and tension, the slip capacity for comparison with service loads must be reduced by the factor: T 1 − Tb as specified in LRFD Specification Section J3.9a, where T is the unfactored force on the connection and Tb is the minimum bolt tension from LRFD Specification Table J3.1. From LRFD Specification Appendix J3.8a, the design slip resistance for comparison with factored loads is φRstr, Effective thickness in bearing db 2
db 4
Ru Ru db
Fig. 8-6. Effective thickness for bearing of countersunk bolts. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 28
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
where Rstr = 1.13µTm Nb Ns and φ is equal to 1.0 for standard holes, 0.85 for oversized and short-slotted holes, 0.70 for long-slotted holes perpendicular to the direction of the load, and 0.60 for long-slotted holes parallel to the direction of the load. When subjected to combined tension and shear, the design slip resistance for comparison with factored loads must be reduced by the factor: Tu 1 − 1.13Tm Nb as specified in LRFD Specification Appendix J3.8b. In the above equations, Tu is the factored force on the connection, Tm is the minimum bolt tension from LRFD Specification Table J3.1, and Nb is the number of bolts in the connection. For convenience, slip capacities for comparison with service loads and design slip resistances for comparison with factored loads are tabulated in Tables 8-16 and 8-17, respectively. ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
When the line of action of an applied load does not pass through the center of gravity (CG) of a bolt group, the load is eccentric and results in a moment which must be considered in the design of the connection. Eccentricity in the Plane of the Faying Surface
Eccentricity in the plane of the faying surface produces additional shear. The bolts must be designed to resist the combined effect of the direct shear from the applied load Pu and the additional shear from the induced moment Pu e. Two methods of analysis for this type of eccentricity will be discussed: (1) the instantaneous center of rotation method; and, (2) the elastic method. Instantaneous Center of Rotation Method
Also known as the ultimate strength method (Crawford, 1968), this method considers the load-deformation relationship of each bolt and, thus, more accurately predicts the ultimate strength of the eccentrically loaded connection. Eccentricity produces both a rotation about the centroid of the bolt group and a translation of one connected element with respect to the other. The combined effect of this rotation and translation is equivalent to a rotation about a point defined as the instantaneous center of rotation (IC) as illustrated in Figure 8-7a. The location of the IC depends on the geometry of the bolt group as well as the direction and point of application of the load. The individual resistance of each bolt is assumed to act on a line perpendicular to a ray passing through the IC and the centroid of that bolt as illustrated in Figure 8-7b. The load-deformation relationship of one bolt is illustrated in Figure 8-8, where R = Rult(1 − e−10∆)0.55 In the above equation, AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 29
Table 8-16. Slip-Critical Connections Design Resistance to Shear at Service Loads,* kips (Class A faying surface, µ = 0.33) Nominal Bolt Diameter, in. 5⁄ 8
ASTM Desig.
Hole Type
A325
STD
A490
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
Nominal Bolt Area, in.2 Loading
0.3068 0.4418 0.6013 0.7854 0.9940
1.227
1.485
1.767
S D
5.22 10.4
7.51 15.0
10.2 20.4
13.4 26.7
16.9 33.8
20.9 41.7
25.2 50.5
30.0 60.1
OVS SSL
S D
4.60 9.20
6.63 13.3
9.02 18.0
11.8 23.6
14.9 29.8
18.4 36.8
22.3 44.5
26.5 53.0
LSLP
S D
3.13 6.26
4.51 9.01
6.13 12.3
8.01 16.0
10.1 20.3
12.5 25.0
15.1 30.3
18.0 36.0
LSLT
S D
3.68 7.36
5.30 10.6
7.22 14.4
9.42 18.8
11.9 23.9
14.7 29.5
17.8 35.6
21.2 42.4
STD
S D
6.44 12.9
9.28 18.6
12.6 25.3
16.5 33.0
20.9 41.7
25.8 51.5
31.2 62.4
37.1 74.2
OVS SSL
S D
5.52 11.0
7.95 15.9
10.8 21.6
14.1 28.3
17.9 35.8
22.1 44.2
26.7 53.5
31.8 63.6
LSLP
S D
3.93 7.85
5.65 11.3
7.70 15.4
10.1 20.1
12.7 25.4
15.7 31.4
19.0 38.0
22.6 45.2
LSLT
S D
4.60 9.20
6.63 13.3
9.02 18.0
11.8 23.6
14.9 29.8
18.4 36.8
22.3 44.5
26.5 53.0
STD = Standard Hole OVS = Oversized Hole SSL = Short-Slotted Hole LSLP = Long-Slotted Hole parallel to line of force LSLT = Long-Slotted Hole transverse to line of force S = Single Shear D = Double Shear *For design slip resistance at factored loads, refer to Table 8-17.
R = shear force in one bolt at a deformation ∆, kips. Rult = ultimate shear strength of one bolt, kips. ∆ = total deformation of a bolt, including shearing, bearing, and bending deformation, plus local bearing deformation of the plate, in. e = 2.718…, base of the natural logarithm. Applying a maximum deformation ∆max to the bolt most remote from the IC, the maximum shear strength of that bolt may be determined. For other bolts, deformations are assumed to vary linearly with distance from the IC, and shear strengths can be obtained from this relationship. The strength of the bolt group is, then, the sum of the
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 30
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-17. Slip-Critical Connections Design Slip Resistance at Factored Loads, kips (Class A faying surface, µ = 0.33) Nominal Bolt Area, in.2 5⁄ 8
ASTM Desig.
Hole Type
A325
STD
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
11⁄8
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
Minimum ASTM A325 Bolt Tension, kips Loading
19.0
28.0
39.0
51.0
56.0
71.0
85.0
103
S D
7.09 14.2
10.4 20.9
14.5 29.1
19.0 38.0
20.9 41.8
26.5 53.0
31.7 63.4
38.4 76.8
OVS SSL
S D
6.02 12.0
8.88 17.8
12.4 24.7
16.2 32.3
17.8 35.5
22.5 45.0
26.9 53.9
32.6 65.3
LSLP
S D
4.25 8.50
6.26 12.5
8.73 17.5
11.4 22.8
12.5 25.1
15.9 31.8
19.0 38.0
23.0 46.1
LSLT
S D
4.96 9.92
7.31 14.6
10.2 20.4
13.3 26.6
14.6 29.2
18.5 37.1
22.2 44.4
26.9 53.8
Minimum ASTM A490 Bolt Tension, kips
A490
24.0
35.0
49.0
64.0
80.0
102
121
148
STD
S D
8.95 17.9
13.1 26.1
18.3 36.5
23.9 47.7
29.8 59.7
38.0 76.1
45.1 90.2
55.2 110
OVS SSL
S D
7.61 15.2
11.1 22.2
15.5 31.1
20.3 40.6
25.4 50.7
32.3 64.7
38.4 76.7
46.9 93.8
LSLP
S D
5.37 10.7
7.83 15.7
11.0 21.9
14.3 28.6
17.9 35.8
22.8 45.6
27.1 54.1
33.1 66.2
LSLT
S D
6.26 12.5
9.14 18.3
12.8 25.6
16.7 33.4
20.9 41.8
26.6 53.3
31.6 63.2
38.6 77.3
STD = Standard Hole OVS = Oversized Hole SSL = Short-Slotted Hole LSLP = Long-Slotted Hole parallel to line of force LSLT = Long-Slotted Hole transverse to line of force S = Single Shear D = Double Shear
individual strengths of all bolts. If the correct location of the IC has been selected, the three equations of in-plane statics will be satisfied; i.e., ΣFx = 0, ΣFy = 0, and ΣM = 0. Tables 8-18 through 8-25 employ the instantaneous center of rotation method for the bolt patterns and eccentric conditions indicated and inclined loads at 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, and 75°. The load-deformation relationship is based on data obtained experimentally for 3⁄4-in. diameter ASTM A325 bolts, where Rult = 74 kips, and ∆max = 0.34 in. The non-dimensional coefficient C is obtained by dividing the factored eccentric force Pu by Rult.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 31
For any of the bolt group geometries shown, the design strength of the eccentrically loaded bolt group is φRn, where φRn = C × φrn
lo e
Pu
IC
CG
(a) Instantaneous center of rotation (IC)
e
lo
Pu CG
IC lrm
ax
ru max
(b) Forces on bolts in group Fig. 8-7. Instantaneous center of rotation method. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 32
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
In the above equation, φrn is the least design strength of one bolt determined from the limit states of bolt shear strength, bearing strength at bolt holes, and slip resistance (if the connection is to be slip-critical). The design strength φRn must be greater than or equal to the required strength Pu. Thus, by dividing Pu by φrn, the minimum coefficient C is obtained, and a bolt group can be selected for which the coefficient is of that magnitude or greater. These tables may be used with any bolt diameter and are conservative when used with ASTM A490 bolts. Linear interpolation within a given table between adjacent values of ex is permitted. Design strengths determined with these tables provide a factor of safety equivalent to that for bolts in connections less than 50 inches long, subjected to shear produced by a concentric load in either bearing-type or slip-critical connections. Although this procedure is based on connections which may experience slip under load, both load tests and analytical studies (Kulak, 1975) indicate that it may be conservatively extended to slip-critical connections. A convergence criterion of one percent was employed for the tabulated iterative solutions. Straight line interpolation between values for loads at different angles may be significantly unconservative. Therefore, unless a direct analysis is performed, use only the values for the next lower angle for design. For bolt group patterns not treated by these tables, a special ultimate strength analysis is required if the instantaneous center of rotation method is to be used.
Example 8-1
Given:
Refer to Figure 8-9. Determine the largest eccentric force Pu for which the design shear strength of the bolts in the connection is adequate using the instantaneous center of rotation method. Use 7⁄8-in. diameter A325-N bolts, φrn = 21.6 kips/bolt. A. Assume the load is vertical as illustrated in Figure 8-9 (θ = 0°°) B. Assume the load acts at an angle of 75°° with respect to vertical (θ = 75°°)
Solution A:
From Table 8-20 with θ = 0°, with s = 3 in., e = 16 in., and n = 6: C = 3.55 Design Shear Strength φRn = C × φrn = 3.55 × 21.6 kips/bolt = 76.7 kips Thus, Pu must be less than or equal to 76.7 kips.
Comment:
Note that this eccentricity has effectively reduced the shear strength of this bolt group by about 70 percent when compared with the concentrically loaded case.
Solution B:
From Table 8-20 with θ = 75°°, s = 3 in., e = 16 in., and n = 6: AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 33
C = 7.90 Design shear strength φRn = C × φrn = 7.90 × 21.6 kips/bolt = 171 kips Thus, Pu must be less than or equal to 171 kips. Comment:
In Solution B, the vertical component of the design strength is φRn sin75°° = (171 kips)(0.966) = 165 kips and the horizontal component of the design strength is φRn cos75°° = (171 kips)(0.259) = 44.3 kips
Elastic Method
Alternatively, the elastic method may be used to analyze eccentrically loaded bolt groups. It offers a simplified, conservative approach but does not render a consistent factor of safety and, in some cases, provides excessively conservative results. Furthermore, the elastic method ignores both the ductility of the bolt group and the load redistribution which occurs. Refer to Higgins (1971). In the elastic method, for a force applied parallel to the Y principal axis of the bolt group as illustrated in Figure 8-10, the eccentric force Pu is resolved into a force Pu acting through the center of gravity (CG) of the bolt group and a moment Pu e where e is the eccentricity. Each bolt is then assumed to support an equal share of the concentric force Pu, and a share of the eccentric moment Pu e which is proportional to its distance from the
80
R, kips
60 R = Rult (1 – e
–10 ∆ 0.55
)
40
20
0
0.10
0.20
0.30
∆, in.
Fig. 8-8. Load-deformation relationship for bolts. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 34
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
CG. The bolt most remote from the CG, then, is the most highly stressed. The resultant vectorial sum of these forces ru is the required strength for the bolt. The direct shear force per bolt due to the concentric force Pu is r1, where r1 =
Pu n
and n is the number of bolts. The shear force in each bolt due to the moment Pu e varies with distance from the CG and will be maximum in the bolt which is must remote from the CG. The maximum shear due to the moment Pu e is rm, where Y e = 16 in. Pu =60 kips
X
CG
1½
5@3=1 ′-3
W14x82 A572 gr. 50
X PL 7/8, A36
2¾
2¾
5½ Y
Fig. 8-9. Bolted bracket plate for Examples 8-1 and 8-2. Y
Pu
e CG
X
Figure 8-10 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
rm =
8 - 35
Pu ec Ip
In the above equation, c = distance from CG to center of bolt most remote from CG, in. Ip = polar moment of inertia of the bolt group, in.4 per in.2 (see any text on statics). To determine the resultant force on the most highly stressed bolt, rm must be resolved into vertical component r2 and horizontal component r3, where Pu ecx Ip Pu ecy r3 = Ip
r2 =
In the above equation, cx and cy are the horizontal and vertical components of the diagonal distance c. Thus, the resultant factored force is ru, where r2 r1
ru = √ (r1 + r2)2 + (r3)2
r3 rm ru
and the bolts must be chosen such that the design strength φrn exceeds the required strength ru. For the more general case of an inclined eccentric force, i.e., not parallel to the Y principal axes of the bolt group, the effect of the X-direction component of the direct shear must also be included. Refer to Iwankiw (1987).
Example 8-2
Given:
Refer to Example 8-1. Recalculate the largest eccentric force Pu for which the design shear strength of the bolts in the connection is adequate using the elastic method. Compare the result with that of Example 8-1. Use 7⁄8-in. diameter A325-N bolts, φrn = 21.6 kips. Ip = 406 in.4 per in.2
Solution:
Direct shear force per bolt: r1 =
Pu n
=
Pu 12
Additional shear force on bolt due to eccentricity: r2 =
Pu ecx Ip AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 36
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
51⁄2−in. Pu (16 in.) 2 = 406 in.4 per in.2 = 0.108 Pu Pu ecy r3 = Ip Pu (16 in.) (71⁄2− in.) = 406 in.4 per in.2 = 0.296 Pu Resultant shear force: (r1 + r2)2 + (r3)2 ru = √
√ 2
Pu 2 12 + 0.108Pu + (0.296Pu ) = 0.352 Pu =
Since ru must be less than or equal to φrn, φrn 0.352 21.6 kips ≤ 0.352 ≤ 61.3 kips
Pu ≤
This 20 percent reduction in the strength predicted by the instantaneous center of rotation method in Example 8-1a is indicative of the conservatism of the elastic method. Eccentricity Normal to the Plane of the Faying Surface
Eccentricity normal to the plane of the faying surface produces tension above and compression below the neutral axis of the bracket connection illustrated in Figure 8-11. The eccentric load Pu can be resolved into a concentric force Pu acting at the faying surface of the connection and a moment Pu e normal to the plane of the faying surface where e is the eccentricity. Each bolt is then assumed to support an equal share of the concentric force Pu, and the moment is resisted by tension in the bolts above the neutral axis and compression between the lower part of the bracket and the column flange. The forces for which the bolts in this connection must be designed must be determined by balancing the tensile forces in the bolts above the neutral axis with the resultant compressive force below the neutral axis. The analysis of such a connection is straightforward and usually begins with one of two assumptions: Case I assumes the neutral axis is not at the center of gravity (CG) while Case II assumes the neutral axis is at the CG. For a bearing-type connection, the limit state of bolt tension, including the effect of prying action and the shear stress present, must still be checked as specified in LRFD Specification Section J3.7. For a slip-critical connection, the bolts above the neutral axis subject to tension would lose a portion of their clamping force. The overall connection, however, would experience no reduction in total clamping force because the clamping AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 37
force below the neutral axis is increased by an equivalent amount. Therefore, it would be unnecessary to reduce the strength of this connection for the interaction of tension and shear above the neutral axis. However, the limit state of bolt tension, including the effect of prying action and the shear stress present, must still be checked as specified in LRFD Specification Section J3.9. Case I—Neutral Axis Not at Center of Gravity
The shear force per bolt due to the concentric force Pu is ruv, where ruv =
Pu n
and n is the number of bolts in the connection. To determine the location of the neutral axis, assume a trial position of the neutral axis at one-sixth of the total bracket depth, measured upward from the bottom. In Figure 8-12a, this is indicated by the line X-X. To provide for reasonable proportions and to recognize that the effective bearing area will depend upon the bracket flange or support flange bending stiffness, the effective width of the compression block Weff should be taken as: Weff = 8tf ≤ bf where tf = lesser of bracket flange and support flange thicknesses, in. bf = bracket flange width, in. This effective width is valid for bracket flanges made from W or S shapes, welded plates, and angles. Where the bracket flange thickness is not constant, the average flange thickness should be used. Having assumed the width of the compression block, it is possible to check an assumed location of the neutral axis by checking static equilibrium assuming an elastic stress
e
Pu
Tee Bracket
Fig. 8-11. Bolts subjected to eccentricity normal to the plane of the faying surface. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 38
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
distribution. Equating the moment of the bolt area above the neutral axis with the moment of the compression block area below the neutral axis, ΣAb × y = Weff × d ×
d 2
In the above equation, ΣAb = sum of the areas of all bolts above the neutral axis, in.2 y = distance from line X-X to CG of of the bolt group above neutral axis, in. d = depth of compression block, in. The value of d may then be adjusted until a reasonable equality exists. Once the neutral axis has been located, the tensile force per bolt rut, as illustrated in Figure 8-12b may be determined as: rut =
Pu ec × Ab Ix
where c = distance from neutral axis to most remote bolt in group, in. Ix = combined moment of inertia of bolt group and compression block about neutral axis, in.4 Bolts above the neutral axis are subjected to the shear force ruv, the tensile force rut, and the effect of prying action; bolts below the neutral axis are subjected to the shear force ruv only. Case II—Neutral Axis at Center of Gravity
This method provides a more direct, but also a more conservative result. As for Case I, the shear force per bolt due to the concentric force Pu is ruv, where
tf
Pu n
CG (tension group)
2rut
y
d = Depth/6
Depth
ruv =
X
NA X
Weff (a) Initial approximation of location of NA
(b) Force diagram with final location of NA
Fig. 8-12. Case I—Neutral axis (NA) not at center of gravity (CG). AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 39
and n is the number of bolts in the connection. The neutral axis is assumed to be located at the CG of the bolt group as illustrated in Figure 8-13. The bolts above the neutral axis are in tension and the bolts below the neutral axis are said to be in “compression.” To obtain a more accurate result, a plastic stress distribution is assumed; this assumption is justified because this method is still more conservative than Case I. Accordingly, the tensile force rut in each bolt above the neutral axis due to the moment Pue is: rut =
Pu e n′dm
where n′ = number of bolts above the neutral axis dm = moment arm between resultant tensile force and resultant compressive force, in.
tf
Bolts above the neutral axis are subjected to the shear force ruv, the tensile force rut, and the effect of prying action; bolts below the neutral axis are subjected to the shear force ruv only.
2rut
NA
Fig. 8-13. Case II—Neutral axis (NA) at center of gravity (CG). AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 40
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-18. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 0°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
where
ex = e
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
s
s
Pu
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
s, in. ex, in.
3
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.18 0.88 0.69 0.56 0.48
2.23 1.75 1.40 1.15 0.97
3.32 2.81 2.36 2.01 1.73
4.39 3.90 3.40 2.96 2.59
5.45 4.98 4.47 3.98 3.55
6.48 6.06 5.56 5.05 4.57
7.51 7.12 6.64 6.13 5.63
8.52 8.17 7.72 7.22 6.70
9.53 9.21 8.78 8.30 7.79
10.5 10.2 9.84 9.38 8.87
11.5 11.3 10.9 10.4 9.96
7 8 9 10 12
0.41 0.36 0.32 0.29 0.24
0.83 0.73 0.65 0.59 0.49
1.51 1.34 1.21 1.09 0.92
2.28 2.04 1.83 1.66 1.40
3.17 2.85 2.59 2.36 2.00
4.13 3.75 3.42 3.14 2.68
5.15 4.72 4.34 4.00 3.44
6.20 5.73 5.31 4.92 4.27
7.28 6.78 6.32 5.89 5.15
8.36 7.85 7.36 6.90 6.09
9.44 8.93 8.42 7.94 7.06
14 16 18 20 24
0.21 0.18 0.16 0.15 0.12
0.42 0.37 0.33 0.29 0.25
0.79 0.70 0.62 0.56 0.47
1.21 1.06 0.95 0.85 0.71
1.74 1.53 1.37 1.24 1.03
2.33 2.06 1.84 1.67 1.40
3.01 2.67 2.39 2.16 1.82
3.75 3.33 3.00 2.72 2.29
4.55 4.06 3.66 3.33 2.81
5.41 4.85 4.38 3.99 3.37
6.31 5.68 5.15 4.70 3.99
28 32 36
0.11 0.09 0.08
0.21 0.18 0.16
0.40 0.35 0.31
0.61 0.54 0.48
0.89 0.78 0.69
1.20 1.05 0.94
1.57 1.37 1.22
1.97 1.73 1.54
2.42 2.13 1.90
2.92 2.57 2.29
3.45 3.04 2.72
2 3 4 5 6
1.63 1.39 1.18 1.01 0.88
2.71 2.48 2.23 1.98 1.75
3.75 3.56 3.32 3.07 2.81
4.77 4.60 4.39 4.15 3.90
5.77 5.63 5.45 5.23 4.98
6.77 6.65 6.48 6.28 6.06
7.76 7.65 7.51 7.33 7.12
8.75 8.66 8.52 8.36 8.17
9.74 9.66 9.53 9.38 9.21
10.7 10.7 10.5 10.4 10.2
11.7 11.6 11.5 11.4 11.2
7 8 9 10 12
0.77 0.69 0.62 0.56 0.48
1.56 1.40 1.26 1.15 0.97
2.58 2.36 2.17 2.01 1.73
3.64 3.40 3.17 2.96 2.59
4.73 4.47 4.22 3.98 3.55
5.81 5.56 5.30 5.05 4.57
6.89 6.64 6.39 6.13 5.63
7.95 7.72 7.47 7.22 6.70
9.00 8.78 8.55 8.30 7.79
10.1 9.84 9.61 9.38 8.87
11.1 10.9 10.7 10.4 9.96
14 16 18 20 24
0.41 0.36 0.32 0.29 0.24
0.83 0.73 0.65 0.59 0.49
1.51 1.34 1.21 1.09 0.92
2.28 2.04 1.83 1.66 1.40
3.17 2.85 2.59 2.36 2.00
4.13 3.75 3.42 3.14 2.68
5.15 4.72 4.34 4.00 3.44
6.20 5.73 5.31 4.92 4.27
7.28 6.78 6.32 5.89 5.15
8.36 7.85 7.36 6.90 6.09
9.44 8.93 8.42 7.94 7.06
28 32 36
0.21 0.18 0.16
0.42 0.37 0.33
0.79 0.70 0.62
1.21 1.06 0.95
1.74 1.53 1.37
2.33 2.06 1.84
3.01 2.67 2.39
3.75 3.33 3.00
4.55 4.06 3.66
5.41 4.85 4.38
6.31 5.68 5.15
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 41
Table 8-18 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 15°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
where
ex
Pu 15°
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
s
e
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
s, in. ex, in.
3
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.15 0.86 0.67 0.55 0.47
2.20 1.76 1.42 1.17 0.99
3.28 2.78 2.35 2.00 1.73
4.34 3.85 3.36 2.94 2.58
5.39 4.92 4.41 3.94 3.52
6.42 5.98 5.48 4.98 4.52
7.45 7.03 6.55 6.04 5.55
8.46 8.08 7.61 7.11 6.61
9.47 9.11 8.67 8.18 7.67
10.5 10.1 9.72 9.24 8.74
11.5 11.2 10.8 10.3 9.81
7 8 9 10 12
0.41 0.36 0.32 0.29 0.24
0.86 0.75 0.67 0.61 0.51
1.52 1.35 1.22 1.10 0.93
2.30 2.06 1.86 1.69 1.43
3.16 2.86 2.60 2.38 2.03
4.11 3.74 3.43 3.16 2.71
5.10 4.69 4.32 4.00 3.46
6.13 5.68 5.27 4.90 4.28
7.18 6.70 6.26 5.85 5.15
8.24 7.74 7.28 6.84 6.06
9.30 8.80 8.31 7.85 7.01
14 16 18 20 24
0.21 0.19 0.17 0.15 0.12
0.43 0.38 0.34 0.30 0.25
0.81 0.71 0.63 0.57 0.48
1.24 1.09 0.97 0.88 0.73
1.76 1.56 1.39 1.26 1.06
2.37 2.10 1.88 1.70 1.43
3.04 2.70 2.43 2.20 1.86
3.78 3.37 3.04 2.76 2.33
4.57 4.09 3.70 3.37 2.86
5.41 4.87 4.42 4.03 3.43
6.30 5.69 5.18 4.74 4.04
28 32 36
0.11 0.09 0.08
0.22 0.19 0.17
0.41 0.36 0.32
0.63 0.55 0.49
0.91 0.80 0.71
1.23 1.08 0.96
1.60 1.41 1.26
2.02 1.77 1.58
2.47 2.18 1.95
2.97 2.62 2.34
3.51 3.10 2.78
2 3 4 5 6
1.61 1.36 1.15 0.98 0.86
2.69 2.45 2.20 1.96 1.76
3.72 3.52 3.28 3.03 2.78
4.74 4.56 4.34 4.10 3.85
5.74 5.59 5.39 5.16 4.92
6.74 6.60 6.42 6.21 5.98
7.73 7.61 7.45 7.25 7.03
8.73 8.61 8.46 8.28 8.08
9.71 9.61 9.47 9.30 9.11
7 8 9 10 12
0.75 0.67 0.61 0.55 0.47
1.57 1.42 1.29 1.17 0.99
2.55 2.35 2.16 2.00 1.73
3.60 3.36 3.14 2.94 2.58
4.66 4.41 4.17 3.94 3.52
5.73 5.48 5.23 4.98 4.52
6.80 6.55 6.30 6.04 5.55
7.85 7.61 7.36 7.11 6.61
8.90 8.67 8.43 8.18 7.67
9.94 9.72 9.49 9.24 8.74
11.0 10.8 10.5 10.3 9.81
14 16 18 20 24
0.41 0.36 0.32 0.29 0.24
0.86 0.75 0.67 0.61 0.51
1.52 1.35 1.22 1.10 0.93
2.30 2.06 1.86 1.69 1.43
3.16 2.86 2.60 2.38 2.03
4.11 3.74 3.43 3.16 2.71
5.10 4.69 4.32 4.00 3.46
6.13 5.68 5.27 4.90 4.28
7.18 6.70 6.26 5.85 5.15
8.24 7.74 7.28 6.84 6.06
9.30 8.80 8.31 7.85 7.01
28 32 36
0.21 0.19 0.17
0.43 0.38 0.34
0.81 0.71 0.63
1.24 1.09 0.97
1.76 1.56 1.39
2.37 2.10 1.88
3.04 2.70 2.43
3.78 3.37 3.04
4.57 4.09 3.70
5.41 4.87 4.42
6.30 5.69 5.18
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
10.7 10.6 10.5 10.3 10.1
11.7 11.6 11.5 11.3 11.1
8 - 42
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-18 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 30°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φ R n = C × φ rn
where
ex
Pu
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
30°
s
s
e
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
s, in. ex, in.
3
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.14 0.86 0.69 0.57 0.49
2.20 1.80 1.50 1.27 1.09
3.25 2.79 2.40 2.08 1.82
4.30 3.83 3.39 3.00 2.68
5.33 4.87 4.41 3.98 3.60
6.36 5.92 5.45 4.99 4.57
7.38 6.96 6.49 6.02 5.58
8.39 7.99 7.53 7.06 6.60
9.40 9.02 8.57 8.11 7.64
10.4 10.0 9.61 9.15 8.68
11.4 11.1 10.6 10.2 9.72
7 8 9 10 12
0.43 0.38 0.34 0.31 0.26
0.95 0.83 0.75 0.67 0.56
1.61 1.44 1.30 1.19 1.01
2.40 2.17 1.98 1.82 1.55
3.27 2.98 2.74 2.52 2.17
4.20 3.86 3.57 3.31 2.87
5.17 4.79 4.46 4.15 3.64
6.17 5.76 5.39 5.05 4.46
7.18 6.75 6.35 5.98 5.33
8.21 7.77 7.34 6.95 6.24
9.25 8.79 8.35 7.93 7.17
14 16 18 20 24
0.23 0.20 0.18 0.16 0.14
0.48 0.42 0.38 0.34 0.28
0.87 0.77 0.69 0.62 0.52
1.35 1.20 1.07 0.97 0.81
1.90 1.69 1.52 1.37 1.16
2.53 2.26 2.04 1.85 1.57
3.23 2.89 2.62 2.38 2.02
3.98 3.58 3.25 2.97 2.53
4.78 4.33 3.94 3.61 3.09
5.63 5.11 4.67 4.30 3.69
6.51 5.94 5.45 5.02 4.33
28 32 36
0.12 0.10 0.09
0.24 0.21 0.19
0.45 0.40 0.35
0.70 0.61 0.55
1.00 0.88 0.78
1.36 1.19 1.07
1.75 1.54 1.38
2.20 1.94 1.74
2.69 2.38 2.13
3.22 2.85 2.56
3.79 3.37 3.03
2 3 4 5 6
1.59 1.34 1.14 0.98 0.86
2.66 2.43 2.20 1.99 1.80
3.69 3.48 3.25 3.02 2.79
4.70 4.52 4.30 4.06 3.83
5.71 5.54 5.33 5.11 4.87
6.70 6.55 6.36 6.14 5.92
7.70 7.55 7.38 7.17 6.96
8.69 8.56 8.39 8.20 7.99
9.68 9.55 9.40 9.22 9.02
7 8 9 10 12
0.77 0.69 0.63 0.57 0.49
1.64 1.50 1.37 1.27 1.09
2.59 2.40 2.23 2.08 1.82
3.60 3.39 3.19 3.00 2.68
4.64 4.41 4.19 3.98 3.60
5.68 5.45 5.22 4.99 4.57
6.73 6.49 6.26 6.02 5.58
7.77 7.53 7.30 7.06 6.60
8.80 8.57 8.34 8.11 7.64
9.83 9.61 9.38 9.15 8.68
10.9 10.6 10.4 10.2 9.72
14 16 18 20 24
0.43 0.38 0.34 0.31 0.26
0.95 0.83 0.75 0.67 0.56
1.61 1.44 1.30 1.19 1.01
2.40 2.17 1.98 1.82 1.55
3.27 2.98 2.74 2.52 2.17
4.20 3.86 3.57 3.31 2.87
5.17 4.79 4.46 4.15 3.64
6.17 5.76 5.39 5.05 4.46
7.18 6.75 6.35 5.98 5.33
8.21 7.77 7.34 6.95 6.24
9.25 8.79 8.35 7.93 7.17
28 32 36
0.23 0.20 0.18
0.48 0.42 0.38
0.87 0.77 0.69
1.35 1.20 1.07
1.90 1.69 1.52
2.53 2.26 2.04
3.23 2.89 2.62
3.98 3.58 3.25
4.78 4.33 3.94
5.63 5.11 4.67
6.51 5.94 5.45
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
10.7 10.6 10.4 10.2 10.0
11.7 11.5 11.4 11.2 11.1
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 43
Table 8-18 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 45°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φ R n = C × φ rn
where
ex 45°
Pu
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
s
e
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
s, in. ex, in.
3
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.17 0.92 0.75 0.64 0.55
2.23 1.89 1.63 1.42 1.25
3.26 2.87 2.54 2.25 2.01
4.28 3.87 3.50 3.17 2.88
5.29 4.88 4.49 4.13 3.80
6.30 5.90 5.49 5.11 4.76
7.31 6.91 6.51 6.11 5.73
8.32 7.93 7.52 7.11 6.73
9.32 8.94 8.53 8.12 7.73
10.3 9.95 9.55 9.14 8.73
11.3 11.0 10.6 10.2 9.74
7 8 9 10 12
0.49 0.44 0.40 0.36 0.31
1.11 0.99 0.90 0.81 0.68
1.81 1.64 1.49 1.37 1.17
2.63 2.41 2.22 2.06 1.79
3.51 3.25 3.02 2.82 2.47
4.43 4.14 3.87 3.63 3.22
5.38 5.06 4.77 4.50 4.02
6.36 6.01 5.69 5.39 4.87
7.34 6.98 6.64 6.32 5.74
8.34 7.96 7.61 7.27 6.65
9.34 8.96 8.58 8.23 7.58
14 16 18 20 24
0.27 0.24 0.21 0.19 0.16
0.59 0.52 0.46 0.41 0.35
1.03 0.91 0.82 0.74 0.63
1.58 1.41 1.27 1.16 0.98
2.20 1.97 1.78 1.62 1.38
2.88 2.60 2.36 2.16 1.85
3.62 3.29 3.00 2.76 2.37
4.41 4.03 3.70 3.41 2.94
5.24 4.81 4.43 4.10 3.56
6.11 5.63 5.21 4.84 4.22
6.99 6.48 6.02 5.61 4.92
28 32 36
0.14 0.12 0.11
0.30 0.26 0.23
0.54 0.48 0.43
0.85 0.75 0.67
1.19 1.05 0.94
1.61 1.43 1.28
2.08 1.84 1.65
2.58 2.30 2.07
3.14 2.80 2.53
3.73 3.34 3.02
4.37 3.92 3.55
2 3 4 5 6
1.57 1.35 1.17 1.03 0.92
2.64 2.43 2.23 2.05 1.89
3.66 3.46 3.26 3.06 2.87
4.67 4.48 4.28 4.07 3.87
5.67 5.49 5.29 5.09 4.88
6.66 6.49 6.30 6.10 5.90
7.66 7.50 7.31 7.12 6.91
8.65 8.49 8.32 8.13 7.93
9.64 9.49 9.32 9.13 8.94
10.6 10.5 10.3 10.1 9.95
11.6 11.5 11.3 11.1 11.0
7 8 9 10 12
0.83 0.75 0.69 0.64 0.55
1.75 1.63 1.52 1.42 1.25
2.70 2.54 2.39 2.25 2.01
3.68 3.50 3.33 3.17 2.88
4.68 4.49 4.30 4.13 3.80
5.69 5.49 5.30 5.11 4.76
6.71 6.51 6.30 6.11 5.73
7.72 7.52 7.31 7.11 6.73
8.74 8.53 8.33 8.12 7.73
9.75 9.55 9.34 9.14 8.73
10.8 10.6 10.4 10.2 9.74
14 16 18 20 24
0.49 0.44 0.40 0.36 0.31
1.11 0.99 0.90 0.81 0.68
1.81 1.64 1.49 1.37 1.17
2.63 2.41 2.22 2.06 1.79
3.51 3.25 3.02 2.82 2.47
4.43 4.14 3.87 3.63 3.22
5.38 5.06 4.77 4.50 4.02
6.36 6.01 5.69 5.39 4.87
7.34 6.98 6.64 6.32 5.74
8.34 7.96 7.61 7.27 6.65
9.34 8.96 8.58 8.23 7.58
28 32 36
0.27 0.24 0.21
0.59 0.52 0.46
1.03 0.91 0.82
1.58 1.41 1.27
2.20 1.97 1.78
2.88 2.60 2.36
3.62 3.29 3.00
4.41 4.03 3.70
5.24 4.81 4.43
6.11 5.63 5.21
6.99 6.48 6.02
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 44
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-18 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 60°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
where
ex 60°
Pu
s
e
s
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
s, in. ex, in.
3
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.27 1.05 0.89 0.77 0.68
2.32 2.05 1.83 1.65 1.49
3.32 3.02 2.77 2.54 2.34
4.31 4.00 3.72 3.47 3.24
5.30 4.98 4.69 4.41 4.16
6.30 5.97 5.66 5.37 5.10
7.29 6.96 6.64 6.34 6.06
8.27 7.94 7.62 7.32 7.02
9.27 8.94 8.61 8.29 7.99
10.3 9.93 9.60 9.28 8.97
11.3 10.9 10.6 10.3 9.95
7 8 9 10 12
0.61 0.56 0.51 0.47 0.40
1.37 1.26 1.16 1.07 0.93
2.17 2.01 1.87 1.74 1.52
3.03 2.83 2.66 2.50 2.22
3.93 3.71 3.51 3.32 3.00
4.85 4.61 4.39 4.19 3.82
5.79 5.54 5.30 5.08 4.67
6.74 6.48 6.23 5.99 5.55
7.71 7.43 7.17 6.92 6.45
8.67 8.39 8.12 7.86 7.37
9.64 9.35 9.07 8.81 8.30
14 16 18 20 24
0.35 0.32 0.29 0.26 0.22
0.81 0.72 0.65 0.58 0.49
1.35 1.21 1.09 1.00 0.85
2.00 1.81 1.66 1.53 1.32
2.73 2.49 2.30 2.12 1.84
3.50 3.23 2.98 2.77 2.41
4.32 4.00 3.72 3.47 3.05
5.16 4.81 4.50 4.21 3.73
6.03 5.65 5.31 4.99 4.45
6.92 6.51 6.14 5.80 5.21
7.83 7.40 7.00 6.63 5.99
28 32 36
0.19 0.17 0.15
0.42 0.37 0.33
0.74 0.65 0.59
1.15 1.02 0.92
1.61 1.43 1.29
2.13 1.91 1.72
2.71 2.44 2.21
3.34 3.02 2.74
4.00 3.63 3.31
4.70 4.28 3.92
5.44 4.97 4.57
2 3 4 5 6
1.60 1.42 1.27 1.15 1.05
2.65 2.48 2.32 2.18 2.05
3.65 3.48 3.32 3.17 3.02
4.64 4.48 4.31 4.15 4.00
5.64 5.47 5.30 5.14 4.98
6.63 6.46 6.30 6.13 5.97
7.62 7.45 7.29 7.12 6.96
8.61 8.44 8.27 8.11 7.94
9.60 9.44 9.27 9.10 8.94
10.6 10.4 10.3 10.1 9.93
11.6 11.4 11.3 11.1 10.9
7 8 9 10 12
0.96 0.89 0.83 0.77 0.68
1.93 1.83 1.73 1.65 1.49
2.89 2.77 2.65 2.54 2.34
3.86 3.72 3.59 3.47 3.24
4.83 4.69 4.55 4.41 4.16
5.81 5.66 5.51 5.37 5.10
6.80 6.64 6.49 6.34 6.06
7.78 7.62 7.47 7.32 7.02
8.77 8.61 8.45 8.29 7.99
9.76 9.60 9.43 9.28 8.97
10.8 10.6 10.4 10.3 9.95
14 16 18 20 24
0.61 0.56 0.51 0.47 0.40
1.37 1.26 1.16 1.07 0.93
2.17 2.01 1.87 1.74 1.52
3.03 2.83 2.66 2.50 2.22
3.93 3.71 3.51 3.32 3.00
4.85 4.61 4.39 4.19 3.82
5.79 5.54 5.30 5.08 4.67
6.74 6.48 6.23 5.99 5.55
7.71 7.43 7.17 6.92 6.45
8.67 8.39 8.12 7.86 7.37
9.64 9.35 9.07 8.81 8.30
28 32 36
0.35 0.32 0.29
0.81 0.72 0.65
1.35 1.21 1.09
2.00 1.81 1.66
2.73 2.49 2.30
3.50 3.23 2.98
4.32 4.00 3.72
5.16 4.81 4.50
6.03 5.65 5.31
6.92 6.51 6.14
7.83 7.40 7.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 45
Table 8-18 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 75°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
where
ex 75°
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
Pu
s
s
e
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
s, in. ex, in.
3
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.49 1.32 1.18 1.07 0.98
2.51 2.33 2.18 2.04 1.92
3.49 3.30 3.14 2.99 2.85
4.46 4.27 4.09 3.93 3.79
5.44 5.24 5.05 4.88 4.73
6.42 6.21 6.01 5.84 5.67
7.40 7.18 6.98 6.79 6.62
8.38 8.15 7.95 7.75 7.57
9.36 9.13 8.92 8.72 8.53
10.3 10.1 9.89 9.68 9.49
11.3 11.1 10.9 10.7 10.5
7 8 9 10 12
0.90 0.84 0.78 0.73 0.65
1.82 1.72 1.63 1.55 1.41
2.73 2.62 2.51 2.41 2.23
3.65 3.52 3.40 3.29 3.08
4.58 4.44 4.31 4.19 3.95
5.52 5.37 5.23 5.10 4.84
6.46 6.30 6.16 6.02 5.75
7.40 7.24 7.09 6.94 6.66
8.36 8.19 8.03 7.88 7.59
9.31 9.14 8.97 8.81 8.51
10.3 10.1 9.92 9.76 9.45
14 16 18 20 24
0.58 0.53 0.48 0.44 0.38
1.30 1.20 1.11 1.03 0.89
2.06 1.92 1.78 1.66 1.46
2.88 2.70 2.53 2.38 2.12
3.73 3.52 3.33 3.16 2.85
4.60 4.38 4.17 3.97 3.63
5.50 5.26 5.03 4.82 4.44
6.40 6.15 5.91 5.69 5.27
7.31 7.05 6.80 6.56 6.13
8.23 7.96 7.70 7.45 6.99
9.16 8.88 8.61 8.35 7.87
28 32 36
0.34 0.30 0.27
0.79 0.70 0.62
1.29 1.16 1.05
1.90 1.73 1.58
2.59 2.38 2.19
3.33 3.08 2.85
4.11 3.81 3.55
4.91 4.58 4.28
5.73 5.37 5.05
6.57 6.19 5.84
7.43 7.02 6.65
2 3 4 5 6
1.71 1.60 1.49 1.40 1.32
2.72 2.61 2.51 2.42 2.33
3.70 3.59 3.49 3.39 3.30
4.69 4.57 4.46 4.37 4.27
5.67 5.55 5.44 5.34 5.24
6.66 6.53 6.42 6.31 6.21
7.64 7.52 7.40 7.29 7.18
8.79 8.50 8.38 8.26 8.15
9.78 9.48 9.36 9.24 9.13
10.8 10.5 10.3 10.2 10.1
11.7 11.5 11.3 11.2 11.1
7 8 9 10 12
1.25 1.18 1.13 1.07 0.98
2.25 2.18 2.11 2.04 1.92
3.22 3.14 3.06 2.99 2.85
4.18 4.09 4.01 3.93 3.79
5.14 5.05 4.97 4.88 4.73
6.11 6.01 5.92 5.84 5.67
7.07 6.98 6.88 6.79 6.62
8.05 7.95 7.85 7.75 7.57
9.01 8.92 8.81 8.72 8.53
10.0 9.89 9.78 9.68 9.49
11.0 10.9 10.8 10.7 10.5
14 16 18 20 24
0.90 0.84 0.78 0.73 0.65
1.82 1.72 1.63 1.55 1.41
2.73 2.62 2.51 2.41 2.23
3.65 3.52 3.40 3.29 3.08
4.58 4.44 4.31 4.19 3.95
5.52 5.37 5.23 5.10 4.84
6.46 6.30 6.16 6.02 5.75
7.40 7.24 7.09 6.94 6.66
8.36 8.19 8.03 7.88 7.59
9.31 9.14 8.97 8.81 8.51
10.3 10.1 9.92 9.76 9.45
28 32 36
0.58 0.53 0.48
1.30 1.20 1.11
2.06 1.92 1.78
2.88 2.70 2.53
3.73 3.52 3.33
4.60 4.38 4.17
5.50 5.26 5.03
6.40 6.15 5.91
7.31 7.05 6.80
8.23 7.96 7.70
9.16 8.88 8.61
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 46
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-19. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 0°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn ex = e
where
s, in.
3
6
Pu
s
s
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
0.84 0.65 0.54 0.45 0.39
2.54 2.03 1.67 1.42 1.22
4.48 3.68 3.06 2.59 2.25
6.59 5.67 4.86 4.21 3.69
8.72 7.77 6.84 6.01 5.32
10.8 9.91 8.93 8.00 7.17
12.9 12.1 11.1 10.1 9.16
15.0 14.2 13.2 12.2 11.2
17.0 16.3 15.4 14.4 13.4
19.0 18.3 17.5 16.5 15.5
21.0 20.4 19.6 18.7 17.7
23.0 22.5 21.7 20.8 19.8
7 8 9 10 12
0.35 0.31 0.28 0.26 0.22
1.08 0.96 0.86 0.78 0.66
1.99 1.78 1.60 1.46 1.24
3.27 2.93 2.65 2.42 2.06
4.74 4.27 3.87 3.53 3.01
6.46 5.86 5.34 4.90 4.19
8.33 10.3 12.4 7.60 9.50 11.5 6.97 8.75 10.7 6.42 8.10 9.91 5.51 7.01 8.63
14.5 13.6 12.7 11.8 10.4
16.7 15.7 14.7 13.8 12.2
18.8 17.8 16.8 15.9 14.2
14 16 18 20 24
0.19 0.17 0.15 0.14 0.12
0.57 0.51 0.45 0.41 0.34
1.08 0.95 0.85 0.77 0.65
1.78 1.57 1.41 1.27 1.07
2.62 2.32 2.07 1.88 1.58
3.66 3.24 2.90 2.63 2.21
4.82 4.27 3.83 3.48 2.93
6.15 5.47 4.92 4.47 3.77
7.61 6.79 6.11 5.55 4.69
9.19 10.9 12.7 8.23 9.78 11.4 7.43 8.85 10.4 6.76 8.07 9.48 5.72 6.85 8.06
28 32 36
0.10 0.09 0.08
0.29 0.26 0.23
0.56 0.49 0.43
0.92 0.80 0.72
1.36 1.19 1.06
1.90 1.67 1.49
2.53 2.22 1.98
3.25 2.86 2.55
4.05 3.57 3.18
4.95 4.36 3.90
2 3 4 5 6
0.84 0.65 0.54 0.45 0.39
3.24 2.79 2.41 2.10 1.85
5.39 4.93 4.44 3.97 3.55
7.47 7.08 6.60 6.11 5.62
9.51 9.17 8.75 8.27 7.77
11.5 11.2 10.9 10.4 9.93
13.5 13.3 12.4 12.5 12.1
15.5 15.3 15.0 14.6 14.2
17.5 17.3 17.0 16.7 16.3
19.5 19.3 19.1 18.7 18.4
21.5 21.3 21.1 20.8 20.4
23.4 23.3 23.1 22.8 22.5
7 8 9 10 12
0.35 0.31 0.28 0.26 0.22
1.64 1.47 1.34 1.22 1.04
3.18 2.87 2.61 2.39 2.04
5.17 4.75 4.39 4.06 3.52
7.27 6.79 6.34 5.92 5.20
9.43 8.92 8.43 7.96 7.10
11.6 11.1 10.6 10.1 9.12
13.7 13.3 12.7 12.2 11.2
15.9 15.4 14.9 14.4 13.4
18.0 17.5 17.1 16.6 15.6
20.1 19.6 19.2 18.7 17.7
22.1 21.7 21.3 20.9 19.9
14 16 18 20 24
0.19 0.17 0.15 0.14 0.12
0.90 0.80 0.71 0.64 0.54
1.77 1.57 1.41 1.28 1.07
3.09 2.75 2.48 2.25 1.90
4.61 4.12 3.72 3.38 2.86
6.36 5.74 5.21 4.77 4.06
8.27 10.3 12.4 7.52 9.44 11.7 6.87 8.68 10.6 6.31 8.02 9.85 5.40 6.91 8.55
14.5 13.5 12.6 11.8 10.3
16.7 15.7 14.7 13.8 12.2
18.9 17.8 16.8 15.9 14.1
28 32 36
0.10 0.09 0.08
0.46 0.41 0.36
0.93 0.81 0.73
1.64 1.44 1.29
2.47 2.18 1.94
3.52 3.11 2.78
4.70 4.16 3.72
6.05 5.37 4.81
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.52 6.69 6.02
5.93 5.23 4.67
7.00 6.18
5.52
9.12 10.8 12.6 8.15 9.71 11.4 7.34 8.78 10.3
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 47
Table 8-19 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 15°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn ex
where
s, in.
3
6
15°
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
Pu
s
s
e
3
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
2 3 4 5 6
0.87 0.68 0.55 0.47 0.41
2.54 2.04 1.69 1.44 1.25
4.47 3.71 3.11 2.66 2.31
6.54 5.63 4.85 4.21 3.70
8.63 7.69 6.79 6.00 5.34
7 8 9 10 12
0.36 0.32 0.29 0.27 0.23
1.10 0.98 0.88 0.81 0.68
2.04 1.83 1.65 1.51 1.28
3.29 2.96 2.68 2.45 2.09
4.79 4.32 3.94 3.61 3.08
6.46 5.87 5.37 4.93 4.24
8.30 10.2 12.3 7.60 9.45 11.4 6.99 8.74 10.6 6.45 8.11 9.88 5.58 7.05 8.66
14 16 18 20 24
0.20 0.17 0.16 0.14 0.12
0.59 0.52 0.47 0.42 0.35
1.11 0.98 0.88 0.79 0.67
1.82 1.61 1.44 1.31 1.10
2.69 2.38 2.13 1.93 1.62
3.71 3.29 2.96 2.68 2.26
4.90 4.36 3.92 3.56 3.00
6.21 5.54 4.99 4.54 3.84
7.67 6.86 6.20 5.65 4.79
9.23 10.9 12.7 8.29 9.83 11.5 7.51 8.93 10.4 6.85 8.17 9.57 5.82 6.96 8.17
28 32 36
0.10 0.09 0.08
0.30 0.27 0.24
0.57 0.50 0.45
0.94 0.83 0.74
1.40 1.23 1.10
1.95 1.72 1.53
2.60 2.28 2.04
3.32 2.93 2.61
4.15 3.66 3.27
5.05 4.46 3.98
2 3 4 5 6
0.87 0.68 0.55 0.47 0.41
3.21 2.76 2.38 2.07 1.83
5.35 4.88 4.40 3.96 3.56
7.42 7.00 6.53 6.04 5.56
9.45 9.09 8.65 8.17 7.67
11.5 11.1 10.7 10.3 9.80
7 8 9 10 12
0.36 0.32 0.29 0.27 0.23
1.63 1.47 1.34 1.23 1.05
3.22 2.92 2.66 2.45 2.09
5.12 4.73 4.37 4.05 3.53
7.19 6.72 6.29 5.90 5.21
9.30 11.4 8.81 10.9 8.33 10.4 7.88 9.95 7.06 9.04
14 16 18 20 24
0.20 0.17 0.16 0.14 0.12
0.91 0.81 0.72 0.66 0.55
1.83 1.62 1.45 1.32 1.11
3.11 2.78 2.50 2.28 1.93
4.64 4.17 3.77 3.45 2.93
6.35 5.75 5.24 4.80 4.10
8.22 10.2 12.2 7.51 9.38 11.4 6.88 8.66 10.5 6.34 8.02 9.82 5.46 6.95 8.57
28 32 36
0.10 0.09 0.08
0.48 0.42 0.37
0.96 0.84 0.75
1.67 1.47 1.32
2.54 2.24 2.00
3.57 3.16 2.83
4.78 4.24 3.80
6
7
10.7 12.8 9.80 11.9 8.84 10.9 7.94 9.98 7.15 9.09
13.5 13.2 12.8 12.4 11.9
8
9
10
11
12
14.8 14.0 13.0 12.1 11.1
16.9 16.1 15.2 14.2 13.2
18.9 18.2 17.3 16.3 15.3
20.9 20.2 19.4 18.4 17.4
22.9 22.3 21.5 20.5 19.6
14.3 13.4 12.6 11.8 10.4
16.4 15.5 14.6 13.7 12.2
18.6 17.6 16.6 15.7 14.1
6.05 5.34 4.78
7.12 6.29 5.64
15.5 15.2 14.9 14.5 14.0
17.4 17.2 16.9 16.5 16.1
19.4 19.2 18.9 18.6 18.2
21.4 21.2 20.9 20.6 20.3
23.4 23.2 22.9 22.6 22.3
13.6 13.1 12.6 12.1 11.1
15.7 15.2 14.7 14.2 13.2
17.8 17.3 16.8 16.3 15.3
19.9 19.4 18.9 18.5 17.5
21.9 21.5 21.0 20.6 19.6
14.3 13.4 12.5 11.7 10.3
16.5 15.5 14.5 13.7 12.1
18.6 17.6 16.6 15.7 14.0
6.11 5.44 4.89
7.58 6.77 6.10
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9.15 10.8 12.6 8.21 9.75 11.4 7.42 8.85 10.4
8 - 48
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-19 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 30°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn ex
where
Pu
s, in.
3
6
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
30°
s
s
e
3
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
0.97 0.75 0.62 0.52 0.45
2.60 2.12 1.78 1.53 1.34
4.52 3.83 3.29 2.85 2.51
6.54 5.71 4.99 4.39 3.89
8.59 7.71 6.88 6.16 5.54
10.6 9.75 8.87 8.06 7.33
12.9 11.8 10.9 10.0 9.23
14.7 13.9 13.0 12.1 11.2
16.7 15.9 15.1 14.1 13.2
18.8 18.0 17.1 16.2 15.3
20.8 20.0 19.2 18.3 17.3
22.8 22.1 21.3 20.4 19.4
7 8 9 10 12
0.40 0.36 0.32 0.30 0.25
1.19 1.07 0.97 0.88 0.75
2.23 2.00 1.81 1.66 1.41
3.48 3.15 2.87 2.64 2.27
5.01 4.57 4.19 3.87 3.34
6.70 6.14 5.66 5.24 4.54
8.51 10.4 7.86 9.68 7.28 9.02 6.77 8.43 5.92 7.43
12.4 11.6 10.9 10.2 9.04
14.4 13.6 12.8 12.0 10.8
16.4 15.6 14.7 13.9 12.5
18.5 17.6 16.7 15.9 14.4
14 16 18 20 24
0.22 0.19 0.17 0.16 0.13
0.65 0.58 0.52 0.47 0.39
1.23 1.08 0.97 0.88 0.74
1.98 1.76 1.58 1.43 1.21
2.93 2.60 2.34 2.12 1.79
3.99 3.56 3.21 2.92 2.48
5.24 4.69 4.24 3.87 3.29
6.61 5.94 5.38 4.92 4.18
8.09 7.30 6.64 6.08 5.19
9.67 11.4 8.77 10.3 8.00 9.45 7.34 8.70 6.29 7.48
28 32 36
0.12 0.10 0.09
0.34 0.30 0.26
0.64 0.56 0.50
1.04 0.92 0.82
1.55 1.36 1.21
2.14 1.89 1.69
2.85 2.51 2.25
3.63 3.21 2.87
4.52 4.00 3.59
5.49 4.87 4.37
2 3 4 5 6
0.97 0.75 0.62 0.52 0.45
3.20 2.75 2.39 2.10 1.87
5.31 4.86 4.42 4.02 3.67
7.37 6.95 6.49 6.04 5.61
9.39 9.01 8.57 8.11 7.66
11.4 11.1 10.6 10.2 9.73
7 8 9 10 12
0.40 0.36 0.32 0.30 0.25
1.69 1.53 1.40 1.29 1.12
3.36 3.08 2.84 2.63 2.28
5.21 4.84 4.51 4.21 3.70
7.21 6.79 6.40 6.04 5.39
9.27 11.4 8.82 10.9 8.39 10.4 7.98 9.99 7.23 9.16
14 16 18 20 24
0.22 0.19 0.17 0.16 0.13
0.98 0.87 0.79 0.71 0.60
2.00 1.78 1.60 1.45 1.23
3.29 2.95 2.68 2.45 2.08
4.86 4.40 4.02 3.70 3.17
6.57 6.01 5.52 5.09 4.39
8.41 10.3 7.75 9.60 7.17 8.93 6.65 8.33 5.79 7.32
28 32 36
0.12 0.10 0.09
0.52 0.46 0.41
1.06 0.93 0.83
1.82 1.61 1.44
2.77 2.45 2.20
3.85 3.42 3.08
5.11 4.56 4.12
13.4 13.1 12.7 12.3 11.8
6.54 5.81 5.22
13.1 12.0 11.0 10.1 8.75 7.68 6.83 6.15
15.4 15.1 14.7 14.3 13.9
17.4 17.1 16.8 16.4 16.0
19.4 19.1 18.8 18.4 18.0
21.3 21.1 20.8 20.4 20.1
23.3 23.1 22.8 22.5 22.1
13.4 13.0 12.5 12.0 11.2
15.5 15.1 14.6 14.1 13.2
17.6 17.1 16.7 16.2 15.3
19.6 19.2 18.7 18.3 17.3
21.7 21.3 20.8 20.4 19.4
12.3 11.5 10.8 10.1 8.95
14.4 13.5 12.7 12.0 10.7
16.4 15.5 14.7 13.9 12.5
18.5 17.6 16.7 15.9 14.4
6.49 5.82 5.27
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.99 7.20 6.53
9.59 11.3 13.0 8.68 10.3 11.9 7.91 9.37 10.9
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 49
Table 8-19 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 45°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn ex
where
Pu
3
6
s
s
45°
s
e
s, in.
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.17 0.92 0.75 0.64 0.55
2.79 2.32 1.99 1.74 1.54
4.67 4.06 3.57 3.17 2.84
6.62 5.92 5.31 4.78 4.33
8.61 7.86 7.16 6.53 5.98
10.6 9.83 9.09 8.39 7.76
12.6 11.8 11.1 10.3 9.63
14.6 13.9 13.1 12.3 11.6
16.6 15.9 15.1 14.3 13.5
18.6 17.9 17.1 16.3 15.5
20.6 19.9 19.1 18.3 17.5
22.6 21.9 21.1 20.3 19.5
7 8 9 10 12
0.49 0.44 0.40 0.36 0.31
1.38 1.25 1.14 1.05 0.90
2.57 2.33 2.13 1.96 1.68
3.93 3.60 3.31 3.06 2.65
5.49 5.06 4.69 4.36 3.83
7.20 6.70 6.25 5.85 5.17
9.00 10.9 8.43 10.3 7.91 9.67 7.44 9.14 6.63 8.20
12.8 12.1 11.5 10.9 9.86
14.8 14.0 13.4 12.7 11.6
16.8 16.0 15.3 14.6 13.4
18.7 18.0 17.2 16.5 15.2
14 16 18 20 24
0.27 0.24 0.21 0.19 0.16
0.78 0.69 0.62 0.56 0.48
1.47 1.31 1.17 1.06 0.90
2.33 2.08 1.88 1.71 1.45
3.40 3.05 2.76 2.52 2.14
4.61 4.16 3.77 3.45 2.94
5.95 5.38 4.91 4.51 3.87
7.41 6.74 6.18 5.69 4.91
8.97 10.6 12.3 8.20 9.75 11.4 7.55 9.00 10.5 6.97 8.34 9.80 6.04 7.26 8.57
28 32 36
0.14 0.12 0.11
0.41 0.36 0.32
0.77 0.68 0.61
1.26 1.11 0.99
1.86 1.64 1.47
2.56 2.27 2.03
3.38 3.00 2.70
4.30 3.82 3.44
5.30 4.73 4.26
2 3 4 5 6
1.17 0.92 0.75 0.64 0.55
3.24 2.84 2.51 2.24 2.03
5.30 4.90 4.52 4.17 3.86
7.32 6.93 6.53 6.15 5.78
9.33 8.96 8.56 8.15 7.76
11.3 11.0 10.6 10.2 9.77
13.3 13.0 12.6 12.2 11.8
15.3 15.0 14.6 14.2 13.8
17.3 17.0 16.6 16.2 15.8
19.3 19.0 18.6 18.3 17.9
21.3 21.0 20.6 20.3 19.9
23.2 23.0 22.6 22.3 21.9
7 8 9 10 12
0.49 0.44 0.40 0.36 0.31
1.85 1.70 1.57 1.46 1.28
3.59 3.35 3.13 2.94 2.60
5.45 5.13 4.85 4.58 4.11
7.39 7.03 6.70 6.38 5.81
9.38 9.00 8.63 8.28 7.64
11.4 11.0 10.6 10.2 9.54
13.4 13.0 12.6 12.2 11.5
15.4 15.0 14.6 14.2 13.5
17.5 17.1 16.7 16.3 15.6
19.5 19.1 18.7 18.3 17.5
21.5 21.1 20.7 20.3 19.5
14 16 18 20 24
0.27 0.24 0.21 0.19 0.16
1.13 1.01 0.92 0.84 0.72
2.32 2.09 1.90 1.73 1.47
3.71 3.36 3.07 2.83 2.43
5.31 4.88 4.50 4.18 3.64
7.06 6.55 6.09 5.69 5.00
8.89 10.8 8.31 10.2 7.78 9.56 7.31 9.02 6.48 8.08
12.7 12.0 11.4 10.8 9.76
14.7 14.0 13.3 12.7 11.5
16.7 15.9 15.2 14.6 13.3
18.7 17.9 17.2 16.5 15.2
28 32 36
0.14 0.12 0.11
0.62 0.55 0.49
1.28 1.13 1.01
2.13 1.90 1.71
3.22 2.88 2.61
4.45 3.99 3.62
5.80 5.24 4.77
8.86 10.5 12.2 8.09 9.65 11.3 7.43 8.90 10.4
14.0 13.0 12.0
7.28 6.62 6.05
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.41 5.73 5.17
7.59 6.80 6.15
14.1 13.1 12.1 11.3 9.95 8.85 7.94 7.20
8 - 50
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-19 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 60°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn ex
where
3
6
s s
60°
s
e
s, in.
Pu
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.51 1.24 1.04 0.89 0.77
3.17 2.76 2.43 2.16 1.95
4.97 4.47 4.04 3.70 3.40
6.85 6.30 5.81 5.39 5.01
8.77 8.19 7.65 7.17 6.73
10.7 10.1 9.53 9.01 8.52
12.7 12.0 11.5 10.9 10.4
14.6 14.0 13.4 12.8 12.3
16.6 16.0 15.3 14.7 14.2
18.6 17.9 17.3 16.7 16.1
20.6 19.9 19.3 18.6 18.0
22.5 21.9 21.2 20.6 20.0
7 8 9 10 12
0.68 0.61 0.56 0.51 0.43
1.77 1.62 1.49 1.38 1.20
3.13 2.90 2.70 2.52 2.21
4.67 4.37 4.09 3.84 3.40
6.33 5.96 5.62 5.31 4.76
8.07 7.65 7.26 6.89 6.25
9.88 9.42 8.98 8.58 7.85
11.7 11.2 10.8 10.3 9.53
13.6 13.1 12.6 12.1 11.3
15.5 15.0 14.5 14.0 13.0
17.4 16.9 16.3 15.8 14.9
19.4 18.8 18.2 17.7 16.7
14 16 18 20 24
0.38 0.34 0.30 0.27 0.23
1.06 0.95 0.85 0.78 0.66
1.96 1.76 1.60 1.46 1.24
3.05 2.75 2.51 2.30 1.97
4.30 3.92 3.59 3.32 2.87
5.71 5.24 4.84 4.48 3.90
7.23 6.68 6.19 5.76 5.04
8.83 10.5 8.20 9.79 7.64 9.16 7.14 8.60 6.29 7.64
12.2 11.5 10.8 10.1 9.06
14.0 13.2 12.4 11.7 10.6
15.8 14.9 14.1 13.4 12.1
28 32 36
0.20 0.18 0.16
0.57 0.50 0.45
1.07 0.95 0.85
1.72 1.52 1.37
2.52 2.24 2.02
3.44 3.07 2.77
4.47 4.01 3.63
5.61 5.06 4.59
2 3 4 5 6
1.51 1.24 1.04 0.89 0.77
3.39 3.08 2.80 2.57 2.37
5.36 5.04 4.73 4.45 4.20
7.33 7.01 6.69 6.39 6.11
9.31 8.98 8.66 8.35 8.05
7 8 9 10 12
0.68 0.61 0.56 0.51 0.43
2.19 2.04 1.91 1.80 1.60
3.98 3.77 3.59 3.42 3.11
5.85 5.61 5.38 5.17 4.78
7.76 7.49 7.24 7.00 6.54
9.70 9.41 9.13 8.87 8.37
14 16 18 20 24
0.38 0.34 0.30 0.27 0.23
1.44 1.31 1.20 1.10 0.95
2.85 2.63 2.43 2.26 1.97
4.43 4.12 3.84 3.58 3.15
6.13 5.74 5.40 5.08 4.53
7.91 7.48 7.08 6.71 6.06
9.74 9.27 8.84 8.43 7.69
28 32 36
0.20 0.18 0.16
0.84 0.74 0.67
1.73 1.54 1.39
2.80 2.52 2.28
4.08 3.71 3.39
5.52 5.05 4.65
7.06 6.51 6.02
11.3 11.0 10.6 10.3 10.0
6.85 6.20 5.65
8.17 7.41 6.77
9.55 11.0 8.70 10.1 7.98 9.26
13.3 12.9 12.6 12.3 12.0
15.2 14.9 14.6 14.3 13.9
17.2 16.9 16.6 16.2 15.9
19.2 18.9 18.6 18.2 17.9
21.2 20.9 20.5 20.2 19.9
23.2 22.8 22.5 22.2 21.8
11.7 11.6 11.1 10.8 10.2
13.6 13.3 13.0 12.7 12.1
15.6 15.3 15.0 14.7 14.1
17.6 17.2 16.9 16.6 16.0
19.5 19.2 18.9 18.6 18.0
21.5 21.2 20.9 20.5 19.9
11.6 11.1 10.7 10.2 9.39
13.5 13.0 12.5 12.0 11.2
15.4 14.9 14.4 13.9 12.9
17.4 16.8 16.3 15.7 14.8
19.3 18.7 18.2 17.6 16.6
8.68 10.4 12.1 8.05 9.66 11.3 7.49 9.03 10.7
13.9 13.1 12.3
15.7 14.8 14.0
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 51
Table 8-19 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 75°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn ex
where
75°
3
6
s
Pu
s
s
e
s, in.
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.84 1.71 1.57 1.44 1.31
3.63 3.41 3.19 2.98 2.79
5.44 5.17 4.90 4.65 4.41
7.29 6.97 6.67 6.39 6.12
9.17 8.82 8.50 8.19 7.90
11.1 10.7 10.4 10.0 9.71
13.0 12.6 12.2 11.9 11.6
14.9 14.5 14.1 13.8 13.4
16.9 16.4 16.0 15.7 15.3
18.8 18.4 18.0 17.6 17.2
20.8 20.3 19.9 19.5 19.1
22.7 22.3 21.8 21.4 21.0
7 8 9 10 12
1.20 1.10 1.01 0.93 0.81
2.61 2.45 2.31 2.18 1.95
4.19 3.99 3.81 3.63 3.33
5.88 5.65 5.43 5.23 4.86
7.62 7.37 7.14 6.91 6.49
9.42 9.14 8.89 8.65 8.19
11.3 11.0 10.7 10.4 9.94
13.1 12.8 12.5 12.2 11.7
15.0 14.7 14.3 14.1 13.5
16.9 16.5 16.2 15.9 15.3
18.8 18.4 18.1 17.8 17.2
20.7 20.3 20.0 19.6 19.0
14 16 18 20 24
0.71 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.44
1.77 1.61 1.48 1.36 1.18
3.06 2.83 2.63 2.45 2.15
4.53 4.23 3.96 3.72 3.30
6.11 5.75 5.42 5.12 4.60
7.76 7.36 6.98 6.63 6.02
9.47 11.2 9.03 10.8 8.61 10.3 8.23 9.88 7.53 9.12
13.0 12.5 12.0 11.6 10.8
14.8 14.3 13.8 13.3 12.4
16.6 16.1 15.6 15.1 14.2
18.4 17.9 17.4 16.9 15.9
28 32 36
0.38 0.34 0.30
1.04 0.92 0.83
1.91 1.71 1.55
2.95 2.67 2.43
4.16 3.78 3.47
5.49 5.04 4.65
6.93 6.41 5.94
11.7 10.9 10.3
13.3 12.6 11.9
15.0 14.2 13.5
2 3 4 5 6
1.84 1.71 1.57 1.44 1.31
3.66 3.49 3.32 3.16 3.02
5.55 5.36 5.18 5.01 4.84
7.48 7.27 7.08 6.89 6.72
9.42 9.20 9.00 8.81 8.62
11.4 11.2 10.9 10.7 10.5
13.3 13.1 12.9 12.7 12.5
15.3 15.1 14.8 14.6 14.4
17.6 17.0 16.8 16.6 16.3
19.6 19.0 18.7 18.5 18.3
21.5 21.0 20.7 20.5 20.2
23.5 22.9 22.7 22.4 22.2
7 8 9 10 12
1.20 1.10 1.01 0.93 0.81
2.88 2.75 2.63 2.52 2.32
4.69 4.54 4.40 4.27 4.03
6.55 6.39 6.24 6.09 5.82
8.44 8.27 8.11 7.95 7.66
10.4 10.2 10.0 9.83 9.52
12.3 12.1 11.9 11.7 11.4
14.2 14.0 13.8 13.6 13.3
16.1 15.9 15.7 15.6 15.2
18.1 17.9 17.7 17.5 17.1
20.0 19.8 19.6 19.4 19.0
22.0 21.8 21.5 21.3 20.9
14 16 18 20 24
0.71 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.44
2.15 2.00 1.87 1.75 1.55
3.82 3.62 3.44 3.28 2.98
5.57 5.35 5.14 4.94 4.57
7.38 7.13 6.90 6.67 6.24
9.22 8.95 8.69 8.45 7.98
11.1 10.8 10.5 10.3 9.75
13.0 12.7 12.4 12.1 11.6
14.9 14.5 14.2 13.9 13.4
16.7 16.4 16.1 15.8 15.2
18.7 18.3 18.0 17.7 17.1
20.6 20.2 19.9 19.5 18.9
28 32 36
0.38 0.34 0.30
1.40 1.27 1.16
2.74 2.52 2.33
4.24 3.95 3.68
5.85 5.49 5.16
7.54 7.13 6.75
9.28 11.1 8.83 10.6 8.41 10.1
12.9 12.4 11.9
14.7 14.1 13.7
16.5 16.0 15.4
18.3 17.8 17.3
8.45 10.0 7.86 9.37 7.32 8.78
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 52
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-20. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 0°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn ex = e
where
s, in.
3
6
Pu
s
s
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
5½
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.14 0.94 0.80 0.70 0.62
2.75 2.32 1.99 1.74 1.54
4.59 3.92 3.39 2.96 2.62
6.61 5.80 5.10 4.51 4.03
8.69 7.82 6.98 6.24 5.60
10.8 9.90 9.00 8.15 7.39
12.9 12.0 11.1 10.2 9.30
14.9 14.1 13.2 12.3 11.3
17.0 16.2 15.3 14.4 13.4
19.0 18.3 17.4 16.5 15.5
21.0 20.4 19.6 18.6 17.7
23.0 22.4 21.7 20.8 19.8
7 8 9 10 12
0.55 0.50 0.46 0.42 0.37
1.38 1.25 1.14 1.04 0.90
2.36 2.14 1.96 1.80 1.55
3.63 3.30 3.01 2.78 2.39
5.07 4.61 4.22 3.89 3.36
6.72 6.15 5.66 5.23 4.53
8.53 10.5 7.84 9.67 7.23 8.97 6.70 8.34 5.82 7.28
12.5 11.6 10.8 10.1 8.87
14.6 13.6 12.8 12.0 10.6
16.7 15.7 14.8 13.9 12.4
18.8 17.8 16.9 15.9 14.2
14 16 18 20 24
0.32 0.29 0.26 0.24 0.20
0.79 0.70 0.63 0.57 0.48
1.36 1.21 1.09 0.99 0.84
2.10 1.87 1.68 1.53 1.29
2.96 2.64 2.37 2.16 1.83
3.99 3.55 3.20 2.91 2.46
5.13 4.58 4.14 3.77 3.19
6.44 5.76 5.21 4.75 4.03
7.87 7.05 6.38 5.82 4.94
9.42 11.1 12.8 8.47 9.99 11.6 7.68 9.08 10.6 7.02 8.30 9.69 5.97 7.07 8.28
28 32 36
0.18 0.16 0.14
0.42 0.37 0.33
0.73 0.64 0.57
1.11 0.98 0.88
1.58 1.39 1.24
2.13 1.88 1.68
2.77 2.44 2.18
3.49 3.08 2.75
4.29 3.79 3.39
5.19 4.58 4.10
2 3 4 5 6
1.14 0.94 0.80 0.70 0.62
3.25 2.86 2.52 2.24 2.00
5.37 4.93 4.47 4.04 3.65
7.45 7.05 6.59 6.12 5.66
9.49 9.14 8.72 8.25 7.77
11.5 11.2 10.8 10.4 9.91
13.5 13.2 12.9 12.5 12.1
15.5 15.3 15.0 14.6 14.2
17.5 17.3 17.0 16.7 16.3
19.5 19.3 19.0 18.7 18.4
21.4 21.3 21.0 20.8 20.4
23.4 23.3 23.0 22.8 22.5
7 8 9 10 12
0.55 0.50 0.46 0.42 0.37
1.80 1.64 1.50 1.38 1.19
3.31 3.02 2.77 2.56 2.21
5.23 4.84 4.49 4.18 3.65
7.29 6.83 6.39 5.99 5.29
9.42 8.93 8.45 7.99 7.16
11.6 11.1 10.6 10.1 9.15
13.7 13.2 12.7 12.2 11.2
15.8 15.4 14.9 14.4 13.4
17.9 17.5 17.0 16.5 15.5
20.0 19.6 19.2 18.7 17.7
22.1 21.7 21.3 20.8 19.8
14 16 18 20 24
0.32 0.29 0.26 0.24 0.20
1.04 0.93 0.84 0.76 0.64
1.95 1.74 1.57 1.43 1.21
3.24 2.90 2.62 2.39 2.02
4.72 4.24 3.84 3.50 2.98
6.44 5.83 5.31 4.87 4.16
8.32 10.3 12.4 7.59 9.48 11.5 6.95 8.74 10.7 6.39 8.08 9.89 5.49 6.99 8.61
14.5 13.6 12.6 11.8 10.4
16.7 15.7 14.7 13.8 12.2
18.8 17.8 16.8 15.9 14.1
28 32 36
0.18 0.16 0.14
0.55 0.49 0.43
1.05 0.93 0.83
1.76 1.55 1.38
2.59 2.29 2.05
3.63 3.21 2.88
4.80 4.25 3.81
6.13 5.45 4.90
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.59 6.77 6.09
6.15 5.44 4.87
7.21 6.38 5.72
9.18 10.9 12.7 8.21 9.76 11.4 7.41 8.83 10.4
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 53
Table 8-20 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 15°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn ex
where
Pu
s, in.
3
6
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
15°
s
s
e
1 5½
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.18 0.97 0.83 0.72 0.64
2.78 2.34 2.02 1.77 1.57
4.61 3.97 3.45 3.03 2.70
6.59 5.80 5.11 4.54 4.06
8.64 7.78 6.97 6.26 5.65
10.7 9.83 8.94 8.12 7.39
12.8 11.9 11.0 10.1 9.27
14.8 14.0 13.1 12.1 11.2
16.8 16.1 15.2 14.2 13.3
18.9 18.1 17.3 16.3 15.4
20.9 20.2 19.3 18.4 17.5
22.9 22.2 21.4 20.5 19.6
7 8 9 10 12
0.57 0.52 0.48 0.44 0.38
1.41 1.28 1.17 1.07 0.93
2.43 2.20 2.01 1.85 1.60
3.66 3.34 3.06 2.82 2.44
5.13 4.68 4.30 3.98 3.44
6.74 6.18 5.70 5.27 4.58
8.52 10.4 7.86 9.65 7.27 8.97 6.76 8.36 5.90 7.34
12.4 11.6 10.8 10.1 8.91
14.4 13.5 12.7 11.9 10.6
16.5 15.6 14.7 13.8 12.4
18.6 17.6 16.7 15.8 14.2
14 16 18 20 24
0.33 0.30 0.27 0.25 0.21
0.81 0.72 0.65 0.59 0.50
1.40 1.25 1.13 1.02 0.87
2.15 1.91 1.72 1.57 1.33
3.03 2.70 2.44 2.22 1.88
4.05 3.62 3.27 2.98 2.53
5.22 4.68 4.23 3.86 3.27
6.51 5.84 5.28 4.83 4.11
7.94 7.14 6.48 5.93 5.05
9.47 11.1 12.8 8.54 10.1 11.7 7.77 9.16 10.7 7.11 8.40 9.78 6.07 7.19 8.39
28 32 36
0.18 0.16 0.14
0.43 0.38 0.34
0.75 0.66 0.59
1.15 1.01 0.90
1.63 1.43 1.28
2.19 1.93 1.73
2.84 2.50 2.24
3.57 3.15 2.82
4.39 3.88 3.48
5.29 4.68 4.19
2 3 4 5 6
1.18 0.97 0.83 0.72 0.64
3.24 2.85 2.51 2.23 2.00
5.34 4.90 4.45 4.05 3.68
7.40 6.99 6.53 6.07 5.62
9.43 9.07 8.63 8.16 7.69
11.5 11.1 10.7 10.3 9.80
7 8 9 10 12
0.57 0.52 0.48 0.44 0.38
1.81 1.65 1.52 1.40 1.21
3.36 3.08 2.83 2.62 2.27
5.20 4.82 4.48 4.18 3.66
7.22 6.78 6.36 5.98 5.31
9.31 11.4 8.83 10.9 8.37 10.5 7.93 9.97 7.13 9.08
14 16 18 20 24
0.33 0.30 0.27 0.25 0.21
1.07 0.95 0.86 0.78 0.66
2.00 1.79 1.62 1.47 1.25
3.25 2.92 2.65 2.42 2.06
4.76 4.29 3.90 3.58 3.05
6.44 5.85 5.34 4.91 4.21
8.28 10.2 12.3 7.58 9.43 11.4 6.97 8.72 10.6 6.43 8.09 9.87 5.55 7.03 8.64
28 32 36
0.18 0.16 0.14
0.57 0.50 0.45
1.08 0.95 0.85
1.79 1.58 1.42
2.66 2.35 2.11
3.68 3.26 2.93
4.87 4.33 3.90
13.5 13.2 12.8 12.4 11.9
6.28 5.56 4.99
7.33 6.50 5.84
15.4 15.2 14.8 14.5 14.0
17.4 17.2 16.87 16.5 16.1
19.4 19.2 18.9 18.6 18.2
21.4 21.2 20.9 20.6 20.2
23.4 23.1 23.0 22.6 22.3
13.5 13.1 12.6 12.1 11.1
15.7 15.2 14.7 14.2 13.2
17.7 17.3 16.8 16.3 15.3
19.8 19.4 18.9 18.4 17.4
21.9 21.4 21.0 20.6 19.6
14.3 13.4 12.5 11.7 10.4
16.4 15.5 14.6 13.7 12.2
18.6 17.6 16.6 15.7 14.1
6.19 5.52 4.97
7.65 6.84 6.18
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9.22 10.9 12.6 8.27 9.81 11.4 7.49 8.91 10.4
8 - 54
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-20 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 30°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn ex
where
Pu
s, in.
3
6
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
30°
s
s
e
5½
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.30 1.08 0.92 0.80 0.71
2.90 2.47 2.14 1.89 1.69
4.72 4.13 3.64 3.24 2.91
6.66 5.94 5.30 4.76 4.29
8.65 7.86 7.12 6.46 5.88
10.7 9.85 9.04 8.29 7.61
12.7 11.9 11.0 10.2 9.45
14.7 13.9 13.0 12.2 11.4
16.7 16.0 15.1 14.2 13.4
18.7 18.0 17.1 16.3 15.4
20.8 20.0 19.2 18.3 17.4
22.8 22.1 21.2 20.4 19.5
7 8 9 10 12
0.64 0.58 0.53 0.49 0.42
1.53 1.39 1.28 1.18 1.02
2.63 2.40 2.20 2.03 1.76
3.90 3.57 3.29 3.04 2.65
5.38 4.95 4.58 4.26 3.72
7.01 6.49 6.02 5.61 4.92
8.76 10.6 8.14 9.92 7.59 9.29 7.09 8.72 6.25 7.73
12.5 11.8 11.1 10.4 9.31
14.5 13.7 12.9 12.2 11.0
16.5 15.7 14.9 14.1 12.8
18.6 17.7 16.8 16.0 14.6
14 16 18 20 24
0.37 0.33 0.30 0.27 0.23
0.90 0.80 0.72 0.66 0.56
1.55 1.38 1.25 1.13 0.96
2.34 2.09 1.89 1.73 1.46
3.29 2.95 2.67 2.43 2.07
4.37 3.92 3.55 3.25 2.77
5.58 5.03 4.57 4.19 3.57
6.93 6.26 5.70 5.23 4.47
8.38 7.59 6.93 6.36 5.47
9.93 11.6 9.03 10.6 8.27 9.70 7.62 8.95 6.56 7.73
28 32 36
0.20 0.18 0.16
0.48 0.43 0.38
0.83 0.73 0.66
1.27 1.12 1.00
1.79 1.58 1.42
2.41 2.13 1.91
3.11 2.76 2.47
3.90 3.46 3.10
4.78 4.25 3.81
5.75 5.11 4.59
2 3 4 5 6
1.30 1.08 0.92 0.80 0.71
3.27 2.89 2.56 2.29 2.08
5.33 4.91 4.50 4.13 3.80
7.36 6.96 6.53 6.10 5.69
9.38 9.01 8.58 8.14 7.70
11.4 11.0 10.6 10.2 9.75
13.4 13.1 12.7 12.3 11.8
15.4 15.1 14.7 14.3 13.9
17.4 17.1 16.8 16.4 15.9
19.3 19.1 18.8 18.4 18.0
21.3 21.1 20.8 20.4 20.0
23.3 23.0 22.8 22.5 22.1
7 8 9 10 12
0.64 0.58 0.53 0.49 0.42
1.89 1.74 1.61 1.49 1.30
3.51 3.25 3.02 2.81 2.47
5.31 4.96 4.64 4.35 3.85
7.27 6.86 6.49 6.13 5.51
9.30 8.86 8.44 8.04 7.31
11.4 10.9 10.5 10.0 9.22
13.4 13.0 12.5 12.1 11.2
15.5 15.0 14.6 14.1 13.2
17.6 17.1 16.7 16.2 15.3
19.6 19.2 18.7 18.3 17.3
21.7 21.3 20.8 20.4 19.4
14 16 18 20 24
0.37 0.33 0.30 0.27 0.23
1.15 1.03 0.93 0.85 0.72
2.19 1.96 1.78 1.62 1.38
3.44 3.11 2.83 2.60 2.23
4.98 4.54 4.16 3.83 3.30
6.67 6.12 5.63 5.21 4.51
8.49 10.4 7.83 9.66 7.26 9.00 6.74 8.41 5.89 7.40
12.4 11.6 10.8 10.2 9.02
14.4 13.5 12.8 12.0 10.7
16.4 15.6 14.7 13.9 12.5
18.5 17.6 16.7 15.9 14.4
28 32 36
0.20 0.18 0.16
0.63 0.55 0.50
1.20 1.06 0.95
1.95 1.73 1.55
2.89 2.57 2.31
3.96 3.53 3.18
5.21 4.67 4.22
6.59 5.92 5.36
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8.07 7.28 6.61
6.78 6.04 5.44
13.3 12.2 11.2 10.4 8.99 7.91 7.06 6.36
9.66 11.3 13.1 8.75 10.3 12.0 7.98 9.43 11.0
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 55
Table 8-20 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 45°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn ex
where
Pu
3
6
s
s
45°
s
e
s, in.
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
5½
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.53 1.30 1.11 0.98 0.87
3.18 2.76 2.43 2.17 1.95
4.96 4.42 3.97 3.60 3.28
6.84 6.22 5.67 5.19 4.77
8.77 8.09 7.46 6.89 6.37
10.7 10.0 9.32 8.68 8.09
12.7 12.0 11.2 10.6 9.90
14.7 14.0 13.2 12.5 11.8
16.7 15.9 15.2 14.4 13.7
18.7 17.9 17.2 16.4 15.6
20.7 19.9 19.2 18.4 17.6
22.6 21.9 21.2 20.4 19.6
7 8 9 10 12
0.78 0.71 0.65 0.60 0.52
1.78 1.63 1.50 1.39 1.22
3.01 2.77 2.57 2.39 2.08
4.40 4.07 3.78 3.52 3.09
5.91 5.50 5.13 4.81 4.26
7.56 7.07 6.64 6.25 5.58
9.31 11.1 8.76 10.5 8.26 9.97 7.81 9.45 7.01 8.54
13.0 12.4 11.8 11.2 10.2
14.9 14.2 13.6 13.0 11.9
16.9 16.2 15.5 14.8 13.6
18.8 18.1 17.4 16.7 15.4
14 16 18 20 24
0.45 0.41 0.37 0.33 0.28
1.08 0.96 0.87 0.79 0.68
1.85 1.65 1.50 1.37 1.16
2.75 2.48 2.25 2.06 1.76
3.82 3.45 3.14 2.88 2.47
5.02 4.55 4.16 3.82 3.28
6.34 5.77 5.29 4.87 4.21
7.76 7.09 6.53 6.04 5.23
9.28 10.9 8.53 10.1 7.87 9.30 7.30 8.65 6.35 7.55
12.6 11.6 10.8 10.1 8.85
14.3 13.3 12.4 11.6 10.2
28 32 36
0.25 0.22 0.20
0.59 0.52 0.46
1.01 0.89 0.80
1.53 1.35 1.21
2.15 1.91 1.71
2.87 2.55 2.29
3.69 3.29 2.96
4.61 4.11 3.70
5.61 5.01 4.53
2 3 4 5 6
1.53 1.30 1.11 0.98 0.87
3.39 3.04 2.74 2.49 2.28
5.36 4.99 4.64 4.31 4.02
7.35 6.98 6.60 6.24 5.89
9.35 8.98 8.60 8.21 7.84
11.3 11.0 10.6 10.2 9.82
13.3 13.0 12.6 12.2 11.8
15.3 15.0 14.6 14.2 13.8
17.3 17.0 16.6 16.3 15.9
19.3 19.0 18.6 18.3 17.9
21.3 21.0 20.6 20.3 19.9
23.2 22.9 22.6 22.3 21.9
7 8 9 10 12
0.78 0.71 0.65 0.60 0.52
2.10 1.94 1.81 1.69 1.50
3.76 3.53 3.32 3.13 2.80
5.57 5.28 5.00 4.74 4.29
7.48 7.13 6.81 6.50 5.94
9.44 9.07 8.71 8.37 7.74
11.4 11.0 10.7 10.3 9.61
13.4 13.0 12.7 12.3 11.5
15.5 15.1 14.7 14.3 13.5
17.5 17.1 16.7 16.3 15.5
19.5 19.1 18.7 18.3 17.5
21.5 21.1 20.7 20.3 19.5
14 16 18 20 24
0.45 0.41 0.37 0.33 0.28
1.34 1.21 1.10 1.01 0.86
2.52 2.29 2.09 1.92 1.64
3.89 3.55 3.26 3.01 2.61
5.45 5.02 4.65 4.33 3.79
7.17 6.67 6.22 5.82 5.13
8.98 10.9 8.41 10.2 7.89 9.65 7.42 9.11 6.60 8.17
12.8 12.1 11.5 10.9 9.84
14.7 14.0 13.4 12.7 11.6
16.7 16.0 15.3 14.6 13.4
18.7 17.9 17.2 16.5 15.2
28 32 36
0.25 0.22 0.20
0.75 0.67 0.60
1.44 1.27 1.14
2.30 2.05 1.85
3.36 3.02 2.73
4.58 4.12 3.74
5.92 5.35 4.88
8.95 10.6 12.3 8.18 9.73 11.4 7.52 8.98 10.5
14.1 13.0 12.1
7.38 6.72 6.15
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.69 6.00 5.43
7.87 7.07 6.40
9.11 8.20 7.44
8 - 56
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-20 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 60°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn ex
where
3
6
s
s
60°
s
e
s, in.
Pu
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
5½
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.78 1.62 1.45 1.31 1.18
3.55 3.26 2.97 2.71 2.48
5.34 4.95 4.57 4.23 3.93
7.17 6.71 6.27 5.86 5.50
9.04 8.53 8.04 7.58 7.16
10.9 10.4 9.86 9.36 8.90
12.9 12.3 11.7 11.2 10.7
14.8 14.2 13.6 13.1 12.5
16.7 16.1 15.5 15.0 14.4
18.7 18.1 17.5 16.9 16.3
20.6 20.0 19.4 18.8 18.2
22.6 22.0 21.4 20.7 20.1
7 8 9 10 12
1.07 0.98 0.90 0.83 0.72
2.28 2.11 1.97 1.84 1.62
3.66 3.43 3.22 3.03 2.70
5.18 4.88 4.61 4.37 3.93
6.79 6.45 6.12 5.82 5.28
8.48 10.2 8.09 9.80 7.72 9.39 7.37 9.00 6.73 8.28
12.0 11.6 11.1 10.7 9.91
13.9 13.4 12.9 12.5 11.6
15.7 15.2 14.7 14.2 13.4
17.6 17.1 16.6 16.1 15.1
19.5 19.0 18.4 17.9 16.9
14 16 18 20 24
0.64 0.57 0.52 0.47 0.40
1.45 1.31 1.19 1.09 0.93
2.43 2.21 2.02 1.85 1.59
3.56 3.24 2.98 2.75 2.37
4.81 4.42 4.07 3.77 3.28
6.19 5.71 5.29 4.93 4.32
7.66 7.11 6.63 6.19 5.46
9.22 10.9 8.60 10.2 8.05 9.55 7.55 8.98 6.69 8.01
12.5 11.8 11.1 10.5 9.41
14.3 13.5 12.7 12.1 10.9
16.0 15.2 14.4 13.7 12.4
28 32 36
0.35 0.31 0.28
0.82 0.72 0.65
1.39 1.24 1.11
2.08 1.86 1.67
2.90 2.59 2.34
3.83 3.43 3.11
4.86 4.37 3.97
5.99 5.41 4.93
2 3 4 5 6
1.78 1.62 1.45 1.31 1.18
3.59 3.35 3.11 2.89 2.70
5.48 5.20 4.93 4.66 4.42
7.41 7.12 6.82 6.53 6.26
9.36 9.06 8.75 8.45 8.16
7 8 9 10 12
1.07 0.98 0.90 0.83 0.72
2.52 2.36 2.23 2.10 1.89
4.19 3.99 3.81 3.64 3.34
6.01 5.77 5.55 5.35 4.97
7.88 7.62 7.37 7.13 6.70
9.79 9.51 9.24 8.98 8.49
14 16 18 20 24
0.64 0.57 0.52 0.47 0.40
1.71 1.57 1.44 1.33 1.16
3.08 2.85 2.65 2.47 2.17
4.63 4.32 4.04 3.79 3.36
6.29 5.92 5.58 5.26 4.71
8.04 7.62 7.22 6.86 6.21
9.85 9.39 8.95 8.55 7.82
28 32 36
0.35 0.31 0.28
1.02 0.91 0.82
1.92 1.72 1.56
3.00 2.71 2.46
4.26 3.88 3.55
5.67 5.20 4.80
7.19 6.64 6.16
11.3 11.0 10.7 10.4 10.1
7.21 6.54 5.98
8.51 7.75 7.10
9.88 11.3 9.02 10.4 8.29 9.55
13.3 13.0 12.7 12.3 12.0
15.3 15.0 14.6 14.3 14.0
17.2 16.9 16.6 16.3 15.9
19.2 18.9 18.6 18.2 17.9
21.2 20.9 20.6 20.2 19.9
23.2 22.9 22.5 22.2 21.9
11.7 11.4 11.1 10.9 10.3
13.7 13.4 13.1 12.8 12.2
15.6 15.3 15.0 14.7 14.1
17.6 17.3 17.0 16.7 16.1
19.6 19.2 18.9 18.6 18.0
21.5 21.2 20.9 20.6 19.9
11.7 11.2 10.7 10.3 9.50
13.6 13.1 12.6 12.1 11.2
15.5 15.0 14.4 13.9 13.0
17.4 16.9 16.3 15.8 14.8
19.3 18.8 18.2 17.7 16.7
8.80 10.5 12.2 8.17 9.77 11.4 7.61 9.14 10.7
14.0 13.1 12.4
15.8 14.9 14.1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 57
Table 8-20 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 75°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn ex
where
3
6
s s s
e
s, in.
75° P u
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
5½
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.92 1.87 1.82 1.75 1.68
3.82 3.72 3.60 3.47 3.33
5.70 5.54 5.37 5.18 5.00
7.57 7.36 7.14 6.92 6.69
9.45 9.19 8.94 8.68 8.42
11.3 11.1 10.8 10.5 10.2
13.2 12.9 12.6 12.3 12.0
15.2 14.8 14.5 14.1 13.8
17.1 16.7 16.3 16.0 15.7
19.0 18.6 18.2 17.9 17.5
20.9 20.5 20.1 19.8 19.4
22.9 22.5 22.1 21.7 21.3
7 8 9 10 12
1.60 1.52 1.45 1.38 1.25
3.19 3.06 2.93 2.80 2.57
4.81 4.63 4.46 4.29 3.98
6.47 6.26 6.05 5.85 5.48
8.17 7.93 7.70 7.48 7.07
9.92 9.66 9.41 9.16 8.71
11.7 11.4 11.2 10.9 10.4
13.5 13.2 12.9 12.6 12.1
15.3 15.0 14.7 14.4 13.9
17.2 16.9 16.5 16.2 15.7
19.1 18.7 18.4 18.1 17.5
20.9 20.6 20.3 19.9 19.3
14 16 18 20 24
1.13 1.03 0.95 0.87 0.75
2.36 2.18 2.02 1.88 1.65
3.70 3.45 3.23 3.03 2.69
5.15 4.85 4.57 4.32 3.87
6.69 6.34 6.01 5.71 5.17
8.29 7.90 7.54 7.19 6.57
9.96 9.53 9.13 8.75 8.05
11.7 11.2 10.8 10.4 9.60
13.4 12.9 12.5 12.0 11.2
15.2 14.7 14.2 13.7 12.9
16.9 16.4 15.9 15.4 14.5
18.7 18.2 17.7 17.2 16.2
28 32 36
0.66 0.59 0.53
1.46 1.31 1.19
2.42 2.18 1.99
3.50 3.19 2.92
4.71 4.32 3.98
6.03 5.56 5.15
7.44 6.90 6.42
12.1 11.4 10.7
13.7 12.9 12.2
15.4 14.6 13.8
2 3 4 5 6
1.92 1.87 1.82 1.75 1.68
3.80 3.70 3.59 3.48 3.36
5.69 5.55 5.40 5.26 5.11
7.59 7.42 7.25 7.09 6.93
9.51 9.32 9.14 8.96 8.78
11.5 11.2 11.1 10.9 10.7
13.4 13.2 13.0 12.8 12.6
15.4 15.1 14.9 14.7 14.5
17.6 17.1 16.9 16.6 16.4
19.6 19.0 18.8 18.6 18.4
21.5 21.0 20.8 20.5 20.3
23.5 23.0 22.7 22.5 22.2
7 8 9 10 12
1.60 1.52 1.45 1.38 1.25
3.24 3.13 3.02 2.91 2.72
4.97 4.84 4.71 4.58 4.34
6.77 6.62 6.47 6.33 6.07
8.62 8.45 8.29 8.14 7.85
10.5 10.3 10.2 9.98 9.67
12.4 12.2 12.0 11.9 11.5
14.3 14.1 13.9 13.7 13.4
16.2 16.0 15.8 15.6 15.3
18.1 17.9 17.7 17.6 17.2
20.1 19.9 19.7 19.5 19.1
22.0 21.8 21.6 21.4 21.0
14 16 18 20 24
1.13 1.03 0.95 0.87 0.75
2.54 2.38 2.24 2.11 1.88
4.13 3.92 3.74 3.57 3.27
5.82 5.59 5.38 5.17 4.80
7.57 7.32 7.09 6.87 6.44
9.38 9.10 8.85 8.61 8.15
11.2 10.9 10.7 10.4 9.90
13.1 12.8 12.5 12.2 11.7
15.0 14.6 14.3 14.0 13.5
16.8 16.5 16.2 15.9 15.3
18.7 18.4 18.1 17.7 17.1
20.6 20.3 19.9 19.6 19.0
28 32 36
0.66 0.59 0.53
1.70 1.55 1.42
3.00 2.77 2.57
4.47 4.17 3.90
6.06 5.70 5.37
7.72 7.31 6.93
9.43 11.2 8.99 10.7 8.57 10.3
13.0 12.5 12.0
14.8 14.3 13.8
16.6 16.1 15.5
18.4 17.9 17.3
8.93 10.5 8.32 9.81 7.78 9.21
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 58
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-21. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 0°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn ex = e
where
s, in.
3
6
Pu
s
s
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
8
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.31 1.12 0.98 0.87 0.79
2.91 2.54 2.24 1.99 1.80
4.71 4.14 3.66 3.27 2.95
6.66 5.95 5.33 4.80 4.35
8.69 7.90 7.15 6.48 5.90
10.8 9.93 9.10 8.33 7.63
12.8 12.0 11.1 10.3 9.49
14.9 14.1 13.2 12.3 11.5
16.9 16.2 15.3 14.4 13.5
18.9 18.2 17.4 16.5 15.6
21.0 20.3 19.5 18.6 17.7
23.0 22.4 21.6 20.7 19.8
7 8 9 10 12
0.71 0.65 0.60 0.56 0.49
1.63 1.49 1.38 1.28 1.11
2.68 2.46 2.27 2.11 1.84
3.97 3.65 3.37 3.13 2.73
5.40 4.97 4.59 4.27 3.73
7.02 6.48 6.01 5.59 4.90
8.77 10.7 8.13 9.91 7.55 9.24 7.04 8.64 6.19 7.63
12.6 11.8 11.1 10.4 9.18
14.6 13.8 13.0 12.2 10.9
16.7 15.8 14.9 14.1 12.6
18.8 17.9 17.0 16.1 14.5
14 16 18 20 24
0.44 0.39 0.36 0.33 0.28
0.99 0.89 0.80 0.73 0.63
1.64 1.47 1.33 1.22 1.04
2.42 2.17 1.97 1.80 1.53
3.31 2.98 2.70 2.47 2.10
4.36 3.91 3.55 3.25 2.77
5.50 4.95 4.50 4.12 3.51
6.80 6.13 5.57 5.10 4.35
8.20 7.40 6.73 6.17 5.28
9.73 11.4 13.1 8.80 10.3 11.9 8.02 9.39 10.9 7.35 8.62 9.99 6.30 7.39 8.59
28 32 36
0.25 0.22 0.20
0.55 0.48 0.43
0.91 0.80 0.72
1.33 1.18 1.06
1.83 1.62 1.45
2.41 2.13 1.91
3.06 2.71 2.43
3.79 3.36 3.01
4.60 4.08 3.66
5.50 4.87 4.37
2 3 4 5 6
1.31 1.12 0.98 0.87 0.79
3.28 2.93 2.63 2.37 2.15
5.35 4.94 4.52 4.13 3.78
7.42 7.03 6.59 6.15 5.72
9.47 9.12 8.70 8.25 7.78
11.5 11.2 10.8 10.4 9.90
13.5 13.2 12.9 12.5 12.0
15.5 15.3 14.9 14.6 14.1
17.5 17.3 17.0 16.6 16.2
19.5 19.3 19.0 18.69 18.3
21.4 21.3 21.0 20.7 20.4
23.4 23.3 23.0 22.8 22.4
7 8 9 10 12
0.71 0.65 0.60 0.56 0.49
1.97 1.81 1.67 1.55 1.35
3.47 3.19 2.95 2.75 2.40
5.32 4.95 4.62 4.33 3.82
7.33 6.89 6.48 6.10 5.43
9.43 8.95 8.49 8.05 7.25
11.6 11.1 10.6 10.1 9.21
13.7 13.2 12.7 12.2 11.3
15.8 15.4 14.9 14.4 13.4
17.9 17.5 17.0 16.5 15.5
20.0 19.6 19.1 18.7 17.7
22.1 21.7 21.3 20.8 19.8
14 16 18 20 24
0.44 0.39 0.36 0.33 0.28
1.20 1.08 0.97 0.89 0.76
2.14 1.92 1.75 1.60 1.37
3.41 3.07 2.79 2.56 2.18
4.86 4.40 4.00 3.67 3.14
6.56 5.96 5.46 5.02 4.32
8.40 10.4 12.4 7.69 9.56 11.5 7.06 8.83 10.7 6.52 8.18 9.97 5.62 7.11 8.71
14.5 13.6 12.7 11.9 10.4
16.7 15.7 14.7 13.9 12.3
18.8 17.8 16.8 15.9 14.2
28 32 36
0.25 0.22 0.20
0.66 0.58 0.52
1.19 1.05 0.95
1.90 1.68 1.51
2.75 2.44 2.19
3.78 3.35 3.01
4.93 4.38 3.94
6.26 5.58 5.02
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.70 6.88 6.21
6.46 5.73 5.15
7.51 6.67 5.99
9.27 11.0 12.7 8.31 9.85 11.5 7.52 8.93 10.4
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 59
Table 8-21 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 15°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn ex
where
Pu
s, in.
3
6
15°
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
s
e
8
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.35 1.16 1.02 0.90 0.81
2.96 2.58 2.28 2.03 1.84
4.75 4.20 3.73 3.35 3.03
6.67 5.98 5.37 4.85 4.40
8.67 7.90 7.17 6.53 5.96
10.7 9.89 9.08 8.34 7.66
12.7 11.9 11.1 10.3 9.48
14.8 14.0 13.1 12.2 11.4
16.8 16.0 15.2 14.3 13.4
18.8 18.1 17.3 16.3 15.4
20.9 20.2 19.3 18.4 17.5
22.9 22.2 21.4 20.5 19.6
7 8 9 10 12
0.74 0.68 0.63 0.58 0.51
1.67 1.53 1.42 1.31 1.15
2.76 2.53 2.34 2.17 1.90
4.02 3.70 3.43 3.19 2.79
5.48 5.05 4.68 4.36 3.82
7.06 6.53 6.07 5.66 4.97
8.79 10.6 8.17 9.91 7.61 9.27 7.12 8.69 6.28 7.69
12.6 11.8 11.0 10.4 9.23
14.5 13.7 12.9 12.2 10.9
16.6 15.7 14.8 14.0 12.6
18.6 17.7 16.8 16.0 14.4
14 16 18 20 24
0.45 0.41 0.37 0.34 0.29
1.02 0.91 0.83 0.76 0.65
1.69 1.51 1.37 1.26 1.07
2.48 2.23 2.02 1.85 1.58
3.40 3.05 2.77 2.54 2.16
4.43 3.99 3.63 3.32 2.84
5.61 5.05 4.60 4.21 3.60
6.88 6.21 5.66 5.19 4.45
8.29 7.50 6.84 6.28 5.39
9.79 11.4 8.88 10.4 8.11 9.48 7.45 8.73 6.40 7.52
28 32 36
0.25 0.23 0.20
0.56 0.50 0.45
0.93 0.83 0.74
1.37 1.22 1.09
1.89 1.67 1.50
2.47 2.19 1.96
3.14 2.78 2.49
3.88 3.44 3.09
4.71 4.18 3.75
5.61 4.98 4.47
2 3 4 5 6
1.35 1.16 1.02 0.90 0.81
3.29 2.94 2.64 2.38 2.17
5.33 4.93 4.52 4.15 3.82
7.39 6.99 6.55 6.12 5.70
9.42 9.05 8.63 8.18 7.72
11.4 11.1 10.7 10.3 9.80
13.4 13.1 12.8 12.4 11.9
15.4 15.2 14.8 14.4 14.0
17.4 17.2 16.9 16.5 16.1
19.4 19.2 18.9 18.5 18.2
21.4 21.2 20.9 20.6 20.2
23.4 23.2 22.9 22.6 22.3
7 8 9 10 12
0.74 0.68 0.63 0.58 0.51
1.99 1.83 1.69 1.58 1.38
3.52 3.25 3.02 2.81 2.47
5.31 4.95 4.63 4.34 3.84
7.28 6.86 6.46 6.10 5.45
9.33 8.87 8.43 8.00 7.23
11.4 11.0 10.5 10.0 9.15
13.5 13.1 12.6 12.1 11.2
15.6 15.2 14.7 14.2 13.2
17.7 17.3 16.8 16.3 15.3
19.8 19.4 18.9 18.4 17.4
21.9 21.5 21.0 20.5 19.6
14 16 18 20 24
0.45 0.41 0.37 0.34 0.29
1.23 1.10 1.00 0.92 0.78
2.20 1.98 1.80 1.65 1.41
3.44 3.11 2.83 2.60 2.23
4.91 4.46 4.08 3.75 3.22
6.56 5.99 5.49 5.06 4.36
8.38 10.3 12.3 7.69 9.52 11.5 7.09 8.82 10.7 6.56 8.20 9.96 5.70 7.15 8.74
14.4 13.5 12.6 11.8 10.4
16.5 15.5 14.6 13.8 12.2
18.6 17.6 16.6 15.7 14.1
28 32 36
0.25 0.23 0.20
0.68 0.60 0.54
1.23 1.09 0.97
1.95 1.73 1.55
2.82 2.50 2.25
3.83 3.41 3.07
5.02 4.47 4.03
6.32 5.64 5.09
7.76 6.96 6.30
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6.59 5.86 5.27
13.1 11.9 11.0 10.1 8.71 7.64 6.80 6.12
9.31 11.0 12.7 8.38 9.90 11.5 7.60 9.01 10.5
8 - 60
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-21 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 30°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn ex
where
s, in.
3
6
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
Pu
s
30°
s
s
e
8
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.49 1.29 1.13 1.00 0.90
3.12 2.74 2.43 2.18 1.98
4.91 4.39 3.95 3.58 3.26
6.80 6.16 5.60 5.10 4.67
8.75 8.04 7.37 6.77 6.23
10.7 9.98 9.24 8.55 7.93
12.7 12.0 11.2 10.4 9.72
14.7 14.0 13.2 12.4 11.6
16.7 16.0 15.2 14.3 13.5
18.7 18.0 17.2 16.3 15.5
20.8 20.0 19.2 18.4 17.5
22.7 22.1 21.3 20.4 19.5
7 8 9 10 12
0.82 0.75 0.70 0.65 0.57
1.81 1.67 1.55 1.44 1.26
2.99 2.76 2.56 2.38 2.09
4.30 3.97 3.69 3.44 3.03
5.76 5.35 4.98 4.66 4.13
7.37 6.87 6.42 6.02 5.34
9.08 10.9 8.49 10.2 7.96 9.62 7.49 9.07 6.66 8.12
12.8 12.0 11.4 10.8 9.67
14.7 13.9 13.2 12.5 11.3
16.7 15.9 15.1 14.4 13.0
18.7 17.8 17.0 16.2 14.8
14 16 18 20 24
0.50 0.45 0.41 0.38 0.32
1.12 1.01 0.92 0.84 0.72
1.86 1.67 1.52 1.39 1.19
2.71 2.44 2.22 2.03 1.74
3.69 3.33 3.03 2.78 2.38
4.78 4.33 3.95 3.62 3.11
5.99 5.44 4.97 4.57 3.93
7.33 6.66 6.10 5.62 4.84
8.75 10.3 11.9 7.98 9.39 10.9 7.32 8.64 10.1 6.75 7.98 9.30 5.83 6.92 8.08
28 32 36
0.28 0.25 0.23
0.63 0.56 0.50
1.04 0.92 0.83
1.52 1.35 1.21
2.08 1.84 1.66
2.72 2.41 2.17
3.44 3.06 2.75
4.24 3.77 3.40
5.13 4.57 4.11
2 3 4 5 6
1.49 1.29 1.13 1.00 0.90
3.36 3.02 2.73 2.48 2.27
5.36 4.97 4.60 4.26 3.96
7.37 6.99 6.58 6.18 5.80
9.38 9.01 8.61 8.18 7.76
11.4 11.0 10.7 10.2 9.79
13.4 13.1 12.7 12.3 11.8
15.4 15.1 14.7 14.3 13.9
17.4 17.1 16.7 16.4 15.9
19.3 19.1 18.8 18.4 18.0
21.3 21.1 20.8 20.4 20.0
23.3 23.1 22.8 22.4 22.1
7 8 9 10 12
0.82 0.75 0.70 0.65 0.57
2.09 1.93 1.80 1.68 1.49
3.68 3.43 3.21 3.01 2.67
5.44 5.11 4.81 4.53 4.05
7.36 6.97 6.61 6.27 5.67
9.35 8.93 8.53 8.14 7.43
11.4 11.0 10.5 10.1 9.31
13.5 13.0 12.6 12.1 11.3
15.5 15.1 14.6 14.2 13.3
17.6 17.1 16.7 16.2 15.3
19.6 19.2 18.7 18.3 17.4
21.7 21.2 20.8 20.4 19.4
14 16 18 20 24
0.50 0.45 0.41 0.38 0.32
1.33 1.20 1.09 1.00 0.86
2.39 2.16 1.97 1.81 1.55
3.65 3.31 3.03 2.80 2.41
5.15 4.71 4.34 4.01 3.48
6.81 6.27 5.79 5.37 4.68
8.60 10.5 7.96 9.76 7.39 9.12 6.89 8.53 6.04 7.53
12.4 11.7 10.9 10.3 9.14
14.4 13.6 12.8 12.1 10.8
16.5 15.6 14.8 14.0 12.6
18.5 17.6 16.8 15.9 14.5
28 32 36
0.28 0.25 0.23
0.75 0.67 0.60
1.35 1.20 1.08
2.12 1.89 1.70
3.06 2.73 2.46
4.13 3.69 3.34
5.36 4.81 4.36
6.72 6.05 5.50
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8.19 7.40 6.74
6.09 5.43 4.89
7.12 6.36 5.74
13.6 12.5 11.5 10.7 9.32 8.24 7.37 6.66
9.76 11.4 13.2 8.86 10.4 12.0 8.09 9.53 11.1
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 61
Table 8-21 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 45°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn ex
where
Pu
3
6
s
s
45°
s
e
s, in.
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
8
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.70 1.51 1.35 1.21 1.10
3.43 3.09 2.78 2.52 2.30
5.22 4.76 4.34 3.97 3.67
7.06 6.52 6.01 5.57 5.17
8.95 8.35 7.78 7.25 6.78
10.9 10.2 9.60 9.01 8.47
12.8 12.2 11.5 10.8 10.2
14.8 14.1 13.4 12.7 12.1
16.8 16.1 15.3 14.6 13.9
18.7 18.0 17.3 16.6 15.9
20.7 20.0 19.3 18.5 17.8
22.7 22.0 21.3 20.5 19.8
7 8 9 10 12
1.00 0.92 0.85 0.79 0.69
2.12 1.96 1.82 1.70 1.50
3.40 3.17 2.96 2.78 2.46
4.82 4.51 4.23 3.97 3.54
6.35 5.96 5.60 5.28 4.73
7.97 7.51 7.08 6.70 6.04
9.67 11.5 9.15 10.9 8.68 10.4 8.24 9.86 7.46 8.97
13.3 12.7 12.1 11.5 10.6
15.2 14.5 13.9 13.3 12.2
17.1 16.4 15.7 15.1 14.0
19.0 18.3 17.6 17.0 15.7
14 16 18 20 24
0.61 0.55 0.50 0.46 0.40
1.34 1.21 1.11 1.02 0.87
2.21 2.00 1.82 1.67 1.43
3.18 2.88 2.64 2.42 2.09
4.27 3.89 3.56 3.29 2.84
5.48 5.01 4.60 4.25 3.68
6.80 6.23 5.74 5.31 4.62
8.21 7.54 6.97 6.47 5.65
9.70 11.3 8.95 10.4 8.30 9.71 7.73 9.06 6.77 7.96
12.9 12.0 11.2 10.5 9.23
14.6 13.6 12.7 11.9 10.6
28 32 36
0.35 0.31 0.28
0.76 0.68 0.61
1.26 1.12 1.00
1.83 1.63 1.46
2.49 2.22 2.00
3.24 2.89 2.60
4.07 3.64 3.29
5.00 4.47 4.04
6.00 5.38 4.87
2 3 4 5 6
1.70 1.51 1.35 1.21 1.10
3.52 3.23 2.96 2.72 2.51
5.44 5.11 4.79 4.48 4.20
7.40 7.06 6.70 6.36 6.03
9.37 9.03 8.67 8.30 7.94
11.4 11.0 10.7 10.3 9.90
13.3 13.0 12.7 12.3 11.9
15.3 15.0 14.6 14.3 13.9
17.3 17.0 16.6 16.3 15.9
19.3 19.0 18.6 18.3 17.9
21.3 21.0 20.6 20.3 19.9
23.2 22.9 22.6 22.3 21.9
7 8 9 10 12
1.00 0.92 0.85 0.79 0.69
2.33 2.18 2.04 1.92 1.71
3.96 3.73 3.53 3.35 3.02
5.73 5.45 5.19 4.94 4.50
7.60 7.27 6.96 6.67 6.13
9.53 9.17 8.83 8.50 7.88
11.5 11.1 10.8 10.4 9.73
13.5 13.1 12.7 12.4 11.6
15.5 15.1 14.7 14.3 13.6
17.5 17.1 16.7 16.3 15.5
19.5 19.1 18.7 18.3 17.5
21.5 21.1 20.7 20.3 19.5
14 16 18 20 24
0.61 0.55 0.50 0.46 0.40
1.55 1.41 1.29 1.19 1.03
2.75 2.51 2.31 2.13 1.84
4.12 3.78 3.49 3.24 2.82
5.65 5.22 4.85 4.53 3.99
7.33 6.83 6.39 6.00 5.32
9.11 11.0 8.55 10.3 8.04 9.77 7.57 9.25 6.76 8.32
12.9 12.2 11.6 11.0 9.97
14.8 14.1 13.4 12.8 11.7
16.8 16.0 15.3 14.7 13.5
19.8 18.0 17.3 16.6 15.3
28 32 36
0.35 0.31 0.28
0.90 0.80 0.72
1.62 1.44 1.30
2.50 2.24 2.02
3.56 3.20 2.90
4.76 4.30 3.92
6.09 5.52 5.04
9.08 10.7 12.4 8.32 9.85 11.5 7.66 9.10 10.6
14.2 13.1 12.2
7.53 6.86 6.30
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7.08 6.37 5.78
8.24 7.43 6.75
9.47 8.56 7.79
8 - 62
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-21 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 60°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn ex
where
3
6
s
s
60°
s
e
s, in.
Pu
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
8
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.86 1.77 1.66 1.54 1.43
3.71 3.52 3.31 3.10 2.90
5.56 5.29 4.99 4.70 4.41
7.41 7.07 6.70 6.34 6.00
9.28 8.88 8.45 8.04 7.64
11.2 10.7 10.3 9.79 9.35
13.1 12.6 12.1 11.6 11.1
15.0 14.5 13.9 13.4 12.9
16.9 16.4 15.8 15.3 14.7
18.8 18.3 17.7 17.1 16.6
20.8 20.2 19.6 19.0 18.5
22.7 22.1 21.6 21.0 20.4
7 8 9 10 12
1.33 1.24 1.16 1.08 0.96
2.71 2.54 2.38 2.24 2.00
4.15 3.92 3.70 3.51 3.17
5.68 5.39 5.12 4.88 4.44
7.27 6.94 6.63 6.34 5.82
8.94 10.7 8.56 10.3 8.22 9.86 7.89 9.49 7.28 8.81
12.4 12.0 11.6 11.2 10.4
14.2 13.8 13.3 12.9 12.1
16.1 15.6 15.1 14.6 13.8
17.9 17.4 16.9 16.4 15.5
19.8 19.3 18.7 18.2 17.3
14 16 18 20 24
0.86 0.77 0.70 0.65 0.56
1.81 1.64 1.51 1.39 1.20
2.88 2.64 2.43 2.25 1.95
4.07 3.74 3.46 3.21 2.80
5.36 4.95 4.59 4.28 3.76
6.73 6.25 5.83 5.45 4.81
8.19 7.64 7.15 6.71 5.96
9.72 11.3 9.11 10.7 8.56 10.0 8.06 9.48 7.19 8.50
13.0 12.2 11.6 11.0 9.88
14.7 13.9 13.2 12.5 11.3
16.4 15.6 14.8 14.1 12.8
28 32 36
0.49 0.43 0.39
1.06 0.94 0.85
1.72 1.54 1.39
2.48 2.22 2.01
3.34 3.00 2.72
4.29 3.87 3.52
5.34 4.83 4.40
6.47 5.87 5.36
2 3 4 5 6
1.86 1.77 1.66 1.54 1.43
3.72 3.55 3.36 3.17 2.99
5.59 5.37 5.14 4.90 4.67
7.50 7.25 6.98 6.72 6.46
9.43 9.16 8.88 8.59 8.31
7 8 9 10 12
1.33 1.24 1.16 1.08 0.96
2.82 2.67 2.52 2.40 2.17
4.46 4.26 4.08 3.91 3.61
6.21 5.98 5.76 5.56 5.20
8.05 7.79 7.55 7.32 6.90
9.92 9.65 9.39 9.14 8.66
14 16 18 20 24
0.86 0.77 0.70 0.65 0.56
1.98 1.82 1.69 1.57 1.37
3.35 3.11 2.91 2.72 2.41
4.87 4.57 4.30 4.05 3.61
6.51 6.15 5.81 5.50 4.96
8.23 10.0 7.81 9.56 7.43 9.13 7.07 8.73 6.43 8.00
28 32 36
0.49 0.43 0.39
1.22 1.09 0.99
2.15 1.94 1.76
3.25 2.94 2.69
4.49 4.10 3.77
5.88 5.41 5.00
11.4 11.1 10.8 10.5 10.2
7.68 6.99 6.41
8.97 10.3 11.7 8.19 9.46 10.8 7.53 8.71 9.96
13.3 13.0 12.7 12.4 12.1
15.3 15.0 14.7 14.4 14.1
17.3 17.0 16.7 16.3 16.0
19.2 18.9 18.6 18.3 18.0
21.2 20.9 20.6 20.3 19.9
23.2 22.9 22.6 22.2 21.9
11.8 11.5 11.3 11.0 10.5
13.8 13.5 13.2 12.9 12.4
15.7 15.4 15.1 14.8 14.2
17.7 17.3 17.0 16.7 16.1
19.6 19.3 19.0 18.7 18.1
21.6 21.3 20.9 20.6 20.0
11.8 11.4 10.9 10.5 9.67
13.7 13.2 12.7 12.2 11.4
15.6 15.1 14.5 14.1 13.2
17.5 16.9 16.4 15.9 15.0
19.4 18.9 18.3 17.8 16.8
8.97 10.6 12.3 8.34 9.92 11.6 7.78 9.30 10.9
14.1 13.3 12.5
15.9 15.0 14.2
7.38 6.83 6.35
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 63
Table 8-21 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 75°° C req =
Pu
φr n
or φ R n = C × φrn ex
where
3
6
s s
s
e
s, in.
75° P u
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
8
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.94 1.92 1.89 1.85 1.81
3.87 3.82 3.75 3.67 3.59
5.79 5.70 5.60 5.48 5.35
7.70 7.58 7.43 7.28 7.11
9.61 9.45 9.26 9.07 8.87
11.5 11.3 11.1 10.9 10.6
13.4 13.2 12.9 12.7 12.4
15.3 15.1 14.8 14.5 14.2
17.3 17.0 16.7 16.4 16.1
19.2 18.9 18.5 18.2 17.9
21.1 20.8 20.4 20.1 19.8
23.0 22.7 22.3 22.0 21.6
7 8 9 10 12
1.76 1.71 1.66 1.61 1.51
3.50 3.40 3.30 3.20 3.01
5.22 5.08 4.94 4.80 4.53
6.94 6.76 6.59 6.42 6.08
8.67 8.46 8.26 8.06 7.67
10.4 10.2 9.96 9.73 9.30
12.2 11.9 11.7 11.4 11.0
14.0 13.7 13.4 13.2 12.7
15.8 15.5 15.2 14.9 14.4
17.6 17.3 17.0 16.7 16.2
19.4 19.1 18.8 18.5 17.9
21.3 21.0 20.6 20.3 19.7
14 16 18 20 24
1.41 1.31 1.23 1.15 1.01
2.82 2.65 2.48 2.34 2.08
4.27 4.03 3.80 3.60 3.23
5.76 5.47 5.19 4.93 4.48
7.31 6.96 6.64 6.34 5.80
8.90 10.5 8.52 10.1 8.16 9.73 7.82 9.36 7.20 8.67
12.2 11.8 11.3 10.9 10.2
13.9 13.4 13.0 12.6 11.8
15.6 15.2 14.7 14.2 13.4
17.4 16.9 16.4 15.9 15.0
19.2 18.6 18.1 17.7 16.7
28 32 36
0.90 0.81 0.73
1.87 1.69 1.54
2.93 2.67 2.45
4.08 3.75 3.45
5.33 4.91 4.55
6.65 6.17 5.74
12.6 11.9 11.2
14.2 13.5 12.8
15.9 15.1 14.3
2 3 4 5 6
1.94 1.92 1.89 1.85 1.81
3.86 3.80 3.74 3.66 3.58
5.77 5.68 5.57 5.46 5.35
7.68 7.55 7.42 7.29 7.15
9.60 9.45 9.29 9.14 8.98
11.5 11.4 11.2 11.0 10.8
13.5 13.3 13.1 12.9 12.7
15.4 15.2 15.0 14.8 14.6
17.6 17.2 16.9 16.7 16.5
19.6 19.1 18.9 18.7 18.5
21.5 21.1 20.8 20.6 20.4
23.5 23.0 22.8 22.6 22.3
7 8 9 10 12
1.76 1.71 1.66 1.61 1.51
3.49 3.40 3.31 3.22 3.05
5.23 5.12 5.00 4.89 4.67
7.01 6.88 6.74 6.61 6.36
8.83 8.68 8.53 8.38 8.10
10.7 10.5 10.4 10.2 9.89
12.5 12.4 12.2 12.0 11.7
14.4 14.3 14.1 13.9 13.6
16.3 16.2 16.0 15.8 15.4
18.3 18.1 17.9 17.7 17.3
20.2 20.0 19.8 19.6 19.2
22.1 21.9 21.7 21.5 21.1
14 16 18 20 24
1.41 1.31 1.23 1.15 1.01
2.88 2.73 2.58 2.45 2.21
4.46 4.26 4.08 3.90 3.59
6.12 5.89 5.68 5.47 5.10
7.84 7.59 7.35 7.13 6.71
9.61 9.33 9.08 8.84 8.38
11.4 11.1 10.8 10.6 10.1
13.3 12.9 12.7 12.4 11.9
15.1 14.8 14.5 14.2 13.6
17.0 16.6 16.3 16.0 15.5
18.9 18.5 18.2 17.9 17.3
20.8 20.4 20.1 19.7 19.1
28 32 36
0.90 0.81 0.73
2.01 1.84 1.70
3.32 3.08 2.87
4.77 4.47 4.19
6.32 5.97 5.64
7.96 7.56 7.19
9.65 11.4 9.21 10.9 8.80 10.5
13.1 12.7 12.2
14.9 14.4 13.9
16.7 16.2 15.7
18.5 18.0 17.5
8.06 7.51 7.01
9.52 11.0 8.91 10.4 8.36 9.77
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 64
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-22. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 0°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
ex = e
where
s, in.
3
6
s
Pu
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
3 6
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.71 1.42 1.21 1.05 0.92
4.07 3.40 2.90 2.51 2.21
6.81 5.79 4.97 4.34 3.85
9.86 8.61 7.53 6.64 5.91
13.0 11.7 10.4 9.24 8.27
16.1 14.8 13.4 12.1 11.0
19.3 18.0 16.6 15.2 13.9
22.3 21.1 19.8 18.3 16.9
25.4 24.3 23.0 21.5 20.0
28.5 27.4 26.1 24.7 23.2
31.5 30.5 29.3 27.9 26.4
34.5 33.6 32.5 31.1 29.7
7 8 9 10 12
0.81 0.72 0.64 0.58 0.49
1.96 1.76 1.60 1.46 1.24
3.44 3.11 2.83 2.59 2.21
5.31 4.80 4.38 4.02 3.44
7.46 6.78 6.20 5.71 4.91
9.95 12.7 9.09 11.6 8.34 10.7 7.70 9.91 6.65 8.59
15.6 14.4 13.3 12.4 10.8
18.6 17.3 16.1 15.0 13.2
21.8 20.4 19.1 17.9 15.7
25.0 23.5 22.1 20.8 18.5
28.2 26.7 25.2 23.8 21.3
14 16 18 20 24
0.42 0.37 0.33 0.29 0.24
1.08 0.95 0.85 0.77 0.64
1.92 1.70 1.52 1.37 1.15
3.00 2.66 2.39 2.16 1.82
4.30 3.82 3.43 3.11 2.62
5.83 5.19 4.67 4.24 3.57
7.57 6.75 6.08 5.53 4.67
9.53 11.7 8.51 10.5 7.68 9.45 6.99 8.61 5.92 7.30
14.0 12.6 11.4 10.4 8.8
16.5 14.9 13.5 12.3 10.5
19.2 17.3 15.8 14.4 12.3
28 32 36
0.21 0.18 0.16
0.55 0.49 0.43
0.99 0.87 0.77
1.57 1.38 1.23
2.26 1.98 1.77
3.08 2.71 2.42
4.04 3.55 3.17
5.12 4.51 4.03
2 3 4 5 6
1.71 1.42 1.21 1.05 0.92
4.85 4.24 3.72 3.29 2.93
8.04 7.36 6.66 6.00 5.41
11.2 10.6 9.86 9.14 8.44
7 8 9 10 12
0.81 0.72 0.64 0.58 0.49
2.63 2.38 2.17 2.00 1.71
4.90 4.46 4.09 3.78 3.27
7.79 10.9 7.20 10.2 6.67 9.54 6.20 8.94 5.41 7.88
14 16 18 20 24
0.42 0.37 0.33 0.29 0.24
1.49 1.32 1.19 1.08 0.91
2.87 2.55 2.30 2.09 1.76
4.78 4.28 3.86 3.51 2.97
7.01 6.29 5.70 5.20 4.42
9.61 12.4 8.69 11.3 7.91 10.4 7.25 9.54 6.19 8.19
28 32 36
0.21 0.18 0.16
0.78 0.69 0.61
1.52 1.33 1.19
2.57 2.27 2.03
3.84 3.39 3.03
5.39 4.77 4.27
14.2 13.7 13.1 12.4 11.6
6.33 5.58 4.99
7.67 6.77 6.05
9.13 10.7 8.06 9.47 7.21 8.48
17.3 16.8 16.2 15.6 14.9
20.3 19.9 19.4 18.7 18.1
23.2 22.9 22.4 21.9 21.2
26.2 25.9 25.5 25.0 24.4
29.2 28.9 28.5 28.1 27.5
32.2 31.9 31.6 31.1 30.6
35.1 34.9 34.6 34.2 33.7
14.1 13.4 12.6 12.0 10.7
17.3 16.6 15.8 15.1 13.7
20.6 19.8 19.1 18.3 16.8
23.7 23.0 22.3 21.6 20.0
26.9 26.2 25.5 24.8 23.3
30.0 29.4 28.7 28.0 26.5
33.2 32.6 31.9 31.2 29.8
15.4 14.2 13.1 12.1 10.4
18.6 17.2 15.9 14.8 12.9
21.8 20.3 18.9 17.7 15.5
25.0 23.5 22.0 20.7 18.3
28.2 26.7 25.2 23.8 21.2
9.15 11.4 13.7 8.13 10.1 12.3 7.30 9.10 11.1
16.3 14.6 13.2
19.0 17.1 15.5
7.14 6.33 5.67
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 65
Table 8-22 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 15°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
ex Pu
where
s, in.
3
6
s
15° e
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
3 6
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.77 1.47 1.25 1.08 0.94
4.10 3.45 2.95 2.57 2.26
6.84 5.86 5.07 4.44 3.93
9.82 8.61 7.55 6.67 5.96
12.9 11.6 10.4 9.26 8.33
16.0 14.7 13.3 12.1 11.0
19.1 17.8 16.4 15.1 13.8
22.2 20.9 19.5 18.1 16.8
25.2 24.1 22.7 21.3 19.8
28.3 27.2 25.8 24.4 23.0
31.3 30.3 29.0 27.6 26.1
34.3 33.3 32.1 30.7 29.3
7 8 9 10 12
0.83 0.74 0.66 0.60 0.50
2.01 1.81 1.64 1.50 1.28
3.52 3.18 2.90 2.65 2.27
5.37 4.87 4.45 4.10 3.52
7.55 6.88 6.31 5.81 5.01
9.97 12.7 9.13 11.7 8.40 10.8 7.77 9.99 6.74 8.71
15.5 14.4 13.3 12.4 10.9
18.5 17.2 16.1 15.0 13.2
21.5 20.2 18.9 17.8 15.8
24.7 23.2 21.9 20.7 18.4
27.8 26.4 25.0 23.6 21.2
14 16 18 20 24
0.43 0.38 0.34 0.30 0.25
1.11 0.98 0.88 0.79 0.67
1.98 1.75 1.57 1.42 1.19
3.08 2.73 2.45 2.22 1.87
4.40 3.91 3.52 3.19 2.69
5.93 5.29 4.77 4.33 3.66
7.69 6.87 6.20 5.65 4.78
9.62 11.8 8.62 10.6 7.80 9.59 7.12 8.76 6.04 7.45
14.1 12.7 11.5 10.5 8.99
16.5 15.0 13.6 12.5 10.7
19.1 17.4 15.9 14.6 12.5
28 32 36
0.22 0.19 0.17
0.57 0.50 0.45
1.02 0.90 0.80
1.61 1.42 1.26
2.32 2.04 1.82
3.17 2.79 2.49
4.14 3.65 3.26
5.24 4.62 4.13
2 3 4 5 6
1.77 1.47 1.25 1.08 0.94
4.83 4.22 3.71 3.28 2.94
7.98 7.31 6.64 6.01 5.45
11.1 10.5 9.77 9.06 8.38
7 8 9 10 12
0.83 0.74 0.66 0.60 0.50
2.65 2.40 2.20 2.02 1.74
4.97 4.55 4.18 3.86 3.34
7.75 10.8 7.17 10.1 6.66 9.49 6.20 8.92 5.43 7.91
14 16 18 20 24
0.43 0.38 0.34 0.30 0.25
1.52 1.35 1.22 1.10 0.93
2.94 2.62 2.36 2.14 1.81
4.82 4.32 3.91 3.57 3.03
7.07 6.38 5.79 5.30 4.52
9.60 12.4 8.71 11.3 7.95 10.4 7.31 9.60 6.26 8.28
28 32 36
0.22 0.19 0.17
0.80 0.71 0.63
1.56 1.37 1.23
2.63 2.32 2.08
3.93 3.47 3.11
5.47 4.85 4.35
14.1 13.6 12.9 12.2 11.5
6.47 5.72 5.11
7.82 6.92 6.20
9.31 10.9 8.24 9.66 7.38 8.66
17.2 16.7 16.1 15.4 14.7
20.2 19.7 19.2 18.5 17.8
23.2 22.8 22.3 21.7 21.0
26.1 25.8 25.3 24.8 24.1
29.1 28.8 28.3 27.8 27.2
32.1 31.8 31.4 30.9 30.3
35.0 34.8 34.4 33.9 33.4
13.9 13.2 12.5 11.9 10.6
17.1 16.4 15.6 14.9 13.6
20.3 19.6 18.8 18.1 16.6
23.5 22.7 22.0 21.3 19.8
26.6 25.9 25.2 24.5 23.0
29.7 29.1 28.4 27.6 26.1
32.8 32.2 31.5 30.8 29.3
15.3 14.1 13.0 12.1 10.5
18.4 17.0 15.8 14.8 12.9
21.5 20.1 18.8 17.6 15.5
24.6 23.2 21.8 20.5 18.2
27.3 26.3 24.9 23.5 21.1
9.24 11.4 13.8 8.23 10.2 12.4 7.41 9.23 11.2
16.3 14.7 13.3
18.9 17.1 15.6
7.26 6.45 5.80
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 66
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-22 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 30°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φ R n = C × φ rn
ex Pu
where
s, in.
3
6
s
30°
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
e
3
3 6
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
1.94 1.61 1.37 1.19 1.04
4.26 3.63 3.15 2.77 2.45
6.99 6.09 5.35 4.74 4.23
9.90 8.80 7.83 7.00 6.30
12.9 11.7 10.6 9.54 8.67
16.0 14.7 13.5 12.3 11.3
19.0 17.7 16.5 15.2 14.1
22.0 20.8 19.5 18.2 17.0
25.1 23.9 22.6 21.2 19.9
28.1 27.0 25.7 24.3 23.0
31.1 30.0 28.7 27.4 26.0
34.1 33.1 31.8 30.5 29.1
7 8 9 10 12
0.92 0.82 0.74 0.67 0.56
2.19 1.98 1.80 1.65 1.41
3.81 3.45 3.16 2.90 2.49
5.71 5.22 4.79 4.42 3.82
7.92 10.4 7.27 9.58 6.71 8.88 6.22 8.26 5.41 7.22
13.0 12.1 11.2 10.5 9.23
15.8 14.8 13.8 12.9 11.5
18.7 17.6 16.5 15.5 13.8
21.7 20.5 19.3 18.2 16.4
24.7 23.4 22.2 21.1 19.0
27.8 26.4 25.2 24.0 21.8
14 16 18 20 24
0.48 0.42 0.38 0.34 0.28
1.23 1.08 0.97 0.88 0.74
2.18 1.93 1.73 1.57 1.32
3.36 2.99 2.69 2.44 2.06
4.78 4.26 3.85 3.50 2.96
6.40 5.73 5.18 4.73 4.01
8.22 10.3 12.4 7.40 9.25 11.3 6.71 8.41 10.3 6.14 7.70 9.42 5.22 6.58 8.08
14.8 13.4 12.3 11.3 9.72
17.2 15.7 14.4 13.3 11.5
19.8 18.2 16.7 15.4 13.4
28 32 36
0.24 0.21 0.19
0.64 0.56 0.50
1.14 1.00 0.89
1.78 1.57 1.40
2.56 2.26 2.02
3.48 3.07 2.75
4.54 4.01 3.59
2 3 4 5 6
1.94 1.61 1.37 1.19 1.04
4.86 4.27 3.78 3.39 3.06
7.96 7.32 6.70 6.14 5.64
11.0 10.4 9.75 9.10 8.48
7 8 9 10 12
0.92 0.82 0.74 0.67 0.56
2.78 2.54 2.34 2.16 1.87
5.19 4.80 4.45 4.14 3.61
7.91 10.9 7.38 10.3 6.90 9.67 6.46 9.14 5.71 8.20
14 16 18 20 24
0.48 0.42 0.38 0.34 0.28
1.65 1.47 1.33 1.21 1.02
3.20 2.86 2.58 2.35 2.00
5.10 4.60 4.19 3.84 3.29
7.41 6.74 6.17 5.68 4.89
28 32 36
0.24 0.21 0.19
0.88 0.78 0.70
1.73 1.52 1.36
2.86 2.54 2.27
4.28 3.80 3.41
14.1 13.5 12.9 12.2 11.5
5.73 5.07 4.54
7.05 6.25 5.61
8.51 10.1 11.8 7.55 8.96 10.5 6.78 8.06 9.44
17.1 16.6 15.9 15.3 14.6
20.1 19.6 19.0 18.4 17.7
23.1 22.6 22.1 21.5 20.8
26.0 25.6 25.1 24.5 23.9
29.0 28.6 28.1 27.6 27.0
32.0 31.6 31.1 30.6 30.1
35.0 34.6 34.2 33.7 33.1
13.9 13.3 12.6 12.0 10.9
17.0 16.3 15.7 15.0 13.8
20.1 19.4 18.7 18.1 16.8
23.2 22.6 21.9 21.2 19.8
26.3 25.7 25.0 24.3 22.9
29.4 28.8 28.1 27.4 26.0
32.5 31.9 31.2 30.5 29.1
9.95 9.12 8.39 7.75 6.71
12.7 11.7 10.8 10.1 8.78
15.6 14.5 13.5 12.6 11.1
18.5 17.3 16.2 15.2 13.5
21.5 20.3 19.1 18.0 16.1
24.6 23.3 22.0 20.9 18.8
27.7 26.4 25.0 23.8 21.6
5.90 5.25 4.73
7.77 6.95 6.28
9.83 12.1 14.5 8.83 10.9 13.1 8.00 9.88 11.9
17.0 15.4 14.1
19.6 17.9 16.4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 67
Table 8-22 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 45°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φ R n = C × φ rn
ex Pu
s
where
3
6
s
e
s, in.
45°
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
3 6
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
2.23 1.89 1.63 1.42 1.25
4.67 4.06 3.57 3.17 2.84
7.33 6.50 5.84 5.27 4.78
10.2 9.19 8.36 7.63 6.99
13.1 12.0 11.1 10.2 9.40
16.0 14.9 13.9 12.9 12.0
19.0 17.9 16.8 15.7 14.7
22.0 20.9 19.7 18.6 17.6
25.0 23.9 22.7 21.5 20.4
28.0 26.9 25.7 24.5 23.4
31.0 29.9 28.7 27.5 26.3
33.9 32.9 31.7 30.5 29.3
7 8 9 10 12
1.11 0.99 0.90 0.81 0.68
2.57 2.33 2.13 1.96 1.68
4.36 3.99 3.68 3.40 2.95
6.42 5.92 5.49 5.10 4.46
8.70 11.2 8.09 10.5 7.54 9.80 7.05 9.21 6.22 8.19
13.8 13.0 12.2 11.6 10.4
16.6 15.7 14.8 14.0 12.7
19.4 18.4 17.5 16.6 15.1
22.3 21.2 20.3 19.3 17.7
25.2 24.1 23.1 22.1 20.3
28.2 27.0 26.0 24.9 23.0
14 16 18 20 24
0.59 0.52 0.46 0.41 0.35
1.47 1.31 1.17 1.06 0.90
2.59 2.31 2.08 1.89 1.60
3.95 3.54 3.20 2.92 2.48
5.55 4.99 4.54 4.15 3.54
7.35 6.65 6.06 5.56 4.76
9.34 11.5 8.49 10.5 7.77 9.64 7.15 8.90 6.15 7.70
13.8 12.7 11.7 10.8 9.39
16.2 14.9 13.8 12.8 11.2
18.7 17.3 16.1 15.0 13.1
21.3 19.8 18.5 17.2 15.2
28 32 36
0.30 0.26 0.23
0.77 0.68 0.61
1.38 1.22 1.08
2.15 1.90 1.69
3.08 2.72 2.44
4.16 3.68 3.30
5.39 4.79 4.30
2 3 4 5 6
2.23 1.89 1.63 1.42 1.25
5.02 4.50 4.05 3.68 3.36
8.01 7.44 6.89 6.40 5.96
11.0 10.4 9.86 9.30 8.78
7 8 9 10 12
1.11 0.99 0.90 0.81 0.68
3.09 2.86 2.65 2.47 2.16
5.57 5.22 4.90 4.61 4.11
8.29 11.2 7.84 10.6 7.43 10.2 7.04 9.69 6.35 8.85
14 16 18 20 24
0.59 0.52 0.46 0.41 0.35
1.92 1.72 1.56 1.43 1.22
3.69 3.34 3.04 2.79 2.38
5.76 5.25 4.82 4.44 3.84
8.11 10.7 7.47 9.94 6.91 9.26 6.43 8.66 5.62 7.64
28 32 36
0.30 0.26 0.23
1.06 0.94 0.84
2.08 1.84 1.65
3.37 3.00 2.71
4.98 4.46 4.04
14.0 13.5 12.9 12.3 11.7
6.77 6.03 5.42
8.28 7.39 6.66
9.91 11.7 8.87 10.5 8.02 9.49
13.5 12.2 11.1
17.0 16.5 15.9 15.3 14.7
20.0 19.5 18.9 18.3 17.7
23.0 22.5 21.9 21.3 20.7
25.9 25.5 24.9 24.4 23.8
28.9 28.4 27.9 27.4 26.8
31.9 31.4 30.9 30.4 29.8
34.8 34.4 33.9 33.4 32.8
14.1 13.6 13.0 12.5 11.6
17.1 16.5 16.0 15.4 14.4
20.1 19.5 19.0 18.4 17.3
23.2 22.6 22.0 21.4 20.2
26.2 25.6 25.0 24.4 23.2
29.2 28.6 28.0 27.4 26.2
32.3 31.7 31.1 30.4 29.2
13.4 12.6 11.8 11.1 9.84
16.2 15.3 14.4 13.6 12.2
19.1 18.1 17.2 16.3 14.7
22.1 21.0 20.0 19.0 17.3
25.0 23.9 22.9 21.9 20.0
28.0 26.9 25.8 24.7 22.8
8.82 11.0 13.4 7.97 10.0 12.2 7.27 9.18 11.2
15.8 14.6 13.4
18.4 17.0 15.7
21.1 19.5 18.1
6.81 6.12 5.56
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 68
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-22 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 60°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
ex
where
3
6
s
60°
s
e
s, in.
Pu
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
3 6
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
2.59 2.32 2.07 1.84 1.65
5.21 4.73 4.29 3.90 3.56
7.88 7.27 6.69 6.18 5.73
10.6 9.91 9.23 8.63 8.08
13.4 12.7 11.9 11.2 10.6
16.3 15.5 14.6 13.9 13.2
19.2 18.3 17.5 16.6 15.9
22.1 21.2 20.3 19.5 18.7
25.0 24.1 23.2 22.3 21.5
28.0 27.0 26.1 25.2 24.3
30.9 30.0 29.0 28.1 27.2
33.9 32.9 32.0 31.0 30.1
7 8 9 10 12
1.49 1.35 1.23 1.12 0.95
3.27 3.01 2.78 2.58 2.25
5.32 4.95 4.63 4.34 3.84
7.59 10.0 7.13 9.48 6.71 8.98 6.33 8.52 5.67 7.70
12.6 12.0 11.4 10.9 9.91
15.2 14.5 13.9 13.3 12.3
17.9 17.2 16.5 15.9 14.7
20.7 19.9 19.2 18.5 17.3
23.5 22.7 22.0 21.2 19.9
26.3 25.5 24.7 24.0 22.6
29.2 28.4 27.6 26.8 25.3
14 16 18 20 24
0.83 0.73 0.65 0.59 0.49
1.98 1.77 1.60 1.46 1.24
3.43 3.09 2.81 2.57 2.20
5.11 4.64 4.24 3.90 3.35
7.00 6.40 5.89 5.44 4.72
9.08 11.3 8.36 10.5 7.73 9.74 7.19 9.09 6.27 7.99
13.7 12.7 11.9 11.1 9.85
16.1 15.1 14.2 13.3 11.9
18.7 17.5 16.5 15.6 14.0
21.3 20.1 19.0 17.9 16.2
23.9 22.6 21.5 20.4 18.5
28 32 36
0.42 0.37 0.33
1.07 0.95 0.85
1.91 1.69 1.51
2.93 2.60 2.34
4.15 3.70 3.34
5.55 4.97 4.49
12.6 11.5 10.5
14.7 13.4 12.3
16.8 15.4 14.2
2 3 4 5 6
2.59 2.32 2.07 1.84 1.65
5.32 4.94 4.57 4.25 3.95
8.17 7.73 7.31 6.91 6.55
11.1 10.6 10.2 9.73 9.32
14.0 13.5 13.1 12.6 12.2
17.0 16.5 16.0 15.5 15.1
19.9 19.4 19.0 18.5 18.0
22.9 22.4 21.9 21.4 20.9
25.8 25.4 24.9 24.4 23.9
28.8 28.3 27.8 27.4 26.9
31.8 31.3 30.8 30.3 29.8
34.7 34.3 33.8 33.3 32.8
7 8 9 10 12
1.49 1.35 1.23 1.12 0.95
3.69 3.46 3.25 3.06 2.73
6.22 5.92 5.64 5.39 4.92
8.94 8.58 8.25 7.94 7.37
11.8 11.4 11.0 10.6 9.97
14.6 14.2 13.8 13.4 12.7
17.5 17.1 16.7 16.3 15.5
20.5 20.0 19.6 19.1 18.3
23.4 22.9 22.5 22.0 21.2
26.4 25.9 25.4 24.9 24.1
29.3 28.8 28.4 27.9 27.0
32.3 31.8 31.3 30.8 29.9
14 16 18 20 24
0.83 0.73 0.65 0.59 0.49
2.46 2.23 2.04 1.88 1.63
4.52 4.18 3.87 3.60 3.15
6.85 6.39 5.97 5.59 4.94
9.36 8.80 8.28 7.81 6.99
12.0 11.4 10.8 10.2 9.25
14.7 14.0 13.4 12.8 11.7
17.5 16.8 16.1 15.4 14.2
20.3 19.6 18.8 18.1 16.8
23.2 22.4 21.6 20.9 19.5
26.1 25.3 24.4 23.7 22.2
29.0 28.1 27.3 26.5 25.0
28 32 36
0.42 0.37 0.33
1.43 1.27 1.15
2.79 2.49 2.25
4.41 3.97 3.61
6.31 5.74 5.26
8.44 10.7 13.1 7.74 9.90 12.2 7.13 9.17 11.4
15.7 14.6 13.7
18.2 17.1 16.1
20.9 19.7 18.6
23.6 22.3 21.1
7.10 6.38 5.79
8.81 10.7 7.95 9.65 7.23 8.81
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 69
Table 8-22 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 75°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
ex
where
3
6
s s
e
s, in.
75° P u
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
3 6
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
2.86 2.77 2.66 2.53 2.40
5.68 5.49 5.27 5.04 4.81
8.47 8.19 7.89 7.58 7.27
11.3 10.9 10.5 10.2 9.81
14.1 13.7 13.2 12.8 12.4
16.9 16.4 16.0 15.5 15.1
19.8 19.2 18.8 18.3 17.8
22.6 22.1 21.6 21.0 20.6
25.5 24.9 24.4 23.9 23.3
28.4 27.8 27.2 26.7 26.2
31.3 30.7 30.1 29.5 29.0
34.2 33.6 33.0 32.4 31.8
7 8 9 10 12
2.26 2.13 2.00 1.89 1.67
4.57 4.35 4.13 3.93 3.57
6.97 6.69 6.41 6.15 5.67
9.47 9.13 8.82 8.51 7.95
12.0 11.7 11.3 11.0 10.4
14.7 14.3 13.9 13.5 12.9
17.4 16.9 16.5 16.1 15.4
20.1 19.6 19.2 18.8 18.0
22.9 22.4 21.9 21.5 20.7
25.6 25.1 24.7 24.2 23.4
28.4 27.9 27.4 27.0 26.1
31.3 30.7 30.2 29.8 28.8
14 16 18 20 24
1.49 1.34 1.21 1.10 0.93
3.25 2.97 2.73 2.53 2.19
5.25 4.87 4.54 4.24 3.75
7.44 6.98 6.56 6.18 5.52
9.77 9.23 8.74 8.28 7.48
12.2 11.6 11.1 10.5 9.59
14.7 14.1 13.5 12.9 11.8
17.3 16.6 16.0 15.3 14.2
19.9 19.2 18.5 17.8 16.6
22.6 21.8 21.1 20.4 19.1
25.3 24.5 23.7 23.0 21.6
28.0 27.2 26.4 25.6 24.2
28 32 36
0.80 0.71 0.63
1.93 1.72 1.55
3.34 3.01 2.74
4.97 4.51 4.12
6.79 6.20 5.70
13.2 12.3 11.5
15.5 14.5 13.6
17.9 16.8 15.9
20.4 19.2 18.2
22.9 21.7 20.6
2 3 4 5 6
2.86 2.77 2.66 2.53 2.40
5.66 5.49 5.30 5.10 4.91
8.48 8.25 8.02 7.79 7.56
11.3 11.1 10.8 10.6 10.3
14.2 13.9 13.6 13.4 13.1
17.1 16.8 16.5 16.2 15.9
20.1 19.7 19.4 19.1 18.8
23.0 22.7 22.3 22.0 21.7
26.4 25.6 25.2 24.9 24.6
29.3 28.5 28.2 27.8 27.5
32.3 31.5 31.1 30.8 30.4
35.2 34.4 34.0 33.7 33.3
7 8 9 10 12
2.26 2.13 2.00 1.89 1.67
4.72 4.54 4.37 4.21 3.90
7.34 7.14 6.94 6.75 6.39
10.1 9.83 9.61 9.40 9.00
12.9 12.6 12.4 12.1 11.7
15.7 15.4 15.2 14.9 14.4
18.5 18.3 18.0 17.7 17.2
21.4 21.1 20.8 20.6 20.0
24.3 24.0 23.7 23.4 22.9
27.2 26.9 26.6 26.3 25.7
30.1 29.8 29.5 29.2 28.6
33.0 32.7 32.4 32.1 31.5
14 16 18 20 24
1.49 1.34 1.21 1.10 0.93
3.63 3.39 3.17 2.98 2.65
6.06 5.75 5.47 5.22 4.76
8.63 8.29 7.96 7.66 7.10
11.3 10.9 10.6 10.2 9.57
14.0 13.6 13.2 12.9 12.2
16.8 16.3 15.9 15.5 14.8
19.6 19.1 18.7 18.2 17.5
22.4 21.9 21.4 21.0 20.2
25.2 24.7 24.2 23.8 22.9
28.1 27.5 27.0 26.6 25.7
30.9 30.4 29.9 29.4 28.5
28 32 36
0.80 0.71 0.63
2.38 2.16 1.97
4.37 4.03 3.73
6.60 6.15 5.75
8.99 11.5 8.45 10.9 7.96 10.3
14.1 13.4 12.8
16.7 16.0 15.3
19.4 18.7 17.9
22.1 21.3 20.6
24.8 24.0 23.3
27.6 26.8 26.0
8.78 10.9 8.08 10.1 7.47 9.40
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 70
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-23. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 0°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
ex= e
where
s, in.
3
6
s
Pu
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
6
6 12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
2 3 4 5 6
2.15 1.91 1.71 1.55 1.42
4.55 4.06 3.65 3.31 3.02
7.17 6.43 5.80 5.27 4.82
7 8 9 10 12
1.31 1.21 1.12 1.05 0.92
2.77 2.56 2.38 2.21 1.94
4.44 4.10 3.81 3.55 3.12
6.34 5.87 5.46 5.09 4.48
8.46 10.8 7.85 10.1 7.31 9.39 6.84 8.79 6.03 7.78
14 16 18 20 24
0.81 0.72 0.64 0.58 0.49
1.72 1.53 1.38 1.26 1.06
2.77 2.48 2.25 2.05 1.73
3.99 3.58 3.25 2.96 2.52
5.38 4.84 4.40 4.02 3.42
6.95 6.27 5.70 5.21 4.45
8.69 10.6 12.7 7.85 9.60 11.5 7.15 8.75 10.5 6.55 8.03 9.65 5.60 6.88 8.29
28 32 36
0.42 0.37 0.33
0.92 0.81 0.72
1.50 1.32 1.18
2.19 1.93 1.72
2.97 2.63 2.35
3.87 3.42 3.06
4.88 4.32 3.87
2 3 4 5 6
2.15 1.91 1.71 1.55 1.42
4.94 4.48 4.07 3.71 3.40
7.98 7.39 6.81 6.27 5.79
11.1 10.5 9.86 9.22 8.61
7 8 9 10 12
1.31 1.21 1.12 1.05 0.92
3.13 2.90 2.69 2.51 2.21
5.35 4.97 4.64 4.34 3.85
8.05 11.0 7.53 10.4 7.07 9.78 6.64 9.24 5.91 8.27
14 16 18 20 24
0.81 0.72 0.64 0.58 0.49
1.96 1.76 1.60 1.46 1.24
3.44 3.11 2.83 2.59 2.21
5.31 4.80 4.38 4.02 3.44
7.46 6.78 6.20 5.71 4.91
9.95 12.7 9.09 11.6 8.34 10.7 7.70 9.91 6.65 8.59
28 32 36
0.42 0.37 0.33
1.08 0.95 0.85
1.92 1.70 1.52
3.00 2.66 2.39
4.30 3.82 3.43
5.83 5.19 4.67
4
5
10.0 13.0 9.06 11.9 8.23 10.9 7.51 9.97 6.88 9.16
14.2 13.6 13.0 12.3 11.7
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
16.0 14.9 13.7 12.7 11.7
19.1 17.9 16.7 15.5 14.4
22.2 21.0 19.8 18.5 17.3
25.3 24.1 22.9 21.5 20.3
28.3 27.2 26.0 24.7 23.3
31.4 30.3 29.1 27.8 26.4
34.4 33.4 32.3 31.0 29.6
13.4 12.5 11.7 10.9 9.70
16.1 15.1 14.1 13.3 11.8
19.0 17.9 16.8 15.8 14.1
22.0 20.7 19.6 18.5 16.6
25.1 23.7 22.5 21.3 19.1
28.2 26.8 25.5 24.2 21.9
14.9 13.6 12.4 11.4 9.82
17.3 15.8 14.4 13.3 11.5
19.9 18.1 16.6 15.3 13.2
6.00 5.32 4.77
7.24 6.42 5.76
8.59 10.1 11.6 7.62 8.93 10.3 6.84 8.02 9.29
17.2 16.7 16.1 15.5 14.8
20.2 19.8 19.3 18.6 18.0
23.2 22.8 22.3 21.8 21.1
26.2 25.8 25.4 24.9 24.3
29.2 28.9 28.5 28.0 27.4
32.1 31.9 31.5 31.0 30.5
35.1 34.8 34.5 34.1 33.6
14.1 13.4 12.8 12.1 11.0
17.3 16.6 15.9 15.2 13.9
20.5 19.8 19.0 18.3 16.9
23.6 23.0 22.2 21.5 20.0
26.8 26.1 25.4 24.7 23.2
29.9 29.3 28.6 27.9 26.4
33.1 32.5 31.8 31.1 29.7
15.6 14.4 13.3 12.4 10.8
18.6 17.3 16.1 15.0 13.2
21.8 20.4 19.1 17.9 15.7
25.0 23.5 22.1 20.8 18.5
28.2 26.7 25.2 23.8 21.3
9.53 11.7 14.0 8.51 10.5 12.6 7.68 9.45 11.4
16.5 14.9 13.5
19.2 17.3 15.8
7.57 6.75 6.08
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 71
Table 8-23 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 15°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
ex
Pu
where s
15°
s, in.
3
6
e
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
6
6 12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
2.22 1.97 1.77 1.61 1.47
4.62 4.13 3.72 3.38 3.10
7.25 6.53 5.91 5.39 4.93
10.1 9.13 8.31 7.60 6.98
13.0 11.9 10.9 10.1 9.28
16.0 14.9 13.7 12.7 11.8
19.0 17.9 16.7 15.5 14.4
22.1 20.9 19.7 18.4 17.2
25.1 24.0 22.7 21.4 20.2
28.2 27.1 25.8 24.5 23.2
31.2 30.1 28.9 27.6 26.2
34.2 33.2 32.0 30.7 29.3
7 8 9 10 12
1.35 1.25 1.16 1.08 0.94
2.85 2.63 2.44 2.28 2.00
4.54 4.21 3.91 3.65 3.20
6.45 5.98 5.57 5.21 4.59
8.59 10.9 7.98 10.2 7.45 9.51 6.97 8.92 6.16 7.91
13.5 12.6 11.8 11.1 9.84
16.1 15.1 14.2 13.4 11.9
19.0 17.8 16.8 15.9 14.2
21.9 20.7 19.5 18.5 16.6
24.9 23.6 22.4 21.2 19.2
27.9 26.6 25.3 24.1 21.9
14 16 18 20 24
0.83 0.74 0.66 0.60 0.50
1.77 1.58 1.43 1.30 1.10
2.85 2.56 2.31 2.11 1.79
4.09 3.68 3.34 3.05 2.59
5.50 4.96 4.51 4.13 3.52
7.08 6.40 5.83 5.34 4.56
8.84 10.8 12.8 8.00 9.75 11.7 7.30 8.91 10.7 6.70 8.19 9.82 5.74 7.03 8.45
15.0 13.7 12.6 11.6 10.0
17.4 15.9 14.6 13.5 11.7
19.9 18.2 16.8 15.5 13.4
28 32 36
0.43 0.38 0.34
0.95 0.84 0.75
1.55 1.37 1.22
2.25 1.99 1.78
3.06 2.70 2.42
3.98 3.52 3.15
5.01 4.43 3.98
2 3 4 5 6
2.22 1.97 1.77 1.61 1.47
4.97 4.50 4.10 3.75 3.45
7.97 7.40 6.84 6.32 5.86
11.0 10.5 9.82 9.20 8.61
7 8 9 10 12
1.35 1.25 1.16 1.08 0.94
3.18 2.95 2.75 2.57 2.26
5.44 5.07 4.73 4.44 3.93
8.06 11.0 7.55 10.4 7.09 9.78 6.67 9.26 5.96 8.33
14 16 18 20 24
0.83 0.74 0.66 0.60 0.50
2.01 1.81 1.64 1.50 1.28
3.52 3.18 2.90 2.65 2.27
5.37 4.87 4.45 4.10 3.52
7.55 6.88 6.31 5.81 5.01
9.97 12.7 9.13 11.7 8.40 10.8 7.77 9.99 6.74 8.71
28 32 36
0.43 0.38 0.34
1.11 0.98 0.88
1.98 1.75 1.57
3.08 2.73 2.45
4.40 3.91 3.52
5.93 5.29 4.77
14.1 13.5 12.9 12.3 11.6
6.15 5.45 4.89
7.40 6.57 5.90
8.77 10.2 11.8 7.79 9.12 10.5 7.01 8.20 9.49
17.1 16.6 16.0 15.4 14.7
20.1 19.7 19.1 18.5 17.8
23.1 22.7 22.2 21.6 20.9
26.1 25.7 25.2 24.7 24.1
29.1 28.7 28.3 27.8 27.2
32.1 31.7 31.3 30.8 30.3
35.0 34.7 34.3 33.9 33.3
14.0 13.3 12.7 12.1 11.0
17.1 16.4 15.7 15.1 13.8
20.3 19.5 18.8 18.1 16.8
23.4 22.7 22.0 21.3 19.8
26.5 25.8 25.1 24.4 23.0
29.6 29.0 28.3 27.6 26.1
32.7 32.1 31.4 30.7 29.3
15.5 14.4 13.3 12.4 10.9
18.5 17.2 16.1 15.0 13.2
21.5 20.2 18.9 17.8 15.8
24.7 23.2 21.9 20.7 18.4
27.8 26.4 25.0 23.6 21.2
9.62 11.8 14.1 8.62 10.6 12.7 7.80 9.59 11.5
16.5 15.0 13.6
19.1 17.4 15.9
7.69 6.87 6.20
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 72
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-23 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 30°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
ex Pu
where
s, in.
3
6
s
30°
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
e
6
6 12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
2.40 2.15 1.94 1.76 1.61
4.89 4.40 3.99 3.65 3.35
7.53 6.84 6.24 5.74 5.29
10.3 9.45 8.69 8.02 7.42
13.2 12.2 11.3 10.5 9.72
16.1 15.1 14.0 13.1 12.2
19.1 18.0 16.9 15.8 14.8
22.1 21.0 19.8 18.7 17.6
25.1 24.0 22.8 21.6 20.4
28.1 27.0 25.8 24.6 23.4
31.1 30.0 28.8 27.6 26.3
34.1 33.0 31.9 30.6 29.3
7 8 9 10 12
1.49 1.37 1.28 1.19 1.04
3.10 2.87 2.67 2.49 2.19
4.90 4.55 4.24 3.97 3.50
6.89 6.42 6.00 5.63 4.98
9.06 11.4 8.47 10.7 7.94 10.1 7.47 9.49 6.64 8.48
13.9 13.1 12.4 11.7 10.5
16.6 15.6 14.8 14.0 12.6
19.3 18.3 17.4 16.5 14.9
22.2 21.1 20.0 19.1 17.3
25.1 23.9 22.8 21.8 19.9
28.1 26.9 25.7 24.6 22.5
14 16 18 20 24
0.92 0.82 0.74 0.67 0.56
1.95 1.75 1.58 1.44 1.22
3.12 2.81 2.55 2.33 1.98
4.46 4.03 3.66 3.35 2.86
5.97 5.40 4.92 4.52 3.87
7.64 6.93 6.33 5.82 5.00
9.46 11.4 8.61 10.4 7.89 9.59 7.27 8.85 6.26 7.65
13.6 12.4 11.4 10.6 9.16
15.8 14.5 13.4 12.4 10.8
18.2 16.7 15.5 14.4 12.5
20.7 19.1 17.7 16.4 14.4
28 32 36
0.48 0.42 0.38
1.06 0.93 0.83
1.72 1.52 1.36
2.49 2.20 1.97
3.37 2.99 2.68
4.37 3.88 3.48
5.48 4.87 4.38
2 3 4 5 6
2.40 2.15 1.94 1.76 1.61
5.11 4.66 4.26 3.92 3.63
8.05 7.51 6.99 6.52 6.09
11.1 10.5 9.90 9.34 8.80
7 8 9 10 12
1.49 1.37 1.28 1.19 1.04
3.38 3.15 2.95 2.77 2.45
5.70 5.35 5.03 4.74 4.23
8.30 11.1 7.83 10.6 7.40 10.0 7.00 9.54 6.30 8.67
14 16 18 20 24
0.92 0.82 0.74 0.67 0.56
2.19 1.98 1.80 1.65 1.41
3.81 3.45 3.16 2.90 2.49
5.71 5.22 4.79 4.42 3.82
7.92 10.4 7.27 9.58 6.71 8.88 6.22 8.26 5.41 7.22
28 32 36
0.48 0.42 0.38
1.23 1.08 0.97
2.18 1.93 1.73
3.43 2.99 2.69
4.78 4.26 3.85
14.1 13.5 12.9 12.3 11.7
6.71 5.97 5.38
8.06 7.18 6.47
9.51 11.1 8.49 9.91 7.66 8.95
12.8 11.4 10.3
17.1 16.5 16.0 15.3 14.7
20.1 19.6 19.0 18.4 17.7
23.0 22.6 22.0 21.5 20.8
26.0 25.6 25.1 24.5 23.9
29.0 28.6 28.1 27.6 27.0
32.0 31.6 31.1 30.6 30.0
34.9 34.6 34.1 33.6 33.1
14.1 13.5 12.9 12.3 11.3
17.1 16.5 15.8 15.2 14.1
20.2 19.5 18.8 18.2 17.0
23.2 22.6 21.9 21.2 19.9
26.3 25.7 25.0 24.3 23.0
29.4 28.7 28.1 27.4 26.0
32.5 31.8 31.2 30.5 29.1
13.0 12.1 11.2 10.5 9.23
15.8 14.8 13.8 12.9 11.5
18.7 17.6 16.5 15.5 13.8
21.7 20.5 19.3 18.2 16.4
24.7 23.4 22.2 21.1 19.0
27.8 26.4 25.2 24.0 21.8
8.22 10.3 12.4 7.40 9.25 11.3 6.71 8.41 10.3
14.8 13.4 12.3
17.2 15.7 14.4
19.8 18.2 16.7
6.40 5.73 5.18
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 73
Table 8-23 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 45°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
ex Pu
where
3
6
s s
e
s, in.
45°
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
6
6 12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
2.64 2.43 2.23 2.05 1.89
5.30 4.90 4.52 4.17 3.86
8.01 7.44 6.89 6.40 5.96
10.8 10.1 9.38 8.75 8.20
13.6 12.8 12.0 11.2 10.6
16.4 15.6 14.7 13.9 13.1
19.3 18.4 17.5 16.6 15.7
22.3 21.3 20.3 19.3 18.4
25.2 24.2 23.2 22.2 21.2
28.1 27.2 26.1 25.0 23.99
31.1 30.1 29.0 27.9 26.9
34.0 33.1 32.0 30.9 29.8
7 8 9 10 12
1.75 1.63 1.52 1.42 1.25
3.59 3.35 3.13 2.94 2.60
5.57 5.22 4.90 4.61 4.11
7.70 7.25 6.83 6.45 5.78
9.99 9.43 8.91 8.44 7.60
12.4 11.7 11.1 10.6 9.58
14.9 14.2 13.5 12.8 11.7
17.5 16.7 15.9 15.2 14.0
20.2 19.3 18.5 17.7 16.3
23.0 22.1 21.2 20.3 18.8
25.8 24.8 23.9 23.0 21.3
28.7 27.7 26.7 25.7 23.9
14 16 18 20 24
1.11 0.99 0.90 0.81 0.68
2.32 2.09 1.90 1.73 1.47
3.69 3.34 3.04 2.79 2.38
5.21 4.74 4.33 3.98 3.42
6.90 6.29 5.77 5.33 4.60
8.73 10.7 8.00 9.85 7.36 9.10 6.81 8.44 5.91 7.35
12.8 11.8 10.96 10.2 8.91
15.0 13.9 12.9 12.1 10.6
17.4 16.1 15.0 14.1 12.4
19.8 18.5 17.3 16.2 14.3
22.3 20.9 19.5 18.4 16.3
28 32 36
0.59 0.52 0.46
1.28 1.13 1.01
2.08 1.84 1.65
2.99 2.65 2.38
4.03 3.59 3.23
5.20 4.63 4.17
12.8 11.6 10.5
14.6 13.3 12.1
2 3 4 5 6
2.64 2.43 2.23 2.05 1.89
5.38 5.02 4.67 4.34 4.06
8.22 7.78 7.33 6.90 6.50
11.1 10.7 10.2 9.66 9.19
14.1 13.6 13.1 12.5 12.0
17.0 16.6 16.0 15.5 14.9
20.0 19.5 19.0 18.4 17.9
22.97 22.5 22.0 21.4 20.9
25.9 25.5 25.0 24.4 23.9
28.9 28.5 28.0 27.4 26.9
31.9 31.4 31.0 30.4 29.9
34.8 34.4 34.0 33.4 32.9
7 8 9 10 12
1.75 1.63 1.52 1.42 1.25
3.80 3.57 3.36 3.17 2.84
6.16 5.84 5.54 5.27 4.78
8.76 8.36 7.99 7.63 6.99
11.5 11.1 10.6 10.2 9.40
14.4 13.9 13.4 12.9 12.0
17.3 16.8 16.2 15.7 14.7
20.3 19.7 19.2 18.6 17.6
23.3 22.7 22.1 21.5 20.4
26.3 25.7 25.1 24.5 23.4
29.3 28.7 28.1 27.5 26.3
32.3 31.7 31.1 30.5 29.3
14 16 18 20 24
1.11 0.99 0.90 0.81 0.68
2.57 2.33 2.13 1.96 1.68
4.36 3.99 3.68 3.40 2.95
6.42 5.92 5.49 5.10 4.46
8.70 11.2 8.09 10.5 7.54 9.80 7.05 9.21 6.22 8.19
13.8 13.0 12.2 11.6 10.4
16.6 15.7 14.8 14.0 12.7
19.4 18.4 17.5 16.6 15.1
22.3 21.2 20.3 19.3 17.7
25.2 24.1 23.1 22.1 20.3
28.2 27.1 26.0 24.9 23.0
28 32 36
0.59 0.52 0.46
1.47 1.31 1.17
2.59 2.31 2.08
3.95 3.54 3.20
5.55 4.99 4.54
9.34 11.5 13.8 8.49 10.5 12.7 7.77 9.64 11.7
16.2 14.9 13.8
18.7 17.3 16.1
21.3 19.8 18.5
7.35 6.65 6.06
6.49 5.80 5.23
7.90 7.07 6.40
9.42 11.1 8.46 9.95 7.67 9.04
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 74
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-23 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 60°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
ex
where
3
6
s
60°
s
e
s, in.
Pu
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
6
6 12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
2.83 2.72 2.59 2.46 2.32
5.64 5.43 5.18 4.92 4.66
8.45 8.13 7.77 7.40 7.03
11.3 10.8 10.4 9.92 9.46
14.1 13.6 13.0 12.5 12.0
16.9 16.3 15.7 15.1 14.5
19.8 19.1 18.5 17.8 17.1
22.6 21.9 21.2 20.5 19.8
25.5 24.8 24.0 23.2 22.5
28.4 27.6 26.8 26.0 25.2
31.3 30.5 29.7 28.9 28.0
34.2 33.4 32.5 31.7 30.8
7 8 9 10 12
2.19 2.07 1.95 1.84 1.65
4.41 4.17 3.95 3.74 3.38
6.68 6.35 6.04 5.75 5.22
9.02 8.61 8.22 7.86 7.19
11.4 11.0 10.5 10.1 9.28
13.9 13.4 12.9 12.4 11.5
16.5 15.9 15.3 14.8 13.8
19.1 18.4 17.8 17.3 16.2
21.8 21.1 20.4 19.8 18.6
24.5 23.7 23.0 22.4 21.1
27.2 26.5 25.7 25.0 23.7
30.0 29.2 28.5 27.7 26.3
14 16 18 20 24
1.49 1.35 1.23 1.12 0.95
3.06 2.79 2.55 2.35 2.02
4.76 4.37 4.02 3.72 3.22
6.61 6.09 5.64 5.24 4.57
8.58 10.7 7.95 9.93 7.39 9.28 6.90 8.69 6.06 7.68
12.9 12.0 11.3 10.6 9.43
15.2 14.2 13.4 12.6 11.3
17.5 16.5 15.6 14.8 13.3
20.0 18.9 17.9 17.0 15.4
22.5 21.3 20.3 19.3 17.5
25.0 23.8 22.7 21.7 19.8
28 32 36
0.83 0.73 0.65
1.76 1.56 1.40
2.84 2.53 2.27
4.04 3.61 3.26
5.39 4.84 4.38
12.0 11.0 10.1
14.0 12.8 11.7
16.0 14.7 13.5
18.1 16.7 15.4
2 3 4 5 6
2.83 2.72 2.59 2.46 2.32
5.64 5.44 5.21 4.97 4.73
8.47 8.19 7.88 7.57 7.27
11.3 11.0 10.6 10.3 9.91
14.2 13.8 13.4 13.1 12.7
17.1 16.7 16.3 15.9 15.5
20.0 19.6 19.2 18.8 18.3
23.0 22.6 22.1 21.7 21.2
25.9 25.5 25.0 24.6 24.1
28.9 28.4 28.0 27.5 27.0
31.8 31.4 30.9 30.4 30.0
34.8 34.3 33.9 33.4 33.0
7 8 9 10 12
2.19 2.07 1.95 1.84 1.65
4.51 4.29 4.09 3.90 3.56
6.97 6.69 6.43 6.18 5.73
9.56 9.23 8.92 8.63 8.08
12.3 11.9 11.5 11.2 10.6
15.0 14.6 14.3 13.9 13.2
17.9 17.5 17.0 16.6 15.9
20.8 20.3 19.9 19.5 18.7
23.7 23.2 22.8 22.3 21.5
26.6 26.1 25.6 25.2 24.3
29.5 29.0 28.6 28.1 27.2
32.4 32.0 31.5 31.0 30.1
14 16 18 20 24
1.49 1.35 1.23 1.12 0.95
3.27 3.01 2.78 2.58 2.25
5.32 4.95 4.63 4.34 3.84
7.59 10.0 7.13 9.48 6.71 8.98 6.33 8.52 5.67 7.70
12.6 12.0 11.4 10.9 9.91
15.2 14.5 13.9 13.3 12.3
17.9 17.2 16.5 15.9 14.7
20.7 19.9 19.2 18.5 17.3
23.5 22.7 22.0 21.2 19.9
26.3 25.5 24.7 24.0 22.6
29.2 28.4 27.6 27.0 25.3
28 32 36
0.83 0.73 0.65
1.98 1.77 1.60
3.43 3.09 2.81
5.11 4.64 4.24
9.08 11.3 13.7 8.36 10.5 12.7 7.73 9.74 11.9
16.1 15.1 14.2
18.7 17.5 16.5
21.3 20.1 19.0
23.9 22.6 21.5
7.00 6.40 5.89
6.86 6.19 5.62
8.47 10.2 7.66 9.26 6.98 8.46
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 75
Table 8-23 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 75°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
ex
where
3
6
s s
e
s, in.
75° P u
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
6
6 12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
2.92 2.89 2.86 2.82 2.77
5.83 5.77 5.70 5.61 5.51
8.73 8.63 8.51 8.38 8.23
11.6 11.5 11.3 11.1 10.9
14.5 14.3 14.1 13.9 13.6
17.4 17.2 16.9 16.6 16.3
20.3 20.0 19.7 19.4 19.0
23.1 22.8 22.5 22.1 21.8
26.0 25.7 25.3 24.9 24.5
28.9 28.5 28.1 27.7 27.2
31.8 31.4 30.9 30.5 30.0
34.7 34.2 33.7 33.3 32.8
7 8 9 10 12
2.72 2.66 2.60 2.53 2.40
5.40 5.29 5.16 5.04 4.78
8.06 7.89 7.71 7.53 7.16
10.7 10.5 10.3 10.1 9.57
13.4 13.1 12.8 12.6 12.0
16.0 15.7 15.4 15.1 14.5
18.7 18.3 18.0 17.7 17.0
21.4 21.0 20.6 20.3 19.6
24.1 23.7 23.3 22.9 22.1
26.8 26.4 26.0 25.6 24.8
29.6 29.1 28.7 28.3 27.4
32.3 31.9 31.4 31.0 30.1
14 16 18 20 24
2.26 2.13 2.00 1.89 1.67
4.52 4.27 4.03 3.81 3.41
6.80 6.45 6.12 5.80 5.24
9.12 8.68 8.27 7.88 7.18
11.5 11.0 10.5 10.1 9.22
13.9 13.3 12.8 12.3 11.4
16.4 15.8 15.2 14.6 13.6
18.9 18.2 17.6 17.0 15.9
21.4 20.7 20.1 19.4 18.2
24.0 23.3 22.6 21.9 20.7
26.6 25.9 25.1 24.4 23.1
29.3 28.5 27.7 27.0 25.6
28 32 36
1.49 1.34 1.21
3.06 2.77 2.52
4.75 4.33 3.97
6.56 6.02 5.56
12.6 11.8 11.1
14.9 13.9 13.1
17.1 16.1 15.2
19.5 18.4 17.4
21.9 20.7 19.7
24.3 23.1 22.0
2 3 4 5 6
2.92 2.89 2.86 2.82 2.77
5.82 5.76 5.68 5.59 5.49
8.71 8.60 8.47 8.34 8.19
11.6 11.4 11.3 11.1 10.9
14.5 14.3 14.1 13.9 13.7
17.4 17.1 16.9 16.7 16.4
20.3 20.0 19.8 19.5 19.2
23.5 22.9 22.6 22.4 22.1
26.4 25.8 25.5 25.2 24.9
29.3 28.7 28.4 28.1 27.8
32.3 31.7 31.3 31.0 30.7
35.2 34.6 34.2 33.9 33.6
7 8 9 10 12
2.72 2.66 2.60 2.53 2.40
5.39 5.27 5.16 5.04 4.81
8.04 7.89 7.74 7.58 7.27
10.7 10.5 10.4 10.2 9.81
13.4 13.2 13.0 12.8 12.4
16.2 16.0 15.8 15.5 15.1
19.0 18.8 18.5 18.3 17.8
21.8 21.6 21.3 21.0 20.6
24.6 24.4 24.1 23.9 23.3
27.5 27.2 27.0 26.7 26.2
30.4 30.1 29.8 29.5 29.0
33.3 33.0 32.7 32.4 31.8
14 16 18 20 24
2.26 2.13 2.00 1.89 1.67
4.57 4.35 4.13 3.93 3.57
6.97 6.69 6.41 6.15 5.67
9.47 9.13 8.82 8.51 7.95
12.0 11.7 11.3 11.0 10.4
14.7 14.3 13.9 13.5 12.9
17.4 16.9 16.5 16.1 15.4
20.1 19.6 19.2 18.8 18.0
22.9 22.4 21.9 21.5 20.7
25.6 25.1 24.7 24.2 23.4
28.4 27.9 27.4 27.0 26.1
31.3 30.7 30.2 29.8 28.8
28 32 36
1.49 1.34 1.21
3.25 2.97 2.73
5.25 4.87 4.54
7.44 6.98 6.56
9.77 12.2 9.23 11.6 8.74 11.1
14.7 14.1 13.5
17.3 16.6 16.0
19.9 19.2 18.5
22.6 21.8 21.1
25.3 24.5 23.7
28.0 27.2 26.4
8.49 10.5 7.84 9.77 7.27 9.10
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 76
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-24. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 0°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
ex = e
where
s, in.
3
6
s
Pu
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
3
3
9
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
2 3 4 5 6
2.60 2.23 1.94 1.69 1.49
5.70 4.92 4.30 3.79 3.37
9.24 13.2 8.05 11.7 7.09 10.4 6.30 9.29 5.65 8.37
7 8 9 10 12
1.32 1.18 1.07 0.98 0.83
3.03 2.74 2.50 2.29 1.96
5.10 4.63 4.24 3.89 3.34
7.59 10.4 6.92 9.56 6.35 8.81 5.86 8.15 5.06 7.06
14 16 18 20 24
0.73 0.65 0.58 0.53 0.44
1.72 1.52 1.37 1.24 1.04
2.92 2.59 2.33 2.11 1.78
4.44 3.95 3.55 3.23 2.72
6.21 5.54 4.99 4.53 3.83
8.27 10.6 13.2 7.39 9.48 11.9 6.67 8.57 10.7 6.07 7.81 9.77 5.14 6.62 8.30
28 32 36
0.38 0.34 0.30
0.90 0.79 0.71
1.54 1.36 1.21
2.35 2.07 1.85
3.31 2.91 2.60
4.45 3.92 3.50
2 3 4 5 6
2.60 2.23 1.94 1.69 1.49
6.48 5.75 5.12 4.58 4.13
10.7 9.79 8.91 8.10 7.37
7 8 9 10 12
1.32 1.18 1.07 0.98 0.83
3.74 3.41 3.13 2.89 2.50
6.74 10.5 6.20 9.73 5.73 9.05 5.31 8.45 4.63 7.43
14 16 18 20 24
0.73 0.65 0.58 0.53 0.44
2.19 1.95 1.76 1.60 1.35
4.09 3.65 3.29 2.99 2.53
6.60 5.93 5.37 4.90 4.16
9.53 12.9 8.59 11.7 7.81 10.8 7.15 9.85 6.10 8.44
28 32 36
0.38 0.34 0.30
1.17 1.03 0.92
2.19 1.93 1.72
3.61 3.19 2.85
5.31 4.69 4.20
3
4
14.9 14.0 13.1 12.2 11.3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
17.3 15.6 14.0 12.6 11.5
21.4 19.7 18.0 16.4 14.9
25.6 23.9 22.1 20.3 18.7
29.7 28.1 26.3 24.4 22.7
33.8 32.3 30.5 28.6 26.7
37.9 36.5 34.7 32.9 30.9
41.9 40.6 38.9 37.1 35.2
45.9 44.7 43.1 41.4 39.4
13.7 12.6 11.6 10.8 9.37
17.2 15.9 14.7 13.7 12.0
21.0 19.5 18.1 16.9 14.9
24.9 23.3 21.7 20.3 17.9
29.0 27.3 25.6 24.1 21.3
33.2 31.4 29.6 27.9 24.9
37.5 35.5 33.7 31.9 28.6
16.0 14.4 13.1 11.9 10.2
19.1 17.2 15.7 14.3 12.2
22.4 20.2 18.4 16.9 14.4
25.8 23.4 21.4 19.6 16.8
5.73 5.05 4.51
7.20 6.35 5.68
8.82 10.6 12.6 7.79 9.38 11.1 6.96 8.39 9.95
14.7 13.0 11.6
18.9 18.2 17.4 16.5 15.5
23.0 22.3 21.6 20.7 19.7
27.0 26.4 25.7 24.9 24.0
31.0 30.5 29.9 29.1 28.3
34.9 34.5 33.9 33.2 32.5
38.9 38.5 38.0 37.4 36.7
42.9 42.5 42.0 41.4 40.8
46.8 46.5 46.1 45.5 44.9
14.5 13.6 12.8 12.1 10.7
18.8 17.8 16.9 16.0 14.3
23.1 22.1 21.1 20.1 18.3
27.4 26.4 25.4 24.4 22.5
31.6 30.6 29.7 28.7 26.7
35.8 34.9 34.0 33.0 31.0
40.0 39.1 38.3 37.3 35.3
44.1 43.3 42.5 41.5 39.6
16.7 15.2 14.0 12.9 11.1
20.6 19.0 17.5 16.2 14.0
24.7 22.9 21.3 19.8 17.3
29.0 27.1 25.3 23.6 20.8
33.3 31.3 29.4 27.6 24.5
37.6 35.5 33.6 31.7 28.3
9.69 12.3 15.2 8.61 11.0 13.6 7.73 9.89 12.3
18.4 16.5 14.9
21.8 19.6 17.8
25.3 22.9 20.8
7.37 6.53 5.85
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 77
Table 8-24 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 15°° C req =
Pu φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
ex Pu
where s
15°
s, in.
3
6
e
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
3
3 9
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
2.68 2.30 1.99 1.74 1.53
5.77 5.00 4.38 3.88 3.45
9.31 8.17 7.22 6.43 5.77
13.2 11.7 10.4 9.37 8.47
17.2 15.6 14.1 12.8 11.6
21.3 19.6 17.9 16.4 15.0
25.4 23.7 22.0 20.2 18.6
29.5 27.9 26.0 24.2 22.5
33.6 32.0 30.2 28.3 26.6
37.7 36.2 34.4 32.5 30.6
41.7 40.2 38.5 36.7 34.8
45.7 44.3 42.7 40.9 39.0
7 8 9 10 12
1.36 1.22 1.11 1.01 0.86
3.10 2.81 2.57 2.36 2.02
5.21 4.74 4.34 4.00 3.44
7.71 10.6 7.05 9.70 6.48 8.95 5.98 8.29 5.18 7.21
13.7 12.7 11.8 10.9 9.52
17.2 15.9 14.8 13.8 12.2
20.9 19.5 18.1 17.0 15.0
24.8 23.2 21.7 20.4 18.1
28.8 27.1 25.5 24.0 21.4
32.9 31.1 29.4 27.7 24.9
37.1 35.2 33.4 31.6 28.5
14 16 18 20 24
0.75 0.67 0.60 0.54 0.46
1.77 1.57 1.41 1.28 1.08
3.01 2.68 2.40 2.18 1.84
4.55 4.05 3.65 3.32 2.80
6.36 5.67 5.12 4.66 3.94
8.43 10.8 13.3 7.54 9.66 12.0 6.81 8.74 10.9 6.21 7.98 9.95 5.26 6.78 8.47
16.1 14.6 13.3 12.1 10.4
19.2 17.3 15.8 14.5 12.4
22.4 20.3 18.6 17.1 14.6
25.8 23.5 21.5 19.8 17.0
28 32 36
0.40 0.35 0.31
0.93 0.82 0.73
1.59 1.40 1.25
2.43 2.14 1.91
3.41 3.00 2.68
4.56 4.03 3.60
12.8 11.3 10.2
14.9 13.2 11.9
2 3 4 5 6
2.68 2.30 1.99 1.74 1.53
6.48 5.75 5.13 4.61 4.17
10.6 9.75 8.91 8.14 7.45
7 8 9 10 12
1.36 1.22 1.11 1.01 0.86
3.79 3.46 3.19 2.94 2.55
6.84 10.4 6.30 9.71 5.83 9.05 5.42 8.47 4.73 7.47
14 16 18 20 24
0.75 0.67 0.60 0.54 0.46
2.24 2.00 1.80 1.64 1.39
4.18 3.74 3.38 3.08 2.60
6.66 6.00 5.45 4.98 4.25
9.62 12.9 8.71 11.8 7.94 10.8 7.28 9.92 6.23 8.54
28 32 36
0.40 0.35 0.31
1.20 1.06 0.94
2.26 1.99 1.78
3.69 3.26 2.92
5.43 4.81 4.31
14.7 13.9 13.0 12.1 11.2
5.89 5.19 4.65
7.37 6.51 5.83
9.02 10.9 7.98 9.59 7.15 8.59
18.8 18.1 17.2 16.3 15.3
22.9 22.2 21.4 20.5 19.5
26.9 26.3 25.5 24.7 23.7
30.9 30.3 29.7 28.9 27.9
34.9 34.4 33.7 33.0 32.2
38.8 38.3 37.7 37.1 36.3
42.8 42.4 41.8 41.2 40.4
46.7 46.3 45.8 45.2 44.5
14.5 13.6 12.8 12.1 10.7
18.6 17.6 16.8 15.9 14.3
22.8 21.8 20.9 20.0 18.2
27.0 26.0 25.1 24.1 22.2
31.3 30.3 29.3 28.3 26.4
35.4 34.5 33.5 32.6 30.6
39.6 38.7 37.8 36.8 34.8
43.7 42.9 42.0 41.0 39.1
16.6 15.2 14.0 13.0 11.2
20.5 18.9 17.5 16.2 14.1
24.5 22.8 21.2 19.8 17.3
28.6 26.8 25.1 23.5 20.8
32.9 30.9 29.1 27.4 24.4
37.1 35.1 33.2 31.4 28.1
9.85 12.5 8.77 11.1 7.89 10.0
15.4 13.8 12.5
18.5 16.6 15.1
21.8 19.7 17.9
25.3 22.9 20.9
7.48 6.65 5.97
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 78
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-24 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 30°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
ex Pu
s
where
s, in.
3
6
30°
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
e
3
3
3
9
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
2 3 4 5 6
2.90 2.50 2.18 1.91 1.69
6.06 5.31 4.70 4.18 3.75
9.59 13.4 8.52 12.1 7.62 10.9 6.85 9.86 6.19 8.98
7 8 9 10 12
1.51 1.36 1.23 1.13 0.96
3.38 3.07 2.81 2.59 2.23
5.63 5.14 4.73 4.37 3.78
8.21 11.2 7.55 10.3 6.97 9.54 6.46 8.88 5.62 7.78
14 16 18 20 24
0.84 0.74 0.67 0.61 0.51
1.95 1.73 1.56 1.42 1.20
3.32 2.96 2.66 2.42 2.04
4.96 4.43 4.00 3.65 3.09
6.90 6.19 5.60 5.11 4.34
9.08 11.6 8.17 10.4 7.41 9.46 6.77 8.67 5.77 7.41
28 32 36
0.44 0.39 0.35
1.03 0.91 0.81
1.77 1.56 1.39
2.68 2.36 2.11
3.77 3.32 2.97
5.01 4.43 3.97
2 3 4 5 6
2.90 2.50 2.18 1.91 1.69
6.59 5.88 5.30 4.81 4.38
10.6 9.83 9.05 8.35 7.72
7 8 9 10 12
1.51 1.36 1.23 1.13 0.96
4.01 3.69 3.41 3.16 2.76
7.15 10.7 6.64 10.0 6.19 9.41 5.79 8.85 5.09 7.88
14 16 18 20 24
0.84 0.74 0.67 0.61 0.51
2.44 2.18 1.97 1.80 1.53
4.54 4.08 3.70 3.38 2.87
7.08 10.1 6.41 9.21 5.85 8.45 5.37 7.80 4.61 6.74
28 32 36
0.44 0.39 0.35
1.32 1.17 1.05
2.49 2.20 1.97
4.02 3.57 3.21
3
4
14.7 13.9 13.0 12.3 11.4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
17.3 15.8 14.4 13.2 12.1
21.3 19.8 18.2 16.8 15.5
25.3 23.8 22.1 20.6 19.1
29.4 27.8 26.1 24.5 22.9
33.4 31.9 30.1 28.4 26.8
37.5 35.9 34.2 32.5 30.7
41.4 40.0 38.3 36.6 34.8
45.4 44.0 42.4 40.7 38.9
14.4 13.3 12.4 11.6 10.2
17.8 16.6 15.5 14.6 12.9
21.4 20.0 18.8 17.7 15.8
25.2 23.7 22.3 21.1 18.9
29.1 27.5 26.1 24.7 22.2
33.1 31.4 29.9 28.3 25.7
37.1 35.4 33.7 32.2 29.3
14.2 12.9 11.8 10.8 9.22
17.1 15.5 14.2 13.1 11.2
20.2 18.4 16.9 15.5 13.4
23.4 21.4 19.7 18.2 15.7
26.8 24.6 22.7 21.0 18.2
13.9 12.3 11.1
16.1 14.4 13.0
6.46 5.71 5.12
8.05 7.14 6.40
9.83 11.8 8.72 10.5 7.84 9.41
18.7 18.0 17.1 16.3 15.4
22.7 22.0 21.2 20.4 19.5
26.7 26.1 25.4 24.5 23.6
30.8 30.1 29.4 28.6 27.8
34.7 34.1 33.5 32.7 31.9
38.7 38.2 37.5 36.8 35.9
42.6 42.2 41.5 40.8 40.0
46.6 46.1 45.5 44.9 44.1
14.6 13.8 13.0 12.4 11.2
18.6 17.7 16.9 16.2 14.7
22.7 21.8 20.9 20.1 18.5
26.9 25.9 25.0 24.1 22.4
31.0 30.0 29.1 28.2 26.4
35.1 34.2 33.3 32.4 30.6
39.2 38.3 37.4 36.5 34.6
43.3 42.4 41.6 40.6 38.8
13.4 12.3 11.4 10.5 9.16
17.0 15.7 14.6 13.6 11.9
20.9 19.4 18.1 16.9 14.9
24.7 23.2 21.8 20.4 18.1
28.8 27.1 25.6 24.1 21.5
32.9 31.1 29.4 27.9 25.1
36.9 35.1 33.4 31.8 28.8
8.07 10.5 13.3 7.20 9.45 11.9 6.49 8.55 10.9
16.3 14.6 13.4
19.4 17.6 16.0
22.7 20.7 18.9
26.2 23.9 22.0
5.91 5.26 4.73
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 79
Table 8-24 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 45°° C req =
Pu φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
ex Pu
s
where
3
6
s
e
s, in.
45°
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
3
3
9
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
3.26 2.87 2.54 2.25 2.01
6.62 5.92 5.31 4.78 4.33
10.2 9.19 8.36 7.63 6.99
13.9 12.7 11.7 10.8 9.94
17.7 16.4 15.2 14.1 13.1
21.6 20.2 18.9 17.6 16.5
25.5 24.0 22.6 21.3 20.1
29.4 27.96 26.5 25.1 23.8
33.4 32.0 30.5 29.0 27.5
37.4 35.9 34.4 32.9 31.4
41.3 39.9 38.4 36.9 35.3
45.3 43.9 42.4 40.8 39.3
7 8 9 10 12
1.81 1.64 1.49 1.37 1.17
3.93 3.60 3.31 3.06 2.65
6.42 5.92 5.49 5.10 4.46
9.20 8.55 7.96 7.44 6.55
12.2 11.4 10.7 10.1 8.93
15.5 14.6 13.7 13.0 11.6
18.9 17.9 16.9 16.0 14.4
22.5 21.3 20.3 19.2 17.5
26.2 24.9 23.8 22.7 20.7
30.0 28.6 27.4 26.2 24.0
33.9 32.4 31.1 29.9 27.5
37.7 36.3 34.9 33.6 31.1
14 16 18 20 24
1.03 0.91 0.82 0.74 0.63
2.33 2.08 1.88 1.71 1.45
3.95 3.54 3.20 2.92 2.48
5.83 5.24 4.75 4.35 3.71
8.00 10.5 7.23 9.47 6.59 8.66 6.04 7.96 5.18 6.84
13.1 12.0 10.9 10.1 8.71
15.9 14.6 13.5 12.5 10.8
19.0 17.5 16.1 15.0 13.0
22.1 20.4 18.9 17.6 15.4
25.4 23.6 21.9 20.5 18.0
28.8 26.8 25.0 23.5 20.7
28 32 36
0.54 0.48 0.43
1.26 1.11 0.99
2.15 1.90 1.69
3.23 2.86 2.56
4.52 4.00 3.59
13.7 12.3 11.2
16.0 14.4 13.1
18.5 16.7 15.2
2 3 4 5 6
3.26 2.87 2.54 2.25 2.01
6.89 6.28 5.74 5.27 4.85
10.8 10.1 9.38 8.75 8.20
7 8 9 10 12
1.81 1.64 1.49 1.37 1.17
4.49 4.16 3.87 3.62 3.19
7.70 11.3 7.25 10.7 6.83 10.2 6.45 9.65 5.78 8.75
14 16 18 20 24
1.03 0.91 0.82 0.74 0.63
2.84 2.56 2.33 2.13 1.82
5.21 4.74 4.33 3.98 3.42
7.97 11.1 7.30 10.3 6.72 9.48 6.21 8.83 5.38 7.74
28 32 36
0.54 0.48 0.43
1.59 1.41 1.26
2.99 2.65 2.38
4.74 4.22 3.81
14.8 14.0 13.3 12.6 11.9
5.99 5.31 4.77
7.65 6.81 6.13
9.50 11.5 8.48 10.3 7.64 9.30
18.7 18.0 17.3 16.5 15.7
22.7 22.0 21.2 20.4 19.7
26.6 26.0 25.3 24.5 23.7
30.6 30.0 29.2 28.5 27.7
34.6 33.9 33.2 32.5 31.7
38.5 37.9 37.2 36.5 35.7
42.5 41.9 41.2 40.5 39.7
46.5 45.9 45.2 44.5 43.8
15.1 14.4 13.8 13.1 12.0
19.0 18.2 17.5 16.9 15.6
22.9 22.2 21.4 20.7 19.3
26.9 26.1 25.4 24.6 23.2
30.9 30.1 29.4 28.5 27.0
34.9 34.1 33.3 32.5 31.0
39.0 38.2 37.4 36.6 35.0
43.0 42.2 41.4 40.6 39.0
14.5 13.5 12.6 11.8 10.4
18.1 16.9 15.9 15.0 13.4
21.8 20.6 19.4 18.4 16.5
25.6 24.3 23.0 21.9 19.8
29.5 28.1 26.7 25.5 23.2
33.4 32.0 30.6 29.2 26.8
37.4 35.9 34.4 33.1 30.5
9.30 12.0 14.9 8.38 10.9 13.6 7.62 9.89 12.5
18.0 16.5 15.2
21.3 19.5 18.0
24.7 22.8 21.1
28.2 26.1 24.3
6.87 6.17 5.59
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 80
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-24 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 60°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
ex
where
3
6
s
60°
s
e
s, in.
Pu
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
3
3
9
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
3.63 3.38 3.10 2.84 2.60
7.25 6.77 6.27 5.80 5.36
10.9 10.3 9.55 8.92 8.33
14.6 13.8 13.0 12.2 11.5
18.3 17.4 16.5 15.6 14.8
22.1 21.1 20.1 19.1 18.2
25.9 24.8 23.7 22.7 21.7
29.7 28.6 27.5 26.4 25.4
33.6 32.4 31.3 30.1 29.1
37.5 36.3 35.1 33.9 32.8
41.4 40.2 38.9 37.8 36.6
45.3 44.1 42.8 41.6 40.4
7 8 9 10 12
2.38 2.19 2.02 1.87 1.62
4.96 4.60 4.28 3.99 3.51
7.79 10.9 7.30 10.2 6.85 9.68 6.45 9.17 5.75 8.27
14.1 13.4 12.7 12.1 11.0
17.4 16.7 15.9 15.2 13.9
20.9 20.0 19.2 18.4 17.0
24.4 23.5 22.6 21.8 20.3
28.0 27.1 26.1 25.3 23.6
31.8 30.7 29.7 28.8 27.0
35.5 34.4 33.4 32.4 30.6
39.3 38.2 37.1 36.1 34.1
14 16 18 20 24
1.43 1.27 1.15 1.04 0.88
3.12 2.81 2.56 2.34 2.00
5.18 4.70 4.29 3.95 3.39
7.50 10.1 6.85 9.23 6.28 8.52 5.80 7.89 5.01 6.87
12.9 11.9 11.0 10.2 8.98
15.8 14.7 13.7 12.8 11.3
18.9 17.6 16.5 15.5 13.8
22.1 20.7 19.5 18.4 16.4
25.4 24.0 22.6 21.4 19.2
28.9 27.3 25.9 24.5 22.1
32.4 30.7 29.1 27.7 25.2
28 32 36
0.76 0.67 0.60
1.74 1.54 1.38
2.96 2.63 2.36
4.39 3.91 3.52
12.3 11.2 10.2
14.8 13.5 12.3
17.4 15.9 14.5
20.1 18.4 16.9
23.0 21.1 19.4
2 3 4 5 6
3.63 3.38 3.10 2.84 2.60
7.29 6.88 6.46 6.06 5.69
11.1 10.6 10.0 9.55 9.09
14.9 14.3 13.8 13.2 12.7
18.8 18.2 17.6 17.0 16.4
22.7 22.1 21.5 20.9 20.3
26.6 26.0 25.4 24.7 24.2
30.5 29.9 29.3 28.7 28.1
34.5 33.9 33.3 32.6 31.9
38.4 37.8 37.2 36.5 35.9
42.4 41.8 41.1 40.4 39.8
46.3 45.7 45.1 44.4 43.8
7 8 9 10 12
2.38 2.19 2.02 1.87 1.62
5.34 5.03 4.74 4.47 4.01
8.66 8.27 7.90 7.55 6.93
12.2 11.7 11.3 10.9 10.1
15.9 15.4 14.9 14.5 13.6
19.7 19.1 18.6 18.1 17.2
23.6 22.9 22.4 21.9 20.8
27.4 26.8 26.2 25.7 24.5
31.3 30.7 30.1 29.5 28.3
35.2 34.6 34.0 33.4 32.2
39.2 38.5 37.9 37.3 36.0
43.1 42.4 41.8 41.2 39.9
14 16 18 20 24
1.43 1.27 1.15 1.04 0.88
3.63 3.31 3.04 2.81 2.44
6.38 5.91 5.49 5.12 4.49
9.46 8.84 8.28 7.77 6.90
12.8 12.1 11.3 10.8 9.62
16.2 15.4 14.6 13.9 12.6
19.9 18.9 18.0 17.2 15.8
23.5 22.6 21.6 20.8 19.1
27.3 26.3 25.2 24.3 22.6
31.0 30.0 28.9 28.0 26.1
34.9 33.8 32.7 31.7 29.8
38.7 37.6 36.5 35.4 33.4
28 32 36
0.76 0.67 0.60
2.15 1.91 1.73
3.99 3.58 3.24
6.18 5.58 5.08
8.70 11.5 14.5 7.93 10.6 13.4 7.27 9.76 12.5
17.7 16.5 15.4
21.1 19.7 18.4
24.5 23.0 21.6
28.0 26.4 24.9
31.6 29.9 28.3
6.07 5.43 4.91
7.97 10.1 7.15 9.06 6.48 8.22
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 81
Table 8-24 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 75°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
ex
where
3
6
s
Pu
s
e
s, in.
75°
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
3
3
9
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
3.86 3.79 3.70 3.59 3.47
7.69 7.53 7.34 7.13 6.89
11.5 11.2 11.0 10.6 10.3
15.3 14.9 14.6 14.2 13.8
19.1 18.6 18.2 17.7 17.2
22.9 22.4 21.9 21.3 20.8
26.7 26.1 25.5 24.9 24.4
30.5 29.9 29.2 28.6 28.0
34.3 33.6 33.0 32.3 31.7
38.2 37.5 36.7 36.1 35.4
42.1 41.3 40.6 39.8 39.1
45.9 45.1 44.3 43.6 42.9
7 8 9 10 12
3.34 3.20 3.07 2.94 2.68
6.65 6.40 6.16 5.91 5.45
9.98 9.64 9.31 8.98 8.36
13.4 12.9 12.6 12.2 11.5
16.8 16.4 15.9 15.4 14.6
20.3 19.8 19.3 18.8 17.9
23.8 23.3 22.8 22.2 21.3
27.4 26.9 26.3 25.7 24.8
31.1 30.4 29.9 29.3 28.3
34.8 34.1 33.5 32.9 31.8
38.5 37.8 37.1 36.6 35.4
42.2 41.5 40.8 40.2 39.0
14 16 18 20 24
2.45 2.24 2.06 1.90 1.63
5.03 4.65 4.31 4.01 3.51
7.79 10.7 7.28 10.1 6.81 9.55 6.40 9.03 5.69 8.13
13.9 13.2 12.5 11.9 10.8
17.1 16.3 15.5 14.9 13.6
20.4 19.6 18.8 18.0 16.6
23.8 22.9 22.0 21.2 19.7
27.3 26.3 25.4 24.5 22.9
30.8 29.8 28.8 27.9 26.2
34.3 33.2 32.2 31.3 29.5
37.9 36.8 35.8 34.8 32.9
28 32 36
1.43 1.27 1.14
3.11 2.79 2.53
5.11 4.62 4.22
12.5 11.5 10.7
15.4 14.3 13.3
18.3 17.1 16.0
21.4 20.0 18.9
24.6 23.2 21.8
27.8 26.3 24.9
31.1 29.5 28.0
2 3 4 5 6
3.86 3.79 3.70 3.59 3.47
7.67 7.51 7.32 7.12 6.92
11.5 11.2 11.0 10.7 10.4
15.3 15.0 14.7 14.4 14.1
19.1 18.8 18.4 18.1 17.7
23.0 22.6 22.2 21.9 21.5
26.9 26.4 26.0 25.6 25.3
30.8 30.4 29.9 29.5 29.1
35.2 34.3 33.8 33.3 32.9
39.1 38.1 37.7 37.3 36.8
43.0 42.1 41.6 41.1 40.7
47.0 46.0 45.5 45.0 44.6
7 8 9 10 12
3.34 3.20 3.07 2.94 2.68
6.70 6.49 6.28 6.08 5.69
10.2 9.92 9.66 9.42 8.95
13.8 13.5 13.2 12.9 12.4
17.4 17.1 16.8 16.5 15.9
21.1 20.8 20.5 20.2 19.5
24.9 24.5 24.2 23.9 23.2
28.7 28.3 28.0 27.6 26.9
32.6 32.1 31.8 31.4 30.7
36.4 36.0 35.6 35.2 34.5
40.2 39.8 39.5 39.0 38.3
44.1 43.7 43.3 42.9 42.1
14 16 18 20 24
2.45 2.24 2.06 1.90 1.63
5.33 4.99 4.69 4.42 3.95
8.51 8.10 7.72 7.36 6.74
11.9 11.5 11.0 10.6 9.83
15.4 14.9 14.4 13.9 13.1
19.0 18.5 17.9 17.4 16.5
22.6 22.1 21.5 21.0 20.0
26.3 25.7 25.1 24.6 23.6
30.1 29.4 28.8 28.2 27.1
33.8 33.1 32.5 31.9 30.7
37.6 36.9 36.2 35.6 34.4
41.4 40.7 40.0 39.3 38.1
28 32 36
1.43 1.27 1.14
3.57 3.25 2.98
6.21 5.74 5.33
9.16 12.4 8.56 11.6 8.02 11.0
15.7 14.9 14.1
19.0 18.2 17.3
22.5 21.6 20.7
26.1 25.1 24.1
29.7 28.6 27.6
33.3 32.2 31.2
36.9 35.9 34.8
7.36 6.71 6.15
9.83 9.02 8.31
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 82
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-25. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 0°° C req =
Pu φ rn
or φR n = C × φ rn
ex= e
where
s, in.
3
6
s
Pu
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
4
4
4
12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
2.82 2.50 2.23 2.01 1.81
5.98 5.31 4.74 4.27 3.86
9.46 8.43 7.58 6.86 6.24
13.3 12.0 10.8 9.82 8.96
17.3 15.7 14.3 13.1 12.0
21.3 19.7 18.2 16.7 15.4
25.5 23.8 22.2 20.5 19.0
29.6 28.0 26.3 24.5 22.9
33.7 32.2 30.4 28.6 26.9
37.7 36.3 34.6 32.8 31.0
41.8 40.4 38.8 37.0 35.2
45.8 44.6 43.0 41.3 39.4
7 8 9 10 12
1.64 1.49 1.36 1.25 1.07
3.52 3.22 2.96 2.73 2.37
5.70 5.24 4.83 4.47 3.89
8.22 11.1 7.57 10.2 7.01 9.48 6.51 8.83 5.68 7.74
14.2 13.2 12.3 11.4 10.1
17.6 16.4 15.3 14.3 12.6
21.3 19.9 18.6 17.5 15.5
25.2 23.6 22.1 20.8 18.5
29.2 27.5 25.9 24.4 21.8
33.3 31.5 29.8 28.2 25.3
37.5 35.6 33.8 32.1 29.0
14 16 18 20 24
0.94 0.83 0.75 0.68 0.58
2.08 1.86 1.67 1.52 1.29
3.42 3.05 2.75 2.50 2.12
5.02 4.49 4.06 3.70 3.14
6.86 6.15 5.56 5.07 4.30
8.95 11.3 8.04 10.2 7.29 9.22 6.65 8.43 5.66 7.18
13.8 12.5 11.4 10.4 8.88
16.6 15.0 13.7 12.6 10.8
19.6 17.8 16.3 14.9 12.8
22.8 20.7 19.0 17.5 15.0
26.2 23.9 21.9 20.2 17.4
28 32 36
0.50 0.44 0.40
1.12 0.98 0.88
1.84 1.62 1.45
2.72 2.40 2.15
3.73 3.30 2.95
4.92 4.34 3.89
13.1 11.6 10.4
15.2 13.5 12.1
2 3 4 5 6
2.82 2.50 2.23 2.01 1.81
6.54 5.90 5.33 4.84 4.42
10.6 9.81 9.01 8.27 7.60
7 8 9 10 12
1.64 1.49 1.36 1.25 1.07
4.05 3.73 3.45 3.20 2.80
7.02 10.6 6.51 9.94 6.06 9.30 5.66 8.72 4.98 7.73
14 16 18 20 24
0.94 0.83 0.75 0.68 0.58
2.47 2.21 2.00 1.82 1.55
4.43 3.98 3.60 3.29 2.79
6.92 6.25 5.68 5.21 4.45
28 32 36
0.50 0.44 0.40
1.34 1.18 1.06
2.42 2.14 1.92
3.87 3.43 3.07
14.8 14.0 13.1 12.2 11.4
6.24 5.51 4.94
7.73 6.84 6.13
9.37 11.2 8.29 9.90 7.43 8.88
18.9 18.1 17.3 16.4 15.5
22.9 22.3 21.5 20.6 19.7
26.9 26.4 25.7 24.8 24.0
30.9 30.4 29.8 29.0 28.2
34.9 34.5 33.9 33.2 32.4
38.9 38.5 37.9 37.3 36.6
42.8 42.5 42.0 41.4 40.7
46.8 46.5 46.0 45.5 44.8
14.6 13.7 13.0 12.2 10.9
18.8 17.8 16.9 16.1 14.5
23.0 22.0 21.1 20.2 18.4
27.3 26.3 25.3 24.4 22.5
31.5 30.6 29.6 28.6 26.7
35.7 34.8 33.9 32.9 30.9
39.9 39.1 38.2 37.2 35.2
44.1 43.3 42.4 41.5 39.5
9.81 8.90 8.13 7.47 6.40
13.2 12.0 11.0 10.1 8.72
16.8 15.4 14.2 13.1 11.3
20.7 19.1 17.7 16.4 14.3
24.8 23.0 21.4 20.0 17.5
29.0 27.1 25.3 23.7 20.9
33.2 31.3 29.4 27.7 24.5
37.5 35.5 33.6 31.7 28.3
5.59 4.95 4.44
7.64 6.79 6.10
9.96 12.6 8.87 11.2 7.98 10.1
15.5 13.8 12.5
18.6 16.7 15.1
21.9 19.7 17.9
25.5 23.0 20.9
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 83
Table 8-25 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 15°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
ex Pu
where
s, in.
3
6
s
15° e
s
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
4
4
4
12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
2.91 2.57 2.30 2.06 1.86
6.06 5.40 4.84 4.37 3.96
9.56 8.57 7.72 6.99 6.37
13.3 12.0 10.9 9.93 9.09
17.2 15.8 14.4 13.2 12.1
21.3 19.7 18.2 16.7 15.5
25.3 23.7 22.1 20.5 19.0
29.4 27.8 26.1 24.4 22.8
33.5 31.9 30.2 28.5 26.7
37.5 36.1 34.3 32.6 30.8
41.6 40.2 38.5 36.7 34.9
45.6 44.3 42.6 40.9 39.0
7 8 9 10 12
1.69 1.53 1.40 1.29 1.11
3.61 3.31 3.04 2.81 2.44
5.83 5.36 4.95 4.59 4.00
8.36 11.2 7.72 10.4 7.15 9.64 6.65 9.00 5.82 7.90
14.3 13.3 12.4 11.6 10.2
17.7 16.5 15.4 14.5 12.8
21.3 19.9 18.7 17.6 15.6
25.1 23.6 22.2 20.9 18.7
29.0 27.4 25.8 24.4 21.9
33.1 31.3 29.7 28.1 25.3
37.2 35.3 33.6 31.9 28.9
14 16 18 20 24
0.97 0.86 0.78 0.71 0.60
2.15 1.92 1.73 1.57 1.33
3.52 3.15 2.84 2.59 2.19
5.15 4.61 4.17 3.80 3.23
7.02 6.30 5.71 5.21 4.43
9.12 11.5 8.21 10.3 7.45 9.41 6.81 8.61 5.80 7.36
14.0 12.7 11.6 10.6 9.07
16.8 15.2 13.9 12.8 11.0
19.8 18.0 16.5 15.2 13.0
22.9 20.9 19.2 17.7 15.3
26.3 24.0 22.1 20.4 17.6
28 32 36
0.52 0.46 0.41
1.15 1.02 0.91
1.90 1.68 1.50
2.80 2.48 2.22
3.85 3.40 3.04
5.05 4.46 4.00
13.4 11.9 10.7
15.5 13.8 12.4
2 3 4 5 6
2.91 2.57 2.30 2.06 1.86
6.57 5.93 5.37 4.89 4.48
10.6 9.81 9.04 8.33 7.70
7 8 9 10 12
1.69 1.53 1.40 1.29 1.11
4.12 3.80 3.52 3.27 2.86
7.13 10.6 6.62 9.95 6.17 9.32 5.77 8.76 5.09 7.80
14 16 18 20 24
0.97 0.86 0.78 0.71 0.60
2.54 2.27 2.06 1.88 1.59
4.53 4.08 3.70 3.38 2.88
7.00 6.34 5.78 5.30 4.54
9.92 9.02 8.26 7.60 6.54
28 32 36
0.52 0.46 0.41
1.38 1.22 1.09
2.50 2.21 1.98
3.96 3.51 3.15
5.72 5.08 4.56
14.7 13.9 13.0 12.2 11.4
6.41 5.67 5.08
7.91 7.01 6.29
9.59 11.4 8.50 10.1 7.63 9.09
18.8 18.0 17.2 16.3 15.4
22.8 22.1 21.3 20.5 19.5
26.8 26.2 25.5 24.6 23.7
30.8 30.3 29.6 28.8 27.9
34.8 34.3 33.6 32.9 32.1
38.8 38.3 37.7 37.0 36.2
42.7 42.3 41.7 41.1 40.3
46.7 46.3 45.8 45.1 44.4
14.5 13.7 12.9 12.2 11.0
18.6 17.7 16.8 16.0 14.5
22.8 21.8 20.9 20.0 18.3
27.0 26.0 25.1 24.1 22.3
31.2 30.2 29.3 28.3 26.4
35.4 34.4 33.5 32.5 30.6
39.5 38.6 37.7 36.8 34.8
43.7 42.8 41.9 41.0 39.0
13.2 12.0 11.1 10.2 8.84
16.8 15.4 14.2 13.2 11.5
20.6 19.0 17.7 16.4 14.4
24.6 22.9 21.3 19.9 17.5
28.7 26.9 25.2 23.6 20.9
32.8 30.9 29.1 27.5 24.5
37.1 35.1 33.2 31.4 28.2
7.77 10.1 12.7 6.92 9.03 11.4 6.23 8.15 10.3
15.6 14.0 12.7
18.7 16.8 15.3
22.0 19.9 18.1
25.4 23.1 21.1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 84
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-25 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 30°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
ex Pu
where
s, in.
3
6
s
30°
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
s
e
4
4
4
12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
3.14 2.79 2.50 2.25 2.04
6.41 5.75 5.19 4.71 4.29
9.91 8.95 8.16 7.45 6.83
13.6 12.4 11.4 10.5 9.65
17.5 16.1 14.9 13.7 12.7
21.4 20.0 18.5 17.2 16.0
25.4 23.9 22.4 20.9 19.6
29.4 27.9 26.3 24.7 23.3
33.4 31.9 30.3 28.6 27.1
37.4 35.9 34.3 32.6 31.0
41.4 40.0 38.4 36.7 35.0
45.4 44.0 42.4 40.7 39.0
7 8 9 10 12
1.85 1.69 1.55 1.43 1.23
3.93 3.61 3.33 3.08 2.68
6.28 5.80 5.38 5.00 4.37
8.92 11.8 8.27 11.0 7.70 10.3 7.19 9.64 6.32 8.52
15.0 14.0 13.1 12.3 11.0
18.3 17.2 16.2 15.3 13.6
21.9 20.6 19.4 18.4 16.5
25.6 24.2 22.9 21.7 19.6
29.4 27.9 26.5 25.2 22.8
33.3 31.7 30.2 28.8 26.2
37.3 35.6 34.0 32.5 29.8
14 16 18 20 24
1.08 0.96 0.87 0.79 0.67
2.36 2.11 1.91 1.74 1.48
3.88 3.47 3.14 2.86 2.43
5.62 5.05 4.57 4.18 3.56
7.61 6.86 6.24 5.71 4.88
9.83 12.3 8.89 11.1 8.10 10.2 7.43 9.35 6.36 8.03
14.9 13.6 12.4 11.5 9.87
17.8 16.2 14.9 13.8 11.9
20.8 19.0 17.5 16.2 14.1
24.0 22.0 20.3 18.9 16.4
27.3 25.2 23.3 21.6 18.9
28 32 36
0.58 0.51 0.46
1.28 1.13 1.01
2.11 1.87 1.67
3.10 2.74 2.45
4.25 3.76 3.37
5.55 4.92 4.41
14.5 12.9 11.7
16.7 14.9 13.5
2 3 4 5 6
3.14 2.79 2.50 2.25 2.04
6.75 6.12 5.58 5.13 4.73
10.7 9.94 9.23 8.58 8.00
7 8 9 10 12
1.85 1.69 1.55 1.43 1.23
4.38 4.06 3.78 3.53 3.10
7.47 10.9 6.98 10.3 6.55 9.72 6.15 9.18 5.47 8.25
14 16 18 20 24
1.08 0.96 0.87 0.79 0.67
2.76 2.48 2.25 2.06 1.76
4.90 4.43 4.04 3.70 3.17
7.46 10.4 6.79 9.55 6.22 8.79 5.72 8.14 4.93 7.06
28 32 36
0.58 0.51 0.46
1.53 1.35 1.21
2.76 2.45 2.19
4.32 3.84 3.46
14.7 13.9 13.1 12.4 11.6
7.02 6.23 5.60
8.65 10.4 12.4 7.69 9.29 11.0 6.91 8.36 9.95
18.7 18.0 17.2 16.3 15.5
22.7 22.0 21.2 20.4 19.5
26.7 26.1 25.3 24.5 23.6
30.7 30.1 29.4 28.6 27.7
34.7 34.1 33.4 32.7 31.8
38.6 38.1 37.5 36.7 35.9
42.6 42.1 41.5 40.8 40.0
46.6 46.1 45.5 44.8 44.1
14.7 14.0 13.3 12.6 11.4
18.7 17.9 17.1 16.3 14.9
22.7 21.9 21.0 20.2 18.6
26.8 25.9 25.1 24.2 22.5
31.0 30.1 29.2 28.3 26.5
35.1 34.2 33.3 32.4 30.6
39.2 38.3 37.4 36.5 34.7
43.3 42.4 41.5 40.6 38.8
13.7 12.6 11.7 10.9 9.48
17.2 16.0 14.9 13.9 12.2
21.0 19.6 18.3 17.1 15.2
24.9 23.3 21.9 20.6 18.3
28.8 27.2 25.7 24.2 21.7
32.9 31.2 29.5 28.0 25.3
37.0 35.2 33.5 31.9 28.9
8.38 10.8 13.5 7.50 9.73 12.2 6.77 8.82 11.1
16.5 14.9 13.6
19.6 17.8 16.3
22.9 20.9 19.1
26.3 24.1 22.2
6.22 5.54 5.00
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 85
Table 8-25 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 45°° C req =
Pu
φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
ex Pu
s
where
3
6
s
e
s, in.
45°
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
4
4
4
12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
3.46 3.15 2.87 2.61 2.39
6.96 6.38 5.84 5.36 4.93
10.5 9.73 8.97 8.30 7.69
14.2 13.2 12.3 11.4 10.7
18.0 16.8 15.7 14.7 13.9
21.8 20.6 19.3 18.2 17.2
25.7 24.4 23.1 21.8 20.7
29.6 28.2 26.9 25.5 24.3
33.5 32.1 30.7 29.3 28.0
37.4 36.1 34.6 33.2 31.8
41.4 40.0 38.6 37.1 35.6
45.3 44.0 42.5 41.0 39.5
7 8 9 10 12
2.19 2.01 1.86 1.72 1.49
4.55 4.21 3.90 3.63 3.18
7.15 6.66 6.21 5.82 5.14
9.98 9.34 8.76 8.24 7.33
13.0 12.2 11.5 10.9 9.76
16.2 15.3 14.5 13.8 12.4
19.6 18.6 17.7 16.8 15.2
23.1 22.0 21.0 20.0 18.3
26.7 25.5 24.4 23.3 21.4
30.4 29.2 27.9 26.8 24.7
34.2 32.9 31.6 30.4 28.1
38.1 36.7 35.3 34.0 31.6
14 16 18 20 24
1.32 1.17 1.06 0.96 0.82
2.82 2.53 2.29 2.10 1.79
4.59 4.14 3.76 3.44 2.94
6.58 5.95 5.43 4.98 4.26
8.81 11.3 8.00 10.3 7.32 9.44 6.74 8.71 5.81 7.53
13.9 12.7 11.7 10.9 9.43
16.7 15.4 14.2 13.2 11.5
19.7 18.2 16.9 15.7 13.8
22.8 21.2 19.7 18.4 16.2
26.1 24.3 22.7 21.2 18.7
29.5 27.5 25.7 24.2 21.4
28 32 36
0.71 0.63 0.56
1.56 1.38 1.23
2.56 2.26 2.03
3.73 3.31 2.97
5.09 4.52 4.06
14.4 12.9 11.7
16.7 15.1 13.7
19.2 17.3 15.8
2 3 4 5 6
3.46 3.15 2.87 2.61 2.39
7.09 6.58 6.09 5.66 5.26
10.9 10.3 9.65 9.07 8.54
14.8 14.1 13.4 12.8 12.1
18.7 18.1 17.3 16.6 15.9
22.7 22.0 21.3 20.6 19.8
26.7 26.0 25.3 24.5 23.8
30.6 30.0 29.3 28.5 27.8
34.6 33.9 33.3 32.5 31.8
38.5 37.9 37.3 36.5 35.8
42.5 41.9 41.2 40.5 39.8
46.5 45.9 45.2 44.5 43.8
7 8 9 10 12
2.19 2.01 1.86 1.72 1.49
4.91 4.59 4.30 4.04 3.59
8.07 7.63 7.23 6.85 6.19
11.6 11.0 10.5 10.0 9.14
15.3 14.6 14.0 13.4 12.4
19.1 18.4 17.7 17.1 15.9
23.0 22.3 21.5 20.8 19.5
27.0 26.2 25.5 24.7 23.3
31.0 30.2 29.4 28.6 27.2
35.0 34.2 33.4 32.6 31.1
39.0 38.2 37.4 36.6 35.1
43.0 42.2 41.4 40.6 39.1
14 16 18 20 24
1.32 1.17 1.06 0.96 0.82
3.22 2.91 2.66 2.44 2.10
5.62 5.13 4.71 4.35 3.76
8.38 11.4 7.71 10.6 7.12 9.87 6.61 9.22 5.76 8.11
14.8 13.8 12.9 12.1 10.8
18.3 17.2 16.2 15.3 13.7
22.0 20.8 19.6 18.6 16.7
25.8 24.4 23.2 22.1 20.0
29.6 28.2 26.9 25.7 23.4
33.5 32.1 30.7 29.4 27.0
37.5 36.0 34.6 33.2 30.6
28 32 36
0.71 0.63 0.56
1.83 1.63 1.46
3.30 2.94 2.64
5.08 4.54 4.11
9.64 12.3 8.71 11.2 7.93 10.2
15.2 13.9 12.7
18.3 16.7 15.4
21.5 19.8 18.3
24.9 23.0 21.3
28.4 26.3 24.5
7.22 6.50 5.90
6.61 5.89 5.30
8.31 10.2 12.2 7.42 9.11 11.0 6.69 8.23 9.91
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 86
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-25 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 60°° C req =
Pu
φrn
or φR n = C × φ rn
ex
where s
Pu
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
3
6
s s
e
s, in.
60°
4
4
4
12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
3.74 3.57 3.38 3.17 2.97
7.46 7.12 6.75 6.36 5.99
11.2 10.7 10.2 9.61 9.09
14.9 14.3 13.6 12.9 12.3
18.6 17.9 17.1 16.4 15.6
22.4 21.6 20.7 19.8 19.0
26.2 25.3 24.3 23.4 22.5
30.0 29.0 28.0 27.0 26.1
33.9 32.8 31.8 30.7 29.7
37.7 36.7 35.6 34.5 33.4
41.6 40.5 39.4 38.2 37.1
45.5 44.4 43.2 42.0 40.9
7 8 9 10 12
2.78 2.60 2.44 2.28 2.02
5.63 5.29 4.98 4.69 4.18
8.59 8.13 7.69 7.28 6.56
11.7 11.1 10.6 10.1 9.16
14.9 14.2 13.6 13.0 11.9
18.2 17.5 16.8 16.1 14.9
21.6 20.8 20.1 19.3 18.0
25.1 24.3 23.4 22.7 21.2
28.7 27.8 26.9 26.1 24.5
32.3 31.4 30.4 29.5 27.8
36.0 35.0 34.0 33.1 31.3
39.8 38.7 37.7 36.7 34.8
14 16 18 20 24
1.80 1.62 1.47 1.34 1.15
3.76 3.40 3.10 2.85 2.45
5.95 5.43 4.99 4.61 3.99
8.38 11.0 7.70 10.2 7.11 9.42 6.59 8.76 5.73 7.67
13.8 12.8 11.9 11.1 9.82
16.7 15.6 14.6 13.7 12.2
19.8 18.6 17.4 16.4 14.6
23.0 21.6 20.4 19.3 17.3
26.3 24.8 23.5 22.2 20.1
29.6 28.1 26.7 25.3 23.0
33.1 31.4 29.9 28.5 26.0
28 32 36
1.00 0.88 0.79
2.15 1.91 1.72
3.51 3.13 2.81
5.06 4.52 4.08
13.2 11.9 10.9
15.6 14.2 13.0
18.2 16.6 15.3
20.9 19.2 17.7
23.8 21.8 20.2
2 3 4 5 6
3.74 3.57 3.38 3.17 2.97
7.47 7.16 6.82 6.47 6.14
11.2 10.8 10.4 9.94 9.52
15.0 14.6 14.1 13.6 13.1
18.9 18.4 17.8 17.3 16.7
22.8 22.2 21.7 21.1 20.5
26.7 26.1 25.5 24.9 24.3
30.6 30.0 29.4 28.8 28.2
34.5 33.9 33.3 32.7 32.1
38.5 37.9 37.3 36.6 36.0
42.4 41.8 41.2 40.5 39.9
46.4 45.8 45.1 44.5 43.8
7 8 9 10 12
2.78 2.60 2.44 2.28 2.02
5.82 5.52 5.24 4.98 4.51
9.11 8.73 8.37 8.03 7.41
12.6 12.1 11.7 11.3 10.6
16.2 15.7 15.2 14.8 14.0
19.9 19.4 18.9 18.4 17.5
23.7 23.2 22.6 22.1 21.1
27.6 27.0 26.4 25.8 24.8
31.5 30.8 30.2 29.7 28.5
35.3 34.7 34.1 33.5 32.3
39.3 38.6 38.0 37.4 36.2
43.2 42.5 41.9 41.3 40.1
14 16 18 20 24
1.80 1.62 1.47 1.34 1.15
4.10 3.76 3.46 3.21 2.79
6.86 6.37 5.94 5.56 4.91
9.91 9.29 8.74 8.23 7.34
13.2 12.4 11.8 11.2 10.1
16.6 15.8 15.0 14.3 13.0
20.1 19.2 18.4 17.6 16.2
23.8 22.8 21.9 21.0 19.5
27.5 26.5 25.5 24.6 22.9
31.2 30.2 29.2 28.2 26.4
35.0 33.9 32.9 31.9 30.0
38.9 37.7 36.6 35.6 33.6
28 32 36
1.00 0.88 0.79
2.47 2.21 2.00
4.38 3.95 3.58
6.61 5.99 5.46
9.13 11.9 8.33 11.0 7.65 10.1
14.9 13.8 12.8
18.1 16.8 15.7
21.4 20.0 18.7
24.7 23.2 21.9
28.2 26.6 25.1
31.8 30.1 28.5
6.80 6.11 5.53
8.76 10.9 7.89 9.83 7.16 8.95
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED BOLT GROUPS
8 - 87
Table 8-25 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Bolt Groups Angle = 75°° C req =
Pu φ rn
or φ R n = C × φrn
ex
where
3
6
s s
e
s, in.
75° P u
s
Pu = factored force, kips φ rn = design strength per bolt, kips φ R n = design strength of bolt group, kips e = eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of bolt group, in. (not tabulated, may be determined by geometry.) e x = horizontal component of e, in. s = bolt spacing, in. C = coefficient tabulated below.
4
4
4
12
Number of bolts in one vertical row, n
ex, in.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
2 3 4 5 6
3.89 3.84 3.79 3.72 3.65
7.75 7.66 7.54 7.40 7.25
11.6 11.5 11.3 11.1 10.8
15.5 15.2 15.0 14.7 14.4
19.3 19.0 18.7 18.3 17.9
23.1 22.7 22.4 21.9 21.5
26.9 26.5 26.1 25.6 25.1
30.8 30.3 29.8 29.3 28.7
34.6 34.1 33.5 32.9 32.4
38.5 37.9 37.3 36.7 36.1
42.3 41.7 41.0 40.4 39.8
46.2 45.5 44.8 44.1 43.5
7 8 9 10 12
3.56 3.47 3.37 3.27 3.07
7.08 6.90 6.71 6.52 6.14
10.6 10.3 10.0 9.77 9.23
14.1 13.7 13.4 13.1 12.4
17.6 17.2 16.8 16.4 15.6
21.1 20.6 20.2 19.8 18.9
24.6 24.1 23.7 23.2 22.3
28.2 27.7 27.2 26.7 25.7
31.8 31.3 30.7 30.2 29.1
35.5 34.9 34.3 33.7 32.6
39.1 38.5 37.9 37.3 36.2
42.8 42.2 41.6 41.0 39.8
14 16 18 20 24
2.87 2.68 2.50 2.34 2.06
5.76 5.40 5.07 4.76 4.23
8.71 8.22 7.76 7.33 6.57
11.8 11.1 10.6 10.0 9.10
14.9 14.2 13.5 12.9 11.8
18.1 17.3 16.6 15.9 14.7
21.4 20.5 19.7 19.0 17.6
24.7 23.8 23.0 22.2 20.7
28.1 27.2 26.3 25.5 23.9
31.6 30.6 29.7 28.8 27.1
35.1 34.1 33.1 32.2 30.4
38.7 37.6 36.6 35.6 33.8
28 32 36
1.82 1.63 1.48
3.78 3.41 3.11
5.94 5.41 4.95
13.5 12.6 11.7
16.4 15.3 14.3
19.3 18.1 17.0
22.4 21.0 19.8
25.5 24.1 22.8
28.7 27.2 25.8
32.0 30.4 28.9
2 3 4 5 6
3.89 3.84 3.79 3.72 3.65
7.74 7.64 7.52 7.38 7.23
11.6 11.4 11.2 11.0 10.8
15.4 15.2 14.9 14.7 14.4
19.3 19.0 18.7 18.4 18.1
23.1 22.8 22.5 22.1 21.8
27.0 26.6 26.3 25.9 25.6
30.9 30.5 30.1 29.7 29.3
35.2 34.4 34.0 33.6 33.2
39.1 38.3 37.8 37.4 37.0
43.0 42.2 41.7 41.3 40.8
47.0 46.1 45.6 45.2 44.7
7 8 9 10 12
3.56 3.47 3.37 3.27 3.07
7.07 6.90 6.73 6.56 6.21
10.6 10.4 10.1 9.92 9.48
14.2 13.9 13.6 13.4 12.9
17.8 17.5 17.2 16.9 16.4
21.5 21.2 20.8 20.5 19.9
25.2 24.9 24.5 24.2 23.6
29.0 28.6 28.3 27.9 27.3
32.8 32.4 32.0 31.7 31.0
36.6 36.2 35.8 35.5 34.7
40.4 40.0 39.6 39.3 38.5
44.3 43.9 43.5 43.1 42.3
14 16 18 20 24
2.87 2.68 2.50 2.34 2.06
5.88 5.57 5.27 4.99 4.50
9.07 8.67 8.29 7.94 7.29
12.4 11.9 11.5 11.1 10.3
15.9 15.4 14.9 14.4 13.6
19.4 18.8 18.3 17.8 16.9
23.0 22.4 21.9 21.3 20.4
26.6 26.0 25.5 24.9 23.9
30.3 29.7 29.1 28.5 27.4
34.1 33.4 32.8 32.2 31.0
37.8 37.1 36.5 35.8 34.7
41.6 40.9 40.2 39.6 38.3
28 32 36
1.82 1.63 1.48
4.08 3.73 3.43
6.73 6.25 5.82
9.67 12.8 9.06 12.1 8.51 11.4
16.1 15.3 14.5
19.4 18.6 17.8
22.9 22.0 21.1
26.4 25.4 24.5
30.0 29.0 28.0
33.6 32.5 31.5
37.2 36.1 35.1
8.30 10.9 7.61 10.0 7.01 9.26
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 88
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
ANCHOR RODS OR THREADED RODS
Cast-in-place anchor rods, illustrated in Figure 8-14, are generally made from unheaded rod material or headed bolt material. Drilled-in anchor rods, illustrated in Figure 8-15, are not normally used; their design is governed by manufacturer’s specifications. Refer also to Cannon, Godfrey, and Moreadith (1981). LRFD Specification Section A3.4 permits the use of unheaded rod material from the following ASTM specifications as anchor rods or threaded rods: A36, A193, A354, A449, A572, A588, and A687. Additionally, LRFD Specification Section A3.4 permits the use of headed bolts conforming to the provisions of LRFD Specification Section A3.3 for use as anchor rods. Headed bolts, however, are generally available only in lengths up to about eight inches. Furthermore, designations such as ASTM A325, A490, and A307 apply only to bolts manufactured with a head and it is, therefore, improper to specify unheaded anchor rods or other similar threaded devices as ASTM A325, A490, or A307. The availability and strength of the aforementioned ASTM specifications for unheaded rod material and headed bolt material are summarized in Table 8-26. Suitable nuts may be selected from ASTM A563 or ASTM A194 grade 7. Because base plates typically have holes larger than oversized holes to allow for tolerances on the location of the anchor rod, washers are usually furnished from ASTM A36 steel plate; they may be round, square, or rectangular, are generally about 1⁄2-in. thick, and generally have holes which are 1⁄16-in. larger than the anchor rod diameter. Minimum Edge Distance and Embedment Length
The recommendations of Shipp and Haninger (1983) for minimum anchor-rod (concrete) edge distance and embedment length for tensile forces, adopted from ACI 349, are summarized in Table 8-26. The edge distance requirement is intended to prevent blow-out of the side of the concrete foundation and is based on concrete with fc′ = 3,000 psi. For edge distance requirements for shear, refer to Shipp and Haninger (1983). In addition to providing the recommended minimum embedment length, anchor rods must extend a distance above the foundation that is sufficient to permit full thread engagement of the nut; from RCSC Specification Section 2(b), “…the end of the [anchor rod] will be flush with or outside the face of the nut when properly installed.”
Lh
(a) Hooked
(b) Headed
(c) Threaded with Nut
Fig. 8-14. Typical cast-in-place anchor rods. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ANCHOR RODS OR THREADED RODS
8 - 89
Note that it is seldom possible to fully tension anchor rods since the concrete usually cannot provide the necessary anchorage. Welding to Anchor Rods
Though not typical, welds must sometimes be used in lieu of nuts to attach anchor rods to base plates. The use of weldable steels such as ASTM A36 or A572 is recommended for this purpose; anchor-rod material which is quenched and tempered should not be welded. Hooked Anchor Rods
Hooked anchor rods should be used only for axially loaded columns to locate and prevent the displacement or overturning of columns due to erection loads or accidental collisions during erection. Additionally, high-strength steels are not recommended for use in hooked rods since bending with heat may materially affect their strength. For the hooked rod of Figure 8-14a, the tensile force is resisted through bond development along the length and the mechanical anchorage of the hook. However, because smooth rods do not always form a reliable bond (due to oil used in threading among other things), the design of such anchor rods should be based upon the anchorage provided by the hook only. To prevent the anchor rod from pulling out and straightening, the hook should be designed to resist one-half the design tensile strength of the anchor rod φRn, where φ = 0.75 Rn = φtFu Ag In the above equation, φt = 0.75. From Fisher (1981), the bearing strength of the concrete is: 0.7fc′dLh
Grout
Fig. 8-15. Drilled-in anchor rods. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 90
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-26. Anchor Rod Material Availability and Strength Availability
Headed Bolt Mat. (Only)
Headed Bolt or Unheaded Rod Material
Unheaded Rod Material (Only)
Type
ASTM Design.
Material Typeb
Strength
Grade
Diameter, d, in.
Proof Load
Min. Yield, ksi
Minimum Min. Embdmt. Minimum Tensile, Length, Edge Dist., in.e ksi in.
A36
C
—
to 8
—
36
58
12d
5d
A572
HSLA
42
to 2
—
42
60
12d
5d
50
to 6
—
50
65
17d
7d
—
to 4
—
50
70
17d
7d
over 4 to 5
—
46
67
17d
7d
over 5 to 8
—
42
63
17d
7d
to 3
—
105
150c
19d
7d
to 21 ⁄2
120
130
150
19d
7d
105
115
140
19d
7d
105
109
125
17d
7d
95
99
115
17d
7d
85
92
120
17d
7d
11 ⁄8 to 11 ⁄2
74
81
105
17d
7d
13 ⁄4 to 3
55
58
90
17d
7d
to 4
—
—
60
12d
5d
85
92
120
17d
7d
74
81
105
17d
7d
120
—
150
19d
7d
A588
HSLA, ACR
A687
A, QT, NT
—
A354
A, QT
BD
5⁄ 1⁄
4
8
over 21 ⁄2 to 4 BC
1⁄
4
to 21 ⁄2
over 21 ⁄2 to 4 A449d
C, QT
—
A307
C
—
A325a,d
C, QT
—
1⁄
1⁄
4
2
to 1
to 1
11 ⁄8 to 11 ⁄2 A490a,d
A, QT
—
1⁄
2
to 11 ⁄2
aAvailable with weathering (atmospheric corrosion resistance) characteristics comparable to ASTM A242 and
A588 steels. bA = Alloy Steel bACR = Atmospheric-Corrosion-Resistant Steel bC = Carbon Steel bHSLA = High-Strength Low-Alloy Steel bNT = Notch-Tough Steel (CVN 15 @ −20°°F) bQT = Quenched and Tempered Steel cMaximum (ultimate tensile strength) dThreaded rod material with properties meeting ASTM A325, A490, and A449 specifications may be obtained
with the use of an appropriate steel (such as ASTM A193, grade B7), quenched and tempered after fabrication. eNot less than 4 in.
Thus, the minimum hook length Lh min is: φRn 2 Lh min = 0.7fc′d where fc′ is the specified strength of the concrete, ksi. The total embedded anchor rod length is then the hook length Lh plus the minimum embedment length from Table 8-26. Headed Anchor Rods
When anchor rods are required for a calculated tensile force Tu, a more positive anchorage is formed when headed anchor rods, illustrated in Figure 8-14b, are used. With adequate embedment and edge distance, the limit state is either a tensile failure of the anchor rod or the pull-out of a cone of concrete radiating outward from the head (Marsh and Burdette, 1985a) as illustrated in Figure 8-16. The design tensile strength of the anchor rod is φRn, AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ANCHOR RODS OR THREADED RODS
8 - 91
where φ = 0.75 Rn = φtFu Ag In the above equation, φt = 0.75. Using the projected surface area of the concrete cone and a limiting average stress on this area of 4√ fc′ , the minimum anchor rod length Lmin is Lmin =
√
Acp 3.14
where Acp =
Tu φt√ fc′
fc′ = specified strength of the concrete, psi
Tu
45° L
Failure Plane
Projected Surface
Fig. 8-16. Concrete cone subject to pull-out. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 92
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-27. Dimensions and Weights of Clevises
D
p
w
b
a
n
t Grip Grip = plate thickness + ¼ in.
t
Thread: UNC Class 2B
Dimensions, in. Clevis Number
Max. D
2
5⁄
2 1 ⁄2
3
3 1 ⁄2
4 5 6 7 8
7⁄
8
8 13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2 13 ⁄4
2 21 ⁄2 3 4
Max. p 3⁄
4
11 ⁄2 13 ⁄4 2 21 ⁄4 21 ⁄2 3 33 ⁄4 4
b
n
17 ⁄16 5⁄8 21 ⁄2 11⁄8 3 15 ⁄16 31 ⁄2 15⁄8 4 13⁄4 21⁄4 5 6 23⁄4 3 7 4 8
a
w
37 ⁄8 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 10
11 ⁄16 11 ⁄4 11 ⁄2 13 ⁄4 2 21 ⁄2 3 31 ⁄2 4
t
Weight, pounds
Design Strength φR n*, kips
(+ 1 ⁄32, −0) 1 16 (+ ⁄32, −0) 1 ⁄ (+ 1 ⁄ 2 32, −0) 1 ⁄ (+ 1 ⁄ 2 32, −0) 1 ⁄ (+ 1 ⁄ 2 32, −0) 5 ⁄ (+ 1 ⁄ 8 16, −0) 3 ⁄ (+ 3 ⁄ 4 32, −0) 7 ⁄ (+ 1 ⁄ −0) 8 8, 1 1 1 ⁄2 (+ ⁄8, −0)
1 2 4 6 8 16 26 36 80
5.25 11.3 22.5 27.0 31.5 56.4 81.0 103 203
5⁄ 5⁄
16
Notes: Weights and dimensions of clevises are typical; products of all suppliers are essentially similar. User shall verify with the manufacturer that product meets design-strength specifications above. *Tabulated design strengths for comparison with factored loads are based on φ=0.3. To determine safe working load (kips) for comparison with service loads, divide tabular design strength by 1.5. Safe working load, then, corresponds to a 5:1 factor of safety using maximum pin diameter.
Tu = tensile force in the anchor rod, kips When the concrete cone intersects an edge of the pedestal or the cone from another anchor rod, the effective area of concrete is reduced; refer to the AISC Design Guide Column Base Plates (DeWolf and Ricker, 1990) and Marsh and Burdette (1985). Marsh and Burdette (1985) showed that the head of the anchor rod usually provides sufficient anchorage and the use of an additional washer or plate does not add significantly to the anchorage. The nut and threading shown in Figure 8-14c is acceptable in lieu of a bolt head. The nut should be welded to the rod to prevent the rod from turning out when the top nut is tightened. For the design of anchor rods for shear or a combination of tension and shear, see AISC Design Guide Column Base Plates (DeWolf and Ricker, 1990), Fisher (1981), Shipp and Haninger (1983), and ACI 349. OTHER MECHANICAL FASTENERS Clevises
Dimensions, weights, and design strengths of clevises are listed in Table 8-27. Compatability of clevises with various rods and pins is given in Table 8-28. Turnbuckles
Dimensions, weights, and design strengths of turnbuckles are listed in Table 8-29. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OTHER MECHANICAL FASTENERS
8 - 93
Table 8-28. Clevis Numbers Compatible with Various Rods and Pins Diameter of Pin, in.
Dia. of Tap, in.
5⁄ 8
5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
2 — —
2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 — 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2 21⁄2
1 11⁄4 13⁄8
— — —
— — —
— — —
11⁄2 13⁄4
— —
— —
— —
31⁄2 31⁄2 31⁄2 — 4 4
4 5
4 5
5 5
5
2 21⁄4
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
5 —
5 —
5 6
5 6
5 6
6 6
6 6
7
7
21⁄2 23⁄4
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
6 —
6 —
6 7
7 7
7 7
7 7
7 8
7 8
3 31⁄4
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
7 —
8 8
8 8
8 8
8 8
8 8
8 8
31⁄2 33⁄4
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
— —
8 8
8 8
8 8
8 8
8 8
8 8
4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
8
8
8
8
8
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3 3 3
11⁄4 11⁄2 13⁄4
3 3 3
3 3 3
2
3 3 31⁄2 31⁄2 31⁄2
21⁄4 21⁄2 23⁄4
3
31⁄4 31⁄2 33⁄4
4
4
Notes: Tabular values assume that the net area of the clevis through the pin hole is greater than or equal to 125 percent of the net area of the rod, and is applicable to round rods without upset ends. For other net area ratios, the required clevis size may be calculated by reference to the dimensions tabulated in Tables 8-7 and 8-27.
Sleeve Nuts
Dimensions and weights of sleeve nuts are listed in Table 8-30. Recessed-Pin Nuts
Dimensions and weights of recessed-pin nuts are listed in Table 8-31. Cotter Pins
Dimensions and weights of cotter pins are listed in Table 8-32.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 94
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-29. Dimensions and Weights of Turnbuckles c a
n
n
g
e
D
Threads: UNC and 4UN Class 2B
Weight (pounds) for Length a, in.
Dimensions, in. Diameter D, in.
a
3⁄ 8
6
9⁄
1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
6 6 6 6
3⁄
32 11⁄16 7 1 ⁄32
1 1 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8
1
6 6 6 6
13 ⁄8 19⁄16 13 ⁄4 115 ⁄16
1 1 ⁄2 1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
6 6 6 6
2 1 ⁄4
2
n 16
29 ⁄
4
c
g
6
11 ⁄32
0.41
71 ⁄2 11⁄16 15 ⁄16 713 ⁄16 13 ⁄16 11 ⁄2 81 ⁄8 15 ⁄16 123 ⁄32 87 ⁄16 13 ⁄32 17 ⁄8
0.75 1.00 1.45 1.85
71 ⁄8
83 ⁄4 91 ⁄8 91 ⁄2 97 ⁄8
e 9⁄
16
9
12
18
24
26
Design Strength, φR n *, kips 1.80
0.80 1.38 1.63
1.00 1.50 2.13 2.83
2.43 3.06 4.20
3.30 5.25 7.80 10.8
4.25 5.43
19 ⁄32 21 ⁄32 113 ⁄32 29 ⁄32 19 ⁄16 217 ⁄32 111⁄16 23 ⁄4
2.60 2.72 3.58 4.50
3.20 4.70 4.70
4.40 6.10 7.13
6.85
10.0
11.3
13.1
21 ⁄8 21 ⁄4 21 ⁄2 23 ⁄4
101 ⁄4 127 ⁄32 31 ⁄32 101 ⁄2 131 ⁄32 39 ⁄32 11 21 ⁄8 39 ⁄16 111 ⁄2 23 ⁄8 4
5.50 7.50 9.50 11.5
8.00
9.13
16.8
19.4
15.3
16.0
19.5
6 6
23 ⁄4 33 ⁄8
111 ⁄2 23 ⁄8 123 ⁄4 211⁄16
4 45 ⁄8
11.5 18.0
15.3 35.3
27.5 43.5
55.8 72.0
2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
6 6
33 ⁄4 41 ⁄8
131 ⁄2 141 ⁄4
3 31 ⁄4
5 55 ⁄8
23.3 31.5
33.6
42.4 54.0
90.0 113
3 1 ⁄4
3
6 6
41 ⁄2 51 ⁄4
15 161 ⁄2
35 ⁄8 37 ⁄8
61 ⁄8 63 ⁄4
39.5 60.5
145 183
3 1 ⁄2 3 3 ⁄4
6 6
51 ⁄4 6
161 ⁄2 18
37 ⁄8 45 ⁄8
63 ⁄4 81 ⁄2
60.5 95.0
183 252
4 1 ⁄4
4
6 9
6 63 ⁄4
18 221 ⁄2
45 ⁄8 51 ⁄4
81 ⁄2 93 ⁄4
95.0
4 1 ⁄2 4 3 ⁄4
9 9
63 ⁄4 63 ⁄4
221 ⁄2 221 ⁄2
51 ⁄4 51 ⁄4
5
9
71 ⁄2
24
6
14.0 17.4 22.8 26.1 31.5 36.8 42.5 55.8
152
252 351
93 ⁄4 93 ⁄4
152 152
351 351
10
200
442
Notes: Weights and dimensions of turnbuckles are typical; products of all suppliers are essentially similar. User shall verify with the manufacturer that product meets design strength specifications above. *Tabulated design strengths for comparison with factored loads are based on φ = 0.3. To determine safe working load (kips) for comparison with service loads, divide tabular design strength by 1.5. Safe working load, then, corresponds to a 5:1 factor of safety using maximum pin diameter.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OTHER MECHANICAL FASTENERS
8 - 95
Table 8-30. Dimensions and Weights of Sleeve Nuts l
4
½
D
n
Long Dia.
½
Short Dia.
n
c
Inspection hole (optional)
Thread: UNC and 4 UN Class 2B Screw Dia. D, in. 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 3⁄ 4 7⁄ 8
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2 15⁄8 13⁄4 17⁄8 2 21⁄4 21⁄2 23⁄4 3 31⁄4 31⁄2 33⁄4 4 41⁄4 41⁄2 43⁄4 5 51⁄4 51⁄2 53⁄4 6
Dimensions, in. Short Dia.
Long Dia.
Length l
Nut n
Clear c
Weight, pounds
11⁄ 16 25⁄ 32 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16 11⁄16 11⁄4 17⁄16 15⁄8 113⁄16
25⁄ 32 7⁄ 8
4 4 4 5 5 5 7 7 71⁄2 71⁄2 8 8 81⁄2 81⁄2 9 9 91⁄2 10 101⁄2 11 111⁄2 12 121⁄2 13 131⁄2 14 141⁄2 15 151⁄2 16 161⁄2 17
— — — — — — 17⁄16 17⁄16 15⁄8 15⁄8 17⁄8 17⁄8 21⁄16 21⁄16 25⁄16 25⁄16 21⁄2 23⁄4 215⁄16 33⁄16 33⁄8 35⁄8 313⁄16 41⁄16 43⁄4 5 51⁄4 51⁄2 53⁄4 6 61⁄4 61⁄2
— — — — — — 1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2 15⁄8 13⁄4 17⁄8 2 21⁄8 23⁄8 25⁄8 27⁄8 31⁄8 33⁄8 35⁄8 37⁄8 41⁄8 43⁄8 43⁄4 5 51⁄4 51⁄2 53⁄4 6 61⁄4
0.27 0.34 0.43 0.64 0.93 1.12 1.75 2.46 3.10 4.04 4.97 6.16 7.36 8.87 10.4 12.2 16.2 21.1 26.7 33.2 40.6 49.1 58.6 69.2 75.0 90.0 98.0 110 122 142 157 176
2 23⁄16 23⁄8 29⁄16 23⁄4 215⁄16 31⁄8 31⁄2 37⁄8 41⁄4 45⁄8 5 53⁄8 53⁄4 61⁄8 61⁄2 67⁄8 71⁄4 75⁄8 8 83⁄8 83⁄4 91⁄8
1 11⁄16 17⁄32 17⁄16 15⁄8 113⁄16 21⁄16 21⁄4 21⁄2 211⁄16 215⁄16 31⁄8 35⁄16 31⁄2 315⁄16 43⁄8 413⁄16 51⁄4 55⁄8 6 63⁄8 67⁄8 71⁄2 715⁄16 83⁄8 87⁄8 91⁄4 93⁄4 101⁄8 105⁄8
Notes: Weights and dimensions of sleeve nuts are typical; products of all suppliers are essentially similar. User shall verify with the manufacturer that strengths of sleeve nut are greater than the corresponding connecting rod when the same material is used.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 96
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-31. Dimensions and Weights of Recessed-Pin Nuts
Short Dia.
Long Dia.
Tc
Grip
d
D s t
Material: Steel
Thread: 6 UN Class 2A/2B
Pin Dimensions, in. Thread
Pin Dia. d, in.
D
T
2, 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 , 2 3 ⁄4 3, 3 1 ⁄4 , 3 1 ⁄2 3 3 ⁄4 , 4 4 1 ⁄4 , 4 1 ⁄2 , 4 3 ⁄4 5, 5 1 ⁄4 5 1 ⁄2 , 5 3 ⁄4 , 6 6 1 ⁄4 , 6 1 ⁄2 6 3 ⁄4 , 7 7 1 ⁄4 , 7 1 ⁄2 7 3 ⁄4 , 8, 81 ⁄4 8 1 ⁄2 , 8 3 ⁄4 , 9 9 1 ⁄4 , 9 1 ⁄2 9 3 ⁄4 , 10
11 ⁄2 2 21 ⁄2 3 31 ⁄2 4 41 ⁄2 5 51 ⁄2 51 ⁄2 6 6 6 6
1 11 ⁄8 11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2 15 ⁄8 13 ⁄4 17 ⁄8 2 2 21 ⁄4 21 ⁄4 23 ⁄8 23 ⁄8
c
Grip
½
d+1
d Bolt ¾
1⁄ 1⁄ 1⁄ 1⁄ 1⁄ 1⁄ 1⁄ 3⁄
3⁄ 3⁄ 3⁄ 3⁄ 3⁄ 3⁄
8 8 8 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Nut Dimensions, in. Thickness t 7⁄
8
1 11 ⁄8 11 ⁄4 13 ⁄8 11 ⁄2 15 ⁄8 13 ⁄4 17 ⁄8 17 ⁄8 21 ⁄8 21 ⁄8 21 ⁄4 21 ⁄4
Diameter Short Dia. 3 35 ⁄8 43 ⁄8 47 ⁄8 53 ⁄4 61 ⁄4 7 75 ⁄8 81 ⁄8 85 ⁄8 93 ⁄8 101 ⁄4 111 ⁄4 111 ⁄4
Recess
Long Dia. Rough Dia. 33 ⁄8 41 ⁄8 5 55 ⁄8 65 ⁄8 71 ⁄4 81 ⁄8 87 ⁄8 93 ⁄8 10 107 ⁄8 117 ⁄8 13 13
25 ⁄ 8 31 ⁄ 8 37 ⁄ 8 43 ⁄ 8 51 ⁄ 4 53 ⁄ 4 61 ⁄ 2 7 71 ⁄ 2 8 83 ⁄ 4 95 ⁄ 8 105⁄8 105⁄8
s 1⁄ 1⁄ 3⁄ 3⁄ 1⁄ 1⁄ 5⁄
5⁄ 3⁄
3⁄ 3⁄ 3⁄ 3⁄ 3⁄
4 4 8 8 2 2 8 8 4 4 4 4 4 4
Weight, pounds 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 19 24 32 32
Notes: Although nuts may be used on all sizes of pins as shown above, a detail similar to that shown at the left is preferrable for pin diameters over 10 inches. In this detail, the pin is held in place by a recessed cap at each end and secured by a bolt passing completely through the caps and pin. Suitable provisions must be made for attaching pilots and driving nuts.
¾
Typical Pin Cap Detail for Pins over 10 in. in dia. Dimensions shown are approximate
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OTHER MECHANICAL FASTENERS
8 - 97
Table 8-32. Dimensions and Weights of Cotter Pins HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL PIN 3/8
HORIZONTAL PIN 1″
1
GRIP + ½
p
d
h
GRIP + 1 ″
1″
d
c
l l = Length of pin, in.
Pins with Heads Head Diameter h, Pin Diameter d, in. in.
11⁄4 11⁄2 13⁄4 2 21⁄4 21⁄2 23⁄4 3 31⁄4 31⁄2 33⁄4
11⁄2 13⁄4 2 23⁄8 25⁄8 27⁄8 31⁄8 31⁄2 33⁄4 4 41⁄4
Weight of One, pounds
0.19 + 0.35l 0.26 + 0.50l 0.33 + 0.68l 0.47 + 0.89l 0.58 + 1.13l 0.70 + 1.39l 0.82 + 1.68l 1.02 + 2.00l 1.17 + 2.35l 1.34 + 2.73l 1.51 + 3.13l
Cotter Length c, in.
Diameter p, in.
Weight per 100, pounds
7⁄
1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 3⁄ 8 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2 1⁄ 2
2.64 3.10 3.50 9.00 9.40 10.9 11.4 28.5 28.5 33.8 33.8
8
1 11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2 15⁄8 13⁄4 17⁄8 17⁄8 21⁄4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 98
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
While AWS D1.1 is the traditional design specification for weld stresses in both buildings and bridges, AASHTO/AWS D1.5 also exists for dynamically loaded structures. There are significant differences between the two codes and, in the case of building structures, AWS D1.1 is normally used unless contract documents state otherwise. Welds in building structures are predominantly designed for static loading. Some parts, however, such as crane runways and machinery supports, are subjected to dynamic loading. When this is the case, additional requirements and special joint details may be necessary. This may include reinforcing fillet welds at tee and corner joints, radius cuts on terminations of gusset type connections, radiographic or ultrasonic testing for quality control, or joint details in accordance with LRFD Specification Appendix K3. The contract documents should specifically enumerate these additional requirements when they are determined to be necessary. Weldability of Steel
AWS has defined weldability as the capacity of a metal to be welded, under the fabrication conditions imposed, into a specific, suitably designed structure, and to perform satisfactorily in the intended service. AWS D1.1 is based on certain weldable grades of steel as listed therein by ASTM designation. It contains all of the steels permitted by LRFD Specification Section A3.1a. The effect a steel’s properties have upon its weldability relates to the reaction of the steel to the drastic heating and cooling cycle of welding. This weld quench can range from the practically instantaneous cooling of an accidental arc strike to the 10 minutes required to cool a high-heat-input electroslag weld. Due to the rapid cooling of the arc strike, the full-quench hardness for the carbon equivalent of the steel may be realized, resulting in brittleness and the potential for cracking. In contrast, the slower cooling rate of the electroslag weld may produce a more ductile and lower-strength metallurgical structure in the heat-affected zone (HAZ) of the base metal. As they cool, welds develop residual shrinkage strains that can approach the yield strain as a limit; ductility and notch resistance are needed to accommodate these strains. Since chemical composition, grain size, and thickness affect ductility and notch resistance, they are the most important properties for weldability. These factors, discussed below, assume greater significance as the structure becomes large and must store greater elastic energy. Table 8-33 summarizes several ASTM specifications and their requirements for the aforementioned properties. Note that there is a greater flexibility in grain size and carbon equivalents in these specifications for shapes, plates, and bars. Also, maximum tensile strength requirements are listed to exclude steels from the upper end of the chemical composition range which might require special welding procedures or weld repairs. In contrast, the requirements for structural tubing, pipe, sheet, and strip do not limit grain size or maximum tensile strength, but generally impose smaller limits on thickness. Chemical analysis of a heat of steel is usually made during the processing as a control and upon completion after it has been tapped into a ladle. This heat analysis is used to compile a mill test report which also lists the customer’s order number, steel grade, quantity and dimension of pieces shipped, and the results of any mechanical testing (tensile, flexural, Charpy impact, or other). This information may be obtained by request from the steel supplier when placing an order and is essential for good control of welded fabrication. It is imperative that the grade of steel to be welded is known since the proper welding procedure depends upon this information. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 99
Table 8-33. ASTM Requirements for Properties Affecting Weldability of Steels Max. Carbon content, % by weight (heat analysis)
Max. tensile strength, ksi
Grain Size
Max. thickness, in.
80
—*
none
ASTM Specification
Products Covered
A36
shapes
0.26
plates
0.25–0.29
A242 A514
bars
0.26–0.29
shapes, plates, bars
type 1, 0.15
plates—quenched varies among 13 and tempered grades, 0.14–0.21
none
—
4
130
fully killed, fine grain
6 1⁄
A529
shapes, plates, bars
0.27
85
—
A572
shapes, plates, bars, sheet piling
varies among grades, 0.21–0.26
none
—*
Gr. 42: 6 Gr. 50: 4 Gr. 60, 65: 11 ⁄4
A588
shapes, plates, bars
varies among 5 grades, 0.15–0.20
none
fine grain
F y = 50: 4 F y = 42: 8
2
A852
plates
0.19
110
fine grain
4
A53 Grade B
tubing, pipe
0.30
none
—
2.344, 24 dia.
A500
tubing, pipe
Gr. A, B: 0.26 Gr. C: 0.23
none
—
A501
tubing, pipe
0.26
none
—
1
A618
tubing, pipe
Gr. Ia: 0.15 Gr. Ib: 0.20 Gr. II: 0.22 Gr. III: 0.23
none
—
11 ⁄2
A570, Gr. 36, 50
sheet, strip
0.25
none
—
0.23
A606
sheet, strip
0.22
none
—
none
A607
sheet, strip
0.22–0.26
none
—
none
1⁄
2
*Supplemental requirements can specify killed fine grain.
Chemical Composition
The most important element affecting weldability is carbon, however, the effect of other elements on weldability is related through a carbon equivalent formula. Weldability is enhanced as carbon equivalent decreases because the maximum hardness and consequent brittleness that a steel may reach after rapid liquid quenching from high temperature is directly proportional to the carbon equivalent. This relationship is illustrated in Figure 8-17 and is applicable to the surface in contact with the quench liquid where the quench rate is greatest. Although no liquid is present in welding, the HAZ is subject to rapid cooling and consequent hardening by conduction of weld heat into the base metal. As the thickness of the section increases, so does the cooling rate, producing progressively harder and less ductile metallurgical constituents. Alloys such as Ni, Cr, and Mo in the steel permit hardening at slower cooling rates and at depths below the surface where the cooling rate is slower; pre-heat is the common remedy for reducing the cooling rate and hardness. As the carbon content increases from 0.10 percent to 0.20 percent by weight, the maximum as-quenched hardness increases from 40 to 50 Rockwell C. Using the known hardness-strength relationship, it can be shown that the maximum as-quenched tensile AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 100
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
strength increases from 180 to 260 ksi. Welding procedures are designed to keep weld quench rates far below these maximum rates. Also, electrodes are usually designed to deposit weld metal containing about 0.008 to 0.12 percent carbon to avoid cracking. Grain Size
In general, weldability will be enhanced by steel with a finer grain size. As illustrated in Figure 8-18, grain size is a prime variable affecting the ductility and impact resistance for a wide variety of steel compositions. The grain size of weld metal also varies and has a similar effect. Because they experience a slower cooling rate, high-heat-input welds show a larger grain size than the same process and electrode at a lower heat input. This is one reason the AWS D1.1 limits multi-pass SAW groove weld layers to a maximum size of 1⁄4-in. Also, a subsequent pass will refine the grain of a previous pass. Thickness
In general, as the thickness to be welded decreases, the weldability of the material is enhanced. Because of their greater mass, thick plates extract heat from and quench the weld more rapidly than thin plates with the identical weld. As a partial remedy, the plates may be pre-heated and held at temperatures of a few hundred degrees Fahrenheit for the welding operation. This pre-heat appreciably slows the quench rate and reduces weld hardness, as does post-heating. As plate thickness increases, the notch impact resistance decreases as shown in Figure 8-19. This test was conducted on American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) class C ship plate in 3⁄4-in., 1-in., 2-in., and 3-in. thicknesses using a severe crack-like notch in the ASTM A208 drop-weight test. The use of fine-grain steelmaking practice as specified by ASTM can improve notch toughness where required by the service of a particular structure.
60 255
50
Maximum hardness for carbon and alloy steels
40
180 140
30 20
Equivalent tensile strength, ksi
Maximum hardness, Rockwell, C
70
10
0
0.20
0.40
0.60
0.80
1.0
Carbon, per cent
Fig. 8-17. Influence of carbon content on the maximum hardness of steel as quenched (Stout and Doty, 1978), courtesy Welding Research Council. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 101
Structural Welding Materials and Processes
Filler metal and flux specifications are exclusively AWS specifications, having been removed from ASTM specifications. Additionally, AWS uses a coding system for consumable electrodes to designate the tensile strength and coating or flux combination. Since the coding for the several filler/flux combinations are consistent only with respect to the types of electrode used, it is very important that the applicable specifications be reviewed when specifying such welding requirements. The welding processes discussed in this text are: shielded metal arc welding (SMAW), submerged arc welding (SAW), gas-metal arc welding (GMAW), flux-cored arc welding (FCAW), electroslag welding (ESW) and electrogas welding (EGW). Except for electroslag welding, each of these processes use electrical energy from an arc discharge between a steel-wire electrode and the base metal to provide heat for fusion. Electroslag welding uses a high-electrical-resistance molten-slag bath which occupies the entire joint. This slag melts both the electrode and the base metal.
40
CVN Transition Temperature, °F
0
– 40
– 80
c c c
–120
–160
— Plain Carbon c — Nickel — Manganese — Molybdenum — Chromium
c
–200
(After Kottcamp and Stout) 9
8
7
6
5
4
ASTM Ferrite-grain Size Number
Fig. 8-18. Effect of ferrite-grain size on CVN transitional temperature (Stout and Doty, 1978), courtesy Welding Research Council. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
3
8 - 102
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Each of the aforementioned processes will be summarized here; a full description may be found in AWS (1978). Additionally, thermal cutting and air arc gouging will be discussed. SMAW
There are two AWS Specifications for SMAW electrodes: AWS A5.1 and AWS A5.5. A condensation of the provisions of these specifications is given in Table 8-34. AWS notation for SMAW electrodes is illustrated in Figure 8-20. This has also been extended to other processes. The welding positions noted in Figure 8-20 (flat, horizontal, vertical, and overhead) are illustrated in Figure 8-21. SMAW (stick) electrodes are made in a variety of low-carbon compositions. The extruded coatings contain aluminum, silicon, and other deoxidizers; the deposited weld is a mini-electric-furnace-killed steel with excellent ductility and resistance to cracking from weld shrinkage strains. In the arc stream, moisture breaks down and liberates atomic hydrogen which is readily soluble in molten iron (Stout and Doty, 1978); see Figure 8-22. As the weld solidifies,
70
Increase in NDT Transition Temperature, °F
60
50
40
30
20
ABS-C, Drop-Weight NDT
10
0 0
1
2 Plate Thickness, in.
3
Fig. 8-19. Effect of plate thickness on the drop-weight NDT ductility transition temperature (Stout and Doty, 1978), courtesy Welding Research Council. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 103
Table 8-34. Condensed AWS Specifications for SMAW Electrodes Electrode
Type
AWS Spec.
Carbon Steel
A5.1
Low Alloy
A5.5
Impact Test Criteria Criteria for Min. Criteria for Tensile Composition Strength, of Deposited Charpy V- Weld Metal Radiographic Grades Weld Metal Notch Test Condition Soundness ksi 60
62
70
72
70 80 90 100 110 120
70 80 90 100 110 120
Not stipulated Required for As-welded some grades Stipulated only Stipulated (all grades)
Required for Some assome grades welded, only some stressrelieved
Stipulated for all but E6012, E6022 Stipulated for all grades
Note: A particular production welding condition may be more severe than the test conditions specified for the above.
hydrogen becomes much less soluble and the atoms are rejected into voids where pairs combine to form a much less mobile molecular H2. This molecular hydrogen can then exert pressure in lattice imperfections which is sufficient, when combined with weld shrinkage strains, to cause “fisheyes” or cracking in the weld material. This can be prevented by maintaining the moisture content of consumable electrodes below specified levels and through proper pre-heat. E7015, E7016, E7018, and E7028 low-hydrogen electrodes have specially compounded and baked extruded coatings containing a limited moisture (hydrogen) content by weight. Coatings for the E70 electrode series can contain a maximum of 0.04 percent moisture, while the E120 electrode series is limited to only 0.015 percent. As the tensile strength of the base metal increases, electrodes with lower moisture content must be selected to avoid weld cracking. Since the electrode coating will absorb moisture when stored in damp or humid conditions, drying ovens near points of use in the shop are necessary for low-hydrogen electrodes.
6
—
A1 Weld metal composition
1
Coating characteristics**
70 70,000 psi min. tensile
Electrode
E
Position code*
ELECTRODE PROPERTIES
**1 = All flat, vertical, overhead, and horizontal **2 = Flat and horizontal only **5, 6, 8 = Low hydrogen
Fig. 8-20. AWS classification system for SMAW electrodes. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 104
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Fillet Welds
Groove Welds
(a) Flat
(b) Horizontal
(c) Vertical
(d) Overhead Fig. 8-21. Welding positions. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 105
The electrodes to be used with various base metals are shown in AWS D1.1 Table 4.1. Low-hydrogen electrodes are used with ASTM A572 and A588 steels among others. Filler metal matching the color of ASTM A588 steel is listed in AWS D1.1 Table 4.2. SAW
The automatic and semi-automatic SAW processes provide consistent, high quality, and economical deposits which are particularly suitable for long welds. Their major limitation is that the work must be positioned to allow for near flat or horizontal welding. In the SAW process, fluxes may be fused or agglomerated (finely powdered constituents bonded together with silicates), but are classified in AWS specifications only according to the weld metal properties produced in the standard specified weld tests. The applicable specifications are: AWS A5.17 and AWS A5.23. AWS notation for SAW electrodes and fluxes is illustrated in Figure 8-23. Fluxes must be kept dry in storage to avoid an increase in moisture content and subsequent chance of hydrogen cracking in steels with higher yield strengths or highly restrained joints in thick members.
Hydrogen, cm.3 per 100 g. of iron 5
10
15
20
25
30
2100
2500 Austenite
Delta Iron
1 atmos.
1100
1500
600 Ferrite
Temperature, °C.
1600
500
100 0
0.00075
0.0015 Hydrogen, percent
0.00225
Fig. 8-22. Solubility of hydrogen in iron (Stout and Doty, 1978), courtesy Welding Research Council. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
0.003
Temperature, °F.
Liquid
3500
8 - 106
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
GMAW
The GMAW process can be used with mixtures of argon and two percent oxygen, argon and carbon dioxide, or pure carbon dioxide. While argon is inert, carbon dioxide can react with the weld metal and result in a reduction in ductility and impact properties at low temperatures. Despite this, 70 ksi electrodes have commonly been used with carbon dioxide gas with good results; a CVN 20 (20 ft-lb Charpy V-notch impact value) at −20°F is specified in the AWS tests. Alloy electrodes producing up to 120 ksi minimum tensile strength with CVN 20 at −60°F, and three percent nickel electrodes producing 80 ksi minimum tensile strength with CVN 20 at −100°F are available. There are two AWS Specifications for GMAW electrodes: A5.18 and A5.28. Identification of these electrodes is illustrated in Figure 8-24. FCAW
FCAW electrodes are made by forming a thin sheet strip into a U-shape and filling it with flux. After closing the tube, it is drawn to size as a continuous coil. AWS classifies these
M
12
K
Silicon killed
Medium Mn (1.00% ± )
E
Nominal carbon (0.12%)
6
Electrode
A
ELECTRODE PROPERTIES
CVN 20 @ − 60° F
7
Tested as welded
Flux
F
70,000 psi min. tensile
FLUX CAPABILITY
Fig. 8-23. AWS classification system for SAW materials.
ELECTRODE PROPERTIES B2
L Low carbon (0.05% max.)
—
Cr (11/ 4 %); Mo (1/ 2 %)
S
Solid electrode
80 80,000 psi min. tensile
R
Rod*
Electrode
E
*Can be used as feed rod with independent heat source (e.g., tungsten arc)
Fig. 8-24. AWS classification system for GMAW electrodes. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 107
electrodes according to: (1) whether or not carbon dioxide is used as a separate shielding gas; (2) suitability for either single or multiple pass applications; (3) the type of current; (4) the welding position; and, (5) the as-welded mechanical properties of the weld metal. High weld-production rates may be attained with semi-automatic equipment which may be used in any position with the appropriate electrode. Where required by service conditions, flux-cored electrode grades can provide weld metal with CVN 20 impact values at temperatures in steps from 20°F to −100°F. Some of the deposits of the carbon steel electrodes will develop CVN 20 at −20°F, while the low alloy electrodes will develop CVN 20 at −100°F. The applicable specifications are AWS A5.20 and AWS 5.29 (symbols are similar to AWS 5.20 with the addition of an alloy composition at the extreme right). The AWS classification system is illustrated in Figure 8-25. ESW and EGW
With the ESW and EGW processes, 18-in. and greater thicknesses may be welded in one pass, using multiple electrodes, with the joint in a vertical plane. A single-electrode, semi-portable welding machine can join plates up to five inches thick. Furthermore, using either of these processes, it is possible to make girder flanges by welding mill-width plates and subsequently longitudinally cutting out three or more flange widths. Note that AWS prohibits the use of these welding processes on quenched and tempered steels. The composition of cored electrodes is based on weld-metal analysis, and the composition of solid electrodes is based on wire analysis. The coarse grains in the slow-cooled electroslag weld may make it difficult to test ultrasonically and the minimum size flaw detectable by RT is about 11⁄2 percent of the thickness. This creates difficulty in the inspection of electroslag welding. AWS A5.25 requires electrodes which contain nickel to provide CVN 15 impact values at either 0°F or −20°F. This specification is patterned after AWS A5.17 and A5.18 insofar as the electrodes are concerned; refer to Figure 8-26.
1
—
2 Usability code**
T
Position code*
70 70,000 psi min. tensile
Electrode
E
Tubular (flux cored)
ELECTRODE PROPERTIES
**2 = Flat and horizontal only **1 = All position **2 = Single pass CO2 shielded only
Fig. 8-25. AWS classification system for FCAW electrodes. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 108
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Thermal Cutting and Air-Arc Gouging
Thermally cut welding bevels are required to be smooth and free of notches or grooves in which weld slag may be trapped. Two cutting systems, oxy-fuel gas and plasma arc, are available. Oxy-fuel gas cutting may be used to cut almost any plate thickness commercially available except in stainless steel which must be plasma cut. Plasma arc cutting will cut thicknesses only up to about 11⁄2-in., but is much faster than oxy-fuel gas cutting. This speed advantage increases as the plate thickness decreases; at a thickness of one inch, the cutting speed is over 300 percent faster with a water-injection plasma torch. The plasma arc cutting process, however, also leaves a slight taper in the cut as it descends. If the plate being cut contains large discontinuities or non-metallic inclusions, turbulence may be created in the oxy-fuel cutting stream. As result, this may cause notches or gouges in the edge of the cut. The plasma arc stream is less susceptible to this as it moves with a higher velocity. Within the depth limits of the specifications, it is usually better practice to remove these by grinding than to weld repair and grind. Additionally, re-entrant thermal cuts should provide a smooth transition. Carbon-air-arc gouging is a convenient method for removing weld defects, gouging the weld root to sound metal, or forming a U-groove on one side of a square butt joint. The carbon arc travels over the work and melts a weld-nugget-shaped area of the metal. This molten material is then blown away by a jet of compressed air, directed from the holder, parallel to the carbon electrode. Thus, air-arc gouging may be considered the opposite of welding in that each pass removes approximately one weld pass. Because the arc quench is similar in both air-arc gouging and welding, any pre-heat required for welding should also be used for air-arc gouging. Inspection
The five most commonly used testing methods for welding inspection are: visual (VT), dye penetrant (DPT), magnetic particle (MT), radiographic (RT), and ultrasonic (UT). These methods are discussed in the following sections; refer also to AWS B1.0. Visual inspection is the most commonly specified procedure. Other, more stringent methods can
Electrode
W
Fig. 8-26. AWS classification system for ESW materials. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
T
1
CNV 15 @ 20°F
E
70,000 psi min. tensile
2
Weld metal tested as deposited
7
CNV 15 @ 20°F
ES
Electroslag flux
Flux
F
ELECTRODE PROPERTIES
70,000 psi min. tensile
FLUX CAPABILITY
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 109
add significant cost to the project and, therefore, should be specified only when essential to the integrity of the structure. The engineer of record (EOR) must specify in the contract documents which type of weld inspection is required as well as the extent and application of each type. In the absence of instruction, AWS D1.1, paragraph 6.6.5 states that the fabricator or erector is responsible only for those weld discontinuities found by visual inspection. If additional inspection more stringent than visual is later required, the owner is normally responsible for the cost of weld repairs other than those identified by the visual inspection. VT
Visual testing provides the most economical approach to checking weld quality. It is particularly good for inspecting single-pass welds, but is limited in that only surface imperfections may be detected. This type of inspection is especially effective when it includes both a check of the joint for accuracy and cleanliness before welding and an observation of the welding procedure. Acceptance criteria are specified in the AISC Code of Standard Practice and Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards (AISC, 1988), as well as AWS D1.1. DPT
A red dye penetrant is applied to the work and penetrates any crack or crevice open to the surface. After removing excess dye, a white developer is applied. Where cracks are present, the red dye seeps through the developer, producing a visible red image. This process is summarized in Figure 8-27. DPT may be used to detect tight cracks as long as they are open to the surface. Like VT, however, only surface cracks are detectable. Furthermore, deep weld ripples and scratches may give a false indication when DPT is used. MT
A magnetizing current is introduced into the weldment to be inspected as shown in Figure 8-28. The magnetic field induced in the work will be distorted by any cracks, seams, inclusions, etc., located on or within approximately 1⁄10-in. of the surface. A dry magnetic powder spread lightly on the surface will gather at such discontinuities, leaving a distinct mark. These magnetically held particles then show the size, location, and shape of the discontinuity. This method will detect surface cracks filled with slag or contaminants which dye in DPT could not enter. Additionally, the powder may be picked up and preserved with clear
Visible Indication
Subvisible Crack
Cleaned Surface
Penetrant Applied
Excess Removed
Fig. 8-27. Schematic diagram of DPT. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Developer Applied
8 - 110
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
tape, providing accurate and detailed records of inspection results. However, this method requires relatively smooth surfaces and while cleanup is easy, demagnetization, when necessary, may not be. RT
This method uses a radioactive source and an X-ray film process. RT can detect porosity, slag, voids, cracks, irregularities, and lack of fusion. To be detected, the imperfection must be oriented roughly parallel to the impinging radiation beam and occupy about 11⁄2 percent of the metal thickness along that beam. The film negative provides a permanent record of the inspection. Defects smaller than about 11⁄2 percent of the metal thickness and defects not parallel to the beam may not register. RT of closed, inaccessible pipe joints is difficult to obtain and interpret and should be discouraged. Additionally, when the particle beam must penetrate varying thicknesses, as at fillets and tee or corner joints, RT is not readily interpreted and the resulting inspection may be less consistent. When this is the case, other inspection methods should be used. Other limitations of RT are that the required exposure time increases with material thickness and there is a worker hazard due to the radiation used in the method. The precautions for avoiding these hazards and the equipment and film costs make this method the most expensive inspection method. UT
This process, illustrated in Figure 8-29, is analogous to radar and operates on a principle called pulse-echo. A short pulse of high-frequency sound is introduced into the metal. The reflection of this sound wave from the far end of the member and any voids encountered along the way may then be detected. Any reflections are displayed as pips on a display in which the horizontal grid represents the distance through the metal, and the vertical scale represents the area, and therefore the strength, of the reflecting surface. The point of origin of the sound wave can be readily moved around to check many orientations and can project the wave into the metal at angles of 90°, 70°, 60°, and 45°. While UT can detect favorably oriented, flat discontinuities smaller than 1⁄64-in. in carbon and low-alloy structural steels, austenitic stainless steels and extremely coarse-
Current
Part
Magnetic Field
Fig. 8-28. Schematic diagram of MT. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 111
grained steels such as electroslag weld metal are difficult to inspect. Also, certain joint geometry limits the use of UT and it is difficult to inspect members less than 5⁄16-in. thick because there is a “dead area” at the origin of the sound wave. The accuracy of UT depends upon the skill and training of the operator and frequent calibration of the instrument. ASNT has set training standards for UT operators. Despite the fact that UT is a more versatile, expedient, and economical inspection method than RT, it does not provide a permanent record like the X-ray negative in MT. Instead the operator must make a written record of discontinuity indications. For more information, see Krautkramer (1977) and Institute of Welding (1972). Economical Considerations
On a weight basis, the cost of weld metal far exceeds the cost of any other material in a structure. Therefore, in addition to designing joints for the best welding position, significant economy can be achieved by selecting the proper weld type and an arrangement for the welds which requires a minimum amount of weld metal and the least amount of deposit time. Acceptance of prior qualification of welding procedures can also result in a more economical structure.
Good Bond
Slag Inclusion
Crack or Incomplete Fusion Fig. 8-29. Variations in UT reflections due to differences in acoustic properties caused by defects at the boundary. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 112
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Welding Position
When weld metal is deposited in the flat position, it can be deposited more quickly since gravity does not adversely affect the deposit. As a result, large electrodes and high currents may be used. In the vertical and overhead positions, electrode diameters above 5⁄ -in. produce weld pools with surface tensions and arc forces which are unable to 32 overcome the pull of gravity, causing the weld metal to run. Since the deposition rate in the flat position and in the horizontal position for single-pass fillet welds (not greater than 5⁄ -in.) is approximately four times faster than that in the vertical or overhead position, 16 there is strong economic incentive to design and position work for welding in the flat or horizontal position. Weld Type
In general, in the flat position, the SAW, GMAW, or FCAW processes will be more economical than the SMAW process. However, the selection of the welding process should be left to the fabricator since the equipment and training of personnel will vary from one shop to another. It is appropriate, though, for the designer to specify the type of weld to be used, e.g., fillet, groove, etc. The fillet weld will be most economical and should generally be selected instead of the groove weld in applications for which groove welds are not required. Additionally, fillet welds result in lesser distortion of the connected material. There are, however, situations, such as joints subjected to fatigue loading, in which the performance of the groove weld is superior. Complete-joint-penetration groove welds may incur the additional costs of non-destructive testing, backgouging, or backing bars; refer to Alexander (1991). Fillet welds around the inside of a hole or slot require less weld metal than plug or slot welds of the same size. It should be noted, however, that the diameters of holes and widths of slots for fillet welds should be somewhat larger than those for plug and slot welds in metal of the same thickness to accommodate the necessary tilt of the electrode. Weld Metal Volume
Welds which are oversized waste weld metal and labor time, resulting in an unnecessary increase in the cost of the connection. Thus, it is important to use the proper weld size required for strength or based upon the minimum weld size from the LRFD Specification and to not over-specify weld size. While the strength of a fillet weld is in direct proportion to its size, the volume of the weld metal increases as the square of the weld size. Thus, a 5⁄8-in. fillet weld is twice as strong as a 5⁄16-in. fillet weld but also four times more costly. For this reason, it is more desirable to specify a smaller-sized and longer weld than a larger-sized and shorter weld. In groove welds, double-bevel, double-V, double-J, and double-U welds are typically more economical than single welds of the same type since they use less weld metal. As an added benefit, the resulting symmetry results in less rotational distortion strain. Double welds, however, require more labor in edge preparation and proper cleaning of the weld root prior to commencing the weld on the second side. There may also be added cost if the piece must be repositioned to perform the weld on the second side. For this reason, many fabricators prefer a single weld in thicknesses up to about one inch. Where single- or double-groove welds are to be used, bevel- and V-groove welds are usually less expensive since they may be flame cut; J- and U-groove welds are more expensive since they must be planed or air-arc gouged. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 113
Deposit Time
Fillet welds sizes up to 5⁄16-in. may be deposited in a single pass when deposited in the flat or horizontal position. Larger-size welds must be deposited in multiple passes which will require appreciably more time and weld metal. Thus, fillet welds sized not greater than 5⁄16-in., where possible, will result in a significant savings in deposit time, weld material, and cost. Prior Qualification of Procedures
Evidence of prior qualification of welding procedures, welders, welding operators, or tackers may be accepted at the discretion of the engineer of record (EOR). Fabricators certified in the AISC Quality Certification Program have the experience and documentation necessary to assure that the EOR could accept such prior qualifications (refer to Part 6 for a description of the AISC Quality Certification Program). Significant economic savings may be achieved by accepting such prior qualifications. Minimizing Weld Repairs
Added cost in the form of weld repairs or replacement may be minimized if the designer considers the possibilities of lamellar tearing, fatigue cracking, notch development, and reduced impact toughness when designing welded connections. Lamellar Tearing
A lamellar tear is a separation or crack in the base metal caused by through-thickness weld shrinkage strains. When steel is hot-rolled, sulphides or other inclusions are elongated to form microscopic platelets in the plane of the steel plate. These inclusions reduce the strength of the steel in the through-thickness direction below that in the longitudinal or transverse direction. While special practices are available to produce low-sulphur steel which is resistant to lamellar tearing and ASTM A770 provides a testing method by which the throughthickness strength of the base metal may be measured, it is difficult to assure freedom from the possibility of lamellar tearing. Lamellar tearing is a phenomenon which can occur even in material with superior mechanical properties. Instead, the joint detail is most important in preventing lamellar tearing. Some joint designs are inherently susceptible to lamellar tearing (AISC, 1973). For example, the complete-joint-penetration groove-welded tee joints in thick sections shown in Figure 8-30 can develop lamellar tears in the crossbar of the tee flange. Such tears can be detected with UT. Other susceptible joints are shown with improved details in Figures 8-31 and 8-32. The probability of lamellar tearing may be minimized through good joint design and proper welding procedures. The joint design should minimize the weld size and, therefore, the resulting shrinkage strains. Additionally, the design should reduce the restraint which intensifies the local strains. The welding procedure should then establish a sequence to minimize component and internal restraint. Welding with low-hydrogen processes and effective pre-heat has also been shown to minimize lamellar tearing (Kaufmann, Pense, and Stout, 1981). Fatigue Cracking
Because of their inherent rigidity, welded members are subjected to severe restrictions at service loads if subjected to the repeated variations in stress (fatigue loading). In a AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 114
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
dynamically loaded structure, fatigue cracks at notches progress at a rate proportional to the stress range and to the number of stress cycles. Gradual transitions of sections will help to alleviate these concentrations. The fatigue resistance of a butt weld in a tension member, for example, can be improved approximately 25 percent by grinding the weld reinforcement flush. Thus, any notches in the tension areas should be ground out. Additionally, all grinding should be done in the direction of the stress. Refer to LRFD Specification Appendix K3 for further information. Notch Development
When subjected to lateral movement, a severe notch can result at locations of one-sided welds. For the fillet-welded joint subjected to lateral loading in Figure 8-33, the unwelded side has no strength in tension and a notch may form from the unwelded side. Using one fillet weld on each side will eliminate this condition. This is also true with partial-jointpenetration groove welds. In the case of the backing bar of Figure 8-34a, the location of the tack welds may cause fatigue notches. An improved detail would be as shown in Figure 8-34b, where the backing bar is tack welded inside the groove. Any undercut would then be filled, or at least backed up, by the final weld joint. This is also applicable in the case of box members with corner backup. Note that backing bars should also be continuous throughout the length to avoid discontinuities at the base of the weld profile. Impact Toughness
Different classifications of alloy electrodes and fluxes can produce welds with CVN 20 at selected temperatures between 0°F and −150°F. Arc Strikes
Arc strikes may occur during welding procedures if the welding rod is lifted from the work while the current is on, or during magnetic particle testing if the magnetizing prod is lifted from the work while the current is on. As stated in Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards (AISC, 1988), arc strikes need not be removed in statically loaded structures.
Fig. 8-30. Lamellar tear resulting from shrinkage of large welds in thick material under high restraint. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 115
Other Considerations in Welded Construction
Matching Electrodes
AWS D1.1 Table 4.1 lists matching electrodes for various steels by ASTM Specification and is referenced in LRFD Specification Table J2.5. Use of electrodes one strength-level higher than matching is permitted. Typical structural steel grades with Fy equal to 36 ksi and 50 ksi are normally welded with electrode material of 70 ksi nominal strength, indicated as E70XX for SMAW or its equivalent. Welding Shapes from ASTM A6 Groups 4 and 5
When heavy shapes are spliced, extremely high shrinkage strains may develop in the base metal, inhibiting ductile deformation in the material and increasing the possibility of brittle fracture. Additionally, interior portions of heavy hot-rolled shapes and plates may contain a coarser grain structure and/or lower notch-toughness properties than other areas of the product.
(a)
Susceptible Detail
Improved Detail
Susceptible Detail
Improved Detail
Susceptible Detail
Improved Detail
(b)
(c)
Fig. 8-31. Susceptibility to lamellar tearing can be reduced by careful detailing of welded connections. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 116
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
LRFD Specification Sections A3.1c, J1.5, J1.6, J2.8, and M2.2 contain special material and fabrication requirements for ASTM A6 Groups 4 and 5 rolled shapes, shapes built-up from plates more than two inches thick, welded together to form the cross section, and shapes where the cross section is to be spliced by welding and subjected to primary tensile stress due to tension or flexure. These special requirements address notch toughness, access hole profiles, welding procedures, pre-heat, thermal cutting, grinding, and inspection requirements and are intended to minimize the possibility of cracking. The corresponding sections of the Commentary on the LRFD Specification provide further information, including alternative splice details and details for weld-access holes and beam copes. Intersecting Welds and Triaxial Stresses
If a stiffener were to be welded into and around the corner as it meets two elements of a shape (i.e., the flange and web of a column), the welding arc would take the path of least resistance to the three plates meeting at the corner and a lack of fusion or slag pocket would result in that corner. In addition to creating a discontinuity, this would add to the weld shrinkage strains in that corner. Corners of stiffeners, then, should be clipped generously to preclude this problem.
Susceptible Detail
Improved Detail Figure 8-32. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 117
In general, a 3⁄4-in. clip will be adequate. In small stiffeners, where such a clip would remove a large portion of the effective area of the stiffener, and in shapes, the radii of which require a clip in excess of 3⁄4-in., the clip dimension may be adjusted to suit conditions. For further information, see Butler, Pal, and Kulak (1972) and Blodgett (1980). Painting Welded Connections
Paint is normally omitted in areas to be field welded. LRFD Specification Section M3.5 requires that, unless otherwise provided in the plans and specifications, surfaces within two inches of any field weld shall be free of materials that would prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes during welding. Since little is gained by an exhaustive identification of the small areas involved, most fabricators prefer to use the general note, “No paint on OSL of connection angles,” where OSL stands for outstanding leg. This
Weak
Strong
Notch
Fig. 8-33. One-sided fillet weld results in a severe notch. A similar effect exists with a one-sided partial-penetration groove weld.
Fillet weld tacks can result in notches that reduce fatigue resistance.
tacks are incorporated in weld
(a) Susceptible Detail
(b) Improved Detail
Fig. 8-34. Backing bar tack welds. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 118
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
“no paint” requirement does not apply to shop welding where painting is normally done after the welds are made. Clearances for Welding
Clearances are required to allow the welder to make proper welds. In the SMAW process, for example, the welder must hold an electrode, about 3⁄8-in. in diameter and 14 inches to 18 inches long, in full control, and in such a position that the far end of the rod is in near contact with the base metal. This welder must observe the weld through a protective window of very dark glass in a bulky protective hood. Furthermore, the welder must keep control of the stiff electrical cable which powers the welding process. These conditions make welding difficult and it is imperative that other factors do not further hamper the welder. Ample room must be provided so that the welder or welding operator may manipulate the electrode and observe the weld as it is being deposited. The preferred position of the electrode when welding in the horizontal position is in a plane forming 30° with the vertical side of the fillet weld being made. However, this angle, shown as angle x in Figure 8-35, may be varied somewhat to avoid contact with some projecting part of the work. A simple rule which may be used to provide adequate clearance for the electrode in horizontal fillet welding is that the clear distance to a projecting element should be at least one-half its height; distance y / 2 in Figure 8-35b. A special case of minimum clearance for welding with a straight electrode is illustrated in Figure 8-36. The 20° angle is the minimum which will allow satisfactory welding along the bottom of the angle and therefore governs the setback with respect to the end of the beam. If a 1⁄2-in. setback and 3⁄8-in. electrode diameter were used, the clearance between the angle and the beam flange could be no less than 11⁄4-in. for an angle with a leg dimension w of three inches, nor less than 15⁄8-in. with a w of four inches. When it is not possible to provide this clearance, the end of the angle may be cut as noted by the optional cut in Figure 8-36 to allow the necessary angle. However, this secondary cut will increase the cost of fabricating the connection. Fillet Welds
In Figure 8-37a, fillet welds A are loaded in longitudinal shear and fillet weld B is loaded in transverse shear. If the force Ru is increased to exceed the strength of the welds, rupture will occur on the planes of least resistance. As shown in Figure 8-37b, this is assumed to take place in the weld throat where the least cross-sectional area is present. Tests of fillet welds using matching electrodes have demonstrated that the weld will fail through its effective throat before the material will fail along the weld leg. Fillet welds are approximately one-third stronger in the transverse direction than in the longitudinal direction. While this increased strength is ignored in LRFD Specification Section J2.4, the provisions of LRFD Specification Appendix J2.4 may be used to take advantage of this increased strength. Effective Area
The effective area of a fillet weld Aw is the product of the effective length of the fillet weld times the effective throat thickness of the fillet weld. The effective length l of the fillet weld is the overall length of the full-sized fillet weld. Except for fillet welds made with the SAW process, the effective throat thickness of the fillet weld is 0.707w, where w is the weld size. The deep penetration of fillet welds made by the SAW process is recognized in the LRFD Specification Section J2.2a wherein the effective throat thickAMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 119
ness is considered to be equal to the weld size for 3⁄8-in. and smaller welds, and equal to the effective throat thickness plus 0.11 in. for fillet welds sizes over 3⁄8-in. Minimum Effective Length
The minimum effective length of a fillet weld when used alone and not as a part of a continuing joint boundary (i.e., an end return or corner) must be greater than or equal to four times the nominal weld size. Thus, the shortest length of 5⁄16-in. fillet weld which is permitted to be considered to transmit load is 11⁄4-in. Conversely, regardless of the fillet-weld size used, the maximum effective size is limited to one-fourth the weld length. Intermittent fillet welds likewise are subject to this provision with the added requirement that the incremental length of weld must not be less than 11⁄2-in; refer to LRFD Specification Section J2.2b. Minimum Fillet Weld Size
When very small fillet-weld sizes are used, rapid cooling after welding creates internal stresses which, in turn, may lead to cracking of the weld. To preclude this, the minimum fillet-weld size is established in LRFD Specification Section J2.2b as a function of the thickness of the thicker of the parts joined. From this, if two 7⁄8-in. plates are joined, the minimum permissible fillet-weld size is 5⁄16-in., even if a 1⁄4-in. weld might provide adequate strength. Where different thicknesses are joined, the weld size need not exceed the thickness of the thinner part, unless a larger size is required for strength. If this is the case, adequate pre-heat must be provided to assure soundness of the weld. Maximum Fillet-Weld Size
The maximum fillet-weld size on the edge of the material is limited in LRFD Specification Section J2.2b to the thickness of the element for material less than 1⁄4-in. thick and 1⁄ -in. less than the thickness of the element for material greater than or equal to 1⁄ -in. 16 4 thick, unless the drawing is specially noted to build up the weld to achieve full throat size. This limitation recognizes that the exposed corner of the welded edge tends to melt Electrode x
END VIEW
PLAN VIEW
(a) y
Electrode A x
y /2
A PLAN VIEW
SECTION A-A (b)
Fig. 8-35. Clearances for welding. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 120
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
into the weld as illustrated in Figure 8-38, thereby reducing the leg dimension and the weld throat. Additionally, the toes of most rolled shapes do not have an ideal 90° corner. Thus the actual thickness of material at the weld is less than the nominal thickness t of the member. While the LRFD Specification permits the use of a larger weld size if the weld is built up to the full throat size, this is difficult to achieve. End Returns
LRFD Specification Section J2.2b gives requirements on when fillet weld terminations must be returned around ends or sides. This is illustrated in Figure 8-39. Weld returns reinforce the effective weld where it is most highly stressed and, thus, inhibit cracking and progressive tearing throughout the length of the weld. Thus, they are required in fatigue applications and for connections which assume flexibility exists in the connected part or parts (e.g., the support legs of a double angle connection). If welds are not returned, they must terminate not less than two times the nominal weld size from the sides or ends. Also, based upon LRFD Specification Section J2.2b, Figures 8-40 and 8-41 indicate examples where welds must be interrupted or should not be returned. In these instances, the welds, while in the same plane, lie on opposite sides of the contact surfaces. An attempt to weld around the corner will melt the corner material, creating a reduced thickness and notch. Furthermore, such welds cannot be made with a fully effective throat. Welding around such a corner should be avoided. It is not recommended that weld be applied in the gap at the end of the beam web between the heels of the angles, as this reduces the flexibility of the connection angles. Furthermore, the setback of the beam web is not a controlled dimension as it may be used to account for the tolerance in length of the beam and may vary from zero in. to 1⁄2-in. or
Setback
w
Optional cut
20° PLAN VIEW Electrode
45° to 50°
ELEVATION
END VIEW
Fig. 8-36. Clearances for welding. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 121
more. In any case, most beam webs are too thin for an effective minimum weld size to be applied along such an edge. Fillet Welds in Holes or Slots
The recommended minimum hole diameters or slot widths for fillet welding are shown in Table 8-35. It is important to distinguish between plug or slot welds and fillet welds placed around the inside of a hole or slot. In the case of such fillet welds, the shear strength is the product of the effective throat thickness and the weld length measured along the line bisecting the throat area. If this effective area should exceed the area of the hole or slot, it cannot be considered to be a fillet weld and must be designed as a plug or slot weld. Other Limitations on Fillet Welds
In concentrically loaded welded joints, the stresses are assumed to be uniformly distributed throughout the length of the welds. The design strength of a concentrically loaded fillet-weld group, then, is the sum of the design strengths of each weld in the group. LRFD Specification Section J1.8 provides that the center of gravity of a weld group should coincide with the gravity axis of an axially loaded member, or provision must be made for the resulting eccentricity. Certain welded members not subject to fatigue loading are excluded from this provision: “Eccentricity between gravity axes of such members…may be neglected in statically loaded members, but shall be considered in members subject to fatigue loading.” This provision permits very significant cost savings in weld material
Ru
Ru
Welds A Weld B
Ru
Ru (a)
(b)
t
1/16
t
1/16
Fig. 8-37. Fillet welds.
(a)
(b)
Figure 8-38. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 122
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
and labor in the fabrication and erection of such statically loaded members as roof and floor trusses, bracing, etc. Additionally, LRFD Specification Section J2.2b imposes other limitations on proportions of lap joints. Minimum Shelf Dimensions
In Figure 8-42, the recommended minimum shelf dimensions for normal size SMAW fillet welds are summarized. This dimension is critical to the deposition of the weld. SAW fillet welds would require a greater shelf dimension to contain the flux, although this is sometimes provided by clamping auxiliary material to the member. In Figure 8-43, the distance b must be large enough so that a full-size weld may be deposited on it. Select a gage that will permit enough clearance b to deposit an effective weld. The dimension b should be sufficient to accommodate the combined tolerances of the framing-angle length, the cope depth, and the beam mill over/underrun as well as the specified weld size. Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds
Assuming compliance with LRFD Specification Section J2, the design strength of complete-joint-penetration groove welds is equal to that of the base metal in all respects. Therefore, no allowance for the presence of such welds need be made in proportioning the connections of structural members for any type of static loading. Where members are of unequal cross section or different material strength, the strength of the complete-jointpenetration groove weld is limited to the strength of the weaker member. Extension, Runoff, Backing, and Spacer Bars
When groove welds are used to splice plate girders and beams, LRFD Specification Section J7 requires that the splice be capable of developing the full strength of the smaller spliced section or 100 percent of the full section if the spliced sections are of the same size. To obtain a fully welded cross section, the termination at either end of the joint must Provide end returns having length = twice nominal weld size if subjected to cyclical (fatigue) loading or = four times nominal weld size if needed for connection flexibility. Otherwise, terminate welds not less than nominal weld size from ends with no end returns.
1
2 x nominal weld size
/4 for Pts. 1 1 for Pts. 2 2
5 /16
Note: Locations of Pts. 1 and Pts. 2 are shown on the erection diagram (not included).
Fig. 8-39. Weld returns. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 123
be of sound weld metal. Extension or runoff bars are usually used to assure the soundness of the end of the weld. Frequently, the joint will require a backing or spacer bar which can be extended to serve as the extension or runoff bar. Figure 8-44 demonstrates the application of extension, backing, and spacer bars in a splice or moment connection. Extension and backing bars should be of approved weldable material as specified in AWS D1.1, Section 8.2.4; spacer bars must be of the same material specification as the base metal. This can create a procurement problem since small tonnage requirements may make them difficult to obtain in the specified ASTM designation. Also indicated in Figure 8-44 is the use of a cover plate or seat angle for backing the weld.
Do not tie welds together here terminate welds 2 x nominal weld size from end.
Do not tie welds together here
Fig. 8-40. Fillet welds on opposite sides of a common plane should not be continuous. Do not return welds here terminate welds 2 x nominal weld size from end.
Fig. 8-41. Fillet welds should not be returned across thickness of material. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 124
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-35. Recommended Minimum Hole Diameters or Slot Widths for Fillet Welding, in. Plate Thickness, in. 3⁄
16
Min. Diameter or Width, in.
and 1⁄4
11⁄ 16 13⁄ 16 15⁄ 16 11⁄16 13⁄16 15⁄16
5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2 5⁄ 8
Shown in Figure 8-45 are flat-type extension bars, normally used with beveled grooves, and contour-type extension bars, normally used with J-grooves or U-grooves and shaped to follow the contour of the joint geometry. While the contour-type extension bar is shown as though it were comprised of two pieces, some fabricators might elect to mill the full contour in one piece and subsequently cut it to suit job requirements. AWS D1.1, Section 3.12 states that runoff and extension bars need not be removed in statically loaded structures unless required by the engineer of record (EOR). Such might be the case where these bars would create an interference with other work. In dynamically and cyclically loaded structures, however, they must be removed and the welds made smooth and flush to the base metal abutting edges.
Vertical or horizontal section
Fillet Weld Size (in.)
Min. Shelf Dim. (in.)
3
/16
7
1
1
5
9
3
5
7
11
1
3
/4
/16 /8 /16 /2
/16 /2
/16
/8 /16
/4
Fig. 8-42. Recommended minimum shelf dimensions for SMAW fillet welds. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 125
According to AWS D1.1, Section 3.13, backing bars on groove-welded joints must be fully spliced to avoid stress concentrations or discontinuities and should be thoroughly fused with the weld metal. It is further required on dynamically loaded structures that the backing bars be removed and the surfaces finished smooth when they are transverse to the direction of stress. If this were the case for the flange splice of Figure 8-44, removal of the backing bars would be required and, therefore, the splice might be made more economically with another joint profile. Weld Access Holes
The beam web is provided with an access hole or “rathole”, as illustrated in Figure 8-44, to permit down-hand welding to the backing bars located below both the top and bottom flanges. The weld-access hole also provides increased relief from concentrated weld shrinkage strains and prevents the intersection or close juncture of welds in orthogonal directions. Weld-access holes should not be filled with weld metal since it is difficult to provide sound weld metal to fill such a void and doing so may introduce a state of triaxial stress under loading. Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds
b
b
b
Gage
Gage
Partial-joint-penetration groove welds are used primarily for welded compression splices, the connection of elements in heavy box sections and pedestals, and, in general, for joints where the stress to be transferred is substantially less than that which would require complete-joint-penetration groove welds. This type of weld is not, however, recom-
Figure 8-43 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
1
t
Extension bars
/8 ″ Min.
w
L
W
8 - 126
Extension bars Backing bar Backing bar
Col.
Beam access hole
Access Hole
Seat angle
Spacer bar (when req’d)
Beam flange Overlapping cover plate Note: Extension bars should be at least ¼ ″ thick to reduce hazard of weld “blow through.” Figure 8-44 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 127
mended in joints subject to dynamic or cyclical loading, except for joining the components of built-up members. Effective Area
The effective area of a partial-joint-penetration groove weld Aw is the product of the effective length of the weld times the effective throat thickness of the fillet weld. These quantities are determined as follows. The effective length is the width of the part joined. The effective throat thickness E is as determined from LRFD Specification Table J2.1, but not less than specified in LRFD Specification Table J2.3. Nomenclature of partial-joint-penetration welds is shown in Figure 8-46. Note that the effective throat thickness shown is less than the dimensioned groove-weld size. AWS prequalified partial-joint-penetration welds establish for each joint an effective throat E as a function of the material thickness, weld-preparation size, or depth S. Thus, the design drawings should specify the effective weld length and the required effective throat. The shop drawings should then show the groove depth S and geometry which will provide for the specified effective throat E. Some fabricators may indicate both the weld size and the effective throat on the shop drawings to eliminate confusion. The comments on “Extension, Runoff, Backing, and Spacer Bars” and “Weld Access Holes” for complete-joint-penetration groove welds also apply to partial-joint-penetration groove welds. Intermittent Welds
In preparing the joint profile for intermittent partial-joint-penetration groove welds, a transition or “faring-in” of the joint at beginning and termination must be provided to ensure proper fusion with the base metal. The nominal angular value of this transition should be 45°as shown in Figure 8-46. Flare Welds
A flare weld is a special case of the partial-joint-penetration groove weld wherein the convex surface of the connected part creates the joint preparation. This convexity may be the result of an edge preparation, but more often results when one (or both) joint component consists of a round rod or a shape with a rounded bend or corner radius created by bending or rolling as shown in Figure 8-47.
Extension bars Runout plate or backing bar extension
Figure 8-45. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 128
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Effective Area
The effective area of a flare weld Aw is the product of the effective length of the weld times the effective throat thickness of the flare weld; the effective length is the width of the part joined and the effective throat thickness E is as determined from LRFD Specification Table J2.2. Limitations
The deposition of effective weld metal to the bottom of the flare groove is very difficult because the welding arc short-circuits across the surfaces due to the sharp angular slopes. Thus, the quality of this weld is difficult to control; LRFD Specification Section J2.1a permits examination and adjustment of the weld strength based on random testing and special qualification. Note that weldability of concrete reinforcing bars is not a part of ASTM specifications. In past experience, improperly welded concrete reinforcing bars have cracked and separated under no-load conditions. Typical deformed-type concrete reinforcing bars, such as ASTM A615, A616, and A617, are not produced to a controlled chemistry and their weldability must be carefully evaluated; refer to AWS D1.4. Plug and Slot Welds
The use of plug and slot welds for stress transfer is limited to resisting shear loads in joint planes parallel to the faying surfaces. These welds should not be subjected to tensile stresses and are limited when subjected to stress reversal. Furthermore, some specificaEffective A
Transition
length
T
S
E
45° Min.
A
SECTION A-A
Fig. 8-46. Partial-joint-penetration groove weld nomenclature.
Flare-V-groove effective throat=R/2
R
R Flare-bevel groove effective throat = 5R/16
Fig. 8-47. Flare weld nomenclature. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 129
tions do not permit their use as load-carrying welds. Because of these limitations, plug and slot welds are more frequently employed as stitch welds rather than as a means of primary stress transfer. The effective area of a plug or slot weld Aw is the nominal cross-sectional area of the hole or slot. The proportions and spacing of holes and slots and the depth of weld are stipulated in LRFD Specification Section J2.3b and illustrated in Figure 8-48. Design Strength of Welds
The design strength of welds is determined in accordance with LRFD Specification Sections J2.2 and J2.4. LRFD Specification requirements are based upon the provisions of AWS D1.1, except as noted in LRFD Specification Section J2. For welds, the limit states of the weld-metal strength and the base-metal strength must be checked as applicable in LRFD Specification Table J2.5. These limit states assume that the matching electrode requirements of LRFD Specification Section J2.6 and Table J2.1 are met. Weld Metal Design Strength
From LRFD Specification Section J2.4, the weld metal design strength is φRn, where φ is a resistance factor from LRFD Specification Table J2.5 and: Rn = Fw Aw In the above equation, Fw = 0.60FEXX Aw = effective area of the weld, in.2 and φ is determined as follows: For a fillet weld loaded in shear on its effective area, φ = 0.75; For a complete-joint-penetration groove weld loaded in shear on its effective area, φ = 0.80; For a partial-joint-penetration groove weld loaded in shear parallel to the axis of the weld, φ = 0.75; For a partial-joint-penetration groove weld loaded in tension normal to the effective area, φ = 0.80; For a plug or slot weld loaded in shear on its effective area, φ = 0.75. Base Metal Design Strength
From LRFD Specification Section J2.4, the base metal design strength is φRn, where φ is a resistance factor from LRFD Specification Table J2.5 and: Rn = FBM ABM AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 130
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
In the above equation, ABM is the cross-sectional area of the base metal. For a fillet weld loaded in tension or compression parallel to the axis of the weld, φ = 0.90 FBM = Fy For a complete-joint-penetration groove weld loaded in tension or compression normal to its effective area, φ = 0.90 FBM = Fy For a complete-joint-penetration groove weld loaded in shear on its effective area, φ = 0.90 FBM = 0.60Fy d
l
l
R′
d
d
S′
t
W
W
W
S
W
S
R
Plate thickness, in. 3/16 & 1/4
Min. hole dia. or slot width, d, in. 9/16
5/16 & 3/8
11/16
7/16 & 1/2
13/16
9/16 & 5/8
15/16
Hole and slot proportions, spacing and depth of weld d ≥ (t + 5/16), round to next higher odd 1/16; also d ≤ 2 1/4W S ≥ 4d S ′≥ 2 l l ≤ 10W R = d/2 R≥t
Where t ≤ 5/8, W = t Where t > 5/8, W = t/2 but, not less than 5/8
Fig. 8-48. Plug and slot welds. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 131
For a partial-joint-penetration groove weld loaded in tension or compression normal to its effective area or tension or compression parallel to the axis of the weld, φ = 0.90 FBM = Fy Prequalified Welded Joints
AWS D1.1 contains provisions for prequalified welded joints which provide joint geometries, such as root openings, angles, and clearances, as illustrated in Figures 8-49 and 8-50, that will permit a qualified welder to deposit sound weld material. Thus, prequalified joints are concerned almost exclusively with the welding process as a method of joining metal and deal with welded joints only from fusion boundary to fusion boundary. The designer must satisfy all provisions of AWS D1.1 Sections 2, 3, and 4 before a joint is considered prequalified. Prequalified welded joints are not, in themselves, adequate consideration of welded design details. To emphasize this, the AWS D1.1 Section 1.1 states: “…The use of prequalified joints is not intended as a substitute for engineering judgment with respect to the suitability of application of these joints to a weld assembly.” The design and detailing for successful welded construction requires consideration of factors which include, but are not limited to, the magnitude, type, and distribution of forces to be transmitted, access, restraint against weld shrinkage, thickness of connected materials, residual stress, and distortion. Accordingly, the design and detailing must also satisfy the requirements of LRFD Specification Section J2. The prequalified welded joints in Table 8-36 meet the requirements of the 1992 version of AWS D1.1 as well as the 1993 LRFD Specification. Because AWS D1.1 is revised every other year, designers and fabricators should verify this information with the latest issue of AWS D1.1. The designations such as B-L1a, B-U2, and B-P3 are those used in AWS standards. Note that lowercase letters, e.g., a, b, c, etc., are often used to differentiate between joints that would otherwise have the same joint designation. These prequalified welded joints are limited to those made by the SMAW, SAW, GMAW (except short circuit transfer), and FCAW procedures. Small deviations from dimensions, angles of grooves, and variation in depth of groove joints are permissible within the tolerances given. In general, all fillet welds, whether illustrated or not, are prequalified, provided they conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1. Groove welds are classified using the conventions indicated in the tables. Welded joints other than those prequalified by AWS may be qualified, provided they are tested and qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 132
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
ctive Effe ength dL Wel
Weld face Throat area (shaded)
45°
45°
t line
e
tiv
Roo
c ffe
E Leg size
h
gt
d
el
n le
/12 N o Th rma r o Siz at l e
W al rm at o N ro Th ze Si
Root
Size 135° max.
60° min.
Penetration
t
roa
Th
t
oa
r Th
t oa
r
Th
Normal Throat Size
p
e De
CONVEX
n tio e tra iz ne t S Pe hroa T
al e rm Siz No at ro Th Fig. 8-49. Fillet weld nomenclature. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONCAVE
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
Groove face
8 - 133
Groove (and bevel) angle
Groove angle Bevel angle
Groove radius
Root
Root opening
Spacer bar
Root Root Root face opening
Backing bar
Root opening
PREPARATION Penetration (fusion zone)
Weld face
Root Backing bead
Weld size
Reinforcement
Weld throat= Weld size
Root opening
0
Root face
PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION
COMPLETE-JOINT-PENETRATION
Groove size Root face
Groove angle Fillet size
1/8
Effective throat
Eff. at thro
PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION (When Reinforcing Fillet is Specified) Fig. 8-50. Groove weld nomenclature. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 134
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-36. Prequalified Welded Joints Symbols for Joint Types B C T
butt joint corner joint T-joint
L U P
limited thickness, complete-joint-penetration unlimited thickness, complete-joint-penetration partial-joint-penetration
1 2 3 4 5
square-groove single-V-groove double-V-groove single-bevel-groove double-bevel-groove
S G F
submerged arc welding SAW gas metal arc welding GMAW flux cored arc welding FCAW
BC butt or corner joint TC T- or corner joint BTC butt, T-, or corner joint
Symbols for Base Metal Thickness and Penetration
Symbols for Weld Types 6 7 8 9 10
single-U-groove double-U-groove single-J-groove double-J-groove Flare-bevel-groove
Symbols for Welding Processes if not Shielded Metal Arc welding (SMAW):
Symbols for Welding Positions F flat H horizontal V vertical OH overhead The lower case letters, e.g., a, b, c, d, etc., are used to differentiate between joints that would otherwise have the same joint designation.
Notes to Prequalified Welded Joints A B Br C E J
J2 L M Mp N
Q Q2 R
V
Not prequalified for GMAW using short circuiting transfer. Refer to AWS D1.1 Appendix A. Joints welded from one side only. Bridge applications limit the use of these joints to the horizontal position. Refer to AWS D1.1 Section 9.12.5. Back gouge root to sound metal before welding second side. Minimum effective throat (E) as shown in LRFD Specification Table J2.3; S as specified on drawings. If fillet welds are used in buildings to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to 1 ⁄4 T 1 , but need not exceed 3 ⁄8 -in. Groove welds in corner and T-joints in bridges shall be reinforced with fillet welds equal to 1 ⁄4 T 1 , but not more than 3 ⁄8 -in. If fillet welds are used in buildings to reinforce groove welds in corner and T-joints, they shall be equal to 1 ⁄4 T 1 , but not more than 3 ⁄8 -in. Butt and T-joints are not prequalified for bridges. Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the depth of the shallower groove shall be not less than one-fourth of the thickness of the thinner part joined. Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided they conform to the limitations of Note E. Also, the effective throat (E), less any reduction, applies individually to each groove. The orientation of the two members in the joints may vary from 135° to 180°, provided the basic joint configuration (groove angle, root face, root opening) remains the same and the design throat thickness is maintained. For corner and T-joints, the member orientation may be changed provided the groove dimensions are maintained as specified. The member orientation may be changed provided the groove dimensions are maintained as specified. The orientation of two members in the joint may vary from 45° to 135° for corner joints and from 45° to 90° for T-joints, provided the basic joint configuration (groove angle, root face, root opening) remains the same and the design throat thickness is maintained. For corner joints, the ouside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive edge melting.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 135
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Basic Weld Symbols
Back
Groove or Butt
Plug or Slot
Fillet
Square
V
Bevel
U
J
Flare Bevel
Flare V
Supplementary Weld Symbols
Backing
Weld All Around
Spacer
Contour Field Weld
Flush
Convex
For other basic and supplementary weld symbols, see AWS A2.4
Standard Location of Elements of a Welding Symbol Finish symbol
Groove angle or included angle or countersink for plug welds
Contour symbol Root opening, depth of filling for plug and slot welds
Length of weld in inches
Effective throat
Pitch (c. to c. spacing) of welds in inches
F
Depth of preparation or size in inches
A
S(E)
sides)
R
Specification, process, or other reference
(Both
T
Tail (omitted when reference is not used)
Field weld symbol
(Arrow (Other side ) side )
Reference line
Weld-all-around symbol
@P
Elements in this area remain as shown when tail and arrow are reversed.
Basic weld symbol or detail reference
A
B
Arrow connects reference line to arrow side of joint. Use break as at A or B to signify that arrow is pointing to the grooved member in bevel or J-grooved joints.
Note: Size, weld symbol, length of weld, and spacing must read in that order, from left to right, along the reference line. Neither orientation of reference nor location of the arrow alters this rule. The perpendicular leg of
,
,
,
, weld symbols must be at left.
Arrow and other side welds are of the same size unless otherwise shown. Dimensions of fillet welds must be shown on both the arrow side and the other side symbol. The point of the field weld symbol must point toward the tail. Symbols apply between abrupt changes in direction of welding unless governed by the ‘‘all around’’ symbol or otherwise dimensioned. These symbols do not explicitly provide for the case that frequently occurs in structural work, where duplicate material (such as stiffeners) occurs on the far side of a web or gusset plate. The fabricating industry has adopted this convention: that when the billing of the detail material discloses the existence of a member on the far side as well as on the near side, the welding shown for the near side shall be duplicated on the far side.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 136
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Fillet Welds
Notes: 1. En, En′ = effective throats dependent on magnitude of root opening Rn. See AWS D1.1 Section 3.3.1 Subscript n represents 1, 2, 3, or 4. 2. t = thickness of thinner part. 3. Not prequalified for gas metal arc welding using short circuitry transfer. Refer to AWS D1.1. 4. Part (f), apply Z loss factor of AWS D1.1 Table 2.4 to determine effective thrust. 5. Part (f), not prequalified for angles under 30°°. For welder qualfications, see AWS D1.1 Table 10.5, Column 10. *Angles smaller than 60°° are permissible, however, if the weld is considered to be a partial-joint-penetration groove weld.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 137
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Square-groove weld (1) Butt joint (B) Corner Joint (C)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
B-L1a
GMAW FCAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
Groove Preparation Tolerances
Gas Shielding for (FCAW)
T1
T2
Root Opening
As Detailed
As Fit Up
Permitted Welding Positions
1 ⁄4
max
—
R = T1
+ 1 ⁄16 , −0
+ 1 ⁄4 , − 1 ⁄16
All
—
N
C-L1a
1 ⁄4
max
U
R = T1
+ 1 ⁄16 , −0
+ 1 ⁄4 , − 1 ⁄16
All
—
—
B-L1a-GF
3 ⁄8
max
—
R = T1
+ 1 ⁄16 , −0
+ 1 ⁄4 , − 1 ⁄16
All
Not Required
A, N
Notes
Square-groove weld (1) Butt joint (B)
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
B-L1b
1 ⁄4
GMAW FCAW
B-L1b-GF
SAW SAW
Groove Preparation Tolerances
Gas Shielding for (FCAW)
T1
T2
Root Opening
As Detailed
As Fit Up
Permitted Welding Positions
max
—
R = T1 / 2
+ 1 ⁄16 , −0
+ 1 ⁄6 , − 1 ⁄8
All
—
C, N
3 ⁄8
max
—
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
+ 1 ⁄16 ,
+ 1 ⁄6 ,
− 1 ⁄8
All
Not Required
A, C, N
B-L1-S
3 ⁄8
max
—
R=0
±0
+ 1 ⁄16 , −0
F
—
N
B-L1a-S
5 ⁄8
max
—
R=0
±0
+ 1 ⁄16 , −0
F
—
C, N
Gas Shielding for (FCAW)
Notes
−0
Notes
Square-groove weld (1) T-joint (T) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
TC-L1b
GMAW FCAW SAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
Groove Preparation Tolerances
T1
T2
Root Opening
As Detailed
As Fit Up
Permitted Welding Positions
1 ⁄4
max
U
R = T1 / 2
+ 1 ⁄16 , −0
+ 1 ⁄16 , − 1 ⁄8
All
—
C, J
TC-L1-GF
3 ⁄8
max
U
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
+ 1 ⁄16 , −0
+ 1 ⁄16 , − 1 ⁄8
All
Not Required
A, C, J
TC-L1-S
3 ⁄8
max
U
R=0
±0
+ 1 ⁄16 , −0
F
—
J, C
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 138
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Single-V-groove weld (2) Butt joint (B)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
B-U2a
GMAW FCAW
B-U2a-GF
Tolerances
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
As Detailed
As Fit Up
R = +1 ⁄16 , −0
+ 1 ⁄4 , − 1⁄16
α = +10°°, − 0°°
+10°°, − 5°°
Groove Preparation
Gas Shielding for FCAW
Notes
T1
T2
Root Opening
Groove Angle
Permitted Welding Positions
U
—
R = 1 ⁄4
α = 45°°
All
—
N
R = 3 ⁄8
α = 30°°
F, V, OH
—
N
R = 1 ⁄2
α = 20°°
F, V, OH
—
N
R = 3 ⁄16
α = 30°°
F, V, OH
Required
A, N
R = 3 ⁄8
α = 30°°
F, V, OH
Not req.
A, N
R = 1 ⁄4
α = 45°°
F, V, OH
Not req.
A, N
U
—
SAW
B-L2a-S
2 max
—
R = 1 ⁄4
α = 30°°
F
—
N
SAW
B-U2-S
U
—
R = 5 ⁄8
α = 20°°
F
—
N
Tolerances
Single-V-groove weld (2) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
C-U2a
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
As Detailed
As Fit Up
R = +1 ⁄16 , −0
+ 1 ⁄4 , − 1⁄16
α = +10°°, − 0°°
+10°°, − 5°°
Groove Preparation
Gas Shielding for FCAW
Notes
T1
T2
Root Opening
Groove Angle
Permitted Welding Positions
U
U
R = 1 ⁄4
α = 45°°
All
—
Q
R = 3 ⁄8
α = 30°°
F, V, OH
—
Q
R = 1 ⁄2
α = 20°°
F, V, OH
—
Q
R = 3 ⁄16
α = 30°°
F, V, OH
Required
A
R = 3 ⁄8
α = 30°°
F, V, OH
Not req.
A, Q
GMAW FCAW
C-U2a-GF
U
U
R = 1 ⁄4
α = 45°°
F, V, OH
Not req.
A, Q
SAW
C-L2a-S
2 max
U
R = 1 ⁄4
α = 30°°
F
—
Q
SAW
C-U2-S
U
U
R = 5 ⁄8
α = 20°°
F
—
Q
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 139
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Single-V-groove weld (2) Butt joint (B)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
Groove Preparation Tolerances
Root Opening Root Face Groove Angle
As Detailed
As Fit Up
Gas Permitted Shielding Welding for Positions Notes FCAW
T1
T2
B-U2
U
—
R = 0 to 1⁄8 f = 0 to 1 ⁄8 α = 60°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 1 ⁄8 Not limited +10°°, − 5°°
All
—
C, N
GMAW FCAW
B-U2-GF
U
—
R = 0 to 1⁄8 f = 0 to 1 ⁄8 α = 60°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 +10°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , −1 ⁄8 Not limited +10°, − 5°°
All
Not required
A, C, N
SAW
B-L2c-S
Over 1 ⁄2 to 1
—
R = 0, α = 60°° f = 1 ⁄4 max
R = ±0 f = +0, − f α = +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0
F
—
C, N
Over 1 to 11 ⁄2
—
R = 0, α = 60°° f = 1 ⁄2 max
Over 11 ⁄2 to 2
—
R = 0, α = 60°° f = 5 ⁄8 max
± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°°
Single-V-groove weld (2) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
Groove Preparation Tolerances
Root Opening Root Face Groove Angle
As Detailed
As Fit Up
Gas Permitted Shielding Welding for Positions FCAW Notes
T1
T2
C-U2
U
U
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8 f = 0 to 1 ⁄8 α = 60°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 1 ⁄8 Not limited +10°°, − 5°°
All
—
C, J, R
GMAW FCAW
C-U2-GF
U
U
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8 f = 0 to 1 ⁄8 α = 60°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 +10°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , −1⁄8 Not limited +10°°, − 5°°
All
Not required
A, C, J, R
SAW
C-L2b-S
U
U
R=0 f = 1 ⁄4 max α = 60°°
±0 +0, − 1 ⁄4 +10° − 0°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0
F
—
C, J, R
± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°°
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 140
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Tolerances
Double-V-groove weld (3) Butt joint (B)
Welding Process SMAW
B-U3a
SAW
B-U3a-S
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
As Fit Up
R = ±0
+ 1 ⁄4 , −0
f = ±0
+1 ⁄16 , − 0
α = +10°°, − 0°°
+10°°, − 5°°
SAW
±0
+1 ⁄16 , − 0
SMAW
±0
+1 ⁄8 , − 0
Spacer
Joint Designation
As Detailed
Groove Preparation
Gas Permitted Shielding Welding for Positions (FCAW) Notes
T1
T2
Root Opening
Root Face
Groove Angle
U Spacer = 1 ⁄8 × R
—
R = 1 ⁄4
f = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 45°°
All
—
R = 3 ⁄8
f = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 30°°
F, V, OH
—
R = 1 ⁄2
f = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 20°°
F, V, OH
—
U Spacer = 1 ⁄4 × R
—
R = 5 ⁄8
f = 0 to 1 ⁄4
α = 20°°
F
—
C, M, N
C, M, N
Double-V-groove weld (3) Butt joint (B) For B-U3c-S only T1
Over 2 21 ⁄ 2 3 35 ⁄ 8 4 43 ⁄ 4 51 ⁄ 2
S1
to 21 ⁄2 3 35 ⁄8 4 43 ⁄4 51 ⁄2 61 ⁄4
13 ⁄8 13 ⁄4 21 ⁄8 23 ⁄8 23 ⁄4 31 ⁄4 33 ⁄4
For T 1 > 61⁄4, or T 1 ≤ 2 S 1 = 2 ⁄3 ( T 1 − 1 ⁄4 )
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
B-U3b
GMAW FCAW
B-U3-GF
SAW
B-U3c-S
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited) T1
T2
U
—
U
—
Groove Preparation Tolerances
Gas Permitted Shielding Welding for Positions FCAW
Root Opening Root Face Groove Angle
As Detailed
As Fit Up
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8 f = 0 to 1 ⁄8 α = β = 60°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 1 ⁄8 Not limited +10°°, − 5°°
All
—
C, M, N
All
Not required
A, C, M, N
R=0 f = 1 ⁄4 min α = β = 60°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 +10°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 +10°, − 5°°
F
—
C, M, N
To find S 1 see table above; S 2 = T 1 − (S 1 + f )
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Notes
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 141
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Tolerances
Single-bevel-groove weld (4) Butt joint (B)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
B-U4a
GMAW FCAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
B-U4a-GF
Welding Process SMAW
GMAW FCAW
SAW
As Fit Up
R = +1 ⁄16, − 0
+ 1 ⁄4 , − 1⁄16
α = +10°°, − 0°°
+10°°, − 5°°
Groove Preparation
Gas Shielding for FCAW
Notes Br, N
T1
T2
Root Opening
Groove Angle
Permitted Welding Positions
U
—
R = 1 ⁄4
α = 45°°
All
—
R = 3 ⁄8
α = 30°°
All
—
Br, N
R = 3 ⁄16
α = 30°°
All
Required
A, Br, N
R = 1 ⁄4
α = 45°°
All
Not req.
A, Br, N
R = 3 ⁄8
α = 30°°
F
Not req.
A, Br, N
U
—
Tolerances
Single-bevel-groove weld (4) T-joint (T) Corner joint (C)
Joint Designation
As Detailed
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
As Detailed
As Fit Up
R = +1 ⁄16, − 0
+ 1 ⁄4 , − 1⁄16
α = +10°°, − 0°°
+10°°, − 5°°
Groove Preparation
Gas Shielding for FCAW
Notes
—
J, Q, V
T1
T2
Root Opening
Groove Angle
Permitted Welding Positions
TC-U4a
U
U
R = 1 ⁄4
α = 45°°
All
R = 3 ⁄8
α = 30°°
F, V, OH
—
J, Q, V
TC-U4a-GF
U
U
R = 3 ⁄16
α = 30°°
All
Required
A, J, Q, V
R = 3 ⁄8
α = 30°°
F
Not req.
A, J, Q, V
R = 1 ⁄4
α = 45°°
All
Not req.
A, J, Q, V
R = 3 ⁄8
α = 30°°
F
—
J, Q, V
R = 1 ⁄4
α = 45°°
TC-U4a-S
U
U
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 142
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Single-bevel-groove weld (4) Butt joint (B)
Base Groove Preparation Metal Thickness Tolerances (U = unlimited) Root Opening As As Fit Root Face T1 T2 Groove Angle Detailed Up
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
B-U4b
U
—
GMAW FCAW
B-U4b-GF
U
—
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8 f = 0 to 1 ⁄8 α = 45°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 1⁄8 Not limited +10°°, − 5°°
Permitted Welding Positions
Gas Shielding for FCAW
Notes
All
—
Br, C, N
All
Not required
A, Br, C, N
Single-bevel-groove weld (4) T-joint (T) Corner joint (C)
Base Groove Preparation Metal Thickness Tolerances (U = unlimited) Root Opening As As Fit Root Face T1 T2 Up Groove Angle Detailed
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
TC-U4b
U
U
GMAW FCAW
TC-U4b-GF
U
U
SAW
TC-U4b-S
U
U
Gas Permitted Shielding Welding for Positions FCAW
Notes
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8 f = 0 to 1 ⁄8 α = 45°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 1 ⁄8 Not limited +10°°, − 5°°
All
—
C, J, R, V
All
Not required
A, C, J, R, V
R=0 f = 1 ⁄4 max α = 60°
±0 +0, − 1 ⁄8 +10°, − 0°
+1 ⁄4 , − 0
F
—
C, J, R, V
± 1⁄16 +10°, − 5°
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 143
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Tolerances
Double-bevel-groove weld (5) Butt joint (B) T-joint (T) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process SMAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
Groove Preparation
As Fit Up
R = ±0
+ 1 ⁄4 , −0
f = 1 ⁄16 , − 0
± 1 ⁄16
α = +10°°, − 0°°
+10°, − 5°°
+1⁄16 , − 0
+1 ⁄8 , − 0
Spacer
Joint Designation
As Detailed
Gas Permitted Shielding Welding for Positions FCAW
T1
T2
Root Opening
Root Face
Groove Angle
B-U5b
U Spacer =1⁄8 × R
U
R = 1 ⁄4
f = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 45°°
All
—
Br, C, M, N
TC-U5a
U Spacer =1⁄4 × R
U
R = 1 ⁄4
f = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 45°°
All
—
C, J, M, R, V
R = 3 ⁄8
f = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 30°°
F, OH
—
C, J, M, R, V
Notes
Double-bevel-groove weld (5) Butt joint (B)
Base Groove Preparation Metal Thickness (U = unlimited) Root Opening Tolerances Joint As As Fit Welding DesigRoot Face T1 T2 Groove Angle Detailed Up Process nation SMAW
B-U5a
GMAW B-U5-GF FCAW
Gas Permitted Shielding Welding for Positions FCAW Notes
U
—
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8 f = 0 to 1⁄8 α = 45°° β = 0°° to 15°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄16 , − 1⁄8 Not limited +1 ⁄16 , − 0 α + β , +10°°, − 0° α + β , +10°°, − 5°
All
—
Br, C, M, N
U
—
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8 f = 0 to 1⁄8 α = 45°° β = 0°° to 15°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 α + β = +10°°, − 0°
All
Not req.
A, Br, C, M, N
+1 ⁄16 , − 1⁄8 Not limited α + β = +10°°, − 5°
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 144
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Double-bevel-groove weld (5) T-joint (T) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
TC-U5b
GMAW TC-U5-GF FCAW SAW
TC-U5-S
Base Groove Preparation Metal Thickness Tolerances (U = unlimited) Root Opening As As Fit Root Face T1 T2 Groove Angle Detailed Up U
U
U
U
U
U
Permitted Welding Positions
Gas Shielding for (FCAW)
Notes
R = 0 to 1⁄8 f = 0 to 1 ⁄8 α = 45°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°
+1 ⁄16 , − 1 ⁄8 Not limited +10°°, − 5°
All
—
C, J, M, R, V
All
Not req.
A, C, J, M, R, V
R=0 f = 3 ⁄16 max α = 60°
±0 +0, − 3 ⁄16 +10°°, − 0°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0
F
—
C, J, M, R, V
± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 145
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Tolerances
Single-U-groove weld (6) Butt joint (B) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
B-U6
GMAW FCAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
As Detailed
As Fit Up
R = +1 ⁄16, − 0
+ 1 ⁄16 , − 1⁄8
α = +10°°, − 0°°
+10°°, − 5°°
f = ± 1 ⁄16
Not limited
r = +1 ⁄8 , − 0
+1 ⁄8 , − 0
Groove Preparation Gas Shielding for FCAW
Notes C, N
T1
T2
Root Opening
Groove Angle
Root Face
Groove Radius
Permitted Welding Positions
U
U
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 45°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 1 ⁄4
All
—
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 20°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 1 ⁄4
F, OH
—
C, N
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 45°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 1 ⁄4
All
—
C, J, R
C-U6
U
U
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 20°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 1 ⁄4
F, OH
—
C, J, R
B-U6-GF
U
U
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 20°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 1 ⁄4
All
Not req.
A, C, N
C-U6-GF
U
U
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 20°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 1 ⁄4
All
Not req.
A, C, J, R
Double-U-groove weld (7) Butt joint (B)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited) T1
T2
B-U7
U
—
GMAW FCAW
B-U7-GF
U
—
SAW
B-U7-S
U
—
Tolerances
Tolerances
For B-U7 and B-U7-GF
For B-U7-S
As Detailed
As Fit Up
R = +1 ⁄16, − 0
+ 1 ⁄16 , − 1⁄8
R = ±0
+ 1 ⁄16 , − 0
+10°°, − 5°°
α = +0°°, − 1 ⁄4 °
± 1 ⁄16
f = ± 1 ⁄16 , − 0
Not limited
r = +1 ⁄4 , − 0
± 1 ⁄16
Gas Permitted Shielding Groove Welding for Radius Positions FCAW
Groove Angle
Root Face
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8 α = 45°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 1 ⁄4
All
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8 α = 20°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 1 ⁄4
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8 α = 20°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 1 ⁄4 r = 1 ⁄4
R=0
As Fit Up
α = +10°°, − 0°°
Groove Preparation Root Opening
As Detailed
α = 20°° f = 1 ⁄4 max
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Notes
—
C, M, N
F, OH
—
C, M, N
All
Not required
A, C, M, N
F
—
C, M, N
8 - 146
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Tolerances
Single-J-groove weld (8) Butt joint (B)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW GMAW FCAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
As Detailed
As Fit Up
R = +1 ⁄16, − 0
+ 1 ⁄16 , − 1⁄8
α = +10°°, − 0°°
+10°°, − 5°°
f = ± 1 ⁄16 , − 0
Not limited
r = +1 ⁄4 , − 0
± 1 ⁄16
Groove Preparation Permitted Groove Welding Radius Positions
Notes
T1
T2
Root Opening
Groove Angle
Root Face
B-U8
U
—
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 45°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 3 ⁄8
All
—
Br, C, N
B-U8-GF
U
—
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 30°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 3 ⁄8
All
Not required
A, Br, C, N
Tolerances
Single-J-groove weld (8) T-joint (T) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
TC-U8a
GMAW FCAW
Gas Shielding for FCAW
TC-U8a-GF
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
Groove Preparation
As Detailed
As Fit Up
R = +1 ⁄16, − 0
+ 1 ⁄16 , − 1⁄8
α = +10°°, − 0°°
+10°°, − 5°°
f = ± 1 ⁄16 , − 0
Not limited
r = +1 ⁄4 , − 0
± 1 ⁄16
Gas Permitted Shielding Groove Welding for Radius Positions FCAW
T1
T2
Root Opening
Groove Angle
Root Face
U
U
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 45°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 3 ⁄8
All
—
C, J, R, V
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 30°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 3 ⁄8
F, OH
—
C, J, R, V
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 30°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 3 ⁄8
All
Not required
A, C, J, R, V
U
U
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Notes
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 147
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Complete-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Tolerances
Double-J-groove weld (9) Butt joint (B)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW GMAW FCAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
As Detailed
As Fit Up
R = +1 ⁄16, − 0
+ 1 ⁄16 , − 1⁄8
α = +10°°, − 0°°
+10°°, − 5°°
f = ± 1 ⁄16 , − 0
Not limited
r = +1 ⁄8 , − 0
± 1 ⁄16
Groove Preparation Permitted Groove Welding Radius Positions
T1
T2
Root Opening
Groove Angle
Root Face
B-U9
U
—
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 45°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 3 ⁄8
All
—
Br, C, M, N
B-U9-GF
U
—
R = 0 to 1 ⁄8
α = 30°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 3 ⁄8
All
Not required
A, Br, C, M, N
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
TC-U9a
TC-U9a-GF
Notes
Tolerances
Double-J-groove weld (9) T-joint (T) Corner joint (C)
GMAW FCAW
Gas Shielding for FCAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
Groove Preparation
As Detailed
As Fit Up
R = +1 ⁄16, − 0
+ 1 ⁄16 , − 1⁄8
α = +10°°, − 0°°
+10°°, − 5°°
f = +1 ⁄16 , − 0
Not limited
r = +1 ⁄8 , − 0
± 1 ⁄16
Gas Permitted Shielding Groove Welding for Radius Positions FCAW
T1
T2
Root Opening
Groove Angle
Root Face
U
U
R = 0 to 1⁄8
α = 45°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 3 ⁄8
All
—
C, J, M, R, V
R = 0 to 1⁄8
α = 30°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 3 ⁄8
F, OH
—
C, J, M, R, V
R = 0 to 1⁄8
α = 30°°
f = 1 ⁄8
r = 3 ⁄8
All
Not required
A, C, J, M, R, V
U
U
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Notes
8 - 148
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Square-groove weld (1) Butt joint (B)
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
T1
SMAW
B-P1a
1 ⁄8
max
B-P1c
1 ⁄4
max
Groove Preparation Tolerances
T2
Root Opening
As Detailed
As Fit Up
Permitted Welding Positions
Effective Throat (E)
Notes
—
R = 0 to 1⁄16
+1 ⁄16 , − 0
± 1 ⁄16
All
T 1 − 1 ⁄32
B
—
T1 R= min 2
+1 ⁄16 , − 0
± 1 ⁄16
All
T1 2
B
Square-groove weld (1) Butt joint (B)
E 1 + E 2 must not exceed
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
B-P1b
3T1 4
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited) T1
T2
max
—
1 ⁄4
Groove Preparation Tolerances Root Opening
As Detailed
As Fit Up
Permitted Welding Positions
Effective Throat (E)
T1 R= 2
± 1 ⁄16 , − 0
± 1 ⁄16
All
3T1
Notes
4
Single-V-groove weld (2) Butt joint (B) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
BC-P2
GMAW FCAW
BC-P2-GF
SAW
BC-P2-S
Groove Preparation Base Metal Thickness Tolerances (U = unlimited) Root Opening Root Face As As Fit T1 T2 Up Groove Angle Detailed 1 ⁄4
1 ⁄4
7 ⁄16
min
min
min
U
U
U
R=0 f = 1⁄32 min α - 60°°
0, +1 ⁄16 +u, −0 +10°°, − 0°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄8 min α - 60°°
0, +1 ⁄16 +u, −0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄4 min α - 60°°
±0 +u, −0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0*
Permitted Welding Positions
Effective Throat (E)
All
S
B, E, Q2
All
S
A, B, E, Q2
F
S
B, E, Q2
± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5° ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°° ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°°
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Notes
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 149
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Double-V-groove weld (3) Butt joint (B)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
B-P3
GMAW FCAW
B-P3-GF
SAW
B-P3-S
Base Groove Preparation Metal Thickness Tolerances (U = unlimited) Root Opening Root Face As As Fit T1 T2 Groove Angle Detailed Up 1 ⁄2
1 ⁄2
3 ⁄4
min
min
min
—
—
—
R=0 f = 1 ⁄8 min α = 60°°
+1⁄16 , − 0 +u, −0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄8 min α = 60°°
+1⁄16 , − 0 +u, −0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄4 min α = 60°°
±0 +u, −0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0*
Permitted Welding Positions
Effective Throat (E)
All
S
E, Mp, Q2
All
S
A, E, Mp, Q2
F
S
E, Mp, Q2
± 1 ⁄16
Notes
+10°°, − 5°° ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°° ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°°
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 150
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Single-bevel-groove weld (4) Butt joint (B) T-joint (T) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
BTC-P4
GMAW FCAW
BTC-P4-GF
SAW
TC-P4-S
Base Groove Preparation Metal Thickness Tolerances (U = unlimited) Root Opening Root Face As As Fit T1 T2 Groove Angle Detailed Up U
1 ⁄4
7 ⁄16
U
U
min
min
U
R=0 f = 1 ⁄8 min α = 45°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 unlimited +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄8 min α = 45°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 unlimited* +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄4 min α = 60°°
±0 +u, −0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0
Permitted Welding Positions
Effective Throat (E)
All
S − 1⁄8
B, E, J2, Q2, V
F, H V, OH
S
S − 1 ⁄8
A, B, E, J2, Q2, V
F
S
Permitted Welding Positions
Effective Throat (E)
All
(S − 1 ⁄8 ) − 1 ⁄4
E, J2, L, Mp, Q2, V
All
(S 1 + S 2 )
A, E, J2, L, Mp, Q2, V
± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°° ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°° ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°°
Notes
B, E, J2, Q2, V
Double-bevel-groove weld (5) Butt joint (B) T-joint (T) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
BTC-P5
GMAW FCAW
BTC-P5-GF
SAW
TC-P5-S
Base Groove Preparation Metal Thickness Tolerances (U = unlimited) Root Opening Root Face As As Fit T1 T2 Groove Angle Detailed Up 5 ⁄16
1 ⁄2
3 ⁄4
min
min
min
U
U
U
R=0 f = 1 ⁄8 min α = 45°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 unlimited +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄8 min α = 45°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 unlimited +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄4 min α = 60°°
±0 unlimited +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0*
± 1 ⁄16
+10°°, − 5°° ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°°
± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°°
*For flat and horizontal postiions f = + u , −0
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
− 1 ⁄4
F
S1 + S2
Notes
E, J2, L, Mp, Q2, V
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 151
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Single-U-groove weld (6) Butt joint (B) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
BC-P6
GMAW FCAW
BC-P6-GF
SAW
BC-P6-S
Base Groove Preparation Metal Thickness Root Opening Tolerances (U = unlimited) Root Face Groove Radius As As Fit T1 T2 Groove Angle Detailed Up 1 ⁄4
1 ⁄4
7 ⁄16
U
min
U
min
min
U
R=0 f = 1 ⁄32 min r = 1 ⁄4 α = 45°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +u, −0 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄8 min r = 1 ⁄4 α = 20°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +u, −0 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄4 min r = 1 ⁄4 α = 20°°
±0 +u, −0 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0
Permitted Welding Positions
Effective Throat (E)
All
S
B, E, Q2
All
S
A, B, E, Q2
F
S
B, E, Q2
Permitted Welding Positions
Effective Throat (E)
All
S1 + S2
E, Mp, Q2
All
S1 + S2
A, E, Mp, Q2
F
S1 + S2
E, Mp, Q2
± 1 ⁄16 ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°° ± 1 ⁄16 ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°° ± 1 ⁄16 ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°°
Notes
Double-U-groove weld (7) Butt joint (B)
Welding Process
Joint Designation
SMAW
B-P7
GMAW FCAW
B-P7-GF
SAW
B-P7-S
Base Groove Preparation Metal Thickness Root Opening Tolerances (U = unlimited) Root Face Groove Radius As As Fit T1 T2 Groove Angle Detailed Up 1 ⁄2
1 ⁄2
3 ⁄4
min
min
min
—
—
—
R=0 f = 1 ⁄8 min r = 1 ⁄4 α = 45°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +u, −0 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄8 min r = 1 ⁄4 α = 20°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0 +u, −0 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16
R=0 f = 1 ⁄4 min r = 1 ⁄4 α = 20°°
±0 +u, −0 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 +10°°, − 0°°
+1 ⁄16 , − 0
± 1 ⁄16 ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°° ± 1 ⁄16 ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°° ± 1 ⁄16 ± 1 ⁄16 +10°°, − 5°°
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Notes
8 - 152
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Partial-Joint-Penetration Groove Welds Single-J-groove weld (8) Butt joint (B) T-joint (T) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process SMAW
Joint Designation TC-P8*
SMAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited) T1
T2
1 ⁄4
min
U
BC-P8**
1 ⁄4
min
U
GMAW FCAW
TC-P8-GF*
1 ⁄4
min
U
GMAW FCAW
BC-P8-GF**
1 ⁄4
min
U
SAW
TC-P8-S*
7 ⁄16
min
U
SAW
C-P8-S**
7 ⁄16
min
U
Groove Preparation Root Opening Tolerances Root Face As As Fit Groove Radius Up Groove Angle Detailed R=0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16 1 f = ⁄8 min ± 1 ⁄16 +u, −0 r = 3 ⁄8 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 ± 1 ⁄16 α = 45°° +10°°, − 0°° +10°°, − 5°° R=0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16 f = 1 ⁄8 min ± 1 ⁄16 +u, −0 3 r = ⁄8 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 ± 1 ⁄16 α = 30°° +10°°, − 0°° +10°°, − 5°° R=0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 +1 ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16 f = 1 ⁄8 min ± 1 ⁄16 +u, −0 3 r = ⁄8 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 ± 1 ⁄16 α = 45°° +10°°, − 0°° +10°°, − 5°° 1 1 R=0 + ⁄16 , − 0 + ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16 f = 1 ⁄8 min ± 1 ⁄16 +u, −0 r = 3 ⁄8 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 ± 1 ⁄16 α = 30°° +10°°, − 0°° +10°°, − 5°° 1 R=0 ±0 + ⁄16 , − 0 f = 1 ⁄4 min ± 1 ⁄16 +u, −0 r = 1 ⁄2 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 ± 1 ⁄16 α = 45°° +10°°, − 0°° +10°°, − 5°° R=0 ±0 +1 ⁄16 , 0 f = 1 ⁄4 min ± 1 ⁄16 +u, −0 r = 1 ⁄2 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 ± 1 ⁄16 α = 20°° +10°°, − 0°° +10°°, − 5°°
*Applies to inside corner joints. **Applies to outside corner joints.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Permitted Effective Welding Throat Positions (E) All S
Notes E, J2, Q2, V
All
S
E, J2, Q2, V
All
S
A, E, J2, Q2, V
All
S
A, E, J2, Q2, V
F
S
E, J2, Q2, V
F
S
E, J2, Q2, V
WELDED CONSTRUCTION
8 - 153
Table 8-36 (cont.). Prequalified Welded Joints Flare Welds Double-J-groove weld (9) Butt joint (B) T-joint ( T) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process SMAW
Joint Designation BTC-P9*
GMAW FCAW
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited) T1
T2
1 ⁄2
min
U
BTC-P9-GF**
1 ⁄2
min
U
SAW
C-P9-S*
3 ⁄4
min
U
SAW
C-P9-S**
3 ⁄4
min
U
SAW
T-P9-S
3 ⁄4
min
U
Groove Preparation Root Opening Tolerances Root Face As As Fit Groove Radius Up Groove Angle Detailed 1 1 R=0 + ⁄16 , − 0 + ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16 f = 1 ⁄8 min ± 1 ⁄16 +u, −0 r = 3 ⁄8 ± 1 ⁄16 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 α = 45°° +10°°, − 0°° +10°°, − 5°° 1 1 R=0 + ⁄16 , − 0 + ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16 f = 1 ⁄8 min ± 1 ⁄16 +u, −0 r = 3 ⁄8 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 ± 1 ⁄16 α = 30°° +10°°, − 0°° +10°°, − 5°° R=0 ±0 +1 ⁄16 , − 0 f = 1 ⁄4 min ± 1 ⁄16 +u, −0 r = 1 ⁄2 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 ± 1 ⁄16 α = 45°° +10°°, − 0°° +10°°, − 5°° R=0 ±0 − 1⁄16 , 0 f = 1 ⁄4 min ± 1 ⁄16 +u, −0 r = 1 ⁄2 +1 ⁄4 , − 0 ± 1 ⁄16 α = 20°° +10°°, − 0°° +10°°, − 5°° R=0 ±0 +1 ⁄16 , 0 f = 1 ⁄4 min ± 1 ⁄16 +u, −0 1 r = 1 ⁄2 + ⁄4 , − 0 ± 1 ⁄16 α = 45°° +10°°, − 0°° +10°°, − 5°°
Permitted Effective Welding Throat Positions (E) All S1 + S2
Notes E, J2, Mp, Q2, V
All
S1 + S2
A, J2, Mp, Q2, V
F
S1 + S2
E, J2, Mp, Q2, V
F
S1 + S2
E, J2, Mp, Q2, V
F
S1 + S2
E, J2, Mp, Q2
Single-J-groove weld (B) Butt joint (B) T-joint (T) Corner joint (C)
Welding Process SMAW
Joint Designation BTC-P10
Base Metal Thickness (U = unlimited) T1
T2
3 ⁄16
U
min GMAW FCAW
BTC-P10-GF
SAW
T-P10-S
3 ⁄16
U
min 1 ⁄2
1 ⁄2
min
min
Groove Preparation
Tolerances Root Opening As As Fit Root Face T3 Bend Radius Detailed Up 1 1 T 1 min R=0 + ⁄16 , − 0 + ⁄8 , − 1 ⁄16 f = 3⁄16 min +U, − 1 ⁄16 +U, −0 3T1 − 0, +Not- − 0, +NotC= min Limited Limited 2 T 1 min R=0 +1⁄16 , − 0 + 1 ⁄8, − 1⁄16 f = 3⁄16 min +U, − 1 ⁄16 +U, −0 3T 1 − 0, +Not- − 0, +NotC= min Limited Limited 2 N/A R=0 ±0 + 1 ⁄16, −0 1 f = ⁄2 min +U, − 1 ⁄16 +U, −0 3T1 − 0, +Not- − 0, +NotC= min Limited Limited 2
*Applies to inside corner joints. **Applies to outside corner joints.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Permitted Effective Welding Throat Positions (E) Notes 5 ⁄8 T 1 J2, All Q2, Z
All
5 ⁄8 T 1
A, J2, Q2, Z
F
5 ⁄8 T 1
J2, Q2, Z
8 - 154
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
When the line of action of an applied load does not pass through the center of gravity (CG) of a weld group, the load is eccentric and results in a moment which must be considered in the design of the connection. Eccentricity in the Plane of the Faying Surface
Eccentricity in the plane of the faying surface produces additional shear and the welds must then be designed to resist the combined effect of the direct shear from the applied load Pu and the additional shear from the induced moment Pu e. Two methods of analysis for this type of eccentricity will be discussed: (1) the instantaneous center of rotation method; and, (2) the elastic method. Instantaneous Center of Rotation Method
Also known as the ultimate strength method (Crawford, 1968), this method considers the load-deformation relationship of each weld element as well as the variation in weld strength with respect to the direction of the applied force and, thus, more accurately predicts the ultimate strength of the eccentrically loaded connection (Butler, Pal, and Kulak, 1972). Eccentricity produces both a rotation about the centroid of the weld group and a translation of one connected element with respect to the other. The combined effect of this rotation and translation is equivalent to a rotation about a point defined as the instantaneous center of rotation (IC) as illustrated in Figure 8-51a. The location of the IC depends on the geometry of the weld group as well as the direction and point of application of the load. The individual resistance of each unit weld element is assumed to act on a line perpendicular to a ray passing through the instantaneous center and the centroid of that element, as illustrated in Figure 8-51b. The load-deformation relationship of a single unit-weld element was originally given by Butler, Pal, and Kulak (1972) for E60 electrodes. New strength curves for E70 electrodes (Lesik and Kennedy, 1990) are illustrated in Figure 8-52, where: R = 0.60FEXX(1.0 + 0.50 sin1.5θ) [p (1.9 − 0.9p)]0.3 In the above equation, R FEXX θ p
= shear force per unit area in a single unit-weld element at a deformation ∆, kips = weld electrode strength, ksi = angle of loading measured from the weld longitudinal axis, degrees = ratio of element deformation to its deformation at maximum stress
Unlike the load-deformation relationship for bolts, strength and deformation of welds are dependent on the angle θ that the resultant elemental force makes with the axis of the weld element. The critical weld element is usually the weld element farthest from the IC. While this may not always be the case, for the purpose of explanation, this will be assumed. The maximum deformation ∆max may be determined as ∆max = 1.087w (θ + 6)−0.65 ≤ 0.17w where w is the leg size of the weld and θ is expressed in degrees. The deformation of other weld elements is assumed to vary linearly with distance from the IC as, AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
∆=
lr lr max
8 - 155
∆max
More discussion of this method is contained in LRFD Specification Appendix J2.4 and its Commentary. These new provisions permit, for the first time, weld strength to exceed the 0.6FEXX nominal value, which is the least strength applicable to longitudinally loaded (θ = 0°) elements. Load-deformation curves in Figure 8-52 for values of θ = 0°, 30°, 45°, Pu
e
lo
CG
IC
(a) Instantaneous center of rotation (IC)
lo e
IC
CG
l ax
rm
ru max
(b) Forces on weld elements Fig. 8-51. Instantaneous center of rotation method. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Pu
8 - 156
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
60°, 75°, and 90° are shown relative to Ro = 0.6FEXX. The ductility of the weld group is governed by ∆max of the element that first reaches its limit. The total strength of all weld elements is the sum of the individual resistances of all welds in the group. If the correct location of the instantaneous center has been selected, the three equations of statics will be satisfied, i.e., ΣFx = 0, ΣFy = 0, ΣM = 0. Because of the non-linear nature of the requisite iterative solution, a minimum of twenty weld elements for the longest line segment is generally recommended for sufficient accuracy. Tables 8-38 through 8-45 employ the instantaneous center of rotation method in accordance with LRFD Specification Appendix J2.4 for the weld patterns and eccentric conditions indicated and inclined loads at 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, and 75°. Thus, unlike the First Edition LRFD Manual, tabulated values are not limited to a maximum weld nominal strength of 0.6FEXX. For some cases, significant increases of up to 50 percent of values tabulated previously are possible; many values reflect more moderate but, nevertheless, substantial increases on the order of 10 to 30 percent. The traditional and more conservative designs based upon a constant fillet weld nominal strength of 0.6FEXX is also permitted, refer to AISC (1986). For any of the weld group geometrics shown, the design strength of the eccentrically loaded weld group is φRn, where In the above equation, 1.6
θ = 90° θ = 75°
1.4
θ = 60° θ = 45°
1.2 θ = 30°
θ = 0°
1.0
( RR ) o
0.8
0.6
0.4 Ro = 0.6Fexx
0.2
0 0.000
0.050
∆ w
0.100
Fig. 8-52. Fillet weld strength as a function of force angle, θ. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
0.150
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 157
C = tabular value (which includes φ = 0.75) φRn = CC1Dl C1 = electrode coefficient from Table 8-37 which adjusts tabular value, which is based on E70XX electrodes, for other electrodes. Note that this coefficient includes an additional reduction factor of 0.90 for E80 and E90 electrodes and 0.85 for E100 and E110; this accounts for the uncertainty of extrapolation to the higher strength electrodes. D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the weld size l = length of the reference weld, in. The first line in each table (a = 0) gives the design strength of a concentrically loaded weld group in accordance with LRFD Specification Appendix J2.2a. Linear interpolation within a given table between adjacent a and k values is permitted. Figure C-J2.5 from LRFD Specification Commentary Section J2 indicates that, for equal-leg fillet welds, the area of the fusion surface is always larger than the leg dimension times the weld length. Therefore, the tabulated values are based upon the strength through the throat of the weld of (0.75 × 0.6 × FEXX × 0.707 × 1⁄16) Tabulated values are valid for weld metal with a strength level equal to or matching the base material. A convergence criterion of less than 0.5 percent unbalanced force was employed for the tabulated iterative solutions. Straight line interpolation between these angles may be significantly unconservative. Therefore, unless a direct analysis is performed, use only the values tabulated for the next lower angle. Since the coefficients in these tables were derived from physical tests with loading at ultimate strength levels, they should be used only for the weld patterns indicated and not in combination with any additional loading. In cases not treated by these tables, a special ultimate strength analysis is required if the instantaneous center of rotation method is to be used.
Example 8-3
Given:
Refer to Figure 8-53. Determine the largest eccentric force Pu for which the design shear strength of the welds in the connection is adequate using the instantaneous center of rotation method. Use 3⁄8-in. fillet weld and 70 ksi electrode weld size. A. Assume the load is vertical as illustrated in Figure 8-53 (θ = 0°°) B. Assume the load acts at an angle of 75°° with respect to vertical (θ = 75°°)
Solution A:
l = 10 in. kl = 5 in. k = 0.5 From Table 8-42 with θ = 0°, x = 0.125 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 158
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-37. Electrode Strength Coefficients Electrode
FEXX (ksi)
C1
E60 E70 E80 E90 E100 E110
60 70 80 90 100 110
0.857 1.00 1.03 1.16 1.21 1.34
xl + al = 10 in. 0.125(10 in.) + a (10 in.) = 10 in. a = 0.875 By interpolation from Table 8-42 with θ = 0°, C = 1.41 Design shear strength φRn = CC1Dl = 1.41(1.0)(6 sixteenths)(10 in.) = 84.6 kips Comment:
Note that this eccentricity has effectively reduced the shear strength of this weld group by 60 percent when compared with the eccentrically loaded case.
Solution B:
From Solution A, k = 0.5 a = 0.875 By interpolation from Table 8-42 with θ = 75°°, C = 2.59 Design shear strength φRn = CC1Dl = 2.59(1.0)(6 sixteenths)(10 in.) = 155 kips
Comment:
In Solution B, the vertical component of the design strength is φRn sin75°° = (155 kips)(0.966) = 150 kips and the horizontal component of the design strength is AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 159
φRn cos75°° = (155 kips)(0.259) = 40.1 kips Elastic Method
Alternatively, the elastic method may be used to analyze eccentrically loaded weld groups. It offers a simplified, conservative approach but does not render a consistent factor of safety and, in some cases, provides excessively conservative results. Furthermore, the elastic method ignores both the ductility of the weld group and the load redistribution which occurs. Refer to Higgins (1971). In the elastic method, for a force applied parallel to the Y principle axis of the weld group, the eccentric force Pu is resolved into a force Pu acting through the center of gravity (CG) of the weld group and a moment Pu e where e is the eccentricity. Each weld element is then assumed to support an equal share of the concentric force Pu, and a share of the eccentric moment Pu e which is proportional to its distance from the CG. The weld most remote from the CG, then, is the most highly stressed. The resultant vectorial sum of these forces ru is the required strength for the weld element. The shear force per linear inch of weld due to the concentric force Pu is r1, where r1 =
Pu l
and l is the total length of the weld measured along the axis of each element. The shear force per linear inch of weld due to the moment Pu e varies with distance from the CG and will be maximum in the weld element which is most remote from the CG. The maximum shear due to the moment Pu e is rm, where rm =
Pu ec Ip
In the above equation,
10 in.
Pu
k l = 5 in.
l = 10 in.
1.25 in.
Figure 8-53. Illustration for Example 8-3 and 8-4. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 160
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
c = distance from CG to point on weld most remote from CG, in. Ip = polar moment of inertia of the weld group, in.4 per in.2 (Ip = Ix + Iy). Refer to Figure 8-54. For section moduli and torsional constants of various welds treated as line elements, refer to Table 5 (page 7.4–7) of Blodgett (1966). To determine the resultant force on the most highly stressed weld element, rm must be resolved into vertical component r2 and horizontal component r3, where Pu ecx Ip Pu ecy r3 = Ip
r2 =
In the above equations, cx and cy are the horizontal and vertical components of the diagonal distance c. Thus, the resultant force is ru, where r2 r1
ru = √ (r1 + r2)2 + (r3)2
r3 rm ru
and the weld size must be chosen such that the design strength of the weld exceeds the required strength ru. For the more general case of an inclined eccentric force, i.e., not parallel to the Y principle axis of the bolt group, the effect of the X-direction component of the direct shear must also be included. Refer to Iwankiw (1987).
Example 8-4
Given:
Refer to Example 8-3a. Recalculate the largest eccentric force Pu for which the design shear strength of the welds in the connection is adequate using the elastic method. Compare the result with that of Example 8-3a. Use 3⁄8-in. weld size, E70XX electrodes Ip = 385 in.4 per in.2
Solution:
Direct shear force per inch of weld Pu l Pu = 20 in.
r1 =
Additional shear force on weld due to eccentricity Pu ecx Ip Pu (8.75 in.) (3.75 in.) = 385 in.4 per in.2 = 0.0852Pu
r2 =
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
r3 =
8 - 161
Pu ecy
Ip
Pu (8.75 in.) (5 in.) = 385 in.4 per in.2 = 0.114Pu Resultant shear force per inch of weld (r1 + r2)2 + (r3)2 ru = √
y
(p) x
xo cg (po )
x
yo
y
xo
xo
x
yo
y
l = 6.283R
x (p)
x
n
y
x (p)
ln2 12
ln2 + l(dy)2 12 lm2 Iyo = 12 lm2 Iy = + l(dx)2 12 Ix =
yo a
xo
cg (po ) xo
dx
y
xo
R
dy
yo
xo
m
Ixo =
y
a = 0.637R l = 3.142R
Ixo = πR 3 Ix = πR 3 + l(dy)2 Iyo = πR 3 Iy = πR 3 + l(dx)2
(p) x
yo
R
a
R
xo cg (po ) x
yo d y x
cg (po )
dy
xo
dx
xo
Ixo = 0 Ix = l(dy)2 l3 Iyo = 12 l3 Iy = + l(dx)2 12
12 l3 Ix = + l(dy)2 12 Iyo = 0 Iy = l(dx)2
cg (po )
y
yo
l3
l /2
/2
dy
xo
y
dx
dy
Ixo =
l l
a
yo
yo
y
dx
l
dy
xo x
yo
y
dy
dx cg (po )
l/ 2
l
yo
x (p)
x yo
y
x (p)
a = 0.637R l = 1.571R
Ix =
π 3 R + l(dy)2 2 π 4 Iyo = − R 3 2 π
π 2 Ixo = − R 3 4 π π 2 3 Ix = − R + l(dy)2 4 π π 2 Iyo = − R 3 4 π
π 4 Iy = − R 3 2 π
π 2 Iy = − R 3 + l(dx)2 4 π
Ixo =
π 3 R 2
Fig. 8-54. Moments of inertia of various weld segments. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 162
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
√
Pu 2 20 + 0.0852Pu + (0.114Pu ) = 0.177Pu 2
=
Since ru must be less than or equal to φrn, φrn 0.177 1.392D ≤ 0.177 1.392 (6 sixteenths) ≤ 0.177 ≤ 47.2 kips
Pu ≤
This is a 44 percent reduction in the strength predicted by the instantaneous center of rotation method in Example 8-3a.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 163
Table 8-38. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 0°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D ex = a l Pu
l
where Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
kl ex = a l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes
P
Special Case
u
(Load not in plane of weld group) Use C-values for k = 0 Any equal distances
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
2.78 2.78 2.75 2.64 2.48
2.78 2.78 2.75 2.63 2.48
2.78 2.78 2.74 2.63 2.48
2.78 2.78 2.73 2.62 2.47
2.78 2.78 2.71 2.60 2.47
2.78 2.77 2.70 2.59 2.46
2.78 2.75 2.69 2.58 2.46
2.78 2.74 2.67 2.57 2.45
2.78 2.73 2.66 2.56 2.45
2.78 2.71 2.64 2.55 2.44
2.78 2.70 2.63 2.54 2.44
2.78 2.67 2.60 2.52 2.43
2.78 2.64 2.58 2.50 2.41
2.78 2.61 2.55 2.48 2.40
2.78 2.59 2.53 2.46 2.39
2.78 2.78 2.50 2.44 2.38
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.32 2.00 1.72 1.50 1.32
2.32 2.00 1.72 1.50 1.32
2.32 2.01 1.74 1.52 1.34
2.32 2.03 1.77 1.55 1.38
2.33 2.05 1.80 1.59 1.42
2.33 2.07 1.83 1.63 1.47
2.33 2.08 1.86 1.67 1.51
2.33 2.10 1.89 1.71 1.55
2.33 2.11 1.91 1.74 1.59
2.33 2.12 1.93 1.77 1.62
2.33 2.14 1.95 1.79 1.65
2.33 2.15 1.99 1.84 1.71
2.33 2.16 2.01 1.87 1.75
2.32 2.17 2.03 1.90 1.79
2.32 2.18 2.05 1.92 1.81
2.31 2.18 2.06 1.94 1.84
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.17 1.05 0.957 0.806 0.695
1.18 1.06 0.963 0.812 0.701
1.20 1.08 0.986 0.835 0.724
1.24 1.12 1.02 0.872 0.758
1.28 1.17 1.07 0.916 0.799
1.33 1.22 1.12 0.963 0.844
1.38 1.27 1.17 1.01 0.889
1.42 1.31 1.21 1.06 0.932
1.46 1.35 1.26 1.10 0.973
1.50 1.39 1.29 1.14 1.01
1.53 1.43 1.33 1.17 1.05
1.59 1.49 1.40 1.24 1.12
1.64 1.54 1.45 1.30 1.18
1.68 1.59 1.50 1.35 1.23
1.71 1.62 1.54 1.40 1.28
1.74 1.66 1.58 1.44 1.32
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.611 0.544 0.491 0.447 0.410
0.616 0.550 0.496 0.452 0.415
0.638 0.570 0.515 0.470 0.431
0.670 0.600 0.542 0.495 0.455
0.708 0.635 0.576 0.526 0.484
0.750 0.674 0.612 0.560 0.516
0.792 0.714 0.650 0.596 0.550
0.833 0.753 0.687 0.631 0.583
0.873 0.791 0.723 0.665 0.616
0.911 0.828 0.758 0.699 0.648
0.947 0.863 0.792 0.731 0.679
1.01 0.928 0.855 0.792 0.738
1.07 0.987 0.912 0.848 0.792
1.13 1.04 0.964 0.899 0.842
1.17 1.09 1.01 0.945 0.887
1.22 1.13 1.05 0.988 0.929
2.60 0.379 0.384 0.399 0.421 0.448 0.478 0.510 0.542 0.573 0.604 0.634 0.691 0.743 0.791 0.836 0.877 2.80 0.352 0.357 0.371 0.392 0.417 0.446 0.476 0.506 0.536 0.565 0.594 0.649 0.699 0.746 0.790 0.830 3.00 0.329 0.333 0.347 0.366 0.390 0.417 0.446 0.474 0.503 0.531 0.559 0.611 0.661 0.706 0.748 0.788
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 164
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-38 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 15°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D ex = a l Pu
15° l
where Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
kl ex = a l Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
15°
Special Case
(Load not in plane of weld group) Use C-values for k = 0 Any equal distances
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
2.97 2.84 2.76 2.63 2.48
2.97 2.84 2.76 2.63 2.48
2.97 2.84 2.75 2.63 2.48
2.97 2.83 2.75 2.62 2.48
2.97 2.82 2.74 2.62 2.49
2.97 2.82 2.73 2.62 2.49
2.97 2.81 2.72 2.61 2.49
2.97 2.80 2.72 2.61 2.49
2.97 2.80 2.71 2.61 2.49
2.97 2.79 2.70 2.61 2.50
2.97 2.78 2.70 2.60 2.50
2.97 2.77 2.69 2.60 2.50
2.97 2.75 2.68 2.59 2.51
2.97 2.74 2.67 2.59 2.51
2.97 2.73 2.66 2.58 2.51
2.97 2.72 2.65 2.58 2.51
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.32 2.01 1.74 1.52 1.34
2.32 2.01 1.74 1.52 1.35
2.32 2.02 1.76 1.54 1.37
2.33 2.04 1.78 1.57 1.40
2.34 2.06 1.82 1.62 1.45
2.35 2.09 1.86 1.66 1.50
2.36 2.12 1.89 1.70 1.54
2.37 2.14 1.93 1.75 1.59
2.38 2.16 1.96 1.78 1.63
2.39 2.18 1.99 1.82 1.67
2.39 2.19 2.01 1.85 1.70
2.41 2.22 2.05 1.90 1.77
2.42 2.25 2.09 1.95 1.82
2.43 2.27 2.12 1.99 1.87
2.43 2.28 2.15 2.02 1.90
2.43 2.30 2.17 2.05 1.94
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.20 1.08 0.979 0.826 0.714
1.20 1.08 0.985 0.832 0.719
1.22 1.11 1.01 0.856 0.743
1.26 1.15 1.05 0.893 0.778
1.31 1.19 1.09 0.938 0.820
1.36 1.24 1.15 0.987 0.866
1.41 1.30 1.20 1.04 0.913
1.46 1.34 1.25 1.09 0.960
1.50 1.39 1.29 1.13 1.00
1.54 1.43 1.33 1.17 1.05
1.58 1.47 1.37 1.21 1.09
1.65 1.54 1.45 1.29 1.16
1.71 1.60 1.51 1.35 1.23
1.76 1.66 1.57 1.41 1.28
1.80 1.70 1.62 1.46 1.34
1.84 1.74 1.66 1.51 1.39
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.628 0.560 0.506 0.461 0.423
0.633 0.566 0.511 0.466 0.428
0.656 0.587 0.530 0.484 0.445
0.688 0.617 0.558 0.510 0.469
0.727 0.653 0.592 0.541 0.499
0.770 0.693 0.630 0.577 0.532
0.815 0.735 0.669 0.613 0.566
0.859 0.777 0.708 0.650 0.601
0.901 0.817 0.746 0.687 0.636
0.941 0.855 0.783 0.722 0.670
0.980 0.893 0.819 0.757 0.703
1.05 0.963 0.887 0.822 0.765
1.12 1.03 0.949 0.882 0.824
1.18 1.09 1.01 0.938 0.878
1.23 1.14 1.06 0.989 0.928
1.28 1.19 1.11 1.04 0.974
2.60 0.391 0.396 0.412 0.434 0.462 0.493 0.526 0.559 0.591 0.624 0.656 0.716 0.772 0.825 0.873 0.918 2.80 0.363 0.368 0.383 0.404 0.430 0.460 0.491 0.522 0.553 0.584 0.614 0.672 0.727 0.778 0.825 0.869 3.00 0.339 0.344 0.358 0.378 0.403 0.430 0.460 0.489 0.519 0.549 0.578 0.634 0.686 0.736 0.781 0.824
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 165
Table 8-38 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 30°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C1Dl
Pu
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
CC 1 D
ex = a l
Pu 30° l
where Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
kl ex = a l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
30°
Special Case
(Load not in plane of weld group) Use C-values for k = 0 Any equal distances
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.28 3.03 2.87 2.72 2.57
3.28 3.03 2.87 2.73 2.57
3.28 3.04 2.87 2.73 2.57
3.28 3.04 2.87 2.73 2.58
3.28 3.04 2.88 2.74 2.59
3.28 3.05 2.88 2.74 2.61
3.28 3.05 2.88 2.75 2.62
3.28 3.06 2.89 2.76 2.63
3.28 3.06 2.90 2.76 2.64
3.28 3.06 2.90 2.77 2.66
3.28 3.07 2.91 2.78 2.67
3.28 3.07 2.92 2.79 2.68
3.28 3.07 2.94 2.81 2.70
3.28 3.06 2.94 2.82 2.72
3.28 3.06 2.95 2.83 2.73
3.28 3.05 2.95 2.84 2.74
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.41 2.11 1.84 1.62 1.44
2.41 2.11 1.85 1.63 1.45
2.42 2.12 1.86 1.65 1.47
2.43 2.14 1.89 1.68 1.51
2.45 2.17 1.93 1.73 1.56
2.47 2.20 1.98 1.78 1.61
2.49 2.24 2.02 1.83 1.66
2.51 2.28 2.06 1.88 1.72
2.53 2.30 2.10 1.92 1.77
2.54 2.33 2.13 1.96 1.81
2.56 2.35 2.17 2.00 1.85
2.59 2.40 2.22 2.07 1.92
2.61 2.43 2.27 2.12 1.99
2.63 2.46 2.31 2.17 2.04
2.64 2.49 2.34 2.21 2.09
2.66 2.51 2.37 2.25 2.13
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.30 1.17 1.07 0.907 0.786
1.30 1.18 1.08 0.913 0.792
1.33 1.20 1.10 0.939 0.817
1.37 1.24 1.14 0.979 0.855
1.42 1.29 1.19 1.03 0.901
1.47 1.35 1.25 1.08 0.951
1.52 1.41 1.30 1.14 1.00
1.58 1.46 1.36 1.19 1.05
1.63 1.51 1.41 1.24 1.10
1.68 1.56 1.46 1.29 1.15
1.72 1.61 1.51 1.33 1.20
1.80 1.69 1.59 1.42 1.28
1.87 1.76 1.66 1.49 1.35
1.93 1.82 1.73 1.56 1.42
1.98 1.88 1.78 1.62 1.49
2.02 1.92 1.84 1.68 1.54
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.693 0.619 0.559 0.510 0.469
0.699 0.625 0.565 0.516 0.474
0.723 0.648 0.587 0.536 0.493
0.759 0.681 0.617 0.564 0.520
0.801 0.721 0.655 0.599 0.552
0.848 0.765 0.696 0.638 0.589
0.897 0.811 0.740 0.679 0.628
0.946 0.857 0.783 0.720 0.667
0.993 0.901 0.825 0.761 0.705
1.04 0.945 0.866 0.800 0.743
1.08 0.987 0.907 0.838 0.779
1.16 1.07 0.984 0.912 0.850
1.24 1.14 1.05 0.981 0.917
1.31 1.21 1.12 1.04 0.978
1.37 1.27 1.18 1.10 1.04
1.42 1.32 1.24 1.16 1.09
2.60 0.433 0.439 0.456 0.481 0.512 0.546 0.583 0.620 0.657 0.693 0.728 0.795 0.860 0.920 0.975 1.03 2.80 0.403 0.408 0.424 0.448 0.477 0.509 0.544 0.579 0.614 0.649 0.683 0.748 0.809 0.867 0.922 0.972 3.00 0.376 0.382 0.397 0.419 0.446 0.477 0.510 0.543 0.577 0.610 0.642 0.705 0.764 0.821 0.873 0.923
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 166
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-38 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 45°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
ex = a l 45°
Pu
l
where Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
kl ex = a l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
45° Pu
Special Case
(Load not in plane of weld group) Use C-values for k = 0 Any equal distances
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.61 3.37 3.13 2.94 2.77
3.61 3.37 3.13 2.94 2.77
3.61 3.38 3.15 2.95 2.78
3.61 3.38 3.17 2.97 2.80
3.61 3.40 3.20 2.99 2.83
3.61 3.42 3.23 3.03 2.86
3.61 3.43 3.25 3.06 2.89
3.61 3.44 3.28 3.10 2.93
3.61 3.46 3.30 3.13 2.97
3.61 3.47 3.33 3.17 3.01
3.61 3.48 3.35 3.20 3.04
3.61 3.50 3.38 3.25 3.11
3.61 3.51 3.41 3.29 3.16
3.61 3.52 3.43 3.33 3.21
3.61 3.52 3.45 3.35 3.25
3.61 3.52 3.46 3.38 3.28
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.61 2.32 2.06 1.84 1.66
2.61 2.32 2.07 1.85 1.66
2.63 2.34 2.09 1.87 1.69
2.65 2.37 2.12 1.91 1.73
2.68 2.41 2.17 1.96 1.79
2.71 2.45 2.22 2.02 1.85
2.75 2.50 2.27 2.08 1.91
2.79 2.54 2.33 2.14 1.97
2.83 2.59 2.38 2.19 2.03
2.86 2.63 2.42 2.25 2.09
2.90 2.66 2.47 2.30 2.14
2.97 2.73 2.54 2.38 2.23
3.04 2.80 2.61 2.45 2.31
3.09 2.87 2.68 2.52 2.38
3.14 2.92 2.74 2.58 2.44
3.18 2.97 2.79 2.63 2.50
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.50 1.37 1.26 1.08 0.938
1.51 1.38 1.26 1.08 0.946
1.54 1.40 1.29 1.11 0.975
1.58 1.45 1.34 1.16 1.02
1.64 1.51 1.40 1.21 1.07
1.70 1.57 1.46 1.28 1.13
1.76 1.64 1.53 1.34 1.19
1.83 1.70 1.59 1.40 1.25
1.89 1.76 1.65 1.46 1.31
1.95 1.82 1.71 1.52 1.37
2.00 1.88 1.77 1.58 1.42
2.10 1.98 1.87 1.68 1.52
2.18 2.07 1.96 1.77 1.62
2.26 2.14 2.04 1.85 1.70
2.32 2.21 2.11 1.93 1.77
2.38 2.27 2.17 2.00 1.84
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.831 0.745 0.675 0.617 0.568
0.838 0.752 0.682 0.624 0.574
0.866 0.779 0.707 0.647 0.596
0.908 0.817 0.743 0.681 0.628
0.958 0.864 0.787 0.722 0.667
1.01 0.917 0.836 0.768 0.710
1.07 0.972 0.888 0.818 0.756
1.13 1.03 0.941 0.868 0.804
1.19 1.08 0.992 0.917 0.851
1.24 1.13 1.04 0.964 0.897
1.29 1.19 1.09 1.01 0.941
1.39 1.28 1.18 1.10 1.03
1.48 1.37 1.27 1.18 1.11
1.56 1.45 1.35 1.26 1.18
1.64 1.52 1.42 1.33 1.25
1.71 1.59 1.49 1.40 1.32
2.60 0.526 0.532 0.553 0.583 0.619 0.660 0.703 0.749 0.794 0.838 0.881 0.963 1.04 1.12 1.18 2.80 0.489 0.496 0.515 0.544 0.578 0.617 0.658 0.701 0.743 0.786 0.827 0.906 0.982 1.05 1.12 3.00 0.458 0.464 0.482 0.509 0.542 0.579 0.618 0.658 0.699 0.739 0.779 0.856 0.929 0.998 1.06
1.25 1.18 1.12
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 167
Table 8-38 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 60°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D ex = a l 60° P
u
l
where Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
kl ex = a l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
60° Pu
Special Case (Load not in plane of weld group) Use C-values for k = 0 Any equal distances
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.91 3.65 3.46 3.27 3.10
3.91 3.66 3.47 3.28 3.10
3.91 3.68 3.49 3.30 3.13
3.91 3.71 3.53 3.35 3.17
3.91 3.74 3.58 3.40 3.23
3.91 3.78 3.63 3.47 3.30
3.91 3.80 3.68 3.54 3.38
3.91 3.83 3.73 3.60 3.46
3.91 3.84 3.76 3.65 3.53
3.91 3.85 3.79 3.69 3.58
3.91 3.86 3.80 3.73 3.63
3.91 3.86 3.83 3.78 3.70
3.91 3.87 3.84 3.80 3.75
3.91 3.86 3.85 3.82 3.78
3.91 3.86 3.85 3.83 3.80
3.91 3.86 3.86 3.84 3.82
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.95 2.68 2.44 2.24 2.05
2.95 2.69 2.45 2.24 2.06
2.98 2.71 2.48 2.27 2.09
3.02 2.76 2.53 2.32 2.15
3.07 2.81 2.59 2.39 2.21
3.14 2.88 2.66 2.46 2.29
3.22 2.95 2.73 2.54 2.37
3.31 3.03 2.80 2.62 2.45
3.39 3.12 2.88 2.69 2.53
3.46 3.21 2.96 2.77 2.60
3.53 3.29 3.05 2.84 2.67
3.62 3.43 3.22 3.01 2.82
3.68 3.53 3.36 3.17 2.98
3.73 3.61 3.46 3.29 3.12
3.76 3.66 3.54 3.39 3.24
3.78 3.70 3.60 3.47 3.34
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.89 1.75 1.62 1.42 1.25
1.90 1.76 1.63 1.43 1.26
1.93 1.79 1.67 1.46 1.30
1.99 1.85 1.73 1.52 1.36
2.06 1.92 1.80 1.59 1.42
2.14 2.00 1.88 1.67 1.50
2.22 2.08 1.96 1.75 1.57
2.30 2.16 2.04 1.83 1.65
2.38 2.24 2.12 1.91 1.73
2.45 2.32 2.20 1.98 1.81
2.52 2.39 2.27 2.06 1.88
2.66 2.53 2.41 2.19 2.01
2.81 2.65 2.53 2.32 2.13
2.95 2.80 2.66 2.43 2.25
3.08 2.93 2.79 2.54 2.35
3.20 3.05 2.91 2.66 2.45
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
1.12 1.01 0.922 0.847 0.782
1.13 1.02 0.932 0.856 0.791
1.17 1.06 0.964 0.887 0.820
1.22 1.11 1.01 0.932 0.863
1.28 1.17 1.07 0.986 0.914
1.35 1.24 1.13 1.05 0.971
1.43 1.31 1.20 1.11 1.03
1.50 1.38 1.27 1.18 1.10
1.58 1.45 1.34 1.25 1.16
1.65 1.52 1.41 1.31 1.22
1.72 1.59 1.47 1.37 1.28
1.85 1.72 1.60 1.49 1.40
1.98 1.84 1.72 1.61 1.51
2.09 1.95 1.82 1.71 1.62
2.19 2.05 1.92 1.81 1.71
2.29 2.14 2.02 1.90 1.80
2.60 0.726 0.734 0.762 0.803 0.852 0.907 0.964 1.03 1.09 1.15 2.80 0.677 0.686 0.712 0.750 0.797 0.849 0.905 0.963 1.02 1.08 3.00 0.635 0.643 0.668 0.704 0.749 0.799 0.852 0.906 0.963 1.02
1.21 1.14 1.07
1.32 1.24 1.18
1.43 1.35 1.28
1.53 1.45 1.37
1.62 1.54 1.46
1.71 1.62 1.55
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 168
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-38 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 75°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
ex = a l
75°
Pu l
where Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
kl ex = a l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
75° Pu
Special Case (Load not in plane of weld group) Use C-values for k = 0
Any equal distances
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
4.11 3.88 3.76 3.64 3.53
4.11 3.90 3.77 3.65 3.54
4.11 3.95 3.83 3.71 3.60
4.11 4.00 3.90 3.79 3.69
4.11 4.04 3.96 3.88 3.78
4.11 4.07 4.01 3.94 3.87
4.11 4.08 4.04 3.99 3.93
4.11 4.09 4.06 4.03 3.98
4.11 4.09 4.08 4.05 4.01
4.11 4.09 4.08 4.06 4.03
4.11 4.09 4.09 4.07 4.05
4.11 4.09 4.09 4.08 4.07
4.11 4.09 4.09 4.09 4.08
4.11 4.09 4.09 4.09 4.08
4.11 4.09 4.09 4.09 4.09
4.11 4.09 4.09 4.09 4.09
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
3.43 3.24 3.07 2.91 2.77
3.44 3.25 3.08 2.92 2.78
3.49 3.29 3.12 2.97 2.82
3.58 3.38 3.20 3.05 2.90
3.69 3.50 3.32 3.15 3.00
3.78 3.62 3.45 3.29 3.13
3.86 3.72 3.57 3.42 3.27
3.92 3.80 3.67 3.54 3.40
3.97 3.86 3.75 3.63 3.51
4.00 3.91 3.82 3.71 3.60
4.02 3.95 3.87 3.78 3.68
4.05 4.00 3.94 3.88 3.80
4.07 4.03 3.99 3.94 3.88
4.07 4.05 4.02 3.98 3.93
4.08 4.06 4.04 4.01 3.97
4.08 4.07 4.05 4.03 4.00
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
2.63 2.50 2.38 2.17 1.99
2.64 2.52 2.40 2.18 2.00
2.69 2.57 2.45 2.24 2.05
2.77 2.64 2.53 2.32 2.13
2.87 2.74 2.63 2.41 2.23
2.99 2.86 2.74 2.52 2.33
3.13 3.00 2.87 2.64 2.45
3.26 3.13 3.01 2.78 2.57
3.39 3.26 3.14 2.91 2.71
3.49 3.38 3.26 3.04 2.84
3.58 3.48 3.37 3.16 2.96
3.72 3.64 3.55 3.37 3.18
3.81 3.75 3.68 3.52 3.36
3.88 3.83 3.77 3.64 3.50
3.93 3.88 3.83 3.73 3.61
3.96 3.93 3.88 3.80 3.69
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
1.83 1.69 1.57 1.46 1.37
1.84 1.70 1.58 1.48 1.38
1.89 1.75 1.63 1.52 1.43
1.97 1.83 1.70 1.59 1.49
2.06 1.92 1.79 1.68 1.57
2.17 2.02 1.89 1.77 1.67
2.28 2.13 1.99 1.87 1.76
2.39 2.24 2.10 1.97 1.86
2.52 2.35 2.21 2.08 1.97
2.65 2.48 2.33 2.19 2.07
2.78 2.61 2.45 2.30 2.18
3.01 2.84 2.68 2.54 2.40
3.20 3.05 2.89 2.75 2.61
3.36 3.22 3.08 2.94 2.81
3.49 3.36 3.23 3.10 2.98
3.59 3.48 3.36 3.24 3.13
2.60 2.80 3.00
1.28 1.21 1.14
1.30 1.22 1.15
1.34 1.27 1.20
1.40 1.33 1.26
1.48 1.40 1.33
1.57 1.49 1.41
1.66 1.58 1.49
1.76 1.67 1.59
1.86 1.77 1.68
1.96 1.86 1.77
2.07 1.96 1.87
2.28 2.16 2.06
2.49 2.37 2.26
2.68 2.56 2.45
2.85 2.73 2.62
3.01 2.89 2.78
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 169
Table 8-39. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 0°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
Pu
kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
4.18 3.24 2.92 2.65 2.41
4.18 3.27 2.95 2.68 2.44
4.18 3.36 3.03 2.75 2.50
4.18 3.48 3.15 2.85 2.60
4.18 3.61 3.29 2.99 2.73
4.18 3.73 3.43 3.15 2.88
4.18 3.83 3.56 3.30 3.04
4.18 3.91 3.68 3.43 3.19
4.18 3.97 3.77 3.55 3.33
4.18 4.01 3.84 3.65 3.44
4.18 4.05 3.90 3.73 3.54
4.18 4.09 3.98 3.85 3.70
4.18 4.12 4.04 3.93 3.81
4.18 4.13 4.07 3.99 3.89
4.18 4.14 4.09 4.03 3.95
4.18 4.15 4.11 4.06 3.99
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.20 1.86 1.60 1.40 1.24
2.23 1.88 1.62 1.42 1.26
2.29 1.95 1.68 1.47 1.30
2.39 2.03 1.76 1.54 1.37
2.50 2.14 1.85 1.63 1.45
2.64 2.26 1.96 1.73 1.54
2.81 2.39 2.08 1.84 1.64
2.96 2.55 2.21 1.96 1.75
3.11 2.71 2.36 2.08 1.86
3.24 2.86 2.51 2.22 1.98
3.36 2.99 2.66 2.36 2.11
3.54 3.22 2.91 2.63 2.38
3.68 3.40 3.12 2.86 2.61
3.79 3.55 3.29 3.05 2.81
3.86 3.66 3.43 3.21 2.99
3.92 3.74 3.55 3.34 3.14
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.11 1.00 0.914 0.777 0.674
1.13 1.02 0.929 0.789 0.685
1.17 1.06 0.965 0.821 0.713
1.23 1.11 1.02 0.866 0.753
1.30 1.18 1.08 0.920 0.802
1.39 1.26 1.15 0.984 0.856
1.48 1.35 1.23 1.05 0.918
1.58 1.44 1.31 1.13 0.982
1.68 1.53 1.40 1.20 1.05
1.79 1.63 1.49 1.28 1.12
1.90 1.73 1.59 1.36 1.19
2.15 1.96 1.79 1.53 1.34
2.39 2.19 2.02 1.72 1.50
2.60 2.40 2.22 1.92 1.68
2.78 2.59 2.41 2.11 1.85
2.95 2.76 2.59 2.28 2.02
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.594 0.531 0.481 0.439 0.404
0.604 0.541 0.489 0.446 0.410
0.629 0.563 0.509 0.465 0.427
0.665 0.595 0.538 0.492 0.452
0.709 0.635 0.574 0.524 0.483
0.759 0.680 0.616 0.562 0.517
0.812 0.729 0.661 0.604 0.555
0.871 0.780 0.708 0.647 0.596
0.931 0.836 0.757 0.693 0.638
0.993 0.892 0.810 0.740 0.681
1.06 0.950 0.862 0.789 0.727
1.19 1.07 0.971 0.890 0.820
1.33 1.20 1.09 0.994 0.917
1.48 1.33 1.21 1.10 1.02
1.64 1.47 1.33 1.22 1.12
1.80 1.62 1.47 1.34 1.23
2.60 0.374 0.379 0.396 0.419 0.447 0.479 0.514 0.552 0.592 0.632 0.674 0.760 0.850 0.941 1.04 1.14 2.80 0.348 0.353 0.368 0.390 0.416 0.446 0.479 0.514 0.551 0.589 0.628 0.709 0.793 0.878 0.966 1.06 3.00 0.325 0.330 0.344 0.364 0.389 0.417 0.448 0.481 0.516 0.552 0.588 0.664 0.742 0.822 0.904 0.989
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 170
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-39 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 15°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
Pu
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
15° kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
4.11 3.29 2.97 2.70 2.46
4.11 3.30 2.99 2.71 2.48
4.11 3.34 3.03 2.76 2.53
4.11 3.43 3.11 2.84 2.61
4.11 3.55 3.22 2.94 2.71
4.11 3.66 3.35 3.07 2.82
4.11 3.76 3.48 3.20 2.95
4.11 3.83 3.59 3.34 3.09
4.11 3.89 3.68 3.45 3.22
4.11 3.94 3.76 3.55 3.34
4.11 3.97 3.82 3.64 3.44
4.11 4.02 3.90 3.76 3.61
4.11 4.04 3.96 3.85 3.72
4.11 4.06 4.00 3.91 3.81
4.11 4.07 4.02 3.95 3.87
4.11 4.07 4.04 3.98 3.91
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.25 1.91 1.65 1.44 1.28
2.27 1.93 1.66 1.46 1.29
2.32 1.98 1.71 1.50 1.34
2.40 2.05 1.79 1.57 1.40
2.50 2.15 1.87 1.65 1.48
2.61 2.25 1.97 1.75 1.56
2.73 2.37 2.08 1.85 1.66
2.87 2.49 2.19 1.95 1.76
3.00 2.62 2.30 2.06 1.85
3.13 2.75 2.42 2.17 1.96
3.25 2.87 2.55 2.28 2.06
3.44 3.10 2.79 2.51 2.27
3.58 3.29 2.99 2.72 2.48
3.69 3.44 3.17 2.91 2.67
3.77 3.56 3.32 3.08 2.85
3.83 3.65 3.44 3.22 3.00
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.15 1.04 0.945 0.803 0.697
1.16 1.05 0.958 0.814 0.707
1.20 1.09 0.993 0.846 0.735
1.26 1.14 1.05 0.892 0.776
1.33 1.21 1.11 0.946 0.825
1.41 1.29 1.18 1.01 0.881
1.50 1.37 1.26 1.08 0.942
1.59 1.45 1.34 1.15 1.01
1.69 1.54 1.42 1.22 1.07
1.78 1.63 1.50 1.30 1.14
1.88 1.72 1.59 1.37 1.21
2.07 1.90 1.75 1.52 1.34
2.27 2.08 1.92 1.67 1.47
2.45 2.26 2.10 1.82 1.61
2.63 2.43 2.26 1.97 1.74
2.79 2.59 2.42 2.12 1.87
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.615 0.550 0.497 0.454 0.418
0.624 0.559 0.505 0.461 0.424
0.649 0.581 0.526 0.480 0.442
0.686 0.614 0.556 0.508 0.467
0.731 0.655 0.593 0.542 0.499
0.781 0.701 0.635 0.580 0.534
0.835 0.751 0.681 0.623 0.573
0.894 0.802 0.729 0.667 0.615
0.954 0.858 0.778 0.713 0.657
1.01 0.913 0.830 0.760 0.700
1.08 0.968 0.881 0.808 0.745
1.20 1.08 0.985 0.904 0.834
1.32 1.19 1.09 0.999 0.924
1.44 1.30 1.19 1.10 1.01
1.56 1.41 1.29 1.19 1.10
1.68 1.52 1.39 1.28 1.19
2.60 0.387 0.392 0.409 0.433 0.462 0.495 0.531 0.570 0.609 0.650 0.691 0.775 0.859 0.942 1.03 1.11 2.80 0.360 0.365 0.381 0.403 0.430 0.461 0.494 0.530 0.568 0.606 0.644 0.724 0.802 0.881 0.959 1.03 3.00 0.336 0.341 0.356 0.377 0.402 0.431 0.463 0.496 0.532 0.568 0.604 0.678 0.753 0.827 0.900 0.972
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 171
Table 8-39 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 30°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
Pu
30° kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.91 3.37 3.07 2.82 2.60
3.91 3.38 3.07 2.83 2.61
3.91 3.40 3.10 2.85 2.63
3.91 3.45 3.14 2.89 2.68
3.91 3.50 3.20 2.94 2.73
3.91 3.56 3.27 3.01 2.80
3.91 3.62 3.35 3.09 2.87
3.91 3.67 3.43 3.17 2.94
3.91 3.71 3.50 3.26 3.03
3.91 3.75 3.56 3.35 3.12
3.91 3.77 3.61 3.42 3.21
3.91 3.81 3.69 3.54 3.36
3.91 3.83 3.74 3.62 3.48
3.91 3.84 3.77 3.68 3.56
3.91 3.85 3.79 3.72 3.62
3.91 3.85 3.81 3.75 3.67
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.40 2.06 1.80 1.58 1.41
2.41 2.07 1.80 1.59 1.42
2.44 2.10 1.84 1.62 1.45
2.49 2.16 1.89 1.68 1.51
2.55 2.22 1.97 1.75 1.58
2.62 2.30 2.04 1.83 1.66
2.69 2.38 2.13 1.91 1.74
2.76 2.46 2.21 2.00 1.82
2.84 2.54 2.29 2.07 1.90
2.92 2.61 2.36 2.15 1.97
3.01 2.69 2.44 2.23 2.05
3.18 2.83 2.57 2.36 2.18
3.32 2.99 2.70 2.49 2.30
3.43 3.14 2.85 2.61 2.42
3.51 3.25 2.98 2.74 2.53
3.57 3.35 3.10 2.86 2.64
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.26 1.15 1.05 0.891 0.774
1.27 1.15 1.06 0.900 0.783
1.31 1.19 1.09 0.932 0.812
1.37 1.25 1.14 0.979 0.855
1.43 1.31 1.20 1.03 0.906
1.51 1.38 1.27 1.10 0.963
1.59 1.46 1.35 1.17 1.02
1.66 1.53 1.42 1.23 1.09
1.74 1.61 1.49 1.30 1.15
1.82 1.68 1.57 1.37 1.21
1.89 1.75 1.63 1.43 1.27
2.03 1.88 1.76 1.56 1.39
2.15 2.01 1.88 1.67 1.50
2.26 2.12 1.99 1.78 1.60
2.36 2.22 2.09 1.88 1.70
2.46 2.32 2.19 1.97 1.79
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.684 0.612 0.554 0.506 0.465
0.692 0.620 0.562 0.513 0.472
0.719 0.644 0.584 0.534 0.491
0.757 0.679 0.616 0.563 0.519
0.805 0.723 0.655 0.600 0.553
0.857 0.771 0.700 0.641 0.591
0.913 0.823 0.749 0.686 0.633
0.972 0.876 0.799 0.733 0.676
1.03 0.931 0.848 0.779 0.720
1.09 0.985 0.899 0.826 0.764
1.14 1.04 0.949 0.874 0.808
1.26 1.14 1.05 0.965 0.896
1.36 1.24 1.14 1.05 0.979
1.46 1.33 1.23 1.14 1.06
1.55 1.42 1.31 1.22 1.14
1.64 1.51 1.39 1.30 1.21
2.60 0.431 0.437 0.455 0.481 0.512 0.548 0.587 0.628 0.669 0.711 0.752 0.835 0.915 0.992 1.07 1.14 2.80 0.401 0.406 0.423 0.448 0.477 0.511 0.547 0.585 0.625 0.664 0.704 0.782 0.858 0.931 1.00 1.07 3.00 0.375 0.380 0.396 0.419 0.447 0.478 0.513 0.548 0.586 0.623 0.661 0.734 0.808 0.878 0.946 1.01
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 172
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-39 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 45°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
45° Pu
kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.61 3.37 3.13 2.94 2.77
3.61 3.37 3.13 2.94 2.77
3.61 3.38 3.15 2.95 2.78
3.61 3.38 3.17 2.97 2.80
3.61 3.40 3.20 2.99 2.83
3.61 3.42 3.23 3.03 2.86
3.61 3.43 3.25 3.06 2.89
3.61 3.44 3.28 3.10 2.93
3.61 3.46 3.30 3.13 2.97
3.61 3.47 3.33 3.17 3.01
3.61 3.48 3.35 3.20 3.04
3.61 3.50 3.38 3.25 3.11
3.61 3.51 3.41 3.29 3.16
3.61 3.52 3.43 3.33 3.21
3.61 3.52 3.45 3.35 3.25
3.61 3.52 3.47 3.38 3.28
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.61 2.32 2.06 1.84 1.66
2.61 2.32 2.07 1.85 1.66
2.63 2.34 2.09 1.87 1.69
2.65 2.37 2.12 1.91 1.73
2.68 2.41 2.17 1.96 1.79
2.71 2.45 2.22 2.02 1.85
2.75 2.50 2.27 2.08 1.91
2.79 2.54 2.33 2.14 1.97
2.83 2.59 2.38 2.19 2.03
2.86 2.63 2.42 2.25 2.09
2.90 2.66 2.47 2.30 2.14
2.97 2.73 2.54 2.38 2.23
3.04 2.80 2.61 2.45 2.31
3.09 2.87 2.68 2.52 2.38
3.14 2.92 2.74 2.58 2.44
3.18 2.97 2.79 2.63 2.50
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.50 1.37 1.26 1.08 0.938
1.51 1.38 1.26 1.08 0.946
1.54 1.40 1.29 1.11 0.975
1.58 1.45 1.34 1.16 1.02
1.64 1.51 1.40 1.21 1.07
1.70 1.57 1.46 1.28 1.13
1.76 1.64 1.53 1.34 1.19
1.83 1.70 1.59 1.40 1.25
1.89 1.76 1.65 1.46 1.31
1.95 1.82 1.71 1.52 1.37
2.00 1.88 1.77 1.58 1.42
2.10 1.98 1.87 1.68 1.52
2.18 2.07 1.96 1.77 1.62
2.26 2.14 2.04 1.85 1.70
2.32 2.21 2.11 1.93 1.77
2.38 2.27 2.17 2.00 1.84
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.831 0.745 0.675 0.617 0.568
0.838 0.752 0.682 0.624 0.574
0.866 0.779 0.707 0.647 0.596
0.908 0.817 0.743 0.681 0.628
0.958 0.864 0.787 0.722 0.667
1.01 0.917 0.836 0.768 0.710
1.07 0.972 0.888 0.818 0.756
1.13 1.03 0.941 0.868 0.804
1.19 1.08 0.992 0.917 0.851
1.24 1.13 1.04 0.964 0.897
1.29 1.19 1.09 1.01 0.941
1.39 1.28 1.18 1.10 1.03
1.48 1.37 1.27 1.18 1.11
1.56 1.45 1.35 1.26 1.18
1.64 1.52 1.42 1.33 1.25
1.71 1.59 1.49 1.40 1.32
2.60 0.526 0.532 0.553 0.583 0.619 0.660 0.703 0.749 0.794 0.838 0.881 0.963 1.04 1.12 1.18 2.80 0.489 0.496 0.515 0.544 0.578 0.617 0.658 0.701 0.743 0.786 0.827 0.906 0.982 1.05 1.12 3.00 0.458 0.464 0.482 0.509 0.542 0.579 0.618 0.658 0.699 0.739 0.779 0.856 0.929 0.998 1.06
1.25 1.18 1.12
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 173
Table 8-39 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 60°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
60°
Pu
kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.28 3.20 3.10 2.98 2.89
3.28 3.19 3.09 2.98 2.89
3.28 3.19 3.10 2.98 2.89
3.28 3.19 3.10 2.98 2.89
3.28 3.19 3.10 2.98 2.89
3.28 3.19 3.10 2.99 2.90
3.28 3.19 3.10 2.99 2.90
3.28 3.19 3.10 3.00 2.91
3.28 3.18 3.10 3.01 2.91
3.28 3.18 3.10 3.01 2.92
3.28 3.18 3.10 3.02 2.92
3.28 3.17 3.10 3.02 2.94
3.28 3.16 3.10 3.03 2.95
3.28 3.15 3.09 3.03 2.96
3.28 3.14 3.09 3.02 2.96
3.28 3.13 3.08 3.02 2.96
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.80 2.63 2.44 2.27 2.09
2.80 2.63 2.44 2.27 2.10
2.80 2.63 2.45 2.28 2.11
2.81 2.64 2.47 2.29 2.13
2.81 2.65 2.48 2.32 2.16
2.82 2.66 2.50 2.35 2.19
2.82 2.67 2.52 2.37 2.23
2.83 2.68 2.54 2.40 2.27
2.83 2.69 2.55 2.42 2.29
2.84 2.70 2.57 2.44 2.32
2.85 2.71 2.58 2.46 2.34
2.86 2.73 2.61 2.49 2.39
2.87 2.74 2.63 2.52 2.42
2.89 2.76 2.65 2.55 2.45
2.89 2.77 2.66 2.57 2.48
2.90 2.78 2.68 2.59 2.50
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.94 1.80 1.67 1.46 1.28
1.94 1.80 1.67 1.46 1.29
1.96 1.82 1.69 1.48 1.31
1.98 1.85 1.73 1.52 1.35
2.02 1.89 1.77 1.57 1.40
2.06 1.93 1.82 1.62 1.46
2.10 1.98 1.87 1.67 1.51
2.14 2.02 1.92 1.73 1.57
2.18 2.06 1.96 1.78 1.62
2.21 2.10 2.00 1.82 1.67
2.23 2.13 2.04 1.86 1.71
2.29 2.19 2.10 1.93 1.79
2.33 2.24 2.15 2.00 1.86
2.37 2.28 2.20 2.05 1.92
2.40 2.32 2.24 2.10 1.97
2.42 2.34 2.27 2.14 2.01
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
1.15 1.03 0.940 0.861 0.794
1.15 1.04 0.946 0.867 0.800
1.18 1.06 0.971 0.892 0.825
1.22 1.11 1.01 0.932 0.863
1.27 1.16 1.06 0.979 0.909
1.32 1.21 1.11 1.03 0.959
1.38 1.27 1.17 1.09 1.01
1.44 1.32 1.22 1.14 1.06
1.49 1.37 1.28 1.19 1.11
1.54 1.42 1.32 1.24 1.16
1.58 1.47 1.37 1.28 1.21
1.66 1.55 1.45 1.37 1.29
1.73 1.63 1.53 1.44 1.36
1.80 1.69 1.60 1.51 1.43
1.85 1.75 1.66 1.57 1.49
1.90 1.80 1.71 1.63 1.55
2.60 0.736 0.743 0.767 0.804 0.848 0.896 0.946 0.997 1.05 1.09 1.14 2.80 0.686 0.693 0.716 0.752 0.794 0.841 0.889 0.937 0.985 1.03 1.07 3.00 0.643 0.649 0.672 0.706 0.746 0.792 0.838 0.885 0.931 0.975 1.02
1.22 1.16 1.10
1.29 1.23 1.17
1.36 1.30 1.24
1.42 1.36 1.30
1.48 1.42 1.36
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 174
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-39 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 75°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l 75°
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
Pu kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
2.97 2.86 2.89 2.88 2.87
2.97 2.86 2.89 2.88 2.87
2.97 2.87 2.89 2.88 2.87
2.97 2.87 2.89 2.88 2.87
2.97 2.88 2.89 2.88 2.86
2.97 2.88 2.89 2.87 2.86
2.97 2.88 2.89 2.87 2.85
2.97 2.89 2.89 2.86 2.85
2.97 2.89 2.88 2.86 2.84
2.97 2.89 2.88 2.85 2.84
2.97 2.89 2.87 2.85 2.83
2.97 2.88 2.86 2.84 2.81
2.97 2.87 2.85 2.82 2.80
2.97 2.85 2.83 2.81 2.79
2.97 2.84 2.82 2.80 2.78
2.97 2.55 2.81 2.78 2.76
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.86 2.84 2.79 2.74 2.66
2.86 2.83 2.79 2.73 2.66
2.86 2.83 2.78 2.73 2.66
2.85 2.82 2.77 2.72 2.66
2.85 2.82 2.77 2.72 2.65
2.84 2.81 2.76 2.71 2.65
2.84 2.80 2.76 2.70 2.64
2.83 2.79 2.75 2.70 2.64
2.82 2.79 2.74 2.69 2.64
2.82 2.78 2.73 2.68 2.63
2.81 2.77 2.73 2.68 2.63
2.80 2.76 2.71 2.67 2.62
2.78 2.74 2.70 2.66 2.61
2.77 2.73 2.69 2.65 2.61
2.76 2.72 2.68 2.64 2.60
2.74 2.71 2.67 2.63 2.59
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
2.59 2.51 2.42 2.25 2.08
2.59 2.51 2.42 2.25 2.08
2.59 2.51 2.43 2.25 2.09
2.58 2.51 2.43 2.27 2.11
2.58 2.51 2.43 2.28 2.13
2.58 2.51 2.44 2.30 2.15
2.58 2.51 2.44 2.31 2.18
2.58 2.51 2.45 2.32 2.19
2.58 2.52 2.45 2.33 2.21
2.58 2.52 2.46 2.34 2.23
2.58 2.52 2.46 2.35 2.24
2.57 2.52 2.47 2.37 2.27
2.57 2.52 2.48 2.38 2.29
2.56 2.52 2.48 2.39 2.31
2.56 2.52 2.48 2.40 2.32
2.56 2.52 2.48 2.40 2.33
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
1.92 1.78 1.65 1.54 1.44
1.93 1.78 1.66 1.54 1.44
1.94 1.80 1.67 1.56 1.46
1.96 1.83 1.70 1.60 1.50
1.99 1.86 1.74 1.64 1.54
2.02 1.89 1.78 1.68 1.59
2.05 1.93 1.82 1.72 1.63
2.08 1.96 1.86 1.76 1.68
2.10 1.99 1.89 1.80 1.71
2.12 2.02 1.92 1.83 1.75
2.14 2.04 1.95 1.86 1.78
2.17 2.08 2.00 1.92 1.84
2.20 2.12 2.04 1.96 1.89
2.22 2.15 2.07 2.00 1.93
2.24 2.17 2.10 2.03 1.97
2.26 2.19 2.12 2.06 2.00
2.60 2.80 3.00
1.35 1.26 1.19
1.35 1.27 1.20
1.37 1.29 1.22
1.41 1.33 1.26
1.45 1.37 1.30
1.50 1.42 1.35
1.55 1.47 1.40
1.60 1.52 1.45
1.64 1.56 1.50
1.67 1.60 1.54
1.71 1.64 1.58
1.77 1.71 1.64
1.82 1.76 1.70
1.87 1.81 1.75
1.91 1.85 1.79
1.94 1.88 1.83
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 175
Table 8-40. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 0°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
2.78 2.78 2.75 2.64 2.48
3.20 3.07 3.05 2.95 2.79
3.62 3.42 3.37 3.25 3.10
4.04 3.78 3.71 3.57 3.40
4.45 4.15 4.06 3.91 3.72
4.87 4.53 4.42 4.25 4.04
5.29 4.91 4.78 4.59 4.38
5.71 5.30 5.15 4.94 4.71
6.12 5.69 5.52 5.30 5.06
6.54 6.08 5.89 5.66 5.40
6.96 6.47 6.27 6.02 5.75
7.80 7.25 7.02 6.75 6.46
8.63 8.03 7.78 7.49 7.18
9.47 10.3 11.1 8.82 9.61 10.4 8.54 9.31 10.1 8.23 8.98 9.74 7.91 8.65 9.39
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.32 2.00 1.72 1.50 1.32
2.61 2.26 1.95 1.70 1.50
2.92 2.54 2.20 1.92 1.70
3.22 2.83 2.47 2.17 1.93
3.52 3.12 2.75 2.44 2.17
3.83 3.41 3.03 2.70 2.43
4.15 3.71 3.31 2.97 2.68
4.47 4.01 3.59 3.24 2.93
4.80 4.32 3.89 3.52 3.20
5.14 4.64 4.19 3.80 3.47
5.48 4.96 4.50 4.09 3.75
6.17 5.62 5.13 4.70 4.33
6.88 6.30 5.78 5.33 4.93
7.59 6.99 6.46 5.98 5.56
8.32 7.70 7.14 6.64 6.20
9.05 8.42 7.84 7.32 6.86
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.17 1.05 0.957 0.806 0.695
1.33 1.20 1.09 0.916 0.790
1.52 1.37 1.24 1.05 0.908
1.73 1.56 1.42 1.21 1.05
1.95 1.77 1.62 1.38 1.20
2.20 2.00 1.83 1.57 1.37
2.43 2.23 2.05 1.76 1.54
2.67 2.45 2.26 1.95 1.72
2.92 2.69 2.49 2.15 1.89
3.18 2.93 2.72 2.36 2.08
3.45 3.18 2.96 2.57 2.27
4.00 3.71 3.45 3.02 2.68
4.58 4.26 3.98 3.50 3.12
5.18 4.84 4.53 4.00 3.58
5.80 5.44 5.10 4.53 4.06
6.44 6.05 5.69 5.08 4.57
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.611 0.544 0.491 0.447 0.410
0.694 0.619 0.558 0.509 0.467
0.800 0.714 0.645 0.588 0.540
0.923 0.825 0.746 0.680 0.625
1.06 0.950 0.860 0.785 0.721
1.21 1.09 0.984 0.898 0.827
1.37 1.23 1.12 1.02 0.939
1.53 1.37 1.25 1.14 1.05
1.69 1.52 1.38 1.27 1.17
1.86 1.68 1.53 1.40 1.29
2.03 1.84 1.67 1.54 1.42
2.40 2.18 1.99 1.83 1.69
2.80 2.54 2.33 2.14 1.99
3.23 2.93 2.69 2.48 2.30
3.67 3.35 3.08 2.84 2.64
4.15 3.79 3.49 3.22 3.00
2.60 0.379 0.431 0.499 0.578 0.667 0.765 0.869 0.977 1.09 1.20 2.80 0.352 0.401 0.464 0.538 0.621 0.712 0.809 0.911 1.01 1.12 3.00 0.329 0.375 0.434 0.503 0.580 0.666 0.757 0.853 0.949 1.05
1.32 1.23 1.16
1.57 1.47 1.38
1.85 1.73 1.62
2.15 2.01 1.89
2.46 2.31 2.17
2.80 2.63 2.47
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.8
2.0
8 - 176
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-40 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 15°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
15°
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
2.97 2.84 2.76 2.63 2.48
3.38 3.16 3.10 2.96 2.79
3.79 3.52 3.44 3.30 3.12
4.20 3.89 3.79 3.64 3.45
4.61 4.28 4.14 3.98 3.78
5.02 4.66 4.51 4.32 4.11
5.43 5.05 4.87 4.67 4.45
5.84 5.43 5.24 5.02 4.78
6.25 5.83 5.61 5.37 5.13
6.66 6.22 5.98 5.73 5.47
7.07 6.62 6.35 6.09 5.82
7.89 7.41 7.11 6.82 6.53
8.71 8.20 7.86 7.55 7.25
9.54 10.4 11.2 8.99 9.79 10.6 8.63 9.41 10.2 8.30 9.05 9.81 7.98 8.72 9.46
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.32 2.01 1.74 1.52 1.34
2.61 2.26 1.96 1.72 1.52
2.92 2.54 2.21 1.94 1.72
3.24 2.84 2.48 2.19 1.95
3.57 3.15 2.77 2.46 2.19
3.89 3.46 3.07 2.74 2.46
4.22 3.77 3.37 3.03 2.73
4.54 4.08 3.66 3.30 3.00
4.88 4.39 3.96 3.59 3.27
5.21 4.71 4.27 3.88 3.55
5.55 5.04 4.58 4.18 3.83
6.24 5.70 5.21 4.79 4.42
6.95 6.38 5.87 5.42 5.03
7.66 7.07 6.54 6.07 5.66
8.39 7.78 7.23 6.74 6.31
9.13 8.50 7.93 7.43 6.97
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.20 1.08 0.979 0.826 0.714
1.36 1.22 1.11 0.938 0.810
1.54 1.39 1.27 1.07 0.930
1.75 1.58 1.45 1.23 1.07
1.98 1.80 1.65 1.41 1.23
2.22 2.03 1.87 1.60 1.40
2.48 2.27 2.09 1.81 1.58
2.74 2.52 2.32 2.01 1.77
3.00 2.76 2.55 2.21 1.95
3.26 3.01 2.79 2.43 2.14
3.53 3.26 3.03 2.65 2.34
4.09 3.80 3.54 3.10 2.76
4.67 4.36 4.07 3.59 3.20
5.28 4.94 4.63 4.10 3.67
5.91 5.54 5.21 4.64 4.16
6.55 6.16 5.81 5.19 4.68
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.628 0.560 0.506 0.461 0.423
0.713 0.636 0.575 0.524 0.481
0.820 0.733 0.663 0.605 0.556
0.946 0.846 0.766 0.699 0.643
1.09 0.974 0.882 0.805 0.741
1.24 1.11 1.01 0.922 0.849
1.41 1.26 1.15 1.05 0.965
1.57 1.42 1.29 1.18 1.09
1.74 1.57 1.43 1.31 1.21
1.91 1.73 1.57 1.45 1.33
2.09 1.89 1.73 1.59 1.47
2.48 2.24 2.05 1.89 1.75
2.89 2.62 2.40 2.21 2.05
3.32 3.02 2.77 2.56 2.38
3.78 3.45 3.17 2.93 2.72
4.26 3.89 3.59 3.32 3.09
2.60 0.391 0.445 0.514 0.595 0.686 0.786 0.894 1.01 1.12 1.24 2.80 0.363 0.414 0.478 0.554 0.638 0.732 0.832 0.938 1.05 1.16 3.00 0.339 0.386 0.447 0.518 0.597 0.684 0.779 0.878 0.981 1.09
1.36 1.27 1.19
1.63 1.52 1.43
1.91 1.79 1.68
2.22 2.07 1.95
2.54 2.38 2.24
2.89 2.71 2.55
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1.8
2.0
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 177
Table 8-40 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 30°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
30°
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.28 3.03 2.87 2.72 2.57
3.67 3.45 3.25 3.07 2.88
4.06 3.85 3.63 3.43 3.22
4.45 4.24 4.02 3.80 3.57
4.84 4.62 4.40 4.17 3.93
5.23 5.00 4.77 4.53 4.29
5.62 5.38 5.15 4.89 4.65
6.01 5.76 5.52 5.25 4.99
6.40 6.14 5.89 5.61 5.34
6.79 6.52 6.26 5.97 5.69
7.18 6.90 6.64 6.34 6.05
7.96 7.67 7.39 7.09 6.77
8.74 8.44 8.15 7.84 7.52
9.53 10.3 9.22 10.0 8.93 9.70 8.60 9.37 8.27 9.04
11.1 10.8 10.5 10.2 9.81
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.41 2.11 1.84 1.62 1.44
2.70 2.36 2.07 1.83 1.63
3.02 2.64 2.32 2.06 1.84
3.35 2.95 2.60 2.31 2.07
3.70 3.27 2.90 2.59 2.33
4.05 3.60 3.21 2.88 2.60
4.40 3.94 3.53 3.18 2.89
4.75 4.28 3.86 3.50 3.19
5.09 4.61 4.19 3.82 3.50
5.43 4.94 4.50 4.12 3.79
5.77 5.27 4.83 4.43 4.09
6.48 5.95 5.48 5.07 4.70
7.21 6.65 6.16 5.73 5.33
7.95 7.36 6.85 6.40 5.99
8.71 8.09 7.56 7.09 6.66
9.48 8.85 8.28 7.79 7.35
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.30 1.17 1.07 0.907 0.786
1.46 1.32 1.21 1.03 0.890
1.65 1.50 1.37 1.17 1.02
1.87 1.70 1.56 1.34 1.17
2.11 1.93 1.78 1.53 1.34
2.37 2.18 2.01 1.73 1.52
2.64 2.43 2.25 1.95 1.72
2.93 2.70 2.51 2.18 1.93
3.22 2.98 2.77 2.41 2.14
3.50 3.25 3.02 2.65 2.34
3.79 3.52 3.28 2.88 2.56
4.38 4.08 3.82 3.37 3.01
4.98 4.67 4.38 3.89 3.49
5.61 5.28 4.97 4.44 3.99
6.26 5.90 5.57 5.00 4.52
6.93 6.55 6.20 5.59 5.07
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.693 0.619 0.559 0.510 0.469
0.785 0.703 0.635 0.579 0.533
0.901 0.808 0.731 0.668 0.614
1.04 0.931 0.844 0.771 0.710
1.19 1.07 0.970 0.887 0.818
1.36 1.22 1.11 1.01 0.935
1.53 1.38 1.26 1.15 1.06
1.72 1.55 1.41 1.30 1.20
1.91 1.73 1.57 1.45 1.34
2.10 1.90 1.74 1.60 1.48
2.30 2.08 1.91 1.75 1.62
2.72 2.47 2.26 2.08 1.93
3.16 2.88 2.64 2.44 2.27
3.62 3.31 3.05 2.82 2.62
4.12 3.77 3.48 3.22 3.00
4.63 4.25 3.93 3.64 3.40
2.60 0.433 0.493 0.569 0.658 0.758 0.867 0.984 1.11 1.24 2.80 0.403 0.458 0.529 0.613 0.706 0.808 0.918 1.03 1.16 3.00 0.376 0.428 0.495 0.573 0.661 0.757 0.860 0.969 1.08
1.37 1.28 1.20
1.51 1.41 1.32
1.80 1.68 1.58
2.11 1.98 1.86
2.45 2.29 2.16
2.80 2.63 2.48
3.18 2.99 2.82
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 178
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-40 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 45°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
45°
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.61 3.37 3.13 2.94 2.77
3.97 3.74 3.52 3.29 3.10
4.33 4.11 3.89 3.65 3.44
4.70 4.48 4.26 4.02 3.79
5.06 4.84 4.62 4.38 4.14
5.42 5.21 4.99 4.75 4.51
5.78 5.58 5.36 5.12 4.87
6.14 5.94 5.74 5.50 5.25
6.50 6.31 6.11 5.88 5.63
6.86 6.68 6.49 6.26 6.01
7.22 7.04 6.86 6.64 6.40
7.95 7.78 7.61 7.39 7.16
8.67 8.52 8.36 8.15 7.92
9.39 10.1 9.25 9.99 9.11 9.85 8.91 9.66 8.68 9.45
10.8 10.7 10.6 10.4 10.2
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.61 2.32 2.06 1.84 1.66
2.91 2.59 2.30 2.06 1.86
3.24 2.87 2.57 2.30 2.08
3.57 3.18 2.86 2.58 2.34
3.92 3.51 3.16 2.87 2.61
4.27 3.85 3.49 3.17 2.91
4.63 4.20 3.82 3.50 3.22
5.00 4.55 4.17 3.83 3.54
5.38 4.92 4.52 4.18 3.88
5.76 5.29 4.89 4.53 4.22
6.15 5.67 5.26 4.89 4.56
6.91 6.42 5.97 5.57 5.22
7.67 7.18 6.71 6.28 5.90
8.44 7.95 7.47 7.02 6.62
9.21 8.72 8.24 7.78 7.35
9.98 9.50 9.01 8.54 8.10
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.50 1.37 1.26 1.08 0.938
1.69 1.54 1.41 1.21 1.06
1.90 1.74 1.60 1.38 1.21
2.13 1.96 1.81 1.57 1.38
2.40 2.21 2.05 1.78 1.57
2.68 2.48 2.30 2.01 1.78
2.98 2.76 2.58 2.26 2.01
3.29 3.06 2.86 2.52 2.24
3.61 3.37 3.15 2.78 2.49
3.93 3.68 3.45 3.06 2.74
4.27 4.00 3.76 3.34 3.00
4.91 4.62 4.35 3.90 3.52
5.56 5.25 4.97 4.48 4.06
6.25 5.91 5.61 5.07 4.62
6.97 6.61 6.28 5.70 5.21
7.70 7.32 6.97 6.35 5.81
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.831 0.745 0.675 0.617 0.568
0.939 0.843 0.764 0.699 0.644
1.07 0.966 0.877 0.804 0.741
1.23 1.11 1.01 0.925 0.854
1.41 1.27 1.16 1.06 0.981
1.60 1.45 1.32 1.21 1.12
1.80 1.63 1.49 1.37 1.27
2.02 1.83 1.67 1.54 1.43
2.24 2.04 1.87 1.72 1.59
2.48 2.25 2.06 1.90 1.77
2.71 2.48 2.27 2.10 1.95
3.20 2.93 2.69 2.49 2.32
3.70 3.40 3.14 2.91 2.71
4.23 3.90 3.60 3.35 3.13
4.78 4.42 4.09 3.81 3.57
5.36 4.96 4.61 4.30 4.03
2.60 0.526 0.597 0.687 0.792 0.911 1.04 1.18 2.80 0.489 0.556 0.641 0.739 0.850 0.972 1.10 3.00 0.458 0.520 0.600 0.693 0.796 0.911 1.03
1.33 1.24 1.17
1.48 1.39 1.30
1.65 1.54 1.45
1.82 1.70 1.60
2.16 2.03 1.91
2.54 2.38 2.24
2.93 2.75 2.60
3.35 3.15 2.97
3.78 3.57 3.37
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 179
Table 8-40 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 60°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
60°
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.91 3.65 3.46 3.27 3.10
4.23 3.97 3.78 3.60 3.42
4.56 4.30 4.11 3.92 3.74
4.89 4.64 4.45 4.26 4.07
5.22 4.99 4.80 4.61 4.41
5.54 5.35 5.17 4.97 4.78
5.87 5.70 5.53 5.35 5.15
6.20 6.05 5.90 5.72 5.53
6.53 6.40 6.26 6.09 5.92
6.85 6.74 6.61 6.46 6.29
7.18 7.08 6.97 6.82 6.67
7.84 7.75 7.66 7.54 7.40
8.49 8.42 8.34 8.24 8.12
9.15 9.08 9.02 8.93 8.83
9.80 9.74 9.69 9.61 9.52
10.5 10.4 10.4 10.3 10.2
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.95 2.68 2.44 2.24 2.05
3.25 2.96 2.70 2.47 2.28
3.57 3.26 2.98 2.74 2.53
3.89 3.57 3.29 3.04 2.81
4.23 3.90 3.61 3.35 3.12
4.59 4.24 3.95 3.69 3.45
4.97 4.61 4.31 4.04 3.79
5.35 4.99 4.68 4.40 4.14
5.74 5.38 5.06 4.77 4.50
6.12 5.77 5.45 5.15 4.87
6.50 6.16 5.84 5.54 5.25
7.25 6.93 6.61 6.31 6.02
7.98 7.69 7.37 7.08 6.79
8.70 8.43 8.12 7.83 7.55
9.41 10.1 9.16 9.87 8.87 9.60 8.58 9.31 8.30 9.04
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.89 1.75 1.62 1.42 1.25
2.10 1.95 1.81 1.59 1.41
2.34 2.18 2.03 1.79 1.59
2.62 2.44 2.29 2.02 1.81
2.92 2.73 2.56 2.28 2.04
3.23 3.04 2.86 2.55 2.30
3.56 3.36 3.17 2.84 2.57
3.91 3.69 3.49 3.15 2.85
4.26 4.03 3.82 3.46 3.14
4.62 4.38 4.17 3.78 3.45
4.99 4.74 4.52 4.11 3.76
5.75 5.49 5.24 4.80 4.41
6.51 6.24 5.98 5.50 5.07
7.27 6.99 6.72 6.21 5.75
8.02 7.74 7.46 6.93 6.44
8.76 8.48 8.20 7.66 7.16
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
1.12 1.01 0.922 0.847 0.782
1.26 1.14 1.04 0.956 0.884
1.43 1.30 1.19 1.09 1.01
1.63 1.48 1.36 1.25 1.16
1.85 1.69 1.55 1.43 1.33
2.09 1.91 1.75 1.62 1.51
2.34 2.14 1.97 1.83 1.70
2.60 2.39 2.20 2.04 1.91
2.88 2.65 2.45 2.27 2.12
3.16 2.92 2.70 2.51 2.35
3.46 3.20 2.97 2.76 2.58
4.08 3.78 3.52 3.28 3.08
4.69 4.36 4.08 3.82 3.59
5.34 4.97 4.65 4.37 4.11
6.01 5.61 5.26 4.94 4.66
6.70 6.27 5.90 5.55 5.24
2.60 0.726 0.821 0.943 1.08 1.24 2.80 0.677 0.767 0.881 1.01 1.16 3.00 0.635 0.719 0.827 0.952 1.09
1.41 1.32 1.24
1.59 1.49 1.40
1.78 1.67 1.58
1.99 1.87 1.76
2.20 2.07 1.95
2.42 2.28 2.15
2.89 2.73 2.58
3.38 3.20 3.03
3.88 3.68 3.49
4.40 4.18 3.97
4.96 4.70 4.47
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 180
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-40 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 75°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
75°
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
4.11 3.88 3.76 3.64 3.53
4.40 4.17 4.04 3.92 3.80
4.70 4.49 4.36 4.23 4.11
5.00 4.81 4.69 4.57 4.45
5.29 5.14 5.03 4.92 4.81
5.59 5.45 5.36 5.26 5.16
5.89 5.76 5.69 5.60 5.50
6.18 6.07 6.00 5.92 5.84
6.48 6.36 6.31 6.24 6.16
6.78 6.66 6.61 6.55 6.48
7.07 6.96 6.91 6.86 6.80
7.67 7.53 7.50 7.46 7.41
8.26 8.11 8.09 8.05 8.01
8.85 8.69 8.67 8.64 8.60
9.45 10.0 9.27 9.84 9.25 9.83 9.23 9.81 9.19 9.78
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
3.43 3.24 3.07 2.91 2.77
3.70 3.51 3.34 3.17 3.02
4.00 3.80 3.63 3.46 3.31
4.34 4.14 3.95 3.78 3.63
4.70 4.49 4.31 4.13 3.97
5.05 4.86 4.67 4.49 4.33
5.40 5.22 5.04 4.86 4.70
5.75 5.57 5.40 5.23 5.07
6.08 5.91 5.75 5.60 5.44
6.41 6.25 6.10 5.95 5.80
6.72 6.57 6.43 6.30 6.16
7.35 7.22 7.08 6.96 6.84
7.96 7.85 7.71 7.60 7.50
8.56 8.46 8.34 8.23 8.13
9.16 9.07 8.96 8.84 8.75
9.75 9.67 9.57 9.46 9.36
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
2.63 2.50 2.38 2.17 1.99
2.87 2.74 2.62 2.39 2.20
3.16 3.02 2.89 2.66 2.45
3.48 3.34 3.20 2.96 2.74
3.81 3.67 3.53 3.28 3.05
4.17 4.02 3.87 3.61 3.38
4.53 4.38 4.23 3.96 3.71
4.91 4.75 4.60 4.32 4.06
5.28 5.13 4.98 4.69 4.42
5.65 5.50 5.35 5.06 4.79
6.01 5.87 5.72 5.44 5.16
6.72 6.58 6.45 6.18 5.91
7.39 7.27 7.15 6.90 6.64
8.04 7.93 7.83 7.60 7.36
8.66 8.57 8.48 8.28 8.06
9.27 9.20 9.11 8.93 8.74
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
1.83 1.69 1.57 1.46 1.37
2.03 1.88 1.75 1.63 1.53
2.27 2.11 1.97 1.84 1.73
2.54 2.37 2.22 2.08 1.96
2.84 2.66 2.49 2.34 2.21
3.16 2.96 2.79 2.63 2.48
3.49 3.28 3.10 2.92 2.77
3.82 3.61 3.41 3.23 3.07
4.17 3.95 3.74 3.55 3.37
4.53 4.29 4.08 3.88 3.69
4.90 4.65 4.43 4.22 4.02
5.64 5.39 5.15 4.92 4.71
6.39 6.13 5.88 5.64 5.42
7.12 6.87 6.62 6.37 6.14
7.83 7.59 7.34 7.10 6.87
8.53 8.30 8.07 7.83 7.59
2.60 2.80 3.00
1.28 1.21 1.14
1.44 1.36 1.28
1.63 1.54 1.46
1.85 1.75 1.66
2.09 1.98 1.88
2.35 2.23 2.12
2.62 2.50 2.38
2.91 2.78 2.65
3.21 3.07 2.92
3.52 3.36 3.22
3.84 3.67 3.52
4.51 4.32 4.14
5.20 5.00 4.80
5.91 5.70 5.49
6.63 6.41 6.19
7.36 7.13 6.91
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2.0
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 181
Table 8-41. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 0°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
Pu
kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
4.18 3.24 2.92 2.65 2.41
4.45 3.51 3.18 2.89 2.64
4.73 3.81 3.49 3.19 2.93
5.01 4.15 3.81 3.52 3.25
5.29 4.51 4.16 3.85 3.58
5.57 4.87 4.53 4.21 3.92
5.85 5.22 4.89 4.58 4.28
6.12 5.55 5.25 4.95 4.65
6.40 5.87 5.60 5.31 5.02
6.68 6.17 5.94 5.67 5.39
6.96 6.47 6.27 6.02 5.75
7.52 7.03 6.89 6.69 6.45
8.07 7.56 7.47 7.32 7.12
8.63 8.08 8.03 7.92 7.76
9.19 8.59 8.58 8.50 8.37
9.74 9.09 9.11 9.06 8.96
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.20 1.86 1.60 1.40 1.24
2.43 2.07 1.79 1.57 1.39
2.70 2.31 2.01 1.77 1.58
3.00 2.59 2.27 2.01 1.79
3.33 2.90 2.55 2.26 2.03
3.66 3.22 2.85 2.54 2.28
4.01 3.54 3.16 2.83 2.56
4.37 3.88 3.48 3.13 2.84
4.74 4.23 3.80 3.44 3.13
5.11 4.60 4.15 3.76 3.44
5.48 4.96 4.50 4.09 3.75
6.20 5.70 5.22 4.79 4.40
6.90 6.43 5.95 5.50 5.09
7.57 7.14 6.68 6.22 5.80
8.21 7.83 7.39 6.95 6.51
8.83 8.49 8.09 7.66 7.23
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.11 1.00 0.914 0.777 0.674
1.25 1.13 1.03 0.880 0.764
1.42 1.29 1.18 1.01 0.879
1.62 1.48 1.35 1.16 1.01
1.84 1.68 1.54 1.32 1.16
2.07 1.89 1.74 1.50 1.31
2.32 2.13 1.96 1.69 1.48
2.59 2.38 2.19 1.89 1.67
2.87 2.64 2.44 2.11 1.86
3.15 2.91 2.69 2.34 2.06
3.45 3.18 2.96 2.57 2.27
4.07 3.77 3.51 3.08 2.73
4.72 4.39 4.10 3.61 3.21
5.41 5.05 4.73 4.18 3.73
6.11 5.73 5.38 4.78 4.28
6.82 6.42 6.06 5.40 4.86
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.594 0.531 0.481 0.439 0.404
0.675 0.604 0.547 0.499 0.459
0.777 0.696 0.630 0.576 0.530
0.895 0.803 0.728 0.665 0.612
1.03 0.921 0.836 0.765 0.705
1.17 1.05 0.953 0.873 0.805
1.32 1.19 1.08 0.990 0.913
1.48 1.34 1.22 1.11 1.03
1.66 1.49 1.36 1.25 1.15
1.84 1.66 1.51 1.39 1.28
2.03 1.84 1.67 1.54 1.42
2.44 2.21 2.02 1.86 1.72
2.89 2.62 2.39 2.20 2.04
3.36 3.06 2.80 2.58 2.39
3.87 3.52 3.23 2.97 2.76
4.39 4.00 3.67 3.39 3.14
2.60 0.374 0.425 0.491 0.567 0.653 0.747 0.847 0.955 1.07 1.19 2.80 0.348 0.396 0.457 0.529 0.608 0.696 0.790 0.890 0.998 1.11 3.00 0.325 0.370 0.428 0.495 0.569 0.651 0.740 0.834 0.935 1.04
1.32 1.23 1.16
1.60 1.49 1.40
1.90 1.77 1.66
2.22 2.08 1.95
2.57 2.40 2.25
2.93 2.74 2.57
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 182
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-41 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 15°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
Pu
ex = a l
15°
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
4.11 3.29 2.97 2.70 2.46
4.40 3.56 3.24 2.95 2.70
4.70 3.85 3.53 3.24 2.98
5.00 4.19 3.85 3.56 3.29
5.29 4.55 4.20 3.89 3.63
5.59 4.91 4.56 4.25 3.97
5.89 5.26 4.93 4.62 4.33
6.18 5.61 5.30 4.99 4.70
6.48 5.95 5.66 5.37 5.08
6.78 6.29 6.01 5.73 5.45
7.07 6.62 6.35 6.09 5.82
7.67 7.26 7.01 6.78 6.54
8.26 7.88 7.65 7.45 7.23
8.85 8.49 8.27 8.08 7.90
9.45 10.0 9.09 9.69 8.89 9.51 8.71 9.31 8.54 9.17
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.25 1.91 1.65 1.44 1.28
2.48 2.12 1.83 1.61 1.43
2.75 2.36 2.06 1.82 1.62
3.05 2.65 2.32 2.06 1.84
3.38 2.95 2.60 2.32 2.08
3.71 3.27 2.90 2.60 2.34
4.06 3.61 3.22 2.89 2.62
4.43 3.95 3.54 3.20 2.91
4.80 4.30 3.88 3.52 3.21
5.17 4.67 4.22 3.84 3.51
5.55 5.04 4.58 4.18 3.83
6.29 5.78 5.31 4.88 4.49
7.01 6.52 6.04 5.60 5.19
7.70 7.25 6.78 6.33 5.90
8.36 7.95 7.51 7.06 6.62
9.01 8.64 8.23 7.78 7.34
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.15 1.04 0.945 0.803 0.697
1.29 1.17 1.07 0.908 0.789
1.46 1.33 1.22 1.04 0.907
1.67 1.52 1.39 1.19 1.04
1.89 1.72 1.59 1.36 1.19
2.13 1.95 1.79 1.54 1.35
2.38 2.19 2.02 1.74 1.53
2.65 2.44 2.25 1.95 1.72
2.93 2.70 2.50 2.17 1.91
3.23 2.98 2.76 2.40 2.12
3.53 3.26 3.03 2.65 2.34
4.15 3.86 3.60 3.16 2.80
4.82 4.49 4.19 3.70 3.30
5.50 5.15 4.83 4.27 3.82
6.21 5.83 5.48 4.86 4.35
6.92 6.52 6.15 5.48 4.92
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.615 0.550 0.497 0.454 0.418
0.698 0.625 0.565 0.516 0.475
0.803 0.719 0.651 0.595 0.548
0.924 0.829 0.752 0.687 0.633
1.06 0.951 0.863 0.790 0.728
1.21 1.08 0.984 0.902 0.832
1.36 1.23 1.12 1.02 0.943
1.53 1.38 1.26 1.15 1.06
1.71 1.54 1.40 1.29 1.19
1.90 1.71 1.56 1.43 1.32
2.09 1.89 1.73 1.59 1.47
2.51 2.28 2.08 1.91 1.77
2.97 2.69 2.47 2.27 2.10
3.45 3.13 2.87 2.65 2.45
3.93 3.58 3.29 3.04 2.82
4.45 4.06 3.73 3.45 3.20
2.60 0.387 0.440 0.508 0.586 0.675 0.772 0.875 0.987 1.11 1.23 2.80 0.360 0.409 0.473 0.546 0.629 0.719 0.817 0.921 1.03 1.15 3.00 0.336 0.383 0.442 0.511 0.589 0.674 0.765 0.863 0.967 1.08
1.36 1.27 1.19
1.65 1.54 1.44
1.96 1.83 1.72
2.28 2.14 2.01
2.63 2.46 2.31
2.99 2.80 2.63
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
2.0
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 183
Table 8-41 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 30°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
Pu
30° kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.91 3.37 3.07 2.82 2.60
4.23 3.70 3.38 3.11 2.87
4.56 4.02 3.71 3.42 3.16
4.89 4.36 4.03 3.74 3.47
5.22 4.71 4.38 4.07 3.80
5.54 5.08 4.74 4.42 4.14
5.87 5.45 5.12 4.80 4.51
6.20 5.81 5.50 5.18 4.88
6.53 6.18 5.88 5.57 5.27
6.85 6.55 6.26 5.96 5.66
7.18 6.90 6.64 6.34 6.05
7.84 7.61 7.37 7.10 6.82
8.49 8.30 8.10 7.85 7.58
9.15 8.98 8.80 8.58 8.33
9.80 9.65 9.50 9.30 9.06
10.5 10.3 10.2 10.0 9.79
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.40 2.06 1.80 1.58 1.41
2.65 2.29 2.00 1.76 1.57
2.93 2.55 2.23 1.98 1.77
3.24 2.83 2.50 2.23 2.01
3.56 3.14 2.79 2.50 2.26
3.89 3.46 3.10 2.79 2.54
4.25 3.81 3.42 3.10 2.82
4.62 4.16 3.76 3.42 3.13
5.00 4.52 4.11 3.75 3.44
5.39 4.89 4.46 4.09 3.76
5.77 5.27 4.83 4.43 4.09
6.55 6.04 5.57 5.15 4.77
7.31 6.81 6.33 5.88 5.47
8.06 7.57 7.09 6.61 6.18
8.81 8.32 7.84 7.35 6.90
9.55 9.06 8.58 8.09 7.63
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.26 1.15 1.05 0.891 0.774
1.42 1.29 1.18 1.01 0.875
1.60 1.46 1.34 1.15 1.00
1.82 1.66 1.53 1.32 1.15
2.06 1.89 1.74 1.50 1.32
2.31 2.13 1.96 1.70 1.49
2.59 2.38 2.20 1.91 1.69
2.87 2.65 2.46 2.14 1.89
3.17 2.93 2.72 2.38 2.10
3.47 3.22 3.00 2.62 2.33
3.79 3.52 3.28 2.88 2.56
4.44 4.14 3.87 3.42 3.05
5.10 4.77 4.47 3.97 3.56
5.78 5.42 5.09 4.54 4.08
6.48 6.09 5.74 5.13 4.63
7.19 6.79 6.41 5.76 5.20
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.684 0.612 0.554 0.506 0.465
0.774 0.694 0.629 0.574 0.528
0.889 0.798 0.723 0.662 0.609
1.02 0.919 0.834 0.763 0.703
1.17 1.05 0.957 0.877 0.809
1.33 1.20 1.09 1.00 0.924
1.51 1.36 1.24 1.14 1.05
1.69 1.53 1.39 1.28 1.18
1.88 1.70 1.55 1.43 1.32
2.09 1.89 1.73 1.59 1.47
2.30 2.08 1.91 1.75 1.62
2.75 2.50 2.29 2.11 1.95
3.22 2.94 2.69 2.48 2.30
3.70 3.38 3.11 2.87 2.67
4.21 3.86 3.55 3.29 3.06
4.74 4.35 4.01 3.72 3.47
2.60 0.431 0.489 0.565 0.652 0.750 0.857 0.972 1.10 1.23 2.80 0.401 0.456 0.526 0.608 0.699 0.800 0.908 1.02 1.15 3.00 0.375 0.426 0.492 0.569 0.654 0.749 0.851 0.959 1.07
1.36 1.27 1.20
1.51 1.41 1.32
1.82 1.70 1.60
2.15 2.01 1.89
2.49 2.34 2.20
2.86 2.68 2.52
3.24 3.05 2.87
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 184
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-41 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 45°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
45° Pu
kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.61 3.37 3.13 2.94 2.77
3.97 3.74 3.52 3.29 3.10
4.33 4.11 3.89 3.65 3.44
4.70 4.48 4.26 4.02 3.79
5.06 4.84 4.62 4.38 4.14
5.42 5.21 4.99 4.75 4.51
5.78 5.58 5.36 5.12 4.87
6.14 5.94 5.74 5.50 5.25
6.50 6.31 6.11 5.88 5.63
6.86 6.68 6.49 6.26 6.01
7.22 7.04 6.86 6.64 6.40
7.95 7.78 7.61 7.39 7.16
8.67 8.52 8.36 8.15 7.92
9.39 10.1 9.25 9.98 9.11 9.85 8.91 9.67 8.68 9.45
10.8 10.7 10.6 10.4 10.2
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.61 2.32 2.06 1.84 1.66
2.91 2.59 2.30 2.06 1.86
3.24 2.87 2.57 2.30 2.08
3.57 3.18 2.86 2.58 2.34
3.92 3.51 3.16 2.87 2.61
4.27 3.85 3.49 3.17 2.91
4.63 4.20 3.82 3.50 3.22
5.00 4.55 4.17 3.83 3.54
5.38 4.92 4.52 4.18 3.88
5.76 5.29 4.89 4.53 4.22
6.15 5.67 5.26 4.89 4.56
6.91 6.42 5.97 5.57 5.22
7.67 7.18 6.71 6.28 5.90
8.44 7.95 7.47 7.02 6.62
9.21 8.72 8.24 7.78 7.35
9.98 9.50 9.01 8.54 8.10
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.50 1.37 1.26 1.08 0.938
1.69 1.54 1.41 1.21 1.06
1.90 1.74 1.60 1.38 1.21
2.13 1.96 1.81 1.57 1.38
2.40 2.21 2.05 1.78 1.57
2.68 2.48 2.30 2.01 1.78
2.98 2.76 2.58 2.26 2.01
3.29 3.06 2.86 2.52 2.24
3.61 3.37 3.15 2.78 2.49
3.93 3.68 3.45 3.06 2.74
4.27 4.00 3.76 3.34 3.00
4.91 4.62 4.35 3.90 3.52
5.56 5.25 4.97 4.48 4.06
6.25 5.91 5.61 5.07 4.62
6.97 6.61 6.28 5.70 5.21
7.70 7.32 6.97 6.35 5.81
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.831 0.745 0.675 0.617 0.568
0.939 0.843 0.764 0.699 0.644
1.07 0.966 0.877 0.804 0.741
1.23 1.11 1.01 0.925 0.854
1.41 1.27 1.16 1.06 0.981
1.60 1.45 1.32 1.21 1.12
1.80 1.63 1.49 1.37 1.27
2.02 1.83 1.67 1.54 1.43
2.24 2.04 1.87 1.72 1.59
2.48 2.25 2.06 1.90 1.77
2.71 2.48 2.27 2.10 1.95
3.20 2.93 2.69 2.49 2.32
3.70 3.40 3.14 2.91 2.71
4.23 3.90 3.60 3.35 3.13
4.78 4.42 4.09 3.81 3.57
5.36 4.96 4.61 4.30 4.03
2.60 0.526 0.597 0.687 0.792 0.911 1.04 1.18 2.80 0.489 0.556 0.641 0.739 0.850 0.972 1.10 3.00 0.458 0.520 0.600 0.693 0.796 0.911 1.03
1.33 1.24 1.17
1.48 1.39 1.30
1.65 1.54 1.45
1.82 1.70 1.60
2.16 2.03 1.91
2.54 2.38 2.24
2.93 2.75 2.60
3.35 3.15 2.97
3.78 3.57 3.37
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 185
Table 8-41 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 60°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l 60°
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
Pu
kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
3.28 3.20 3.10 2.98 2.89
3.67 3.59 3.50 3.38 3.27
4.06 3.98 3.90 3.79 3.66
4.45 4.37 4.29 4.17 4.04
4.84 4.76 4.67 4.56 4.43
5.23 5.14 5.05 4.94 4.80
5.62 5.53 5.43 5.31 5.17
6.01 5.92 5.82 5.69 5.55
6.40 6.30 6.20 6.07 5.92
6.79 6.69 6.58 6.45 6.29
7.18 7.08 6.96 6.83 6.67
7.96 7.86 7.74 7.59 7.43
8.74 8.63 8.51 8.36 8.19
9.53 10.3 9.41 10.2 9.29 10.1 9.13 9.91 8.96 9.74
11.1 11.0 10.9 10.7 10.5
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.80 2.63 2.44 2.27 2.09
3.16 2.96 2.74 2.54 2.35
3.54 3.30 3.06 2.84 2.63
3.92 3.66 3.40 3.16 2.93
4.29 4.02 3.75 3.49 3.25
4.66 4.38 4.10 3.83 3.58
5.02 4.74 4.46 4.18 3.92
5.39 5.09 4.80 4.53 4.26
5.76 5.44 5.14 4.86 4.59
6.13 5.80 5.49 5.20 4.92
6.50 6.16 5.84 5.54 5.25
7.25 6.89 6.54 6.23 5.93
8.01 7.64 7.28 6.93 6.63
8.77 8.40 8.02 7.66 7.34
9.55 10.3 9.17 9.94 8.78 9.56 8.42 9.18 8.07 8.82
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.94 1.80 1.67 1.46 1.28
2.18 2.02 1.88 1.64 1.45
2.44 2.27 2.11 1.85 1.64
2.73 2.54 2.37 2.09 1.86
3.03 2.83 2.65 2.35 2.10
3.35 3.14 2.95 2.62 2.35
3.68 3.46 3.26 2.91 2.63
4.01 3.78 3.58 3.21 2.91
4.34 4.11 3.90 3.52 3.20
4.66 4.43 4.21 3.82 3.48
4.99 4.74 4.52 4.11 3.76
5.65 5.40 5.16 4.73 4.35
6.34 6.07 5.82 5.36 4.96
7.04 6.76 6.50 6.02 5.58
7.75 7.46 7.19 6.69 6.23
8.49 8.18 7.90 7.38 6.89
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
1.15 1.03 0.940 0.861 0.794
1.30 1.17 1.06 0.974 0.899
1.47 1.33 1.21 1.11 1.03
1.67 1.51 1.39 1.27 1.18
1.89 1.72 1.58 1.46 1.35
2.13 1.95 1.79 1.65 1.54
2.39 2.19 2.01 1.86 1.73
2.66 2.44 2.25 2.09 1.94
2.93 2.69 2.49 2.31 2.15
3.19 2.94 2.72 2.53 2.36
3.46 3.20 2.97 2.76 2.58
4.01 3.72 3.47 3.24 3.03
4.60 4.28 3.99 3.74 3.52
5.20 4.85 4.55 4.27 4.02
5.82 5.45 5.12 4.82 4.55
6.47 6.07 5.72 5.40 5.11
2.60 0.736 0.834 0.956 1.10 1.26 2.80 0.686 0.778 0.893 1.03 1.18 3.00 0.643 0.729 0.837 0.964 1.11
1.43 1.34 1.26
1.62 1.52 1.43
1.82 1.70 1.61
2.02 1.89 1.79
2.22 2.08 1.97
2.42 2.28 2.15
2.86 2.69 2.55
3.32 3.13 2.97
3.80 3.60 3.41
4.31 4.08 3.88
4.84 4.59 4.37
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 186
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-41 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 75°° φ R n = CC 1 D l
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
75° Pu
kl
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
2.97 2.86 2.89 2.88 2.87
3.38 3.27 3.24 3.19 3.17
3.79 3.67 3.65 3.61 3.57
4.20 4.08 4.06 4.02 3.98
4.61 4.49 4.47 4.43 4.38
5.02 4.90 4.87 4.83 4.79
5.43 5.31 5.28 5.24 5.19
5.84 5.72 5.69 5.64 5.59
6.25 6.14 6.10 6.05 5.99
6.66 6.55 6.50 6.45 6.39
7.07 6.96 6.91 6.86 6.80
7.89 7.78 7.72 7.67 7.60
8.71 8.60 8.54 8.48 8.40
9.54 9.42 9.36 9.29 9.21
10.4 10.2 10.2 10.1 10.0
11.2 11.1 11.0 10.9 10.8
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
2.86 2.84 2.79 2.74 2.66
3.17 3.16 3.13 3.07 3.00
3.54 3.51 3.47 3.42 3.34
3.93 3.88 3.83 3.76 3.68
4.33 4.26 4.19 4.11 4.02
4.73 4.64 4.56 4.47 4.37
5.13 5.02 4.93 4.83 4.72
5.53 5.41 5.30 5.19 5.07
5.93 5.79 5.68 5.56 5.43
6.33 6.18 6.05 5.93 5.79
6.73 6.57 6.43 6.30 6.16
7.52 7.36 7.20 7.04 6.89
8.32 8.15 7.96 7.80 7.63
9.12 8.94 8.75 8.56 8.38
9.92 9.73 9.53 9.33 9.14
10.7 10.5 10.3 10.1 9.90
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
2.59 2.51 2.42 2.25 2.08
2.91 2.82 2.73 2.53 2.35
3.25 3.15 3.05 2.84 2.63
3.59 3.49 3.38 3.15 2.94
3.93 3.82 3.71 3.48 3.25
4.26 4.15 4.03 3.80 3.57
4.61 4.49 4.37 4.12 3.88
4.95 4.83 4.70 4.44 4.19
5.30 5.17 5.03 4.77 4.51
5.66 5.52 5.38 5.10 4.83
6.01 5.87 5.72 5.44 5.16
6.74 6.58 6.42 6.12 5.83
7.47 7.30 7.14 6.82 6.52
8.21 8.04 7.86 7.53 7.22
8.96 8.78 8.60 8.26 7.93
9.71 9.52 9.34 8.99 8.65
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
1.92 1.78 1.65 1.54 1.44
2.17 2.01 1.87 1.74 1.63
2.44 2.26 2.11 1.97 1.84
2.73 2.54 2.37 2.22 2.08
3.04 2.84 2.65 2.49 2.34
3.35 3.14 2.95 2.77 2.61
3.65 3.43 3.24 3.06 2.89
3.95 3.73 3.53 3.34 3.17
4.26 4.04 3.82 3.63 3.44
4.58 4.34 4.12 3.92 3.73
4.90 4.65 4.43 4.22 4.02
5.55 5.30 5.05 4.83 4.62
6.23 5.96 5.70 5.47 5.24
6.92 6.63 6.37 6.12 5.89
7.62 7.33 7.05 6.79 6.55
8.33 8.03 7.75 7.48 7.23
2.60 2.80 3.00
1.35 1.26 1.19
1.52 1.43 1.35
1.73 1.63 1.53
1.95 1.84 1.74
2.20 2.08 1.97
2.47 2.34 2.22
2.74 2.60 2.48
3.01 2.86 2.73
3.28 3.13 2.99
3.56 3.40 3.25
3.84 3.67 3.52
4.43 4.25 4.07
5.04 4.84 4.66
5.67 5.46 5.26
6.32 6.10 5.89
6.98 6.75 6.53
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 187
Table 8-42. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 0°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
Pu
l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.39 1.39 1.37 1.32 1.24
1.81 1.71 1.69 1.63 1.56
2.28 2.09 2.05 1.98 1.88
2.65 2.48 2.43 2.33 2.22
3.06 2.88 2.81 2.70 2.57
3.48 3.28 3.20 3.08 2.93
3.90 3.69 3.60 3.46 3.29
4.32 4.10 4.00 3.84 3.65
4.73 4.51 4.40 4.23 4.03
5.15 4.92 4.80 4.62 4.40
5.57 5.33 5.21 5.01 4.77
6.40 6.16 6.02 5.80 5.53
7.24 6.99 6.84 6.58 6.30
8.07 7.82 7.65 7.38 7.07
8.91 8.65 8.47 8.17 7.84
9.74 9.48 9.28 8.97 8.62
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.16 0.998 0.860 0.748 0.659
1.46 1.27 1.09 0.952 0.838
1.77 1.55 1.35 1.17 1.04
2.09 1.84 1.61 1.41 1.25
2.42 2.13 1.87 1.65 1.46
2.76 2.43 2.14 1.89 1.68
3.10 2.74 2.41 2.14 1.91
3.45 3.06 2.70 2.40 2.15
3.81 3.38 3.00 2.67 2.40
4.16 3.71 3.30 2.95 2.66
4.53 4.04 3.61 3.24 2.93
5.26 4.73 4.25 3.84 3.50
6.00 5.43 4.92 4.47 4.09
6.75 6.14 5.60 5.13 4.72
7.51 6.87 6.30 5.80 5.36
8.27 7.61 7.01 6.49 6.03
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.586 0.527 0.478 0.403 0.348
0.746 0.671 0.609 0.512 0.441
0.922 0.829 0.752 0.633 0.546
1.11 1.00 0.909 0.766 0.661
1.31 1.18 1.08 0.910 0.787
1.51 1.37 1.25 1.06 0.922
1.72 1.56 1.43 1.22 1.06
1.94 1.77 1.62 1.39 1.21
2.17 1.98 1.82 1.56 1.36
2.42 2.21 2.03 1.75 1.53
2.67 2.44 2.25 1.94 1.70
3.20 2.95 2.73 2.36 2.08
3.77 3.48 3.23 2.81 2.48
4.36 4.05 3.77 3.29 2.92
4.98 4.64 4.33 3.80 3.38
5.62 5.25 4.92 4.34 3.86
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.305 0.272 0.245 0.223 0.205
0.387 0.345 0.311 0.283 0.260
0.479 0.427 0.385 0.350 0.321
0.581 0.518 0.467 0.425 0.390
0.692 0.618 0.558 0.508 0.467
0.813 0.727 0.657 0.599 0.551
0.938 0.840 0.760 0.694 0.639
1.07 0.958 0.868 0.793 0.729
1.21 1.09 0.983 0.897 0.826
1.36 1.22 1.10 1.01 0.929
1.51 1.36 1.23 1.13 1.04
1.85 1.66 1.51 1.38 1.27
2.21 1.99 1.81 1.66 1.53
2.61 2.35 2.14 1.97 1.82
3.03 2.74 2.50 2.30 2.12
3.48 3.15 2.88 2.65 2.46
2.60 0.189 0.240 0.297 0.360 0.431 0.509 0.591 0.675 0.765 0.860 0.961 1.18 2.80 0.176 0.223 0.276 0.335 0.401 0.474 0.550 0.628 0.712 0.801 0.895 1.10 3.00 0.164 0.208 0.257 0.313 0.375 0.443 0.514 0.588 0.666 0.749 0.838 1.03
1.42 1.33 1.24
1.69 1.57 1.48
1.98 1.85 1.73
2.29 2.14 2.01
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 188
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-42 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 15°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
15°
Pu l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.48 1.42 1.38 1.32 1.24
1.89 1.77 1.73 1.66 1.56
2.31 2.15 2.09 2.01 1.91
2.72 2.55 2.47 2.37 2.25
3.13 2.96 2.86 2.74 2.60
3.54 3.38 3.25 3.11 2.96
3.95 3.79 3.64 3.49 3.32
4.36 4.20 4.04 3.87 3.68
4.77 4.61 4.44 4.25 4.05
5.18 5.02 4.84 4.64 4.41
5.59 5.43 5.24 5.02 4.79
6.41 6.25 6.05 5.80 5.53
7.23 7.08 6.85 6.57 6.29
8.05 7.90 7.66 7.36 7.06
8.87 8.73 8.46 8.15 7.82
9.69 9.55 9.28 8.94 8.60
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.16 1.00 0.869 0.759 0.670
1.46 1.27 1.10 0.961 0.849
1.79 1.56 1.35 1.18 1.05
2.12 1.85 1.62 1.42 1.26
2.45 2.16 1.89 1.67 1.48
2.79 2.46 2.17 1.92 1.72
3.13 2.77 2.45 2.18 1.95
3.48 3.09 2.74 2.44 2.20
3.83 3.41 3.04 2.72 2.45
4.19 3.74 3.34 3.00 2.71
4.54 4.07 3.65 3.29 2.98
5.27 4.76 4.30 3.90 3.55
6.01 5.46 4.96 4.53 4.15
6.75 6.17 5.64 5.18 4.78
7.51 6.90 6.34 5.86 5.43
8.27 7.63 7.06 6.55 6.10
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.598 0.539 0.490 0.413 0.357
0.758 0.683 0.621 0.524 0.452
0.934 0.842 0.766 0.646 0.558
1.12 1.02 0.924 0.781 0.675
1.33 1.20 1.10 0.928 0.804
1.54 1.40 1.28 1.09 0.943
1.76 1.60 1.47 1.25 1.09
1.99 1.81 1.66 1.42 1.24
2.22 2.03 1.87 1.61 1.40
2.47 2.26 2.08 1.80 1.57
2.72 2.50 2.31 1.99 1.75
3.26 3.01 2.79 2.42 2.13
3.83 3.55 3.30 2.88 2.54
4.43 4.12 3.84 3.36 2.99
5.06 4.71 4.41 3.88 3.45
5.70 5.33 5.00 4.42 3.95
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.314 0.280 0.253 0.230 0.211
0.398 0.355 0.320 0.291 0.267
0.491 0.438 0.395 0.360 0.330
0.595 0.531 0.479 0.437 0.401
0.708 0.633 0.572 0.522 0.479
0.833 0.746 0.675 0.616 0.566
0.967 0.867 0.784 0.717 0.659
1.10 0.988 0.896 0.819 0.753
1.25 1.12 1.01 0.926 0.853
1.40 1.26 1.14 1.04 0.959
1.56 1.40 1.27 1.16 1.07
1.90 1.71 1.55 1.43 1.31
2.27 2.05 1.87 1.71 1.58
2.67 2.42 2.20 2.03 1.87
3.11 2.81 2.57 2.37 2.19
3.56 3.24 2.96 2.73 2.53
2.60 0.195 0.247 0.305 0.370 0.444 0.524 0.610 0.697 0.790 0.889 0.993 1.22 2.80 0.182 0.230 0.284 0.344 0.412 0.487 0.568 0.649 0.736 0.827 0.925 1.14 3.00 0.170 0.214 0.265 0.321 0.386 0.456 0.531 0.607 0.688 0.774 0.866 1.06
1.47 1.37 1.28
1.74 1.62 1.52
2.04 1.90 1.79
2.36 2.20 2.07
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 189
Table 8-42 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 30°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C1Dl
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
30° Pu
l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.64 1.52 1.44 1.36 1.28
2.03 1.93 1.82 1.72 1.61
2.42 2.32 2.21 2.09 1.97
2.81 2.72 2.60 2.47 2.33
3.20 3.11 2.99 2.84 2.69
3.59 3.50 3.37 3.21 3.04
3.98 3.89 3.75 3.58 3.40
4.37 4.28 4.14 3.95 3.76
4.76 4.68 4.52 4.33 4.11
5.15 5.07 4.91 4.70 4.48
5.54 5.46 5.29 5.08 4.84
6.33 6.24 6.07 5.84 5.59
7.11 7.03 6.84 6.60 6.34
7.89 7.81 7.62 7.38 7.10
8.67 8.60 8.41 8.15 7.87
9.45 9.39 9.19 8.93 8.65
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.20 1.05 0.921 0.812 0.722
1.51 1.32 1.16 1.02 0.908
1.84 1.61 1.41 1.25 1.11
2.18 1.91 1.68 1.49 1.33
2.53 2.23 1.96 1.74 1.56
2.88 2.55 2.26 2.01 1.81
3.22 2.87 2.56 2.29 2.07
3.56 3.19 2.86 2.57 2.33
3.91 3.52 3.16 2.86 2.60
4.26 3.85 3.47 3.15 2.87
4.62 4.18 3.79 3.45 3.15
5.33 4.86 4.44 4.07 3.74
6.07 5.57 5.11 4.71 4.36
6.82 6.28 5.80 5.38 5.00
7.58 7.02 6.51 6.06 5.67
8.35 7.77 7.24 6.77 6.35
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.647 0.586 0.535 0.454 0.393
0.816 0.739 0.674 0.572 0.496
0.998 0.905 0.827 0.703 0.610
1.20 1.09 0.994 0.847 0.736
1.41 1.28 1.18 1.00 0.874
1.64 1.49 1.37 1.17 1.02
1.88 1.71 1.58 1.36 1.19
2.12 1.95 1.80 1.55 1.36
2.37 2.18 2.02 1.75 1.53
2.63 2.42 2.25 1.95 1.72
2.90 2.68 2.48 2.16 1.91
3.46 3.21 2.99 2.61 2.32
4.05 3.77 3.52 3.10 2.75
4.66 4.36 4.08 3.61 3.22
5.30 4.97 4.67 4.15 3.72
5.96 5.60 5.28 4.71 4.24
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.347 0.310 0.280 0.255 0.234
0.437 0.391 0.353 0.322 0.296
0.538 0.481 0.435 0.397 0.365
0.650 0.582 0.526 0.481 0.442
0.773 0.693 0.627 0.573 0.528
0.909 0.816 0.740 0.677 0.623
1.06 0.949 0.861 0.789 0.727
1.21 1.09 0.988 0.904 0.833
1.37 1.23 1.12 1.02 0.944
1.53 1.38 1.26 1.15 1.06
1.70 1.54 1.40 1.28 1.18
2.07 1.87 1.71 1.57 1.45
2.47 2.24 2.05 1.88 1.74
2.90 2.64 2.41 2.22 2.06
3.36 3.06 2.81 2.59 2.40
3.85 3.52 3.23 2.98 2.77
2.60 0.217 0.273 0.337 0.409 0.489 0.577 0.674 0.772 0.875 0.983 1.10 1.34 2.80 0.201 0.254 0.314 0.381 0.455 0.538 0.628 0.719 0.815 0.916 1.02 1.26 3.00 0.188 0.238 0.293 0.356 0.426 0.504 0.588 0.673 0.763 0.858 0.959 1.18
1.62 1.51 1.42
1.92 1.79 1.68
2.24 2.10 1.97
2.59 2.43 2.28
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 190
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-42 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 45°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
45°
l
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
Pu
c.g.
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.81 1.68 1.57 1.47 1.39
2.17 2.06 1.95 1.83 1.72
2.53 2.43 2.32 2.19 2.06
2.89 2.80 2.68 2.55 2.41
3.25 3.17 3.05 2.91 2.76
3.61 3.55 3.42 3.28 3.12
3.97 3.92 3.80 3.64 3.48
4.33 4.29 4.17 4.02 3.85
4.70 4.66 4.54 4.39 4.22
5.06 5.03 4.92 4.76 4.58
5.42 5.40 5.29 5.13 4.95
6.14 6.14 6.03 5.88 5.69
6.86 6.86 6.77 6.62 6.44
7.58 7.58 7.51 7.37 7.19
8.31 8.31 8.25 8.12 7.94
9.03 9.03 8.99 8.86 8.69
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.31 1.16 1.03 0.921 0.829
1.62 1.43 1.28 1.14 1.03
1.94 1.72 1.54 1.38 1.25
2.27 2.03 1.81 1.63 1.48
2.61 2.34 2.10 1.90 1.73
2.96 2.66 2.40 2.18 1.99
3.31 2.99 2.71 2.47 2.26
3.67 3.33 3.03 2.77 2.54
4.03 3.68 3.36 3.08 2.84
4.39 4.03 3.70 3.41 3.15
4.75 4.37 4.03 3.72 3.46
5.49 5.08 4.70 4.37 4.08
6.23 5.82 5.41 5.04 4.72
6.99 6.57 6.15 5.76 5.40
7.75 7.32 6.90 6.49 6.11
8.50 8.09 7.66 7.23 6.84
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.751 0.685 0.629 0.538 0.469
0.935 0.854 0.785 0.674 0.589
1.13 1.04 0.956 0.822 0.720
1.35 1.24 1.14 0.985 0.864
1.58 1.45 1.34 1.16 1.02
1.82 1.68 1.56 1.35 1.19
2.08 1.92 1.78 1.56 1.38
2.35 2.18 2.03 1.78 1.58
2.63 2.45 2.29 2.01 1.79
2.93 2.73 2.55 2.25 2.00
3.22 3.00 2.81 2.49 2.22
3.81 3.57 3.35 2.98 2.67
4.43 4.17 3.93 3.51 3.16
5.08 4.79 4.53 4.07 3.68
5.77 5.45 5.16 4.66 4.23
6.47 6.14 5.83 5.28 4.81
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.416 0.373 0.338 0.308 0.284
0.522 0.468 0.424 0.388 0.357
0.639 0.574 0.521 0.477 0.439
0.769 0.692 0.628 0.575 0.531
0.911 0.821 0.746 0.685 0.632
1.07 0.964 0.879 0.806 0.745
1.24 1.12 1.02 0.939 0.868
1.42 1.29 1.17 1.08 0.999
1.61 1.46 1.33 1.22 1.13
1.80 1.63 1.49 1.37 1.27
2.00 1.82 1.66 1.53 1.42
2.42 2.20 2.02 1.86 1.73
2.87 2.62 2.41 2.23 2.07
3.35 3.07 2.84 2.63 2.44
3.87 3.56 3.29 3.05 2.84
4.41 4.06 3.76 3.50 3.27
2.60 0.263 0.331 0.407 0.492 0.587 0.692 0.807 0.928 1.05 1.18 2.80 0.245 0.308 0.379 0.458 0.548 0.646 0.753 0.867 0.983 1.10 3.00 0.229 0.288 0.355 0.429 0.513 0.606 0.707 0.814 0.922 1.04
1.32 1.23 1.16
1.61 1.51 1.42
1.93 1.81 1.70
2.28 2.14 2.02
2.66 2.50 2.36
3.06 2.88 2.72
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 191
Table 8-42 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 60°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
60°
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
c.g.
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.95 1.82 1.73 1.63 1.55
2.28 2.15 2.05 1.96 1.87
2.61 2.48 2.38 2.28 2.18
2.94 2.82 2.71 2.61 2.50
3.26 3.16 3.06 2.94 2.83
3.59 3.51 3.41 3.29 3.17
3.92 3.86 3.76 3.65 3.53
4.25 4.21 4.12 4.01 3.89
4.57 4.56 4.47 4.37 4.25
4.90 4.90 4.83 4.73 4.62
5.23 5.24 5.18 5.09 4.98
5.88 5.88 5.87 5.80 5.70
6.54 6.54 6.54 6.49 6.41
7.19 7.19 7.19 7.18 7.11
7.85 7.85 7.85 7.85 7.79
8.51 8.51 8.51 8.51 8.47
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.47 1.34 1.22 1.12 1.03
1.78 1.62 1.48 1.36 1.25
2.09 1.91 1.75 1.61 1.49
2.40 2.20 2.03 1.88 1.74
2.72 2.51 2.32 2.15 2.00
3.05 2.83 2.63 2.44 2.28
3.40 3.16 2.95 2.75 2.58
3.76 3.52 3.28 3.07 2.89
4.13 3.88 3.63 3.41 3.22
4.50 4.24 4.00 3.76 3.56
4.87 4.61 4.36 4.13 3.91
5.60 5.36 5.10 4.86 4.62
6.32 6.09 5.84 5.59 5.33
7.02 6.82 6.57 6.32 6.05
7.72 7.53 7.30 7.03 6.78
8.40 8.23 8.01 7.75 7.50
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.945 0.874 0.812 0.709 0.626
1.16 1.07 0.999 0.875 0.776
1.38 1.28 1.20 1.06 0.939
1.62 1.51 1.41 1.25 1.12
1.87 1.75 1.64 1.46 1.31
2.14 2.01 1.89 1.69 1.52
2.42 2.28 2.15 1.93 1.75
2.72 2.57 2.43 2.19 1.98
3.04 2.87 2.72 2.46 2.23
3.36 3.18 3.02 2.74 2.49
3.70 3.51 3.34 3.03 2.76
4.39 4.17 3.97 3.62 3.31
5.09 4.85 4.63 4.23 3.89
5.80 5.55 5.32 4.89 4.50
6.52 6.26 6.02 5.56 5.15
7.24 6.98 6.73 6.26 5.82
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.560 0.506 0.461 0.423 0.391
0.696 0.630 0.575 0.528 0.489
0.845 0.766 0.701 0.645 0.597
1.01 0.916 0.839 0.774 0.718
1.18 1.08 0.993 0.917 0.851
1.38 1.26 1.16 1.07 0.999
1.59 1.46 1.34 1.24 1.16
1.81 1.66 1.53 1.42 1.33
2.04 1.88 1.74 1.61 1.51
2.28 2.11 1.95 1.81 1.69
2.54 2.34 2.17 2.02 1.89
3.05 2.82 2.62 2.44 2.29
3.59 3.33 3.11 2.90 2.72
4.17 3.88 3.62 3.39 3.19
4.79 4.46 4.17 3.91 3.68
5.43 5.07 4.75 4.47 4.21
2.60 0.363 0.454 0.556 0.669 0.794 0.932 1.08 1.24 2.80 0.339 0.424 0.519 0.625 0.744 0.875 1.02 1.17 3.00 0.317 0.398 0.488 0.587 0.700 0.824 0.956 1.10
1.41 1.33 1.25
1.59 1.49 1.41
1.77 1.66 1.57
2.15 2.02 1.91
2.56 2.42 2.29
3.01 2.84 2.69
3.48 3.29 3.12
3.98 3.77 3.58
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 192
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-42 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 75°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
75°
Pu l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
2.05 1.94 1.88 1.82 1.76
2.35 2.22 2.15 2.09 2.04
2.65 2.51 2.44 2.38 2.32
2.94 2.81 2.75 2.69 2.63
3.24 3.13 3.07 3.01 2.95
3.54 3.44 3.39 3.33 3.27
3.83 3.75 3.70 3.65 3.60
4.13 4.05 4.01 3.97 3.92
4.43 4.35 4.32 4.29 4.24
4.72 4.65 4.63 4.60 4.56
5.02 4.94 4.93 4.90 4.87
5.61 5.53 5.52 5.50 5.47
6.21 6.11 6.10 6.09 6.07
6.80 6.68 6.68 6.67 6.66
7.39 7.26 7.26 7.25 7.24
7.99 7.83 7.83 7.83 7.82
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.71 1.62 1.53 1.46 1.38
1.99 1.89 1.80 1.71 1.63
2.27 2.16 2.07 1.97 1.89
2.57 2.46 2.35 2.25 2.16
2.89 2.77 2.65 2.55 2.45
3.21 3.09 2.98 2.86 2.76
3.54 3.42 3.31 3.19 3.08
3.87 3.76 3.64 3.53 3.42
4.19 4.09 3.98 3.87 3.76
4.51 4.41 4.31 4.21 4.10
4.83 4.73 4.64 4.54 4.44
5.44 5.36 5.27 5.19 5.11
6.05 5.98 5.90 5.83 5.75
6.64 6.58 6.51 6.44 6.38
7.23 7.18 7.11 7.04 6.99
7.81 7.77 7.71 7.64 7.59
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.31 1.25 1.19 1.09 0.994
1.56 1.49 1.42 1.30 1.20
1.81 1.73 1.66 1.53 1.41
2.07 1.99 1.91 1.77 1.65
2.35 2.27 2.18 2.03 1.90
2.66 2.56 2.47 2.31 2.16
2.98 2.88 2.78 2.60 2.44
3.31 3.21 3.10 2.91 2.74
3.65 3.54 3.44 3.24 3.05
3.99 3.89 3.78 3.57 3.38
4.34 4.23 4.13 3.92 3.71
5.01 4.92 4.82 4.61 4.40
5.67 5.59 5.49 5.30 5.09
6.31 6.24 6.16 5.98 5.78
6.93 6.87 6.80 6.64 6.46
7.54 7.48 7.43 7.29 7.13
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.914 0.845 0.784 0.730 0.683
1.11 1.03 0.956 0.894 0.838
1.31 1.22 1.14 1.07 1.01
1.53 1.43 1.34 1.26 1.19
1.77 1.66 1.56 1.47 1.39
2.03 1.91 1.80 1.70 1.61
2.30 2.16 2.04 1.94 1.84
2.58 2.44 2.31 2.19 2.08
2.88 2.73 2.58 2.45 2.33
3.20 3.03 2.88 2.73 2.60
3.52 3.35 3.18 3.03 2.89
4.20 4.00 3.82 3.65 3.49
4.89 4.68 4.49 4.30 4.12
5.58 5.38 5.18 4.97 4.77
6.27 6.07 5.86 5.65 5.43
6.94 6.76 6.55 6.33 6.11
2.60 0.641 0.788 0.949 1.13 2.80 0.604 0.744 0.897 1.07 3.00 0.570 0.704 0.851 1.01
1.32 1.25 1.19
1.53 1.45 1.38
1.75 1.66 1.59
1.98 1.89 1.80
2.22 2.12 2.03
2.48 2.37 2.27
2.76 2.63 2.52
3.34 3.20 3.07
3.95 3.78 3.63
4.58 4.39 4.23
5.23 5.04 4.85
5.90 5.70 5.50
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 193
Table 8-43. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 0°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
Pu
l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
kl xl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.39 1.39 1.38 1.32 1.24
1.81 1.72 1.70 1.63 1.55
2.23 2.10 2.05 1.96 1.86
2.65 2.48 2.41 2.31 2.18
3.06 2.86 2.77 2.65 2.51
3.48 3.24 3.13 2.99 2.84
3.90 3.62 3.50 3.34 3.17
4.32 4.00 3.86 3.68 3.50
4.73 4.38 4.22 4.03 3.83
5.15 4.76 4.58 4.38 4.16
5.57 5.13 4.94 4.72 4.50
6.40 5.88 5.66 5.42 5.17
7.24 6.63 6.38 6.12 5.86
8.07 7.37 7.11 6.83 6.55
8.91 8.12 7.84 7.55 7.25
9.74 8.87 8.57 8.27 7.96
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.16 0.998 0.860 0.748 0.659
1.45 1.26 1.08 0.942 0.828
1.75 1.52 1.31 1.14 1.00
2.05 1.79 1.56 1.35 1.20
2.36 2.08 1.81 1.58 1.41
2.68 2.36 2.07 1.83 1.63
2.99 2.65 2.34 2.07 1.86
3.31 2.94 2.60 2.32 2.10
3.63 3.24 2.88 2.58 2.34
3.95 3.54 3.15 2.84 2.58
4.27 3.84 3.44 3.11 2.83
4.93 4.46 4.02 3.66 3.35
5.60 5.09 4.63 4.23 3.90
6.27 5.74 5.25 4.83 4.47
6.96 6.41 5.89 5.45 5.06
7.66 7.08 6.55 6.08 5.67
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.586 0.527 0.478 0.403 0.348
0.735 0.661 0.599 0.505 0.436
0.895 0.807 0.734 0.621 0.537
1.07 0.971 0.885 0.751 0.651
1.27 1.15 1.05 0.893 0.776
1.47 1.34 1.23 1.05 0.912
1.69 1.54 1.41 1.21 1.06
1.91 1.75 1.61 1.38 1.21
2.13 1.96 1.81 1.56 1.37
2.36 2.18 2.01 1.75 1.54
2.60 2.40 2.22 1.94 1.71
3.09 2.86 2.66 2.33 2.07
3.61 3.35 3.13 2.75 2.45
4.15 3.87 3.62 3.20 2.86
4.72 4.41 4.14 3.68 3.30
5.30 4.97 4.68 4.17 3.75
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.305 0.272 0.245 0.223 0.205
0.383 0.341 0.308 0.280 0.257
0.472 0.422 0.381 0.347 0.318
0.574 0.512 0.463 0.422 0.388
0.685 0.613 0.554 0.506 0.465
0.806 0.722 0.654 0.597 0.548
0.936 0.839 0.760 0.694 0.639
1.07 0.963 0.873 0.798 0.735
1.22 1.10 0.993 0.909 0.836
1.37 1.23 1.12 1.02 0.942
1.53 1.38 1.25 1.15 1.06
1.86 1.68 1.53 1.41 1.30
2.21 2.00 1.84 1.69 1.56
2.58 2.35 2.15 1.99 1.85
2.98 2.72 2.50 2.31 2.15
3.41 3.11 2.87 2.65 2.47
2.60 0.189 0.238 0.294 0.358 0.430 0.508 0.592 0.681 0.773 0.872 0.976 1.20 2.80 0.176 0.221 0.274 0.333 0.400 0.472 0.550 0.633 0.720 0.811 0.908 1.12 3.00 0.164 0.207 0.256 0.311 0.374 0.442 0.515 0.593 0.673 0.758 0.850 1.05
1.46 1.36 1.27
1.72 1.61 1.51
2.00 1.88 1.76
2.30 2.16 2.03
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 194
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-43 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 15°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
15°
Pu l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.48 1.42 1.38 1.32 1.24
1.89 1.77 1.73 1.65 1.55
2.31 2.15 2.09 1.99 1.87
2.72 2.53 2.45 2.33 2.20
3.13 2.91 2.80 2.67 2.53
3.54 3.29 3.16 3.01 2.85
3.95 3.66 3.52 3.35 3.17
4.36 4.04 3.87 3.69 3.50
4.77 4.41 4.22 4.03 3.82
5.18 4.78 4.58 4.36 4.15
5.59 5.14 4.93 4.70 4.47
6.41 5.89 5.64 5.38 5.13
7.23 6.63 6.36 6.08 5.80
8.05 7.38 7.08 6.78 6.49
8.87 8.14 7.81 7.49 7.18
9.69 8.90 8.54 8.21 7.89
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.16 1.00 0.869 0.759 0.670
1.45 1.25 1.09 0.950 0.838
1.75 1.51 1.31 1.14 1.01
2.06 1.78 1.55 1.35 1.20
2.37 2.06 1.80 1.58 1.41
2.68 2.35 2.05 1.81 1.62
3.00 2.64 2.32 2.06 1.86
3.31 2.94 2.60 2.33 2.10
3.62 3.23 2.88 2.59 2.35
3.93 3.53 3.17 2.87 2.61
4.25 3.82 3.45 3.14 2.87
4.89 4.43 4.03 3.69 3.40
5.54 5.05 4.63 4.27 3.95
6.21 5.69 5.25 4.86 4.52
6.89 6.35 5.89 5.47 5.10
7.58 7.03 6.54 6.11 5.71
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.598 0.539 0.490 0.413 0.357
0.747 0.672 0.611 0.516 0.446
0.905 0.818 0.746 0.633 0.548
1.08 0.980 0.896 0.763 0.663
1.27 1.15 1.06 0.905 0.789
1.47 1.34 1.23 1.06 0.925
1.68 1.54 1.42 1.22 1.07
1.91 1.75 1.61 1.39 1.22
2.15 1.97 1.82 1.58 1.39
2.39 2.20 2.04 1.77 1.56
2.64 2.44 2.26 1.97 1.74
3.14 2.92 2.72 2.39 2.12
3.66 3.41 3.19 2.82 2.52
4.21 3.94 3.69 3.27 2.93
4.77 4.48 4.21 3.75 3.38
5.36 5.04 4.75 4.25 3.84
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.314 0.280 0.253 0.230 0.211
0.393 0.351 0.317 0.289 0.265
0.484 0.432 0.391 0.356 0.327
0.586 0.524 0.474 0.433 0.398
0.698 0.626 0.567 0.518 0.476
0.820 0.737 0.668 0.611 0.562
0.951 0.854 0.776 0.710 0.654
1.09 0.981 0.891 0.816 0.753
1.24 1.11 1.01 0.929 0.857
1.39 1.26 1.14 1.05 0.967
1.56 1.41 1.28 1.18 1.09
1.91 1.73 1.58 1.45 1.34
2.27 2.06 1.89 1.74 1.61
2.65 2.42 2.22 2.05 1.90
3.06 2.80 2.57 2.38 2.21
3.49 3.19 2.95 2.73 2.54
2.60 0.195 0.245 0.303 0.368 0.441 0.521 0.606 0.698 0.795 0.898 1.01 1.24 2.80 0.182 0.228 0.282 0.343 0.410 0.485 0.565 0.650 0.741 0.837 0.937 1.16 3.00 0.170 0.213 0.263 0.320 0.384 0.453 0.528 0.609 0.694 0.782 0.877 1.08
1.50 1.40 1.31
1.77 1.66 1.56
2.06 1.93 1.82
2.37 2.23 2.10
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 195
Table 8-43 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 30°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
30°
Pu l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.64 1.52 1.44 1.36 1.28
2.03 1.92 1.81 1.70 1.60
2.42 2.30 2.17 2.04 1.91
2.81 2.66 2.53 2.37 2.22
3.20 3.02 2.87 2.70 2.53
3.59 3.38 3.21 3.02 2.83
3.98 3.74 3.55 3.35 3.14
4.37 4.10 3.90 3.67 3.45
4.76 4.46 4.24 4.00 3.77
5.15 4.83 4.59 4.34 4.09
5.54 5.19 4.94 4.68 4.42
6.33 5.93 5.66 5.37 5.10
7.11 6.67 6.39 6.09 5.79
7.89 7.43 7.13 6.82 6.51
8.67 8.19 7.88 7.56 7.24
9.45 8.96 8.64 8.32 8.00
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.20 1.05 0.921 0.812 0.722
1.49 1.30 1.14 1.01 0.895
1.79 1.56 1.36 1.20 1.07
2.08 1.82 1.59 1.41 1.26
2.37 2.08 1.83 1.63 1.47
2.66 2.35 2.09 1.87 1.69
2.96 2.63 2.35 2.12 1.93
3.25 2.92 2.63 2.39 2.17
3.56 3.22 2.92 2.66 2.43
3.89 3.52 3.21 2.94 2.70
4.21 3.84 3.51 3.23 2.98
4.86 4.46 4.12 3.82 3.55
5.53 5.10 4.73 4.41 4.11
6.23 5.77 5.37 5.01 4.69
6.95 6.45 6.03 5.64 5.30
7.68 7.15 6.70 6.30 5.93
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.647 0.586 0.535 0.454 0.393
0.803 0.726 0.663 0.563 0.489
0.966 0.878 0.805 0.687 0.599
1.15 1.05 0.960 0.825 0.721
1.34 1.23 1.13 0.973 0.855
1.54 1.42 1.31 1.13 0.997
1.76 1.62 1.50 1.30 1.15
2.00 1.84 1.71 1.48 1.31
2.24 2.07 1.92 1.68 1.49
2.49 2.31 2.15 1.88 1.67
2.75 2.56 2.39 2.10 1.86
3.30 3.08 2.88 2.55 2.28
3.85 3.61 3.39 3.02 2.72
4.41 4.15 3.91 3.50 3.16
4.99 4.71 4.45 4.01 3.63
5.60 5.30 5.02 4.53 4.12
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.347 0.310 0.280 0.255 0.234
0.432 0.386 0.349 0.319 0.293
0.530 0.475 0.430 0.393 0.361
0.639 0.574 0.521 0.476 0.439
0.760 0.684 0.620 0.568 0.524
0.890 0.802 0.729 0.668 0.616
1.03 0.928 0.846 0.776 0.716
1.18 1.06 0.969 0.890 0.823
1.33 1.21 1.10 1.01 0.936
1.50 1.36 1.24 1.14 1.06
1.68 1.52 1.39 1.28 1.19
2.06 1.87 1.71 1.58 1.46
2.46 2.25 2.06 1.91 1.77
2.88 2.63 2.42 2.25 2.09
3.31 3.04 2.80 2.60 2.42
3.77 3.47 3.21 2.98 2.78
2.60 0.217 0.271 0.335 0.406 0.486 0.572 0.665 0.765 0.870 0.983 1.10 1.36 2.80 0.201 0.252 0.311 0.378 0.453 0.534 0.621 0.714 0.813 0.919 1.03 1.28 3.00 0.188 0.236 0.291 0.354 0.424 0.500 0.582 0.669 0.763 0.862 0.967 1.20
1.65 1.55 1.45
1.95 1.83 1.72
2.27 2.13 2.00
2.60 2.45 2.31
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 196
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-43 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 45°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
45°
Pu l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.81 1.68 1.57 1.47 1.39
2.17 2.04 1.93 1.81 1.70
2.53 2.38 2.25 2.12 1.99
2.89 2.71 2.56 2.41 2.27
3.25 3.04 2.86 2.69 2.53
3.61 3.37 3.18 2.99 2.82
3.97 3.71 3.51 3.30 3.12
4.33 4.06 3.85 3.64 3.44
4.70 4.41 4.19 3.98 3.77
5.06 4.77 4.55 4.33 4.12
5.42 5.12 4.91 4.69 4.47
6.14 5.84 5.64 5.41 5.18
6.86 6.56 6.37 6.14 5.92
7.58 7.30 7.10 6.88 6.66
8.31 8.03 7.85 7.63 7.40
9.03 8.76 8.59 8.38 8.15
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.31 1.16 1.03 0.921 0.829
1.60 1.41 1.26 1.13 1.02
1.88 1.67 1.48 1.33 1.20
2.14 1.91 1.71 1.55 1.41
2.40 2.16 1.96 1.78 1.63
2.68 2.43 2.22 2.03 1.86
2.97 2.71 2.49 2.29 2.11
3.28 3.01 2.77 2.55 2.37
3.60 3.31 3.06 2.84 2.63
3.94 3.63 3.37 3.13 2.91
4.28 3.96 3.68 3.43 3.21
4.98 4.64 4.34 4.06 3.82
5.70 5.33 5.02 4.72 4.45
6.42 6.03 5.70 5.38 5.09
7.17 6.74 6.38 6.06 5.75
7.92 7.46 7.09 6.75 6.42
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.751 0.685 0.629 0.538 0.469
0.920 0.840 0.772 0.664 0.581
1.10 1.01 0.930 0.804 0.706
1.29 1.19 1.10 0.957 0.845
1.50 1.38 1.28 1.12 0.995
1.72 1.59 1.48 1.30 1.16
1.95 1.81 1.69 1.49 1.33
2.20 2.05 1.92 1.69 1.51
2.46 2.30 2.15 1.91 1.71
2.72 2.55 2.40 2.13 1.91
3.00 2.82 2.65 2.37 2.13
3.59 3.38 3.19 2.87 2.59
4.21 3.98 3.77 3.40 3.09
4.82 4.58 4.35 3.95 3.60
5.46 5.20 4.95 4.50 4.12
6.12 5.83 5.57 5.09 4.67
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.416 0.373 0.338 0.308 0.284
0.515 0.463 0.420 0.384 0.354
0.629 0.566 0.515 0.471 0.435
0.754 0.681 0.621 0.569 0.526
0.892 0.807 0.736 0.677 0.626
1.04 0.943 0.862 0.793 0.734
1.20 1.09 0.995 0.918 0.850
1.36 1.24 1.14 1.05 0.974
1.54 1.41 1.29 1.19 1.11
1.73 1.58 1.45 1.34 1.25
1.93 1.77 1.62 1.50 1.40
2.36 2.17 2.00 1.85 1.72
2.82 2.60 2.40 2.23 2.08
3.31 3.05 2.83 2.64 2.46
3.80 3.52 3.27 3.05 2.85
4.31 4.00 3.73 3.48 3.27
2.60 0.263 0.328 0.403 0.488 0.582 0.683 0.792 0.909 1.03 1.16 2.80 0.245 0.306 0.376 0.455 0.543 0.639 0.741 0.851 0.966 1.09 3.00 0.229 0.286 0.352 0.427 0.510 0.600 0.697 0.799 0.910 1.03
1.31 1.22 1.15
1.61 1.51 1.43
1.95 1.83 1.73
2.31 2.17 2.05
2.68 2.53 2.39
3.07 2.90 2.74
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 197
Table 8-43 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 60°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
60° Pu
l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.95 1.83 1.73 1.63 1.55
2.28 2.13 2.03 1.93 1.84
2.61 2.42 2.30 2.19 2.09
2.94 2.72 2.58 2.45 2.34
3.26 3.03 2.88 2.74 2.62
3.59 3.36 3.19 3.04 2.92
3.92 3.69 3.52 3.36 3.23
4.25 4.03 3.86 3.69 3.55
4.57 4.37 4.20 4.03 3.88
4.90 4.71 4.55 4.38 4.22
5.23 5.05 4.89 4.73 4.56
5.88 5.73 5.59 5.43 5.26
6.54 6.41 6.27 6.13 5.97
7.19 7.08 6.96 6.82 6.67
7.85 7.74 7.63 7.51 7.37
8.51 8.40 8.31 8.19 8.06
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.47 1.34 1.22 1.12 1.03
1.76 1.60 1.46 1.34 1.23
2.00 1.84 1.69 1.56 1.44
2.25 2.08 1.93 1.79 1.67
2.52 2.34 2.18 2.04 1.91
2.81 2.62 2.45 2.30 2.16
3.12 2.91 2.73 2.57 2.42
3.43 3.22 3.04 2.86 2.70
3.76 3.54 3.35 3.16 3.00
4.09 3.87 3.67 3.48 3.30
4.42 4.20 3.99 3.80 3.62
5.11 4.87 4.66 4.46 4.27
5.80 5.54 5.33 5.14 4.94
6.51 6.23 6.01 5.81 5.62
7.22 6.91 6.69 6.49 6.30
7.93 7.61 7.37 7.16 6.98
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.945 0.874 0.812 0.709 0.626
1.14 1.06 0.983 0.862 0.766
1.34 1.25 1.17 1.03 0.922
1.55 1.45 1.37 1.21 1.09
1.79 1.68 1.58 1.41 1.27
2.03 1.91 1.81 1.62 1.46
2.29 2.16 2.05 1.84 1.67
2.56 2.42 2.30 2.08 1.89
2.84 2.70 2.57 2.33 2.13
3.14 2.98 2.84 2.59 2.37
3.45 3.28 3.13 2.86 2.63
4.08 3.91 3.75 3.44 3.18
4.75 4.56 4.39 4.06 3.76
5.42 5.24 5.05 4.70 4.38
6.10 5.91 5.73 5.36 5.02
6.79 6.60 6.41 6.03 5.66
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.560 0.506 0.461 0.423 0.391
0.688 0.623 0.569 0.524 0.484
0.831 0.756 0.692 0.638 0.591
0.988 0.901 0.828 0.765 0.710
1.16 1.06 0.975 0.902 0.840
1.34 1.23 1.13 1.05 0.979
1.53 1.41 1.30 1.21 1.13
1.74 1.60 1.48 1.38 1.29
1.95 1.80 1.67 1.56 1.46
2.18 2.02 1.88 1.75 1.64
2.43 2.25 2.09 1.95 1.83
2.94 2.73 2.55 2.39 2.24
3.50 3.26 3.05 2.86 2.69
4.08 3.82 3.58 3.37 3.17
4.70 4.41 4.14 3.90 3.69
5.32 5.00 4.71 4.45 4.21
2.60 0.363 0.451 0.551 0.662 0.785 0.916 1.06 1.21 2.80 0.339 0.421 0.515 0.620 0.736 0.861 0.994 1.14 3.00 0.317 0.395 0.484 0.584 0.693 0.812 0.939 1.07
1.37 1.29 1.22
1.54 1.45 1.37
1.72 1.62 1.53
2.11 2.00 1.89
2.54 2.40 2.28
3.00 2.85 2.70
3.49 3.31 3.15
3.99 3.79 3.60
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 198
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-43 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 75°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
75° Pu l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
2.05 1.94 1.88 1.82 1.76
2.35 2.21 2.14 2.07 2.01
2.65 2.48 2.40 2.32 2.26
2.94 2.77 2.67 2.59 2.53
3.24 3.06 2.96 2.88 2.82
3.54 3.37 3.26 3.18 3.11
3.83 3.68 3.58 3.48 3.41
4.13 3.99 3.89 3.78 3.71
4.43 4.31 4.20 4.10 4.02
4.72 4.60 4.51 4.42 4.32
5.02 4.88 4.82 4.73 4.63
5.61 5.46 5.42 5.35 5.26
6.21 6.04 6.00 5.96 5.88
6.80 6.61 6.58 6.54 6.49
7.39 7.19 7.16 7.12 7.08
7.99 7.77 7.74 7.70 7.67
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.71 1.62 1.53 1.46 1.38
1.95 1.86 1.77 1.69 1.61
2.20 2.10 2.01 1.93 1.85
2.47 2.36 2.27 2.18 2.09
2.76 2.65 2.55 2.45 2.36
3.05 2.95 2.84 2.74 2.65
3.36 3.25 3.15 3.05 2.95
3.66 3.56 3.46 3.36 3.26
3.96 3.86 3.77 3.67 3.57
4.26 4.16 4.07 3.98 3.89
4.56 4.46 4.38 4.29 4.21
5.17 5.06 4.98 4.91 4.83
5.79 5.66 5.58 5.51 5.44
6.42 6.26 6.17 6.10 6.05
7.03 6.88 6.76 6.69 6.64
7.62 7.49 7.35 7.28 7.22
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.31 1.25 1.19 1.09 0.994
1.54 1.47 1.40 1.29 1.18
1.77 1.70 1.63 1.50 1.39
2.01 1.94 1.87 1.73 1.61
2.28 2.19 2.12 1.98 1.85
2.56 2.47 2.39 2.24 2.10
2.85 2.76 2.68 2.51 2.36
3.16 3.07 2.98 2.80 2.64
3.48 3.38 3.29 3.11 2.94
3.79 3.70 3.60 3.42 3.24
4.11 4.02 3.93 3.74 3.56
4.75 4.66 4.57 4.39 4.21
5.37 5.29 5.21 5.04 4.86
5.98 5.92 5.84 5.69 5.52
6.58 6.52 6.46 6.32 6.17
7.17 7.13 7.07 6.95 6.80
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.914 0.845 0.784 0.730 0.683
1.10 1.02 0.947 0.886 0.832
1.29 1.21 1.13 1.06 0.996
1.50 1.41 1.32 1.25 1.18
1.73 1.63 1.53 1.45 1.37
1.97 1.86 1.75 1.66 1.57
2.23 2.10 1.99 1.89 1.79
2.50 2.36 2.24 2.13 2.03
2.78 2.64 2.50 2.38 2.27
3.08 2.93 2.78 2.65 2.53
3.39 3.23 3.07 2.93 2.80
4.02 3.85 3.68 3.53 3.38
4.68 4.50 4.33 4.16 3.99
5.34 5.16 4.98 4.81 4.64
6.00 5.82 5.65 5.47 5.29
6.65 6.49 6.31 6.13 5.96
2.60 0.641 0.782 0.940 1.11 2.80 0.604 0.738 0.890 1.06 3.00 0.570 0.699 0.844 1.00
1.30 1.23 1.17
1.49 1.42 1.36
1.71 1.62 1.55
1.93 1.84 1.76
2.17 2.07 1.98
2.42 2.31 2.22
2.68 2.57 2.46
3.24 3.11 2.99
3.84 3.70 3.56
4.47 4.31 4.16
5.12 4.95 4.79
5.78 5.61 5.44
x
0.000 0.008 0.029 0.056 0.089 0.125 0.164 0.204 0.246 0.289 0.333 0.424 0.516 0.610 0.704 0.800
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 199
Table 8-44. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 0°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l Pu
yl
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.39 1.39 1.38 1.32 1.24
1.60 1.53 1.52 1.47 1.39
1.81 1.71 1.69 1.63 1.55
2.02 1.90 1.87 1.80 1.71
2.23 2.09 2.05 1.98 1.88
2.44 2.29 2.24 2.15 2.04
2.65 2.48 2.43 2.33 2.21
2.85 2.68 2.62 2.52 2.39
3.06 2.88 2.82 2.70 2.57
3.27 3.08 3.01 2.89 2.74
3.48 3.29 3.21 3.08 2.93
3.90 3.70 3.61 3.46 3.30
4.32 4.11 4.01 3.85 3.68
4.73 4.52 4.42 4.25 4.06
5.15 4.94 4.83 4.65 4.46
5.57 5.35 5.26 5.05 4.85
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.16 0.998 0.860 0.748 0.659
1.30 1.12 0.965 0.840 0.739
1.45 1.25 1.08 0.935 0.822
1.61 1.39 1.20 1.04 0.913
1.77 1.54 1.32 1.15 1.01
1.92 1.68 1.46 1.27 1.12
2.08 1.82 1.60 1.40 1.24
2.25 1.97 1.73 1.53 1.36
2.42 2.13 1.87 1.66 1.48
2.59 2.29 2.02 1.80 1.61
2.77 2.45 2.17 1.94 1.74
3.13 2.79 2.50 2.24 2.03
3.50 3.15 2.84 2.57 2.34
3.88 3.51 3.19 2.90 2.66
4.26 3.89 3.55 3.26 3.00
4.65 4.27 3.92 3.62 3.35
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.586 0.527 0.478 0.403 0.348
0.658 0.591 0.536 0.452 0.389
0.732 0.658 0.597 0.503 0.433
0.813 0.731 0.663 0.558 0.481
0.901 0.811 0.736 0.620 0.535
1.00 0.900 0.818 0.690 0.596
1.11 0.999 0.909 0.769 0.665
1.22 1.11 1.01 0.856 0.743
1.34 1.21 1.11 0.947 0.824
1.45 1.32 1.21 1.04 0.904
1.58 1.44 1.32 1.13 0.990
1.85 1.69 1.56 1.35 1.18
2.14 1.97 1.82 1.58 1.39
2.45 2.26 2.10 1.83 1.62
2.77 2.57 2.40 2.10 1.86
3.11 2.90 2.71 2.38 2.12
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.305 0.272 0.245 0.223 0.205
0.342 0.305 0.275 0.250 0.229
0.381 0.339 0.306 0.278 0.255
0.423 0.377 0.340 0.309 0.284
0.470 0.419 0.378 0.344 0.316
0.525 0.468 0.423 0.385 0.354
0.586 0.524 0.473 0.431 0.396
0.655 0.585 0.529 0.483 0.443
0.728 0.652 0.590 0.539 0.495
0.800 0.717 0.649 0.593 0.546
0.877 0.787 0.713 0.652 0.600
1.05 0.941 0.854 0.780 0.719
1.24 1.11 1.01 0.927 0.855
1.44 1.30 1.19 1.09 1.00
1.67 1.51 1.38 1.26 1.17
1.91 1.73 1.58 1.45 1.34
2.60 0.189 0.212 0.236 0.262 0.292 0.327 0.366 0.410 0.458 0.505 0.555 0.667 0.792 0.933 1.09 1.25 2.80 0.176 0.197 0.219 0.244 0.271 0.304 0.340 0.381 0.426 0.470 0.517 0.621 0.739 0.870 1.01 1.17 3.00 0.164 0.184 0.204 0.228 0.254 0.284 0.318 0.356 0.398 0.440 0.483 0.581 0.692 0.815 0.950 1.10
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 200
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-44 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = ±15°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
15° yl
15°
c.g.
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.48 1.42 1.38 1.32 1.24
1.69 1.56 1.53 1.48 1.39
1.89 1.73 1.69 1.63 1.55
2.10 1.90 1.85 1.78 1.69
2.31 2.09 2.03 1.94 1.85
2.51 2.28 2.20 2.11 2.00
2.72 2.47 2.39 2.28 2.16
2.92 2.67 2.57 2.46 2.33
3.13 2.88 2.76 2.64 2.50
3.33 3.09 2.95 2.82 2.67
3.54 3.30 3.15 3.00 2.85
3.95 3.73 3.54 3.38 3.21
4.36 4.17 3.95 3.77 3.59
4.77 4.59 4.37 4.16 3.97
5.18 5.02 4.80 4.57 4.36
5.59 5.45 5.23 4.97 4.76
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.16 1.00 0.869 0.759 0.670
1.31 1.13 0.978 0.854 0.753
1.46 1.27 1.09 0.953 0.840
1.60 1.41 1.22 1.06 0.936
1.74 1.53 1.34 1.18 1.04
1.89 1.66 1.46 1.29 1.15
2.04 1.80 1.59 1.41 1.26
2.20 1.94 1.72 1.53 1.37
2.36 2.09 1.85 1.65 1.48
2.53 2.25 2.00 1.79 1.61
2.70 2.41 2.15 1.93 1.74
3.05 2.74 2.47 2.23 2.03
3.42 3.09 2.80 2.55 2.33
3.79 3.45 3.15 2.89 2.65
4.18 3.83 3.51 3.24 2.99
4.57 4.21 3.88 3.60 3.34
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.598 0.539 0.490 0.413 0.357
0.672 0.605 0.550 0.464 0.401
0.749 0.675 0.613 0.517 0.446
0.834 0.750 0.681 0.574 0.496
0.927 0.834 0.758 0.639 0.552
1.03 0.925 0.842 0.712 0.616
1.13 1.02 0.933 0.791 0.686
1.23 1.12 1.03 0.878 0.764
1.34 1.23 1.12 0.964 0.841
1.46 1.33 1.23 1.06 0.921
1.58 1.45 1.34 1.15 1.01
1.85 1.71 1.58 1.36 1.20
2.14 1.98 1.84 1.60 1.41
2.45 2.28 2.12 1.86 1.64
2.78 2.59 2.42 2.13 1.89
3.12 2.91 2.73 2.41 2.15
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.314 0.280 0.253 0.230 0.211
0.352 0.314 0.283 0.258 0.237
0.392 0.350 0.315 0.287 0.263
0.436 0.389 0.351 0.319 0.293
0.485 0.433 0.391 0.356 0.327
0.542 0.484 0.437 0.398 0.366
0.605 0.541 0.489 0.446 0.410
0.675 0.604 0.546 0.499 0.458
0.745 0.668 0.606 0.554 0.510
0.818 0.735 0.666 0.609 0.561
0.897 0.806 0.731 0.669 0.616
1.07 0.962 0.875 0.801 0.738
1.26 1.14 1.04 0.950 0.877
1.47 1.33 1.21 1.11 1.03
1.70 1.54 1.41 1.29 1.20
1.94 1.77 1.62 1.49 1.38
2.60 0.195 0.219 0.243 0.271 0.302 0.338 0.379 0.424 0.472 0.520 0.571 0.685 0.814 0.957 1.12 1.28 2.80 0.182 0.203 0.226 0.252 0.281 0.314 0.352 0.394 0.439 0.484 0.532 0.639 0.759 0.894 1.04 1.20 3.00 0.170 0.190 0.211 0.235 0.262 0.294 0.329 0.368 0.411 0.453 0.498 0.598 0.711 0.838 0.977 1.13
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 201
Table 8-44 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = ±30°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
30°
yl
30°
c.g.
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.64 1.52 1.44 1.36 1.28
1.83 1.68 1.60 1.51 1.43
2.03 1.85 1.76 1.67 1.58
2.22 2.03 1.91 1.83 1.73
2.42 2.21 2.08 1.98 1.88
2.61 2.39 2.25 2.14 2.03
2.81 2.58 2.42 2.30 2.18
3.01 2.77 2.60 2.47 2.34
3.20 2.97 2.78 2.64 2.51
3.40 3.16 2.97 2.82 2.68
3.59 3.36 3.16 3.00 2.85
3.98 3.77 3.55 3.37 3.21
4.37 4.18 3.95 3.76 3.59
4.76 4.59 4.37 4.16 3.98
5.15 5.00 4.79 4.57 4.37
5.54 5.41 5.20 4.98 4.78
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.20 1.05 0.921 0.812 0.722
1.34 1.18 1.03 0.910 0.811
1.49 1.31 1.15 1.02 0.908
1.63 1.44 1.27 1.13 1.01
1.78 1.58 1.40 1.25 1.12
1.92 1.71 1.52 1.36 1.22
2.06 1.84 1.64 1.47 1.33
2.22 1.98 1.77 1.59 1.44
2.37 2.13 1.91 1.72 1.56
2.54 2.28 2.06 1.86 1.69
2.71 2.44 2.21 2.00 1.83
3.06 2.78 2.53 2.31 2.12
3.43 3.13 2.87 2.64 2.43
3.81 3.50 3.23 2.98 2.77
4.20 3.88 3.60 3.34 3.12
4.60 4.27 3.98 3.71 3.48
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.647 0.586 0.535 0.454 0.393
0.729 0.660 0.601 0.510 0.441
0.815 0.736 0.671 0.568 0.492
0.908 0.820 0.747 0.632 0.547
1.01 0.912 0.831 0.704 0.610
1.11 1.01 0.920 0.783 0.680
1.21 1.10 1.01 0.868 0.756
1.31 1.20 1.11 0.952 0.835
1.43 1.31 1.21 1.04 0.916
1.55 1.42 1.31 1.14 1.00
1.67 1.54 1.43 1.24 1.10
1.95 1.81 1.68 1.47 1.30
2.25 2.10 1.96 1.72 1.53
2.58 2.41 2.25 1.99 1.77
2.91 2.73 2.56 2.28 2.04
3.26 3.07 2.89 2.58 2.32
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.347 0.310 0.280 0.255 0.234
0.389 0.347 0.314 0.286 0.263
0.433 0.387 0.349 0.318 0.292
0.482 0.430 0.389 0.354 0.325
0.537 0.480 0.433 0.395 0.363
0.600 0.536 0.485 0.442 0.406
0.668 0.599 0.542 0.495 0.455
0.742 0.666 0.604 0.552 0.508
0.814 0.733 0.666 0.610 0.562
0.893 0.805 0.732 0.670 0.618
0.978 0.882 0.802 0.735 0.679
1.16 1.05 0.958 0.880 0.813
1.37 1.24 1.13 1.04 0.963
1.60 1.45 1.33 1.22 1.13
1.84 1.67 1.54 1.42 1.31
2.10 1.92 1.76 1.63 1.51
2.60 0.217 0.243 0.270 0.301 0.335 0.376 0.421 0.471 0.521 0.573 0.630 0.754 0.896 1.05 1.22 2.80 0.201 0.226 0.251 0.280 0.312 0.349 0.392 0.438 0.486 0.535 0.588 0.704 0.836 0.984 1.15 3.00 0.188 0.211 0.235 0.261 0.292 0.327 0.366 0.410 0.455 0.501 0.550 0.660 0.784 0.924 1.08
1.41 1.32 1.24
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 202
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-44 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = ±45°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
45° yl
45°
c.g.
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.81 1.68 1.57 1.47 1.39
1.99 1.83 1.71 1.61 1.52
2.17 1.99 1.86 1.75 1.65
2.35 2.14 2.01 1.90 1.80
2.53 2.30 2.17 2.06 1.96
2.71 2.47 2.33 2.22 2.11
2.89 2.64 2.50 2.37 2.26
3.07 2.82 2.67 2.54 2.42
3.25 3.00 2.84 2.71 2.58
3.43 3.18 3.02 2.88 2.75
3.61 3.37 3.21 3.06 2.93
3.97 3.76 3.59 3.43 3.29
4.33 4.15 3.99 3.83 3.68
4.70 4.55 4.39 4.23 4.07
5.06 4.95 4.80 4.64 4.48
5.42 5.35 5.21 5.06 4.90
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.31 1.16 1.03 0.921 0.829
1.43 1.27 1.14 1.02 0.919
1.56 1.40 1.25 1.13 1.02
1.71 1.53 1.38 1.24 1.13
1.86 1.67 1.51 1.36 1.24
2.01 1.81 1.64 1.49 1.36
2.15 1.95 1.77 1.62 1.48
2.31 2.10 1.91 1.74 1.60
2.46 2.25 2.05 1.88 1.73
2.63 2.40 2.20 2.02 1.87
2.80 2.57 2.36 2.18 2.01
3.16 2.92 2.70 2.50 2.32
3.54 3.28 3.05 2.85 2.66
3.93 3.66 3.43 3.21 3.02
4.33 4.06 3.81 3.59 3.39
4.75 4.47 4.21 3.98 3.77
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.751 0.685 0.629 0.538 0.469
0.835 0.764 0.702 0.603 0.527
0.928 0.849 0.782 0.674 0.589
1.03 0.943 0.870 0.751 0.655
1.14 1.05 0.966 0.836 0.730
1.25 1.15 1.07 0.926 0.811
1.36 1.26 1.16 1.01 0.894
1.47 1.36 1.27 1.11 0.979
1.60 1.48 1.38 1.21 1.07
1.73 1.61 1.50 1.32 1.17
1.87 1.74 1.63 1.43 1.28
2.17 2.03 1.90 1.69 1.51
2.49 2.34 2.21 1.97 1.77
2.84 2.68 2.53 2.27 2.05
3.20 3.03 2.87 2.59 2.34
3.58 3.39 3.22 2.92 2.65
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.416 0.373 0.338 0.308 0.284
0.467 0.419 0.379 0.346 0.318
0.521 0.466 0.422 0.385 0.355
0.580 0.519 0.470 0.429 0.395
0.646 0.579 0.524 0.479 0.441
0.721 0.647 0.587 0.536 0.493
0.799 0.720 0.654 0.599 0.552
0.877 0.793 0.722 0.663 0.613
0.961 0.869 0.794 0.730 0.675
1.05 0.953 0.871 0.801 0.741
1.15 1.04 0.954 0.878 0.812
1.36 1.24 1.14 1.05 0.971
1.60 1.46 1.34 1.24 1.15
1.86 1.70 1.56 1.45 1.34
2.14 1.96 1.80 1.67 1.56
2.43 2.23 2.06 1.92 1.78
2.60 0.263 0.295 0.328 0.365 0.408 0.457 0.511 0.570 0.627 0.689 0.756 0.904 1.07 1.26 2.80 0.245 0.274 0.305 0.340 0.380 0.425 0.476 0.532 0.585 0.643 0.707 0.845 1.00 1.18 3.00 0.229 0.256 0.286 0.318 0.355 0.398 0.446 0.498 0.549 0.604 0.663 0.794 0.942 1.11
1.46 1.37 1.29
1.67 1.57 1.48
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 203
Table 8-44 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = ±60°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
60° yl
60°
c.g.
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.95 1.83 1.73 1.63 1.55
2.12 1.94 1.84 1.74 1.66
2.28 2.07 1.96 1.87 1.78
2.44 2.20 2.10 2.00 1.92
2.61 2.35 2.25 2.15 2.06
2.77 2.51 2.40 2.31 2.22
2.94 2.68 2.57 2.47 2.38
3.10 2.85 2.74 2.64 2.55
3.26 3.03 2.92 2.81 2.72
3.43 3.21 3.10 2.99 2.89
3.59 3.40 3.28 3.18 3.07
3.92 3.78 3.67 3.56 3.45
4.25 4.17 4.07 3.96 3.85
4.57 4.55 4.47 4.37 4.27
4.90 4.90 4.86 4.78 4.68
5.23 5.23 5.23 5.16 5.08
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.47 1.34 1.22 1.12 1.03
1.58 1.44 1.32 1.21 1.12
1.70 1.56 1.43 1.32 1.22
1.83 1.69 1.56 1.44 1.33
1.98 1.83 1.69 1.57 1.46
2.13 1.98 1.83 1.71 1.59
2.29 2.13 1.99 1.85 1.73
2.46 2.29 2.14 2.00 1.88
2.63 2.45 2.30 2.15 2.02
2.80 2.62 2.46 2.31 2.18
2.98 2.80 2.63 2.48 2.34
3.35 3.16 2.99 2.83 2.68
3.75 3.55 3.37 3.21 3.05
4.16 3.96 3.77 3.60 3.44
4.58 4.38 4.19 4.01 3.85
5.00 4.81 4.61 4.43 4.26
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.945 0.874 0.812 0.709 0.626
1.03 0.958 0.893 0.783 0.695
1.13 1.05 0.983 0.865 0.771
1.24 1.16 1.08 0.957 0.855
1.36 1.27 1.19 1.06 0.948
1.49 1.40 1.31 1.17 1.05
1.63 1.53 1.44 1.29 1.16
1.76 1.66 1.56 1.40 1.26
1.90 1.79 1.69 1.52 1.38
2.05 1.94 1.83 1.65 1.50
2.21 2.09 1.98 1.79 1.63
2.55 2.42 2.30 2.09 1.91
2.91 2.77 2.65 2.42 2.22
3.29 3.15 3.01 2.76 2.55
3.69 3.53 3.39 3.13 2.89
4.09 3.93 3.79 3.51 3.25
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.560 0.506 0.461 0.423 0.391
0.623 0.564 0.515 0.473 0.438
0.693 0.629 0.575 0.530 0.489
0.771 0.701 0.642 0.590 0.545
0.857 0.781 0.716 0.659 0.608
0.952 0.868 0.798 0.735 0.680
1.05 0.957 0.880 0.813 0.755
1.15 1.05 0.964 0.891 0.829
1.25 1.15 1.06 0.978 0.910
1.36 1.25 1.16 1.07 0.997
1.49 1.37 1.26 1.17 1.09
1.75 1.61 1.49 1.39 1.30
2.04 1.89 1.75 1.63 1.53
2.35 2.18 2.03 1.90 1.78
2.68 2.50 2.33 2.18 2.05
3.03 2.83 2.64 2.48 2.33
2.60 0.363 0.407 0.454 0.506 0.565 0.632 0.704 0.774 0.850 0.932 1.02 1.22 2.80 0.339 0.380 0.424 0.472 0.527 0.590 0.658 0.726 0.797 0.875 0.958 1.14 3.00 0.317 0.356 0.397 0.442 0.494 0.553 0.618 0.683 0.750 0.824 0.903 1.08
1.43 1.35 1.27
1.67 1.57 1.49
1.93 1.82 1.72
2.20 2.08 1.97
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 204
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-44 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = ±75°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
75°
75°
c.g.
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
2.05 1.94 1.88 1.82 1.76
2.20 2.01 1.95 1.90 1.84
2.35 2.11 2.05 2.00 1.95
2.50 2.23 2.17 2.12 2.07
2.65 2.37 2.31 2.26 2.21
2.79 2.52 2.47 2.41 2.36
2.94 2.69 2.63 2.58 2.53
3.09 2.87 2.81 2.76 2.71
3.24 3.05 3.00 2.95 2.89
3.39 3.24 3.19 3.14 3.09
3.54 3.44 3.39 3.34 3.29
3.83 3.80 3.77 3.73 3.69
4.13 4.09 4.09 4.09 4.06
4.43 4.38 4.38 4.38 4.38
4.72 4.67 4.67 4.67 4.67
5.02 4.96 4.96 4.96 4.96
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.71 1.62 1.53 1.46 1.38
1.79 1.70 1.62 1.54 1.47
1.90 1.81 1.72 1.64 1.57
2.02 1.93 1.84 1.76 1.69
2.16 2.07 1.98 1.90 1.82
2.31 2.22 2.13 2.05 1.97
2.48 2.39 2.30 2.21 2.13
2.66 2.56 2.47 2.38 2.30
2.84 2.75 2.66 2.57 2.48
3.04 2.94 2.85 2.76 2.67
3.24 3.14 3.04 2.95 2.86
3.65 3.54 3.44 3.34 3.25
4.03 3.95 3.85 3.75 3.65
4.38 4.32 4.25 4.16 4.07
4.67 4.66 4.61 4.54 4.46
4.96 4.96 4.94 4.90 4.84
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.31 1.25 1.19 1.09 0.994
1.40 1.34 1.28 1.17 1.07
1.50 1.44 1.38 1.27 1.17
1.62 1.55 1.49 1.38 1.28
1.75 1.68 1.62 1.50 1.40
1.90 1.83 1.76 1.64 1.53
2.06 1.98 1.91 1.79 1.67
2.22 2.15 2.08 1.95 1.83
2.40 2.33 2.25 2.11 1.98
2.59 2.51 2.43 2.28 2.14
2.77 2.69 2.60 2.45 2.31
3.16 3.07 2.98 2.82 2.67
3.56 3.47 3.38 3.21 3.04
3.97 3.88 3.79 3.61 3.44
4.38 4.29 4.20 4.02 3.85
4.76 4.68 4.60 4.43 4.26
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.914 0.845 0.784 0.730 0.683
0.992 0.920 0.857 0.801 0.751
1.08 1.01 0.941 0.881 0.828
1.19 1.11 1.04 0.973 0.916
1.30 1.22 1.14 1.08 1.01
1.43 1.34 1.26 1.19 1.12
1.57 1.47 1.39 1.31 1.24
1.72 1.62 1.52 1.44 1.36
1.86 1.76 1.66 1.57 1.49
2.02 1.90 1.80 1.70 1.62
2.18 2.06 1.95 1.85 1.76
2.53 2.39 2.27 2.16 2.06
2.89 2.75 2.62 2.50 2.39
3.28 3.13 2.99 2.86 2.73
3.68 3.52 3.37 3.23 3.10
4.10 3.93 3.77 3.62 3.48
2.60 0.641 0.706 0.781 0.865 0.960 1.07 1.18 2.80 0.604 0.666 0.738 0.819 0.910 1.01 1.12 3.00 0.570 0.631 0.700 0.777 0.863 0.961 1.07
1.29 1.23 1.17
1.41 1.34 1.28
1.54 1.46 1.39
1.67 1.59 1.52
1.96 1.87 1.79
2.28 2.18 2.09
2.62 2.51 2.41
2.97 2.86 2.74
3.35 3.22 3.10
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 205
Table 8-45. Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = 0°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
yl
Pu
l
c.g.
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.39 1.39 1.38 1.32 1.24
1.60 1.55 1.53 1.47 1.38
1.81 1.74 1.71 1.63 1.52
2.02 1.93 1.88 1.79 1.66
2.23 2.12 2.06 1.94 1.80
2.44 2.31 2.22 2.09 1.94
2.65 2.49 2.38 2.23 2.07
2.85 2.66 2.54 2.37 2.21
3.06 2.83 2.69 2.52 2.35
3.27 2.99 2.83 2.67 2.51
3.48 3.14 2.98 2.81 2.66
3.90 3.45 3.28 3.12 2.96
4.32 3.76 3.59 3.42 3.27
4.73 4.08 3.91 3.75 3.59
5.15 4.42 4.24 4.08 3.91
5.57 4.76 4.58 4.41 4.25
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.16 0.998 0.860 0.748 0.659
1.29 1.11 0.958 0.833 0.733
1.42 1.22 1.05 0.913 0.805
1.54 1.32 1.14 0.998 0.884
1.67 1.42 1.24 1.09 0.967
1.79 1.54 1.34 1.18 1.06
1.92 1.66 1.46 1.29 1.15
2.06 1.80 1.58 1.41 1.26
2.20 1.94 1.72 1.54 1.38
2.35 2.09 1.86 1.67 1.51
2.51 2.24 2.01 1.81 1.64
2.82 2.55 2.31 2.10 1.92
3.12 2.85 2.61 2.40 2.21
3.44 3.16 2.91 2.69 2.50
3.76 3.48 3.22 2.99 2.79
4.10 3.81 3.54 3.31 3.09
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.586 0.527 0.478 0.403 0.348
0.652 0.586 0.532 0.448 0.387
0.719 0.648 0.589 0.497 0.430
0.791 0.715 0.651 0.551 0.476
0.868 0.786 0.717 0.609 0.528
0.951 0.864 0.791 0.674 0.586
1.04 0.949 0.870 0.744 0.648
1.14 1.04 0.957 0.820 0.716
1.25 1.15 1.05 0.904 0.790
1.37 1.26 1.16 0.997 0.874
1.50 1.38 1.27 1.10 0.963
1.77 1.63 1.51 1.31 1.16
2.05 1.90 1.77 1.55 1.37
2.32 2.17 2.03 1.80 1.60
2.61 2.44 2.29 2.04 1.83
2.90 2.73 2.57 2.30 2.07
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.305 0.272 0.245 0.223 0.205
0.340 0.303 0.273 0.249 0.228
0.378 0.337 0.304 0.277 0.254
0.419 0.374 0.338 0.308 0.283
0.466 0.416 0.376 0.343 0.315
0.518 0.463 0.419 0.382 0.351
0.573 0.514 0.465 0.425 0.391
0.634 0.569 0.516 0.472 0.434
0.702 0.630 0.572 0.523 0.482
0.776 0.697 0.633 0.579 0.534
0.856 0.771 0.700 0.641 0.591
1.03 0.932 0.848 0.778 0.718
1.23 1.11 1.02 0.932 0.861
1.44 1.31 1.20 1.10 1.02
1.66 1.51 1.39 1.28 1.18
1.88 1.72 1.58 1.47 1.36
2.60 0.189 0.211 0.235 0.261 0.291 0.325 0.362 0.402 0.446 0.495 0.548 0.667 0.800 0.945 1.10 1.27 2.80 0.176 0.196 0.218 0.243 0.271 0.302 0.337 0.375 0.416 0.461 0.511 0.622 0.747 0.882 1.03 1.18 3.00 0.164 0.183 0.204 0.227 0.253 0.282 0.315 0.350 0.389 0.431 0.478 0.582 0.700 0.825 0.962 1.11
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 206
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-45 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = ±15°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
yl
15° 15°
c.g.
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.48 1.42 1.38 1.32 1.24
1.69 1.57 1.54 1.47 1.39
1.89 1.74 1.70 1.63 1.54
2.10 1.92 1.86 1.78 1.68
2.31 2.09 2.02 1.94 1.81
2.51 2.27 2.19 2.09 1.94
2.72 2.44 2.35 2.22 2.07
2.92 2.61 2.51 2.36 2.21
3.13 2.78 2.67 2.51 2.35
3.33 2.95 2.83 2.66 2.50
3.54 3.12 2.98 2.82 2.66
3.95 3.45 3.30 3.13 2.98
4.36 3.78 3.62 3.45 3.30
4.77 4.12 3.95 3.78 3.63
5.18 4.46 4.29 4.12 3.96
5.59 4.81 4.64 4.46 4.30
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.16 1.00 0.869 0.759 0.670
1.30 1.12 0.970 0.847 0.746
1.43 1.23 1.06 0.926 0.820
1.55 1.33 1.15 1.01 0.899
1.68 1.44 1.25 1.10 0.983
1.80 1.55 1.36 1.20 1.07
1.93 1.68 1.48 1.31 1.18
2.06 1.81 1.60 1.43 1.29
2.21 1.95 1.74 1.56 1.41
2.36 2.10 1.88 1.69 1.53
2.51 2.25 2.02 1.83 1.67
2.83 2.57 2.33 2.12 1.95
3.15 2.88 2.64 2.43 2.25
3.48 3.20 2.95 2.74 2.54
3.81 3.53 3.28 3.05 2.84
4.15 3.87 3.61 3.37 3.15
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.598 0.539 0.490 0.413 0.357
0.666 0.600 0.545 0.461 0.398
0.734 0.663 0.604 0.511 0.442
0.807 0.730 0.666 0.565 0.490
0.885 0.803 0.734 0.625 0.543
0.969 0.881 0.807 0.690 0.601
1.06 0.968 0.888 0.761 0.664
1.17 1.06 0.979 0.840 0.734
1.28 1.17 1.08 0.927 0.812
1.40 1.28 1.18 1.02 0.897
1.52 1.40 1.30 1.12 0.988
1.79 1.66 1.54 1.34 1.19
2.08 1.93 1.80 1.58 1.40
2.37 2.21 2.08 1.84 1.64
2.66 2.49 2.34 2.09 1.88
2.96 2.78 2.63 2.35 2.12
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.314 0.280 0.253 0.230 0.211
0.350 0.312 0.282 0.257 0.236
0.389 0.347 0.313 0.286 0.262
0.432 0.386 0.348 0.318 0.292
0.479 0.429 0.388 0.354 0.325
0.532 0.476 0.431 0.393 0.362
0.589 0.528 0.479 0.438 0.403
0.651 0.585 0.531 0.486 0.447
0.721 0.649 0.589 0.538 0.496
0.798 0.718 0.652 0.597 0.550
0.879 0.793 0.721 0.660 0.609
1.06 0.958 0.873 0.801 0.740
1.26 1.14 1.04 0.958 0.886
1.48 1.34 1.23 1.13 1.05
1.70 1.55 1.43 1.32 1.22
1.93 1.77 1.63 1.51 1.40
2.60 0.195 0.218 0.242 0.270 0.301 0.335 0.373 0.415 0.460 0.510 0.565 0.687 0.824 0.975 1.13 1.31 2.80 0.182 0.203 0.225 0.251 0.280 0.312 0.348 0.386 0.428 0.476 0.527 0.641 0.770 0.910 1.06 1.22 3.00 0.170 0.189 0.211 0.234 0.261 0.291 0.325 0.361 0.401 0.445 0.494 0.601 0.722 0.852 0.993 1.15
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 207
Table 8-45 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = ±30°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
30°
yl
30°
c.g.
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.64 1.52 1.44 1.36 1.28
1.83 1.68 1.59 1.51 1.42
2.03 1.85 1.75 1.66 1.56
2.22 2.03 1.91 1.81 1.71
2.42 2.20 2.07 1.96 1.85
2.61 2.38 2.23 2.12 1.99
2.81 2.55 2.40 2.26 2.12
3.01 2.73 2.56 2.41 2.26
3.20 2.90 2.72 2.56 2.41
3.40 3.06 2.88 2.72 2.57
3.59 3.23 3.05 2.89 2.74
3.98 3.59 3.41 3.24 3.09
4.37 3.95 3.77 3.59 3.43
4.76 4.32 4.13 3.94 3.77
5.15 4.70 4.51 4.31 4.13
5.54 5.08 4.89 4.68 4.49
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.20 1.05 0.921 0.812 0.722
1.34 1.17 1.03 0.904 0.804
1.47 1.29 1.13 0.993 0.884
1.60 1.40 1.22 1.08 0.968
1.74 1.51 1.33 1.18 1.06
1.87 1.64 1.45 1.29 1.16
1.99 1.76 1.57 1.41 1.27
2.13 1.90 1.70 1.53 1.38
2.28 2.04 1.83 1.66 1.51
2.43 2.19 1.98 1.80 1.64
2.60 2.35 2.13 1.94 1.78
2.95 2.68 2.45 2.25 2.08
3.28 3.03 2.80 2.59 2.40
3.62 3.35 3.13 2.93 2.73
3.97 3.69 3.46 3.25 3.06
4.32 4.04 3.80 3.58 3.37
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.647 0.586 0.535 0.454 0.393
0.722 0.654 0.596 0.506 0.438
0.796 0.722 0.659 0.560 0.487
0.874 0.794 0.727 0.620 0.540
0.957 0.872 0.799 0.685 0.597
1.05 0.957 0.879 0.755 0.660
1.15 1.05 0.968 0.833 0.729
1.26 1.16 1.07 0.920 0.806
1.38 1.27 1.17 1.02 0.891
1.51 1.39 1.29 1.12 0.984
1.64 1.51 1.40 1.22 1.08
1.92 1.78 1.66 1.46 1.29
2.23 2.08 1.94 1.72 1.53
2.55 2.39 2.24 1.99 1.79
2.87 2.70 2.55 2.28 2.05
3.19 3.02 2.85 2.56 2.32
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.347 0.310 0.280 0.255 0.234
0.386 0.345 0.312 0.285 0.262
0.430 0.384 0.347 0.317 0.291
0.477 0.427 0.386 0.352 0.324
0.529 0.474 0.429 0.392 0.360
0.585 0.526 0.477 0.436 0.401
0.648 0.583 0.529 0.484 0.446
0.717 0.645 0.586 0.537 0.495
0.794 0.715 0.650 0.595 0.549
0.878 0.791 0.720 0.660 0.609
0.967 0.874 0.796 0.730 0.674
1.16 1.05 0.961 0.884 0.817
1.38 1.25 1.15 1.06 0.978
1.61 1.47 1.35 1.24 1.15
1.87 1.70 1.57 1.45 1.34
2.12 1.94 1.79 1.66 1.55
2.60 0.217 0.242 0.269 0.299 0.334 0.372 0.413 0.459 0.510 0.566 0.626 0.760 0.910 1.08 1.25 2.80 0.201 0.225 0.250 0.278 0.311 0.346 0.385 0.428 0.475 0.527 0.584 0.710 0.851 1.01 1.17 3.00 0.188 0.210 0.234 0.260 0.290 0.324 0.360 0.401 0.445 0.494 0.547 0.666 0.799 0.944 1.10
1.44 1.35 1.27
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 208
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-45 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = ±45°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
45° yl
45°
c.g.
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.81 1.68 1.57 1.47 1.39
1.99 1.83 1.71 1.60 1.51
2.17 1.99 1.86 1.74 1.64
2.35 2.15 2.02 1.88 1.77
2.53 2.32 2.18 2.04 1.92
2.71 2.50 2.36 2.21 2.07
2.89 2.67 2.53 2.38 2.24
3.07 2.85 2.69 2.54 2.41
3.25 3.02 2.86 2.71 2.58
3.43 3.19 3.03 2.88 2.75
3.61 3.37 3.21 3.06 2.93
3.97 3.74 3.58 3.42 3.29
4.33 4.10 3.95 3.80 3.66
4.70 4.48 4.33 4.18 4.04
5.06 4.85 4.71 4.56 4.42
5.42 5.21 5.08 4.94 4.80
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.31 1.16 1.03 0.921 0.829
1.43 1.27 1.13 1.01 0.911
1.55 1.38 1.23 1.11 1.00
1.67 1.49 1.35 1.22 1.11
1.81 1.63 1.48 1.34 1.21
1.95 1.77 1.61 1.46 1.33
2.11 1.92 1.74 1.58 1.45
2.28 2.07 1.88 1.72 1.58
2.45 2.23 2.03 1.86 1.71
2.62 2.39 2.19 2.01 1.86
2.80 2.57 2.36 2.18 2.01
3.16 2.92 2.72 2.52 2.35
3.54 3.27 3.06 2.87 2.70
3.91 3.64 3.40 3.21 3.04
4.29 4.03 3.76 3.55 3.37
4.66 4.41 4.14 3.91 3.71
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.751 0.685 0.629 0.538 0.469
0.828 0.757 0.696 0.598 0.523
0.915 0.839 0.773 0.666 0.582
1.01 0.927 0.854 0.735 0.644
1.11 1.02 0.938 0.810 0.712
1.22 1.12 1.03 0.892 0.786
1.33 1.22 1.14 0.985 0.868
1.45 1.34 1.25 1.09 0.960
1.58 1.47 1.36 1.20 1.06
1.72 1.60 1.49 1.31 1.16
1.87 1.74 1.63 1.43 1.28
2.19 2.05 1.92 1.70 1.52
2.53 2.38 2.24 2.00 1.80
2.88 2.73 2.58 2.31 2.09
3.21 3.05 2.91 2.64 2.40
3.54 3.38 3.23 2.96 2.71
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.416 0.373 0.338 0.308 0.284
0.464 0.416 0.377 0.344 0.317
0.516 0.463 0.419 0.383 0.353
0.572 0.513 0.466 0.426 0.392
0.633 0.570 0.518 0.474 0.436
0.700 0.631 0.574 0.526 0.485
0.774 0.699 0.636 0.583 0.538
0.857 0.775 0.705 0.647 0.598
0.948 0.858 0.782 0.718 0.664
1.05 0.947 0.865 0.795 0.736
1.15 1.04 0.954 0.878 0.812
1.38 1.25 1.15 1.06 0.983
1.63 1.49 1.37 1.26 1.17
1.90 1.74 1.60 1.49 1.38
2.19 2.02 1.86 1.73 1.61
2.50 2.31 2.14 1.99 1.85
2.60 0.263 0.293 0.327 0.363 0.405 0.450 0.500 0.555 0.617 0.684 0.756 0.916 1.09 1.29 2.80 0.245 0.273 0.304 0.338 0.377 0.420 0.467 0.518 0.576 0.638 0.707 0.857 1.03 1.21 3.00 0.229 0.256 0.285 0.317 0.353 0.393 0.437 0.486 0.540 0.599 0.663 0.805 0.964 1.14
1.50 1.41 1.33
1.73 1.62 1.53
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
ECCENTRICALLY LOADED WELD GROUPS
8 - 209
Table 8-45 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = ±60°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where ex = a l
Pu = factored force, kips
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
60° yl
60°
c.g.
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
1.95 1.83 1.73 1.63 1.55
2.12 1.94 1.84 1.74 1.65
2.28 2.07 1.96 1.86 1.76
2.44 2.21 2.09 1.98 1.88
2.61 2.36 2.24 2.12 2.02
2.77 2.53 2.40 2.28 2.18
2.94 2.70 2.57 2.45 2.35
3.10 2.88 2.75 2.63 2.53
3.26 3.06 2.94 2.82 2.72
3.43 3.24 3.13 3.00 2.90
3.59 3.41 3.31 3.20 3.08
3.92 3.76 3.67 3.57 3.46
4.25 4.11 4.03 3.94 3.84
4.57 4.45 4.38 4.30 4.21
4.90 4.78 4.72 4.65 4.56
5.23 5.12 5.06 4.99 4.91
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.47 1.34 1.22 1.12 1.03
1.58 1.44 1.31 1.20 1.11
1.68 1.54 1.41 1.30 1.20
1.80 1.66 1.53 1.42 1.32
1.94 1.79 1.67 1.55 1.45
2.09 1.94 1.81 1.69 1.59
2.26 2.10 1.97 1.85 1.74
2.44 2.27 2.13 2.01 1.90
2.62 2.45 2.30 2.17 2.06
2.81 2.64 2.48 2.35 2.23
2.99 2.83 2.66 2.52 2.40
3.36 3.20 3.04 2.89 2.75
3.73 3.56 3.42 3.27 3.12
4.11 3.93 3.78 3.64 3.50
4.48 4.29 4.14 4.00 3.87
4.83 4.65 4.49 4.36 4.23
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
0.945 0.874 0.812 0.709 0.626
1.02 0.950 0.886 0.777 0.690
1.12 1.04 0.973 0.858 0.765
1.23 1.15 1.08 0.952 0.852
1.35 1.27 1.19 1.06 0.945
1.49 1.40 1.32 1.17 1.04
1.64 1.54 1.45 1.28 1.15
1.79 1.68 1.58 1.41 1.26
1.95 1.83 1.73 1.54 1.39
2.11 1.99 1.88 1.68 1.52
2.28 2.16 2.05 1.84 1.66
2.63 2.51 2.40 2.17 1.97
2.99 2.87 2.75 2.52 2.31
3.36 3.23 3.10 2.87 2.66
3.73 3.60 3.46 3.21 3.00
4.10 3.96 3.83 3.56 3.34
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.560 0.506 0.461 0.423 0.391
0.619 0.561 0.512 0.471 0.436
0.689 0.626 0.573 0.527 0.487
0.769 0.697 0.636 0.585 0.541
0.850 0.771 0.705 0.649 0.600
0.938 0.853 0.780 0.719 0.666
1.04 0.943 0.864 0.797 0.738
1.14 1.04 0.957 0.883 0.819
1.26 1.15 1.06 0.977 0.907
1.38 1.27 1.17 1.08 1.00
1.52 1.39 1.28 1.19 1.10
1.81 1.66 1.53 1.43 1.33
2.12 1.96 1.82 1.69 1.58
2.46 2.28 2.12 1.98 1.85
2.80 2.61 2.44 2.28 2.14
3.13 2.94 2.77 2.60 2.44
2.60 0.363 0.405 0.452 0.502 0.558 0.620 0.687 0.763 0.847 0.937 1.03 1.25 2.80 0.339 0.379 0.422 0.469 0.521 0.580 0.644 0.715 0.793 0.878 0.969 1.17 3.00 0.317 0.355 0.395 0.440 0.489 0.545 0.605 0.672 0.746 0.826 0.913 1.10
1.48 1.39 1.31
1.74 1.63 1.54
2.01 1.90 1.79
2.30 2.17 2.06
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 210
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-45 (cont.). Coefficients C for Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups Angle = ±75°° φ R n = CC1Dl
C min =
Pu
D min =
C 1D l
Pu
lmin =
CC 1 l
Pu
CC 1 D
where Pu = factored force, kips
ex = a l
D = number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the fillet weld size l = characteristic length of weld group, in. a = e x / l, in. e x = horizontal component of eccentricity of Pu with respect to centroid of weld group, in.
75° yl
75°
c.g.
l
Pu
C = coefficient tabulated below which includes φ = 0.75 C 1 = electode strength coefficient from Table 8-37 (1.0 for E70XX electrodes)
xl kl
k a
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
0.00 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25
2.05 1.94 1.88 1.82 1.76
2.20 2.01 1.94 1.89 1.83
2.35 2.08 2.03 1.97 1.92
2.50 2.20 2.15 2.09 2.04
2.65 2.34 2.29 2.24 2.19
2.79 2.49 2.44 2.39 2.35
2.94 2.65 2.61 2.56 2.52
3.09 2.81 2.77 2.73 2.69
3.24 2.97 2.94 2.90 2.86
3.39 3.13 3.10 3.07 3.03
3.54 3.28 3.25 3.23 3.20
3.83 3.59 3.56 3.53 3.51
4.13 3.93 3.87 3.84 3.81
4.43 4.25 4.20 4.15 4.11
4.72 4.57 4.52 4.48 4.42
5.02 4.88 4.84 4.80 4.75
0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70
1.71 1.62 1.53 1.46 1.38
1.78 1.69 1.61 1.53 1.46
1.87 1.79 1.70 1.63 1.56
2.00 1.91 1.83 1.75 1.68
2.14 2.05 1.97 1.89 1.82
2.30 2.21 2.12 2.05 1.97
2.47 2.38 2.29 2.21 2.14
2.65 2.56 2.47 2.39 2.31
2.82 2.74 2.66 2.57 2.49
3.00 2.92 2.84 2.76 2.68
3.17 3.10 3.03 2.95 2.87
3.49 3.43 3.38 3.31 3.25
3.79 3.75 3.70 3.65 3.60
4.09 4.05 4.02 3.97 3.93
4.39 4.35 4.32 4.28 4.24
4.70 4.65 4.61 4.58 4.55
0.80 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40
1.31 1.25 1.19 1.09 0.994
1.39 1.33 1.27 1.16 1.07
1.49 1.43 1.37 1.26 1.16
1.61 1.54 1.48 1.37 1.27
1.75 1.68 1.62 1.50 1.40
1.90 1.83 1.77 1.64 1.54
2.06 1.99 1.93 1.80 1.69
2.24 2.16 2.10 1.97 1.85
2.41 2.34 2.27 2.14 2.01
2.60 2.52 2.45 2.31 2.19
2.79 2.71 2.64 2.50 2.36
3.17 3.10 3.03 2.87 2.73
3.54 3.47 3.41 3.26 3.12
3.88 3.82 3.76 3.64 3.50
4.20 4.16 4.10 3.99 3.87
4.51 4.47 4.43 4.34 4.23
1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
0.914 0.845 0.784 0.730 0.683
0.987 0.915 0.852 0.797 0.748
1.08 1.00 0.937 0.878 0.825
1.18 1.11 1.04 0.972 0.915
1.30 1.22 1.15 1.08 1.02
1.44 1.35 1.27 1.20 1.13
1.58 1.49 1.40 1.33 1.26
1.74 1.64 1.55 1.46 1.39
1.90 1.80 1.70 1.60 1.52
2.07 1.95 1.84 1.74 1.65
2.24 2.11 2.00 1.89 1.80
2.59 2.45 2.33 2.21 2.10
2.97 2.82 2.69 2.56 2.44
3.36 3.21 3.06 2.92 2.80
3.74 3.61 3.46 3.31 3.17
4.11 3.99 3.85 3.71 3.56
2.60 0.641 0.704 0.778 0.865 0.963 1.07 1.19 2.80 0.604 0.664 0.736 0.819 0.913 1.02 1.13 3.00 0.570 0.628 0.698 0.777 0.867 0.966 1.07
1.32 1.25 1.18
1.44 1.37 1.30
1.57 1.49 1.42
1.71 1.62 1.55
2.00 1.91 1.82
2.33 2.23 2.13
2.68 2.57 2.46
3.05 2.93 2.81
3.42 3.30 3.18
x y
0.000 0.005 0.017 0.035 0.057 0.083 0.113 0.144 0.178 0.213 0.250 0.327 0.408 0.492 0.579 0.667 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 0.313 0.294 0.278 0.263 0.250 0.227 0.208 0.192 0.179 0.167
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONSTRUCTION COMBINING BOLTS AND WELDS
8 - 211
Eccentricity Normal to the Plane of the Faying Surface
Figure 8-55 shows a bracket welded to a column flange. The eccentric load Pu can be resolved into a concentric force Pu at the faying surface of the connection and a moment Pu e normal to the plane of the faying surface where e is the eccentricity. Each weld element is then assumed to support an equal share of the concentric force Pu, and the moment Pu e is resisted by tension in the welds above the neutral axis and compression below the neutral axis. In contrast to bolts, where the interaction of shear and tension must be considered, for welds, shear and tension may be combined vectorially for welds into a resultant shear. Thus, the solution of a weld loaded eccentrically normal to the plane of the faying surface is parallel to that discussed previously for welds loaded eccentrically in the plane of the faying surface; with the neutral axis assumed to be located at the CG of the weld group, this case is identical to that described previously for the elastic method. CONSTRUCTION COMBINING BOLTS AND WELDS
In bearing-type connections in new construction, the rigidity of the welds prevents the initial joint slippage necessary to develop the strength of all the bolts in a connection that might combine both welds and bolts. Thus, bearing-type connections combining welds and bolts are permissible only if the design strength of the welds φRn alone exceeds the required strength of the connection Ru. However, in situations where it can safely be assumed that joint slippage has occurred before welding is performed, welds may be used to reinforce existing bolted or riveted joints. Such is the case with structures previously in service. In this case, the design strength of the original bolt group may be used to carry the existing dead loads and the design strength of the welds need be adequate only to carry additional loads. Refer to LRFD Specification Section J1.9. In slip-critical connections, since connection slip is neither expected nor required for the bolts to develop their strength, the design strengths of welds and high-strength bolts are additive. When high-strength bolts and welds are used together in a slip-critical connection, the bolts should preferably be fully tensioned before welding is performed. The design drawings should clearly indicate where this type of connection occurs.
Pu e
Fig. 8-55. Welds subjected to eccentricity normal to the plane of the faying surface. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 212
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Connected elements are the angles, plates, tees, gussets, and other connecting elements used in connections to transfer load from one structural member to another as well as the affected elements of the connected members. Economical Considerations
Cost effective steel fabrication requires close cooperation between the designer, detailer, and fabricator. Effective communication and planning will allow the project to take full advantage of the strengths of all parties involved. Often, potential problems can be avoided through early consultation and good communication during the full life of a project. Designs and details should be suited to the shop practices and standards of the fabricator. The resulting similarity throughout the project will further lend itself to the minimization of errors. For example, once gage lines conforming to standard machine set-ups are determined, they should be utilized as much as possible throughout any one job. Furthermore, it is desirable to keep the same bolt spacing throughout a project. Longitudinal spacing should preferably be three inches or a multiple of three inches, since most shops consider this to be standard. At a minimum, gages and hole sizes on any one member should not be varied throughout the length of that member. This prevents unnecessary material re-handling and the need for multiple punching or drilling. Design Strength of Connected Elements
The design strength of connecting elements is determined in accordance with the provisions of LRFD Specification Sections J4 and J5; the applicable limit states are shear yielding, shear rupture, block shear rupture, tension yielding, and tension rupture. Shear Yielding
This limit state applies to the gross section of the connected element. From LRFD Specification Section J5.3, the design shear yielding strength is φRn, where φ = 0.90 Rn = 0.60Fy Ag Shear Rupture
This limit state applies to the net section From LRFD Specification Section J4.1, the design shear rupture strength is φRn, where φ = 0.75 Rn = 0.60Fu Anv Table 8-46 gives the reduction in area for standard, oversized, short-slotted, and long-slotted holes in material thicknesses from 3⁄16-in. to 1 in.; for other material thicknesses, multiply the tabular value for 1-in. thickness by the actual thickness. Block Shear Rupture
The term block shear rupture describes a material tearing limit state which occurs in a combination of shear and tension. This phenomenon can occur at the end of a coped beam, shown in Figure 8-56, or at the end of a tension connection, shown in Figure 8-57. This AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 213
Table 8-46. Reduction in Area for Holes, in.2 C
Thckns. t, in.
A
B
STD Standard Hole
OVS Oversized Hole
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
D
A
A
SSL Short-Slotted Hole
LSL Long-Slotted Hole
A ×t
B ×t
Bolt Diameter d b , in.
Bolt Diameter d b , in.
1
1 1 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄4
1 3 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄2
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
1 1 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄4
1 3 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄2
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
0.164 0.188 0.211 0.234 0.258 0.281 0.305 0.188 0.211 0.246 0.281 0.305 0.328 0.352 0.219 0.250 0.281 0.313 0.344 0.375 0.406 0.250 0.281 0.328 0.375 0.406 0.438 0.469
5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
0.273 0.328 0.383 0.438
0.313 0.375 0.438 0.500
0.352 0.422 0.492 0.563
0.391 0.469 0.547 0.625
0.430 0.516 0.602 0.688
0.469 0.563 0.656 0.750
0.508 0.609 0.711 0.813
0.313 0.375 0.438 0.500
0.352 0.422 0.492 0.563
0.410 0.492 0.574 0.656
0.469 0.563 0.656 0.750
0.508 0.609 0.711 0.813
0.547 0.656 0.766 0.875
0.586 0.703 0.820 0.938
9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
0.492 0.547 0.602 0.656
0.563 0.625 0.688 0.750
0.633 0.703 0.773 0.844
0.703 0.781 0.859 0.938
0.773 0.859 0.945 1.03
0.844 0.938 1.03 1.13
0.914 1.02 1.12 1.22
0.563 0.625 0.688 0.750
0.633 0.703 0.773 0.844
0.738 0.820 0.902 0.984
0.844 0.938 1.03 1.13
0.914 1.02 1.12 1.22
0.984 1.09 1.20 1.31
1.05 1.17 1.29 1.41
13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
0.711 0.766 0.820 0.875
0.813 0.875 0.938 1.00
0.914 0.984 1.05 1.13
1.02 1.09 1.17 1.25
1.12 1.20 1.29 1.38
1.22 1.31 1.41 1.50
1.32 1.42 1.52 1.63
0.813 0.875 0.938 1.00
0.914 0.984 1.05 1.13
1.07 1.15 1.23 1.31
1.22 1.31 1.41 1.50
1.32 1.42 1.52 1.63
1.42 1.53 1.64 1.75
1.52 1.64 1.76 1.88
1 3 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄2
1
Thckns. t, in.
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
C ×t
D ×t
Bolt Diameter d b , in.
Bolt Diameter d b , in.
1
1 1 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄4
1 3 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄2
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
1 1 ⁄8
1 1 ⁄4
3⁄ 16 1⁄ 4
0.199 0.223 0.258 0.293 0.316 0.340 0.363 0.363 0.422 0.480 0.539 0.598 0.656 0.715 0.266 0.297 0.344 0.391 0.422 0.453 0.484 0.484 0.563 0.641 0.719 0.797 0.875 0.953
5⁄ 16 3⁄ 8 7⁄ 16 1⁄ 2
0.332 0.398 0.465 0.531
0.371 0.445 0.520 0.594
0.430 0.516 0.602 0.688
0.488 0.586 0.684 0.781
0.527 0.633 0.738 0.844
0.566 0.680 0.793 0.906
0.605 0.727 0.848 0.969
0.605 0.727 0.848 0.969
0.703 0.844 0.984 1.13
0.801 0.961 1.12 1.28
0.898 1.08 1.26 1.44
0.996 1.20 1.39 1.59
1.09 1.31 1.53 1.75
1.19 1.43 1.67 1.91
9⁄ 16 5⁄ 8 11⁄ 16 3⁄ 4
0.598 0.664 0.730 0.797
0.668 0.742 0.816 0.891
0.773 0.859 0.945 1.03
0.879 0.977 1.07 1.17
0.949 1.05 1.16 1.27
1.02 1.13 1.25 1.36
1.09 1.21 1.33 1.45
1.09 1.21 1.33 1.45
1.27 1.41 1.55 1.69
1.44 1.60 1.76 1.92
1.62 1.80 1.98 2.16
1.79 1.99 2.19 2.39
1.97 2.19 2.41 2.63
2.14 2.38 2.62 2.86
13⁄ 16 7⁄ 8 15⁄ 16
0.863 0.930 0.996 1.06
0.965 1.04 1.11 1.19
1.12 1.20 1.29 1.38
1.27 1.37 1.46 1.56
1.37 1.48 1.58 1.69
1.47 1.59 1.70 1.81
1.57 1.70 1.82 1.94
1.57 1.70 1.82 1.94
1.83 1.97 2.11 2.25
2.08 2.24 2.40 2.56
2.34 2.52 2.70 2.88
2.59 2.79 2.99 3.19
2.84 3.06 3.28 3.50
3.10 3.34 3.57 3.81
1
failure is usually the result of high reactions imposed on relatively thin material through a short connection. The design block shear rupture strength is φRn, where φ = 0.75 and Rn is determined as follows. For bolted connections, from LRFD Specification Section J4.3, when Fu Ant ≥ 0.6Fu Anv, shear yielding occurs in combination with tension rupture and, Rn = 0.6Fy Agv + Fu Ant AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 214
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
This case is the basis of Tables 8-47, where φFu Ant is tabulated per inch of material thickness in Table 8-47a and φ(0.6Fy Agv) is tabulated per inch of material thickness in Table 8-47b. When 0.6Fu Anv > Fu Ant , shear rupture occurs in combination with tension yielding and, Rn = 0.6Fu Anv + Fy Agt This case is the basis of Tables 8-48, where φ(0.6Fu Anv) is tabulated per inch of material thickness in Table 8-48a and φFy Agt is tabulated per inch of material thickness in Table 8-48b. For welded connections, block shear rupture is treated as for bolted connections; the only difference is that, in the absence of bolt holes, Anv = Agv and Ant = Agt. L eh
L ev n bolts @ s spacing
Shear Area
Shear Area
Tension Area
Tension Area
(a) Bolted Connections
(b) Welded Connections
Fig. 8-56. Block shear rupture in coped beams.
L eh
L ev Shear Area
n bolts @ s spacing
Tension Area
Fig. 8-57. Block shear rupture in ends of tension members. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 215
Table 8-47a. Block Shear Rupture Tension Rupture Component per inch of thickness, φ[FuAnt] / t, kips/in. L eh
Fu, ksi 58
65
70
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
24.5
21.8
19.0
27.4
24.4
21.3
29.5
26.3
23.0
1 1 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
29.9 35.3 40.8 46.2
27.2 32.6 38.1 43.5
24.5 29.9 35.3 40.8
33.5 39.6 45.7 51.8
30.5 36.6 42.7 48.8
27.4 33.5 39.6 45.7
36.1 42.7 49.2 55.8
32.8 39.4 45.9 52.5
29.5 36.1 42.7 49.2
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
51.7 57.1 62.5 68.0
48.9 54.4 59.8 65.3
46.2 51.7 57.1 62.5
57.9 64.0 70.1 76.2
54.8 60.9 67.0 73.1
51.8 57.9 64.0 70.1
62.3 68.9 75.5 82.0
59.1 65.6 72.2 78.8
55.8 62.3 68.9 75.5
78.8 89.7 101 111
76.1 87.0 97.9 109
73.4 84.3 95.2 106
88.4 101 113 125
85.3 97.5 110 122
82.3 94.5 107 119
95.2 108 121 135
91.9 105 118 131
88.6 102 115 128
Leh, in.
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
3
1
1
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1
8 - 216
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-47b. Block Shear Rupture Shear Yielding Component per inch of thickness, φ[0.6FyAgv] / t, kips/in.
L ev n bolts @ 3 ″ spacing
Fy, ksi 36
50
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
n
Lev, in.
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
12
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
562 564 566
563 565 567
564 566 568
780 783 786
782 785 788
783 786 789
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
568 570 572 574
569 571 573 575
570 572 574 576
789 792 795 797
790 793 796 799
792 795 797 800
3
578 582 586 590
579 583 587 591
580 584 588 592
803 809 814 820
804 810 816 821
806 811 817 823
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
513 515 517
514 516 518
515 517 519
713 716 719
714 717 720
716 719 721
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
519 521 523 525
520 522 524 527
521 523 525 528
721 724 727 730
723 726 728 731
724 727 730 733
3
530 534 538 542
531 535 539 543
532 536 540 544
735 741 747 752
737 743 748 754
738 744 750 755
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
465 467 469
466 468 470
467 469 471
645 648 651
647 650 653
648 651 654
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
471 473 475 477
472 474 476 478
473 475 477 479
654 657 660 662
655 658 661 664
657 660 662 665
481 485 489 493
482 486 490 494
483 487 491 495
668 674 679 685
669 675 681 686
671 676 682 688
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
11
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
10
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 217
Table 8-47b (cont.). Block Shear Rupture Shear Yielding Component per inch of thickness, φ[0.6FyAgv] / t, kips/in.
L ev n bolts @ 3 ″ spacing
Fy, ksi 36
50
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
n
Lev, in.
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
9
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
416 418 420
417 419 421
418 420 422
578 581 584
579 582 585
581 584 586
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
422 424 426 428
423 425 427 429
424 426 428 430
586 589 592 595
588 591 593 596
589 592 595 598
3
432 436 440 444
433 437 441 446
434 438 442 447
600 606 612 617
602 608 613 619
603 609 615 620
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
368 370 372
369 371 373
370 372 374
510 513 516
512 515 518
513 516 519
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
374 376 378 380
375 377 379 381
376 378 380 382
519 522 525 527
520 523 526 529
522 525 527 530
3
384 388 392 396
385 389 393 397
386 390 394 398
533 539 544 550
534 540 546 551
536 541 547 553
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
319 321 323
320 322 324
321 323 325
443 446 449
444 447 450
446 449 451
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
325 327 329 331
326 328 330 332
327 329 331 333
451 454 457 460
453 456 458 461
454 457 460 463
335 339 343 347
336 340 344 348
337 341 345 349
465 471 477 482
467 473 478 484
468 474 480 485
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
8
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
7
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 218
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-47b (cont.). Block Shear Rupture Shear Yielding Component per inch of thickness, φ[0.6FyAgv] / t, kips/in.
L ev n bolts @ 3 ″ spacing
Fy, ksi 36
50
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
n
Lev, in.
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
6
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
270 272 274
271 273 275
272 274 276
375 378 381
377 380 383
378 381 384
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
276 278 280 282
277 279 281 284
278 280 282 285
384 387 390 392
385 388 391 394
387 390 392 395
3
287 291 295 299
288 292 296 300
289 293 297 301
398 404 409 415
399 405 411 416
401 406 412 418
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
222 224 226
223 225 227
224 226 228
308 311 314
309 312 315
311 314 316
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
228 230 232 234
229 231 233 235
230 232 234 236
316 319 322 325
318 321 323 326
319 322 325 328
3
238 242 246 250
239 243 247 251
240 244 248 252
330 336 342 347
332 338 343 349
333 339 345 350
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
173 175 177
174 176 178
175 177 179
240 243 246
242 245 248
243 246 249
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
179 181 183 185
180 182 184 186
181 183 185 187
249 252 255 257
250 253 256 259
252 255 257 260
189 193 197 201
190 194 198 203
191 195 199 204
263 269 274 280
264 270 276 281
266 271 277 283
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
5
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
4
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 219
Table 8-47b (cont.). Block Shear Rupture Shear Yielding Component per inch of thickness, φ[0.6FyAgv] / t, kips/in.
L ev n bolts @ 3 ″ spacing
Fy, ksi 36
50
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
n
Lev, in.
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
125 127 129
126 128 130
127 129 131
173 176 179
174 177 180
176 179 181
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
131 133 135 137
132 134 136 138
133 135 137 139
181 184 187 190
183 186 188 191
184 187 190 193
3
141 145 149 153
142 146 150 154
143 147 151 155
195 201 207 212
197 203 208 214
198 204 210 215
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
76 78 80
77 79 81
78 80 82
105 108 111
107 110 113
108 111 114
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
82 84 86 88
83 85 87 89
84 86 88 90
114 117 120 122
115 118 121 124
117 120 122 125
92 96 100 104
93 97 101 105
94 98 102 106
128 134 139 145
129 135 141 146
131 136 142 148
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
2
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 220
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-48a. Block Shear Rupture Shear Rupture Component per inch of thickness, φ[0.6FuAnv] / t, kips/in.
L ev n bolts @ 3 ″ spacing
Fu, ksi 58
65
70
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
n
Lev, in.
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
12
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
631 635 638
594 597 600
556 560 563
707 711 715
665 669 673
623 627 631
762 766 770
717 721 725
671 675 679
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
641 644 648 651
604 607 610 613
566 569 573 576
718 722 726 729
676 680 684 687
634 638 642 645
774 778 782 786
728 732 736 740
683 687 691 695
3
657 664 670 677
620 626 633 639
582 589 595 602
737 744 751 759
695 702 709 717
653 660 667 675
793 801 809 817
748 756 764 772
703 711 719 726
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
576 579 582
542 545 548
507 511 514
645 649 653
607 611 614
569 572 576
695 699 703
654 658 662
612 616 620
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
586 589 592 595
551 555 558 561
517 520 524 527
656 660 664 667
618 622 625 629
580 583 587 590
707 711 715 719
665 669 673 677
624 628 632 636
3
602 608 615 622
568 574 581 587
533 540 546 553
675 682 689 697
636 644 651 658
598 605 612 620
726 734 742 750
685 693 701 709
644 652 660 667
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
520 524 527
489 493 496
458 462 465
583 587 590
548 552 556
514 517 521
628 632 636
591 595 599
553 557 561
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
530 533 537 540
499 502 506 509
468 471 475 478
594 598 601 605
559 563 567 570
525 528 532 536
640 644 648 652
602 606 610 614
565 569 573 577
546 553 560 566
515 522 529 535
484 491 498 504
612 620 627 634
578 585 592 600
543 550 558 565
660 667 675 683
622 630 638 646
585 593 600 608
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
11
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
10
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 221
Table 8-48a (cont.). Block Shear Rupture Shear Rupture Component per inch of thickness, φ[0.6FuAnv ] / t, kips/in.
L ev n bolts @ 3 ″ spacing
Fu, ksi 58
65
70
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
n
Lev, in.
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
9
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
465 468 471
437 440 444
409 413 416
521 525 528
490 494 497
459 463 466
561 565 569
528 532 536
494 498 502
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
475 478 481 484
447 450 453 457
419 422 426 429
532 536 539 543
501 505 508 512
470 473 477 481
573 577 581 585
539 543 547 551
506 510 514 518
3
491 498 504 511
463 470 476 483
436 442 449 455
550 558 565 572
519 527 534 541
488 495 503 510
593 600 608 616
559 567 575 583
526 534 541 549
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
409 413 416
385 388 392
361 364 367
459 463 466
431 435 439
404 408 411
494 498 502
465 469 473
435 439 443
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
419 422 426 429
395 398 401 405
370 374 377 380
470 473 477 481
442 446 450 453
415 419 422 426
506 510 514 518
476 480 484 488
447 451 455 459
3
436 442 449 455
411 418 424 431
387 393 400 406
488 495 503 510
461 468 475 483
433 441 448 455
526 534 541 549
496 504 512 520
467 474 482 490
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
354 357 361
333 336 339
312 315 318
397 400 404
373 377 380
349 353 356
427 431 435
402 406 410
376 380 384
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
364 367 370 374
343 346 349 352
321 325 328 331
408 411 415 419
384 388 391 395
360 364 367 371
439 443 447 451
413 417 421 425
388 392 396 400
380 387 393 400
359 365 372 378
338 344 351 357
426 433 441 448
402 410 417 424
378 386 393 400
459 467 474 482
433 441 449 457
408 415 423 431
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
8
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
7
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 222
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-48a (cont.). Block Shear Rupture Shear Rupture Component per inch of thickness, φ[0.6FuAnv ] / t, kips/in.
L ev n bolts @ 3 ″ spacing
Fu, ksi 58
65
70
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
n
Lev, in.
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
6
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
299 302 305
281 284 287
263 266 269
335 338 342
314 318 322
294 298 302
360 364 368
339 343 347
317 321 325
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
308 312 315 318
290 294 297 300
272 276 279 282
346 349 353 356
325 329 333 336
305 309 313 316
372 376 380 384
350 354 358 362
329 333 337 341
3
325 331 338 344
307 313 320 326
289 295 302 308
364 371 378 386
344 351 358 366
324 331 338 346
392 400 408 415
370 378 386 394
348 356 364 372
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
243 246 250
228 232 235
214 217 220
272 276 280
256 260 263
239 243 247
293 297 301
276 280 284
258 262 266
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
253 256 259 263
238 241 245 248
223 227 230 233
283 287 291 294
267 271 274 278
250 254 258 261
305 309 313 317
287 291 295 299
270 274 278 282
3
269 276 282 289
254 261 268 274
240 246 253 259
302 309 316 324
285 293 300 307
269 276 283 291
325 333 341 348
307 315 323 331
289 297 305 313
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
188 191 194
176 179 183
165 168 171
210 214 218
197 201 205
185 188 192
226 230 234
213 217 221
199 203 207
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
197 201 204 207
186 189 192 196
175 178 181 184
221 225 229 232
208 212 216 219
196 199 203 207
238 242 246 250
224 228 232 236
211 215 219 222
214 220 227 233
202 209 215 222
191 197 204 210
239 247 254 261
227 234 241 249
214 221 229 236
258 266 274 282
244 252 260 268
230 238 246 254
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
5
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
4
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 223
Table 8-48a (cont.). Block Shear Rupture Shear Rupture Component per inch of thickness, φ[0.6FuAnv ] / t, kips/in.
L ev n bolts @ 3 ″ spacing
Fu, ksi 58
65
70
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
Bolt Diameter db, in.
n
Lev, in.
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
1
3
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
132 135 139
124 127 131
116 119 122
148 152 155
139 143 146
130 133 137
159 163 167
150 154 158
140 144 148
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
142 145 148 152
134 137 140 144
126 129 132 135
159 163 166 170
150 154 157 161
141 144 148 152
171 175 179 183
161 165 169 173
152 156 159 163
3
158 165 171 178
150 157 163 170
142 148 155 161
177 185 192 199
168 176 183 190
159 166 174 181
191 199 207 215
181 189 197 205
171 179 187 195
1 1 ⁄4 1 3 ⁄8 1 1 ⁄2
77 80 83
72 75 78
67 70 73
86 90 93
80 84 88
75 79 82
93 96 100
87 91 95
81 85 89
1 5 ⁄8 1 3 ⁄4 1 7 ⁄8
86 90 93 96
82 85 88 91
77 80 83 86
97 101 104 108
91 95 99 102
86 90 93 97
104 108 112 116
98 102 106 110
93 96 100 104
103 109 116 122
98 104 111 117
93 100 106 113
115 122 130 137
110 117 124 132
104 112 119 126
124 132 140 148
118 126 134 142
112 120 128 136
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
2
2 2 1 ⁄4 2 1 ⁄2 2 3 ⁄4
3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 224
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
Table 8-48b. Block Shear Rupture Tension Yielding Component per inch of thickness φ[FyAgt] / t, kips/in. L eh
Fy, ksi Leh, in.
36
50
1
27.0
37.5
11⁄8 11⁄4 13⁄8 11⁄2
30.4 33.8 37.1 40.5
42.2 46.9 51.6 56.3
15⁄8 13⁄4 17⁄8 2
43.9 47.3 50.6 54.0
60.9 65.6 70.3 75.0
21⁄4 21⁄2 23⁄4 3
60.8 67.5 74.3 81.0
84.4 93.8 103 113
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 225
Tension Yielding
From LRFD Specification Section J5.2, the design tension yielding strength is φRn, where φ = 0.90 Rn = Fy Ag Tension Rupture
From LRFD Specification Section J5.2, the design tension rupture strength is φRn, where φ = 0.75 Rn = Fu An In the above equation, An is the net area not to exceed 0.85Ag. Table 8-46 gives the reduction in area for standard, oversized, short-slotted, and long-slotted holes in material thicknesses from 3⁄16-in. to 1 in.; for material thicknesses not listed, multiply the tabular value for 1-in. thickness by the actual thickness. Members with Copes, Blocks, or Cuts
When structural members frame together, a minimum clearance of 1⁄2-in. should be provided, when possible. In cases where material removal is necessary to provide such a clearance, material may be removed by coping, blocking, or cutting as illustrated in Figures 8-58. Note the recommended practices for coping illustrated in Figure 8-59; the potential notch left by the first cut will occur in waste material which will subsequently be removed by the second cut. All re-entrant corners must be shaped notch-free per AWS D1.1 to a radius. An approximate minimum radius to which this corner must be shaped is 1⁄2-in. Material removal is costly, and should be avoided when possible. For example, the elevations of the tops of infill beams could be established at a sufficient distance below the tops of girders to clear the girder fillet. Alternatively, coping could be eliminated with a connection as illustrated in Figure 8-60; this detail also allows the use of a shorter beam length. When necessary, coping is usually the most economical method to remove material. Copes, blocks, and cuts can significantly reduce the design strengths of members and may require web reinforcement; it may be more economical to use a heavier member than to provide such reinforcement. The design strength of the unreinforced coped member is determined from the limit states of flexural yielding, local buckling, and lateral torsional buckling, if applicable. Web reinforcement of coped beams is discussed in Part 9. Flexural Yielding
The flexural yielding strength of a supported beam which is coped at the top and/or bottom is φbMn, where φb = 0.90 Mn = Fy Snet AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 226
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
In the above equation, Snet is the net elastic section modulus, in.3 Values of Snet are tabulated in Table 8-49. The beam-end reaction Ru must be such that: Ru ≤
φbMn e
where e is the distance from the face of the cope to the point of inflection of the beam, in. It is usually assumed that the point of inflection is located at the face of the supporting member and e is as shown in Figure 8-61. However, depending upon the connection type and stiffness and support condition, the point of inflection may move away from the face of the supporting member; when this is the case, a lesser value of e may be justified. In any case, the choice of e shown in Figure 8-61 will be conservative. Local Web Buckling
For short copes no greater than the length of the connection angle(s), plate, or tee, local web buckling will generally not occur. If, however, the depth of the cope were such that
c dc
c
Cut not grid preferred Cut and grid if surface must be flush with web
c dc
(a) Cope
(b) Blocks
(c) Cut
Fig. 8-58. Copes, blocks, and cuts.
first cut
resulting notch occurs in waste
0 to 15° as required second cut
second cut potential notch
AVOID
first cut
RECOMMENDED
Fig. 8-59. Recommended coping practice. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 227
dc > 0.2d, the unreinforced web could buckle between the top of the cope and the beam flange if the beam web were thin. In a reduced section, the design strength in local web buckling may be more critical than the design strength in flexural yielding. This design strength is critical at the compression zone of the web near the cope and is dependent on three parameters: (1) cope depth dc; (2) cope length c; and (3) web thickness tw. It should be noted that, for convenience, the dimension h0 in Figure 8-61 is used instead of the more correct dimension h1; this eliminates the detailed calculation required to locate the neutral axis of the coped beam. Alternatively, the dimension h1 may be substituted for h0 in the following local buckling calculations. The beam end reaction Ru must be such that: Ru ≤
φFbc Snet e
where Snet = elastic section modulus of the net section, in.3 from Table 8-49 e = distance from the end reaction to the face of the cope, in. and φFbc is determined as follows. When a beam is coped at the top flange only, the design recommendations are based on the classical plate buckling formula with a k-factor based on three edges simply supported and one free edge. An additional factor f, which generally accounts for stress concentration at the cope, was developed to correlate with the coped beam buckling solutions (Cheng, et. al., 1984). From Figure 8-61, when the c ≤ 2d and dc ≤ d / 2, 2
π2E tw fk Fcr = 12(1 − v2) ho where E = 29,000 ksi, modulus of elasticity of steel ν = 0.3, Poisson’s ratio f = plate buckling model adjustment factor
(a) Coping Required
(b) Coping Eliminated
Fig. 8-60. Minimizing coping requirements. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 228
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
k = plate buckling coefficient ho = d − dc, reduced beam depth, in. Thus, the design buckling stress φFbc for a beam coped at the top flange only is, 2
tw φFbc = 23,590 fk ho where f and k are determined from the following equations: c c f = 2 for ≤ 1.0 d d c c f = 1 + for > 1.0 d d ho c k = 2.2 for ≤ 1.0 ho c ho c k = 2.2 for > 1.0 ho c When a beam is coped at both flanges, the design recommendations are based on the lateral buckling model with an adjustment factor fd (Cheng, et al., 1984). From Figure 8-62, when at both flanges c ≤ 2d and dc ≤ 0.2d, Fcr = 0.62πE
t2w f cho d
Thus, the design buckling stress φFbc for a beam coped at both flanges is, φFbc = 50,840
t2w f cho d
and e c
Buckling checked here dc
Setback
ho
Ru
d
h1
tw
Simple shear connection
Fig. 8-61. Local buckling of beam web coped at top flange only. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
N.A.
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 229
d d
c fd = 3.5 − 7.5
where dc is the larger of the top cope depth dct and the bottom cope depth dcb. Lateral Torsional Buckling
In laterally unbraced beams, copes, blocks, and cuts further reduce the out-of-plane rotational restraint. Cheng, et al. (1984) discusses the design strength of laterally unbraced coped beams. For laterally unbraced beams coped at the top only, this design strength may be determined with this information and the provisions of LRFD Specification Section F1.2. For laterally unbraced beams coped at the top and bottom, this design strength may be determined with this information and the provisions of LRFD Specification Appendix F1. A detailed discussion of this topic is beyond the scope of this text.
e c
Buckling checked here
Simple shear connection
d
Ru
tw
d cb
d – d ct – dcb
d ct
Setback
Fig. 8-62. Local buckling of beam web coped at both flanges. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
N.A.
8 - 230
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
So
Snet
d
Sx
d
d
dc
Table 8-49. Section Modulus of Coped W Shapes
Snet, in.3 dc, in.
Designation
d in.
tf in.
Sx in.3
So in.3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W44×335 W ×290 W ×262 W ×230
44.0 43.6 43.3 42.9
1.77 1.58 1.42 1.22
1410 1240 1120 969
492 417 374 330
451 382 342 301
431 365 327 288
411 348 312 274
392 332 297 261
373 316 283 249
355 300 269 236
337 285 255 224
320 270 241 212
303 255 228 200
W40×593 W ×503 W ×431 W ×372 W ×321 W ×297 W ×277 W ×249 W ×215 W ×199 W ×174
43.0 42.1 41.3 40.6 40.1 39.8 39.7 39.4 39.0 38.7 38.2
3.23 2.76 2.36 2.05 1.77 1.65 1.58 1.42 1.22 1.07 0.830
2340 1980 1690 1460 1250 1170 1100 992 858 769 639
810 673 567 480 406 374 335 299 256 247 234
— — — — 368 339 304 271 231 224 211
— 584 491 415 350 323 289 258 220 213 201
671 556 467 394 332 306 274 245 208 202 190
639 528 444 374 315 290 260 232 197 191 180
607 501 421 354 298 275 246 219 186 180 170
575 475 398 335 282 259 232 207 176 170 160
545 449 376 316 266 245 219 195 166 160 151
515 424 355 298 250 230 206 183 156 150 142
486 399 334 280 235 216 193 172 146 141 133
W40×466 W ×392 W ×331 W ×278 W ×264 W ×235 W ×211 W ×183 W ×167 W ×149
42.4 41.6 40.8 40.2 40.0 39.7 39.4 39.0 38.6 38.2
2.95 2.52 2.13 1.81 1.73 1.58 1.42 1.22 1.03 0.830
1710 1440 1210 1020 971 874 785 682 599 512
705 581 483 396 371 320 286 244 234 217
— — — 360 337 291 259 221 212 196
613 504 419 342 321 276 246 210 201 186
584 480 398 325 305 262 234 199 191 177
556 456 378 308 289 249 221 189 181 167
528 432 358 292 274 235 209 179 171 158
500 409 339 276 259 222 198 168 161 149
474 387 320 261 244 210 186 159 152 140
448 365 302 245 230 197 175 149 143 132
422 344 284 231 216 185 165 140 134 123
W36×848 W ×798 W ×650 W ×527 W ×439 W ×393 W ×359 W ×328 W ×300 W ×280 W ×260 W ×245 W ×230
42.5 42.0 40.5 39.3 38.3 37.8 37.4 37.1 36.7 36.5 36.3 36.1 35.9
4.53 4.29 3.54 2.91 2.44 2.20 2.01 1.85 1.68 1.57 1.44 1.35 1.26
3170 2980 2420 1950 1620 1450 1320 1210 1110 1030 953 895 837
1094 1016 794 618 503 443 400 360 328 305 285 269 253
— — — — — — — 324 295 274 256 241 227
— — — 531 430 378 341 307 279 259 242 228 214
903 836 649 503 407 358 322 290 264 245 228 215 202
858 794 615 476 384 338 304 273 249 230 215 203 190
813 752 582 449 362 318 286 257 234 217 202 190 179
770 712 550 423 341 299 269 242 220 203 190 178 168
728 673 518 398 320 281 252 226 206 190 177 167 157
687 634 487 374 300 263 236 212 192 178 166 156 146
647 597 457 350 280 246 220 197 179 165 154 145 136
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 231
So
Snet
d
Sx
d
d
dc
Table 8-49 (cont.). Section Modulus of Coped W Shapes
Snet, in.3 Designation
d in.
tf in.
Sx in.3
W36×256 W ×232 W ×210 W ×194 W ×182 W ×170 W ×160 W ×150 W ×135
37.4 37.1 36.7 36.5 36.3 36.2 36.0 35.9 35.6
1.73 1.57 1.36 1.26 1.18 1.10 1.02 0.940 0.790
895 809 719 664 623 580 542 504 439
W33×354 W ×318 W ×291 W ×263 W ×241 W ×221 W ×201
35.6 35.2 34.8 34.5 34.2 33.9 33.7
2.09 1.89 1.73 1.57 1.40 1.28 1.15
W33×169 W ×152 W ×141 W ×130 W ×118
33.8 33.5 33.3 33.1 32.9
W30×477 W ×391 W ×326 W ×292 W ×261 W ×235 W ×211 W ×191 W ×173 W30×148 W ×132 W ×124 W ×116 W ×108 W ×99 W ×90
So in.3
dc, in. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
329 295 272 249 234 218 206 195 181
297 266 245 224 211 196 185 176 163
281 251 232 212 199 185 175 166 154
266 238 219 201 188 175 165 157 145
251 224 207 189 178 165 156 148 137
237 211 195 178 167 155 147 139 129
223 199 183 167 157 146 138 130 121
209 186 172 157 147 137 129 122 113
196 174 161 146 137 128 120 114 105
183 163 150 137 128 119 112 106 98.1
1230 1110 1010 917 829 757 684
373 330 300 268 250 230 209
— 295 268 239 223 205 186
315 278 253 226 210 193 175
297 262 238 212 197 181 165
279 246 223 199 185 170 154
262 230 209 186 173 159 144
245 216 195 174 162 148 135
229 201 182 162 150 138 125
213 187 169 151 140 128 116
198 173 157 139 129 118 107
1.22 1.06 0.960 0.855 0.740
549 487 448 406 359
191 176 165 155 143
170 157 147 138 128
161 148 139 130 120
151 139 130 122 113
141 130 122 114 106
132 122 114 107 98.6
124 114 106 100 91.9
115 106 98.8 92.5 85.4
107 97.9 91.6 85.7 79.1
98.6 90.5 84.6 79.2 73.0
34.2 33.2 32.4 32.0 31.6 31.3 30.9 30.7 30.4
2.95 2.44 2.05 1.85 1.65 1.50 1.32 1.19 1.07
1530 1250 1030 928 827 746 663 598 539
475 378 305 269 240 211 192 174 158
— — — 238 212 186 170 153 139
398 315 254 223 198 174 159 143 130
374 295 237 208 185 163 148 133 121
350 276 221 194 172 152 138 124 112
327 257 206 180 160 141 128 115 104
305 239 191 167 148 130 118 106 96.1
283 222 177 155 137 120 109 97.7 88.4
262 205 163 142 126 110 100 89.6 81.0
242 188 150 130 115 101 91.2 81.8 73.9
30.7 30.3 30.2 30.0 29.8 29.7 29.5
1.18 1.00 0.930 0.850 0.760 0.670 0.610
436 380 355 329 299 269 245
152 139 131 124 118 110 98.7
134 123 115 109 103 96.4 86.7
125 115 108 102 96.5 90.0 80.9
117 107 100 95.3 89.9 83.9 75.4
109 99.3 93.4 88.6 83.6 77.9 70.0
101 92.1 86.5 82.1 77.4 72.1 64.8
93.3 85.1 79.9 75.8 71.4 66.5 59.7
86.0 78.3 73.6 69.7 65.7 61.1 54.9
78.9 71.8 67.4 63.9 60.1 56.0 50.2
72.1 65.5 61.5 58.2 54.8 51.0 45.7
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
10
8 - 232
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
So
Snet
d
Sx
d
d
dc
Table 8-49 (cont.). Section Modulus of Coped W Shapes
Snet, in.3 Designation
d in.
tf in.
Sx in.3
So in.3
W27×539 W ×448 W ×368 W ×307 W ×281 W ×258 W ×235 W ×217 W ×194 W ×178 W ×161 W ×146
32.5 31.4 30.4 29.6 29.3 29.0 28.7 28.4 28.1 27.8 27.6 27.4
3.54 2.99 2.48 2.09 1.93 1.77 1.61 1.50 1.34 1.19 1.08 0.975
1570 1300 1060 884 811 742 674 624 556 502 455 411
W27×129 W ×114 W ×102 W ×94 W ×84
27.6 27.3 27.1 26.9 26.7
1.10 0.930 0.830 0.745 0.640
W24×492 W ×408 W ×335 W ×279 W ×250 W ×229 W ×207 W ×192 W ×176 W ×162 W ×146 W ×131 W ×117 W ×104
29.7 28.5 27.5 26.7 26.3 26.0 25.7 25.5 25.2 25.0 24.7 24.5 24.3 24.1
W24×103 W ×94 W ×84 W ×76 W ×68 W24×62 W ×55
dc, in. 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
509 404 321 259 233 212 193 174 155 145 131 118
— — — — 203 185 168 152 134 126 113 102
— — 262 211 189 172 156 141 125 117 105 95.0
394 310 244 196 176 159 145 130 115 108 97.2 87.7
367 288 226 181 162 147 134 120 106 100 89.5 80.7
341 267 209 167 150 136 123 111 97.6 91.5 82.0 74.0
316 247 193 154 137 124 113 101 89.3 83.6 74.9 67.5
292 227 177 141 126 114 103 92.3 81.3 76.1 68.1 61.3
269 209 162 128 114 103 93.2 83.7 73.6 68.8 61.5 55.3
247 191 147 116 104 93.3 84.2 75.5 66.3 61.9 55.3 49.7
345 299 267 243 213
117 106 94.2 88.0 80.5
101 91.6 81.6 76.2 69.6
94.0 84.9 75.6 70.6 64.5
86.9 78.4 69.8 65.1 59.5
80.1 72.2 64.3 59.9 54.7
73.5 66.2 58.9 54.9 50.1
67.2 60.5 53.7 50.1 45.7
61.1 54.9 48.8 45.4 41.4
55.3 49.6 44.0 41.0 37.3
49.7 44.6 39.5 36.8 33.5
3.54 2.99 2.48 2.09 1.89 1.73 1.57 1.46 1.34 1.22 1.09 0.960 0.850 0.750
1290 1060 864 718 644 588 531 491 450 414 371 329 291 258
420 331 261 210 184 167 149 136 124 115 104 94.4 84.4 75.4
— — — — 158 143 127 117 106 98.0 88.5 80.3 71.7 64.1
— — 209 167 146 132 117 107 97.6 90.0 81.2 73.7 65.7 58.7
316 247 193 154 134 121 107 98.2 89.4 82.3 74.2 67.3 60.0 53.5
292 227 177 141 123 111 98.0 89.5 81.4 74.9 67.5 61.1 54.5 48.6
269 209 162 128 112 101 89.0 81.2 73.8 67.9 61.1 55.3 49.2 43.8
247 191 147 116 101 91.0 80.4 73.3 66.5 61.1 54.9 49.7 44.2 39.3
226 173 133 105 91.2 81.8 72.2 65.8 59.6 54.7 49.1 44.3 39.4 35.0
205 157 120 94.3 81.7 73.1 64.4 58.6 53.0 48.6 43.6 39.3 34.8 30.9
186 141 108 84.0 72.6 64.9 57.0 51.8 46.8 42.8 38.3 34.5 30.5 27.1
24.5 24.3 24.1 23.9 23.7
0.980 0.875 0.770 0.680 0.585
245 222 196 176 154
82.9 76.2 68.3 62.6 57.5
70.7 64.9 58.0 53.2 48.8
64.9 59.5 53.2 48.7 44.7
59.3 54.3 48.6 44.5 40.8
53.9 49.4 44.1 40.4 37.0
48.8 44.6 39.8 36.4 33.4
43.9 40.1 35.8 32.7 29.9
39.2 35.8 31.9 29.1 26.6
34.8 31.7 28.2 25.8 23.5
30.6 27.9 24.8 22.6 20.6
23.7 23.6
0.590 0.505
131 114
56.9 51.1
48.3 43.4
44.3 39.7
40.4 36.2
36.7 32.9
33.1 29.7
29.7 26.6
26.5 23.7
23.4 20.9
20.5 18.3
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 233
So
Snet
d
Sx
d
d
dc
Table 8-49 (cont.). Section Modulus of Coped W Shapes
Snet, in.3 Designation
d in.
tf in.
W21×201 W ×182 W ×166 W ×147 W ×132 W ×122 W ×111 W ×101
23.0 22.7 22.5 22.1 21.8 21.7 21.5 21.4
W21×93 W ×83 W ×73 W ×68 W ×62
dc, in.
Sx in.3
So in.3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.63 1.48 1.36 1.15 1.04 0.960 0.875 0.800
461 417 380 329 295 273 249 227
125 111 99.3 91.2 81.0 74.1 67.1 60.4
105 93.3 83.0 76.1 67.5 61.6 55.7 50.1
95.2 84.8 75.3 68.9 61.1 55.7 50.4 45.3
86.2 76.6 68.0 62.1 55.0 50.2 45.3 40.7
77.6 68.8 61.0 55.7 49.2 44.8 40.4 36.3
69.4 61.4 54.4 49.5 43.7 39.8 35.9 32.1
61.6 54.4 48.1 43.7 38.5 35.0 31.5 28.2
54.2 47.8 42.2 38.2 33.6 30.5 27.4 24.5
47.3 41.6 36.6 33.1 29.0 26.3 23.6 21.1
21.6 21.4 21.2 21.1 21.0
0.930 0.835 0.740 0.685 0.615
192 171 151 140 127
67.2 59.0 51.5 48.1 44.1
56.0 49.1 42.7 39.9 36.5
50.7 44.4 38.7 36.1 33.0
45.7 40.0 34.8 32.4 29.7
40.9 35.7 31.0 29.0 26.5
36.3 31.7 27.5 25.6 23.4
32.0 27.9 24.2 22.5 20.5
27.9 24.3 21.0 19.6 17.8
24.1 20.9 18.1 16.8 15.3
W21×57 W ×50 W ×44
21.1 20.8 20.7
0.650 0.535 0.450
111 94.5 81.6
43.4 39.2 35.2
36.1 32.5 29.1
32.6 29.4 26.3
29.3 26.4 23.6
26.2 23.6 21.0
23.2 20.8 18.6
20.4 18.3 16.3
17.7 15.9 14.1
15.2 13.6 12.1
W18×311 W ×283 W ×258 W ×234 W ×211 W ×192 W ×175 W ×158 W ×143 W ×130
22.3 21.9 21.5 21.1 20.7 20.4 20.0 19.7 19.5 19.3
2.74 2.50 2.30 2.11 1.91 1.75 1.59 1.44 1.32 1.20
624 564 514 466 419 380 344 310 282 256
186 166 148 130 115 102 92.1 81.7 72.5 65.2
— — — — 94.5 83.4 75.1 66.4 58.8 52.8
140 124 110 96.1 84.8 74.7 67.2 59.3 52.4 47.0
126 111 98.3 85.9 75.6 66.5 59.7 52.6 46.4 41.5
113 99.3 87.4 76.2 66.9 58.7 52.6 46.2 40.7 36.4
100 87.8 77.2 67.1 58.7 51.4 45.9 40.2 35.4 31.5
88.2 77.1 67.5 58.5 51.0 44.5 39.6 34.6 30.4 27.0
77.0 67.0 58.5 50.4 43.8 38.1 33.8 29.4 25.7 22.8
66.5 57.6 50.0 43.0 37.1 32.1 28.4 24.6 21.5 19.0
W18×119 W ×106 W ×97 W ×86 W ×76
19.0 18.7 18.6 18.4 18.2
1.06 0.940 0.870 0.770 0.680
231 204 188 166 146
61.7 54.4 48.9 43.1 37.6
49.8 43.8 39.3 34.6 30.1
44.3 38.9 34.9 30.6 26.7
39.1 34.3 30.7 26.9 23.4
34.2 29.9 26.8 23.4 20.3
29.5 25.8 23.1 20.2 17.5
25.2 22.0 19.6 17.1 14.8
21.2 18.5 16.4 14.3 12.3
W18×71 W ×65 W ×60 W ×55 W ×50
18.5 18.4 18.2 18.1 18.0
0.810 0.750 0.695 0.630 0.570
127 117 108 98.3 88.9
42.4 38.3 35.0 32.4 29.1
34.1 30.8 28.1 26.0 23.4
30.3 27.3 24.9 23.0 20.7
26.7 24.0 21.9 20.2 18.2
23.3 20.9 19.1 17.6 15.8
20.1 18.0 16.4 15.1 13.5
17.1 15.3 13.9 12.8 11.5
14.3 12.8 11.6 10.7 9.54
W18×46 W ×40 W ×35
18.1 17.9 17.7
0.605 0.525 0.425
78.8 68.4 57.6
28.9 24.9 22.7
23.2 20.0 18.2
20.6 17.7 16.1
18.1 15.5 14.1
15.7 13.5 12.3
13.5 11.6 10.5
11.5 9.80 8.88
9.56 8.16 7.37
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
10
8 - 234
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
So
Snet
d
Sx
d
d
dc
Table 8-49 (cont.). Section Modulus of Coped W Shapes
Snet, in.3 dc, in.
Designation
d in.
tf in.
Sx in.3
So in.3
2
3
4
5
6
7
W16×100 W ×89 W ×77 W ×67
17.0 16.8 16.5 16.3
0.985 0.875 0.760 0.665
175 155 134 117
44.4 39.0 33.1 28.3
34.9 30.6 25.9 22.1
30.5 26.7 22.6 19.2
26.4 23.1 19.4 16.5
22.6 19.7 16.5 14.0
19.0 16.5 13.8 11.7
15.7 13.6 11.4 9.58
W16×57 W ×50 W ×45 W ×40 W ×36
16.4 16.3 16.1 16.0 15.9
0.715 0.630 0.565 0.505 0.430
92.2 81.0 72.7 64.7 56.5
29.4 25.6 22.9 20.1 18.8
23.0 20.0 17.9 15.6 14.6
20.1 17.4 15.5 13.6 12.7
17.3 15.0 13.4 11.7 10.9
14.8 12.7 11.3 9.89 9.21
12.4 10.7 9.47 8.24 7.67
10.2 8.74 7.75 6.73 6.25
W16×31 W ×26
15.9 15.7
0.440 0.345
47.2 38.4
17.1 14.9
13.3 11.6
11.6 10.1
10.0 8.64
8.44 7.31
7.03 6.08
5.73 4.95
W14×808 W ×730 W ×665 W ×605 W ×550 W ×500 W ×455
22.8 22.4 21.6 20.9 20.2 19.6 19.0
5.12 4.91 4.52 4.16 3.82 3.50 3.21
1400 1280 1150 1040 931 838 756
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
W14×426 W ×398 W ×370 W ×342 W ×311 W ×283 W ×257 W ×233 W ×211 W ×193 W ×176 W ×159 W ×145
18.7 18.3 17.9 17.5 17.1 16.7 16.4 16.0 15.7 15.5 15.2 15.0 14.8
3.04 2.85 2.66 2.47 2.26 2.07 1.89 1.72 1.56 1.44 1.31 1.19 1.09
707 656 607 559 506 459 415 375 338 310 281 254 232
164 150 135 122 107 94.4 83.1 73.2 64.9 57.6 52.2 45.7 40.9
— — — — — — 64.1 56.1 49.5 43.8 39.5 34.5 30.7
W14×132 W ×120 W ×109 W ×99 W ×90
14.7 14.5 14.3 14.2 14.0
1.03 0.940 0.860 0.780 0.710
209 190 173 157 143
38.1 34.2 30.0 27.2 24.3
28.6 25.5 22.3 20.2 18.0
24.3 21.7 18.9 17.0 15.2
W14×82 W ×74 W ×68 W ×61
14.3 14.2 14.0 13.9
0.855 0.785 0.720 0.645
123 112 103 92.2
28.0 24.4 22.2 19.7
20.9 18.2 16.5 14.6
17.7 15.4 13.9 12.3
451 365 317 275 238 208 182
— — — — 153 131 113
— 220 187 158 134 115 98.2
244 195 165 139 117 99.4 84.6
216 172 144 121 101 85.3 72.1
87.6 78.7 70.1 61.9 53.5 46.3 40.0 34.6 30.2 26.4 23.6 20.4 18.0
75.2 67.2 59.6 52.3 44.9 38.7 33.3 28.6 24.8 21.6 19.2 16.5 14.5
63.8 56.7 50.0 43.6 37.2 31.8 27.1 23.2 19.9 17.3 15.2 13.0 11.4
20.3 18.1 15.7 14.2 12.6
16.7 14.8 12.8 11.5 10.2
13.4 11.8 10.2 9.15 8.07
14.8 12.8 11.6 10.2
12.1 10.4 9.42 8.28
9.64 8.31 7.46 6.54
— 101 104 91.1 93.7 81.4 83.4 72.3 72.7 62.7 63.6 54.6 55.5 47.4 48.4 41.3 42.6 36.1 37.5 31.7 33.8 28.5 29.4 24.7 26.1 21.9
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8
9
10
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 235
So
Snet
d
Sx
d
d
dc
Table 8-49 (cont.). Section Modulus of Coped W Shapes
Snet, in.3 dc, in.
Designation
d in.
tf in.
Sx in.3
So in.3
2
3
4
5
6
W14×53 W ×48 W ×43
13.9 13.8 13.7
0.660 0.595 0.530
77.8 70.3 62.7
19.1 17.3 15.3
14.2 12.8 11.3
12.0 10.8 9.50
9.93 8.93 7.84
8.07 7.23 6.34
6.39 5.71 4.99
W14×38 W ×34 W ×30
14.1 14.0 13.8
0.515 0.455 0.385
54.6 48.6 42.0
16.0 14.4 13.2
12.0 10.8 9.88
10.2 9.14 8.37
8.48 7.62 6.96
6.94 6.22 5.68
5.54 4.95 4.51
W14×26 W ×22
13.9 13.7
0.420 0.335
35.3 29.0
12.3 10.7
9.20 7.97
7.80 6.75
6.50 5.62
5.31 4.58
4.23 3.64
W12×336 W ×305 W ×279 W ×252 W ×230 W ×210 W ×190 W ×170 W ×152 W ×136 W ×120 W ×106 W ×96 W ×87 W ×79 W ×72 W ×65
16.8 16.3 15.9 15.4 15.1 14.7 14.4 14.0 13.7 13.4 13.1 12.9 12.7 12.5 12.4 12.3 12.1
3.00 2.71 2.47 2.25 2.07 1.90 1.74 1.56 1.40 1.25 1.105 0.990 0.900 0.810 0.735 0.670 0.605
— — — — — 49.0 42.3 36.5 31.6 27.5 23.7 19.8 17.4 15.8 14.1 12.6 11.2
83.1 71.4 63.1 54.2 47.5 41.6 35.7 30.7 26.5 22.9 19.7 16.3 14.3 13.0 11.5 10.3 9.16
71.4 61.0 53.5 45.7 39.9 34.7 29.7 25.3 21.7 18.7 16.0 13.2 11.5 10.4 9.23 8.24 7.28
60.6 51.4 44.8 38.0 32.9 28.5 24.2 20.5 17.5 14.9 12.6 10.4 9.03 8.11 7.16 6.37 5.61
50.8 42.7 36.9 31.0 26.7 22.9 19.3 16.2 13.7 11.6 9.70
W12×58 W ×53
12.2 12.1
0.640 0.575
78.0 70.6
14.8 13.9
10.4 9.74
8.52 7.94
6.79 6.31
5.24 4.85
W12×50 W ×45 W ×40
12.2 12.1 11.9
0.640 0.575 0.515
64.7 58.1 51.9
14.8 13.1 11.4
10.4 9.27 8.03
8.54 7.56 6.54
6.82 6.02 5.19
5.27 4.63 3.98
W12×35 W ×30 W ×26
12.5 12.3 12.2
0.52 0.44 0.38
45.6 38.6 33.4
12.3 10.5 9.08
8.85 7.47 6.47
7.30 6.15 5.32
5.89 4.94 4.27
4.61 3.86 3.32
W12×22 W ×19 W ×16 W ×14
12.3 12.2 12.0 11.9
0.425 0.350 0.265 0.225
25.4 21.3 17.1 14.9
9.60 8.39 7.43 6.61
6.89 6.01 5.30 4.71
5.69 4.95 4.36 3.86
4.59 3.98 3.50 3.10
3.59 3.11 2.72 2.41
483 123 435 108 393 96.1 353 83.7 321 74.2 292 65.6 263 57.0 235 49.6 209 43.3 186 37.9 163 32.8 145 27.6 131 24.3 118 22.2 107 19.9 97.4 17.9 87.9 16.0
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
7
8
9
10
8 - 236
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
So
Snet
d
Sx
d
d
dc
Table 8-49 (cont.). Section Modulus of Coped W Shapes
Snet, in.3 Designation
d in.
tf in.
dc, in.
Sx in.3
So in.3
2
3
4
25.7 22.3 19.1 16.2 13.9 12.1 10.5 9.46
17.5 15.0 12.8 10.7 9.13 7.88 6.79 6.10
13.9 11.9 10.0 8.35 7.10 6.09 5.22 4.68
10.8 9.12 7.62 6.29 5.30 4.52 3.86 3.44
W10×112 W ×100 W ×88 W ×77 W ×68 W ×60 W ×54 W ×49
11.4 11.1 10.8 10.6 10.4 10.2 10.1 8.00
1.25 126 1.12 112 0.990 98.5 0.870 85.9 0.770 75.7 0.680 66.7 0.615 60.0 0.560 54.6
W10×45 W ×39 W ×33
10.1 2.00 3.00
0.620 0.530 0.435
49.1 42.1 35.0
9.75 8.49 7.49
6.33 5.48 4.80
4.88 4.20 3.67
3.61 3.08 2.67
W10×30 W ×26 W ×22
10.5 10.3 10.2
0.510 0.440 0.360
32.4 27.9 23.2
8.64 7.33 6.51
5.75 4.86 4.29
4.51 3.80 3.34
3.41 2.85 2.50
W10×19 W ×17 W ×15 W ×12
10.2 10.1 9.00 7.00
0.395 0.330 0.270 0.210
18.8 16.2 13.8 10.9
6.52 6.01 5.52 4.43
4.33 3.98 3.64 2.91
3.39 3.10 2.83 2.26
2.55 2.33 2.12 1.68
W8×67 W ×58 W ×48 W ×40 W ×35 W ×31
0.00 5.00 0.00 5.00 2.00
0.935 0.810 0.685 0.560 0.495 0.435
60.4 52.0 43.3 35.5 31.2 27.5
12.2 10.4 7.89 6.71 5.66 5.06
7.42 6.24 4.63 3.89 3.24 2.88
5.44 4.52 3.32 2.74 2.28 2.01
W8×28 W ×24
6.00 3.00
0.465 0.400
24.3 20.9
5.04 4.23
2.89 2.40
2.02 1.67
W8×21 W ×18
8.00 4.00
0.400 0.330
18.2 15.2
4.55 4.02
2.67 2.35
1.91 1.66
W8×15 W ×13 W ×10
1.00 9.00 9.00
0.315 0.255 0.205
11.8 9.91 7.81
4.03 3.61 2.65
2.36 2.10 1.54
1.68 1.49 1.08
5
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
6
7
8
9
10
CONNECTED ELEMENTS
8 - 237
Other Elements in Connections
Shims
Shims are furnished to the erector for use in filling the spaces allowed for field clearance which might be present at connections such as simple shear connections, PR and FR moment connections, column base plates, and column splices. These shims, illustrated in Figure 8-63, may be either strip shims, with round punched holes, or finger shims, with slots cut through the edge. Whereas strip shims are less expensive to fabricate, finger shims may be laterally inserted and eliminate the need to remove erection bolts or pins already in place. Finger shims, when inserted fully against the bolt shank, are acceptable for slip-critical connections and are not to be considered as an internal ply with the slotted hole determining the design strength of the connection. This is because less than 25 percent of the contact surface is lost and this is not enough to affect the performance of the joint. Fillers
A filler is furnished to occupy spaces which will be present because of dimensional separations between elements of a connection across which load transfer occurs. Examples where fillers might be used are beams framing off center on a column and raised beams. From LRFD Specification Section J6, fillers in welded connections and fillers thicker than 3⁄4-in. in bolted bearing-type connections must be fully developed. In bolted bearing-type connections, fillers between 1⁄4-in. and 3⁄4-in. thick, inclusive, need not be developed, provided the design shear strength of the bolts is reduced by the factor 0.4(t − 0.25) where t is the total thickness of the fillers up to 3⁄4-in. In bolted slip-critical connections, fillers need not be fully developed.
Strip
Finger
Fig. 8-63. Shims. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
8 - 238
BOLTS, WELDS, AND CONNECTED ELEMENTS
REFERENCES
Alexander, W. G., 1991, “Designing Longitudinal Welds for Bridge Members,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 28, No. 1, (1st Qtr.), pp. 29–36, AISC, Chicago, IL. American Concrete Institute, 1985, ACI 349 Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety Related Concrete Structures, Appendix B, ACI, Detroit, MI. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 1993, Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, AISC, Chicago, IL. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 1989, Manual of Steel Construction— Allowable Stress Design, 9th ed., AISC, Chicago, IL. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 1988, Quality Criteria and Inspection Standards, 3rd ed., AISC, Chicago, IL. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., 1973, “Commentary on Highly Restrained Welded Connections,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 10, No. 3, (3rd Qtr.), pp. 61–73, AISC, Chicago, IL. American Welding Society, 1978, Welding Handbook—Volume 2, 7th ed., AWS, Miami, FL. American Welding Society, 1977, Guide for the Non-Destructive Inspection of Welds, (AWS B1.0-77), AWS, Miami, FL. Astaneh, A., 1985, “Procedure for Design and Analysis of Hanger-Type Connections,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 22, No. 2, (2nd Qtr.), pp. 63–66, AISC, Chicago, IL. Blodgett, O. W., 1966, Design of Welded Structures, James F. Lincoln Arc Welding Foundation, Cleveland, OH. Blodgett, O. W., 1980, “Detailing to Achieve Practical Welded Fabrication,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 17, No. 4, (4th Qtr.), pp. 106–119, AISC, Chicago, IL. Bowman, M. D. and M. Betancourt, 1991, “Reuse of A325 and A490 High-Strength Bolts,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 28, No. 3, (3rd Qtr.), pp. 110–118, AISC, Chicago, IL. Butler, L. J., S. Pal, and G. L. Kulak, 1972, “Eccentrically Loaded Welded Connections,” Journal of the Structural Division, Vol. 98, No. ST5, (May), pp. 989–1005, ASCE, New York, N.Y. Cannon, R. W., D. A. Godfrey, and F. L. Moreadith, 1981, “Guide to the Design of Anchor Bolts and Other Steel Embedments,” Concrete International, Vol. 3, No. 7, (July 1981), pp. 28–41, ACI, Detroit, MI.. Cheng, J. J., J. A. Yura, and C. P. Johnson, 1984, “Design and Behaviour of Coped Beams,” Department of Civil Engineering, The University of Texas at Austin, Austin, TX. Crawford, S. F. and G. L. Kulak, 1968, “Behavior of Eccentrically Loaded Bolted Connections,” Studies in Structural Engineering, (No. 4), Department of Civil Engineering, Nova Scotia Technical College, Halifax, Nova Scotia. DeWolf, J. T. and D. T. Ricker, 1990, Column Base Plates, AISC, Chicago, IL Fisher, J. M., 1981, “Structural Details in Industrial Buildings,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 18, No. 3, (3rd Qtr.), pp. 83–89, AISC, Chicago, IL. Fisher, J. W. and J. H. A. Struik, 1974, Guide to Design Criteria for Bolted and Riveted Joints, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, NY. Grover, L., 1946, Manual of Design for Arc Welded Steel Structures, Air Reduction Sales Co., New York, NY. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
REFERENCES
8 - 239
Higgins, T. R., 1971, “Treatment of Eccentrically Loaded Connections in the AISC Manual,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 8, No. 2, (April), pp. 52–54, AISC, Chicago, IL. Institute of Welding, 1972, Procedures and Recommendations for the Ultrasonic Testing of Butt Welds, London, England. Iwankiw, N. R., 1987, “Design for Eccentric and Inclined Loads on Bolt and Weld Groups,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 24, No. 4, (4th Qtr.), pp. 164–171, AISC, Chicago, IL. Kaufmann, J., A. W. Pense, and R. D. Stout, 1981, “An Evaluation of Factors Significant to Lamellar Tearing,” Welding Journal Research Supplement, Vol. 60, No. 3, (March), AWS, Miami, FL. Krautkramer, J., 1977, Ultrasonic Testing of Materials, 2nd. ed., Springer-Verlag, Berlin, West Germany. Kulak, G. L., 1975, “Eccentrically Loaded Slip-Resistant Connections,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 12, No. 2, (2nd Qtr.), pp. 52–55, AISC, Chicago, IL. Lesik, D. F. and D. J. L. Kennedy, 1990, “Ultimate Strength of Fillet-Welded Connections Loaded in Plane,” Canadian Journal of Civil Engineering, Vol. 17, No. 1, National Research Council of Canada, Ottawa, Canada. Kulak, G. L. and Timler, 1984, “Tests on Eccentrically Loaded Fillet Welds,” Department of Civil Engineering, University of Alberta, Edmonton, Canada. Kulak, G. L., J. W. Fisher, and J. H. A. Struik, 1987, Guide to Design Criteria for Bolted and Riveted Joints, 2nd ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY. Marsh, M. L., and E. G. Burdette, 1985a, “Anchorage of Steel Building Components to Concrete,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 15, No. 4, (4th Qtr.), pp. 33–39, AISC, Chicago, IL. Marsh, M. L., and E. G. Burdette, 1985b, “Multiple Bolt Anchorages: Method for Determining the Effective Projected Area of Overlapping Stress Cones,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 15, No. 4, (4th Qtr.), pp. 29–32, AISC, Chicago, IL. Research Council on Structural Connections, 1988, Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, AISC, Chicago, IL. Shipp, J. G. and E. R. Haninger, 1983, “Design of Headed Anchor Bolts,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 20, No. 2, (2nd Qtr.), pp. 58–69, AISC, Chicago. IL. Stout, R. D. and W. D. Doty, 1978, Weldability of Steels, 3rd. ed., Welding Research Council, New York, NY Thornton, W. A., 1985, “Prying Action—A General Treatment,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 22, No. 2, (2nd Qtr.), pp. 67–75, AISC, Chicago, IL. Tide, R. H. R., 1980, “Eccentrically Loaded Weld Groups—AISC Design Tables,” Engineering Journal, Vol. 17, No. 4, (4th Qtr.), pp. 90–95, AISC, Chicago, IL.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9-1
PART 9 SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Double-Angle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Shear End-Plate Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91 Unstiffened Seated Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-128 Stiffened Seated Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-138 Single-Plate Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-147 Single-Angle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-161 Tee Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-170 SHEAR SPLICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-176 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . 9-185 Web Reinforcement of Coped Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-185 Simple Shear Connections at Stiffened Column-Web Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-190 Eccentric Effect of Larger-Than-Normal Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-192 Simple Shear Connections for Large End Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-196 Double Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-196 Beams Offset from Column Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-202 Connections for Raised Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-211 Connections for Tubular and Pipe Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-215 Non-Rectangular Simple Shear Connections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-215
PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-234 Flange-Plated PR Moment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-246 Flexible Wind Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-253 REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-263
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9-2
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OVERVIEW
9-3
OVERVIEW Part 9 contains general information, design considerations, examples, and design aids for the design of simple shear connections, shear splices, PR moment connections, and special considerations in the aforementioned topics. It is based upon the provisions of the 1993 LRFD Specification. Supplementary information may also be found in the Commentary on the LRFD Specification. Following are the general topics addressed. SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Considerations for Economical Simple Shear Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Comparing Two-Sided, Seated, and One-Sided Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Erectability Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Computer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Double-Angle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Design Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Recommended Angle Length and Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Shop and Field Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Bolted/Welded Double-Angle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 All-Welded Double-Angle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Shear End-Plate Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91 Design Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91 Recommended End-Plate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91 Shop and Field Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91 Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92 Unstiffened Seated Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-128 Design Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129 Shop and Field Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-130 All-Bolted Unstiffened Seated Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-130 Bolted/Welded Unstiffened Seated Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-132 All-Welded Unstiffened Seated Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-132 Stiffened Seated Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-138 Design Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-139 Shop and Field Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-140 All-Bolted Stiffened Seated Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-140 Bolted/Welded Stiffened Seated Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-140 Single-Plate Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-147 Design Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-147
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9-4
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Recommended Plate Length and Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-148 Shop and Field Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-149 Bolted/Welded Single-Plate Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-149 Single-Angle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-161 Design Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-161 Recommended Angle Length and Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-161 Shop and Field Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-161 All-Bolted Single-Angle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-162 Bolted/Welded Single-Angle Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-163 Tee Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-170 Design Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-170 Recommended Tee Length and Flange and Web Thicknesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-171 Shop and Field Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-171 SHEAR SPLICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-176 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . 9-185 Web Reinforcement of Coped Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-185 Doubler Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-185 Longitudinal Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-185 Combination Longitudinal and Transverse Stiffening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-185 Simple Shear Connections at Stiffened Column-Web Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-190 Eccentric Effect of Larger-Than-Normal Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-192 Column-Web Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-192 Girder-Web Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-194 Alternative Treatment of Eccentric Moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-195 Simple Shear Connections for Large End Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-196 Double Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-196 Supported Beams of Different Nominal Depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-196 Supported Beams Offset Laterally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-200 Beams Offset from Column Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-202 Framing to the Column Flange from the Strong Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-202 Framing to Column Flange from the Weak Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-204 Framing to the Column Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-209 Connections for Raised Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-211 Connections for Tubular and Pipe Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-215 Non-Rectangular Simple Shear Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-215 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
OVERVIEW
9-5
Skewed Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-215 Sloped Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-224 Canted Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-225 Inclines in Two or More Directions (Hip and Valley Framing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-228 PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-234 Modeling PR Moment Connections for Gravity Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-234 Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-237 The Beam Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-239 Elastic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-240 Non-Rigid Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-242 Plastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-244 Real Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-244 Flange Plated PR Moment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-246 Force Transfer in PR Moment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-248 Design Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-248 Shop and Field Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-248 Flexible Wind Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-253 Design Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-254 REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-263
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9-6
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9-7
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
The ends of members with simple shear connections are assumed to be unrestrained or free to rotate under load as illustrated in Figure 9-1. While simple shear connections do actually possess some rotational restraint, as illustrated by curve A in Figure 9-2, this small amount is usually neglected and the connection is idealized to be completely flexible. Accordingly, simple shear connections are sized only for the end reaction or shear Ru of the supported beam. Note that simple shear connections must provide flexibility to accommodate the required end rotation of the supported beam. When members are designed with simple shear connections, provision must be made to stabilize the frame for gravity loads and also to resist lateral loads. A positive steel bracing system, such as X- or K-bracing, PR or FR construction, and concrete or masonry shear walls are three commonly used methods. PR moment connections (including flexible wind connections) are treated in this Part. FR moment connections are treated in Part 10. Bracing systems and connections are treated in Part 11. For the design of concrete or masonry shear walls, refer to ACI 318. Considerations for Economical Simple Shear Connections
The AISC Code of Standard Practice states that, after the engineer of record (EOR) designs the structural members, the EOR may design and detail the connections or the EOR may have the fabricator develop the detailed configuration of the simple shear connections. In both cases, the fabricator must submit shop drawings for approval and verification that the EOR’s design criteria and intent have been satisfied. Regardless of which approach is taken, the AISC Code of Standard Practice states that the EOR is responsible for the adequacy of these connections. The fabricator is responsible for the accuracy of the detail dimensions, clearances, and general fit-up of the structural steel members and connecting materials for field assembly (refer to the AISC Code of Standard Practice Section 2 for definition of which items are and are not considered structural steel). The latter approach is usually taken since there are economies inherent in allowing the fabricator to choose the most efficient connections for the fabricator’s shop and erection processes. Whenever possible, the designer should give the fabricator and erector the flexibility to choose the connection types which offer the most economical shop fabrication and safest and most economical erection. In taking this approach, however, some engineers of record specify general design criteria (e.g., one-half the total factored uniform load) from which the connections are to be developed without regard to the actual reactions. Thornton (1992) describes several of these practices and provides examples of the uneconomical and/or unsafe connections which can result from their use. Because of this, when the fabricator or detailer is to θ
θ No restraint Ends free to rotate
Note: top angle not shown for clarity.
Figure 9.1. Illustration of simple shear connection. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9-8
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
develop the detailed configuration of the connections, the EOR must indicate the actual design reactions on the contract drawings or provide the fabricator with a method to accurately determine the required strength. In the absence of such information, connections will be selected to support one-half the total factored uniform load for the given beam, span, and grade of steel specified; no consideration will be given for the effects of any other loads unless specified on the contract drawings. Comparing Two-Sided, Seated, and One-Sided Connections
Following is a general discussion of the advantages of two-sided, seated, and one-sided connections. Two-sided connections, such as double-angle and shear end-plate connections, offer the following advantages: (1) suitability for use when the end reaction is large; (2) compactness (usually, the entire connection is contained within the flanges of the supported beam); and, (3) eccentricity perpendicular to the beam axis need not be considered for usual gages. Unstiffened and stiffened seated connections offer the following advantages: (1) seats may be shop attached to the support, simplifying erection; (2) ample erection clearance is provided; (3) erection is fast and safe; and, (4) the bay length of the structure is easily maintained (seated connections may be preferable when maintaining bay length is a concern for repetitive bays of framing). Note that seated connections can cause erection
FR moment connections
Fixed end moment PR moment connections
End moment
Beam line
Simple shear connections A Simple beam rotation
Rotation
A
Figure 9-2. Simple shear connection behavior. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9-9
interference when floors are close, beams are deep, or seats protrude excessively from the column face; the practice of leaning or tilting the columns to erect a column-web connection is difficult, unsafe, and should always be avoided. One-sided connections such as single-plate, single-angle, and tee connections offer the following advantages: (1) shop attachment of connecting materials to the support, simplifying shop fabrication and erection; (2) reduced material and shop labor requirements; and, (3) excellent safety during erection since double connections may be eliminated. Erectability Considerations
In field-bolted connections, when beams or girders frame opposite each other and take the same open holes in the web of a column, as illustrated in Figure 9-3, the first member to be erected must be supported while the second member to be erected is brought into its final position. Note that hanging the beam on a partially inserted bolt or drift pin is dangerous; such a makeshift practice should not be attempted. A temporary erection seat, usually an angle, is sometimes provided in the column web and located to clear the bottom flange of the supported member by approximately 3⁄8-in. to accommodate mill, fabrication, and erection tolerances. The erection seat is sized and attached to the column web with sufficient bolts or welds to support the dead weight of the member, unless additional loading is indicated. The sequence of erection is most important in determining the need for erection seats. If the erection sequence is known, the erection seat is provided on the side needing the support. If the erection sequence is not known, a seat can be provided on both sides of the column web. Erection seats may be reused at other locations, but are not generally required to be removed unless they create an interference, detract from the architectural appearance, or such removal is required in the contract documents. In field-welded connections in which some means of temporary support must be provided until final welding is performed, temporary erection bolts are usually provided.
Column First beam to be erected
Clearance
Second beam to be erected
Temporary erection seat
Figure 9-3. Erection seat. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 10
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Note that it is not necessary that these bolts be removed subsequent to final welding. Subject to the provisions of LRFD Specification Section J1.9, erection bolts may also serve as permanent attachment; refer to “Construction Combining Bolts and Welds” in Part 8. Safety laws require that two bolts be placed for erection safety. As a general rule, then, two erection bolts are used for framing angles or similar connecting elements up to 12 inches long, four bolts are used for connecting elements up to 18 inches long, and six bolts are used for longer connecting elements. Additional erection bolts may be provided and serve two purposes: (1) they provide for the contingency of large temporary loads during erection; and, (2) they assist in pulling the connection angles up tightly against the web of the supporting beam prior to welding. Some engineers prefer to locate erection bolts below the mid-depth of the connection; theoretically, this provides the greatest possible flexibility near the top of the connection, where the angles are expected to flex away from the supporting member. However, this practice does not ensure a close fit-up of the angle before welding. Other engineers prefer the more general practice of spacing the bolts equally along the length of the angles. In this latter case, the bolts are placed as closely as practical to the toes of the outstanding leg to provide greater flexibility. Computer Software
CONXPRT is fully automated connection design software which provides for rapid design of economical simple shear connections. Based upon the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Volume II—Connections and the engineering knowledge and experience of respected fabricators and design engineers, CONXPRT comes with preset guidelines, but can be modified to meet individual standards. It is menu-driven with a built-in shapes database and provides complete documentation of all design checks.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 11
Double-Angle Connections
A double-angle connection is made with two angles, one on each side of the web of the beam to be supported, as illustrated in Figure 9-4. These angles may be bolted or welded to the supported beam as well as to the supporting member. When the angles are welded to the support, adequate flexibility must be provided in the connection. As illustrated in Figure 9-4c, line welds are placed along the toes of the angles with a return at the top per LRFD Specification Section J2.2b. Note that welding across the entire top of the angles must be avoided as it would inhibit the flexibility and, therefore, the necessary end rotation of the connection; the performance of the resulting connection is unpredictable.
(a) All-bolted
w
(b) Bolted/welded, angles welded to supported beam
w
2w Note: weld returns on top of angles per LRFD Specification Section J2.2b.
w
(c) Bolted/welded, angles welded to support Figure 9-4. Double-angle connections. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 12
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Table 9-1. Fillet Encroachment Chart k − tf, in. 5⁄
k
tf encr.
1
/32 in.
tw
encr., in.
16
1⁄ 8
3⁄ 8
3⁄ 16
7⁄
16
3⁄ 16
1⁄ 2
3⁄ 16
9⁄
16
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 8
1⁄ 4
11⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
3⁄ 4
1⁄ 4
13⁄ 16
1⁄ 4
7⁄ 8
5⁄ 16
1
5⁄ 16
Design Checks
The design strengths of the bolts and/or welds and connected elements must be determined in accordance with the LRFD Specification; the applicable limit states are discussed in Part 8. In all cases, the design strength φRn must equal or exceed the required strength Ru. For usual gages of three inches and standard or short-slotted holes, eccentricity in double-angle connections may be neglected, except in the case of a double vertical row of bolts through the web of the supported beam, as illustrated in Figure 9-5. Eccentricity should always be considered in the design of welds for double-angle connections. Recommended Angle Length and Thickness
To provide for stability during erection, it is recommended that the minimum angle length be one-half the T-dimension of the beam to be supported. The maximum length of the connection angles must be compatible with the T-dimension of an uncoped beam and the remaining web depth, exclusive of fillets, of a coped beam. Note that the angle may encroach on the fillet or fillets by 1⁄8-in. to 5⁄16-in., depending upon the radius of the fillets; refer to Table 9-1. To provide for flexibility, the maximum angle thickness for use with usual gages should be limited to 5⁄8-in. Shop and Field Practices
Double-angle connections may be made to the webs of supporting girders and to the flanges of supporting columns. Because of bolting and welding clearances, double-angle connections may not be suitable for connections to the webs of W8 columns, unless gages are reduced or bolts are staggered, and may be impossible for W6 columns. When framing to a girder web, both angles are usually shop attached to the web of the supported beam. When framing to a column web, both angles may be shop attached to AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 13
the supported beam or to the column web. In the latter case, the bottom flange of the supported beam is coped to allow knifed erection (the beam web is lowered into place between the angles from above). Knifed erection requires that a total erection clearance of about 1⁄8-in. be provided between the angles as illustrated in Figure 9-6a. For bolted construction, this clearance may vary as gages will occur in minimum increments of 1⁄ -in. Shims must be furnished whenever measured clearances exceed 1⁄ -in. 16 8 When framing to a column flange, provision must be made for possible mill variation in the depth of the columns. If both angles are shop attached to the beam web, the beam length could be shortened to provide for mill overrun and shims could be furnished at the appropriate intervals to fill the resulting gaps or to provide for mill underrun; in general, shims are not required except for fairly long runs (i.e., six or more bays of framing). If both angles are shop attached to the column flange, the erected beam is knifed into place and play in the open holes usually furnishes the necessary adjustment to compensate for the mill variation in the columns; short slots can also be used. Alternatively, in any of the aforementioned cases, one angle could be shop attached to the support and the other shipped loose. In this case, the spread between the outstanding legs should equal the decimal beam web thickness plus a clearance which will produce an opening to the next higher 1⁄16-in. increment, as illustrated in Figure 9-6b; short slots in the support-leg of the angle eliminate the need to provide for variations in web thickness. However, shipping one angle loose is not a desirable practice since it requires additional material handling as well as added erection costs and difficulty. All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
Tables 9-2 are design aids for all-bolted double-angle connections. Design strengths are tabulated for supported and supporting member material, as well as angle material with Supporting member
g1
g3
E
g2
E
E indicates that eccentricity must be considered in this leg. Gages g1, g2, g 3 are usual gages as shown below Usual gages* in angle legs, in. Leg
8
7
6
5
4
31⁄2
3
21⁄2
2
13⁄4
11⁄2
13⁄8
11⁄4
1
g1 g2 g3
41⁄2 3 3
4 21⁄2 3
31⁄2 21⁄4 21⁄2
3 2 13⁄4
21⁄2
2
13⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄8
1
7⁄ 8
7⁄ 8
3⁄ 4
5⁄ 8
*Other gages are permitted to suit specific requirements subject to clearances and edge distance limitations.
Figure 9-5. Eccentricity in double-angle connections. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 14
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi and Fu = 58 ksi and with Fy = 50 ksi and Fu = 65 ksi. All values, including slip-critical bolt design strengths, are for comparison with factored loads. Tabulated bolt and angle design strengths consider the limit states of bolt shear, bolt bearing on the angles, shear yielding of the angles, shear rupture of the angles, and block shear rupture of the angles. Values are tabulated for 2 through 12 rows of 3⁄4-in., 7⁄8-in, and 1 in. diameter A325 and A490 bolts at 3 in. spacing. For calculation purposes, angle edge distances Lev and Leh are assumed to be 11⁄4-in. Tabulated beam web design strengths, per inch of web thickness, consider the limit state of bolt bearing on the beam web. For beams coped at the top flange only, the limit state of block shear rupture is also considered. Additionally, for beams coped at both the top and bottom flanges, the tabulated values consider the limit states of shear yielding gage
Provide approximately 1/8 in. erection clearance between angles; spread should be a multiple of 1/16 in.
(a) Both angles shop attached to the column flange (beam knifed into place)
gage
Provide erection clearance so that spread is the next larger multiple of 1/16 in. greater than the beam web thickness.
(b) One shop attached to the column flange, other shipped loose Figure 9-6. Double-angle connection erection clearances. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 15
and shear rupture of the beam web. Values are tabulated for beam web edge distances Leh from 11⁄4-in. to 3 in. and for beam end distances Leh of 11⁄2-in. and 13⁄4-in.; for calculation purposes, these end distances have been reduced to 11⁄4-in. and 11⁄2-in., respectively, to account for possible underrun in beam length. For coped members, the limit states of flexural yielding and local buckling must be checked independently. These limit states are discussed in Part 8; web reinforcement of coped members is treated in this Part under “Special Considerations”. Tabulated supporting member design strengths, per inch of flange or web thickness, consider the limit state of bolt bearing on the support. Bolted/Welded Double-Angle Connections
Table 9-3 (see page 9-88) is a design aid arranged to permit substitution of welds for bolts in connections designed with Tables 9-2. Electrode strength is assumed to be 70 ksi. All values are for comparison with factored loads. Holes for erection bolts may be placed as required in angle legs that are to be field welded. Welds A may be used in place of bolts through the supported-beam-web legs of the double angles or welds B may be used in place of bolts through the support legs of the double angles. Although it is permissible to use welds A and B from Table 9-3 in combination to obtain all-welded connections, it is recommended that such connections be chosen from Table 9-4. This table will allow increased flexibility in selection of angle lengths and connection strengths since Table 9-3 conforms to the bolt spacing and edge distance requirements for the bolted double-angle connections of Tables 9-2. Weld design strengths are tabulated for the limit state of weld shear. Design strengths for welds A are determined by the instantaneous center of rotation method using Table 8-42 with θ = 0°. Design strengths for welds B are determined by the elastic method. With the neutral axis assumed at one-sixth the depth of the angles measured downward and the tops of the angles in compression against each other through the beam web, the design strength of these welds is φRn, where φRn = 2 ×
1.392DL
√ 1+
12.96e2 L2
In the above equation, D is the number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the weld size, L is the length of the connection angles, and e is the width of the leg of the connection angle attached to the support. The tabulated minimum thicknesses of the supported beam web for welds A and the support for welds B match the shear yielding strength of these elements with the strength of the weld metal. Given the design shear yielding strength per unit length from LRFD Specification Section J5.3 as 0.9(0.60Fy t) and the weld strength constant (unit length design strength per 1⁄16-in. weld size for 70 ksi electrodes) as 1.392 kips/in., the minimum supported beam web thickness for welds A (two lines of weld) is tmin =
D × 1.392 × 2 5.16D = Fy 0.9 × 0.60Fy
where D is the number of sixteenths in the weld size. Similarly for welds B (one line of weld) the minimum supporting flange or web thickness is AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 16
tmin =
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
2.58D
Fy
When welds line up on opposite sides of the support, the minimum thickness is the sum of the thicknesses required for each weld. In either case, when less than the minimum material thickness is present, the tabulated weld design strength must be reduced by the ratio of the thickness provided to the minimum thickness. The minimum angle thickness when Table 9-3 is used is the weld size plus 1⁄16-in. but not less than the angle thickness determined from Table 9-2. The angle length L must be as tabulated in Table 9-3. In general, 2L4×31⁄2 will accommodate usual gages, with the 4 in. leg attached to the supporting member. Width of web legs in Case I may be optionally reduced from 31⁄2-in. to 3 in. Width of outstanding legs in Case II may be optionally reduced from 4 in. to 3 in. for values of L from 51⁄2 through 171⁄2-in. All-Welded Double-Angle Connections
Table 9-4 (see page 9-89) is a design aid for all-welded double-angle connections. Electrode strength is assumed to be 70 ksi. All values are for comparison with factored loads. Holes for erection bolts may be placed as required in angle legs that are to be field welded. Weld design strengths are tabulated for the limit state of weld shear. Design strengths for welds A are determined by the instantaneous center of rotation method using Table 8-42 with θ =0°. Design strengths for welds B are determined by the elastic method as discussed previously for bolted/welded double-angle connections. The tabulated minimum thicknesses of the supported beam web for welds A and the support for welds B match the shear yielding strength of these elements with the strength of the weld metal and are determined as discussed previously for bolted/welded double angle connections. When welds line up on opposite sides of the support, the minimum thickness is the sum of the thicknesses required for each weld. When less than the minimum material thickness is present, the tabulated weld design strength must be reduced by the ratio of the thickness provided to the minimum thickness. The minimum angle thickness when Table 9-4 is used must be equal to the weld size plus 1⁄16-in. The angle length L must be as tabulated in Table 9-4. Use 2L4×3 for angle lengths greater than or equal to 18 in.; use 2L3×3 otherwise.
Example 9-1
Given:
Refer to Figure 9-7. Use Table 9-2 to design an all-bolted double-angle connection for the W18×50 beam to W21×62 girder web connection. Ru = 60 kips W18×50 tw = 0.355 in. d = 17.99 in. Fy = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi top flange coped 2 in. deep by 4 in. long, Lev = 11⁄4-in., Leh = 13⁄4-in. (Assumed to be 11⁄2-in. for calculation purposes to account for possible underrun in beam lengths) AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 17
W21×62 tw = 0.400 in. Fy = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi Use 3⁄4-in. diameter A325-N bolts in standard holes. Assume angle material with Fy = 36 ksi and Fu = 58 ksi. Solution:
Design bolts and angles (refer to Part 8) From Table 9-2, for 3⁄4-in. diameter A325-N bolts and angle material with Fy = 36 ksi and Fu = 58 ksi, select three rows of bolts and 1⁄4-in. angle thickness. φRn = 76.7 kips > 60 kips o.k. Check supported beam web From Table 9-2, for three rows of bolts, beam material with Fy = 50 ksi and Fu = 65 ksi, and Lev = 11⁄4-in. and Leh = 13⁄4-in. (Assumed to be 11⁄2-in. for calculation purposes to account for possible underrun in beam lengths) φRn = (204 kips/in.)(0.355 in.) = 72.4 kips > 60 kips o.k. Check flexural yielding on the coped section (refer to Part 8) From Table 8-49, Snet = 23.4 in.3 φRn =
φFy Snet
e 0.9 (50 ksi) (23.4 in.3) = (4 in. + 1⁄2jin.) = 234 kips > 60 kips o.k.
Check local web buckling at the cope (refer to Part 8) c 4 in. = = 0.222 d 17.99 in. 4 in. c = = 0.250 ho (17.99 in. − 2 in.) c Since ≤ 1.0, d c f =2 d = 2(0.222) = 0.444 c Since ≤ 1.0, ho AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 18
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
1.65
ho k = 2.2 c
1 = 2.2 0.250
1.65
= 21.7 2
tw φFbc = 23,590 fk ho 2
0.355 in. = 23,590 (0.444) (21.7) 17.99 in. − 2 in. = 112 ksi φFbc Snet φRn =
e (112 ksi) (23.4 in.3) = (4 in. + 1⁄2jin.) = 582 kips > 60 kips o.k.
Check supporting girder web From Table 9-2, for three rows of bolts and girder material with Fu = 65 ksi, φRn = (527 kips/in.)(0.400 in.) = 211 kips > 60 kips o.k. The connection, as summarized in Figure 9-7, is adequate.
Example 9-2
Given:
Refer to Figure 9-8. Use Table 9-2 to design an all-bolted double-angle connection for the W36×230 beam to W14×90 column-flange connection. Ru = 225 kips W36×230 tw = 0.760 in. Fy = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi W14×90 tf = 0.710 in. Fy = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi Use 3⁄4-in. diameter A325-N bolts in standard holes. Assume angle material with Fy = 36 ksi and Fu = 58 ksi.
Solution:
Design bolts and angles AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 19
From Table 9-2, for 3⁄4-in. diameter A325-N bolts and angle material with Fy = 36 ksi and Fy = 58 ksi, select eight rows of bolts and 5⁄16-in. angle thickness. φRn = 254 kips > 225 kips o.k. Check supported beam web From Table 9-2, for eight rows of bolts, beam material with Fy = 50 ksi and Fu = 65 ksi, and Leh = 13⁄4-in., φRn = (702 kips/in.)(0.760 in.) = 534 kips > 225 kips o.k. Check supporting column flange From Table 9-2, for eight rows of bolts and column material with Fy = 50 ksi and Fu = 65 ksi, φRn = (1,404 kips/in.)(0.710 in.) = 997 kips 225 kips o.k.
Example 9-3
Given:
Refer to Example 9-1. Use Table 9-3 to substitute welds for bolts in the supported-beam-web legs of the double-angle connection (welds A).
Solution:
From Table 9-3, for three rows of bolts (an angle length of 81⁄2-in.), a 3⁄ -in. weld size provides φR = 110 kips. For beam web material with 16 n Fy = 50 ksi, the minimum web thickness is 0.31 in. Since tw = 0.355 in. > 0.31 in., no reduction in the tabulated value is required. φRn = 110 kips > 60 kips o.k. Check minimum angle thickness The minimum angle thickness for Table 9-3 is the weld size plus 1⁄16-in., but not less than the thickness determined from Table 9-2. tmin = 3⁄16-in. + 1⁄16-in. = 1⁄4-in. This thickness is equal to the thickness chosen previously from Table 9-2.
Example 9-4
Given:
Refer to Example 9-2. Use Table 9-3 to substitute welds for bolts in the support legs of the double-angle connection (welds B).
Solution:
From Table 9-3, for eight rows of bolts (an angle length of 231⁄2-in.), a 5⁄ -in. weld size provides φR = 279 kips. For beam web material with 16 n AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 20
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 50 ksi, the minimum column flange thickness is 0.26 in. Since tf = 0.710 in. > 0.26 in., no reduction of the tabulated value is required. φRn = 279 kips > 225 kips o.k. Check minimum angle thickness The minimum angle thickness for Table 9-3 is the weld size plus 1⁄16-in., but not less than the thickness determined from Table 9-2. tmin = 5⁄16-in. + 1⁄16-in. = 3⁄8-in. Thus, the angle thickness must be increased to 3⁄8-in. to accommodate the welded legs of the double-angle connection. Example 9-5
Given:
Refer to Example 9-2. Use Table 9-4 to design an all-welded doubleangle connection for the W36×230 beam to W14×90 column-flange connection.
Solution:
Design supported-beam-web angle leg welds (welds A) From Table 9-4, for L = 24 in., a 3⁄16-in. weld A size provides φRn = 259 kips. For beam web material with Fy = 50 ksi, the minimum supported beam web thickness is 0.31 in. Since tw = 0.760 in. > 0.31 in., no reduction of the tabulated value is required. φRn = 259 kips > 225 kips o.k. Design support angle leg welds (welds B) From Table 9-4, for L = 24 in., a 1⁄4-in. weld B size provides φRn = 229 kips. For column flange material with Fy = 50 ksi, the minimum column flange thickness is 0.21 in. Since tf = 0.710 in. > 0.21 in., no reduction of the tabulated value is required. Check minimum angle thickness The minimum angle thickness for Table 9-4 is the weld size plus 1⁄16-in. tmin = 1⁄4-in. + 1⁄16-in. = 5⁄16-in. Use 2L4×3×5⁄16.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 21
¾φ A325-N
/16*
¼ 1 3/8 max.
11/4 min.
W18×50
11/16
2 15/16
A
3
61/8 min. (use 6¼)
L ev = 1¼
3 3 3¼ 2
2¼ L eh = 1¾
2L 4×3½×¼×8½ (SLBB)
Section at A * This dimension (see sketch, section at A) is determined to be one-half of the decimal web thickness rounded to the next higher 1/16 in. Example: 0.355/2 = 0.1775; use 3/16 in. This will produce spacing of holes in the supporting beam slightly larger than detailed in the angles to per mit spreading of angles (angles can be spread but not closed) at time of erection to supporting member. Alternatively, consider using horizontal slots in the support legs of the angles. Fig. 9-7.
2½
¾φ A325-N /16 *
/16
7
2L 5×3× 5/16 ×1″-1½
Section at B * This dimension is one-half decimal web thickness rounded to the next higher 1/16 in., as in example 9-1. Fig. 9-8. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
1 3/8 max.
1¼ min.
W36×230
3 9/16
5
B
1 7/16
7@3 = 1 ″-9
1¼
6¾ min. (use 8)
1¾
9 - 22
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2. All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
12 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
326
382
382
382
X
—
326
408
477
477
SC
STD
251
251
251
251
OVS
213
213
213
213
SSLT
213
213
213
213
STD
326
380
380
380
OVS
307
323
323
323
SSLT
323
323
323
323
N
—
326
408
477
477
X
—
326
408
489
596
SC Class A
STD
313
313
313
313
OVS
266
266
266
266
SSLT
266
266
266
266
STD
326
408
475
475
OVS
307
383
403
403
SSLT
326
403
403
403
A325 Varies
t
11@3 = 33
Class A
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
L eh
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
11@3 = 33
Lev
A490
Lev
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
940
665
668
672
675
685
711
653
659
666
672
685
711
13⁄4
940
672
675
678
682
691
717
653
659
666
672
691
717
11⁄2
940
628
631
634
637
647
673
613
620
626
633
647
673
13⁄4
940
634
638
641
644
654
680
613
620
626
633
653
680
11⁄2
940
665
668
672
675
685
711
653
659
666
672
685
711
13⁄4
940
672
675
678
682
691
717
653
659
666
672
691
717
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1879
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account f or possible underrun in beam length
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 23
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 3⁄ -in 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
12 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
366
382
382
382
X
—
366
457
477
477
SC
STD
251
251
251
251
OVS
213
213
213
213
SSLT
213
213
213
213
STD
366
380
380
380
OVS
323
323
323
323
SSLT
323
323
323
323
N
—
366
457
477
477
X
—
366
457
548
596
SC
STD
313
313
313
313
OVS
266
266
266
266
SSLT
266
266
266
266
STD
366
457
475
475
OVS
344
403
403
403
SSLT
366
403
403
403
11@3 = 33
Class A
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
L eh Lev
A490
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
11@3 = 33
Class A
SC Lev
Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
1053
754
758
762
765
776
806
731
739
746
753
775
806
13⁄4
1053
764
767
771
775
786
815
731
739
746
753
775
815
11⁄
2
1053
712
716
720
723
734
764
687
695
702
709
731
764
13⁄4
1053
722
725
729
733
744
773
687
695
702
709
731
773
11⁄2
1053
754
758
762
765
776
806
731
739
746
753
775
806
13⁄
1053
764
767
771
775
786
815
731
739
746
753
775
815
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2106
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 24
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
11 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
299
350
350
350
X
—
299
373
437
437
SC
STD
230
230
230
230
OVS
195
195
195
195
SSLT
195
195
195
195
STD
299
348
348
348
OVS
281
296
296
296
SSLT
296
296
296
296
N
—
299
373
437
437
X
—
299
373
448
547
SC Class A
STD
287
287
287
287
OVS
244
244
244
244
SSLT
244
244
244
244
STD
299
373
435
435
OVS
281
351
370
370
SSLT
299
370
370
370
A325 Varies
t
Class A 10@3 = 30
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
L eh
10@3 = 30
Lev
A490
Lev
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
861
610
613
616
619
629
655
597
604
610
617
629
655
13⁄4
861
616
620
623
626
636
662
597
604
610
617
636
662
11⁄2
861
575
579
582
585
595
621
561
568
574
581
595
621
13⁄4
861
582
585
589
592
602
628
561
568
574
581
600
628
11⁄2
861
610
613
616
619
629
655
597
604
610
617
629
655
13⁄4
861
616
620
623
626
636
662
597
604
610
617
636
662
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1723
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 25
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
11 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
335
350
350
350
X
—
335
418
437
437
SC
STD
230
230
230
230
OVS
195
195
195
195
SSLT
195
195
195
195
STD
335
348
348
348
OVS
296
296
296
296
SSLT
296
296
296
296
N
—
335
418
437
437
X
—
335
418
502
547
SC
STD
287
287
287
287
OVS
244
244
244
244
SSLT
244
244
244
244
STD
335
418
435
435
OVS
314
370
370
370
SSLT
335
370
370
370
Class A 10@3 = 30
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
L eh
10@3 = 30
Lev
A490
Class A
Lev
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
965
692
696
700
703
714
743
669
676
684
691
713
743
13⁄4
965
702
705
709
713
724
753
669
676
684
691
713
753
11⁄
2
965
654
657
661
665
676
705
629
636
644
651
673
705
13⁄4
965
663
667
671
674
685
714
629
636
644
651
673
714
11⁄2
965
692
696
700
703
714
743
669
676
684
691
713
743
13⁄
965
702
705
709
713
724
753
669
676
684
691
713
753
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1931
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 26
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
3⁄ -in. 4
Bolt
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
10 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
271
318
318
318
X
—
271
338
398
398
SC
STD
209
209
209
209
OVS
178
178
178
178
SSLT
178
178
178
178
STD
271
316
316
316
OVS
254
269
269
269
SSLT
269
269
269
269
N
—
271
338
398
398
X
—
271
338
406
497
SC Class A
STD
261
261
261
261
OVS
222
222
222
222
SSLT
222
222
222
222
STD
271
338
396
396
OVS
254
318
336
336
SSLT
271
336
336
336
A325 Varies
t
Class A 9@3 = 27
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
Lev
9@3 = 27
A490
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
783
554
557
561
564
574
600
542
548
555
561
574
600
13⁄4
783
561
564
567
571
580
607
542
548
555
561
580
607
11⁄2
783
523
526
530
533
543
569
509
515
522
529
543
569
13⁄4
783
530
533
536
540
549
576
509
515
522
529
548
576
11⁄2
783
554
557
561
564
574
600
542
548
555
561
574
600
13⁄4
783
561
564
567
571
580
607
542
548
555
561
580
607
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1566
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 27
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
10 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
303
318
318
318
X
—
303
379
398
398
SC
STD
209
209
209
209
OVS
178
178
178
178
SSLT
178
178
178
178
STD
303
316
316
316
OVS
269
269
269
269
SSLT
269
269
269
269
N
—
303
379
398
398
X
—
303
379
455
497
SC
STD
261
261
261
261
OVS
222
222
222
222
SSLT
222
222
222
222
STD
303
379
396
396
OVS
285
336
336
336
SSLT
303
336
336
336
Class A 9@3 = 27
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
9@3 = 27
A490
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
878
630
634
637
641
652
681
607
614
622
629
651
681
13⁄4
878
639
643
647
650
661
691
607
614
622
629
651
691
11⁄
2
878
595
599
603
606
617
647
570
578
585
592
614
647
13⁄4
878
605
608
612
616
627
656
570
578
585
592
614
656
11⁄2
878
630
634
637
641
652
681
607
614
622
629
651
681
13⁄
878
639
643
647
650
661
691
607
614
622
629
651
691
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1755
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 28
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
9 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
243
286
286
286
X
—
243
304
358
358
SC
STD
188
188
188
188
OVS
160
160
160
160
SSLT
160
160
160
160
STD
243
285
285
285
OVS
228
242
242
242
SSLT
242
242
242
242
N
—
243
304
358
358
X
—
243
304
365
447
SC Class A
STD
235
235
235
235
OVS
200
200
200
200
SSLT
200
200
200
200
STD
243
304
356
356
OVS
228
285
303
303
SSLT
243
303
303
303
A325 Varies
t
8@3 = 24
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
A490
Lev
8@3 = 24
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
705
499
502
505
508
518
544
486
493
499
506
518
544
13⁄4
705
505
509
512
515
525
551
486
493
499
506
525
551
11⁄2
705
471
474
477
481
491
517
457
463
470
476
491
517
13⁄4
705
478
481
484
487
497
523
457
463
470
476
496
523
11⁄2
705
499
502
505
508
518
544
486
493
499
506
518
544
13⁄4
705
505
509
512
515
525
551
486
493
499
506
525
551
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1409
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 29
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
9 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
272
286
286
286
X
—
272
340
358
358
SC
STD
188
188
188
188
OVS
160
160
160
160
SSLT
160
160
160
160
STD
272
285
285
285
OVS
242
242
242
242
SSLT
242
242
242
242
N
—
272
340
358
358
X
—
272
340
409
447
SC
STD
235
235
235
235
OVS
200
200
200
200
SSLT
200
200
200
200
STD
272
340
356
356
OVS
256
303
303
303
SSLT
272
303
303
303
8@3 = 24
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
8@3 = 24
A490
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
790
568
572
575
579
590
619
545
552
559
567
589
619
13⁄4
790
577
581
585
588
599
628
545
552
559
567
589
628
11⁄
2
790
537
540
544
548
559
588
512
519
527
534
556
588
13⁄4
790
546
550
554
557
568
597
512
519
527
534
556
597
11⁄2
790
568
572
575
579
590
619
545
552
559
567
589
619
13⁄
790
577
581
585
588
599
628
545
552
559
567
589
628
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1580
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 30
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
8 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33, 30
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
215
254
254
254
X
—
215
269
318
318
SC
STD
167
167
167
167
OVS
142
142
142
142
SSLT
142
142
142
142
STD
215
253
253
253
OVS
202
215
215
215
SSLT
215
215
215
215
N
—
215
269
318
318
X
—
215
269
323
398
SC Class A
STD
209
209
209
209
OVS
178
178
178
178
SSLT
178
178
178
178
STD
215
269
316
316
OVS
202
253
269
269
SSLT
215
269
269
269
A325 Varies
t
7@3 = 21
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
7@3 = 21
A490
Lev
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
626
443
446
450
453
463
489
431
437
444
450
463
489
13⁄4
626
450
453
456
460
470
496
431
437
444
450
470
496
11⁄2
626
419
422
425
429
438
464
405
411
418
424
438
464
13⁄4
626
425
429
432
435
445
471
405
411
418
424
444
471
11⁄2
626
443
446
450
453
463
489
431
437
444
450
463
489
13⁄4
626
450
453
456
460
470
496
431
437
444
450
470
496
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1253
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 31
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
8 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33, 30
A325 Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
241
254
254
254
X
—
241
302
318
318
SC
STD
167
167
167
167
OVS
142
142
142
142
SSLT
142
142
142
142
STD
241
253
253
253
OVS
215
215
215
215
SSLT
215
215
215
215
N
—
241
302
318
318
X
—
241
302
362
398
SC
STD
209
209
209
209
OVS
178
178
178
178
SSLT
178
178
178
178
STD
241
302
316
316
OVS
227
269
269
269
SSLT
241
269
269
269
t
7@3 = 21
Class A
SC 2 1/ 4
Class B
Lev
L eh
7@3 = 21
A490
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
702
506
509
513
517
528
557
483
490
497
505
527
557
13⁄4
702
515
519
522
526
537
566
483
490
497
505
527
566
11⁄
2
702
478
482
486
489
500
530
453
461
468
475
497
530
13⁄4
702
488
491
495
499
510
539
453
461
468
475
497
539
11⁄2
702
506
509
513
517
528
557
483
490
497
505
527
557
13⁄
702
515
519
522
526
537
566
483
490
497
505
527
566
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1404
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 32
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
7 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
188
223
223
223
X
—
188
234
278
278
SC
STD
146
146
146
146
OVS
124
124
124
124
SSLT
124
124
124
124
STD
188
221
221
221
OVS
176
188
188
188
SSLT
188
188
188
188
N
—
188
234
278
278
X
—
188
234
281
348
SC Class A
STD
183
183
183
183
OVS
155
155
155
155
SSLT
155
155
155
155
STD
188
234
277
277
OVS
176
220
235
235
SSLT
188
234
235
235
A325
t
6@3 = 18
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Lev
L eh
Lev
6@3 = 18
A490
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
548
388
391
394
398
407
433
375
382
388
395
407
433
13⁄4
548
394
398
401
404
414
440
375
382
388
395
414
440
11⁄2
548
367
370
373
376
386
412
352
359
365
372
386
412
13⁄4
548
373
377
380
383
393
419
352
359
365
372
392
419
11⁄2
548
388
391
394
398
407
433
375
382
388
395
407
433
13⁄4
548
394
398
401
404
414
440
375
382
388
395
414
440
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1096
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 33
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
7 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond. A325
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
210
223
223
223
X
—
210
263
278
278
SC
STD
146
146
146
146
OVS
124
124
124
124
SSLT
124
124
124
124
STD
210
221
221
221
OVS
188
188
188
188
SSLT
188
188
188
188
N
—
210
263
278
278
X
—
210
263
315
348
SC
STD
183
183
183
183
OVS
155
155
155
155
SSLT
155
155
155
155
STD
210
263
277
277
OVS
197
235
235
235
SSLT
210
235
235
235
6@3 = 18
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Lev
L eh
6@3 = 18
A490
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
614
444
447
451
455
466
495
420
428
435
442
464
495
13⁄4
614
453
457
460
464
475
504
420
428
435
442
464
504
11⁄
2
614
420
423
427
431
442
471
395
402
410
417
439
471
13⁄4
614
429
433
437
440
451
480
395
402
410
417
439
480
11⁄2
614
444
447
451
455
466
495
420
428
435
442
464
495
13⁄
614
453
457
460
464
475
504
420
428
435
442
464
504
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1229
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 34
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
6 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24, 21 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
160
191
191
191
X
—
160
200
239
239
SC
STD
125
125
125
125
OVS
107
107
107
107
SSLT
107
107
107
107
STD
160
190
190
190
OVS
150
161
161
161
SSLT
160
161
161
161
N
—
160
200
239
239
X
—
160
200
240
298
SC Class A
STD
157
157
157
157
OVS
133
133
133
133
SSLT
133
133
133
133
STD
160
200
237
237
OVS
150
188
202
202
SSLT
160
200
202
202
A325
t
5@3 = 15
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
5@3 = 15
Lev
L eh
A490
Lev
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
470
332
336
339
342
352
378
320
326
333
339
352
378
13⁄4
470
339
342
346
349
359
385
320
326
333
339
359
385
11⁄2
470
314
318
321
324
334
360
300
307
313
320
334
360
13⁄4
470
321
324
328
331
341
367
300
307
313
320
339
367
11⁄2
470
332
336
339
342
352
378
320
326
333
339
352
378
13⁄4
470
339
342
346
349
359
385
320
326
333
339
359
385
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
940
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 35
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
6 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24, 21 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond. A325
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
179
191
191
191
X
—
179
224
239
239
SC
STD
125
125
125
125
OVS
107
107
107
107
SSLT
107
107
107
107
STD
179
190
190
190
OVS
161
161
161
161
SSLT
161
161
161
161
N
—
179
224
239
239
X
—
179
224
269
298
SC
STD
157
157
157
157
OVS
133
133
133
133
SSLT
133
133
133
133
STD
179
224
237
237
OVS
168
202
202
202
SSLT
179
202
202
202
5@3 = 15
Class A
SC 2 1/ 4
Class B
5@3 = 15
Lev
L eh
Lev
A490
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
527
381
385
389
392
403
433
358
366
373
380
402
433
13⁄4
527
391
394
398
402
413
442
358
366
373
380
402
442
11⁄
2
527
361
365
369
372
383
413
336
344
351
358
380
413
13⁄4
527
371
374
378
382
393
422
336
344
351
358
380
422
11⁄2
527
381
385
389
392
403
433
358
366
373
380
402
433
13⁄
527
391
394
398
402
413
442
358
366
373
380
402
442
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1053
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 36
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
5 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W30, 27, 24, 21, 18 S24, 20, 18 MC18
Varies
A325
4@3 = 12
1⁄ 2
159
159
159
X
—
132
165
198
199
SC
STD
104
104
104
104
OVS
88.8
88.8
88.8
88.8
SSLT
88.8
88.8
88.8
88.8
STD
132
158
158
158
OVS
124
134
134
134
SSLT
132
134
134
134
N
—
132
165
198
199
X
—
132
165
198
249
SC Class A
STD
131
131
131
131
OVS
111
111
111
111
SSLT
111
111
111
111
STD
132
165
198
198
OVS
124
155
168
168
SSLT
132
165
168
168
Lev
A490
4@3 = 12
3⁄ 8
132
L eh
L ev
5⁄ 16
—
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
1⁄ 4
N
Class A
t
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
392
277
280
283
287
296
322
264
271
277
284
296
322
13⁄4
392
284
287
290
293
303
329
264
271
277
284
303
329
11⁄2
392
262
265
269
272
282
308
248
254
261
268
282
308
13⁄4
392
269
272
275
279
288
315
248
254
261
268
287
315
11⁄2
392
277
280
283
287
296
322
264
271
277
284
296
322
13⁄4
392
284
287
290
293
303
329
264
271
277
284
303
329
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
783
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 37
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
5 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W30, 27, 24, 21, 18 S24, 20, 18 MC18
Varies
A325
159
159
X
—
148
185
199
199
SC
STD
104
104
104
104
4@3 = 12
OVS
88.8
88.8
88.8
88.8
SSLT
88.8
88.8
88.8
88.8
STD
148
158
158
158
OVS
134
134
134
134
SSLT
134
134
134
134
N
—
148
185
199
199
X
—
148
185
222
249
SC
STD
131
131
131
131
OVS
111
111
111
111
SSLT
111
111
111
111
STD
148
185
198
198
OVS
139
168
168
168
SSLT
148
168
168
168
Lev 4@3 = 12
1⁄ 2
159
L eh
L ev
3⁄ 8
148
SC
A490
5⁄ 16
—
Class B
2 1/ 4
1⁄ 4
N
Class A
t
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
439
319
323
327
330
341
370
296
303
311
318
340
370
13⁄4
439
329
332
336
340
351
380
296
303
311
318
340
380
11⁄
2
439
303
306
310
314
325
354
278
285
293
300
322
354
13⁄4
439
312
316
320
323
334
363
278
285
293
300
322
363
11⁄2
439
319
323
327
330
341
370
296
303
311
318
340
370
13⁄
439
329
332
336
340
351
380
296
303
311
318
340
380
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
878
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 38
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
4 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W24, 21, 18, 16 S24, 20, 18, 15 C15 MC18
A325
3@3 = 9
1⁄ 2
127
127
127
X
—
104
131
157
159
SC
STD
83.5
83.5
83.5
83.5
OVS
71.0
71.0
71.0
71.0
SSLT
71.0
71.0
71.0
71.0
L eh
STD OVS
104 97.9
127
127
127
108
108
108
104
108
108
108
N
—
104
131
157
159
X
—
104
131
157
199
SC Class A
STD
104
104
104
104
L ev
SSLT A490
3@3 = 9
3⁄ 8
104
SC Class B
L ev
5⁄ 16
—
t
2 1/ 4
1⁄ 4
N
Class A Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
OVS
88.8
88.8
88.8
88.8
SSLT
88.8
88.8
88.8
88.8
STD OVS SSLT
104 97.9 104
131
157
158
122
134
134
131
134
134
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
313
221
225
228
231
241
267
209
215
222
228
241
267
13⁄4
313
228
231
235
238
248
274
209
215
222
228
248
274
11⁄2
313
210
213
216
220
230
256
196
202
209
215
230
256
13⁄4
313
217
220
223
226
236
262
196
202
209
215
235
262
11⁄2
313
221
225
228
231
241
267
209
215
222
228
241
267
13⁄4
313
228
231
235
238
248
274
209
215
222
228
248
274
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
626
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 39
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
4 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W24, 21, 18, 16 S24, 20, 18, 15 C15 MC18
A325
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
117
127
127
127
X
—
117
146
159
159
SC
STD
83.5
83.5
83.5
83.5
OVS
71.0
71.0
71.0
71.0
SSLT
71.0
71.0
71.0
71.0
Class A Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
3@3 = 9
t
SC
STD
117
127
127
127
OVS
108
108
108
108
SSLT
108
108
108
108
N
—
117
146
159
159
X
—
117
146
176
199
SC
STD
104
104
104
104
Class B
2 1/ 4
L ev
L eh
L ev
3@3 = 9
A490
Class A
SC Class B
OVS
88.8
88.8
88.8
88.8
SSLT
88.8
88.8
88.8
88.8
STD
117
146
158
158
OVS
110
134
134
134
SSLT
117
134
134
134
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
351
257
261
264
268
279
308
234
241
249
256
278
308
13⁄4
351
266
270
274
277
288
318
234
241
249
256
278
318
11⁄
2
351
244
248
252
255
266
296
219
227
234
241
263
296
13⁄4
351
254
257
261
265
276
305
219
227
234
241
263
305
11⁄2
351
257
261
264
268
279
308
234
241
249
256
278
308
13⁄
351
266
270
274
277
288
318
234
241
249
256
278
318
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
702
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 40
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
3 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W18, 16, 14, 12, 10* S18, 15, 12 C15, 12 MC18, 13, 12
A325
*Limited to W10×12, 15, 17, 19, 22, 26, 30.
Varies
Lev
95.4
95.4
X
—
76.7
95.8
SC
STD
62.7
62.6
62.6
62.6
OVS
53.3
53.3
53.3
53.3
SSLT
53.3
53.3
53.3
53.3
STD
76.7
94.9
94.9
94.9
OVS
71.8
80.7
80.7
80.7
SSLT
76.7
80.7
80.7
80.7
N
—
76.7
95.8
115
119
X
—
76.7
95.8
115
149
SC Class A
STD
76.7
78.3
78.3
78.3
OVS
66.6
66.6
66.6
66.6
SSLT
66.6
66.6
66.6
66.6
STD
76.7
95.8
115
119
OVS
71.8
89.7
101
101
SSLT
76.7
95.8
101
101
A490
Lev
1⁄ 2
95.4
2 /4
3 3
3⁄ 8
76.7
1
L eh
5⁄ 16
—
SC Class B
3 3
1⁄ 4
N
Class A
t
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
115
119
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
235
166
169
172
176
185
212
153
160
166
173
185
212
13⁄4
235
173
176
179
182
192
218
153
160
166
173
192
218
11⁄2
235
158
161
164
168
177
203
144
150
157
163
177
203
13⁄4
235
164
168
171
174
184
210
144
150
157
163
183
210
11⁄2
235
166
169
172
176
185
212
153
160
166
173
185
212
13⁄4
235
173
176
179
182
192
218
153
160
166
173
192
218
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
470
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 41
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
3 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W18, 16, 14, 12, 10* S18, 15, 12 C15, 12 MC18, 13, 12
A325
*Limited to W10×12, 15, 17, 19, 22, 26, 30.
Varies
Lev Lev
95.4
95.4
95.4
—
85.9
SC
STD
62.6
62.6
62.6
62.6
OVS
53.3
53.3
53.3
53.3
SSLT
53.3
53.3
53.3
53.3
STD
85.9
94.9
94.9
94.9
OVS
80.4
80.7
80.7
80.7
SSLT
80.7
80.7
80.7
80.7
N
—
85.9
107
119
119
X
—
85.9
107
129
149
SC
STD
78.3
78.3
78.3
78.3
OVS
66.6
66.6
66.6
66.6
SSLT
66.6
66.6
66.6
66.6
STD
85.9
107
119
119
OVS
80.4
101
101
101
SSLT
85.9
101
101
101
2 /4
3 3
1⁄ 2
X
1
A490
3⁄ 8
85.9
SC
L eh
5⁄ 16
—
Class B
3 3
1⁄ 4
N
Class A
t
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Class A
SC Class B
107
119
119
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
263
195
199
202
206
217
246
172
179
186
194
216
246
13⁄4
263
204
208
212
215
226
256
172
179
186
194
216
256
11⁄
2
263
186
189
193
197
208
237
161
168
176
183
205
237
13⁄4
263
195
199
203
206
217
246
161
168
176
183
205
246
11⁄2
263
195
199
202
206
217
246
172
179
186
194
216
246
13⁄
263
204
208
212
215
226
256
172
179
186
194
216
256
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
527
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 42
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
2 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W12, 10, 8 S12, 10, 8 C12, 10, 9, 8 MC13, 12, 10, 9, 8
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
48.9
61.2
63.6
63.6
X
—
48.9
61.2
73.4
79.5
SC
STD
41.8
41.8
41.8
41.8
OVS
35.5
35.5
35.5
35.5
SSLT
35.5
35.5
35.5
35.5
STD
48.9
61.2
63.3
63.3
OVS
45.7
53.8
53.8
53.8
SSLT
48.9
53.8
53.8
53.8
N
—
48.9
61.2
73.4
79.5
X
—
48.9
61.2
73.4
97.9
SC Class A
STD
48.9
52.2
52.2
52.2
OVS
44.4
44.4
44.4
44.4
SSLT
44.4
44.4
44.4
44.4
STD
48.9
61.2
73.4
79.1
OVS
45.7
57.1
67.2
67.2
SSLT
48.9
61.2
67.2
67.2
A325
Class A Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
t
3
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
3
Lev
A490
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
157
110
114
117
120
130
156
97.9 104
111
117
130
156
13⁄4
157
117
120
124
127
137
157
97.9 104
111
117
136
157
11⁄2
157
106
109
112
115
125
151
91.4
97.9 104
111
125
151
13⁄4
157
112
116
119
122
132
157
91.4
97.9 104
111
131
157
11⁄2
157
110
114
117
120
130
156
97.9 104
111
117
130
156
13⁄4
157
117
120
124
127
137
157
97.9 104
111
117
136
157
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
313
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 43
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 3⁄ -in. 4
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
2 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W12, 10, 8 S12, 10, 8 C12, 10, 9, 8 MC13, 12, 10, 9, 8
A325
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
54.8
63.6
63.6
63.6
X
—
54.8
68.6
79.5
79.5
SC
STD
41.8
41.8
41.8
41.8
OVS
35.5
35.5
35.5
35.5
SSLT
35.5
35.5
35.5
35.5
STD
54.8
63.3
63.3
63.3
OVS
51.2
53.8
53.8
53.8
SSLT
53.8
53.8
53.8
53.8
N
—
54.8
68.6
79.5
79.5
X
—
54.8
68.6
82.3
99.4
SC
STD
52.2
52.2
52.2
52.2
OVS
44.4
44.4
44.4
44.4
SSLT
44.4
44.4
44.4
44.4
STD
54.8
68.6
79.1
79.1
OVS
51.2
64.0
67.2
67.2
SSLT
54.8
67.2
67.2
67.2
Class A Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
t
3
SC
2 1/ 4
Class B
Lev
L eh
3
Lev
A490
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
176
133
136
140
144
155
176
110
117
124
132
154
176
13⁄4
176
142
146
149
153
164
176
110
117
124
132
154
176
11⁄
2
176
127
131
135
138
149
176
102
110
117
124
146
176
13⁄4
176
137
140
144
148
159
176
102
110
117
124
146
176
11⁄2
176
133
136
140
144
155
176
110
117
124
132
154
176
13⁄
176
142
146
149
153
164
176
110
117
124
132
154
176
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
351
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 44
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
12 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
307
383
460
520
X
—
307
383
460
613
SC
STD
307
349
349
349
OVS
286
297
297
297
SSLT
297
297
297
297
STD
307
383
460
520
OVS
286
358
429
450
SSLT
307
383
450
450
N
—
307
383
460
613
X
—
307
383
460
613
SC Class A
STD
307
383
439
439
OVS
286
358
373
373
SSLT
307
373
373
373
STD
307
383
460
613
OVS
286
358
429
565
SSLT
307
383
460
565
A325 Varies
t
11@3 = 33
Class A
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
L eh
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
11@3 = 33
Lev
A490
Lev
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
Hole Type
Leh, Unin. coped 11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
STD
11⁄2
1096
628
631
634
637
647
673
613
620
626
633
647
673
13⁄4
1096
634
638
641
644
654
680
613
620
626
633
653
680
11⁄2
1096
589
592
595
598
608
634
573
579
586
592
608
634
13⁄4
1096
595
599
602
605
615
641
573
579
586
592
612
641
11⁄2
1096
628
631
634
637
647
673
613
620
626
633
647
673
13⁄4
1096
634
638
641
644
654
680
613
620
626
633
653
680
OVS SSLT
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2192
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 45
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
12 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
344
430
516
520
X
—
344
430
516
649
SC
STD
344
349
349
349
OVS
297
297
297
297
SSLT
297
297
297
297
STD
344
430
516
520
OVS
321
401
450
450
SSLT
344
430
450
450
N
—
344
430
516
649
X
—
344
430
516
687
SC
STD
344
430
439
439
OVS
321
373
373
373
SSLT
344
373
373
373
STD
344
430
516
649
OVS
321
401
481
565
SSLT
344
430
516
565
11@3 = 33
Class A
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
L eh Lev
A490
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
11@3 = 33
Class A
SC Lev
Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
1229
712
716
720
723
734
764
687
695
702
709
731
764
13⁄4
1229
722
725
729
733
744
773
687
695
702
709
731
773
11⁄
2
1229
669
672
676
680
691
720
642
649
656
664
686
720
13⁄4
1229
678
682
685
689
700
729
642
649
656
664
686
729
11⁄2
1229
712
716
720
723
734
764
687
695
702
709
731
764
13⁄
1229
722
725
729
733
744
773
687
695
702
709
731
773
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2457
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 46
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
11 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
281
351
421
476
X
—
281
351
421
561
SC
STD
281
320
320
320
OVS
262
272
272
272
SSLT
272
272
272
272
STD
281
351
421
476
OVS
262
327
393
412
SSLT
281
351
412
412
N
—
281
351
421
561
X
—
281
351
421
561
SC Class A
STD
281
351
402
402
OVS
262
327
342
342
SSLT
281
342
342
342
STD
281
351
421
561
OVS
262
327
393
518
SSLT
281
351
421
518
A325 Varies
t
Class A 10@3 = 30
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
L eh
10@3 = 30
Lev
A490
Lev
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
1005
575
579
582
585
595
621
561
568
574
581
595
621
13⁄4
1005
582
585
589
592
602
628
561
568
574
581
600
628
11⁄2
1005
540
543
546
549
559
585
524
530
537
543
559
585
13⁄4
1005
546
550
553
556
566
592
524
530
537
543
563
592
11⁄2
1005
575
579
582
585
595
621
561
568
574
581
595
621
13⁄4
1005
582
585
589
592
602
628
561
568
574
581
600
628
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2010
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 47
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
11 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
314
393
472
476
X
—
314
393
472
595
SC
STD
314
320
320
320
OVS
272
272
272
272
SSLT
272
272
272
272
STD
314
393
472
476
OVS
294
367
412
412
SSLT
314
393
412
412
N
—
314
393
472
595
X
—
314
393
472
629
SC
STD
314
393
402
402
OVS
294
342
342
342
SSLT
314
342
342
342
STD
314
393
472
595
OVS
294
367
440
518
SSLT
314
393
472
518
Class A 10@3 = 30
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
L eh
10@3 = 30
Lev
A490
Class A
Lev
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
1126
654
657
661
665
676
705
629
636
644
651
673
705
13⁄4
1126
663
667
671
674
685
714
629
636
644
651
673
714
11⁄
2
1126
614
618
621
625
636
665
587
594
602
609
631
665
13⁄4
1126
623
627
631
634
645
674
587
594
602
609
631
674
11⁄2
1126
654
657
661
665
676
705
629
636
644
651
673
705
13⁄
1126
663
667
671
674
685
714
629
636
644
651
673
714
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2252
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 48
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
10 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
254
318
382
433
X
—
254
318
382
509
SC
STD
254
291
291
291
OVS
238
247
247
247
SSLT
247
247
247
247
STD
254
318
382
433
OVS
238
297
356
375
SSLT
254
318
375
375
N
—
254
318
382
509
X
—
254
318
382
509
SC Class A
STD
254
318
365
365
OVS
238
297
311
311
SSLT
254
311
311
311
STD
254
318
382
509
OVS
238
297
356
471
SSLT
254
318
382
471
A325 Varies
t
Class A 9@3 = 27
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
Lev
9@3 = 27
A490
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
914
523
526
530
533
543
569
509
515
522
529
543
569
13⁄4
914
530
533
536
540
549
576
509
515
522
529
548
576
11⁄2
914
491
494
497
501
510
537
475
482
488
495
510
537
13⁄4
914
498
501
504
507
517
543
475
482
488
495
514
543
11⁄2
914
523
526
530
533
543
569
509
515
522
529
543
569
13⁄4
914
530
533
536
540
549
576
509
515
522
529
548
576
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1827
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 49
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
10 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
285
356
428
433
X
—
285
356
428
541
SC
STD
285
291
291
291
OVS
247
247
247
247
SSLT
247
247
247
247
STD
285
356
428
433
OVS
266
333
375
375
SSLT
285
356
375
375
N
—
285
356
428
541
X
—
285
356
428
570
SC
STD
285
356
365
365
OVS
266
311
311
311
SSLT
285
311
311
311
STD
285
356
428
541
OVS
266
333
399
471
SSLT
285
356
428
471
Class A 9@3 = 27
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B 2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
9@3 = 27
A490
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
1024
595
599
603
606
617
647
570
578
585
592
614
647
13⁄4
1024
605
608
612
616
627
656
570
578
585
592
614
656
11⁄
2
1024
559
563
567
570
581
610
532
540
547
554
576
610
13⁄4
1024
569
572
576
580
591
620
532
540
547
554
576
620
11⁄2
1024
595
599
603
606
617
647
570
578
585
592
614
647
13⁄
1024
605
608
612
616
627
656
570
578
585
592
614
656
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2048
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 50
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
9 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
228
285
343
390
X
—
228
285
343
457
SC
STD
228
262
262
262
OVS
213
223
223
223
SSLT
223
223
223
223
STD
228
285
343
390
OVS
213
266
320
337
SSLT
228
285
337
337
N
—
228
285
343
457
X
—
228
285
343
457
SC Class A
STD
228
285
329
329
OVS
213
266
280
280
SSLT
228
280
280
280
STD
228
285
343
457
OVS
213
266
320
424
SSLT
228
285
343
424
A325 Varies
t
8@3 = 24
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
A490
Lev
8@3 = 24
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
822
471
474
477
481
491
517
457
463
470
476
491
517
13⁄4
822
478
481
484
487
497
523
457
463
470
476
496
523
11⁄2
822
442
445
449
452
462
488
426
433
439
446
462
488
13⁄4
822
449
452
455
459
468
495
426
433
439
446
465
495
11⁄2
822
471
474
477
481
491
517
457
463
470
476
491
517
13⁄4
822
478
481
484
487
497
523
457
463
470
476
496
523
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1644
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 51
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
9 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
256
320
384
390
X
—
256
320
384
487
SC
STD
256
262
262
262
OVS
223
223
223
223
SSLT
223
223
223
223
STD
256
320
384
390
OVS
239
299
337
337
SSLT
256
320
337
337
N
—
256
320
384
487
X
—
256
320
384
512
SC
STD
256
320
329
329
OVS
239
280
280
280
SSLT
256
280
280
280
STD
256
320
384
487
OVS
239
299
358
424
SSLT
256
320
384
424
8@3 = 24
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
8@3 = 24
A490
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
921
537
540
544
548
559
588
512
519
527
534
556
588
13⁄4
921
546
550
554
557
568
597
512
519
527
534
556
597
11⁄
2
921
504
508
512
515
526
556
478
485
492
500
522
556
13⁄4
921
514
518
521
525
536
565
478
485
492
500
522
565
11⁄2
921
537
540
544
548
559
588
512
519
527
534
556
588
13⁄
921
546
550
554
557
568
597
512
519
527
534
556
597
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1843
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 52
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
8 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33, 30
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
202
253
303
346
X
—
202
253
303
405
SC
STD
202
233
233
233
OVS
189
198
198
198
SSLT
198
198
198
198
STD
202
253
303
346
OVS
189
236
283
300
SSLT
202
253
300
300
N
—
202
253
303
405
X
—
202
253
303
405
SC Class A
STD
202
253
292
292
OVS
189
236
249
249
SSLT
202
249
249
249
STD
202
253
303
405
OVS
189
236
283
377
SSLT
202
253
303
377
A325 Varies
t
7@3 = 21
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
7@3 = 21
A490
Lev
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
731
419
422
425
429
438
464
405
411
418
424
438
464
13⁄4
731
425
429
432
435
445
471
405
411
418
424
444
471
11⁄2
731
393
397
400
403
413
439
377
384
390
397
413
439
13⁄4
731
400
403
407
410
420
446
377
384
390
397
417
446
11⁄2
731
419
422
425
429
438
464
405
411
418
424
438
464
13⁄4
731
425
429
432
435
445
471
405
411
418
424
444
471
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1462
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 53
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
8 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33, 30
A325 Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
227
283
340
346
X
—
227
283
340
433
SC
STD
227
233
233
233
OVS
198
198
198
198
SSLT
198
198
198
198
STD
227
283
340
346
OVS
211
264
300
300
SSLT
227
283
300
300
N
—
227
283
340
433
X
—
227
283
340
453
SC
STD
227
283
292
292
OVS
211
249
249
249
SSLT
227
249
249
249
STD
227
283
340
433
OVS
211
264
317
377
SSLT
227
283
340
377
t
7@3 = 21
Class A
SC 2 1/ 4
Class B
Lev
L eh
7@3 = 21
A490
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
819
478
482
486
489
500
530
453
461
468
475
497
530
13⁄4
819
488
491
495
499
510
539
453
461
468
475
497
539
11⁄
2
819
450
453
457
461
472
501
423
430
438
445
467
501
13⁄4
819
459
463
466
470
481
510
423
430
438
445
467
510
11⁄2
819
478
482
486
489
500
530
453
461
468
475
497
530
13⁄
819
488
491
495
499
510
539
453
461
468
475
497
539
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1638
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 54
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
7 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
176
220
264
303
X
—
176
220
264
352
SC
STD
176
204
204
204
OVS
164
173
173
173
SSLT
173
173
173
173
STD
176
220
264
303
OVS
164
205
246
262
SSLT
176
220
262
262
N
—
176
220
264
352
X
—
176
220
264
352
SC Class A
STD
176
220
256
256
OVS
164
205
217
217
SSLT
176
217
217
217
STD
176
220
264
352
OVS
164
205
246
329
SSLT
176
220
264
329
A325
t
6@3 = 18
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Lev
L eh
Lev
6@3 = 18
A490
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
639
367
370
373
376
386
412
352
359
365
372
386
412
13⁄4
639
373
377
380
383
393
419
352
359
365
372
392
419
11⁄2
639
344
348
351
354
364
390
329
335
342
348
364
390
13⁄4
639
351
354
358
361
371
397
329
335
342
348
368
397
11⁄2
639
367
370
373
376
386
412
352
359
365
372
386
412
13⁄4
639
373
377
380
383
393
419
352
359
365
372
392
419
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1279
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 55
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
7 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond. A325
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
197
247
296
303
X
—
197
247
296
379
SC
STD
197
204
204
204
OVS
173
173
173
173
SSLT
173
173
173
173
STD
197
247
296
303
OVS
184
230
262
262
SSLT
197
247
262
262
N
—
197
247
296
379
X
—
197
247
296
395
SC
STD
197
247
256
256
OVS
184
217
217
217
SSLT
197
217
217
217
STD
197
247
296
379
OVS
184
230
276
329
SSLT
197
247
296
329
6@3 = 18
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Lev
L eh
6@3 = 18
A490
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
717
420
423
427
431
442
471
395
402
410
417
439
471
13⁄4
717
429
433
437
440
451
480
395
402
410
417
439
480
11⁄
2
717
395
399
402
406
417
446
368
376
383
390
412
446
13⁄4
717
404
408
412
415
426
456
368
376
383
390
412
456
11⁄2
717
420
423
427
431
442
471
395
402
410
417
439
471
13⁄
717
429
433
437
440
451
480
395
402
410
417
439
480
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1433
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 56
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
6 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24, 21 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
150
188
225
260
X
—
150
188
225
300
SC
STD
150
175
175
175
OVS
140
148
148
148
SSLT
148
148
148
148
STD
150
188
225
260
OVS
140
175
210
225
SSLT
150
188
225
225
N
—
150
188
225
300
X
—
150
188
225
300
SC Class A
STD
150
188
219
219
OVS
140
175
186
186
SSLT
150
186
186
186
STD
150
188
225
300
OVS
140
175
210
280
SSLT
150
188
225
282
A325
t
5@3 = 15
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
5@3 = 15
Lev
L eh
A490
Lev
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
548
314
318
321
324
334
360
300
307
313
320
334
360
13⁄4
548
321
324
328
331
341
367
300
307
313
320
339
367
11⁄2
548
296
299
302
305
315
341
280
286
293
299
315
341
13⁄4
548
302
306
309
312
322
348
280
286
293
299
319
348
11⁄2
548
314
318
321
324
334
360
300
307
313
320
334
360
13⁄4
548
321
324
328
331
341
367
300
307
313
320
339
367
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1096
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 57
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
6 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24, 21 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond. A325
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
168
210
252
260
X
—
168
210
252
325
SC
STD
168
175
175
175
OVS
148
148
148
148
SSLT
148
148
148
148
STD
168
210
252
260
OVS
157
196
225
225
SSLT
168
210
225
225
N
—
168
210
252
325
X
—
168
210
252
336
SC
STD
168
210
219
219
OVS
157
186
186
186
SSLT
168
186
186
186
STD
168
210
252
325
OVS
157
196
235
282
SSLT
168
210
252
282
5@3 = 15
Class A
SC 2 1/ 4
Class B
5@3 = 15
Lev
L eh
Lev
A490
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
614
361
365
369
372
383
413
336
344
351
358
380
413
13⁄4
614
371
374
378
382
393
422
336
344
351
358
380
422
11⁄
2
614
340
344
348
351
362
392
314
321
328
335
357
392
13⁄4
614
350
353
357
361
372
401
314
321
328
335
357
401
11⁄2
614
361
365
369
372
383
413
336
344
351
358
380
413
13⁄
614
371
374
378
382
393
422
336
344
351
358
380
422
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1229
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 58
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
5 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W30, 27, 24, 21, 18 S24, 20, 18 MC18
Varies
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
124
155
186
216
X
—
124
155
186
248
SC
STD
124
145
145
145
OVS
115
124
124
124
SSLT
124
124
124
124
STD
124
155
186
216
OVS
115
144
173
187
SSLT
124
155
186
187
N
—
124
155
186
248
X
—
124
155
186
248
SC Class A
STD
124
155
183
183
OVS
115
144
155
155
SSLT
124
155
155
155
STD
124
155
186
248
OVS
115
144
173
231
SSLT
124
155
186
235
A325
Class A
4@3 = 12
t
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
4@3 = 12
A490
L ev
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
457
262
265
269
272
282
308
248
254
261
268
282
308
13⁄4
457
269
272
275
279
288
315
248
254
261
268
287
315
11⁄2
457
247
250
253
257
266
293
231
238
244
251
266
293
13⁄4
457
254
257
260
263
273
299
231
238
244
251
270
299
11⁄2
457
262
265
269
272
282
308
248
254
261
268
282
308
13⁄4
457
269
272
275
279
288
315
248
254
261
268
287
315
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
914
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 59
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
5 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W30, 27, 24, 21, 18 S24, 20, 18 MC18
Varies
A325
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
139
174
208
216
X
—
139
174
208
271
SC
STD
139
145
145
145
OVS
124
124
124
124
SSLT
124
124
124
124
STD
139
174
208
216
OVS
129
162
187
187
SSLT
139
174
187
187
N
—
139
174
208
271
X
—
139
174
208
278
SC
STD
139
174
183
183
OVS
129
155
155
155
SSLT
139
155
155
155
STD
139
174
208
271
OVS
129
162
194
235
SSLT
139
174
208
235
Class A
4@3 = 12
t
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
L ev
4@3 = 12
A490
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
512
303
306
310
314
325
354
278
285
293
300
322
354
13⁄4
512
312
316
320
323
334
363
278
285
293
300
322
363
11⁄
2
512
286
289
293
297
308
337
259
266
273
281
303
337
13⁄4
512
295
299
302
306
317
346
259
266
273
281
303
346
11⁄2
512
303
306
310
314
325
354
278
285
293
300
322
354
13⁄
512
312
316
320
323
334
363
278
285
293
300
322
363
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1024
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 60
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
4 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W24, 21, 18, 16 S24, 20, 18, 15 C15 MC18
1⁄ 4
N
—
97.9
X
—
SC
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
122
147
173
97.9
122
147
196
STD
97.9
116
116
116
OVS
91.1
98.9
98.9
98.9
SSLT
97.9
98.9
98.9
98.9
STD
97.9
122
147
173
OVS
91.1
114
137
150
SSLT
97.9
122
147
150
N
—
97.9
122
147
196
X
—
97.9
122
147
196
SC Class A
STD
97.9
122
146
146
OVS
91.1
114
124
124
SSLT
97.9
122
124
124
STD
97.9
122
147
196
OVS
91.1
114
137
182
SSLT
97.9
122
147
188
A325
Class A Varies
3@3 = 9
t
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
L ev
L eh
3@3 = 9
A490
L ev
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
5⁄ 16
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
365
210
213
216
220
230
256
196
202
209
215
230
256
13⁄4
365
217
220
223
226
236
262
196
202
209
215
235
262
11⁄2
365
198
201
205
208
218
244
182
189
195
202
218
244
13⁄4
365
205
208
211
215
224
250
182
189
195
202
221
250
11⁄2
365
210
213
216
220
230
256
196
202
209
215
230
256
13⁄4
365
217
220
223
226
236
262
196
202
209
215
235
262
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
731
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 61
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
4 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W24, 21, 18, 16 S24, 20, 18, 15 C15 MC18
A325
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
110
137
165
173
X
—
110
137
165
216
SC
STD
110
116
116
116
Class A Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
OVS
98.9
98.9
98.9
98.9
SSLT
98.9
98.9
98.9
98.9
3@3 = 9
t
SC
STD
110
137
165
173
OVS
102
128
150
150
SSLT
110
137
150
150
N
—
110
137
165
216
X
—
110
137
165
219
SC
STD
110
137
146
146
OVS
102
124
124
124
SSLT
110
124
124
124
STD
110
137
165
216
OVS
102
128
153
188
SSLT
110
137
165
188
Class B
2 1/ 4
L ev
L eh
L ev
3@3 = 9
A490
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
410
244
248
252
255
266
296
219
227
234
241
263
296
13⁄4
410
254
257
261
265
276
305
219
227
234
241
263
305
11⁄
2
410
231
235
238
242
253
282
204
211
219
226
248
282
13⁄4
410
240
244
248
251
262
292
204
211
219
226
248
292
11⁄2
410
244
248
252
255
266
296
219
227
234
241
263
296
13⁄
410
254
257
261
265
276
305
219
227
234
241
263
305
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
819
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 62
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
3 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W18, 16, 14, 12, 10* S18, 15, 12 C15, 12 MC18, 13, 12
Varies
1⁄ 4
N
—
71.8
X
—
SC
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
89.7
108
130
71.8
89.7
108
144
STD
71.8
87.3
87.3
87.3
OVS
66.7
74.2
74.2
74.2
SSLT
71.8
74.2
74.2
74.2
STD
71.8
89.7
108
130
OVS
66.7
83.4
100
112
SSLT
71.8
89.7
108
112
N
—
71.8
89.7
108
144
X
—
71.8
89.7
108
144
SC Class A
STD
71.8
89.7
108
110
OVS
66.7
83.4
93.2
93.2
SSLT
71.8
89.7
93.2
93.2
STD
71.8
89.7
108
144
OVS
66.7
83.4
100
133
SSLT
71.8
89.7
108
141
A325
*Limited to W10×12, 15, 17, 19, 22, 26, 30
Class A
t
SC Class B
3 3 1
2 /4 L eh Lev
A490
Lev
3 3
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
5⁄ 16
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
274
158
161
164
168
177
203
144
150
157
163
177
203
13⁄4
274
164
168
171
174
184
210
144
150
157
163
183
210
11⁄2
274
149
153
156
159
169
195
133
140
146
153
169
195
13⁄4
274
156
159
163
166
176
202
133
140
146
153
173
202
11⁄2
274
158
161
164
168
177
203
144
150
157
163
177
203
13⁄4
274
164
168
171
174
184
210
144
150
157
163
183
210
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
548
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 63
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
3 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W18, 16, 14, 12, 10* S18, 15, 12 C15, 12 MC18, 13, 12
A325
*Limited to W10×12, 15, 17, 19, 22, 26, 30
Varies
1⁄ 4
N
—
80.4
X
—
80.4
SC
STD
80.4
87.3
87.3
87.3
OVS
74.2
74.2
74.2
74.2
SSLT
74.2
74.2
74.2
74.2
STD
80.4
OVS
74.7
SSLT
80.4
N
—
X SC
Class A
t
SC Class B
3 3 1
2 /4 L eh Lev
A490
Lev
3 3
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Class A
SC Class B
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
101
121
130
101
121
161
101
121
130
112
112
101
112
112
80.4
101
121
161
—
80.4
101
121
161
STD
80.4
101
110
110
OVS
74.7
93.2
93.2
93.2
SSLT
80.4
93.2
93.2
93.2
STD
80.4
OVS
74.7
SSLT
80.4
93.4
101 93.4 101
121
161
112
141
121
141
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
307
186
189
193
197
208
237
161
168
176
183
205
237
13⁄4
307
195
199
203
206
217
246
161
168
176
183
205
246
11⁄
2
307
176
180
184
187
198
227
149
157
164
171
193
227
13⁄4
307
186
189
193
197
208
237
149
157
164
171
193
237
11⁄2
307
186
189
193
197
208
237
161
168
176
183
205
237
13⁄
307
195
199
203
206
217
246
161
168
176
183
205
246
4
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
614
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 64
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
2 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W12, 10, 8 S12, 10, 8 C12, 10, 9, 8 MC13, 12, 10, 9, 8
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
45.7
57.1
68.5
86.6
X
—
45.7
57.1
68.5
91.4
SC
STD
45.7
57.1
58.2
58.2
OVS
42.3
49.4
49.4
49.4
SSLT
45.7
49.4
49.4
49.4
STD
45.7
57.1
68.5
86.6
OVS
42.3
52.9
63.4
74.9
SSLT
45.7
57.1
68.5
74.9
N
—
45.7
57.1
68.5
91.4
X
—
45.7
57.1
68.5
91.4
SC Class A
STD
45.7
57.1
68.5
73.1
OVS
42.3
52.9
62.1
62.1
SSLT
45.7
57.1
62.1
62.1
STD
45.7
57.1
68.5
91.4
OVS
42.3
52.9
63.4
84.6
SSLT
45.7
57.1
68.5
91.4
A325
Class A Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
t
3
SC Class B
2 1/ 4
Lev
L eh
3
Lev
A490
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
183
106
109
112
115
125
151
91.4 97.9 104
111
125
151
13⁄4
183
112
116
119
122
132
158
91.4 97.9 104
111
131
158
11⁄2
183
100
104
107
110
120
146
84.6 91.1
97.6 104
120
146
13⁄4
183
107
110
114
117
127
153
84.6 91.1
97.6 104
124
153
11⁄2
183
106
109
112
115
125
151
91.4 97.9 104
111
125
151
13⁄4
183
112
116
119
122
132
158
91.4 97.9 104
111
131
158
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
365
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 65
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 7⁄ -in. 8
Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
2 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W12, 10, 8 S12, 10, 8 C12, 10, 9, 8 MC13, 12, 10, 9, 8
A325
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
N
—
51.2
64.0
76.8
X
—
51.2
64.0
76.8
SC
STD
51.2
58.2
58.2
58.2
OVS
47.4
49.4
49.4
49.4
SSLT
49.4
49.4
49.4
49.4
STD
51.2
64.0
76.8
86.6
OVS
47.4
59.2
71.1
74.9
SSLT
51.2
64.0
74.9
74.9
N
—
51.2
64.0
76.8
102
X
—
51.2
64.0
76.8
102
SC
STD
51.2
64.0
73.1
73.1
OVS
47.4
59.2
62.1
62.1
SSLT
51.2
62.1
62.1
62.1
STD
51.2
64.0
76.8
OVS
47.4
59.2
71.1
94.1
SSLT
51.2
64.0
76.8
94.1
Class A Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
1⁄ 2
86.6 102
t
3
SC
2 1/ 4
Class B
Lev
L eh
3
Lev
A490
Class A
SC Class B
102
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
11⁄
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
2
205
127
131
135
138
149
179 102
110
117
124
146
179
13⁄4
205
137
140
144
148
159
188 102
110
117
124
146
188
11⁄
173
2
205
122
125
129
133
144
173
94.8 102
109
117
139
13⁄4
205
131
135
138
142
153
182
94.8 102
109
117
139
182
11⁄2
205
127
131
135
138
149
179 102
110
117
124
146
179
13⁄4
205
137
140
144
148
159
188 102
110
117
124
146
188
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
410
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 66
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
12 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
286
358
429
573
X
—
286
358
429
573
SC
STD
286
358
429
456
OVS
258
323
387
388
SSLT
286
358
388
388
STD
286
358
429
573
OVS
258
323
387
516
SSLT
286
358
429
573
N
—
286
358
429
573
X
—
286
358
429
573
SC Class A
STD
286
358
429
573
OVS
258
323
387
487
SSLT
286
358
429
487
STD
286
358
429
573
OVS
258
323
387
516
SSLT
286
358
429
573
A325 Varies
t
11@3 = 33
Class A
SC Class B 2 1/ 2
L eh
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
11@3 = 33
Lev
A490
Lev
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
Hole Type
Leh, Unin. coped 11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
STD
11⁄2
1253
589
592
595
598
608
634
573
579
586
592
608
634
13⁄4
1253
595
599
602
605
615
641
573
579
586
592
612
641
11⁄2
1253
534
538
541
544
554
580
516
523
529
536
554
580
13⁄4
1253
541
544
548
551
561
587
516
523
529
536
555
587
11⁄2
1253
589
592
595
598
608
634
573
579
586
592
608
634
13⁄4
1253
595
599
602
605
615
641
573
579
586
592
612
641
OVS SSLT
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2506
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 67
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
12 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
321
401
481
642
X
—
321
401
481
642
SC
STD
321
401
456
456
OVS
289
362
388
388
SSLT
321
388
388
388
STD
321
401
481
642
OVS
289
362
434
579
SSLT
321
401
481
588
N
—
321
401
481
642
X
—
321
401
481
642
SC
STD
321
401
481
573
OVS
289
362
434
487
SSLT
321
401
481
487
STD
321
401
481
642
OVS
289
362
434
579
SSLT
321
401
481
642
11@3 = 33
Class A
SC Class B 2 1/ 2
L eh Lev
A490
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
11@3 = 33
Class A
SC Lev
Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
1404
669
672
676
680
691
720
642
649
656
664
686
720
13⁄4
1404
678
682
685
689
700
729
642
649
656
664
686
729
11⁄2
1404
608
612
615
619
630
659
579
586
593
601
622
659
13⁄4
1404
617
621
625
628
639
669
579
586
593
601
622
669
11⁄2
1404
669
672
676
680
691
720
642
649
656
664
686
720
13⁄4
1404
678
682
685
689
700
729
642
649
656
664
686
729
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2808
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 68
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
11 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
262
327
393
524
X
—
262
327
393
524
SC
STD
262
327
393
418
OVS
236
295
354
356
SSLT
262
327
356
356
STD
262
327
393
524
OVS
236
295
354
472
SSLT
262
327
393
524
N
—
262
327
393
524
X
—
262
327
393
524
SC Class A
STD
262
327
393
524
OVS
236
295
354
446
SSLT
262
327
393
446
STD
262
327
393
524
OVS
236
295
354
472
SSLT
262
327
393
524
A325 Varies
t
Class A 10@3 = 30
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B 2 1/ 2
L eh
10@3 = 30
Lev
A490
Lev
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
1148
540
543
546
549
559
585
524
530
537
543
559
585
13⁄4
1148
546
550
553
556
566
592
524
530
537
543
563
592
11⁄2
1148
490
494
497
500
510
536
472
479
485
492
510
536
13⁄4
1148
497
500
504
507
517
543
472
479
485
492
511
543
11⁄2
1148
540
543
546
549
559
585
524
530
537
543
559
585
13⁄4
1148
546
550
553
556
566
592
524
530
537
543
563
592
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2297
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 69
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
11 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
294
367
440
587
X
—
294
367
440
587
SC
STD
294
367
418
418
OVS
265
331
356
356
SSLT
294
356
356
356
STD
294
367
440
587
OVS
265
331
397
529
SSLT
294
367
440
539
N
—
294
367
440
587
X
—
294
367
440
587
SC
STD
294
367
440
525
OVS
265
331
397
446
SSLT
294
367
440
446
STD
294
367
440
587
OVS
265
331
397
529
SSLT
294
367
440
587
Class A 10@3 = 30
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B 2 1/ 2
L eh
10@3 = 30
Lev
A490
Class A
Lev
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
1287
614
618
621
625
636
665
587
594
602
609
631
665
13⁄4
1287
623
627
631
634
645
674
587
594
602
609
631
674
11⁄2
1287
559
562
566
570
581
610
529
536
544
551
573
610
13⁄4
1287
568
572
575
579
590
619
529
536
544
551
573
619
11⁄2
1287
614
618
621
625
636
665
587
594
602
609
631
665
13⁄4
1287
623
627
631
634
645
674
587
594
602
609
631
674
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2574
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 70
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
10 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
238
297
356
475
X
—
238
297
356
475
SC
STD
238
297
356
380
OVS
214
268
321
323
SSLT
238
297
323
323
STD
238
297
356
475
OVS
214
268
321
428
SSLT
238
297
356
475
N
—
238
297
356
475
X
—
238
297
356
475
SC Class A
STD
238
297
356
475
OVS
214
268
321
406
SSLT
238
297
356
406
STD
238
297
356
475
OVS
214
268
321
428
SSLT
238
297
356
475
A325 Varies
t
9@3 = 27
Class A
SC Class B 2 1/ 2
Lev
L eh
9@3 = 27
A490
Lev
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
1044
491
494
497
501
510
537
475
482
488
495
510
537
13⁄4
1044
498
501
504
507
517
543
475
482
488
495
514
543
11⁄2
1044
446
450
453
456
466
492
428
435
441
448
466
492
13⁄4
1044
453
456
460
463
473
499
428
435
441
448
467
499
11⁄2
1044
491
494
497
501
510
537
475
482
488
495
510
537
13⁄4
1044
498
501
504
507
517
543
475
482
488
495
514
543
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2088
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 71
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
10 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
266
333
399
532
X
—
266
333
399
532
SC
STD
266
333
380
380
OVS
240
300
323
323
SSLT
266
323
323
323
STD
266
333
399
532
OVS
240
300
360
480
SSLT
266
333
399
490
N
—
266
333
399
532
X
—
266
333
399
532
SC
STD
266
333
399
477
OVS
240
300
360
406
SSLT
266
333
399
406
STD
266
333
399
532
OVS
240
300
360
480
SSLT
266
333
399
532
Class A 9@3 = 27
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B 2 1/ 2
Lev
L eh
9@3 = 27
A490
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
1170
559
563
567
570
581
610
532
540
547
554
576
610
13⁄4
1170
569
572
576
580
591
620
532
540
547
554
576
620
11⁄2
1170
509
513
516
520
531
560
480
487
494
502
524
560
13⁄4
1170
519
522
526
530
540
570
480
487
494
502
524
570
11⁄2
1170
559
563
567
570
581
610
532
540
547
554
576
610
13⁄4
1170
569
572
576
580
591
620
532
540
547
554
576
620
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2340
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 72
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
9 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
213
266
320
426
X
—
213
266
320
426
SC
STD
213
266
320
342
OVS
192
240
288
291
SSLT
213
266
291
291
STD
213
266
320
426
OVS
192
240
288
384
SSLT
213
266
320
426
N
—
213
266
320
426
X
—
213
266
320
426
SC Class A
STD
213
266
320
426
OVS
192
240
288
365
SSLT
213
266
320
365
STD
213
266
320
426
OVS
192
240
288
384
SSLT
213
266
320
426
A325 Varies
t
8@3 = 24
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 2
Lev
L eh
A490
Lev
8@3 = 24
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SS:T
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
940
442
445
449
452
462
488
426
433
439
446
462
488
13⁄4
940
449
452
455
459
468
495
426
433
439
446
465
495
11⁄2
940
402
405
409
412
422
448
384
390
397
404
422
448
13⁄4
940
409
412
415
419
428
455
384
390
397
404
423
455
11⁄2
940
442
445
449
452
462
488
426
433
439
446
462
488
13⁄4
940
449
452
455
459
468
495
426
433
439
446
465
495
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1879
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 73
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
9 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33
A325 Varies
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
239
299
358
478
X
—
239
299
358
478
SC
STD
239
299
342
342
OVS
215
269
291
291
SSLT
239
291
291
291
STD
239
299
358
478
OVS
215
269
323
430
SSLT
239
299
358
441
N
—
239
299
358
478
X
—
239
299
358
478
SC
STD
239
299
358
430
OVS
215
269
323
365
SSLT
239
299
358
365
STD
239
299
358
478
OVS
215
269
323
430
SSLT
239
299
358
478
8@3 = 24
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 2
Lev
L eh
8@3 = 24
A490
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
1053
504
508
512
515
526
556
478
485
492
500
522
556
13⁄4
1053
514
518
521
525
536
565
478
485
492
500
522
565
11⁄2
1053
460
463
467
471
482
511
430
438
445
452
474
511
13⁄4
1053
469
473
476
480
491
520
430
438
445
452
474
520
11⁄2
1053
504
508
512
515
526
556
478
485
492
500
522
556
13⁄4
1053
514
518
521
525
536
565
478
485
492
500
522
565
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
2106
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 74
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
8 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33, 30
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
189
236
283
377
X
—
189
236
283
377
SC
STD
189
236
283
304
OVS
170
212
255
259
SSLT
189
236
259
259
STD
189
236
283
377
OVS
170
212
255
340
SSLT
189
236
283
377
N
—
189
236
283
377
X
—
189
236
283
377
SC Class A
STD
189
236
283
377
OVS
170
212
255
325
SSLT
189
236
283
325
STD
189
236
283
377
OVS
170
212
255
340
SSLT
189
236
283
377
A325 Varies
t
7@3 = 21
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 2 Lev
L eh
7@3 = 21
A490
Lev
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
835
393
397
400
403
413
439
377
384
390
397
413
439
13⁄4
835
400
403
407
410
420
446
377
384
390
397
417
446
11⁄2
835
358
361
365
368
378
404
340
346
353
359
378
404
13⁄4
835
365
368
371
375
384
410
340
346
353
359
379
410
11⁄2
835
393
397
400
403
413
439
377
384
390
397
413
439
13⁄4
835
400
403
407
410
420
446
377
384
390
397
417
446
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1670
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 75
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
8 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W44, 40, 36, 33, 30
A325 Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
211
264
317
423
X
—
211
264
317
423
SC
STD
211
264
304
304
OVS
190
238
259
259
SSLT
211
259
259
259
STD
211
264
317
423
OVS
190
238
286
381
SSLT
211
264
317
392
N
—
211
264
317
423
X
—
211
264
317
423
SC
STD
211
264
317
382
OVS
190
238
286
325
SSLT
211
264
317
325
STD
211
264
317
423
OVS
190
238
286
381
SSLT
211
264
317
423
t
7@3 = 21
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 2 Lev
L eh
7@3 = 21
A490
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
936
450
453
457
461
472
501
423
430
438
445
467
501
13⁄4
936
459
463
466
470
481
510
423
430
438
445
467
510
11⁄2
936
410
414
418
421
432
461
381
388
395
403
425
461
13⁄4
936
420
423
427
431
442
471
381
388
395
403
425
471
11⁄2
936
450
453
457
461
472
501
423
430
438
445
467
501
13⁄4
936
459
463
466
470
481
510
423
430
438
445
467
510
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1872
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 76
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
7 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
164
205
246
329
X
—
164
205
246
329
SC
STD
164
205
246
266
OVS
148
185
222
226
SSLT
164
205
226
226
STD
164
205
246
329
OVS
148
185
222
296
SSLT
164
205
246
329
N
—
164
205
246
329
X
—
164
205
246
329
SC Class A
STD
164
205
246
329
OVS
148
185
222
284
SSLT
164
205
246
284
STD
164
205
246
329
OVS
148
185
222
296
SSLT
164
205
246
329
A325
t
6@3 = 18
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 2
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Lev
L eh
Lev
6@3 = 18
A490
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
731
344
348
351
354
364
390
329
335
342
348
364
390
13⁄4
731
351
354
358
361
371
397
329
335
342
348
368
397
11⁄2
731
314
317
320
324
334
360
296
302
309
315
334
360
13⁄4
731
321
324
327
330
340
366
296
302
309
315
335
366
11⁄2
731
344
348
351
354
364
390
329
335
342
348
364
390
13⁄4
731
351
354
358
361
371
397
329
335
342
348
368
397
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1462
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 77
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
7 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond. A325
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
184
230
276
368
X
—
184
230
276
368
SC
STD
184
230
266
266
OVS
166
207
226
226
SSLT
184
226
226
226
STD
184
230
276
368
OVS
166
207
249
331
SSLT
184
230
276
343
N
—
184
230
276
368
X
—
184
230
276
368
SC
STD
184
230
276
334
OVS
166
207
249
284
SSLT
184
230
276
284
STD
184
230
276
368
OVS
166
207
249
331
SSLT
184
230
276
368
6@3 = 18
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 2
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Lev
L eh
6@3 = 18
A490
Lev
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
819
395
399
402
406
417
446
368
376
383
390
412
446
13⁄4
819
404
408
412
415
426
456
368
376
383
390
412
456
11⁄2
819
361
365
368
372
383
412
331
339
346
353
375
412
13⁄4
819
370
374
378
381
392
421
331
339
346
353
375
421
11⁄2
819
395
399
402
406
417
446
368
376
383
390
412
446
13⁄4
819
404
408
412
415
426
456
368
376
383
390
412
456
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1638
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 78
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
6 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24, 21 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
140
175
210
280
X
—
140
175
210
280
SC
STD
140
175
210
228
OVS
126
157
189
194
SSLT
140
175
194
194
STD
140
175
210
280
OVS
126
157
189
252
SSLT
140
175
210
280
N
—
140
175
210
280
X
—
140
175
210
280
SC Class A
STD
140
175
210
280
OVS
126
157
189
243
SSLT
140
175
210
243
STD
140
175
210
280
OVS
126
157
189
252
SSLT
140
175
210
280
A325
t
5@3 = 15
Class A
SC Class B
2 1/ 2
5@3 = 15
Lev
L eh
A490
Lev
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
626
296
299
302
305
315
341
280
286
293
299
315
341
13⁄4
626
302
306
309
312
322
348
280
286
293
299
319
348
11⁄2
626
270
273
276
280
289
315
252
258
265
271
289
315
13⁄4
626
277
280
283
286
296
322
252
258
265
271
291
322
11⁄2
626
296
299
302
305
315
341
280
286
293
299
315
341
13⁄4
626
302
306
309
312
322
348
280
286
293
299
319
348
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1253
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 79
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
6 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30,27, 24, 21 S24
Varies
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond. A325
t
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
157
196
235
314
X
—
157
196
235
314
SC
STD
157
196
228
228
OVS
141
176
194
194
SSLT
157
194
194
194
STD
157
196
235
314
OVS
141
176
211
282
SSLT
157
196
235
294
N
—
157
196
235
314
X
—
157
196
235
314
SC
STD
157
196
235
286
OVS
141
176
211
243
SSLT
157
196
235
243
STD
157
196
235
314
OVS
141
176
211
282
SSLT
157
196
235
314
5@3 = 15
Class A
SC 2 1/ 2
Class B
5@3 = 15
Lev
L eh
Lev
A490
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
702
340
344
348
351
362
392
314
321
328
335
357
392
13⁄4
702
350
353
357
361
372
401
314
321
328
335
357
401
11⁄2
702
311
315
319
322
333
363
282
289
297
304
326
363
13⁄4
702
321
324
328
332
343
372
282
289
297
304
326
372
11⁄2
702
340
344
348
351
362
392
314
321
328
335
357
392
13⁄4
702
350
353
357
361
372
401
314
321
328
335
357
401
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1404
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 80
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
5 rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W30, 27, 24, 21, 18 S24, 20, 18 MC18
Varies
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
115
144
173
231
X
—
115
144
173
231
SC
STD
115
144
173
190
OVS
104
130
156
162
SSLT
115
144
162
162
STD
115
144
173
231
OVS
104
130
156
207
SSLT
115
144
173
231
N
—
115
144
173
231
X
—
115
144
173
231
SC Class A
STD
115
144
173
231
OVS
104
130
156
203
SSLT
115
144
173
203
STD
115
144
173
231
OVS
104
130
156
207
SSLT
115
144
173
231
A325
Class A
4@3 = 12
t
SC Class B
2 1/ 2
Lev
L eh
4@3 = 12
A490
Lev
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
522
247
250
253
257
266
293
231
238
244
251
266
293
13⁄4
522
254
257
260
263
273
299
231
238
244
251
270
299
11⁄2
522
226
229
232
236
245
271
207
214
221
227
245
271
13⁄4
522
232
236
239
242
252
278
207
214
221
227
247
278
11⁄2
522
247
250
253
257
266
293
231
238
244
251
266
293
13⁄4
522
254
257
260
263
273
299
231
238
244
251
270
299
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1044
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 81
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
5 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W30, 27, 24, 21, 18 S24, 20, 18 MC18
Varies
A325
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
129
162
194
259
X
—
129
162
194
259
SC
STD
129
162
190
190
OVS
116
145
162
162
SSLT
129
162
162
162
STD
129
162
194
259
OVS
116
145
174
233
SSLT
129
162
194
245
N
—
129
162
194
259
X
—
129
162
194
259
SC
STD
129
162
194
239
OVS
116
145
174
203
SSLT
129
162
194
203
STD
129
162
194
259
OVS
116
145
174
233
SSLT
129
162
194
259
Class A
4@3 = 12
t
SC Class B
2 1/ 2
Lev
L eh
Lev
4@3 = 12
A490
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
585
286
289
293
297
308
337
259
266
273
281
303
337
13⁄4
585
295
299
302
306
317
346
259
266
273
281
303
346
11⁄2
585
262
266
269
273
284
313
233
240
247
254
276
313
13⁄4
585
271
275
279
282
293
323
233
240
247
254
276
323
11⁄2
585
286
289
293
297
308
337
259
266
273
281
303
337
13⁄4
585
295
299
302
306
317
346
259
266
273
281
303
346
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
1170
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 82
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
4 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W24, 21, 18, 16 S24, 20, 18, 15 C15 MC18
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
91.1
114
137
182
X
—
91.1
114
137
182
SC
STD
91.1
114
137
152
OVS
81.7
102
123
129
SSLT
91.1
114
129
129
STD
91.1
114
137
182
OVS
81.7
102
123
163
SSLT
91.1
114
137
182
N
—
91.1
114
137
182
X
—
91.1
114
137
182
SC Class A
STD
91.1
114
137
182
OVS
81.7
102
123
162
SSLT
91.1
114
137
162
STD
91.1
114
137
182
OVS
81.7
102
123
163
SSLT
91.1
114
137
182
A325
Class A Varies
3@3 = 9
t
SC Class B
2 1/ 2
Lev
L eh
3@3 = 9
A490
Lev
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
418
198
201
205
208
218
244
182
189
195
202
218
244
13⁄4
418
205
208
211
215
224
250
182
189
195
202
221
250
11⁄2
418
182
185
188
191
201
227
163
170
176
183
201
227
13⁄4
418
188
192
195
198
208
234
163
170
176
183
203
234
11⁄2
418
198
201
205
208
218
244
182
189
195
202
218
244
13⁄4
418
205
208
211
215
224
250
182
189
195
202
221
250
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
835
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 83
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
4 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W24, 21, 18, 16 S24, 20, 18, 15 C15 MC18
A325
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
102
128
153
204
X
—
102
128
153
204
SC
STD
102
128
152
152
114
129
129
Class A Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
OVS
91.6
3@3 = 9
t
SC Class B
2 1/ 2 L eh
102
128
129
129
STD
102
128
153
204
114
137
183
OVS
91.6
SSLT
102
128
153
196
N
—
102
128
153
204
X
—
102
128
153
204
SC
STD
102
128
153
191
114
137
162
Lev Lev
3@3 = 9
A490
SSLT
Class A
SC Class B
OVS
91.6
SSLT
102
128
153
162
STD
102
128
153
204
114
137
183
128
153
204
OVS SSLT
91.6 102
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
468
231
235
238
242
253
282
204
211
219
226
248
282
13⁄4
468
240
244
248
251
262
292
204
211
219
226
248
292
11⁄2
468
213
216
220
224
235
264
183
190
198
205
227
264
13⁄4
468
222
226
229
233
244
273
183
190
198
205
227
273
11⁄2
468
231
235
238
242
253
282
204
211
219
226
248
282
13⁄4
468
240
244
248
251
262
292
204
211
219
226
248
292
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
936
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 84
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
3 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W18, 16, 14, 12, 10* S18, 15, 12 C15, 12 MC18, 13, 12
A325
*Limited to W10×12, 15, 17, 19, 22, 26, 30
Varies
Lev Lev
1⁄ 2
83.4
100
133
X
—
66.7
83.4
100
133
SC
STD
66.7
83.4
100
114
OVS
59.6
74.5
89.5
97.0
SSLT
66.7
83.4
97.0
97.0
STD
66.7
83.4
OVS
59.6
74.5
SSLT
66.7
83.4
100
133
N
—
66.7
83.4
100
133
X
—
66.7
83.4
100
133
SC Class A
STD
66.7
83.4
100
133
OVS
59.6
74.5
SSLT
66.7
83.4
100
122
STD
66.7
83.4
100
133
OVS
59.6
74.5
SSLT
66.7
83.4
A490
3 3
3⁄ 8
66.7
2 1/ 2 L eh
5⁄ 16
—
SC Class B
3 3
1⁄ 4
N
Class A
t
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
SC Class B
100
133
89.5
119
89.5
119
89.5
119
100
133
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
313
149
153
156
159
169
195
133
140
146
153
169
195
13⁄4
313
156
159
163
166
176
202
133
140
146
153
173
202
11⁄2
313
137
141
144
147
157
183
119
126
132
139
157
183
13⁄4
313
144
148
151
154
164
190
119
126
132
139
158
190
11⁄2
313
149
153
156
159
169
195
133
140
146
153
169
195
13⁄4
313
156
159
163
166
176
202
133
140
146
153
173
202
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
626
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 85
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
3 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W18, 16, 14, 12, 10* S18, 15, 12 C15, 12 C18, 13, 12
A325
*Limited to W10×12, 15, 17, 19, 22, 26, 30
Varies
Lev Lev
3 3
1⁄ 2
93.4
112
149
X
—
74.7
93.4
112
149
SC
STD
74.7
93.4
112
114
OVS
66.8
83.5
97.0
97.0
SSLT
74.7
93.4
97.0
97.0
STD
74.7
93.4
112
149
OVS
66.8
83.5
100
134
SSLT
74.7
93.4
112
147
N
—
74.7
93.4
112
149
X
—
74.7
93.4
112
149
SC
STD
74.7
93.4
112
143
OVS
66.8
83.5
100
122
SSLT
74.7
93.4
112
122
STD
74.7
93.4
112
149
OVS
66.8
83.5
100
134
SSLT
74.7
93.4
112
149
2 1/ 2
A490
3⁄ 8
74.7
SC
L eh
5⁄ 16
—
Class B
3 3
1⁄ 4
N
Class A
t
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
351
176
180
184
187
198
227
149
157
164
171
193
227
13⁄4
351
186
189
193
197
208
237
149
157
164
171
193
237
11⁄2
351
163
167
170
174
185
214
134
141
148
156
178
214
13⁄4
351
173
176
180
183
194
224
134
141
148
156
178
224
11⁄2
351
176
180
184
187
198
227
149
157
164
171
193
227
13⁄4
351
186
189
193
197
208
237
149
157
164
171
193
237
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
702
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 86
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Fy = 36 ksi Fu = 58 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections
1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
2 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W12, 10, 8 S12, 10, 8 C12, 10, 9, 8 MC13, 12, 10, 9, 8
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
42.3
52.9
63.4
84.6
X
—
42.3
52.9
63.4
84.6
SC
STD
42.3
52.9
63.4
76.1
OVS
37.6
47.0
56.4
64.7
SSLT
42.3
52.9
63.4
64.7
STD
42.3
52.9
63.4
84.6
OVS
37.6
47.0
56.4
75.2
SSLT
42.3
52.9
63.4
84.6
N
—
42.3
52.9
63.4
84.6
X
—
42.3
52.9
63.4
84.6
SC Class A
STD
42.3
52.9
63.4
84.6
OVS
37.6
47.0
56.4
75.2
SSLT
42.3
52.9
63.4
81.1
STD
42.3
52.9
63.4
84.6
OVS
37.6
47.0
56.4
75.2
SSLT
42.3
52.9
63.4
84.6
A325
Class A Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
t
3
SC Class B
2 1/ 2
Lev
L eh
3
Lev
A490
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Type STD OVS SSLT
Leh,* Unin. coped
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in. 11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
Lev, in. 2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
209
100
104
107
110 120 146 84.6 91.1 97.6 104
120 146
13⁄4
209
107
110
114
117 127 153 84.6 91.1 97.6 104
124 153
11⁄2
209
13⁄4
209
100
103
107
110 120 146 75.2 81.7 88.2
11⁄2
209
100
104
107
110 120 146 84.6 91.1 97.6 104
120 146
13⁄4
209
107
110
114
117 127 153 84.6 91.1 97.6 104
124 153
93.4
96.7
99.9 103 113 139 75.2 81.7 88.2
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
418
94.7 113 139 94.7 114 146
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 87
Fy = 50 ksi Fu = 65 ksi
Table 9-2 (cont.). All-Bolted Double-Angle Connections 1-in. Bolts
Bolt and Angle Design Strength, kips
2 Rows
ASTM Thread Desig. Cond.
W12, 10, 8 S12, 10, 8 C12, 10, 9, 8 MC13, 12, 10, 9, 8
A325
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
1⁄ 2
N
—
47.4
59.2
71.1
94.8
X
—
47.4
59.2
71.1
94.8
SC
STD
47.4
59.2
71.1
76.1
OVS
42.1
52.7
63.2
64.7
SSLT
47.4
59.2
64.7
64.7
STD
47.4
59.2
71.1
94.8
OVS
42.1
52.7
63.2
84.2
SSLT
47.4
59.2
71.1
94.8
N
—
47.4
59.2
71.1
94.8
X
—
47.4
59.2
71.1
94.8
SC
STD
47.4
59.2
71.1
94.8
OVS
42.1
52.7
63.2
81.1
SSLT
47.4
59.2
71.1
81.1
STD
47.4
59.2
71.1
94.8
OVS
42.1
52.7
63.2
84.2
SSLT
47.4
59.2
71.1
94.8
Class A Varies
Angle Thickness, in.
Hole Type
t
3
SC
2 1/ 2
Class B
Lev
L eh
3
Lev
A490
Class A
SC Class B
Beam Web Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in. Coped at Top Flange Only Hole Leh,* UnType in. coped 11⁄4 STD OVS SSLT
Coped at Both Flanges
Lev, in.
Lev, in.
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄4
13⁄8
11⁄2
15⁄8
2
3
11⁄2
234
122
125
129
133
144
173
94.8
102 109
117
139
173
13⁄4
234
131
135
138
142
153
182
94.8
102 109
117
139
182
11⁄2
234
114
117
121
125
136
165
84.2 91.6
98.9 106
128
165
13⁄4
234
123
127
130
134
145
174
84.2 91.6
98.9 106
128
174
11⁄2
234
122
125
129
133
144
173
94.8
102 109
117
139
173
13⁄4
234
131
135
138
142
153
182
94.8
102 109
117
139
182
Notes: Support Design STD = Standard holes Strength per Inch OVS = Oversized holes Thickness, kips/in. SSLT = Short-slotted holes transverse to direction of load
468
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
*Tabulated values include 1⁄4-in. reduction in end distance Leh to account for possible underrun in beam length.
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 88
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Length of return 2 x weld size
½
Welds B
L
L
3 spa.
3 spa.
Web thickness
k (min.)
Table 9-3. Combination Bolted/Welded Double-Angle Connections
3½
3½
k (min.)
Varies 2¼
Welds A
Welds A (70 ksi) Weld Size, in.
n
L
12
351 ⁄2
5⁄
16
1⁄ 3⁄
11
321 ⁄2
10
291 ⁄2
9
261 ⁄2
16
5⁄
16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 5⁄
16 1⁄ 4
3⁄
16
5⁄
16
1⁄ 3⁄
8
7
231 ⁄
2
201 ⁄2
6
2
16
16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 5⁄ 16
16
5⁄
16
3⁄
141 ⁄2
4
111 ⁄2
3
81 ⁄2
16
16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄
16
5⁄
16
3⁄
51 ⁄2
4
5⁄
1⁄
2
4
3⁄
1⁄
5
4
5⁄
1⁄
171 ⁄
4
5⁄
4
16
16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 16
Welds B (70 ksi)
Min. Web Thickness, in.
φRn, kips
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
593 475 356 548 439 329 506 405 304 464 371 278 423 338 254 379 304 228 334 267 200 287 230 172 237 190 142 184 147 110 125 100 75.2
0.72 0.57 0.43 0.72 0.57 0.43 0.72 0.57 0.43 0.72 0.57 0.43 0.72 0.57 0.43 0.72 0.57 0.43 0.72 0.57 0.43 0.72 0.57 0.43 0.72 0.57 0.43 0.72 0.57 0.43 0.72 0.57 0.43
0.52 0.41 0.31 0.52 0.41 0.31 0.52 0.41 0.31 0.52 0.41 0.31 0.52 0.41 0.31 0.52 0.41 0.31 0.52 0.41 0.31 0.52 0.41 0.31 0.52 0.41 0.31 0.52 0.41 0.31 0.52 0.41 0.31
Weld Size, in. 3⁄
8
5⁄
16 1⁄ 4 3⁄
8
5⁄
16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄
4
3⁄
8
5⁄
16
1⁄
4
3⁄
8
5⁄
16 1⁄ 4 3⁄
5⁄
8
16
1⁄
4
3⁄
8
5⁄
16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄ 4 3⁄ 8 5⁄ 16 1⁄
4
3⁄
8
5⁄
16 1⁄ 4 3⁄
5⁄
8
16 1⁄ 4
φRn, kips 550 458 366 496 414 331 443 369 295 389 324 259 335 279 223 280 234 187 226 188 150 172 143 115 120 100 79.9 72.2 60.1 48.1 32.8 27.3 21.9
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
Min. Support Thickness, in.
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi 0.43 0.36 0.29 0.43 0.36 0.29 0.43 0.36 0.29 0.43 0.36 0.29 0.43 0.36 0.29 0.43 0.36 0.29 0.43 0.36 0.29 0.43 0.36 0.29 0.43 0.36 0.29 0.43 0.36 0.29 0.43 0.36 0.29
0.31 0.26 0.21 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.31 0.26 0.21
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 89
Length of return 2 x weld size
k (min.)
Table 9-4. All-Welded Double-Angle Connections
½
L
Weld B
3
k (min.)
Web thickness 4 in. for L > 18 in. (typ.) 3 in. for L < 18 in. (typ.)
Weld A
Welds A (70 ksi)
L 36
Weld Size, in. 5⁄
0.52
3⁄
4
483
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
362
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
574
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
459
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
345
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
546
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
437
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
328
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
516
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
413
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
310
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
487
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
390
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
292
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
459
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
367
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
275
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
432
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
346
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
259
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
404
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
323
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
242
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
376
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
301
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
226
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
348
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
278
0.57
0.41
5⁄
16
209
0.43
0.31
1⁄
1⁄
30
1⁄
28
1⁄
26
1⁄
24
1⁄
22
1⁄
20
1⁄
18
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
Weld Size, in.
0.72
1⁄
32
Min. Web Thickness, in.
603
16
1⁄
34
φRn, kips
Welds B (70 ksi)
1⁄ 3⁄
φRn, kips
Min. Web Thickness, in.
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
8
558
0.43
0.31
16
465
0.36
0.26
4
372
0.29
0.21
8
523
0.43
0.31
16
436
0.36
0.26
4
349
0.29
0.21
8
487
0.43
0.31
16
406
0.36
0.26
4
325
0.29
0.21
8
452
0.43
0.31
16
376
0.36
0.26
4
301
0.29
0.21
8
416
0.43
0.31
16
347
0.36
0.26
4
277
0.29
0.21
8
380
0.43
0.31
16
317
0.36
0.26
4
253
0.29
0.21
8
344
0.43
0.31
16
286
0.36
0.26
4
229
0.29
0.21
8
307
0.43
0.31
16
256
0.36
0.26
4
205
0.29
0.21
8
271
0.43
0.31
16
226
0.36
0.26
4
181
0.29
0.21
8
235
0.43
0.31
16
196
0.36
0.26
157
0.29
0.21
4
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 90
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Length of return 2 x weld size
k (min.)
Table 9-4 (cont.). All-Welded Double-Angle Connections
½
L
Weld B
3
k (min.)
Web thickness 4 in. for L > 18 in. (typ.) 3 in. for L < 18 in. (typ.)
Weld A
Welds A (70 ksi)
L 16
Weld Size, in. 5⁄
0.52
3⁄
4
255
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
191
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
546
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
437
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
328
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
516
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
413
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
310
0.43
0.31
1⁄
4
5⁄
16
8
1⁄
10
8
7
6
0.26
4
148
0.29
0.21
8
185
0.43
0.31
16
154
0.36
0.26
4
123
0.29
0.21
8
149
0.43
0.31
16
124
0.36
0.26
0.29
0.21
0.52
3⁄
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
292
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
459
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
367
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
275
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
432
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
346
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
259
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
404
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
323
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
242
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
376
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
301
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
226
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
348
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
278
0.57
0.41
5⁄
3⁄
16
209
0.43
0.31
1⁄
5⁄
16
318
0.72
0.52
3⁄
4
255
0.57
0.41
5⁄
16
191
0.43
0.31
1⁄
1⁄
4
0.31
0.36
0.57
1⁄
5
0.43
185
0.72
1⁄
1⁄ 3⁄
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
16
390
1⁄
Min. Web Thickness, in.
222
487
1⁄
φRn, kips
8
4
1⁄
9
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 50 ksi
Weld Size, in.
0.72
1⁄
12
Min. Web Thickness, in.
318
16
1⁄
14
φRn, kips
Welds B (70 ksi)
99.3
0.43
0.31
94.6
0.36
0.26
4
75.7
0.29
0.21
8
96.2
0.43
0.31
16
80.2
0.36
0.26
4
64.2
0.29
0.21
8
79.5
0.43
0.31
16
66.3
0.36
0.26
4
53.0
0.29
0.21
8
63.6
0.43
0.31
16
53.0
0.36
0.26
4
42.4
0.29
0.21
8
48.7
0.43
0.31
16
40.6
0.36
0.26
4
32.4
0.29
0.21
8
35.1
0.43
0.31
16
29.2
0.36
0.26
4
23.4
0.29
0.21
8
23.2
0.43
0.31
16
19.3
0.36
0.26
15.5
0.29
0.21
16
4
113
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 91
Shear End-Plate Connections
A shear end-plate connection is made with a plate length less than the supported beam depth as illustrated in Figure 9-9. The end plate is always shop welded to the beam web with fillet welds on each side, but may be field bolted or welded to the supporting member. Welds connecting the end plate to the beam web should not be returned across the thickness of the beam web at the top or bottom of the end plate because of the danger of creating a notch in the beam web. When the plate is welded to the support, adequate flexibility must be provided in the connection. Line welds are placed along the vertical edges of the plate with a return at the top per LRFD Specification Section J2.2b. Note that welding across the entire top of the plate must be avoided as it would inhibit the flexibility and, therefore, the necessary end rotation of the connection; the performance of the resulting connection is unpredictable. The use of steels with Fy greater than 36 ksi for the end plate should be based on an engineering investigation that confirms that adequate flexibility will be provided. The strength and end-rotation characteristics of the shear end-plate connection will closely approximate that of the double-angle connection for similar thicknesses, gage lines, and length of connection. Design Checks
The design strengths of the bolts and/or welds and connected elements must be determined in accordance with the LRFD Specification; the applicable limit states are discussed in Part 8. Note that the limit state of shear yielding of the beam web must be checked along the length of weld connecting the end plate to the beam web. In all cases, the design strength φRn must equal or exceed the required strength Ru. Recommended End-Plate Dimensions
End plates should be designed with a plate thickness between 1⁄4-in. and 3⁄8-in., inclusive. The gage g should be between 31⁄2-in. and 51⁄2-in., inclusive, with top and bottom edge distances of 11⁄4-in.; lesser values of edge distance should be avoided. Shop and Field Practices
Shear end-plate connections may be made to the flanges of supporting columns and to the webs of supporting girders. Because of bolting and welding clearances, shear end-plate connections may not be suitable for connections to the webs of W8 columns, unless gages are reduced, and may be impossible for W6 columns.
Figure 9-9. Shear end-plate connections. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 92
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
When framing to a column flange, provision must be made for possible mill variation in the depth of the columns. The beam length could be shortened to provide for mill overrun and shims could be furnished at the appropriate intervals to fill the resulting gaps or to provide for mill underrun; in general shims are not required except for fairly long runs (i.e., six or more bays of framing). Shear end-plate connections require close control in cutting the beam to the proper length and in squaring the beam ends such that both end plates are parallel. Additionally, any beam camber must not result in out-of-square end plates which make erection and field fit-up difficult. Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections
Tables 9-5 are design aids for shear end-plate connections bolted to the supporting member and welded to the supported beam. Design strengths are tabulated for supported and supporting member material with Fy = 36 ksi and Fu = 58 ksi and with Fy = 50 ksi and Fu = 65 ksi. End-plate material is assumed to have Fy = 36 ksi and Fu = 58 ksi. Electrode strength is assumed to be 70 ksi. All values, including slip-critical bolt design strengths, are for comparison with factored loads. Tabulated bolt and end-plate design strengths consider the limit states of bolt shear, bolt bearing on the end plate, shear yielding of the end plate, shear rupture of the end plate, and block shear rupture of the end plate. Values are included for 2 through 12 rows of 3⁄4-in., 7⁄8-in., and 1 in. diameter A325 and A490 bolts at 3 in. spacing. End-plate edge distances Lev and Leh are assumed to be 11⁄4-in. Tabulated weld design strengths consider the limit state of weld shear assuming an effective weld length equal to the plate length minus twice the weld size. The tabulated minimum beam web thickness matches the shear yielding strength of the web material with the strength of the weld metal. As developed previously for double-angle connections, tmin =
5.16D Fy
where D is the number of sixteenths-of-an-inch in the weld size. When less than the minimum material thickness is present, the tabulated weld design strength must be reduced by the ratio of the thickness provided to the minimum thickness. Tabulated supporting member design strengths, per inch of flange or web thickness, consider the limit state of bolt bearing.
Example 9-6
Refer to Figure 9-10. Design a shear end-plate connection for the W18×50 beam to W21×62 girder web connection. Ru = 60 kips W18×50 tw = 0.355 in.
d = 17.99 in.
Fy = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi top flange coped 2 in. deep by 41⁄2-in. long W21×62 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 93
tw = 0.400 in. Fy = 50 ksi, Fu = 65 ksi Use 3⁄4-in. diameter A325-N bolts in standard holes and 70 ksi electrodes. Assume plate material with Fy = 36 ksi and Fu = 58 ksi. Design bolts and end-plate From Table 9-5, for 3⁄4-in. diameter A325-N bolts and end-plate material with Fy = 36 ksi and Fu = 58 ksi, select three rows of bolts and 1⁄4-in. plate thickness φRn = 76.7 kips > 60 kips o.k. Check weld and beam web From Table 9-5, for a 1⁄4-in. weld size and three rows of bolts (an end-plate length of 81⁄2-in.), a 1⁄4-in. weld size provides φRn = 89.1 kips. For beam web material with Fy = 50 ksi, the minimum web thickness is 0.41 in. Since tw = 0.355 in. < 0.41 in. the tabular value must be reduced. Thus, 0.355 in. φRn = 89.1 kips 0.41 in. = 77.1 kips > 60 kips o.k. Check flexural yielding on the coped section From Table 8-49, Snet = 23.4 in.3 0.9Fy Snet e
2
φRn =
3 3 3¼
A
W18×50
PL ¼×6×8½
3½
Solution:
Section at A Fig. 9-10. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 94
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
0.9 (50 ksi) (23.4 in.4) (41⁄2−in. + 1⁄4−in.) = 222 kips > 60 kips o.k. =
Check local web buckling at the cope 41⁄2−in. c = = 0.250 d 17.99 in. 41⁄2−in. c = = 0.281 ho (17.99 in. − 2 in.) c Since ≤ 1.0, d c f =2 d = 2(0.250) = 0.500 c Since ≤ 1.0, ho 1.65
ho k = 2.2 c
1 = 2.2 0.281
1.65
= 17.9 2
tw φFbc = 23,590 fk ho 2
0.355 in. = 23,590 (0.500) (17.9) 17.99 in. − 2 in. = 104 ksi φFbc Snet φRn =
e
(104 ksi) (23.4 in.3) = (41⁄2−in. + 1⁄4−in.) = 512 kips > 60 kips o.k. Check supporting girder web: From Table 9-5, for three rows of bolts and girder material with Fu = 65 ksi, φRn = (527 kips/in.)(0.400 in.) = 211 kips > 60 kips o.k. The connection, as summarized in Figure 9-10, is adequate. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 95 3⁄ -in. 4
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 58 ksi
Diameter Bolts 12 Rows W44
Table 9-5. Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
326
382
382
X
—
326
408
477
SC
STD
251
251
251
OVS
213
213
213
SSLT
213
213
213
STD
326
380
380
OVS
307
323
323
SSLT
323
323
323
N
—
326
408
477
X
—
326
408
489
SC Class A
STD
313
313
313
OVS
266
266
266
SSLT
266
266
266
STD
326
408
475
OVS
307
383
403
SSLT
326
403
403
Class A
SC Class B
A490
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
293
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
390
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
485
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
580
0.86
0.62
1879
2106
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 96
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS 3⁄ -in. 4
Diameter Bolts
Fy = 36 ksi
11 Rows
Fy = 58 ksi
W44, 40
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
299
350
350
X
—
299
373
437
SC
STD
230
230
230
OVS
195
195
195
SSLT
195
195
195
STD
299
348
348
OVS
281
296
296
SSLT
296
296
296
N
—
299
373
437
X
—
299
373
448
SC Class A
STD
287
287
287
OVS
244
244
244
SSLT
244
244
244
STD
299
373
435
OVS
281
351
370
SSLT
299
370
370
Class A
SC Class B
A490
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
268
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
356
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
444
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
530
0.86
0.62
1723
1931
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 97 3⁄ -in. 4
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 58 ksi
Diameter Bolts 10 Rows
W44, 40, 36
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
271
318
318
X
—
271
338
398
SC
STD
209
209
209
OVS
178
178
178
SSLT
178
178
178
STD
271
316
316
OVS
254
269
269
SSLT
269
269
269
N
—
271
338
398
X
—
271
338
406
SC Class A
STD
261
261
261
OVS
222
222
222
SSLT
222
222
222
STD
271
338
396
OVS
254
318
336
SSLT
271
336
336
Class A
SC Class B
A490
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
243
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
323
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
402
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
480
0.86
0.62
1566
1755
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 98
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS 3⁄ -in. 4
Fy = 36 ksi
Diameter Bolts
Fy = 58 ksi
9 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
243
286
286
X
—
243
304
358
SC
STD
188
188
188
OVS
160
160
160
SSLT
160
160
160
STD
243
285
285
OVS
228
242
242
SSLT
242
242
242
N
—
243
304
358
X
—
243
304
365
SC Class A
STD
235
235
235
OVS
200
200
200
SSLT
200
200
200
STD
243
304
356
OVS
228
285
303
SSLT
243
303
303
Class A
SC Class B
A490
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
218
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
290
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
360
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
430
0.86
0.62
1409
1580
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 99 3⁄ -in. 4
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 58 ksi
Diameter Bolts 8 Rows
W44, 40, 36, 33, 30
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
215
254
254
X
—
215
269
318
SC
STD
167
167
167
OVS
142
142
142
SSLT
142
142
142
STD
215
253
253
OVS
202
215
215
SSLT
215
215
215
N
—
215
269
318
X
—
215
269
323
SC Class A
STD
209
209
209
OVS
178
178
178
SSLT
178
178
178
STD
215
269
316
OVS
202
253
269
SSLT
215
269
269
Class A
SC Class B
A490
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
193
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
256
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
318
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
380
0.86
0.62
1253
1404
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 100
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
3⁄ -in. 4
Fy = 36 ksi
Diameter Bolts
Fy = 58 ksi
7 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24 S24
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
188
223
223
X
—
188
234
278
SC
STD
146
146
146
OVS
124
124
124
SSLT
124
124
124
STD
188
221
221
OVS
176
188
188
SSLT
188
188
188
N
—
188
234
278
X
—
188
234
281
SC
STD
183
183
183
OVS
155
155
155
SSLT
155
155
155
STD
188
234
277
OVS
176
220
235
SSLT
188
234
235
Class A
SC Class B
A490
Class A
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
168
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
223
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
277
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
330
0.86
0.62
1096
1229
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 101 3⁄ -in. 4
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 58 ksi
Diameter Bolts 6 Rows
W44, 40, 36, 33, 30, 27, 24, 21 S24
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
160
191
191
X
—
160
200
239
SC
STD
125
125
125
OVS
107
107
107
SSLT
107
107
107
STD
160
190
190
OVS
150
161
161
SSLT
160
161
161
N
—
160
200
239
X
—
160
200
240
SC
STD
157
157
157
OVS
133
133
133
SSLT
133
133
133
STD
160
200
237
OVS
150
188
202
SSLT
160
200
202
Class A
SC Class B
A490
Class A
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
143
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
189
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
235
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
280
0.86
0.62
940
1053
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 102
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
3⁄ -in. 4
Fy = 36 ksi
Diameter Bolts
Fy = 58 ksi
5 Rows W30, 27, 24, 21, 18 S24, 20, 18 MC18
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
A325
N
—
132
159
159
X
—
132
165
198
SC Class A
STD
104
104
104
SC Class B
A490
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
OVS
88.8
88.8
88.8
SSLT
88.8
88.8
88.8
STD
132
158
158
OVS
124
134
134
SSLT
132
134
134
N
—
132
165
198
X
—
132
165
198
SC Class A
STD
131
131
131
OVS
111
111
111
SSLT
111
111
111
STD
132
165
198
OVS
124
155
168
SSLT
132
165
168
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
118
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
156
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
193
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
230
0.86
0.62
783
878
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 103 3⁄ -in. 4
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 58 ksi
Diameter Bolts 4 Rows
W24, 21, 18, 16 S24, 20, 18, 15 C15 MC18
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
A325
N
—
104
127
127
X
—
104
131
157
SC Class A
STD
83.5
83.5
83.5
OVS
71.0
71.0
71.0
SSLT
71.0
71.0
71.0
SC Class B
A490
1⁄ 4
STD
104
OVS
97.9
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
127
127
108
108
SSLT
104
108
108
N
—
104
131
157
X
—
104
131
157
SC Class A
STD
104
104
104
SC Class B
OVS
88.8
88.8
88.8
SSLT
88.8
88.8
88.8
STD
104
OVS
97.9
SSLT
104
131
157
122
134
131
134
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in. 3⁄ 16
Fy, ksi
φRn, kips
36
50
92.9
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
Fu, ksi
1⁄ 4
122
0.57
0.41
5⁄ 16
151
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
180
0.86
0.62
626
702
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 104
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
3⁄ -in. 4
Fy = 36 ksi
Diameter Bolts
Fy = 58 ksi
3 Rows W18, 16, 14, 12, 10* S18, 15, 12 C15, 12 MC18, 13, 12 *Limited to W10×12, 15, 17, 19, 22, 26, 30.
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
A325
N
—
76.7
95.4
95.4
X
—
76.7
95.8
SC Class A
STD
62.7
62.7
62.7
OVS
53.3
53.3
53.3
SSLT
53.3
53.3
53.3
SC Class B
A490
3⁄ 8
N
115
STD
76.7
94.9
94.9
OVS
71.8
80.7
80.7
SSLT
76.7
80.7
80.7
—
76.7
95.8
115 115
X
—
76.7
95.8
SC Class A
STD
76.7
78.3
78.3
OVS
66.6
66.6
66.6
SSLT
66.6
66.6
66.6
SC Class B
STD
76.7
95.8
115
OVS
71.8
89.7
101
SSLT
76.7
95.8
101
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
Fy, ksi
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
67.9
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
89.1
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
110
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
129
0.86
0.62
470
527
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 105 3⁄ -in. 4
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 58 ksi
Diameter Bolts 2 Rows
W12, 10, 8 S12, 10, 8 C12, 10, 9, 8 MC13, 12, 10, 9, 8
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
48.9
61.2
63.6
X
—
48.9
61.2
73.4
SC Class A
STD
41.8
41.8
41.8
OVS
35.5
35.5
35.5
SSLT
35.5
35.5
35.5
STD
48.9
61.2
63.3
OVS
45.7
53.8
53.8
SSLT
48.9
53.8
53.8
N
—
48.9
61.2
73.4
X
—
48.9
61.2
73.4
SC Class A
STD
48.9
52.2
52.2
OVS
44.4
44.4
44.4
SSLT
44.4
44.4
44.4
STD
48.9
61.2
73.4
OVS
45.7
57.1
67.2
SSLT
48.9
61.2
67.2
SC Class B
A490
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
42.8
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
55.7
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
67.9
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
79.3
0.86
0.62
313
351
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 106
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
7⁄ -in. 8
Diameter Bolts
Fy = 36 ksi
12 Rows
Fy = 58 ksi
W44
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
307
383
460
X
—
307
383
460
SC
STD
307
349
349
OVS
286
297
297
SSLT
297
297
297
STD
307
383
460
OVS
286
358
429
SSLT
307
383
450
N
—
307
383
460
X
—
307
383
460
SC Class A
STD
307
383
439
OVS
286
358
373
SSLT
307
373
373
STD
307
383
460
OVS
286
358
429
SSLT
307
383
460
Class A
SC Class B
A490
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
293
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
390
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
485
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
580
0.86
0.62
2192
2457
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 107 7⁄ -in. 8
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 58 ksi
Diameter Bolts 11 Rows W44, 40
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
281
351
421
X
—
281
351
421
SC
STD
281
320
320
OVS
262
272
272
SSLT
272
272
272
STD
281
351
421
OVS
262
327
393
SSLT
281
351
412
N
—
281
351
421
X
—
281
351
421
SC Class A
STD
281
351
402
OVS
262
327
342
SSLT
281
342
342
STD
281
351
421
OVS
262
327
393
SSLT
281
351
421
Class A
SC Class B
A490
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
268
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
356
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
444
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
530
0.86
0.62
2010
2252
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 108
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
7⁄ -in. 8
Diameter Bolts
Fy = 36 ksi
10 Rows
Fy = 58 ksi
W44, 40, 36
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
254
318
382
X
—
254
318
382
SC
STD
254
291
291
OVS
238
247
247
SSLT
247
247
247
STD
254
318
382
OVS
238
297
356
SSLT
254
318
375
N
—
254
318
382
X
—
254
318
382
SC Class A
STD
254
318
365
OVS
238
297
311
SSLT
254
311
311
STD
254
318
382
OVS
238
297
356
SSLT
254
318
382
Class A
SC Class B
A490
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
243
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
323
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
402
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
480
0.86
0.62
1827
2048
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
SIMPLE SHEAR CONNECTIONS
9 - 109 7⁄ -in. 8
Fy = 36 ksi Fy = 58 ksi
Diameter Bolts 9 Rows
W44, 40, 36, 33
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
228
285
343
X
—
228
285
343
SC
STD
228
262
262
OVS
213
223
223
SSLT
223
223
223
STD
228
285
343
OVS
213
266
320
SSLT
228
285
337
N
—
228
285
343
X
—
228
285
343
SC Class A
STD
228
285
329
OVS
213
266
280
SSLT
228
280
280
STD
228
285
343
OVS
213
266
320
SSLT
228
285
343
Class A
SC Class B
A490
SC Class B
Weld (70 ksi) and Beam Web Design Strength, kips Minimum Beam Web Thickness, in. 70 ksi Weld Size, in.
φRn, kips
36
50
3⁄ 16
218
0.43
0.31
Support Design Strength per Inch Thickness, kips/in.
1⁄ 4
290
0.57
0.41
Fu, ksi
5⁄ 16
360
0.72
0.52
58
65
3⁄ 8
430
0.86
0.62
1644
1843
Fy, ksi
STD = Standard holes OVS = Oversized holes SSLT = Short slotted holes transverse to direction of load
N = Threads included X = Threads excluded SC = Slip critical
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION
9 - 110
SIMPLE SHEAR AND PR MOMENT CONNECTIONS
7⁄ -in. 8
Fy = 36 ksi
Diameter Bolts
Fy = 58 ksi
8 Rows W44, 40, 36, 33, 30
Table 9-5 (cont.). Bolted/Welded Shear End-Plate Connections Bolt and End-Plate Design Strength, kips End-Plate Thickness, in.
ASTM Desig.
Thread Cond.
Hole Type
1⁄ 4
5⁄ 16
3⁄ 8
A325
N
—
202
253
303
X
—
202
253
303
SC
STD
202
233
233
OVS
189
198
198
SSLT
198
198
198
STD